TCL

Laker Tcl Reference Manual
Version K-2015.06, June 2015
Copyright and Proprietary Information Notice

2015 Synopsys, Inc. All rights reserved. This software and documentation contain confidential and proprietary information that is
the property of Synopsys, Inc. The software and documentation are furnished under a license agreement and may be used or
copied only in accordance with the terms of the license agreement. No part of the software and documentation may be reproduced,
transmitted, or translated, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, manual, optical, or otherwise, without prior written
permission of Synopsys, Inc., or as expressly provided by the license agreement.
Destination Control Statement

All technical data contained in this publication is subject to the export control laws of the United States of America.
Disclosure to nationals of other countries contrary to United States law is prohibited. It is the readers responsibility to
determine the applicable regulations and to comply with them.
Disclaimer
SYNOPSYS, INC., AND ITS LICENSORS MAKE NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH
REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Trademarks
Synopsys and certain Synopsys product names are trademarks of Synopsys, as set forth at
http://www.synopsys.com/Company/Pages/Trademarks.aspx.
All other product or company names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
Synopsys, Inc.
690 E. Middlefield Road
Mountain View, CA 94043
www.synopsys.com
ii

K-2015.06
Contents
1.
Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ix
Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ix
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ix
Customer Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Getting Started with Tcl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running Tcl Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tcl Commands and Command Substitution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tcl Variables and Variable Substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tcl Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Flow Control (if, while, for, foreach) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

if . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
while . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
foreach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
4
5
5
5
Data Structures: Lists and Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Built-in Commands and Math Functions in Tcl. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading a Tcl Script File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
Laker and Tcl/Tk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
Tk Command Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Invoking Laker from Another Tk Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Invoking Commands from Another Tk Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending Command to Laker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Getting System-assigned Tk Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Event Callbacks to the Tk Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replaying Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tk Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Debugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
13
13
13
15
15
16
18
18
Socket Command Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Environment Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up Laker as a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up a Client Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tcl Commands for Socket Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
19
20
20
21
iii
Contents
2.
3.
4.
iv
Integration Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
Application Programming Interface (API) References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
General Tcl Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
New Data Types and Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
Bounding Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
Point List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
Basic User-definable Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
GUI Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75
Bottom-Up Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
76
Global Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
76
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
Form and Field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
89
Pre-processing Tcl Callback Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
121
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
126
Database Extensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
143
Database Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
144
Database Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
144
Object Access Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
145
Library Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
147
Cell View Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
163
Tcl PCells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
185
Shape Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
197
Shape Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
214
Instances and Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
219
Figure Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
225
Accessory Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
253
Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
254
Contents
Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
260
Logic Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
266
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
281
General Object Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
288
Parameterized Test Structure Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
334
Schematic Object Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
343
DFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
349
Technology File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
351
Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
373
File Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
373
Library Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
435
Category Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
466
Cell Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
470
Floorplan Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
479
Options Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
482
Symbol Callback Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
530
Netlist Procedure Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
532
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
540
6.
Library Mapping Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
583
7.
Layout Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
591
Cell Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
592
View Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
606
Create Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
628
Edit Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
684
SDL Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
730
MCell Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
748
798
Query Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
826
5.
Contents
vi
EIP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
880
Verification Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
886
Placer Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
920
Router Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
950
Window Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1013
Schematic Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1018
UDD Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1023
DFM Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1039
Selection Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1040
Highlight Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1055
User Entry Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1069
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1074
8.
Custom Digital Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1119
9.
Automatic Place and Route (APR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1195
10. Design Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1337
11. Matching Device Creator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1381
12. Stick Diagram Compiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1461
13. Schematic Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1491
Cell Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1491
View Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1504
Create Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1513
Edit Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1535
1548
Query Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1550
Check Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1560
Contents
Tools Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1574
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1587
14. Symbol Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1601
Cell Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1601
View Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1605
Create Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1610
Edit Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1623
Query Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1634
1641
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1644
15. Hierarchy Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1647
A.
Symbol Callback Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1657
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1657
Attaching Tcl Procedures to Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1657
Attaching Tcl File to Symbol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1657
Attaching Tcl Procedure to Symbols Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1658
Callback Working Scheme. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1659
Callback Procedure Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1659
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1661
vii
Contents
viii
About This Manual

The Laker3 Tcl Reference Manual covers general Tcl commands for Tk and Cbased applications, and the definable Tcl commands to access the database
and the Graphical User Interface (GUI) which applied within the Laker3.
Audience
The audience for this manual includes physical layout and circuit designers and
CAD support groups with general proficiency in Tcl. These audiences use
Laker Tcl commands for both layout design optimizing and design environment
customizing.
Related Publications
For additional information about this product, see
Documentation installed with the software and available through the Help
menu in any window
Release Notes, available on SolvNet (see Accessing SolvNet on page xi)
Documentation on the Web, which provides PDF documents and is

available on SolvNet (see Accessing SolvNet on page xi)
Conventions
The following conventions are used in Synopsys documentation.
Convention
Description
Courier
Indicates command syntax.

K-2015.06
ix
Customer Support
Convention
Description
Italic
Indicates a user-defined value, such as object_name.
Purple
Within an example, indicates information of special

interest.
Within a command-syntax section, indicates a default
value, such as:
include_enclosing = true | false

Bold
[]
Within syntax and examples, indicates user inputtext

you type verbatim.
Indicates a graphical user interface (GUI) element that has
an action associated with it.
Denotes optional parameters, such as:

write_file [-f filename]
...
Indicates that parameters can be repeated as many times as

necessary:
pin1 pin2 ... pinN
Indicates a choice among alternatives, such as

low | medium | high
Indicates a continuation of a command line.
Indicates levels of directory structure.
Edit > Copy
Indicates a path to a menu command, such as opening the

Edit menu and choosing Copy.
Ctrl+C
Indicates a keyboard combination, such as holding down the

Ctrl key and pressing the C key.
Customer Support
Customer support is available through the Synopsys SolvNet customer support
website and by contacting the Synopsys support center.

K-2015.06
Customer Support
Accessing SolvNet
The SolvNet support site includes an electronic knowledge base of technical
articles and answers to frequently asked questions about Synopsys tools. The
site also gives you access to a wide range of Synopsys online services, which
include downloading software, viewing documentation, and entering a call to
the Support Center.
To access the SolvNet site:
1. Go to the web page at https://solvnet.synopsys.com.
2. If prompted, enter your user name and password. (If you do not have a
Synopsys user name and password, follow the instructions to register.)
If you need help using the site, click Help on the menu bar.
Contacting Synopsys Support

If you have problems, questions, or suggestions, you can contact Synopsys
support in the following ways:
Go to the Synopsys Global Support site on synopsys.com. There you can

find e-mail addresses and telephone numbers for Synopsys support centers
throughout the world.
Go to either the Synopsys SolvNet site or the Synopsys Global Support site
and open a case online (Synopsys user name and password required).

K-2015.06
xi
Customer Support
xii

K-2015.06
1
Introduction
This chapter introduces the essential elements of Tcl and explains how to invoke
and replay the commands.
Tcl stands for Tool Command Language. It is a simple, embeddable scripting

language for controlling and extending applications. Like other scripting
languages, Tcl provides programmability that allows you to build up compound
scripts to complete a task.
Lakers Tcl programming functions with 6-digit floating number. For example, a
floating number 0.0000015 is rounded off to 0.000002 during value
evaluation.
You can have a test in the message frame of the Home Page by typing the
following example:
set
set
puts
puts
a 0.0000015
=> 0.0000015
b [expr 1.0*$a]
=>1.5e-06
[format "%10.8f" $b] =>0.00000150
[format "%10.6f" $b] => 0.000002
This chapter contains the following sections:
Getting Started with Tcl
Laker and Tcl/Tk
Application Programming Interface (API) References

K-2015.06
Chapter 1: Introduction

This section briefly introduces the essential elements of Tcl programs with the
following sections:
Running Tcl Programs
Tcl Commands and Command Substitution
Tcl Variables and Variable Substitution
Tcl Procedures
Basic Flow Control (if, while, for, foreach)
Data Structures: Lists and Arrays
Built-in Commands and Math Functions in Tcl
Loading a Tcl Script File
Running Tcl Programs

Since Tcl is an interpreted language, to run a Tcl program, users can pass the
script file to the Tcl interpreters, tclsh and wish. To leave the program, use
the exit command.
Tcl Commands and Command Substitution

Tcl is a string-based, interpreted command language with a simple structure.
Each line begins with a command and a number of arguments. Each command
is implemented as a C function or is defined as a Tcl procedure. This function is
responsible for handling all the arguments.
The basic syntax for a Tcl command is as follows:
command arg1 arg2 ...
The command is either the name of a built-in command or a Tcl procedure

name. White space is used to separate the command name and its arguments.
arg1 and arg2 are the first two arguments of this command.
Nested commands are allowed in a Tcl script. To write a nested command, the
command must be placed in a pair of brackets. The Tcl interpreter replaces the

K-2015.06
outer command by substituting the nested command with its result. For
example:
format \%s\ size = %d $fName [file size $fName]
The Tcl interpreter replaces [file size $fName] with its result for the
format command.
Tcl Variables and Variable Substitution

Variables in Tcl can be considered as boxes in which various types of data can
be stored. These variables are given names, which are then used to access the
values stored in them.
Tcl variables need not be declared before they are used. These variables are
simply created when they are first assigned values, using the set command,
as illustrated below.
set varName varValue
Tcl variables can be deleted by using the unset command as follows:

unset varName
The value stored in a variable can be accessed by prefacing the variable name
with a dollar sign ($). This is known as Variable Substitution, and is described
as follows.
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
a 100
b 200
sum1 [expr
sum2 [expr
1 100
sum3 [expr
sum3 [expr
$a+$b]
$sum1+100]
1+2]; #return 3
$1+2]; #return 102
Tcl Procedures
Procedures are Tcl built-in commands that can be defined at any time and
users can pass arguments by value. By default, the return value from a
procedure is the result of the last statement in its body. However, the return
command may be used to return another value. If an argument is assigned to
the return command, then the value of this argument becomes the result of
the procedure.

K-2015.06
The following example is a Tcl procedure computing the sum of the values of
two arguments and returning the sum.
proc sum {arg1 arg2} {
set r [expr $arg1+$arg2]
return $r
}
The procedure, starts with the proc command, is followed by argument(s) and
a procedure body. These arguments are separated by white spaces, and the
procedure body is a group of Tcl commands. After a procedure is declared, it is
considered a Tcl command. For example:
sum 1 2
The result 3 is then returned.
Basic Flow Control (if, while, for, foreach)

Tcl offers decision-making construct (if-statement) and looping constructs
(while, for, and foreach statements), both of which can change the flow of
execution in response to some conditions.
These constructs are explained in the following sections:
if
while
for
foreach
if
This command executes scripts conditionally. The syntax of the if command
is:
if bool then body1 else body2
where bool is a Boolean expression; and body1 and body2 are the command
body. The following is a simple example of the if command.

K-2015.06
set r [expr $b%10]

set q [expr $b/10]
if {$r >= 5} then {
set b [expr ($q+1)*10]
} else {
set b [expr $q*10]
}
while
This command executes script repeatedly as long as a condition is met. The
syntax of the while command is:
while bool body
where bool is a Boolean expression, and body is the command body. The
following is an example of the while command.
## calculate the sum of all even positive
## integers smaller than or equal to 1000
set a 0
set sum 0
while {$a <= 1000} {
set sum [expr $sum+$a]
set a [expr $a + 2]
}
for
This is a looping command. The syntax of the for command is:
for init bool step body
where init is a command body to initialize the for loop; bool is a Boolean
expression; step is a command body which is executed after body; and body
is a loop body. The following is a simple example of the for command.
for {set a 0; set sum 0} {$a <= 1000} {set a [expr $a + 2]} {
set sum [expr $sum + $a]
}
foreach
This command iterates over all elements in a list. The syntax of the foreach
command is:
foreach var valueList body

K-2015.06
where var is a variable used to hold each element in valueList for each
loop, and body is executed once for each element in valueList. The
following is a simple example of the foreach command.
set L [list]
for {set a 0} {$a <= 1000} {incr a 2} {
lappend L $a
}
set sum 0
foreach b $L {
set sum [expr $sum + $b]
}
Data Structures: Lists and Arrays

Tcl supports two primitive data structures: lists and arrays. Lists provide a
simple means by which to group collections of elements, and deal with the
collection as a single entity. In Tcl, lists are represented as strings with a
specified format and interpretation. The elements of a list are also strings
enclosed by left and right braces, and are separated by white space(s).
For example, {1 2 a {3 {4 5} 6} bcd ef 7 {g h}} is a list with
seven elements; they are 1, 2, a, {3 {4 5} 6}, bcd ef, 7, and {g h}.
The forth element is a list with three elements, and the fifth element is a string
bcd ef.
Another way of grouping data in Tcl is to use arrays. Arrays are collections of
elements in which each element is given a unique string index. The element of
an array may be referred to by using the array name, followed immediately by
the index of the element, enclosed in parentheses. For example:
ArrName(stringIdx)
Array elements are treated much like any other Tcl variables. They are created
by means of the set command, and their values can be substituted using the
dollar sign $. White spaces may not be used as part of the string index
because they often cause confusion.
The usage of a list and an array is presented in the example below. This
example completes the task to store 100 integers (from 0 to 99) to a list (or an
array) and computes the sum of the list (or array).

K-2015.06
## example of list usage

set List [list]; #make an empty list
set num 0
while {$num < 100} {
lappend List $num; #append num to List
incr num
}
set sum 0
foreach element $List {
set sum [expr $sum + $element]
}
puts sum = $sum
## example of array usage
set idx 0
while {$idx < 100} {
set Arr($idx) $idx; #save 0 to Arr(0), 1 to Arr(1), ...
incr idx
}
set sum 0
set idx 0
while {$idx < 100} {
set sum [expr $sum + $Arr($idx)]
incr idx
}
puts sum = $sum
Like strings, there are plenty of commands to manipulate lists and arrays. For
more details on list and array manipulations, please refer to the reference
books introducing Tcl programming.
Built-in Commands and Math Functions in Tcl

The following table lists the built-in commands in Tcl and their descriptions.
Command
Description
after
Set up commands to be run in the future.
append
Append values to some variables value without spaces.
array
Query the information about array variables.
break
Force to exit from a loop.
catch
Trap errors raised by a command.

K-2015.06
Command
Description
cd
Change current working directory.
clock
Get time and make a date string according to some format string.
close
Close an I/O channel.
concat
Concatenate arguments with spaces separating them.
continue
Skip current loop and run next loop immediately.
error
Raise an error to halt the execution of the Tcl script.
eof
Determine end-of-file status of a channel.
eval
Run the Tcl command that is made by the arguments of this

command.
exec
Run the UNIX program in Tcl.
exit
Terminate the process.
expr
Analyze and compute a Tcl math expression.
fblocked
Query whether the data is ready on some channel or not.
fconfigure
Query the status of a channel.
fcopy
Copy data from one channel to another.
file
Query file information.
fileevent
Register a procedure for an I/O channel event.
flush
Force data in the channel buffer outputted.
for
Construct loops.
foreach
Construct loops.
format
Make a string by a conversion format string and arguments.
gets
Get a line of input.

K-2015.06
Command
Description
global
Declare global variables.
if
Execute the then-clause commands if the condition is true; otherwise,

execute the else-clause commands.
incr
Increase the value of a variable with an integer amount.
info
Query the Tcl interpreter about the information of variables,

procedures, commands, etc.
join
Concatenate elements of a list together into a string with a string

separating them.
lappend
Append elements to a list.
lindex
Get an element from a list by its index.
linsert
Insert values into a list.
list
Create a list.
llength
Measure the length of a list.
lrange
Get a range of elements from a list.
lreplace
Replace a range of list elements with some value.
lsearch
Search an element in a list.
lsort
Sort elements of a list with some order.
open
Open an I/O channel.
pid
Get process identifier.
proc
Declare a user-define procedure.
puts
Output data to an I/O channel.
pwd
Get current working directory.
read
Read data from an I/O channel.

K-2015.06
Command
Description
regexp
Tell whether a string matches a pattern (regular expression).
regsub
Substitute a string if it matches a pattern.
rename
Change the Tcl command name.
return
Return from a procedure and set a value as the result of procedure

execution.
scan
Parse a string and get value it.
seek
Set the seek position of an I/O channel.
set
Assign a value to a variable or get the value of a variable.
socket
Open a socket.
source
Execute a Tcl script file.
split
Split a string.
string
Manipulate strings.
subst
Do command and variable substitutions in a string.
switch
Establish multiple branches (command bodies).
tell
Inform the seek position of an I/O channel.
time
Inform the run time of a command.
trace
Monitor the assignments of a variable.
unset
Make a variable undeclared.
uplevel
Execute a command at an upper scope.
upvar
Get a variable value at an upper scope.
while
Construct loops.
The built-in math functions in Tcl are: acos(x), asin(x), atan(x),

atan2(x,y), ceil(x), cos(x), cosh(x), exp(x), floor(x),
fmod(x,y), hypot(x,y), log(x), log10(x), pow(x,y), sin(x),
10

K-2015.06
Laker and Tcl/Tk
sinh(x), sqrt(x), tan(x), tanh(x), abs(x), double(x), int(x),

round(x), rand(), and srand(x).
A Tcl interpreter does not evaluate any math expressions, and thus the expr
command may be issued to evaluate a math expression.
Loading a Tcl Script File

To load a Tcl script file, use the following command:
source fileName
For more details on Tcl, please refer to the reference books introducing Tcl
programming.
Laker and Tcl/Tk

Laker supports a command language interface for Tk and C-based
applications. An overview of Laker Command Language Architecture is shown
in the diagram below.
Tk Application
C-based Application
Tk Communication Protocol
TCP/IP Communication Protocol
Tcl Interpreter
Laker Kernel
Figure 1
Laker Tcl Command Language Architecture
With Lakers embedded Tcl interpreter, Laker can communicate with Tk and Cbased applications using Tk and TCP/IP communication protocol respectively.
The communication methods for the Tk command client and socket command
client are described in detail in the following section. The tutorials and
references are also provided in the succeeding paragraphs.

K-2015.06
11
Laker and Tcl/Tk
The Laker and Tcl/Tk section contains the following sections:
Tk Command Client
Socket Command Client
Tk Command Client
Lakers embedded Tcl interpreter is used when the Tcl Send command is
called, enabling Laker to communicate with other Tcl applications.
Communication is done by sending pre-defined commands to Laker.
Laker provides the following capabilities with the Tk application:
Invoking Laker from Another Tk Application
Invoking Commands from Another Tk Application
Sending Command to Laker
Getting System-assigned Tk Name
Adding Event Callbacks to the Tk Application
Replaying Commands
Tk Commands
Debugging
Two commands, sysTcpPortNumber and sysTkName, are registered to get

the tkName and serverPort value.
The following diagram depicts Lakers Command Language Interface with Tk
applications (Tk command clients).
Laker
Graphical
User Interface
Tk send command
Laker
Command
Language
Interface
Return Value
Tk
Applications
Event Restration
Return Value
Laker
Kernel
Playback
Figure 2
12
Command File
(Tcl Script)
Laker Command Language Interface with Tk applications

K-2015.06
Laker and Tcl/Tk
Invoking Laker from Another Tk Application

Commands cannot be sent as soon as Laker is invoked. The registration of
commands and the Tk name must be completed before proceeding. The
following polling mechanism is used to check the status of the registration
process. For example:
exec laker -tkName <tk name goes here> &
while {1} {
set s [winfo interps]
if {-1 != [string first <tk name goes here> $s]} {
break;
}
after 500
}
send <tk name goes here> <user Tcl procedures>
Invoking Commands from Another Tk Application

To invoke Lakers commands from another Tk application, a Tk name must be
registered for Laker with the command line option -tkName.
The syntax for registering Lakers Tk name is as follows:
> laker -tkName <Tk name>
where <Tk name> indicates the Tk name that is automatically assigned when
Laker is invoked. The default Tk name is Laker. Alternatively, you can choose
any name for the Tk name. To avoid having the same Tk name on a machine, if
another Tk application has the same name then a sequential numeric value
(_<number>) is appended to the Tk name so that it is unique. For example,
Laker_2 is assigned for the second Laker Tk name of Laker when there is
already an existing Laker with the Tk name of Laker.
Sending Command to Laker

To send a command to Laker, use the Tcl send command. The syntax of the Tcl
send command is shown below:
send <Tk name> <Lakers Command Reference>
For example:

K-2015.06
13
Laker and Tcl/Tk
#!/bin/sh
# the next line restarts using wish \
exec wish "$0" "$@"
set tkAppList [winfo interp]
set LAKER "Laker[pid]";
# used to get the PID number as the unique name
if {[lsearch $tkAppList $LAKER] < 0} {
exec laker -tkName $LAKER &
}
while {1} {
set tkAppList [winfo interp]
if {-1 != [string first $LAKER $tkAppList]} {
break;
}
after 1000
}
set topLib"cpu"
set techFile"/dq3/qa/LEO/PACK/laker2.3v3/etc/default.tf"
set topCell"test"
send $LAKER "lakerNewLib -path . -lib $topLib -tech $techFile"
send $LAKER "lakerNewCell -path . -lib $topLib -cell $topCell"
The results of the above example are illustrated as follows:
Figure 3
14
Laker Design Window is Displayed after Playing Command File

K-2015.06
Laker and Tcl/Tk
Getting System-assigned Tk Name

To get the Tk name assigned while invoking Laker, the sysTkName command
can be used to get the desired information. For example:
# Invoke Laker by giving a Tk name Synopsys
% laker -tkName Synopsys
# Enter the following command in the Home page to get
# the Tk name and assign to variable: tkName
set tkName [sysTkName]
Adding Event Callbacks to the Tk Application

Laker can call back the invoking Tk application when specific events occur. This
is done by sending a command to Laker which registers a callback function
along with a reason used to determine when to call the callback function. A
special command AddEventCallback is used to set up the callback
information.
Note:
In earlier versions AddCommandCallback was used to add

event callbacks. However, this command has been superceded
by AddEventCallback.
AddCommandCallback forces all events to be sent
asynchronously which can cause problems for some events
which must be sent synchronously.
Note:
Tk applications do not accept commands that use xhost-style

security protection. For this reason, xauth must be used instead.
Another alternative is to compile Tk with security turned off.
The syntax of AddEventCallback is as follows:

AddEventCallback TkAppName CallbackFunc Reason
async
where:
TkAppName: Indicates the Tk application name (which is usually the name

that appears in the title). Laker uses this name to identify the Tcl interpreter
to send commands to. If the Tk application is running under the control of a
script file it is usually the name of the script file.
The following Tk commands can be used to get the application name:
winfo name .
winfo interps
selection get APPLICATION

K-2015.06
15
Laker and Tcl/Tk
CallbackFunc: Indicates the Tk callback command/procedure.
Reason: Indicates the reason for callbacks. Laker invokes the callback
when the specified reason occurs. The following table lists the possible
reasons for callbacks.
Reason
Description
Calldata
guiInfoMessage
Sent when an information message is

displayed
Message body
guiWarnMessage
Sent when a warning message is displayed
Message body
async: Specifies whether event callbacks are always asynchronous. This

parameter is required for backward compatibility but is ignored.
The following is an example to use the callback.

# Modify the Laker.menu file to add a user-defined menu
Menu File
{
"Test" s f.tcl "Test" "EventTrigger UDR_MY_REASON clientdata"
...
}
Tk Application: (myTkApp)
# Register Callbacks
#
send Laker {AddEventCallback myTkApp myEventCallbackProc
UDR_MY_REASON 0}
Replaying Commands
Commands can be replayed by typing the following line when starting Laker:
> Laker -play <filename>
where <filename> corresponds to the name of the command file that has
been programmed manually.
Create a Command Replay File
Generally, most executed commands are prompted in the message frame of
the Home Page. It is very convenient for users to identify necessary commands
by executing the procedures through Laker graphical user interface (GUI).
16

K-2015.06
Laker and Tcl/Tk
Figure 4
Executed Commands Listed in the Home Pages Message Frame
On the other hand, under the working directory, Laker creates a <lakerLog>
directory to store generated log file(s). All operations that have been done
through the graphical user interface (GUI) are recorded in a laker.cmd file. This
file is updated each time Laker is started and a backup of the file is saved with
the filename laker.cmd.bak.
lakerOpenDesign -lib top -cell CPU -mode edit
lakerSetActiveWnd Wnd1
lakerLayerTable -side left
lakerPreSel -point (-111.243,284.019) -traversedist 18.133
lakerZoomAll
lakerPreSel -point (161.197,316.928) -traversedist 15.602
lakerMaxViewLevel
lakerZoomInByArea -point (100.351,234.239) (245.447,354.372)
lakerSingleSel -point (153.013,329.842) -traversedist 3.683
...
"laker.cmd" 14 lines, 559 characters
This laker.cmd file stores more detailed information of the executed commands.
By replaying the commands, users may redo the procedures previously done in
the last Laker session.
Play Command File
The Tcl-based command file can be played by the -play option. Users may
replay the commands or play the application written by Laker Tcl commands by
typing the following command:
> laker -play laker.cmd
Since the laker.cmd file under <lakerLog> directory is updated each time Laker
is started, to avoid overwriting the modified command file (laker.cmd), do not
use the following command:
> laker -play lakerLog/laker.cmd

K-2015.06
17
Laker and Tcl/Tk
Tk Commands
A full set of Tk commands is available for tool customization and integration. Tk
commands allow the creation of sophisticated graphical user interfaces by
using the Tcl scripting language. The Tk commands are registered by default
when Laker starts and can be used in scripts with -play and the Tcl source
commands.
Examples can be found under the <install_dir>/etc/tk_library/demos/*.tcl
directory. The Tcl source command can be specified in the message frame of
the Home Page or -play command line option to run the samples.
Debugging
Commands can be displayed to stdout as they are received by setting the
following environment variable.
To turn on the display of commands:
> setenv CMD_TRACE 1
To turn off the display of commands:
> setenv CMD_TRACE 0
The command and its arguments are both output.
Socket Command Client

Lakers command language interface supports a communication interface using
C++ for Laker and third-party client-side integration.
Third party tools can use this interface to send commands to and receive event
notifications from a command server (for example: laker). The name of the
library to link to is libcmd.a. The header file cmdclt.h contains the function
prototypes that are needed.
The following diagram depicts the Lakers Command Language Interface with C
applications (Socket Command Clients).
18

K-2015.06
Laker and Tcl/Tk
Call Command
Client Kernel
Command
TRUE/FALSE
(Some C Apps)
Client
Return Value/Error Message
Command
Server
Server
Kernel - Laker
Event
Event Data
Client Side
Figure 5
Communication Protocol
Server Side
Laker Tcl Interface with C Applications
In order to communicate with one another, the third-party tool can be launched
from a command line in Laker or it runs stand-alone and the third-party tool
must also support interface to connect Laker via its communications GUI or
UNIX command prompt.
This communication interface allows the third-party tool to execute all Laker
provided Tcl commands or the built-in Tcl commands in an active design
window of Laker.
The section includes the following sections:
Environment Setup
Setting Up Laker as a Server
Setting Up a Client Process
Tcl Commands for Socket Port
Integration Flows
Environment Setup
You must set up the environment before setting up Laker as a server or setting
up a client process. Follow the steps below:
1. Locate the packed .a files in the following path:
<install_path>/share/libcmd/<platform>
2. After completing the C++ API application, the following two .a files are
required to build the program: libnclt.a and libnsys.a.

K-2015.06
19
Laker and Tcl/Tk
Copy these files to the local working directory or assign the absolute path to
each of them. Then, use one of the following methods to build the C++ API
application (test is the execution file and main.cpp is the source code):
g++ -o test main.cpp libnclt.a libnsys.a -lpthread -ldl
or
g++ -o test -g main.cpp
<install_path>/share/libcmd/<platform>/libnclt.a
<install_path>/share/libcmd/<platform>/libnsys.a
-lpthread -ldl
3. If there is no other compiling error message, now run the program (test).
Setting Up Laker as a Server

To start the server so that it can accept commands, the command line
argument -serverPort <port> must be passed for socket interface when
invoking Laker.
Many clients can connect to a server through the specified port. The port
number can be specified in the range of 1024 and 65535. For example:
> laker -serverPort 11060
Setting Up a Client Process

Use the following steps to setup a client application so it can send commands
to Laker:
1. Create (CmdCltCreate)
2. Connect (CmdCltConnect)
3. Call Command (CmdCltCallCommand)
The following is an example for setting up a client application:
CMDCLT cmdclt;
char* result; cmdclt = CmdCltCreate(0);
CmdCltConnect(cmdclt, 11060, sps32, -1);
if (CmdCltCallCommand(cmdclt, lakerVersion, 0, &result))
printf(Command successful. Result = %s\n, result);
else
printf(Command failed. Error = %s\n, result);
...
CmdCltDestroy(cmdclt);
20

K-2015.06
Laker and Tcl/Tk
To get the TCP/IP socket port number assigned when invoking Laker, use the
command sysTcpPortNumber to get the desired information. For example:
# Invoke Laker by giving a TCP/IP socket port number
% laker -serverPort 8251
# Enter the following command in the Home page to get
# the socket port number and assign to variable: tcpPortName
set tcpPortName [sysTcpPortNumber]
Tcl Commands for Socket Port

Lakers command language supports a socket interface, that is, a C application
can send commands to Laker or any other product that uses the command
language interface.
The following two Tcl commands are used for communication:
sysServerPort
sysTcpPortNumber
sysServerPort
The command starts Laker listening for connections over the -serverPort
interface. Clients must link with libnclt.a and libnsys.a and use the C API
provided in cmdclt.h to send commands to Laker and retrieve the result.
sysServerPort can only be called once successfully per Laker instance.
Subsequent calls return the port Laker is currently listening on.
The command starts Laker so it functions as a server. It can only do this on the
local machine. The client program can be on another machine if needed but it is
up to the user.
The command syntax is as follows:
sysServerPort [-port num]
where -port num specifies a port number to use, and it must be free. If the
port is not specified, a free port is used.
The command returns a correct port number if successful; otherwise, it returns
-1.

K-2015.06
21
Laker and Tcl/Tk
sysTcpPortNumber
To get the TCP/IP socket port number assigned while invoking Laker, use the
command sysTcpPortNumber to get the desired information. The command
syntax is as follows:
sysTcpPortNumber
The command returns a correct port number if successful; otherwise, it returns

-1.
Integration Flows
Laker provides the following two integration flows to communicate with the C++
interface:
Laker stands a server and you can fire it up as a TCP/IP socket server
through one of the following methods:
laker -serverPort 11060 when invoking Laker.
Execute the sysServerPort Tcl command in the Home Page.
After/before Laker is running in stand-alone mode, you can do one of the

following ways:
Create a C++ API application by using the Tcl command [exec

myCppClient [sysServerPort] &] in the Home Page.
Execute the C++ API application on the UNIX/Linux platform. You may
assign the desired socket port number manually to connect to Laker.
myCppClient is the C++ API application execution file.
Note: TCP/IP integration is only supported with Laker 2012.03b,

LakerOA2012.04p1, or later versions.
myCppClient links with the API provided in libnclt.a (cmdclt.h) and
connects to Laker on the returned port which is passed as a parameter. It
can connect between different machines. The related API prototype takes a
serverName parameter which if 0 means the local host.
The communication scheme between Laker and the C++ API application is
based on the TCP/IP socket. The following sections are related to the TCP/IP
integration:
22
TCP/IP Sockets
Start and Connect

K-2015.06
Laker and Tcl/Tk
TCP/IP Sockets
Laker provides a client/server architecture based on TCP/IP sockets to build
the communication with a third-party tool if both tools are already running
individually.
The hostname (or, use the IP address) and the port number must be
specified before starting Laker and the C++ API application.
It is unnecessary to specify the hostname (or, use the IP address) if running
and displaying on the same machine, but the port number (that is available
to facilitate the connection) shall be specified.
It is preferable to set the Environment Variables in a UNIX setup file (the

.cshrc file).
Start and Connect

When Laker is installed correctly and all of the files are setup for the C++ API
application, start and verify the socket connection with the following scenario:
Invoking Laker by firing up a TCP/IP Server on the console or terminal:

Invoking Laker and firing up a TCP/IP Server later in the Home Page:
> sysServerPort -port 9189
Executing the C++ API application via another console/terminal.
The test program connects to Laker with the specified port number. Once it
connects to Laker, the test program requests Laker to execute the
lakerVersion Tcl command and retrieves or displays the returned value
from Laker via the socket port as below.
./test 9189
@@@connecting with socket port number 9189 ....
Connecting to 172.26.3.76 on port 9189 ...
SocketClient::connectToServer: Connected successfully
@@@connected.
CallCommand successful: Return Value: "Laker - Custom Layout
Automation System, 2012.07 64-bit (Linux x86_64/64bit) 05/22/
2012"
See below for the sample code of the test program.

K-2015.06
23
Laker and Tcl/Tk
#include
#include
#include
#include
"cmdclt.h"
<stdio.h>
<unistd.h>
<stdlib.h>
void
EventProc(char* event, char* clientData, char* callData)
{
if (!callData)
callData = "no calldata";
printf("Event: \"%s\"\nCalldata: \"%s\"\n", event, callData);
}
int
main(int argc, char** argv)
{
CMDCLT cmdclt;
char
buf[128], *myargv[10], *returnValue;
int
port;
setbuf(stdout, NULL);
setbuf(stderr, NULL);
// Find free port, fork an instance of Laker and
// start as a command server.
//
if (1 == argc) {
fprintf(stderr, "Please specify a port number!\n");
return 0;
}
port = atoi(argv[1]);
if (port == -1)
{
fprintf(stderr, "Could get free port!\n");
return 0;
}
// Initialize the client communication.
cmdclt = CmdCltCreate(0);
sleep(3);
// Connect on local machine, wait until connected.
fprintf(stderr, "@@@connecting with socket port number %d
...\n", port);
CmdCltConnect(cmdclt, port, NULL, -1);
fprintf(stderr, "@@@connected.\n");
// Query the current Laker release info and print the value
returned.
if (CmdCltCallCommand(cmdclt, "lakerVersion", 0,
&returnValue))
24

K-2015.06
printf("CallCommand successful: Return Value: \"%s\"\n",

returnValue);
else
printf("CallCommand NOT successful: Return Value: \"%s\"\n",
returnValue);
// Close connection/release resources
return 0;
}

This section contains the application programming interface (API) references
and describes how to use the C interface. Use of this API hides the details of
the communication protocol.
This section includes the following basic and helper functions:
Basic Functions:
CMDCLT CmdCltCreate(char silent)
void CmdCltDestroy(CMDCLT cmdclient)
void CmdCltConnect(CMDCLT cmdclient, int port, char* serverName,

int timeout)
void CmdCltSetAbortProc(CMDCLT cmdclient, procVoid func, void*

clientData)
char CmdCltCallCommand(CMDCLT cmdclient, char* command, char

async, char** returnString)
char CmdCltAddEventCallback(CMDCLT cmdclient, char* reason,

procVoid func, void* clientData);
void CmdCltCheckForEvents(CMDCLT cmdclient)
Helper Functions:
char CmdCltCheckConnection(CMDCLT cmdclient, char** errorMsg)
char* CmdCltGetDotFormat(char* machineName);
char* CmdCltGetLocalMachineName()
int CmdCltGetFreePort()

K-2015.06
25
char CmdCltIsPortFree(int port)

Creates an instance of a Command Client object. CmdCltDestroy MUST be
called to free the returned object.
Syntax
Returns
Pointer to a Command Client object.
Arguments
silent
If TRUE, suppress the status information from being dumped to stdout.
Examples
CMDCLT cmdclt;
...

Destroys a Command Client object. This function MUST be called to free the
object returned by CmdCltCreate.
Syntax
Arguments
cmdclient
: Indicates the pointer to the Command Client object.
Examples
CMDCLT cmdclt;
...
26

K-2015.06
void CmdCltConnect(CMDCLT cmdclient, int port, char*

serverName, int timeout)
Connects to server. This function does not return until a connection has been
established. The server side must be started with the command line option serverPort <port number> where <port number> is the same as port.
It is unnecessary to start the server first. For example:
Syntax
void CmdCltConnect(CMDCLT cmdclient, int port, char*
serverName, int timeout)
Arguments
cmdclient
Indicates the pointer to the Command Client object.
port
Indicates the port on which to communicate with the server. The port
number is in the range of 1024 and 65535.
serverName
Specifies the server name. This can be the machine name or an IP address.
A value of NULL indicates the local machine.
timeout
Indicates the timeout period. If a connection cannot be made within timeout,
CmdCltConnect returns. A value of -1 means the function does not return
until a connection has been established.
Examples
CMDCLT cmdclt;
...

K-2015.06
27
void CmdCltSetAbortProc(CMDCLT cmdclient,

procVoid func, void* clientData)
Used to set a function that is called back when the connection with the server is
broken.
Whenever CmdCltCallCommand or CmdCltAddEventCallback is called, a
check of the connection with the server is made. If the connection is broken,
func is called. CmdCltCheckConnection can be called to manually check
the connection.
Syntax
void CmdCltSetAbortProc(CMDCLT cmdclient, procVoid func,
void* clientData)
Arguments
cmdclient
cmdclient
Indicates the callback function.
clientData
Indicates the application defined data that is passed to the callback. This
value can be NULL.
Examples
void AbortProc(void* clientData)
{
char* myString = (char*)clientData;
printf(%s\n, myString);
}
int main()
{
CMDCLT cmdclt;
char myString[100];
strcpy(myString, Connection broken);
CmdCltSetAbortProc(cmdclt, AbortProc, myString);
...
return 1;
}
28

K-2015.06
char CmdCltCallCommand(CMDCLT cmdclient, char*

command, char async, char** returnString)
This function sends a command/Tcl expression to the server and retrieves the
results. Sending the command asynchronously can greatly speed up the
execution of the command. However, it is not possible to get returnString
when using asynchronous commands. CmdCltCallCommand always returns
TRUE in this situation. This function calls CmdCltCheckForEvents to check
for any pending events before sending the command.
Syntax
char CmdCltCallCommand(CMDCLT cmdclient, char* command, char
async, char** returnString)
Returns
0 on error.
Arguments
cmdclient
command
Indicates the command to call. This can be any valid Tcl command.
async
If 0, this command is executed synchronously, otherwise it is executed
asynchronously.
returnString
Indicates the point to the result of the call. If the return value is 0, an error
message appears; otherwise the return value points to the return result.
Examples
CMDCLT cmdclt;
char*
result;
if (CmdCltCallCommand(cmdclt, Test A B C, 0, &result))
printf(Command successful. Result = %s\n, result);
else
printf(Command failed. Error = %s\n, result);
...

K-2015.06
29
char CmdCltAddEventCallback(CMDCLT cmdclient,

char* reason, procVoid func, void* clientData);
Registers a function to be called when a particular event (reason) in the server
occurs. To check for events CmdCltCheckForEvents MUST be called.
If an event is registered for with this function, CmdCltCheckForEvents must
be called at some regular intervals. Refer to CmdCltCheckForEvents for
details.
Syntax
char CmdCltAddEventCallback(CMDCLT cmdclient, char* reason,
procVoid func, void* clientData);
Returns
0 on error.
Arguments
cmdclient
reason
Indicates the event notification callback reason (see below).
func
Indicates the callback function, which must be of the form: void
myEventCB(char* eventname, void* clientData, char*
callData). The value pointed to by callData is always a string, the value
of which depends on reason.
30

K-2015.06
Examples
void CursorTimeChangeCB(void* clientData, void* callData)
{
char* cursorTime = (char*)callData;
printf(Received CursorTimeChange Event. Value = %s\n,
cursorTime);
}
int main()
{
CMDCLT cmdclt;
CmdCltAddEventCallback(cmdclient, CursorTimeChange,
CursorTimeChangeCB, NULL);
...
return 1;
}

Flushes all pending events. Call this function to check for any pending events
and call registered event handlers. This function must be called at regular
intervals. Every 100~500 milliseconds is a reasonable interval. For GUI-based
applications a timer can be used.
If the events have been registered for with CmdCltAddEventCallback then
this function MUST be called; otherwise, this function does nothing and does
not need to be called.
Syntax
Arguments
cmdclient

K-2015.06
31
char CmdCltCheckConnection(CMDCLT cmdclient,

char** errorMsg)
This function tests whether the listening socket is still alive. It returns TRUE if
successful, and FALSE if unsuccessful. errorMsg can only be set if there is an
error.
This function calls the function registered with CmdCltSetAbortProc if the
connection is broken.
CmdCltCallCommand and CmdCltAddEventCallback both call this
function.
Syntax
char CmdCltCheckConnection(CMDCLT cmdclient, char**
errorMsg)
Arguments
cmdclient

This function returns the dot notation (IP Address) given the machine name.
Syntax
This function gets the local machine name.
Syntax
This function gets a free port on the local machine. Returns -1 on error. After
1000 failed attempts, it returns -1.
32

K-2015.06
Syntax

This function tests if the given port is free or not (local machine). The return
value is TRUE if the port is free, and FALSE if the port is not free or an error has
occurred.
Syntax

K-2015.06
33
34

K-2015.06
2
General Tcl Extensions
This chapter introduces the Tcl commands applied for general usage.
Laker3 applies the Tcl interpreter and supports a command language interface
for Tk and C-based applications. To meet the design requirements, Tcls are
extended by augmenting the Tcl commands and data types.
A shortcut of these data types is provided for users convenience. Laker3
supports plenty of commands for users to manipulate their designs. The syntax
of Laker3s Tcl commands is similar to the built-in Tcl commands and C shell
commands.
Laker3 adopts name-mapping as the strategy to pass arguments to a
command. This makes users not have to care the arguments order and makes
them comfortable to write their script files. As for other tools, they usually adopt
a so-called position-mapping strategy, which makes program-writing a longwinded work.
Besides strings, lists, and arrays, Laker3 supports several new data types, such
as point, bounding box, and point list.
Furthermore, Laker3 also supports several fundamental commands for users to
write their own script files.
New Data Types and Shortcut
Basic User-definable Commands

K-2015.06
35
Chapter 2: General Tcl Extensions


Laker supports three new data types in Tcl extensions: point, bounding box,
and point list.
Each data type can be represented by three approaches. In each format, a
useful shortcut is provided to input a mathematical expression to express an xaxis or y-axis coordinate.
The data types and shortcut are described in the following sections:
Point
Bounding Box
Point List
Point
A point that represents a planar coordinate is a pair of floating numbers. A point
can be specified by using the following formats (where x and y are
mathematical expressions):
(x,y): The two expressions are enclosed by a pair of left and right
parentheses and are separated by a comma character (,).
x y: The two expressions are separated by a white space.
{x y}: A list with two elements stands for a point.
This shortcut must be used carefully because white spaces in a command are
always recognized as the separator of these two expressions. If the expression
contains spaces, the command mis-interprets the input. Besides, the {x y}
format disables variable substitution.
Any of the following examples can be used to represent a point.
(1.234, -3.456)
(1.234+$a, [expr 2.345*$b]+(15*$c)*2.71828)
1.234 -3.456
1.234+$a 2.345*$b
{1.234 -3.456}
{1.234+3 -3.456/2.5}
Note:
The following examples are illegal point representations:
((1 -3)*4,5)
(1 -3)*4 5
36

K-2015.06

{(1 -3)*4 5}
Bounding Box
A bounding box is represented by two planar points. A bounding box can be
specified with the following three formats:
(x1,y1) (x2,y2)
x1 y1 x2 y2
{{x1 y1} {x2 y2}}
where x1, x2, y1, and y2 are the mathematical expressions.

In the x1 y1 x2 y2 format, the x1 and y1 expressions represent a point, and
x2 and y2 expressions represent another point.
Refer to the Point description for more details on the shortcut and restriction of
the bounding box.
Any of the following examples can be used to specify a bounding box.
(-1,-3) (1,3)
(-1+$deltaX, -3+$deltaY) (1+$deltaX, 3+$deltaY)
-1 -3 1 3
-1+$deltaX -3+$deltaY 1+$deltaX 3+$deltaY
{{-1 -3}{1 3}}
Point List
A point list contains two or more planar points. It can be represented by the
following three formats:
(x1,y1) (x2,y2) ... (xn,yn)
x1 y1 x2 y2 ... xn yn
{{x1 y1} {x2 y2} ...{xn yn}}
where x1, x2, ... xn, y1, y2, ..., and yn are the mathematical
expressions.
In the x1 y1 x2 y2 ... xn yn format, the x1 and y1 expressions represent
a point, x2 and y2 expressions represent another point, and so on. Give heed
to the expressions since the second format is sensitive to white spaces.
Refer to the Point description for more details on the shortcut and restriction of
the point list.
Any of the following examples can be used to specify a point list.

K-2015.06
37

(0,0) (2,0) (2,2) (0,2)

0 0 2 0 2 2 0 2
{{0 0} {2 0} {2 2} {0 2}}
($a+$b,0)($b-2,8)($x,$y)
{{1 2}{3 4}}

This section describes basic user-definable commands. These commands
include:
38
atof
atoi
beautyFileName
car
caar
cadr
cdar
cddr
cdr
cxyzr
cwxyzr
cdrN
charToInt
concatInstallDir
comment
cons
currentTime
decr
echo
elemN
encrypt

K-2015.06

firstIdxStr
getenv
getInstallDir
incr
intToChar
isEmptyList
isEqual
isEven
isFileEncrypted
isFloat
isInteger
isNegative
isNEqual
isNumber
isOdd
isOne
isPositive
isSymbolicLink
isZero
lastElem
lastIdxStr
max
member
min
mod
pdecr
pincr
putenv
random

K-2015.06
39

reverseList
source_enc
srandom
stop
strcat
stringLess
strncat
strncmp
subStr
timeCmp
timeStrToTime
timeToTimeStr
tmpFileName
tmpName
atof
The atof command returns a floating point number if the string can be
converted to a floating point number. This command is similar to the C function
atof.
Syntax
atof aString
Returns
A floating point number if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
aString
A string.
Examples
atof -3.14159e2
40

K-2015.06

atoi
The atoi command returns an integer number if the string can be converted to
an integer number. This command is similar to the C function atoi.
Syntax
atoi aString
Returns
An integer number if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
aString
A string.
Examples
atoi 2
beautyFileName
The beautyFileName command returns an absolute file name if the file name
can be made with an absolute path.
Syntax
beautyFileName aFileName
Returns
An absolute file name if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
aFileName
A file name.
Examples
beautyFileName ~mozart/concert
beautyFileName gauss/theory1
beautyFileName /usr/usr1/

K-2015.06
41

car
The car command returns a list if the first element in the list can be obtained.
Syntax
car aList
Returns
A list if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
aList
A list.
Examples
car [list 1 2 3]
car [list [list 1 2 3] [list 4 5 6] x y z]
caar
This command is equivalent to car [car aList].
Syntax
caar aList
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
aList
A list.
Examples
caar [list [list 1 2 3] [list 4 5 6] x y z]
See Also
car
42

K-2015.06

cadr
This command is equivalent to car [cdr aList].
Syntax
cadr aList
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
aList
A list.
Examples
cadr [list [list 1 2 3] [list 4 5 6] x y z]
See Also
car
cdr
cdar
This command is equivalent to cdr [car aList].
Syntax
cdar aList
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
aList
A list.
Examples
cdar [list [list 1 2 3] [list 4 5 6] x y z]

K-2015.06
43

See Also
car
cdr
cddr
This command is equivalent to cdr [cdr aList].
Syntax
cddr aList
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
aList
A list.
Examples
cddr [list [list 1 2 3] [list 4 5 6] x y z]
See Also
cdr
cdr
The cdr command returns a list if the tail list, which is the original list with the
first list element removed, of a specific list can be obtained.
Syntax
cdr aList
Returns
Arguments
44
Argument
Description
aList
A list.

K-2015.06

Examples
cdr [list 1 2 3]
cdr [list [list 1 2 3] [list 4 5 6] x y z]
cxyzr
This command is equivalent to cxr [cyr [czr aList]]; where x, y, z is
one of a or d; this means it is a set of 8 commands.
Syntax
cxyzr aList
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
aList
A list.
Examples
cdadr [list [list 1 2 3] [list 4 5 6] x y z]
caddr [list [list 1 2 3] [list 4 5 6] x y z]
cwxyzr
This command is equivalent to cwr [cxr [cyr [czr aList]]]; where w,
x, y, z is one of a or d; this means it is a set of 16 commands.
Syntax
cwxyzr aList
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
aList
A list.

K-2015.06
45

Examples
cddddr [list [list 1 2 3] [list 4 5 6] x y z]
cdrN
The cdrN command returns a list if the cdr operation can be applied on a list
with n times.
Syntax
cdrN aList n
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
aList
A list.
An integer.
Examples
cdrN [list 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8] 5
;# {6 7 8} is returned
See Also
cdr
charToInt
The charToInt command returns an integer if the first character in the
specified string can be converted to an integer which encodes this character in
the machine.
Syntax
charToInt aString
Returns
An integer if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
46

K-2015.06

Arguments
Argument
Description
aString
A string.
Examples
charToInt a
charToInt abc
charToInt abc
concatInstallDir
The concatInstallDir command returns a string if the install directory of
this string can be concated with a string.
Syntax
concatInstallDir aString
Returns
A string if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
aString
A string.
Examples
concatInstallDir file1
comment
The comment command returns an empty string if the block comment in Tcl
can be simulated. We simulate a block-comment in Tcl by this command to
consume its arguments but does nothing. This command returns a value (),
unlike a line comment skiped by Tcl interpreter.
Syntax
comment { commands }
Returns
An empty string (for example: ) if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.

K-2015.06
47

Arguments
None
Examples
comment {
set a 100
set b 200
set c [expr $a+$b]
}
cons
This cons command returns a list if the element can be inserted to the head of
a list.
Syntax
cons aElem aList
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
aElem
Any data.
aList
A list.
Examples
cons 9 {10 11 12}
cons a [list x y z]
currentTime
The currentTime command returns a time string if the current time in the
machine can be obtained.
Syntax
currentTime
Returns
A time string if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
48

K-2015.06

Arguments
None
Examples
set curTime [currentTime]
decr
The decr command returns a number if the variable, whose content is a
number, with some amount can be decreased.
Syntax
decr varName [amount]
Returns
A number if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
varName
A variable name.
amount
A number (default=1).
Examples
set var1 5.7
set var2 100
decr var1 9
decr var2 4.5
echo
The echo command returns the input content if the user input can be echoed.
Syntax
echo anyInput
Returns
The input content if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.

K-2015.06
49

Arguments
Argument
Description
anyInput
Any content that user inputs.
Examples
echo abcd
set abcd [random 1024]
echo $abcd
echo {$abcd}
elemN
The elemN command returns a list if the nth element in a list can be obtained.
This command treats the first element in the list as rank 1 but not 0.
Syntax
elemN aList n
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
aList
A list.
An integer.
Examples
elemN [list 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1] 3
;# 8 is returned
encrypt
The encrypt command returns 1 if the device ASCII file can be encrypted to
an unreadable format.
Syntax
encrypt plainFile cypherFile
50

K-2015.06

Returns
1 if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
plainFile
Any input device file.
cypherFile
An output file name.
Examples
encrypt leoArc.tcl leoArc.cp
firstIdxStr
The firstIdxStr command returns a string if the substring of str2 can be
obtained from the first occurrence of str1 to the end.
Syntax
firstIdxStr str1 str2
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
str1, str2
Strings.
Examples
firstIdxStr a xyzabcdef
firstIdxStr abc xyzababab
;# abcdef is returned
;# is returned
getenv
The getenv command returns the content of the environment variable if the
content of some environment variables can be obtained under UNIX shell.
Syntax
getenv envVar

K-2015.06
51

Returns
The content of the environment variable if successful; otherwise, returns
nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
envVar
The environment variable.
Examples
getenv DISPLAY
getenv PATH
getenv abc
getInstallDir
The getInstallDir command returns the install directory of the product if
the install directory of the product can be obtained.
Syntax
getInstallDir
Returns
The install directory of the product if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
None
Examples
set installDir [getInstallDir]
incr
The incr command returns a number if the variable, whose content is a
number, with some amount can be increased.
Syntax
incr varName [amount]
Returns
52

K-2015.06

Arguments
Argument
Description
varName
A variable name.
amount
Examples
set var1 5.7
set var2 100
incr var1 9
incr var2 4.5
intToChar
The intToChar command returns a character if the integer can be converted
to a character where the integer encodes the character in the machine.
Syntax
intToChar aInt
Returns
A character if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
aInt
An integer.
Examples
intToChar 97
intToChar [charToInt a]
isEmptyList
The isEmptyList command returns 1 if the given list is empty.
Syntax
isEmptyList aList
Returns
K-2015.06
53

Arguments
Argument
Description
aList
A list.
Examples
set listL [myProc1 abc.def]
if {[isEmptyList $listL]} {
stop something wrong while processing \abc.def\
}
isEqual
The isEqual command returns 1 if two objects are equal.
Syntax
isEqual obj1 obj2
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
obj1, obj2
Data objects.
Examples
set listL [myProc1 abc.def]
if {[isEqual $listL [list]]} {
stop something wrong while processing \abc.def\
}
isEven
The isEven command returns 1 if the number is even.
Syntax
isEven aInt
Returns
54

K-2015.06

Arguments
Argument
Description
aInt
An integer.
Examples
isEven [random]
isFileEncrypted
The isFileEncrypted command returns 1 if the input file is encrypted.
Syntax
isFileEncrypted aFileName
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
aFileName
An input encrypted file.
Examples
isFileEncrypted leoArc.cp
isFloat
The isFloat command returns 1 if the input is a decimal floating point
number.
Syntax
isFloat anyInput
Returns

K-2015.06
55

Arguments
Argument
Description
anyInput
Any input.
Examples
isFloat [expr sin(3.14/2)]
isFloat 2.0
isInteger
The isInteger command returns 1 if the decimal input is an integer.
Syntax
isInteger anyInput
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
anyInput
Any input.
Examples
isInteger [expr sin(3.14/2)]
isInteger 2
isNegative
The isNegative command returns 1 if the decimal number is negative.
Syntax
isNegative aNum
Returns
56

K-2015.06

Arguments
Argument
Description
aNum
A number.
Examples
isNegative -2.71828
isNEqual
The isNEqual command returns 1 if two objects are not equal.
Syntax
isNEqual obj1 obj2
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
obj1, obj2
Data objects.
Examples
isNEqual [list]
isNEqual [list 1 2 3] [list a b c]
isNEqual 97 [charToInt a]
isNumber
The isNumber command returns 1 if the input is a decimal number.
Syntax
isNumber anyInput
Returns

K-2015.06
57

Arguments
Argument
Description
anyInput
Any input.
Examples
isNumber [expr sin(3.14/2)]
isNumber 2
isOdd
The isOdd command returns 1if the integer is odd.
Syntax
isOdd aInt
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
aInt
An integer.
Examples
isOdd [random]
isOdd -45
isOne
The isOne command returns 1 if the number is equal to 1.
Syntax
isOne aNum
Returns
58

K-2015.06

Arguments
Argument
Description
aNum
A number.
Examples
isOne [random 2]
isOne 1.00000
isPositive
The isPositive command returns 1 if the number is positive.
Syntax
isPositive aNum
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
aNum
A number.
Examples
isPositive [expr sin([random])]
isSymbolicLink
The isSymbolicLink command returns 1 if the file is symbolic link.
Syntax
isSymbolicLink fileName
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
fileName
A file name.

K-2015.06
59

Examples
isSymbolicLink abc
isZero
The isZero command returns 1 if the number is equal to 0.
Syntax
isZero aNum
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
aNum
A number.
Examples
isZero [random 2]
lastElem
The lastElem command returns a data object if the last element in a list can
be obtained.
Syntax
lastElem aList
Returns
A data object if successful, otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
aList
A list.
Examples
lastElem {a b c 1 2 3}
lastElem [list a b c [list 1 2 3]]
60

K-2015.06

lastIdxStr
The lastIdxStr command returns a string if the substring of str2 can be
obtained from the last occurrence of str1 to the end.
Syntax
lastIdxStr str1 str2
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
str1, str2
Strings.
Examples
lastIdxStr abc 1abcdabcdefabcx
;# abcx is returned
max
The max command returns a number if the maximum can be obtained among
several numbers.
Syntax
max num1 [num2 [num3 ...]]
Returns
A number if successful, otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
num1, num2, num3
Numbers.
Examples
max 1 2 3 4 4.05 -8 3

K-2015.06
61

member
The member command returns a list if the maximum sublist of aList can be
obtained from the first occurrence of aElem in aList to the end.
Syntax
member aElem aList
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
aElem
Any data objects.
aList
A list.
Examples
member a [list 1 2 3 a b c 1 2 3]
;# {a b c 1 2 3} is returned
member [list 1 2] [list 1 2 3 [list 1 2] a b]
;# {{1 2} a b} is returned
min
The min command returns a number if the minimum can be obtained among
several numbers.
Syntax
min num1 [num2 [num3 ...]]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
num1, num2, num3
Numbers.
Examples
min $a $b $c
62

K-2015.06

mod
The mod command returns an integer if the remainder, that the divisor (int2)
divides the dividend (int1), can be obtained. This remainder has the same
sign as the dividend.
Syntax
mod int1 int2
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
int1,int2
Integers.
Examples
mod 5 3
mod -5 3
;# 2 is returned
;# -2 is returned
pdecr
The pdecr command returns the original value that stored in the variable if the
variable, whose content is a number, with some amount can be decreased.
Syntax
pdecr varName [amount]
Returns
The original value that stored in the variable if successful; otherwise, returns
nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
varName
A variable name.
amount

K-2015.06
63

Examples
set var1 200
pdecr var1
set var1
pdecr var1 3.5
set var1
;# 200 is returned
;# 199 is returned
;# 199 is returned
;# 195.5 is returned
pincr
The pincr command returns the original value that stored in the variable if the
variable, whose content is a number, with some amount can be increased.
Syntax
pincr varName [amount]
Returns
The original value that stored in the variable if successful; otherwise, returns
nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
varName
A variable name.
amount
Examples
set var1 200
pincr var1
set var1
pincr var1 3.5
set var1
;#
;#
;#
;#
200 is returned
201 is returned
201 is returned
204.5 is returned
putenv
The putenv command returns 1 if the shell (UNIX shell) environment variable
is set up.
The input string should be in xxx=yyy format.
The substring before = is the environment variable and the substring after =
is the content of the variable.
64

K-2015.06

If = doesnt exist within the string, a shell environment variable is set without
any content.
Syntax
putenv aString
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
aString
A string.
Examples
putenv
putenv
getenv
getenv
abc
def=1
abc
def
random
The random command returns a random number if the random number can be
obtained.
The argument, aInt, is optional. If it is specified, the random number is modulo
aInt; otherwise, no modulation is done. For example, the following two
statements are equivalent.
set rNum [random 1024]
;# statement 1
set rNum [random] ; set rNum [mod $rNum 1024]
;#
statement 2
XX
Syntax
random [aInt]
Returns
A random number if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
aInt
An integer.

K-2015.06
65

Examples
set rNum [random 2]
if {$rNum == 0} {
puts even
} else {
puts odd
}
reverseList
The reverseList command returns a list if the order of elements in a list can
be reversed.
Syntax
reverseList aList
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
aList
A list.
Examples
reverseList [list a c [list 1 2 3] 1 2 3 b c [list 1 2 3] 1 2 3]
source_enc
The source_enc command returns 1 if the encrypted device file can be
sourced. This command is similar to the Tcl function source.
Syntax
source_enc encryptedFile
Returns
Arguments
66
Argument
Description
encryptedFile
An input encrypted file.

K-2015.06

Examples
source_enc leoArc.cp
srandom
The srandom command returns 1 if the random seed is set.
Syntax
srandom aInt
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
aInt
An integer.
Examples
srandom [random [random [random]]]
stop
The stop command halts the execution of the Tcl script file. If the argument
aString is not specified, no warning messages are shown.
Syntax
stop [aString]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
aString
A string.

K-2015.06
67

Examples
set status [myProc1 $fName]
if {$status == unknown} {
set warnMsg [format fail to process file %s $fName]
stop $warnMsg
}
strcat
The strcat command returns a string if several strings can be concatenated
to a new one.
Syntax
strcat str1 [str2 [ ...]]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
str1, str2 ...
Strings.
Examples
strcat 123 abc
stringLess
The stringLess command returns 1 if str1 is less than str2 in alphabetical
order.
Syntax
stringLess str1 str2
Returns
1 if successful, otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
68
Argument
Description
str1, str2 ...
Strings.

K-2015.06

Examples
stringLess abcdef defghi
strncat
The strncat command returns a string if two strings can be concatenated to
a new one, where the second string is concatenated to the first one with at
most n characters.
Syntax
strncat str1 str2 n
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
An integer.
str1, str2
Strings.
Examples
strncat
abcdef
ghi
strncmp
The strncmp command compares two strings by n characters.
Syntax
strncmp str1 str2 n
Returns
0 if the two strings are equal by n characters.
1 if str1 is greater than str2 in alphabetical order.
-1 if str1 is less than str2 in alphabetical order.

K-2015.06
69

Arguments
Argument
Description
An integer.
str1, str2
Strings.
Examples
strncmp abcdef
abcxyz
subStr
The subStr command returns a string if the substring of aString can be
obtained from index (idx) to the end with length n. If idx is negative, the index
counts from the right to the left.
Syntax
subStr aString idx [n]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
aString
A string.
idx, n
Integers.
Examples
subStr
subStr
subStr
subStr
abcdefghi
abcdefghi
abcdefghi
abcdefghi
3
3 4
-8
-8 4
;# cdefghi is returned
;# cdef is returned
;# bcdefghi is returned
;# bcde is returned
timeCmp
The timeCmp command compares two time strings and returns their difference
in seconds.
70

K-2015.06

Syntax
timeCmp timeStr1 timeStr2
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
timeStr1, timeStr2
Time strings.
Examples
timeCmp [currentTime] [timeToTimeStr [file mtime addring.tcl]]
set secThisYear [timeCmp Jan 1 0:0:0 2001 Jan 1 0:0:0 2000]
timeStrToTime
The timeStrToTime command returns an absolute time clock in seconds if
the time string can be converted to the absolute time clock in seconds, which is
a decimal integer.
Syntax
timeStrToTime aString
Returns
An absolute time clock in seconds if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
aString
A string.
Examples
timeStrToTime Nov 11 9:9:9 2000
timeToTimeStr
The timeToTimeStr command returns a time string if the absolute time clock
can be converted to a time string.

K-2015.06
71

Syntax
timeToTimeStr aInt
Returns
A time string if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
aInt
An integer.
Examples
timeToTimeStr [file mtime ioPrep.tcl]
tmpFileName
The tmpFileName command returns a file name if the unique temporary file
name can be made.
Syntax
tmpFileName [aString]
Returns
A file name if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
aString
A string.
Examples
## make a temp file and write something on it
set fName [tmpFileName]
set fHandle [open $fName w]
set str [format How are you?\n %s %d abc 123]
puts $fHandle $str
close $fHandle
tmpName
The tmpName command returns a symbol if the unique temporary symbol can
be made.
72

K-2015.06

Syntax
tmpName [aString]
Returns
A symbol if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
aString
A string.
Examples
tmpName abc
tmpName

K-2015.06
73

74

K-2015.06
3
3
GUI Extensions
This chapter describes the definable Tcl commands for the Graphical User
Interface (GUI) which applied within the Laker3 system.
Bottom-Up Construction
Global Symbols
Menu
Dialog Box
Form and Field
Pre-processing Tcl Callback Functions
Miscellaneous

K-2015.06
75
Chapter 3: GUI Extensions

All composite user-interface objects should be created in a bottom-up method.
In other words, each sub-object must be created before the composite objects.
Global Symbols
All commands must specify a unique symbol name to identify the objects, and
all creating commands return a system-generated handle to the user.
If the create commands of two different objects are specified with the same
symbol name, the former created objects are overwritten by the latter.
The handle or symbol can be used to identify the objects. For example:
set cyclicHandle [gtCreateCyclicField \
-name cyclicSymbol \
-prompt choose Animal: \
-value dog \
-defValue cat \
-choices [list elephant mouse cat dog whale dophine
tiger snake shark]]
set formHandle [gtCreateAppForm \
-name formSymbol \
-title demo \
-buttonLayout OKCancelDefApply \
-fields $cyclicHandle \
-callback {puts you press OK or apply}]
To get the value of a sub-object after the composite object is created, the
command formSymbol(cyclicSymbol:value) must be used to get the
value in cyclicSymbol.
The symbol of each created object must be different, otherwise it gets confused
when trying to get the information via a symbol name.
Refer to the Form and Field section for more details.
76

K-2015.06

Menu
Menu
Three types of menus are supported in GUI extensions: Popup menu, Pulldown menu, and Fixed menu (not supported currently).
Each menu item must be created before building a popup menu or a pulldown
menu. After creating the menu items, assign them to Menu, PullDown Menu,
PopupMenu, Cascade Menu, etc.
The Menu Create commands are described as follows:
gtAppendBannerMenu
gtCreateMenu
gtCreateMenuItem
gtCreatePulldownMenu
gtCreateSliderMenuItem
gtHideBannerMenu
gtShowBannerMenu
gtAppendBannerMenu
The gtAppendBannerMenu command appends a pull-down menu to the
menu bar of the Home Page or Design/Layout window pane.
Syntax
gtAppendBannerMenu [ -window windowId | -windowType
windowType] -file user_defined_menu_file
Returns
None

K-2015.06
77

Menu
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file
user_defined_menu_file
Specify the user-defined menu file. The menu file is as

follows:Menu your_pulldown_menu_name {
# Label Mnemonic Type Dummy
Your_Tcl_Command
"myTcl1" 1 f.tcl dummy "puts my tcl command 1"
"SubMenu2" 2 f.menu
"mySubMenu2" "
}
Menu mySubMenu2 {
#_Label Mnemonic Type Dummy
Your_Tcl_Command
"myTcl3" 3 f.tcl dummy "puts my tcl command 3"
}
-window
windowId
Specify the destination window. The window identifier

can be obtained by calling lakerGetwtWndId, which only
affects the active window.
-windowType
windowType
Specify the window type. This argument is case

insensitive.
Valid values for Laker: lakerDsgWnd (Design/Layout
window pane) and lakerMasterWnd (Home Page).
Valid values for ADP: LEOMASTERWND (Home Page)
AMSFM_TOP_DSGWND (Schematic Editor
SIM_MAINMGR_WND), (Simulation Console),
nAnalyzer (LakerWave window), and
SYMFM_TOP_DSGWND (Symbol Editor).
78

K-2015.06

Menu
Examples
gtAppendBannerMenu -windowType lakerDsgWnd -file ~/Tcl/laker3/
lakerAppend1.menu
#lakerAppend1.menu
Menu myTclCmd2
{
# Label Mnemonic Type Dummy "your Tcl command"
"myTcl2"
_2
f.tcl dummy
"puts
{***************myTcl2*************}"
"myTcl3"
_3
f.tcl dummy
"puts
{***************myTcl3*************}"
"myTcl4"
_4
f.tcl dummy
"puts
{***************myTcl4*************}"
"myTcl5"
_5
f.tcl dummy
"puts
{***************myTcl5*************}"
"myTclMenu6" _6 f.menu
"myTclMenu6"
}
Menu myTclMenu6
{
"myTcl61"
_1
f.tcl dummy
"puts
{***************myTcl61*************}"
"myTcl62"
_2
f.tcl dummy
"puts
{***************myTcl62*************}"
"myTcl63"
_3
f.tcl dummy
"puts
{***************myTcl63*************}"
"myTcl64"
_4
f.tcl dummy
"puts
{***************myTcl64*************}"
}
gtCreateMenu
The gtCreateMenu command returns an object handle if the popup menu
(with menu items created in the gtCreateMenuItem call) can be created.
Syntax
gtCreateMenu -name menuSymbol -prompt menu title -fields
$field1 $field2 ...
Returns
An object handle if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-fields
$field1 $field2
Specify the menu items created in gtCreateMenuItem and

gtCreateSliderMenuItem.

K-2015.06
79

Menu
Argument
Description
-name menuSymbol
Specify the menu symbol.
-prompt menu title
Specify the menu title.
Examples
set menu1 [gtCreateMenu -name menu1 -fields $item1 $item2]
gtCreateMenuItem
The gtCreateMenuItem command returns an object handle if the menu item
can be created.
Syntax
gtCreateMenuItem -name menuSymbol -itemText {text} -callback
{commands} -disable 0|1
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-callback {commands}
Specify the Tcl procedures to be executed when the

MenuItem is selected.
-disable 0|1
If set to 1, the item is grayed (not selectable).

Valid values: Boolean values, 0 and 1.
-itemText {text}
Specify the text shown on the button.
-name menuSymbol
Specify the symbol of the menu item.
Examples
set item1 [gtCreateMenuItem -name item1 -itemText "item1" \
-callback [list sum 1 $var1] ]
set item2 [gtCreateMenuItem -name item2 -itemText "exit" \
-callback {exit} ]
80

K-2015.06

Menu
gtCreatePulldownMenu
The gtCreatePulldownMenu command returns an object handle if the pulldown menu on the window menu bar can be created. This kind of menus
cannot be existed on a form.
Syntax
gtCreatePulldownMenu -name menuSymbol -prompt Menu Text fields $menufield1 $menufield2 ...
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-fields
$menufield1 $menufield2
Specify the menu items created in gtCreateMenuItem

and gtCreateSliderMenuItem.
-name menuSymbol
Specify the menu symbol.
-prompt Menu Text
Specify the menu title.
Examples
set puldwn1 [gtCreatePulldownMenu -name menu1 \
-prompt "pulldown1" -fields [list $item1 $item2]]
gtCreateSliderMenuItem
The gtCreateSliderMenuItem command returns an object handle if the
cascade menu item can be created. gtCreateMenu must be used to create a
menu before assigning it to a Slider Menu.
Syntax
gtCreateSliderMenuItem -name menuSymbol -subMenu $menu1 itemText SliderMenu Text -disable 0|1
Returns

K-2015.06
81

Menu
Arguments
Argument
Description
-disable 0|1
If set to 1, the item is grayed (no selectable).

-itemText
SliderMenu Text
Specify the prompt string shown on the slider menu item.
-name menuSymbol
Specify the slider menu symbol.
-subMenu $menu1
Specify the menu handle created in gtCreateMenu, not

the menu symbol.
Examples
set menu1 [gtCreateMenu -name menu1 -fields $item1 $item2]
set sld1 [gtCreateSliderMenuItem -name slider1 \
-itemText "slider menu1" -subMenu $meun1]
See Also
The following shows an example of a popup menu.
Figure 1
Example of Menu
The Tcl example is listed as follows:

proc sum {arg1 arg2 arg3} {
set result [expr $arg1 + $arg2 + $arg3]
puts $arg1+$arg2+$arg3 = $result
}
set var1 10
set itm1 [gtCreateMenuItem -name item1 -itemText item1 \
-callback {sum 1 1 $var1}]
set itm2 [gtCreateMenuItem -name exit -itemText exit \
-callback {exit}]
-callback {sum 3 3 3}]
82

K-2015.06

Menu

set men1 [gtCreateMenu -name menu1 \
-fields [list $itm1 $itm2]]
-itemText slider menu1 -subMenu $men1]
set men2 [gtCreateMenu -name menu2 \
-fields [list $itm3 $itm4 $sld1]]
-itemText slider menu2 -subMenu $men2]
gtCreateMenu -name popupmenu1 -prompt a cascade menu \
-fields [list $itm4 $itm5 $sld2]
gtDisplay -name popupmenu1
gtHideBannerMenu
The gtHideBannerMenu command hides a pull-down menu or a command
item on the window menu bar.
Syntax
gtHideBannerMenu [-window windowId | -windowType windowType]
[-itemName name | -menuname name]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-itemName name
Specify the command item in the menu file.
-menuname name
Specify the menu to be hidden.
-window windowId
Specify the destination window. The window identifier can be

obtained by calling lakerGetwtWndId, which only affects the
active window.

K-2015.06
83

Menu
Argument
Description
-windowType
windowType
Specify the window type. This argument is case insensitive.

Valid values for Laker: lakerDsgWnd (Design/Layout window
pane) and lakerMasterWnd (Home Page).
Valid values for ADP: LEOMASTERWND (Home Page),
AMSFM_TOP_DSGWND (Schematic Editor),
SIM_MAINMGR_WND (Simulation Console), nAnalyzer
(LakerWave window), and SYMFM_TOP_DSGWND
(Symbol Editor).
Examples
# Example 1
# Hide the "Cell>Open" command in the Design window
# Before executing the Tcl, check the menu file, leoDsgWnd.menu,
# to find the item name:
#
Menu Cell
#
{
#
"Open..." _O f.exec "LEODSGOpen"
#
...
#
}
gtHideBannerMenu -windowType lakerDsgWnd -itemName LEODSGOpen
# Example 2
# Hide the Window pull-down menu and Cell>Open in the Home Page
gtHideBannerMenu -windowType lakerMasterWnd -menuName Window
gtHideBannerMenu -windowType lakerMasterWnd -itemName
LEOMasterOpen
# Example 3
# Hide the Window menu and Cell > Open in the Layout window
gtHideBannerMenu -window [lakerGetActiveWnd] -menuName Window
gtHideBannerMenu -window [lakerGetActiveWnd] -itemName
LEOMasterOpen
gtHideBannerMenu -windowType lakerDsgWnd -menuName Window
gtHideBannerMenu -windowType lakerDsgWnd -itemName LEODSGOpen
See Also
gtShowBannerMenu
gtShowBannerMenu
The gtShowBannerMenu command shows a pull-down menu or a command
item on the window menu bar.
84

K-2015.06

Menu
Syntax
gtShowBannerMenu [-window windowId | -windowType windowType]
[-itemName name | -menuname name]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-itemName name
Specify the command item in the menu file.
-menuname name
Specify the menu to be shown.
-window windowId

obtained by calling lakerGetwtWndId, which only affects
the active window.
-windowType
windowType

(LakerWave window), and SYMFM_TOP_DSGWND
(Symbol Editor).
Examples
# Example 1
# Show the "Cell>Open" command in the Design window
# Before executing the Tcl, check the menu file, leoDsgWnd.menu,
# to find the item name:
#
Menu Cell
#
{
#
"Open..." _O f.exec "LEODSGOpen"
#
...
#
}
gtShowBannerMenu -windowType lakerDsgWnd -itemName LEODSGOpen
# Example 2
# Show the Window pull-down menu and Cell>Open in the Home page
gtShowBannerMenu -windowType lakerMasterWnd -menuName Window
gtShowBannerMenu -windowType lakerMasterWnd -itemName
LEOMasterOpen

K-2015.06
85

Dialog Box
# Example 3
# Show the Window menu and Cell>Open in the Layout window
gtShowBannerMenu -window [lakerGetActiveWnd] -menuName Window
gtShowBannerMenu -window [lakerGetActiveWnd] -itemName
LEOMasterOpen
gtShowBannerMenu -windowType lakerDsgWnd -menuName Window
gtShowBannerMenu -windowType lakerDsgWnd -itemName LEODSGOpen
See Also
gtHideBannerMenu
Dialog Box
Dialog boxes are popup windows containing messages displayed to the user.
Currently, Laker3s GUI extensions support the following basic dialogs: Error,
Information, Warning, Working, and Question.
Each dialog box has at least three buttons: OK, Cancel, and Help. Only the OK
and Cancel buttons can dismiss the current dialog box. The dialog styles are
summarized as follows.
Style
Sub-style
Affect
Modal
Application Modal
Block all applications in GUI
Modal
System Modal
Block all System Process
Modeless
Non-block
In the Application Modal, all applications in GUI extensions or other

applications, such as Laker3, are blocked when the OK or Cancel button is
clicked.
In the System Modal, all processes in the environment are blocked when the
OK or Cancel button is clicked. The programs for Modeless style can be run at
the same time.
86

K-2015.06

Dialog Box
All the dialogs have the same options. The Dialog Create Command is
described as follows.
gtDisplayAppDBox
gtDisplayAppDBox
The gtDisplayAppDBox command returns an object handle if the dialog box
can be created.
Syntax
gtDisplayAppDBox -name dialogSymbol -dboxBanner Title dboxText message shown in the dialog -dialogType Type
-buttonLayout ButtonType -defaultButton (1|2|3|4) callback {commands 1} {commands2} ... -location {X Y}
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-buttonLayout
ButtonType
Specify the type of buttons in a dialog.

Valid values: OKCancel, YesNo, YesNoCancel, and
Close.
-callback {commands 1}
{commands2} ...
Run user-specified actions when the OK, Yes, and

Apply buttons are clicked.
-dboxBanner Title
Specify the dialog title.
-dboxText message
shown in the dialog
Specify the message shown in the Dialog.
-defaultButton (1|2|3|4)
Specify the initial focus button when the dialog first

appears. The valid range is 1-4 (depends on the
buttons created), the maximum is 4. Exceeded number
is replaced by 1 as the initial focus button.
-dialogStyle
Specify the dialog style.

Valid values: Modeless, Modal, and systemModal.

K-2015.06
87

Dialog Box
Argument
Description
-dialogType Type
Specify the dialog type.

Valid values: WarningDialog, ErrorDialog,
InformationDialog, MessageDialog,
QuestionDialog, and WorkingDialog.
-location {X Y}
Specify the X/Y position related to the entire Screen.

The origin is upperleft.
The valid format is {X Y}, where X and Y are integers
that are greater than or equal to 0, for example: {123
234}.
If an invalid position (for example: {-1 123.456}) is
specified, the system uses {0 0} as the default
position.
-name dialogSymbol
Specify the symbol name that is specified by the user.
Examples
The following shows an example of a warning dialog.
Figure 2
88
Dialogs for Error, Information, Message, Question, Warning and Working

K-2015.06

Form and Field
The Tcl example is demonstrated as follows:

set dlg [gtDisplayAppDBox -name Dialog2 \
-dialogType WarningDialog -defaultButton 2 \
-dboxBanner a dialog -buttonLayout YesNoCancel \
-dboxText Warning DIALOG -location {200200} \
-callback {puts you press YES} {sum 3 3 3}]
Form and Field

A standard form is used to solicit data from the user under normal operation. A
form is like a container, which contains fields receiving user input. The creation
order is from bottom up. That means you must create fields before using them,
then create a form to include those fields.
Each standard form contains a banner showing the title of the current form and
four selectable buttons. These buttons perform the following actions:
The OK button applies all changes indicated in the form, executes any userdefined Tcl commands, and hides the form from the screen.
The Cancel button cancels any changes made to the form, and hides the
form from the screen.
The Defaults button sets all values in the form to their default values.
The Apply button applies the changes indicated in the form and leaves the
form displayed for further changes.
Note:
All fields must be ready before creating a form. gtDisplay must

be called to display the form on screen since it does not appear
immediately after gtCreateAppForm is called.

K-2015.06
89

Form and Field
The meaning of symbols and argument comments are explained as follows:
formSymbol, fieldSymbol: User-defined symbols for forms and fields.
formHandle, fieldHandle: System-created pointer address

(hexadecimal value).
Point Argument: The currently supported argument is [list X Y] or

(X,Y).
In the argument [list X Y], spaces are used to differentiate two
coordinates, for example, [list $x1+$x2 $y1+$y2] is legal.
However, [list $x1 +$x2 $y1 +$y2] is illegal since in Tcl, it expands
[list $x1+$x2 $y1+$y2] as {20 30}, supposed that x1=5, y1=10,
x2=15, y2=20; and [list $x1 +$x2 $y1 +$y2] is expanded to {5 +15
15 +20}, it is ambiguous to explain +15 that stands for add or sign.
In addition, it is ambiguous that how we group the expression ? 5, +15 15
+20 or 5 +15 15 , +20.
In the argument (X,Y), spaces are not allowed between two coordinates,
for example, ($x1+$x2,$y1+$y2) is legal, but ($x1 +$x2,$y1 +$y2)
is illegal.
Note: Do not leave spaces for unnecessary places.
When all fields are created and displayed under a form, GUI extensions create
a specific set of variables, which can be used directly to control the form.
After all fields are instantiated in a form, for example, you can type the
command set myform(stringfield:value) under the command window
to get the value, or you can type set myform(stringfield:value) =
{Hello Laker!} to set the field value.
The following paragraphs explain the definition of those variables.
The table below lists six reserved attributes in the Form and Field structures,
respectively.
Form Reserved Attributes
Field Reserved Attributes
GtFormSym
Value
FieldList
DefValue
_formType
90

K-2015.06

Form and Field
Form Reserved Attributes
Field Reserved Attributes
DoneAction
FieldType
dialogStyle
Choices
Font
The Form data structure is illustrated in the following table:

Array Name
Key
MyForm
gtFormSym
Attribute Value
fieldList
_formType
doneAction
dialogStyle
Font
MyField1
value
lastValue
fieldType
choices
MyField2
...
MyField3
...
MyField4
value
defValue
fieldType
choices
...

K-2015.06
...
91

Form and Field
In the C-based argument, formSymbol>fieldSymbol>value is used to

retrieve the attribute value in a form while in Tcl
formSymbol(fieldSymbol:value) is used.
The difference is shown in the following table.
Argument
Description
formSymbol>gtFormSym (read only)

formSymbol >fieldList (read only)
formSymbol>_formType (read only)
formSymbol>doneAction (read only)
formSymbol>font (read only)
formSymbol>dialogStyle (read only)
formSymbol(gtFormSym)
formSymbol(fieldList)
formSymbol(_formType)
formSymbol(doneAction)
formSymbol(font)
formSymbol(dialogStyle)
formSymbol>fieldSymbol>value
formSymbol>fieldSymbol>defValue
formSymbol>fieldSymbol>fieldType
formSymbol>fieldSymbol>choices
formSymbol(fieldSymbol:value)
formSymbol(fieldSymbol:defValue)
formSymbol(fieldSymbol:fieldType)
formSymbol(fieldSymbol:choices)
A Tcl array is indeed a hash table; its argument is summarized in the following
table.
Each entry in the hash table is indexed by a key.
ArrayName(IndexKey): No space is allowed between ( and ) - left and

right parentheses.
If the user types ArrayName(Index1)(Index2) in Tcl, it does not mean 2D

array key index instead, it means ArrayName(Index1)(Index2). Thus,
typing formSymbol(fieldSymbol:value) means
formSymbol>fieldSymbol>value.
92
Array Name
Key
Attribute Value
MyForm
hiFormSym
MyForm
MyForm
fieldList
MyField1 MyField2 ...
MyForm
_formType
nonoption
MyForm
DoneAction
Callback Commands
MyForm
DialogStyle
Modeless, Modal,...

K-2015.06

Form and Field
Array Name
Key
Attribute Value
MyForm
Font
MyForm
MyField1:value
...
MyForm
MyField1:defValue
...
MyForm
MyField1:FieldType
...
MyForm
MyField1:choices
...
MyForm
MyField2:value
...
MyForm
MyField2:defValue
...
MyForm
MyField2:FieldType
...
MyForm
MyField2:choices
...
...
...
...
The Form and Field commands are described as follows.
gtCreateAppForm
gtCreateBooleanButton
gtCreateButton
gtCreateButtonBoxField
gtCreateCyclicField
gtCreateFileOpenField
gtCreateFloatField
gtCreateForm
gtCreateIntField
gtCreateLabel
gtCreateListBoxField
gtCreateListField
gtCreatePointField
gtCreatePointListField

K-2015.06
93

Form and Field
gtCreateRadioField
gtCreateSeparatorField
gtCreateStringField
gtCreateToggleField
gtDeleteForm
gtDisableField
gtDisplay
gtEnableField
gtFormApply
gtFormCancel
gtFormDone
gtCreateAppForm
The gtCreateAppForm command returns an object handle if the form can be
created.
Syntax
gtCreateAppForm -name formSymbol -fields [list $field1
$field2 ...] [-title Form Title] [-dialogStyle
(Modeless | modal | systemModal)] [-initialSize {width
height}] [-buttonLayout ButtonType] [-callback
{command1} {command2} ...]
Returns
Arguments
94
Argument
Description
-buttonLayout
ButtonType
Specify the type of buttons in a dialog.

Valid values: OKCancel, OKCancelDef, OKCancelApply,
ApplyCancel, ApplyCancelDef, and OKCancelDefApply
(default=OKCancelDefApply).

K-2015.06

Form and Field
Argument
Description
-callback
{commands 1}
{commands2} ...
Specify the Tcl Callback command list to be executed

when the OK or Apply button is clicked.
-dialogStyle
(Modeless | modal |
systemModal)
Specify the dialog style.

Valid values: modeless, modal, and systemModal
(default=modeless).
-fields
[list $field1 $field2 ...]
Specify the list of field handles returned from

gtCreateXXXFields. To specify more than one field,
use [list $field1 $field2 ...] to enclose the fields.
-formType
Specify the form type.

Valid values: Options and NonOptions
(default=NonOptions).
-initialSize
{width height}
Specify an initial form size by giving a value for width and

height.
-name formSymbol
Specify the form symbol (for example: demo).
-title "Form Title"
Specify the form title (for example: "This is a form").
Examples
set form1 [gtCreateAppForm -name demo -title This is a form \
-fields [list $btn2 $btn1 $cyc2 $int1 $bol1 $list1 $bbox1 $rad1] \
-callback {puts you press OK or apply} -initialSize {800 600}]
gtCreateBooleanButton
The gtCreateBooleanButton command returns an object handle if the
state of the Boolean button, 1 (pressed) or 0 (unpressed), can be defined.
Syntax
gtCreateBooleanButton -name fieldSymbol -buttonText
Boolean Text [-value 0|1] [-defValue 0|1] [-callback
{command1} {command2} ...]
Returns

K-2015.06
95

Form and Field
Arguments
Argument
Description
-buttonText
Boolean Text
Specify the string shown beside the Boolean button.
-callback {command1}
{command2} ...
Specify the Tcl callback command list to be executed.
-defValue 0|1
Specify the default value.

-name fieldSymbol
Specify the field symbol.
-value 0|1
Examples
set bol1 [gtCreateBooleanButton -name bool1 -prompt Boolean \
-value 1 -defValue 0]
# Output Result, see figure below
gtCreateButton
The gtCreateButton command returns an object handle if the push button
can be created.
Syntax
gtCreateButton -name fieldSymbol -buttonText ButtonText
[-callback {command1} {command2} ...]
Returns
96

K-2015.06

Form and Field
Arguments
Argument
Description
-buttonText
ButtonText
Specify the string shown on the button.
-callback
{command1}
{command2} ...
-name fieldSymbol
Examples
set btnA [gtCreateButton -name buttonA \
-buttonText buttonA -callback {myformB}]
# Output Result, see figure below
gtCreateButtonBoxField
The gtCreateButtonBoxField command returns an object handle if the
group of buttons in a field can be created.
Syntax
gtCreateButtonBoxField -name fieldSymbol -choices {choice1
choice2 ... choicen} [-callback {command1} {command2} ...
{commandn}]
Returns

K-2015.06
97

Form and Field
Arguments
Argument
Description
{command2} ...
{commandn}

The number of callback commands must be the same
with the one in the choice list.
-choices
{choice1 choice2 ...
choicen}
Specify a list of button choices.
-name fieldSymbol
Examples
set bbox1 [gtCreateButtonBoxField -name car \
-choices BMW BENZ Toyota Honda \
VolksWagon Land Rover
-callback {sum 1 1} {puts BENZ} {pubs Toyota} \
{puts Honda} {puts VolksWagon} {puts Land Rover} \
-prompt choose CAR: ]
# The output result is shown in the following figure:
gtCreateCyclicField
The gtCreateCyclicField command returns an object handle if the cyclic
field for option-select can be created.
Syntax
gtCreateCyclicField -name fieldSymbol -choices {choice1
choice2 ... choicen} [-value the value in choice list]
[-defValue the default value chosen from the choices]
[-callback {command1} {command2} ... {commandn}] [-prompt
Prompt Text]
Returns
98

K-2015.06

Form and Field
Arguments
Argument
Description
{command2} ... {commandn}
Specify the Tcl callback commands to be executed

when the user changes the field items.
-choices {choice1 choice2

... choicen}
Specify a string list of choices (for example: puma

or leopard).
-defValue the default value

chosen from the choices
Specify the default value, which must be one of the

choices.
-name fieldSymbol
-prompt Prompt Text
Specify the prompt text.
-value the value in choice list
Specify the first appeared value when creating the

form, which must be one of the choices.
Examples
set cyc2 [gtCreateCyclicField -name animal \
-prompt choose Animal: \
-value dog -defValue cat \
-choices [list elephant mouse cat dog \
whale dophine tiger snake shark] \
-callback {cmd1} {cmd2} {cmd3} {cmd4}]

K-2015.06
99

Form and Field
gtCreateFileOpenField
The gtCreateFileOpenField command creates a field which can browse
files.
Syntax
gtCreateFileOpenField -name fieldSymbol [-prompt prompt
text] [-initPath initial dir, if working dir not
specified] [-filter for example, *.tcl] [-callback
Tcl to be executed]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-callback Tcl to be executed
Specify the Tcl command to be executed when the

file name is specified and the Return key is pressed.
-filter for example, *.tcl
Specify the file filter, for example: *.cpp or *.tcl.
-initPath initial dir, if

working dir not specified
Specify the user-specified path to find files.
-name fieldSymbol
-prompt prompt text
Examples
# Example 1
set file1 [gtCreateFileOpenField -name filefield \
-prompt Filename:-initPath tcl/ -filter *.tcl \
-callback {puts filefield(value): $filefield(value)} \
{source $filefield(value)}]
100

K-2015.06

Form and Field
# Example 2
set rad1 [gtCreateFileOpenField -name radiofield \
-prompt "radio field:" \
-initPath "./" -filter "*.cpp *.h" \
-callback {puts hello1} {puts hello2}]
set formradio [gtCreateAppForm -name radioform -title "radio" \
-buttonLayout OKCancelDefApply -fields $rad1 \
-callback {puts "you press OK or apply"}]
gtDisplay -name radioform
gtCreateFloatField
The gtCreateFloatField command returns an object handle if the field for
user-input floating numbers can be created. The range of the input limitation
can also be specified.
Syntax
gtCreateFloatField -name fieldSymbol [-value {integer} ] [defValue {integer}] [-range {min max}] [-prompt Prompt
Text] [-editable 0|1] [-callback {command1} {command2}]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
{command2}
Specify the Tcl callback commands list to be executed.
-defValue {integer}

Valid value: an integer.
-editable 0|1
Specify whether the field is editable.

-name fieldSymbol
-prompt Prompt Text
-range {min max}
Specify the range for the input value. When {min max} is
specified, it checks whether the input value is valid.
-value {integer}
Specify the first appeared value when creating the form.

K-2015.06
101

Form and Field
Examples
set float1 [gtCreateFloatField -name floatfield \
-prompt fish weight (1.00 : 3.99): \
-value 1.02 -defValue 2.00 -range {1.00 3.99}]
gtCreateForm
The gtCreateForm command returns an object handle if the form can be
created. This is a simplified command derived from gtCreateAppForm.
Syntax
gtCreateForm -name formSymbol -title formTitle -fields [list
$field1 $field2 ... $fieldn] -callback {callback1}
{callback2} ... {callbackn}
Returns
Arguments
102
Argument
Description
-callback {callback1}
{callback2} ...
{callbackn}
Specify the Tcl callback command list to be executed when

the OK or Apply button is clicked.
-fields
[list $field1 $field2 ...
$fieldn]
Specify the fields which are created from the CreateField

commands.
-name formSymbol
Specify the form symbol.
-title formTitle
Specify the form title.

K-2015.06

Form and Field
Examples
set stringhandle1 [gtCreateStringField -name stringSym \
-value First appear string -defValue this is a default string\
-prompt Input your name: -editable 1 -callback {puts Hello!}]
set formHandle [gtCreateForm -name demo2 \
-fields [list $stringhandle1] \
-callback "You press OK/Apply button!"
gtCreateIntField
The gtCreateIntField command returns an object handle if the field for
user-input integers can be created. The range of the input limitation can also be
specified.
Syntax
gtCreateIntField -name fieldSymbol [-value {integer} ]
[-defValue {integer}] [-range {min max}] [-prompt Prompt
Text] [-editable 0|1] [-callback {command1} {command2}]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
{command2}
-defValue {integer}

-editable 0|1

-name fieldSymbol
-prompt Prompt Text
Specify the text string.
-range {min max}
Specify the range for the input value. When {min max} is
specified, it checks whether the input value is valid. For
example: {-100 100} means the invalid value range is
between -100 and 100.

K-2015.06
103

Form and Field
Argument
Description
-value {integer}
Specify the first appeared value when the form is created.

Examples
set inthandle [gtCreateIntField -name intSym -value 30 \
-defValue 35 -range {1 99} -prompt Your Age: \
-editable 1 -callback {sum 1 3}]
gtCreateLabel
The gtCreateLabel command returns an object handle if the label can be
created.
Syntax
gtCreateLabel -name fieldSymbol -labelText text
-justification Justification
Returns
Arguments
104
Argument
Description
-justification
Justification
Specify the justification of the label.

Valid values: left, center, and right.
-labelText text
-name fieldSymbol

K-2015.06

Form and Field
Examples
set lab1 [gtCreateLabel -name label1 \
-labelText labelfield: this is a label]
gtCreateListBoxField
The gtCreateListBoxField command returns an object handle if the list
box field entry for a form can be created.
Syntax
gtCreateListBoxField -name fieldSymbol [-prompt prompt
text] -choices {choice1 choice2 ... choicen} [-value
{the value in choice list}] [-defValue {the value in
choice list}] [-multipleSelect 0|1] [-numRows numRows ]
[-changeCB {Tcl command when changed}] [-doubleClickCB
{Tcl command as double-click}]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-changeCB
Specify the Tcl command to be executed when the
{Tcl command when changed} selected item changed.
-choices
{choice1 choice2 ... choicen}
Specify the string list choices.
-defValue
{the value in choice list}
Specify the default selected item in the list box.
-doublieClickCB
{Tcl command as doubleclick}
Specify the Tcl command to be executed when

double-click on one item.

K-2015.06
105

Form and Field
Argument
Description
-multipleSelect 0|1

0 : Disallow multiple select items at a time.
1 : Allow multiple select items at a time.
-name fieldSymbol
Specify the field Symbol.
-numRows numRows
Specify the number of rows to be appeared one time.
-prompt prompt text
-value
{the value in choice list}
Specify the first appeared value when the item is

selected in the list box.
Examples
# Example 1
set list1 [gtCreateListBoxField -name listbox \
-prompt ListBox Field -value choice4 \
-defValue choice9 -numRows 5 \
-choices [list choice1 choice2 choice3 choice4 \
choice5 choice6 choice7 choice8 choice9 choice10] \
-changeCB {puts changeCB: $listbox(value)} \
-multipleSelect 0 -doubleClickCB {doubleclick}]
106

K-2015.06

Form and Field
# Example 2
# get the index of the selected item
set list1 [gtCreateListBoxField -name listbox \
-prompt "ListBox Field" -value "choice4" \
-defValue "choice9" -numRows 5 \
-choices [list "choice1" "choice2" "choice3" "choice4" \
"choice5" "choice1" "choice6" "choice7" "choice8" "choice9" \
"choice10"]\
-changeCB {puts "changeCB: $listbox(value)"} \
-doubleClickCB {doubleclick}]
set formlistbox [gtCreateAppForm -name listboxform \
-title "demo ListBox" -buttonLayout "OKCancelDefApply" \
-fields $list1 -callback {puts "you press OK or apply"}]
gtDisplay -name listboxform
# select identical item "choice1" and try:
set stringObj [gtGet -obj $list1 -attr listbox]
set result [gtGet -obj $stringObj -attr index]
puts "the StringField's value is : $result"
# Instead of returning value, this command may return index
# of the selected item in single select mode.
gtCreateListField
The gtCreateListField command returns an object handle if the list field
can be created.
Syntax
gtCreateListField -name fieldSymbol [-value {choice}] [defValue {choice}] [-prompt Prompt Text] [-editable
0|1] [-callback {command1} {command2}]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-callback
{command1} {command2}
-defValue {choice}
Specify the default value list.

K-2015.06
107

Form and Field
Argument
Description
-editable 0|1

-name fieldSymbol
-prompt Prompt Text
-value {choice}
Specify the value list, for example: ab cd 1234

$a.
Examples
set list1 [gtCreateListField -name listfield \
-prompt "list Field" -value [list "a" "b" "c" 123] \
-defValue {"A" "B" "C" 456} -callback {sum 3 9} ]
gtCreatePointField
The gtCreatePointField command returns an object handle if the point
field for a form can be created.
A point field accepts only a point as input, the point can be floating point
numbers or integers.
Mixed types of point values are acceptable, for example: (123,3.345e3).
No spaces are allowed between the point values, for example, (123 ,345) is
illegal.
Syntax
gtCreatePointField -name fieldSymbol [-value {X Y}] [defValue {X Y}] [-prompt Prompt Text] [-callback
{command1} {command2} ... {commandn}] [editable 0|1]
108

K-2015.06

Form and Field
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
{command2} ...
{commandn}
Specify one or more Tcl commands to be executed when

current field value changed.
-defValue {X Y}
Specify the default point value.
-editable 0|1

Valid values: Boolean values, 0 and 1 (default=1).
-name fieldSymbol
-prompt Prompt Text
-value {X Y}
Specify the point value with the following format: (x,y) or {x

y}. No spaces are allowed in (x,y) format, but in {x y}
format, spaces can be used to separate two values.
Examples
set pnt1 [gtCreatePointField -name point1 \
-prompt Point: -value (123,345) -defValue (111,222)]
gtCreatePointListField
The gtCreatePointListField command returns an object handle if the
point list field entry for a form can be created.
A point list field accepts only a point list as input.
A valid point list is represented by one or more points separated by spaces.

K-2015.06
109

Form and Field
Syntax
gtCreatePointListField -name fieldSymbol [-prompt Prompt
Text ] [-value {choice}] [-defValue {choice}][-editable
0|1] [-callback {command1} {command2} ... {commandn}]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
{command2} ...
{commandn}
Specify one or more Tcl commands to be executed when

the current field value changed.
-defValue {choice}
Specify the default point list value.
-editable 0|1

-name fieldSymbol
-prompt Prompt Text
Specify the prompt text, for example: Point List

Field:.
-value {choice}
Specify the point list enclosed by [list (x1,y1)

(x2,y2) (x3,y3) ...].
The point format is similar to gtCreatPointField.
Spaces are used to separate different point pairs.
Examples
set pntlst1 [gtCreatePointListField -name pointlist1 \
-prompt Point List: -value [list (123,345) (3,4) (333,321)] \
-defValue (111,222)]
110

K-2015.06

Form and Field
gtCreateRadioField
The gtCreateRadioField command returns an object handle if the radio
field for a form can be created.
This option is similar to gtCreateToggleField, except that in the radio field,
the user can only select one radio button at a time.
Syntax
gtCreateRadioField -name fieldSymbol -choices {choice1
choice2 ... choicen} [-value {choice}][-defValue
{choice}] [-direction direction] [-callback {command1}
{command2} ... {commandn}] [-prompt Prompt Text] [itemsPerRow {integer}]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
{command2} ...
{commandn}
Specify the Tcl callback commands to be executed.

... choicen}
Specify the list of choices.
-defValue {choice}
Specify the default value that must be one of the values

in the list of choices.
-direction direction
Specify the direction to arrange the radio field.

Valid values: horizontal and vertical (default=horizontal).
-itemsPerRow {integer}
Specify the number of radio buttons per row.
-name fieldSymbol
-prompt Prompt Text
-value {choice}
Specify the valid value that must be one of the values in

the list of choices.

K-2015.06
111

Form and Field
Examples
set rad1 [gtCreateRadioField -name color -prompt Color: \
-choices [list white golden yellow red green] \
-value red -defValue green -callback {sum 9 9}]
gtCreateSeparatorField
The gtCreateSeparatorField command returns an object handle if the
separator field for a form can be created.
Syntax
gtCreateSeparatorField -name fieldSymbol
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-name fieldSymbol
Examples
set sep1 [gtCreateSeparatorField -name aseparator]
gtCreateStringField
The gtCreateStringField command returns an object handle if the field for
user-input string can be created.
112

K-2015.06

Form and Field
Syntax
gtCreateStringField -name fieldSymbol [-value Initial shown
on the form ] [-defValue default value] [-prompt
Prompt Text] [-editable 0|1] [-callback {command1}
{command2} ... {commandn}]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-callback
{command1} {command2} ...
{commandn}
-defValue default value
-editable 0|1

-name fieldSymbol
Specify the field symbol, for example: stringSym.
-prompt Prompt Text
-value
Initial shown on the form
Specify the first appeared value when creating the form.
Examples
-prompt "string field:" -value {SSoft, Inc.} \
-defValue {this is default value} ]
set theForm [gtCreateAppForm -name formName -title "string" \
-buttonLayout "OKCancelDefApply" \
-fields [list $stringhandle1] -callback {puts "Hello!"} ]
gtDisplay -handle $theForm

K-2015.06
113

Form and Field
gtCreateToggleField
The gtCreateToggleField command returns an object handle if the state
of toggle button for a form can be defined. This command returns 1 when
pressed (toggled), and 0 when unpressed (untoggled).
Syntax
gtCreateToggleField -name fieldSymbol [-prompt Prompt
Text] -choices {choice1 choice2 ... choicen} [-value
{choice}] [-defValue {choice}] [-callback {command1}
{command2} ... {commandn}]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
{command2} ...
{commandn}
Specify the Tcl callback commands to be executed.

... choicen}
Specify the toggle list.
-defValue {choice}
Specify the default value, for example: [list 0 0 1

1].
The count of true/false values must be matched with
the count of choices.
114
-name fieldSymbol
-prompt Prompt Text

K-2015.06

Form and Field
Argument
Description
-value {choice}
Specify a list of true/false values, for example: [list

1 1 0 0].
The count of true/false values must be matched with
the count of choices.
Examples
set tgl1 [gtCreateToggleField -name foods -prompt Foods: \
-choices [list fish chicken pork beef] \
-value [list 1 1 0 0] -defValue [list 0 1 0 1] \
-callback {sum 1 1} {sum 2 2}]
gtDeleteForm
The gtDeleteForm command deletes a form and returns the object handle if
the form can be deleted.
Syntax
gtDeleteForm (-name formSymbol | -handle $formhandle)
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-handle $formhandle
Specify the form handle.
-name formSymbol

K-2015.06
115

Form and Field
Examples
# Example 1
set form1 [gtCreateAppForm -name demo ...]
gtDisplay -name demo
# Example 2
gtDeleteForm -handle $form1
gtDisableField
The gtDisableField command disables a field.
Syntax
gtDisableField -form formName -field fieldName
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-field fieldName
Specify the field name.
-form formName
Specify the form which contains the field.
Examples
# disable the "wRouteMode" field of "wRouteNetForm" form
gtDisableField -form wRouteNetForm -field wRouteMode
gtDisplay
The gtDisplay command displays a form, a popup menu or a window.
Syntax
gtDisplay [-block] (-name formSymbol | -handle $formHandle)
Returns
None
116

K-2015.06

Form and Field
Arguments
Argument
Description
-block
Block the execution of gtDisplay. All Tcl commands

executed after gtDisplay is blocked until an action is
taken on the frame which is displayed by gtDisplay.
-handle $formHandle
Specify the system-generated handle.
-name formSymbol
Specify the user-specified symbol name.
Examples
# Example 1
# Example 2
gtDisplay -handle $form1
# Example 3
# Show $your_form without "Hello" printed out.
# The string "Hello" is printed out until an action is taken
# on $your_form, like a button is clicked.
gtDisplay -block -handle $your_form
puts "Hello"
gtEnableField
The gtEnableField command enables a field.
Syntax
gtEnableField -form formName -field fieldName
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-field fieldName
Specify the field name.
-form formName
Specify the form which contains the field.

K-2015.06
117

Form and Field
Examples
# enable the "wRouteMode" field of "wRouteNetForm" form
gtEnableField -form wRouteNetForm -field wRouteMode
gtFormApply
The gtFormApply command executes the operation of clicking the Apply
button in a form. This command can also be executed with user-defined Tcl
commands.
Syntax
gtFormApply (-name formSymbol | -handle $formhandle)
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-handle $formhandle
-name formSymbol
Examples
# Example 1
gtFormApply -name demo
# Example 2
gtFormApply -handle $form1
gtFormCancel
The gtFormCancel command returns an object handle if the operation of
clicking the Cancel button in a form can be executed. This command can also
be executed with user-defined Tcl commands.
Syntax
gtFormCancel (-name formSymbol | -handle $formhandle)
118

K-2015.06

Form and Field
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-handle $formhandle
-name formSymbol
Examples
# Example 1
gtFormCancel -name demo
# Example 2
gtFormCancel -handle $form1
gtFormDone
The gtFormDone command executes the operation of clicking the OK button
in a form. This command can also be executed with user-defined Tcl
commands.
Syntax
gtFormDone (-name formSymbol | -handle $formhandle)
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-handle $formhandle
-name formSymbol

K-2015.06
119

Form and Field
Examples
# Example 1
gtFormDone -name demo
# Example 2
gtFormDone -handle $form1
The following is an example of forms and fields.
Figure 3
Example of Form and Field
The Tcl example is demonstrated as follows:

proc sum {arg1 arg2} {
set result [expr $arg1 + $arg2]
puts $arg1+$arg2 = $result
}
set list1 [gtCreateListField -name listfield \
-prompt list Field -value [list a b c 123] \
-defValue {A B C 456} -callback {sum 3 9} ]
set bbox1 [gtCreateButtonBoxField -name car \
-choices BMW BENZ Toyota Honda VolksWagon Land Rover
-callback {sum 1 1} {puts BENZ} {pubs Toyota} \
120

K-2015.06

{puts Honda} {puts VolksWagon} {puts Land Rover} \

-prompt choose CAR: ]
set cyc2 [gtCreateCyclicField -name animal \
-prompt choose Animal: -value dog -defValue cat \
-choices [list elephant mouse cat dog \
whale dophine tiger snake shark]]
set str1 [gtCreateStringField -name string1 \
-editable 1 -prompt input name: -value SS inc. \
-defValue Made In Taiwan!]
set btn1 [gtCreateButton -name button1 \
-buttonText call Tcl func -callback {myformA}]
set btn2 [gtCreateButton -name button2 \
-buttonText call popup menu \
-callback {gtDisplay -name popupmenu}]
set int1 [gtCreateIntField -name intfield \
-prompt input your age (1-60): \
-range {1 60} -value 25 -defValue 30]
set tgl1 [gtCreateToggleField -name foods -prompt Foods: \
-choices [list fish chicken pork beef] \
set tgl2 [gtCreateToggleField -name flower -prompt Flower : \
-choices [list rose lily lotus carnation] \
set rad1 [gtCreateRadioField -name color -prompt Color: \
-choices [list white golden yellow red green]\
-value red -defValue green -callback {sum 9 9}]
set bol1 [gtCreateBooleanButton -name bool1 -prompt Boolean \
-value 1 -defValue 0]
set lab2 [gtCreateLabel -name label1 \
-labelText label: A demo case]
set form11 [gtCreateAppForm -name demo -title demo \
-fields [list $lab2 $tgl1 $str1 $tgl2 $btn2 $btn1 \
$cyc2 $int1 $bol1 $list1 $bbox1 $rad1] \
-callback {puts you press OK or apply}]

This section describes the pre-processing Tcl callback functions for drag-anddrop actions.
You can source the following Tcl functions in Laker3, and then hold the Shift
key and perform the drag-and-drop action.

K-2015.06
121

proc gtProcessDragData {type args} {

puts "gtProcessDragData: type=$type, value=$args"
switch $type {
COMPOUND_TEXT
{return "123"}
default
{}
}
return
}proc
gtProcessDropData
{type args} {
puts "gtProcessDropData: type=$type, value=$args"
switch $type {
COMPOUND_TEXT
{return "ABC"}
default
{}
}
return
}
proc
gtProcessDropType
{args} {
puts "gtProcessDragType: type=$args"
switch $args {
SPS_SOURCE_NAME
{return "MY_DND_TYPE"}
default
{}
}
return
}
proc
gtProcessDragType
{args} {
switch $args {
MY_DND_TYPE
{return "SPS_SOURCE_NAME"}
default
{}
}
return
}
122

K-2015.06

The function replaces the COMPOUND_TEXT type data for both drag and drop
actions. If the drag-and-drop type name for drag is SPS_SOURCE_NAME then it
is replaced with a user-defined name when dragging from Laker3.
Likewise the user-defined type (assuming it was dragged from another
application) is mapped to SPS_SOURCE_NAME.
The Tcl callback functions are described in the following sections:
gtProcessDragData
gtProcessDragType
gtProcessDropData
gtProcessDropType
gtProcessDragData
The gtProcessDragData command changes the drag data from Laker3 for
compatibility with other applications.
The command interface for gtProcessDragData and gtProcessDropData
is the same. Both take the following two arguments:
A type string. This is the drag-and-drop drag type. Some types are listed as
follows: SPS_SIGNAL, SPS_INST, SPS_INST_PIN, and COMPOUND_TEXT.
Type can be dumped from the callback function to obtain the type names
relevant for a particular drag-and-drop action.
The drag data. This data may be encoded differently for each drag-and-drop
type. To modify drag-and-drop data:
The callback function can use the Tcl return command to pass back
to Laker the modified drag or drop string.
If the return command is called with no arguments or an empty string

then the data for that type is not modified.
Syntax
gtProcessDragData
Returns
None
Arguments
None
K-2015.06
123

Examples
proc gtProcessDragData {type args} {
puts "gtProcessDragData: type=$type, value=$args"
switch $type {
COMPOUND_TEXT
{return "123"}
default
{}
}
return
}
gtProcessDragType
The gtProcessDragType command maps the type name Laker3 uses to a
name that another application uses as a drop target.
The command interface for gtProcessDragType and gtProcessDropType
is the same. Both take the following single argument:
The drag-and-drop type name. To map the drag-and-drop type name:
The callback function can use the Tcl return command to pass back
to Laker the mapped type name. The mapped type name is used in
place of the original name in all further processing.
If the return command is called with no arguments or an empty string

then the type name is not mapped.
Syntax
gtProcessDragType
Returns
None
Arguments
None
124

K-2015.06

Examples
proc gtProcessDropType {args} {
switch $args {
SPS_SOURCE_NAME
{return "MY_DND_TYPE"}
default
{}
}
return
}
gtProcessDropData
The gtProcessDropData command changes the drop data from other
application for compatibility with Laker3.
The command interface for gtProcessDragData and gtProcessDropData
is the same.
Syntax
gtProcessDropData
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
proc gtProcessDropData {type args} {
puts "gtProcessDropData: type=$type, value=$args"
switch $type {
COMPOUND_TEXT
{return "ABC"}
default
{}
}
return
}
gtProcessDropType
The gtProcessDropType command maps the type name another application
uses to a type name that Laker3 uses as a drop target.
K-2015.06
125

Miscellaneous
The command interface for gtProcessDragType and gtProcessDropType

is the same.
Syntax
gtProcessDropType
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
proc gtProcessDragType {args} {
switch $args {
MY_DND_TYPE
{return "SPS_SOURCE_NAME"}
default
{}
}
return
}
Miscellaneous
This section describes the other Tcl commands applied to GUI extensions.
These commands include:
126
gtAddFields
gtCancelNumberKeyPad
gtDeleteFields
gtDeleteField
gtDestroyAllObjs
gtGet
gtGetBBox
gtGetOrigin
gtIsGTObj
gtMaxWnd

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
gtMoveIntoScreen
gtSet
gtSetBBox
gtSetBindKey
gtSetOrigin
gtSetWndBgColor
gtAddFields
The gtAddFields command adds new fields after the form is created.
The origin point and bounding box may be specified if the specified form is in
2D form style.
Syntax
gtAddFields (-name formSymbol | -handle $handle) -fields
[list $field1 $field2 ... $fieldn]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-fields
Specify the fields created with gtCreateXXXField.
-handle $handle
Specify the name or handle of the form.
-name formSymbol
Examples
# Example 1
# 1D form style
gtAddFields -handle demo -fields [list $field1 $field2]
# Example 2
# 2D form style
gtAddFields -handle demo \
-fields [list [list $field1 {0 0} {100 100}] \
[list $fields {101 101} {200 200}]

K-2015.06
127

Miscellaneous
The gtCancelNumberKeyPad command maps keys on the key pad of Linux
X server to the following:
0> <Key>Insert
1> <Key>End
2> <Key>Down
3> <Key>Next
4> <Key>Left
5> <Key>Begin
6> <Key>Right
7> <Key>Home
8> <Key>Up
9> <Key> Prior
Syntax
Returns
None
Examples
gtDeleteFields
The gtDeleteFields command deletes fields from the form.
Syntax
gtDeleteFields -handle $handle \
-fields [list $field1 $field2 ... $fieldn]
Returns
None
128

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Arguments
Argument
Description
-fields
-handle $handle
Examples
gtDeleteFields -handle form -fields [list docfile1 docfile2]
See Also
gtDeleteField
gtDeleteField
The gtDeleteField command deletes one field after the form is created.
Syntax
gtDeleteField -form $form -handle $handle -field $field1
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-field $field1
-form $form
-handle $handle
Specify the name or handle of the field.
Examples
set Fieldid [gtGet -obj $Formid -attr MY_Field]
gtDeleteField -form $Formid -handle $Fieldid -field $MY_Fieldid
See Also
gtDeleteFields
gtAddFields

K-2015.06
129

Miscellaneous
gtDestroyAllObjs
The gtDestroyAllObjs command calls the objects created via GUI
commands, and free the memory. This is useful after creating many forms,
windows, and other GUI extensions.
Syntax
gtDestroyAllObjs
Returns
None
Examples
gtDestroyAllObjs
gtGet
The gtGet command returns the value of form or field if the attribute of a form
or field can be obtained.
Syntax
gtGet -obj $handle -handle $handle -attr attribute
Returns
The value of form or field if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
130
Argument
Description
-attr attribute
Specify the attribute, similar to Form dialogStyle, FieldList,

Fields value, or gtCreateStringField value. The fields of a form
is also an attribute of the form.
-handle $handle
Specify the form or field handle.
-obj $handle

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Examples
# Example 1
# Get the StringField value.
-value "First appear string" -defValue "this is a default string"\
-prompt "Input your name: " -editable 1 -callback {puts "Hello!"}]
set formObj [gtCreateAppForm -name demo2 \
-fields [list $stringhandle1]]
# Example 2
# Get form's attribute
set demo2FieldList [gtGet -obj $formObj -attr FieldList]
set demo2DialogStyle [gtGet -obj $formObj -attr dialogStyle]
# Example 3
# Get form's field's value
set stringObj [gtGet -obj $formObj -attr stringSym]
set result [gtGet -obj $stringObj -attr value]
puts "the StringField's value is : $result"
gtGetBBox
The gtGetBBox command returns a point that contains the bounding box of
the window/form if the size of window/form can be obtained.
Syntax
gtGetBBox (-name formSymbol | -handle $handle)
Returns
Point that contains the bounding box of the window/form (the format is {width
height}) if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-handle $handle
Specify the name or handle of the window/form.
-name formSymbol
Examples
set bbox [gtGetBBox -name demo]
then bbox may look like {100 200}

K-2015.06
131

Miscellaneous
gtGetOrigin
The gtGetOrigin command returns the point of the origin if the origin of the
form can be obtained.
Syntax
gtGetOrigin -name formSymbol -handle $handle -obj $handle
Returns
The point of the origin, where the origin coordinate is at the upper left screen, if
successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-handle $handle
Specify the form handle created from gtCreateAppForm.
-name formSymbol
-obj $handle
Examples
set point [ gtGetOrigin -name demo]
echo $point 100 200
gtIsGTObj
The gtIsGTObj command returns 1 if the object is created from Tcl
commands.
Syntax
gtIsGTObj -obj $handle
Returns
Arguments
132
Argument
Description
-obj $handle

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Examples
set ret [gtIsGTObj -obj $formObj]
puts "ret= $ret"
# ret = 1
gtMaxWnd
The gtMaxWnd command gets the correct window identifier and maximizes the
window to fit the screen.
Syntax
gtMaxWnd [-window windowId | -windowType windowType]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-window
windowId

active window.
-windowType
windowType

SIM_MAINMGR_WIND (Simulation Console), nAnalyzer
(LakerWave window), and SYMFM_TOP_DSGWND (Symbol
Editor).
Examples
gtMaxWnd -windowType lakerMasterWnd

K-2015.06
133

Miscellaneous
gtMoveIntoScreen
The gtMoveIntoScreen command gets the correct window identifier or
resets the position of all windows on the screen.
Syntax
gtMoveIntoScreen [-window windowId | -windowType windowType]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-window
windowId

active window.
-windowType
windowType

(LakerWave window), and SYMFM_TOP_DSGWND (Symbol
Editor).
Examples
gtMoveIntoScreen -windowType lakerMasterWnd
gtSet
The gtSet command sets the attribute of the form or field.
Syntax
gtSet -obj $handle -handle $handle -attr attribute -value
attrValue
Returns
None
134

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Arguments
Argument
Description
-attr attribute
Specify the attribute, similar to Form dialogStyle, FieldList,

Fields value, or gtCreateStringField value. The fields of a form
is also an attribute of the form.
-handle $handle
Same as -obj.
-obj $handle
-value attrValue
Specify the attribute value.
Examples
# Modify StringField value
set formObj [gtCreateAppForm -name demo2 -fields [list
$stringhandle1]]
set stringObj [gtGet -obj $formObj -attr stringSym]
gtSet -obj $stringObj -attr value -value "A new string!"
gtSetBBox
The gtSetBBox command changes the size of the window/form after creation.
Syntax
gtSetBBox (-name formSymbol | -handle $handle) -bBox {width
height}
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-bBox {width height}
Specify the bounding box with the following format: {width

height}
-handle $handle
Specify the name or handle of the window/form.
-name formSymbol

K-2015.06
135

Miscellaneous
Examples
gtSetBBox -name demo -bBox {300 400}
gtSetBindKey
The gtSetBindKey command sets user-defined hotkeys with a specified
definition file and dynamically updates the customized hotkeys onto pull-down
menu.
A bind key definition file may contain the following lines:
Keys myBindKey
{
#bindkey
AppliedArea
Type
Ctrl<Key>b
DRAWINGAREAWND f.tcl
Alt<Key>b
<Key>Z
}
dummy Tcl_Commands
dummy lakerZoomIn
dummy lakerZoomOut
dummy puts {you press Z}
gtSetBindKey does not support the bind key that is set as Shift<Key>*
(where * represents all characters having ASCII code), because this may
cause confusion, such as Shift<Key>a = <Key>A. To avoid this situation,
<Key>* must be used instead of Shift<Key>*; Shift<Key>Tab, however,
is an exception.
To define bindkey in the definition file, use Ctrl/Alt + <Key>a~z or
<Key>A~Z. For example:
<Key>a
<Key>A
Ctrl<Key>a
Alt<Key>a
Ctrl<Key>A
Alt<Key>A
Note:
:
:
:
:
:
:
a
Shift + a
Ctrl + a
Alt + a
Ctrl + Shift + a
Alt + Shift + a
Pressing Shift+A and Shift+a may have the same result

under X-Window in all Unix platforms because the <Caps
Lock> key takes no effect upon such invocation.
To define the AppliedArea:
Use asterisk (*) to apply the user-defined bind key in the active window.
Use DRAWINGAREAWND to apply the bind key in the drawing area only.
For detailed information about key definition, use the hotkey application to test
all bind keys.
136

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Syntax
gtSetBindKey [-window windowId | -windowType windowType] file user_defined_bind_key_file
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file
user_defined_bind_key_file
Specify the definition file for customized bind key.
-window windowId
Specify the destination window. The window identifier

can be obtained by calling lakerGetwtWndId, which
only affects the active window.
-windowType
windowType
Specify the window type. This argument is case

insensitive.
Valid values for Laker: lakerDsgWnd (Design/Layout
window pane) and lakerMasterWnd (Home Page).
Valid values for ADP: LEOMASTERWND (Home
Page), AMSFM_TOP_DSGWND (Schematic Editor),
SIM_MAINMGR_WND (Simulation Console),
nAnalyzer (LakerWave window), and
SYMFM_TOP_DSGWND (Symbol Editor).

K-2015.06
137

Miscellaneous
Examples
gtSetBindKey -windowType lakerDsgWnd -file demo.key
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
contents of demo.key:
Keys myBindKey
{
<Key>e
* f.exec
LEOMasterPreferences
<Key>a
* f.exec
LEODSGAlign
<Key>A
* f.exec
LEODSGSmashOne
<Key>F8
DRAWINGAREAWND
f.exec LEODSGCreateRect
<Key>F9
DRAWINGAREAWND
f.exec LEODSGCreatePoly
<Key>F10
DRAWINGAREAWND
f.exec LEODSGCreatePath
<Key>F11
DRAWINGAREAWND
f.exec LEODSGCreateText
}
These customized hotkeys are dynamically updated onto pull-down
menu in the same Laker session after executing the command.
Pressing <Key>e invokes LEOMasterPreferences.
When <Caps Lock> is off, pressing <Key>a invokes LEODSGAlign.
When <Caps Lock> is on, pressing <Key>a invokes LEODSGAlign.
Pressing <Shift> + <Key>A invokes LEODSGSmashOne.
Pressing F8 invokes the Create Rectangle command.
Pressing F9 invokes the Create Polygon command.
Pressing F10 invokes the Create Path command.
Pressing F11 invokes the Create Text command.
gtSetOrigin
The gtSetOrigin command sets the origin of the form.
Syntax
gtSetOrigin -name formSymbol -handle $handle -obj $handle orig {X Y}
Returns
None
Arguments
138
Argument
Description
-handle $handle
-name formSymbol
-obj $handle
Specify the form handle which is the same as -handle.

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Argument
Description
-orig {X Y}
Specify the X/Y position with {X Y} format. The origin is at the

upperleft screen.
Examples
gtSetOrigin -name demo -orig {100 200}
gtSetWndBgColor
The gtSetWndBgColor command changes the background color of the active
Layout, Schematic Editor, or Symbol Editor windows.
Syntax
gtSetWndBgColor [-window windowId][-color color]
Returns
None

K-2015.06
139

Miscellaneous
Arguments
Argument
Description
-color
color
Specify the background color for windows. The color is changed after
lakerRedraw is executed.
Valid values: black, Gray1, Gray2, Gray3, Gray4, Gray5, Gray6,
white, red1, red2, red3, red4, red5, red6, red7, red8,
orange1, orange2, orange3, orange4, orange5, orange6,
orange7, orange8, yellow1, yellow2, yellow3, yellow4,
yellow5, yellow6, yellow7, yellow8, green1, green2, green3,
green4, green5, green6, green7, green8, cyan1, cyan2, cyan3,
cyan4, cyan5, cyan6, cyan7, cyan8, blue1, blue2, blue3,
blue4, blue5, blue6, blue7, blue8, purple1, purple2,
purple3, purple4, purple5, purple6, purple7, purple8,
lavender, LightYellow2, MistyRose, gray, SlateGray, red,
OrangeRed, tomato, red3, orange, DarkOrange, yellow,
OliveDrab1, DarkOliveGreen2, gold, LightGoldenrod,
YellowGreen, green, MediumSpringGreen, SpringGreen2,
SeaGreen3, LimeGreen, ForestGreen, blue, CornflowerBlue,
MediumSlateBlue, DeepSkyBlue, LightSkyBlue, CadetBlue2,
cyan, PaleTurquoise, DarkTurquoise, MediumAquamarine,
aquamarine, purple, DarkKhaki, sienna, peru, burlywood,
SandyBrown, chocolate, brown, salmon, HotPink, DeepPink,
LightPink, wheat2, magenta, violet, aquamarine1,
chartreuse2, pink2, gray80, SpringGreen, OliveDrab,
DarkSeaGreen, DarkSeaGreen2, SeaGreen, MediumSeaGreen,
LightSeaGreen, PaleGreen, pink, wheat (default=black).
140

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Argument
Description
The color is changed after adpDsgRedraw or symDsgRedraw is

executed.
Valid values: black, Gray1, Gray2, Gray3, Gray4, Gray5, Gray6,
white, red1, red2, red3, red4, red5, red6, red7, red8,
orange1, orange2, orange3, orange4, orange5, orange6,
orange7, orange8, yellow1, yellow2, yellow3, yellow4,
yellow5, yellow6, yellow7, yellow8, green1, green2, green3,
green4, green5, green6, green7, green8, cyan1, cyan2, cyan3,
cyan4, cyan5, cyan6, cyan7, cyan8, blue1, blue2, blue3,
blue4, blue5, blue6, blue7, blue8, purple1, purple2,
purple3, purple4, purple5, purple6, purple7, purple8,
white, lavender, LightYellow2, MistyRose, gray, SlateGray,
red, OrangeRed, tomato, red3, orange, DarkOrange, yellow,
OliveDrab1, DarkOliveGreen2, gold, LightGoldenrod,
YellowGreen, green, MediumSpringGreen, SpringGreen2,
SeaGreen3, LimeGreen, ForestGreen, blue, CornflowerBlue,
MediumSlateBlue, DeepSkyBlue, LightSkyBlue, CadetBlue2,
cyan, PaleTurquoise, DarkTurquoise, MediumAquamarine,
aquamarine, purple, DarkKhaki, sienna, peru, burlywood,
SandyBrown, chocolate, brown, salmon, HotPink, DeepPink,
LightPink, wheat2, magenta, violet, aquamarine1,
chartreuse2, pink2, gray80, SpringGreen, OliveDrab,
DarkSeaGreen, DarkSeaGreen2, SeaGreen, MediumSeaGreen,
LightSeaGreen, PaleGreen, pink, wheat (default=black).
-window
windowId
Specify the destination window.

The window identifier can be obtained by calling lakerGetwtWndId,
which only affects the active window. If it is not specified, the
background color of all Layout windows is changed.
The window identifier can be obtained by calling adpGetwtWndId,
which only affects the active window. If it is not specified, the
background color of all Schematic Editor or Symbol Editor windows is
changed.
Examples
# Example 1
gtSetWndBgColor -color white
# Example 2
gtSetWndBgColor -window [lakerGetwtWndId -type layout] \
-color white
gtSetWndBgColor -window [adpGetwtWndId] -color white
K-2015.06
141

Miscellaneous
142

K-2015.06
4
4
Database Extensions
This chapter introduces the database model and describes the Tcl commands
to access the database. The records in the database can be accessed through
the object identifiers.
The Tcl commands are explained in the following sections. Tcl commands and
arguments are sorted alphabetically.
Database Overview
Library Management
Cell View Management
Tcl PCells
Shape Creation
Shape Conversion
Instances and Arrays
Figure Manipulation
Accessory Objects
Property
Group
Logic Objects
Parameters
General Object Manipulation
Parameterized Test Structure Devices
Schematic Object Manipulation

K-2015.06
143
Chapter 4: Database Extensions

Database Overview
DFM
Technology File
Database Overview
This section briefly introduces the database model and the object access fields.
This section contains the following parts:
Database Model
Object Access Fields
Database Model
The relationship among objects is illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 1
Database Model
In this figure, each rectangle or ellipse has an identifier. For example, a label
has a label identifier; a cell view has a cell view identifier; a net has a net
identifier, and so on.
144

K-2015.06

Database Overview
A dash-arrow line means inherence, for example: a path object is a shape and
a figure, an array is a figure but not a shape.
A solid-single-arrow line means a single derivation and a solid-double-arrow
line represents multiple derivations. For example, port identifiers can be
derived by a cell view identifier; a cell view identifier can be derived by a port
identifiers; a net identifier can be used to derive multiple instance port
identifiers, and so on.
Object Access Fields

The following table shows the defined fields in each object.
Identifier
Access Fields
CellView
Props, Type, Arrays, BBox, CellName, CellViewType,

DBUPerUU, FileName, GroupMembers, Groups, InstCount,
InstHeaders, Insts, IsModified, Lib, LibName, Masters, Mode,
NetCount, Nets, PortCount, Ports, Shapes, UserUnit,
ViewName, LPs
LP
CV, Type, Layer, LayerNum, Purpose, PurposeNum,

ShapeCount, Shapes
Instance
CV, Props, BBox, Net, Parent, IsVisible, Pin, Type, CellName,

InstHeader, InstPins, InstPorts, LibName, Mag, Master, Name,
Num, Orient, Point, ViewName
InstHeader
(Instance Header)
CV, Props, Type, CellName, Insts, LibName, Master, ViewName
Array
CV, Props, BBox, Net, Parent, IsVisible, Pin, Type, CellName,

ColSpace, Cols, LibName, Mag, Master, Name, Orient, Point,
RowSpace, Rows, ViewName
Rectangle
CV, Props, BBox, Net, Parent, IsVisible, Pin, Layer, LayerNum,

Purpose, PurposeNum, Type
Polygon

Purpose, PurposeNum, Type, PointNum, Points
Line

Purpose, PurposeNum, Type, PointNum, Points

K-2015.06
145

Database Overview
Identifier
Access Fields
Path

Purpose, PurposeNum, Type, BeginExt, EndExt, PointNum,
Points, Style, Width
Label

Purpose, PurposeNum, Type, Font, Height, IsDrafted,
IsOverbar, Justify, Orient, Point, Text
Arc

Purpose, PurposeNum, Type, EllipseBBox, StartAngle,
StopAngle
Ellipse

Purpose, PurposeNum, Type
Doughnut

Purpose, PurposeNum, Type, Inner, Outer, Point
Dot

Purpose, PurposeNum, Type, Height, Point, Width
Property
Type, Name, Obj, Value, ValueType
Group
Type, DeleteWhen, GroupType, IsOrdered, IsUniqueName,

Members, Name, Objects
Group Member
Type, Group, Object
Net
CV, Props, Type, InstPins, InstPortCount, InstPorts, Figs, Name,

NumBits, Pins, Port, Priority
Port
CV, Props, Type, Dir, Name, Net, NumBits, PinCount, Pins
Pin
CV, Props, Type, Dir, Fig, Name, Net, Port
Instance Port
CV, Props, Type, Inst, InstPins, Name, Net, Port
Instance Pin
CV, Props, Type, BBox, InstPort, Name, Net, Pin
Before issuing a command to get the identifiers, make sure that the
dbOpenLib command has been issued to open the library with the proper
open mode. The concept is shown as the following diagram.
Open Library > Access Library Information > Close Library
146

K-2015.06

Library Management
For example, the library may be opened before opening a cell view:
dbOpenLib -lib cpu
dbOpenCV -lib cpu -cell cpu -view layout
Library Management
This section describes the Tcl commands that are related to the library
database management. These commands include:
dbCloseLib
dbCreateLib
dbFindOrphanCell
dbGetAllCellRefNumber
dbGetAllLibs
dbGetLayerIdByLayerPurposeName
dbGetLayerIdByLayerPurposeNum
dbGetLayerIdsByLib
dbGetLayerNameByLayerId
dbGetLayerNumByLayerId
dbGetLDMFile
dbGetLibNameByLibId
dbGetLibIdByLibName
dbGetLibPath
dbGetMasterLibName
dbGetTechParam
dbGetPurposeNameByLayerId
dbGetPurposeNumByLayerId
dbGetOpenLib
dbLibExist
dbOpenLib

K-2015.06
147

Library Management
dbSaveLib
dbSaveAllLib
dbCloseLib
The dbCloseLib command returns 1 if the specified library can be closed.
Syntax
dbCloseLib -lib libName
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libName
Specify the logical library name or library identifier.
Examples
set libId1
set libId2
...
dbCloseLib
dbCloseLib
[dbOpenLib -lib cpu]

[dbOpenLib -lib cpu64]
-lib $libId1
-lib cpu64
dbCreateLib
The dbCreateLib command returns a library identifier if a new library can be
created.
Syntax
dbCreateLib -lib libName [-path libPath]
Returns
A library identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
148
Argument
Description
-lib libName
Specify the library name.

K-2015.06

Library Management
Argument
Description
-path libPath
Specify the working directory (default=current directory).
Examples
dbCreateLib -lib RAM
dbCreateLib -lib RAM -path ../
See Also
lakerNewLib
Home Page: Library > New
dbFindOrphanCell
If the orphan cell views are opened, the dbFindOrphanCell command finds
or removes orphan MCell sub-masters. Once the orphan cell views are
opened, they cannot be deleted.
The dbFindOrphanCell command is only valid for the cell views with the
mdevice view name.
When -exec Delete is specified, the log file is generated with the following
format:
Performed by User at Date Time
Delete un-used sub-masters from lib(libName)
cell(cellName) view(viewName)
...
Total ### sub-masters deleted
When -exec Find is specified, the log file is generated with the following
format:
Performed by User at Date Time
Used sub-masters of lib(libName)
...
Total ### sub-masters are used
Un-used sub-msaters of lib(libName)

K-2015.06
149

Library Management
...
Total ### sub-masters are not used in other cells
Syntax
dbFindOrphanCell -lib libName -exec command [-rcmap 0|1]
[-cellType cellType] -log logFile
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cellType cellType
Specify the cell type.

Valid values: mcell and pcell (default=mcell).
-exec command
Specify the command for orphan MCell sub-masters.

Valid values: Delete and Find.
Delete : Delete orphan MCell sub-masters.
Find : Find and list the active and orphan MCell sub-masters
separately.
-lib libName
Specify the library name or a list of libraries. Use brackets when

specifying a list of libraries, for example:
-lib {A B C}.
-log logFile
Specify the file name of the log file.
-rcmap 0|1

1 : Map all libraries from the laker.rc resource file.
0 : Do not map all libraries from the laker.rc resource file.
Examples
# Example 1
dbFindOrphanCell -lib qa -exec Find -cellType pcell -log findlog
# Example 2
dbFindOrphanCell -lib qa -exec Delete -cellType pcell -log dellog
150

K-2015.06

Library Management
dbGetAllCellRefNumber
The dbGetAllCellRefNumber command returns a list of all referenced cell
views in the specified library, and the time they have been referenced by other
cell views.
The dbGetAllCellRefNumber command shows the referenced cell views
only when they have been referenced more than the specified threshold value.
If the threshold value is not specified, the default threshold time -1 is used.
Syntax
dbGetAllCellRefNumber -lib libName [-threshold threshold]
Returns
A list of all referenced cell views in the specified library, and the time they have
been referenced by other cell views if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libName
Specify the library name or library identifier.
-threshold threshold
Define a threshold value.

Valid value: an integer number (default=-1).
Examples
# Example 1
set libId [dbOpenLib -lib mLibtar]
set cvId [dbOpenCV -lib mLibtar -cell c1 -mode edit]
dbGetAllCellRefNumber -lib $libId
dbGetAllCellRefNumber -lib mLibtar
dbSaveCV -cv $cvId
dbCloseCV -cv $cvId
dbSaveLib -lib $libId
dbCloseLib -lib mLibtar

K-2015.06
151

Library Management
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
The results are:

{c1 layout 0} {tt layout 0} {MCELL_XTR_4209531 mdevice 0}
{t1 layout 0} {MCELL_XTR_4209004 mdevice 0}
{MCELL_PCO_339137 mdevice 0} {MCELL_PCO_639488 mdevice 0}
{MCELL_XTR_1151794 mdevice 0} {rr layout 0}
{MCELL_XTR_4210058 mdevice 0} {r1 layout 0}
{MCELL_XTR_1150740 mdevice 0}
# Example 2
# In library TEST, there are 4 cells test1, test2, test3, test4.
# test1 is the top cell, test2 and test4 are referenced by other
cells
# once, and test3 is referenced by other cells twice.
# Execute the Tcl if the threshold value is not specified.
dbGetAllCellRefNumber -lib TEST
# The results are: {test1 layout 0} {test2 layout 1}
# {test3 layout 2} {test4 layout 1}
# Execute the Tcl if the threshold value is 1.
dbGetAllCellRefNumber -lib TEST -threshold 1
# The results are:
# {test2 layout 1} {test3 layout 2} {test4 layout 1}
dbGetAllLibs
The dbGetAllLibs command returns a list of library identifiers if all logical
library names that are defined in the laker.rc file can be obtained and they exist
within the disk.
Syntax
dbGetAllLibs
Returns
A list of library identifiers if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
None
Examples
set libList [dbGetAllLibs]
foreach x $libList {
puts [dbGetAllCells -lib $x]
}
152

K-2015.06

Library Management
The dbGetLayerIdByLayerPurposeName command returns a layer
identifier if the layer identifier can be obtained by giving the library ID, layer
number and purpose number.
Syntax
dbGetLayerIdByLayerPurposeName -lib libId -layer layerNum
-purpose purposeNum
Returns
A layer identifier if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libId
Specify the library identifier.
-layer layerNum
Specify the layer number.
-purpose purposeNum
Specify the purpose number.
Examples
# Get the layer identifier of the layer whose layer name is MT1 and
# whose purpose name is drawing in the library Test.
set libId [dbOpenLib -lib Test -mode readOnly]
set layerId [dbGetLayerIdByLayerPurposeName \
-lib $libId -layer MT1 -purpose drawing]
See Also
The dbGetLayerIdByLayerPurposeNum command returns a layer identifier
if the layer identifier can be obtained by giving the library ID, layer number and
purpose number.
Syntax
dbGetLayerIdByLayerPurposeNum -lib libId -layer layerNum
-purpose purposeNum
K-2015.06
153

Library Management
Returns
A layer identifier if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libId
-layer layerNum
Specify the layer number (0-255).
-purpose purposeNum
Specify the purpose number (0-255).
Examples
dbGetLayerIdByLayerPurposeNum -lib $libId -layer 255 -purpose 255
See Also
dbGetLayerIdsByLib
The dbGetLayerIdsByLib command returns a list of layer identifiers if the
layer identifiers can be obtained by giving a library name.
Syntax
dbGetLayerIdsByLib -lib libName
Returns
A list of layer identifiers if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libName
Specify the logical library name or library identfier.
Examples
set layerIdList [dbGetLayerIdsByLib -lib cpu]
dbGetLayerNameByLayerId
The dbGetLayerNameByLayerId command returns a layer name if the layer
name can be obtained by giving a layer identifier.
154

K-2015.06

Library Management
Syntax
dbGetLayerNameByLayerId -layer $layerId
Returns
A layer name if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-layer $layerId
Specify the layer identifier.
Examples
foreach layerId $layerIdList {
set layerName [dbGetLayerNameByLayerId -layer $layerId]
puts "$layerName"
}
dbGetLayerNumByLayerId
The dbGetLayerNumByLayerId command returns a layer number if the layer
number can be obtained by giving a layer identifier.
Syntax
dbGetLayerNumByLayerId -layer $layerId
Returns
A layer number if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-layer $layerId
Examples
dbOpenLib -lib cpu
set layerIds [dbGetLayerIdsByLib -lib cpu]
foreach x $layerIds {
puts [dbGetLayerNumByLayerId -layer $x]
}

K-2015.06
155

Library Management
dbGetLDMFile
The dbGetLDMFile command returns the full file path of the library definition
mapping file (*.defs) if it can be obtained by giving a library name or identifier.
The library definition mapping file includes the given library name.
Syntax
dbGetLDMFile -lib libName
Returns
The full file path of the library definition mapping file (*.defs) if successful;
otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libName
Specify the library name or identifier.
Examples
# local lib.defs
INCLUDE /home/tools/project2/lib.defs
DEFINE analogLib /home/tools/xxx/analogLib
....
# /home/tools/project2/lib.defs
DEFINE tech2Lib /home/iWork/tech2Lib
puts "[dbGetLDMFile -lib tech2Lib]"
# Returned value: /home/tools/project2/lib.defs
puts "[dbGetLDMFile -lib analogLib]"
# Returned value: /home/test/lib.defs
dbGetLibNameByLibId
The dbGetLibNameByLibId command returns a logical library name if the
logical library name can be obtained by giving a library identifier.
Syntax
dbGetLibNameByLibId -lib libId
Returns
A logical library name if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
156

K-2015.06

Library Management
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libId
Examples
dbGetLibNameByLibId -lib [dbOpenLib -lib cpu]
dbGetLibIdByLibName
The dbGetLibIdByLibName command returns a library identifier if the library
identifier can be obtained by giving a library name.
Syntax
dbGetLibIdByLibName -lib libName
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libName
Examples
set libId [dbGetLibIdByLibName -lib cpu]
dbGetLibPath
The dbGetLibPath command returns an absolute path if the directory, where
the library is located, can be obtained.
Syntax
dbGetLibPath -lib libName
Returns
An absolute path to indicate where the library is.

K-2015.06
157

Library Management
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libName
Examples
dbGetLibPath -lib cpu
dbGetLibPath -lib [dbOpenLib -lib cpu]
dbGetMasterLibName
The dbGetMasterLibName command gets the master library name by giving
a slave library name. If the slave library has no master, the master library
returns itself.
Syntax
dbGetMasterLibName -lib libName
Returns
A logical library name if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libName
Specify the logical libray name or libray identifier.
Examples
# Example 1
dbGetMaserLibName -lib SLAVE
# Example 2
set slaveId [dbOpenLib -lib SLAVE]
dbGetMaserLibName -lib $slaveId
dbGetTechParam
The dbGetTechParam command retrieves the parameter defined in the
tfTechParameter section of the technology file by giving a library name.
Syntax
dbGetTechParam -lib libName -param paramName
158

K-2015.06

Library Management
Returns
Parameter value that defined in the associated technology file section.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libName
Specify the logical libray name or libray identifier.
-param paramName
Specify the parameter name.
Examples
dbGetTechParam -lib CPU -param minMT1Width
See Also
Layout Window: Create > Device
dbGetPurposeNameByLayerId
The dbGetPurposeNameByLayerId command returns a purpose name if
the purpose name can be obtained by giving a layer identifier.
Syntax
dbGetPurposeNameByLayerId -layer $layerId
Returns
A purpose name if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-layer $layerId
Examples
foreach layerId $layerIdList {
set purposeName [dbGetPurposeNameByLayerId -layer $layerId]
puts $purposeName
}

K-2015.06
159

Library Management
dbGetPurposeNumByLayerId
The dbGetPurposeNumByLayerId command returns a purpose number if
the purpose number can be obtained by giving a layer identifier.
Syntax
dbGetPurposeNumByLayerId -layer $layerId
Returns
A purpose number (0-255) if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-layer $layerId
Examples
set layers [dbGetLayerIdsByLib -lib [dbOpenLib -lib cpu]]
foreach x $layers {
puts [dbGetPurposeNumByLayerId -layer $x]
}
dbGetOpenLib
The dbGetOpenLib command returns a list of all opened library identifiers if
these library identifiers can be obtained.
Syntax
dbGetOpenLib
Returns
A list of all opened library identifiers if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
None
Examples
dbGetOpenLib
dbLibExist
The dbLibExist command returns 1 if the specified library exists.
160

K-2015.06

Library Management
Syntax
dbLibExist -lib libName
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libName
Specify the logical library name or library identfier.
Examples
dbLibExist -lib cpu
dbOpenLib
The dbOpenLib command returns a library identifier if the specified library can
be opened.
Syntax
dbOpenLib -lib libName [-mode openMode]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libName
-mode openMode
Specify the open mode of a library.

Valid values: edit and readOnly (default=edit).
Examples
dbOpenLib -lib cpu
dbOpenLib -lib cpu -mode edit
dbOpenLib -lib cpu -mode readOnly
dbSaveLib
The dbSaveLib command returns 1 if the specified library can be saved.

K-2015.06
161

Library Management
Syntax
dbSaveLib -lib libName
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libName
Examples
set libId [dbOpenLib -lib cpu]
set cvId [dbOpenCV -lib $libId -cell test -view test -mode edit]
dbSet -obj $cvId -attr CellViewType -value maskLayout
dbSaveCV -cv $cvId
dbCloseCV -cv $cvId
dbCloseLib -lib cpu
dbSaveAllLib
The dbSaveAllLib command returns 1 if all logical libraries can be saved.
Syntax
dbSaveAllLib
Returns
Arguments
None
162

K-2015.06

Examples
dbCreateLib -lib AA
dbCreateLib -lib BB
set libId [dbOpenLib -lib AA]
set masterId [dbOpenLib -lib BB]
set cvId [dbOpenCV -lib $libId -cell Top -view layout -mode create]
set cvId2 [dbOpenCV -lib $masterId -cell cell -view layout -mode
create]
dbCreateRect -cv $cvId -layer 8 -purpose 252 -bbox
(-100,-100)(100,100)
dbCreatePolygon -cv $cvId2 -layer 8 -point
(-500,-500)(-300,-500)\
(-100,-300)(-300,-100)(-500,-100) -purpose 252
dbSaveCV -cv $cvId
dbSaveCV -cv $cvId2
dbCloseCV -cv $cvId
dbCloseCV -cv $cvId2
dbSaveAllLib
dbCloseLib -lib $libId
dbCloseLib -lib $masterId

This section describes the Tcl commands that are related to the cell view
management. These commands include:
dbChangeCVMode
dbCheckBBox
dbCheckCV
dbCheckRecursion
dbCloseCV
dbCopyCV
dbCVExist
dbDelCV
dbDumpTCL
dbFindCV
dbGetAllCells

K-2015.06
163

dbGetAllViews
dbGetCbInstId
dbGetCVFullPath
dbGetDummyMOS
dbGetInstByLogicName
dbGetInstSwitchMaster
dbGetOpenCV
dbGetOpenCVNum
dbOpenCV
dbOpenHier
dbOpenRecoveryCV
dbPurgeCV
dbRegisterCVPurge
dbSaveCV
dbUnregisterCVPurge
dbChangeCVMode
The dbChangeCVMode command returns 1 if the opening mode of the
specified cell view can be changed.
Syntax
dbChangeCVMode -cv cellviewId -mode openMode
Returns
Arguments
164
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
Specify the cell view identifier.
-mode openMode
Specify the opening mode of a cell view.


K-2015.06

Examples
set cvId [dbOpenCV -lib cpu -cell an2d1 -mode readOnly]
dbChangeCVMode -cv $cvId -mode edit
See Also
lakerChgmodeDesign
Layout Window: Cell > Change To Edit/ReadOnly Mode
dbCheckBBox
The dbCheckBBox command returns 1 if the bounding box of the library (or
cell view) has been modified.
Syntax
dbCheckBBox -lib libName [-cell cellName]
Returns
1 if the bounding box of the library (or cell view) has been modified; otherwise,
returns 0 if the bounding of the library (or cell view) are correct. If the specified
library or cell view is incorrect, warning messages are shown in the message
pane.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
Specify the cell name. This is an optional argument. If the cell

name is not specified, all cells in the specified library are
checked.
-lib libName
Specify the library that is located in the working directory, or

specify a library with its full path.
Examples
# Example 1
# Check and fix the bounding box of all cells in the Local library
dbCheckBBox -lib Local
# Example 2
# Check and fix the bounding of the new1 cell in the Local library
dbCheckBBox -lib Local2 -cell new1
See Also
Utility: dbCheckBBox

K-2015.06
165

dbCheckCV
The dbCheckCV command returns 1 if a legal cell view Id can be obtained;
otherwise returns 0 if the cell view Id is illegal.
Syntax
dbCheckCV [-cv cellviewId]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
Examples
dbCreateLib -lib BB
set libId [dbOpenLib -lib BB]
set cvId [dbOpenCV -lib $libId -cell Top -view layout -mode create]
set cvId2 [dbOpenCV -lib $libId -cell Top2 -view layout -mode
create]
...
dbCheckCV
dbCheckCV
-cv $cvId
dbCheckCV
-cv $cvId2
...
dbSaveCV -cv $cvId
dbSaveCV -cv $cvId2
dbCloseCV -cv $cvId
dbCheckRecursion
The dbCheckRecursion command returns 0 if the hierarchical relation of the
cell view masters is recursive. If the reference count of the specified cell view is
166

K-2015.06

1, the cell view is purged. If the reference count is greater than 1, the reference
count is decreased by 1.
Syntax
dbCheckRecursion -cv cellviewId
Returns
1 if non-recursive; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
Examples
set cvId [dbOpenCV -lib cpu -cell cpu]
dbCheckRecursion -cv $cvId
dbCloseCV
The dbCloseCV command returns 1 if the specified cell view can be closed. If
all the views of the cell are closed, the cell name on the Cell pane of the Open
Cell form is reset to black color.
Syntax
dbCloseCV -cv cellviewId
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
Examples
set cv1 [dbOpenCV -lib cpu -cell cpu]
...
set cv2 [dbOpenCV -lib cpu -cell cpu]
dbCloseCV -cv $cv2
...
dbCloseCV -cv $cv1

K-2015.06
167

See Also
lakerCloseDesign
Layout Window: Cell > Close
adpDsgCloseWnd
Schematic Editor: Cell> Close
dbCopyCV
The dbCopyCV command returns 1 if the specified cell view can be created in
the target library. The -overWrite option forces to overwrite the existing cell
views by the new cell views.
Syntax
dbCopyCV -cell cellName -cv cellviewId -lib libName [-view
viewName] [-overWrite 0|1]
Returns
Arguments
168
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
Specify the cell name of the specified cell view.
-cv cellviewId
-lib libName
-overWrite 0|1
Specify the switch mode.

-view viewName
Specify the view type of the target cell view.

Valid values: layout, abs, and schematic
(default=layout).

K-2015.06

Examples
# Copy and overwrite the layout view of the cell an2d1 from
# library cpu to library temp1.
set cv [dbOpenCV -lib cpu -cell an2d1 -mode create]
set newLib [dbCreateLib -lib temp1]
dbCopyCV -cell an2d1 -cv $cv -lib $newLib -overWrite 1
# Output Result
1
See Also
lakerCopyCell
Home Page: Cell > Copy
dbCVExist
The dbCVExist command returns 1 if the specified cell view exists within the
library.
Syntax
dbCVExist -lib libName -cell cellName [-view viewName]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
-lib libName
-view viewName

(default=layout).
Examples
if {[dbCVExist -lib cpu -cell cpu]} {
} else {
set cvId [dbOpenCV -lib cpu -cell cpu -mode create]
}

K-2015.06
169

See Also
lakerOpenDesign
lakerNewCell
Layout Window: Cell > Open
adpLibMgrOpenDesign
Schematic Editor: Cell> Open
dbDelCV
The dbDelCV command returns 1 if the specific cell view can be removed from
the specified library.
Syntax
dbDelCV -lib libName -cell cellName [-view viewName]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
-lib libName
-view viewName

(default=layout).
Examples
dbDelCV -lib cpu -cell cpu -view layout
dbDelCV -lib cpu -cell cpu32
See Also
lakerDelCell
Home Page: Cell > Delete
170

K-2015.06

dbDumpTCL
The dbDumpTCL command returns 1 if the specified cell view content can be
dumped, hierarchically or non-hierarchically, to a Tcl script file that can
reconstruct this cell view.
If -mode append is specified, the cell view content is appended to the
specified file. If -mode write is specified and the specified file exists, the
existing file is updated by the cell view content.
If -hier 0 is specified, only the specified cell view is dumped. If -hier 1 is
specified, the cell view is dumped hierarchically.
Syntax
dbDumpTCL -cv cellviewId -file fileName [-mode fileOpenMode]
[-hier 0|1]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
-file fileName
Specify the output file.
-hier 0|1
Specify the switch mode.

-mode fileOpenMode
Specify the opening mode of the file.

Valid values: write and append (default=write).
Examples
set cvId1
set cvId2
dbDumpTCL
dbDumpTCL
dbDumpTCL
[dbOpenCV -lib cpu -cell cpu -mode readOnly]

[dbOpenCV -lib cpu -cell an2d1 -mode readOnly]
-cv $cvId1 -file outfile1
-cv $cvId1 -file outfile2 -hier 1
-cv $cvId2 -file outfile1 -mode append

K-2015.06
171

dbFindCV
The dbFindCV command returns a cell view identifier if an opened cell view
can be found.
Syntax
dbFindCV -lib libName -cell cellName [-view viewName]
Returns
A cell view identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
Specify the cell name.
-lib libName
-view viewName
Specify the view name.

Valid values: layout, abs, schematic, and device
(default=layout).
Examples
dbOpenCV -lib cpu -cell an2d1
...
set cvId [dbFindCV -lib cpu -cell an2d1]
See Also
Layout Window: Query > Find
Schematic Editor: Query > Find
dbGetAllCells
The dbGetAllCells command returns a list of cell names if all cell names in
the specified library can be obtained.
This command returns all cell names, which include cell names from Tcl PCells
or the cells created by Import LEF, Import Stream, New Cell, Rename Cell or
Save As commands.
172

K-2015.06

Syntax
dbGetAllCells -lib libName|libId [-psubmaster 1] [-view
viewname]
Returns
A list of cell names of the specified library if successful; otherwise, returns
nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libName|libId
-psubmaster 1
Valid value: Boolean value, 1.

1 : Get the sub-master of Tcl PCells.
-view viewname

Valid values: layout, symbolic, pcc, spc, abs,
mdevice_superMaster, mdevice, logic, netlist,
graphic, schematic, and symbol.layout: Layout
view.symbolic: The super-master or sub-master of Tcl
PCells.pcc: The super-master of UDDs.spc: The submaster of UDDs.abs: Abstract
view.mdevice_superMaster: The MCell super-master
for MCell version control.mdevice: The sub-master of
MCells.logic: Logic view.netlist: Netlist
view.graphic: Graphic view.schematic: Schematic
view.symbol: Symbol view.
Examples
# Example 1
set libId1 [dbCreateLib -lib newLib1]
set libId2 [dbCreateLib -lib newLib2]
dbOpenCV -lib $libId1 -cell c1 -mode create
...
dbGetAllCells -lib $libId1
dbGetAllCells -lib newLib2
# Example 2
dbGetAllCells -lib qa -psubmaster 1
See Also
dbGetAllViews
lakerOpenDesign
K-2015.06
173

adpLibMgrOpenDesign
Home Page: File > Open
dbGetAllViews
The dbGetAllViews command returns a list of view names if all view names
of the specified cell and library can be obtained.
Syntax
dbGetAllViews -lib libName|libId -cell cellName
Returns
A list of view names of the specified cell and library if successful; otherwise,
returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
-lib libName|libLib
Examples
dbGetAllViews -lib cpu -cell and2d1
See Also
dbGetAllCells
lakerOpenDesign
adpLibMgrOpenDesign
dbGetCbInstId
The dbGetCbInstId command returns the current instance identifier after the
parameter change callbacks or attribute evaluations. This command can only
be called from within the parameter attribute scripts.
174

K-2015.06

Syntax
dbGetCbInstId
Returns
The instance identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
None
Examples
proc getCurrentRef { } {
puts [dbGetCbInstId]
return [dbGetCbInstId]
}
dbGetCVFullPath
The dbGetCVFullPath command returns the full path of the specified cell
view if the full path of a cell view can be obtained. Each cell view is a file under
the directory <libName>.lib++/<cellName>.
Syntax
dbGetCVFullPath -cv cellviewId
Returns
The full path of the specified cell view if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
Examples
dbGetCVFullPath -cv [dbOpenCV -lib cpu -cell an2d1]
dbGetDummyMOS
The dbGetDummyMOS command returns a string which contains all information
of dummy gates if such information can be obtained in the specified cell view.
Syntax
dbGetDummyMOS -cv cellviewId

K-2015.06
175

Returns
A string contains all information of dummy gates if successful; otherwise,
returns an empty string.
The syntax of the returned value is explained as follows:
{{GateName Net_Drain Net_Gate Net_Source Net_Bulk
ModelName Width Length AD AS PD PS} ... }
where:
GateName refers to the gate name of dummy gates.
Net_Drain, Net_Gate, Net_Source, and Net_Bulk refer to the net names
that connect to drains, gates, sources, and bulk nets.
ModelName refers to the MCell super-master name.
Width and Length refer to the gate width and length of dummy gates.
AD AS PD and PS refer to the area and perimeter for drains and sources.
If the net/gate name is nil, the empty net/gate name is filled by {}.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
Examples
set cvId [dbOpenCV -lib cpu -cell an2d1 -mode readOnly]
set dummyInfo [dbGetDummyMOS -cv $cvId]
dbGetInstByLogicName
The dbGetInstByLogicName command returns a list of instance identifiers
associated with the specified logic instance if the corresponding layout
instances can be obtained by instance name in the logic cell view.
Syntax
dbGetInstByLogicName -cv cellviewId -logicName
logicInstName
Returns
A list of instance identifiers associated with the specified logic instance if
176

K-2015.06

For MCell instances, each element in the returned list is for each gate of the
instances, so the list includes pairs of the instance identifier and the gate glue
number.
For other types of instances, each element in the returned list is for each
instance identifier.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
Specify the layout cell view identifier.
-logicName
logicInstName
Specify the logic instance name.
Examples
# Example 1
# Logic instance M1 is realized as some PyCell instances
# Value returned: A list of Ids (for example: oa::001 oa::002)
dbGetInstByLogicName -cv $cvId -logicName M1
# Example 2
# Logic instance M2 is realized as some gates in some MCell
instances
# Value returned: A list of pairs of Ids and gate glue number
# (for example: {oa:003 2} {oa:003 3} {oa:004 1} {oa:004 2})
dbGetInstByLogicName -cv $cvId -logicName M2
dbGetInstSwitchMaster
The dbGetInstSwitchMaster command returns an instance identifier if the
instance master can be replaced with the specified cell view.
Syntax
dbGetInstSwitchMaster -inst instId [-view viewName]
Returns
An instance identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-inst instId
Specify the instance identifier.

K-2015.06
177

Argument
Description
-view viewName

(default=layout).
Examples
set tcvId [dbOpenCV -lib cpu -cell cpu -mode edit]
set mcvId [dbOpenCV -lib cpu -cell or_2 -view layout -mode create]
...
set instId [dbCreateInst -cv $tcvId -master $mcvId -point (0, 1.2)]
...
dbGetInstSwitchMaster -inst $instId -view schematic
dbGetOpenCV
The dbGetOpenCV command returns a list of all opened cell view identifiers in
the specified library if these cell view identifiers can be obtained.
Syntax
dbGetOpenCV -lib libName
Returns
A list of all opened cell view identifiers in the specified library if successful;
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libName
Specify the logical library name of library identifier.
Examples
dbGetOpenCV -lib testLib
dbGetOpenCVNum
The dbGetOpenCVNum command returns the number of opened cell views if
these cell views can be counted.
Syntax
dbGetOpenCVNum
178

K-2015.06

Returns
The number of opened cell views if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
None
Examples
dbCreateLib -lib AA
set libId [dbOpenLib -lib AA ]
set cvId [dbOpenCV -lib $libId -cell c1 -view layout -mode create]
set cvId2 [dbOpenCV -lib $libId -cell r1 -view layout -mode create]
set cvId3 [dbOpenCV -lib $libId -cell master -view layout -mode
create]
dbGetOpenCVNum
dbCloseCV -cv $cvId
dbOpenCV
The dbOpenCV command returns a cell view identifier if the specified cell view
can be opened.
Syntax
dbOpenCV -lib libName -cell cellName [-view viewName] [-mode
openMode]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
-lib libName
-mode openMode
Specify the opening mode of the cell view.

Valid values: create, readOnly, and edit
(default=edit).

K-2015.06
179

Argument
Description
-view viewName

(default=layout).
Examples
set libId1 [dbCreateLib -lib temp]
dbOpenCV -lib $libId1 -cell c1 -mode create
dbOpenCV -lib $libId1 -cell c2 -view schematic -mode create
set cpuId [dbOpenCV -lib cpu -cell cpu -mode edit]
See Also
lakerOpenDesign
lakerNewCell
adpLibMgrOpenDesign
dbOpenHier
The dbOpenHier command returns a list of opened cell view identifiers if the
specified cell view masters can be opened hierarchically.
Syntax
dbOpenHier -cv cellviewId [-level openLevel]
Returns
A list of opened cell view identifiers if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
180
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
-level openLevel
Specify the hierarchical view level.

Valid value: a positive integer (default=49).
The range of the maximum hierarchical view level is from 0
to 49. The maximum positive integer value is 49.

K-2015.06

Examples
dbOpenHier -cv [dbOpenCV -lib cpu -cell cpu] -level 10
See Also
dbOpenCV
lakerViewLevel
lakerEditInPlace
Layout Window: View > View Level
Layout Window: EIP > Descend Mode
Layout Window: EIP > Edit In Place
dbOpenRecoveryCV
The dbOpenRecoveryCV command returns a cell view identifier if the
recovery copy of the specified cell view can be opened.
Syntax
dbOpenRecoveryCV -lib libName -cell cellName [-view
viewName] [-mode openMode]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
-lib libName
-mode openMode
Specify the opening mode of the cell view.

Valid values: readOnly and edit (default=edit).
-view viewName

(default=layout).
Examples
dbOpenRecoveryCV -lib cpu -cell cpu -mode readOnly
See Also
lakerOpenDesign

K-2015.06
181


adpLibMgrOpenDesign
dbPurgeCV
The dbPurgeCV command returns 1 if the content of the specified cell view
can be purged from memory. The specified cell view is always purged,
regardless of the reference count.
Syntax
dbPurgeCV -cv cellviewId
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
Examples
dbPurgeCV -cv 2028c0
dbRegisterCVPurge
The dbRegisterCVPurge command returns 1 if an invoking Tcl procedure
can be registered when a cell view is purged.
The Tcl procedure that a user registers for the purging event should always
have one and only one argument. When a purging event occurs on the
specified cell view, the callback is invoked and the cell view identifier is passed
to the callback.
When the specified cell view is purged, the procedure with the higher priority is
executed first. If there are more than two procedures having the same priority,
the latest registered procedure is executed in a higher priority.
Syntax
dbRegisterCVPurge -fun procedure [-priority priorityNo]
182

K-2015.06

Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-fun procedure
Specify the name of the Tcl procedure.
-priority priorityNo
Specify the priority number.

Valid value: a positive integer with 0 being the highest
priority (default=0).
Examples
proc cvPurge1 {cvId} {
puts "cvPurg1 is called"
puts "$cvId is purged from memory"
return 1
}
puts "cvPurge2 is called"
return 0
}
dbRegisterCVPurge -fun cvPurge1 -priority 30
dbRegisterCVPurge -fun cvPurge2
dbSaveCV
The dbSaveCV command returns 1 if the specified cell view can be saved to
the disk.
Syntax
dbSaveCV -cv cellviewId [-dst dstCVId]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
Specify the cell view identifier to be saved.
-dst dstCVId
Specify the identifier of the destination cell view. If this

argument is not specified, the content of cellviewId is
saved to itself.

K-2015.06
183

Examples
set cv1 [dbOpenCV -lib cpu -cell cpu -mode edit]
dbCreateRect -cv $cv1 -layer THIN -bbox (0,0)(5.5,10)
...
dbSaveCV -cv $cv1
dbSaveCV -cv $cv1 -dst [dbOpenCV -lib cpu2 -cell cpu -mode create]
See Also
lakerSaveDesign
lakerSaveAsDesign
Layout Window: Cell > Save
Layout Window: Cell > Save As
adpDsgSave
adpDsgSaveAs
Schematic Editor: Cell> Save
Schematic Editor: Cell> Save As
dbUnregisterCVPurge
The dbUnregisterCVPurge command returns 1 if the Tcl procedure, which
was registered as a purging callback, cannot be invoked when a cell view is
purged.
Syntax
dbUnregisterCVPurge -fun procedure
Returns
Arguments
184
Argument
Description
-fun procedure

K-2015.06

Tcl PCells
Examples
puts "cvPurg1 is called"
puts "$cvId is purged from memory"
return 1
}
puts "cvPurge2 is called"
return 0
}
dbRegisterCVPurge -fun cvPurge1 -priority 30
dbRegisterCVPurge -fun cvPurge2
...
dbUnregisterCVPurge -fun cvPurge1
dbUnregisterCVPurge -fun cvPurge2
Tcl PCells
This section describes the Tcl commands that are related to Tcl PCells. These
commands include:
dbDefineParameterizedCell
dbCreateParameterizedInst
dbSetPCellParam
dbGetInstParam
dbGetPcellDefValue
dbDefineParameterizedCell
The dbDefineParameterizedCell command returns the results to
evalulate the script of Tcl PCells if any symbolic parameterized cells in the
specified library can be defined.
The view name of a parameterized cell is symbolic. For example, assume that
the master is B, if a Tcl PCell is created within another parameterized cell (for
example: A) and the same variable is used in these two scripts of the Tcl
PCells, this variable should be delared as the local variable in both scripts;
otherwise, errors may be occured. It is recommended to declare all variables
that appear in the script of Tcl PCells as the local variables.

K-2015.06
185

Tcl PCells
Syntax
dbDefineParameterizedCell -lib libName -cell cellName params parameters [-vars localVariables] [-refresh 0|1]
[-encrypt encryptionKey] [-pcellVersion num] -exec
Tcl_commands
Returns
The results to evalulate the script of Tcl PCells if successful; otherwise, returns
nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
Specify the cell name of the Tcl PCell.

The cell name must not end with _number (for example:
cellName_1, cellName_18, or cellName_33)
because this naming pattern is treated as a sub-master in
certain situations.
If any Tcl PCell cell names match with the above pattern,
the Tcl PCells are not created after copying the Tcl PCells
to another library.
-encrypt
encryptionKey
Specify the encryption key to encrypt the ASCII script of

Tcl PCells. If it is not specified, the plain text (ASCII) of Tcl
PCells is saved.
-exec
Tcl_commands
Specify the Tcl script that creates Tcl PCells. The

variables dbParameterizedCell,
dbSuperMasterId, and dbSuperMasterLibId can
be used in the script.
dbParameterizedCell can access the evaluating submaster.
dbSuperMasterId can access the cell view identifier of the
super-master.
dbSuperMasterLibId can access the library identifier of
the super-master.
The variables that are defined in the parameter list of Tcl
PCells can also be accessed.
-lib libName
186
Specify the library name in which Tcl PCells are defined.

K-2015.06

Tcl PCells
Argument
Description
-params
parameters
Specify the parameter list. A parameter is a list of two or

three items.
If the parameter consists of two items, the two items in the
list represent the parameter name and the default value of
the parameter, respectively. For the parameter with two
items, the default data type of the parameter is String.
If the parameter consists of three items, the three items in
the list indicate the parameter name, the default value,
and the data type of the parameter. The valid values of the
data type for each parameter can be String, Integer,
Float, or Boolean.
-pcellVersion num
Specify the version tag. If the Tcl PCell supermaster is

changed, the -pcellVersion value should also be
increased.
-refresh 0|1

1 : All Tcl PCells in DB are re-evaluted with new definition.
0 : All Tcl PCells are not re-evaluated.
-vars
localVariables
Specify the list of variable names which are treated as

local variables in the script of Tcl PCells.

K-2015.06
187

Tcl PCells
Examples
# create a spiral inductor
dbDefineParameterizedCell -lib parameterizedCellLib \
-cell Spiral_v2 -params [list [list spiralNo 10 Integer] \
[list radius
10.0 Float] [list gap
3.0 Float] \
[list width
2.0 Float] [list space
0.8 Float]] \
-vars {Layer PI2 sin45 sec hgap cvId nCnt os is om im} \
-exec {
# create a spiral inductor
set cvId
$dbParameterizedCell
set Layer MET1
set PI2
[expr acos(0)]
set sin45 [expr sin($PI2/2)]
set sec
[expr 1.0/cos($PI2/4)]
set hgap
[expr $gap*0.5]
for {set nCnt 0} {$nCnt < $spiralNo} {incr nCnt} {
set os [expr $radius*$sec]
set is [expr double($radius-$width)*$sec]
set om [expr $os*$sin45]
set im [expr $is*$sin45]
dbCreatePolygon -cv $cvId -layer $Layer \
-point ($os,$hgap) ($om,[expr $om+$hgap])\
(0,[expr $os+$hgap]) (0,[expr $is+$hgap])\
($im,[expr $im+$hgap]) ($is,$hgap)
-point ([expr -$os],$hgap)\
([expr -$om],[expr $om+$hgap]) (0,[expr $os+$hgap])\
(0,[expr $is+$hgap]) ([expr -$im],[expr $im+$hgap]) \
([expr -$is],$hgap)
-point ($os,[expr -$hgap]) ($om,[expr -$om-$hgap])\
(0,[expr -$os-$hgap]) (0,[expr -$is-$hgap])\
($im,[expr -$im-$hgap]) ($is,[expr -$hgap])
-point ([expr -$os],[expr -$hgap])\
([expr -$om],[expr -$om-$hgap]) \
(0,[expr -$os-$hgap]) (0,[expr -$is-$hgap]) \
([expr -$im],[expr -$im-$hgap])\
([expr -$is],[expr -$hgap])
set radius [expr double($radius+$width+$space)]
}
# return 1
expr 1
}
188

K-2015.06

Tcl PCells
# create one rectangle in current evaluating master

set libName "device"
dbDefineParameterizedCell -lib $libName -cell ViaChain \
-params [list ...
-exec {
dbCreateRect -cv $
dbParameterizedCell
-layer MET1 \
-bbox ((0,0) (100,100))
# create ViaChain device instance for hierarchical Tcl PCell
set libName "device"
dbDefineParameterizedCell -lib $libName \
-cell ViaChainCellTypeSubBlock -params [list ...
-exec {
...
set curCvId $
dbParameterizedCell
set mCvId [dbOpenCV -lib $
dbSuperMasterLibId
-cell ViaChain \
-view symbolic]
set devId [dbCreateParameterizedInst -cv $curCvId \
-master $mCvId -point (0,0) \
-params [list [list Layer VIA1 String] \
[list Via_size $Via_size Float] ] ]
# create device name label of super master
...
-exec {
...
set curCvId $
dbParameterizedCell
dbCreateLabel -cv $curCvId -text [dbGet -obj $
dbSuperMasterId
\
-attr CellName] ...
# re-evaluate all Tcl PCells in db
dbDefineParameterizedCell -lib test -cell pDev1 \
-params [list \
[list a 1.0 ] \
[list b 5 ] \
[list c 5 ] \
[list d 1.122 ] \
] \
-vars {cvId _instCV_ _devCV_ \
-refresh FALSE \
} \
-exec {

K-2015.06
189

Tcl PCells
set cvId $dbParameterizedCell

dbCreateRect -cv $cvId -layer MET1 \
-bbox ($a,$a) ([expr $a+$b],[expr $a+$b]) \
dbCreateRect -cv $cvId -layer MET2 \
-bbox ($c,$c) ([expr $c+$d],[expr $c+$d])\
}
dbCreateParameterizedInst
The dbCreateParameterizedInst command returns an instance identifier
if the Tcl PCell, whose master is a symbolic parameterized cell, can be created.
Syntax
dbCreateParameterizedInst -cv tcvId -master
parameterizedCellId [-name parameterizedInstName] -point
origin -orient orientation [-params parameters]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv tcvId
Specify the cell view identifier on which the

parameterized instance is created.
-master
parameterizedCellId
Specify the master cell view identifier of the

parameterized instance.
-name
Specify the parameterized instance.
parameterizedInstName
-orient orientation
190
Specify the orientation of this parameterized instance.

Valid values: R0, R90, R180, R270, MXR0, MXR90,
MYR0, and MYR90 (default=R0).

K-2015.06

Tcl PCells
Argument
Description
-params parameters
Specify the parameter list. A parameter is a list of two

or three items.
If the parameter is of two items, the two items in the
list represent the parameter name and the default
value of the parameter, respectively.
If the parameter is of three items, the three items in
the list indicate the parameter name, the default value,
and the data type of the parameter.
Valid value of the data type for each parameter is
either String, Integer, Float, or Boolean.
If the parameter is of two items, the default data type
of the parameter is String.
-point origin
Specify the origin point of this parameterized

instance.
Examples
# define Tcl PCell C0
dbDefineParameterizedCell -encrypt xxxxxxxx \
-lib parameterizedCellLib -cell C0
\
-params [list [list p1 0 Integer] [list p2 0 Integer] ] \
-vars [list textString]
-exec {
set textString "p1 on C0 = $p1"
dbCreateLabel -cv $dbParameterizedCell -layer MT1 \
-text $textString -height 2 -point 0 0
set textString "p2 on C0 = $p2"
expr 1
}
#define Tcl PCell C1
dbDefineParameterizedCell -lib parameterizedCellLib
\
-cell C1 -params [list [list p1 0 Integer] [list p2 0 Integer]]\
-vars {textString1 textString mcvId bbox_mcv xlen_mcv ylen_mcv}\
-exec {
dbOpenLib -lib parameterizedCellLib
set mcvId [dbOpenCV -lib parameterizedCellLib -cell C0 \
-view symbolic]
set bbox_mcv [dbGet -obj $mcvId -attr BBox]
set xlen_mcv [expr [getBBoxRight -bbox $bbox_mcv]

K-2015.06
191

Tcl PCells
- [getBBoxLeft -bbox $bbox_mcv]]

set ylen_mcv [expr [getBBoxTop -bbox $bbox_mcv]
- [getBBoxBottom -bbox $bbox_mcv]]
dbCreateParameterizedInst -cv $dbParameterizedCell \
-master $mcvId
-point 0 0
\
-params [list [list p1 [expr 2*$p1] Integer]
[list p2 [expr 2*p2] Integer]]
dbCloseCV -cv $mcvId
dbCloseLib -lib parameterizedCellLib
expr 1
}
\
-exec {
set textString "p1 on C2= $p1"
expr 1
}
dbDefineParameterizedCell -encrypt abcdefxyz123
-params [list [list p1 0 Integer] [list p2 0 Integer] ]
-exec {
\
\
\
expr 1
}
192

K-2015.06

Tcl PCells

\
-exec {
expr 1
}
\
-vars {textString1 textString mcvId1 mcvId2 bbox_mcv \
xlen_mcv ylen_mcv} \
-exec {
set mcvId1 [dbOpenCV -lib parameterizedCellLib \
-cell C1 -view symbolic]
-master $mcvId1 -point 0 0
\
-params [list [list p1 [expr 2*$p1] Integer] \
set
set
set
-
bbox_mcv [dbGet -obj $mcvId1 -attr BBox]

xlen_mcv [expr [getBBoxRight -bbox $bbox_mcv]
[getBBoxLeft -bbox $bbox_mcv]]
ylen_mcv [expr [getBBoxTop -bbox $bbox_mcv]
[getBBoxBottom -bbox $bbox_mcv]]

-master $mcvId2 -point [list $xlen_mcv $ylen_mcv] \
-params [list [list p1 [expr 2*$p1+1] Integer]
[list p2 [expr 2*p2+1] Integer]]
dbCloseCV -cv $mcvId1

K-2015.06
193

Tcl PCells

expr 1
}
\
-exec {
dbCreateParameterizedInst -cv $dbParameterizedCell
\
set bbox_mcv [dbGet -obj $mcvId1 -attr BBox]
set xlen_mcv [expr [getBBoxRight -bbox $bbox_mcv]
- [getBBoxLeft -bbox $bbox_mcv]]
set ylen_mcv [expr [getBBoxTop -bbox $bbox_mcv]
- [getBBoxBottom -bbox $bbox_mcv]]

-master $mcvId2 -point [list $xlen_mcv $ylen_mcv] \
expr 1
}
dbDefineParameterizedCell -encrypt "pwd = abc"
\
\
-params [list [list p1 1 Integer] [list p2 1 Integer]]\
-exec {
194

K-2015.06

Tcl PCells

\
set
set
set
-
bbox_mcv [dbGet -obj $mcvId1 -attr BBox]

xlen_mcv [expr [getBBoxRight -bbox $bbox_mcv]
[getBBoxLeft -bbox $bbox_mcv]]
ylen_mcv [expr [getBBoxTop -bbox $bbox_mcv]
[getBBoxBottom -bbox $bbox_mcv]]

-master $mcvId2 -point [list $xlen_mcv $ylen_mcv]

expr 1
}
dbSetPCellParam
The dbSetPCellParam command changes the value of an existing parameter
in the PCell superMaster. It only works for an existing parameter.
Syntax
dbSetPCellParam -cv cellviewId -name paramName -value
paramValue
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
Specify the cell view identifier of the PCell superMaster.
-name paramName
Specify an existing parameter name.
-value paramValue
Specify a new value for the parameter.

K-2015.06
195

Tcl PCells
Examples
set logfile [open ./super.log w ]
set libId [dbOpenLib -lib pcellLib]
set cvId [dbOpenCV -lib $libId -cell superMaster -view layout]
set ANS [dbSetPCellParam -cv $cvId -name pin1Side -value 5]
if { 1 == $ANS } {
puts $logfile "SUCCESS"
} else {
puts $logfile "FAIL"
}
dbSaveCV -cv $cvId
dbCloseCV -cv $cvId
close $logfile
dbGetInstParam
The dbGetInstParam command is used to query the valid spacing or spacing
interval (in the x or y direction) between two instances.
Syntax
dbGetInstParam -inst instId [ -paramName paramName [-attr
attrName] ]
Returns
The value returned may vary depending on the following conditions:
{ {paramName type value} ... } if only -inst is specified.
{ type value } if only -inst and -paramName are specified.
{ type } or { value } if -inst, -paramName, and -attr are specified.
Arguments
196
Argument
Description
-attr attrName
Specify the attribute name.

Valid values: Type and Value.
-inst instId
Specify the instance identifier (instId).
-paramName
paramName

K-2015.06

Shape Creation
Examples
# Example 1
dbGetInstParam -inst $instA -paramName leftDPoly -attr Value
# Example 2
dbGetInstParam -inst $instB -paramName leftDPoly -attr Value
dbGetPcellDefValue
The dbGetPcellDefValue command gets the value of the corresponding
name for Tcl PCell data.
Syntax
dbGetPcellDefValue -cv superCVId -name name
Returns
The value of the corresponding name if successful.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv superCVId
Specify the identifier of the super master cell view.
-name name
Specify the name of the addData.
Examples
# Example 1
# If the addData name is ScriptEngineName, and the value is
oaTclEngine
dbGetPcellDefValue -cv $superCVId -name ScriptEngineName
# Returned value: oaTclEngine
Shape Creation
This section describes the Tcl commands that are related to the shape
creation. These commands include:
dbCreateArc
dbCreateDoughnut
dbCreateDot

K-2015.06
197

Shape Creation
dbCreateEllipse
dbCreateFinRegion
dbCreateLabel
dbCreateLine
dbCreatePath
dbCreatePathRouter
dbCreatePolygon
dbCreateRect
dbCreateTextToPoly
dbPtToPtRouter
dbCreateRoute
dbCreateArc
The dbCreateArc command returns an arc identifier if the arc shape can be
created.
Syntax
dbCreateArc -cv cellviewId -layer layer [-purpose purpose]
-bbox eBBox -startAngle angle1 -stopAngle angle2
Returns
An arc identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
198
Argument
Description
-bbox eBBox
Specify the ellipse bounding box of the arc.
-cv cellviewId
-layer layer
Specify the layer number (0-255) or layer name.
-purpose purpose
Specify the purpose number (0-255) or purpose name

(default=drawing).
-startAngle angle1
Specify the starting angle in radian.

Valid value: a floating number.

K-2015.06

Shape Creation
Argument
Description
-stopAngle angle2
Specify the ending angle in radian.

Examples
dbCreateArc -cv $cvId -layer 1 -bbox (0,0)(3,3) -startAngle 0 \
-stopAngle 3.1415926/2
dbCreateArc -cv $cvId -layer PWELL -bbox (1,1) (9,9) \
-startAngle 0 -stopAngle 3.1415926/2
dbCreateDoughnut
The dbCreateDoughnut command returns a doughnut identifier if the
doughnut shape can be created.
Syntax
dbCreateDoughnut -cv cellviewId -layer layer [-purpose
purpose] -point center -inner r1 -outer r2
Returns
A doughnut identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
-inner r1
Specify the inner radius of a doughnut shape.

Valid value: a positive floating number.
-layer layer
-outer r2
Specify the outer radius of a doughnut shape.

-point center
Specify the central point of a doughnut shape in one of

the following formats: (a, b), a b, or {a b}.
-purpose purpose

(default=drawing).

K-2015.06
199

Shape Creation
Examples
dbCreateDoughnut -cv $cvId -layer 8 -point (2.25,-5.25) \
-inner 0 -outer 3.2
dbCreateDoughnut -cv $cvId -layer MT1 -point (-1.35,-1.35) \
-inner 0.35 -outer 1.35
See Also
lakerCreateDoughnut
Layout Window: Create > Conics > Doughnut
dbCreateDot
The dbCreateDot command returns a dot identifier if the dot shape can be
created.
Syntax
dbCreateDot -cv cellviewId -layer layer [-purpose purpose]
-point point
Returns
A dot identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
-layer layer
-point point
Specify the place of a dot shape in one of the following

formats: (a, b), a b, or {a b}.
-purpose purpose

(default=drawing).
Examples
dbCreateDot -cv $cvId -layer 1 -point (-2.25,5.20)
dbCreateDot -cv $cvId -layer MT1 -point (-1.0,-1.0)
200

K-2015.06

Shape Creation
dbCreateEllipse
The dbCreateEllipse command returns an ellipse identifier if the ellipse
shape can be created.
Syntax
dbCreateEllipse -cv cellviewId -layer layer [-purpose
purpose] -bbox eBBox
Returns
An ellipse identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-bbox eBBox
Specify the bounding box of the ellipse in one of the

following formats:
(a, b) (c d), a b c d, or {{a b} {c d}}.
-cv cellviewId
-layer layer
-purpose purpose

(default=drawing).
Examples
dbCreateEllipse -cv $cvId -layer 1 -bbox (0,0)(10,5)
dbCreateEllipse -cv $cvId -layer MT1 -bbox (-1,1) (1,2)
See Also
lakerCreateEllipse
Layout Window: Create > Conics > Ellipse
symDsgCreateEllipse
Symbol Editor: Create> Ellipse
dbCreateFinRegion
The dbCreateFinRegion command creates fin regions by honoring the
tfWideAlignments definition in the technology file section
lakerLayerRule.

K-2015.06
201

Shape Creation
Syntax
dbCreateFinRegion -cv cellviewId -layerName layerName purpose purpose -point (x1,y1) (x2,y2) (x3,y3) (x4,y4)
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
-layerName layerName
Specify the name of the fin boundary layer.
-point (x1,y1) (x2,y2)

(x3,y3) (x4,y4)
(x1,y1) specifies the lower left corner of the

boundary, (x2,y2) specifies the upper left corner,
(x3,y3) specifies the upper right corner, and
(x4,y4) specifies the lower right corner.
-purpose purpose
Specify the purpose of the fin boundary layer.
Examples
dbCreateFinRegion -layer FINFET -purpose FB1 \
-point (0.286,0.76) (0.286,1.202) (0.8225,1.202) (0.8225,0.76)
See Also
lakerCreateFinRegion
Layout Window: Create > Fin Region
dbCreateLabel
The dbCreateLabel command returns a label identifier if the label can be
created.
Syntax
dbCreateLabel -cv cellviewId -layer layer [-purpose purpose]
-point origin -text textString -height height [-spacing
dSpacing] [-orient orientation] [-justify justification]
[-font textFont]
Returns
A label identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
202

K-2015.06

Shape Creation
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
-font textFont
Specify the text font.

Valid values: Modern, Script, Roman and
Contemplate1 (default=Modern).
-height height
Specify the label height.

-justify
justification
Specify the justification for labels.

Valid values: UpperLeft, CenterLeft, LowerLeft,
UpperCenter, CenterCenter, LowerCenter,
UpperRight, CenterRight, and LowerRight
(default=LowerLeft).
-layer layer
-orient
orientation
Specify the orientation for labels.

Valid values: R0, R90, R180, R270, MXR0, MXR90, MYR0,
and MYR90 (default=R0).
-point origin
Specify the origin point of labels in one of the following

formats: (a, b), b, or {a b}.
-purpose
purpose

(default=drawing).
-spacing
dSpacing
Specify the spacing between Contemplate1 font text

labels (default=1.0).
-text textString
Specify the content of the label.
Examples
dbCreateLabel
-height 1.2
dbCreateLabel
-height 1.2
dbCreateLabel
-text {This
-cv $cvId -layer 1 -point (100,100) -text cpu \

-font Script
-cv $cvId -layer 2 -point (200,200) -orient R90 \
-text { i_ALUB/i_alu/sub_38_1/B_not[3]}
-cv $cvId -layer 3 -point (50,50) -height 1.2 \
is a label!}
See Also
dbCreateTextToPoly

K-2015.06
203

Shape Creation
lakerCreateText
Layout Window: Create > Text
symDsgCreateText
Symbol Editor: Create> Text
dbCreateLine
The dbCreateLine command returns a line identifier if the line can be
created.
Syntax
dbCreateLine -cv cellviewId -layer layer [-purpose purpose]
-point pointList
Returns
A line identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
204
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
-layer layer
-point pointList
Specify a point list through which the line goes. The point
list can be specified in one of the following formats: (a,
b) (c, d) ... (y, z), a b c d ... y z, or {{a
b} {c d} ... {y z}}.
-purpose purpose

(default=drawing).

K-2015.06

Shape Creation
Examples
set 2Pi [expr 2*3.1415926]
set count 0
set pointList [list] ; #make an empty list
while {$count < 1000} {
set x [expr $count*$2Pi/1000]
set y [expr sin($x)]
lappend pointList [list $x $y]
incr count
}
set cvId [dbOpenCV -lib cpu -cell test -mode create]
dbCreateLine -cv $cvId -layer 1 -point $pointList
dbCreateLine -cv $cvId -layer 1 \
-point 0 0 20 0 20 20 0 20 0 0 10 0 10 20 0 20 0 10 20 10
dbCreatePath
The dbCreatePath command returns a path identifier if the path shape can
be created.
Syntax
dbCreatePath -cv cellviewId -layer layer [-purpose purpose]
-point pointList -width pathWidth [-style pathStyle] [beginExt pathBegExt -endExt pathEndExt]
Returns
A path identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-beginExt
pathBegExt
Specify the start point of the path extension. It is used in

combination with -endExt and it is only valid when style Variable is specified.
Valid value : a positive floating number.
-cv cellviewId
-endExt
pathEndExt
Specify the end point of the path extension. It is used in

combination with -endExt and it is only valid when style Variable is specified.
Valid value : a positive floating number.
-layer layer

K-2015.06
205

Shape Creation
Argument
Description
-point pointList
Specify a point list through which the path goes. The

point list can be specified in one of the following
formats:(a, b) (c, d) ... (y, z), a b c d
... y z, or {{a b} {c d} ... {y z}}.
-purpose purpose

(default=drawing).
-style pathStyle
Specify the path style at two ends.

Valid values: Truncate, Extend, Round, and
Variable (default=Truncate).
-width pathWidth
Specify the path width.

Examples
dbCreatePath -cv $cvId -layer 1 -width 0.5 \
-point (0,0)(10,0)(10,10)(0,10)(0,20)(10,20)
See Also
lakerCreatePath
Layout Window: Create > Path
dbCreatePathRouter
The dbCreatePathRouter command returns a routing path identifier if two
points can be connected by the available routing layers.
Syntax
dbCreatePathRouter -cv cellviewId -point (x1,y1)(x2,y2)
(-lp | -layer layer [-purpose purpose]) -width pathWidth
[-style pathStyle] [-snapMode snapMode]
Returns
A routing path identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
206
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId

K-2015.06

Shape Creation
Argument
Description
-layer layer
Specify the layer name or layer number (0-255).
-point
(x1,y1)(x2,y2)
Specify two points that are to be connected.
-purpose purpose

(default=drawing).
-snapMode
snapMode
Specify the snap mode for routing.

Valid values: AnyAngle, Orthogonal, YFirst,
XFirst (default=AnyAngle).
-style pathStyle

Variable (default=Truncate).
-width pathWidth
Specify the path segment width.

Examples
dbCreatePathRouter -cv $cvId -point (-11.5,4.6) (2.5,5.0) \
-layer MET1 -width 0.35
dbCreatePathRouter -cv $cvId -point (15 54) (25 54) -layer POLY \
-width 0.18 -snapMode XFirst
See Also
lakerCreatePath
dbCreatePath
lakerPtToPtRouter
dbPtToPtRouter
Layout Window: Router > Point To Point Router
dbCreatePolygon
The dbCreatePolygon command returns a polygon identifier if the polygon
Syntax
dbCreatePolygon -cv cellviewId -layer layer [-purpose
purpose] -point pointList
K-2015.06
207

Shape Creation
Returns
A polygon identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
-layer layer
-point pointList
Specify a point list of coordinates to the polygon vertices.

The point list can be specified in one of the following
formats: (a, b) (c, d) ... (y, z), a b c d ...
y z, or {{a b} {c d} ... {y z}}.
-purpose purpose

(default=drawing).
Examples
dbCreatePolygon -cv $cvId -layer 1 -point (0,0)(1,1)(0,1)
See Also
lakerCreatePoly
Layout Window: Create > Polygon
symDsgCreatePolygon
Symbol Editor: Create> Polygon
dbCreateRect
The dbCreateRect command returns a rectangle identifier if the rectangle
can be created.
Syntax
dbCreateRect -cv cellviewId -layer layer [-purpose purpose]
-bbox bBox
Returns
A rectangle identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
208

K-2015.06

Shape Creation
Arguments
Argument
Description
-bbox bBox
Specify the bounding box of the rectangle in one of the

following formats: (a, b) (c, d), a b c d, or {{a
b} {c d}}.
-cv cellviewId
-layer layer
-purpose purpose

(default=drawing).
Examples
dbCreateRect -cv $cvId -layer THIN -bbox (0,0)(1,2)
See Also
lakerCreateRect
Layout Window: Create > Rectangle
symDsgCreateRect
Symbol Editor: Create> Rectangle
dbCreateTextToPoly
The dbCreateTextToPoly command returns a polygon identifier if the
polygon shape, that are determined by a text string, can be created.
Syntax
dbCreateTextToPoly -cv cellviewID -layer layer [-purpose
purpose] -point origin -text textString -height height
[-width width] [-orient orientation] [-justify
justification] [-font textFont] [-spacing spacing] [non45free 0|1]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId

K-2015.06
209

Shape Creation
210
Argument
Description
-font textFont
Specify the font type of the input text string.

Valid values: Simple, Merit and Contemplate
(default=Merit).
-height height
Specify the height of polygons.

Valid value: a positive number.
-justify
justification
Specify the justification.

-layer layer
Specify the layer name or layer number (0-255).
-non45free 0|1
Valid values: Boolean values, 0 and 1. (default=0).

1: Do not allow non45 polygon texts.
0: Allow non45 polygon texts.
-orient
orientation
Specify the orientation.

Valid values: R0, R90, R180, R270, MYR0, MYR90, MXR0,
and MXR90 (default=R0).
-point origin
Specify the origin point.
-purpose
purpose

(default=drawing).
-spacing
spacing
Specify the spacing between polygonal texts.

Valid value: a floating number (default=0).
-text
textString
Specify the text string that determines the polygon shape.
-width width
Specify the stick width of the polygonal label in

Contemplate font type. The height must be greater than
5 times of the specified stick width; and the stick width must
be the even multiple resolutions.

K-2015.06

Shape Creation
Examples
dbOpenLib -lib CPU
set cvId [dbOpenCV -lib CPU -cell test -mode create]
dbCreateTextToPoly -cv $cvId -layer MT1 -point 1000 1000
-height 10 -font Simple -text GND -non45free 1
See Also
dbCreateLabel
lakerCreateText
symDsgCreateText
Symbol Editor: Create> Text
dbPtToPtRouter
The dbPtToPtRouter command connects two selected objects by the
available routing layers.
Syntax
dbPtToPtRouter -cv cellviewId -point (x1,y1)(x2,y2) [routingLayer routingLayer] [-minContacts n]
dbPtToPtRouter -cv cellviewId -point {(x1,y1) [LayerName]}
{(x2,y2) [LayerName]} [-routingLayer routingLayer] [minContacts n]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
-minContacts n
Specify the minimum number of contacts to be used.
-point
(x1y1)(x2,y2)
Specify two points to select the objects to be connected.

K-2015.06
211

Shape Creation
Argument
Description
-routingLayer
routingLayer
Specify the list of available routing layer(s). If it is not

specified, all routing layers defined in the technology file
are used. The list can be specified by one of these two
formats:
Use {MET1 MET2 MET3} to indicate that the available

layer list can be used without rule specification.
Use {MET1 2 2 0.5 0.5} {MET2 2 2 0.5 0.5}
to indicate that the available layer list shall be used with
rule specification, in the order of {LayerName Hcost
Vcost Width Space}.
Examples
# Example 1
dbPtToPtRouter -cv cellviewId -point (-11.576,4.691) \
(2.528,5.019) -routingLayer {MET1 MET2 POLY MET3}
# Example 2
dbPtToPtRouter -cv cellviewId -point {(2.400,0.500) POLY} \
{(8.000,8.000) MET1} -routingLayer {POLY 2 3 0.5 0.5} \
{MET1 2 3 0.5 0.5} -minContacts 2
See Also
lakerCreatePath
dbCreatePath
lakerPtToPtRouter
Layout Window: Router > Point-To-Point Router
dbCreateRoute
The dbCreateRoute command returns a route identifier if the route can be
created.
Syntax
dbCreateRoute -cv cellviewId [-purpose purpose] [-net netId]
-route {{ PATHSEG -layer layer -beginPt beginPoint -endPt
endpoint [-width width -beginStyle beginStyle -endStyle
endStyle -beginExt beginExt -endExt endExt beginLeftDiagExt beginLeftDiagExt -beginRightDiagExt
beginRightDiagExt -beginRightHalfWidth
beginRightHalfWidth -endLeftDiagExt endLeftDiagExt 212

K-2015.06

Shape Creation
endRightHalfWidth endRightHalfWidth]} {CUSTOMVIA -def

defName [-orient orient]} {STDVIA -def defName [-orient
orient]} ...}
Returns
A route identifier if successful; otherwise returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-beginExt beginExt
-endExt endExt
-beginLeftDiagExt
beginLeftDiagExt
Specify the segment extension beyond the begin or

end points.
-beginRightDiagExt
beginRightDiagExt
-beginRightHalfWidth
beginRightHalfWidth
-endLeftDiagExt
endLeftDiagExt
-endRightHalfWidth
endRightHalfWidth
-beginPt beginPoint
-endPt endpoint
Specify a point list through which the line goes. The

point list can be specified in one of the following
formats: (a, b) (c, d) ... (y, z), a b c d
... y z, or {{a b} {c d} ... {y z}}.
-beginStyle beginStyle
-endStyle endStyle
Specify the style type of path segments.

Valid values: Truncate, Extend, Variable,
Chamfer, and Custom (default=Extend).
-cv cellviewId
-def defName
Specify the standard vias and custom vias.

This is the default rule setting in the LEF/DEF data.
-layer layer
-net netId
Specify the net identifier.

K-2015.06
213

Shape Conversion
Argument
Description
-orient orientation
Specify the orientation of via objects.

-purpose purpose

(default=drawing).
-width pathWidth

Examples
# Example 1
dbCreateRoute -cv $masterId -route {{PATHSEG -layer METAL1 \
-beginPt {-100,-100} -endPt {100,100} -width 20 -beginExt 20 \
-endExt 20 -beginLeftDiagExt 15 -beginRightDiagExt 15 \
-beginRightHalfWidth 20 -endLeftDiagExt 15 \
-endRightHalfWidth 20 }}
# Example 2
dbCreateRoute -cv $masterId -route {{PATHSEG -layer VIA23 \
-beginPt {-25,-25} -endPt {25, 25} -width 10} {CUSTOMVIA \
-def Via23} {PATHSEG -layer VIA23 -beginPt {-100, -100} \
-endPt {100,100} -width 10}}
# Example 3
dbCreateRoute -cv $masterId -route {{PATHSEG -layer VIA23 \
-beginPt {-25,-25} -endPt {25, 25} -width 10} {STDVIA -def Via23 \
-orient MXR180 } {PATHSEG -layer VIA23 -beginPt {-100, -100} \
-endPt {100,100} -width 10}}
Shape Conversion
This section describes the Tcl commands that are related to shape conversion.
214
dbArcToLine
dbDoughnutToPolygon
dbEllipseToPolygon
dbLineToPath
dbPathToPolygon

K-2015.06

Shape Conversion
dbPathSideToPolygonSide
dbPolygonToTrap
dbArcToLine
The dbArcToLine command returns a line identifier if the target arc can be
converted to a line.
Syntax
dbArcToLine -arc arcId -side sideNo
Returns
A line identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-arc arcId
Specify the arc identifier.
-side sideNo
Specify the number of sides.

Valid value: a positive integer.
Examples
set arcId [dbCreateArc -cv $cvId -layer 1 -bbox (0,0)(20,10) \
-startAngle 0 -stopAngle 3.14]
set lineId [dbArcToLine -arc $arcId -side 10]
dbDoughnutToPolygon
The dbDoughnutToPolygon command returns a polygon identifier if the
target doughnut shape can be converted to a polygon shape.
Syntax
dbDoughnutToPolygon -doughnut doughnutId -side sideNo
Returns

K-2015.06
215

Shape Conversion
Arguments
Argument
Description
-doughnut doughnutId
Specify the doughnut identifier.
-side sideNo

Examples
set doughnutId [dbCreateDoughnut -cv $cvId -layer 1 \
-point (0,0) -inner 5 -outer 10]
set polygonId [dbDoughnutToPolygon -doughnut $doughnutId -side 8]
dbEllipseToPolygon
The dbEllipseToPolygon command returns a polygon identifier if the target
ellipse shape can be converted to a polygon shape.
Syntax
dbEllipseToPolygon -ellipse ellipseId -side sideNo
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-ellipse ellipseId
Specify the ellipse identifier.
-side sideNo

Examples
set ellipseId [dbCreateEllipse -cv $cvId -layer 1 \
-bbox (0,0)(10,20)]
set polygonId [dbEllipseToPolygon -ellipse $ellipseId -side 4]
216

K-2015.06

Shape Conversion
dbLineToPath
The dbLineToPath command returns a path identifier if the target line shape
can be converted to a path shape.
Syntax
dbLineToPath -line lineId -width pathWidth [-style
pathStyle]
Returns
A path identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-line lineId
Specify the line identifier.
-style pathStyle

Valid values: Truncate, Extend, Round, and Variable
(default=Truncate).
-width pathWidth

Examples
set lineId [dbCreateLine -cv $cvId -layer 1 -point (0,0)(10,0)]
dbLineToPath -line $lineId -width 0.5
dbPathToPolygon
The dbPathToPolygon command returns a polygon identifier if the target
path shape can be converted to a polygon shape.
Syntax
dbPathToPolygon -path pathId
Returns

K-2015.06
217

Shape Conversion
Arguments
Argument
Description
-path pathId
Specify the path identifier.
Examples
set pathId [dbCreatePath -cv $cvId -layer 1 \
-point (0,0)(10,0) -width 0.5 ]
dbPathToPolygon -path $pathId
See Also
lakerConvertToPoly
Layout Window: Edit > Others > Convert To Polygon
dbPathSideToPolygonSide
The dbPathSideToPolygonSide command returns a list of point
coordinates to one side of the path boundary if the specified side of the path
boundary can be obtained.
Syntax
dbPathSideToPolygonSide -point pointList -width extendWidth
Returns
A list of point coordinates to one side of the path boundary if successful;
otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-point pointList
Specify a list of point coordinates to the center path.
-width extendWidth
Specify the extend width.

Examples
dbPathSideToPolygonSide -point (0,0) (0,5) (5,5) -width -3
# The output is {3.0 0.0} {3.0 2.0} {5.0 2.0}
See Also
None
218

K-2015.06

dbPolygonToTrap
The dbPolygonToTrap command returns a list of trapezoid figIds if the target
shape can be partitioned to trapezoids.
Syntax
dbPolygonToTrap -fig figId [-deloldobj 0|1]
Returns
A list of trapezoid figIds if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-fig figId
Specify the shape identifier.
-deloldobj 0|1
Specify the switch mode for object deletion.

1 : Delete original figures.
0 : Do not delete original figures.
Examples
set polyId [lakerCreatePoly -layerName MET2 \
-point (9.05,5.725) (9.05,2.1) (13.925,2.1) \
(13.925,-2.65) (8.25,-2.65) (8.25,-5.625) \
(3.775,-5.625) (3.775,-1.35) (6.275,-1.35) \
(6.275,2.15) (3.775,2.15) (3.775,3.275) \
(1.85,3.275) (1.85,5.725)]
dbPolygonToTrap -fig $polyId -deloldobj 1

This section describes the Tcl commands that are related to instances and
arrays. These commands include:
dbCreateArray
dbCreateInst
dbFindInst

K-2015.06
219

dbIsSameMaster
dbSetInstHeaderMasterName
dbCreateArray
The dbCreateArray command returns an array identifier if the array can be
created.
There are two approaches to create an array: (1) specify the master by its
identifier if this master is opened; (2) specify the master by its cell name, view
name, and library name (or library identifier) where the cell view exists.
Syntax
dbCreateArray -cv tcvId (-master mcvId | -lib libName -cell
cellName [-view viewName]) [-name arrayName] -point
origin [-orient orientation] -rows rowNo -cols colNo rowSpace rowSpace -colSpace colSpace
Returns
An array identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
220
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
-cols colNo
Specify the number of columns of the array.

-colSpace
colSpace
Specify the spacing between two columns.

-cv tcvId
Specify the identifier of the top cell view.
-lib libName
-master mcvId
Specify the identifier of the master cell view.
-name
arrayName
Specify the created array. This name is generated by the

database.

K-2015.06

Argument
Description
-orient
orientation
Specify the orientation of arrays.

-point origin
Specify the original point of the array in one of the following

formats:
(a, b), a b, or {a b}.
-rows rowNo
Specify the number of rows of the array.

-rowSpace
rowSpace
Specify the spacing between two rows.

-view
viewName

(default=layout).
Examples
set tcvId [dbOpenCV -lib libraryA -cell cell2]
set mcvId [dbOpenCV -lib libraryA -cell cell3]
dbCreateArray -cv $tcvId -master $mcvId -name A1 \
-point (0,0) -rows 2 -cols 10 -rowSpace 1.0 -colSpace 0
dbCreateArray -cv $tcvId -lib libraryA -cell cell32 -name A2
-point (0,0) -rows 3 -cols 1 -rowSpace 1.0 -colSpace 0
dbCreateInst
The dbCreateInst command returns an instance identifier if the instance can
be created.
There are two approaches to create an instance: (1) create an instance by
specifying the master with its identifier; (2) specify the master by its cell name,
view name, and library name (or library identifier) where the cell view exists.

K-2015.06
221

Syntax
dbCreateInst -cv tcvId (-master mcvId | -lib libName -cell
cellName [-view viewName]) [-name instName] -point origin
[-orient orientation] [-justification justification] [returnOrigin 0|1]
Returns
Arguments
222
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
-cv tcvId
-justification
justification
Specify the justification of the instance.

Valid values: UL, CL, LL, UC, CC, LC, UR, CR, LR, and
Origin.
-lib libName
-master mcvId
Specify the identifier of the master cell view.
-name instName
Specify the created instance. This name is generated by

the database.
-orient
orientation
Specify the orientation of instances.

-point origin
Specify the original point of the instance in one of the

following formats: (a, b), a b, or {a b}.
-returnOrigin 0|1

1 : Return the origin of the instance.
0 : Do not return the origin of the instance.
-view viewName

(default=layout).

K-2015.06

Examples
set tcvId [dbOpenCV -lib libraryA -cell cell2]
set mcvId [dbOpenCV -lib libraryA -cell cell3]
dbCreateInst -cv $tcvId -master -mcvId -point (0,0) -name I1
dbCreateInst -cv $tcvId -lib libraryA -cell cell33 -name I2 \
-point (10,10)
dbCreateInst -cv $tcvId -lib libraryB -cell cell33 -name I3 \
-point (-10,-10)
See Also
lakerCreateInstance
Layout Window: Create > Instance
dbFindInst
The dbFindInst command returns an instance identifier if the target instance
can be found by its name.
Syntax
dbFindInst -cv tcvId -name instName
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv tcvId
-name instName
Specify the instance name.
Examples
dbFindInst -cv 202810 -name I0
See Also
lakerFindObj

K-2015.06
223

dbIsSameMaster
The dbIsSameMaster command returns 1 if two instances have the same
master.
Syntax
dbIsSameMaster -inst1 instId1 -inst2 instId2
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-inst1 instId1
Specify the first instance identifier.
-inst2 instId2
Specify the second instance identifier.
Examples
dbIsSameMaster -inst1 $instId1 -inst2 $instId1
dbIsSameMaster -inst1 $instId2 -inst2 $instId1
dbSetInstHeaderMasterName
The dbSetInstHeaderMasterName command returns 1 if the master cell
view of an instance can be replaced with another cell view.
Syntax
dbSetInstHeaderMasterName -instHeader instHId [-lib
libName] -cell cellName [-view viewName]
Returns
Arguments
224
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
-instHeader instHId
Specify the identifier of the instance header.
-lib libName

K-2015.06

Figure Manipulation
Argument
Description
-view viewName

(default=layout).
Examples
set instId [dbCreateInst -cv $tcvId -lib libraryA -cell c1 \
-point (0,0)]
set instHId [dbGet -obj $instId -attr InstHeader]
dbSetInstHeaderMasterName -instHeader $instHId -cell c2
dbSetInstHeaderMasterName -instHeader $instHId \
-lib libraryB -cell c3
Figure Manipulation
This section describes the Tcl commands that are related to figure
manipulation. These commands include:
dbBreakTraverse
dbConcatTransform
dbCopyFig
dbCorrectPolygon
dbGetTrueOverlaps
dbLayerGen
dbMoveFig
dbRepairCellViewRouteObj
dbSeparateRouteObj
dbShiftOrigin
dbSizing
dbSmashInst
dbSnapToGrid
dbTransformBBox

K-2015.06
225

Figure Manipulation
dbTransformPoint
dbTraverse
getBBoxBottom
getBBoxCenter
getBBoxLeft
getBBoxLeftBottom
getBBoxRight
getBBoxRightTop
getBBoxTop
dbBreakTraverse
The dbBreakTraverse command breaks the command file used in
dbTraverse and dbGetTrueOverlaps.
Syntax
dbBreakTraverse
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
proc cbFun {id} {
if {xxx} {
dbBreakTraverse
}
}
dbTraverse -cv $cvId -shapeOnly on -cbFun cbFun
dbGetTrueOverlaps -cv $masterId -bbox (-500,-500) (800, 700) \
-shapeOnly 0 -cbFun cbFun -condition EO
See Also
dbTraverse
dbGetTrueOverlaps
226

K-2015.06

Figure Manipulation
dbConcatTransform
The dbConcatTransform command returns a list of result transform if two
transformations can be concated to a new one.
Syntax
dbConcatTransform [-orient1 orientation1] -offsetPoint1
offset1 [-mag1 magnification1] [-orient2 orientation2]
-offsetPoint2 offset2 [-mag2 magnification2]
Returns
A list of the result transform if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mag1 magnification1,
-mag2 magnification2
Specify the magnification of the transformation.

Valid value: a floating number (default=1.0).
-offsetPoint1 offset1,
-offsetPoint2 offset2
Specify the offset point of the transformation in one of

-orient1 orientation1,
-oritne2 orientation2
Specify the orientation of the transformation.

Examples
dbConcatTransform -orient1 R90 -offsetPoint1 (10,10) \
-offsetPoint2 (-4,5) -mag2 3.5
dbCopyFig
The dbCopyFig command returns a figure identifier if the figure, transformed
by a transformation, can be copied to a destination cell view. If the destination
cell view is not specified, the figure is copied to the cell view in which this figure
exists.
Syntax
dbCopyFig -fig figId [-dst dstCVId] [-orient orientation]
-offsetPoint offset [-mag magnification]

K-2015.06
227

Figure Manipulation
Returns
A figure identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-dst dstCVId
Specify the identifier of the destination cell view.
-fig figId
Specify the figure identifier.
-mag magnification

-offsetPoint offset

-orient orientation

Examples
set rectId [dbCreateRect -cv $cvId1 -layer 8 -bbox (0,0)(10,20)]
dbCopyFig -fig $rectId -offsetPoint (0,0) -dst $cvId3
set arrayId [dbCreateArray -cv $cvId1 -master $cvId2 \
-point (0,0) -rows 2 -cols 3 -rowSpace 0.5 -colSpace 0.5]
set instId [dbCreateInst -cv $cvId1 -master $cvId2 \
-point (-20,-20)]
dbCopyFig -fig $arrayId -offsetPoint (30,30)
dbCopyFig -fig $instId -offsetPoint (-30,-30)
See Also
lakerCopyObj
adpDsgCopy
dbCorrectPolygon
The dbCorrectPolygon command returns 1 if reentrant and self-intersecting
polygons can be fixed.
228

K-2015.06

Figure Manipulation
Self-intersecting polygons, which may be created by third-party tools, can be

reported in the gdsIn.err and gdsOut.err files by setting the following keyword in
the laker.rc file. The default is FALSE.
[LeoPreference]
IoReportSelfIntersectingPolygons=TRUE
Syntax
dbCorrectPolygon -cv cellviewID [-type polygonType] [snapGrid 0|1]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewID
Specify the cell view identifier to be corrected.
-snapGrid 0|1

1 : Snap new objects onto the grid resolution.
0 : Do not snap any new objects onto the grid resolution.
-type polygonType
Specify the polygon type to be corrected.

Valid values: Reentrant, Self-Intersecting, or
All (default=All).
Examples
#To fix reentrant and self-intersecting polygons in cell 'cpu'
dbCorrectPolygon -cv $cvId -type All
# Example results:

K-2015.06
229

Figure Manipulation
dbGetTrueOverlaps
The dbGetTrueOverlaps command returns a list of all objects in a cell view;
these objects overlap the area specified by the specified bounding box.
The intersecting condition of the bounding box (BBox) with objects can be
specified by -condition. The condition can be any combination of E
(enclosed), O (overlapping), B (butting) and S (singular). For example, when
-condition {E} is specified, only the objects that are enclosed by the
bounding box are returned. When -condition {EO} is specified, the objects
that are enclosed by and overlaps with the bounding box are returned.
When -attachBBox and -attachPoint are specified at the same time,
-attachBBox has the higher priority.
Syntax
dbGetTrueOverlaps -cv cellviewId [-bbox bBox] [-layer layer]
[-purpose purpose] [-startLevel level1] [-stopLevel
level2] [-cbFun callBackFunc] ([-shapeOnly 0|1]|[instOnly 0|1]) [-attachBBox 0|1] [-attachPoint 0|1] [condition [{O|E|B|S}]]
Returns
One of the following is returned:
A list of identifiers. Neither -attachBBox nor -attachPoint is turned on.
A list of lists, each of which is composed of an identifier and a bounding box.

The -attachBBox option is turned on.
A list of lists, each of which is composed of an identifier and a list of points.

The -attachPoint option is turned on.
Arguments
230
Argument
Description
-attachBBox 0|1

1 : Compute and attach the bounding box of the figure
related to top cell views.
0 : Return the figure Ids only.
-attachPoint 0|1

1 : Compute and attach the point of each shape related to
top cell views.
0 : Return the figure Ids only.

K-2015.06

Figure Manipulation
Argument
Description
-bbox bBox
Specify the bounding box in one of the following formats:

(a, b) (c, d), a b c d, or {{a b} {c d}}. The
default is cell view BBox.
-cv cellviewId
-cbFun
callBackFunc
Specify a user-defined Tcl procedure for the callback

results. The procedure syntax is as follows: proc
callBackFunc {p_pCallData } { ... }, where
p_pCallData is the return value.
-condition
[{O|E|B|S}]
Specify one of the following conditions:O: Overlapping

(includes enclosed[E]).
E: Enclosed.
B: Butting.
S: Singular.
-instOnly 0|1

1 : Traverse instances, instance arrays, MCells, and Tcl
PCells only. This argument cannot be used with -layer.
0 : No restrictions on the above traversing.
-layer layer
Specify the layer number or layer name (default=all

layers).
-purpose purpose
Specify the purpose number or purpose name (default=all

purposes).
-shapeOnly 0|1
Restrict the traversing for shapes only.

-startLevel level1
Specify the starting level.

-stopLevel level2
Specify the stopping level.


K-2015.06
231

Figure Manipulation
Examples
# Example 1
-shapeOnly 0 -attachBBox 1 -attachPoint 0 -condition EO
# Value returned as follows:
# {2a962b7400 {{678.000 650.000} {800.000 700.000}}}
# {2a962b5c00 {{500.000 100.000} {1000.000 800.000}}}
# Example 2
-shapeOnly 0 -attachBBox 1 -attachPoint 0 -condition O
# {2a962b7400 {{678.000 650.000} {800.000 700.000}}}
{2a962b5c00 {{500.000 100.000} {1000.000 800.000}}}
# Example 3
-shapeOnly 0 -attachBBox 1 -attachPoint 0 -condition E
# {2a962b7400 {{678.000 650.000} {800.000 700.000}}}
See Also
dbTraverse
dbLayerGen
The dbLayerGen command returns a list of figure identifiers if the shapes of
two specific layers or figures can be changed by using the Boolean operations.
Syntax
dbLayerGen -op booleanOperation -dst dstCVID (-lp layerName
[purposeName] | -layer layerName [-purpose purposeName])
(-figs1 figures | -lp1 layerName [purposeName] | -layer1
layerName [-purpose1 purposeName]) (-figs2 figures | lp2 layerName [purposeName] | -layer2 layerName [purpose2 purposeName])
Returns
A list of figure identifiers if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
232
Argument
Description
-op
booleanOperation
Set the Boolean operation.

Valid values: OR, AND, NOT, and XOR.

K-2015.06

Figure Manipulation
Argument
Description
-dst dstCVID
Specify the identifier of the destination cell view.
-lp layerName
purposeName
Specify the layer name and purpose name of resulting

shapes.
-layer layerName
Specify the one of resulting shapes with layer name.
-purpose
purposeName
Specify the one of resulting shapes with purpose name

(default=drawing).
-figs1 figures
Specify the list of figure identifiers of main shapes.
-lp1 layerName
purposeName
Specify the layer name and purpose name of main

shapes.
-layer1 layerName
Specify the layer of main shapes with layer name.
-purpose1
purposeName
Specify the layer of main shapes with purpose name

(default=drawing).
-figs2 figures
Specify the list of figure identifiers of operating shapes.
-lp2 layerName
purposeName
Specify the layer of operating shapes with layer name

and purpose name.
-layer2 layerName
Specify the layer of operating shapes with layerName.
-purpose2
purposeName
Specify the layer of main operating with purpose name

(default=drawing).
Examples
# example1. or PWELL layers and put the results to layer POLY
set figList [dbTraverse -cv $cvId -layer PWELL -shapeOnly 1]
dbLayerGen -op OR -dst $cvId -layer POLY -figs1 $figList
# example2. put the results to layer POLY
set figList1 [dbTraverse -cv $cvId -layer PWELL -shapeOnly 1]
set figList2 [dbTraverse -cv $cvId -layer CONT -shapeOnly 1]
dbSizing -op NOT -dst $cvId -layer POLY -figs1 $figList1 \
-figs2 $figList2

K-2015.06
233

Figure Manipulation
# example3. xor both PWELL and POLY layers and

# put the results to layer THIN
dbLayerGen -op XOR -dst $cvId -layer THIN -figs1 $figList \
-layer2 POLY
# example4. and both PWELL and POLY layers and
# put the results to layer THIN
dbLayerGen -op AND -dst $cvId -layer THIN \
-layer1 PWELL -layer2 POLY
See Also
dbSizing
lakerBoolean
lakerLayerGen
Layout Window: Edit > Boolean
Layout Window: Edit > Others > Layer Gen...
dbMoveFig
The dbMoveFig command returns a figure identifier if the figure, transformed
by a transformation, can be moved to the target cell view.
Syntax
dbMoveFig -fig figId -dst dstCVId [-orient orientation] offsetPoint offset [-mag magnification]
Returns
A figure identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
234
Argument
Description
-dst dstCVId
Specify the identifier of the target cell view.
-fig figId
-mag magnification

-offsetPoint offset


K-2015.06

Figure Manipulation
Argument
Description
-orient orientation

Examples
set pathId [dbCreatePath -cv $tcvId -layer 1 \
-point (0,0) (1,1) -width 0.2]
set instId1 [dbCreateInst -cv $tcvId -master $mcvId -point (0,0)]
set arrayId1 [dbCreateArray -cv $tcvId -master $mcvId \
-point (10,10) -rows 2 -cols 5 -rowSpace 0 -colSpace 0]
set pathId2 [dbMoveFig -fig $pathId -dst $tcvId \
-offsetPoint (-10,-10)]
dbMoveFig -fig $pathId2 -dst $cvId3 -offsetPoint (0,0) -mag 1.5
set instId2 [dbMoveFig -fig $instid1 -dst $tcvId \
dbMoveFig -fig $instId2 -dst $cvId3 -offsetPoint (0,0) -mag 1.5
set arrayId2 [dbMoveFig -fig $arrayId1 -dst $tcvId \
dbMoveFig -fig $arrayId2 -dst $cvId3 -offsetPoint (0,0) -mag 1.5
See Also
lakerMoveObj
adpDsgMove
dbRepairCellViewRouteObj
The dbRepairCellViewRouteObj command returns a list of fixed route
object identifiers if all invalid route objects can be found and fixed in the current
working cell view.
Syntax
dbRepairCellViewRouteObj (-lib libName -cell cellName [-view
viewName] | -cv cellviewId)
Returns
A list of fixed route object identifiers if successful; otherwise, returns 0.

K-2015.06
235

Figure Manipulation
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
-cv cellviewId
-lib libName
-view viewName
Specify the view name. The default is layout.
Examples
# Example 1
dbRepaireCellViewRouteObj -lib DEF -cell mc_top
dbSeparateRouteObj
The dbSeparateRouteObj command returns a list of route object identifiers
if a route (dbRoute) object can be separated into multiple route objects,
pathSeg and via objects, or path and rectangle objects.
Syntax
dbSeparateRouteObj -figs figIds [-separateAll 0|1 -checkRule
0|1] [-transShape 0|1]
Returns
A list of route object identifiers if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
236
Argument
Description
-checkRule 0|1

1 : Re-evaluate the rule of new route objects.
0 : Set the rule of original route object to new route objects.
-figs figIds
Specify a list of route object identifiers.
-separateAll 0|1

1 : Separate a route object into path segment (pathSeg) and via
objects.
0 : Separate a route object into multiple route objects composed
of one pathSeg and one via.

K-2015.06

Figure Manipulation
Argument
Description
-transShape 0|1

1 : Separate a route object into a path and flatten the via on the
path as a rectangle.
0 : Separate a route object into multiple route objects composed
of one pathSeg and one via.
Examples
# Example 1
dbSeparateRouteObj -figs [lakerGetSelSet]
# Example 2
dbSeparateRouteObj -figs [lakerGetSelSet] -separateAll 1 \
-checkRule 1
# Example 3
# Separate a route object to a path and flatten the via
# into a rectangle
dbSeparateRouteObj -figs [lakerGetSelSet] -transShape 1
dbShiftOrigin
The dbShiftOrigin command shifts the original point of the target cell view
to new origin.
Syntax
dbShiftOrigin -cv dstCVId -point (x0,y0)
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv dstCVId
Specify the identifier of the target cell view.
-point (x0,y0)
x0 specifies a position value for x coordinate point while y0

specifies the one for y coordinate point.
Examples
dbShiftOrigin -cv $cvId -point (100,50)

K-2015.06
237

Figure Manipulation
See Also
lakerShiftOrigin
Layout Window: Edit > Others > Shift Origin
symDsgEditOrigin
Symbol Editor: Edit> Origin
dbSizing
The dbSizing command returns a list of figure identifiers if each side of the
specified objects can be expanded or shrunk.
Syntax
dbSizing -size sizeValue -figs figures [-layer layer]
[-purpose purpose] [-deloldobj 0|1] [-truncate
floatValue] [-convert 0|1] [-keepOrthogonal 0|1] [absolute 0|1]
Returns
A list of figure identifiers if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
238
Argument
Description
-absolute 0|1

1 : Multiply the truncate value by sizing value.
0 : Do not multiply any truncate value.
-convert 0|1

1 : Convert the round path to polygon before sizing.
This is valid for round path only.0 : Do not convert the
round path to polygon before sizing.
-deloldobj 0|1
Specify the switch mode for object deletion.

1 : Delete original figures.
0 : Do not delete original figures.
-figs figures
Specify the list of figure identifiers.

K-2015.06

Figure Manipulation
Argument
Description
-keepOrthogonal 0|1

1 : Keep orthogonal edges.
0 : Cutting acute angle by its bisection regardless of
the vertical or horizontal edges.
-layer layer
Specify the layer number (0-255) or layer name

(default=the layer where the figure exists.)
If -layer is specified, the results are placed on it after
the sizing operation. If -layer is not specified, the
results of these objects are placed to their original
layers.
-purpose purpose

(default=drawing).
-size sizeValue
Specify the size of the expanding or shrinking sides.

-truncate floatValue
Specify a value to cut out the sharp angle.

Valid value: a floating number, larger than 0.
Examples
# Example 1
# Delete the original figures
dbSizing -size 1.0 -figs $figList
# Example 2
# Keep the original figures
dbSizing -size -1.25 -figs $figList -deloldobj 0
# Example 3
# Put the results to layer THIN and keep the original figures
dbSizing -size 1.0 -figs $figList -layer THIN \
-purpose drawing -deloldobj 0

K-2015.06
239

Figure Manipulation
# Example 4
set figList [dbTraverse -cv $cvId -layer MET1 -shapeOnly 1]
dbSizing -size 2.0 -figs $figList -layer MET2 -deloldobj 0 \
-truncate 1.0 -convert 1
# Example 5
dbSizing -size 0.5 -figs [lakerGetSelSet] -layer MET2 \
-deloldobj 0 -truncate 1 -keepOrthogonal 1 -absolute 1 -convert 1
See Also
dbLayerGen
lakerBoolean
lakerLayerGen
Layout Window: Edit > Others > Layer Gen
dbSmashInst
The dbSmashInst command flattens the number of levels of instances,
including Tcl PCells, MCells, arrays and leaf cells as a polygon data, based on
the specified level.
Syntax
dbSmashInst -inst instId [-level level][-smashArrayInst 0|1]
Returns
A list of object identifiers if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
240
Argument
Description
-inst instId
-level level
Specify the number of design hierarchy levels to be

smashed.
Valid value: a positive integer, 1-50 (default=1).
-smashArrayInst 0|1
Specify whether to smash an instance, array, or MCell.

Valid value: Boolean values, 0 and 1 (default=0).
1 : Smash instances, arrays, or MCells. All array
instances are smashed when this is specified.
0 : Do not smash instances, arrays, or MCells.

K-2015.06

Figure Manipulation
Examples
set pMyCVId [dbOpenCV -lib libraryA -cell cell1]
set pInst [dbCreateInst -cv $pMyCVId -lib libraryA \
-cell cell2 -point (0,0)]
set pShapes [dbSmashInst -inst $pInst -level 49]
puts "shape list: $pShapes"
See Also
lakerSmashObj
Layout Window: Edit > Smash
dbSnapToGrid
The dbSnapToGrid command returns an on-grid coordinate if a coordinate
can be snapped to an on-grid coordinate.
Syntax
dbSnapToGrid -cv cellviewId -coord coordinate
Returns
An on-grid coordinate if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-coord coordinate
Specify the coordinate.

-cv cellviewId
Examples
dbSnapToGrid -cv [set cvId [dbOpenCV -lib cpu -cell cpu]] \
-coord 1.234678
dbSnapToGrid -cv $cvId -coord [expr 10*cos(3.1415926/4)]
dbTransformBBox
The dbTransformBBox command returns a bounding box if the
transformation can be applied on a bounding box.

K-2015.06
241

Figure Manipulation
Syntax
dbTransformBBox -bbox bBox [-orient orientation] offsetPoint offset [-mag magnification]
Returns
A bounding box if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-bbox bBox
Specify the bounding box in one of the following

formats:
(a, b) (c, d), a b c d, or {{a b} {c d}}.
-mag magnification

-offsetPoint offset

-orient orientation

Examples
dbTransformBBox -bbox (0,0) (5,10) -offsetPoint (5,5)
dbTransformBBox -bbox 0 0 5 10 -offsetPoint (5,5) -orient R90
dbTransformBBox -bbox [dbGet -obj $cvId -attr BBox] \
-offset 0 0 -orient R180
dbTransformPoint
The dbTransformPoint command returns a point if the transformation can
be applied on a point.
Syntax
dbTransformPoint -point point [-orient orientation] offsetPoint offset [-mag magnification]
Returns
A point if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
242

K-2015.06

Figure Manipulation
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mag magnification

-offsetPoint offset

-orient orientation

-point point
Specify the desired point in one of the following formats:

(a, b), a b, or {a b}.
Examples
dbTransformPoint -point (5,10) -offsetPoint (5,5)
dbTransformPoint -point 5 10 -offsetPoint (5,5) -orient R90
dbTraverse
The dbTraverse command returns a list of identifiers or a list of lists if it can
get the objects, whose bounding boxes overlap the specified bounding box, and
can get the extra information associated with these objects with the top cell
view.
When the -instOnly and -attachPoint arguments are both specified, the
same array instance identifier and the origin point of different array instances
are returned. For example, when traversing the cell view with a 1x2 array:
dbTraverse -cv $cvId -instOnly 1 -attachPoint 1
# Value returned:
# 0x123456 {0,0}
0x123488
{0,0}
# 0x123488
{100,0}
# arrayId arrOrigin arrInst[0,0] origin
# arrInst[0,1] origin
When the -instOnly and -attachBBox arguments are both specified, the
same array instance identifier and the bounding box of different array instances
are returned. For example, when traversing the cell view with a 1x2 array:
dbTraverse -cv $cvId -instOnly 1 -attachBBox 1
# Value returned:
K-2015.06
243

Figure Manipulation
# 0x123456 {{0,0}{200,100}} 0x123488 {{0,0}{100,100}}

# 0x123488 {{100,0}{200,100}}
# arrayId arrBBox arrInst[0,0] bbox arrInst[0,1] bbox
When the -attachOutlinePoint and -instOnly arguments are both
specified, the same array instance identifier and the origin point of different
array instances are returned. For example, when traversing the cell view with a
1x2 array:
dbTraverse -cv $cvId -instOnly 1 -attachOutlinePoint 1
# Value returned:
# 2a971d9100 {{0.000 0.000} {0.000 10.000}
# {20.000 10.000} {20.000 0.000}} 2a971d9d28
# {{0.000 0.000} {0.000 10.000} {10.000 10.000}
# {10.000 0.000}} 2a971d9d28 {{10.000 0.000}
# {10.000 10.000} {20.000 10.000} {20.000 0.000}}
# arrayId_outline_points_of_bbox
arrInst[0,0]_outline_points_of_bbox
# arrInst[0,1]_outline_points_of_bbox
The attach preference is as follows:
toAttachBBox > toAttachPoint > toAttachOutlinePoint
For example, when -toAttachBBox 1 and -toAttachOutlinePoint 1
are specified at the same time, -toAttachBBox is set as 1, but toAttachOutlinePoint is set as 0.
Syntax
dbTraverse -cv cellviewId [-cbFun callBackFunc] [-bbox bBox]
[-layer layer] [-purpose purpose] [-startLevel level1]
[-stopLevel level2] [-trueOverlap 0|1] ([-shapeOnly 0|1]
| [-instOnly 0|1]) [-attachBBox 0|1] [-attachPoint 0|1]
[-disableArrayInst 0|1] [-attachOutlinePoint 0|1 [-side
sideNum]]
Returns
One of the following values is returned:
244
A list of identifiers. Neither -attachBBox nor -attachPoint is specified.
A list of lists (each of which is composed of an identifier and a bounding box)

when the -attachBBox option is specified.
A list of lists (each of which is composed of an identifier and a list of points)

when the -attachPoint option is specified.

K-2015.06

Figure Manipulation
Arguments
Argument
Description
-attachBBox 0|1

1 : Compute and attach the bounding box of the figure
related to the top coordinate of the cell view.
0 : Return the figure identifier only.
-attachOutlinePoint 0|1

1 : Compute and attach the outline coordinates. The
attachment depends on the following figure types:
When the figure is an instance or an array, the list of

outline points is the objects bounding box.
When the figure is a polygon, rectangle, ellipse,

path, doughnut, or arc, the outline points of the
figure are attached.
When the figure is a line, the points where it passes

are attached.
If the figure is a label, the original point of the label

is attached.
If the figure is dot, its center point is attached.

-attachPoint 0|1

1 : Compute and attach the list of points related to the
top coordinate of the cell view. The attachment
depends on the following figure types:
When the figure is an instance, array, rectangle,

ellipse, or arc, the list of points is the objects
bounding box.
When the figure is a polygon, the points of the

polygon vertices are attached.
When the figure is a line or path, the points where it

passes are attached.
When the figure is a label, the original point of the

label is attached.
When the figure is a dot or doughnut, its center point

is attached.

K-2015.06
245

Figure Manipulation
246
Argument
Description
-bbox bBox
Specify the bounding box (BBox) in one of the following

formats:
(a, b) (c, d), a b c d, or {{a b} {c d}}. The
default is cell view BBox.
-cv cellviewId
-cbFun callBackFunc
Specify a user-defined Tcl procedure for callback

results. The procedure syntax is: proc
callBackFunc {p_pCallData } { ... }, where
p_pCallData is the return value.
-disableArrayInst 0|1

1 : Disable the dbArrayInst report in the result.
0 : Enable the dbArrayInst report in the result.
-instOnly 0|1

1 : Return instances only. The -shapeOnly and
-instOnly arguments cannot be specified
simultaneously. The same array instance identifier can
be returned multiple times. For example, to traverse the
cell view with a 1x2 array:dbTraverse -cv $cvId
-instOnly 1
0x123456
0x123488
0x123488
(arrayId) arrInst[0,0] arrInst[0,1]0 :
No restriction on the above traversing.
-layer layer
Specify the layer number or layer name (default=all

layers).
-purpose purpose
Specify the purpose number or purpose name

(default=all purposes).
-shapeOnly 0|1

1 : Return shapes only. The -shapeOnly and
-instOnly arguments cannot be specified
simultaneously.
0 : No restriction on the above traversing.

K-2015.06

Figure Manipulation
Argument
Description
-side sideNum
Specify the number of sides for a shape/object, or the

number of points for an arc, ellipse, or doughnut
shapes.
-startLevel level1
Specify the starting level.

-stopLevel level2
Specify the stopping level.

-trueOverlap 0|1

1 : Return the objects that are totally covered by the
specified bounding box only.
0 : No restriction on the above traversing.
This argument is invalid when the -instOnly or
-shapeOnly argument is specified.
Examples
#Example 1
#Define callback procedure
proc traverseCB { p_pCallData } {
if {"Instance" == [dbGet -obj $p_pCallData -attr type]} {
if {"contact" == [dbGet -obj $p_pCallData -attr cellName]} {
#.....
puts $p_pCallData
}
}
}
#Open processing CV
set cvId [dbOpenCV -lib CPU -cell CPU]
#Call dbTraverse with callback style
dbTraverse -cv $cvId -cbFun traverseCB -instOnly 1
#Example 2
dbTraverse -cv $cvId1
dbTraverse -cv $cvId1 -layer MET1 -shapeOnly 1 \
-bbox (-100,-100) (100,100)
dbTraverse -cv $cvId2 -instOnly 1

K-2015.06
247

Figure Manipulation
### an example and its result

### program begin
set cv1 [dbOpenCV -lib cpu -cell k1 -mode create]
puts "rect: [dbCreateRect -cv $cv1 -bbox 0 0 1 1 -layer 1] on cv1"
puts "inst: [dbCreateInst -cv $cv1 -master $cv2 -point 1 1]"
puts "\n\nResult:\n"
puts "[dbTraverse -cv $cv4 -attachBBox 1 -stopLevel 0 \
-shapeOnly 1] \n"
-shapeOnly 1] \n"
-shapeOnly 1] \n"
-shapeOnly 1] \n"
### program end
### result
rect: 30a850 on cv1
rect: 30a450 on cv2
rect: 30a050 on cv3
rect: 309c50 on cv4
inst: 30a890
inst: 30a490
inst: 30a090
Result:
{309c50 {{0 0} {1 1}}}
{30a050 {{0 0} {1 1}}} {309c50 {{1 1} {2 2}}}
{30a450 {{0 0} {1 1}}} {30a050 {{1 1} {2 2}}} {309c50 {{2 2} {3 3}}}
{30a850 {{0 0} {1 1}}} {30a450 {{1 1} {2 2}}} {30a050 {{2 2} {3
3}}} {309c50 {{3 3} {4 4}}}
# Example 3
# Assume that 1 array(1*2), 1 instance, 1 ellipse, and 1 dot are
# in library BB
dbOpenLib -lib BB
set cvId [dbOpenCV -lib BB -cell Top -view layout -mode create]
set objlist [dbTraverse -cv $cvId -attachOutlinePoint 1 -side 50]
foreach obj $objlist {
set id [lindex $obj 0]
set tp [dbGet -obj $id -attr Type]
puts "Type= $tp"
puts "\tobj= $obj\n"
}
dbCloseCV -cv $cvId
dbCloseLib -lib BB
248

K-2015.06

Figure Manipulation
# The traversed results are:

# Type= Array
# obj= 2a971d9100 {{0.000 0.000} {20.000 10.000}}
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
Type= ArrayInst
obj= 2a971d9d28 {{10.000 0.000} {10.000 10.000} {20.000 10.000}
{20.000 0.000}}
Type= ArrayInst
obj= 2a971d9d28 {{10.000 0.000} {10.000 10.000} {20.000 10.000}
{20.000 0.000}}
Type= Instance
obj= 2a971d9d00 {{-790.000 -490.000} {-790.000 710.000}
{810.000 710.000} {810.000 -490.000}}
Type= Ellipse
obj= 2a971d9e00 {{-600.000 650.000} {-601.000 656.000}
{-603.000 662.000} {-607.000 668.000}
{-612.000 674.000} {-619.000 679.000}
{-627.000 684.000} {-636.000 689.000}
{-646.000 692.000} {-657.000 695.000}
{-669.000 698.000} {-681.000 699.000}
{-694.000 700.000} {-706.000 700.000}
{-719.000 699.000} {-731.000 698.000}
{-743.000 695.000} {-754.000 692.000}
{-764.000 689.000} {-773.000 684.000}
{-781.000 679.000} {-788.000 674.000}
{-793.000 668.000} {-797.000 662.000}
{-799.000 656.000} {-800.000 650.000}
{-799.000 644.000} {-797.000 638.000}
{-793.000 632.000} {-788.000 626.000}
{-781.000 621.000} {-773.000 616.000}
{-764.000 611.000} {-754.000 608.000}
{-743.000 605.000} {-731.000 602.000}
{-719.000 601.000} {-706.000 600.000}
{-694.000 600.000} {-681.000 601.000}
{-669.000 602.000} {-657.000 605.000}
{-646.000 608.000} {-636.000 611.000}
{-627.000 616.000} {-619.000 621.000}
{-612.000 626.000} {-607.000 632.000}
{-603.000 638.000} {-601.000 644.000}}
Type= Dot
obj= 2a971da000 {50.000 -50.000}
getBBoxBottom
The getBBoxBottom command returns a coordinate if the y-axis coordinate of
the lower left point of a bounding box can be obtained.
Syntax
getBBoxBottom -bbox bBox

K-2015.06
249

Figure Manipulation
Returns
A coordinate if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-bbox bBox
Specify the bounding box in one of the following formats: (a,

b) (c, d), a b c d, or {{a b} {c d}}.
Examples
getBBoxBottom -bbox [dbGet -obj $cvId -attr BBox]
getBBoxBottom -bbox (0,0)(1,3)
getBBoxCenter
The getBBoxCenter command returns a planar pointer if the center point of a
bounding box can be obtained.
Syntax
getBBoxCenter -bbox bBox
Returns
A planar pointer if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-bbox bBox

b) (c, d), a b c d, or {{a b} {c d}}.
Examples
getBBoxCenter -bbox [list [list 0 0] [100 100]]
getBBoxCenter -bbox [dbGet -obj $cvId -attr BBox]
getBBoxLeft
The getBBoxLeft command returns a coordinate if the x-coordinate of the
lower left point of a bounding box can be obtained.
Syntax
getBBoxLeft -bbox bBox
250

K-2015.06

Figure Manipulation
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-bbox bBox

b) (c, d), a b c d, or {{a b} {c d}}.
Examples
getBBoxLeft -bbox [dbGet -obj $cvId -attr BBox]
getBBoxLeft -bbox (1,0)(5,3)
getBBoxLeftBottom
The getBBoxLefBottom command returns a planar pointer if the bottom left
corner point of a bounding box can be obtained.
Syntax
getBBoxLeftBottom -bbox bBox
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-bbox bBox

b) (c, d), a b c d, or {{a b} {c d}}.
Examples
set cvId [dbOpenCV -lib [dbOpenLib -lib CPU -cell CPU]
getBBoxLeftBottom -bbox [dbGet -obj $cvId -attr BBox]
getBBoxRight
The getBBoxRight command returns a coordinate if the x-coordinate of the
upper right point of a bounding box can be obtained.
Syntax
getBBoxRight -bbox bBox

K-2015.06
251

Figure Manipulation
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-bbox bBox

b) (c, d), a b c d, or {{a b} {c d}}.
Examples
getBBoxRight -bbox [dbGet -obj $cvId -attr BBox]
getBBoxRight -bbox (0,0)(5,3)
getBBoxRightTop
The getBBoxRightTop command returns a planar pointer if the top right
corner point of a bounding box can be obtained.
Syntax
getBBoxRightTop -bbox bBox
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-bbox bBox

b) (c, d), a b c d, or {{a b} {c d}}.
Examples
getBBoxRightTop -bbox [dbGet -obj $cvId -attr BBox]
getBBoxTop
The getBBoxTop command returns a coordinate if the y-coordinate of the
upper right point of a bounding box can be obtained.
Syntax
getBBoxTop -bbox bBox
252

K-2015.06

Accessory Objects
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-bbox bBox

b) (c, d), a b c d, or {{a b} {c d}}.
Examples
getBBoxTop -bbox [dbGet -obj $cvId -attr BBox]
getBBoxTop -bbox (-1,0)(5,3)
Accessory Objects
The accessory objects include Property and Group, which are explained later
in the following sections.
Property is used to keep additional information of the attached dbObject. For
example, you can create a property with specified property name, data type
and value on a dbObject, and then query the property from this dbObject.
Group is a container that groups a set of dbObjects. Groups can be created
and dbObjects can be created to one or many groups. Group can be used to
build a relationship for some dbObjects which should have the same attributes.
Group members can be queried from one group, and the groups that the
dbObject belongs to can also be queried.
The relationship of accessory objects is illustrated in the following figure.

K-2015.06
253

Property
Figure 2
Accessory Objects
Property
This section describes the Tcl commands that are related to properties. These
commands include:
dbCellPro
dbCopyProp
dbCreateProp
dbDeletePropByName
dbFindProp
dbCellPro
The dbCellPro command assigns a string (cell property) to a cell view of the
specified library so that the LefOut process can refer to the string and dump the
information to the CLASS token.
254

K-2015.06

Property
Syntax
dbCellPro -lib libName -cell cellName -view {abs | layout |
abs layout} -property {None -attr None | COVER -attr
{None|BUMP} RING -attr None| BLOCK -attr {None | BLACKBOX}
PAD -attr {None | INPUT | OUTPUT | INOUT | POWER | SPACER
| AREAIO} CORE -attr {None | FEEDTHRU | TIEHIGH | TIELOW
| SPACER | ANTENNACELL} ENDCAP -attr {PRE | POST | TOPLEFT
| TOPRIGHT | BOTTOMLEFT | BOTTOMRIGHT} SITE -attr
{coresite | User-defined Site} SYMMETRY -attr {X | Y | X
Y | Any}} -site {coresite | User-defined Site}
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-attr propertyType
Specify the attribute of the property type.
-cell cellName
-lib libName
-property
propertyName
Specify the name of the property type.
-site
{coresite|User-defined Site}
Specify the site name.

Valid values: coresite, and any user-defined
site (default=coresite).
-view
{abs | layout | abs layout}
Specify the cell view to be updated with the cell

property.
Valid values: abs, layout, and abs layout
(default=abs).
Examples
dbCellPro -lib demo -cell cell1 -property RING -attr None
See Also
lakerCellPro
Layout Window: Cell > Cell Type

K-2015.06
255

Property
dbCopyProp
The dbCopyProp command returns 1 if all properties can be copied from one
object to another.
Syntax
dbCopyProp -obj1 objId1 -obj2 objId2
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-obj1 objId1
Specify the identifier of the source object.
-obj2 objId2
Specify the identifier of the destination object.
Examples
set rectId [dbCreateRect -cv $cvId -layer 1 -bbox 1 1 3 5]
set pathId [dbCreatePath -cv $cvId -layer 1
-path (0,0)(1,1)(2,1)(3,0) -width 0.1]
dbCreateProp -obj $rectId -name p1 -type Integer -value 1
dbCreateProp -obj $rectId -name p2 -type Float -value 1.2
dbCopyProp -obj1 $rectId -obj2 $pathId
dbCopyProp -obj1 $rectId -obj2 $cvId
dbCreateProp
The dbCreateProp command returns a property identifier if the property can
be created on an object.
When -replace 1 is specified, the existing property is replaced by the new
property if their names are similar. When -type HierProp is specified, no
value should be specified to the -value argument.
Syntax
dbCreateProp -obj objId -name propName -type propType -value
propValue [-displayed 0|1] [-replace 0|1] [-appType
typeName]
Returns
Property Identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
256

K-2015.06

Property
Arguments
Argument
Description
-appType typeName
Specify the application type for -type AppProp. Any

name can be entered.
-displayed 0|1
Specify the switch mode for display.

-name propName
Specify the property name.
-obj objId
Specify the object identifier.
-replace 0|1
Specify the switch mode for replacement.

-type propType
Specify the property type.

Valid values: String, Int, Float, DBId, Boolean,
Time, LpPair, AppProp, and UserPair.
-value propValue
Specify the property value. This value depends on the

-type argument.
Examples
dbCreateProp -obj $cvId -name p1 -type Int -value 1
dbCreateProp -obj $cvId -name p2 -type Boolean -value 0
dbCreateProp -obj $cvId -name p1 -type String -value string1
-replace 1
# Open any existing design with a mode
set cv [dbOpenCV -lib l1 -cell cell1 -view layout -mode a]
# The return value is oa:0x2a9685f39a
# Create oaAppProp
set p [dbCreateProp -obj $cv -name testAppProp -type AppProp
-appType testApp -value appvalue]
# The return value is oa:0x2a9685f01a
# Use
dbGet
dbGet
dbGet
dbGet to get atributes

-obj $p -attr Name testAppProp
-obj $p -attr Value appvalue
-obj $p -attr AppType testApp

K-2015.06
257

Property
dbDeletePropByName
The dbDeletePropByName command returns 1 if the property can be deleted
by giving a property name.
Syntax
dbDeletePropByName -obj objId -name propName
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-name propName
-obj objId
Examples
dbDeletePropByName -obj $cvId -name IntProp1
dbDeletePropByName -obj $instId -name FProp2
dbFindProp
The dbFindProp command returns a property identifier if the property can be
found by giving a property name.
Syntax
dbFindProp -obj objId -name propName
Returns
Property identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
258
Argument
Description
-name propName
-obj objId

K-2015.06

Property
Examples
# Example 1
dbFindProp -obj $instId -name FProp2
dbFindProp -obj $cvId -name IntProp1
# Example 2
# please use the technology file under demo directory and
# make sure the file name is changed to laker.tf
lakerNewLib -lib PROP -tech laker.tf
# create a library PROP with tech file laker.tf
# value returned: null
set libId [dbOpenLib -lib PROP ]
# open the library created.
# value returned: an id , ex 264780c
set cvId [dbOpenCV -lib $libId -cell cell -mode create
-view layout]
# create a cell in library PROP with layout view
# value returned: an id , ex 264680c
set rect1 [dbCreateRect -cv $cvId -layer 16 -bbox (1,1) (5,5) ]
# create a rectagle
# value returned: an id , ex 2646847
set pathId01 [dbCreatePath -cv $cvId -layer 16 -width 1
-point (0,0) (10,0) ]
-point (0,10) (10,10) ]
-point (0,20) (10,20) ]
# create a path
dbCreateProp -obj $rect1 -name P1 -type Integer -value 1
dbCreateProp -obj $rect2 -name P2 -type Boolean -value 0
dbCreateProp -obj $rect2 -name P3 -type String -value text
-replace 1
# create a property
set hpId1 [dbCreateProp -obj $pathId01 -name HP1 -type HierProp ]
set hpId2 [dbCreateProp -obj $pathId02 -name HP2 -type HierProp ]
# create a hier property

K-2015.06
259

Group

dbCreateProp -obj $hpId1 -type Integer -value 1
dbCreateProp -obj $hpId2 -type String -value h_text
dbFindProp -obj $hpId1 -name HP1
# save cell
# value returned: 1
dbSaveCV -cv $cvId
# close cell
# value returned: 1
dbCloseCV -cv $cvId
# close library
# value returned: 1
#
#
#
#
#
Example 3
To distinguish the pin created by Soft Pin Realizer and Create Pin
attach a property "SP_Realized" to the extra pin shapes created by
Soft Pin Realizer, and adopt the following script to judge if the
shape is created by that feature.
proc IsSoftPinRealized { FigId } {
set Property [dbFindProp -obj $FigId -name SP_Realized]
if { $Property == 0 } {
return 0;
} else {
set Value [dbGet -obj $Property -attr Value]
set Type [dbGet -obj $Property -attr ValueType]
if { $Value == 1 && $Type == "Boolean" } {
return 1;
} else {
return 0;
}
}
Group
This section describes the Tcl commands that are related to groups. These
commands include:
260
dbAddObjectToGroup
dbCreateGroup

K-2015.06

Group
dbDeleteGroupByName
dbDeleteObjectFromGroup
dbFindGroup
dbMoveMember
dbAddObjectToGroup
The dbAddObjectToGroup command returns a member identifier if the
object can be added to a group.
Syntax
dbAddObjectToGroup -obj objId -group groupId
Returns
A member identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-group groupId
Specify the group identifier.
-obj objId
Examples
dbAddObjectToGroup -obj $pathId -group $groupId
dbAddObjectToGroup -obj $rectId -group $groupId
dbCreateGroup
The dbCreateGroup command returns a group identifier if the group can be
created.
When -ordered 1 and -type Set are specified, the order of group members
may be changed.
When the -uniqueName 1 is specified, this allows the group to share the
same group name with other groups.
Syntax
dbCreateGroup -cv cellviewId -name groupName -type groupType
[-ordered 0|1] [-uniqueName 0|1]
K-2015.06
261

Group
Returns
A group identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
-name groupName
Specify the group name.
-ordered 0|1
Specify the switch mode for the order of group members.

-type groupType
Specify the group type.

Valid values: Collect and Set (default=Set).
-uniqueName 0|1
Specify the switch mode for unique names.

Examples
dbCreateGroup -cv $cvId -name G1 -type Set
dbCreateGroup -cv $cvId -name G2 -type Collect
dbCreateGroup -cv $cvId -name G3 -type Set -ordered 1 -uniqueName 1
dbDeleteGroupByName
The dbDeleteGroupByName command returns 1 if the group can be deleted
by giving a group name.
Syntax
dbDeleteGroupByName -cv cellviewId -name groupName
Returns
Arguments
262
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
-name groupName

K-2015.06

Group
Examples
dbDeleteGroupByName -cv $cvId -name G1
dbDeleteObjectFromGroup
The dbDeleteObjectFromGroup command returns 1 if the object can be
deleted from its group.
Syntax
dbDeleteObjectFromGroup -obj objId -group groupId
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-group groupId
Specify the group identifier.
-obj objId
Specify the object identifier which belongs to the group.
Examples
dbAddObjectToGroup -obj $pathId -group $groupId
dbAddObjectToGroup -obj $rectId -group $groupId
...
dbDeleteObjectFromGroup -obj $pathId -group $groupId
dbFindGroup
The dbFindGroup command returns group identifier if the object can be found
from its group.
Syntax
dbFindGroup -cv cvId -name groupName
Returns
Group identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.

K-2015.06
263

Group
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cvId
-name groupName
Examples
set groupId [dbFindGroup -cv $cvId -name "Group1"]
dbMoveMember
The dbMoveMember command returns 1 if the order of a member can be
changed in a group.
Syntax
dbMoveMember -member1 memId1 [-member2 memId2]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-member1 memId1
Specify the moving member.
-member2 memId2
Specify the member before which memId1 is placed

(default=the first member in the group).
Examples
# Use the technology file under "demo" directory and
# make sure the file name is changed to "laker.tf"
lakerNewLib -lib GROUP -tech laker.tf
# create a library "GROUP" with tech file "laker.tf"
set libId [dbOpenLib -lib GROUP ]
# value returned: an id , ex "264780c"
-view layout]
# create a cell in library "GROUP" with layout view
264

K-2015.06

Group

# create a rectagle
# value returned: an id , ex "2646844"
# create a rectagle
-point (0,0) (10,0) ]
# create a path
-point (0,10) (10,10) ]
# create a path
# value returned: an id , ex "264684a"
-point (0,20) (10,20) ]
# create a path
set gId1 [dbCreateGroup -cv $cvId -name G1 -type Set]
# create a group
set gId2 [dbCreateGroup -cv $cvId -name G2 -type Collect
-ordered 1]
# create a group
dbAddObjectToGroup -obj $rect1 -group $gId1
# add object to a group
dbAddObjectToGroup -obj $rect2 -group $gId1
set memId1 [dbAddObjectToGroup -obj $pathId01 -group $gId2]
dbGet -obj $gId2
# value returned: ex# Type: Group DeleteWhen: Never GroupType: Collect \
# IsOrdered: 1 IsUniqueName: 0 \
# Members: 267493c 2674954 267496c \
# Name: G2 Objects: 267488c 26748a4 26748bc

K-2015.06
265

Logic Objects
dbMoveMember -member1 $memId3

# change sequence in an ordered group
# value returned: 1
dbMoveMember -member1 $memId2 -member2 $memId3
# change sequence in an ordered group
# value returned: 1
dbDeleteObjectFromGroup -obj $pathId01 -group $gId2
# remove object from group
# value returned: 1
dbDeleteGroupByName -cv $cvId -name G1
# remove a group name
# value returned: 1
dbSaveCV -cv $cvId
# save cell
# value returned: 1
dbCloseCV -cv $cvId
# close cell
# value returned: 1
# close library
# value returned: 1
Logic Objects
This section describes the Tcl commands that are related to logic objects.
266
dbCreateBusNet
dbCreateInstPin
dbCreateInstPort
dbCreateNet
dbCreatePin
dbCreatePort
dbCreateSingleNet
dbDeleteAllNet
dbDeviceSetParameter
dbFindNet
dbFindPort
dbGenPin

K-2015.06

Logic Objects
dbGetGlobalNet
dbMakeBusNet
dbCreateSingleNet
dbCreateBusNet
The dbCreateBusNet command returns a net identifier if the bus net in the
specified cell view can be created.
Syntax
dbCreateBusNet -cv cellViewId -name netName -leftIdx n1 rightIdx n2 [-step n3]
Returns
A net identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
-leftIdx n1
Specify the left index of bus nets. n1 is an integer.
-name netName
Specify the net name.
-rightIdx n2
Specify the right index of bus nets. n2 is an integer.
-step n3
Specify the interval size of bus nets.

n3 is an integer (default=1).
This argument is valid only if the -leftIdx and
-rightIdx arguments exist.
Examples
# Example 1
dbCreateBusNet -cv $cvId -name G -leftIdx 0 -rightIdx 5
# Example 2
dbCreateBusNet -cv $cvId -name D -leftIdx 0 -rightIdx 6 -step 2

K-2015.06
267

Logic Objects
dbCreateInstPin
The dbCreateInstPin command returns an instance pin identifier if the
specified instance pin can be created. The pin can be specified by its identifier
or by its name.
Syntax
dbCreateInstPin -instPort instPortId (-pin pinId | -name
pinName) [-net netId]
Returns
An instPin (instance pin) identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-instPort instPortId
Specify the identifier of the instance port.
-name pinName
Specify the pin name.
-net netId
Specify the net identifier to which the created instance

pin connects (default=no net).
-pin pinId
Specify the pin identifier.
Examples
## open two cellviews
set mcvId [dbOpenCV -lib cpu -cell c1 -mode edit]
set tcvId [dbOpenCV -lib cpu -cell c2 -mode edit]
## create a net in the master cell view
set netId [dbCreateNet -cv $mcvId -name N]
## create a port and a pin in the master cell view
set portId [dbCreatePort -net $netId -dir Input]
set rectId [dbCreateRect -cv $mcvId -layer 1 -bbox (0,0)(1,1)]
set pinId [dbCreatePin -net $netId -fig $rectId]
##create an instance
set instId [dbCreateInst -cv $tcvId -master $mcvId -point (0,0)]
##create an instance port
set instPortId [dbCreateInstPort -inst $instId -port $portId]
##create a instance pin
dbCreateInstPin -instPort $instPortId -pin $pinId
268

K-2015.06

Logic Objects
dbCreateInstPort
The dbCreateInstPort command returns an instance port identifier if the
specified instance port can be created. The port can be specified by its
identifier or by its name.
Syntax
dbCreateInstPort -inst instId (-port portId | -name portName)
[-net netId]
Returns
An instPort (instance port) identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-inst instId
-name portName
Specify the port name on the master cell view.
-net netId
Specify the net identifier to which the created instance

port connects (default=no net).
-port portId
Specify the port identifier.
Examples
set portId1 [dbCreatePort -cv $mcvId -net $netId1 -dir Input]
set portId2 [dbCreatePort -cv $mcvId -net $netId2 \
-name outPort -dir Output]
set instId1 [dbCreateInst -cv $tcvId -master $mcvId \
-point ($x,$y)]
set instId2 [dbCreateInst -cv $tcvId -master $mcvId \
-point ($x+3,$y-3)]
dbCreateInstPort -inst instId1 -port portId1
dbCreateInstPort -inst instId2 -name outPort
dbCreateNet
The dbCreateNet command returns a net identifier if the net can be created.

K-2015.06
269

Logic Objects
If -get 1 is specified and a net with netName already exists, then the id of
the existing net is returned. If a net with netName does not exist, a new net
is created and the id of the new net is returned.
If -get 0 is specified and a net with netName already exists, then 0 is

returned. If a net with netName does not exist, a new net is created and the
id of the new net is returned.
If -declaration 1 is specified, a declaration net is created.
If -declaration 0 is specified and a declaration net with netName

already exists, then a new operation net is created. If a declaration net with
netName does not exist, a new declaration net is created before creating a
new operation net.
Syntax
dbCreateNet -cv cellviewId -name netName -get 0|1
[-declaration 0|1] [-leftIdx n1 -rightIdx n2 [-step n3]]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
-declaration 0|1]

1 : Create a declaration net. See details in Description.
0 : Create a declaration net first and then an operation net.
-get 0|1

1 : Get the net identifier. See details in Description.
0 : Do not get the net identifier.
-leftIdx n1
-name netName
-rightIdx n2
-step n3

n3 is an integer (default=1).
This argument is valid only if the -leftIdx and
-rightIdx arguments exist.
270

K-2015.06

Logic Objects
Examples
dbCreateNet -cv $cvId -name N
...
dbCreateNet -cv $cvId -name N -get 1
set netId [dbCreateNet -cv $cvId -name tin]
set netId [dbCreateNet -cv $cvId -name tin -declaration 0]
set GNetId [dbCreateNet -cv $cvId -name G -leftIdx 1 \
-rightIdx 6 -step 2]
...
See Also
dbCreatePin
lakerCreatePin
lakerAttribute
Layout Window: Create > Pin
Layout Window: Query > Attribute
symDsgCreatePin
symDsgQueryAttribute
Symbol Editor: Create > Pin
Symbol Editor: Query > Attribute
dbCreatePin
The dbCreatePin command returns a pin identifier if the pin can be created.
Syntax
dbCreatePin -net $netId -fig $figId [-name pinName] [-portDir
PortDir] [-dir accessDirection] [-jointType JointType]
Returns
A pin identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-dir accessDirection
Specify the pin direction.

Valid values: the combination of {Top}, {Bottom},
{Left}, and {Right} (default=all directions, that is,
{Top}{Bottom}{Left}{Right}).
-fig figId

K-2015.06
271

Logic Objects
Argument
Description
-jointType JointType
Specify the joint type for the specified pin.

Valid values: Disjointed, Strong, and Weak.
-name pinName
Specify the pin name (default=one sequence number

for all pins on the port).
-net netId
-portDir PortDir
Specify the port pin type.

Valid values: Input, Output, InputOutput, Jumper,
and Feedthrough (default=Input).
Examples
set rectId [dbCreateRect -cv $cvId -layer 1 -bbox (1,1)(2,2)]
dbCreatePin -net $netId1 -fig $rectId
See Also
dbCreatePort
lakerCreatePin
lakerAttribute
symDsgCreatePin
dbCreatePort
The dbCreatePort command returns a port identifier if the port can be
created.
Syntax
dbCreatePort -net $netId -dir direction [-name portName]
Returns
A port identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
272

K-2015.06

Logic Objects
Arguments
Argument
Description
-dir direction
Specify the direction of the port.

Valid values: Input, Output, InputOutput, and
Jumper.
-name portName
Specify the port name (default=name of netId).
-net netId
Examples
dbCreatePort -net $netId1 -dir Input
dbCreatePort -net $netId2 -dir Output -name O
See Also
dbCreatePin
dbCreateNet
lakerCreatePin
lakerAttribute
symDsgCreatePin
dbCreateSingleNet
The dbCreateSingleNet command returns a net identifier if the single net in
the specified cell view can be created.
Syntax
dbCreateSingleNet -cv cellViewId -name netName
Returns

K-2015.06
273

Logic Objects
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
-name netName
Examples
# Example 1
dbCreateSingleNet -cv $cvId -name N1
dbDeleteAllNet
The dbDeleteAllNet command returns 1 if all nets in the specified cell view
can be deleted.
Syntax
dbDeleteAllNet -cv cellviewId
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
Examples
dbDeleteAllNet -cv $cvId
dbDeviceSetParameter
The dbDeviceSetParameter command sets the value to the specified
parameter and triggers the callback of this paramter.
Syntax
dbDeviceSetParameter -cv cellviewId -inst instName -param
parameterName -value value
Returns
None
274

K-2015.06

Logic Objects
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellViewId
-inst instName
-param parameterName
-value value
Specify the parameter value.
Examples
dbDeviceSetParameter -cv oa:0x2a978cef1a -inst X1 -param ln \
-value 1
dbFindNet
The dbFindNet command returns a net identifier if the net in the specified cell
view can be found.
Syntax
dbFindNet -cv cellviewId -name netName [-leftIdx num
-rightIdx num [-step num]]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
-leftIdx num
Specify the left index of bus nets.

-name netName
-rightIdx num
Specify the right index of bus nets.


K-2015.06
275

Logic Objects
Argument
Description
-step num

Valid value: an integer (default=1).
This argument is used only when the -leftIdx and rightIdx exist.
Examples
# Example 1
dbFindNet -cv $cvId -name N1
# Example 2
dbCreateNet -cv $cv -name A
dbCreateNet -cv $cv -name A -declaration 0 -leftIdx 0 -rightIdx 4
dbCreateNet -cv $cv -name B
dbCreateNet -cv $cv -name B -declaration 0 -leftIdx 0 -rightIdx
4 -step 2
dbCreateNet -cv $cv -name C
dbCreateNet -cv $cv -name C -declaration 0
dbFindNet -cv $cv -name A -leftIdx 0 -rightIdx 4
dbFindNet -cv $cv -name C
dbFindNet -cv $cv -name B -leftIdx 0 -rightIdx 4 -step 2
See Also
lakerConnBrowser
lakerFindObj
adpDsgQueryFind
Schematic Editor: Query> Find
dbFindPort
The dbFindPort command returns a port identifier if the port in the specified
cell view can be found.
Syntax
dbFindPort -cv cellviewId -name portName
Returns
A port identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
276

K-2015.06

Logic Objects
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
-name portName
Specify the port name.
Examples
dbFindPort -cv $cvId -name P1
See Also
lakerFindObj
adpDsgQueryFind
Schematic Editor: Query> Find
dbGenPin
The dbGenPin command creates real pin shapes from the traversed shapes
with net and port properties and removes the soft pins after realization.
Syntax
dbGenPin -cv cellviewId -genPinBy label|net|mix
-topLevelOnly 0|1 -extLevel levelNo -useColonVirtual 0|1
-pinSize 0|1 -width width
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
Specify the working cell view.
-genPinBy
label|net|mix
Specify the method for pin creation.

Valid values: label, net, mix (default=label).

K-2015.06
277

Logic Objects
Argument
Description
-topLevelOnly 0|1

1: Create pin shapes from the traversed shapes with net
and port properties at top level, and the soft pin is
removed.
0: Not only create pin shapes from top level, but also
from instance.
-useColonVirtual 0|1

1 : Use colon as the virtual connection.
0 : Do not use colon as the virtual connection.
This option decides whether the joint type of a
generated pin shape is weak or disjointed. If the label is
followed by a colon (:), it is weak.
-extLevel levelNo
Specify the extraction level.

Valid value: an integer, from 0 to 49 (default=0).
-pinSize 0|1

1 : Limit the size of pin shapes.
0 : Do not limit the size of pin shapes.
This option controls the size of generated pin shapes.
-width width
Specify the width of a rectangle to limit the size of

generated pin shape.
Examples
set lib1 [dbOpenLib -lib cpu]
if { $lib1 != 0 } {
set cv1 [dbOpenCV -lib lib -cell na2c -view layout]
if { $cv1 != 0 } {
dbGenPin -cv $cv1 -genPinBy mix -topLevelOnly 0 -extLevel 1 \
-useColonVirtual 1 -pinSize 1 -width 100
dbSaveCV -cv $cv1
dbCloseCV -cv $cv1
}
dbCloseLib -lib $lib1
}
See Also
lakerGenPin
Layout Window: SDL > Gen Pin
278

K-2015.06

Logic Objects
dbGetGlobalNet
The dbGetGlobalNet command returns a name list of power nets, ground
nets and global nets of the specified cell view.
Syntax
dbGetGlobalNet -cv cellviewId
Returns
{net name list of power} {net name list of ground} {net
name list of global net} if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
Specify the cell view identifier of the specified cell view.
Examples
set globalNet [dbGetGlobalNet -cv [lakerGetWndCellViewId]]
# The returned globalNet can be {VDD VDD1} {VSS} {signet}
dbMakeBusNet
The dbMakeBusNet command returns a net identifier if the bus net in the
specified cell view can be made.
Syntax
dbMakeBusNet -cv cellViewId -name netName -leftIdx n1
-rightIdx n2 [-step n3]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
-leftIdx n1
-name netName

K-2015.06
279

Logic Objects
Argument
Description
-rightIdx n2
-step n3
Specify the interval size of bus nets. This argument is valid

only if the
-leftIdx and -rightIdx arguments exist. n3 is an
integer (default=1).
Examples
# Example 1
dbMakeBusNet -cv $cvId -name G -leftIdx 0 -rightIdx 5
# Example 2
dbMakeBusNet -cv $cvId -name D -leftIdx 0 -rightIdx 6 -step 2
dbCreateSingleNet
The dbMakeSingleNet command returns a net identifier if the single net in
the specified cell view can be made.
Syntax
dbMakeSingleNet -cv cellViewId -name netName
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
-name netName
Examples
# Example 1
dbMakeSingleNet -cv $cvId -name N1
280

K-2015.06

Parameters
Parameters
This section describes the Tcl commands that are related to parameters. These
commands include:
dbCellFind
dbCopyParam
dbCreateParam
dbDeleteParamByName
dbFindParam
dbLoadCellCDF
dbLoadLibCDF
dbSaveCellCDF
dbSaveLibCDF
dbCellFind
The dbCellFind command locates the cell view identifier (ID) by specifying a
library ID and cell name.
Syntax
dbCellFind -lib $libId -cell cellName
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
-lib $libId
Examples
dbCellFind -lib $libId -cell cellA

K-2015.06
281

Parameters
dbCopyParam
The dbCopyParam command returns 1 if all parameters can be copied from
one object to another.
Syntax
dbCopyParam -obj1 objId1 -obj2 objId2
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-obj1 objId1
Specify the identifier of the source object.
-obj2 objId2
Specify the identifier of the destination object.
Examples
dbCopyParam -obj1 $MasterId1 -obj2 $MasterId2
dbCreateParam
The dbCreateParam command returns 1 if all parameters can be copied from
one object to another.
Syntax
dbCreateParam -obj objId -name paramName [-promptName
promptName] -type paramType [-value paramValue] [displayed 0|1] [-visible 0|1] [-editable 0|1] [-asTCL
0|1] [-asVarExpr 0|1] [-replace 0|1] [-hasdefault 0|1]
Returns
Arguments
282
Argument
Description
-asTCL 0|1
Specify the switch mode of asTCL.


K-2015.06

Parameters
Argument
Description
-asVarExpr 0|1
Specify the switch mode of asVarExpr.

-displayed 0|1
Specify the switch mode of the display setting.

-editable 0|1
Specify the switch mode of the editable setting.

-hasdefault 0|1
Specify the switch mode of the default setting.

-name paramName
-obj objId
-promptName
promptName
Specify the prompt name.
-replace 0|1
Specify the switch mode of the replacement setting.

-type paramType
Specify the parameter type.

Valid values for Laker: Int, Float, String, and
Boolean.
Valid values for ADP: Int, Float, String, Radio,
Cyclic, Boolean, Checkbox, , PccInt, PccFloat,
PccString, PccBoolean, PccLpPair , Hidden, and
PccUserPair.
-value paramValue
Specify the parameter value. This value depends on the

-type option.
-visible 0|1
Specify the switch mode of the visibility setting.

Examples
# Example 1
dbCreateParam -obj $inst1 -name qaqa -promptName qaqa_prompt \
-type String -value aaaaaa -displayed 0 -visible 1 \
-editable 1 -asTCL 0 -asVarExpr 0
# Example 2
K-2015.06
283

Parameters
dbCreateParam -obj $inst1 -name xxxx -promptName xxxx_prompt \

-type String -value xxxxxx -displayed 1 -visible 0 \
-editable 1 -asTCL 0 -asVarExpr 0
# Example 3
dbCreateParam -obj $rectId -name rect_A \
-promptName rect_prompt -type Hidden -value D -displayed 0 \
-visible 1 -editable 1 -asTCL 0 -asVarExpr 0
# Example 4
dbCreateParam -obj $instId -name inst_A \
-promptName inst_prompt -type Hidden \
-value aaa -displayed 0 -visible 1 -editable 1 \
-asTCL 0 -asVarExpr 0
dbDeleteParamByName
The dbDeleteParamByName command returns 1 if the parameter can be
deleted by giving a parameter name.
Syntax
dbDeleteParamByName -obj objId -name paramName
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-name paramName
-obj objId

Valid values: Figure identifier, net identifier, port identifier,
pin identifier, instance port identifier, and instance pin
identifier.
Examples
dbDeleteParamByName -obj $inst2 -name aaa
dbFindParam
The dbFindParam command returns a parameter identifier if the parameter
can be found by giving a parameter name.
284

K-2015.06

Parameters
Syntax
dbFindParam -obj cellId -name paramName
Returns
Parameter identifier if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-name paramName
-obj cellId
Specify the object identifier. Use dbGet -obj $cellId

to get all parameter identifiers. Use dbGet -obj
anyParamId to get the name of any parameters.
Examples
# Example 1
# Check find parameter by name
puts $file "\n#####Check Find Parameter by Name#####"
puts $file "#inst1's parameter:#"
set tmp [dbFindParam -obj $inst1 -name xxxx]
set P_Name [dbGet -obj $tmp -attr Name ]
set P_Type [dbGet -obj $tmp -attr Type ]
set P_ProName [dbGet -obj $tmp -attr PromptName ]
set P_ParamType [dbGet -obj $tmp -attr ParamType ]
set P_Value [dbGet -obj $tmp -attr Value ]
set P_Visible [dbGet -obj $tmp -attr Visible ]
set P_Editable [dbGet -obj $tmp -attr Editable ]
set P_AsTCL [dbGet -obj $tmp -attr AsTCL ]
set P_AsVarExpr [dbGet -obj $tmp -attr AsVarExpr ]
set P_Displayed [dbGet -obj $tmp -attr Displayed ]
set P_HasDefault [dbGet -obj $tmp -attr HasDefault ]
puts $file "$P_Name $P_Type $P_ProName $P_ParamType $P_Value
$P_Visible $P_Editable $P_AsTCL $P_AsVarExpr
$P_Displayed $P_HasDefault"
close $file
# Example 2
set libId [dbOpenLib -lib analogADP -mode readOnly]
set cellId [dbCellFind -lib analogADP -cell nmos]
dbLoadCellCDF -cellId $cellId
dbFindParam -obj $cellId -name trise
dbFindParam -obj $cellId -name ls
dbFindParam -obj $cellId -name ld
dbFindParam -obj $cellId -name geo

K-2015.06
285

Parameters
dbLoadCellCDF
The dbLoadCellCDF command loads the CDF data from a file (for example:
data.dm) to memory.
Syntax
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cellId $cellId
Examples
See Also
dbLoadLibCDF
dbSaveCellCDF
dbSaveLibCDF
dbLoadLibCDF
The dbLoadLibCDF command loads the CDF data from a library to memory.
Syntax
dbLoadLibCDF -lib $libId
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib $libId
Examples
dbLoadLibCDF -lib $libId
286

K-2015.06

Parameters
See Also
dbLoadCellCDF
dbSaveCellCDF
dbSaveLibCDF
dbSaveCellCDF
The dbSaveCellCDF command saves the CDF data from memory to a file (for
example: data.dm).
Syntax
dbSaveCellCDF -cellId $cellId
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cellId $cellId
Examples
dbSaveCellCDF -cellId $cellId
See Also
dbLoadCellCDF
dbLoadLibCDF
dbSaveLibCDF
dbSaveLibCDF
The dbSaveLibCDF command saves the CDF data from memory to a library.
Syntax
dbSaveLibCDF -lib $libId
Returns
None

K-2015.06
287

Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib $libId
Examples
dbSaveLibCDF -lib $libId
See Also
dbLoadCellCDF
dbLoadLibCDF
dbSaveCellCDF

This section describes the Tcl commands that are related to the manipulation
on general objects. These commands include:
288
dbAddChildToParent
dbArea
dbColorBackAnno
dbColorPropagation
dbDelete
dbGet
dbGetChild
dbGetLastModifyTime
dbGetParent
dbGetShapeDimension
dbIterateDB
dbIsDbObj
dbIterateLib
dbSelObjsByType
dbSet

K-2015.06

dbAddChildToParent
The dbAddChildToParent command returns 1 if there is a parent/child
relationship between two objects.
Syntax
dbAddChildToParent -child objId1 -parent objId2
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-child objId1
Specify the child object identifier.
-parent objId2
Specify the parent object identifier.
Examples
set obj1 [dbCreateRect -cv $cvId -layer 1 -bbox
(1.0,2.0)(3.5,4.2)]
set obj2 [dbCreateRect -cv $cvId -layer 2 -bbox
(3.3,4.4)(5.5,6.6)]
dbAddChildToParent -child $obj2 -parent $obj1
dbArea
The dbArea command estimates the area of pointed shapes.
Syntax
dbArea -cv cellviewId [-layer {layerName purposeName} {...}]
[-fromlevel Level] [-tolevel Level] [-file fileName]
dbArea -figs dbFig [-file fileName]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId

K-2015.06
289

Argument
Description
-figs dbFig
Specify the list of figures.
-file fileName
Save the measurement results to a specified file (*.log).

The file path is printed in the message pane of the Home
page.
-fromlevel Level
Specify the start level (default=current start level).

-layer {{layerName
purposeName} {...}
Specify the layer of the displayed shapes (default=layer

of all displayed shapes).
-tolevel Level
Specify the view level (default=current view level).

Examples
None
See Also
lakerArea
dbColorBackAnno
The dbColorBackAnno command returns 1 if all uncolored and unlocked
shapes in the top cell can be scanned and their color attribute can be updated
according to the attribute on the corresponding shapes in the color cell.
Syntax
Syntax 1:
dbColorBackAnno {{-topLib libName -topCell cellName [topView viewName]} | -topCv cellViewId}
Syntax 2:
dbColorBackAnno {{-colorLib libName -colorCell cellName [colorView viewName]} | -colorCv cellViewId}
Returns
290

K-2015.06

Arguments
Argument
Description
-colorCell cellName
Specify the cell name of the color cell.
-colorCv cellViewId
Specify the cell view identifier of the color cell.
-colorLib libName
Specify the library name of the color cell.
-colorView viewName
Specify the view type of the color cell. The default is layout.
-topCell cellName
Specify the top cell name.
-topCv cellViewId
Specify the cell view identifier of the top cell.
-topLib libName
Specify the library name of the top cell.
-topView viewName
Specify a view type. The default is layout.
Examples
dbColorBackAnno -topCv CvId -colorLib libName -colorCell cellName
dbColorPropagation
The dbColorPropagation command returns 1 if locked shapes can be
created on 0x for the unlocked shapes that are connected to the locked shapes
but not fully covered by them.
Syntax
dbColorPropagation {{{-lib libName -cell cellName [-view
viewName]} | -cv cellViewId} [-clearOnly] [mapToFullLock] }
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName

K-2015.06
291

Argument
Description
-clearOnly
When specified, only delete shapes created by

dbColorPropagation.
When not specified, delete shapes created by
dbColorPropagation and regenerate the shapes
according to the current design. This argument is off by
default.
-cv cellViewId
-lib libName
-mapToFullLock
When specified, propagate the color by colored shapes.

When not specified, propagate the color by locked shapes.
This argument is off by default.
-view viewName
Specify a view type. The default is layout.
Examples
dbColorPropagation -cv [lakerGetWndCellViewId]
dbDelete
The dbDelete command returns 1 if the specified object can be deleted.
Syntax
dbDelete -obj objId
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-obj objId

Valid values: Figure identifier, net identifier, port identifier, pin
identifier, instance port identifier, and instance pin identifier.
Examples
set rectId [dbCreateRect -cv $cvId -layer 1 -bbox (0,0)(1,2)]
dbDelete -obj $rectId
292

K-2015.06

dbGet
The dbGet command returns an attribute value if the attribute value of a
certain object attribute can be obtained.
The object attributes and their valid values are described in the following tables.
Objects
Attribute Names
AppType
appTypeName
Arc
All, AllNames, CV, Params, Props, BBox, Net, Parent,

IsVisible, Pin, Layer, LayerNum, Purpose, PurposeNum,
Type
Array
All, AllNames, CV, Props, Params, BBox, Net, Parent,

IsVisible, Pin, Type, CellName, ColSpace, Cols, LibName,
Mag, Master, Name, Orient, Point, RowSpace, Rows,
ViewName, ParamContent
CellView
All, AllNames, CV, Props, Params, Type, Arrays, BBox,

CellName, CellViewType, DBUPerUU, FileName,
GroupMembers, Groups, InstCount, InstHeaders, Insts,
IsModified, Lib, LibName, Masters, Mode, NetCount, Nets,
Parameters, PortCount, Ports, Shapes, UserUnit,
ViewName, LPs, UsedIn, RepType, UnneedAPR, opNets,
ParamContent, SimInfos, OtherInfos
CustomViaHeader
All, AllNames, Params, Props, Type, Arrays, BBox,

CellName, CellViewType, DBUPerUU, FileName,
GroupMembers, Groups, InstCount, InstHeaders, Insts,
IsModified, Lib, LibName, Masters, Mode, NetCount, Nets,
PortCount, Ports, RepType, Shapes, UserUnit, ViewName,
LPs, UsedIn
Dot

Type, Height, Point, Width, ParamContent
Doughnut

Type, Inner, Outer, Point, ParamContent, Color, Lock

K-2015.06
293

294
Objects
Attribute Names
Ellipse

Type, ParamContent, Color, Lock
Group
Type, GroupType, Members, Name, Objects, ParamContent
Group Member
All, AllNames, CV, Params, Props, Type, Dir, Name, Net,

NumBits, PinCount, Pins, JointType
HET
All, AllNames, CV, Props, Params, Type, InstPins,

InstPortCount, InstPorts, Figs, Name, NameWithRange,
NumBits, Pins, Port, Priority, DefShieldNetName,
DefNetNondefRuleName, DefNetSource,
DefOriginalNetName, DefNetUsage, DefNetProperty,
Range, Step, ZeroBus, NetType, UserDefName,
ParamContent
Instance

IsVisible, Pin, Type, CellName, InstHeader, InstPins,
InstPorts, LibName, Mag, Master, Name, Num, Orient,
Point, ViewName, DefCompSource, DefCompPlaceStatus,
DefCompProperty, IsDefSpecialNetObj,
DefShieldNetName, DefWireShape, ParamContent
InstPin
All, AllNames, CV, Props, Params, Type, BBox, InstPort,

Name, Net, Pin, ParamContent
InstPort
All, AllNames, CV, Props, Params, Type, Inst, InstPins,

Name, Net, NumBits, Port, IsWidthOK,
IsDefSpecialNetObj, ParamContent
InstHeader
All, AllNames, CV, Props, Params, Type, CellName, Insts,

Arrays, LibName, Master, ViewName, ParamContent
Label

Type, Font, Height, IsDrafted, IsOverbar, Justify, Orient,
Point, Text, Spacing, LabelType, ParamContent
Layer
Name, Lib, LayerNum, PurposeNum, Stipple, OutlineColor,

FillColor, LineStyle, Packet, Params, ParamContent
LD
Type, Layer, Purpose, ShapeNum, BBox

K-2015.06

Objects
Attribute Names
Lib
Mode, Name, Scale, Resolution, Params, ParamContent
Line

Type, PointNum, Points, ParamContent
LP
All, AllNames, CV, Params, Props, BBox, Net, Parent,

IsVisible, Pin, Type, CellName, InstHeader, InstPins,
InstPorts, LibName, Mag, Master, Name, Num, Orient,
Point, ViewName, DefCompSource, DefCompPlaceStatus,
DefCompProperty, IsDefSpecialNetObj,
DefShieldNetName, DefWireShape
Net
All, AllNames, CV, Params, Props, Type, Dir, Fig, Name,

Net, Port, UserDefName, Range, IsBus, IsSingle, IsBundle
Netlist
All, AllNames, Name, namePrefix, termOrder
Path
All, AllNames, CV, Props, BBox, IsVisible, Net, Parent, Pin,

Layer, LayerNum, Purpose, PurposeNum, Type, BeginExt,
EndExt, PointNum, Points, Style, Width, IsDefSpecialPin,
DefPinPlaceStatus, DefPinPosition, DefPinOrient,
IsDefSpecialNetObj, DefShieldNetName, DefWireShape,
ParamContent, OutlinePoints, Status, Color, Lock
Pin
All, AllNames, CV, Props, Params, Type, Dir, JointType, Fig,

Name, Net, Port, PortDir, Origin, ParamContent
Polygon

Type, PointNum, Points, IsDefSpecialPin,
IsDefSpecialNetObj, DefShieldNetName, DefWireShape,
ParamContent, Color, Lock
Port
All, AllNames, CV, Props, Params, Type, Dir, Name, Net,

NumBits, PinCount, Pins, PortType, ParamContent
Property
All, AllNames, Type, Group, Object

K-2015.06
295

Objects
Attribute Names
Rectangle

Type, IsDefSpecialPin, DefPinPlaceStatus, DefPinPosition,
DefPinOrient, IsDefSpecialNetObj, DefShieldNetName,
DefWireShape, ParamContent, Color, Lock
Route

IsVisible, Pin, Purpose, PurposeNum, Type, IsSpecial,
Status, Topology, Spec, Color, Lock
RowArea
Type, BBox, Points
siteDef
All, AllNames, Type, Name, SiteDefType, Width, Height,

IsSymmX, IsSymmY, IsSymmRot, IsVirtual
StdViaHeader
Mode, Name, Scale, Resolution
If -attr All is specified, all attribute values of the specified object are
returned.
If -attr AllNames is specified, all attribute names that belong to the specified
object are returned.
The following table represents the valid values of each attribute.
296
Attribute Name
Valid Values
appTypeName
Any name strings.
Arrays
A list of identifiers of arrays.
BBox
abcd
(a, b)(c, d)
{{a b}{c d}}
BeginExt
A positive floating number.
beginPoint, endPoint
A point.
beginStyle, endStyle
{Truncate}, {Extend}, {Variable Ext}, {Chamfer},

{Custom Ext LefDiagExt RightDiagExt RightHalfWidth}
CellName
A cell name which is a string.

K-2015.06

Attribute Name
Valid Values
CellViewType
maskLayout, schematicSymbol, schematic, netlist,

state, stranger, vhEntityHier, vhEntityData, vhArchHier,
vhArchData, vhConfHier, vhConfData, vhPackHier,
vhPackBodyData, vhPackData.
Color
String.
Color value, 0-7
Cols
A positive integer.
ColSpace
A floating number.
CustomVia
{CustomVia DefName {Origin} Orient ViaHeader

Master}
Example:
{CustomVia Via23 {-445.900 240.125} R0 3aa6758
36e800c}
cutColumns, cutRows
A postive integer.
cutPattern
{1 0 1 ... } where the number of 0/1 sequence is

cutColums*cutRows. cutPattern is optional if all
specified values are 1.
cutWidth, cutHeight
A floating number.
CV
A cell view identifier.
DBUPerUU
A floating number.
DefCompPlaceStatus
Place status of the input component: FIXED, COVER,

PLACED, UNPLACED.
DefCompProperty
DEF property string of the input component.
DefCompSource
Source type of the input component: NETLIST, DIST,

USER, TIMING.
DefName
Name of via definition.
DefNetNondefRuleName The non-default rule used by the input net.

K-2015.06
297

298
Attribute Name
Valid Values
DefNetProperty
DEF property string of the input net.
DefNetSource
Source type of the input net: NETLIST, DIST, USER,

TIMING, TEST.
DefNetUsage
Usage of the input net: ANALOG, CLOCK, GROUND,

POWER, RESET, SCAN, SIGNAL, TIEOFF.
DefOriginalNetName
The original net of the input net.
DefPinOrient
Orientation: R0, R90, R180, R270, MXR0, MXR90,

MYR0, MYR90.
DefPinPlaceStatus
Place status of the input pin: FIXED, COVER, PLACED,

UNPLACED.
DefPinPosition
(a,b), a b, {a b}
DefShieldNetName
For Net object type, this specifies the net shielding the
input net. For other object types, this specifies the net
shielded by the input object.
DefWireShape
Wire shape type of the input object: RING, PADRING,

BLOCKRING, STRIPE, FOLLOWPIN, IOWIRE,
OREWIRE, BLOCKWIRE, BLOCKAGEWIRE,
FILLWIRE, DRCFILL.
DeleteWhen
Never, First, Last.
Dir (access direction of a

pin)
Single value: Left, Right, Top, Bottom.

Multiple values: Value string with braces, like {Left Top}
or {Left Bottom Right}.
Dir (port direction)
Input, Output, InputOutput, Jumper, Feedthrough.
ElementId
A list of identifiers of route objects.
EllipseBBox
An ellipse bounding box (the same as BBox).
EndExt

K-2015.06

Attribute Name
Valid Values
Ext LefDiagExt
RightDiagExt
RightHalfWidth
A floating number.
Figs
A list of identifiers of figures.
FileName
A file name.
FillColor
Fill color.
Font
Modern, Fixed, Raster, Modern1, Script, Roman,

TTAGth, TTARoman, TTASlab.
Group
A group identifier.
GroupMembers
A list of identifiers of group members.
Groups
A list of identifiers of groups.
GroupType
Set, Collect.
Height
Inner
InstCount
A positive integer.
InstHeader
Identifier of an instance header.
InstHeaders
A list of identifiers of instance headers.
InstPins
A list of identifiers of instance pins.
InstPort
Identifier of an instance port.
InstPortCount
A positive integer.
InstPorts
A list of identifiers of instance ports.
Insts
A list of identifiers of instances.
IsBundle
0, 1

K-2015.06
299

300
Attribute Name
Valid Values
IsBus
0, 1
IsDefSpecialNetObj
0, 1
IsDefSpecialPin
0, 1
IsDrafted
0, 1
IsModified
0, 1
IsOrdered
0, 1
IsOverbar
0, 1
IsSingle
0, 1
IsSpecial
0, 1
IsSymmRot
0, 1
IsSymmX
0, 1
IsSymmY
0, 1
IsUniqueName
0, 1
IsVirtual
0, 1
IsVisible
0, 1
JointType
Disjointed, Strong, Weak.
Justify
UpperLeft, CenterLeft, LowerLeft, UpperCenter,

CenterCenter, LowerCenter, UpperRight, CenterRight,
LowerRight.
LabelType
Normal, Annotate, Comment.
Layer
0~255 or a layer name.
Layer1, Layer2, cutLayer
The same as Layer.

K-2015.06

Attribute Name
Valid Values
layer1Enclosure,
A pair of floating numbers.
layer2Enclosure,
implant1Enc,
implant2Enc,
layer1Offset, layer2Offset,
originOffset, cutSpacing
Layer1Num, Layer2Num, The same as LayerNum.
cutLayerNum
LayerNum
0~255
Lib
A library identifier.
LibName
Logical name of a library.
LineStyle
Line style.
List of Params
{layer1Enclosure}{layer2Enclosure}{implant1Enc}
{implant2Enc}{layer1Offset}{layer2Offset}
{originOffset}{cutSpacing}
cutLayer cutLayerNum cutPurpose cutPurposeNum
cutWidth cutHeight cutColumns cutRows {cutPatterns}
Example:
{{0.600 0.600} {0.600 0.600} {0.000 0.000}
{0.000 0.000} {0.000 0.000} {0.000 0.000}
{0.000 0.000} {0.450 0.450}
VIA12 17 drawing 252 0.5 0.5 15 15}
Lock
String.
Mag
A floating number.
Master
Identifier of a master cell view.
Masters
A list of identifiers of master cellviews.
Members
A list of identifiers of members.
Mode
create, edit, readOnly
Name
Object name.

K-2015.06
301

302
Attribute Name
Valid Values
NameWithRange
Object name with range (only useful for nets).
Net
A net identifier or 0.
NetCount
A positive integer.
Nets
A list of identifiers of declaration nets.
NumBits
An integer.
opNets
A list of identifiers of operation nets.
Obj
An object identifier.
Object
An object identifier.
Objects
A list of identifiers of objects.
Orient

MYR0, MYR90.
Origin
A point value, for example: (x,y).
OtherInfos
All other information.
Outer
OutlineColor
Outline color.
OutlinePoints
Coordinate points of the path outline, path segment

outline, or via.
Packet
Display group.
Params
Type, Name, PromptName, ParamType, Value, Visible,

Editable, AsTCL, AsVarExpr, Displayed, HasDefault,
CellView, Instance, InstHeader, Array, Rectangle,
Polygon, Line, Path, Label, Arc, Ellipse, Doughnut, Dot,
Net, Port, Pin, Instance Port, Instance Pin, Route,
CustomViaHeader, StdViaHeader

K-2015.06

Attribute Name
Valid Values
PathSeg
{PathSeg LayerNum {beginPoint} {endPoint} width

{beginStyle} {endStyle}}
Example:
{PathSeg 28 {-192.500 296.025} {-192.500 297.325}
0.6 {Extend} {Extend}}
Pin
A pin identifier or 0.
PinCount
A positive integer.
Pins
A list of identifiers of pins.
Point
A point.
PointNum
A positive integer.
Points
A list of points.
PortCount
A positive integer.
Ports
A list of identifiers of ports.
PortType
Unknown, Data, Clock, SyncSet, SyncReset,

AsyncSet, AsyncReset, Control, TriEnable,
ComboOutput, TriOutput, Latched, Registered,
InferLatch, FSMControl, FSMOutput, OffPageConn,
Hidden.
If the PortType is not defined, the return value is
"UnknownPort {}".
Priority
0~127
Props
A list of identifiers of properties.
Purpose
0~255 or a purpose name.
Purpose1, Purpose2,
cutPurpose
The same as Purpose.
Purpose1Num,
Purpose2Num,
cutPurposeNum
The same as PurposeNum.

K-2015.06
303

304
Attribute Name
Valid Values
PurposeNum
0~255
Range
<bus range>, for example: <0:5>
RepType
UnknownCell, NotCell, OrCell, AndCell, NorCell,

NandCell, BufCell, XorCell, XNorCell, AOICell,
OAICell, ComboCell, MacroCell, TriBufCell, InBufCell,
OutBufCell, TriCell, FlipFlopCell, LatchCell, DelayCell,
MosCell, InputPadCell, OutputPadCell, InoutPadCell,
GroundPadCell, PowerPadCell, IOCell, PullUpCell,
PullDownCell, BusRepeaterCell, FpgaRamCell,
FpgaRomCell, InternalRamCell, InternalRomCell,
InternalAsycCell, ExternalRamCell, ExternalRomCell,
MuxCell, CpmCell, DecoderCell, AdderCell, MulCell,
DivCell, SubCell, AssignCell, OpCell, ConnectorCell,
FSMCell, InitCell, EQCell, GenerateCell, UserCell,
InfLatchCell, GlobalSignalCell, TranCell,
FlipFlopGroupCell, ConcatCell, BusKeeperCell,
BiDirectionCell, FlipFlopResetGroupCell,
LatchGroupCell, LatchResetGroupCell, GateClkCell,
RipperCell, BusSplitterCell, MacroGroupCell,
BufGroupCell, NotGroupCell, LogoCell, Bd2scrCell,
Bt2crpCell, SchmitcdqCell, Bd2crdqpCell,
Bd2hzicaruqpCell, BdstardqpCell, SheetCell,
TerminatorCell, NMosCell, PMosCell, DiodeCell,
NPNCell, PNPCell, NJFCell, PJFCell, ResCell,
CapCell, IndCell, SubcktCell, VoltageSource,
CurrentSource, VCVSource, VCCSource, VCResistor,
VCCapacitor, CCVSource, CCCSource, OpAmpCell,
TransformerCell, BVSource, BCSource, MutualIndCell
Resolution
The resolution of the cell view in the library.
Rows
A positive integer.
RowSpace
A floating number.
Scale
dbScale.
ShapeCount
A positive integer.
ShapeNum
A positive integer.

K-2015.06

Attribute Name
Valid Values
Shapes
A list of identifiers of shapes.
SimInfos
All netlist information.
SiteDefType
Core, Pad
Spec
The Spec name of routes. When SpecValue is NULL,

the Spec value in $routeId is cleared.
StartAngle
A floating number.
Status
Normal, Cover, Fixed, Routed, Shield, NoShield
StdVia
{StdVia DefName {Origin} Orient ViaHeader Master}
Stipple
Stipple pattern.
StopAngle
A floating number.
Style
Truncate, Extend, Round, Variable
Text
A string.
Topology
None, Ring, PadRing, BlockRing, Stripe, FollowPin,

IOWire, CoreWire, BlockWire, BlockageWire, FillWire,
DrcFill
Type
Array, Arc, ArrayInst, Cell view, Instance,

InstanceHeader, Dot, Doughnut, Ellipse, Label, Line,
Path, Polygon, Rectangle, InstPort, Port, InstPin, Pin,
Net, Property, Group, RowArea, dbSiteDef,
GroupMember, LP, Route, CustomViaHeader,
StdViaHeader, 0|1 (if return value=0, then
UnneedAPR=FALSE; if return value=1, then
UnneedAPR=TRUE).
Type (for NetType)
SIGNAL, GROUND, SUPPLY, GLOBAL.
UsedIn
A list of cell view identifiers.

K-2015.06
305

Attribute Name
Valid Values
UserDefName
0, 1
Returns 1 when the net is a user-defined net.
Returns 0 when the net is not a user-defined net.
UserUnit
micro, millimeter, centimeter, meter, mil, inch.
Value
A property value which may be 0, 1, a string, an integer,

a floating number, or an identifier.
ValueType
Integer, Float, String, Boolean, HierProp.
ViaHeader
Identifier of a via header.
ViewName
A view name.
Width
Syntax
dbGet -obj objId [-attr attrName] [-attType attType]
Returns
An attribute value if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
306
Argument
Description
-attr attrName
Specify the attribute name (default=All).
-attType attType
Specify the attribute type.

Valid values: original, and user.
-obj objId

Valid values: cell view identifier, instance identifier, instance
header identifier, array identifier, rectangle identifier,
polygon identifier, line identifier, path identifier, label
identifier, arc identifier, ellipse identifier, doughnut identifier,
dot identifier, parameter identifier, property identifier, group
identifier, group member identifier, net identifier, netlist
identifier, pin identifier, port identifier, instance port identifier,
instance pin identifier, route identifier, library identifier, layer
identifier, and via header identifier.

K-2015.06

Examples
# Example 1
dbGet -obj $cvId
dbGet -obj $cvId -attr BBox
dbGet -obj $rectId -attr AllNames
dbGet -obj $rectId -attr All
dbGet -obj $instId -attr DefCompSource
dbGet -obj $rectId -attr DefPinPlaceStatus
dbGet -obj $polyId -attr DefPinPosition
dbGet -obj $pathId -attr DefPinOrient
dbGet -obj $netId -attr DefNetUsage
dbGet -obj $instPortId -attr IsDefSpecialNetObj
# Example 2
# Return value: 0.0001
dbGet -obj $libId -attr Scale
# Example 3
# Return value: 0.005
dbGet -obj $libId -attr Resolution
# Example 4
set workLib [dbOpenLib -lib def]
set layers [dbGetLayerIdsByLib -lib $workLib]
foreach layer $layers {
lakerMessage [dbGet -obj $layer]
}
# Example 5
dbGet -obj $PropId -attr Value
#(a) When this Prop's value Type are LpPair, UserPair return
#
{layerNum purposeNum}
#(b) When this Prop's value Type is Time return
#
{Mar 31 12:50:30 2005}
#(c) When this Prop's value Type is Boolean return
#
0
or
1
#(d) Other supported types: String, Int, Float, DBId.
#(e) Not supported types: HierProp, BString.
# Example 6
# For JointType
dbGet -obj $pinId -attr JointType
# The return value is one of {Disjointed, Strong, Weak}

K-2015.06
307

# Example 7
# For AccessDirection
dbGet -obj $pinId -attr Dir -value Value
# (1) When Value is a single value,
#
then the Value is one of the following four strings
#
Top, Buttom, Left, Right
#
For example:
#
dbGet -obj $pinId -attr Dir > Top
# (2) When Value is a multiple value,
#
then the Value is composed string with braces of the following
#
four strings Top, Buttom, Left, and Right
#
For example:
#
dbGet -obj $pinId -attr Dir > {Top Bottom}
# Example 8
# For pinType(PortDirType)
dbGet -obj $pinId -attr PortDir
# The return value is one of
#
{Input, Output, InputOutput, Jumper, Feedthrough}
# Example 9
# When SpecValue=="NULL", it clears the Spec Value in $routeId.
dbSet -obj $routeId -attr Spec -value SpecValue
# Example 10
# this returns 0|1
dbGet -obj $pathSegId -attr IsSpecial
# Example 11
foreach rowarealist [dbGet -obj $cvId -attr RowArea] {
dbGet -obj $rowarealist -attr Type > return Type(RowArea)
dbGet -obj $rowarealist -attr BBox
dbGet -obj $rowarealist -attr Points
}
# the results are:
# Row (Type) : RowArea
# Row (BBox) : {{0.195 0.170} {70.150 54.365}}
# Row (Points): {0.195 0.170} {70.150 0.170} {70.150 54.365}
#
{0.195 54.365}
#
#
#
#
308
Example 12
If -attr = " " or "All" or no -attr option, all of the RowArea
related information is returned. But if -attr = ALL,
no results are returned.

K-2015.06

set Ans [dbGet -obj $rowarealist]

puts $file "Row (no -attr)
: $Ans "
set Ans [dbGet -obj $rowarealist -attr ]
puts $file "Row (
)
: $Ans "
set Ans [dbGet -obj $rowarealist -attr All]
puts $file "Row (All)
: $Ans "
set Ans [dbGet -obj $rowarealist -attr ALL]
puts $file "Row (ALL)
: $Ans "
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
the results are:

Row (no -attr): Type: RowArea
BBox: {{0.195 0.170} {70.150 54.365}}
Points: {{0.195 0.170} {70.150 0.170}
{70.150 54.365} {0.195 54.365}}
ParamContent:
Row (
)
: Type: RowArea
BBox: {{0.195 0.170} {70.150 54.365}}
Points: {{0.195 0.170} {70.150 0.170}
{70.150 54.365} {0.195 54.365}}
ParamContent:
Row (All)
: Type: RowArea
BBox: {{0.195 0.170} {70.150 54.365}}
Points: {{0.195 0.170} {70.150 0.170}
{70.150 54.365} {0.195 54.365}}
ParamContent:
Row (ALL)
:
# Example 13
# get AppType
dbSet -obj $id -attr AppType -value appTypeName
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
Example 14
1. Get drawing pattern (stipple, outline color, fill color,
line style, display group) by layerID:
dbGet -obj layerId -attr Stipple
dbGet -obj layerId -attr LineStyle
dbGet -obj layerId -attr FillColor
dbGet -obj layerId -attr OutlineColor
dbGet -obj layerId -attr Packet
2. If drawing pattern of one layer is a display group, use the
command dbGetDispGroupInfo -disp $dispGroup
to get the attribute string/list of the group.
Attribute string: { fillColor stipple outColor lineStyle }
3. The stipple settings to Tcl interpreter by their names defined
in display file.
4. The color settings to Tcl interpreter as a Tcl variable array.
The indices are the color names defined in display file.

K-2015.06
309

#
Ex. LayerColor(winColor0)
# 5. The line style settings to Tcl interpreter as a Tcl variable
#
array.
#
The indices are the line style names defined in display file.
#
Ex. LayerLine(dots)
# 6. The line width can be got by the following command
#
dbGetLineStyleWidth -lineStyle $lineStyle
# 7. "Solid" line style is a special case.
#
When LayerLine($lineStyle) is empty, that means the line
#
is solid type.
# 8. "bigX" stipple is a special case. Remember to draw "X"
#
by lines.
# 9. In Tk, if the line width > 1, the drawing results of lines
#
may look different from Laker layer table.
#
That is because the line expands and the spaces between
#
segments are shrunk. 92109.gif is for reference.
#
# Sample Tcl script:
#
#!/usr/bin/wish
# Creation d'un nouveau canvas
wm deiconify .
canvas .can -width 610 -height 610 -background "#C0C0C0"
pack .can
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
cvId [lakerGetWndCellViewId]
libName [dbGet -obj $cvId -attr LibName]
layerList [dbGetLayerIdsByLib -lib $libName]
x1 10
x2 40
y1 10
y2 40
foreach layer $layerList {

set dispGroup [dbGet -obj $layer -attr Packet]
if { 0 == [string length $dispGroup] } {
set stipple [dbGet -obj $layer -attr Stipple]
set lineStyle [dbGet -obj $layer -attr LineStyle]
set fillColor [dbGet -obj $layer -attr FillColor]
set outColor [dbGet -obj $layer -attr OutlineColor]
} else {
set grpPattern [dbGetDispGroupInfo -disp $dispGroup]
set stipple [lindex $grpPattern 1]
set lineStyle [lindex $grpPattern 3]
set fillColor [lindex $grpPattern 0]
set outColor [lindex $grpPattern 2]
}
set lineWidth [dbGetLineStyleWidth -lineStyle $lineStyle]
set box "$x1 $y1 $x2 $y2"
# LineStyle: solid type
if { 0 == [string length $LayerLine($lineStyle)] } {
310

K-2015.06

.can create rectangle $box -stipple $stipple \

-fill $LayerColor($fillColor) \
-outline $LayerColor($outColor) \
-width $lineWidth
# Stipple: bigX type
if { 0 == [string compare $stipple "bigX"] } {
.can create line $x1 $y1 $x2 $y2 -fill \
$LayerColor($fillColor) -width $lineWidth
$LayerColor($fillColor) -width $lineWidth
}
} else {
.can create rectangle $box -stipple $stipple \
-fill $LayerColor($fillColor) \
-outline $LayerColor($outColor) \
-dash $LayerLine($lineStyle) -width $lineWidth
# Stipple: bigX type
if { 0 == [string compare $stipple "bigX"] } {
$LayerColor($fillColor) -dash \
$LayerLine($lineStyle) -width $lineWidth
$LayerColor($fillColor) -dash \
$LayerLine($lineStyle) -width $lineWidth
}
}
set x1 [expr $x1+40]
set x2 [expr $x1+30]
if { $x2 > 610 } {
set y1 [expr $y1+40]
set y2 [expr $y1+30]
if { $y2 > 610 } break
set x1 10
set x2 40
}
}
# output of the above Tcl script:

K-2015.06
311

# Example 15
set a [dbIterLib -lib $libId -attr siteDef]
foreach objId $a {
set g2 [dbGet -obj $objId -attr Type]
set g4 [dbGet -obj $objId -attr SiteDefType]
}
# the results are:
# g2 = SiteDef
# g4 = Core
# Example 16
set lib "path"
dbCreateLib -lib $lib
set cvid [dbOpenCV -lib $lib -cell top -mode create]
set ph [dbCreatePath -cv $cvId -layer 8 -purpose 252 \
-point (0,10) (30,10) -width 2 -style Variable -begExt 1 -endExt
1]
....
puts "Type:[dbGet -obj $path -attr Type]"
puts "Status:[dbGet -obj $path -attr Status]"
dbSaveCV
-cv $cvId
dbCloseCV -cv $cvId
dbCloseLib -lib $lib
# The results are:
# Type:Path
# Status:Shield
# Example 17
set list [dbIterateDB -cv $cv -attr LD]
foreach ob $list {
set L [dbGet -obj $ob -attr Layer]
set P [dbGet -obj $ob -attr Purpose]
312

K-2015.06

set S [dbGet -obj $ob -attr ShapeNum]

set B [dbGet -obj $ob -attr BBox]
puts "LP($L $P) ShapeNum($S) BBox:$B"
}
#
#
#
#
The results are:

LP(8 252) ShapeNum(2)
BBox:{{-200.000 -200.000} {100.000 100.000}}
LP(9 253) ShapeNum(1) BBox:{{100.000 100.000} {200.000 200.000}}
# Example 18
# The return value is origin (-500,500)
dbSet -obj $PinId -attr Origin -value (-500,500)
set gorigin [dbGet -obj $PinId -attr Origin]
# Example 19
# The return value is one of {Normal, Annotate, Comment}
dbGet -obj $labelId -attr LabelType
# Example 20
# The return value is one of {SIGNAL, GROUND, SUPPLY, GLOBAL, ""}
# If the return value = "", it means NetType = Unknown
dbGet -obj $netId -attr Type
# Example 21
# The return value is one of dbRepType {NotCell, OrCell..}
dbGet -obj $cvId -attr RepType
# Example 22
dbGet -obj $cvId -attr Type
# If the return value=0, it means UnneedAPR = FALSE.
# If the return value=1, it means UnneedAPR = TRUE.
# Example 23
dbSet -obj $SNetId -attr UserDefName -value 1 ##return :1
dbGet -obj $SNetId -attr UserDefName
##return :1
dbSet -obj $VNetId -attr UserDefName -value 0 ##return :1
dbGet -obj $VNetId -attr UserDefName
##return :0
# Example 24
# Return the PortType of $portId
dbSet -obj $DPortId -attr PortType -value AsyncReset #return: 1
dbGet -obj $DPortId -attr PortType
#return:AsyncReset
dbSet -obj $GPortId -attr PortType -value Clock
dbGet -obj $GPortId -attr PortType
#return: 1
#return: Clock
# If the PortType of this PortId is not defined, return: UnknownPort

{}
dbGet -obj $NPortId -attr PortType

K-2015.06
313

# Example 25
# Get the declaration netId (DeclaNetId) that can only be used
# to find the reference of the netId
dbGet -obj $CellId -attr Nets
# Get the operation netId (OpNetId) that can be used in the
following
# application (DeclaNetId vs. OpNetId). For example, there are two
# opNetIds A[0:1]:0x1234 and A[2:3]:0x2468;
# but they have the common DeclaNetId A[0:3]:0x5678;
# the DeclaNetId can get the two opNetIds.
dbGet -obj $CellId -attr opNets
# Example 26
# To get the path outline coordinate with given pathId
# result: OutlinePoints:{{-1.000 9.000} {31.000 11.000}}
set lib "path"
dbCreateLib -lib $lib
set cvid [dbOpenCV -lib $lib -cell top -mode create]
set ph [dbCreatePath -cv $cvid -layer 8 -purpose 252 \
-point (0,10) (30,10) -width 2 -style Variable -begExt 1 -endExt
1]
set ans [dbGet -obj $ph -attr OutlinePoints]
puts "OutlinePoints:$ans"
dbSaveCV
-cv $cvid
dbCloseCV -cv $cvid
dbCloseLib -lib $lib
# Example 27
# Use the "ElementId" attribute to get Ids of route objects, and
then
# use the "OutlinePoints" attribute to get the outline points for
PathSegId or
# ViaId (the boundary points of vias bbox for ViaId)
puts "[dbGet -obj routeId -attr Type]"
> Route
set id [dbGet -obj routeId -attr ElementId]
foreach ob $id {
puts "type :[dbGet -obj $ob -attr Type]"
puts "op
:[ dbGet -obj $ob -attr OutlinePoints]"
}
>type :PathSeg
>op
:{197.530 389.900} {197.530 662.900} \
>
{197.810 662.900} {197.810 389.900}
>type :CustomVia
>op
:{{197.450 662.620} {197.450 662.900} \
>
{197.890 662.900} {197.890 662.620}}
314

K-2015.06

# Example 28
# Get all attributes/values for a paramId
dbGet -obj $paramId [-attType original]
# Example 29
# Get one attribute/value for a paramId
dbGet -obj $paramId -attr attName [-attType user]
# Example 30
# Show all netList information
dbGet -obj $cellId -attr SimInfos
# Example 31
# show all other information
dbGet -obj $cellId -attr OtherInfos
# Example 32
# Return a value for the netlistId
dbGet -obj $netlistId -attr namePrefix [-attType original]
# Example 33
# Output the netlist name
dbGet -obj $netlistId -attr Name
# Example 34
set shape [lakerGetSelSet]
dbGet -obj $shape -attr Color
# Example 35
set shape [lakerGetSelSet]
dbGet -obj $shape -attr Lock
dbGetChild
The dbGetChild command is used to get all child objects that belong to the
specified parent object.
Syntax
dbGetChild -obj objId
Returns
The list of child objects that belongs to the specific parent object if successful;

K-2015.06
315

Arguments
Argument
Description
-obj objId
Specify the parent object.
Examples
dbGetChild -obj $parentId
See Also
dbAddChildToParent
dbGetParent
dbGetLastModifyTime
The dbGetLastModifyTime command returns the time information if the last
modified time of the specified library or cellview can be obtained.
Syntax
dbGetLastModifyTime -lib libName|libId [-cell cellName
[-view viewName]]
Returns
The time information (for example: "Mon Dec 15 11:11:11 2008") if
Arguments
316
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
-lib libName|libId
-view viewName
Specify the view name (default=layout).

K-2015.06

Examples
# Library ZZ is created and saved at 15 Dec, 2008 11:11:01
# Cell KK in library ZZ is created and saved at 15 Dec, 2008 11:11:11
# Example 1
# If the library ZZ or cell KK is not opened, return the time
# information from disk
# return the last modified time of library ZZ:
# Mon Dec 15 11:11:01 2008
dbGetLastModifyTime -lib ZZ
# return the last modified time of cell KK:
# Mon Dec 15 11:11:11 2008
dbGetLastModifyTime -lib ZZ -cell KK
# Example 2
# If the library ZZ or cell KK is opened but not modified,
# return the time information from the opening design
# If library ZZ is opened with readOnly mode and it is not modified,
# return the last modified time of library ZZ:
# Mon Dec 15 11:11:01 2008
# If cell KK in library ZZ is opened with readOnly mode and
# it is not modified, return the last modified time of cell KK:
# Mon Dec 15 11:11:11 2008
# Example 3
# If library ZZ is opened with edit mode and it is not modified,
# return the current system time of library ZZ:
# Tue Dec 16 15:48:02 2008
# If cell KK in library ZZ is opened with edit mode and
# it is not modified, return the last modified time of cell KK:
# Mon Dec 15 11:11:11 2008
# Example 4
# If library ZZ is opened with edit mode and it is modified,
# return the current system time of library ZZ:
# Tue Dec 16 15:48:02 2008
# If cell KK in library ZZ is opened with edit mode and
# it is modified, return the current system time of cell KK:
# Tue Dec 16 15:48:02 2008

K-2015.06
317

dbGetParent
The dbGetParent command is used to get the parent object for the specified
child object.
Syntax
dbGetParent -obj objId
Returns
The parent object idenfiers if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-obj objId
Specify the child object.
Examples
dbGetParent -obj $childId
See Also
dbAddChildToParent
dbGetChild
dbGetShapeDimension
The dbGetShapeDimension command returns the area or perimeter of the
shape if Area or Perimeter is specified.
This command returns 0 if the shape is not a legal shape.
Syntax
dbGetShapeDimension -obj objId -attr attrName
Returns
If successful, the Area option returns the area of the shape. The Perimeter
option returns the perimeter of the shape. Otherwise, 0 is returned if the shape
is not a legal shape.
318

K-2015.06

Arguments
Argument
Description
-attr attrName

Valid values: Area and Perimeter.
-obj objId
Specify a general identifier.
Examples
dbGetShapeDimension -obj $PolygonId -attr Area
See Also
Layout Window: Query > Measure > Area
Layout Window: Query > Measure > Perimeter
dbIterateDB
The dbIterateDB command works as dbGen which generates the data of the
design library.
Syntax
dbIterateDB [-cv cellviewId] -attr attrName
Returns
If -cv is not specified but -attr cellview is specified, all DB cell views that
were opened in memory are returned.
If -attr is not specified or -attr " " is specified, all of the dbIterateDB
related information is returned.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-attr attrName
Specify the attribute of the dbIterateDB related

information.
Valid values: Type, cellview, Row, and LD.
-cv cellviewId
Examples
# Example 1
# Return all DB cell views opened in the memory

K-2015.06
319

# Example 2
# Return all row Ids in the specified DB cell view
dbIterateDB -cv $cvId -attr Row
# Example 3
#set b0 [dbIterateDB]
# TCLError
#set b2 [dbIterateDB -attr Type]
# TCLError
#set b3 [dbIterateDB -attr Row]
# TCLError
set b1 [dbIterateDB -attr cellview]
set b4 [dbIterateDB -cv $cvId -attr Type]
set b5 [dbIterateDB -cv $cvId -attr Row]
foreach rowlist $b5 {
set h3 [dbGet -obj $rowlist -attr AllNames]
set h4 [dbGet -obj $rowlist -attr Type]
set h5 [dbGet -obj $rowlist -attr RowName]
set h6 [dbGet -obj $rowlist -attr SiteOrigin]
set h7 [dbGet -obj $rowlist -attr RowOrient]
set h8 [dbGet -obj $rowlist -attr NumSites]
set h9 [dbGet -obj $rowlist -attr SiteSpacing]
set h10 [dbGet -obj $rowlist -attr RowArea]
}
# The results are:
# a1 = a243c18
# a4 = dbIterateDB
# a5 = a247d20 a247d00 a247ce0 a247cc0 a247ca0 ...
#
h3 = Type RowName SiteDefName SiteOrigin RowOrient NumSites
# SiteSpacing RowArea ParamContent
#
h4 = Row
#
h5 = Row_:8
#
h6 = 7
#
h7 = {0.195 35.450}
#
h8 = 105
#
h9 = 0
#
h10= a245800
#
h3 = Type RowName SiteDefName...
# Example 4
# Return the layer and purpose pair of the specified cell view
dbIterateDB -cv $cvId -attr LD
320

K-2015.06

# Example 5
set list [dbIterateDB -cv $cv -attr LD]
foreach ob $list {
set L [dbGet -obj $ob -attr Layer]
set P [dbGet -obj $ob -attr Purpose]
set S [dbGet -obj $ob -attr ShapeNum]
set B [dbGet -obj $ob -attr BBox]
puts "LP($L $P) ShapeNum($S) BBox:$B"
}
# The results are:
# LP(8 252) ShapeNum(2) BBox:{{-200.000 -200.000} {100.000
100.000}}
# LP(9 253) ShapeNum(1) BBox:{{100.000 100.000} {200.000 200.000}}
dbIsDbObj
The dbIsDbObj command returns 1 if the general identifier is a dbObject.
Syntax
dbIsDbObj -obj objId
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-obj objId
Specify a general identifier.
Examples
dbIsDbObj -obj [dbOpenCV -lib cpu -cell cpu]
dbIsDbObj -obj 123456
dbIterateLib
The dbIterateLib command works as dbGen which generates the data of
the design library.
Syntax
dbIterateLib -lib libName [-attr attrName]

K-2015.06
321

Returns
If -attr is not specified or -attr " " is specified, all of the dbIterateLib
related information is returned.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-attr attrName
Specify the attribute of the dbIterateLib related

information.
Valid values: Type, siteDef, cell, view, and
cellview.
-lib libName
Examples
# Example 1
set a0 [dbIterateLib -lib $libId -attr Type]
set a1 [dbIterateLib -lib $libId -attr Type]
set a2 [dbIterateLib -lib $libId -attr siteDef]
set a3 [llength [dbIterateLib -lib $libId -attr cell]]
set a4 [llength [dbIterateLib -lib $libId -attr view]]
set a5 [llength [dbIterateLib -lib $libId -attr cellview]]
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
the results are:

a0 = Type: dbIterateLib siteDef: a074000
cell: a06e010 9f56c60 9f56c00 a146a00 a06d890 9f56c30 ...
view: 9f56a40 9f56950 9f56a10 ...
cellview: a0b0700 a00eb00 a008940 9f57080 ...
a1 = dbIterLib
a2 = 9f60800
a3 = a071810 9f69460 9f69400 a14a200 a071090 ...
a4 = 9f69240 9f69150 9f69210 9f69030 9f69270 ...
a5 = a0b3f00 a012300 a00c140 9f69880 9fdda80 ...
dbSelObjsByType
The dbSelObjsByType command returns a list of object identifiers if the
objects from a list of specified object identifiers can be selected by giving an
object type.
Syntax
dbSelObjsByType -objs objIds -type objType
Returns
A list of object identifiers if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
322

K-2015.06

Arguments
Argument
Description
-objs objIds
Specify a list of object identifiers.
-type objType
Specify the desired object type.

Valid values: CellView, Instance, InstHeader, Array,
Rectangle, Polygon, Line, Path, Label, Arc,
Ellipse, Dot, Property, Group, GroupMember, Net,
Port, Pin, InstPort, and InstPin.
Examples
# please use the technology file under "demo" directory and
# make sure the file name is changed to "laker.tf"
lakerNewLib -lib GEN_OBJ -tech laker.tf
# create a library "GEN_OBJ" with tech file "laker.tf"
set libId [dbOpenLib -lib GEN_OBJ ]
-view layout]
# create a cell in library "GEN_OBJ" with layout view
# create a rectagle
# create a rectagle
-point (0,0) (10,0) ]
# create a path
-point (0,10) (10,10) ]
# create a path
# value returned: an id , ex "264684a"
-point (0,20) (10,20) ]
# create a path
dbAddChildToParent -child $rect2 -parent $rect1

K-2015.06
323

# make rectange 2 a child object to rect1

# value returned: 1
dbDelete -obj $pathId03
# delete a path
# value returned: 1
dbIsDbObj -obj $cvId
# check an id is an db object or not
# value returned: 1
set allIds [dbTraverse -cv $cvId -shapeOnly on]
# generate a list of ids
# value returned: list of ids.
# ex: 26468a4 264688c 2646874 2646844
dbSelObjsByType -objs $allIds -type Path
# select objects
# value returned: list of ids. ex: 2646874 2646844
dbSaveCV -cv $cvId
# save cell
# value returned: 1
dbCloseCV -cv $cvId
# close cell
# value returned: 1
# close library
# value returned: 1
dbSet
The dbSet command returns 1 if the attribute value of a certain object attribute
can be set.
The object attributes, which set up the contents and their valid values, are
described in the following tables.
324
Objects
Attribute Names
Arc
Net, Parent, Purpose, Layer, EllipseBBox, StartAngle,

StopAngle
Array
Net, Parent, Purpose, ColSpace, Cols, Mag, Master, Name,

Orient, Point, RowSpace, Rows
CellView
CellViewType, DBUPerUU, UserUnit, Flag, RepType, Type
Dot
Net, Parent, Purpose, Layer, BBox, Height, Point, Width
Doughnut
Net, Parent, Purpose, Layer, Inner, Outer, Point, Color, Lock

K-2015.06

Objects
Attribute Names
Ellipse
Net, Parent, Purpose, Layer, BBox, Color, Lock
Group
DeleteWhen, GroupType, IsOrdered, IsUniqueName, Name
Instance
Net, Parent, Purpose, Mag, Master, Name, Orient, Point,

DefCompSource, DefCompPlaceStatus, DefCompProperty,
DefSpecialNetObj, DefShieldNetName, DefWireShape
Instance Pin
Net
Instance Port
All, AllNames, CV, Props, Type, Inst, InstPins, Name, Net,

Port, DefSpecialNetObj
Label
Net, Parent, Purpose, Layer, Font, Height, IsDrafted,

IsOverbar, IsVisible, Justify, Orient, Point, Text, LabelType
Line
Net, Parent, Purpose, Layer, Points
Net
All, AllNames, CV, Props, Type, InstPins, InstPortCount,

InstPorts, Figs, Name, NumBits, Pins, Port, Priority,
DefShieldNetName, DefNetNondefRuleName, DefNetSource,
DefOriginalNetName, DefNetUsage, DefNetProperty, Net,
Parent, Type, UserDefName
Netlist
All, AllNames, namePrefix, termOrder
Path
Net, Parent, Purpose, Layer, BeginExt, EndExt, Points, Style,

Width, DefSpecialPin, DefPinPlaceStatus, DefPinPosition,
DefPinOrient, DefSpecialNetObj, DefShieldNetName,
DefWireShape, Color, Lock
Pin
Dir, PortDir, Name, JointType, Origin
Polygon
Net, Parent, Purpose, Layer, Points, DefSpecialPin,

DefSpecialNetObj, DefShieldNetName, DefWireShape, Color,
Lock
Port
Dir, Name, PortType
Property
AllNames, Value

K-2015.06
325

Objects
Attribute Names
Rectangle
Net, Parent, Purpose, Layer, BBox, DefSpecialPin,

DefSpecialNetObj, DefShieldNetName, DefWireShape, Color,
Lock
Route
AllNames, Net, Parent, Purpose, IsVisible, IsSpecial, Status,

Topology, Spec, Color, Lock
viaCellViewId
ViaCell
The following table shows the valid values for each attribute.
326
Attribute Name
Valid Values
BBox
(a, b) (c,d)
a b c d
{{a b}{c d}}
BeginExt
CellViewType
Graphic, maskLayout, schematic, symbolic, netlist, state,

stranger, vhEntityHier, vhEntityData, vhArchHier,
vhArchData, vhConfHier, vhConfData, vhPackHier,
vhPackBodyData, vhPackData.
Color
String of the new color value.
Cols
A positive integer.
ColSpace
A floating number.
DBUPerUU
A floating number.
DefCompPlaceStatus
Place status of the input component: FIXED, COVER,

PLACED, UNPLACED. Case is ignored.
DefCompProperty
DEF property string of the input component.
DefCompSource
Source type of the input component: NETLIST, DIST,

USER, TIMING. Case is ignored.
DefNetNondefRuleName
The non-default rule used by the input net.

K-2015.06

Attribute Name
Valid Values
DefNetProperty
DEF property string of the input net.
DefNetSource
Source type of the input net: NETLIST, DIST, USER,

TIMING, TEST. Case is ignored.
DefNetUsage
Usage of the input net: ANALOG, CLOCK, GROUND,

POWER, RESET, SCAN, SIGNAL, TIEOFF. Case is
ignored.
DefOriginalNetName
The original net of the input net.
DefPinOrient

MYR0, MYR90.
DefPinPlaceStatus
Place status of the input pin: FIXED, COVER, PLACED,

UNPLACED. Case is ignored.
DefPinPosition
(a,b)
ab
{a b}
DefShieldNetName
For Net object type, this specifies the net shielding the
input net. For other object types, this specifies the net
shielded by the input object.
DefSpecialNetObj
0, 1
DefSpecialPin
0, 1
DefWireShape
Wire shape type of the input object: RING, PADRING,

BLOCKRING, STRIPE, FOLLOWPIN, IOWIRE,
OREWIRE, BLOCKWIRE, BLOCKAGEWIRE,
FILLWIRE, DRCFILL. Case is ignored.
DeleteWhen
Never, First, Last.
Dir (access direction of a

pin)
Single value: Left, Right, Top, Bottom.

Multiple values: value string with braces, like {Left Top} or
{Left Bottom Right}.
Dir (port direction)
Input, Output, InputOutput, Jumper, Feedthrough.
EllipseBBox
An ellipse bounding box (the same as BBox).

K-2015.06
327

328
Attribute Name
Valid Values
EndExt
Flag
An integer.
Font
Modern, Fixed, Raster, Modern1, Script, Roman,

TTAGth, TTARoman, TTASlab.
GroupType
Set, Collect.
Height
Inner
IsDrafted
0, 1
IsOrdered
0, 1
IsOverbar
0, 1
IsSpecial
0, 1
IsUniqueName
0, 1
IsVisible
0, 1
JointType
Disjointed, Strong, Weak.
Justify
UpperLeft, CenterLeft, LowerLeft, UpperCenter,

CenterCenter, LowerCenter, UpperRight, CenterRight,
LowerRight.
LabelType
Normal, Annotate, Comment.
Layer
0~255 or a layer name.
Lock
0, 1
Mag
A floating number.
Master
A cell view identifier.
Name
A string.

K-2015.06

Attribute Name
Valid Values
Net
A net identifier.
Orient

MYR0, MYR90.
Origin
A point value, for example: (x,y).
Outer
Parent
A db object identifier.
Point
(a,b)
a b
{a b}
Points
(a,b) (c,d) ...(y,z)

a b c d ... y z
{{a b}{c d} ... {y z}}
PortType
Unknown, Data, Clock, SyncSet, SyncReset, AsyncSet,

AsyncReset, Control, TriEnable, ComboOutput,
TriOutput, Latched, Registered, InferLatch, FSMControl,
FSMOutput, OffPageConn, Hidden
If return=1, then set PortType successfully.
If return=0, then fail to set PortType.
Priority
0~127
Purpose
0~255 or a purpose name.
RepType
Refer to RepType in dbGet.
Rows
A positive integer.
RowSpace
A floating number.
Spec
The Spec name of routes. When SpecValue is NULL, it

clears the Spec value in $routeId.
StartAngle
A floating number.

K-2015.06
329

Attribute Name
Valid Values
Status
Normal, Cover, Fixed, Routed, Shield, NoShield
StopAngle
A floating number.
Style
Truncate, Extend, Round, Variable.
Text
A string.
Topology
None, Ring, PadRing, BlockRing, Stripe, FollowPin,

IOWire, CoreWire, BlockWire, BlockageWire, FillWire,
DrcFill
Type (cellviewType)
0, 1
If value=1, then set UnneedAPR=TRUE.
If value=0, then set UnneedAPR=FALSE.
The return value=1 if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Type (NetType)
SIGNAL, GROUND, SUPPLY, GLOBAL.
UserDefName
0, 1
If value=1, return=1, then set "the net is user-defined".
If value=1, return=0, then do not set "the net is userdefined".
If value=0, return=1, then unset "the net is user-defined".
If value=0, return=0, then do not unset "the net is userdefined".
UserUnit
Micro, millimeter, centimeter, meter, mil, inch.
ViaCell
1
If value=1, then add the via cell property.
Width
Syntax
dbSet -obj objId -attr attrName -value attrValue [-attType
attType]
Returns
330

K-2015.06

Arguments
Argument
Description
-attr attrName
-attType attType

Valid values: original and user.
-obj objId

Valid values: cell view identifier, instance identifier, array
identifier, rectangle identifier, polygon identifier, line
identifier, path identifier, label identifier, arc identifier,
ellipse identifier, doughnut identifier, dot identifier, net
identifier, netlist identifier, pin identifier, port identifier,
instance port identifier, instance pin identifier, property
identifier, group identifier, and cell view identifier of a via.
-value attrValue
Specify the attribute value. This value depends on the attr option.
Examples
# Example 1
dbSet -obj $pathId -attr Points -value (0,0)(1,1)(2,1)(3,1)
dbSet -obj $rectId -attr BBox -value (0,0)(3,5)
dbSet -obj $instId -attr Master -value [dbOpenCV -lib lib2
-cell C2]
dbSet -obj $instId -attr DefCompSource -value netlist
dbSet -obj $rectId -attr DefPinPlaceStatus -value COVER
dbSet -obj $polyId -attr DefPinPosition -value (1.23,-1.23)
dbSet -obj $pathId -attr DefPinOrient -value MXR90
dbSet -obj $netId -attr DefNetUsage -value signal
dbSet -obj $instPortId -attr IsDefSpecialNetObj -value 1
# Example 2
# set via cell property
set viaCvId [dbOpenCV -lib cpu -cell via12 -view abs -mode edit]
dbSet -obj $viaCvId -attr ViaCell -value 1
# Example 3
set a [lakerGetSelSet]
set cvId [lakerGetWndCellViewId]
set netId [dbCreateNet -cv $cvId -name N -get 1]
dbSet -obj $a -attr Net -value $netId
# Example 4
dbSet -obj $PropId -attr Value -Value XXX

K-2015.06
331

#(a) When this Prop's value Type is LpPair, UserPair, then

#
dbSet -obj $PropId -attr Value -Value "{layerNum purposeNum}"
#
or
#
dbSet -obj $PropId -attr Value -Value "(layerNum purposeNum)"
#
or
#
dbSet -obj $PropId -attr Value -Value "layerNum purposeNum"
#(b) When this Prop's value Type is Time, then
#
dbSet -obj $PropId -attr Value -Value "Mar 31 12:50:30 2005"
#(c) When this Prop's value Type is Boolean return
#
dbSet -obj $PropId -attr Value -Value 1 > for true
#
dbSet -obj $PropId -attr Value -Value 0 > for false
#(d) Other supported types: String, Int, Float, DBId.
#(e) Not supported types: HierProp, BString.
# Example 5
# For JointType
dbSet -obj $pinId -attr JointType -value XXX
# XXX can be one of {Disjointed, Strong, Weak}
# Example 6
# For AccessDirection
dbSet -obj $pinId -attr Dir -value Value
# (1) When Value is a single value,
#
then the Value is one of the following four strings
#
Top, Bottom, Left, Right
#
For example:
#
dbSet -obj $pinId -attr Dir -value {Top};
# (2) When Value is a multiple value,
#
then the Value is composed string with braces of following
#
four strings Top, Bottom, Left, Right
#
For example:
#
dbSet -obj $pinId -attr Dir -value {Top Bottom};
# Example 7
# For pinType(PortDirType)
# XXX can be one of {Input, Output, InputOutput,
#
Jumper, Feedthrough}
dbSet -obj $pinId -attr PortDir -value XXX
# Example 8
dbSet -obj $pathSegId -attr IsSpecial -value 0|1
# Example 9
# The return value is origin (-500,500)
dbSet -obj $PinId -attr Origin -value (-500,500)
set gorigin [dbGet -obj $PinId -attr Origin]
# Example 10
dbSet -obj $labelId -attr LabelType -value XXX
# XXX can be one of {Normal, Annotate, Comment}
# LabelType
# "Unknown",
// dbcNormalLabel >tclErrMsg
332

K-2015.06

# "Normal",
# "Annotate",
# "Comment",
// dbcNormalLabel
// dbcAnnotateLabel
// dbcCommentLabel
# Example 11
dbSet -obj $netId -attr Type -value XXX
#
#
#
#
#
#
XXX can be one of {SIGNAL, GROUND, SUPPLY, GLOBAL}

"", // dbcUnknownNetType
"SIGNAL", // dbcSignalNet
"GROUND", // dbcGroundNet
"SUPPLY", // dbcSupplyNet
"GLOBAL", // dbcGlobalNet
# Example 12
dbSet -obj $cvId -attr RepType -value XXX
# XXX can be one of dbRepType {NotCell, OrCell..}
# Example 13
dbSet -obj $cvId -attr Type -value 1|0
# if value=1, then set UnneedAPR=TRUE, the return value=1 if
successful.
# if value=0, then do not call setUnneedAPR(), the return value=0.
# Example 14
dbSet -obj $SNetId -attr UserDefName -value 1 ##return :1
dbGet -obj $SNetId -attr UserDefName
##return :1
dbSet -obj $VNetId -attr UserDefName -value 0 ##return :1
dbGet -obj $VNetId -attr UserDefName
##return :0
# Example 15
dbSet -obj $portId -attr PortType -value XXX
# XXX can be one of
# {
# "Unknown", "Data",
"Clock",
"SyncSet",
"SyncReset",
# "AsyncSet", "AsyncReset", "Control",
# "TriEnable", "ComboOutput", "TriOutput", "Latched",
# "Registered","InferLatch", # "FSMControl",
# "FSMOutput", "OffPageConn","Hidden"
# }
# If the value is the other type, a Tcl error is shown.
# Example 16
# Set one attribute/value for a paramId
dbSet -obj $paramId -attr attrName -value v [-attType original]
# Example 17
# Set a value to the property for a netlistId
dbSet -obj $netlistId -attr namePrefix -value xxx [-attType user]

K-2015.06
333

# Example 18
dbSet -obj $shape -attr Color -value colorA
# Example 19
dbSet -obj $shape -attr Lock -value 1

on parameterized test structure devices. These commands include:
dbUDDBool
dbUDDCopy
dbUDDDelete
dbUDDFill
dbUDDGetParameter
dbUDDSetParameter
dbUDDBool
The dbUDDBool command returns a list of figures after the Boolean operation.
Syntax
Apply Boolean operation on two sets of figures:
dbUDDBool -action [AND | OR | NOT | SIZE | GROW | SHRINK |
SIZE4DIR] -outputLayer layerPurpose -opnd1 figList1 opnd2 figList2
Apply Boolean operation on specific layers:
dbUDDBool -action [AND | OR | NOT | SIZE | GROW | SHRINK |
SIZE4DIR] -outputLayer layerPurpose -opnd1Layer
layerPurpose -opnd2Layer layerPurpose -sizeValue
sizeValue -cv cellviewId
Returns
List of figures after the Boolean operation if successful; otherwise returns
nothing.
334

K-2015.06

Arguments
Apply the Boolean operation on two sets of figures:
Argument
Description
-action
[AND|OR|NOT|SIZE|
GROW|SHRINK|
SIZE4DIR]
Specify the Boolean operation.

Valid values: AND, OR, NOT, SIZE, GROW, SHRINK,
and SIZE4DIR.
GROW, SHRINK, and SIZE4DIR have to be used with
-left, -right,
-top, or -bottom.
-opnd1 figList1
Specify the first input list of figures.
-opnd2 figList2
Specify the second input list of figures.
-outputLayer
layerPurpose
Specify the output layer for the results from the

Boolean operation.
Apply the Boolean operation on specific layers:

Argument
Description
-action
[AND|OR|NOT|SIZE|
GROW|SHRINK|
SIZE4DIR]
Specify the Boolean operation.

Valid values: AND, OR, NOT, SIZE, GROW, SHRINK,
and SIZE4DIR.
GROW, SHRINK, and SIZE4DIR have to be used with
-left, -right,
-top, or -bottom.
-cv cellviewId
Specify the cell view that the Boolean operation

applies to. It is only needed when using layer-base
operation.
-opnd1Layer layerPurpose Specify the input layer1.

-opnd2Layer layerPurpose Specify the input layer2.
-outputLayer layerPurpose Specify the output layer for the results from the
Boolean operation.
-sizeValue sizeValue

K-2015.06
Specify the value for the SIZE operation (only valid

for SIZE).
335

Examples
dbUDDBool -action [AND|OR|NOT|SIZE] -outputLayer layerPurpose \
-opnd1Layer {OD drawing } -opnd2Layer POLY -sizeValue 0.5 \
-cv $CVId
dbUDDCopy
The dbUDDCopy command returns a list of figures resulting from copy
procedure if the procedure can be defined.
Syntax
dbUDDCopy -figs figList -cols colNo -rows rosNo -colSpace
colSpace -rowSpace rowSpace
Returns
List of figures resulting from the copy procedure if successful, otherwise returns
nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cols colNo
Specify an integer number for the repeated columns of

the copied figures.
-colSpace colSpace
-figs figList
Specify the list of figures.
-rows rosNo
Specify an integer number for the repeated rows of the

copied figures.
-rowSpace rowSpace
Examples
set Pitch 3.4
set Figx0 [expr -1.04]
set Figx2 [expr $Figx0+0.4]
set Figy1 [expr -1.04]
set Figy3 [expr [max [expr 0.875] [expr $Figx2+1.515]]]
set __colSpace__ [expr $Pitch]
set __rowSpace__ [expr $Pitch]
set _Fig0 [dbCreateRect -cv $cvId -layer CellBdry \
-purpose boundary -bbox ($Figx0, $Figy3) ($Figx2, $Figy1)]
336

K-2015.06


-purpose boundary -bbox ($Figy1, $Figx0) ($Figy3, $Figx2)]
set copiedFigs [dbUDDCopy -figs [list $_Fig0 $_Fig1] -cols 2 \
-rows 2 -colSpace $__colSpace__ -rowSpace $__rowSpace__]
dbUDDDelete
The dbUDDDelete command deletes a list of figures.
Syntax
dbUDDDelete -figs figList
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-figs figList
Specify the list of figures to be deleted.
Examples
dbUDDDelete -figs [list $_Fig0 $_Fig1]
set ActRegion [dbUDDBool -action NOT -outputLayer MET1 \
-opnd1Layer { OD drawing } -opan2Layer {POLY drawing} ]
set FillResult [ dbFill -figs $ActRegion -lib Test \
-cell cont08 -XPitch 1.0 -YPitch 1.0 -LEncl 0.5 \
-REncl 0.5 -TEncl 0.5 -BEncl 0.5]
dbUDDDelete -figs $ActRegion
set METObj1 [dbUDDBool -action SIZE -outputLayer MET1 \
-opnd1 $FillResult -value 0.3]
set METObj2 [dbUDDBool -action SIZE -outputLayer MET1 \
-opnd1 $METObj1 -value -0.2]
dbUDDDelete -figs $METObj1
#// the METObj2 is the objecet that user want in MET1 layer
#// overlapped Active Region
set ALL [dbUDDBool -action OR -outputLayer PWELL \
-opnd1Layer { OD drawing } -opan2Layer {POLY drawing} ]
#// create well object
dbUDDFill
The dbUDDFill command returns a list of instances or arrays if the fill
procedure can be defined.
K-2015.06
337

Syntax
dbUDDFill -figs figList [-lib libraryName -cell cellName [view viewName] | -fillInObj figId|figIdList] -colSpace
colSpace -rowSpace rowSpace [-leftEnc leftEnc] [-rightEnc
rightEnc] [-topEnc topEnc] [-bottomEnc bottomEnc] [method contact|guardring] [-justify jusification] [magni manification] [-orient orientation]
Returns
A list of instances or arrays if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
338
Argument
Description
-bottomEnc
bottomEnc
Specify the bottom enclosure space to the filled figure.

Valid value: positive floating number (default=0.0).
-cell cellName
Specify the cell name of the filling cell.
-colSpace colSpace
-figs figList
Specify the list of figures to be filled.
-fillInObj figId|figIdList
Define the filled object by a figure or a list of figures.
-justify jusification
Specify the justification of the filling cell.

Valid values: UpperLeft, CenterLeft,
LowerLeft, UpperCenter, CenterCenter,
LowerCenter, UpperRight, CenterRight,
LowerRight (default=CenterCenter).
-leftEnc leftEnc
Specify the left enclosure spacing to the filled figure.

-lib libraryName
Specify the library name of the filling cell view.
-magni manification
Specify the magnification of the filling cell.

-method
contact|guardring
Specify the method to be used to fill the figures.

Valid value: contact, and guardring
(default=contact).

K-2015.06

Argument
Description
-orient orientation
Specify the orientation of the filling cell.

MYR0, MYR90 (default=R0).
-rightEnc rightEnc
Specify the right enclosure spacing to the filled figure.

-rowSpace rowSpace
-topEnc topEnc
Specify the top enclosure spacing to the filled figure.

-view viewName
Specify the view name of the filling cell

(default=layout).
Examples
set Pitch 3.4
set Figx0 [expr -1.04]
set Figx2 [expr $Figx0+0.4]
set Figy1 [expr -1.04]
set Figy3 [expr [max [expr 0.875] [expr $Figx2+1.515]]]
set __colSpace__ [expr $Pitch]
set __rowSpace__ [expr $Pitch]
-purpose boundary -bbox ($Figx0, $Figy3) ($Figx2, $Figy1)]
-purpose boundary -bbox ($Figy1, $Figx0) ($Figy3, $Figx2)]
set instList [dbUDDFill -figs [list $_Fig0 $_Fig1] \
-lib qa -cell cont1 -colSpace $__colSpace__ \
-rowSpace $__rowSpace__ -method guardring ]
# The following example is to fill with parameterized
# test structures
# Variable Cont_2pair keeps the instance id for sub master cell
set Cont_2pairMasterId [dbGet -obj $Cont_2pair -attr Master]
set libName [dbGet -obj $Cont_2pairMasterId -attr LibName]
set cellName [dbGet -obj $Cont_2pairMasterId -attr CellName]
set viewName [dbGet -obj $Cont_2pairMasterId -attr ViewName]
set Cont_2pair_BBox [dbGet -obj $Cont_2pair -attr BBox]

K-2015.06
339

set
set
set
set
set
set
colSpace [expr $CT_s + $CT_w]

rowSpace [expr $CT_s + $CT_w]
LeftEnc $M1_CT_E
RightEnc $GateOd1_CT_S
TopEnc $M1_CT_E
BottomEnc $M1_CT_E
set FillResult [dbUDDFill -figs $LeftSide -lib $libName \

-cell $cellName -view $viewName -colSpace $colSpace \
-rowSpace $rowSpace -leftEnc $LeftEnc -rightEnc $RightEnc \
-topEnc $TopEnc -bottomEnc $BottomEnc -method guardring \
-justify CenterCenter]
dbUDDGetParameter
The dbUDDGetParameter command returns all UDD parameter definitions.
Syntax
dbUDDGetParameter -cv cellviewId [-availOnly [0|1]]
Returns
The parameter definition { {paramName type value} ... } is returned if
successful; where:
paramNam corresponds to the parameter name.
type corresponds to the parameter type.
value corresponds to the parameter value.
The valid parameter types and values are as follows:
340
String: {parName string $x+1 }
Integer: {parName int 3}
Float: {parName float 3.3}
Boolean: {parName Boolean
Layer: {parName layer 16 252}
PathStyle: {parName pathStyle

[Truncate|Extend|Round|Variable]}
[0|1]}

K-2015.06

Rotate: {parName Rotate

[R0|R90|R180|R270|MXR0|MXR90|MYR0|MYR90]
Justify: {parName Justify

[UpperLeft|UpperCenter|UpperRight|
CenterLeft|CenterCenter|CenterRight|
LowerLeft|LowerCenter|LowerRight]}
Arguments
Argument
Description
-availOnly 0|1
Valid values: Boolean values, 0, and 1 (default=1).

1 : Return the available parameters only.
0 : Return all parameters.
-cv cellviewId
Examples
# Example 1
# Return the available parameter(s) only
dbUDDGetParameter -cv $cvId
# Example 2
# Return all parameters
dbUDDGetParameter -cv $cvId -availOnly 0
See Also
dbUDDSetParameter
dbUDDSetParameter
The dbUDDSetParameter command modifies the existing parameter
definitions when both the -type and -value arguments must be specified.
Alternatively, it deletes the existing parameter when the -delete argument is
specified.
Syntax
dbUDDSetParameter -cv cellviewId -name parName -value
parValue [-delete] -type [string | int | float | Boolean
| layer | pathStyle | Rotate | Justify]
Returns
None

K-2015.06
341

Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
-delete
Delete the specified parameter.
-name parName
Specify the parameter to be modified or deleted.
-type
Specify the parameter type. Refer to the parameter types

and values description in dbUDDGetParameter for details.
Valid values: string, int, float, Boolean, layer,
pathStyle, Rotate, and Justify.
-value parValue
Specify the parameter value. Refer to the parameter types

and values description in dbUDDGetParameter for details.
Examples
# Example 1
# Modify the Param1 definition (paramType: int, value: 12)
dbUDDSetParameter -cv $cvId -name Param1 -type int -value 12
# Example 2
# Modify the Param1 definition (paramType: string,
# value: {$a1*4+1})
dbUDDSetParameter -cv $cvId -name Param1 -type string \
-value {$a1*4+1}
# Example 3
# Modify the Param1 definition (paramType: layer, value: "1 252")
dbUDDSetParameter -cv $cvId -name Param1 -type layer "1 252"
# Example 4
# Modify the Param1 definition (paramType: Justify, value:
CenterCenter)
dbUDDSetParameter -cv $cvId -name Param1 -type Justify \
-value CenterCenter
# Example 5
# Modify the Param1 definition (paramType: float,
# value: 30.123456)
dbUDDSetParameter -cv $cvId -name Param1 -type float \
-value 30.123456
342

K-2015.06

# Example 6
# Modify the Param1 definition (paramType: Boolean, value: 1)
dbUDDSetParameter -cv $cvId -name Param1 -type Boolean -value 1
# Example 7
# Modify the Param1 definition (paramType: pathStyle,
# value: Truncate)
dbUDDSetParameter -cv $cvId -name Param1 -type pathStyle \
-value Truncate
# Example 8
# Modify the Param1 definition (paramType: Rotate, value: R0)
dbUDDSetParameter -cv $cvId -name Param1 -type Rotate -value R0
# Example 9
# Delete the Param1 parameter
dbUDDSetParameter -cv $cvId -name Param1 -delete
See Also
dbUDDGetParameter

on the schematic. These commands include:
dbSchCloneMaster
dbSchExpandMFactor
dbSchFlatten
dbSchGroup
dbSchInstanceMap
dbSchMakeNode
dbSchUngroup
dbSchCloneMaster
The dbSchCloneMaster command copies the master cell of the specified
instance to another cell.

K-2015.06
343

Syntax
dbSchCloneMaster -cv cellviewId -inst inst_list -newCell
cell_name
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
-inst inst_list
Specify the instances.
-newCell cell_name
Specify the new cell for hard blocks.
Examples
# clone master
set lib [dbOpenLib !Vlib demo]
set cvId [dbOpenCV -lib $lib -cell and]
dbSchCloneMaster -cv $cvId -inst x1 -newCell CloneCell
dbSchExpandMFactor
The dbSchExpandMFactor command expands M-Factor of the specified
instances.
Syntax
dbSchExpandMFactor -cv cellviewId -inst inst_list
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
-inst inst_list
Examples
dbSchExpandMFactor -cv $cvId -inst x0 x1
344

K-2015.06

dbSchFlatten
The dbSchFlatten command flattens the specified schematic objects.
Syntax
dbSchFlatten -cv cellviewId -inst inst_list [-level
flatten_level]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
-inst inst_list
-level flatten_level
Specify the flatten level.

Valid value: Integer from 1 to 50 (default=1).
Examples
# flatten instances
set lib [dbOpenLib -lib demo]
dbSchFlatten -cv $cvId -inst x0 x1 -level 2
See Also
lakerSchFlattenAll
lakerSchFlattenLvl
lakerSchFlattenOne
lakerSmashObj
dbSchGroup
The dbSchGroup command is used for the ECO extraction when the Expand
Schematic command is executed. This command rebuilds the user-defined
group and stacking MOS group in the target library.
Syntax
dbSchGroup -cv cellviewId -inst instList [-name groupName]
-type groupType

K-2015.06
345

Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
Specify the logic cell view.
-inst instList
Specify the instances. Multiple instances must be

separated by spaces, for example: -inst x1 x2.
-name groupName
Specify the group name. If it is not specified, the system

generates a unique name automatically.
-type groupType

Valid values: user and stacking (default=user).
Examples
# Example 1
dbSchGroup -cv $cvId -inst x1 x2 x3 -name G1 -type user
# Example 2
dbSchGroup -cv $cvId -inst x11 x12 x13 -name StackMOS_1 \
-type stacking
dbSchInstanceMap
The dbSchInstanceMap command changes the instance mapping
information.
Syntax
dbSchInstanceMap -cv cellviewId -inst instName -mapLib
refLib -mapCell refCell -mapView refView [-parameterMap
{parameterMapping}] [-portMap {portMappingList}] [hierInstMap hierInstMap][-hierNetMap hierNetMap]
Returns
None
346

K-2015.06

Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
-hierInstMap
hierInstMap
Specify the hierarchical instance mapping.
-hierNetMap
hierNetMap
Specify the hierarchical net mapping.
-inst instName
Specify the modified instance.
-mapCell refCell
Specify the layout mapping cell.
-mapLib refLib
Specify the layout mapping library

(default=current library).
-mapView refView
Specify the layout mapping view.
-parameterMap
parameterMapping
Specify the parameter mapping list.

Refer to the definition of the MODEL_MAP section in
the model map file for more details on the formats of
ParameterMap.
-portMap mappingPort
Specify the layout mapping port in format:

{ port1:Mapped_port1 ...
portn:Mapped_portn}
Examples
# Example 1
# change mapping of instance(x1) to cell(devCell) in the
# library(demo)
dbSchInstanceMap -cv $cv -inst x1 -mapLib demo \
-mapCell devCell -mapView symbolic
dbSchMakeNode
The dbSchMakeNode command groups the specified instances to a schematic
hierarchy hard block.

K-2015.06
347

Syntax
dbSchMakeNode -cv cellviewId -inst instList -newCell
cellName [-newInst instName]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
-inst instList
-newCell cellName
Specify the new cell name for hard block.
-newInst instName
Specify the new instance name. If it is not specified, a

unique system-generated name is used.
Examples
# make node instances
dbSchMakeNode -cv $cvId -inst x0 x1 -newCell MkCell -newInst xMk1
See Also
lakerSchMakeNode
lakerMakeCell
dbSchUngroup
The dbSchUngroup command is used for the ECO extraction when the
Expand Schematic command is executed. This command ungroups the autocreated stacking MOS group in the target library.
Syntax
dbSchGroup -cv cellviewId -inst instList -type groupType
Returns
None
348

K-2015.06

DFM
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
Specify the logic cell view.
-inst instList

separated by spaces, for example: -inst x1 x2.
-type groupType

Valid value: stacking.
Examples
dbSchUngroup -cv $cvId -inst x11 x12 x13 -type stacking
DFM
on the DFM process. These commands include:
dbGetAllMCellDeviceNames
dbGetAllMCellRuleValues
The dbGetAllMCellDeviceNames command gets all device names of the
specified MCell type defined in the technology file of the specified library.
Syntax
dbGetAllMCellDeviceNames -lib library_name -type
MCell_type_name
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib library_name

K-2015.06
349

DFM
Argument
Description
-type MCell_type_name
Specify the MCell type name.

Valid values: transistor, resistor,
capacitor, guardRing, and contactDevice.
Examples
# Example 1
dbGetAllMCellDeviceNames -lib "cpu" -type "transistor"
# Return: "pmos nmos pmos1 nmos1"
See Also
Layout Window: DFM > DFM
lakerUpdateMCell
The dbGetAllMCellRuleValues command gets all MCell rule values of the
specified device by giving a device name, library name and MCell type.
Syntax
dbGetAllMCellRuleValues -lib library_name -type
MCell_type_name -dev device_name
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-dev device_name
Specify the device name.
-lib library_name
-type MCell_type_name
Specify the MCell type.

Valid values: transistor, resistor,
capacitor, guardRing, and contactDevice.
Examples
# Example 1
dbGetAllMCellRuleValues -lib "cpu" -type "transistor" -dev "pmos"
# Return: "minPoly2GateExtension 0.1 minOd2GateExtension 0.3 ..."
350

K-2015.06

Technology File
See Also
lakerUpdateMCell
Technology File
This section describes the Tcl command that is related to the manipulation on
the technology file.
tfGet
tfGet
The tfGet command returns an attribute value if the attribute value of the
specified section rule can be obtained.
The tfGet command is available in the execPlugIn section for MCell Plugins
when the tfLayoutMagicCell or tfLayoutMagicCellCallBack sections
have been encrypted.
Rules in technology file sections and their valid attribute names and values can
be manipulated through the tfGet Tcl command. These sections includes:
tfTechParameter: Parameter names defined in this section are returned

in the condition of:
If -attr <Parameter_Name> is specified, returns the value of the

specified parameter.
If -attr All is specified, returns a list of the defined parameter names

and their values. For example: {<Parameter_Name> <Value>}
{<Parameter_Name> <Value>}...
If -attr AllNames is specified, returns a list of the defined parameter

names. For example: <Parameter_Name> <Parameter_Name>
...
tfLayoutSystemUnit: Settings defined in this section are returned in the

condition of:

K-2015.06
351

Technology File
352
If -attr UserUnit is specified, returns the value defined with

userUnit. Valid values: micro, millimeter, centimeter, meter,
mil, and inch.
If -attr Scale is specified, returns the value defined with dbScale.

If -attr Resolution is specified, returns the value defined with

dbResolution. Valid value: a floating number.
If -attr XGridSpacing is specified, returns the value defined with

xGridSpacing. Valid value: a floating number.
If -attr YGridSpacing is specified, returns the value defined with

yGridSpacing. Valid value: a floating number.
If -attr GridSpacing is specified, returns a pair of values defined

with xGridSpacing and yGridSpacing. The format is
<X_Grid_Spacing> <Y_Grid_Spacing>.
If -attr MajorGridRatio is specified, returns the value defined with

majorGridRatio. Valid value: a positive integer.
If -attr GridType is specified, returns the value defined with

gridType. Valid values: None, Dot, and Line.
If -attr ContactCenterGrid is specified, returns the value defined

with contactCenterGrid. Valid value: a floating number.
If -attr All is specified, returns a list of attribute-value pairs. For

example: {UserUnit <Value>} {Scale <Value>} ...
If -attr AllNames is specified, returns a list of the attribute names.

For example: UserUnit Scale ...
tfSystemPurpose: User-defined and built-in purpose names

(substrate, blockage, control, softBdry, warning, tool,
label, flight, error, annotate, boundary, pin, drawing,
net, cell) in the tfSystemPurpose section are returned in the
condition of:
If -attr <Purpose_Name> is specified, returns the purpose number

of the specified purpose. Valid value: 0-255.
If -attr PurposeNum<Purpose_Number> is specified, returns the

corresponding purpose name.

K-2015.06

Technology File
If -attr All is specified, returns a list of user-defined purpose namenumber pairs. For example: {<Purpose_Name> <Purpose_Num>}
{<Purpose_Name> <Purpose_Num>}...
If -attr AllNames is specified, returns a list of user-defined purpose

names. For example: <Purpose_Name> <Purpose_Name> ...
If -attr AllBuiltIn is specified, returns a list of built-in purpose

name-number pairs. For example: {<Purpose_Name>
<Purpose_Num>} {<Purpose_Name> <Purpose_Num>}...
If -attr AllNamesBuiltIn is specified, returns a list of built-in

purpose names. For example: <Purpose_Name> <Purpose_Name>
...
tfLayoutLayerTable: Attributes for a specified layer identifier defined in

this section are returned in the condition of:
If -attr LayerName is specified, returns the layer name of the layer.
If -attr LayerNum is specified, returns the layer number of the layer.

Valid value: 0-255.
If -attr PurposeName is specified, returns the purpose name of the

layer.
If -attr PurposeNum is specified, returns the purpose number of the

layer. Valid value: 0-255.
If -attr FillColor is specified, returns the fill color name of the

layer.
If -attr Stipple is specified, returns the stipple name of the layer.
If -attr LineColor is specified, returns the line color name of the

layer.
If -attr LineStyle is specified, returns the line style name of the

layer.
If -attr Packet is specified, returns the packet name of the layer.
If -attr Visible is specified, returns 1 if the shapes in the layer is

visible; otherwise, returns 0.
If -attr Selectable is specified, returns 1 if the shapes in the layer

is selectable; otherwise, returns 0.
If -attr Appear is specified, returns 1 if the layer appears in the layer

table pane; otherwise, returns 0.

K-2015.06
353

Technology File
If -attr All is specified, returns a list of attribute-value pairs for the

specified layer. If FillColor, Stipple, LineColor, and LineStyle
are defined but Packet is not, the packet is not listed. For example:
{LayerName <Layer_Name>} {LayerNum <Layer_Num>} ...
If -attr AllNames is specified, returns a list of the above attribute

names. If FillColor, Stipple, LineColor, and LineStyle are
defined but Packet is not, the packet is not listed. For example:
LayerName LayerNum ...
Other attributes without any specified layer identifier are also returned.
These attributes include all user-defined and built-in layers ({PinBorder
substrate}, {PlaceBlockage blockage}, {PassThrough
control}, {SoftBdry softBdry}, {RouteBlockage warning},
{Mark tool}, {PinBlockage label}, {TLRDevBdry flight},
{TLRPadBdry annotate}, {CellBdry boundary}, {SoftPin pin},
{ShortErr drawing}, {R_Extent net}, and {CoreBdry cell})
defined in the tfLayoutLayerTable section.
If -attr All is specified, returns a list of layer identifiers.

names. For example: LayerName LayerNum ...
If -attr AllBuiltIn is specified, returns a list of the above built-in

layer identifiers.
tfStreamIoTable: Attributes for a specified layer identifier defined in this

section are returned in the condition of:
If -attr StreamNum is specified, returns the mapped stream number

of the layer. Valid value: 0-65535.
If -attr DataType is specified, returns the mapped data type number

of the layer. Valid value: 0-65535.
If -attr Available is specified, returns 1 if the layer mapping is

available; otherwise, returns 0.
If -attr All is specified, returns a list of the above attribute names

and their values for the layer. For example: {StreamNum
<Stream_Num>} {DataType <Date_Type_Num>} ...
Other attributes without any specified layer identifier are also returned in the
condition of:
354
If -attr All is specified, returns a list of the layer identifiers.

K-2015.06

Technology File

names. For example: StreamNum DataType ...
tfLayoutMagicCell: Attributes defined in this section are returned in the

condition of:
If -attr DeviceName is specified, returns the device name.
If -attr DeviceType is specified, returns the device type. Only the

transistor device type is supported currently.
Before getting the Version or AllVersions attributes, the

MCellVersionControl flag must be set under the [LeoPreference]
section of the laker.rc resource file:
MCellVersionControl = TRUE
If -attr AllVersions is specified, returns a list of versions for the

device identifier.
If -attr Version is specified, returns the version of the device

identifier. The value 0 corresponds to the latest version.
If the attributes for layerDef are specified, returns the following attributes:
If -attr LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name>Name is specified,

returns the mapped layer name defined in the device.
If -attr LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name>Layer is specified,

returns a layer identifier for the mapped layer defined in the device.
If -attr LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name>Generate is specified,

returns the value defined with generate for the mapped layer in the
device. Valid values: on, off, user, and <constraint>.
If -attr LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name>Stretchable is
specified, returns the value defined with stretchable for the mapped
layer in the device.
If -attr LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name>Extend is specified,

returns the value defined with extend for the mapped layer in the
device. Valid values: on, fillNotch, and rectangle.
If -attr LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name>BoolOper is specified,

returns the Boolean operations defined for the mapped layer in the
device.
If -attr LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name>IsUser is specified,

returns 1 if the mapped layer is user-defined; otherwise, returns 0.

K-2015.06
355

Technology File
356
If -attr LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name>,
LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name>All is specified, returns a list of
attribute-value pairs for the mapped layer defined in the device. For
example: {LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name>Name
<Mapped_Layer_Name>}
{LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name>Layer
<Layer_Identifier>} ...
If -attr LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name>AllNames is specified,

returns a list of attribute names for the mapped layer defined in the
device. For example: LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name>Name
LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name>Layer ...
If -attr LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name>String is specified, the

rule string for the mapped layer defined in the device is returned.
If -attr LayerDef or -attr LayerDefAll is specified, returns a

list of attribute-value pairs for all mapped layers defined in the device.
For example: {LayerDef<Mapped_Layer1_Name>Name
<Mapped_Layer1_Name>}
{LayerDef<Mapped_Layer1_Name>Layer
{LayerDef<Mapped_Layer2_Name>Name
If -attr LayerDefAllNames is specified, returns a list of the mapped

layer names defined in the device. For example:
LayerDef<Mapped_Layer1_Name>
LayerDef<Mapped_Layer2_Name> ...
If -attr LayerDefReservedNames is specified, returns a list of the

reserved mapped layer names defined in the device. For example:
If -attr LayerDefUserNames is specified, returns a list of

LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name> where the user-defined mapped
layer names defined in the device. For example:
If -attr LayerDefString is specified, returns the rule string for the

layerDef rule defined in the device.

K-2015.06

Technology File
If the attributes for traitDef are specified, returns the following attributes:
If -attr TraitDef<Trait_Name>Name is specified, returns the trait

name defined in the device.
If -attr TraitDef<Trait_Name>RepPattern is specified, returns

the repeat pattern for the trait defined in the device.
If -attr TraitDef<Trait_Name>OptLayer is specified, returns a

list of option layer names for the trait defined in the device.
If -attr TraitDef<Trait_Name> or -attr

TraitDef<Trait_Name>All is specified, returns a list of attributevalue pairs for the trait defined in the device. For example:
{TraitDef<Trait_Name>Name <Trait_Name>}
{TraitDef<Trait_Name>RepPattern <0, 1>} ...
If -attr TraitDef<Trait_Name>AllNames is specified, returns a

list of attribute names for the trait defined in the device. For example:
TraitDef<Trait_Name>Name
TraitDef<Trait_Name>RepPattern ...
If -attr TraitDef<Trait_Name>String is specified, returns the

rule string for the trait defined in the device.
If -attr TraitDef or -attr TraitDefAll is specified, returns a

list of attribute-value pairs for all traits defined in the device. For
example:
{TraitDef<Trait1_Name>Name <Trait1_Name>}
{TraitDef<Trait1_Name>RepPattern <0, 1>} ...
{TraitDef<Trait2_Name>Name <Trait2_Name>}
{TraitDef<Trait2_Name>RepPattern <0, 1>} ...
If -attr TraitDefAllNames is specified, returns a list of the trait

names defined in the device. For example:
TraitDef<Trait1_Name>Name TraitDef<Trait2_Name>Name
...
If -attr TraitDefString is specified, returns the rule string for the

traitDef rule defined in the device.
If the attributes for ruleDef, stackVia, Esd, and polyContact with/

without ruleSwitch are specified, returns the following attributes.

K-2015.06
357

Technology File
When specifying the attributes, <Rule_Type> can be RuleDef,

StackVia, ESD, or PolyContact; and <Command_Name> must be
capitalized.
358
If -attr
[RuleSwitch<Switch_Name>]<Rule_Type><Command_Name>De
fault is specified, returns the default value defined with the command
in the rule type (within the rule switch) for the device. Valid value: a
floating point or pairs of floating points.
If -attr
[RuleSwitch<Switch_Name>]<Rule_Type><Command_Name>Co
ndition is specified, returns a list of conditional rules with its value
defined with the command in the rule type (within the rule switch) for the
device.
If -attr
[RuleSwitch<Switch_Name>]<Rule_Type><Command_Name> or
-attr
[RuleSwitch<Switch_Name>]<Rule_Type><Command_Name>Al
l is specified, returns a list of attribute-value pairs for the command
defined in the rule type (within the rule switch) of the device. For
example:
{[RuleSwitch<Switch_Name>]RuleDef<Command_Name>Defau
lt <Default_Value>} {[RuleSwitch<Switch_Name>]
RuleDef<Command_Name>Condition <Conditional_Rules>}
If -attr
[RuleSwitch<Switch_Name>]<Rule_Type><Command_Name>Al
lNames is specified, returns a list of attribute names where this
command name is defined in the rule type (within the rule switch) for the
device. For example: [RuleSwitch<Switch_Name>]
RuleDef<Command_Name>Default
[RuleSwitch<Switch_Name>]
RuleDef<Command_Name>Condition
If -attr [RuleSwitch<Switch_Name>]<Rule_Type> or -attr

[RuleSwitch<Switch_Name>]<Rule_Type>All is specified,
returns a list of attribute-value pairs for the rule type defined (within the
rule switch) in the device. For example:
{[RuleSwitch<Switch_Name>]RuleDef<Command1_Name>Defa
ult <Default_Value>} ...
{[RuleSwitch<Switch_Name>]RuleDef<Command2_Name>Defa
ult <Default_Value>} ...

K-2015.06

Technology File
If -attr [RuleSwitch<Switch_Name>]<Rule_Type>AllNames
is specified, returns a list of
[RuleSwitch<Switch_Name>]<Rule_Type><Command_Name>
where the command names defined in the rule type (within the rule
switch) for the device. For example: [RuleSwitch<Switch_Name>]
RuleDef<Command1_Name> [RuleSwitch<Switch_Name>]
RuleDef<Command2_Name> ...
If -attr RuleSwitchDefault or -attr RuleSwitchDefaultAll

is specified, returns a list of attribute-value pairs for all rule types without
any rule switch definition in the device. For example:
{RuleDef<Command_Name>Default <Default_Value>} ...
{StackVia<Command_Name>Default <Default_Value>} ...
If -attr RuleSwitchDefaultAllNames is specified, returns a list

of <Rule_Type> where the rule types without any rule switch definition
in the device. For example: RuleDef StackVia ...
If -attr RuleSwitchDefaultString is specified, returns the rule

string for the rule type without any rule switch definition in the device.
If -attr RuleSwitch<Switch_Name> or -attr

RuleSwitch<Switch_Name>All is specified, returns a list of
attribute-value pairs for all rule types defined within the rule switch in the
device. For example:
{RuleSwitch<Switch_Name>RuleDef<Command_Name>Default
<Default_Value>} ...
{RuleSwitch<Switch_Name>StackVia<Cmd_Name>Default
If -attr RuleSwitch<Switch_Name>AllNames is specified,

returns a list of RuleSwitch<Switch_Name><Rule_Type> where
the rule types defined within the rule switch in the device. For example:
RuleSwitch<Switch_Name>RuleDef
RuleSwitch<Switch_Name>StackVia ...
If -attr RuleSwitch<Switch_Name>String is specified, returns

the rule string for the rule type defined (within the rule switch) in the
device.
If -attr RuleSwitchAllNames is specified, returns a list of rule

switch names defined in the device.
If the attributes for CallBack are specified, returns the following attributes:
If -attr CallBackParams<Parameter_Name>Name is specified,

returns the variable name defined in the device.

K-2015.06
359

Technology File
360
If -attr CallBackParams<Parameter_Name>Default is
specified, returns the default value defined for the variable name in the
device.
If -attr CallBackParams<Parameter_Name>Type is specified,

returns the value type of the variable name defined in the device. Valid
values: string, integer, float, and Boolean.
If -attr CallBackParams<Parameter_Name>Editable is
specified, returns the editable status of the variable name defined in the
device. Valid values: editable and strict.
If -attr CallBackParams<Parameter_Name> or -attr

CallBackParams<Parameter_Name>All is specified, returns a list
of attribute-value pairs for the variable name defined in the device. For
example: {CallBackParams<Parameter_Name>Name
<Parameter_Name>}
{CallBackParams<Parameter_Name>Default
If -attr CallBackParams<Parameter_Name>AllNames is
specified, returns a list of attribute names where the variable is defined
in the device. For example:
CallBackParams<Parameter_Name>Name
CallBackParams<Parameter_Name>Default ...
If -attr CallBackParams<Parameter_Name>String is specified,

returns the rule string for the params rule defined in the device.
If -attr CallBackParams or -attr CallBackParamsAll is

specified, returns a list of attribute-value pairs for all variable names
defined with the params rule in the device.
{CallBackParams<Parameter1_Name>Name
<Parameter1_Name>}
{CallBackParams<Parameter1_Name>Default
{CallBackParams<Parameter2_Name>Name
<Parameter2_Name>}
{CallBackParams<Parameter2_Name>Default
If -attr CallBackParamsAllNames is specified, returns a list of

variable names defined with the params rule in the device. For example:
CallBackParams<Parameter1_Name>
CallBackParams<Parameter2_Name> ...

K-2015.06

Technology File
If -attr CallBackMcellInstId is specified, returns the variable

name defined with the mcellInstId rule in this device.
If -attr CallBackExec is specified, returns the rule strings of Tcl

command sets defined with the exec rule in the device.
If -attr CallBack or -attr CallBackAll is specified, returns a

list of attribute-value pairs for all attributes defined in the device. For
example: {CallBackParams<Parameter_Name>Name
<Parameter_Name>} ... {CallBackMcellInstId
<Variable_Name>} ...
If -attr CallBackAllNames is specified, returns a list of attribute

names where the rules are defined in the device. For example:
CallBackParams<Parameter1_Name>
CallBackParams<Parameter2_Name> ...
CallBackMcellInstId CallBackExec
If -attr CallBackString is specified, returns the rule string for the

callBack rule defined in the device.
If -attr All or -attr AllNames is specified, returns the following

attributes:
If -attr All is specified, returns a list of attribute-value pairs of all

above attribute names defined in the device. For example:
{DeviceName <Device_Name>} {AllVersions
<Version_Num_List>} {Version
<Version_Num>} ...
{LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name>Name
<Mapped_Layer_Name>} ... {TraitDef<Trait_Name>Name
<Trait_Name>} ...
{RuleSwitch<Switch_Name>RuleDef<Command_Name>Default
{CallBackParams<Parameter_Name>Name
<Parameter_Name>} ...

names defined in the device. For example: DeviceName DeviceType
AllVersions Version LayerDef TraitDef RuleSwitch
CallBack.
tfLayoutConnection: Attributes for a specified layer identifier are

returned in the condition of:
If -attr IsWireLayer is specified, returns 1 if the layer is defined as

a wiring layer in the general connection rule; otherwise, returns 0.

K-2015.06
361

Technology File
362
If -attr IsViaLayer is specified, returns 1 if the layer is defined as

a via layer; otherwise, returns 0.
If -attr IsStopLayer is specified, returns 1 if the layer is defined as

a stop layer; otherwise, returns 0.
If -attr IsMultiPolyLayer is specified, returns 1 if the layer is

defined as a poly layer in the multi-poly connection rule; otherwise,
returns 0.
If -attr WireLayers is specified, returns a list of wiring layer

identifiers defined in the same general connection rules with the layer.
If -attr ViaLayers is specified, returns a list of via layer identifiers

defined in the same rules with the layer.
If -attr StopLayers is specified, returns a list of stop layer identifiers

defined in the same rules with the layer.
If -attr MultiPolyLayers is specified, returns a list of poly layer

identifiers defined in the same multi-poly rules with the layer.
If -attr ConnectLayers is specified, returns a list of layer identifiers

in the same rules where the layer is defined. For example:
{<Layer1_Identifier> <Layer2_Identifier>
{<Via_Layer_Identifier_List>}
[<Stop_Layer_Identifier>]} ...
{{<Poly_Layer_Identifier_List>}
{<Via_Layer_Identifier_List>}
[<Stop_Layer_Identifier>]} ...
If -attr IsMetalLayer is specified, returns 1 if the layer is defined

in defMetalLayer; otherwise, returns 0.
If -attr IsPolyLayer is specified, returns 1 if the layer is defined in

defPolyLayer; otherwise, returns 0.
If -attr IsOdLayer is specified, returns 1 if the layer is defined in

defOdLayer; otherwise, returns 0.

and their values for the layer. For example: {IsWireLayer <0, 1>}
{IsViaLayer <0, 1>} ...

names. For example: IsWireLayer IsViaLayer ...

K-2015.06

Technology File
condition of:
If -attr WireLayers is specified, returns a list of wiring layer

identifiers defined in all general connection rules.
If -attr ViaLayers is specified, returns a list of via layer identifiers

defined in all rules.
If -attr StopLayers is specified, returns a list of stop layer identifiers

defined in all rules.
If -attr MultiPolyLayers is specified, returns a list of poly layer

identifiers defined in all rules.
If -attr MetalLayers is specified, returns a list of layer identifiers

defined in defMetalLayer.
If -attr PolyLayers is specified, returns a list of layer identifiers

defined in defPolyLayer.
If -attr OdLayers is specified, returns a list of layer identifiers

defined in defOdLayer.

and their values. For example: {WireLayers
<Wire_Layer_Identifier_List>} {ViaLayers
<Via_Layer_Identifier_List>} ...

names. For example: WireLayers ViaLayers ...
tfNetRouteRule: Attributes for a specified layer identifier are returned in

the condition of:
If -attr IsPolyLayer is specified, returns 1 if the layer is defined in

defPolyLayer; otherwise, returns 0.
If -attr IsMetalLayer is specified, returns 1 if the layer is defined

in defMetalLayer; otherwise, returns 0.
If -attr IsRouteLayer is specified, returns 1 if the layer is defined

in defPolyLayer or defMetalLayer; otherwise, returns 0.
If -attr HRouteCost is specified, returns the horizontal routing cost

of the layer. Valid value: a positive integer.
If -attr VRouteCost is specified, returns the vertical routing cost of

the layer. Valid value: a positive integer.

K-2015.06
363

Technology File
364
If -attr RouteCost is specified, returns a pair of values for the

horizontal and vertical routing costs of the layer. For example:
<Horizontal_Route_Cost> <Vertical_Route_Cost>
If -attr MinWidth is specified, returns the minimum width of the

layer. Valid value: a floating point.
If -attr PreferWidth is specified, returns the preferred width of the

If -attr MinSpacing is specified, returns the minimum spacing of the

If -attr Direction is specified, returns the routing direction of the

layer. Valid values: H, V, HV, and VH.
If -attr MaxWireLen is specified, returns the maximum wiring length

of the layer. This is only valid for the layer defined in defPolyLayer.
Valid value: a floating point.
If -attr TrackPitch is specified, returns the pitch of the routing track

along the x-axis and y-axis for the layer. For example:
<X_Track_Pitch> <Y_Track_Pitch> (two floating points).
If -attr TrackOffset is specified, returns the offset of the routing

track along the x-axis and y-axis for the layer. For example:
<X_Track_Offset> <Y_Track_Offset> (two floating points).
If -attr Display is specified, returns 1 if displaying the routing track

for the layer; otherwise, returns 0.
If -attr Available is specified, returns 1 if the routing track for the

layer is available; otherwise, returns 0.
If -attr Spacing is specified, returns a list of other layer identifiers

and the spacing values in the same rules where the layer is defined. For
example: {<Other_Layer_Identifier> <Spacing_Value>}
...
If -attr ContactCost is specified, returns a list of contact device

names and their costs in the same rules where the layer is defined. For
example: {<Contact_Device_Name> <Cost>} ...
If -attr FatSpacing is specified, returns a list of value sets in the

same rule where the layer is defined. Valid value: a list of floating points.

and their values for the layer. For example: {IsPolyLayer <0, 1>}
{IsMetalLayer <0, 1>} ...
K-2015.06

Technology File
If -attr AllNames is specified, returns a list of above attribute names.

For example: IsPolyLayer IsMetalLayer ...
condition of:
If -attr PolyLayers is specified, returns a list of layer identifiers

defined in defPolyLayer.
If -attr MetalLayers is specified, returns a list of layer identifiers

defined in defMetalLayer.
If -attr RouteLayers is specified, returns a list of layer identifiers

defined in defPolyLayer or defMetalLayer.
If -attr SpacingLayers is specified, returns a list of layer identifiers

defined in the spacingRule rules.
If -attr ContactCost is specified, returns a list of all contact device

names and their costs defined in the defContDevice rules. For
example: {<Contact_Device_Name> <Cost>} ...
If -attr FatSpacingLayers is specified, returns a list of layer

identifiers defined in the fatSpaceRule rules.

above attributes. For example: {PolyLayers
<Poly_Layer_Identifier_List>} {MetalLayers
<Poly_Layer_Identifier_List>} ...

names. For example: PolyLayers MetalLayers ...
tfMaskResolution: Attributes for a specified layer identifier are returned

in the condition of:
If -attr XGridSpacing is specified, returns a pair of the spacing

distances of the minor grid along the x-axis for the layer. Valid value: a
floating point.
If -attr YGridSpacing is specified, returns a pair of the spacing

distances of the minor grid along the y-axis for the layer. Valid value: a
floating point.
If -attr GridSpacing is specified, returns a pair of the spacing

distances of the minor grid along the x-axis and y-axis for the layer. For
example: <X_Grid_Spacing> <Y_Grid_Spacing>.

K-2015.06
365

Technology File
If -attr Available is specified, returns 1 if the minor grid for the

layer is available; otherwise, returns 0.

and their values for the layer. For example: {XGridSpacing
<X_Grid_Spacing>} {YGridSpacing <Y_Grid_Spacing>}
{Available <0, 1>} ...

names. For example: XGridSpacing YGridSpacing
GridSpacing Available
condition of:
If -attr All is specified, returns a list of the layer identifiers defined

in the tfMaskResolution section.

names. For example: XGridSpacing YGridSpacing
GridSpacing Available
tfStandardDefinition: Attributes are returned in the condition of:
If -attr DeviceName is specified, returns the device name.
If -attr IsStandardVia is specified, returns 1 if the device is a

standard via; otherwise, returns 0.
If -attr IsCustomVia is specified, returns 1 if the device is a custom

via; otherwise, returns 0.
If the attributes for the stdViaDef rules are specified, returns the
layerDef attributes in the conditon of:
366
If -attr LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name>Name is specified,

returns the mapped layer name defined in the device.
If -attr LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name>Layer is specified,

returns a layer identifier for the mapped layer defined in the device.
If -attr LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name> or -attr

LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name>All is specified, returns a list of all
attribute names and their values for the mapped layer defined in the
device. For example: {LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name>Name
<Mapped_Layer_Name>}
{LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name>Layer
<Layer_Identifier>}.

K-2015.06

Technology File
If -attr LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name>AllNames is specified,

returns a list of the attribute names for the mapped layer defined in the
device. For example: LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name>Name
LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name>Layer.
If -attr LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name>String is specified,

returns the rule string for the mapped layer defined in the device.
If -attr LayerDef or -attr LayerDefAll is specified, returns a

list of attribute-value pairs for all mapped layer defined in the device. For
example: {LayerDef<Mapped_Layer1_Name>Name
<Layer_Identifier>}
{LayerDef<Mapped_Layer2_Name>Name
If -attr LayerDefAllNames is specified, returns a list of

LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name> where the mapped layer names
defined in the device. For example:
If -attr LayerDefString is specified, returns the rule string for the

layerDef rule defined in the device.
If the attributes for the stdViaDef rules are specified, returns the ruleDef
attributes as follows. When specifying the attributes, <Command_Name>
must be capitalized.
If -attr RuleDef<Command_Name>Default is specified, returns a

list of the default values defined with the command name in the device.
Valid value: a list of floating points or pairs of floating points.
If -attr RuleDef<Command_Name> or -attr

RuleDef<Command_Name>All is specified, returns a list of attributevalue pairs for the command name defined in the device. For example:
RuleDef<Command_Name>Default <Default_Value>
If -attr RuleDef<Command_Name>AllNames is specified, returns a

list of the attribute names where the command name is defined in the
device. For example: RuleDef<Command_Name>Default

K-2015.06
367

Technology File
If -attr RuleDef or -attr RuleDefAll is specified, returns a list

of the attribute names and their values for all rules defined in the device.
For example: {RuleDef<Command1_Name>Default
<Default_Value>} {RuleDef<Command2_Name>Default
If -attr RuleDefAllNames is specified, returns a list of

RuleDef<Command_Name> where the command names defined in the
device. For example: RuleDef<Command1_Name>
RuleDef<Command2_Name> ...
If -attr RuleDefString is specified, returns the rule string for the

ruleDef rule defined in the device.
If the attributes for the customViaDef rules are specified, returns the
layerDef attributes. The layerDef attributes of the customViaDef
rules are similar to the layerDef attributes of the stdViaDef rules.
If the attributes for the customViaDef rules are specified, returns the
masterDef attributes in the condition of:
368
If -attr MasterDefLibName is specified, returns the library name of

the master cell view for the device.
If -attr MasterDefCellName is specified, returns the cell name of

If -attr MasterDefViewName is specified, returns the view name of

If -attr MasterDef or -attr MasterDefAll is specified, returns

a list of attribute-value pairs of all attributes defined in the device. For
example: {MasterDefLibName <Library_Name>}
{MasterDefCellName <Cell_Name>} {MasterDefViewName
<View_Name>}
If -attr MasterDefAllNames is specified, returns a list of all

attribute names defined in the device. For example:
MasterDefLibName MasterDefCellName MasterDefViewName.
If -attr MasterDefString is specified, returns the rule string of the

masterDef rule defined in the device.

K-2015.06

Technology File
If -attr All or -attr AllNames is specified, returns the following

attribues:

above attributes defined in the device. For example: {DeviceName
<Device_Name>} {IsStandardVia <0, 1>} {IsCustomVia
<0, 1>} ... {LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name>Name
<Mapped_Layer_Name>} ...
{RuleDef<Command_Name>Default <Default_Value>}...
{DeviceName <Device_Name>} {IsStandardVia <0, 1>}
{IsCustomVia <0, 1>} ...
{LayerDef<Mapped_Layer_Name>Name
<Mapped_Layer_Name>} ... {MasterDefLibName
<Library_Name>}...

names defined in the device. For example: DeviceName
IsStandardVia IsCustomVia LayerDef RuleDef
MasterDefLibName MasterDefCellName MasterDefViewName.
Syntax
Method 1:
tfGet -lib libId -sect sectName [-deviceName deviceName [deviceType deviceType] [-ver version]]
Method 2:
tfGet -obj objId [-layer layerId] [-attr attrName]
Method 3:
tfGet -lib libId -sect sectName [-deviceName deviceName [deviceType deviceType] [-ver version]] [-layer layerId]
-attr attrName
Method 4:
tfGet -lib libName -param parameters
Returns
For Method 1, a section or device identifier is returned if successful; otherwise,
returns nothing.
For Method 2, 3 and 4, the value of the specified attribute is returned if

K-2015.06
369

Technology File
Arguments
370
Argument
Description
-attr attrName

Valid values: All and AllNames (default=All).
All : Retuen a list of all attribute names and their values.
AllNames : Return a list of all attribute names.
-deviceName
deviceName
Specify the device name. This argument is valid for the

tfLayoutMagicCell and tfStandardDefinition
sections. For the tfLayoutMagicCell section, only the
transistor device names are supported.
-deviceType
deviceType
Specify the device type. This argument is valid for the

transistor device type defined in the
tfLayoutMagicCell section.
-layer layerId
-lib libId/libName
Specify the library identifier only for Method 1, 2, and 3.

Specify the logical library name or library identifier for
Method 4.
-obj objId
Specify the section or device identifier.
-param parameters
Specify the parameters.

Valid values: fileName and lastModifiedDate.
fileName : Get the full path of the specified technology
file.
lastModifiedDate : Get the last modified date of the
specified technology library. This date is updated when
creating a library or replacing a technology file.
-sect sectName
Specify the section name to query rules.

Valid values: tfTechParameter,
tfLayoutSystemUnit, tfSystemPurpose,
tfLayoutLayerTable, tfStreamIoTable,
tfLayoutMagicCell, tfLayoutConnection,
tfNetRouteRule, tfMaskResolution, and
tfStandardDefinition.

K-2015.06

Technology File
Argument
Description
-ver version
Specify the version number. This argument is valid for the

tfLayoutMagicCell section.
Valid value: a positive integer, less than or equal to the
latest version number (default=0, which corresponds to the
latest version number).
For example, assuming that the latest version number is 5,
and the version number of the working MCell sub-master
is 3, when -ver 0 is specified, the rule value of the latest
version is returned. When -ver 1 is specified, the rule
value of version number 1 is returned. When -ver is not
specified, the rule value of the working sub-master version
is returned.
Examples
# Example 1
# return the purpose number (240) of substrate
tfGet -lib sample -sect tfSystemPurpose -attr substrate
# Example 2
# return the purpose name (substrate) of the purpose number (240)
tfGet -lib sample -sect tfSystemPurpose -attr PurposeNum240
# Example 3
# Return the full path of the technology file
tfGet -lib sample -param fileName
# Output Results:
# /home/sample/mytf/sample.tf
# Example 4
# Return the last modified time of the technology library
set libId [dbOpenLib -lib sample -mode readOnly]
tfGet -lib $libId -param lastModifiedTime
# Output Results:
# Thu May 6 20:31:44 CST 2010

K-2015.06
371

Technology File
372

K-2015.06
5
5
Home Page
This chapter describes the definable Tcl commands to access the Graphical
User Interface (GUI) which applied within the Home Page.
File Commands
Library Commands
Category Commands
Cell Commands
Floorplan Commands
Options Commands
Symbol Callback Commands
Netlist Procedure Commands
Miscellaneous
File Commands
This section describes the Tcl commands applied to the File commands of the
Home Page. These commands include:
adpLibMgrExportSpice
adpLibMgrExportVeri
adpLibMgrImportTextView
adpLibMgrOpenDesign

K-2015.06
373
Chapter 5: Home Page

File Commands
adpOpenWaveAna
lakerCDLIn
lakerCDLOut
lakerCheckSchTimeStamp
lakerCheckUnsavedDesign
lakerChmod
lakerEDIFIn
lakerExit
lakerExpandSchParameter
lakerExportConstraint
lakerExportDEF
lakerExportLEF
lakerExportOASIS
lakerExportStream
lakerImportConstraint
lakerImportDEF
lakerImportLEF
lakerImportOASIS
lakerImportStream
lakerImportTLUPlus
lakerImportVerilog
lakerOpenDesign
lakerSession
The adpLibMgrExportSpice command exports the Laker ADP database to
a Spice format database.
374

K-2015.06

File Commands
Syntax
adpLibMgrExportSpice -lib libName -cell cellName [-view
viewName] [-file fileName] [-case case] [-sim netType]
[-include 0|1] [-flatten 0|1 [-delimiter delimiter]] [level 0|1] [-forkChild 0|1] [-end 0|1] [-genPseu 0|1] [genIncVa 0|1] [-addu 0|1] [-spiceStop 0|1] [-outputBorder
0|1] [-dummySuffix 0|1] [-busParentheses style] [linespace lineSpace] [-popupInfoDlg 0|1] [-extScript 0|1
[-command command] [-argv arguments]] [-pinInfo 0|1] [removeDevice 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-addu 0|1

1 : Apply the u scale to the width and length.
0 : Do not apply the u scale to the width and length.
-argv arguments
Specify the arguments for the script command when

-extScript is specified.
-busParentheses
style
Specify the bus translation style.

Valid values: Angle, Square, Underscore, and None
(default=Angle).
-case case
Specify the case sensitivity setting for the design.

Valid values: preserve, upper, and lower
(default=preserve).
-cell cellName
Specify the cell name of the output design.
-command
command
Specify the script command file when -extScript is

specified.
-delimiter
delimiter
Specify the hierarchical delimiter for objects when

-flatten is specified.
-dummySuffix 0|1

1 : Enable the Append Port Name for Dummy Nodes option.
0 : Disable the Append Port Name for Dummy Nodes option.

K-2015.06
375

File Commands
376
Argument
Description
-end 0|1

1 : Add the .end statement.
0 : Do not add the .end statement.
-extScript 0|1

1 : Enable the Invoke Script option.
0 : Disable the Invoke Script option.
-file fileName
Specify the file name of the output file.
-flatten 0|1

1 : Output the design to a flattened netlist.
0 : Output the design to a hierarchical netlist.
-forkChild 0|1

1: Invoke batch mode.
0: Do not invoke batch mode.
-genIncVa 0|1

1 : Generate the IncVA file (Include Verilog-A Modules in Eldo/
Spice netlist).
0 : Do not generate the IncVA file.
-genPseu 0|1

1 : Display the pseudo device statement.
0 : Do not display the pseudo device statement.
-include 0|1

1 : Export the header for each subcircuit.
0 : Do not export the header for each subcircuit.
-level 0|1

1 : Declare all levels in the output file as subckt.
0 : Do not declare all levels in the output file as subckt.
-lib libName
-linespace
lineSpace
Specify the number of maximum characters per line.

-outputBorder 0|1

1 : Export the border information of the top schematic.
0 : Do not export the border information of the top schematic.

K-2015.06

File Commands
Argument
Description
-pinInfo 0|1

1 : Append the pin direction information after the subckt
statement in the netlist.
0 : Do not append the pin direction information after the subckt
statement in the netlist.
-popupInfoDlg 0|1

1 : Show the Export Results Report form after exporting.
0 : Do not show the above form after exporting.
-removeDevice 0|1

1 : Remove the instance with the RemoveDevice parameter.
0 : Do not remove the instance with the RemoveDevice
parameter.
-sim netType
Specify the netlist type for the simulation.

Valid values: Hspice, CDL, Eldo, SmartSpice, and
Spectre (default=Hspice).
-spiceStop 0|1

1 : Ignore the spiceStop statement.
0 : Do not ignore the spiceStop statement.
-view viewName
Specify the view name for the output file.

Valid values: schematic and config.
Examples
# Example 1
adpLibMgrExportSpice -lib mixMode -cell inst -view schematic \
-file inst.sp -case preserve -sim Hspice -include 0 -level 0 \
-forkChild 0 -end 0 -genPseu 0 -genIncVa 0 -addu 0 \
-spiceStop 1 -outputBorder 0 -dummySuffix 0 \
-busParentheses Angle -linespace 72 -extScript 0
# Example 2
adpLibMgrExportSpice -lib mixMode -cell test1 -view config \
-file test1.sp -case preserve -sim Hspice -include 0 -level 0 \
-forkChild 0 -end 0 -genPseu 0 -genIncVa 0 -addu 0 \
-spiceStop 1 -outputBorder 0 -busParentheses Angle \
-linespace 72 -extScript 0 -popupInfoDlg 1
See Also
Home Page: File > Export > Spice

K-2015.06
377

File Commands
adpLibMgrExportVeri
The adpLibMgrExportVeri command exports the design database to the
Verilog format database.
Syntax
adpLibMgrExportVeri -lib libName -cell cellName -view
viewName -file fileName [-by callStyle] [-expand 0|1] [splitBundle 0|1] [-veriStop 0|1] [-hiddenPort port] [popupInfoDlg 0|1] [-linespace num] [-outTextView 0|1][cellHeader 0|1][-pwr netNames][-gnd netNames] [splitInstArray 0|1] [-insteadToken insteadValue]
Returns
None
Arguments
378
Argument
Description
-by callStyle
Specify the calling style for the port instance statement.

Valid values: name and reference (default=name).
-cell cellName
-cellHeader 0|1

1 : Dump the cell information before the module body.
0 : Do not dump the cell information before the module body.
-expand 0|1

1 : Execute the bus expansion.
0 : Do not execute the bus expansion.
-file fileName
Specify the output file name.
-gnd netNames
Specify the ground net name to be supply0 in the netlist.
-hiddenPort port
Specify the direction of hidden ports when exporting the

Verilog netlist.
Valid values: input and inout (default=inout).
-insteadToken
insteadValue
Specify the parentheses style for the instance array.

Valid values: line, square, and arc (default=line).
-lib libName

K-2015.06

File Commands
Argument
Description
-linespace num

-outTextView 0|1

1 : Merge the plain text files into one netlist file when exporting
Verilog netlist.
0 : Do not merge the plain text files into one netlist file when
exporting Verilog netlist.
-popupInfoDlg 0|1

1 : Show the Export Results Report form after exporting.
0 : Do not show the above form after exporting.
-pwr netNames
Specify the power net name to be supply1 in the netlist.
-splitBundle 0|1

1 : Expand bundle ports.
0 : Do not expand bundle ports.
-splitInstArray 0|1

1 : Expand instance array.
0 : Do not expand instance array.
-veriStop 0|1

1 : Ignore the verilogStop statement.
0 : Do not ignore the verilogStop statement.
-view viewName
Examples
# Example 1
adpLibMgrExportVeri -lib aa -cell BIT4_SW_CP_CELL \
-file BIT4_SW_CP_CELL.v -by name -expand 0 -veriStop 0
# Example 2
adpLibMgrExportVeri -lib IO -cell BBC4F -view schematic \
-file BBC4F.v -by name -expand 0 -splitBundle 0 \
-veriStop 0 -hiddenPort inout -linespace 128 -popupInfoDlg 1
See Also
Home Page: File > Export > Verilog

K-2015.06
379

File Commands
adpLibMgrImportTextView
The adpLibMgrImportTextView command imports a text file into the Laker
ADP database.
Syntax
adpLibMgrImportTextView [-file|-list] listFilename -path
runPath -lib libName -refLib refLib -tech techLibName [append] -textType textType
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-append
Specify that the technology file is from a library.
-file listFilename
Specify the name of the file.
-lib libName
Specify the library name of the imported results.
-list listFilename
Specify the name of the list file for the Verilog family.
-path runPath
Specify the location of the imported results.
-textType textType
Specify the language of text.

Valid Values: verilog, veriloga, verilogams,
spice, and spectre (default=verilog).
Examples
adpLibMgrImportTextView -textType verilog \
-file /home2/REG/FA.v -path /REG -lib wk2
See Also
Home Page: File > Import > Text
adpLibMgrOpenDesign
The adpLibMgrOpenDesign command returns 1 if the design data, with the
specified path and open mode, can be opened in a new Schematic Editor
window.
380

K-2015.06

File Commands
Syntax
adpLibMgrOpenDesign -lib libName -cell cellName [-mode mode]
[-viewType cellviewType] [-view viewName] [-showDsgWnd
restoreNum] [-topCell topCell] [-viewList {viewList}] [stopList {stopList}] [-openConfig] [-openTopCell] [dmCVCkout 0|1] [-dmCVCkin 0|1][-restorenum 0|1]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
Specify the cell to be opened.
-dmCVCkin 0|1

1 : Check in cell view files, that are checked out automatically.
The default value depends on the setting in the laker.rc
resource file.
0 : Do not check in cell view files.
-dmCVCkout 0|1

1 : Check out cell view files. The default value depends on the
setting in the laker.rc resource file.
0 : Do not check out cell view files.
-lib libName
Specify the library database.
-mode mode
Specify an open mode.

-openConfig
When specified, open the config view of the selected cell in the
Hierarchy Editor window.
-openTopCell
When specified, open the top cell of the selected config view in
the Schematic Editor window.
-restorenum 0|1

1 : Open the backup version cell view file.
0 : Do not open the backup version cell view file.
-showDsgWnd
restoreNum
Restore the backup database (default=-1).

K-2015.06
381

File Commands
Argument
Description
-stopList {stopList}
Specify a stop list at the global level with the following format:
{view1 view2 ... viewn}. For example: {schematic
symbol}.
Valid values: schematic, symbol, simulation, config,
veriloga, verilog, spice, and any user-defined view
name.
-topCell topCell
Specify the top cell of the config view with the following
format: {libName cellName viewName}.
-view viewName
Specify the view name of the cell to be opened.

name (default=schematic).
-viewList {viewList}
Specify an inherited view list at the cell level with the following
format: {view1 view2 ... viewn}. For example:
{schematic symbol}.
name.
-viewType
cellviewType
Specify the cell view type of the cell to be opened.

Valid values: schematic, schematicSymbol, simulation,
config, veriloga, verilog, and spice
(default=schematic).
Examples
# Example 1
# Create a new schematic view of library "a1", cell "ss"
adpLibMgrOpenDesign -lib a1 -cell ss -view schematic \
-mode edit -showDsgWnd 1
# Example 2
# Create a new symbol view of library "a1", cell "ss"
adpLibMgrOpenDesign -lib a1 -cell ss -view symbol \
-mode edit -showDsgWnd 1
# Example 3
# Create cell aaa with sym01 view, its cell view type is schematic
adpLibMgrOpenDesign -lib test -cell aaa -mode edit \
-viewType schematic -view sym01 -showDsgWnd 1
# Example 4
382

K-2015.06

File Commands
# Create cell aaa with schematic view, its cell view type is
# schematic
-view schematic -showDsgWnd 1
# Example 5
# Open cell aaa with sym01 view
-view sym01 -showDsgWnd 1
# Example 6
# Create a new config view
adpLibMgrOpenDesign -lib FA4 -cell HA -mode edit -view config \
-showDsgWnd 1 -topCell {FA4 HA schematic} -viewList schematic
# Example 7
# Open an existing config view
adpLibMgrOpenDesign -lib FA4 -cell XOR2 -mode edit -view config \
-showDsgWnd 1 -openConfig -openTopCell
See Also
adpDiscardDesign
Home Page: File> Open
Home Page: Cell > New
adpOpenWaveAna
The adpOpenWaveAna command returns 1 if the LakerWave window is
opened.
Syntax
adpOpenWaveAna -topWnd winId
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Specify the top window identifier.
Examples
adpOpenWaveAna -topWnd _adp1

K-2015.06
383

File Commands
See Also
Home Page: File > Waveform Analyzer
lakerCDLIn
The lakerCDLIn command imports a CDL format design to the Laker
database.
Syntax
lakerCDLIn -file fileName [-topCell topCells] [-excludedCell
excludedCells] -lib libName [-path path] ([-tech
techFile]| [-attachToLib masterLib]) [-forkChild 0|1] [ps 0|1] [-scale scale_LW] [-case case] [-cellCase case]
[-instCase case] [-netCase case] [-paraCase case] [modelMap modelMap] [-expandLog logFile] [-refLib
refLibName] [-execECO 0|1] [-extractConstraint 0|1] [priority priority] [-suffix suffix] [-ecoFile
ecoFileName] [-dumpMap modelMapFile] [-genAllSchematic
0|1] [-preProc 0|1] [-preProcBckp 0|1] [preProcBckpSuffix suffix] [-preProcCmd filename] [preProcArgs args] [-postProc 0|1] [-postProcCmd filename]
Returns
None
Arguments
384
Argument
Description
-attachToLib
masterLib
Specify the master library. This creates a library with the

technology file settings of the specified master library.
-case case
Globally set the case sensitivity in cell names, instance names,

pin/port/net names and parameter names.
Valid values: upper, lower, and preserve
(default=preserve).
-cellCase case
Set the case sensitivity in cell names only.

If not specified, the global setting specified by -case is used.
Valid values: upper, lower, and preserve.
-dumpMap
modelMapFile
Specify the model map file to be dumped from the reference

library.

K-2015.06

File Commands
Argument
Description
-ecoFile
ecoFileName
Specify the extracting command file.
-excludedCell
excludedCells
Specify the cells to be excluded. Multiple names must be

separated by spaces.
-execECO 0|1

1: Execute the ECO command file automatically.
0: Do not execute the ECO command file.
-expandLog
logFile
Specify the log file to describe the relationship between the

parameter and logic view name of expanded cells.
-extractConstraint
0|1

1: Extract design-driven layout (DDL) constraints.
0: Do not extract DDL constraints.
-file fileName
Specify the input CDL netlist file name.
-forkChild 0|1

-genAllSchematic
0|1

1: Generate schematics with placement and routing.
0: Generate schematics without placement and routing.
-instCase case
Set the case sensitivity in instance names only.

If not specified, the global setting specified by -case isused.
-lib libName
-modelMap
modelMap
Specify the model map file.
-netCase case
Set the case sensitivity in pin/port/net names only.

-paraCase case
Set the case sensitivity in parameter names only.


K-2015.06
385

File Commands
386
Argument
Description
-path path
-postProc 0|1

1 : Enable the Post-process option.
0 : Disable the Post-process option.
-postProcCmd
filename
Specify the Tcl script file. This argument is valid only if postProc 1 is specified.
-preProc 0|1

1 : Enable the Pre-process option.
0 : Disable the Pre-process option.
-preProcArgs args
Specify the arguments for the Tcl script. This argument is valid
only if
-preProc 1 is specified.
-preProcBckp 0|1

1 : Enable the Backup Input File with Suffix option.
0 : Disable the Backup Input File with Suffix option.
-preProcBckpSuffix
suffix
Specify the suffix string for the backup input file.

Valid value: a string (default=_bak).
-preProcCmd
filename
Specify the Tcl script file. This argument is valid only if preProc 1 is specified.
-priority priority
Specify a priority to handle conflicted constraints.

Valid values: schematic and layout (default=schematic).
-ps 0|1

1: Extract the swapping information of equivalent ports from the
imported netlist data.
0: Do not extract any swapping information.
-refLib
refLibName
Specify the referenced library for extracting the object tree

information.
-scale scale_LW
Set a scale factor to evaluate the final width and length of

transistors in the schematic. The unit is micron (u), and the
default value is 1.

K-2015.06

File Commands
Argument
Description
-suffix suffix
Specify the suffix for renaming conflicted constraints

(default=_LK).
-tech techFile
Specify the technology file.
-topCell topCells
Specify the top cells of the design to be translated. Multiple

names must be enclosed by brackets { } and separated by
spaces, commas, or semicolons.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerCDLIn -file demo.cir -tech demo.tf -lib test
-modelMap demo.map
# Example 2
lakerCDLIn -file AutoPortMap.cir -tech leo306.tf -lib testDB \
-forkChild 0 -ps 1 -case preserve -modelMap AutoPortMap.map
# Example 3
lakerCDLIn -refLib q1 -ecoFile ./q1_ECO.cmd -file retree.cir \
-tech demo.tf -lib q2 -forkChild 0 -ps 1 -case preserve
# Example 4
lakerCDLIn -refLib q1 -retreeView schematic -backup 0 \
-ecoFile ./q1_ECO.cmd -dumpMap ./q1.map -file retree.cir \
-tech sample.tf -lib q2 -forkChild 0 -ps 1 -case preserve \
-modelMap test2.map
# Example 5
lakerCDLIn -file demo.cir -tech demo.tf -lib test \
-modelMap demo.map -expandLog ./demo_expand.log
# Example 6
lakerCDLIn -file laker.cir -lib top -tech ./a.tf -ps 1 \
-modelMap ./a.map -case upper -cellCase preserve -netCase lower
# Example 7
# Specify OPG & Sum as top cells; specify inv as the excluded cell
lakerCDLIn -file rcMfactor.cir -lib PCell -topCell {OPG Sum} \
-excludedCell {inv} -modelMap rcMfactor.map
# Specify script tab
lakerCDLIn -file rcMfactor.cir -lib PCell \
-modelMap rcMfactor.map -preProc 1 -preProcBckp 0 \
-preProcBckpSuffix _bak -preProcCmd preProc.tcl \
-preProcArgs {$FileName} -postProc 1 -postProcCmd postProc.tcl

K-2015.06
387

File Commands
See Also
Home Page: File > Import > CDL In
lakerCDLOut
The lakerCDLOut command exports the Laker design database to a CDL
format database.
Syntax
lakerCDLOut -file fileName -lib libName [-topCell
topCellName] [-prefix 0|1] [-modelMap mapFile] [forkChild 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file fileName
Specify the output CDL netlist file name.
-forChild 0|1

1 : Invoke batch mode.
0 : Do not invoke batch mode.
-lib libName
-modelMap
mapFile
Specify the model map file if adding prefix to the element name.
-prefix 0|1

1 : Add prefix to the element name.
0 : Do not add prefix to the element name.
-topCell
topCellName
Examples
# Example 1
lakerCDLOut -file CkSpiceout.cir -lib qqq -forkChild 1
# Example 2
lakerCDLOut -file test.sp -lib test -topCell TEST \
388

K-2015.06

File Commands
-prefix 1 -modelMap new.map
See Also
Home Page: File > Export > CDL Out
lakerCheckSchTimeStamp
The lakerCheckSchTimeStamp command checks whether the
corresponding schematics are modified since the last expansion by verifying
the schematic time stamp for all logic cell views in the specified libraries.
Syntax
lakerCheckSchTimeStamp -autoCheck | -lib libraryNameList [showResultForm 0|1] | -closeResultForm | -checkOpenResult
Returns
When -autocheck or -lib is specified:
If successful, a list of designs is returned when any of the designs are not
synchronized. This is a compound list, and the format is
{library_name_1 {cell_name_11 cell_name12 ...}}
{library_name_2 {cell_name_21 cell_name_22 ...}} ...
Or, nothing is returned if all designs are synchronized.
When -checkOpenResult is specified:
A pair of library/cell names is returned if successful when some working

designs are not synchronized.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-autoCheck
Automatically check the schematic time stamp of working

designs.
-checkOpenResult
Get the checked results from the working design.
-closeResultForm
Close the Checked Results form.
-lib libraryNameList
Specify a set of libraries to be checked.

K-2015.06
389

File Commands
Argument
Description
-showResultForm 0|1

1 : Show the Checked Results form.
0 : Hide the Checked Results form.
Examples
# Auto check on working designs
lakerCheckSchTimeStamp -autoCheck
# Check the "LibA", "LibB" and "LibC" libraries,
# and show the Checked Results form
lakerCheckSchTimeStamp -lib LibA LibB LibC -showResultForm 1
# and found that the following designs are not synchronized
# CellA2, CellA10, and CellA23 in LibA; CellC3 in LibC
# {LibA {CellA2 CellA10 CellA23}} {LibC {CellC3}}
# Close the checked results form
lakerCheckSchTimeStamp -closeResultForm
# Get the checking results from the working design
lakerOpenDesign -lib LibA -cell CellA2
lakerCheckSchTimeStamp -checkOpenResult
# and found that the working design is not synchronized
# LibA CellA2
See Also
Home Page: File > Check Schematic Time Stamp
The lakerCheckUnsavedDesign command checks whether all layout
designs are saved in memory.
390

K-2015.06

File Commands
A Save Confirmation form appears if there are any unsaved designs. You can
click Check All to check all designs in the Save field, or click Check None to
uncheck all designs in the Save field.
Figure 1
Save Confirmation Form
Syntax
Returns
1 if OK is clicked in the Save Confirmation form; otherwise returns 0 if Cancel
is clicked in the form.
Arguments
None
Examples
lakerChmod
The lakerChmod command configures the access permission of the specified
library or cell.
Syntax
lakerChmod -lib libName [-cell cellName [-view viewName]]
[-ownerW 0|1] [-groupR 0|1] [-groupW 0|1] [-otherR 0|1]
[-otherW 0|1]
Returns
None

K-2015.06
391

File Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
Specify the cell to be configured.
-lib libName
-groupR 0|1

1 : Restrict the read permission to group members.
0 : Disallow the read permission to group members.
-groupW 0|1

1 : Restrict the write permission to group members.
0 : Disallow the write permission to group members.
-otherR 0|1

1 : Restrict the read permission to others who are not in the
same group.
0 : Disallow the read permission to others who are not in the
same group.
-otherW 0|1

1 : Restrict the write permission to others who are not in the
same group.
0 : Disallow the write permission to others who are not in the
same group.
-ownerW 0|1
Valid value: Boolean values, 0 and 1.

1 : Restrict the write permission to the owner.
0 : Disallow the write permission to the owner.
-view viewName
Specify the view name of the cell to be configured.
Examples
# Example 1
# configure the access permission of demoCell in demoLib library
lakerChmod -lib demoLib -cell demoCell -groupR 1 -groupW 1 \
-otherR 1 -otherW 0
# Example 2
# Disallow the write permission of layout view of demoCell cell
# in demoLib library to the owner
lakerChmod -lib demoLib -cell demoCell -view layout -ownerW 0
392

K-2015.06

File Commands
See Also
Home Page: File > Access Permission
lakerEDIFIn
The lakerEDIFIn command imports an EDIF format design to the Laker
database.
Syntax
lakerEDIFIn -file fileName [-topCell topCellName] -lib
libName [-from fromSource] ([-tech techFile] | [attachToLib masterLib]) [-path path] [-cvMode
cellviewMode] [-forkChild 0|1] [-ps 0|1] [-case case] [cellCase case] [-instCase case] [-netCase case] [paraCase case][-scale scale_LW] [-refLib refLibName] [execECO 0|1] [-overwriteCell 0|1] [-modelMap modelMdap]
[-expandLog logFile] [-extractConstraint 0|1] [-priority
schematic|layout] [-cdf cdfPath] [-suffix suffix] [ecoFile ecoFileName] [-dumpMap modelMapFile] [ignoreNameList {IgnoreList}] [-shortNameList
{ShortList}]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-attachToLib
masterLib

-case case
Globally set the case sensitivity in cell names, instance names,

pin/port/net names and parameter names.
Valid values: upper, lower, and preserve
(default=preserve if it imports from Composer;
default=upper if it imports from ViewDraw).
-cdf cdfPath
Specify the iCDF directory.
-cellCase case
Set the case sensitivity in cell names only.


K-2015.06
393

File Commands
394
Argument
Description
-cvMode
cellviewMode
Get the EDIF information.

Valid values: netlist and schematic (default=schematic).
netlist: Cell views with logic information only.
schematic: Cell views with logic and physical information.
-dumpMap
modelMapFile
Specify the model map file that is to be dumped from the

reference library.
-ecoFile
ecoFileName
-execECO 0|1

-expandLog logFile

-extractConstraint
0|1

-file fileName
Specify the input EDIF schematic file name.
-forkChild 0|1

-from fromSource
Indicate the file source of EDIF data.

Valid values: Composer and ViewDraw. (default=Composer).
-ignoreNameList
{IgnoreList}
Specify the property used to ignore devices or symbols.
-instCase case
Set the case sensitivity in instance names only.

-lib libName
-modelMap
modelMap

K-2015.06

File Commands
Argument
Description
-netCase case
Set the case sensitivity in pin/port/net names only.

-overwriteCell 0|1

1: Overwrite existing cell views.
0: Do not overwrite any existing cell views.
-paraCase case
Set the case sensitivity in parameter names only.

-path path
-priority
schematic|layout

Valid values: schematic and layout (default=schematic).
-ps 0|1

1: Extract the swapping information of equivalent ports from the
imported schematic.
-refLib refLibName
Specify the referenced library for extracting the object tree

information.
-scale scale_LW

transistors in the schematic. The unit is micron (u), and the
default value is 1.
-shortNameList
{ShortList}
Specify the property used to ignore devices and short pins.
-suffix suffix

(default=_LK).
-tech techFile
-topCell
topCellName
Specify the top cell name of the design to be translated.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerEDIFIn -file ./16adder.edif -tech ./16adder.tf -path . \

K-2015.06
395

File Commands
-forkChild 0 -ps 1 -case preserve -modelMap ./16adder.map

# Example 2
-forkChild 0 -ps 1 -case preserve -modelMap ./16adder.map
# Example 3
-forkChild 0 -ps 1 -case preserve -modelMap ./16adder.map \
-expandLog ./16adder_expand.log
# Example 4
lakerEDIFIn -file ./adder.edif -tech ./adder.tf -path . \
-ps 1 -modelMap ./adder.map -case upper -cellCase preserve \
-netCase lower
See Also
Home Page: File > Import > EDIF200 From Composer
Home Page: File > Import > EDIF200 From ViewDraw
lakerExit
The lakerExit command closes and leaves the program. This command is
usually written on the last line of the command file (*.cmd) to exit the program.
Syntax
lakerExit [-confirm 0|1][-dmCkinDesign design_name
[design_name ...]] [-dmCkcancelDesign design_name
[design_name ...]]
Returns
None
Arguments
396
Argument
Description
-confirm 0|1

1 : Prompt a confirmation form when exiting the program.
0 : Do not prompt a confirmation form when exiting the
program.
-dmCkinDesign
design_name
[design_name ...]
Specify a design name or a set of design names, which are

checked out automatically, to be checked in.
Valid value: {library_name cell_name view_name}.

K-2015.06

File Commands
Argument
Description
-dmCkcancelDesign
design_name
[design_name ...]
Specify a design name or a set of design names, which are

checked out automatically, to cancel the check out.
Valid value: {library_name cell_name view_name}.
Examples
# Example 1
# Exit the program
lakerExit
# Example 2
# Check in or cancel checkouts automatically as exiting process
lakerExit -dmCkcancelDesign \
{CPU AN2D1 layout} {CPU AN3D1 schematic} \
-dmCkinDesign {CPU INV0 symbol} {CPU INV1 abs}
# Example 3
lakerExit -saveToDisk 1
See Also
Home Page: File > Exit
lakerExpandSchParameter
The lakerExpandSchParameter command expands the schematic data to
the Laker database.
This command is only available for the Laker_L3 and Laker_Viewer license
features.
Syntax
lakerExpandSchParameter -lib libName [-topCell topCellName]
[-toLib toLib] [-path path] [-tech techFile | -attachToLib
masterLib] [-refLib refLibName] [-execECO 0|1] [extractConstraint 0|1] [-suffix suffix] [-ps 0|1] [-copy
0|1 -copyRefLib copyRefLib] [-overwriteCell 0|1] [priority priority] [-scale scale] [-ecoFile ecoFileName]
[-dumpMap modelMapFile] [-modelMap modelMapFile] [showOnly [-cbFunc cbProcName]] [-expandLog logFile] [switchViews viewList] [-ignoreNameList {IgnoreList}] [shortNameList {ShortList}] [-expandVectorInst 0|1] [skipSaveModelMap 0|1] [-expandLevel level]

K-2015.06
397

File Commands
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-attachToLib
masterLib

-cbFunc
cbProcName
Specify the callback procedure name when the user action

is completed.
The callback procedure has a parameter with string, which
can be written in the following format: {srcLibName
srcTopCellName srcTopViewName} {destLibName
destTopCellName destTopViewName}.
When the user action failed or is cancelled, the parameter
of the callback procedure is empty. The callback procedure
is discarded when the command is aborted.
398
-copy 0|1

1: Copy expanded source cell views to the target cell
views.
0: Do not copy any expanded source cell views.
-copyRefLib copyRefLib
Copy referenced libraries. This argument works with copy.

Valid values: all, noRef, and ignoreRef.
all : Copy expanded source cell views with all referenced
libraries.
noRef : Copy expanded source cell views without any
referenced libraries.
ignoreRef : Copy expanded source cell views with all
referenced libraries except those specified. ignoreRef is
not supported as copying a category.
-dumpMap
modelMapFile
Specify the model map file that is to be dumped from the

reference library.
-ecoFile
ecoFileName
-execECO 0|1


K-2015.06

File Commands
Argument
Description
-expandLevel level
Specify the hierarchy level to be expanded to.

Valid value: an integer from 0 to 49.
-expandLog logFile

-expandVectorInst 0|1

1: Expand array objects (vector instances) to scalar
instances in the logic view.
0: Retain array objects (vector instances) in the logic view.
-extractConstraint
0|1

1: Extract design-driven layout (DDL) constraints from
layout and schematic databases.
0: Extract DDL constraints from schematic database.
-ignoreNameList
{IgnoreList}
Specify the property used to ignore devices or symbols.
-lib libName
Specify the library database to be expanded.
-modelMap
modelMap
-overwriteCell 0|1
This argument comes along with -copy.

1: Overwrite existing cell views when copying the source
cell view.
0: Do not overwrite any existing cell views.
-path path
-priority priority

Valid values: schematic and layout
-ps 0|1

1: Extract the swapping information of equivalent ports.
-refLib
refLibName
Specify the reference library for extracting the object tree

information.

K-2015.06
399

File Commands
Argument
Description
-scale scale

transistors in the schematic. The unit is micron (u).
-showOnly
If specified, show the Expand Schematic Parameter form

with settings passed from this Tcl
lakerExpandSchParameter.
-shortNameList
{ShortList}
Specify the property used to ignore devices and short pins.
-skipSaveModelMap
0|1

1: Do not save the specified model map file to the target
library.
0: Save the specified model map file to the target library.
-suffix suffix

(default=_LK).
-switchViews viewList
Specify one or more view names.
-tech techFile
Specify the defined ASCII technology file.
-toLib toLib
Specify the destination library of the expanded results.
-topCell
topCellName
Specify the top cell name of the expanded design.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerExpandSchParameter -lib demo1 -toLib demo2 -refLib demo1 \
-extractConstraint 1 -priority layout -suffix _LK -execECO 1
# Example 2
lakerExpandSchParameter -showOnly -lib demo1 -toLib demo2 \
-refLib demo1 -extractConstraint 1 -priority layout \
-suffix _LK -execECO 1 -topCell test -cbFunc myProc
# Example 3
# Copy schematic with all referenced libraries except the
# specified libraries libA", libB, and libC
lakerExpandSchParameter -copy 1 \
-copyRefLib ignoreRef libA libB libC
400

K-2015.06

File Commands
See Also
Home Page: File > Expand Schematic
lakerExportConstraint
The lakerExportConstraint command exports library level constraints
from specified cells and views.
Syntax
lakerExportConstraint -lib libName -file fileName [-cell
cellNameList] [-view viewNameList] [-logFile logErrName]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellNameList
Specify a list of cell names separated by spaces.

If the cell list is not specified, constraints within each cell in
the selected library are exported.
If it is specified, constraints within the specified cell list are
exported.
-file fileName
Specify the output file name that is determined by the

specified library, cell and view names. The default is
<libName>_<cellName>_<viewName>.cons.
-lib libName
Specify the target library for constraints to be exported.
-logFile logErrName
Specify the file name for the log and error files
(default=constExport).
-view viewNameList
Specify a list of view names separated by spaces.

If the view list is not specified, constraints of all views in the
selected cell are exported.
If the view list is specified, constraints of the view list are
exported.
Examples
# Example 1
# Extract constraints from the logic view of cell 'TEST_01'
# from library 'TEST_LIB'
K-2015.06
401

File Commands
lakerExportConstraint -lib TEST_LIB -file TEST_LIB_logic.cons \

-cell TEST_01 -view logic
See Also
Home Page: File > Export > Constraint
lakerExportDEF
The lakerExportDEF command exports the Laker3 database to a DEF
format database.
Syntax
lakerExportDEF -file fileName -lib libName [-topCell
topCellName] [-view viewName] [-logFile logErrName] [forkChild 0|1] [-rectDrcFill 0|1] [-keepSoftPinShapes
0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
402
Argument
Description
-file fileName
Specify the output DEF file.
-forkChild 0|1

-keepSoftPinShapes
0|1

1 : Keep shapes in soft pins.
0 : Filter shapes in soft pins.
-lib libName
-logFile
logErrName
(default=DefOut).
-rectDrcFill 0|1

1 : Write DRC fillers as rectangles in the output file.
0 : Do not write DRC fillers as rectangles in the output file.

K-2015.06

File Commands
Argument
Description
-topCell
topCellName
Specify the top cell name of the output design.
-view viewName
Specify the output view name of the specified cell.
Examples
lakerExportDEF -file demo.def -lib demoLib -topCell design
See Also
Home Page: File > Export > DEF
lakerExportLEF
The lakerExportLEF command exports the Laker database to an LEF
format database.
Syntax
lakerExportLEF -file fileName -lib libName [-topCell
topCellList] [-cellList cellName] [-view viewName] [forkChild 0|1] [-logFile logErrName] [-version
[5.3|5.4|5.5|5.6|5.7]]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cellList cellName
Specify a cell name.
-file fileName
Specify the file name of the output LEF file.
-forkChild 0|1

-lib libName
-logFile logErrName
(default=LefOut).

K-2015.06
403

File Commands
Argument
Description
-topCell topCellList
Specify the top cell name(s) of the output design. Multiple

names must be enclosed by brackets { } and separated
by spaces, commas, or semicolons.
-version
[5.3|5.4|5.5|5.6|5.7]
Specify the supported LEF version.

Valid values: 5.3, 5.4, 5.4, 5.6, and 5.7 (default=5.6).
-view viewName
Specify the output the view name of the specified cell.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerExportLEF -file demo.lef -lib demoLib
See Also
Home Page: File > Export > LEF
lakerExportOASIS
The lakerExportOASIS command exports the Laker database to an OASIS
database.
Syntax
lakerExportOASIS -file expFileName -lib expLibName [-topCell
topCellList] [-case case] [-renameMode mode] [layerMapMode mode] [-layerMap layerMapFile] [-cellMap
cellMapFile] [-fontMap fontMapFile] [-forkChild 0|1] [label label] [-mergeRefLib 0|1] [-smashMCell mode}] [con3Layer 0|1] [-smashPCell 0|1] [-snapGrid 0|1] [-filter
0|1] [-filterDummyCellInst 0|1] [-scale dbScale] [expLevel levelRange] [-logicProp 0|1] [-MCellProp 0|1]
[-cvtRoundPath mode] [-path2Rect 0|1] [-cmpLevel level]
[-logInfo 0|1] [-dumpTree 0|1] [-logUndefInst 0|1] [logFile logErrName] [-showOnly 0|1] [-rotateArIdv 0|1]
Returns
None
404

K-2015.06

File Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-case case
Set the case sensitivity in cell names.

Valid values: Preserve, Upper, and Lower
(default=Preserve).
-cellMap cellMapFile
Specify the cell map file.
-cmpLevel level
Specify the compression level.

-con3Layer 0|1

1 : Export MCells contact top/bottom layers.
0 : Do not export MCells contact top/bottom layers.
-cvtRoundPath mode
Specify the path conversion mode.

Valid values: Polygon, Truncate, and Extend
(default=Polygon).
Polygon: Convert Round type paths to polygons.
Truncate: Change the path type to Truncate.Extend:
Change the path type to Extend.
-dumpTree 0|1

1 : Dump the design tree to a log file.
0 : Do not dump the design tree to a log file.
-expLevel levelRange
Specify the export level range from Level X to Level Y,

where X and Y are integers with value ranges from >=0
to <=49.
-file expFileName
Specify the exported OASIS file.
-filter 0|1

1 : Filter illegal polygons or paths.
0 : Do not filter any illegal polygons or paths.
-filterDummyCellInst 0|1

1 : Filter the empty cell and the reference but undefined
instance.
0 : Do not filter the empty cell and the reference but
undefined instance.
-fontMap fontMapFile
Specify the font map file.

K-2015.06
405

File Commands
406
Argument
Description
-forkChild 0|1

-layerMapMode mode
Specify the layer mapping mode.

Valid values: Map, Filter, and Off (default=Map).
Map: Use the layer map file, which has higher priority, or
the tfStreamIoTable section for layer mapping.
Filter: Filter the undefined layers and only convert the
layers that are defined in the layer map file or the
tfStreamIoTable section.
Off: Disable the option.
-label label
Set the case sensitivity in text labels.

(default=Preserve).
-layerMap layerMapFile
Specify the layer map file.
-lib expLibName
Specify the exported library database.
-logFile logErrName
(default=oasisOut).
-logicProp 0|1

1 : Export the logic information to the property.
0 : Do not export any logic information to the property.
-logInfo 0|1

1 : Save information messages to the log file.
0 : Do not save any information messages to the log file.
-logUndefInst 0|1

1 : Report undefined instances with their coordinate
location to the error file.
0 : Do not report any undefined instances with their
coordinate location to the error file.
-mergeRefLib 0|1

1 : Merge the referenced library.
0 : Do not merge any referenced libraries.

K-2015.06

File Commands
Argument
Description
-MCellProp 0|1

1 : Export the MCell information to the property.
0 : Do not export the MCell information to the property.
-path2Rect 0|1

1 : Convert 2-point paths to rectangles.
0 : Do not convert 2-point paths to rectangles.
-renameMode mode
Specify the renaming mode for duplicate cells.

Valid values: AppendLibName, AppendOrdinalNo,
and Off (default=AppendLibName).
AppendLibName: Append the library name to
duplicated cell names.
AppendOrdinalNo: Append a random number to
duplicated cell names.
Off: Do not rename any duplicated cells.
-rotateArrIdv 0|1

1: Convert the array rotation rule to rotate individual
elements of the array by 90 degrees.
0: Convert the array rotation rule to convert the whole
array by 90 degrees.
-scale dbScale
Specify the output design with a new dbScale.

dbScale=double.
-showOnly 0|1

1: Show the Export OASIS form.
0: Do not show the form.
-smashMCell mode
Smash MCells to cell instances.

Valid values: ExpCont, Off, and All
(default=ExpCont).
ExpCont: Smash MCells except contacts.
All: Smash all MCells.
-smashPCell 0|1

1: Smash Tcl PCells to cell instances.
0: Do not smash any Tcl PCells.

K-2015.06
407

File Commands
Argument
Description
-snapGrid 0|1

1 : Snap vertices to the minimum grid resolution.
0 : Do not snap vertices to the minimum grid resolution.
Specify the top cell name(s) of the output design.

Multiple names must be enclosed by brackets { } and
separated by spaces, commas, or semicolons.
Examples
lakerExportOASIS -file demo.oas -lib demo -topCell {top} \
-case Preserve -label Preserve -mergeRefLib 1 \
-smashMCell ExpCont -layerMapMode Map \
-cvtRoundPath Polygon
See Also
Home Page: File > Export > OASIS
lakerExportStream
The lakerExportStream command exports the Laker3 database to a GDSII
format database.
Syntax
lakerExportStream [-showOnly 0|1] -file fileName -lib
libName [-viewName viewName] [-topCell topCellList] [snapGrid 0|1] [-case case] [-forkChild 0|1] [-scale scale]
[-duplicatedCell ordinal] [-instProp instProp] [-netProp
netProp] [-mcellProp MCellProp] [-logicProp logicProp]
[-finShapeProp finShapeProp] [-fullColoringProp
fullColoringProp] [-maxVerti maxVerti] [-mergeRefLib
0|1] [-logInfo 0|1] [-skip200 0|1] [-SmashMCell mode] [filter 0|1] [-cellNameLen maxNameLen] [-layerMap
layerMap] [-exportLevel levelRange] [-logFile
logErrName] [-cellMap cellMap] [-purposeMap 0|1] [fontMap fontMap] [-label mode] [-IoLayerMapMode mode [IoLayerMapFullLock 0|1]] [-filterDummyCell 0|1] [filterDummyInst 0|1] [-filterText 0|1] [-OutAbsCell
{Off|ViaOnly|All}] [-dumpTree 0|1] [-con3Layer 0|1] [LogInstLoc 0|1] [-renPCell 0|1] [-rptZeroNegPitch 0|1]
[-propMap propMapFile] [-filterSysPin 0|1] [filterSoftPin 0|1] [-reduceDevice 0|1] [408

K-2015.06

File Commands
colorPropagation 0|1] [-convertPolyText 0|1] [convertTextBrackets 0|1] [-keepPCell 0|1] [-SmashPCell

0|1] [-designIntention 0|1 [-diLayerMapFile mapFileName
[-diIncludeOriginLayers 0|1]]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-case case

(default=Preserve).
-cellMap cellMap
-cellNameLen
maxNameLen
Specify the maximum length of cell names (default=32).
-colorPropagation 0|1

1 : Automatically propagate coloring shapes.
0 : Do not propagate coloring shapes.
-con3Layer 0|1

1 : Export MCells top/bottom contact layers.
0 : Do not export MCells top/bottom contact layers.
-convertPolyText 0|1

1 : Convert text labels using the Contemplate1 font type to
polygons.
0 : Do not export convert text labels using the Contemplate1
font to polygons.
-convertTextBrackets
0|1

1 : Convert the angle brackets of text labels to square
brackets.
0 : Do not convert the angle brackets of text labels to square
brackets.
-designIntention 0|1

1 : Export net-based shapes with mapped layers.
0 : Do not export net-based shapes with mapped layers.

K-2015.06
409

File Commands
410
Argument
Description
-diIncludeOriginLayers
0|1
This argument is valid only if -designIntention is

specified.
1 : Export net-based shapes with mapped and original
layers.
0 : Export net-based shapes with mapped layers only.
-diLayerMapFile
mapFileName
Specify the layer map file for design intention.

This argument is valid only if -designIntention is
specified.
-dumpTree 0|1

0 : Do not the dump design tree to a log file.
-duplicatedCell
ordinal
Append a random number to duplicated cell names. The

library name is appended by default.
-exportLevel
levelRange
Specify the export level range from Level X to Level Y, where

X and Y are integers with value ranges from >=0 to <=49.
-file fileName
Specify the output GDSII file in *.db, *.gds, *.gz, or *.Z

formats.
-filter 0|1

0 : Do not filter any illegal polygons or paths.
-filterDummyCell 0|1

1 : Filter empty cells.
0 : Do not filter any empty cells.
-filterDummyInst 0|1

1 : Filter undefined instances.
0 : Do not filter any undefined instances.
-filterSoftPin 0|1

1 : Filter soft pin shapes.
0 : Do not filter any soft pin shapes.
-filterSysPin 0|1

1 : Filter system pins.
0 : Do not filter any system pins.

K-2015.06

File Commands
Argument
Description
-filterText 0|1

1 : Filter text data.
0 : Do not filter any text data.
-finShapeProp
finShapeProp
Export the real fin shape information with the specified

property number.
Valid value: an integer with value ranges from 1 to 127
(default=105).
-fontMap fontMap
-forkChild 0|1

-fullColoringProp
fullColoringProp
Export the color propagation of coloring shapes with the

specified property number.
(default=106).
-instProp instProp
Export the instance name information with the specified

property number.
(default=102).
-IoLayerMapFullLock
0|1

1 : Enable the Map to Full Locked option.
0 : Disable the Map to Full Locked option.
-IoLayerMapMode
mode

Valid values: Off, Map, and Filter (default=Off).

K-2015.06

Map: Use the layer map file, which has higher priority, or
the tfStreamIoTable section in the technology
section lakerLayerRule for layer mapping.
411

File Commands
Argument
Description
-keepPCell 0|1

1 : Keep the Tcl PCell and UDD information.
0 : Do not keep the Tcl PCell and UDD information.
-label mode

(default=Preserve).
-layerMap layerMap
Specify the layer map file for basic layer mapping.
-lib libName
-logFile logErrName
(default=streamOut).
-logicProp logicProp
Export the logic information with the specified property

number.
(default=103).
-logInfo 0|1

1 : Save information messages to the log file.
-LogInstLoc 0|1

1 : Report undefined instances with their coordinate location
to the error file.
0 : Do not report any undefined instances with their
-maxVerti maxVerti
Load maximum vertices in paths and polygons

(maximum=4096).
-mergeRefLib 0|1

1 : Merge the referenced library.
0 : Do not merge any referenced libraries.
-mcellProp MCellProp
Export the MCell information with the specified property

number.
(default=104).
412

K-2015.06

File Commands
Argument
Description
-netProp netProp
Export the net name information with the specified property

number.
(default=102).
-OutAbsCell mode
Export the abstract cell view.

Valid values: Off, ViaOnly, and All (default=Off).
Off: Do not export any abstract cell views.

ViaOnly: Export the abstract view of referenceVIA cells,
but do not export the abstract view of other cells.
All: Export the abstract view of all reference cells.
-propMap
propMapFile
Specify the property map file.
-purposeMap 0|1

1 : Enable the Reference Purpose Map File option.
0 : Disable the Reference Purpose Map File option.
-reduceDevice 0|1

1: Reduce the duplicates of MCells, Tcl PCells or UDDs to
one MCell, Tcl PCell or UDD and then export to the GDSII
file.
0: Export all duplicates of MCells, Tcl PCells or UDDs to the
GDSII file.
-renameMode 0|1

1: Enable the renaming mode for duplicated cells.
0: Disable the renaming mode for duplicated cells.
-renPCell 0|1

1: Rename modified Tcl PCells, naming in
string$$number, with new format stringSCnumber.
0: Do not rename any modified Tcl PCells.
-rptZeroNegPitch 0|1

1: Report zero or negative array pitch values.
0: Do not report any zero or negative array pitch values.
-scale scale
Set the db scale.

K-2015.06
413

File Commands
Argument
Description
-showOnly 0|1

1: Show the Export Stream form.
0: Do not show the form.
-skip200 0|1

1: Skip warning messages for over-200-vertex polygons.
0: Do not skip any warning messages.
-SmashMCell mode
Smash MCells to cell instances.

Valid values: Off, ExpCont, and All (default=ExpCont).

ExpCont: Smash MCells except contacts.
All: Smash all MCells.
-SmashPCell 0|1

1: Smash Tcl PCells to cell instances.
0: Do not smash any Tcl PCells.
-snapGrid 0|1

Specify the top cell name(s) of the output design. Multiple

names must be enclosed by brackets { } and separated by
-viewName viewName
Specify the view name for the specified cell

(default=layout).
Examples
# Example 1
lakerExportStream -file demo.db -Lib demoLib
# Example 2
lakerExportStream -file demo.db -lib demoLib -topCell "TOP" \
-case Preserve -maxVerti 1024 -mergeRefLib 1 -SmashMCell ExpCont
# Example 3
# Show the Export Stream form and specify the top cell and GDS file
lakerExportStream -showOnly 1 -file $sFileName \
-lib $sLibName -topCell $sCellName
# Example 4
414

K-2015.06

File Commands
lakerExportStream -file out01.db -lib lib01 -topCell {cell01} \

-case Preserve -label Preserve -maxVerti 1024 -mergeRefLib 1 \
-SmashMCell ExpCont -SmashPCell 1 -IoLayerMapMode Map
See Also
Home Page: File > Export > Stream
lakerImportConstraint
The lakerImportConstraint command imports library level constraints to
the Laker database.
Syntax
lakerImportConstraint -lib libName -file fileName [-mode
importMode] [-suffix suffix] [-cell cellNameList] [-view
viewNameList] [-logFile logErrName]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellNameList
Specify a list of cell names separated by spaces.

If the cell list is not specified, constraints within each cell in
the selected library are exported.
If it is specified, constraints within the specified cell list are
exported.
-file fileName
Specify the input file that contains the information of

constraints to be imported.
-lib libName
Specify the target library for constraints to be imported.
-logFile logErrName
(default=constImport).
-mode importMode
Specify the import mode.

Valid values: Rebuild, Overwrite, and Preserve
(default=Rebuild).
-suffix suffix

(default=_LK).

K-2015.06
415

File Commands
Argument
Description
-view viewNameList
Specify a list of view names separated by spaces.

If the view list is not specified, constraints of all views in the
selected library are imported.
If the view list is specified, constraints of the view list are
imported.
Examples
# Example 1
# Check constraints in the logic view of each cell from file
# 'TEST_LIB_all.cons' and import related constraints to the target
# library 'TEST_LIB01'.
lakerImportConstraint -lib TEST_LIB01 -view logic -file
TEST_LIB_all.cons
See Also
Home Page: File > Import > Constraint
lakerImportDEF
The lakerImportDEF command imports an DEF format design to the Laker
database.
Syntax
lakerImportDEF -file fileName -lib libName [-path libPath]
[-tech techFile | -attachToLib masterLib] [-forkChild
0|1] [-logFile logErrName]
Returns
None
Arguments
416
Argument
Description
-attachToLib
masterLib
Specify the master library. This imports a library with the

-file fileName
Specify the input file.

K-2015.06

File Commands
Argument
Description
-forkChild 0|1

-lib libName
Specify the imported library.
-logFile
logErrName
(default=DefIn).
-path libPath
-tech techFile
Examples
lakerImportDEF -file demo.def -lib demoLib
See Also
Home Page: File > Import > DEF
lakerImportLEF
The lakerImportLEF command imports an LEF format design to the Laker
database.
Syntax
lakerImportLEF -file fileName -lib libName [-path libPath]
[-forkChild 0|1] [-tech techFile | -attachToLib
masterLib] [-logFile logErrName]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-attachToLib
masterLib

-file fileName
Specify the input LEF file.

K-2015.06
417

File Commands
Argument
Description
-forkChild 0|1

-lib libName
-logFile logErrName
(default=LefIn).
-path libPath
-tech techFile
Examples
lakerImportLEF -file demo.lef -lib demoLib
See Also
Home Page: File > Import > LEF
lakerImportOASIS
The lakerImportOASIS command imports an OASIS format design to the
Laker database.
Syntax
lakerImportOASIS -file impOasisFile -lib impLibName [-tech
techFile | -attachToLib masterLib] [-path libPath] [topCell topCellList] [-case case] [-showOnly 0|1] [-label
{Preserve|Upper|Lower}] [-renameMode
{Overwrite|Rename|Query|Skip}] [-layerMapMode
{Map|Filter|Off}] [-layerMap layerMapFile] [-cellMap
cellMapFile] [-fontMap fontMapFile] [-forkChild 0|1] [refOtherFirst 0|1] [-refLib [ libList]] [-snapGrid 0|1]
[-filter 0|1] [-filterBadChar 0|1] [-resize resizeFactor]
[-dumpTree 0|1] [-logicProp 0|1] [-MCellProp 0|1] [impLayerOnly 0|1] [-correctNon90Inst 0|1] [-useLAYERNAME
0|1] [-logInfo 0|1] [-logUndefInst 0|1] [-logFile
logErrName] [-rotateArIdv 0|1]
Returns
None
418

K-2015.06

File Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-attachToLib
masterLib

-case case

(default=Preserve).
-cellMap
cellMapFile
-correctNon90Inst 0|1

1 : Correct angle for non-90 degree based instance by
smashing its master and rotating it to a desired angle.
0 : Do not smash and rotate the master cell of non-90
degree based instance.
-dumpTree 0|1

-file impOasisFile
Specify the imported OASIS file.
-filter 0|1

1 : Filter the illegal polygon or path.
0 : Do not filter the illegal polygon or path.
-filterBadChar 0|1
This argument is used only when the imported OASIS file

has illegal characters in the string sections.
1 : Filter illegal characters in the string sections without
reporting any FATAL messages in the oasisIn.err file.
0 : The oasisIn process fails and a FATAL message is
reported in the oasisIn.err file.
-fontMap
fontMapFile
-forkChild 0|1


K-2015.06
419

File Commands
Argument
Description
-impLayerOnly 0|1

1 : Populate the layer table with layers in OASIS file only.
0 : Do not populate the layer table.
-layerMapMode
{Map|Filter|Off}

Valid values: Map, Filter, and Off (default=Map).
Map: Use the layer map file, which has higher priority, or the
tfStreamIoTable section for layer mapping;
-label
{Preserve|Upper|Lower} Valid values: Preserve, Upper, and Lower
(default=Preserve).
420
-layerMap
layerMapFile
-lib impLibName
-logFile logErrName
(default=oasisIn).
-logicProp 0|1

1 : Restore the logic information from the property.
0 : Do not restore any logic information from the property.
-logInfo 0|1

1 : Save the information message into log file.
0 : Do not save any information messages into log file.
-logUndefInst 0|1

1 : Report undefined instances with the coordinate location
to the error file.
0 : Do not report any undefined instances with the
-MCellProp 0|1

1 : Restore the MCell information from the property.
0 : Do not restore the MCell information from the property.

K-2015.06

File Commands
Argument
Description
-path libPath
Specify the working directory (default=working directory).
-refLib [libList]
Specify the reference libraries by using one of these

options:
Default: Do not specify -refLib to reference any

libraries defined in the RC file.
-refLib: Do not reference other libraries.
-refLib libList: Reference other libraries with the
sequence in libList, which is {Lib1 Lib2 Lib3}.
-refOtherFirst 0|1

1 : Reference instances from other existing libraries first.
0 : Reference instances from the imported library first.
-renameMode
{Overwrite|Rename|
Query|Skip}

Valid values: Overwrite, Rename, Query, and Skip
(default=Overwrite).
Overwrite: Overwrite existing cells.

Rename: Rename imported cells.
Query: Ask the user for next action.
Skip: Skip imported cells.
-resize resizeFactor
Specify a resize factor to resize the design.

resizeFactor: double >=0.
-rotateArrIdv 0|1

1: Convert the array rotation rule to rotate individual
elements of the array by 90 degrees.
0: Convert the array rotation rule to convert the whole array
by 90 degrees.
-showOnly 0|1

1 : Show the Import OASIS form.
0 : Do not show the form.
-snapGrid 0|1

-tech techFile

K-2015.06
421

File Commands
Argument
Description
Specify the top cell name(s) of input design. Multiple names

must be enclosed by brackets { } and separated by
-useLAYERNAME 0|1

1 : Use LAYERNAME records in the imported file as layer
mapping.
0 : Do not use LAYERNAME records in the imported file.
Examples
lakerImportOASIS -file demo.oas -tech demo.tf -path . \
-lib demo -case Preserve -label Preserve \
-correctNon90Inst 1 -layerMapMode Map
See Also
Home Page: File > Import > OASIS
lakerImportStream
The lakerImportStream command imports a GDSII format design to the
Laker database.
Syntax
lakerImportStream -file fileName -lib libName [-showOnly
0|1] [-tech techFile | -attachToLib masterLibName] [-path
libPath] [-topCell topCellList] [-snapGrid 0|1] [-logInfo
0|1] [-keepPCell 0|1] [-skip200 0|1] [-refOther 0|1] [filter 0|1] [-forkChild 0|1] [-maxVerti maxVerti] [instProp instProp] [-netProp netProp] [-MCellProp
MCellProp] [-logicProp logicProp] [-finShapeProp
finShapeProp] [-fullColoringProp fullColoringProp] [case case] [-layerMap layerMap] [-cellMap cellMap] [fontMap fontMap] [-logFile logErrName] [-resize
resizeFactor] [-CorrectNon90Inst 0|1] [-label mode] [IoLayerMapMode mode] [-refLib {libList}] [strmInLayerOnly 0|1] [-dumpTree 0|1] [-renameMode mode]
[-LogInstLoc 0|1] [-rptZeroNegPitch 0|1] [-propMap
propMapFile] [-sumExtraLayer 0|1] [-replaceTF mode] [updateMCell mode] [-updateMCellLib libList] [-
422

K-2015.06

File Commands
updateSlaveMCell 0|1] [-ignoreConflictMCell 0|1] [ignoreDupMap 0|1] [-convertTextBrackets 0|1] [convertTextAngBrackets 0|1] [-detectVias 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-attachToLib
masterLibName
Specify the master library name. This imports a library

with the technology file settings of the specified master
library.
-case case
Specify the case sensitivity in cell names.

(default=Preserve).
-cellMap cellMap
-convertTextBrackets 0|1

1 : Convert the angle brackets of text labels to square
brackets.
0 : Do not convert the angle brackets of text labels to
square brackets.
-convertTextAngBrackets
0|1

1 : Convert the square brackets of text labels to angle
brackets.
0 : Do not convert the square brackets of text labels to
angle brackets.
-CorrectNon90Inst 0|1

1 : Correct angle for non-90 degree based instances by
smashing the master cell and rotating them to a desired
angle.
0 : Do not smash and rotate the master cell of non-90
degree based instances.
-detectVias 0|1

1 : Detect via definitions and create vias.
0 : Convert vias as instances.

K-2015.06
423

File Commands
Argument
Description
-dumpTree 0|1

-file fileName
Specify the input GDSII file in *.db, *.gds, *.gz, or

*.Z formats.
-filter 0|1

0 : Do not filter illegal polygons or paths.
-finShapeProp
finShapeProp
Restore the fin shape information with the specified

property number.
(default=105).
-fontMap fontMap
-forkChild 0|1

-fullColoringProp
fullColoringProp
Restore the color propagation of coloring shapes with

the specified property number.
(default=106).
424
-ignoreConflictMCell 0|1
This argument is used with -MCellProp only.

1 : If the input GDSII file has the same MCell name as
the technology file, and the MCell rules of these files are
different, the MCell rules of the input GDSII file are
ignored. Only the sub-master cells are imported in this
situation.
0 : If the above situation occurs, the MCell rules of the
input GDSII file are renamed and appended to the
corresponding technology file.
-ignoreDupMap 0|1

1 : Enable the Ignore Duplicated Mappings options.
0 : Disable the Ignore Duplicated Mappings options.

K-2015.06

File Commands
Argument
Description
-instProp instProp
Restore the instance name information with the

specified property number.
(default=102).
-IoLayerMapMode
mode

Valid values: Off, Map, and Filter (default=Map).

Map: Use the layer map file, which has higher priority,
or the tfStreamIoTable section for layer mapping.
Filter: Filter undefined layers and only convert the
-keepPCell 0|1

1 : Restore the Tcl PCell and UDD information.
0 : Do not restore any Tcl PCell and UDD information.
-label mode

(default=Preserve).
-layerMap layerMap
-lib libName
-logFile logErrName
(default=streamIn).
-logicProp logicProp
Restore the logic information with the specified property

number.
(default=103).
-logInfo 0|1

K-2015.06

1 : Save the information message to the log file.
425

File Commands
Argument
Description
-LogInstLoc 0|1

1 : Report undefined instances with the coordinate
location to the error file.
0 : Do not report any undefined instances with the
-maxVerti maxVerti
Specify the maximum number of vertices to split a

polygon or path. The paths or polygons with 16384
vertices can be loaded into the Laker database, but such
paths or polygons are sliced by the maximum vertices of
4096.
-MCellProp MCellProp
Restore the MCell information with the specified

property number.
(default=104).
-netProp netProp
Restore the net name information with the specified

property number.
(default=102).
-path libPath
Specify the working directory (default=working

directory).
-propMap propMapFile
Specify the property map file.
-refLib {libList}
Specify the reference libraries by these options:
-refOther 0|1
426
Default: Do not specify -refLib to reference all

libraries defined in RC file.
-refLib: Do not reference other libraries.
-refLib libList: Reference other libraries with
the sequence in libList, which is {Lib1 Lib2
Lib3}.

1 : Reference instances from other existing libraries first.
0 : Do not reference instances from other existing
libraries.

K-2015.06

File Commands
Argument
Description
-renameMode mode

Valid values: overwrite, rename, query, and skip
(default=overwrite).
-replaceTF mode
overwrite: Overwrite existing cells.

rename: Rename imported cells.
query: Ask the user for the next action.
skip: Skip imported cells.
Replace the existing technology file or attach it to

another library.
Valid values: All, Partial, and Off (default=Off).
All: Replace all existing technology file sections.

Partial: Replace partial technology file sections. It
only works when -tech techFile is specified.
Off: Do not replace the technology file.
-resize resizeFactor
Specify a resize factor to resize the design.

resizeFactor: double >=0.
-rptZeroNegPitch 0|1

1: Report zero or negative array pitch values.
0: Do not report zero or negative array pitch values.
-showOnly 0|1

1 : Show the Import Stream form.
-skip200 0|1

1 : Skip the warning message for over-200-vertex
polygons.
0 : Do not skip the warning message.
-snapGrid 0|1

-strmInLayerOnly 0|1

1 : Populate the layer table with layers in GDSII file only.
0 : Do not populate the layer table.

K-2015.06
427

File Commands
Argument
Description
-sumExtraLayer 0|1

1 : Check extra layers in the imported GDS database.
0 : Do not check extra layers in the imported GDS
database.
-tech techFile
Specify the top cell name(s) of input design. Multiple

names must be enclosed by brackets { } and separated
by spaces, commas, or semicolons.
-updateMCell mode
Decide whether to update MCells. It does not work when

-replaceTF Off is specified.
Valid values: All, Off, and MCellList (default=Off).
All: Update all MCells.

MCellList: Specify the MCell devices to be
updated in format { dev1 dev2 ... devn }.
MCell names in the MCellList must be separated
by spaces.
Off: Do not update any MCell definitions.
-updateMCellLib libList
Specify the libraries to be updated in format { Lib1

Lib2 ... Libn}. Library names in the libList must
be separated by spaces.
-updateSlaveMCell 0|1
Update MCell definitions for slave libraries. It does not

work when -updateMCell Off is specified.
1 : Update MCell definitions for slave libraries.
0 : Do not update MCell definitions for slave libraries.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerImportStream -file demo.db -lib demoLib
# Example 2
lakerImportStream -file demo.db -lib demoLib -attachToLib demo2
# Example 3
# Show the Import Stream form and specify the top cell and GDS file
lakerImportStream -showOnly 1 -file demo.db -lib demoLib \
-topCell cell_a
428

K-2015.06

File Commands
# Example 4
lakerImportStream -file out05.db -tech laker_demo301v3.tf \
-path . -lib imp01 -CorrectNon90Inst 1 -IoLayerMapMode Off \
-case Preserve -label Preserve -maxVerti 1024
# Example 5
# Update all MCell devices dev1 and dev2 in Lib1 and Lib2
# All these devices have a master library ImLib
lakerImportStream -lib ImLib ... -updateMCell {dev1 dev2} \
-updateMCellLib {Lib1 Lib2}
See Also
Home Page: File > Import > Stream
lakerImportTLUPlus
The lakerImportTLUPlus command extracts the sheet resistance
information from a Table Look Up Plus (TLU+) file and saves the extracted
information with a sheetResistance constraint in the specified database.
Syntax
lakerImportTLUPlus inputFile -to output [-layerMap layerMap]
[-defaultThickness mode] [-layerThicknessFile file]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-defaultThickness mode
Specify the default thickness for all layers.

Valid values: minimum, nominal, and maximum
(default=nominal).
-layerMap layerMap
-layerThicknessFile file
Specify the layer thickness file containing the userspecified thickness for each layer.

K-2015.06
429

File Commands
Argument
Description
-to output
Specify the output in one of the following formats:

libName or {libName cellName viewName},
where libName represents the technology library file,
and {libName cellName viewName} represents
the target library, cell, and view names.
inputFile
Specify the TLU Plus file with its full path.
Examples
lakerImportTLUPlus path ./tech/icc/reference40_10lm.tluplus \
-to {chip_top cpu_routed layout} -layerMap \
./tech/ref4_1_tluplus.map -defaultThickness nominal
# Example 2
lakerImportTLUPlus path ./tech/ref4_1.tluplus \
-to chip_top -layerMap ./tech/ref4_1_tluplus.map \
-defaultThickness nominal
See Also
Home Page: File > Import > TLU+
lakerImportVerilog
The lakerImportVerilog command imports a Verilog format design to the
Laker database.
Syntax
lakerImportVerilog [-file | -list] verilogListFilename [path runPath] -lib libName [-topCell topCellName] [showOnly] [-impRefLib refereLib] [-tech techFile | attachToLib masterLib] [-power powerName] [-gnd gndName]
[-rmEsc 0|1] [-ps 0|1] [-modelMap modelMap] [-expandLog
logFile] [-refLib refLibName [-ecoFile ecoFileName] [extractConstraint 0|1] [-priority priority] [-suffix
suffix] [-dumpMap modelMapFile] [-execECO 0|1]] [genAllSchematic 0|1]
Returns
None
430

K-2015.06

File Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-attachToLib
masterLib

-dumpMap
modelMapFile
Specify the model map file to be dumped from the reference

library.
-ecoFile
ecoFileName
-execECO 0|1

-expandLog
logFile

-extractConstraint
0|1

-file
verilogListFilename
Specify the name of the Verilog file.
-genAllSchematic 0|1
Valid value: Boolean values, 0, and 1 (default=1).

1: Generate schematics with placement and routing.
0: Generate schematics without placement and routing.
-gnd gndName
Specify the ground net name.
-impRefLib refLib
Specify the cell reference libraries.
-lib libName
Specify the library name of the imported results.
-list
verilogListFilename
Specify the name of the list file.
-modelMap
modelMap
-path runPath
Specify the location of the imported results. The default is .
-power powerName
Specify the power net name.

K-2015.06
431

File Commands
Argument
Description
-priority priority

Valid values: schematic and layout
-ps 0|1

1: Extract the swapping information of equivalent ports from
the imported netlist data.
-refLib
refLibName
Specify the reference library for extracting the object tree

information.
-rmEsc 0|1

1: Remove the first backslash of all escaped identifiers.
0: Do not remove the first backslash of all escaped
identifiers.
-showOnly
When specified, the Import Verilog form is shown with

settings passed from lakerImportVerilog.
-suffix suffix

(default=_LK).
-tech techFile
-topCell topCellName

Only one top cell name can be specified.
Examples
lakerImportVerilog -file inv.v -path . -lib inv \
-tech default.tf -append -power VSS -gnd VDD
See Also
Home Page: File > Import > Verilog
lakerOpenDesign
The lakerOpenDesign command returns 1 if the design data, with the
specified path and open mode, can be opened in a new layout window.
432

K-2015.06

File Commands
Syntax
lakerOpenDesign -lib libName -cell cellName [-mode mode] [viewType cellviewType] [-view viewName] [-restorenum
restoreNum] [-autosave] [-dmCVCkout 0|1] [-dmCVCkin 0|1]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-autosave
Open the autosave file if it exists.
-cell cellName
-dmCVCkin 0|1

1 : Check in cell view files, that are checked out automatically.
The default value depends on the setting in the laker.rc
resource file.
-dmCVCkout 0|1

1 : Check out cell view files. The default value depends on the
setting in the laker.rc resource file.
-lib libName
-mode mode
Specify the opening mode.

Valid values: edit or readOnly (default=edit).
-restorenum
restoreNum
-view viewName
Specify the view name of the cell to be opened.

Valid values: layout, logic, schematic, and any userdefined view name (default=layout).
-viewType
cellviewType
Specify the cell view type of the cell to be opened. The only
available type is maskLayout.

K-2015.06
433

File Commands
Examples
# Example 1
# Open the layout view of the cell (ram) in the library (ram)
lakerOpenDesign -lib ram -cell ram -mode edit
# Example 2
# Open the previous version of the layout view of the cell (ram)
# in the library (ram)
lakerOpenDesign -lib ram -cell ram -mode edit -restorenum 1
# Example 3
# Library CPU and its full path: /tmp/CPU.lib++
# All design files and library level files are read-only
# Open a design in edit mode and check out its file automatically
lakerOpenDesign -lib CPU -cell AN2D1 -mode edit -dmCVCkout 1 dmCVCkin 0
See Also
dbGetAllCells
dbGetAllViews
lakerSession
The lakerSession command saves the current working environment to a
session file, or restores the previous session from a session file.
Syntax
lakerSession [-save filename] [-restore filename]
Returns
None
Arguments
434
Argument
Description
-restore filename
Specify the file name of the session file to be restored.
-save file
Specify a file name for the session file to be saved as.

K-2015.06

Library Commands
Examples
# Example 1
# Save a session file
lakerSession -save a.ses
# Example 2
# Restore a session file
lakerSession -restore a.ses
See Also
Home Page: File > Save Session
Home Page: File > Restore Session
Library Commands
This section describes the Tcl commands applied to the Library commands in
the Home Page. These commands include:
adpNetlistMapping
lakerAbstractCell
lakerAddICCLib
lakerChangeRefLib
lakerCopyLib
lakerDelLib
lakerDefGlobalNet
lakerDiscrepancyHier
lakerDumpModelMap
lakerEncryptLib
lakerLibCellDumpParam
lakerLibCellParam
lakerMCellTechPorting
lakerNewLib
lakerPurgeBackup
lakerRefLib

K-2015.06
435

Library Commands
lakerRefreshMCell
lakerRefreshUDD
lakerRenLib
lakerRepModelMap
lakerSwapPort
lakerTechDump
lakerTechReplace
lakerTechSave
lakerText2Prop
lakerUpdateCellProp
adpNetlistMapping
The adpNetlistMapping command sets the netlist mapping before
exporting the design.
Syntax
adpNetlistMapping -netlistMap netlistMap -defNetlist
netlistType
Returns
None
Arguments
436
Argument
Description
-defNetlist netlistType
Specify the default netlist type.

Valid values: hspiceD, auCdl, smartspice, eldoD,
spectre, and verilog.
-netlistMap netlistMap
Specify the netlist mapping table can be specified with

format:
{netlistType disp exportSpiceFormat ...}

K-2015.06

Library Commands
Examples
# Example 1
# The default netlist type is hspiceD; and the hspiceD, auCdl
# and verilog netlist types are shown in the Netlist Table
# selection field
adpNetlistMapping -netlistMap \
{"hspiceD 1 SPICE" "auCdl 1 CDL" "smartspice 0 SPICE" \
"eldoD 0 SPICE" "spectre 0 Spectre" "verilog 1 SPICE"} \
-defNetlist hspiceD
See Also
Home Page: Library > Global Netlist Mapping
lakerAbstractCell
The lakerAbstractCell command extracts the cell information of a cell
view or a library, including pin extraction, blockage generation, and boundary
generation.
Syntax
lakerAbstractCell [-showOnly 0|1] -lib libname -cell
cellname [-view viewName] -extDepth depth -onlyLevel0 0|1
-useColonVirtual 0|1 [-genPolyPin 0|1] [boundaryFromLayer layerName purpname] [-extractThrPin
0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-boundaryFromLayer
layerName purpName
Specify a layer to transfer into cell boundary. When it is not

specified, the rule defined in the technology file is used to
generate a boundary.
-cell cellName
Specify the cell to be extracted. If this argument is not

specified, all cells in the library are extracted.
-extDepth depth
Specify the extraction depth.

Valid value: an integer from 0 to 49 (default=49).

K-2015.06
437

Library Commands
Argument
Description
-extractThrPin 0|1

1 : Extract pins through via/contact.
0 : Do not extract pins through via/contact.
-genPolyPin 0|1

1 : Extract the on-grid POLY pin shapes on MET1 routing
track.
0 : Do not extract the on-grid POLY pin shapes on MET1
routing track.
-lib libName
-onlyLevel0 0|1

1 : Only process labels (text) at level 0.
0 : Do not process labels (text) at level 0.
-showOnly 0|1

1: Show the Abstract Cell form.
0: Hide the Abstract Cell form.
-useColonVirtual

1 : Use a colon as the virtual connection.
0 : Do not use a colon as the virtual connection.
-view viewName
Specify the view name of the cell to be extracted.

Valid values: layout, logic, schematic, and any userdefined view name (default=layout).
Examples
# Example 1
# Extract the layout view of cell "chk" and cell "adder"
lakerAbstractCell -lib Demotest2 -cell chk adder
# Example 2
# Extract the layout000 view of cell "test1" and cell "test2"
lakerAbstractCell -lib Demotest2 -cell test1 test2 -view layout000
See Also
Home Page: Library > Abstract Cell
Layout Window: Cell > Abstract Cell
438

K-2015.06

Library Commands
lakerAddICCLib
The lakerAddICCLib command adds an ICC library with the specified library
name.
Syntax
lakerAddICCLib -lib libName -path path [-addICCRefLibs 0|1]
[-useOATech attachToLib [-layerMap layerMapLib]
[-viaMap viaMapLib]]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libName
Specify the added ICC library name.
-path path
Specify the added ICC librarys directory.
-addICCRefLibs

1 : Add the ICC reference libraries.
0 : Do not add the ICC reference libraries.
-useOATech

1 : Attach an OA technology file.
0 : Do not attach an OA technology file.
-layerMap
layerMapLib
Specify the layer mapping file when a separate OA technology

file is attached.
-viaMap
viaMapLib
Specify the via mapping file when a separate OA technology

file is attached.
Examples
# Example 1
# Add an ICC library chip_mstop_icc and its all reference libraries
lakerAddICCLibNewLib -lib chip_mstop_icc -path . -addICCRefLibs 1
# Example 2
# Add an ICC library chip_mstop_icc and using OA tech:
# Attach library (qa), layerMap library (demoLib), viaMap (viaLib)
lakerAddICCLibNewLib -lib chip_mstop_icc -path . \
-useOAtech qa -layerMap demoLib -viaMap viaLib

K-2015.06
439

Library Commands
See Also
Home Page: Library > Add ICC Libraries
lakerChangeRefLib
The lakerChangeRefLib command changes the original referenced library
to another. With the optional arguments, -refView and -toView, this
command may also change the original reference view of the original
referenced library to another view with another library.
Syntax
lakerChangeRefLib -lib libName -refLib refLib [-refView
viewName] -toLib toLib [-toView viewName]
Returns
None
Arguments
440
Argument
Description
-lib libName
-refLib refLib
Specify the original referenced library.
-refView
viewName
Specify the view name of the original reference library.

Valid values: layout and abs.
-refView and -toView must be specified or not specified at
the same time.
-toLib toLib
Specify the new target of the referenced library.
-toView
viewName
Specify the view name for the new target of the referenced
library.
Valid values: layout and abs.
-refView and -toView must be specified or not specified at
the same time.

K-2015.06

Library Commands
Examples
# Example 1
# Change the reference library (oriLib) of library (demoLib) to
# the new reference library (newRefLib)
lakerChangeRefLib -lib demoLib -refLib oriLib -toLib newRefLib
# Example2
lakerChangeRefLib -lib CPU -refLib CPU_REF -refView layout \
-toLib CPU_REF -toView abs
# Example 3
lakerChangeRefLib -lib CPU -refLib CPU -refView abs -toLib CPU_REF
-toView abs
See Also
Home Page: Library > Change Reference
lakerCopyLib
The lakerCopyLib command duplicates another copy of the specified cell
view(s) from source library to target library.
Syntax
lakerCopyLib -lib libName -toLib toLib [-toPath toPath] view viewNameList -overwrite 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libName
-overwrite 0|1

1 : Overwrite the cell view if it is existed in the target library.
0 : Do not overwrite the cell view if it is existed in the target
library.
-toLib toLib
Specify the new target library database.
-toPath toPath

K-2015.06
441

Library Commands
Argument
Description
-view
viewNameList
Specify a list of cell views to be copied.
Examples
# Example 1
# Duplicate another copy of library (demoLib)
# with different name (demo2Lib)
lakerCopyLib -lib demoLib -toLib demo2Lib
# Example 2
# Copy specific view name of cell view from source library to
# target library
lakerCopyLib -lib demoLib -toLib demo2Lib -view layout abs \
-overwrite 1
See Also
Home Page: Library > Copy
lakerDelLib
The lakerDelLib command deletes the entire database in the library and
removes the directory of the library.
Syntax
lakerDelLib -lib libName
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libName
Examples
# Delete the library (demoLib)
lakerDelLib -lib demoLib
See Also
Home Page: Library > Delete
442

K-2015.06

Library Commands
lakerDefGlobalNet
The lakerDefGlobalNet command defines global net of the specified
library.
Syntax
Append Mode:
lakerDefGlobalNet -lib libName -power powNetNameList -ground
gndNetNameList
Remove Mode:
lakerDefGlobalNet -lib libName -power powNetNameList -ground
gndNetNameList -global globalNetNameList -remove
Returns
A list of global net names if it is defined in the library; otherwise, returns
nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libName
-power
powNetNameList
Specify the list of operation power nets.
-ground
gndNetNameList
Specify the list of operation ground nets.
-global
globalNetNameList
Specify the list of operation global nets.
-remove
Remove the specified global nets.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerDefGlobalNet -lib demo -power VDD -ground VSS GND
# Example 2
set AllGlobalNet [lakerDefGlobalNet -lib demo]
# Example 3
lakerDefGlobalNet -lib -global $AllGlobalNet -remove

K-2015.06
443

Library Commands
lakerDiscrepancyHier
The lakerDiscrepancyHier command makes a discrepancy report for the
specified library with data comparison between the schematic and layout.
Syntax
lakerDiscrepancyHier -lib libName [-lib2 libName] [-view1
viewName] [-view2 viewName] [-topCkt topCktList] [ignoreBulk 0|1] [-cmpHierarchy 0|1] [-dumpMapInfo 0|1]
[-reportDiscOnly 0|1] [-groupsDis 0|1] [-groupInst 0|1]
[-file filename]
Returns
None
Arguments
444
Argument
Description
-dumpMapInfo 0|1

1 : Enable the Dump Mapping Information option.
0 : Disable the Dump Mapping Information option.
-file filename
Specify the file to save the discrepancy results.
-groupDis 0|1

1 : Dump the discrepancy information and group the results
by mismatched type.
0 : Do not dump the discrepancy information and group the
results by mismatched type.
-groupInst 0|1

1 : Dump the discrepancy information and group the results
by instance name.
0 : Do not dump the discrepancy information and group the
results by instance name.
-ignoreBulk 0|1

1 : Enable the Ignore Bulk Checking option.
0 : Disable the Ignore Bulk Checking option.
-lib libName
Specify the library to make the discrepancy report.
-lib2 libName
Specify the second library that is to be compared with the

library specified by -lib.

K-2015.06

Library Commands
Argument
Description
-reportDiscOnly 0|1

1 : Enable the Report Discrepancy Only option.
0 : Disable the Report Discrepancy Only option.
-topCkt topCktList
Specify a list of top cells to get the hierarchical discrepancy

report.
-view1
viewName
Specify the first view name for the comparison.

Valid values: layout, logic, and netlist
(default=logic).
-view2
viewName
Specify the second view name for the comparison.

Valid values: layout, logic, and netlist
(default=layout).
Examples
# Example 1
# save the discrepancy results to the file (diff.rpt)
lakerDiscrepancyHier -lib demoLib -topCkt topCell1 topCell2 \
-file diff.rpt
# Example 2
lakerDiscrepancyHier -lib lib2 -view1 netlist -ignoreBulk 1 \
-dumpMapInfo 1 -groupDis 1 -groupInst 1 -file ./
lakerDiscHier.log.1
See Also
Home Page: Library > Discrepancy Report
lakerDumpModelMap
The lakerDumpModelMap command dumps the model map file of a specified
library.
Syntax
lakerDumpModelMap -lib libName -file fileName
Returns
None

K-2015.06
445

Library Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libName
Specify the library that is related to the model map file to be

dumped.
-file fileName
Specify the file to save the dumped model map file with its
full path.
Examples
lakerDumpModelMap -lib Demo -file ./test.map
See Also
Home Page: Library > Model Map File > Dump
lakerEncryptLib
The lakerEncryptLib command encrypts user-defined devices (UDDs) to
prevent from modifying the UDDs.
Syntax
lakerEncryptLib -lib libName -toPath pathName -toLib
newLibName
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libName
Specify the source library.
-toLib newLibName
Specify the destination library.
-toPath pathName
Specify the path of the destination library.
Examples
lakerEncryptLib -lib Demo -toPath . -toLib EDemo
See Also
Home Page: Library > Encrypt UDD
446

K-2015.06

Library Commands
lakerLibCellDumpParam
The lakerLibCellDumpParam command dumps the parameter setting for
the symbol library.
Syntax
lakerLibCellDumpParam -lib libName [-file cdfFile] [allCell] [-dir icdfDir]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-allCell
When specified, parameters from all cells in the specified

library are dumped.
-dir icdfDir
Specify the iCDF directory to save the dumped

parameters.
-file cdfFile
Specify the cdf file.
-lib libName
Examples
# Example 1
lakerLibCellDumpParam -lib q -file q.cdf
# Example 2
lakerLibCellDumpParam -allCell -lib q2 -dir ./iCDF
See Also
Home Page: Library > Dump Parameter
lakerLibCellParam
The lakerLibCellParam command adds the parameters into the Parameter
Dialog form for the symbol library.

K-2015.06
447

Library Commands
Syntax
lakerLibCellParam -topWnd winId -lib libName -cell cellName
[-add] [-delete] -paname paramName [-paramAttr
{{paramAttr}...} -value {{value}...}] [-nlsimtype
netlistType -netlistAttr {{nlAttr}...} -value
{{value}...}] [-dispAttr {{dispAttr} ...} -value
{{value}...}]
Argument
Description
-add
Add a parameter.
-cell cellName
-delete
Delete a parameter.
-dispAttr {{dispAttr}
Specify the display attribute with format:

{{opDisp} {paramDisp}}
-lib libName
-netlistAttr {{nlAttr}
Specify the netlist attribute with format:

{{namePrefix} {netlistProc} {pinOrder}
{otherParams} {compName} {modelName}
{instParams} {subParams} {propMap}}
-nlsimtype netlistType
Specify the netlist type.

Valid values: hspiceD, auCdl, smartspice, eldoD,
spectre, and verilog.
-paname paramName
-paramAttr {{paramAttr}...} Specify the parameter attribute with format:

{{name} {type} {value} {dispPrio}
{promptName} {type} {value} {callback}
{parseAsNum} {parseAsPEL} {editable}
{visible}}
448
-topWnd winId
-value {{value}...}
The attribute values vary depending on the assigned

-dispAttr, -paramAttr, or -netlistAttr.

K-2015.06

Library Commands
Examples
# Example 1
# Modify the Parameter information
#Add parameters
lakerLibCellParam -topWnd _adp1 -lib q -cell inv -add -paname
new_0 \
-paramAttr {{dispPrio}} -value {{6}}
lakerLibCellParam -topWnd _adp1 -lib q -cell inv -add -paname
new_0 \
-paramAttr {{type} {value} {dispPrio}} -value {{button} {} {6}}
# Delete parameters
lakerLibCellParam -topWnd _adp1 -lib q -cell inv -delete -paname ln
# Modify the parameter name
lakerLibCellParam -topWnd _adp1 -lib q -cell inv -paname old \
-paramAttr {{name} {value} {dispPrio}} -value {{new} {11} {0}}
# Modify other fields in the parameter table
lakerLibCellParam -topWnd _adp1 -lib q -cell inv -paname mp \
-paramAttr {{promptName} {type} {value} {callback} {parseAsNum}
\
{parseAsPEL} {editable} {visible}} \
-value {{PMOS Multiplierq} {Boolean} {t} {q} {q} {q} {f} {f}}
# Modify the parameter type
lakerLibCellParam -topWnd _adp1 -lib q -cell inv -paname ln \
-paramAttr {{type}} -value {{button}}
# Example 2
# Modify the Netlist information
lakerLibCellParam -topWnd _adp1 -lib q -cell inv -nlsimtype
hspiceD \
-netlistAttr {{namePrefix} {netlistProc} {pinOrder}
{otherParams} \
{compName} {modelName} {instParams} {subParams} \
{propMap}} \
-value {{X} {} {a b c} {} {} {} {} {} {}}
# Example 3
# Modify the Display information
lakerLibCellParam -topWnd _adp1 -lib q -cell inv \
-dispAttr {{opDisp} {paramDisp}} -value {{test1} {test2}}
See Also
Home Page: Library > Parameter

K-2015.06
449

Library Commands
lakerMCellTechPorting
The lakerMCellTechPorting command changes the related
tfLayoutMagicCell section of the existing design library and then reevaluates MCells based on the new rule.
Syntax
lakerMCellTechPorting -lib libName -topCell topCellName toLib targetLibName [-toPath toPath] [-overwrite 0|1] [shiftOrigin 0|1 | transistor|contact] [-updateMCell mode]
[-tech techFile | -attachToLib masterLibName] [keepEditValue 0|1] [-keepTxLenWidth 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
450
Argument
Description
-attachToLib
masterLib
Specify the master library. This causes the technology file

settings of the target library identical with that of the
specified master library.
-keepEditValue 0|1

It is used only when -updateMCell optimize is
specified.
1 : Maintain edited values.
0 : Reset edited values, except for transistor length/width, to
new minimum values.
-keepTxLenWidth 0|1

It is used only when -updateMCell optimize is
specified.
1 : Do not update previous minimum gate length/width to
new minimum rule, unless it violates the new one.
0 : Reset minimum gate length/width to new minimum rule.
-lib libName
The library database.
-overwrite 0|1

1 : Overwrite the existing cell view in the target library.
0 : Do not overwrite the existing cell view in the target library.

K-2015.06

Library Commands
Argument
Description
-shiftOrigin
Valid values: Boolean values (0 and 1), transistor, and
0 | 1 | transistor | contact contact (default=0).
1 : Shift the origin of MCells (transistors and contact
devices).
0 : Do not shift the origin of MCells (transistors and contact
devices).
transistor : Shift the origin of transistors only.contact :
Shift the origin of contact devices only.
-tech techFile
-toLib targetLibName
Specify the new target library database.
-toPath toPath
-updateMCell mode
Valid values: optimize, keepConn and off

(default=off).
optimize : Optimization mode.
keepConn : Keep the connection.
off : Do not update MCells.
Examples
lakerMCellTechPorting -lib sourceLib -topCell cell \
-toLib destLib -updateMCell optimize -keepEditValue 1 \
-keepTxLenWidth 1 -shiftOrigin transistor -attachToLib libB
See Also
Home Page: Library > Technology File > Porting
lakerNewLib
The lakerNewLib command creates a new library with the specified library
name.
Syntax
lakerNewLib -lib libName [-path path] [-tech techFile | attachToLib masterLib | -refTechLib refTechLibs]

K-2015.06
451

Library Commands
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-attachToLib
masterLib

-lib libName
-path path
-refTechLib
refTechLibs
Set the reference for technology libraries.
-tech techFile
Specify the ASCII technology file (default=default.tf).
Examples
# Example 1
# Create a new library demoLib
lakerNewLib -lib demoLib
# Example 2
# Create a new library test and attach it to library demoLib
lakerNewLib -lib test -path . -attachToLib demoLib
# Example 3
# Create a new library newLib, and set the reference technology
# libraries refLib1, refLib2, and refLib3
lakerNewLib -lib newLib -refTechLib refLib1 refLib2 refLib3
See Also
dbCreateLib
Home Page: Library > New
lakerPurgeBackup
The lakerPurgeBackup command purges the backup data.
Syntax
lakerPurgeBackup -lib Liblist -backupnum nKeepBackupNum
452

K-2015.06

Library Commands
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-backupnum
nKeepBackupNum
Reserve the number of backup database.

Valid value: positive integer number.
-lib Liblist
Specify the database (DB) list.
Examples
# Example 1
# If the backup version is older than 3 in library (Lib1, Lib2),
# remove the backup data
lakerPurgeBackup -backupnum 3 -lib Lib1 Lib2
# Example 2
# Remove all the backup data in library (Lib1, Lib2)
lakerPurgeBackup -backupnum 0 -lib Lib1 Lib2
See Also
Home Page: Library > Purge Backup
lakerRefLib
The lakerRefLib command checks and fixes the unmatched cell view and
library structure.
Syntax
lakerRefLib -lib libName [-updateCellBBox 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libName
Specify the library database to be refreshed.

K-2015.06
453

Library Commands
Argument
Description
-updateCellBBox 0|1

1 : Check the DB bounding box when updating the specified
library. The checking results are shown on the console.
0 : Do not check the DB bounding box.
Examples
# refresh demoLib and check db bounding box
lakerRefLib -lib demoLib -updateCellBox 1
See Also
Home Page: Library > Refresh
lakerRefreshMCell
The lakerRefreshMCell command refreshes the MCell definition in the
technology file.
Syntax
lakerRefreshMCell -lib libName [-update 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libName
-update 0|1

1 : Refresh the MCell definition.
0 : Do not refresh the MCell definition.
Examples
lakerRefreshMCell -lib demoLib -update 1
454

K-2015.06

Library Commands
lakerRefreshUDD
The lakerRefreshUDD command refreshes parameterized test structure
devices to synchronize the Tcl scripts if the scripts can be found in the user
environment.
Syntax
lakerRefreshUDD -lib libName [-updateProcScript 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libName
Specify the library to be refreshed.
-updateProcScript 0|1
This argument is only used with -lib.

1 : Update the procedure scripts of the specified library and
UDD supermasters.
0 : Do not update the procedure scripts of the specified
library and UDD supermasters.
Examples
# Example 1
# Library-based Refresh Device: All UDD/Tcl PCell submasters in
# the library are deleted and re-generated
lakerRefreshUDD -lib LibA -updateProcScript 1
See Also
Home Page: Library > Refresh Device
lakerRenLib
The lakerRenLib command changes the name of the specified library.
Syntax
lakerRenLib -lib libName -rename rename [-update 0|1]
Returns
None

K-2015.06
455

Library Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libName
-rename rename
Specify a new name for the library.
-update 0|1

1 : Update all instances that use the specified library.
0 : Do not update all instances that use the specified library.
Examples
# change the library name (demoLib) to (renameLib) and
# update all instances that use this library
lakerRenLib -lib demoLib -rename renameLib -update 1
See Also
Home Page: Library > Rename
lakerRepModelMap
The lakerRepModelMap command returns 1 if the model map file of the
specified library can be replaced.
Syntax
lakerRepModelMap -lib libName -modelMap modelMapFile
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libName
-modelMap
modelMapFile
Specify a new model map file for the library.
Examples
lakerRepModelMap -lib demo -modelMap demo.map
456

K-2015.06

Library Commands
See Also
Home Page: Library > Model Map File > Replace
lakerSwapPort
The lakerSwapPort command edits the port swapping information in the
specified library.
The perm_string syntax is as follows:
perm_string: {p|f|c perm_string}
| {p|f|c port_list}
| perm_string perm_string
port_list: port_name port_name
port_name: any ASCII string
where:
perm_string: Consists of an ordered sequence of expressions beginning

f, p, c.
f (fixed): Indicates that the group elements cannot be swapped (nonpermutable).
p (permutable): Indicates that any of the group elements can be swapped

(independently swappable).
c (cyclic): Indicates that the set of group elements may be rotated (cyclically
permutable). For example, {c A B C} indicates that the permissible
permutations are A B C, B C A and C B A.
Notice that:
The port name is not in brackets twice. For example, {p{f A A}{f C D}}.
If one group is assigned f, the port number of the next group needs to be
the same with the former. For example, {p{f A B C}{c C D E}}.
p is the default.
Different swapping types (p, f, c) are not allowed in the same swapping
level, or a discrepancy could result. For example,
{p {f NODE_0 NODE_1} {f NODE_2 NODE_3}} and
{p {c NODE_0 NODE_1} {c NODE_2 NODE_3}} are legal;
but {p {f NODE_0 NODE_1} {p NODE_2 NODE_3}} is illegal because
f and p are different types. The swap port function is disabled if different

K-2015.06
457

Library Commands
swapping types are found and an error message is prompted as follows:

swap type inconsistent in {p {f NODE_0 NODE_1} {p NODE_2
NODE_3}}
Syntax
lakerSwapPort [-purge 0|1] -lib libName -swapInfo {{cell1
perm_string} {cell2 perm_string}...}
lakerSwapPort -lib libName -save filename
lakerSwapPort -lib libName -load filename
Returns
None
Arguments
458
Argument
Description
-lib libName
-load filename
Load the previously saved port swapping information by

specifying the file name.
-purge 0|1

1: Clean previous port swapping information in the
specified library and show new information. This option is
arbitrary.
0: Do not clean previous information but append the new
information.
-save filename
Specify the file to save the port swapping information. The

file format is as follows:
[PORT_SWAP]
cell_name1
{p{f A B C}{f D E F}}
cell_name2
{p{p1 p2 p3}{p4 p5 p6}}
cell_name3
{p{c A B}{f C D}{f E F}}
-swapInfo
{{cell1 perm_string}
{cell2 perm_string}...}
Specify the port swapping information of the cell.

perm_string consists of an ordered sequence of
expressions beginning f, p, or c.

K-2015.06

Library Commands
Examples
# Example 1
lakerSwapPort -lib lib3 -save PnSwInfo.swa
#
#
#
#
contents of PnSwInfo.swa
[PORT_SWAP]
c3_1
{p{f r1 r2}{f o1 o2}{f g1 g2}}
c3_2
{p{c r g}{c j y}}
# Example 2
lakerSwapPort -purge 0 -lib lib3 -swapInfo {{cell3{p{f 1 2 3}{f
3 4 5}}} }
See Also
Home Page: Library > Swap Port...
lakerSwapInstPort
lakerTechDump
The lakerTechDump command obtains a writable ASCII technology file.
Syntax
lakerTechDump -lib libName -tech techFile [-local 0|1] [unique 0|1] [-section sectionName] [-editor 0|1] [getMasterLibName 0|1] [-returnContent 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-editor 0|1

1 : Invoke the editor after dumping the technology file.
0 : Do not invoke the editor after dumping the technology
file.
-getMasterLibName 0|1

1 : When specified, only -lib is valid, other arguments are
skipped.
0 : When specified, all arguments are valid.
-lib libName

K-2015.06
459

Library Commands
Argument
Description
-local 0|1

1 : Enable the Local option.
0 : Disable the Local option.
-returnContent 0|1

1 : When specified, -getMasterLibName is invalid. No
matter the library is master or slave, the content of the
desired section is placed to the returning of that Tcl
command.
0 : When specified, returns nothing.
-section sectionName
Specify the sections to be dumped.

Value values: tfLayoutSystemUnit,
tfSystemPurpose, tfLayoutLayerTable,
tfStreamIoTable, tfLayoutLayerRule,
tfLayoutVerifyRule, tfLayoutDevice,
tfLayoutMagicCell, tfLayoutConnection,
tfDeviceRule, tfNetlistDrivenRule,
tfSubstrateExtraction, tfAreaEstimation,
tfAbstractCell, tfLVSRule, tfLayoutMetalSlot,
and tfLayoutCompaction.
All sections are dumped if this option is not specified.
-tech techFile
-unique 0|1
This argument is valid only when -local 0 is specified.

1 : Enable the Unique option.
0 : Disable the Unique option.
Examples
# Example 1
# Dump all technology file sections
lakerTechDump -lib demoLib -tech demo.tf
# Example 2
# Dump tfSystemPurpose and tfLayoutLayerTable sections
lakerTechDump -lib demoLib -tech demo1.tf \
-section tfSystemPurpose tfLayoutLayerTable
See Also
Home Page: Library > Technology File > Dump
460

K-2015.06

Library Commands
lakerTechReplace
The lakerTechReplace command compiles and permanently replaces the
ASCII technology file to library database after it is updated. This command also
attaches the technology file to the specified master library.
Syntax
lakerTechReplace -lib libName [-partial 0|1] (-tech techFile
| -attachToLib masterLib) [[-updateMCell 0|1] [updateMCellList MCellList] [-updateSlaveMCell 0|1]]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-attachToLib
masterLib

-lib libName
The library database.
-partial 0|1

1 : Replace partial technology file sections. It only works
when
-tech is specified.
0 : Do not replace partial technology file sections.
-tech techFile
The defined ASCII technology file.
-updateMCell 0|1

1 : Update the related MCell definitions.
0 : Do not update the related MCell definitions.
-updateMCellList
MCellList
Specify the MCells to be updated. This argument only

works when -updateMCell 1 is specified.
Valid values: {All}, {None}, and {device1 device2
...} (default={All}).
-updateSlaveMCell 0|1
This argument only works when -updateMCell is turned

on.
1 : Update MCell definitions for slave libraries.
0 : Do not update MCell definitions for slave libraries.

K-2015.06
461

Library Commands
Examples
# Example 1
lakerTechReplace -tech demo.tf -lib demoLib
# Example 2
lakerTechReplace -lib test -attachToLib demoLib -updateMCell 1
# Example 3
lakerTechReplace -lib test -updateMCell 1 -updateMCellList {pmos
nmos}
See Also
Home Page: Library > Technology File > Replace
lakerTechSave
The lakerTechSave command permanerntly saves the changes of the
technology file to the library after the layer pattern or layer category is changed.
Syntax
lakerTechSave -lib libName [-sect sectionName]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libName
-sect sectionName
Specify the section to be saved.

Valid values: tfLayoutLayerTable,
tfLayoutLayerCategory, and tfStreamIoTable.
Examples
lakerTechSave -lib demoLib
See Also
Technology File Editor: File > Save
462

K-2015.06

Library Commands
lakerText2Prop
The lakerText2Prop command assigns the text property with net/port
names to polygons in the current cell view or all cell views in the specified
library.
Syntax
lakerText2Prop -lib libName [-cell cellName] [-view
viewName] [-mode mode] [-pinSize 0|1 -width width [excludePoly 0|1] [-topMetalLayer number] [-thruVia 0|1]]
[-extDepth depth] [-extLabelDepth labelDepth] [useColonVirtual 0|1] [-createPinFromInstance 0|1] [checkLogicNet 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
Specify the cell to be extracted. When it is not specified,

all cells in the library are extracted.
-checkLogicNet 0|1

1 : Enable the Check if Nets Exist in Schematic option.
0 : Disable the Check if Nets Exist in Schematic option.
-createPinFromInstance
0|1

1 : Create additional pin shapes, which overlap with
labels, at level 0 and assign nets or ports for them.
0 : Do not create any additional pin shapes at level 0.
-excludePoly 0|1

1 : Do not generate system pins with poly shapes.
0 : Generate system pins with poly shapes.
-extDepth depth
Specify the shape extraction depth.

-extLabelDepth
labelDepth
Specify the label extraction depth.

This argument is only valid for -mode assignShape.
-lib libName

K-2015.06
463

Library Commands
Argument
Description
-mode mode
Specify the method to assign nets or ports.

Valid values: genSystemPin, genPinPurpose, and
assignShape (default=genSystemPin).
-pinSize 0|1

1 : Enable the Pin Size option.
0 : Disable the Pin Size option.
-thruVia 0|1

1 : Propagate system pins through vias/contacts.
0 : Do not propagate system pins through vias/contacts.
-topMetalLayer number
Valid value: an integer, greater than or equal to 1

(default=1).
When it is specified, the number of top metal layers is
used to generate system pins.
When it is not specified, the top metal layers are not used
to generate system pins.

1 : Use a colon as the virtual connection.
0 : Do not use a colon as the virtual connection.
-view viewName
Specify the view name of the cell to be extracted (default=

layout).
-width width

generated pin shapes. This argument is only valid for
-pinSize 1.
Examples
# Example 1
# Poly-layer shape is extracted by the Generate System Pin method
# Extract labels from level 0~3 and shapes from 0~10
lakerText2Prop -lib Demotest2 -cell test2 -mode genSystemPin \
-extDepth 10 -extLabelDepth 3 -excludePoly 0
# Example 2
# Pin shapes on first 2 top layers are created by
# the Generate System Pin method
lakerText2Prop -lib Demotest2 -cell test2 -mode genSystemPin \
-topMetalLayer 2
464

K-2015.06

Library Commands
# Example 3
lakerText2Prop -lib all -cell OPA -mode genSystemPin \
-excludePoly 0 -thruVia 0 -pinSize 0 -checkLogicNet 1 \
-extDepth 0 -extLabelDepth 0 -useColonVirtual 1
# Example 4
# Extract the view "layout.routed" of cell "top"
lakerText2Prop -lib TestLib -cell top -view layout.routed \
-extDepth 0 -createPinFromInstance 0 -useColonVirtual 1
See Also
Home Page: Library > Assign Net/Port
Layout Window: Cell > Assign Net/Port
lakerUpdateCellProp
The lakerUpdateCellProp command updates the cell type and pin
direction after pin extraction (abstract cell) according to the specified cell
property file.
Syntax
lakerUpdateCellProp -lib libName -cellPropFile filename view {viewName}
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cellPropFile filename
Specify the cell property file (*.cpf) with its full path.
-lib libName
-view {viewName}
Specify the cell view to be updated with cell property.

Multiple view names must be separated by spaces. The
wildcard characters * and ? are supported.
Valid values: all view names (default=abs layout).

K-2015.06
465

Category Commands
Examples
# Example 1
# Update the abstract, layout and layout1 views of cell "test"
lakerUpdateCellProp -lib qa -cellPropFile demo.cpf \
-view abstract layout layout1
# Example 2
# Update the view leading with "abs"
lakerUpdateCellProp -lib qa -cellPropFile demo.cpf -view abs*
# Example 3
# Update the abstract view
lakerUpdateCellProp -lib test -cellPropFile demo.cpf
See Also
Home Page: Library > Update Cell Property
Category Commands
This section describes the Tcl commands applied to the Category commands
in the Home Page.
lakerDelCategory
lakerModifyCategory
lakerNewCategory
lakerRenCategory
lakerDelCategory
The lakerDelCategory command deletes the specified category. However,
this does not delete the cells that are included in this category.
Syntax
lakerDelCategory -lib libName -category catgPath
Returns
None
466

K-2015.06

Category Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-category catgPathName
Specify the category to be deleted in full path.
-lib libName
Examples
# Example 1
# Delete catg1_1 sub-category under catg1 category in
# demoLib library
lakerDelCategory -lib demoLib -category /catg1/catg1_1
See Also
Home Page: Category > Delete
lakerModifyCategory
The lakerModifyCategory command assigns cells and sub-categories into
a specified category, or removes cells and sub-categories from a specified
category.
Syntax
lakerModifyCategory -lib libName -cell cellList -category
catgList (-toCategory catgPathName | -remove)
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-category catgList
Specify the operating category list.
-cell cellList
Specify the operating cell list.
-lib libName
-remove
Specify the Remove operation.
-toCategory
catgPathName
Specify the target category (Assignment) in full path.

K-2015.06
467

Category Commands
Examples
# Example 1
# Assign demoCell1, demoCell2 and catg1_1 to /catg1 in
# demoLib library
lakerModifyCategory -lib demoLib -cell demoCell1 demoCell2 \
-category catg1_1 -toCategory /catg1
# Example 2
# Remove demoCell1 from category in demoLib library
lakerModifyCategory -lib demoLib -cell demoCell1 -remove
See Also
Home Page: Category > Modify
lakerNewCategory
The lakerNewCategory command creates a new category, that can group
cells and categories, by the existing library name and fabrication category
name.
Syntax
lakerNewCategory -lib libName -category catgPathName
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-category
catgPathName
Specify the new category in full path.
-lib libName
Examples
# Example 1
# Create catg1 category to group the cells in demoLib library
lakerNewCategory -lib demoLib -category /catg1
# Example 2
# Create catg1_1 sub-category under catg1 category
# to group the cells in demoLib library
lakerNewCategory -lib demoLib -category /catg1/catg1_1
468

K-2015.06

Category Commands
See Also
Home Page: Category > New
lakerRenCategory
The lakerRenCategory command renames a category of the specified
library.
Syntax
lakerRenCategory -lib libName -category catgPathName newName newCatgPathName
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-category catgPathName
Specify the category to be renamed in full path.
-lib libName
-newName
newCatgPathName
Specify the new name and path of the category after

renaming.
Examples
# Example 1
# rename catg1_1 sub-category under catg1 category as
# subCatg1 in demoLib library
lakerRenCategory -lib demoLib -category /catg1/catg1_1 \
-newName /catg1/subCatg1
See Also
Home Page: Category > Rename

K-2015.06
469

Cell Commands
Cell Commands
This section describes the Tcl commands applied to the Cell commands in the
Home Page.
lakerCopyCell
lakerDelCell
lakerExportUDDGC
lakerImportUDDGC
lakerNewCell
lakerRenCell
lakerReuseCell
lakerCopyCell
The lakerCopyCell command copies a cell view, a cell, or a category of the
specified library to its own or to another library.
Syntax
lakerCopyCell -lib libName -cell cellName [-view viewName]
[-toLib toLib] -toCell toCatgPathCellName [-hierarchy
hierarchy] [-copyView viewList] [-updateInst updateInst]
[-opt options]
lakerCopyCell -lib libName -category catgName -toLib toLib
-toCategory toCatgPathName [-hierarchy hierarchy] [-opt
options]
Returns
None
Arguments
470
Argument
Description
-category
catgName
Specify the source category.
-cell cellName
Specify the source cell to be copied.

K-2015.06

Cell Commands
Argument
Description
-copyView
viewList
Specify a list of views to be copied. If none, all views are

copied. This option is not supported when copying a category.
-hierarchy
hierarchy
Copy design hierarchies.

Valid values: all, noRef, and ignoreRef.
all: Copy cells hierarchically, including those cells in
reference libraries.
noRef: Copy cells hierarchically, excluding those in reference
libraries.ignoreRef: Copy cells hierarchically, excluding
those in specified reference libraries. ignoreRef is not
supported as copying category.
-lib libName
-opt options
Specify the options to copy cell.

Valid values: overwrite, ignorecopy, updateinst, and
rename -nameFormat %C_%L (default=overwrite).
overwrite: Replace an existing cell in target library with the
cell, including design hierarchy, copied from source library.
ignorecopy: Copy selected cell to target library but keep the
reference of instances to source library.
updateinst: Copy selected cell to target library and update
the reference of instances to target library.
rename -nameFormat %C_%L: Copy selected cell to target
library and assign a new name to the copied cell and its
instances with rename format.
-toCategory
toCatgPathName
Specify the destination category with its full path.
-toCell
Specify the destination cell with its category path.
toCatgPathCellName
-toLib toLib
-updateInst
updateInst
Update instance references. This option is not supported

when copying a category.
Valid values: all and newCopied.

K-2015.06
471

Cell Commands
Argument
Description
-view viewName
Specify the view name of the cell. The available views vary
depend on the license invoked.
Valid values: layout, pcc, symbolic, schematic,
symbol, simulation, config, veriloga, verilog,
spice, verilogAMS, vhdlAMS, vhdl, systemVerilog,
hspice, cdl, spectre, and any user-defined view name.
Examples
# Example 1
# Copy demoCell in demoLib library to demoCell2
lakerCopyCell -lib demoLib -cell demoCell -toCell demoCell2
# Example 2
# Copy catg1 category from demoLib library to
# catg1 category in demoLib2
lakerCopyCell -lib demoLib -category catg1 -toLib demoLib2 \
-toCategory catg1
# Example 3
# Copy CellA (with hierarchy) from Lib1 to Lib2
# and rename it as CellA_Lib2
lakerCopyCell -lib Lib1 -cell CellA -toLib Lib2 -toCell CellA \
-hierarchy all -opt rename -nameFormat %C_%L
# Example 4
# Copy CellA (with hierarchy) from Lib1 to Lib2
# and reference cell under CellA's hierarchy to same cell in Lib2
-hierarchy all -opt updateinst -nameFormat %C_%L
# Example 5
# Copy CellA (without all reference libraries) from Lib1 to Lib2
# and only copy abs and layout views
-hierarchy noRef -copyView abs layout
# Example 6
# Copy CellA (with hierarchy) from Lib1 to Lib2 and update all
# references of all instances in Lib2
-hierarchy all -updateInst all
# Example 7
# Copy CellA (ignore reference library RefLib1 and RefLib2)
# from Lib1 to Lib2
-hierarchy ignoreRef RefLib1 RefLib2
472

K-2015.06

Cell Commands
See Also
Home Page: Cell > Copy
lakerDelCell
The lakerDelCell command deletes a cell with the specified view name, or
a category of the specified library.
Syntax
lakerDelCell -lib libName -cell cellName [-view viewName]
[-category catgName] [-filterCell filterContent] [filterView filterContent] [-dmCVCkdelete 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-category
catgName
Specify the category name.
-cell
cellName
Specify the cell to be deleted. The wildcard character * is

supported.
-dmCVCkdelete 0|1

1 : Remove cell view files.
0 : Do not remove any cell view files.
-filterCell
filterContent
Specify the cells to be filtered. The wildcard character * is

supported.
-filterView
filterContent
Specify the views to be filtered. The wildcard character * is

supported.
-lib libName
-view viewName
Specify the view name of the cell to be deleted. The wildcard

character * is supported.

K-2015.06
473

Cell Commands
Examples
# Example 1
# Delete cells nand2, nand 3, and nand 4 from library demolib
lakerDelCell -lib demolib -cell nand2 nand3 nand 4
# Example 2
# Delete cells nand2, nand 3, and nand 4 from library demolib,and
locate
# the specified view name "layout01"
lakerDelCell -lib demolib -cell nand2 nand3 nand 4 -view layout01
# Example 3
# Delete cells nand2, nand 3, and nand 4 from library demolib, and
# locate the specified view name matching "layout*"
lakerDelCell -lib demolib -cell nand2 nand3 nand 4 -view layout*
# Example 4
# Delete all cells and views of library demolib
lakerDelCell -lib demolib -cell * -view *
# Example 5
# Delete cell views of category axv in library demolib, and locate
# the cell names matching "all*", and the view names matching "pcc*"
# The cell filter is "a*", and the view filter is "p*"
lakerDelCell -lib demolib -cell all* -view pcc* \
-withCategory ./axv -filterCell a* -filterView p*
# Example 6
# Delete a design and remove it from DM system automatically
lakerDelCell -lib CPU -cell AND21 -view layout -dmCVCkdelete 1
See Also
Home Page: Cell > Delete
lakerExportUDDGC
The lakerExportUDDGC command exports global constant to a text file
(*.gc).
Syntax
lakerExportUDDGC -lib libName -file fileName
Returns
None
474

K-2015.06

Cell Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file fileName
Specify the gc file to be exported.
-lib libName
Examples
lakerExportUDDGC -lib TEST -file testB.gc
See Also
Home Page: Cell > UDD > Export Global Constant
lakerImportUDDGC
The lakerImportUDDGC command imports global constant from a text file
(*.gc).
Syntax
lakerImportUDDGC -lib libName -file fileName
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file fileName
Specify the gc file to be imported.
-lib libName
Specify library database.
Examples
lakerImportUDDGC -lib TEST -file testA.gc
See Also
Home Page: Cell > UDD > Import Global Constant

K-2015.06
475

Cell Commands
lakerNewCell
The lakerNewCell command creates a new cell, library subset, by the
existing library name and fabrication cell name with the specified category
path.
Syntax
lakerNewCell -lib libName -cell cellName [-withCategory
catgPathName] [-view viewName] [-viewType cellviewType]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
Specify the new cell.
-lib libName
-view viewName
Specify a view name for the new cell.
-viewType
cellviewType
Specify the view type for the new cell. The available view
types vary depend on the license invoked.
Valid values: maskLayout, schematic, symbol,
simulation, config, veriloga, verilog, spice,
verilogAMS, vhdlAMS, vhdl, systemVerilog, hspice,
cdl, spectre, and any user-defined view name.
-withCategory
catgPathName
Specify the category for the new cell in full path (default=/).
Examples
# Example 1
# create new cell "aa" of library "aaa" in Laker OA
lakerNewCell -lib aaa -cell aa
# Example 2
# create new maskLayout view of library "aaa", cell "aa" in Laker OA
lakerNewCell -lib aaa -cell aa -view layout2
lakerNewCell -lib aaa -cell aa -view layout2 -viewType maskLayout
476

K-2015.06

Cell Commands
See Also
dbOpenCV
Home Page: Cell > New
lakerRenCell
The lakerRenCell command renames a cell of the specified library.
Syntax
lakerRenCell -lib libName -cell cellName [-view viewName] toCell newCellName [-toView newViewName] -update 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
Specify the cell to be renamed.
-lib libName
-toCell
newCellName
Specify a new file name for the cell.
-toView
newViewName
Specify a new file name for the view.
-update 0|1

1 : Update all instances which use the specified cell and view.
0 : Do not update all instances which use the specified cell and
view.
-view viewName
Specify the view name of the cell to be renamed.

Valid values for Laker: layout, logic, schematic and any
user-defined view name (default=layout).
Valid values for ADP: schematic, symbol, simulation,
config, veriloga, verilog, spice, and any user-defined
view name (default=schematic).

K-2015.06
477

Cell Commands
Examples
# Example 1
# Rename cellview (the same cell)
# Rename cell aa view layout in library aaa to cell aa view layout1
# and do not update all instances
lakerRenCell -lib aaa -cell aa -view layout -toCell aa \
-toView layout1 -update 0
# Example 2
# Rename cellview (different cell)
# Rename cell aa view sch1 in library aaa to cell bb view sch2
# and update all instances
lakerRenCell -lib aaa -cell aa -view sch1 -toCell bb \
-toView sch2 -update 1
# Example 3
# Rename cellview (the same cell)
# Rename cell aa view layout in library aaa to cell aa view
# schematic and do not update all instances
lakerRenCell -lib aaa -cell aa -view schematic -toCell aa \
-toView schematic -update 0
See Also
Home Page: Cell > Rename
lakerReuseCell
The lakerReuseCell command reuses the cells that are created with
Expand Schematic or ECO by mapping the copied layout view with the logic
view.
Syntax
lakerReuseCell -lib libName -cell cellName -toLib toLib [hierarchy hierarchy]
Returns
None
Arguments
478
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
Specify the source cell to be copied.
-hierarchy hierarchy
Copy design hierarchies.

Valid values: all and noRef.

K-2015.06

Floorplan Commands
Argument
Description
-lib libName
-toLib toLib
Examples
# Example 1
# Copy CellA from demoLib to demoLib2 with all design hierarchies
lakerReuseCell -lib demoLib -cell CellA -toLib demoLib2 \
-hierarchy all
# Example 2
# Copy CellA from demoLib to demoLib2 without copying
# design hierarchies
lakerReuseCell -lib demoLib -cell CellA -toLib demoLib2
See Also
Home Page: Cell > Reuse
Floorplan Commands
This section describes the Tcl commands applied to the Floorplan commands
in the Home Page. These commands include:
lakerCreateSite
lakerDeleteSite
lakerModifySite
lakerCreateSite
The lakerCreateSite command creates the site information for the
specified library.
Syntax
lakerCreateSite -lib libName -site siteName -width width height height -class className [-symmetry symmetry]
Returns
None

K-2015.06
479

Floorplan Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-class className
Valid values: CORE, and PAD (default=CORE).
-height height
Specify the site height.

-lib libName
-site siteName
Specify the site name to be defined.
-symmetry symmetry
Valid values: X, Y, R90, X Y, Y R90, X R90, and X Y R90.
-width width
Specify the site width.

Examples
lakerCreateSite -lib testLib -site io_site -width 1.0 \
-height 211.75 -class PAD -symmetry X Y R90
See Also
Home Page: Floorplan > Site > Create
lakerDeleteSite
The lakerDeleteSite command removes the site information from the
specified library.
Syntax
lakerDeleteSite -lib libName -site siteName
Returns
None
Arguments
480
Argument
Description
-lib libName
-site siteName
Specify the site to be removed.

K-2015.06

Floorplan Commands
Examples
lakerDeleteSite -lib testLib -site io_site
See Also
Home Page: Floorplan > Site > Delete
lakerModifySite
The lakerModifySite command modifies the site information for the
specified library.
Syntax
lakerModifySite -lib libName -site siteName -width width height height -class className [-symmetry symmetry]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-class className
Valid values: CORE, and PAD (default=CORE).
-height height

-lib libName
-site siteName
-symmetry symmetry
Valid values: X, Y, R90, X Y, Y R90, X R90, and X Y R90.
-width width

Examples
lakerModifySite -lib testLib -site io_site -width 1.5 \
-height 211.5 -class PAD -symmetry X Y R90
See Also
Home Page: Floorplan > Site > Modify

K-2015.06
481

Options Commands
Options Commands
This section describes the Tcl commands applied to the Options commands in
the Home Page. These commands include:
adpLakerWavePreference
adpDumpDsgTree
adpDsgPref
adpSimConPreference
lakerChangeLicense
lakerGetLicenseName
lakerLoadDispFile
lakerPreference
lakerRefreshLockedLayerFile
lakerSchBroPreference
lakerSetUserStrokeFile
adpLakerWavePreference
The adpLakerWavePreference command returns 1 if one or more
preferences have been set in the LakerWave Preferences form.
Syntax
adpLakerWavePreference [-numDispMode digDisplayed] [widthSelWave num] [-fullName 0|1] [-datapoints 0|1] [anchorMeter 0|1] [-stickResults 0|1] [-grid gridSetting
[-minDis num]] [-ToFSDB 0|1] [-snap mode] [-shape shape]
[-gravity 0|1 [-type type] [-range num]]
Returns
482

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-anchorMeter 0|1

1 : Enable the Show Anchor Measurement option.
0 : Disable the Show Anchor Measurement option.
-datapoints 0|1

1 : Enable the Show Data Points option.
0 : Disable the Show Data Points option.
-fullName 0|1

1 : Enable the Hierarchical Signal Name option.
0 : Disable the Hierarchical Signal Name option.
-gravity 0|1

1 : Enable the Gravity option.
0 : Disable the Gravity option.
-grid gridSetting
Specify whether to show horizontal or vertical grids.

Valid values: vLine and hLine.
-minDis num
Specify the minimum grid distance.

-numDispMode
digDisplayed
Specify the number of digits to be displayed and the display

mode.
Valid values: an integer (for the number of digits to be
displayed), engineer and scientific (for the display
mode).
-range num
Specify a gravity range.

-shape shape
Specify the property shape for the preselector.

Valid values: square, squareCross, cross, and vLine
(default=square).
-snap mode
Specify the property mode for the preselector.

Valid values: x, y, and xy.
-stickResults 0|1

1 : Enable the Show Stick Measurement Results option.
0 : Disable the Show Stick Measurement Results option.

K-2015.06
483

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-ToFSDB 0|1

1 : Enable the Convert to FSDB File option.
0 : Disable the Convert to FSDB File option.
-type type
Specify the desired gravity types.

Valid values: max, min, and avg.
-widthSelWave num
Specify the width for the selected waveform.

Examples
# Example 1
adpLakerWavePreference -minDis 60 -numDispMode 2 engineer \
-widthSelWave 5 -fullName 1 -datapoints 1 -anchorMeter 1 \
-stickResults 1 -grid vLine hLine -ToFSDB 1 -gravity 1 \
-type min -range 50 -snap x -shape square
See Also
Home Page: Options > LakerWave Preferences
adpDumpDsgTree
The adpDumpDsgTree command returns 1 if the tree node information can be
dumped successfully.
Syntax
adpDumpDsgTree -topWnd winId [-all] [-np 0|1] [-fullpath 0|1]
Returns
Arguments
484
Argument
Description
-all
Dump all nodes in the design tree.
-fullpath 0|1

1 : Dump instances with their full path.
0 : Do not dump instances with their full path.

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-np 0|1

1 : Ignore primative devices.
0 : Do not ignore primative devices.
-topWnd winId
Examples
# Example 1
adpDumpDsgTree -topWnd _adp2 -np 0 -fullpath 0
See Also
Home Page: Options > Schematic Preferences > View Options > Design
Window > Display Cell Name in Tree Node
adpDsgPref
The adpDsgPref command defines the display of extra information on the
window.
Syntax
adpDsgPref [-portName 0|1] [-instName 0|1] [-libName 0|1]
[-netName 0|1] [-pinName 0|1 [-topPort 0|1]] [localNetName 0|1] [-netLabel 0|1] [-treeNodeCellName 0|1]
[-showComment 0|1] [-vtop design] [-PseudoRC 0|1] [dimMode 0|1] [-changescope 0|1] [-defaultPinSize value]
[-zoomToSelectSet 0|1] [-zoomToHighlightObject 0|1] [zoomRatio value] [-correctIOPortForSpice 0|1] [makeFGateHier 0|1] [-undoSize value] [-withoutWiring 0|1]
[-showNamedNet 0|1] [-allPortNet 0|1] [-pinLabelSize
pinLabelSize] [-ignorePinOrderforPrimitive 0|1] [defaultSysNetNamePrefix prefix] [-highlightFloatPoint
0|1] [-multipleOfFontOfPitchValue value] [caseSensInNetName case] [-defaultBorder 0|1 [defaultBorderCell cell -defaultBorderLib lib]] [showMessageForAutoCheck 0|1] [-showMessageForAutoFixing
0|1] [-instParamDisp 0|1] [-emptyValueParam 0|1] [precision value] [-dispmode dispMode] [-texteditor
texteditor] [-panRatioValue value] [-parmsym 0|1 [parmSymSkipDefaultValue 0|1]] [-instSelectable 0|1] [netLabelSelectable 0|1] [-wireLabelSelectable 0|1] [-

K-2015.06
485

Options Commands
crossCursor 0|1] [-portSelectable 0|1] [-pinSelectable

0|1] [-textSelectable 0|1] [-shapeSelectable 0|1] [annoTextSelectable 0|1] [-borderSelectable 0|1] [directManipulation 0|1] [-snapCreate snapCreate] [snapEdit snapEdit] [-keepNonEditParamValue 0|1] [gravity 0|1 [-gravityRadius value]] [-honorMOSMfactor
0|1] [-autoCreateWideWire 0|1 -autoWireWidth num] [dmAutoCheckOutCV option] [-dmAutoCheckInCV option] [dmAutoCheckOutInFile option] [-dmAutoExcludeViewName
viewNameList] [-dummyNMOSGateNet 0|1] [dummyNMOSGateNetName netname] [-dummyPMOSGateNet 0|1] [dummyPMOSGateNetName netname] [-dummyNMOSSDNet 0|1] [dummyNMOSSDNetName netname] [-dummyPMOSSDNet 0|1] [dummyPMOSSDNetName netname] [-highlightWithXSymbol 0|1 PixelSensitiveRadius value] [-autoSave 0|1 autoSaveInterval value][-autoBackup value] [allSegWireLbl 0|1] [-keepNetNameWhileDeleting 0|1] [parmList 0|1] [-keepNetNameWhenDelLabel 0|1] [keepNetNameWhileDeletingPort 0|1] [-chkERC 0|1 checkERCMode checkMode] [-powerFtr value] [-NetExprDisp
value] [-evaluateParamValue 0|1] [-resistanceFtr value]
[-conductanceFtr value] [-capacitanceFtr value] [inductanceFtr value] [-lengthMetricFtr value] [-timeFtr
value] [-frequencyFtr value] [-voltageFtr value] [currentFtr value] [-viewListDefaultBinding format] [avoidDiffUserNets 0|1] [-enableAreaSelFilter 0|1][instAreaSelFilter 0|1][-wireAreaSelFilter 0|1] [netLabelAreaSelFilter 0|1][-portAreaSelFilter 0|1][pinAreaSelFilter 0|1] [-textAreaSelFilter 0|1][shapeAreaSelFilter 0|1][-annTextAreaSelFilter 0|1] [borderAreaSelFilter 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
486
Argument
Description
-allPortNet 0|1

1 : Change all net names when renaming a port.
0 : Do not change the net name when renaming a
port.

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-allSegWireLbl 0|1

1 : Enable the Add Net Label to All Wire Segments
option.
0 : Disable the Add Net Label to All Wire
Segments option.
-annoTextSelectable 0|1

1 : Enable the selectability of annotation text
labels.
0 : Disable the selectability of annotation text
labels.
-annTextAreaSelFilter 0|1

1 : Enable the area selectability of annotation text
labels.
0 : Disable the area selectability of annotation text
labels.
-autoBackup value
Specify the number of backup copies.

Valid value: an integer (default=1)
-autoCreateWideWire 0|1

1 : Enable the Auto Create Wide Wire option.
0 : Disable the Auto Create Wide Wire option.
-autoSave 0|1

1 : Enable the Auto Save Interval option.
0 : Disable the Auto Save Interval option.
-autoSaveInterval value
Specify the auto saving time interval.

This argument is valid only when -autoSave 1
is specified.
-autoWireWidth num
Specify the width for the wide wires that are

created automatically. This argument is valid only
if -autoCreateWideWire 1 is specified.

K-2015.06
487

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-avoidDiffUserNets 0|1

1 : Enable the Avoid Connecting Different
User-defined Nets option.
0 : Disable the Avoid Connecting Different
User-defined Nets option.
-borderAreaSelFilter 0|1

1 : Enable the area selectability of border
instances.
0 : Disable the area selectability of border
instances.
-borderSelectable 0|1

1 : Enable the selectability of border instances.
0 : Disable the selectability of border instances.
-capacitanceFtr value
Specify the unit for the capacitance.

Valid values: auto, none, fF, pF, nF, uF, mF,
and F (default=auto).
-caseSensInNetName
case
Case sensitivity in net names.

(default=Preserve).
-cellNameInTitle 0|1

1 : Show the following format in the title banner:
libraryName:cellName
0 : Show the following format in the title banner:
libraryName:cellName.instanceName.....instance
Name(cellname)
-changescope 0|1
488

1 : Change the design scope of the schematic
view by double-clicking on the instance.
0 : Change the design scope by selecting the
View > Pop View Up command when
double-clicking on a port, or by selecting the
View > Push View In command when
double-clicking on a pin.

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-checkERCMode
checkMode
Specify the ERC check level.

Valid values: Whole Hierarchy and Top Only.
-chkERC 0|1

1 : Always execute the ERC checking before
Spice exporting.
0 : Execute the ERC checking based on the Stop
Export setting in the Logic tab of the Setup
Schematic Check Rules form, invoked by
Check > Setup ERC Rules in the Schematic
Editor window.
-conductanceFtr value
Specify the unit for the conductance.

Valid values: auto, none, uMhos, and mMhos
(default=auto).
-correctIOPortForSpice
0|1

1 : Correct I/O ports for the spice netlist.
0 : Do not correct I/O ports for the spice netlist.
-crossCursor 0|1

1 : Enable the Cross Cursor option.
0 : Disable the Cross Cursor option.
-currentFtr value
Specify the unit for the current.

Valid values: auto, none, pA, nA, uA, mA, and A
(default=auto).
-defaultBorder 0|1

1 : Add the default border to newly created cells.
0 : Do not add the default border to newly created
cells.
-defaultBorderCell cell
Specify the name of the cell which is set as the

sheet symbol cell.
This argument is valid only if -defaultBorder
1 is specified.
-defaultBorderLib lib
Specify the name of the library where the default

border is located.
This argument is valid only if -defaultBorder
1 is specified.

K-2015.06
489

Options Commands
490
Argument
Description
-defaultPinSize value
Set the default size for the pin's dot and

connection dot.
-defaultSysNetNamePrefix
prefix
Specify the prefix for default system net names.

Valid value: a text string (default=N_).
-directManipulation 0|1

1 : Enable the Direct Manipulation option.
0 : Disable the Direct Manipulation option.
-dispmode dispMode
Specify the display mode of parameters.

Valid values: Normal, Engineering, and
Scientific (default=Engineering).
-dmAutoCheckInCV
option
Specify the automatic way to check in cell view

files.
Valid values: Always, Prompt, and Never.
Always : Always check in cell view files
automatically.
Prompt : Show a prompt notification prior to the
check in of cell view files, which are automatically
checked out.
Never : Never automatically check in cell view
files, which are automatically checked out.
-dmAutoCheckOutCV
option
Specify the automatic way to check out cell view

files.
Always : Always check out cell view files
automatically.
check out of cell view files.
Never : Never check out cell view files
automatically.

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-dmAutoCheckOutInFile
option
Specify the automatic way to check in/out other

files.
Always : Always check in/out other files
automatically.
Prompt : Show a prompt notification prior to
checking in/out other files.
Never : Never check in/out other files
automatically.
-dmAutoExcludeViewName
viewNameList
Specify a list of excluded view names for auto

check-in and check-out of Data Management with
format: {viewName1 viewName2 viewName3
... viewNamen}.
This argument is only valid for dbGetAllCells dm0|1 and dbGetAllViews -dm0|1.
-dummyNMOSGateNet 0|1

1 : Enable the Gate Net Name for Dummy NMOS
option.
0 : Disable the Gate Net Name for Dummy NMOS
option.
-dummyNMOSGateNetName
netname
Assign a single net name for all dummy NMOS

devices.
-dummyNMOSSDNet 0|1

1 : Enable the S/D Net Name for Dummy NMOS
option.
0 : Disable the S/D Net Name for Dummy NMOS
option.
-dummyNMOSSDNetName
netname
Assign a single source/drain net name for all

dummy NMOS devices.
-dummyPMOSGateNet 0|1

1 : Enable the Gate Net Name for Dummy PMOS
option.
0 : Disable the Gate Net Name for Dummy PMOS
option.

K-2015.06
491

Options Commands
492
Argument
Description
-dummyPMOSGateNetName
netname
Assign a single net name for all dummy PMOS

devices.
-dummyPMOSSDNet 0|1

1 : Enable the S/D Net Name for Dummy PMOS
option.
0 : Disable the S/D Net Name for Dummy PMOS
option.
-dummyPMOSSDNetName
netname

dummy NMOS devices.
-emptyValueParam 0|1

1 : Show parameters with the empty value.
0 : Hide parameters with the empty value.
-enableAreaSelFilter 0|1

1 : Enable the Enable Area Selectable Filter
option.
0 : Do not enable the Enable Area Selectable
Filter option.
-evaluateParamValue 0|1

1 : Show the evaluated parameter value.
0 : Do not show the evaluated parameter value.
-frequencyFtr value
Specify the unit for the frequency.

Valid values: auto, none, Hz, kHz, MHz, and GHz
(default=auto).
-gravity 0|1

1 : Enable the Gravity function for Create Wire.
0 : Disable the Gravity function for Create Wire.
-gravityRadius value
Specify the radius value for -gravity.

-highlightAllSeg 0|1

1 : Enable the Highlight All Wire Segments when
Pre-selecting Nets option.
0 : Disable the Highlight All Wire Segments when
Pre-selecting Nets option.

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-highlightFloatPoint 0|1

1 : Enable the Highlight Floating Point for Wires
option.
0 : Disable the Highlight Floating Point for Wires
option.
-highlightWithXSymbol 0|1

1 : Highlight wires with X.
0 : Do not highlight wires.
-honorMOSMfactor 0|1

1 : Enable the Honor MOS M-factor option.
0 : Disable the Honor MOS M-factor option.
-ignorePinOrderforPrimitive
0|1

1 : Ignore checking the inconsistent pin order for
primitive symbols.
0 : Check the inconsistent pin order for primitive
symbols.
-inductanceFtr value
Specify the unit for the inductance.

Valid values: auto, none, pH, nH, uH, mH, and H
(default=auto).
-instAreaSelFilter 0|1

1 : Enable the area selectability of instances.
0 : Disable the area selectability of instances.
-instName 0|1

1 : Show instance names.
0 : Hide instance names.
-instParamDisp 0|1

1 : Enable the Display option in the Parameter tab
of the Attribute form (invoked by Query > Attribute)
when a new instance is created in the schematic.
0 : Do not enable the above Display option
automatically.
-instSelectable 0|1

1 : Enable the selectability of instances.
0 : Disable the selectability of instances.

K-2015.06
493

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-keepNetNameWhenDelLabel
0|1

1 : Keep the original net name after net labels are
deleted.
0 : Replace the net name with a system-assigned
net name when net labels are deleted.
-keepNetNameWhileDeleting
0|1

1 : Keep the original net name after wire
connections are deleted.
net name when wire connections are deleted.
-keepNetNameWhileDeletingPort Valid values: Boolean values, 0 and 1 (default=1).

0|1
1 : Keep the original net name after ports are
deleted.
net name when ports are deleted. Refer to the
Keep Net Name when Deleting Ports description
for these specific ports.
494
-keepNonEditParamValue 0|1

1 : Enable the Keep Non-editable Parameter
Value of New Master option.
0 : Disable the Keep Non-editable Parameter
Value of New Master option.
-lengthMetricFtr value
Specify the unit for the length (metric).

Valid values: auto, none, uM, mM, cM, and M
(default=auto).
-libName 0|1

1 : Show the library name.
0 : Hide the library name.
-localNetName 0|1

1 : Show local net names.
0 : Hide local net names.
-makeFGateHier 0|1

1 : Enable the form-gate block to make a new
hierarchical design.
0 : Disable the form-gate block.

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-multipleOfFontOfPitchValue
value
Set the display font size based on the pitch value.

Valid value: an integer with value ranges from 1 to
1024 (default=1).
-NetExprDisp
Specify the net expression display format.

Valid values: valueOnly, valueDefault,
valueProperty, valueExpr, and ExprOnly
(default=valueProperty).
-netLabel 0|1

1 : Show physical net labels.
0 : Hide physical net labels.
-netLabelAreaSelFilter 0|1

1 : Enable the area selectability of net labels.
0 : Disable the area selectability of net labels.
-netLabelSelectable 0|1

1 : Enable the selectability of net labels.
0 : Disable the selectability of net labels.
-netName 0|1

1 : Show dynamic net names.
0 : Hide dynamic net names.
-panRatioValue value
Set the pan ratio increment for the panning

distance.
Valid value: a floating number with value ranges
from 0.1 to 1.0 (default=0.333).
-parmList 0|1

1 : Show the parameter list.
0 : Hide the parameter list.
-parmsym 0|1

1 : Show symbol parameters.
0 : Hide symbol parameters.

K-2015.06
495

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-parmSymSkipDefaultValue
0|1
This argument is valid only if -parmSym is

specified.
1 : Hide symbol parameters (for example: the
default W and L values) if they are not realized
onto the instance.
0 : Show the symbol parameters.
-pinAreaSelFilter 0|1

1 : Enable the area selectability of pins.
0 : Disable the area selectability of pins.
-pinLabelSize
pinLabelSize
Set the default font size of the pin name when

generating a symbol from the schematic.
-pinName 0|1

1 : Show I/O port names.
0 : Hide I/O port names.
-pinSelectable 0|1

1 : Enable the selectability of pins.
0 : Disable the selectability of pins.
-PixelSensitiveRadius value
Specify the pixel size. Only available when the

-highlightWithSymbol option is specified.
Valid value: an integer with value ranges 10 to 30
(default=10).
496
-portAreaSelFilter 0|1

1 : Enable the area selectability of ports.
0 : Disable the area selectability of ports.
-portName 0|1

1 : Show instance port names.
0 : Hide instance port names.
-portSelectable 0|1

1 : Enable the selectability of ports.
0 : Disable the selectability of ports.

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-powerFtr value
Specify the unit for the power.

Valid values: auto, none, uW, mW, and W
(default=auto).
-precision value
Specify the number of digits of the hierarchical

signals displayed in the Schematic Editor window.
-PseudoRC 0|1

1 : Display pseudo RC devices for backannotation.
0 : Do not display pseudo RC devices for backannotation.
-resistanceFtr value
Specify the unit for the resistance.

Valid values: auto, none, Ohms, kOhms, and
MOhms (default=auto).
-shapeAreaSelFilter 0|1

1 : Enable the area selectability of shapes.
0 : Disable the area selectability of shapes.
-shapeSelectable 0|1

1 : Enable the selectability of shapes.
0 : Disable the selectability of shapes.
-showComment 0|1

1 : Show comments.
0 : Hide comments.
-showMessageForAutoCheck
0|1

1 : Show messages for auto checking.
0 : Do not show messages for auto checking.
-showMessageForAutoFixing
0|1

1 : Show messages for auto fixing.
0 : Do not show messages for auto fixing.

K-2015.06
497

Options Commands
498
Argument
Description
-showNamedNet 0|1

1 : Show a warning message when two userdefined nets are shorted together.
0 : Do not show the warning message when two
user-defined nets are shorted together.
-snapCreate snapCreate
Snap mode for creation.

Valid values: anyAngle, diagonal,
orthogonal, xFirst, and yFirst
(default=orthogonal).
-snapEdit snapEdit
Snap mode for editing.

Valid values: anyAngle, diagonal, and
orthogonal (default=orthogonal).
-textAreaSelFilter 0|1

1 : Enable the area selectability of text labels.
0 : Disable the area selectability of text labels.
-texteditor
texteditor
Set the preferred text editor.

Valid values: default, textedit, gvim, joe,
and vi (default=default).
-textSelectable 0|1

1 : Enable the selectability of text labels.
0 : Disable the selectability of text labels.
-timeFtr value
Specify the unit for the time.

Valid values: auto, none, pS, nS, uS, mS, and S
(default=auto).
-topPort 0|1
This argument is valid only if -pinName 1 is

specified.
1 : Show top level port names.
0 : Hide top level port names.
-treeNodeCellName 0|1

1 : Show the master cell name on tree nodes.
0 : Hide the master cell name on tree nodes.

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-undoSize value
Specify the number of times undo is allowed.

-viewListDefaultBinding
format
Specify the netlist type, switch views, and stop

views for exporting the netlist with the following
format:
{"{hspiceD}{viewNames}{viewName}"
"{auCdl}{viewNames}{viewName}"
"{smartspice}{viewNames}{viewName}"
"{eldoD}{viewNames}{viewName}"
"{spectre}{viewNames}{viewName}"
"{verilog}{viewNames}{viewName}"}
-voltageFtr value
Specify the unit for the voltage.

Valid values: auto, none, uV, mV, V, and kV
(default=auto).
-vtop design
Specify a virtual top design.
-wireAreaSelFilter 0|1

1 : Enable the area selectability of net labels.
0 : Disable the area selectability of net labels.
-wireLabelSelectable 0|1

1 : Enable the selectability of net labels.
0 : Disable the selectability of net labels.
-withoutWiring 0|1

1 : Place the netlist data without physical direct
wires (not routed).
0 : Place the netlist data with physical direct wires
(routed).
-zoomRatio value
Set the ratio to zoom in to the highlighted objects.

This argument is valid only if zoomToHighlighObject 1 is specified.
Valid value: an integer, greater than or equal to 0
(default=1).
-zoomToHighlightObject 0|1

1 : Zoom to the highlighted objects.
0 : Do not zoom to the highlighted objects.

K-2015.06
499

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-zoomToSelectSet 0|1

1 : Zoom to the select set.
0 : Do not zoom to the select set.
Examples
# Example 1
adpDsgPref -treeNodeCellName 1 -portName 1 -pinName 0 \
-instName 0 -netName 1 -localNetName 1 -parmList 0 \
-zoomToSelectSet 0 -zoomToHighlighSet 0 -labelSelectable 1 \
-pinSelectable 1 -dimMode 0 -correctIOPortForSpice 1 \
-showMessageForAutoCheck 1 -showMessageForAutoFixing 0 \
-ignorePinOrderforPrimitive 1
# Example 2
# Exclude view names with "schematic" in DM environment
adpDsgPref -dmAutoExcludeViewName {schematic}
# Example 3
# No views are excluded in DM environment
adpDsgPref -dmAutoExcludeViewName {}
# or the curly brackets can be omitted
adpDsgPref -dmAutoExcludeViewName
# Example 4
# Set the following automation for DM:
# - Always check out cell view files automatically;
# - Never check in cell view files automatically;
# - Show a prompt notification prior to the check in/out of other
files
adpDsgPref -dmAutoCheckOutCV Always -dmAutoCheckInCV Never \
-dmAutoCheckOutInFile Prompt
# Example 5
# Specify net expression display
adpDsgPref -NetExprDisp valueProperty
See Also
Home Page: Options > Schematic Preferences
adpSimConPreference
The adpSimConPreference command returns 1 if one or more preferences
have been set.
500

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Syntax
adpSimConPreference [-simCtrlSeg 0|1] [-bgmode 0|1] [openLog 0|1] [-addu 0|1] [-busParentheses style] [simBackupDir] [-include 0|1] [-spiceStop 0|1] [-end 0|1]
[-genIncVa 0|1] [-genPseu 0|1] [-linespace lineSpace] [dummySuffix 0|1] [-regenControlDecks 0|1] [IgnoredParamNames {param1 ... paramn}] [-pinInfo 0|1]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-addu 0|1

1 : Apply the u scale to the width and length.
0 : Do not apply the u scale to the width and length.
-bgmode 0|1

1 : Run the simulation in batch mode.
0 : Do not run the simulation in batch mode.
-busParentheses style
Specify the bus translation style.

Valid values: Angle, Square, Underscore, and None
(default=Angle).
-dummySuffix 0|1

1 : Enable the Append Port Name for Dummy Nodes
option.
0 : Disable the Append Port Name for Dummy Nodes
option.
-end 0|1

1 : Add the .end statement.
0 : Do not add the .end statement.
-genIncVa 0|1

1 : Generate the IncVA file (Include Verilog-A Modules in
Eldo/Spice netlist).
0 : Do not generate the IncVA file.
-genPseu 0|1

1 : Display the pseudo device statement.
0 : Do not display the pseudo device statement.

K-2015.06
501

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-IgnoredParamNames
{param1 ... paramn}
Specify the parameters to be ignored when extracting

design variables.
-include 0|1

1 : Export the header for each subcircuit.
0 : Do not export the header for each subcircuit.
-linespace
lineSpace

-openLog 0|1

1 : Open the log file after the simulation is finished.
0 : Do not open the log file after the simulation is finished.
-pinInfo 0|1

1 : Enable the Output Pin Information option.
0 : Disable the Output Pin Information option.
-regenControlDecks 0|1

1 : Re-generate the *_tb and *_t.sp files.
0 : Do not re-generate the *_tb, *_t.sp, and *_sch files.
-simBackupDir
Specify the name of the netlist backup directory.
-simCtrlSeg 0|1

1 : Place the include file in ahead of the design netlist.
0 : Do not place the include file in ahead of the design
netlist.
-spiceStop 0|1

1 : Ignore the spiceStop statement.
0 : Do not ignore the spiceStop statement.
Examples
adpSimConPreference -simCtrlSeg 1 -bgmode 0 -openLog 0 \
-genPseu 0 -applyUToWL 0 -busParentheses Angle \
-simBackupDir -include 0 -spiceStop 0 -end 0 -genIncVa 0 \
-addu 0 -linespace 80
See Also
Home Page: Options > SimCon Preferences
502

K-2015.06

Options Commands
lakerChangeLicense
The lakerChangeLicense command returns 1 if the desired license level
can be changed successfully after closing all opened layout windows.
Syntax
lakerChangeLicense -Level licenseLevel
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-Level licenseLevel
Specify the license level.

Valid values: LViewer, L0, L1, L2, L3, L4, SE, and ADP.
Examples
# Example 1
# Change to L2
lakerChangeLicense -Level L2
See Also
lakerGetLicenseName
lakerGetLicenseName
The lakerGetLicenseName command returns the current check-out license
name (such as LViewer, L0, L1, L2, L3, L4, SE, or ADP) or version if the
license name or version can be obtained successfully.
Syntax
lakerGetLicenseName [-version]
Returns
A license name or a license name and version if successful; otherwise, returns
nothing.

K-2015.06
503

Options Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-version
Return the license version for L0, L1, L2, L3, L4, SE, or ADP.
Examples
# Example 1
# Get the license name in L2, it returns "L2"
lakerGetLicenseName
# Example 2
# Get the license name and version in L3, it returns "L3 2011.02"
lakerGetLicenseName -version
See Also
lakerChangeLicense
lakerLoadDispFile
The lakerLoadDispFile command modifies the current display definition by
loading a dsp or drf display file. Replace all definitions with appendOverwrite
or append only the current definitions with appendIgnore.
Syntax
lakerLoadDispFile -fileName dispFileName [-format
fileFormat] [-method method] [-dumpFile fileName]
Returns
None
Arguments
504
Argument
Description
-dumpFile fileName
Dump a drf file to a dsp file and save the result under the
laker3Log directory.
-fileName
dispFileName
Load the specified display file name.
-format fileFormat
Specify the file format.

Valid values: dsp and drf (default=dsp).

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-method method
Specify the method to load the file.

Valid values: default, appendOverwrite, and
appendIgnore (default=default).
Examples
# Example 1
# The file is in dsp format and the loading method is default
lakerLoadDispFile -fileName /temp/Laker/default.dsp
# Example 2
# The file is in drf format and the loading method is
# appendOverwrite
lakerLoadDispFile -fileName /temp/Laker/default.drf \
-format drf -method appendOverwrite
# Example 3
# The file is in drf format and dump the result to tmp.dsp
lakerLoadDispFile -fileName /temp/Laker/default.drf \
-format drf -dumpFile tmp.dsp
See Also
Home Page: Options > Load Display File
lakerPreference
The lakerPreference command defines the preference settings.
Syntax
lakerPreference [-shortDetector 0|1] [-flightLine 0|1] [SkipWarnNo number] [-overrideSwap 0|1] [-hlObjPathWidth
number] [-offGridRouter 0|1] [-shapeToLine 0|1] [DimColorLevel level] [-drawing level] [-drawingMethod
method] [-relativeLibPath 0|1] [-drawingMaxFilter
filter] [-createDummyGate 0|1] [-EIPDimNeighbor 0|1] [ShowNetNameTip 0|1] [-dummyGateNumbers numberSingle
numberMulti numberInner] [-dummyGateInnerTolerance
toleranceValue] [-dummyGateLengthType LengthType] [maxPropagation number] [-updateMCell 0|1] [resistorSegNum number] [-discreteGatePitch 0|1] [keepUpdatedCreateValue 0|1] [-showWarnMsgWnd 0|1] [dispCellName style] [-snapRowRadius dRadius] [-

K-2015.06
505

Options Commands
autoCreateSoftPin 0|1] [-instRubberBandBorderOnly 0|1]

[-setGrAlignCenterLine 0|1] [-delConnVia 0|1] [showLayerAlias 0|1] [-showStreamNumber 0|1] [autoMergeSplitTx 0|1] [-getDelimiter] [-confirmEIPSave
0|1] [-ioDefaultDirectory filePath] [-DRCOperMode mode]
[-enableDevObjMode 0|1] [-alignSpacingValue
AlignSpacing] [-fixEnc 0|1] [-dmAutoCheckOutCV option]
[-dmAutoCheckOutInFile option] [-dmAutoExcludeViewName
viewNameList] [-dmAutoCheckInCV option] [-abutDevice 0|1
-abutmentMode mode -abutPCellPath path] [-stretchDevice
0|1] [-bindFlightLine 0|1] [-showFlightLineBySel 0|1] [flightLineMode mode] [-maxFlightLineByNet number] [maxFlightLine number] [-MsgLineNumber number] [draglineDisplayStyle style] [-flightLineDisplay style]
[-setDimensionMarkUnit unit] [-sheetResFile fileName] [ToolTipMaxChars value] [-ShowRulerWithMinResolution 0|1]
[-useAbutProcedure 0|1] [-ProcedureToOpenSchematic name]
[-mouseWheel 0|1] [-instanceLoopChecking 0|1] [rightClickCommandMenu 0|1] [-maxFinHierLevel number] [SnapToFinSeparately 0|1] [-constraintAwareLevel level]
[-checkValidRoutingLayer 0|1] [-propagateColor 0|1] [propagateLock 0|1] [-viewPathLabel 0|1] [-viewInstPin
0|1] [-viewPinLabel Off|Port|Net] [-createColor 0|1|2]
[-createColorMode cMode] [-drdColorMode cMode] [pastePickedParameterMethod method] [-enableSelectUndo
0|1] [-undoCnt value] [-selectUndoCnt value] [selectUndoMaxObj value]
Returns
None
Arguments
506
Argument
Description
-abutDevice 0|1

1 : Enable the Device Abutment option.
0 : Disable the Device Abutment option.
-abutmentMode mode
Specify the abutment mode.

Valid values: Auto, 2Connections, and
3Connections (default=Auto).
-abutPCellPath path
Specify the path for abutment PCells. This argument

is valid only if -abutDevice is specified.

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-alignSpacingValue
AlignSpacing
The spacing values for alignment.

Valid value: a floating number, or a list of floating
numbers. Multiple values must be separated by
spaces.
-autoMergeSplitTx 0|1

1 : Enable Auto Merge/Split when moving or
stretching transistors.
0 : Disable Auto Merge/Split when moving or
stretching transistors.
-bindFlightLine 0|1

1 : Enable the Merge Instance's Flight Lines into
Single Line option.
0 : Disable the Merge Instance's Flight Lines into
Single Line option.
-checkValidRoutingLayer 0|1

1 : Enable the Check Valid Routing Layer option.
0 : Disable the Check Valid Routing Layer option.
-confirmEIPSave 0|1

1 : Enable the Always Confirm EIP Save option.
0 : Disable the Always Confirm EIP Save option.
-constraintAwareLevel level
Specify the constraint aware level.

Valid values: all, foundry, and off (default=off).
-createColor 0|1|2
Specify the color index for the coloring behavior of

creation features.
Valid values: 0, 1, and 2 (default=0).
-createColorMode cMode
0: No color.
1: Color 1.
2: Color 2.
Specify the color behavior of creation features.

Valid values: keep and locked (default=locked).
-createDummyGate 0|1

K-2015.06

1 : Create dummy gates.
0 : Do not create dummy gates.
507

Options Commands
508
Argument
Description
-delConnVia 0|1

1 : Delete path segments with connected vias.
0 : Keep path segments with connected vias.
-DimColorLevel level
Specify the dim/bright level.

-discreteGatePitch 0|1

1 : Enable the Discrete Gate Pitch option.
0 : Disable the Discrete Gate Pitch option.
-dispCellName style
Specify the display style of cell names on the layout.

Valid values: master and instance.
-dmAutoCheckInCV
option
Specify the automatic way to check in cell view files.

Always : Always check in cell view files
automatically.
check in of cell view files, which are automatically
checked out.
Never : Never automatically check in cell view files,
which are automatically checked out.
-dmAutoCheckOutCV
option
Specify the automatic way to check out cell view files.

Always : Always check out cell view files
automatically.
check out of cell view files.
Never : Never check out cell view files automatically.
-dmAutoCheckOutInFile
option
Specify the automatic way to check in/out other files.

Always : Always check in/out other files
automatically.
Prompt : Show a prompt notification prior to
checking in/out other files.
Never : Never check in/out other files automatically.

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-dmAutoExcludeViewName
viewNameList
Specify a list of excluded view names for auto checkin and check-out of Data Management with format:
{viewName1 viewName2 viewName3 ...
viewNamen}.
This argument is valid for dbGetAllCells -dm0|1
and dbGetAllViews -dm0|1.
-draglineDisplayStyle style
Specify the dragline display style.

Valid values: none, all, and nearest
(default=nearest).
-drawing level
Specify the drawing level. The higher the level the

better the performance.
-drawingMaxFilter filter
Specify the filter threshold in drawing level 5. The unit

is in screen pixel.
-drawingMethod method
Specify the drawing method.

Valid values: fast and normal.
-DRCOperMode mode
Specify the operate mode for design rule checking.

Valid values: LiveDRC and RuleDriven.
-drdColorMode cMode
Specify the coloring behavior for DRD checking.

Valid values: visual, keep, and locked
(default=visual).
-dummyGateInnerTolerance
toleranceValue
Specify a threshold value (micro) for dummy gates. If

the difference of gate width (between two adjacent
gates) exceeds this value, dummy gates are added
within the adjacent gates.
Valid value: a floating number, greater than or equal
to 0.0 (default=0.0).
-dummyGateLengthType
LengthType
Specify the length type for dummy gate length.

Valid values: AdjacentNarrower,
AdjacentWider, and MinChannelLength
(default=AdjacentNarrower).
Only valid when -createDummyGate is specified.

K-2015.06
509

Options Commands
510
Argument
Description
-dummyGateNumbers
numberSingle numberMulti
numberInner
Specify the number of dummy gates with these

values:
numberSingle: (default=2) for a transistor with one
normal gate.
numberMulti: (default=1) for a transistor with
multiple normal gates.
numberInner: (default=1) for a transistor with gate
width difference (between two adjacent gates)
exceeding the toleranceValue.
Valid value: integer, greater than or equal to 0.
-EIPDimNeighbor 0|1

1 : Enable the EIP Dim Neighbor option.
0 : Disable the EIP Dim Neighbor option.
-enableDevObjMode 0|1

1 : Enable the Device Object Mode option.
0 : Disable the Device Object Mode option.
-enableSelectUndo 0|1

1 : Enable the Enable Select Undo/Redo option.
0 : Disable the Enable Select Undo/Redo option.
-fixEnc 0|1

1 : Enable the Fix StdVia Enclosure Value option.
0 : Disable the Fix StdVia Enclosure Value option.
-flightLine 0|1

1 : Show flight lines.
0 : Do not show flight lines.
-flightLineDisplayStyle style
Specify the flight line display style.

Valid values: cc, vv, and ve (default=vv).
-flightLineMode mode
Specify the flight line mode.

Valid values: wireplan and floorplan
(default=wireplan).

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-getDelimiter
The argument is mutually exclusive with the other

arguments, and has the highest priority. It is used for
Laker/Composer integration.
lakerPreference returns the delimiter string used
in Laker for this argument only. For other arguments,
it returns nothing.
-hlObjPathWidth number
Specify the status of Path Width of Highlighted

Object which controls the path width of those objects
for highlighting lines and pairs.
Valid value: an integer, greater than or equal to 1.
-instanceLoopChecking 0|1

1 : Enable the Check Loops for Instances option.
0 : Disable the Check Loops for Instances option.
-instRubberBandBorderOnly
0|1

1 : Show the rubber band of the instance border as
creating or editing objects.
0 : Do not show the rubber band of the instance
border.
-ioDefaultDirectory filePath
Specify the default directory for the output GDSII file.

If it is not specified, the output file is saved under the
working directory.
-keepUpdatedCreateValue 0|1 Valid values: Boolean values, 0 and 1 (default=0).

1 : Reserve the value of Contact to Gate, X-spacing,
and Y-spacing in the Create Transistor form.
0 : Reset to the default value.
-maxFinHierLevel number
Specify the maximum number of hierarchy levels to

be traversed when snapping fin regions or OD
shapes.
-maxFlightLine number
Specify the maximum number of flight lines to be

displayed for all nets.
Valid value: an integer (maximum=20000).

K-2015.06
511

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-maxFlightLineByNet number
Specify the maximum number of flight lines to be

displayed for a specified net.
Valid value: an integer (maximum=20000).
-maxPropagation number
Specify the maximum number of propagation

objects.
-mouseWheel 0|1

1 : Enable the Enable Mouse Wheel option.
0 : Disable the Enable Mouse Wheel option.
-MsgLineNumber number

0 : Enable the On the Same Row option.
1 : Enable the One Message Line option.
2 : Enable the Two Message Lines option.
-offGridRouter 0|1

1 : The point-to-point router supports routing on offgrid shapes.
0 : The point-to-point does not support off-grid
routing.
-overrideSwap 0|1

1 : Serial gates are not swappable in the Layout
window and Stick Diagram Compiler.
0 : Serial gates are swappable.
-pastePickedParameterMethod Specify the method to paste the parameters.

method
Valid values: updateAll,
updateAllWithSameType, and
updateModifiedParameterWithCB
(default=updateAllWithSameType).
512
-ProcedureToOpenSchematic
procName
Specify the procedure to open the schematic data.
-propagateColor 0|1

1: Enable the Propagate Color Information option.
0: Disable the Propagate Color Information option.

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-propagateLock 0|1

1: Enable the Propagate Locked Information
option.
0: Disable the Propagate Locked Information
option.
-propagation 0|1

1: Enable the Propagate Net Information option.
0: Disable the Propagate Net Information option.
-relativeLibPath 0|1

1 : Translate all mapping paths into a relative path.
0 : Translate all mapping paths into an absolute path.
-resistorSegNum number
Specify the number of resistor segments.

-rightClickCommandMenu 0|1

1 : Enable the right-click command menu in the
layout.
0 : Disable the right-click command menu in the
layout.
-selectUndoCnt value
Specify the number of times undo is allowed for

select operations.
-selectUndoMaxObj value
Specify the maximum number of selected objects to

be reserved for Select Undo actions.
Valid value: an integer from 1 to 1000
(default=1000).
-setDimensionMarkUnit unit
Specify the unit of the dimension value to be

displayed on screen.
Valid values: none, auto, micrometer, and
millimeter.
-setGrAlignCenterLine 0|1

1: The reference point of the guard ring alignment
can be its centerline only.
0: The reference point of the guard ring alignment
can be its centerline, vertices, and edges of contacts.

K-2015.06
513

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-shapeToLine 0|1

1: Shapes can be stretched to a line.
0: Shapes cannot be stretched to a line.
-sheetResFile fileName
Specify the sheet resistance file with its file path, for
example: ./sheet.res.
-shortDetector 0|1

1: Enable the Activate Short Detector option.
0: Disable the Activate Short Detector option.
-showFlightLineBySel 0|1

1: Show flight lines by selection.
0: Do not show flight lines by selection.
-showLayerAlias 0|1

1: Enable the Show Layer Alias Name option.
0: Disable the Show Layer Alias Name option.
-ShowNetNameTip 0|1

1 : Enable the Show Net Name when Pre-selecting
Objects option.
0 : Disable the Show Net Name when Preselecting Objects option.
-ShowRulerWithMinResolution Valid values: Boolean values, 0 and 1 (default=0).

0|1
1: Enable the Show Ruler with Min Resolution
option.
0: Disable the Show Ruler with Min Resolution
option.
514
-showStreamNumber 0|1

1: Enable the Show Stream Number option.
0: Disable the Show Stream Number option.
-showWarnMsgWnd 0|1

1: Show warning or error messages in a separate
window.
0: Show warning or error messages in the message
frame of the Home Page.

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-SkipWarnNo number
Specify the number of warning messages to be

ignored.
Valid value: an integer (default=100, maximum).
-snapRowRadius dRadius
Specify the snapping distance for tile cells.

Valid value: a positive floating number (default=0.3).
-SnapToFinSeparately 0|1

1: Enable the Snap to Fin Grid Individually option.
0: Disable the Snap to Fin Grid Individually option.
-stretchDevice 0|1

1 : Enable the Device Stretch option.
0 : Disable the Device Stretch option.
-ToolTipMaxChars value
Specify the maximum characters per line to be

displayed in the yellow tip window.
This argument corresponds to the value saved in the
[LeoPreference] section of the laker.rc resource
file designated by the keyword ToolTipMaxChars.
-undoCnt value
Specify the number of times undo is allowed for

creating and editing operations.
-updateMCell 0|1

1: Update MCell definitions.
0: Do not update MCell definitions.
-useAbutProcedure 0|1

1: Use AbutProcedure to perform the abutment.
0: Use AbutControlPcell to perform the
abutment.
-viewInstPin 0|1

1: Enable the View Instance Pin option.
0: Disable the View Instance Pin option.
-viewPathLabel 0|1

1: Enable the View Path Label option.
0: Disable the View Path Label option.

K-2015.06
515

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-viewPinLabel Off|Port|Net
Specify the display mode of pin labels.

Valid values: Off, Port, and Net (default=Off).
Examples
# Example 1
# Turn on "Activate Short Detector"
lakerPreference -shortDetector 1
# Example 2
# Turn on "Show Flight Line"
lakerPreference -flightLine 1
# Example 3
# Turn off "Show Global Flight Line"
lakerPreference -globalFlightLine 0
# Example 4
# Specify the number of warning messages to be ignored
lakerPreference -SkipWarnNo 100
# Example 5
# Turn on "Shape Can't Stretch to Line"
lakerPreference -shapeToLine 0
# Example 6
# Translate all mapping paths into absolute path
lakerPreference -relativeLibPath 0
# Example 7
# Translate all mapping paths into relative path
lakerPreference -relativeLibPath 1
# Example 8
# Turn off Create Dummy Gate
lakerPreference -createDummyGate 0
# Example 9
# Turn on Create Dummy Gate and specify the number of gates and
# tolerance and dummy gate length type
lakerPreference -createDummyGate 1 -dummyGateNumbers 2 1 1 \
-dummyGateInnerTolerance 0.2 -dummyGateLengthType \
MinChannelLength
# Example 10
# Specify the Spacing values for alignment
lakerPreference -alignSpacingValue {1.0 2.5 3.0}
516

K-2015.06

Options Commands
# Example 11
# Enable the checking when opening a logic cell view.
lakerPreference -checkSchTimeStampWhenOpen 1
# Example 12
# Enable the checking periodically and the interval is 30 minutes.
lakerPreference -autoCheckSchTimeStamp 1 \
-autoCheckSchTimeStampInterval 30
# Example 13
# Exclude view names with "logic" and "schematic" in DM environment
lakerPreference -dmAutoExcludeViewName {logic schematic}
# Example 14
# No views are excluded in DM environment
lakerPreference -dmAutoExcludeViewName {}
# or the curly brackets can be omitted
lakerPreference -dmAutoExcludeViewName
# Example 15
# Set the following automation for DM:
# - Always check out cell view files automatically;
# - Never check in cell view files automatically;
# - Show a prompt notification prior to the check in/out
# of other files
lakerPreference -dmAutoCheckOutCV Always -dmAutoCheckInCV Never \
-dmAutoCheckOutInFile Prompt
The lakerRefreshLockedLayerFile command refreshes the locked layer
definition if the locked layer file exists.
Syntax
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
See Also
Home Page: Options > Refresh Locked Layer File
K-2015.06
517

Options Commands
lakerSchBroPreference
The lakerSchBroPreference command configures the settings of the
Design Browser pane and the tolerance sensitivity of mismatched values
between the netlist and layout.
Syntax
lakerSchBroPreference [-mosDim 0|1] [-mosExtraDevArg 0|1]
[-mosPort 0|1] [-mosLayoutPort 0|1] [-mosSchPort 0|1] [resDim 0|1] [-resExtraDevArg 0|1] [-resPort 0|1] [resLayoutPort 0|1] [-resSchPort 0|1] [-capDim 0|1] [capExtraDevArg 0|1] [-capPort 0|1] [-capLayoutPort 0|1]
[-capSchPort 0|1] [-instDim 0|1] [-instExtraDevArg 0|1]
[-instPort 0|1] [-instLayoutPort 0|1] BrowserShowGateType 0|1 | -BrowserShowGroup 0|1 | BrowserShowStack 0|1 [-BrowserShowStackDetail 0|1] | BrowserShowConstraint 0|1 | -BrowserCmpDetail 0|1 | BrowserCmpFormgate 0|1 | -BrowserAutoExpandGrp 0|1 | BrowserAutoFlatnGrp 0|1 | -BrowserTipLayPara 0|1 | BrowserTipSchPara 0|1] [[-BrowserAutoGenText 0|1] [BrowserGenTextFor {deviceType}] [-BrowserGenTextHeight
textHeight] [-BrowserGenTextFont textFont] [BrowserGenTextCase textCase] [BrowserUnsetGenTextLayer] [-BrowserGenTextLayer
layerName [purposeName]] [-BrowserGenTextJustify
textJustify] [-BrowserGenTextOrient textMirror]] [BrowserDimTolerance num | -BrowserMosLenTolerance num |
-BrowserMosWidthTolerance num | BrowserResValueTolerance num | -BrowserResLenTolerance
num | -BrowserResWidthTolerance num | BrowserCapValueTolerance num] [-BrowserIgnoreBulk 0|1]
[-dummyNMOSGateNet 0|1] [-dummyNMOSGateNetName netname]
[-dummyPMOSGateNet 0|1] [-dummyPMOSGateNetName netname]
[-dummyNMOSSDNet 0|1] [-dummyNMOSSDNetName netname] [dummyPMOSSDNet 0|1] [-dummyPMOSSDNetName netname][instSchPort 0|1] [-honorMOSMfactor 0|1] [BrowserSyncStatusWithADP 0|1] [-BrowserSyncScopewithADP
0|1] [-useStickPostProc 0|1] [-stickPostProc procName]
[-stickPostProcScript file] [-useMatchPostProc 0|1] [matchPostProc procName] [-matchPostProcScript file] [[useSpacingProc 0|1] [-spacingProc procName]] [displayStickAtLeastObj value] [-autoCheckSchTimeStamp
0|1] [-autoCheckSchTimeStampInterval interval] [-
518

K-2015.06

Options Commands
autoCreateSoftPin 0|1] [-checkSchTimeStampWhenOpen 0|1]

[-schTopology 0|1] [-autochain 0|1] [-multiInstDelimiter
delimiter] [-selectObjectWhenCrossProbe 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-autoChain 0|1

1 : Enable the Auto Transistor Chaining and
Placement option.
0 : Disable the Auto Transistor Chaining and
Placement option.
-autoCheckSchTimeStamp 0|1

1 : Automatically check the schematic time stamp
when the specified interval is passed. The auto
checking is enabled only when the interval is
greater than 0.
0 : Do not check the schematic time stamp
automatically.
-autoCheckSchTimeStampInterval Set the period of time to automatically check the

interval
schematic time stamp. The time unit is minutes.
Valid values: integer, greater than or equal to 0
(default=0).
The auto checking is enabled only when
-autoCheckSchTimeStamp 1 is specified and
the interval is greater than 0.
-autoCreateSoftPin 0|1

1 : Enable the Auto Create Soft Pin option.
0 : Disable the Auto Create Soft Pin option.
-BrowserAutoExpandGrp 0|1

1 : Grouping after expanding instances.
0 : No grouping after expanding instances.
-BrowserAutoFlatnGrp 0|1

1 : Grouping after flattening instances.
0 : No grouping after flattening instances.

K-2015.06
519

Options Commands
520
Argument
Description
-BrowserAutoGenText 0|1

1 : Generate text labels for specified object types.
0 : Do not generate text labels for specified object
types.
-BrowserCapValueTolerance num
Specify the tolerance percentage for the capacitor

value.
-BrowserCmpDetail 0|1

1 : Show the detailed report in a tip window.
0 : Hide the detailed report in a tip window.
-BrowserCmpFormgate 0|1

1 : Show the discrepancy report by the form gate
information.
0 : Hide the discrepancy report by the form gate
information.
-BrowserDimTolerance 0|1

1 : Allow tolerance to dimension.
0 : Do not allow tolerance to dimension. The
dimension must be matched.
-BrowserGenTextFor
{deviceType}
Set the object type of the target for text

generation. Multiple types can be specified.
Valid values: Transistor, Resistor,
Capacitor, Instance, and Device
(default={}).
-BrowserGenTextHeight
textHeight
Specify the text height for generated text labels.

Valid values: a positive floating number
(default=1.0).
-BrowserGenTextFont
textFont
Specify the font type for generated text labels.

Valid values: Modern, Script, and Roman
(default=Roman).
-BrowserGenTextCase
textCase
Specify the case sensitivity setting for generated

text labels.
Valid values: Original, Upper, and Lower
(default=Original).

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-BrowserGenTextLayer
layerName purposeName
Specify the layer for generated text labels. If the

purpose is not specified, the default is drawing. If
the specified layer is not found in the library, the
layer setting in the SDL Preferences form keeps
the original value and a warning message is
shown in the message pane of the Home page.
-BrowserGenTextJustify
textJustify
Specify the justification for generated text labels.

LowerCenter, UpperRight, CenterRight,
and LowerRight (default=CenterCenter).
-BrowserGenTextOrient
textMirror
Specify the mirror and rotation status for

generated text labels.
Valid values: R0, R90, R180, R270, MXR0,
MXR90, MYR0, and MYR90 (default=R0).
-BrowserIgnoreBulk 0|1

1 : Enable the Ignore Bulk Checking option.
0 : Disable the Ignore Bulk Checking option.
-BrowserMosLenTolerance num
Specify the tolerance percentage of the length of

MOS devices.
-BrowserMosWidthTolerance num Specify the tolerance percentage of the width of

MOS devices.
-BrowserResLenTolerance num
Specify the tolerance percentage of the length of

resistor devices.
-BrowserResValueTolerance num
Specify the tolerance percentage of the resistor

value.
-BrowserResWidthTolerance num
Specify the tolerance percentage of the width of

resistor devices.

K-2015.06
521

Options Commands
522
Argument
Description
-BrowserShowConstraint 0|1

1 : Show the information of Device Matching and
Chain constraints on the Design Browser pane.
0 : Hide the information of Device Matching and
Chain constraints on the Design Browser pane.
-BrowserShowGateType 0|1

1 : Show the form gate type.
0 : Hide the form gate type.
-BrowserShowGroup 0|1

1 : Show the user-defined group information on
the Design Browser pane.
0 : Hide the user-defined group information on the
Design Browser pane.
-BrowserShowStack 0|1

1 : Show the stacking MOS group information on
0 : Hide the stacking MOS information on the
-BrowserShowStackDetail 0|1
Valid values: Boolean values, 0 and 1

(default=0).
1 : Show the detailed stacking MOS group
information on the Design Browser pane.
0 : Hide the detailed stacking MOS information on
-BrowserSyncStatusWithADP 0|1

1 : Enable the Synchronize Realization Status
option.
0 : Disable the Synchronize Realization Status
option.
-BrowserSyncScopewithADP 0|1

1 : Enable the Synchronize Scope Changes
option.
0 : Disable the Synchronize Scope Changes
option.

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-BrowserTipLayPara 0|1

1 : Show the layout device parameter information
in a tip window.
0 : Hide the layout device parameter information.
-BrowserTipSchPara 0|1

1 : Show the schematic parameter information in
a tip window.
0 : Hide the schematic parameter information.
-BrowserUnsetGenTextLayer
If specified, the layer setting in the SDL

Preferences form is cleared.
-capDim 0|1

1 : Enable the comparison of dimensions for
capacitors.
0 : Disable the comparison.
-capExtraDevArg 0|1

1 : Enable the comparison of extra arguments in
the layout for capacitors.
-capLayoutPort 0|1

1 : Enable the comparison of extra ports in the
layout for capacitors.
-capPort 0|1

1 : Enable the comparison of port connections for
capacitors.
-capSchPort 0|1

schematic for capacitors.

K-2015.06
523

Options Commands
524
Argument
Description
-checkSchTimeStampWhenOpen
0|1

1 : Check the schematic time stamp when
opening a logic cell view.
0 : Do not check the schematic time stamp when
opening a logic cell view.
-displayStickAtLeastObj value
Specify the minimum number of the selected

MOS device in the Design Browser pane or the
Schematic window.

1 : Enable the Gate Net Name for Dummy
NMOS option.
0 : Disable the Gate Net Name for Dummy
NMOS option.
-dummyNMOSGateNetName
netname
Assign a single net name for all dummy NMOS

devices.
-dummyNMOSSDNet 0|1

option.
option.
-dummyNMOSSDNetName
netname

dummy NMOS devices.

1 : Enable the Gate Net Name for Dummy PMOS
option.
0 : Disable the Gate Net Name for Dummy PMOS
option.
-dummyPMOSGateNetName
netname
Assign a single net name for all dummy PMOS

devices.

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-dummyPMOSSDNet 0|1

option.
option.
-dummyPMOSSDNetName
netname

dummy NMOS devices.

1 : Enable the Honor MOS M-factor option.
0 : Disable the Honor MOS M-factor option.
-instDim 0|1

instances.
-instExtraDevArg 0|1

the layout for instances.
-instLayoutPort 0|1

layout for instances.
-instPort 0|1

instances.
-instSchPort 0|1

schematic for instances.
-matchPostProc procName
Specify the name of the post-process procedure

used in the Matching Device Creator window.

K-2015.06
525

Options Commands
526
Argument
Description
-matchPostProcScript file
Specify the script file with the post-process

procedure used in the Matching Device Creator
window.
-mosDim 0|1

1 : Enable the comparison of dimensions for MOS
devices.
-mosExtraDevArg 0|1

the layout for MOS devices.
-mosLayoutPort 0|1

layout for MOS devices.
-mosPort 0|1

MOS devices.
-mosSchPort 0|1

schematic for MOS devices.
-multiInstDelimiter delimiter
Specify the delimiter for multiple instances. If the

string is empty, the default delimiter is "::".
-resDim 0|1

resistors.
-resExtraDevArg 0|1

the layout for resistors.

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-resLayoutPort 0|1

layout for resistors.
-resPort 0|1

resistors.
-resSchPort 0|1

schematic for resistors.
-schTopology 0|1

1 : Enable the Schematic Topology Cloned
Placement option.
0 : Disable the Schematic Topology Cloned
Placement option.
-selectObjectWhenCrossProbe
0|1

1 : Enable the Cross Select option.
0 : Disable the Cross Select option.
-spacingProc procName
Specify the spacing procedure name when

-useSpacingProc 1 is specified.
-stickPostProc procName
Specify the name of the post-process procedure

used in the Stick Diagram Compiler window.
-stickPostProcScript file
Specify the script file with the post-process

procedure used in the Stick Diagram Compiler
window.
-useMatchPostProc 0|1

1 : Enable the Procedure for Matching Device
Creator option.
0 : Disable the Procedure for Matching Device
Creator option.

K-2015.06
527

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-useSpacingProc 0|1

1 : Enable the Device Spacing Procedure option.
0 : Disable the Device Spacing Procedure option.
-useStickPostProc 0|1

1 : Enable the Procedure for Stick Diagram
Compiler option.
0 : Disable the Procedure for Stick Diagram
Compiler option.
Examples
# Example 1
# If it is a transistor type, show the length and width.
# If it is a resistor type, show the resistor value.
# If it is a capacitor type, show the capacitor value.
# If it has an M-factor, show its M-factor.
# Disable the group information, and show the form gate
# as PnP level.
lakerSchBroPreference -BrowserFormat \
{[%L %L/%W]\n[%C %C]\n[%R %R]\n[%F m=%F]} -BrowserShowGroup 0 \
-BrowserShowGateType 1
528

K-2015.06

Options Commands
# Example 2
# Set tolerance of mos's length and width to be 2%, tolerance of
# Resistor's value to be 2%, and tolerance of Capacitor's
# value to be 2%, it allows mismatch between netlist and
# layout inside the tolerence
lakerSchBroPreference -BrowserDimTolerance 1 \
-BrowserMosLenTolerance 2.0 -BrowserMosWidthTolerance 2.0 \
-BrowserResValueTolerance 2.0 -BrowserCapValueTolerance 2.0
# Example 3
lakerSchBroPreference -BrowserDimTolerance 1 \
-BrowserMosLenTolerance 0.85 -BrowserMosWidthTolerance 0.75 \
-BrowserResValueTolerance 2.5 -BrowserCapValueTolerance 1.8
# Example 4
lakerSchBroPreference -BrowserShowGateType 0 \
-mosLayoutPort 1 -resLayoutPort 1 -capLayoutPort 1 \
-instLayoutPort 0
# Example 5
# Turn on the Generate Text option for MCell Transistors,
# MCell Capacitors, and Devices
lakerSchBroPreference -BrowserGenTextFor \
{Transistor Capacitor Device}
# Example 6
# Turn off the Enable Auto Text Generation option
lakerSchBroPreference -BrowserAutoGenText 0
# Example 7
# Specify the text layer with layer name and purpose name
lakerSchBroPreference -BrowserGenTextLayer MT1 drawing
# Example 8
# Clear the layer setting
lakerSchBroPreference -BrowserUnsetGenTextLayer
# Example 9
# Use post-process procedure "alignPoly" which is defined
# in "alignPoly.tcl" for Stick Diagram Compiler
lakerSchBroPreference -useStickPostProc 1 \
-stickPostProc alignPoly -stickPostProcScript ../alignPoly.tcl
See Also
Home Page: Options > SDL Preferences

K-2015.06
529

lakerSetUserStrokeFile
The lakerSetUserStrokeFile command updates the UserStrokeFile
settings in the [LeoPreference] section of the laker.rc resource file, and
then replaces the mouse wheel binding with new definitions immediately.
Syntax
lakerSetUserStrokeFile fileName
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
fileName
Specify the user-defined stroke file with its full path and
enclose the file path with double quotes.
Examples
lakerSetUserStrokeFile "/usr/myMouseWheel.stk"

This section describes the Tcl commands for symbol callbacks. These
commands include:
paramGetAttr
paramSetAttr
paramGetAttr
The paramGetAttr command returns the field value of the parameter if the
value of the parameter can be obtained.
This command only works in the script file of symbol parameter callbacks.
Refer to Appendix A, Symbol Callback Procedures for more details.
Syntax
paramGetAttr -name parameterName -attr fieldName [-eval] [lib] [-cell]
530

K-2015.06

Returns
The field value of the parameter if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-attr fieldName
Specify the field name of the parameter.

Valid values: promptname, type, value, visible, and
editable.
-cell
Return the cell name of the master cell for the current instance.
-eval
Return the final real value for the expression value of the
parameter.
-lib
Return the library name of the master cell for the current
instance.
-name
parameterName
Specify the parameter name (not "Prompt Name").
Examples
# Example 1
paramGetAttr -name w -attr value -eval
# Example 2
paramGetAttr -name 1 -attr visible
# Example 3
paramGetAttr -name area -attr value
See Also
Home Page: Library > Parameter > Callback
paramSetAttr
The paramSetAttr command sets a new value into the parameter.
This command only works in the script file of symbol parameter callbacks.
Refer to Appendix A, Symbol Callback Procedures for more details.
Syntax
paramSetAttr -name parameterName -attr fieldName -value
value
K-2015.06
531

Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-attr fieldName
Specify the field name of the parameter.

Valid values: promptname, type, value, visible, and
editable.
-name parameterName
Specify the parameter name (not "Prompt Name").
-value value
Specify the new value.
Examples
# Example 1
paramSetAttr -name l -attr value value 0.1u
# Example 2
paramSetAttr -name w -attr visible value 1
See Also
Home Page: Library > Parameter > Callback

This section describes the Tcl commands for netlist procedures. These
commands include:
nlEval
nlGetAttr
nlPuts
nlEval
The nlEval command returns a string if the evaluated value from the netlist
table can be obtained.
The netlist table is specified in the Netlist tab of the Parameter Dialog form,
invoked by the Library > Parameter command in the Home Page.
532

K-2015.06

Syntax
nlEval [-modelName modelName | -pin allTerm | -instParam
instParam [-keyword 0|1] | -subcktParam subcktParam
[-keyword 0|1]] [-componentName componentName]
[-instModelName model]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-componentName
componentName
Get the evaluated component name in the Component Name

text field of the netlist table.
The componentName is with the following format:
[nlGetAttr -attr componentName].
-instModelName
model
Get the evaluated instance model name if the netlist is not

exported from the netlist procedure.
-instParam
instParam
[-keyword 0|1]
Get the evaluated instance parameter in the Instance

Parameters text field of the netlist table.
-modelName
modelName
Get the evaluated model name in the Model Name text field of
the netlist table.
-pin allTerm
Get the evaluated pin order (for example: connected names) in

the Pin Order text field of the netlist table.
-subcktParam
subcktParam
[-keyword 0|1]
Get the evaluated subckt parameter in the Subckt Parameters

text field of the netlist table.

K-2015.06
533

Examples
# Example 1
proc outInstProc {} {
set nlPinOrder [nlGetAttr -attr nlPinOrder]
set nlNamePreFix [nlGetAttr -attr nlNamePreFix]
set nlModelName [nlGetAttr -attr nlModelName]
set nlInstParam [nlGetAttr -attr nlInstParam]
set nlInstName [nlGetAttr -attr nlInstName]
set outInstName ""
append outInstName $nlNamePreFix
append outInstName $nlInstName
nlPuts "$outInstName"
set connectedNet [
nlEval -pin $nlPinOrder
]
nlPuts "$connectedNet"
set modelName [
nlEval -modelName $nlModelName
]
set nlength [llength $modelName]
if {$nlength > 0} {
nlPuts "$modelName "
}
set InstParamEval [
nlEval -instParam $nlInstParam -keyword 1
534

K-2015.06

]
nlPuts "$InstParamEval"
}
proc myCProc {} {
outInstProc
}
proc myMProc {} {
outInstProc
}
proc myRProc {} {
outInstProc
}
# Example 2
# Return connected net
# If they are floating
# n corresponds to the
nlEval -pin "A B C D"
# Return the connected
nlEval -pin "A[0:3]"
names "1 2 3 4" of ports A, B, C and D.

nets, return dummy_node_n where
index of dummy nets.
net names "A[0] A[1] A[2] A[3]"
# Example 3
# Return the cell name
nlEval -modelName "@[CellName]"
# If the parameter XXX exists, return the evaluated value of
# parameter XXX. If the parameter XXX does not exist, return
# a string XXX.
nlEval -modelName "XXX"
# Example 4
# Return the cell name of the instance master
nlEval -instParam "@[CellName]"
# Return the value 2 if X equals to 2
nlEval -instParam X -keyword 0
# Return the value X=2 if X equals to 2
nlEval -instParam X -keyword 1
See Also
nlGetAttr
nlPuts

K-2015.06
535

nlGetAttr
The nlGetAttr command returns a string if the simulation information in the
netlist table or the export options of the File > Export > Spice, Verilog, and
EDIF commands can be obtained.
The netlist table is specified in the Netlist tab of the Parameter Dialog form,
invoked by the Library > Parameter command in the Home Page.
Syntax
nlGetAttr -attr attrName [-attType attrType]
Returns
The following table lists the available attribute names.
536
Attribute Name
Description
componentName
Get the value of the Component field of the netlist table.
instParameters
Get the value of the Instance Parameters field of the netlist table.
namePrefix
Get the value of the Name Prefix field of the netlist table.
netlistProcedure
Get the value of the Netlist Procedure field of the netlist table.
netlistType
Get the netlist type. Supported netlist types: Hspice, CDL, Eldo,
SmartSpice, Spectre, and UserDefine.
Default procedure name for these netlist types:
adpHspiceProc, adpCDLProc, adpEldoProc,
adpSmartSpiceProc, and adpSpectreProc.
nlInstId
Get the instanceId when exporting an instances statement.
nlInstName
Get the instance name when exporting an instances statement.
nlSchematicCV
Get the schematic cellviewId when exporting a subckt's

statement.
nlSymbolCV
Get the symbol cellviewId when exporting a subckts statement.

If the symbol cellviewId does not exist, an empty string is
returned.

K-2015.06

Attribute Name
Description
otherParameters
Get the value of the Other Parameters field of the netlist table.
propMapping
Get the value of the Property Mapping field of the netlist table.
pseudoDevice
Get the option status of the Generate Pseudo Device option.
termOrder
Get the value of the Term Order field of the netlist table.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-attr attrName
Specify the attribute name. Refer to the Attribute Name

Table for more details on the available attribute names.
-attType attrType

Valid values: user, and original.
user : Get the user-defined value of the simulation

information.
original : Get the original value of the simulation

information.
If the attribute type is not specified, return the user-defined
value if it exists, otherwise, return the original value of the
simulation information.
Examples
# Example 1
set nlPinOrder [
nlGetAttr -attr nlPinOrder
]
set nlNamePreFix [
nlGetAttr -attr nlNamePreFix
]
set nlModelName [
nlGetAttr -attr nlModelName
]
set nlInstParam [
nlGetAttr -attr nlInstParam

K-2015.06
537

]
set nlInstName [
nlGetAttr -attr nlInstName
]
set outInstName ""
set connectedNet [nlEval -pin $nlPinOrder]
set modelName [nlEval -modelName $nlModelName]
if {$nlength > 0} {
}
set InstParamEval [nlEval -instParam $nlInstParam -keyword 1]
}
proc myCProc {} {
outInstProc
}
proc myMProc {} {
outInstProc
}
proc myRProc {} {
outInstProc
}
See Also
nlEval
nlPuts
Home Page: Library > Parameter > Netlist Procedure
nlPuts
The nlPuts command is used in the Tcl script file of netlist procedures, it
returns a string if the desired text string of the Spice command can be
exported.
Syntax
nlPuts "string"
538

K-2015.06

Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
"string"
Specify the desired text string.
Examples
# Example 1
set nlPinOrder [nlGetAttr -attr nlPinOrder]
set nlNamePreFix [nlGetAttr -attr nlNamePreFix]
set nlModelName [nlGetAttr -attr nlModelName]
set nlInstParam [nlGetAttr -attr nlInstParam]
set nlInstName [nlGetAttr -attr nlInstName]
set outInstName ""
set connectedNet [nlEval -pin $nlPinOrder]
set modelName [nlEval -modelName $nlModelName]
if {$nlength > 0} {
}
set InstParamEval [nlEval -instParam $nlInstParam -keyword 1]
}
proc myCProc {} {
outInstProc
}
proc myMProc {} {
outInstProc
}
proc myRProc {} {
outInstProc
}

K-2015.06
539

Miscellaneous
See Also
nlGetAttr
nlEval
Miscellaneous
This section describes the other Tcl commands applied to the Home Page.
540
adpAddHighLightInst
adpAddHighLightNet
adpAddPortPad
adpAutoCheck
adpChgBusChar
adpDelGNet
adpDelRNet
adpDiscardDesign
adpDsgSaveSchCV
adpFixBundleNet
adpFixNetFig
adpFixPinDot
adpGetActiveWnd
adpGetNetListType
adpGetTextEditor
adpGetWindowVar
adpGetWndByCV
adpGetWndCellViewId
adpRegWndCB
adpRmHighLight
adpRmParam

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
adpSetInstParamCB
adpSetLibGrid
adpSetObjType
adpTriggerPropertyCB
lakerEcho
lakerExportSIF
lakerGetLibCell
lakerExtractECOCommand
lakerExtractSwapPort
lakerGetDesign
lakerImportSIF
lakerIpcHdl
lakerLoadNanoScopeFile
lakerRegWndCB
lakerSetDeviceObjMode
lakerVersion
sysGetRcValue
sysSetRcValue
wtShowLicStatus
adpAddHighLightInst
The adpAddHighLightInst command returns 1 if any instances have been
highlighted.
Syntax
adpAddHighLightInst -topWnd winId -name instName1 instName2
[-color colorType]
Returns

K-2015.06
541

Miscellaneous
Arguments
Argument
Description
-color colorType
Specify the color code.
-name
instName1 instName2...
Specify the instance name(s).
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpAddHighLightInst -topWnd _adp2 -name aa -color ID_Red4
adpAddHighLightNet
The adpAddHighLightNet command returns 1 if any nets have been
highlighted.
Syntax
adpAddHighLightNet -topWnd winId -name netName1 netName2 [color colorType]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-color colorType
-name
netName1 netName2...
Specify the net name(s).
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpAddHighLightNet -topWnd _adp2 -name aa -color ID_Red4
542

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
adpAddPortPad
The adpAddPortPad command returns 1 if there is any port pads have been
created.
Syntax
adpAddPortPad [-lib libname [-cell cellname]]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellname
-lib libname
Examples
adpAddPortPad -lib aa
adpAutoCheck
The adpAutoCheck command invokes an offline auto fix to the schematic or
symbol views of the current cell in the database when the schematic ERC,
symbol check pin, Save Design or Save As features are executed.
Syntax
adpAutoCheck [-lib libName [-cell cellName [-view
viewName]]] [-fix] [-log [-file FileName]]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
-file FileName
Specify the file to save the checking/fixing results.

This argument is valid only if -log is specified.

K-2015.06
543

Miscellaneous
Argument
Description
-fix
Fix the DB errors.
-lib libName
-log
Dump the auto checking/fixing results to a log file.
-view viewName

Valid values: schematic, and symbol.
Examples
# Example 1
# Check DB errors in a symbol cell view
adpAutoCheck -lib local -cell test -view symbol
# Example 2
# Check DB errors in a cell
adpAutoCheck -lib local -cell test
# Example 3
# Check DB errors in a library
adpAutoCheck -lib local
# Example 4
# Check DB errors in all libraries with mapping path
adpAutoCheck
# Example 5
# Fix DB errors in a symbol cell view
adpAutoCheck -lib local -cell test -view symbol -fix
# Example 6
# Fix DB errors in a cell
adpAutoCheck -lib local -cell test -fix
# Example 7
# Fix DB errors in a library
adpAutoCheck -lib local -fix
# Example 8
# Fix DB errors in all libraries with mapping path
adpAutoCheck -fix
# Example 9
# Fix DB errors in a symbol cell view and log the results
adpAutoCheck -lib local -cell 4_bit_adder2 -view symbol -fix -log
544

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
adpChgBusChar
The adpChgBusChar command changes different bus parenthesis to create
bus type objects. It checks the following objects:
instance names (in the schematic)
bundle net names (in the schematic)
base names of buses (in the schematic)
net name labels (in the schematic)
port names (in the schematic)
pin names (in the symbol)
pin name labels (in the symbol)
the Pin Order field for all kinds of netlist type (in the symbol)
the adpBusParenthesis property (in the library), which supports characters

[ and ( only.
Since this Tcl may update the pin name of the symbol, ERC must be executed
to fix the connection in the schematic. Alternatively, the adpFixNetFig
command can be used to fix the related instance connection in the schematic.
Syntax
adpChgBusChar -lib libName -orig OrigChar -rep RepChar [dump]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-dump
Dump a report of the modified results to a file. The file name can
be _adpChgBusCharCmd%d where %d corresponds to an integer
starting from 0.
-lib libName
Specify library name.
-orig OrigChar
The old bus parenthesis can be specified by < or [.

Specifying {<} changes <> to a new bus parenthesis.
Specifying {[} changes [] to a new bus parenthesis.

K-2015.06
545

Miscellaneous
Argument
Description
-rep RepChar
The new bus parenthesis can be specified by < or [ only.
Examples
adpChgBusChar -lib local -orig {[} -rep < -dump
# the log message (dumped to the file) can be:
# Original = TR[1:0] Replace = TR<1:0> (Symbol Pin Label)
# Original = TOUT[3:0] Replace = TOUT<3:0> (Symbol Pin Name)
# Original = N1<1> Replace = N1[1] (Net Name)
# Original = A<0><0:1> Replace = A[0][0:1] (Instance Name)
# Original = <> Replace = [] (Bus Parenthesis)
adpDelGNet
The adpDelGNet command returns 1 if the global net is deleted.
Syntax
adpDelGNet -lib libName -name net1 net2 net3...
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libName
-name netName
Specify the name of the global net that is deleted.
Examples
adpDelGNet -lib aa -name VDD VSS VDD! VSS!
adpDelRNet
The adpDelRNet command returns 1 if the net or port without figures is
deleted.
Syntax
adpDelRNet -lib libName -cell cellName [-name netName]
546

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
-lib libName
-name netName
Specify the name of the non-figured net that is deleted.

Otherwise, delete all the nets with no figures.
Examples
adpDelRNet -lib local -cell dm_chan
adpDelRNet -lib local -cell dm_chan -name EQ1_18
adpDiscardDesign
The adpDiscardDesign command discards the active design and restores
the original design.
Syntax
adpDiscardDesign -topWnd winId -lib libName -cell cellName
-view viewName
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
Specify the cell to be discarded.
-lib libName
-topWnd winId
Specify the active window identifier.
-view viewName
Specify the view name of the cell to be discarded.

Valid values: schematic, symbol, and any user-defined view

K-2015.06
547

Miscellaneous
Examples
# Discard saving the schematic cell aaa with sch001 view
adpDiscardDesign -topWnd _adp5 -lib test -cell aaa -view sch001
See Also
adpLibMgrOpenDesign
adpDsgSaveSchCV
adpDsgSaveSchCV
The adpDsgSaveSchCV command saves the schematic cell design.
Syntax
adpDsgSaveSchCV -topWnd winId -lib libName -cell cellName view viewName
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
Specify the cell to be saved.
-lib libName
-topWnd winId
Specify the active window identifier.
-view viewName
Specify the view name of the cell to be saved.

Valid values: schematic, symbol, and any user-defined
Examples
# Save the schematic cell aaa with sch001 view
adpDsgSaveSchCV -topWnd _adp5 -lib test -cell aaa -view sch001
See Also
adpLibMgrOpenDesign
adpDiscardDesign
548

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
adpFixBundleNet
The adpFixBundleNet command returns 1 if the Laker ADP database with
bundle net issue has been fixed.
Syntax
adpFixBundleNet
Returns
Arguments
None
Examples
adpFixBundleNet
adpFixNetFig
The adpFixNetFig command returns 1 if the old wire model has been
converted to a new wire model.
Syntax
adpFixNetFig -lib libName -cell cellName
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
-lib libName
Examples
adpFixNetFig -lib local -cell dm_chan

K-2015.06
549

Miscellaneous
adpFixPinDot
The adpFixPinDot command returns 1 if the label size is kept fixed while
changing the grid resolution.
Syntax
adpFixPinDot -lib libName [-cell cellName] -dotSize dotSize
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
Specify the cell name. If it is not specified, all cells are fixed.
-dotSize dotSize
Specify the label size.

When the grid resolution is 16, the dot size is set as 12.
-lib libName
Examples
adpFixPinDot -lib aa -dotSize 12
adpGetActiveWnd
The adpGetActiveWnd command returns the current schematic/symbol
window identifier (or window name).
Syntax
adpGetActiveWnd [-id] | [-name]
Returns
The current schematic/symbol window identifier (or window name) if
550

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Arguments
Argument
Description
-id
Get the current schematic/symbol window identifier.
-name
Get the current schematic/symbol window name.
Examples
adpGetActiveWnd -id
adpGetNetListType
The adpGetNetListType command returns the netlist type Hspice, CDL,
Eldo, SmartSpice or Spectre.
Syntax
adpGetNetListType
Returns
The netlist type Hspice, CDL, Eldo, SmartSpice or Spectre if successful;
Arguments
None
Examples
adpGetSelectHierName -topWnd _adp2 -net -delimiter . \
-netlist [adpGetNetListType]
adpGetTextEditor
The adpGetTextEditor command returns the default text editor.
Syntax
adpGetTextEditor
Returns
The default text editor if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
None

K-2015.06
551

Miscellaneous
Examples
adpGetTextEditor
adpGetWindowVar
The adpGetWindowVar command returns a window identifier if the window
identifier is given.
Syntax
adpGetWindowVar winId
Returns
Window identifier if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
winId
Specify the window identifier.
Examples
adpGetWindowVar la22810
adpGetWndByCV
The adpGetWndByCV command returns a window identifier if the window
identifier can be obtained by the cell view identifier.
Syntax
adpGetWndByCV -cv cellViewId | [-lib libName [-cell cellName]
-view viewName]
Returns
A window identifier if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
552
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
Specify the cell name of the opened cell.
-cv cellViewId

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Argument
Description
-lib libName
Specify the library.
-view viewName
Specify the view name of the opened cell.

Valid values: schematic, and symbol.
Examples
# Example 1
adpGetWndByCV -cv la22810
# Example 2
adpGetWndByCV -lib testLib -cell testCell -view schematic
adpGetWndCellViewId
The adpGetWndCellViewId command returns a cell view identifier if the cell
view identifier of the current Design window can be obtained.
Syntax
adpGetWndCellViewId -topWnd winId
Returns
The cell view identifier if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpGetWndCellViewId -topWnd _adp2
adpRegWndCB
The adpRegWndCB command returns 1 if an event can be registered or
unregistered for the specified design window. This command is used for the
ADP/Composer Integration.
When evaluating the specified callback procedures, several global Tcl variables
are provided to keep the information for accessing. They are explained with the
following Examples:
K-2015.06
553

Miscellaneous
_adpWndCBReasonName SelectSchematic (SelectSchematic,

PreSelect, MouseMoving, MouseLeftClick, MouseRightClick,
WndEnter,or WndClose)
_adpWndCBLibName
xxxLib (library logic name)
_adpWndCBCellName
xxxCell
_adpWndCBViewName
Schematic
_adpWndCBWndName
_adp3
_adpWndCBDBCoord
(0.567,0.409)
_adpWndCBScrCoord
(562 284)
_adpWndCBObjId
7fb5478 (Only for the preSelect event
and return 0 when no object is
pre-selected.)
Syntax
adpRegWndCB -type typeName -callback procedureName [-topWnd
_adp#] [-remove]
Returns
Arguments
554
Argument
Description
-callback
procedureName
Specify the callback procedure name.
-remove
To unregister the event with the specified callback procedure

name.
-topWnd _adp#
Specify the name of the design window to register/unregister.

The default is the active window, but if the active window is not
the design window, the command fails.
-type typeName
Specify the register/unregister type.

Valid values: SelectSchematic, WndEnter, WndClose,
PreSelect, MouseMoving, MouseLeftClick, and
MouseRightClick.

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Examples
# Example 1
adpRegWndCB -type SelectSchematic -callback SchematicSelectChange
-topWnd _adp2
# Example 2
adpRegWndCB -type PreSelect -callback SchematicPreSelect -topWnd
_adp2 -remove
adpRmHighLight
The adpRmHighLight command returns 1 if the highlighted object(s) has
been removed.
Syntax
adpRmHighLight -topWnd winId
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpRmHighLight -topWnd _adp2
adpRmParam
The adpRmParam command removes the duplicate parameter data from the
schematic view.
Syntax
adpRmParam -lib libName
Returns
None

K-2015.06
555

Miscellaneous
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libName
Examples
adpRmParam -lib aa
adpSetInstParamCB
The adpSetInstParamCB command sets the value to the specified
parameter and triggers the callback of this paramter.
Syntax
adpSetInstParamCB -cv cellviewId -inst instName -param
parameterName -value value
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellViewId
-inst instName
-param parameterName
-value value
Specify the parameter value.
Examples
adpSetInstParamCB -cv oa:0x2a978cef1a -inst X1 -param ln -value 1
adpSetLibGrid
The adpSetLibGrid command returns 1 if the resolution of the library has
been changed.
Syntax
adpSetLibGrid -lib libName -resolution resolutionValue
556

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libName
-resolution
Specify the resolution of the library grid.
resolutionValue
Examples
adpSetLibGrid -lib aa -resolution 4
adpSetObjType
The adpSetObjType command filters unnecessary objects when selecting
objects in the schematics.
Syntax
adpSetObjType -obj objtype -sel selmode
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-obj objtype
Specify the object type to be set.

Valid values: all, instance, wire, wirelabel, port, pin,
frame, pseudorc, text, shape, and annotationtext.
-sel
0|1

1 : The specified object type is selectable.
0 : The specified object type is unselectable.
Examples
adpSetObjType -obj all -sel 1

K-2015.06
557

Miscellaneous
adpTriggerPropertyCB
The adpTriggerPropertyCB command updates parameter values when
changing and updating the script file. It uses the current parameter value as the
input and trigger the procedure function of the parameter (if the parameter has
a procedure function), and update all modified parameter values if needed. It is
a cell-based command.
Syntax
adpTriggerPropertyCB -lib libname [-cell cellname] [callback callbackFuncName] [-masterLib masterlibName masterCell masterCellName] -param Name
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-callback
callbackFuncName
Specify the procedure name (callback function name) in the

script file.
-cell cellname
Specify the schematic cell view.
-lib libname
-masterCell
masterCellName
Specify the master symbol view name of an instance.
-masterLib
masterlibName
Specify the master library name of an instance.
-param Name
Specify the parameter name of an instance.
Examples
# Example 1
# Update param w of all instances of all schematic views in
# library a
adpTriggerPropertyCB -lib a -param w
# Example 2
# Update param w of all instances of schematic view b in
# library a
adpTriggerPropertyCB -lib a -cell b -param w
558

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
# Example 3
# Update param w of all instaces of all schematic views in
# library a. The master library of these instances is b and
# the master cell is c.
adpTriggerPropertyCB -lib a -masterLib b -masterCell c -param w
lakerEcho
The lakerEcho command specifies whether to echo messages in the Home
Page.
Syntax
lakerEcho 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
0|1

1 : Enable echo messages.
0 : Disable echo messages.
Examples
# Disable the echo in the Home page
lakerEcho 0
lakerExportSIF
The lakerExportSIF command exports the Laker database to a SIF format
database.
Syntax
lakerExportSIF -file fileName -lib libName -design
designName [-logFile logErrName]
Returns

K-2015.06
559

Miscellaneous
Arguments
Argument
Description
-design designName
Specify the design name.
-file fileName
Specify the input SIF file.
-lib libName
-logFile logErrName
Specify the file name for the log and error files.
Examples
lakerExportSIF -file test.sif -lib test -design test
lakerGetLibCell
The lakerGetLibCell command shows a dialog for user to select a library
and a cell.
Syntax
lakerGetLibCell [-initLib initLibName [-initCell
initCellName]] [-canNew 0|1]
Returns
The selected library and a list of cell names if successful; otherwise, returns
nothing.
Arguments
560
Argument
Description
-canNew 0|1

1: Allow to open a new cell.
0: Do not allow to open a new cell.
-initCell
initCellName
The cell name is selected initially if it exists in the -initLib

argument is specified. If this option is not specified, nothing is
selected. If the -initLib argument is not specified, this option
is ignored.
-initLib
initLibName
The logical library name is selected initially if it exists. If this

argument is not specified, nothing is selected.

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Examples
# Popup this dialog with initially-selected library, named LibA,
# and cell named CellA. And user can open a new cell.
lakerGetLibCell -initLib LibA -initCell CellA -canNew 1
lakerExtractECOCommand
The lakerExtractECOCommand command extracts ECO commands from
the referenced library.
Syntax
lakerExtractECOCommand -refLib refLibName -targetLib
targetLibName [-topCell topCellName] [-ecoFile
ecoFileName] [[-extractConstraint 0|1] [-priority
priority] [-suffix constraintSuffix]] [-extractReadOnly
0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-ecoFile
ecoFileName
Specify the extracted command file. If not specified, the

ecoFileName is the name of the referenced library with a
suffix _ECO.cmd.
-extractConstraint 0|1

1 : Extract constraint information from the referenced library.
0 : Do not extract constraint information from the referenced
library.
-extractReadOnly 0|1

1 : Extract ECO commands even if the cell view is readOnly.
0 : Do not extract ECO commands for readOnly cell views.
-priority priority
Valid values: schematic, and layout

schematic: Constraints in the schematic view have higher
priority.
layout: Constraints in the logic view have higher priority.

K-2015.06
561

Miscellaneous
Argument
Description
-refLib
refLibName
Specify the referenced library to extract the object tree

information.
-suffix
constraintSuffix
Specify the suffix added when the constraint names conflict.
-targetLib
targetLibName
Specify the new target library database. Recovering

hierarchy manipulation on this library.
-topCell
topCellName
Specify the top cell name of the design to be extracted. Its

library should be the referenced library. If not specified, the
whole library is analyzed.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerExtractECOCommand -refLib chkLib -target myLib \
-extractConstranit 0 -priority layout -extractReadOnly 1
# Example 2
lakerExtractECOCommand -refLib chkLib -target myLib \
-topCell topCkt -ecoFile result_ECO.cmd
lakerExtractSwapPort
The lakerExtractSwapPort command extracts the swap port information
and appends it into the model mapping file.
Syntax
lakerExtractSwapPort -lib libName [-cell cellName]
Returns
None
Arguments
562
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
Specify the cell to be extracted. If the option is null, all cells in

the library are extracted.
-lib libName

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Examples
lakerExtractSwapPort -lib chkLib
lakerExtractSwapPort -lib chkLib -cell sum
lakerGetDesign
The lakerGetDesign command shows a dialog for user to select
miscellaneous types of designs.
Syntax
lakerGetDesign -type designType [-initLib initLibName [initCell initCellName [-initView initViewName] ] ] | [initView initViewName] [-canNew 0|1]
Returns
The value returned depends on the design type you specified with -type. See
table below.
Design Type
Value Returned
-type library
A selected library name if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
-type cellView A list of the selected library, cell and view names if successful;
-type cell
A list of the selected library and selected cell names if successful;

-type view
A list of the selected view names (which might be empty) if

successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-canNew 0|1

1: Allow to specify a new library, a new cell view, or one or more
new cells.
0: Do not allow to specify a new library, a new cell view, or one or
more new cells.
This option is not supported if -type library, -type
cellView or -type cell is specified.

K-2015.06
563

Miscellaneous
Argument
Description
-initCell
initCellName
Specify one or more cell names to be selected initially if they

exists. If this option is not specified, nothing is selected.
This option is not supported if -type library or -type view
is specified.
More than one cell names can be specified only if -type cell
is specified.
-initLib
initLibName
Specify a logical library name to be selected initially if it exists. If

this option is not specified, nothing is selected.
This option is not supported if -type view is specified.
-initView
initViewName
Specify one or more view names to be selected initially if they

exists. If this option is not specified, nothing is selected.
This option is not supported if -type library or -type cell
is specified.
More than one view names can be specified only if -type view
is specified.
-type designType
Specify a design type to select.

Valid values: library, cellView, cell, and view.
library: Select a library.
cellView: Select a cell view.
cell: Select one or more cells in some library.
view: Select one or more views.
Examples
# Example 1
# Show a dialog to select a library.
lakerGetDesign -type library
# User selects library LibB; Laker returns LibB
# User clicks on "Cancel" button, Laker returns empty.
# Example 2
# Show a dialog to select a cell view, with initially-selected
# library named LibA, cell named CellA, and view named layout.
lakerGetDesign -type cellView -initLib LibA -initCell CellA \
-initView layout
# User selects library LibA, cell CellB, and view schematic;
# Laker returns LibA CellB schematic
564

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
# Example 3
# Show a dialog to select one or more cells, with initially-selected
# library named LibA, and cells named CellA, and CellB
lakerGetDesign -type cell -initLib LibA -initCell CellA CellB
# User selects library LibB, cells CellB1, CellB3 and CellB7;
# Laker returns LibB {CellB1 CellB3 CellB7}
# Example 4
# Show a dialog to select one or more cells, and also specify new
# cells.
lakerGetDesign -type cell -canNew 1
# User selects library LibB, specify NewA, NewB, and NewC in Text
# field; Laker returns LibB {NewA NewB NewC}
# Example 5
# Show a dialog to select one or more views, with initially-selected
# views, named layout, symbol, and abs.
lakerGetDesign -type view -initView layout symbol abs
# User selects views schematic, and logic;
# Laker returns schematic logic
# User selects nothing and clicks on "OK" button; Laker returns 0
lakerImportSIF
The lakerImportSIF command imports an SIF format to the Laker
database. The specified library and design (cell) name must be opened.
Syntax
lakerImportSIF -file fileName -lib libName -design
designName [-logFile logErrName]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-design designName
Specify the design name.
-file fileName
Specify the file input SIF file.
-lib libName

K-2015.06
565

Miscellaneous
Argument
Description
-logFile logErrName
Specify the file name for the log and error files.
Examples
lakerImportSIF -file test.sif -lib test -design test
lakerIpcHdl
The lakerIpcHdl command invokes an independent Tcl process from Laker.
This command helps you to keep writing data to the process, or to terminate
the invoked Tcl process.
The -error and -end arguments are not ready at current stage. The
procedure defined in -end is not triggled when you submit the terminate
command to the specific IPC number.
At the current stage, the IPC Handler sends a special word, _TERMINATE_, to
the child process if you run lakerIpcHdl command with -terminate option.
To use the -terminate option correctly, you should make your child process
terminated itself if it receives the special word _TERMINATE_.
More than one process can be invoked even if you specify the same read
procedure in the -read option with the lakerIpcHdl command. However,
you have to take charge of handling those messages from various invoked
processes in the read procedure.
Syntax
lakerIpcHdl -opt option {-script tclScriptFile -read
readHdlProc -error errorHdlProc -end endHdlProc | -id
virProcId [-content content]}
lakerIpcHdl -opt option {-cmdLine Executable_Command -read
readHdlProc -error errorHdlProc -end endHdlProc | -id
virProcId [-content content]}
Returns
566

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cmdLine
Executable_Command
Specify an executable program that can run on UNIX

environment and talk with Laker through IPC protocol.
-content content
Specify the content to be written to an invoked Tcl

process.
-end endHdlProc
Specify the Tcl procedure when terminating a Tcl

process.
-error errorHdlProc
Specify the Tcl procedure when failing to read data from a

Tcl process.
-id virProcId
Specify a virtual process identifier which is written to or

terminated. You can get it from the result value after a Tcl
process is invoked.
-opt option
Specify an action of the Tcl process.

Valid values: invoke, write, and terminate.
where invoke starts a Tcl process; write writes data to
a Tcl process; and terminate ends a Tcl process.
-read readHdlProc
Specify the Tcl process when succeeding to read data

from a Tcl process.
-script tclScriptFile
Specify the Tcl script file which is executed by the invoked

Tcl process.
Examples
# Example 1
# Invoke a Tcl process
lakerIpcHdl -opt invoke -script tcpServer.tcl \
-read IpcReadHdlProc -error IpcErrHdlProc -end IpcEndHdlProc
# Write to a Tcl process
lakerIpcHdl -opt write -id 2222 -content \
{lakerProbeShape -mode net}
# Terminate a Tcl process
lakerIpcHdl -opt terminate -id 2222

K-2015.06
567

Miscellaneous
# Example 2
# submit a process and communicate with Laker
# through IPC protocol
lakerIpcHdl -opt invoke \
-script $env($COHESION_TOOL_PATH)/scripts/navclient.tcl \
-read ProcessReadHdl -error ProcessErrorHdl -end ProcessEndHdl
# terminate the IPC process
lakerIpcHdl -opt terminate -id $ipcVar(nVirTcpProcessId)
# Example 3
set Global(ecsPort) "-porttosch $porttosch \
-portfromsch $portfromsch"
set Global(ecsCmd) "$Global(ecsCmdPath)/hdsshell
$Global(ecsPort)"
lakerIpcHdl -opt invoke -cmdLine "$Global(ecsCmd)" \
-read ProcessECSReadHdl -error ProcessErrorHdl \
-end ProcessECSEndHdl
lakerLoadNanoScopeFile
The lakerLoadNanoScopeFile command loads the defect and simulation
data generated by NanoScope and shows the defect and simulation objects on
screen.
Syntax
lakerLoadNanoScopeFile -view viewName [-output outputFile]
[-contour contourFile] [-point (x1,y1) (x2,y2)] [quality]
Returns
Arguments
568
Argument
Description
-contour contourFile
Specify the output ASCII file from NanoScope, which

contains simulation contours.
-output outputFile
Specify the output ASCII file from NanoScope, which

contains inspected defects.
Specify the bounding box of the selected area for

inspecting and contouring.

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Argument
Description
-quality
Specify whether those inspected defects are with qualities

in the specified output file from NanoScope.
-view viewName
Specify the view name to be appended to the cell.
Examples
# Example 1
# Load only output file from NanoScope
lakerLoadNanoScopeFile -view ns_output -output nsOutput.rpt
# Example 2
# Load output file and contour file with a specified area from
# NanoScope
lakerLoadNanoScopeFile -view ns_output -output nsOutput.rpt \
-contour nsContour.rpt -point \
(1698.65,3142.28) (2190.22,3617.98)
# Example 3
# Load output file containing qualities from NanoScope
lakerLoadNanoScopeFile -view quality -output nsOutput.rpt
lakerRegWndCB
The lakerRegWndCB command is an event registered or unregistered for a
specific design window. This command is used for Laker/Composer integration.
When evaluating the specified callback procedure, several global Tcl variables
are provided to keep the information for accessing. They are
_lkWndCBReasonName, _lkWndCBWndName, _lkWndCBLibName,
_lkWndCBCellName, _lkWndCBViewName, _lkWndCBInstList,
_lkWndCBNetList, _lkWndCBScrCoord, _lkWndCBDBCoord,
_lkWndCBObjId, _lkWndCBLibName2, _lkWndCBCellName2,
_lkWndCBViewName2, _lkWndCBHLInstList, and _lkWndCBHLNetList.

K-2015.06
569

Miscellaneous
570
SelectLayout
V V V V V V V
SelectBrowser
V V V V V V V
MouseMoving
V V V V V
V V
MouseLeftClick
V V V V V
V V
MouseRightClick V V V V V
V V
preSelect
V V V V V
WndEnter
V V V V V
EIP
V V V V V
V V V
Descend
V V V V V
V V V
ReturnTo
V V V V V
V V V
Save
V V V V V
SaveAs
V V V V V
Discard
V V V V V
Load
V V V V V
Highlight
V V V V V
ClearHighlight
V V V V V
_lkWndCBHLNetList
_lkWndCBHLInstList
_lkWndCBViewName2
_lkWndCBCellName2
_lkWndCBLibName2
_lkWndCBObjId
_lkWndCBDBCoord
_lkWndCBScrCoord
_lkWndCBNetList
_lkWndCBInstList
_lkWndCBViewName
_lkWndCBCellName
_lkWndCBLibName
_lkWndCBWndName
CallBack Type
_lkWndCBReasonName
The following table shows the relationship of callback types and global Tcl
variables.
V V V
V V V
V V V
V V

K-2015.06
WndClose
V V V V V
WndOpen
V V V V V
_lkWndCBHLNetList
_lkWndCBHLInstList
_lkWndCBViewName2
_lkWndCBCellName2
_lkWndCBLibName2
_lkWndCBObjId
_lkWndCBDBCoord
_lkWndCBScrCoord
_lkWndCBNetList
_lkWndCBInstList
_lkWndCBViewName
_lkWndCBCellName
_lkWndCBLibName
_lkWndCBWndName
CallBack Type
_lkWndCBReasonName

Miscellaneous
Syntax
lakerRegWndCB -type typeName -callback procedureName [-wnd
wndName] [-remove]
Returns
1 if successful, otherwise returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-callback
procedureName
Specify the callback procedure name.
-remove
Unregister the event with the specified callback procedure name.

K-2015.06
571

Miscellaneous
Argument
Description
-type typeName
Specify the registered or unregistered callback type.

Valid values are listed and explained as follows:
-wnd wndName
SelectLayout: Used when the select set in the layout is

changed.
SelectBrowser: Used when the select set in the Design
Browser pane is changed.
MouseMoving: Used for mouse moving in the Layout
window.
MouseLeftClick: Used for left-click in the Layout window.
MouseRightClick: Used for right-click in the Layout
window.
preSelect: Used for pre-selecting the layout in the Layout
window.
WndEnter: Used for mouse entering in the Layout window.
EIP: Used for editing a cell with EIP mode.
Descend: Used for descending a cell in EIP mode.
ReturnTo: Used for returning to the EIP/Descend level.
Save: Used for saving a design with the same name.
SaveAs: Used for saving the design with another name.
Discard: Used for discard editing.
Load: Used for loading another design in the current Layout
window.
Highlight: Used for showing highlights in the layout.
ClearHighlight: Used for clearing highlights in the layout.
WndClose: Used for closing the Design window.
WndOpen: Used for opening the Design window.
Specify the name of the registered or unregistered design

window. The default is the active window, but if the active window
is not the design window, the command fails.
Do not specify this argument when -type WndOpen is
specified.
Examples
# Example 1. Evaluate the callback procedure
# LayoutSelectChange with the following global
# Tcl variables for the SelectLayout event
572

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
proc LayoutSelectChange {} {
global _lkWndCBReasonName
global _lkWndCBWndName
global _lkWndCBLibName
global _lkWndCBCellName
global _lkWndCBViewName
global _lkWndCBInstList
global _lkWndCBNetList
lakerMessage "CallBack Type: $_lkWndCBReasonName
Window:$_lkWndCBWndName Library:$_lkWndCBLibName
Cell:$_lkWndCBCellName View:$_lkWndCBViewName"
lakerMessage "instList: $_lkWndCBInstList\nnetList:
$_lkWndCBNetList"
}
# register the SelectLayout callback event
lakerRegWndCB -type SelectLayout \
-callback LayoutSelectChange -wnd Wnd2
# unregister the SelectLayout callback event
lakerRegWndCB -type SelectLayout -callback LayoutSelectChange \
-wnd Wnd2 -remove
# Example 2. Various Examples for supported callback events.
proc DumpGlobalVar {} {
global _lkWndCBReasonName
global _lkWndCBLibName
global _lkWndCBCellName
global _lkWndCBViewName
lakerMessage "CallBack Type: $_lkWndCBReasonName
Window:$_lkWndCBWndName Library:$_lkWndCBLibName
Cell:$_lkWndCBCellName View:$_lkWndCBViewName"
}
proc EIPLayoutWnd {} {
DumpGlobalVar
# Information of the previous editing cell view
global _lkWndCBLibName2
global _lkWndCBCellName2
global _lkWndCBViewName2
lakerMessage "Old: libName: $_lkWndCBLibName2, cellName:
$_lkWndCBCellName2, viewName: $_lkWndCBViewName2"
}

K-2015.06
573

Miscellaneous
proc DescendLayoutWnd {} {
DumpGlobalVar
}
proc ReturnToLayoutWnd {} {
DumpGlobalVar
}
proc SaveLayoutWnd {} {
DumpGlobalVar
}
proc SaveAsLayoutWnd {} {
DumpGlobalVar
# Information of the current editing cell view
global
_lkWndCBLibName2
global
_lkWndCBCellName2
global
_lkWndCBViewName2
}
proc closeLayoutWnd {} {
DumpGlobalVar
}
proc DiscardLayoutWnd {} {
DumpGlobalVar
}
proc LoadLayoutWnd {} {
DumpGlobalVar
global
_lkWndCBLibName2
global
_lkWndCBCellName2
global
_lkWndCBViewName2
574

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous

}
proc selObjsInLayout {} {
DumpGlobalVar
global _lkWndCBInstList
global _lkWndCBNetList
#lakerMessage {Callback Type: SelectLayout|SelectBrowser}
lakerMessage "instList: $_lkWndCBInstList\nnetList:
$_lkWndCBNetList"
}
proc MouseMovingCB {} {
DumpGlobalVar
global _lkWndCBDBCoord
global _lkWndCBScrCoord
lakerMessage "Coordinate: $_lkWndCBDBCoord, coor:
$_lkWndCBScrCoord"
}
proc MouseLeftClickCB {} {
DumpGlobalVar
$_lkWndCBScrCoord"
}
proc MouseRightClickCB {} {
DumpGlobalVar
$_lkWndCBScrCoord"
}
proc preSelectCB {} {
DumpGlobalVar
global _lkWndCBObjId
if {$_lkWndCBObjId == "0"} {
lakerMessage "Clear Pre-select data"
} else {
lakerMessage "Pre-select objId: $_lkWndCBObjId"
}
$_lkWndCBScrCoord"

K-2015.06
575

Miscellaneous
}
proc enterCB {} {
DumpGlobalVar
}
proc highlightCB {} {
DumpGlobalVar
global _lkWndCBHLInstList
global _lkWndCBHLNetList
lakerMessage "InstList: $_lkWndCBHLInstList NetList:
$_lkWndCBHLNetList"
}
proc clearhighlightCB {} {
DumpGlobalVar
}
proc regSDLCallBack {} {
set cv [leoGetWndCellViewId]
set wndId [lakerGetWndByCV -cv $cv]
set result [lakerRegWndCB -wnd $wndId -type WndClose -callback
closeLayoutWnd]
set result [lakerRegWndCB -wnd $wndId -type EIP -callback
EIPLayoutWnd]
set result [lakerRegWndCB -wnd $wndId -type Descend -callback
DescendLayoutWnd]
set result [lakerRegWndCB -wnd $wndId -type ReturnTo \
-callback ReturnToLayoutWnd]
set result [lakerRegWndCB -wnd $wndId -type Save -callback
SaveLayoutWnd]
set result [lakerRegWndCB -wnd $wndId -type SaveAs -callback
SaveAsLayoutWnd]
set result [lakerRegWndCB -wnd $wndId -type Discard -callback
DiscardLayoutWnd]
set result [lakerRegWndCB -wnd $wndId -type Load -callback
LoadLayoutWnd]
set result [lakerRegWndCB -wnd $wndId -type MouseMoving \
-callback MouseMovingCB]
set result [lakerRegWndCB -wnd $wndId -type MouseLeftClick \
-callback MouseLeftClickCB]
set result [lakerRegWndCB -wnd $wndId -type MouseRightClick \
-callback MouseRightClickCB]
set result [lakerRegWndCB -wnd $wndId -type preSelect \
-callback preSelectCB]
set result [lakerRegWndCB -wnd $wndId -type SelectLayout \
-callback selObjsInLayout]
set result [lakerRegWndCB -wnd $wndId -type SelectBrowser \
-callback selObjsInLayout]
set result [lakerRegWndCB -wnd $wndId -type WndEnter \
576

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
-callback enterCB]
set result [lakerRegWndCB -wnd $wndId -type Highlight \
-callback highlightCB]
set result [lakerRegWndCB -wnd $wndId -type ClearHighlight \
-callback clearhighlightCB]
}
# Example 3. Specify a callback for window opened event
proc OpenLayoutWnd {} {
set logoutFile [open RegWndCB.log a+]
global
global
global
global
global
_lkWndCBReasonName
_lkWndCBWndName
_lkWndCBLibName
_lkWndCBCellName
_lkWndCBViewName
puts $logoutFile "Callback Type: $_lkWndCBReasonName"

puts $logoutFile "Window : $_lkWndCBWndName"
puts $logoutFile "Current: libName: $_lkWndCBLibName, cellName:
$_lkWndCBCellName, viewName: $_lkWndCBViewName"
puts $logoutFile
"========================================================"
close $logoutFile
}
lakerRegWndCB -type WndOpen -callback OpenLayoutWnd
lakerSetDeviceObjMode
The lakerSetDeviceObjMode command sets the device object mode to
treat MCells as regular instances.
Syntax
lakerSetDeviceObjMode [-mode 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode 0|1

1 : Enable the Device Object Mode option.
0 : Disable the Device Object Mode option.

K-2015.06
577

Miscellaneous
Examples
lakerSetDeviceObjMode -mode 1
See Also
Home Page: Options > Preferences > General tab > Selector > Device
Object Mode
lakerVersion
The lakerVersion command returns the current release information, such
as the current release date and version. The version related information is not
displayed on the Home Page if this command is used in a Tcl script.
Syntax
lakerVersion [-release | -date]
Returns
The information of the current version if successful, otherwise returns an error
message.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-date
Specify the release date of the current version.
-release
Specify the version of the current release.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerVersion
# Return:
# Laker - Toward Custom Layout Automation,
# Release 3.0v6 32-bit (SOLARIS) 04/15/2003
lakerVersion -release
# Return: 3.0v6
lakerVersion -date
# Return: 04/15/2003
578

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
sysGetRcValue
The sysGetRcValue command is used to get the value of the specified
keyword in the laker.rc resource file.
Syntax
sysGetRcValue -section section -key key
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-key key
Specify the keyword.

Valid values: InfixEditing, PopUpInformation,
SetColorNameForShapeCreation, and
SetLockForShapeCreation.
-section section
Specify the section name.

Valid value: LeoPreference.
Examples
# Example 1
sysGetRcValue -section LeoPreference -key InfixEditing
# Example 2
sysGetRcValue -section LeoPreference -key PopUpInformation
# Example 3
sysGetRcValue -section LeoPreference \
-key SetColorNameForShapeCreation
# Example 4
sysGetRcValue -section LeoPreference -key SetLockForShapeCreation
sysSetRcValue
The sysSetRcValue command is used to set or modify the value of the
specified keyword in the laker.rc resource file.
You can specify the color and lock in the [LeoPreference] section of the
laker.rc resource file with the following keywords:

K-2015.06
579

Miscellaneous
SetColorNameForShapeCreation = ColorName
SetLockForShapeCreation = TRUE | FALSE
Syntax
sysSetRcValue -section section -key key -value value
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-key key
Specify the keyword.

Valid values: InfixEditing, PopUpInformation,
SetColorNameForShapeCreation, and
SetLockForShapeCreation.
-section section
Specify the section name.

Valid value: LeoPreference.
-value value
Specify the value to be set.

Valid values: true and false for InfixEditing,
PopUpInformation, and SetLockForShapeCreation;
colorName for SetColorNameForShapeCreation, where
colorName can be any string like colorA.
Examples
# Example 1
sysSetRcValue -section LeoPreference -key InfixEditing \
-value true
# Example 2
sysSetRcValue -section LeoPreference -key PopUpInformation \
-value true
# Example 3
sysSetRcValue -section LeoPreference \
-key SetColorNameForShapeCreation -value colorA
# Example 4
sysSetRcValue -section LeoPreference \
-key SetLockForShapeCreation -value FALSE
580

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
wtShowLicStatus
The wtShowLicStatus command shows the license status.
When the command is invoked without -feature, the system displays an
Information form showing the Laker_AdvancedNode license status.
Figure 2
Information Form Shows Laker_AdvancedNode License Status
When the command is invoked with -feature, the system displays an

Information form showing the status of the specified license feature.
Figure 3
Information Form Shows Specified License Feature
Syntax
wtShowLicStatus [-feature feature]
Returns
None

K-2015.06
581

Miscellaneous
Arguments
Argument
Description
-feature feature
Specify the license feature to be checked.

Valid values: Laker_Viewer, Laker_L1, Laker_L2,
Laker_L3, Laker_L4, Laker_FPD_L2, Laker_SE,
Laker_ADP, and Laker_AdvancedNode
(default=Laker_AdvancedNode).
Examples
# Example 1
wtShowLicStatus -feature Laker_L3
# Example 2
wtShowLicStatus -feature Laker_Viewer
582

K-2015.06
6
6
Library Mapping Editor
User Interface (GUI) which applied within the Library Mapping Editor window,
invoked by Library > Mapping Path in the Home Page.
lakerLME
lakerLMEBack2Top
lakerLMEClose
lakerLMEOpen
lakerLMESave
lakerLMESaveAs
lakerMapPath
lakerLME
The lakerLME command invokes the Library Mapping Editor window and
creates and deletes the mapping record by the specified -purge and buildmap option.
Syntax
lakerLME [-logicName logicName -mapPath mapPath | -purge 0|1
| -buildmap buildmap | -include fileName]
Returns
None

K-2015.06
583
Chapter 6: Library Mapping Editor

lakerLMEBack2Top
Arguments
Argument
Description
-buildmap buildmap
Build all libraries in the directory into the Library Mapping

Editor (default=current directory).
-include fileName
Include the library mapping file. Specify the file with its full
path.
-logicName logicName
Specify the logic name of the mapping library.
-mapPath mapPath
Specify the mapping library in full path.
-purge 0|1

1 : Clear all mapping paths in the Library Mapping Editor.
0 : Keep all mapping paths in the Library Mapping Editor.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerLME -purge 1
lakerLME -logicName a1 -mapPath /local/test/a1.lib++
lakerLME -logicName demo -mapPath /local/test/demo.lib++
lakerLME -include /local/test/aa.lib
See Also
lakerLMEBack2Top
lakerLMEClose
lakerLMEOpen
lakerLMESave
lakerLMESaveAs
lakerLMEBack2Top
The lakerLMEBack2Top command returns to the initial state of the library
mapping record.
Syntax
lakerLMEBack2Top
584

K-2015.06

lakerLMEClose
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
None
See Also
Library Mapping Editor: File > Back to Top
lakerLME
lakerLMEClose
lakerLMEOpen
lakerLMESave
lakerLMESaveAs
lakerLMEClose
The lakerLMEClose command closes the Library Mapping Editor window.
Syntax
lakerLMEClose
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
None
See Also
Library Mapping Editor: File > Close
lakerLME
lakerLMEBack2Top
lakerLMEOpen
lakerLMESave
lakerLMESaveAs

K-2015.06
585

lakerLMEOpen
lakerLMEOpen
The lakerLMEOpen command opens an existing library mapping file in the
Library Mapping Editor.
Syntax
lakerLMEOpen -file fileName
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file fileName
Specify the library mapping file with its full path.
Examples
lakerLMEOpen -file /local/test/aa.lib
See Also
Library Mapping Editor: File > Open
lakerLME
lakerLMEBack2Top
lakerLMEClose
lakerLMESave
lakerLMESaveAs
lakerLMESave
The lakerLMESave command saves the library mapping file. If the file does
not exist, save it to the laker.rc file.
Syntax
lakerLMESave [-file fileName]
Returns
None
586

K-2015.06

lakerLMESaveAs
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file fileName
Specify the library mapping file with its full path.
Examples
None
See Also
Library Mapping Editor: File > Save
lakerLME
lakerLMEBack2Top
lakerLMEClose
lakerLMEOpen
lakerLMESaveAs
lakerLMESaveAs
The lakerLMESaveAs command saves the library mapping file with another
file name.
Syntax
lakerLMESaveAs
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
None
See Also
Library Mapping Editor: File > Save As
lakerLME
lakerLMEBack2Top
lakerLMEClose
lakerLMEOpen
lakerLMESave

K-2015.06
587

lakerMapPath
lakerMapPath
The lakerMapPath command creates and deletes the mapping path in the
Library Mapping Editor window by the specified -purge and -buildmap
options.
By specifying the -add and -del options, the lakerMapPath command can
also create and delete the mapping path without invoking the Library Mapping
Editor window.
Syntax
Operations in the GUI:
lakerMapPath [-logicName logicName -mapPath mapPath | -purge
0|1 | -buildmap buildmap]
Add or remove the library definition without invoking the GUI:
lakerMapPath [-add|-del] -logicName logicName [-mapPath
mapPath]
Returns
None
Arguments
588
Argument
Description
-add
If specified, create the library mapping path.
-buildmap buildmap
Build all libraries in the directory into mapping path

window (default=current directory).
-del
If specified, delete the library mapping path.
-logicName logicName
Specify the logic name of the mapping path.
-mapPath mapPath
Specify the library of the mapping path.
-purge 0|1
Clear all mapping paths in the GUI and save the results
to the laker.rc file.

K-2015.06

lakerMapPath
Examples
# Example 1
#clear all mapping paths in the GUI
lakerMapPath -purge 1
# Example 2
# build all libraries in directory (/usr/home/work)
# into mapping path
lakerMapPath -buildmap /usr/home/work
# Example 3
# create a mapping path for library (demoLib) on /usr/home/work
lakerMapPath -logicName demoLib -mapPath /usr/home/work/demoLib
# Example 4
# Add a library mapping of library "a1"
lakerMapPath -add -logicName a1 -mapPath /local/test/a1
# Example 5
lakerMapPath -logicName a1 -mapPath /local/test/a1
# Example 6
# Delete a library mapping "a1"
lakerMapPath -del -logicName a1
See Also

K-2015.06
589

lakerMapPath
590

K-2015.06
7
Layout Window
User Interface (GUI) which applied within the Layout window (including the
Schematic Area). In general, each command in these windows has a
corresponding Tcl command for configuration.
The Tcl commands are categorized in the following sections. Tcl commands
and arguments are sorted alphabetically.
Cell Commands
View Commands
Create Commands
Edit Commands
SDL Commands
MCell Commands
Options Commands
Query Commands
EIP Commands
Verification Commands
Placer Commands
Router Commands
Window Commands
Schematic Commands
UDD Commands
DFM Commands

K-2015.06
591
Chapter 7: Layout Window

Cell Commands
Selection Commands
Highlight Schemes
User Entry Functions
Miscellaneous
Cell Commands
This section describes the Tcl commands applied to the Cell commands of the
Layout window. These commands include:
lakerAssocNet
lakerCapture
lakerCapturePNG
lakerCellPro
lakerCheckReference
lakerChgmodeDesign
lakerCloseDesign
lakerDiscardDesign
lakerIPMerge
lakerLoadDesign
lakerOpenDesign
lakerPrintDesign
lakerSaveDesign
lakerSaveAsDesign
lakerSummaryDesign
lakerSynchronize
lakerAssocNet
The lakerAssocNet command associates nets to top level shapes and
instance ports.
592

K-2015.06

Cell Commands
Syntax
lakerAssocNet -fromView viewName [-rptFile reportFileName]
[-tolerance tolerance] [-overwrite 0|1] -layer
layerMappingList
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-fromView
viewName
Specify the view name having LVS or Net Tracer

connection results.
-layer
layerMappingList
Specify the layer mapping list. Each layer mapping

includes the use flag, the layer name of the LVS stage (this
is needed only when -from View lvs is specified), the
layer number in the From View, the purpose number in the
From View, the layer number in the layout view, and the
purpose number in the layout view. If the use flag is 0, that
means that layer is not processed. Otherwise, if the use
flag is 1, that layer is processed.
-overwrite 0|1

1 : Overwrite the original net names in the layout.
0 : Do not overwrite the original net names in the layout.
-rptFile
reportFileName
Specify the file name of the report file.
-tolerance
tolerance
Specify the tolerance to equivalent layers between

fromView and layout view. The default is 0 micron.
Examples
lakerAssocNet -fromView {lvs} -rptFile ./AssocNet.rpt \
-tolerance 0 -overwrite 1 \
-layer { 0 NSD 1 252 46 252 }
{ 0 PSD 1 26 1 26 } \
{ 1 POLY 2 252 2 252 }
{ 1 MET1 3 252 3 252 }
{ 1 MET2 4 252 4 252 }
See Also
Layout Window: Cell > Associate Net

K-2015.06
593

Cell Commands
lakerCapture
The lakerCapture command captures the image of the Layout window pane.
Syntax
lakerCapture -footer footercomment -file filename -Inverse
lakerCapture -printer printerName -type printType -copy
copyNumber -orient orientation -paper paperSize [fitpage]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-copy copyNumber
Specify the number of copies.
-file filename
Save the captured image to a file.
-fitpage
Fit the printout to paper size.
-footer footercomment
Specify the footer comment.
-Inverse
Inverse the image color.
-orient orientation

Valid values: Landscape and Portrait.
-paper paperSize
Specify the paper size.

Valid values: Letter, A4, A3, A2, A1, A0, B, C, D, and
E.
-printer printerName
Specify the printer name.
-type printType
Specify the postscript print type.

Valid values: Level1, and Level2.
Examples
# Specify the file name (test.png) and footer (Sheet1)
# and specify to inverse the image color
lakerCapture -footer Sheet1 -file test.png -Inverse
lakerCapture -printer Jupiter -type Level2 -copy 1 \
-orient Landscape -paper D -fitpage
594

K-2015.06

Cell Commands
See Also
Layout Window: Cell > Capture
lakerCapturePNG
The lakerCapturePNG command captures a PNG image.
Syntax
lakerCapturePNG -file filename
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file filename
Save the captured PNG image to a file.
Examples
lakerCapturePNG -file caplamg
See Also
lakerCapture
lakerCellPro
The lakerCellPro command assigns a string (cell property) to a cell view so
that the LefOut process can refer to the string and dump the information to the
CLASS token.
Syntax
lakerCellPro -property {None -attr None | COVER -attr {None
| BUMP} RING -attr None | BLOCK -attr {None | BLACKBOX}
| PAD -attr {None | INPUT | OUTPUT | INOUT | POWER |
SPACER | AREAIO} | CORE -attr {None | FEEDTHRU | TIEHIGH
| TIELOW | SPACER | ANTENNACELL | WELLTAP} | ENDCAP -attr
{PRE | POST | TOPLEFT | TOPRIGHT | BOTTOMLEFT |
BOTTOMRIGHT} | SITE -attr {coresite | User-defined Site}
| ANTENNAINFO -attr {pinName antennaAreaType antennaArea
[layerName]} | SYMMETRY -attr {X|Y|X Y|Any}} -site
siteName
K-2015.06
595

Cell Commands
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-attr propertyType
Specify the attributes of the property type. If -property

ATTENNAINFO is specified, the ATTENNAINFO
attributes is a list of parameters with this format:
-attr {pinName antennaAreaType
antennaArea [layerName]}
pinName: The pin that has the antenna info.

antennaAreaType: The antenna area type. Valid
values: ANTENNADIFFAREA, and
ANTENNAGATEAREA.
antennaArea: The antenna area. Valid values: a
positive floating number. The default is 0.0.
layerName: Layer name. The layer is not specified
by default. When the layer is not specified, the
antenna area applies to all layers.
-property
propertyName
Specify the name of the property type.

Valid values: None, COVER, RING, BLOCK, PAD, CORE,
ENDCAP, SITE, ATTENNAINFO, and SYMMETRY.
-site siteName

Valid values: coresite, and any user-defined sites
(default=coresite).
Examples
# Example 1
lakerCellPro -property RING -attr None
# Example 2
lakerCellPro -property CORE -attr WELLTAP
# Example 3
lakerCellPro -property ANTENNAINFO \
-attr {I2 ANTENNADIFFAREA 4.8} {F3 ANTENNAGATEAREA 6.0 MET1}
# Example 4
# Antenna diffusion area in pin A2 has two values 4.0 and 4.8
lakerCellPro -property ANTENNAINFO \
-attr {A2 ANTENNADIFFAREA 4.8} {A2 ANTENNADIFFAREA 4.0}
596

K-2015.06

Cell Commands
See Also
dbCellPro
Layout Window: Cell > Cell Type
lakerCheckReference
The lakerCheckReference command checks whether all used master cell
views exist in the current design hierarchy.
Syntax
lakerCheckReference
Returns
None
Examples
lakerCheckReference
See Also
Layout Window: Cell > Check Reference
lakerChgmodeDesign
The lakerChgmodeDesign command changes the editing mode of the
activated design.
Syntax
lakerChgmodeDesign
Returns
None
Examples
# Change the editing mode of the activated design
lakerChgmodeDesign
See Also
Layout Window: Cell > Change to Edit/ReadOnly Mode

K-2015.06
597

Cell Commands
lakerCloseDesign
The lakerCloseDesign command closes the activated design.
Syntax
lakerCloseDesign
Returns
None
Examples
# Example 1
# Close the activated design
lakerCloseDesign
See Also
Layout Window: Cell > Close
lakerDiscardDesign
The lakerDiscardDesign command discards the activated design and
restores the original design.
Syntax
lakerDiscardDesign
Returns
None
Examples
# Discard the activated design and restore the original design
lakerDiscardDesign
See Also
Layout Window: Cell > Discard Edit
lakerIPMerge
The lakerIPMerge command returns 1 if the specified masters can be
searched and replaced.
598

K-2015.06

Cell Commands
Syntax
lakerIPMerge [-logFile 0|1] [-logFileName fileName] [skipEmptyCell 0|1] [-gdsOut 0|1] [-gdsOutFileName
fileName] [-changedMasters masterList]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-changedMasters
masterList
Record the changed masters of the design.
-gdsOut 0|1

1 : Export the merged results to a stream file.
0 : Do not export the merged results to a stream file.
-gdsOutFileName
fileName
Specify the file name for the output stream file.
-logFile 0|1

1 : Save messages to a log file.
0 : Do not save messages to a log file.
-logFileName
fileName
Specify the file name for the log file.
-skipEmptyCell 0|1

1 : Skip empty cells when exporting the merged results.
0 : Keep empty cells when exporting the merged results.
Examples
# Example 1
# Save the results to IPMergeResult.log and export the results to
# the stream file, IPMergeResult.gz
lakerIPMerge -logFile 1 -logFileName IPMergeResult \
-skipEmptyCell 1 -gdsOut 1 -gdsOutFileName IPMergeResult.gz
# Example 2
# Display AND2X1, AND2X2 and AND2X4 in the Master Cell List table
lakerIPMerge -changedMasters {{AND2X1 s1423_lef AND2X1} \
{AND2X2 s1423_lef AND2X2} {AND2X4 s1423_lef AND2X4}}

K-2015.06
599

Cell Commands
See Also
Layout Window: Cell > IP Merge
lakerLoadDesign
The lakerLoadDesign command returns 1 if the design data (with the
specified file path and opening mode) can be loaded into the current layout
window.
Syntax
lakerLoadDesign -lib libName -cell cellName [-mode mode] [view viewName] [-restorenum restoreNum]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
-lib libName
-mode mode
Specify an opening mode.

-view viewName
Specify the view type of the opened cell.

(default=layout).
-restorenum
restoreNum
Examples
# Example 1
# Load the layout view of cell (ram) in the library (ram)
lakerLoadDesign -lib ram -cell ram -mode edit
# Example 2
# Load the previous version of layout view of cell (ram)
# in the library (ram)
lakerLoadDesign -lib ram -cell ram -mode edit -restorenum 1
600

K-2015.06

Cell Commands
See Also
Layout Window: Cell > Load
lakerOpenDesign
Refer to the lakerOpenDesign command in the Home Page: File Commands
section for more details.
lakerPrintDesign
The lakerPrintDesign command prints the layout design.
Syntax
lakerPrintDesign [-printerName printerName] [-orient
orientation] [-paperSize paperSize] [-copy printCopy] [color printColor] [-toFile printToFile] [-fileName
fileName] [-header paperHeader] [-footer paperFooter] [magni magnification] [-view viewName] [-layerPattern 0|1]
[-ruler 0|1] [-type Type] [-filter filterValue]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-color printColor
Set the output format in color.
-copy printCopy
Specify the number of copies (default=1).
-fileName fileName

K-2015.06
601

Cell Commands
Argument
Description
-filter filterValue
Specify the print quality.

Valid values: -1, 0, and 1 (default=0).
-1 : Print at the highest resolution. This is not
recommended for layouts with an extremely large
scale because this prints all layout objects (no layout
objects are filtered) in the printout.
0 : Print at a moderate resolution. This can slow
down the printing process, and some layout objects
might be filtered.
1 : Print at a lower resolution in a short time.
-footer paperFooter
Print the footer string.
-header paperHeader
Print the header string.
-layerPattern 0|1

1 : Print the layer patterns.
0 : Do not print the layer patterns.
-magni magnification
View size is printed compared with a real chip size.

-orient orientation
Specify the paper orientation.

Valid values: Portrait and Landscape
(default=Landscape).
-paperSize paperSize

Valid values: Letter, Legal, A4, A3, A2, A1, A0, B,
C, D, E, and User-defined (default=A4).
-printerName printerName Specify the printer name.
602
-ruler 0|1
Print the ruler lines.

-toFile printToFile
Set the output to file or printer.
-type Type
Specify the print file type.

Valid values: PS2, PS1, and GL2 (default=PS2).

K-2015.06

Cell Commands
Argument
Description
-view viewName
Print the whole chip or screen area.

Valid values: screen, and cell
(default=cell).screen : Print the viewing area on
screen (a part of the cell view).
cell : Print the full cell view (the whole chip).
Examples
# Example 1
lakerPrintDesign -paper A4 -header "%L, %C, %M, %T, %H" \
-footer "%U" -file "Auto.ps" -type GL2 \
-filter 0 -view screen
# Example 2
lakerPrintDesign -orient portrait -paper Letter \
-file 32v3.ps -type PS2 -filter -1
See Also
Layout Window: Cell > Print Layout
Layout Window: Cell > Print Schematic
lakerSaveDesign
The lakerSaveDesign command saves the activated design to the
database.
Syntax
lakerSaveDesign [-autosave]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-autosave
Create the autosave file.
Examples
# Example 1
# save the activated design to database
lakerSaveDesign

K-2015.06
603

Cell Commands
# Example 2
# save the activated design to an autosave file
lakerSaveDesign -autosave
tclExec cp ./A.lib++/a/layout.autosave .
See Also
Layout Window: Cell > Save
lakerSaveAsDesign
The lakerSaveAsDesign command saves the activated design to another
cell.
Syntax
lakerSaveAsDesign -cell cellName [-lib libName] [IgnoreLogicSchematicView 0|1] [-SavemaskLayoutOnly 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName

IgnoreLogicSchematicView 1 : Enable the Ignore Logic/Schematic Views
0|1
option.
0 : Disable the Ignore Logic/Schematic Views
option.
604
-lib libName
Specify the library database (default=the current

library).
-SavemaskLayoutOnly 0|1

1 : Do not save the logic and schematic views of the
selected cell.
0 : Save the selected cell with all of its existing
views.

K-2015.06

Cell Commands
Examples
# Example 1
# Save the activated design to another cell (demo)
# in the library (demo)
lakerSaveAsDesign -lib demo -cell demo
# Example 2
# Save the activated design to another cell (demo) in the
# library (demo)
# without logic/schematic views
lakerSaveAsDesign -lib demo -cell demo \
-IgnoreLogicSchematicView 1
See Also
dbSaveCV
Layout Window: Cell > Save As
lakerSummaryDesign
The lakerSummaryDesign command displays the summary of the design.
Syntax
lakerSummaryDesign [-mode modeName [-level levelNum]] [logFile logFileName]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-level levelNum
Specify the design hierarchy level.

-logFile logFileName
Specify the summary file in ASCII format.
-mode modeName
Specify the mode to be used to get the summary.

Valid values: full and select (default=full).
Examples
# Example 1
# summary for default mode (full) and default level (0)
lakerSummaryDesign

K-2015.06
605

View Commands
# Example 2
# summary for default mode (full) and maximum level (49)
lakerSummaryDesign -mode full -level 49
# Example 3
lakerSummaryDesign -mode select
# Example 4
lakerSummaryDesign -logFile /tmp/Laker/summary.log
See Also
Layout Window: Cell > Summary
lakerSynchronize
The lakerSynchronize command synchronizes and updates the cell view
content in several processes if any of the cell views opened in several
processes are modified.
Syntax
lakerSynchronize
Returns
None
Examples
# Reload data from database
lakerSynchronize
See Also
Layout Window: Cell > Synchronize
View Commands
This section describes the Tcl commands applied to the View commands of the
Layout window. These commands includes:
606
lakerBackwardView
lakerDelAllAreaDsp
lakerDelAreaDsp

K-2015.06

View Commands
lakerFitSelObj
lakerForwardView
lakerLastView
lakerMaxViewLevel
lakerMinViewLevel
lakerPanDown
lakerPanLeft
lakerPanRight
lakerPanUp
lakerPanXY
lakerRedraw
lakerSetAbsMode
lakerSetAreaDsp
lakerSetBothViewMode
lakerSetLayoutMode
lakerViewInsAbs
lakerViewInsLayout
lakerViewInsNormal
lakerViewLevel
lakerViewLevelDec
lakerViewLevelInc
lakerViewMark
lakerViewPinLabelNet
lakerViewPinLabelOff
lakerViewPinLabelPort
lakerViewTopSysPin
lakerZoomAll
lakerZoomIn

K-2015.06
607

View Commands
lakerZoomInByArea
lakerZoomOut
lakerBackwardView
The lakerBackwardView command changes to the previous view.
Syntax
lakerBackwardView
Returns
None
Examples
# Example 1
# Change to the previous view
lakerBackwardView
See Also
Layout Window: View > Cycle Last View > Backward View
lakerDelAllAreaDsp
The lakerDelAllAreaDsp command deletes all area displays.
Syntax
lakerDelAllAreaDsp
Returns
None
Examples
# Example 1
# Clean all area displays
lakerDelAllAreaDsp
See Also
Layout Window: View > Area Display > Delete All Areas
608

K-2015.06

View Commands
lakerDelAreaDsp
The lakerDelAreaDsp command deletes the area display at the specified
point.
Syntax
lakerDelAreaDsp -point (x0,y0)
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-point (x0,y0)
x0 specifies a position value for the x coordinate point while

y0 specifies the value for the y coordinate point.
Examples
# Example 1
# Remove the area display on point (100,100)
lakerDelAreaDsp -point (100,100)
See Also
Layout Window: View > Area Display > Delete Area Display
lakerFitSelObj
The lakerFitSelObj command zooms in the view area to the bounding box
of the selected objects.
Syntax
lakerFitSelObj
Returns
None
Examples
# Example 1
# Zoom in the view area to the bounding box of the selected objects
lakerFitSelObj

K-2015.06
609

View Commands
See Also
Layout Window: View > Fit Selected Obj
lakerForwardView
The lakerForwardView command changes to the next view.
Syntax
lakerForwardView
Returns
None
Examples
# Example 1
# Change to the next view
lakerForwardView
See Also
Layout Window: View > Cycle Last View > Forward View
lakerLastView
The lakerLastView command changes the current view area to the last view
area.
Syntax
lakerLastView
Returns
None
Examples
# Example 1
# Switch to the last view area
lakerLastView
See Also
Layout Window: View > Last View
610

K-2015.06

View Commands
lakerMaxViewLevel
The lakerMaxViewLevel command sets the view level to maximum (49) to
view all levels of hierarchial design.
Syntax
lakerMaxViewLevel
Returns
None
Examples
# Example 1
# Set the view level to 49
lakerMaxViewLevel
See Also
Layout Window: View > View Level > Max View Level
lakerMinViewLevel
The lakerMinViewLevel command sets the view level to the minimum (0) to
view the top level of hierarchial design.
Syntax
lakerMinViewLevel
Returns
None
Examples
# Example 1
lakerMinViewLevel
See Also
Layout Window: View > View Level > Min View Level

K-2015.06
611

View Commands
lakerPanDown
By following the specified ratio, the lakerPanDown command pans the current
view area downward the current window or the view box boundary.
Syntax
lakerPanDown [-ratio ratio]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-ratio ratio
Specify the size of the scrolled view box (default=2).

0: Scroll to the bottom of the view box boundary.
n: 1/n of the view box for each scrolled size.
Examples
# Example 1
# Pan 1/4 down of current view area to the current window
lakerPanDown -ratio 4
# Example 2
# Pan to the bottom of the view box boundary
lakerPanDown -ratio 0
See Also
Layout Window: View > Pan
lakerPanLeft
By following the specified ratio, the lakerPanLeft command pans the current
view area to the left of the current window or the view box boundary.
Syntax
lakerPanLeft [-ratio ratio]
Returns
None
612

K-2015.06

View Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-ratio ratio

Examples
# Example 1
# Pan 1/4 left of current view area to the current window
lakerPanLeft -ratio 4
# Example 2
# Pan to the left of the view box boundary
lakerPanLeft -ratio 0
See Also
lakerPanRight
By following the specified ratio, the lakerPanRight command pans the
current view area to the right of the current window or the view box boundary.
Syntax
lakerPanRight [-ratio ratio]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-ratio ratio

Examples
# Example 1
# Pan 1/4 right of current view area to the current window
lakerPanRight -ratio 4

K-2015.06
613

View Commands
# Example 2
# Pan to the right of the view box boundary
lakerPanRight -ratio 0
See Also
lakerPanUp
By following the specified ratio, the lakerPanUp command pans the current
view area upward the current window or the view box boundary.
Syntax
lakerPanUp [-ratio ratio]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-ratio ratio

0: Scroll to the top of the view box boundary.
Examples
# Example 1
# Pan 1/4 up of current view area to the current window
lakerPanUp -ratio 4
# Example 2
# Pan to the top of the view box boundary
lakerPanUp -ratio 0
See Also
lakerPanXY
The lakerPanXY command pans the current view area to the specified point
or place a mark on the specified point.
614

K-2015.06

View Commands
Syntax
lakerPanXY [-load loadFile | -save saveFile | -disall 0|1 |
-delall 0|1 | -changeall 0|1 | -point (x0,y0) [-mark 0|1]
[-delmark 0|1] [-dismark 0|1] [-zoomsize zoomSize] [snapcursor 0|1] ]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-changeall 0|1

1 : Enable all marks.
0 : Disable all marks.
-delall 0|1

1 : Delete all marks.
0 : Keep all marks.
-delmark 0|1

1 : Delete the mark.
0 : Keep the mark.
-disall 0|1

1 : Disable all marks.
0 : Enable all marks.
-dismark 0|1

1 : Disable the mark.
0 : Enable the mark.
-load loadFile
Load mark data from file.
-mark 0|1

1 : Set the mark.
0 : Do not set the mark.
-point (x0,y0)
x0 specifies a position value for the x coordinate point

while y0 specifies the value for the y coordinate point.
-save saveFile
Save mark data to file.

K-2015.06
615

View Commands
Argument
Description
-snapcursor 0|1

1 : Snap the cursor to the desired point.
0 : Do not snap the cursor to the desired point.
-zoomsize zoomSize
Zoom in to the specified scale.

Examples
# Example 1
# Load a mark data from demofile.mark
lakerPanXY -load demofile.mark
# Example 2
# Save the current mark data to demofile.mark
lakerPanXY -save demofile.mark
# Example 3
# Disable all marks
lakerPanXY -disall 1
# Example 4
# Delete all marks
lakerPanXY -changeall 1
# Example 5
# Place a mark on point (100,100)
lakerPanXY -point (100,100) -mark 1
# Example 6
# Disable the mark of point (100,100)
lakerPanXY -point (100,100) -dismark 1
# Example 7
# Delete the mark of point (100,100)
lakerPanXY -point (100,100) -delmark 1
# Example 8
# Pan to the point (100,100) and
# change its view box as (95,95) (105,105)
lakerPanXY -point (100,100) -zoomsize 5
# Example 9
# Set the desired point (-3.615,2.77) and snap cursor to this point
lakerPanXY -point (-3.615,2.77) -snapcursor 1
See Also
616

K-2015.06

View Commands
lakerRedraw
The lakerRedraw command redraws the current viewing area.
Syntax
lakerRedraw
Returns
None
Examples
# Redraw the current viewing area
lakerRedraw
See Also
Layout Window: View > Redraw
lakerSetAbsMode
The lakerSetAbsMode command sets the viewing mode of the Layout
window to the Abstract Mode.
Syntax
lakerSetAbsMode
Returns
None
Examples
lakerSetAbsMode
See Also
Layout Window: View > View Mode > Abstract View
lakerSetAreaDsp
The lakerSetAreaDsp command sets the area display bounding box and its
view level.

K-2015.06
617

View Commands
Syntax
lakerSetAreaDsp -lowerLeft (x0,y0) -upperRight (x1,y1) [StartViewLevel StartViewLevel] [-ViewLevel ViewLevel]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lowerLeft (x0,y0)

-StartViewLevel
StartViewLevel
Start of the view level in this area.

-upperRight (x1,y1)

-ViewLevel
ViewLevel
End of the hierarchical view level in this area.

The range of the maximum hierarchical view level is
from 0 to 49. The maximum non-negative integer value
is 49.
Examples
# set the area display on area (100,100) (110,110)
# and its view level from 0 to 49
lakerSetAreaDsp -lowerLeft (100,100) -upperRight (110,110)
-StartViewLevel 0 -ViewLevel 10
See Also
Layout Window: View > Area Display > Set Area Display
The lakerSetBothViewMode command sets the viewing mode of the layout
window to the Layout and Abstract Mode.
Syntax
618

K-2015.06

View Commands
Returns
None
Examples
See Also
Layout Window: View > View Mode > Both View
lakerSetLayoutMode
The lakerSetLayoutMode command sets the viewing mode of the layout
window to the Layout Mode.
Syntax
lakerSetLayoutMode
Returns
None
Examples
lakerSetLayoutMode
See Also
lakerOpenDesign
lakerChgmodeDesign
Layout Window: View > View Mode > Layout Mode
lakerViewInsAbs
The lakerViewInsAbs command sets the view type of the selected instance
to the abstract view.
Syntax
lakerViewInsAbs
Returns
None
Examples
lakerViewInsAbs

K-2015.06
619

View Commands
See Also
Layout Window: View > View Instance > Abstract View
lakerViewInsLayout
The lakerViewInsLayout command sets the view type of the selected
instance to the layout view.
Syntax
lakerViewInsLayout
Returns
None
Examples
lakerViewInsLayout
See Also
Layout Window: View > View Instance > Layout View
lakerViewInsNormal
The lakerViewInsNormal command sets the view type of the selected
instance to the original view.
Syntax
lakerViewInsNormal
Returns
None
Examples
lakerViewInsNormal
See Also
Layout Window: View > View Instance > Normal
620

K-2015.06

View Commands
lakerViewLevel
The lakerViewLevel command sets the view level by following the specified
value.
Syntax
lakerViewLevel -level level [-startlevel startlevel]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-level level
Specify the value of the view level.

-startlevel startlevel
Specify the starting value of the view level.

Examples
# Example 1
# Set the view level from 0 to 5
lakerViewLevel -startlevel 0 -level 5
See Also
Layout Window: View > View Level > View Level
lakerViewLevelDec
The lakerViewLevelDec command decreases the view level in the
hierarchial design by one.
Syntax
lakerViewLevelDec
Returns
None
Examples
# Example 1
# Decrease on current view level
lakerViewLevelDec

K-2015.06
621

View Commands
See Also
Layout Window: View > View Level > View Level-1
lakerViewLevelInc
The lakerViewLevelInc command increases the view level in the
hierarchial design by one.
Syntax
lakerViewLevelInc
Returns
None
Examples
# Example 1
# Increase one current view level
lakerViewLevelInc
See Also
Layout Window: View > View Level > View Level+1
lakerViewMark
The lakerViewMark command records the specified viewing area to a *.mark
file.
Syntax
lakerViewMark [ -load loadFile | -save saveFile | -del
delitem | -delall 0|1 | -point (x1,y1)(x2,y2) [ -view 0|1
| -addkey keystr]]
Returns
None
Arguments
622
Argument
Description
-load loadFile
Load the view mark data from a file.
-save saveFile
Save the view mark data to a file.

K-2015.06

View Commands
Argument
Description
-delall 0|1

1 : Delete all view marks.
0 : Keep all view marks.
-del delItem
Delete the view mark.
(x1,y1) specifies the lower left point of the viewing

area while (x2,y2) specifies the upper right point.
-view 0|1

1 : Enable the zoom area.
0 : Disable the zoom area.
-addkey keystr
Add the viewing area and keystr as its comment.
Examples
# Example 1
# Load the view marks from the demo.mark file
lakerViewMark -load demo.mark
# Example 2
# Save the current view marks to the demo.mark file
lakerViewMark -save demo.mark
# Example 3
# Delete all marks
lakerViewMark -delall 1
# Example 4
# Delete the View_area1 view mark
lakerViewMark -del View_area1
# Example 5
# Add to View_area1 view area (0,0)(100,100) to view mark notes
lakerViewMark -point (0,0)(100,100) -addkey View_area1
# Example 6
# Zoom to the (0,0)(100,100) area
lakerViewMark -point (0,0)(100,100) -view 1
See Also
Layout Window: View > View Mark

K-2015.06
623

View Commands
The lakerViewPinLabelNet command sets the display mode of pin labels
to Net Name.
Syntax
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
See Also
Layout Window: View > View Pin > View Pin Label > Net Name
The lakerViewPinLabelOff command sets the display mode of pin labels
to Off.
Syntax
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
See Also
Layout Window: View > View Pin > View Pin Label > Off
624

K-2015.06

View Commands
The lakerViewPinLabelPort command sets the display mode of pin labels
to Port Name.
Syntax
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
See Also
Layout Window: View > View Pin > View Pin Label > Port Name
lakerViewTopSysPin
The lakerViewTopSysPin command sets the display mode of top system
pins in the layout.
Syntax
lakerViewTopSysPin [-mode 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode 0|1

1 : Show top system pins.
0 : Hide top system pins.
Examples
lakerViewTopSysPin

K-2015.06
625

View Commands
See Also
Layout Window: View > View Pin > View Top System Pin
lakerZoomAll
The lakerZoomAll command fits the current design in the layout window.
Syntax
lakerZoomAll
Returns
None
Examples
# Example 1
# Fit the current design in the layout window
lakerZoomAll
See Also
Layout Window: View > Zoom All
lakerZoomIn
The lakerZoomIn command zooms in the view area by 1/2 of the active
layout window.
Syntax
lakerZoomIn [-ratio ratio]
Returns
None
Arguments
626
Argument
Description
-ratio ratio
Specify a value to determine the size of the view area. When

specified, the view area is zoomed in by 1/<value> of the
active layout window.
Valid value: a positive integer, greater than or equal to 2.

K-2015.06

View Commands
Examples
# Example 1
# Zoom in the view area by 1/2 of the active layout window
lakerZoomIn
See Also
Layout Window: View > Zoom In
lakerZoomInByArea
The lakerZoomInByArea command zooms to a desired viewing area by
specifying an area in the active layout window.
Syntax
lakerZoomInByArea -point (x1,y1) (x2,y2) [-refTop level]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-point
(x1,y1) (x2,y2)
(x1,y1) specifies the lower left point of the zoomIn area

while (x2,y2) specifies the upper right point.
-refTop level
Specify the design hierarchy level to be referenced.

Valid value: an integer, 0-49 (default=0).
This argument only takes effect in the EIP (Descend)
mode. It automatically transforms the input cooridinate
based on the specified hierarchy level.
Examples
# Example 1
# Zoom to the desired viewing area (100,100) (200,200)
lakerZoomInByArea -point (100,100) (200,200)
# Example 2
lakerZoomInByArea -point (100,100) (200,200) -refTop 2
See Also
Layout Window: View > Area Zoom

K-2015.06
627

Create Commands
lakerZoomOut
The lakerZoomOut command zooms out the view area by 1/2 of the active
layout window.
Syntax
lakerZoomOut [-ratio ratio]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-ratio ratio
Specify a value to determine the size of the view area. When

specified, the view area is zoomed out by 1/<value> of the
active layout window.
Valid value: a positive integer, greater than or equal to 2.
Examples
# Example 1
# Zoom out the view area by 1/2 of the active layout window
lakerZoomOut
See Also
Layout Window: View > Zoom Out
Create Commands
This section describes the Tcl commands applied to the Create commands of
the Layout window. These commands include:
628
lakerCreateBus
lakerCreateCapacitor
lakerCreateCircle
lakerCreateContact
lakerCreateDoughnut
lakerCreateEllipse

K-2015.06

Create Commands
lakerCreateGuardRing
lakerCreateInstance
lakerCreateMetalSlot
lakerCreatePath
lakerCreatePickedDevice
lakerCreatePin
lakerCreatePoly
lakerCreateRect
lakerCreateResistor
lakerCreateStackedPath
lakerCreateText
lakerCreateTransistor
lakerDimensionMark
lakerGenText
lakerRulerLabel
lakerCreateBus
The lakerCreateBus command draw a bus.
Syntax
lakerCreateBus -point point (x0,y0)...(xn,yn) -style
pathStyle -pattern {number {{width [layer purpose]
colorName 0|1} ...} {spacing ...} }
Returns
None

K-2015.06
629

Create Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-pattern {number
{{width [layer purpose]
{colorName 0|1}} ...}
{spacing ...} }
Specify the number of buses and the repeated pattern of

the layer (width), color attributes, and spacing as follows:
number: Specifies the number of buses.

width: Specifies the width of the drawing path.
layer: Specifies the layer of the drawing path
(default=current).
purpose: Specifies the purpose of the layer
(default=drawing).
colorName: Specifies the color of the shape.
0|1: Specifies the shapes lock status.
spacing: Specifies the spacing between paths.
-point point
(x0,y0)...(xn,yn)
x0...xn specify the x coordinate for the point array

while y0...yn specify the y coordinate.
-style pathStyle
Specify the path style.

Variable -beginExt value -endExt value
(default=Truncate).
Examples
# Example 1
lakerCreateBus -point \
(-11.705,11.26) (-2.535,11.26) (-2.535,7.035)\
-style Extend -pattern \
{10 {0.1 {0.1 OD} {0.5 MET1 drawing} {0.2 VIA2} 0.3} {0.1 0.2 0.5}}
# Example 2
lakerCreateBus -point (0.185,1.01) (7.56,1.01) \
(7.56,7.56) (12.67,7.56) -pattern \
{10 {0.1 {0.1 OD} {0.5 MET1 drawing} {0.2 VIA2} 0.3} {0.1 0.2 0.5}}
See Also
Layout Window: Create > Bus
lakerCreateCapacitor
The lakerCreateCapacitor command returns a dbFigId if the specified
capacitor can be created.
630

K-2015.06

Create Commands
Syntax
lakerCreateCapacitor -device deviceName -point (x0,y0) value value [-contType contType [-metEncCo metEncCo metWidth metWidth -unitDist unitDist]] [-inst instName]
[-orient orientation] [-magni magnification] [-pattern
pattern] [-cutDist cutDist] [-originOffset xOffset
yOffset] [-dummyCapValue dummyCapValue] [-xRepeat
xRepeat] [-yRepeat yRepeat] [-unitSpaceX unitSpaceX] [unitSpaceY unitSpaceY] [-unitValue unitValue] [unitWidth unitWidth] [-useMaskResolution 0|1] [-xCoSpace
spacing_in_x_direction] [-yCoSpace
spacing_in_y_direction]
Returns
A dbFigId if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-contactMode
contact_mode
Specify the contact mode.

Valid values: normal, and cross (default=normal).
-contType contType
Specify the contact type.

Valid values: maximum or contactArray
(default=maximum).
maximum : Insert a maximum number of
contacts.contactArray : Insert a contact array with
the number of columns and rows, such as
contactArray [column_number]
[row_number]. This is only valid for square-type
capacitors.
-cutDist cutDist
Cut distance for capacitor corners.

-device deviceName
Specify the name of capacitor devices.
-dummyCapValue
dummyCapValue
Specify the capacitance (in pF) of dummy capacitors.
-inst instName
Specify the instance name (default=system-assigned).


K-2015.06
631

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-metEncCo metEncCo Specify the enclosure distance between the metal and
contact layers (for Cross contact mode only).
632
-metWidth metWidth
Specify the width of Metal layer shapes that connect

cross type contacts (for Cross contact mode only).
-orient orientation
Specify the orientation of capacitors.

-originOffset
xOffset yOffset
xOffset is the offset value from the point x0 while

yOffset is the offset value from the point y0.
The origin of MCell instances is calculated by
(x0+xOffset, y0+yOffset).
-pattern pattern
Specify the capacitor pattern.

Valid values: patternA, patternB, patternC, and
patternD (default=patternA).
-point (x0,y0)

-unitDist unitDist
Specify the unit distance of the cross contact array

structure (for Cross contact mode only).
-unitSpaceX
unitSpaceX
Specify the horizontal spacing between unit capacitors.

-unitSpaceY
unitSpaceY
Specify the vertical spacing between unit capacitors.

-unitValue
unitValue
Specify the unit capacitance in pF.

-unitWidth
unitWidth
Specify the width (in microns) of unit capacitors.

-useMaskResolution
0|1

1 : Use the Mask/General resolution.
0 : Use the MCell resolution.

K-2015.06

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-value value
Specify the capacitor value. The equation is defined in

the technology file.
-width width
Specify the width of capacitors.
-xCoSpace
Specify the contact spacing in X direction when the

contact type is contactArray or maximum. The
spacing_in_x_direction spacing_in_x_direction is in user units.
-xRepeat xRepeat
Specify the number of capacitors in x-direction.

-yCoSpace
Specify the contact spacing in Y direction when the

spacing_in_y_direction spacing_in_y_direction is in user units.
-yRepeat yRepeat
Specify the number of capacitors in y-direction.

Examples
# Example 1
# The origin of this capacitor is (23.76,-11.41)
lakerCreateCapacitor -point (23.26,-11.91) \
-originOffset 0.5 0.5 -device PCAP -value 100.0 \
-metEncCo 0.8 -unitDist 5.0 -metWidth 1.2 -pattern patternB
# Example 2
# Create 2x1 unit capacitors with dummy capacitors. Each unit is
# 1.0pF, distance between units is 1 micron and dummy is 0.5pF.
lakerCreateCapacitor -point (147.3,-146.725) -device PCAP \
-metEncCo 0.35 -unitDist 2.000000 -metWidth 0.5 \
-pattern patternA -xRepeat 2 -yRepeat 1 -unitValue 1.0 \
-unitSpaceX 1.0 -unitSpaceY 1.0 -dummyCapValue 0.5
# Example 3
# Same as Example 2 but no dummy capacitors
lakerCreateCapacitor -point (147.3,-146.725) -device PCAP \
-unitSpaceX 1.0 -unitSpaceY 1.0

K-2015.06
633

Create Commands
# Example 4
# Create an PCAP capacitor with patternA type, and which
# has 10x10 contacts with spacing in X direction 1.0 and spacing
# in Y direction 1.5 on CAP1 layer. The spacing of contacts on CAP2
# layer is the maximum of spacing_in_x_direction and spacing
# in_y_direction.
lakerCreateCapacitor -point (-2.62,-9.64) -useMaskResolution 0 \
-device PCAP -value 36.903320 -width 10.000000 -cutDist 1.0 \
-pattern patternA -contactType contactArray 10 10 \
-xConSpace 1.0 -yConSpace 1.5
See Also
Layout Window: Create > Capacitor
lakerCreateCircle
The lakerCreateCircle command returns a dbFigId if the specified circle
Syntax
lakerCreateCircle -point (x0,y0) -radius radius [-layerName
layerName [-purpose purpose]] [-color colorName] [-lock
0|1]
Returns
Arguments
634
Argument
Description
-colorName colorName
Specify the color name.

Valid value: a string.
-layerName
layerName
Specify the layer name (default=the active layer).
-lock 0|1

1 : Lock the color of the shape.
0 : Unlock the color of the shape.
-point (x0,y0)
x0 specifies a center value for the x coordinate point


K-2015.06

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-purpose purpose
Specify the purpose name (default=drawing).
-radius radius
Specify the radius of the circle.
Examples
lakerCreateCircle -layerName poly -purpose drawing \
-point (0,0) -radius 10.5
See Also
Layout Window: Create > Conics > Circle
lakerCreateContact
The lakerCreateContact command returns a dbFigId if the specified
contact device can be created.
Syntax
To create contact in a regular way:
lakerCreateContact -device deviceName -point (x0,y0) -width
width -length length -xSpace xSpace -ySpace ySpace xLay1Enc xLay1Enc -yLay1Enc yLay1Enc -xLay2Enc xLay2Enc
-yLay2Enc yLay2Enc [-xRepeat xRepeat] [-yRepeat
yRepeat][-inst instName] [-orient orientation] [originOffset xOffset yOffset] [-viaGroup mode] [-param
parameters] [-updateAs 0|1] [-autoPoint (x1,y1) (x2,y2)]
[-sameNetOnly 0|1] [-sameMetWidth 0|1] [-split 0|1] [nonOverlapVia 0|1] [-routeStatus routeStatus] [routeParam attributeList] [-routeType routeType]
To create auto contact in the route library:
lakerCreateContact [-autoPoint (x1,y1) (x2,y2) [-fill 0|1]
[-sameMetWidth 0|1] [[-atLeastOne 0|1] | [-minContact
contNumber] [-direction direction] [-minEnclosureSet
0|1] [-align justification]] [-contMode contMode] [autoContNum autoContNum] [-routeStatus routeStatus] [layerSeparateStackVia layerName [purposeName]] [routeParam attributeList] [-routeType routeType]]
Returns

K-2015.06
635

Create Commands
Arguments
636
Argument
Description
-align justification
Specify the justification for minimum contact creation.

LowerCenter, UpperRight, CenterRight, and
-autoContNum
autoContNum
Specify the number of contacts to be created in the

Auto Contact mode.
Valid values: maximum and single
(default=maximum).
-autoPoint
(x1,y1) (x2,y2)
(x1,y1) (x2,y2) indicate the dragging rectangle

when creating contacts automatically.
-atLeastOne 0|1

This argument is used for the Auto Contact mode
only.
1: Generate contacts on the overlapping area
regardless of the area width.
0: No contact is generated if the area is too small to
contain a contact.
-contMode
contMode
Specify the relation of shapes for cut layers.

Valid values: centerAlign and maximum
(default=maximum).
centerAlign : The center of the cut layer is
aligned.
maximum : Each cut layer is independent and the
number of rows/columns for each cut layer is as large
as possible.
-device
deviceName
Specify the name of contact devices. The device

name can be StackVia for stack vias, or
viaStacking for via stackings.
Specify a direction for minimum contact creation.

Valid values: horizontal and vertical
(default=horizontal).

K-2015.06

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-fill 0|1
This argument is used for auto contact mode only.

1 : Enable the Fill Overlapped Metal option.
0 : Disable the Fill Overlapped Metal option.
-inst instName
Specify the instance name (default=systemassigned).
-layerSeparateStackVia
layerName
[purposeName]
Specify the layer to separate a stack via by assigning

layerName [purposeName], where
purposeName is optional. The default purpose
name is drawing.
-length length
Specify the cutting length of contacts.
-minContact
contNumber
Specify the number of contacts to be generated when

the overlapped metal area or the selected area is
smaller than the contact area.
This argument is used for the Auto Contact mode and
it works for rectangular overlapped areas only. If it is
specified, -atLeastOne is ignored.
-minEnclosureSet 0|1

1 : Enable the Min Enclosure Set option.
0 : Disable the Min Enclosure Set option.
-nonOverlapVia 0|1

1 : Allow non-overlapping contacts/vias.
0 : Allow overlapping contacts/vias.
-orient orientation

-originOffset
xOffset yOffset


K-2015.06
637

Create Commands
638
Argument
Description
-param parameters
Specify the parameter list. Each parameter includes

the device name, the number of columns, the number
of rows, the contact width, the contact length, the
align type (m for maximum type), optional parameters
for the width and height of the bottom layer, the
horizontal spacing between contact layers, the
vertical spacing between contact layers, the
horizontal enclosure distance between the contact
layer and the first connected layer, the vertical
enclosure distance between the contact layer and the
first connected layer, the horizontal enclosure
distance between the contact layer and the second
connected layer, the vertical enclosure distance
between the contact layer and the second connected
layer, the align type (c for align center, other for no
align center), the horizontal distance between the
leftmost contacts center of the current contact layer
and the first contact layer, the vertical distance
between the leftmost contact's center of the current
contact layer and the first contact layer.
-point (x0,y0)
x0 specifies a position value for the x coordinate

point while y0 specifies the value for the y coordinate
point.
-routeParam
attributeList
Specify the list of attributes for the modified element

of route objects. The format is {elementIndex
{attrKey attrValue} ...}. Some attributes for
path and via elements are illustrated in
lakerAttribute.
-routeType
routeType
Specify the route type.
-sameMetWidth 0|1

1 : Force each metal layer to be the same size.
0 : Do not force each metal layer to be the same size.
Valid values: none, ring, padRing, blockRing,

stripe, followPin, IOWire, coreWire, and
blockWire (default=none).

K-2015.06

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-sameNetOnly 0|1

1: Generate contacts for the overlapped area with the
same net.
0: Generate contacts on all overlapped areas.
-split 0|1

1 : Enable the Split Contact Device option.
0 : Disable the Split Contact Device option.
-updateAs 0|1
This argument is used for manual create mode only.

1: Set CreateContactUpdateAs=TRUE and save
the setting to the laker.rc resource file.
0: Set CreateContactUpdateAs=FALSE and save
the setting to the laker.rc resource file.
-viaGroup mode
Specify the via group for auto contact creation.

Valid values: MCell, and RouteVia.
If -viaGroup MCell is specified and the MCell
contact device definition exists in the technology file,
contacts are created based on the MCell contact
device definition.
If -viaGroup RouteVia is specified and the
standard via definition exists in the technology file,
contacts are created based on the standard via
definition.
-width width
Specify the cutting width of contacts.
-xLay1Enc
xLay1Enc
Specify the horizontal enclosure distance between

the contact layer and the first connected layer.
-xLay2Enc
xLay2Enc

the contact layer and the second connected layer.
-xRepeat xRepeat
Specify the number of columns for contact arrays.

-xSpace xSpace
Specify the horizontal spacing between contact

layers.

K-2015.06
639

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-yLay1Enc
yLay1Enc
Specify the vertical enclosure distance between the

contact layer and the first connected layer.
-yLay2Enc
yLay2Enc

contact layer and the second connected layer.
-yRepeat yRepeat
Specify the number of rows for contact arrays.

-ySpace ySpace
Specify the vertical spacing between contact layers.
Examples
# Example 1
# The origin of this contact device becomes (0.3,10.5)
lakerCreateContact -point (-0.2,10) -originOffset 0.5 0.5 \
-device M1_P1 -yRepeat 1 -xSpace 0.4 -ySpace 0.4 -length 0.4 \
-width 0.4 -xLay1Enc 0.15 -yLay1Enc 0.15 -xLay2Enc 0.15 \
-yLay2Enc 0.15
# Example 2
# Create a 2x3 contact device with M1_PDIFF type
lakerCreateContact -point (-2.03,3.005) -device M1_PDIFF -param \
{M1_PDIFF 2 3 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0 0.0 0.0 }
# Example 3
# Create a 2x3 stack via from P1 to M3 with align center
# and no offset
lakerCreateContact -point (-6.48,1.67) -device StackVia -param \
{ M1_P1 2 3 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0 0.0 0.0 } \
{ M1_M2 2 3 0.5 0.5 0.45 0.45 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.15 c 0.0 0.0 } \
{ M2_M3 2 3 0.5 0.5 0.45 0.45 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.15 c 0.0 0.0 }
# Example 4
# Create a 2x3 stack via from P1 to M3 with no align center
# and no offset
lakerCreateContact -point (-4.325,2.74) -device StackVia -param \
{ M1_P1 2 3 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0 0.0 0.0 } \
{ M1_M2 2 3 0.5 0.5 0.45 0.45 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.15 0 0.0 0.0 } \
{ M2_M3 2 3 0.5 0.5 0.45 0.45 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.15 0 0.0 0.0 }
# Example 5
# Create auto contact with device = M1_P1 inside
# the bounding box, (-7.875,-1.97) (14.025,12.885)
lakerCreateContact -autoPoint (-7.875,-1.97) (14.025,12.885) \
-point (-5.05,1.175) -device M1_P1 -param \
{ M1_P1 20 12 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0 0.0 0.0 }
640

K-2015.06

Create Commands
# Example 6
# If the device name is "Auto", no "-param" parameter is needed.
# The program automatically finds the matched contact devices
# and create contacts inside the bounding box,
# (-7.815,-1.495) (14.0,11.88)
lakerCreateContact -autoPoint (-7.815,-1.495) (14.0,11.88) \
-device Auto
# Example 7
lakerCreateContact -autoPoint (-763.065,-5411.435) \
(210.91,-4445.61) -sameNetOnly 1 -device Auto
# Example 8
lakerCreateContact -autoPoint (2.85,-4.08) (5.395,-1.805) \
-atLeastOne 0 -device Auto
# Example 9
lakerCreateContact -point (3.443,1.755) -device viaStacking1 \
-sameMetWidth 1 -param \
{ M1_P1 0 0 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 c 0.0 0.0 3.0 4.0 } \
{ M1_M2 0 0 0.5 0.5 0.45 0.45 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.15 c 0.0 0.0 3.0 4.0 } \
{ M2_M3 0 0 0.5 0.5 0.45 0.45 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.15 c 0.0 0.0 3.0 4.0 }
# Example 10
lakerCreateContact -autoPoint (0,0) (100,100) -device Auto \
-split 1
See Also
Layout Window: Create > Contact
lakerCreateDoughnut
The lakerCreateDoughnut command returns a dbFigId if the specified
doughnut shape can be created.
Syntax
lakerCreateDoughnut -point (x0,y0) -inner r1 -outer r2 [layerName layerName [-purpose purpose]] [-color
colorName] [-lock 0|1]
Returns

K-2015.06
641

Create Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-colorName colorName Specify the color name.

-inner r1
Specify the inner radius of doughnuts.
-layerName layerName Specify the layer name (default=the active layer).

-lock 0|1

-outer r2
Specify the outer radius of doughnuts.
-point (x0,y0)

-purpose purpose
Examples
lakerCreateDoughnut -layerName poly -purpose drawing \
-point (0,0) -inner 10.5 -outer 20
See Also
dbCreateDoughnut
Layout Window: Create > Conics > Doughnut
lakerCreateEllipse
The lakerCreateEllipse command returns a dbFigId if the specified
ellipse shape can be created.
Syntax
lakerCreateEllipse -point (x1,y1) (x2,y2) [-layerName
layerName [-purpose purpose]] [-color colorName] [-lock
0|1]
Returns
642

K-2015.06

Create Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description

-lock 0|1

-point (x1,y1)(x2,y2)
(x1,y1) specifies the lower left corner of the ellipse

while (x2,y2) specifies the upper right corner.
-purpose purpose
Examples
lakerCreateEllipse -layerName poly -purpose drawing \
-point (0,0) (10,10)
See Also
Layout Window: Create > Conics > Ellipse
The lakerCreateFinRegion command creates fin regions by honoring the
tfWideAlignments definition in the technology file section
lakerLayerRule.
Syntax
lakerCreateFinRegion -layerName layerName -purpose purpose
-point (x1,y1) (x2,y2) (x3,y3) (x4,y4)
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
Specify the name of the boundary layer.

K-2015.06
643

Create Commands
Argument
Description

(x3,y3) (x4,y4)

boundary, (x2,y2) specifies the upper left corner,
(x3,y3) specifies the upper right corner, and
(x4,y4) specifies the lower right corner.
-purpose purpose
Specify the purpose of the boundary layer.
Examples
lakerCreateFinRegion -layerName FINFET2 -purpose boundary \
-point (-0.2,-0.19) (-0.2,0.49) (0.288,0.49) (0.288,-0.19)
See Also
Layout Window: Create > Fin Region
lakerCreateGuardRing
The lakerCreateGuardRing command returns a dbFigId if the specified
guard ring can be created.
Syntax
lakerCreateGuardRing -device deviceName -point (x0,y0) (centerLine centerLine | -mode select [-fitRect 0|1]) [rows rows] [-inst instName] [-orient orientation] [-magni
magnification] [-impEnc impEnc] [-useMaskResolution 0|1]
[-originOffset xOffset yOffset] [-bodyWidth floatValue]
[-contMode contMode] [-topLayer layerName] [createCornerContact 0|1] [-contactDevice $deviceName] [sameMetWidth 0|1] [-SameAsBodyWidth 0|1] [-globalRule
$rule_name] [-rectContactStyle 0|1] [-bboxSpace
spacingValue | -layerSpace {GRLayerName GRPurposeName
RefLayerName RefPurposeName spacingValue} +] [layerSetting {layerName purposeName enable | disable
rectangle | fillNotch | none | fillHole} {value1 value2}
+] [-plugInParam {{$paramName $paramValue}[{$paramName
$paramValue} +]}]
Returns
644

K-2015.06

Create Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-bboxSpace spacingValue
Specified with -mode select only.

Specify the spacing between the bounding box of
selected objects and the guard rings boundary.
-bodyWidth floatValue
Specify the body width of guard rings. The number

of contact rows is determined by the body width
and contact spacing.
-centerLine centerLine
(x0,y0)...(xn,yn)
x0...xn specify the x coordinate for the point

array of the center line while y0...yn specify the
y coordinate.
-contactDevice
$deviceName
Specify the contact device name.
-contMode contMode

Valid values: normal and stackVia
(default=normal).
-createCornerContact 0|1

1 : Create corner contacts.
0 : Do not create corner contacts.
-device deviceName
Specify the name of guard ring devices.

Valid values: PGR, NGR, TGR, and Auto.
-fitRect 0|1

1 : Enable the Fit to Rectangle option.
0 : Disable the Fit to Rectangle option.
-globalRule
$rule_name
Specify the global rule (default=default, which

indicates the default rule).
-impEnc impEnc
Specify the enclosure distance between Imp and

Body layers.
-inst instName

K-2015.06
645

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-layerSetting {layerName
purposeName enable|disable
rectangle|fillNotch|none|fillHole}
{value1 value2}+
enable or disable enables or disables the

specified layer, and rectangle, fillNotch,
none, or fillHole sets the extend type of that
layer.
The parameter set {layerName
is ignored if the specified layer is disabled
(setting generate off and control off in
the technology file).
enable or disable is ignored if the layer is
locked (setting control off in the technology
file).
rectangle, fillNotch, none, or fillHole
is ignored if this layer is set to be disable.
{value1 value2} sets the enclosure distance
between preserved option layers (Imp, L1-L9)
and the body layer.
The layers without layer editing parameters use
the default value defined in the technology file.
-layerSpace {GRLayerName
Specified with -mode select only.
GRPurposeName
Specify the spacing between GR and Ref layers
RefLayerName
individually.
RefPurposeName spacingValue}
+

Valid value: a positive floating number
(default=1.0).
-mode select
Create guard rings automatically enclosing the

selected objects.
-plugInParam {{$paramName
$paramValue}[{$paramName
$paramValue} +]}
Define a list of parameters for MCell callbacks.
646
$paramName: Specify the parameter name,

which is defined in params of the callBack
section.
$paramValue: Specify the parameter value for
the corresponding $paramName.

K-2015.06

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-orient orientation

-originOffset xOffset yOffset

The origin of the MCell instance is calculated by
-point (x0,y0)

point while y0 specifies the value for the y
coordinate point.
-rectContactStyle 0|1

1 : Enable the Rectangle Contact Style option.
0 : Disable the Rectangle Contact Style option.
-ring rings
Specify the number rings to be added when the

-device auto option is specified.
-rows rows
Specify the number of rows for cutting array of

contacts.
-SameAsBodyWidth 0|1

1 : Force M1 width to be the same as the body
width.
0 : M1 width may not be the same as the body
width.
-sameMetWidth 0|1

1 : Enlarge all metal layers to fit all contacts/vias
and metal rules.
0 : Do not enlarge all metal layers.
-topLayer layerName
Specify the top layer is selected from one of the

metal layers defined in the technology file.
This argument is valid only if -contMode
stackVia is specified.

K-2015.06
647

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-useMaskResolution 0|1

Examples
# Example 1
# The origin of this guard ring is (1.24,3.02)
lakerCreateGuardRing -point (0.74,2.52) -device TGR \
-originOffset 0.5 0.5 \
-centerLine (0.74,2.52) (15.84,2.52) (15.84,-5.36) \
(-9.66,-5.36) (-9.66,10.23)
# Example 2
lakerCreateGuardRing -mode select -device auto -ring 2 \
-conSpace 0.5
# Example 3
lakerCreateGuardRing -mode select -device TGR -rows 2 \
-conSpace 0.800000 -impEnc 0.350000 \
-layerSpace {{OD drawing} {POLY drawing} 0.45} \
{{MET1 drawing} {MET1 drawing} 0.45} \
{{OD drawing} {OD drawing} 0.6} -layerSetting \
{ PP drawing enable none }
See Also
Layout Window: Create > Guard Ring
lakerCreateInstance
The lakerCreateInstance command returns a dbFigId if the specified
instance or array cell can be created.
Syntax
lakerCreateInstance -cell cellName -point (x0,y0) [-lib
libName] [-inst instName] [-orient orientation] [justification justification] [-rowSpace rowSpace colSpace colSpace [-rows rowsNo] [-cols colsNo]] [-view
viewName] [-param $param] [-reEval 0|1]
Returns
648

K-2015.06

Create Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
Specify the instance cell.
-cols colsNo
Specify the number of instance columns.

-colSpace colSpace
Specify the number of instances for y coordinate spacing.
-inst instName
Specify the instance name (default=system-assigned).
-justification
justification
Specify the instance justification.

Valid values: UL, CL, LL, UC, CC, LC, UR, CR, LR, and
Origin.
-lib libName
-orient orientation

-param $param
Specify the variable parameters ($param), which consist

of pairs of a name and value, for example: {pd
{1.15u}}.
-point (x0,y0)
Specify the reference point of Justification.

-reEval 0|1

1: Re-evaluate and update the existing device.
0: Do not re-evaluate the existing device.
-rows rowsNo
Specify the number of instance rows.

-rowSpace rowSpace Specify the number of instances for the x coordinate

spacing.
-view viewName

K-2015.06
Specify the view name for the specified cell

(default=layout).
649

Create Commands
Examples
# Example 1
lakerCreateInstance -point (8.65,5.82) -cell in01d1
# Example 2
lakerCreateInstance -point (8.65,5.82) -lib y1 \
-cell in01d1 -rows 2 -cols 3 -rowSpace 21.3 -colSpace 5.5
# Example 3
lakerCreateInstance -point (25.079,1.511) -cell xtr \
-lib device_lib -view symbolic
# Example 4
lakerCreateInstance -point (-0.45,0.915) -cell nch -lib N1 \
-view layout -param {drawDnw FALSE} {tieL {35n}} {tieW {20n}} \
{vshareSD {None}} {sb {17n}} {sa {17n}} {nrd {0.5}} {nrs {0.5}} \
{pd {75n}} {ps {75n}} {ad {3.5e-14}} {as {3.5e-14}} \
{POshrink {(0 0 0)}} {SDshrink {(0 0 0 0 0)}} {RdiffExt {0}} \
{LdiffExt {0}} {fingers_SP_INC {0}} {w {20n}} {l {6n}}
See Also
Layout Window: Create > Instance
The lakerCreateMetalSlot command creates slot shapes on wide wires.
Besides, All rules may also be maintained in the user's own laker.ms file.
Syntax
To create slots:
lakerCreateMetalSlot -action create -mode mode -slotCell
slotCellName (-switch ruleName | -ruleDef modifiedRules)
[-ignore 0|1] [-rotateSlots 0|1] [-mergeLayer {layer
purpose}] [-area bboxSet] [-toViewLevel | -toMaxLevel]
To change a rule switch:
lakerCreateMetalSlot -action change -switch ruleName
To create and save a rule set:
lakerCreateMetalSlot -action save -switch ruleName -ruleDef
modifiedRules
Returns
None
650

K-2015.06

Create Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-action action
Specify the action type.

Valid values: create, change, and save.
create : Create slot shapes.change : Change a rule
set.save : Save a new rule set to the laker.ms file.
-area bboxSet
Specify the bounding boxes. This option is only used with mode area.
-ignore 0|1

1 : Enable the Ignore Existing Slot Instances option.
0 : Disable the Ignore Existing Slot Instances option.
-mergeLayer
{layer purpose}
Specify the layer and purpose of the merger layer to connect

end edges.
-mode mode
Specify the action mode. Valid values: cell, and

area.cell : Create slot shapes on whole cell view.area :
Create slot shapes on the bounding boxes specified by the
-area option.
-rotateSlots 0|1

1 : Enable the Rotate Square Slots in Diagonal Metal option.
0 : Disable the Rotate Square Slots in Diagonal Metal
option.
-ruleDef
modifiedRules
Specify the modified rule values.
-slotCell
slotCellName
Specify the cell that stores all slot shapes created in this
feature.
-switch
ruleName
Assign the rule set name (defined in the technology file) for
metal slotting to be adopted to. This option can be assigned
with -ruleDef when creating a new rule set.
-toMaxLevel
Set the traverse depth for slot shape creation. If this option
is set, this function works on all design data.
-toViewLevel
Set the traverse depth for slot shape creation. If this option
is set, this function works on the design data from top level
to the current view level. This option is set by default.

K-2015.06
651

Create Commands
Examples
# Example 1
# Create slot shapes in cell mode with rule set, al_process
lakerCreateMetalSlot -action create -switch al_process \
-toViewLevel -ignore 0 -slotCell CellMode -mode cell
# Example 2
# Create slot shapes
# and modified rules
-slotCell SelectMode
-ruleDef {slotLength
in select mode with action rule set

-action create -toViewLevel -ignore 0 \
-mode select \
100.0 20.0 60.0}
# Example 3
# Create slot shapes in area mode with rule set, al_process
lakerCreateMetalSlot -action create -switch al_process
-toMaxLevel -ignore 1 -slotCell AreaMode -mode area \
-area (1698.65,3142.28) (2190.22,3617.98) \
(1696.67,2295.91) (2206.07,2753.78)
# Example 4
# Change rule set to al_process
lakerCreateMetalSlot -action change -switch al_process
# Example 5
# Save modified rules to rule set, al_process, in "laker.ms"
lakerCreateMetalSlot -action save -switch al_process \
-ruleDef {slotLength 100.0 20.0 60.0}
# Example 6
# Rotate the square slots in diagonal metal
lakerCreateMetalSlot -action create -switch checker \
-toViewLevel -ignore 0 -rotateSlots 0 -slotCell LakerMetalSlot \
-mode select
# Example 7
# Do not rotate the square slots in diagonal metal
-toViewLevel -ignore 0 -rotateSlots 1 -slotCell LakerMetalSlot \
-mode select
# Example 8
# Specify the merger layer to decide the connected end edge
-toViewLevel -ignore 0 -mergeLayer {MT1 drawing} \
-slotCell LakerMetalSlot -mode select
See Also
Layout Window: Create > Metal Slot
652

K-2015.06

Create Commands
lakerCreatePath
The lakerCreatePath command returns a dbFigId if the specified path
shape, wire with contact or bus can be created.
Syntax
lakerCreatePath -point point -width pathWidth [contWidth]
[-layerName layerName [-purpose purpose]] [-style
pathStyle] [-busNo busNo -pitch pitch -via2via via2via
[-push segmentNo] [-pathStartPos pathStartPos]] [contactPos contactPos -cell cellName -rows rowsNo -cols
colsNo -yDist yDist -xDist xDist -length length -justify
justification [-busAlignStyle busAlignStyle] [-router
snapmode [-onGrid 0|1]]] [-net netName] [-useDropVia] [commitDropVia] [-globalRule $rule_name] [-routeParam
attributeList] [-viaGroup mode] [-routeStatus
routeStatus] [-routeType routeType] [-color colorName]
[-lock 0|1]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-busAlignStyle
busAlignStyle
Specify the bus alignment style.

Valid values: line, saw, inc, and dec (default=saw).
-busNo busNo
Specify the number of buses.

-cell cellName
Specify the cell to be renamed.

-cols colsNo

-commitDropVia
Execute the dropping via action.
-contactPos contactPos
(x0,y0)...(xn,yn)
x0...xn specify the x coordinate for the center

position of contacts while y0...yn specify the y
coordinate.

K-2015.06
653

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-globalRule $rule_name

-justify justification
Specify the justification of contacts.

LowerRight.
-length length
-lock 0|1

-net netName
Specify the net name of the path to be created. The

net name is not assigned if -net is not specified.
-onGrid 0|1

1 : The drawing points must be on-grid.
0 : The drawing points may be off-grid.
-pathStartPos pathStartPos
(x0,y0)...(xn,yn)
x0...xn specify the x coordinate for the start of the

bus position while y0...yn specify the y coordinate.
-pitch pitch
Specify the spacing between the path centerlines.

654
-point point
(x0,y0)...(xn,yn)

-purpose purpose
-push segmentNo
Enable the push-wire function and start pushing from

the number of path segments specified.
Valid value: an integer, greater than 0.

K-2015.06

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-routeParam
attributeList
Specify the list of attributes for the modified element

of route objects. The format is {elementIndex
{attrKey attrValue} ...}. Some attributes for
path and via elements in lakerAttribute.
-router snapmode
Create connection paths with Auto Route mode,

where the snap mode may be one of the following:
auto: The path is automatically decided by the

router.
orthogonal: The target point aligns to the source
point horizontally or vertically, depending on the
larger direction offset.
xFirst: The router creates horizontal paths from
the start point first.
yFirst: The router creates vertical paths from the
start point first.
-routeStatus
routeStatus
Specify the route status.

Valid values: Fixed, Routed, and Cover
(default=Fixed).
-routeType
routeType
-rows rowsNo

-style pathStyle

Variable -beginExt value -endExt value
(default=Truncate).
-useDropVia
Adopt via dropping at the same net intersection.
-via2via via2via
Specify the spacing for the center of the contact

position to another between two paths.

K-2015.06

stripe, followPin, IOWire, coreWire, and
blockWire (default=none).
655

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-viaGroup mode

Valid values: MCell and RouteVia.
device definition.
definition.
-width
pathWidth [contWidth]
Specify the path width and cutting width of contacts.

-xDist xDist
Specify the number of instances for the y coordinate

spacing.
-yDist yDist
Specify the number of instances for the x coordinate

spacing.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerCreatePath -layerName poly -purpose drawing \
-point (0,0) (10,10) (25,20) (30,-35) -width 0.6
# Example 2
lakerCreatePath -router auto -layerName MET1 \
-point (-6.12,4.58) (-12.17,-2.20) -width 0.350000
# Example 3
lakerCreatePath -router auto -onGrid 1 -layerName MET1 \
-point (-6.12,4.58) (-12.17,-2.20) -width 0.350000
# Example 4
lakerCreatePath -push 1 -layerName MET1 \
-point (1.62,4.23) (1.62,8.76) (11.27,8.76) -width 0.5 0.0
# Example 5
lakerCreatePath -layerName poly -purpose drawing -point \
(0,0) (10,10) (25,20) (30,-35) -width 0.6 -net VDD
656

K-2015.06

Create Commands
# Example 6
lakerCreatePath -contactPos (145.542,-88.091) \
-busAlignStyle saw -device M1_M2 -param \
{M1_M2 1 1 0.5 0.5 0.45 0.45 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.15 0 0.0 0.0 } \
-layerName MET2 -point (88.649,-87.841) (145.792,-87.841) \
-width 0.600000 0.500000 -net net1 -useDropVia
lakerCreatePath -contactPos (145.542,-131.402) \
-busAlignStyle saw -orient MXR90 -device M1_M2 -param \
{M1_M2 1 1 0.5 0.5 0.45 0.45 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.15 0 0.0 0.0 } \
-pathStartPos (145.792,-87.841) -layerName MET1 -point \
(145.792,-87.841) (145.792,-131.152) -width 0.500000 0.500000 \
-net net1 -useDropVia
lakerCreatePath -pathStartPos (145.792,-131.152) \
-width 0.600000 0.000000 -net net1 -useDropVia
lakerCreatePath -commitDropVia
# Example 7
lakerCreatePath -routeParam {0 {layerName METAL1} \
{purpose drawing} {points (-1.48,4.255) (2.19,4.255)} \
{width 0.5} {beginStyle Truncate} {endStyle Truncate}}
# Example 8
# Create a path object with color attribute
lakerCreatePath -pathStartPos (145.792,-131.152) \
-width 0.6 0.0 -net net1 -useDropVia -color ColorA -lock 0
# Example 9
# Create a route object with color attribute
lakerCreatePath -routeParam \
{0 {layerName METAL1} {purpose drawing} \
{points (-1.48,4.255) (2.19,4.255)} {width 0.5} \
{beginStyle Truncate} {endStyle Truncate}} {color ColorA} {lock 0}
See Also
dbCreatePath
lakerCreatePickedDevice
The lakerCreatePickedDevice command creates picked devices from the
schematic.

K-2015.06
657

Create Commands
Syntax
lakerCreatePickedDevice -point (x,y) [-viewList {listName}]
[-spacing value] [-MFactor {MFacotrName}] [-instName 0|1]
[-connectivity 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-connectivity 0|1

1 : Keep the connectivity from schematic.
0 : Do not keep the connectivity from schematic.
-instName 0|1

1 : Keep the instance name from schematic.
0 : Do not keep the instance name from schematic.
-MFactor
{MFacotrName}
Specify the priority to search M-factor names.
-point (x,y)
x specifies the x coordinate while y specifies the y

coordinate.
-spacing value
Specify the spacing between devices.
-viewList {listName}
Specify the priority to search view names.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerCreatePickedDevice -point (-4.917,-8.348) \
-viewList {layout} -spacing 2 -instanceName 1 -connectivity 1
See Also
Layout Window: Create > Picked Device
lakerCreatePin
The lakerCreatePin command returns a dbFigId if the specified pin can
be created.
658

K-2015.06

Create Commands
Syntax
lakerCreatePin [-layerName layerName] [-purpose purpose] net netName -port portName -pin pinName [-dir pinType]
[-accDir accDir] -point point [-jointType jointType] [placementStatus status] [-color colorName] [-lock 0|1]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-accDir accDir

Valid values: the combination of {Top}, {Bottom},
{Left}, and {Right} (default=all directions, that is,
-colorName colorName Specify the color name.

-dir pinType
Specify the pin type.

Valid values: Input, Output, InputOutput,
Jumper, and Feedthrough (default=Input).
-jointType jointType

-lock 0|1

-net netName
-pin pinName
-placementStatus status Specify the pin placement status.

Valid values: Fixed, Cover, Placed, Unplaced, and
Null (default=Placed).
-point point
(x0,y0)...(xn,yn)
x0...xn specify the x coordinate for the pin shape,

-port portName

K-2015.06
659

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-purpose purpose
Examples
# Example 1
lakerCreatePin -layerName POLY -net ABC -port ABC \
-dir Input -pin 1 -accDir Top -point (0.159,-0.96) \
(0.159,1.225) (2.146,1.225) (2.146,-0.96)
# Example 2
lakerCreatePin -layerName MET4 -purpose drawing -net ABC \
-port ABC -dir Jumper -pin ABC -accDir {Right} {Left} -point \
(4.81,1.51) (4.81,2.73) (3.62,2.73) (3.62,1.51)
See Also
dbCreatePin
lakerCreatePoly
The lakerCreatePoly command returns a dbFigId if the specified polygon
Syntax
lakerCreatePoly -point point [-layerName layerName [-purpose
purpose]] [-color colorName] [-lock 0|1]
Returns
Arguments
660
Argument
Description

-lock 0|1


K-2015.06

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-point point
(x0,y0)...(xn,yn)

-purpose purpose
Examples
lakerCreatePoly -layerName poly -purpose drawing \
-point (0,0) (10,10) (25,20) (30,-35)
See Also
dbCreatePolygon
Layout Window: Create > Polygon
lakerCreateRect
The lakerCreateRect command returns a dbFigId if the specified rectangle
Syntax
lakerCreateRect -point (x1,y1)(x2,y2) [-layerName layerName
[-purpose purpose]] [-color colorName] [-lock 0|1]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description

-lock 0|1


rectangle while (x2,y2) specifies the upper right
corner.

K-2015.06
661

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-purpose purpose
Examples
lakerCreateRect -layerName poly -purpose drawing \
-point (0,0.3) (10.1,10)
See Also
dbCreateRect
Layout Window: Create > Rectangle
lakerCreateResistor
The lakerCreateResistor command returns a dbFigId if the specified
resistor can be created.
Syntax
lakerCreateResistor -device deviceName -point (x0,y0) [totalLength length|-value value] -fit (seg|block)
fitValue -width width -space deviceSpace -metWidth
metWidth [-inst instName] [-orient orientation] [-magni
magnification] [-contType contType] [-connectType
connectType] [-interDist interContDistance] [-resEncCo
enclosure_value] [-originOffset xOffset yOffset] [dummyWidth value] [-dummyContact 0|1] [-extSegLength 0|1]
[-param parameter] [-useMaskResolution 0|1] [-xCoSpace
spacing_in_x_direction] [-yCoSpace
spacing_in_y_direction]
Returns
Arguments
662
Argument
Description
-connectType
connectType
Specify the connected type for resistors.

Valid values: metal, res, and none (default=res).

K-2015.06

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-contType contType

Valid values: maxRow, single, maximum, and
contactArray (default=maxRow).maxRow : Insert
as many contact rows as possible, such as maxRow
row_number.
single : Insert a single contact.
maximum : Insert a maximum number of contacts.
contactArray : Insert a contact array with the
number of columns and rows, such as
contactArray column_number row_number.
-device deviceName
Specify the name of resistor devices.
-dummyContact 0|1

1 : Add contacts and metal on dummy resistors.
0 : Do not add contacts and metal on dummy
resistors.
-dummyWidth value
Specify the dummy width for resistors. By default,

the value is equal to the -width option.
-extSegLength 0|1

This argument is used for disconnected resistors
only.
1 : Extend each segment to make each segment
having the same length.
0 : Do not extend each segment of the resistor.
-fit (seg|block) fitValue
Specify the segment or blockLength value.
-inst instName
-interDist
interContDistance
Each inter contact distance (default=empty string).

-metWidth metWidth
Specify the width of the Metal layer.

K-2015.06
663

Create Commands
664
Argument
Description
-orient orientation

-originOffset
xOffset yOffset

-param parameter

the resistors value, length, width, align, offset, and
metal-option string.
This argument is used for disconnected resistors
only.
-point (x0,y0)

point.
-resEncCo
enclosure_value

the resistor body layer and contact layer.
-space deviceSpace
Specify the spacing between resistor shapes.
-totalLength length
Specify the total length between outmost contact

layers (default=100.0).

-value value
Specify the resistance value. If -totalLength is

specified, this argument is ignored.
-width width
Specify the width of the resistor body layer.
-xCoSpace
spacing_in_x_direction
Specify the contact spacing in X direction when the

spacing_in_x_direction is in user units.
-yCoSpace
spacing_in_y_direction
Specify the contact spacing in Y direction when the

spacing_in_y_direction is in user units.

K-2015.06

Create Commands
Examples
# Example 1
# The origin of this resistor is (4.1,1.5)
lakerCreateResistor -point (3.6,1) -originOffset 0.5 0.5
-device TRES -totalLength 100 -width 4 -space 2 \
-metWidth 4 -fit seg 5
# Example 2
lakerCreateResistor -point (0.00425,0.00478) -device TRES \
-totalLength 100.000000 -width 4.000000 -space 2.000000 \
-metWidth 2.000000 -fit segment 4 -connectType none \
-param { length 100.0 4.0 asIs 0.0 "" } \
{ length 100.0 4.0 left 0.0 "" } \
{ length 100.0 4.0 left 0.0 "" } \
{ length 100.0 4.0 left 0.0 "" }
# Example 3
# create a TRES resistor with 3x3 contact, and the contact spacing
# in X and Y directions is 1.0 user unit.
lakerCreateResistor -point (-38.7,8.715) -useMaskResolution 0 \
-device TRES -totalLength 100.000000 -width 4.000000 \
-space 2.000000 -metWidth 2.000000 -fit segment 5 \
-contType contactArray 3 3 -xConSpace 1.0 -yConSpace 1.0 \
-extSegLength 0
See Also
Layout Window: Create > Resistor
lakerCreateStackedPath
The lakerCreateStackedPath command returns a dbFigId if the
specified stack path can be created.
Syntax
lakerCreateStackedPath -point point (x0,y0)...(xn,yn) useMaskResolution 0|1 -width width [-pathOffset value]
[-style pathStyle] -topLayer topLayerName [topPurpose] bottomLayer bottomLayerName [bottomPurpose] [-device
viaStackName] [-createContact 0|1] [-createCornerContact
0|1] [-contAlignMode Center|Max] [-param parameters]
Returns

K-2015.06
665

Create Commands
Arguments
666
Argument
Description
-bottomLayer
bottomLayerName
[bottomPurpose]
Specify the layer name (and purpose name) for the

bottommost layer.
-contAlignMode
Center|Max
Specify the contact pattern.

Valid values: Center, and Max (default=Center).
Center : Center-aligned contacts;
Max : Maximum contacts.
-createContact 0|1

1 : Create contacts in stack paths.
0 : Do not create contacts in stack paths.
-createCornerContact 0|1

0 : Do not create any corner contacts.
-device viaStackName
Specify the via stacking name (or contact device

name) for stack paths (default=StackVia). If it is
StackVia, the contact device sequence is
connected automaically.
-param parameters

the contact device name, contact width, contact
length, horizontal/vertical spacing between contact
layers, horizontal/vertical enclosure distance
between contact layer and the first connected layer,
horizontal/vertical enclosure distance between
-pathOffset value
Specify the path offset for user-defined justification.

-point point
(x0,y0)...(xn,yn)

-style pathStyle

Valid values: Truncate, Extend, and Variable
-beginExt value -endExt value
(default=Truncate).

K-2015.06

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-topLayer
topLayerName
[topPurpose]

topmost layer.

-width width

Examples
# Example 1
lakerCreateStackedPath -point (60.7708,90.3622)
(60.7708,90.3622)\
-useMaskResolution 0 -topLayer MET2 -bottomLayer POLY \
-width 0.900000 -pathOffset 0.200000
#
#
#
#
Example 2
Create stacked path by specifying a contact device instead of
a viaStacking,creating corner contact(default value) and with
contact pattern "Center"(default value):
lakerCreateStackedPath -point (-6.858,7.947) (-6.858,7.947)\

(3.391,7.947) (3.391,3.003) (15.613,3.003) -device M1_P1 \
-param {M1_P1 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 } \
-topLayer MET1 -bottomLayer POLY -width 2.000000
#
#
#
#
Example 3
Create stacked path by specifying a viaStacking "viaStacking1"
contains three contact device without creating corner contact
and with contact pattern "Maximum":
lakerCreateStackedPath -point (0.0,0.0) (-11.719,15.168)\

(8.169,15.168) (8.169,-6.275) (-16.163,-6.275) \
-device viaStacking1 \
-param {M1_P1 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 } \
{M1_M2 0.5 0.5 0.45 0.45 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.15 } \
{M2_M3 0.5 0.5 0.45 0.45 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.15 } \
-topLayer MET3 -bottomLayer POLY -width 4.000000 \
-createCornerContact 0 -contAlignMode Max
See Also
Layout Window: Create > Stack Path

K-2015.06
667

Create Commands
lakerCreateText
The lakerCreateText command returns a dbFigId if the specified text label
can be created.
Syntax
lakerCreateText -point (x0,y0) | (x1,y1) (x2, y2) ... (xn,
yn) -height height [-width width] -text textString [layerName layerName [-purpose purpose]] [-orient
orientation] [-justify justification] [-font textFont]
[-offsetPoint (x0,y0)] [-drafting 0|1] [-toPoly 0|1] [attachFig figId | -attach 0|1] [-spacing dSpacing] [non45free 0|1] [-placeOn 0|1] [-skip skipVal] [-textLayer
textLayer] [-mapFile fileName]
Returns
Arguments
668
Argument
Description
-attach 0|1

1 : Attach text strings/labels to a pre-selected object.
0 : Do not attach text strings/labels to objects.
-attachFig figId
Specify the figure identifier to be attached. When it is

specified, the -attach argument is ignored.
-drafting 0|1

1 : Show the orientation of the text at zero degrees.
0 : Do not show the orientation of the text at zero
degrees.
-font textFont

Valid values: Modern, Script, Roman, Simple,
Merit, Contemplate, and Contemplate1
(default=Modern).
-height height
Specify the text height.


K-2015.06

Create Commands
Argument
Description
Specify the justification of the input text string.

Valid values: Original, UpperLeft, CenterLeft,
LowerRight (default=LowerLeft). The Original
value is available only if -toPoly 1 is specified.
-layerName
layerName
-mapFile fileName
Specify the layer map file. This argument is valid only if

-textLayer userDef is specified.
-non45free

1: Do not allow non-45 polygons for all polygonal text
labels.
0: Allow non-45 polygons for all polygonal text labels.
This argument is valid only if -toPoly 1 is specified.
-offsetPoint (x0,y0)
x0 specifies an offset value from the x coordinate point

while y0 specifies the value from the y coordinate point.
-orient orientation
Specify the orientation of the input text string.

MYR0, MYR90, and auto (default=R0).
When -orient auto is used, the orientation of serial
texts is adjusted by the direction of line segments:
If it is a vertical line, the orientation is R0.

If it is a horizontal line, the orientation is R90.
If it is a non-orthogonal line, the orientation is R0.
-placeOn 0|1

1: Place serial texts on the selected objects which
overlap the drawing line.
0: Place serial texts on objects which overlap the
drawing line.
-point (x0,y0) | (x1,y1)

(x2, y2) ... (xn, yn)

If point count is more than one, it means a drawing point
array is used to trace the overlapped shapes.

K-2015.06
669

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-purpose purpose
-skip skipVal
Specify a skip width to ignore the shape that exceeds

the specified value during text creation.
If the width of a shape is greater than the specified Skip
Width value, the text string is not placed on that shape.
If the Skip Width field is empty, the checking is ignored.
-spacing dSpacing
Specify the spacing between polygonal labels

(default=1.0).
This argument is valid only if -toPoly 1 or -font
Contemplate1 is specified.
-text textString
Specify the text string list.
-textLayer textLayer
Specify the layer for text creation.

Valid values: active, tf, and userDef.
active: Current selected layer.
tf: The rule of tfAbstractCell in technology file.
userDef: The rule defined in the layer map file,
specified by -mapFile.
-toPoly 0|1
Create the border of text with polygon segments.

1: All font types are available.
0: Only three font types (for example: Modern, Script,
and Roman) are available.
-width width
Specify the stick width of polygonal labels in

Contemplate font type. The height must be greater
than 5 times of the specified stick width, and the stick
width must be the even multiple resolutions.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerCreateText -layerName poly -purpose drawing -point (0,0) \
-orient R90 -justify CenterCenter -font Roman -height 0.6 \
-text demostring
670

K-2015.06

Create Commands
# Example 2
lakerCreateText -toPoly 1 -layerName POLY -purpose drawing \
-point (0,0) -orient R0 -justify Original -font Contemplate \
-height 40.0 -width 8.0 -spacing 0.0 -text demostring
# Example 3
lakerCreateText -toPoly 1 -spacing 1.0 -layerName poly \
-purpose drawing -point (0,0) -justify Original -font Merit \
-height 0.6 -text {demostring}
# Example 4
lakerCreateText -layerName poly -point (1.02,-3.26) \
-font Contemplate1 -height 1.0 -text {abc}
# Example 5
lakerCreateText -textLayer active -skip 1.6 -layerName NWELL \
-height 1.0 -spacing 1.000000 -text {a[0:3]-b[0:3],c[0:3]} \
-point {(-8.95,12.75) (-8.95,1.44) (1.86,1.44) } -orient auto
See Also
dbCreateLabel
lakerCreateTransistor
The lakerCreateTransistor command returns a dbFigId if the specified
transistor can be created.
Syntax
lakerCreateTransistor -device deviceName -point (x0,y0) gates gates -param parameter [-globalRule $rule_name] [inst instName] [-orient orientation] [-magni
magnification] [-contType contType] [-contAlign
contAlign] [-contMode contMode] [-type deviceType] [disableImpNotch 0|1] [-optLayerRepeatPattern
optLayerRepeatPattern] [-traitRepeatPattern Pattern] [co2Gate number [$rule_name]] [[-conSpaceRule
coSpaceRuleName]|[-xConSpace xConSpace [$rule_name]] [yConSpace yConSpace [$rule_name]]] [-discreteGatePitch
0|1] [-originOffset xOffset yOffset] [-useMaskResolution
0|1] [-coWidth value [value2]] [-layerSetting {layerName
purposeName enable|disable rectangle|fillNotch|none}
{value1 value2}+ ] [-createDummyGate {numberSingle
numberMulti numberInner | {numberInner toleranceValue}}
[-dummyGateLengthType LengthType]] [-createPolyCont 0|1]

K-2015.06
671

Create Commands
[-polyContType polyContType] [-polyConSymmetry 0|1] [xPolyCoEnc value] [-yPolyCoEnc value] [-xPolyCoConSpace

xConSpace [$rule_name]] [-yPolyCoConSpace yConSpace
[$rule_name]] [-dummyGatePolyCoSym mode] [-xCo2OdEnc
xValue -yCo2OdEnc yValue] [-plugInParam {{$paramName
$paramValue}[{$paramName $paramValue}...]}]
Returns
Arguments
672
Argument
Description
-co2Gate
number [$rule_name]
Specify the spacing between contacts and gates.

number: The number is in user units, and it must be
greater than or equal to the minCo2GateSpace
value defined in the technology file. The default is
the minCo2GateSpace value.
$rule_name: The rule to be used
(default=default, which indicates the default rule).
-conSpaceRule
coSpaceRuleName
Specify the contact spacing.

If the specified rule name is not defined in the super
master of the referenced transistor, the default rule
is used.
If -conSpaceRule is specified, -xConSpace and
-yConSpace are ignored.
-coWidth value [value2]
Specify the contact width.

The value or the value pair of {value value2}
should be one of the defined value of minCoWidth
in the super master of the referenced transistor;
otherwise, the create or modify attribute operation
fails.
-contAlign contAlign
Specify the contact alignment.

Valid values: top, center, and bottom
(default=center).
-contMode contMode

Valid values: Normal, Esd, and StackVia
(default=Normal).

K-2015.06

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-contType contType

Valid values: SingleContact, MaxContact,
ContactArray, and NoContact
(default=MaxContact).
-createDummyGate
Create dummy gates for a transistor with these
{ numberSingle
conditions:
numberMulti numberInner | numberSingle: Number of dummy gates
{ numberInner
(default=2) for a transistor with one normal gate.
toleranceValue } }
numberMulti: Number of dummy gates

(default=1) for a transistor with multiple normal
gates.
numberInner: Number of dummy gates

(default=1) for a transistor with different gate
width (between two adjacent gates) exceeding
the toleranceValue. This toleranceValue
must be greater than or equal to 0.0.
numberSingle, numberMulti and

numberInner must be specified when this
option is used.
-createPolyCont 0|1

1 : Create poly contacts.
0 : Do not create any poly contacts.
-device deviceName
Name of transistor devices.
-disableImpNotch 0|1

1 : Create a notch shape on IMP/L1/L2 layers.
0 : Do not create any notch shapes on IMP/L1/L2
layers.


K-2015.06
673

Create Commands
Argument
Description
LengthType
Specify the length type for dummy gates. This

argumant is valid only if -createDummyGate is
specified.
AdjacentWider, and MinChannelLength
-dummyGatePolyCoSym
mode
Set the poly contact structure for dummy gates.

Valid values: none, polyOnly, and all
(default=none).
-gates gates
Specify the number of gates to be used.

Valid values: a positive integer (maximum=2500).

-inst instName
-layerSetting {layerName
purposeName
enable|disable
rectangle|fillNotch|none}
{value1 value2}+
674

specified layer, and rectangle, fillNotch, or
none sets the extend type of that layer.
The parameter set {layerName purposeName
enable|disable
rectangle|fillNotch|none} is ignored if
the specified layer is disabled (setting generate
off and control off in the technology file).
file).
rectangle, fillNotch, or none is ignored if
this layer is set to be disable.
and the OD layer.


K-2015.06

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-optLayerRepeatPattern
optLayerRepeatPattern
Define the repeated sequence of option layers.
-orient orientation

-originOffset xOffset
yOffset

-param parameter
Specify the parameter list for transistors. The list is

defined with this format:
-param {pattern width length align
offset [{polyConPattern
polyConLocation polyConShift}]
[$rule_name] [dummyGate]}+

K-2015.06
pattern: Gate pattern. Valid values:

patternA, patternB, patternC, patternD,
and patternE.
width: Channel width. Valid value: a floating
number.
length: Channel length. Valid value: a floating
number.
align: Contact alignment between gates. Valid
values: top, center, bottom, and asIs.
offset: Offset value. Valid value: a floating
number.
polyConPattern: Poly contact pattern. Valid
values: none, top, bottom, and both
(default=none).
polyConLocation: Poly contact location. Valid
values: inner, and outer (default=inner).
polyConShift: Poly contact shift. Valid values:
left, center, and right.(default=center).
$rule_name: Refer to the global rule.
dummyGate: If specified, the auto generation of
dummy gates is ignored.
675

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-plugInParam
{{$paramName
$paramValue}[{$paramNa
me $paramValue}...]}
Define a list of parameters for MCell callbacks.
676

section.
-point (x0,y0)

point while y0 specifies the value for the y
coordinate point.
-polyContType
contType
Specify the contact type for poly contacts.

Valid values: NoContact, SingleContact,
MaxContact, and ContactArray
SingleContact : Insert a single contact.
MaxContact : Insert the maximum number of
contacts.
ContactArray : Insert a contact array with the
contactArray row column.
-polyConSymmetry 0|1

1 : Enable the Symmetry option for poly contacts.
0 : Disable the Symmetry for poly contacts.
-traitRepeatPattern
Pattern
Define the trait repeat pattern for transistors. The

valid value can be any combinations from the
defined trait in technology file.
-type deviceType
Specify the device type.

Valid values: parallel and serial
(default=serial).

-xCo2OdEnc xValue
Horizontal enclosure distance between the contact

layer and the adjacent edge of the Thin-oxide layer.

K-2015.06

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-xConSpace xConSpace
[$rule_name]
Specify the contact x-spacing

(default=minCoSpace in ruleDef).
to the minCoSpace value.
$rule_name: Rule to be used (default=default,
which indicates the default rule).
-xPolyCoConSpace
xConSpace [$rule_name]
Specify the contact x-spacing for poly contacts

(default=minCoSpace in polyContact). The valid
value and $rule_name settings are similar to the xConSpace argument.
-xPolyCoEnc value
Specify the minimum horizontal enclosure distance

from contacts to metals.
-yCo2OdEnc yValue

contact layer and the adjacent edge of the Thinoxide layer.
-yConSpace xConSpace
[$rule_name]
Specify the contact y-spacing

(default=minCoSpace in ruleDef).
to the minCoSpace value.
-yPolyCoConSpace
yConSpace [$rule_name]
Specify the contact y-spacing for poly contacts

(default=minCoSpace in polyContact). The valid
value and $rule_name settings are similar to the yConSpace argument.
-yPolyCoEnc value
Specify the minimum vertical enclosure distance

Examples
# Example 1
# The origin of this transistor instance is (3.5,7.3)
lakerCreateTransistor -point ((3.0,6.8) -originOffset 0.5 0.5 \
-device pmos -gates 1 -param {patternA 0.7 0.35 bottom 0.0}

K-2015.06
677

Create Commands
# Example 2
lakerCreateTransistor -point (5.25,0.235) -device pmos -gates 1 \
-disableImpNotch 0 -contType MaxContact -xConSpace 0.4 \
-yConSpace 0.4 -co2Gate 0.5 -contAlign center \
-param {patternA 0.7 0.35 bottom 0.0 } -optLayerRepeatPattern { }
# Example 3
lakerCreateTransistor -point (-1.175,2.055) -device pmos \
-gates 2 -type parallel -contType MaxContact -ConSpaceRule 0.4 \
-param {patternA 1.0 0.35 asIs 0.0 } \
{patternA 1.2 0.35 bottom 0.0 } \
-optLayerRepeatPattern { } -layerSetting \
{ PP drawing enable none } -createDummyGate {2 1 1}
# Example 4
lakerCreateTransistor -point (-1.175,2.055) -device pmos \
-gates 2 -type parallel -contType MaxContact -xConSpace 0.4 \
-param {patternA 1.0 0.35 asIs 0.0 } \
{patternA 1.2 0.35 bottom 0.0 } \
{ PP drawing enable none } -createDummyGate {2 1 {1 0.2}}
# Example 5
lakerCreateTransistor -point (37.145,16.653) \
-useMaskResolution 0 -device pfet -gates 2 -type parallel \
-contType MaxContact -xConSpace 1.0 -yConSpace 1.0 \
-co2Gate 0.8 -contAlign center -param \
{patternA 2.0 1.0 asIs 0.0 } {patternA 3.0 2.0 bottom 0.0 } \
{ PIMP drawing enable none } -createDummyGate {2 1 1} \
-dummyGateLengthType AdjacentNarrower
# Example 6
lakerCreateTransistor -point (52.192,17.547) \
-useMaskResolution 0 -device PMOS_plugIn_dummyPoly \
-gates 2 -type parallel -contType MaxContact -xEnc 0.5 \
-yEnc 0.45 -xConSpace 1.0 -yConSpace 1.0 -co2Gate 0.8 \
-contAlign center -xCo2OdEnc 0.5 -yCo2OdEnc 0.5 \
-param {patternA 6.0 0.8 asIs 0.0 } {patternA 3.0 0.8 bottom 0.0 } \
-optLayerRepeatPattern { } -traitRepeatPattern { } \
-layerSetting {PIMP drawing enable none} \
-plugInParam {{normalPitch 4.0} {dummyPitch 2.0} {numDummy 1}}
See Also
Layout Window: Create > Transistor
678

K-2015.06

Create Commands
lakerDimensionMark
The lakerDimensionMark command draws a dimension line from an object,
and saves the dimension line drawing into the related cell view for later
reference.
Syntax
lakerDimensionMark -point point [-layerName layerName] [purpose purpose] [-font textFont] [-height height] [hideDim 0|1] [-showExtensionLine 0|1] [-justify
justification]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-font textFont
Specify the font type for text labels.

(default=Modern).
-height height
Specify the text height for text labels.

-hideDim 0|1

1 : Enable the Hide Value of Dimension Mark option.
0 : Disable the Hide Value of Dimension Mark option.
Specify the justification of dimension mark labels.

Valid values: Auto, UpperLeft, CenterLeft,
LowerRight.
-point point
(x0,y0),(x1,y1),(x2,y2)
x0, x1 and x2 specify the x coordinate for point0,

point1 and point2 while y0, y1 and y2 specify the y
coordinate for point0, point1 and point2.
-purpose purpose

K-2015.06
679

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-showExtensionLine 0|1

1 : Enable the Show Extension Line option.
0 : Disable the Show Extension Line option.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerDimensionMark -layerName poly -purpose drawing \
-point (0,0) (10,0) (10,10)
# Example 2
lakerDimensionMark -layerName poly -purpose drawing \
-point (0,0) (10,0) (10,10) -font Modern -height 1.2 -hideDim 0 \
-showExtensionLine 1 -justify auto
See Also
Layout Window: Create > Dimension Mark
lakerGenText
The lakerGenText command generates text labels from the logical
information, and attaches the text labels to shapes, transistors, resistors,
capacitors, Tcl PCells and instances. The content of text labels refers to the net
name or instance name.
Syntax
lakerGenText -from pin -mode mode -height height [-attach
0|1] [-font textFont] [-justify justification] [-orient
orientation] [-busParentheses bracket] [-fromTF | fromObj | -fromFile fileName | [-layerName layerName purpose purpose]] [-useVirtual 0|1] [-ThruVia 0|1]
lakerGenText -from net -mode mode -height height [-attach
0|1] [-font textFont] [-justify justification] [-orient
orientation] [-busParentheses bracket] [-fromTF | fromObj | -fromFile fileName | [-layerName layerName purpose purpose]] [-useVirtual 0|1] [-ThruVia 0|1]
lakerGenText -from instance -mode mode -height height [attach 0|1] [-font textFont] [-justify justification] [orient orientation] [-layerName layerName -purpose
purpose] [-useVirtual 0|1] [-ThruVia 0|1]
680

K-2015.06

Create Commands
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-attach 0|1

1 : Enable the Attach to Object option.
0 : Disable the Attach to Object option.
-busParentheses bracket Specify the bus translation style.

Valid values: angle and square (default=square).
angle: angle bracket < >.
square: square bracket [ ].
-font textFont

(default=Modern).
-fromFile fileName
Use layers that are defined in a separate file for label

generation; otherwise, nothing is generated.
-fromObj
Use the same layer of the selected object for label

generation.
-fromTF
Use layers that are defined in tfAbstractCell for

label generation; otherwise, nothing is generated.
-height height

Specify the text justification.

Specify the layer name of the layer to be used for label

generation.

K-2015.06
681

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-mode mode
Specify the attach mode of text labels.

Valid values: select, full, area, line, and click.
select: selected objects.
full: full cell.
area: -area (0.0, 0.0) (2.0, 2.0)
line: -line (0.0, 0.0) (0.0, 2.0)
(2.0, 2.0) (4.0, 2.0) (6.0, 3.0)
click: -point (0.0, 0.0)
-orient orientation
Specify the text orientation.

MYR0,and MYR90 (default=R0).
-purpose purpose
-ThruVia 0|1

1 : Generate text labels through Via and treate text
label as connected physically.
0 : Do not generate text labels through Via.
-useVirtual 0|1

1 : Connect text labels appended with ":" for objects
belonging to a same net but which are not connected
together.
0 : Do not connect text labels appended with ":"
Examples
# Example 1
lakerGenText -from instance -mode full -height 1.0 -font Roman \
-justify LowerLeft -orient R90 -layerName POLY -purpose drawing
# Example 2
lakerGenText -from pin -mode full -height 1.0 -font Roman \
-justify CenterCenter -orient R0 -busParentheses square -fromTF
# Example 3
lakerGenText -from net -mode select -height 1.0 -font Modern \
-justify CenterCenter -orient R0 -busParentheses angle \
-layerName POLY -purpose drawing -attach 0
See Also
Layout Window: Create > Generate Text
682

K-2015.06

Create Commands
lakerRulerLabel
The lakerRulerLabel command draws ruler labels, and saves the drawing
of ruler labels into the related cell view for later reference.
Syntax
lakerRulerLabel -point point [-layerName layerName] [purpose purpose] [-font textFont] [-height height]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-font textFont

(default=Modern).
-height height

-point point
(x0,y0)...(xn,yn)

-purpose purpose
Specify the purpose name of the layer

(default=drawing).
Examples
lakerRulerLabel -layerName poly -purpose drawing \
-point (0,0) (10,0) (0,10)
See Also
Layout Window: Create > Ruler Label

K-2015.06
683

Edit Commands
Edit Commands
This section describes the Tcl commands applied to the Edit commands of the
684
lakerAlignObj
lakerAnnotatePin
lakerAttachObj
lakerAutoFix
lakerBoolean
lakerChgVia
lakerChopObj
lakerCloneMaster
lakerContinueBus
lakerConvertToPoly
lakerCopyObj
lakerCopyToClipboard
lakerCorrectOffGridObj
lakerCutCorner
lakerCutFinBdry
lakerCutPolyShape
lakerDeleteObj
lakerDtbAlign
lakerGroupObj
lakerHybridAlign
lakerLayerGen
lakerMakeCell
lakerMergeObj
lakerMirrorX
lakerMirrorY

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
lakerMoveObj
lakerPasteObj
lakerPropagateNet
lakerReassignNet
lakerRedo
lakerRepeatObj
lakerReshapeObj
lakerRotate
lakerRotate90
lakerSelGroupByName
lakerShiftOrigin
lakerSlitSlot
lakerSmashObj
lakerSplitArray
lakerSplitNet
lakerSplitObj
lakerStretchObj
lakerStripeWire
lakerSwapInstPort
lakerTrimWire
lakerTunnelObj
lakerUndo
lakerUngroupObj
lakerYankObj
lakerAlignObj
The lakerAlignObj command aligns each specified position of objects to a
reference edge.

K-2015.06
685

Edit Commands
Syntax
lakerAlignObj [ -point point -mode selMode | -refPoint
(x0,y0) [-space space] ] [-traversedist traverseDist]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode selMode
Specify the select mode of alignment, the mode for

the first point is start, the second one is select/
deselect.
-point
point (x0,y0)...(xn,yn)
Specify each position of the aligned objects.

-refPoint (x0,y0)
Specify a reference coordinate to align. x0 specifies

a position value for the x coordinate point while y0
specifies the value for the y coordinate point.
-space space
Make a spacing from each aligned edge to the

reference edge.
Valid value: a floating number, greater than 0.
-traversedist
traverseDist
Specify the traversing distance.

Examples
# align the point (10,0) object and point (20,0) object
# to point (0,0) object
lakerPreSel -point (10,0)
lakerAlignObj -point (10,0) -mode start
lakerAlignObj -point (20,0) -mode select
lakerAlignObj -refPoint (0,0)
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Others > Align
686

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
lakerAnnotatePin
The lakerAnnotatePin command validates new instance ports to nets.
Syntax
lakerAnnotatePin -annotate {{instPortName netName} ... }
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-annotate
{{instPortName netName} ... }
Set the net name to the instance ports of the

selected instance.
Examples
lakerAnnotatePin -annotate {{yb n1n29} {i n1n27} {vdd vdd} {vss
vss}}
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Annotate Pin
lakerAttachObj
The lakerAttachObj command attaches a child object to a parent object.
When moving, copying, or deleting a parent object, the child object is also
moved, copied, or deleted.
Syntax
lakerAttachObj -mode attachMode
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode attachMode
Specify the attach mode for the selected objects.

Valid values: children and toParent.

K-2015.06
687

Edit Commands
Examples
lakerSingleSel -point (0,0)
lakerAttachObj -mode children
lakerAttachObj -mode toParent
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Others > Attach
lakerAutoFix
The lakerAutoFix command runs AutoFix.
Syntax
lakerAutoFix [-region { {x1 y1} {x2 y2} }] [-insertJogs mode]
[-lockVias 0|1] [-lockInstances 0|1] [lockInvisibleShapes 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
688
Argument
Description
-insertJogs mode
Specifies whether to insert jogs.

Valid values: conservatively, aggressively,
and never (default=conservatively).
-lockInstances 0|1

1 : Lock the position of instances.
0 : Move instances.
-lockInvisibleShapes 0|1

1 : Lock the position of invisible shapes.
0 : Move invisible shapes.
-lockVias 0|1

1 : Lock the position of vias.
0 : Move vias.

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
Argument
Description
-region { {x1 y1} {x2 y2} }
Specifies the window extent with coordinates { {x1

y1} {x2 y2} } . If not specified, the full design layout
is applied by default.
Examples
lakerAutoFix -region { { -27.0 -2.8 } { 84.3 , 59.9 } } \
-insertJogs aggressively -lockInstances 0 -lockVias 0 \
-lockInvisibleShapes 0
lakerBoolean
The lakerBoolean command changes the selected shapes by using the
Boolean operation with point array.
Syntax
lakerBoolean -op booleanOperation -point point [-truncate
value] [-newObj 0|1] [-layerName layerName [-purpose
purpose]] [-convert 0|1] [-keepOrthogonal 0|1] [-absolute
0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-absolute 0|1

1 : Multiply the truncate value by sizing value.
0 : Do not multiply the truncate value.
-convert 0|1

1 : Convert the round path to polygon before sizing it.0
: Do not convert the round path to polygon before
sizing.
-keepOrthogonal 0|1

1 : Keep orthogonal edges.
0 : Cutting acute angle by its bisection regardless of
the vertical or horizontal edges.

K-2015.06
689

Edit Commands
Argument
Description
Assign to another layer. The operation shape is

changed by a specific layer.
-newObj 0|1

1 : Assign to the newly created shape.
0 : Do not assign to the newly created shape.
-op booleanOperation
Set Boolean operation.

Valid values: OR, AND, NOT, XOR, and SIZE. If this is
set to SIZE, the point option has no effect; and in this
case, four values need to be specified by the order
Left, Bottom, Right, Top, for example,
{SIZE 0.5 -0.3 0 0.15}
-point point
(x0,y0)...(xn,yn)
Draw a point array. x0...xn specify the x coordinate

for the point array while y0...yn specify the y
coordinate.
-purpose purpose
Assign to another layer purpose. The operation shape

is changed by a specific purpose.
-truncate value
Specify a value to cut out the sharp angle.

Valid value: a floating number, greater than 0
(default=2.61).
Examples
# Example 1
lakerBoolean -op {SIZE -0.1 -0.1 0.1 0.1} -newObj 1 \
-layerName THIN
# Example 2
lakerBoolean -op AND -point (2.42,4.87) (2.42,12.3) \
(4.74,12.3) (4.74,4.87)
# Example 3
lakerBoolean -op NOT
-point (1.29,8.13) (1.29,9.89) (9.84,9.89) (9.84,8.13) \
-layerName poly
# Example 4
lakerBoolean -op {SIZE 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2} -truncate 3.0
690

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
# Example 5
lakerBoolean -op {SIZE 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0} -truncate 2.61 \
-convert 1 -newObj 1 -layerName OD
# Example 6
lakerBoolean -op {SIZE 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5} -truncate 2.0 \
-keepOrthogonal 1 -absolute 1 -convert 1 -selObj 0
See Also
lakerChgVia
The lakerChgVia command replaces all vias by specified net name or
location.
Syntax
lakerChgVia {-netName name -point (x0,y0)| -area (x1,y1)
(x2,y2)} -from viaName -to replaceName [-normalOnly 0|1]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-area (x1,y1) (x2,y2)
Specify the area to select via devices. x1 and x2 specify

the x coordinate for the area while y1 and y2 specify the
y coordinate.
-from viaName
Specify the via candidate for replacement.
-netName name
-normalOnly 0|1

1 : Filter special routes during replacement.
0 : No filter.
-point (x0,y0)
Specify the position point to select a via device. x0

specifies a position value for the x coordinate point while
-to replaceName
Specify the target via (the via to be substituted).

K-2015.06
691

Edit Commands
Examples
# Example 1
lakerChgVia -netName net1 -from via12E -to via12S
# Example 2
lakerChgVia -netName net1 -area (0,0)(10,10) -from via12E \
-to via12S
# Example 3
lakerChgVia -area (0,0)(10,10) -from via12E -to via12S \
-normalOnly 1
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Others > Change Via
lakerChopObj
The lakerChopObj command chops the selected object with a point array.
Syntax
lakerChopObj -point point [-mode chopMode] [-keep 0|1] [keepPath 0|1] [-keepExtendPathEnds 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-keep 0|1

1 : Enable the Keep Chopped Area option.
0 : Disable the Keep Chopped Area option.
-keepExtendPathEnds 0|1 Valid values: Boolean values, 0 and 1.

1 : Enable the Keep Extend Path Ends in Chopped
Area option.
0 : Disable the Keep Extend Path Ends in Chopped
Area option.
-keepPath 0|1
692

1 : Enable the Chop Path Centerline option.
0 : Disable the Chop Path Centerline option.

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
Argument
Description
-mode chopMode
Specify the chop mode.

Valid values: line, polygon, and rectangle
(default=rectangle). When line is specified, the
remove action has no effect.
-point point
(x0,y0)...(xn,yn)
Draw a point array to chop shapes. x0...xn specify

the x coordinate for the point array while y0...yn
specify the y coordinate.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerChopObj -mode line -point (0,0) (10,10) (25,20) (30,-35)
# Example 2
lakerChopObj -mode rectangle -point \
(21.368,32.128) (26.781,41.427) -keepExtendPathEnds 0|1
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Chop
lakerCloneMaster
The lakerCloneMaster command copies the master cell of the specified
instance to another.
Syntax
lakerCloneMaster -cellname cellName -inst instName
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cellname cellName
Specify a new cell name.
-inst instName
Specify the action instance.
Examples
# Change the master cell of instance (xinvB) to cell (NewINV)
lakerCloneMaster -cellname NewINV -inst xinVB

K-2015.06
693

Edit Commands
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Clone Master
Design Browser: Clone Master
lakerContinueBus
The lakerContinueBus command continues drawing a bundle of the
selected paths or stack paths, and then changes their direction via the end
point of each path or stack path.
Syntax
lakerContinueBus -point point (x0,y0)...(xn,yn) [-ignoreNet
0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-ignoreNet 0|1

1 : Ignore the net after the continue bus operation.
0 : Do not ignore the net after the continue bus operation.
-point point
(x0,y0)...(xn,yn)

Examples
lakerContinueBus -point (16.265,-0.745) (14.87,-0.745) \
(14.87,-0.745) (13.33,-0.745) (13.33,0.42)
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Continue Bus
lakerConvertToPoly
The lakerConvertToPoly command converts the selected objects to
polygon shapes.
Syntax
lakerConvertToPoly [-snapGrid 0|1]
694

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-snapGrid 0|1

Examples
lakerConvertToPoly
See Also
dbPathToPolygon
Layout Window: Edit > Others > Convert To Polygon
lakerCopyObj
The lakerCopyObj command copies the selected objects from the reference
point to the offset point.
Syntax
lakerCopyObj -refPoint (x0,y0) -offsetPoint offsetPoint [orient orientation] [-rows rowsNo] [-cols colsNo] [layerName layerName [-purpose purpose]] [-keepLogic 0|1]
[-autoArrange 0|1 [-colSpace colSpace | -rowSpace
rowSpace]]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-autoArrange 0|1

1 : Arrange the array of copied objects automatically.
0 : Do not arrange the array of copied objects.
-cols colsNo
Specify the number of columns in the array of copied

objects.

K-2015.06
695

Edit Commands
Argument
Description
-colSpace colSpace
Specify the interval between two columns.

Valid value: a positive or negative floating number.
Copy a shape to another layer. The copied shapes

are changed by a specific layer.
-keepLogic 0|1

1 : Preserve the logic information of copied
object(s).
0 : Do not preserve the logic information of copied
object(s).
-offsetPoint offsetPoint
(x0,y0) [(x1,y1) [(x2,y2)]]
Control the position of the copied object. xn

specifies an offset value from the x coordinate point
while yn specifies the value from the y coordinate
point.
-orient orientation
Specify the orientation for objects.

-purpose purpose
Copy a shape to another layer purpose. The copied

shapes are changed by a specific purpose.
-refPoint (x0,y0)
Specify a reference coordinate to copy. x0 specifies

a reference position value for the x coordinate point
while y0 specifies the value for the y coordinate
point.
-rows rowsNo
Specify the number of rows in the array of copied

objects.
-rowSpace rowSpace
Specify the interval between two rows.

Valid value: a positive or negative floating number.
Examples
lakerCopyObj -refPoint (-17.73,24.571) -offsetPoint \
(-57.084,65.527) (-57.084,56.445) (-48.002,56.089) \
-cols 2 -rows 2 -orient R90 -layerName MET1 -purpose pin \
-keepLogic 1
696

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Copy
The lakerCopyToClipboard command copies the selected objects to a
temporay memory area for later pasting action.
Syntax
Returns
None
Examples
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Paste
lakerCorrectOffGridObj
The lakerCorrectOffGridObj command fixes off-grid instance or
geometric shape in the working cell view by shifting the off-grid point to the
closest grid point.
Syntax
lakerCorrectOffGridObj -mode mode -show option -correct item
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-correct item
Specify the item to be corrected.

Valid values: index and all.
index: fixes particular object by giving its index number (1 2
3 ...) such as 1 represents the first matched item.all: fixes
all objects.

K-2015.06
697

Edit Commands
Argument
Description
-mode mode
Define the filter mode for the search of off-grid objects.

Valid values: cell and select.
cell: searches on all objects within the working cell view.
select: searches on the selected objects only.
-show option
Define the filter mode for the matches of your search result.
Valid values: Instance and Shape.
Instance: displays off-grid instance only.
Shape: displays off-grid geometric shape only.
Examples
# Fix matched items 1 and 3 that the Find process found
# in the working cell view
lakerCorrectOffGridObj -mode cell -show Instance Shape \
-correct 1 3
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Others > Correct Off-grid Object
lakerCutCorner
The lakerCutCorner command cuts the object corner at 45 degrees or
smooths the object corner with the Arc Sides setting.
Syntax
lakerCutCorner [-cutangleLen nLength] [-cutangleSides
nSides]
Returns
None
Arguments
698
Argument
Description
-cutangleLen nLength
Specify the cutting length (default=1.0).
-cutangleSides nSides
Specify the arc sides of the cutting corner (default=8).

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
Examples
# Example 1
# Cut the selected object corner to 8 sides using 0.2 radius
lakerCutCorner -cutangleLen 0.2 -cutangleSides 8
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Others > Cut Corner
lakerCutFinBdry
The lakerCutFinBdry command cuts the fin boundary on design.
Syntax
lakerCutFinBdry [-cutLen nLength] [-stepTracksNum num] [lastStepTracks mode]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cutLen nLength
Specify the cut length.

-lastStepTracks mode
Specify the minimum number of tracks to be covered in

the last step.
Valid values: stepTracks and minTracks
(default=stepTracks).
-stepTrackNum num
Specify the number of step tracks to be covered in the

vertical segment for each step.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerCutFinBdry -cutLen 0.2 - stepTracksNum 2 \
-lastStepTracks stepTracks
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Others > Cut Fin Boundary

K-2015.06
699

Edit Commands
lakerCutPolyShape
When a poly shape is entirely crossed by a cut shape, and they are both on the
same design hierarchy, the lakerCutPolyShape command divides the poly
shape into two poly shapes.
Syntax
lakerCutPolyShape -cutoffLayer layerName [-cutoffPurpose
purposeName] -polyLayer layerName [-polyPurpose
purposeName]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cutoffLayer
layerName
Specify the layer name of the cut layer.
-cutoffPurpose
purposeName
Specify the purpose name of the cut layer

(default=drawing).
-polyLayer
layerName
Specify the layer name of the poly layer.
-polyPurpose
purposeName
Specify the purpose name of the poly layer

(default=drawing).
Examples
# Example 1
lakerCutPolyShape -cutoffLayer POLY2 -polyLayer POLY
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Others > Cut Poly Shape
lakerDeleteObj
The lakerDeleteObj command deletes the selected object(s).
Syntax
lakerDeleteObj
700

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
Returns
None
Examples
lakerDeleteObj
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Delete
lakerDtbAlign
The lakerDtbAlign command aligns more than one object at one time.
Syntax
lakerDtbAlign -opt alignOpt
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-opt alignOpt
Valid values: left, right, verCenter, hozCenter,

bottom, top, verDistrib, and hozDistrib.
left: Align to the left.
right: Align to the right.
verCenter: Align to the vertical center.
hozCenter: Align to the horizontal center.
bottom: Align to the bottom.
top: Align to the top.
verDistrib: Vertical distribution with spacing.
hozDistrib: Horizontal distribution with spacing.
Examples
lakerDtbAlign -opt left
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Others > Distributed & Align

K-2015.06
701

Edit Commands
lakerGroupObj
The lakerGroupObj command joins selected objects into one group so they
behave as one unit.
Syntax
lakerGroupObj -append 0|1 -name groupName
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-append 0|1

1 : Append selected objects to an existing group.
0 : Create a new group.
-name groupName
Examples
lakerGroupObj -append 1 -name g1
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Group
lakerHybridAlign
The lakerHybridAlign command aligns more objects at one time with
hybrid modes.
Syntax
lakerHybridAlign -mode mode [-align 0|1] [-distribute 0|1]
[-distributeMethod method] [-spacing value] [-orthogonal
0|1] [-sorting 0|1] [-orthogonalDirection Direction] [orthogonalSpacing value] [-reverseSorting 0|1] [sortMethod method] [-layerName layerName -purpose
purposeName] [-snap 0|1]
Returns
None
702

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-align 0|1

1 : Enable the Align option.
0 : Disable the Align option.
-distribute 0|1

1 : Enable the Distribute by option.
0 : Disable the Distribute by option.
-purpose purposeName
Specify the layer and the layers purpose name for

snapping boundary.
-distributeMethod method
Specify the distribute method.

Valid values: spacing and pitch.
-mode mode
Specify the align mode.

Valid values: alignLeft, alignRight, alignTop,
alignBottom, alignVerticalCenter, and
alignHorizontalCenter.
-orthogonal 0|1

1 : Enable the Orthogonal option.
0 : Disable the Orthogonal option.
-orthogonalDirection
Direction
Specify the orthogonal direction.

Valid values: rightUp, rightDown, topLeft, and
topRight.
-orthogonalSpacing value
Specify the orthogonal distance between objects

edges or centers.
-reverseSorting 0|1

1 : Enable the Reverse option.
0 : Disable the Reverse option.
-snap 0|1

1 : Enable the Snap by Reference Point option.
0 : Disable the Snap by Reference Point option.
-sorting 0|1

1 : Enable the Sorting by option.
0 : Disable the Sorting by option.

K-2015.06
703

Edit Commands
Argument
Description
-sortMethod method
Specify the sorting method.

Valid values: InstanceName, CellName, and
NetName.
-spacing value
Specify the distance between objects edges or

centers.
Examples
lakerHybridAlign -align 1 -alignMode alignLeft -distribute 1 \
-spacing 100 -orthogonalSpacing 1 -orthogonalSpacingValue 200 \
-distributeMethod spacing -sorting 1 -sortingMethod CellName \
-reverseSorting 0 -snap 0
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Others > Distributed and Align
lakerLayerGen
The lakerLayerGen command changes the shapes of specific layer by using
the Boolean operation.
Syntax
lakerLayerGen -layerName layerName1 layerName2 layerName3
[-with operationWith] [-purpose purpose1 purpose2
purpose3] [-op booleanOperation]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-layer layerName1
layerName1 specifies the layer of main shapes,
layerName2 layerName3 layerName2 specifies the layer of operating shapes,
and layerName3 specifies the layer of resulting
shapes.
-op booleanOperation
704
Set the Boolean operation.

Valid values: OR, AND, NOT, and XOR (default=OR).

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
Argument
Description
-purpose purpose1
purpose2 purpose3
purpose1 specifies the purpose of main shapes,

purpose2 specifies the purpose of operating
shapes, and purpose3 specifies the purpose of
resulting shapes. (default=drawing)
-with operationWith
Set the operation objects are from visible layers or

selectable layers.
Valid values: visible and select
(default=visible).
Examples
lakerLayerGen -op AND -layerName PIMP POLY PWELL
lakerLayerGen -op NOT -with select -layerName PIMP POLY PWELL
See Also
dbLayerGen
Layout Window: Edit > Others > Layer Gen...
lakerMakeCell
The lakerMakeCell command makes a cell view from the selected objects.
Syntax
lakerMakeCell -cell cellName [-lib libName] -view viewName
-instname instName [-replace 0|1] [-overwrite 0|1] [originOffset (Dx,Dy)] [-originPoint (x,y)]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
Specify the new cell.
-instname
instName
Specify the new instance name.
-lib libName
Specify the library database. The default is the active

library.

K-2015.06
705

Edit Commands
Argument
Description
-originOffset (Dx,Dy)
Set the origin offset. The default is (0,0).

-originOffset takes higher priority than
-originPoint.
-originPoint (x,y)
Set the point of the top cell view as the instance origin. The
default is (0,0).
-overwrite 0|1

1 : Overwrite the selected cell.
0 : Do not overwrite the selected cell.
-replace 0|1

1 : Enable the Replace Figures option.
0 : Disable the Replace Figures option.
-view viewName
Specify the view type of the cell (default=layout).
Examples
# Example 1
lakerMakeCell -replace 1 -cell INV_0 -view layout \
-instname aaa -overwrite 1
See Also
lakerSchMakeNode
dbSchMakeNode
Layout Window: Edit > Make Cell
lakerMergeObj
The lakerMergeObj command merges the selected shapes that touch or
overlap each other into one shape. Shapes on different layers cannot be
merged.
Syntax
lakerMergeObj [-sameNetOnly 0|1] [-moveColPoint 0|1]
Returns
None
706

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-sameNetOnly 0|1

1 : Merge shapes with the same net.
0 : Merge shapes but the belonging net name is cleared.
-moveColPoint 0|1

1 : Delete the points that approximate to collinear after
merging.
0 : Keep the points that approximate to collinear after
merging.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerMergeObj -sameNetOnly 1
# Example 2
lakerMergeObj -moveColPoint 1
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Merge
lakerMirrorX
The lakerMirrorX command mirrors the selected objects along the x-axis.
Syntax
lakerMirrorX [-individual 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-individual 0|1

1 : Enable the Individual Swap option.
0 : Disable the Individual Swap option.
Examples
lakerMirrorX

K-2015.06
707

Edit Commands
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Others > Mirror X
lakerMirrorY
The lakerMirrorY command mirrors the selected objects along the y-axis.
Syntax
lakerMirrorY [-individual 0|1] [-refPoint (x0,y0)]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-individual 0|1

1 : Enable the Individual Swap option.
0 : Disable the Individual Swap option.
-refPoint (x0,y0)
Specify a reference coordinate to mirror. x0 specifies a

reference position value for the x coordinate point while y0
Examples
# Example 1
lakerMirrorY -refPoint (-16.58169,-13.31044)
# Example 2
lakerMirrorY -individual 1
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Others > Mirror Y
lakerMoveObj
The lakerMoveObj command moves the selected object from reference point
to offset point.
708

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
Syntax
lakerMoveObj -refPoint (x0,y0) -offsetPoint (x0,y0) [-orient
orientation] [-layerName layerName [-purpose purpose]]
[-ignoreNet 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-ignoreNet 0|1

1 : Ignore the net of shapes/contacts.
0 : Do not ignore the net of shapes/contacts.
Move a shape to another layer. The moved shapes

Specify an offset direction to move. x0 specifies an

offset value from the x coordinate point while y0
specifies the value from the y coordinate point.
-orient orientation
Specify the orientation for objects.

-purpose purpose
Move a shape to another layer purpose. The moved

-refPoint (x0,y0)
Specify a reference coordinate to move. x0 specifies

a reference position value for the x coordinate point
Examples
lakerMoveObj -refPoint (3.440,15.890) \
-offsetPoint (9.210,11.890) -orient R90 -layerName FUSE1
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Move

K-2015.06
709

Edit Commands
lakerPasteObj
The lakerPasteObj command pastes the copied or yanked object from
clipboard to the current cell view.
Syntax
lakerPasteObj -point (x0,y0) [-stack 0|1] [-guiMode 0|1]
[-oneExecute 0|1] [-procedure procedureName] [clientData clientData] [-orient orientation] [-justify
justification]
Returns
None
Arguments
710
Argument
Description
-clientData
clientData
Specify the client data, which is treated as the second

argument of the specified procedure.
-guiMode 0|1

1 : Apply the interactive GUI mode after this Tcl is exectued
and show the rubber banding of stacked layout objects.
0 : Do not apply the interactive GUI mode after this Tcl is
executed.
-justify
justification
Specify the justification of the pasting referenced point.

LowerRight (default=Original).
-oneExecute 0|1

1 : Execute this Tcl in one time execution mode.
0 : Execute this Tcl in continuous mode.
-orient
orientation

-point (x0,y0)
Specify a position to paste. x0 specifies a position value for

the x coordinate point while y0 specifies the value for the y
coordinate point.

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
Argument
Description
-procedure
procedureName
Specify a Tcl procedure name. For example:

proc tcl_procedure {reason clientData} {...}
-stack 0|1

1 : Enable the stacking function.
0 : Disable the stacking function.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerPasteObj -point (9.210,11.890) -orient R90
# Example 2
lakerPasteObj -point (0.0,2.89) -justify Original -stack 1 \
-guiMode 1 -oneExecute 0 -procedure iPasteCB \
-clientData [lakerGetSelSet]
# Example 3
lakerPasteObj -point (22.935,12.25) -justify CenterCenter \
-stack 1 -guiMode 1 -procedure iPasteCB
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Paste
lakerPropagateNet
The lakerPropagateNet command assigns a net to all shapes, route
objects, or instance pins without a net name in the working cell view by
propagating the net name from their overlapping shapes, route objects, or
instance pins.
Syntax
lakerPropagateNet
Returns
None
Examples
lakerPropagateNet
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Net Operation > Propagate Net

K-2015.06
711

Edit Commands
lakerReassignNet
The lakerReassignNet command reassigns an existing net to another net
name.
Syntax
lakerReassignNet -netName newName
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-netName newName
Specify a net name to the selected objects.
Examples
lakerReassignNet -netName n1
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Net Operation > Reassign Net
lakerRedo
The lakerRedo command repeats the last editing command.
Syntax
lakerRedo
Returns
None
Examples
# redo the last editing command
lakerRedo
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Redo
712

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
lakerRepeatObj
The lakerRepeatObj command repeats the last copy command to newly
selected objects.
Syntax
lakerRepeatObj
Returns
None
Examples
lakerRepeatObj
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Others > Repeat
lakerReshapeObj
The lakerReshapeObj command reshapes the selected object with a point
array.
Syntax
lakerReshapeObj -point point [-mode reshapeMode] [-swap
swapNo]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode reshapeMode
Reshape mode sets whether you are adding a

rectangle, polygon or redrawing a path.
Valid values: rectangle and line
(default=rectangle).
-point point
(x0,y0)...(xn,yn)
Draw a point array to reshape a shape. x0...xn specify

the x coordinate for the point array while y0...yn

K-2015.06
713

Edit Commands
Argument
Description
-swap swapNo
The reshape action always makes two shapes but only

one can be selected; while the swap option selects the
value that is not selected by default.
Examples
lakerReshapeObj -mode line -swap 1 \
-point (0,0) (10,10) (25,20) (30,-35)
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Reshape
lakerRotate
The lakerRotate command rotates the selected objects at any angle. This
command does not support the rotation of MCells, instances, text labels, Tcl
PCells, ruler labels, and dimension marks.
Syntax
lakerRotate -point (x0,y0) -angle angle [-snap 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-angle angle
Specify the angle to rotate the object.
-point (x0,y0)
x0 specifies a position value for the x coordinate point while y0

-snap 0|1

1 : Snap rotated objects onto the grid resolution.
0 : Do not snap rotated objects onto the grid resolution.
Examples
lakerRotate -point (0,0) -angle 20.0 -snap 1
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Others > Rotate
714

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
lakerRotate90
The lakerRotate90 command turns the selected objects at 90 degrees
counterclockwise.
Syntax
lakerRotate90
Returns
None
Examples
lakerRotate90
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Others > Rotate 90
lakerSelGroupByName
The lakerSelGroupByName command queries groups by name and adds
the matched group to the select set.
Syntax
lakerSelGroupByName -groupName groupName -zoomTo 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-groupName
groupName
Specify the group name. Multiple groups must be separated

by spaces.
-zoomTo 0|1

1 : Fit the highlighted group to screen.
0 : Highlight the group with the current viewing area.
Examples
lakerSelGroupByName -groupName g3 g5 -zoomTo 1

K-2015.06
715

Edit Commands
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Group Operation > Select Group By Name
lakerShiftOrigin
The lakerShiftOrigin command shifts the original point of the active cell
view to a new origin.
Syntax
lakerShiftOrigin -point (x0,y0)
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-point (x0,y0)

Examples
lakerShiftOrigin -point (9.210,11.890)
See Also
dbShiftOrigin
Layout Window: Edit > Others > Shift Origin
lakerSlitSlot
The lakerSlitSlot command slots on AnyAngle metal shapes.
Syntax
lakerSlitSlot -action create -mode mode [-slitLayer {layer
purpose}] [-guideline {layer purpose} [deleteGuideline]] [-operation booleanOP -blockLayer
{layer purpose}] [-ruleDef rules]
lakerSlitSlot -loadRuleFile -filename fileName
lakerSlitSlot -saveRuleFile -filename fileName
Returns
None
716

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-action create
Generate slot shapes.
-blockLayer
{layer purpose}
Specify the layer and purpose of the blockage layer.
-deleteGuideline
Delete the guildline after slitting.
-fileName
fileName
Specify the rule file for loading and saving.
-guideline
{layer purpose}
Specify the layer and purpose of the guideline layer.
-loadRuleFile
Load the rules from an existing file.
-mode mode
Specify the slitting mode.

Valid values: Cell and Select (default=Cell).
-operation
booleanOP
Specify the Boolean operation between the slit layer and

the blockage layer.
Valid values: AND and NOT.
-ruleDef rules
Specify the slit rules with the following format:

{rulename value}.
-saveRuleFile
Save the rules to a file.
-slitLayer
{layer purpose}
Specify the layer and purpose of the slit layer.

K-2015.06
717

Edit Commands
Examples
# Example 1
lakerSlitSlot -action create -slitLayer {Met1 drawing} \
-guideline {poly drawing} -operation not -blockLayer \
{BLOCK1 drawing} -mode cell -ruleDef {slitWidth 3}
# Example 2
# Load the rule file
lakerSlitSlot -loadRuleFile -filename /home/work/laker.st \
-saveToRC 0
# Example 3
# Save the rule file
lakerSlitSlot -saveRuleFile -filename /home/work/laker.st \
-saveToRC 0
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Slit
lakerSmashObj
The lakerSmashObj command flattens the number of levels of instances,
which include Tcl PCells, MCells and leaf cells as polygon data, based on the
user-specified level.
Syntax
lakerSmashObj [-level level] [-SmashArrayInst 0|1] [autoGroup 0|1] [-smashStripedWire 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
718
Argument
Description
-autoGroup 0|1

1 : Group objects of the smashed instance automatically.
0 : Do not group objects of the smashed instance.
-level level

smashed (default=all levels).
Valid value: a non-negative integer, 1-50 (default=1).

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
Argument
Description
-SmashArrayInst 0|1

1 : Smash instances, arrays or MCells.
0 : Do not smash any instances, arrays or MCells.
-smashStripedWire 0|1

1 : Only the striped wire is smashed and the normal
instance or MCell are not smashed.
0 : Do not smash any stripe wires or normal instances/
MCells.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerSmashObj -level 1 -SmashArrayInst 1
# Example 2
lakerSmashObj -level 2 -autoGroup 1
See Also
dbSmashInst
dbSchFlatten
lakerSchFlattenAll
lakerSchFlattenLvl
lakerSchFlattenOne
Layout Window: Edit > Smash
lakerSplitArray
The lakerSplitArray command separates selected instance arrays.
Syntax
lakerSplitArray [-swap swapNo] -point (x1,y1) (x2,y2)
Returns
None

K-2015.06
719

Edit Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-point
(x1,y1) (x2,y2)
Draw a line to split instance array. x1, x2 specify the x

coordinate for the point array while y1, y2 specify the y
coordinate.
-swap swapNo
The split action makes two parts of split segment but only
one can be selected; while the swap option selects the
value that is not selected, by default.
Examples
lakerSplitArray -swap 1 -point (7.318,6.349) (13.533,6.349)
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Split Array
lakerSplitNet
The lakerSplitNet command splits an existing net to multiple net segments.
Syntax
lakerSplitNet [-mode splitMode] -points point list -net
{{netName (x,y)} ... }
Returns
None
Arguments
720
Argument
Description
-mode splitMode
Specify the split mode to control the shape to be used

as the cutter.
Valid values: rectangle and polygon
(default=rectangle).
-net
{{netName (x,y)} ... }
Specify the objects included in the region, the point

(x,y) located on, with the net name.
-points point list
Draw a point array to split net. x0...xn specifies x

corrdinate for the point array while y0...yn specifies
y coordinate.

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
Examples
# Example 1
lakerSplitNet -mode rectangle -points \
(21.368,32.128) (26.781,41.427) \
-net {n1_1 (21.368,33.763)} {n1_2 (26.781,33.763)}
# Example 2
lakerSplitNet -mode polygon \
-points (20.813,41.288) (20.813,32.128) (8.877,32.128) \
(8.877,27.548) (8.877,27.548) (25.671,27.548) (25.671,41.288) \
-net {n1_1 (25.671,30.794)} {n1_2 (18.395,27.548)} \
{n1_3 (11.074,32.128)} {n1_4 (23.553,27.548)}
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Net Operation > Split Net
lakerSplitObj
The lakerSplitObj command uses a line to spilt and stretches the selected
object from reference point to offset point.
Syntax
lakerSplitObj -point point -refPoint (x0,y0) -offsetPoint
(x0,y0) [-swap swapNo] [-lockAngle 0|1] [-layerName
layerName] [-purpose purpose]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-layerName
layerName
Stretch a shape to another layer. The stretched shapes

-lockAngle 0|1

1 : Lock the angle of objects while stretching in order to
prevent changes.
0 : Do not lock the angle of objects while stretching.
Specify an offset direction to stretch part of splitter

edges. x0 specifies an offset value from the x
coordinate point while y0 specifies the value from the y
coordinate point.

K-2015.06
721

Edit Commands
Argument
Description
-point point
(x0,y0)...(xn,yn)
Draw a line to split shapes. x0...xn specify the x

coordinate for the point array while y0...yn specify
the y coordinate.
-purpose purpose
Stretch a shape to another layer purpose. The

stretched shapes are changed by a specific purpose.
-refPoint (x0,y0)
Specify a reference coordinate to stretch part of splitter

edges. x0 specifies a reference position value for the x
coordinate point while y0 specifies the value for the y
coordinate point.
-swap swapNo
The split action makes two parts of stretched edges but

only one can be selected; while the swap option selects
the value that is not selected, by default.
Examples
lakerSplitObj -lockAngle 1 -point (0,0) (10,10) (25,20) (30,-35)
-refPoint (-6.020,13.650) -offsetPoint (-4.420,12.120) layerName POLY
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Split
lakerStretchObj
The lakerStretchObj command stretches the selected object from a
reference point to an offset point.
Syntax
lakerStretchObj [-push] -refPoint (x0,y0) -offsetPoint
(x0,y0) [-lockAngle 0|1] [-layerName layerName [-purpose
purpose]] [-ignoreNet 0|1] [-slideRail mode]
Returns
None
722

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-ignoreNet 0|1

1 : Enable the Ignore Logic Information (Shape/Contact)
option.
0 : Disable the Ignore Logic Information (Shape/Contact)
option.
-layerName
layerName
Stretch a shape to another layer. The stretched shapes

are changed by a specified layer.
-lockAngle 0|1

1 : Enable the Lock Angle option.
0 : Disable the Lock Angle option.
Specify an offset direction to stretch. x0 specifies an

-purpose purpose
Stretch a shape to another layer purpose. The stretched

-push
Enable the push-wire function.
-refPoint (x0,y0)
Specify a reference coordinate to stretch. x0 specifies a

reference position value for the x coordinate point while
-slideRail mode
Specify the slide-rail mode.

Valid values: individual, backbone, and fixedVia
(default=individual).
Examples
# Example 1
lakerStretchObj -refPoint (-6.0,13.6) -offsetPoint (4.420,12.120) \
-layerName POLY
# Example 2
lakerStretchObj -push -refPoint (-1.49,1.28) -ignoreNet 0 \
-offsetPoint (-1.49,-0.96)
# Example 3
lakerStretchObj -slideRail fixedVia -refPoint (3.425,1.855) \
-ignoreNet 0 -offsetPoint (3.425,2.105)

K-2015.06
723

Edit Commands
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Stretch
lakerStripeWire
The lakerStripeWire command stripes selected wire objects, including
paths, pathSegs, and vias.
Syntax
lakerStripeWire [-policy StripePolicy] [-beginStrap 0|1] [endStrap 0|1] [-expandSel]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-beginStrap 0|1

1 : Indicate there is a strap at the begin terminal.
0 : Do not indicate the strap at the begin terminal.
-endStrap 0|1

1 : Indicate there is a strap at the end terminal.
0 : Do not indicate the strap at the end terminal.
-expandSel
When specified, expands selection from current selected

objects.
-policy StripePolicy
Sets striped width, spacing, and number.

Valid values: Optimal, Footprint, and Width
(default=Optimal).
Examples
# Stripe the selected wire objects with optimal policy,
# do not create strap at begin/end.
lakerStripeWire -policy Optimal -beginStrap 0 -endStrap 0 \
-expandSel
724

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
lakerSwapInstPort
The lakerSwapInstPort command swaps the net of two specified instance
ports.
Syntax
lakerSwapInstPort [[-inst instance_name] | -portName
port_name]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-inst instance_name
Specify the instance.
-portName port_name
Specify the two ports to be swapped.
Examples
# Swap the net of instance(xsc) port(a,b)
lakerSwapInstPort -inst xsc -portName a b
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Net Operation > Swap Instance Port
lakerSwapPort
lakerTrimWire
The lakerTrimWire command trims the edge of selected objects to the
nearest wire, the cross edge or area.
Syntax
lakerTrimWire [-mode mode] [-net 0|1]
Returns
None

K-2015.06
725

Edit Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode mode
Specify the preferred mode for trimming.

Valid values: Wire, ViaEdge, and ViaCnter
(default=Wire).
-net 0|1

1 : Enable the Trim by Net option.
0 : Disable the Trim by Net option.
Examples
# To trim the wire to the nearest edge of the cross object
# without considering the net relationship
lakerTrimWire -mode Wire -net 0
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Others > Trim Wire
lakerTunnelObj
The lakerTunnelObj command makes an opening through the selected path
with a point array, and then replaces the opening with a contact and connects
the path with a new layer.
Syntax
lakerTunnelObj -point point -cutoffLayerName
cutoffLayerName [-cutoffPurpose cutoffPurpose] replaceLayerName replaceLayerName [-replacePurpose
replacePurpose] [-via2via via2via] [-contRow contRow]
[-repWidth repWidth] [-xLay1Enc xLay1Enc] [-yLay1Enc
yLay1Enc] [-xLay2Enc xLay2Enc] [-yLay2Enc yLay2Enc] [viaGroup mode -viaDef ViaName]
Returns
None
Arguments
726
Argument
Description
-contRow contRow


K-2015.06

Edit Commands
Argument
Description
-cutoffLayerName
cutoffLayerName
Assign to a cutoff layer. The operation shape is cut by

a specified layer.
-cutoffPurpose
cutoffPurpose
Assign to a cutoff layer purpose. The operation shape

is cut by a specified purpose (default=drawing).
-point point
(x0,y0)...(xn,yn)
Draw a point array to tunnel path shapes. x0...xn

specify the x coordinate for the point array while
y0...yn specify the coordinate.
-replaceLayerName
replaceLayerName
Assign to another layer. The operation shape is

changed by a specified layer.
-replacePurpose
replacePurpose
Assign to another layer purpose. The operation shape

is changed by a specified purpose (default=drawing).
-repWidth repWidth
Change to the replaced path width. The cutoff width is

kept by default.
-via2via via2via
Specify the spacing for the center of the contact

position to another between two paths.
Valid value: a floating number (default=0.0)
-viaDef ViaName
Specify the name of the via definition.
-viaGroup mode
Specify the via group.

vias are created based on the MCell contact device
definition.
standard/custom via definition exists in the technology
file, vias are created based on the standard/custom via
definition.
If -viaGroup is not specified, vias are created
automatically when changing the layer.
-xLay1Enc xLay1Enc

K-2015.06
Specify the horizontal enclosure distance between the

727

Edit Commands
Argument
Description
-xLay2Enc xLay2Enc
Specify the horizontal enclosure distance between the

-yLay1Enc yLay1Enc

-yLay2Enc yLay2Enc

Examples
# Example 1
lakerTunnelObj -point (0,0) (10,10) (25,20) (30,-35) \
-cutoffLayerName POLY -replaceLayerName MET1
# Example 2
lakerTunnelObj -point (-1547.94,-27.495) (-1547.94,-19.99) \
(-1537.81,-19.99) (-1537.81,-27.495) \
-cutoffLayerName METAL1 -replaceLayerName METAL2 \
-viaGroup RouteVia -viaDef via1Array -xLay1Enc 0.2 \
-yLay1Enc 0.2 -xLay2Enc 0.2 -yLay2Enc 0.2
# Example 3
lakerTunnelObj -point (-1552.89,-20.195) (-1552.89,-15.795) \
(-1545.705,-15.795) (-1545.705,-20.195) \
-cutoffLayerName METAL1 -replaceLayerName METAL2 \
-viaGroup MCell -viaDef M1_M2 -xLay1Enc 0.2 -yLay1Enc 0.2 \
-xLay2Enc 0.2 -yLay2Enc 0.2
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Tunnel
lakerUndo
The lakerUndo command reverses the last editing command.
Syntax
lakerUndo
Returns
None
Examples
# undo the last editing command
lakerUndo
728

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Undo
lakerUngroupObj
The lakerUngroupObj command separates previously grouped objects so
that they can be manipulated individually.
Syntax
lakerUngroupObj [-level level]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-level level
Specify the number of design hierarchy levels to be ungrouped.

Valid value: a non-negative integer, 1-50.
Examples
lakerUngroupObj -level 1
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Ungroup
lakerYankObj
The lakerYankObj command returns a clipboard cell view identifier if the
selected objects or a set of area enclosing the objects can be copied to the
yank buffer for later pasting.
Syntax
lakerYankObj -refPoint (x,y) [-point (x1,y1) ... (xn,yn)]
Returns
A clipboard cell view identifier if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.

K-2015.06
729

SDL Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-point (x1,y1) ... (xn,yn)
Specify the coordinate points for yank area. If you

specify two points only, (x1,y1) specifies the lower
left corner of the bounding box while (x2,y2)
specifies the upper right corner. If this argument is
not specified, the selected objects are copied to the
yank buffer.
-refPoint (x,y)
Specify the referenced point for later pasting.
Examples
# for yank the selected objects
lakerYankObj
# if nothing selection, yank with rectangle
lakerYankObj -point (3.0,15.0) (9.0,11.5)
# if nothing selection, yank with polygon
lakerYankObj -point (0.0,0.0) (0.0,5.0) (5.0,5.0) (5.0,10.0)
(10.0,10.0) (10.0,0.0)
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Yank
SDL Commands
This section describes the Tcl commands applied to the SDL commands of the
730
lakerCopyAssoc
lakerCrSoftPin
lakerDelPin
lakerDelSoftPin
lakerGenPin
lakerMatch
lakerPasteWithLogic
lakerPatternReuse

K-2015.06

SDL Commands
lakerToStickDiagram
lakerYankWithLogic
lakerCopyAssoc
The lakerCopyAssoc command copies a selected layout pattern on the
layout window and associate the logic information for the matched candidates.
Syntax
Dump the searched results of candidates:
lakerCopyAssoc [-mode mode] [-selObj 0|1] [-parameter 0|1]
[-autoMapInfo fileName]
Create and associate the data:
lakerCopyAssoc [-arrayMode 0|1] [-rearrangeMaster 0|1] [cols columnNum -rows rowNum -typeIn 0|1 -colSpace colSpace
-rowSpace rowSpace] [-orient orientationList] [-mapInfo
mapInfoList -point point (x0,y0)...(xn,yn)] [[rowDoubleBack 0|1] [-colDoubleBack 0|1] [-flipRow 0|1]
[-flipCol 0|1]]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-arrayMode 0|1

1 : Arrange objects by array style.
0 : Do not arrange objects by array style.
-autoMapInfo
fileName
Specify the output file to save the candidate data.
-colDoubleBack 0|1

1 : Enable the Double Back for Columns option.
0 : Disable the Double Back for Columns option.
This argument is valid only if -arrayMode 1 is
specified.
-cols colsNum
Specify the number of columns for instances.


K-2015.06
731

SDL Commands
732
Argument
Description
-colSpace
colSpace
Specify the number of instances for y coordinate

spacing.
-flipCol 0|1

1 : Enable the Flip All Columns option.
0 : Disable the Flip All Columns option.
specified.
-flipRow 0|1

1 : Enable the Flip All Rows option.
0 : Disable the Flip All Rows option.
specified.
-mapInfo
mapInfoList
Specify the mapping information list with the following

format:
{ {userDefInstName1} {mapInstName1}
{userDefInstName2} {mapInstName2}...}
{ {userDefNetName1} {mapNetName1}
{userDefNetName2} {mapNetName2}...}}
where userDefInstName is the specified instance,
userDefNetName is the specified net, mapInstName
is the instance to be reused, and mapNetName is the net
to be reused.
-mode mode
Valid values: connection and topology

(default=connection).
connection : Only the net connection is considered
when searching candidates.
topology : No net connection but the topology
relationship is considered when searching candidates.
-orient
orientationList
Specify the orientation list with the following format: {

R0 R0 R90 R180 ... }

K-2015.06

SDL Commands
Argument
Description
-parameter 0|1

1 : Compare with the device parameters (dimension), for
example: W and L for MOS devices, and value for
resistors and capacitors.
0 : Do not compare with the above device parameters.
-point point
(x0,y0)...(xn,yn)

-rearrangeMaster 0|1

1 : Rearrange master cells.
0 : Do not rearrange master cells.
specified.
-rowDoubleBack 0|1

1 : Enable the Double Back for Rows option.
0 : Disable the Double Back for Rows option.
specified.
-rows rowsNum
Specify the number of rows for instances.

-rowSpace
rowSpace

spacing.
-selObj 0|1

1 : Enable the Selected Objects option.
0 : Disable the Selected Objects option.
-typeIn 0|1

1 : Specify the x- and y-spacing between objects when
copying them with array mode.
0 : Do not specify the x- and y-spacing between objects
when copying them with array mode.

K-2015.06
733

SDL Commands
Examples
# Example 1
# Dump the searched results to a file
lakerCopyAssoc -mode topology -selObj 1 -parameter 0 \
-autoMapInfo topology.out
# Example 2
lakerCopyAssoc -arrayMode 1 -cols 2 -rows 3 -typeIn 1 \
-colSpace 2.5 -rowSpace 3.3 -mapInfo \
{{{M10} {M9} {M11} {M12}} {{M14} {M13} {M15} {M16}} \
{{M20} {M19} {M17} {M18}} {{M25} {M26} {M28} {M27}} \
{{M95} {M96} {M97} {M98}} {{M5} {M6} {M8} {M7}}} \
-point (31.25,11.02) -orient { R0 }
# Example 3
lakerCopyAssoc -arrayMode 0 -mapInfo \
{{{M10} {M9} {M11} {M12}} {{M14} {M13} {M15} {M16}} \
{{M20} {M19} {M17} {M18}} {{M25} {M26} {M28} {M27}} \
{{M95} {M96} {M97} {M98}} {{M5} {M6} {M8} {M7}}} \
-point (40.72,52.668) (34.096,47.463) (30.31,35.633) \
(52.55,44.624) (31.257,28.772) (63.906,42.494) \
-orient { R0 R0 R90 R180 R270 R0 }
See Also
Layout Window: SDL > Copy & Associate
lakerCrSoftPin
The lakerCrSoftPin command creates soft pin after opening the layout cell.
Syntax
lakerCrSoftPin
Returns
None
Examples
lakerCrSoftPin
See Also
Layout Window: SDL > Soft Pin > Create Soft Pin
734

K-2015.06

SDL Commands
lakerDelPin
The lakerDelPin command deletes all system pins, generated by the
Generate System Pin command.
Syntax
lakerDelPin
Returns
None
Examples
lakerDelPin
See Also
Layout Window: SDL > Delete System Pin
lakerDelSoftPin
The lakerDelSoftPin command deletes the selected soft pin.
Syntax
lakerDelSoftPin
Returns
None
Examples
lakerDelSoftPin
See Also
Layout Window: SDL > Soft Pin > Delete Soft Pin
lakerGenPin
The lakerGenPin command creates real pins for soft pins. It automatically
creates pin shapes from the traversed shape with net and port properties and
removes the soft pin(s) after realization.

K-2015.06
735

SDL Commands
Syntax
lakerGenPin [-points points] [-genPinBy label|net|mix]
[-report 0|1] [-topLevelOnly 0|1] [-extLevel levelNo]
[-useColonVirtual 0|1] [-pinSize 0|1 -width width [excludePoly 0|1] [-topMetalLayer number] [-thruVia 0|1]]
[-usePinPurpose 0|1] [-placementStatus status]
Returns
Arguments
736
Argument
Description
-excludePoly 0|1

1 : Do not generate system pins with poly shapes.
0 : Generate system pins with poly shapes.
-extLevel levelNo
Specify the extraction level.

-genPinBy
label|net|mix
Specify the method to create system pins.

Valid values: label, net, mix (default=label).
-pinSize 0|1

1 : Enable the Pin Size option.
0 : Disable the Pin Size option.
-placementStatus status
Specify the pin placement status.

Valid values: Fixed, Cover, Placed, Unplaced,
and Null (default=Placed).
-points points
Specify a region to generate system pins. If it is not

specified, system pins are generated in the top cell.
-report 0|1

1 : Show a report after the command is invoked.
0 : Do not show the report after the command is
invoked.
-thruVia 0|1

1 : Propagate system pins through via/contact.
0 : Do not propagate system pins through via/contact.

K-2015.06

SDL Commands
Argument
Description
-topLevelOnly 0|1

1: Create pin shapes from the traversed shapes with
net and port properties at the top level, and the soft
pin is removed.
0: Not only create pin shapes from the top level, but
also from instances.
-topMetalLayer number
Valid value: an integer, larger than or equal to 1

(default=1).
If it is specified, use the specified number of top metal
layers to generate system pins.
If it is not specified, do not use top metal layers to
generate system pins.

1 : Use colon as the virtual connection.
0 : Do not use colon as the virtual connection.
This option decides whether the joint type of a
generated pin shape is weak or disjointed. If the label
is followed by a colon (:), it is weak.
-usePinPurpose 0|1

1 : Use pin purpose.
0 : Do not use pin purpose.
This option decides whether the pin purpose is copied
to the pin shapes.
-width width

generated pin shapes.
This argument is only valid for -pinSize 1.

K-2015.06
737

SDL Commands
Examples
# Example 1
lakerGenPin -genPinBy label -extLevel 1 -useColonVirtual 1
-pinSize 1 -width 5.0
# Example 2
lakerGenPin -points (-2.07,3.58) (-2.07,9.71) \
(7.08,9.71) (7.08,3.58) -genPinBy net -topLevelOnly 0
# Example 3
lakerGenPin -points \
{(-2.07,3.58) (-2.07,9.71) (7.08,9.71) (7.08,3.58)} \
{(-13.82,6.02) (-9.28,6.02) (-9.28,3.15) \
(-7.015,3.15) (-7.015,-0.41) (-13.82,-0.41)} \
-genPinBy net -topLevelOnly 0
# Example 4
lakerGenPin -genPinBy net -topLevelOnly 1 -topMetalLayer 2 \
-excludePoly 1
See Also
Layout Window: SDL > Generate System Pin
lakerMatch
The lakerMatch command makes the arrangement of symmetrical patterns
for analog circuits, according to the selected transistors and instances in the
Layout window pane.
Refer to the lakerSchMatch description for more details.
Syntax
lakerMatch -XSpace xSpace -YSpace ySpace -repeatRow
repeatRow -repeatCol repeatCol -param matchPattern [ODSharing 0|1] [-inst instName1]
Returns
Refer to the Arguments section in lakerSchMatch for more details on
arguments.
738

K-2015.06

SDL Commands
Examples
# Example 1
lakerMatch -XSpace 1.0 -YSpace 2.0 -repeatRow 1 -repeatCol 1 \
-param {0 {0 my} 0 {0 my}}
# Example 2
-param {0 {1 my} 0 {0 my} 1 {0 my} } {{1 mx} {0 mxy} {1 mx} \
{1 mxy} {0 mx} {1 mxy} } {0 {1 my} 0 {0 my} 1 {0 my} }
# Example 3
-param {0 {1 my} 1 {0 my}} {{1 mx} {0 mxy} {0 mx} {1 mxy}}
See Also
Layout Window: SDL > Match
Matching Device Creator
lakerPasteWithLogic
The lakerYankWithLogic command copies selected layout instances with
their logic information to a yank buffer for later pasting action.
The lakerPasteWithLogic command pastes instances with their logic
information from a yank buffer.
The combination of these two commands allows copying instances to another
design.
Syntax
lakerPasteWithLogic [-point (x0, y0)] [-shortNet 0|1] [globalNet 0|1] [-dim 0|1] [-formGate 0|1] [-arrayMode
0|1] [-cols colsNo] [-rows rowsNo] [-typeIn 0|1] [colSpace colSpace] [-cmpInnerNet 0|1] [-rowSpace
rowSpace] [-autoMapInfo fileName] [-cmpSubstrate 0|1] [mapInfo { {mappingInformation1} {mappingInformation2}
...}] [-corrPointFile corrPointFile] [-orient
orientation]
Returns
None

K-2015.06
739

SDL Commands
Arguments
740
Argument
Description
-arrayMode 0|1

1 : Arrange the objects by array style.
0 : Do not arrange the objects by array style.
-autoMapInfo fileName
Specify a file in which the candidate data can be

accessed.
-cmpInnerNet 0|1

1 : Compare inner nets.
0 : Do not compare any inner nets.
-cmpSubstrate 0|1

1 : Compare substrates.
0 : Do not compare any substrates.
-cols colsNo
Number of instance columns.

-colSpace colSpace
Number of instance for y coordinate spacing.

-corrPointFile
corrPointFile
Specify the initial corresponding file in full path.
-dim 0|1

1 : Consider the dimension net of primitive object if
the object to be copied is a primitive object like MOS.
0 : Do not consider the dimension net of primitive
object.
-globalNet 0|1

1 : Consider global nets.
0 : Do not consider any global nets.
-shortNet 0|1

1 : Consider external short nets.
0 : Do not consider any external short nets.
-find 0|1

1 : Get the matching list of the specified cell.
0 : Do not get the matching list of the specified cell.

K-2015.06

SDL Commands
Argument
Description
-formGate 0|1

1 : Consider the form gate topology, which treats
serial or parallel device structure as equalivlent
schematic circuit.
0 : Do not consider the form gate topology, which
treats serial or parallel device structure as equalivlent
schematic circuit.
-mapInfo {
{mappingInformation1}
{mappingInformation2}
...}
Specify the mapping information with the following

format:
where:
userDefInstName: The specified instance.
userDefNetName: The specified net.
mapInstName: The instance to be reused.
mapNetName: The net to be reused.
-orient orientation

-point (x0, y0)

-rows rowsNo

-rowSpace rowSpace

spacing.
-typeIn 0|1

1 : Specify the x- and y-spacing between objects if
0 : Do not specify the x- and y-spacing between
objects if copying them with array mode.

K-2015.06
741

SDL Commands
Examples
lakerPreSel -point (-0.702,6.89) -traversedist 0.37 \
lakerYankWithLogic \
lakerPasteWithLogic -shortNet 0 -globalNet 1 -dim 1 -formGate 0 \
-cmpSubstrate 0 -cmpInnerNet 1 -arrayMode 1 -cols 1 -rows 1 \
-typeIn 0 -point (6.78,-11.66) -orient R0 \
-mapInfo {{ {{N4} {N4} {P4} {P4} } {{LATCH_N} {LATCH_N} \
{LATCH_P} {LATCH_P} {NET046} {NET046} {OUTPUTB} \
{OUTPUTB} {VDD!} {VDD!} {VSS!} {VSS!} } } \
{ {{N3} {N4} {P3} {P4} } {{LATCH_N} {LATCH_N} \
{LATCH_P} {LATCH_P} {NET0115} {NET046} {OUTPUT} \
{OUTPUTB} {VDD!} {VDD!} {VSS!} {VSS!} } }}
See Also
lakerCopyAssoc
lakerYankWithLogic
Layout Window: SDL > Paste with Logic View
lakerPatternReuse
The lakerPatternReuse command defines the logic information on a layout
instance when it is reused from a cell that is made from other layout objects
with the same layout topology.
Syntax
To invoke the Pattern Reuse feature:
lakerPatternReuse -start
To search for candidates and dump the matched results:
lakerPatternReuse -mode mode -selObj 0|1 [-autoMapInfo
fileName]
To select the pattern cell view:
lakerPatternReuse -patternLib patternLibName -patternCell
patternCellName -patternView patternViewName
To select the layout mapping cell view:
lakerPatternReuse -mapLib mapLibName -mapCell mapCellName mapView mapViewName
742

K-2015.06

SDL Commands
To create and associate the logic/layout data:

lakerPatternReuse -realizeToLayout 0|1 [-arrayMode 0|1 -cols
columnNum -rows rowNum -typeIn 0|1 -colSpace colSpace rowSpace rowSpace -rearrangeMaster 0|1] -mapInfo
mapInfoList [-point pointList -orient orientationList instPrefix instNamePrefix -cellPrefix cellNamePrefix] [dumpTip fileName]
To abort the Pattern Reuse feature:
lakerPatternReuse -end
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-arrayMode 0|1

-autoMapInfo
fileName
Specify the output file to save the candidate data to.
-cellPrefix
cellNamePrefix
Specify the cell name prefix for new nodes.
-colDoubleBack 0|1

This argument is valid only if -arrayMode 1 is specified.
-cols colsNum

-colSpace
colSpace

-dumpTip
fileName
Specify the file to save the dumped tips to. The default file
name is MismatchTip.log.
-end
Abort this feature.

K-2015.06
743

SDL Commands
744
Argument
Description
-flipCol 0|1

-flipRow 0|1

-instPrefix
instNamePrefix
Specify the instance name prefix for new nodes.
-mapCell
mapCellName
Specify the cell name of the mapped layout.
-mapInfo
mapInfoList
Specify the format of mapping information as follows:

{ {cellName [instName]}
where:
cellName is the pattern cell name, instName is the
pattern instance name, userDefInstName is the
specified instance, userDefNetName is the specified net,
mapInstName is the instance to be reused, and
mapNetName is the net to be reused.
-mapLib
mapLibName
Specify the library name of the mapped layout.
-mapView
mapViewName
Specify the view name of the mapped layout.
-mode mode

when searching for candidates.
topology : The topology relationship (not the net
connection) is considered when searching for candidates.

K-2015.06

SDL Commands
Argument
Description
-orient
orientationList
Specify the orientation list with the following format: { R0

R0 R90 R180 ... }
-patternCell
patternCellName
Specify the cell name of the pattern cell.
-patternLib
patternLibName
Specify the library name of the pattern cell.
-patternView
patternViewName
Specify the view name of the pattern cell.
-point pointList
Specify a point list of coordinates to paste the mapping

object to. For example, fill in three coordinates in the
pointList when there are three mapping objects.
Only one point value is needed if -arrayMode is
specified. The coordinate is reset to (0,0) when the point
value is not specified.
-realizeToLayout 1

1 : Realize the selected candidates to the layout.
0 : Do not realize the selected candidates to the layout.
-rearrangeMaster
0|1

-rowDoubleBack 0|1 Valid values: Boolean values, 0 and 1 (default=0).

-rows rowsNum

K-2015.06

745

SDL Commands
Argument
Description
-rowSpace
rowSpace

spacing.
-selObj 0|1

0 : Disable the Selected Objects option.
-start
Start this feature.
-typeIn 0|1

1 : Specify the x- and y- spacings between objects if
0 : Do not specify the x- and y- spacings between objects
if copying them with array mode.
Examples
lakerPatternReuse -start
lakerPatternReuse -mode topology -selObj 1 \
-autoMapInfo topology.out
lakerPatternReuse -realizeToLayout 1 -arrayMode 1 -cols 1 -rows 1 \
-typeIn 1 -colSpace 3.1 -rowSpace 13.954 -DoubleBackForRows 1 \
-DoubleBackForColumns 0 -FlipAllRows 0 -FlipAllColumns 0 \
-rearrangeMaster 0 -mapInfo { { { {NewInstName} {NewCellName} } \
{ {M28} {M27} {M26} {M25} {M35} } } } -point (-2.892,28.9) \
-orient { R0 } -instPrefix xLK -cellPrefix PatternCell_LK
lakerPatternReuse -realizeToLayout 1 -arrayMode 0 -mapInfo \
{ { { {xPT0} {NewCell0} } { {I127} {I131} {I130} {I129} } } \
{ { {xPT1} {NewCell1} } { {I128} {I132} {I133} {I134} } } \
{ { {} {} } { {I135} {I141} {I140} {I139} } } { { {} {} } \
{ {I136} {I142} {I143} {I144} } } { { {} {} } { {I137} {I147} \
{I146} {I145} } } { { {} {} } { {I138} {I148} {I149} {I150} } } } \
-point (62.254,26.792) (71.529,61.014) (52.499,34.788) \
(77.126,52.379) (73.608,10.001) (42.264,7.922) \
-orient { R0 R90 R180 R270 R0 R90 } -instPrefix xLK \
-cellPrefix PatternCell_LK
lakerPatternReuse -end
746

K-2015.06

SDL Commands
See Also
lakerSchPatternReuse
Design Browser: Pattern Reuse
Layout Window: SDL > Pattern Reuse
lakerToStickDiagram
This lakerToStickDiagram command puts the selected transistors from the
Layout window pane to the Stick Diagram Compiler window for further editing.
Syntax
lakerToStickDiagram
Returns
None
Examples
lakerToStickDiagram
See Also
Layout Window: SDL > To Stick Diagram
lakerYankWithLogic
The lakerYankWithLogic command copies selected layout instances with
their logic information to a yank buffer for later pasting action.
The lakerPasteWithLogic command pastes instances with their logic
information from a yank buffer.
The combination of these two commands allows copying instances to another
design.
Syntax
lakerYankWithLogic
Returns
None
Examples
lakerPreSel -point (-0.702,6.89) -traversedist 0.37

K-2015.06
747

MCell Commands
lakerYankWithLogic \
lakerSetActiveWnd Wnd3 \
lakerPasteWithLogic -shortNet 0 -globalNet 1 -dim 1 -formGate 0 \
-cmpSubstrate 0 -cmpInnerNet 1 -arrayMode 1 -cols 1 -rows 1 \
-typeIn 0 -point (6.78,-11.66) -orient R0 \
-mapInfo {{ {{N4} {N4} {P4} {P4} } {{LATCH_N} {LATCH_N} \
{LATCH_P} {LATCH_P} {NET046} {NET046} {OUTPUTB} \
{OUTPUTB} {VDD!} {VDD!} {VSS!} {VSS!} } } \
{ {{N3} {N4} {P3} {P4} } {{LATCH_N} {LATCH_N} \
{LATCH_P} {LATCH_P} {NET0115} {NET046} {OUTPUT} \
{OUTPUTB} {VDD!} {VDD!} {VSS!} {VSS!} } }}
See Also
Layout Window: SDL > Yank with Logic View
MCell Commands
This section describes the Tcl commands applied to the MCell commands of
748
lakerAddDummyGate
lakerAutoChopGR
lakerChangeStack
lakerChopContact
lakerChopGuardRing
lakerDeleteDummyGate
lakerDivideObj
lakerFillContact
lakerFillGuardRing
lakerFold
lakerFuseObj
lakerInsert
lakerLinkMCell
lakerMergeGate
lakerMoveContact

K-2015.06

MCell Commands
lakerMoveGate
lakerOptimize
lakerReGuardRing
lakerRmOverlapGRCont
lakerStretchCapacit
lakerStretchContact
lakerStretchGate
lakerStretchResist
lakerSubduce
lakerSwapGate
lakerUnlinkMCell
mcGet
mcSet
schLakerSetMosType
lakerAddDummyGate
The lakerAddDummyGate command adds dummy gates to the selected
MCell transistor by honoring the Auto Dummy Gate Settings section in the
Preferences form, invoked by Options > Preferences > MCell_Tx tab. If the
selected transistor contains dummy gates, this command does nothing.
Syntax
lakerAddDummyGate
Returns
None
Examples
lakerAddDummyGate
See Also
Layout Window: MCell > Dummy Gates > Create
Home Page: Options > Preferences > MCell_Tx

K-2015.06
749

MCell Commands
lakerAutoChopGR
The lakerAutoChopGR command chops guard ring metals and removes
contact/via that violates DRC rule, minMetSpace.
Syntax
lakerAutoChopGR [-bbox (x1,y1) (x2,y2)] [-fullCell 0|1] [ignoreSameNet 0|1] [-checkGroupMet 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
750
Argument
Description
-bbox (x1,y1) (x2,y2)
Draw an area to chop guard ring. x1 and x2 specify the

x coordinate for the point array while y1 and y2 specify
the y coordinate.
-checkGroupMet 0|1

1 : Check all metal layers which belong to the same
group.
0 : Do not check all metal layers which belong to the
same group.
-fullCell 0|1

1 : All overlapping areas of guard rings and metal
shapes in the cell is checked and the contact/via that
causes DRC violations is removed.
0 : Only the fully selected guard rings and metal
shapes are checked and the contact/via that causes
DRC violations is removed.
-ignoreSameNet 0|1

1 : Do not chop the overlapping areas of guard rings
and metal shapes which have the same nets.
0 : Chop the overlapping areas of guard rings and
metal shapes even they are having the same nets.

K-2015.06

MCell Commands
Examples
# Example 1
# check guard rings and metal shapes in the cell and do not chop
# overlapping area of guard rings and metals that have the same net
lakerAutoChopGR -fullCell 1
# Example 2
# check selected guard rings and/or metal shapes and do not chop
# overlapping area of guard rings and metals that have the same net
lakerAutoChopGR
# Example 3
# check guard rings and metal shapes within specified chop
# area and chop overlapping area of guard rings and metals
# even they have the same net
lakerAutoChopGR -bbox (0,100) (100,200) -ignoreSameNet 0
See Also
Layout Window: MCell > Auto Chop Guard Ring
lakerChangeStack
The lakerChangeStack command modifies the selected activeLayer-region
of a transistor by chopping contact/via or filling with specified layer in particular
conditions.
Syntax
lakerChangeStack -point (x1,y1) (x2,y2) [-stackViaLayerName
layerName [-stackViaPurpose purpose]] [-removeContact
0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
(x1,y1) specifies the lower left point and (x2,y2)

specifies the upper right point of the area where the
stack layer of the stack vias inside is changed.

K-2015.06
751

MCell Commands
Argument
Description
-removeContact 0|1

1 : Remove the contact(s) and change the layer to
MET1 layer. This argument only works if the layer
specified by
-stackViaLayerName or -stackViaPurpose is
MET1 layer.
0 : Change the layer to MET1 layer and keep the
contact(s).
-stackViaLayerName
layerName
Specify the layer name to be changed to.
-stackViaPurpose
purpose
Specify the purpose name of the layer to be changed

to (default=drawing).
Examples
lakerChangeStack -point (0,0) (5,5) -stackViaLayerName MET1 \
-removeContact 1
See Also
Layout Window: MCell > Modify Contact/Via
lakerChopContact
The lakerChopContact command chops contact(s) in a selected contact/via
array or stack path.
Syntax
lakerChopContact -point point -topLayerName topLayerName [topPurpose topPurpose] -bottomLayerName bottomLayerName
[-bottomPurpose bottomPurpose] [-removeContactOnly 0|1]
[-clip 0|1]
Returns
None
752

K-2015.06

MCell Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-bottomLayerName
bottomLayerName
Specify the layer name for the bottommost layer.
-bottomPurpose
bottomPurpose
Specify the purpose name for the bottommost layer

(default=drawing).
-clip 0|1
Valid values: Boolean values, 0 and 1 (default=1;

only works for contact device).
1 : Force the chopped boundary for each conductor
layer between the top/bottom layers become the
same.
0 : The chopped boundary for each conductor layer
keeps the minimum enclosure rule to the related
contact/via layer and may be different with each
other.
-point point
(x0,y0)...(xn,yn)
Draw a point array (rectangle) to chop shapes.

-removeContactOnly 0|1

1 : Remove the contact layer(s) only and keep the
conductor layers.
0 : Remove both contact layer(s) and conductor
layers.
-topLayerName
topLayerName
Specify the layer name for the topmost layer.
-topPurpose topPurpose
Specify the purpose name for the topmost layer

(default=drawing).
Examples
lakerChopContact -point (-231.677,972.795) \
(-231.677,985.241) (-218.928,985.241) (-218.928,972.795) \
-topLayerName MET3 -bottomLayerName POLY -removeContactOnly 1 \
-clip 0
See Also
Layout Window: MCell > Chop Contact

K-2015.06
753

MCell Commands
lakerChopGuardRing
The lakerChopGuardRing command chops the selected guard ring with a
point array.
Syntax
lakerChopGuardRing -point point [-split 0|1] [-chopType
chopType]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-chopType chopType
Valid values: metal, split, and contact.

metal : Chop metals and contacts in the guard ring.
split : Split one guard ring into two guard rings.
contact : Remove contacts in the guard ring only.
Overwrite the -split option when the -chopType
option is defined.
-point point
(x0,y0)...(xn,yn)
Draw a point array (rectangle) to chop guard ring.

-split 0|1

1 : Split one guard ring into two guard rings.
0 : Do not split one guard ring into two guard rings.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerChopGuardRing -point (0,0) (0,20) (25,20) (25,0)
# Example 2
lakerChopGuardRing -point (6.91,1.21) (6.91,4.13) \
(10.56,4.13) (10.56,1.21) -chopType contact
See Also
Layout Window: MCell > Chop Guard Ring
754

K-2015.06

MCell Commands
lakerDeleteDummyGate
The lakerDeleteDummyGate command removes dummy gates from the
selected MCell transistor. If the selected transistor does not have any dummy
gates, this command does nothing.
Syntax
lakerDeleteDummyGate [-keepGatePosition 0|1] [-optimizeOD
0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-keepGatePosition 0|1

1 : Enable the Keep Gate Positions option.
0 : Disable the Keep Gate Positions option.
-optimizeOD 0|1

1 : Enable the Optimize OD option.
0 : Disable the Optimize OD option.
Examples
lakerDeleteDummyGate -keepGatePosition 1 -optimizeOD 1
See Also
Layout Window: MCell > Dummy Gates > Delete
lakerDivideObj
The lakerDivideObj command splits the selected transistor to two
transistors.
Syntax
lakerDivideObj
Returns
None

K-2015.06
755

MCell Commands
Examples
lakerDivideObj
See Also
Layout Window: MCell > Split
lakerFillContact
The lakerFillContact command refills contact(s) in a selected contact/via
array or stack path.
Syntax
lakerFillContact -point point -topLayerName topLayerName [topPurpose topPurpose] -bottomLayerName bottomLayerName
[-bottomPurpose bottomPurpose]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-bottomLayerName
bottomLayerName
Specify the layer name for the bottommost layer.
-bottomPurpose
bottomPurpose
Specify the purpose name for the bottommost layer

(default=drawing).
-point point
(x0,y0)...(xn,yn)
Draw a point array (rectangle) to fill shapes. x0...xn

specify the x coordinate for the point array while
y0...yn specify the y coordinate.
-topLayerName
topLayerName
Specify the layer name for the topmost layer.
-topPurpose
topPurpose
Specify the purpose name for the topmost layer

(default=drawing).
Examples
lakerFillContact -point \
(-5.884,6.041) (-5.884,8.79) (-1.829,8.79) (-1.829,6.041)
-topLayerName MET1 -bottomLayerName MET1
756

K-2015.06

MCell Commands
See Also
Layout Window: MCell > Fill Contact
lakerFillGuardRing
The lakerFillGuardRing command fills the selected guard ring with a point
array.
Syntax
lakerFillGuardRing -point point
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-point point
(x0,y0)...(xn,yn)
Draw a point array (rectangle) to fill guard ring. x0...xn

specify the x coordinate for the point array while y0...yn
Examples
lakerFillGuardRing -point (0,0) (0,20) (25,20) (25,0)
See Also
Layout Window: MCell > Fill Guard Ring
lakerFold
The lakerFold command splits a selected transistor gate.
Syntax
lakerFold -glueNo glueNo (-segment segmentNum|-width
gateWidth) -contAlign alignMode
Returns
None

K-2015.06
757

MCell Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-contAlign
alignMode
Specify the alignment style of contacts after folding gate.

Valid value: top, center, and bottom (default=bottom).
-glueNo
glueNo
Specify a glue block number of the transistor gate (or that of

the range of gates) to be folded.
-segment
segmentNum
Specify the segment number that the specified gate(s) to be

folded to.
-width
gateWidth
Specify the maximum gate width for the resulting gates.

Examples
# Example 1
lakerFold -glueNo 2 -width 3.0
# Example 2
lakerFold -glueNo 2 -segment 2 -contAlign center
See Also
Layout Window: MCell > Fold
lakerFuseObj
The lakerFuseObj command merges two selected transistors.
Syntax
lakerFuseObj -fixed 0|1 | [-align align [-offset offset]]
[-swap swapNo]
Returns
None
758

K-2015.06

MCell Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-align align
Specify the alignment of transistors.

Valid values: top, center, bottom, and ruleDist. If align ruleDist is set, the offset option has no effect.
-fixed 0|1

1 : Position of both transistors remains unchanged, the
merged region expands after fusion.
0 : Adjust the position of both transistors.
-offset offset
Specify an offset value for alignment.

-swap swapNo
Select the transistor to be merged (default=the first selected).
Examples
# Example 1
# Merge two transistors at fixed position
lakerFuseObj -fixed 1
# Example 2
# Merge two transistors and align them on top with offset (1.0)
lakerFuseObj -align top -offset 1.0
See Also
Layout Window: MCell > Merge Transistors
lakerInsert
The lakerInsert command inserts a transistor with the entire object
selected to another transistor with an activeLayer-region selected.
Syntax
lakerInsert
Returns
None
Examples
lakerInsert

K-2015.06
759

MCell Commands
See Also
Layout Window: MCell > Insert
lakerLinkMCell
The lakerLinkMCell command groups selected MCells together if their submaster is the same.
Syntax
lakerLinkMCell
Returns
None
Examples
lakerLinkMCell
See Also
Layout Window: MCell > Link
lakerMergeGate
The lakerMergeGate command merges the selected gate into the target
merged gate in the same transistor.
Syntax
lakerMergeGate -selGlueNo num1 -mergeGlueNo num2 -optimize
0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
760
Argument
Description
-mergeGlueNo num2
num2 is the glue number for the target gate.


K-2015.06

MCell Commands
Argument
Description
-optimize 0|1

1 : Optimize the source/drain after merging gates, even
if the order of some gates have to be changed.
0 : Optimize such source/drain only if the transistor,
which contains only one gate and no gate order change,
needs to be reversed.
-selGlueNo num1
num1 is the glue number for the selected gate.

Examples
lakerMergeGate -selGlueNo 2 -mergeGlueNo 4
See Also
Layout Window: MCell > Merge Gates
lakerMoveContact
The lakerMoveContact command moves an inner contact of MCell devices.
Syntax
lakerMoveContact -refPoint (x0,y0) -offsetPoint (x0,y0)
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
Specify an offset direction to move. x0 specifies an offset

value from the x coordinate point while y0 specifies the
value from the y coordinate point.
-refPoint (x0,y0)
Specify a reference coordinate to move. x0 specifies a

Examples
lakerMoveContact -refPoint (5.59,5.63) -offsetPoint (8.01,5.63)

K-2015.06
761

MCell Commands
lakerMoveGate
The lakerMoveGate command moves a gate of the transistor device to a new
location.
Syntax
lakerMoveGate -refPoint (x0,y0) -offsetPoint (x0,y0) [alignWith alignWith]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-alignWith alignWith
Specify a side of the gate on which all gates are kept at

the original position after the Move Gate command.
Valid values: left, right, and both (default=right).
Specify an offset direction to move. x0 specifies an

-refPoint (x0,y0)
Specify a reference coordinate to move. x0 specifies a

Examples
lakerMoveGate -refPoint (5.59,5.63) -offsetPoint (8.01,5.63)
lakerOptimize
The lakerOptimize command optimizes an activeLayer-region or the entire
selected transistor. It is auto-adjusted horizontally in order to meet the minimum
design rule.
Syntax
lakerOptimize
Returns
None
762

K-2015.06

MCell Commands
Examples
lakerOptimize
See Also
Layout Window: MCell > Optimize
lakerReGuardRing
The lakerReGuardRing command reforms the shape of the selected guard
ring with a point array.
Syntax
lakerReGuardRing -point point [-swap 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-point point
(x0,y0)...(xn,yn)
Draw a point array to reform guard ring. x0...xn specify

the x coordinate for the point array while y0...yn specify
the coordinate.
-swap 0|1

1 : Select a new conjunction from the first or the last
drawing point.
0: Do not select a new conjunction from the first or the last
drawing point.
Examples
lakerReGuardRing -point (0,0) (0,10) (10,10) (10,15)
See Also
Layout Window: MCell > Re-Guard Ring
The lakerRmOverlapGRCont command removes the contacts of overlapping
guard rings that violate the contact DRC rules.

K-2015.06
763

MCell Commands
Syntax
lakerRmOverlapGRCont [-fullCell 0|1] [-viewLevel viewLevel]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-fullCell 0|1

1 : All guard rings in the cell are checked and the contacts that
cause DRC violations are removed.
0 : Only the fully selected guard rings are checked and the
contacts that cause DRC violations are removed.
-viewLevel
viewLevel
Check guard rings at a specified view level.

Valid values: current, max, and min (default=current).
current : Check guard rings that could be viewed at current
view level only.
min : Check the DRC errors of guard rings that belong to the
current cell.
max : Check the DRC errors of guard rings that belong to the
current cell and all descendants.
Examples
# Example 1
# Select mode:
# or
lakerRmOverlapGRCont -fullCell 0
# Example 2
# Full Cell mode:
lakerRmOverlapGRCont -fullCell 1
# Example 3
lakerRmOverlapGRCont -viewLevel max
See Also
Layout Window: MCell > Remove Overlapping Guard Ring Contacts
764

K-2015.06

MCell Commands
lakerStretchCapacit
The lakerStretchCapacit command stretches an edge of the capacitor.
The total value of the capacitor remains unchanged.
Syntax
lakerStretchCapacit -refPoint (x0,y0) -offsetPoint (x0,y0)
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description

offset value from the x coordinate point while y0 specifies
the value from the y coordinate point.
-refPoint (x0,y0)

Examples
lakerStretchCapacit -refPoint (5.59,5.63) \
-offsetPoint (8.01,5.63)
See Also
Layout Window: MCell > Stretch Capacitor
lakerStretchContact
The lakerStretchContact command stretches the edge or vertice of L1/L2
bounding box in a contact array.
Syntax
lakerStretchContact -refPoint (x0,y0) -offsetPoint (x0,y0)
Returns
None

K-2015.06
765

MCell Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description

-refPoint (x0,y0)

Examples
lakerStretchContact -refPoint (5.5,5.3) -offsetPoint (8.0,5.3)
See Also
Layout Window: MCell > Stretch Contact
lakerStretchGate
The lakerStretchGate command stretches the gate edge of a transistor
device.
Syntax
lakerStretchGate -refPoint (x0,y0) -offsetPoint (x0,y0)
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description

-refPoint (x0,y0)

Examples
lakerStretchGate -refPoint (5.59,5.63) -offsetPoint (8.01,5.63)
766

K-2015.06

MCell Commands
lakerStretchResist
The lakerStretchResist command stretches the resistor in two ways, at
the end point, or at the edge with fixed one of the end point.
Syntax
lakerStretchResist -refPoint (x0,y0) -offsetPoint (x0,y0)
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description

-refPoint (x0,y0)

Examples
lakerStretchResist -refPoint (5.59,5.63) -offsetPoint (8.01,5.63)
See Also
Layout Window: MCell > Stretch Resistor
lakerSubduce
The lakerSubduce command divides one selected transistor into two
transistors.
Syntax
lakerSubduce -glueNo glueNo
Returns
None

K-2015.06
767

MCell Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-glueNo glueNo
Specify two numbers to divide the glue blocks.

Examples
lakerSubduce -glueNo 3 5
See Also
Layout Window: MCell > Subduce
lakerSwapGate
The lakerSwapGate command swaps the gate(s) or active(s) of an MCell.
Syntax
lakerSwapGate -selGlueNo num1 num2 -swapGlueNo num3 num4
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-selGlueNo num1 num2
num1 and num2 may have the same value; they refer
to the number of the selected glue block.
-swapGlueNo num3 num4 num3 and num4 may have the same value; they refer
to the number of glue block that is swapped with.
Examples
#swap glue block 1 with glue block 7
lakerSwapGate -selGlueNo 1 1 -swapGlueNo 7 7
# swap glue block 2 to 4 with glue block 5 to 9
lakerSwapGate -selGlueNo 2 4 -swapGlueNo 5 9
See Also
Layout Window: MCell > Swap
768

K-2015.06

MCell Commands
lakerUnlinkMCell
The lakerUnlinkMCell command ungroups selected MCells from their
group.
Syntax
lakerUnlinkMCell
Returns
None
Examples
lakerUnlinkMCell
See Also
Layout Window: MCell > Unlink
mcGet
The mcGet command gets parameters of transistors and guard rings for the
encrypted technology file sections tfLayoutMagicCell and
tfLayoutMagicCellCallBack.
The available attributes of mcGet and mcSet are listed in the following tables.
Syntax
To get parameters of transistors:
mcGet -obj <obj_Id> [glueSyntax] [-all | -attr attr_name]
To get parameters of guard rings:
mcGet -obj <obj_Id> [-all | -attr attr_name [segmentSyntax] ]
Returns
Varies based on the attribute settings.

K-2015.06
769

MCell Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-all | -attr attr_name
The -attr argument specifies the attribute to be obtained.

If -all or -attr All is specified, displays all attributes,
including values, for the whole transistor, the whole guard ring,
the specified glue block of a transistor, or the specified segment
of a guard ring.
If -attr attr_name is not specified, the default is -all.
The available attributes are listed in the Whole Transistor
Attributes tables, the Transistor Gate Region Attributes tables,
the Transistor activeLayer Region Attributes tables, the Whole
Guard Ring Attributes tables, and the Guard Ring Segment
Attributes tables.
-obj <obj_Id>
obj_id can be an instanceId of an MCell transistor or an

MCell guard ring, or a cellviewId of an MCell sub-master cell.
770
Using mcGet with an instanceId can get the following types

of attributes: transistor/guard ring parameter, logic
information, geometry attribute name, physical geometry
(the coordinates are based on the top cell view.)
Using mcGet with a cellviewId of an MCell sub-master cell
can get the following types of attributes: transistor/guard
ring parameter, geometry attribute name, physical geometry
(the coordinates are based on the sub-master cell view),
and physical geometry identifier.

K-2015.06

MCell Commands
Argument
Description
glueSyntax
This only works for MCell transistors. glueSyntax refers to

[-glueNo glue_block_number] | [-glueGateNo
gate_glue_number] | [-glueActiveNo
active_glue_number], where:
-glueNo, -glueGateNo, and -glueActiveNo are

exclusive.
-glueNo specifies the number of glue blocks for

activeLayer regions or gates of a transistor.
The glue_block_number value must be greater than or

equal to 1; and the total_glue_block_number must be
greater than or equal to the glue_block_number value.
The odd value corresponds to activeLayer region glue

blocks.
The even value corresponds to gate glue blocks.
-glueGateNo specifies the number of gate glue blocks.
The gate_glue_number value must be greater than or

equal to 1; and the value of
(total_glue_block_number-1)/2 must be greater
than or equal to the gate_glue_number value.
-glueActiveNo specifies the number of activeLayer

region glue blocks.
The active_glue_number value must be greater than or

(total_glue_block_number+1)/2 must be greater
than or equal to the active_glue_number value.
If this glueSyntax is not specified, using mcGet can get the
attributes of the whole transistor. Refer to the Whole Transistor
Attributes tables for more details.
If the glueSyntax is specified with gate glue blocks, then
using mcGet can get the attributes of gate regions. Refer to the
Transistor Gate Region Attributes tables for more details.
If the glueSyntax is specified with activeLayer region glue
blocks, then using mcGet can get the attributes of activeLayer
regions. Refer to the Transistor activeLayer Region Attributes
tables for more details.

K-2015.06
771

MCell Commands
Argument
Description
segmentSyntax
This only works for MCell guard rings with the Segment
column checked in attributes. segmentSyntax refers to [segHori] | [-segVert], where:
-segHori and -segVert are exclusive.

-segHori specifies the horizontal segment of a guard ring.
-segVert specifies the vertical segment of a guard ring.

The return values are sorted by the location of segments, from
left to right and from bottom to top.
If this segmentSyntax is not specified, using mcGet can get

the attributes of the whole guard ring. Refer to the Whole
Guard Ring Attributes tables for more details.
If -segHori or -segVert is specified, then using mcGet can
get the attributes of horizontal or vertical guard ring segments.
Refer to the Guard Ring Segment Attributes tables for more
details.
Examples
# Create Dummy Poly by defining the callBack subsection
# in the tfLayoutMagicCell section with mcGet and mcSet:
tfLayoutMagicCell {
device {
deviceName {PMOS_plugIn_dummyPoly}
layerDef { {Co CONT} {Met MT1} {Poly POLY} {Od $L_OD} {Imp PIMP}
{Met2 MT2} {Via VIA1} }
callBack { params { { NormalPitch
4.0
String editable }
{ DummyPitch
2.0
String editable }
{ NumDummy
1
String editable } }
execPlugIn {
set gatePoints [
mcGet -obj $dbMCellSubMasterId -glueNo 2 -attr ObjPoly ]
set tmp [lindex $gatePoints end]
set numTmp [llength $tmp]
for { set j 0 } { $j<$NumDummy } { incr j} {
set newPoints {}
for { set i 0 } { $i<$numTmp } { incr i } {
set t1 [lindex $tmp $i]
set p1 [lindex $t1 0]
set p1 [expr $p1 - ($NormalPitch + ($j * $DummyPitch) )]
772

K-2015.06

MCell Commands
lappend newPoints [format {(%s,%s)} $p1 $p2]

}
dbCreatePolygon -cv $dbMCellSubMasterId -layer POLY \
-point $newPoints
}
set idxRGate [expr [
mcGet -obj $dbMCellSubMasterId -attr GlueNum] - 1]
set gatePoints [
mcGet -obj $dbMCellSubMasterId -glueNo $idxRGate \
-attr ObjPoly]
set tmp [lindex $gatePoints end ]
set numTmp [llength $tmp]
for { set j 0 } { $j<$NumDummy } { incr j } {
set newPoints {}
for { set i 0 } { $i<$numTmp } { incr i } {
set t1 [lindex $tmp $i]
set p1 [expr $p1 + ($NormalPitch + ($j * $DummyPitch) )]
lappend newPoints [format {(%s,%s)} $p1 $p2]
}
dbCreatePolygon -cv $dbMCellSubMasterId -layer POLY \
-point $newPoints
}
}
ruleDef
}
{ { minChannelLength 0.8 }
{ minChannelWidth 1.0 }
{ minGateSpace 1.2 }
{ minOd2GateExtension 1.2 }
{ minOdNotch 0.7 }
{ minPoly2GateExtension 0.8 }
{ minCo2OdEnclosure 0.5 }
{ minCoSpace 1.0 }
{ minCo2GateSpace 0.8 }
{ minCoWidth $CONT_WIDTH }
{ minCo2MetEnclosure {{0.5 0.45} {0.55 0.4}} }
{ minOd2PolySpace 0.4 }
{ minOdWidth $OD_WIDTH }
{ minOd2ImpEnclosure 0.6}
{ minMetSpace 1.45}
{ minImpNotch 1.4}
{ diagonalGateBendCompensation 0.02}
{ minPoly2ImpEnclosureX 0.3}
{ minPoly2ImpEnclosureY 0.4}
{ minOdSpace 1.3}
}
}}

K-2015.06
773

MCell Commands
See Also
This section includes attributes tables for transistors: Whole Transistor
Attributes, Transistor Gate Region Attributes, and Transistor activeLayer
Region Attributes; and attributes tables for guard rings: Whole Guard Ring
Attributes and Guard Ring Segment Attributes.
Whole Transistor Attributes
The attributes of the whole transistor are summarized in the following tables:
Table 1, Table 2, Table 3, Table 4, and Table 5.
Table 1
774
Parameter Type for Whole Transistor Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return Values
Applicable
Tcls
DeviceName
Device name
String
mcGet,
mcSet
OptLayerMaskResolution
Enable/disable the Use

Tech. File's Mask/General
Resolution For Option
Layers option
0, 1
mcGet,
mcSet
PolyContact
Enable/disable the Poly

Contact option
0, 1
mcGet,
mcSet
DiscreteGatePitch
Enable/disable the
Discrete Gate Pitch option
0, 1
mcGet,
mcSet
GateNum
Number of gates
Integer
mcGet,
mcSet
ActiveNum
Number of activeLayer
regions
Integer
mcGet
GlueNum
Number of glue blocks
Integer
mcGet
UserDefOptRepeatPattern
The repeat pattern of user- A list of user- mcGet,

defined option layers
defined option mcSet
layers, for
example:
Imp2 none
Imp1 none

K-2015.06

MCell Commands
Table 1
Parameter Type for Whole Transistor Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return Values
Applicable
Tcls
TraitRepeatPattern
Trait repeat pattern
A list of trait
names, for
example: HV2
None HV2
mcGet,
mcSet
RuleSwGlobalRule
Global rule
String
mcGet,
mcSet
ParamXXX
Plug-in parameter value
Parameter
type value
mcGet,
mcSet
Table 2
Logic Information for Whole Transistor Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return Values
Applicable
Tcls
SubstrateNet
Substrate nets
String
mcGet,
mcSet
Table 3
Geometry Attribute Name for Whole Transistor Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return Values
Applicable
Tcls
AllLayerObjName
Attribute names to get

geometries for available
layers
A list of attribute
names, for
example:
objOd
objPoly ...
mcGet
AllDevLayerObjName

device layers
A list of attribute
names
mcGet
AllResvLayerObjName

reserved option layers
A list of attribute
names
mcGet

K-2015.06
775

MCell Commands
Table 3
Arguments
Description
Return Values
Applicable
Tcls
AllUserLayerObjName

user-defined option layers
A list of attribute
names, for
example:
objUserImp1
...
mcGet
Table 4
776
Geometry Attribute Name for Whole Transistor Attributes
Physical Geometry for Whole Transistor Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return Values
Applicable
Tcls
ObjOd
For Od layer (whole and

individual)
Several lists of
coordinates, for
example: {
{200.002
100.005} { } ...
} {...}
mcGet
ObjPoly
For Poly layer
Several lists of
coordinates
mcGet
ObjCo
For Co layer
Several lists of
coordinates
mcGet
ObjMet
For Met layer
Several lists of
coordinates
mcGet
ObjVia
For Via layer
Several lists of
coordinates
mcGet
ObjMet2
For Met2 layer
Several lists of
coordinates
mcGet
ObjPolyCoPoly
For polyCo Poly layer
Several lists of
coordinates
mcGet
ObjPolyCoCo
For polyCo Co layer
Several lists of
coordinates
mcGet

K-2015.06

MCell Commands
Table 4
Physical Geometry for Whole Transistor Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return Values
Applicable
Tcls
ObjPolyCoMet
For polyCo Met layer
Several lists of
coordinates
mcGet
Obj<Imp, L1~L9>
For reserved option

layers
Several lists of
coordinates
mcGet
ObjUser<userdefined name>
For user-defined option

layers
Several lists of
coordinates
mcGet
Table 5
Physical Geometry Identifier (Id) for Whole Transistor Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return Values
Applicable
Tcls
ObjIdOd
For Od layer (whole and

individual)
Several lists of
identifiers
mcGet
ObjIdPoly
For Poly layer
A list of identifiers, for

example:
6fccd22acb00
caff0000213b...
mcGet
ObjIdCo
For Co layer
A list of identifiers
mcGet
ObjIdMet
For Met layer
mcGet
ObjIdVia
For Via layer
mcGet
ObjIdMet2
For Met2 layer
mcGet
ObjIdPolyCoPoly
mcGet
ObjIdPolyCoCo
For polyCo Co layer
mcGet
ObjIdPolyCoMet
mcGet
ObjId<Imp, L1~L9>
For reserved option

layers
mcGet

K-2015.06
777

MCell Commands
Table 5
Physical Geometry Identifier (Id) for Whole Transistor Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return Values
Applicable
Tcls
ObjIdUser<userdefined name>

layers
mcGet
Transistor Gate Region Attributes

The attributes of the gate regions are summarized in the following tables:
Table 6, Table 7, Table 8, Table 9, Table 10, and Table 11.
Table 6
Parameter Type for Transistor Gate Region Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return Values
Applicable
Tcls
GatePattern
Gate pattern
patternA, patternB,
patternC, patternD,
patternE
mcGet,
mcSet
Length
Gate length
Positive floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
Width
Gate width
Positive floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
Align
Gate alignment
bottom, center, top
mcGet,
mcSet
Offset
Gate offset
Floating number
mcGet,
mcSet
OptLayer
Option layer
A list of user-defined
option layers
mcGet,
mcSet
Trait
Trait name
A list of trait names
mcGet,
mcSet
IsDummy
Dummy gate
definition
0, 1
mcGet,
mcSet
Rule name (String)
mcGet,
mcSet
RuleSwGatePatternRule Gate rule
778

K-2015.06

MCell Commands
Table 7
Parameter (polyContact) for Transistor Gate Region Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return
Values
Applicable
Tcls
PolyCoPattern
polyContact pattern
none, top,
bottom,
both
mcGet,
mcSet
PolyCoLoc
polyContact location
inner, outer
mcGet,
mcSet
PolyCoShift
polyContact shift
left, center,
right
mcGet,
mcSet
PolyCoSymmetry
Enable/disable the
Poly Contact
Symmetry option
0, 1
mcGet,
mcSet
RuleSwPolyCoCo2MetEncRule
polyContact
Co2MetEnc rule
Rule name
(String)
mcGet,
mcSet
RuleSwPolyCoCoSpacingRule
polyContact Contact
spacing rule
Rule name
(String)
mcGet,
mcSet
PolyCoTopContactType
Contact type
user, single,
max
mcGet,
mcSet
PolyCoTopRow
Number of contact
rows
Positive
integer
mcGet,
mcSet
PolyCoTopColumn
Number of contact
columns
Positive
integer
mcGet,
mcSet
PolyCoTopMetEncX
Contact to Met
Enclosure X
Positive
floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
PolyCoTopMetEncY
Contact to Met
Enclosure Y
Positive
floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
PolyCoTopCoSpaceX
Contact spacing X
Positive
floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet

K-2015.06
779

MCell Commands
Table 7
780
Parameter (polyContact) for Transistor Gate Region Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return
Values
Applicable
Tcls
PolyCoTopCoSpaceY
Contact spacing Y
Positive
floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
PolyCoTopCoWidth
Contact width X,Y
A pair of x,y
values, for
example:
1.0,1.1
mcGet,
mcSet
PolyCoBottomContactType
Contact type
user, single,
max
mcGet,
mcSet
PolyCoBottomRow
Number of contact
rows
Positive
integer
mcGet,
mcSet
PolyCoBottomColumn
Number of contact
columns
Positive
integer
mcGet,
mcSet
PolyCoBottomMetEncX
Contact to Met
Enclosure X
Positive
floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
PolyCoBottomMetEncY
Contact to Met
Enclosure Y
Positive
floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
PolyCoBottomCoSpaceX
Contact spacing X
Positive
floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
PolyCoBottomCoSpaceY
Contact spacing Y
Positive
floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
PolyCoBottomCoWidth
Contact width X,Y
A pair of x,y
values, for
example:
1.0,1.1
mcGet,
mcSet

K-2015.06

MCell Commands
Table 8
Logic Information for Transistor Gate Region Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return
Values
Applicable
Tcls
GateName
Gate name
String
mcGet,
mcSet
GateNet
Nets on the gate
String
mcGet,
mcSet
SourceNet
Nets on the left side of the

specified gate
String
mcGet,
mcSet
DrainNet
Nets on the right side of the

specified gate
String
mcGet,
mcSet
Table 9
Geometry Attribute Name for Transistor Gate Region Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return Values
Applicable
Tcls
AllLayerObjName

layers
A list of
attribute
names
mcGet
AllDevLayerObjNa
me

device layers
A list of
attribute
names
mcGet
Table 10
Physical Geometry for Transistor Gate Region Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return Values
Applicable
Tcls
ObjPoly
For Poly layer
Several lists of
coordinates
mcGet
ObjGate
For gate area
Several lists of
coordinates
mcGet
ObjPolyCoPoly
Several lists of
coordinates
mcGet

K-2015.06
781

MCell Commands
Table 10
Physical Geometry for Transistor Gate Region Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return Values
Applicable
Tcls
ObjPolyCoCo
For polyCo Co layer
Several lists of
coordinates
mcGet
ObjPolyCoMet
Several lists of
coordinates
mcGet
Table 11
Physical Geometry Identifier (Id) for Transistor Gate Region Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return Values
Applicable
Tcls
ObjIdPoly
For Poly layer
mcGet
ObjIdPolyCoPoly
mcGet
ObjIdPolyCoCo
For polyCo Co layer
mcGet
ObjIdPolyCoMet
mcGet
Transistor activeLayer Region Attributes

The attributes of the activeLayer regions are summarized in the following
tables: Table 12, Table 13, Table 14, Table 15, Table 16, and Table 17.
Table 12
782
Parameter Type for Transistor activeLayer Region Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return Values
Applicable
Tcls
GlueBlockType
glueBlock type
left, inter, right
mcGet
BlockLength
glueBlock length
Positive floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
LeftWidth
glueBlock left width (related

to the left gate width and
pattern)
Positive floating
number
mcGet

K-2015.06

MCell Commands
Table 12
Parameter Type for Transistor activeLayer Region Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return Values
Applicable
Tcls
RightWidth
glueBlock right width (related

to the right gate width and
pattern)
Positive floating
number
mcGet
OptLayer
Option layer
String
mcGet,
mcSet
Trait
Trait name
String
mcGet,
mcSet
AutoExpand
Decide the expand direction

of diffusion when the
diffusion cannot contain the
user-defined contacts
no, top, bottom,

topBottom
mcGet,
mcSet
CoAlign
Align contacts within OD

active regions of transistors
to the center in the xdirection
xCenter
mcSet
Table 13
Parameter (Contact) for Transistor activeLayer Region Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return
Values
Applicable
Tcls
CoType
Contact type
no, single,
max, user
mcGet,
mcSet
CoRow
Number of contact rows
Positive
integer
mcGet,
mcSet
CoColumn
Number of contact columns
Positive
integer
mcGet,
mcSet
Co2MetX
Co2MetEnclosure X
Positive
floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet

K-2015.06
783

MCell Commands
Table 13
784
Parameter (Contact) for Transistor activeLayer Region Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return
Values
Applicable
Tcls
Co2MetY
Co2MetEnclosure Y
Positive
floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
Co2OdX
Co2OdEnclosure X
Positive
floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
Co2OdY
Co2OdEnclosure Y
Positive
floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
CoSpaceX
Contact spacing X
Positive
floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
CoSpaceY
Contact spacing Y
Positive
floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
CoWidth
ContactWidth X,Y
A pair of x,y
values, for
example:
1.0,1.1
mcGet,
mcSet
CoMode
Contact mode
normal, Esd, mcGet,

stackVia
mcSet
RuleSwCo2GateRule
Co2Gate rule name
String
mcGet,
mcSet
RuleSwCoModeRule
CoMode rule name
String
mcGet,
mcSet
RuleSwCo2MetEncRule
Co2MetEnclosure rule name String
mcGet,
mcSet
RuleSwCoSpacingRule
Co spacing rule name
mcGet,
mcSet
String

K-2015.06

MCell Commands
Table 14
Logic Information for Transistor activeLayer Region Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return Values Applicable

Tcls
Net
Net name
String
Table 15
mcGet,
mcSet
Geometry Attribute Name for Transistor activeLayer Region Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return Values
Applicable
Tcls
AllLayerObjName

layers
A list of attribute
names
mcGet
AllDevLayerObjName

device layers
A list of attribute
names
mcGet
Table 16
Physical Geometry for Transistor activeLayer Region Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return Values
Applicable
Tcls
ObjOd
For Od layer
Several lists of
coordinates
mcGet
ObjCo
For Co layer
Several lists of
coordinates
mcGet
ObjMet
For Met layer
Several lists of
coordinates
mcGet
ObjVia
For Via layer
Several lists of
coordinates
mcGet
ObjMet2
For Met2 layer.
Several lists of
coordinates.
mcGet

K-2015.06
785

MCell Commands
Table 17
Physical Geometry Identifier (Id) for Transistor activeLayer Region

Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return Values
Applicable
Tcls
ObjIdOd
For Od layer
Several lists of identifiers
mcGet
ObjIdCo
For Co layer
mcGet
ObjIdMet
For Met layer
mcGet
ObjIdVia
For Via layer
mcGet
ObjIdMet2
For Met2 layer
mcGet
Whole Guard Ring Attributes

The attributes of the whole guard ring are summarized in the following
tables: Table 18, Table 19, Table 20, Table 21, and Table 22.
Table 18
786
Parameter Type for Whole Guard Ring Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return Values
Applicable
Tcls
DeviceName
Device name
String
mcGet
OptLayerMaskResolution
Enable/disable the
option layer referring
to mask resolution
0, 1
mcGet,
mcSet
RuleSwGlobalRule
Global rule name
String
mcGet,
mcSet
CenterLine
Centerline of a guard
ring
Several lists of
coordinates of
segments, for
example: { {x1
y1} {x2 y2 } }
{}
mcGet
Met<2~4>Seg
A list of segments
Several lists of
coordinates of
segments
mcGet

K-2015.06

MCell Commands
Table 18
Arguments
Description
Return Values
Applicable
Tcls
Via<2~3>Seg
A list of segments
Several lists of
coordinates of
segments
mcGet
RowNumber
Contact row number
Integer
mcGet,
mcSet
CornerContact
Enable/disable to
0, 1
create corner contacts
mcGet,
mcSet
MetalWidthAsBody
Enable/disable metal
width = body
0, 1
mcGet,
mcSet
SameMetalWidth
Enable/disable all
metal widths are the
same
0, 1
mcGet,
mcSet
BodyWidth
Body layer width
Positive floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
BodyWidthHori
Body layer width in

horizontal segments
Positive floating
number
mcGet
BodyWidthVert
Body layer width in

vertical segments
Positive floating
number
mcGet
MetWidthHori
Met layer width in

horizontal segments
Positive floating
number
mcGet
MetWidthVert
Met layer width in

vertical segments
Positive floating
number
mcGet
Met<2~4>WidthHori
Met<2~4> layer width Positive floating

in horizontal segments number
mcGet
Met<2~4>WidthVert
Met<2~4> layer width

in vertical segments
Positive floating
number
mcGet
CoSpaceX
Contact spacing X
Positive floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet

K-2015.06
787

MCell Commands
Table 18
788
Arguments
Description
Return Values
Applicable
Tcls
CoSpaceY
Contact spacing Y
Positive floating
numberPositive
floating number
mcGet,
mcSet
Co2BodyX
Co2BodyEnclosureX
Positive floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
Co2BodyY
Co2BodyEnclosureY
Positive floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
Co2MetX
Co2MetEnclosreX
Positive floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
Co2MetY
Co2MetEnclosreY
Positive floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
CoWidth
Contact width
Positive floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
CoLength
Contact length
Positive floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
Via<2~3>SpaceX
Via<2~3> spacing X
Positive floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
Via<2~3>SpaceY
Via<2~3> spacing Y
Positive floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
Via<2~3>Layer1X
Via<2~3> to Layer1
enclosure X
Positive floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
Via<2~3>Layer1Y
Via<2~3> to Layer1
enclosure Y
Positive floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
Via<2~3>Layer2X
Via<2~3> to Layer2
enclosure X
Positive floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
Via<2~3>Layer2Y
Via<2~3> to Layer2
enclosure Y
Positive floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet

K-2015.06

MCell Commands
Table 18
Arguments
Description
Return Values
Applicable
Tcls
Via<2~3>Width
Via<2~3> width
Positive floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
Via<2~3>Length
Via<2~3> length
Positive floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
Body2<Imp,L1~L9>EncX
Body to <Imp, L1~L9>

enclosure X
Positive floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
Body2<Imp,L1~L9>EncY
Body to <Imp, L1~L9>

enclosure Y
Positive floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
ParamXXX
Plug-in parameter
value
Positive floating
number
mcGet,
mcSet
Table 19
Logic Information for Whole Guard Ring Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return
Values
Applicable
Tcls
NetName
Net name
String
mcGet,
mcSet
Table 20
Geometry Attributes for Whole Guard Ring Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return Values
Applicable
Tcls
AllLayerObjName

layers
A list of
attribute
names, for
example:
objBody
objMet ...
mcGet
AllDevLayerObjName

device layers
A list of
mcGet
attribute names

K-2015.06
789

MCell Commands
Table 20
Arguments
Description
Return Values
AllResvLayerObjName

reserved option layers
A list of
mcGet
attribute names
AllUserLayerObjName

user-defined option layers
A list of
attribute
names, for
example:
objUserImp1
...
Table 21
790
Geometry Attributes for Whole Guard Ring Attributes

Applicable
Tcls
mcGet
Physical Geometry for Whole Guard Ring Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return Values
Applicable
Tcls
ObjBody
For Body layer (whole

and individual)
Several lists of
coordinates, for
example: {
{200.002
100.005} { } ...
} {...}
mcGet
Obj<Imp, L1~L9>
For reserved option

layers
Several lists of
coordinates
mcGet
ObjUser<userdefined name>
For user-defined
option layers
Several lists of
coordinates
mcGet

K-2015.06

MCell Commands
Table 22
Physical Geometry Identifier (Id) for Whole Guard Ring Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return Values
Applicable
Tcls
ObjIdBody
For Body layer (whole and

individual)
Several lists of
identifiers, for
example:
6fccd22acb00
caff0000213b
...
mcGet
ObjId<Imp, L1~L9> For reserved option layers
mcGet
ObjIdUser<userdefined name>
mcGet

layers
Guard Ring Segment Attributes

The attributes of segments are summarized in the following tables: Table 23,
Table 24, and Table 25.
Table 23
Parameter Type for Guard Ring Segment Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return Values
Applicable
Tcls
BodySeg
A list of segments for

the centerline
Several lists of
coordinates of
segments, for example:
{ {x1 y1} {x2 y2 }
} {}
mcGet
MetSeg

the centerline
(available segments
without a chopped
region)
Several lists of
coordinates of
segments
mcGet
ContSeg

the centerline
Several lists of
coordinates of
segments
mcGet

K-2015.06
791

MCell Commands
Table 24
Physical Geometry for Guard Ring Segment Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return Values
Applicable
Tcls
ObjCo
For Co layer
Several lists of
coordinates
mcGet
ObjMet
For Met layer
Several lists of
coordinates
mcGet
ObjVia
For Via layer
Several lists of
coordinates
mcGet
ObjMet<2~4>
For MetX layer
Several lists of
coordinates
mcGet
ObjVia<2~3>
For ViaX layer
Several lists of
coordinates
mcGet
Table 25
Physical Geometry Identifier (Id) for Guard Ring Segment Attributes
Arguments
Description
Return Values
Applicable
Tcls
ObjIdCo
For Co layer
mcGet
ObjIdMet
For Met layer
mcGet
ObjIdVia
For Via layer
mcGet
ObjIdMet<2~4>
For MetX layer
mcGet
ObjVia<2~3>
For ViaX layer
mcGet
mcSet
The mcSet command sets parameters of transistors or guard rings for
encrypted the technology file sections tfLayoutMagicCell and
tfLayoutMagicCellCallBack.
When default settings are required, settings in the attributes form are applied
without referencing the MCell.rc resource file. When using mcSet to modify
792

K-2015.06

MCell Commands
multiple parameters, you must follow the settings in the attribute form. That is, if
a field in the current setting cannot be modified in the attribute form, using
mcSet to modify it may get a return value 0.
The default settings of mcSet attributes are similar to the settings in the
Transistor Attribute form. For example, when the Discrete Gate Pitch option is
not editable in the Transistor Attribute form, using mcSet to modify the
discreteGatePitch attribute returns 0.
Syntax
To set parameters of transistors:
mcSet -obj <obj_Id> [glueSyntax] -attr attr_name -value
new_value [-submit]
To re-generate the layout with the logic information of the specified transistor:
mcSet -obj <instance_Id> -regen
To set parameters of guard rings:
mcSet -obj <obj_Id> -attr attr_name -value new_value [submit]
To apply the modification of mcSet to a transistor or guard ring immediately:
mcSet -submit
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-attr attr_name
Specify the attribute to be set. The available attributes are listed

in the Whole Transistor Attributes tables, the Transistor Gate
Region Attributes tables, the Transistor activeLayer Region
Attributes tables, the Whole Guard Ring Attributes tables, and the
Guard Ring Segment Attributes tables.
-obj <obj_Id>
obj_id must be an instanceId of the MCell transistor or guard

ring. Using mcSet with an instanceId can set the followings types
of attributes: transistor/guard ring parameter and logic
information.

K-2015.06
793

MCell Commands
Argument
Description
-regen
When an MCell transistor contains any callBack definitions in

the tfLayoutMagicCell or tfLayoutMagicCellCallBack
sections, the logic information of this MCell transistor is used to
re-generate the layout.
-submit
Apply the modification of mcSet to the MCell transistor or guard

ring immediately.
-value new_value
When -submit is not specified, the modification is kept in the

buffer. The buffer is cleared each time after specifying
-submit, regardless of the return value of mcSet; however, if
a set command has a return value 0, the following -submit is
ignored.
When a new object Id (obj_Id) is specified in an mcSet
command C, the mcSet -submit command is called
automatically before the mcSet command C runs, and the
auto submit does not return any values.
The mcGet command always returns the evaluated value.
When a value has been set but not submitted by mcSet, using
mcGet can get the old value.
Specify a new attribute value. Refer to the return values in the

Whole Transistor Attributes tables, the Transistor Gate Region
Attributes tables, the Transistor activeLayer Region Attributes
tables, the Whole Guard Ring Attributes tables, and the Guard
Ring Segment Attributes tables for the supported value types of
each attribute. mcSet returns 0 if any wrong value types are set.
No new value is set if -value is specified.
794

K-2015.06

MCell Commands
Argument
Description
glueSyntax
This only works for MCell transistors. glueSyntax refers to

[-glueNo glue_block_number] | [-glueGateNo
gate_glue_number] | [-glueActiveNo
active_glue_number], where:
-glueNo, -glueGateNo and -glueActiveNo are

exclusive.
-glueNo specifies the number of glue blocks for activeLayer

regions or gates of a transistor.
The glue_block_number value must be greater than or

equal to 1; and the total_glue_block_number must be
greater than or equal to the glue_block_number value.
The odd value corresponds to activeLayer region glue blocks.
The even value corresponds to gate glue blocks.
-glueGateNo specifies the number of gate glue blocks.
The gate_glue_number value must be greater than or equal

to 1; and the value of (total_glue_block_number-1)/2
must be greater than or equal to the gate_glue_number
value.
-glueActiveNo specifies the number of activeLayer region

glue blocks.
The active_glue_number value must be greater than or

(total_glue_block_number+1)/2 must be greater than
or equal to the active_glue_number value.
If glueSyntax is not specified, using mcSet can set the
attributes of the whole transistor. Refer to the Whole Transistor
Attributes tables for more details.
If glueSyntax is specified with gate glue blocks, then using
mcSet can set the attributes of gate regions. Refer to the
Transistor Gate Region Attributes tables for more details.
If glueSyntax is specified with activeLayer region glue block,
then using mcSet can set the attributes of activeLayer regions.
Refer to the Transistor activeLayer Region Attributes tables for
more details.
Examples
# Example 1
dbOpenLib -lib reg_mcGetSet
set CVID [dbOpenCV -lib reg_mcGetSet -cell reg_1]
set INSTID [dbGet -obj $CVID -attr Insts]

K-2015.06
795

MCell Commands
#1~5
mcSet
mcSet
mcSet
mcSet
mcSet
-obj $INSTID -attr SubstrateNet -value ""

-obj $INSTID -glueGateNo 4 -attr GatePattern -value patternA
-obj $INSTID -glueGateNo 4 -attr Length -value 2
-obj $INSTID -glueGateNo 4 -attr Width -value 5
-obj $INSTID -glueGateNo 3 -attr IsDummy -value 0
#6~10
mcSet -obj $INSTID -glueGateNo 4 -attr IsDummy -value 1
mcSet -obj $INSTID -glueGateNo 2 -attr PolyCoPattern -value both
mcSet -obj $INSTID -glueGateNo 1 -attr PolyCoTopContactType \
-value single
mcSet -obj $INSTID -glueGateNo 1 -attr PolyCoBottomRow -value 2
mcSet -obj $INSTID -glueGateNo 1 -attr PolyCoBottomColumn -value 2
#11~15
mcSet -obj
-value 0.6
mcSet -obj
-value 0.7
mcSet -obj
-value 1.2
mcSet -obj
-value 1.4
mcSet -obj
#16~20
mcSet -obj
mcSet -obj
mcSet -obj
mcSet -obj
mcSet -obj
796
$INSTID -glueGateNo 1 -attr PolyCoBottomMetEncX \

$INSTID -glueGateNo 1 -attr PolyCoBottomMetEncY \
$INSTID -glueGateNo 1 -attr PolyCoBottomCoSpaceX \
$INSTID -glueGateNo 1 -attr PolyCoBottomCoSpaceY \
$INSTID -glueGateNo 1 -attr GateName -value gate001
$INSTID
$INSTID
$INSTID
$INSTID
$INSTID
-glueGateNo 1
-glueGateNo 1
-glueGateNo 1
-glueActiveNo
-glueActiveNo
-attr GateNet -value ""

-attr SourceNet -value a1
-attr DrainNet -value a2
3 -attr BlockLength -value 3.9
4 -attr CoType -value user

K-2015.06

MCell Commands
#21~25
mcSet -obj $INSTID -glueActiveNo 4 -attr CoRow -value 2
mcSet -obj $INSTID -glueActiveNo 4 -attr CoColumn -value 1
mcSet -obj $INSTID -glueActiveNo 5 -attr Net -value net5
mcSet -submit
mcSet -submit -regFile empty_file
dbSaveCV -cv $CVID
dbCloseCV -cv $CVID
# Example 2
# The priority of this option is lower than the rules and
# the compact form of transistors. If the left and right sides
# of contact related rules are not the same, the contact is set
# as close as possible to the center in the x-direction, but
# not always at the center. It also depends on the rules and
# whether the active region is in a compact form.
# For a compact MOS:
# - In the left or right OD region, the contact follows rules
# minCo2ODEnclsure and minCo2GateSpacing at different sides. If
# the values are not equal, the contact is not at the center.
# - In an internal OD region, the contact follows rules
# minCo2GateSpacing and minMetSpace. The metal of different sides
# of neighboring OD regions can be different. If the metal of one
# side is closer than another, the metal of the contact may be
# pushed away to keep the minimum metal spacing.
mcSet -glueNo 2 -attr CoAlign -value xCenter
schLakerSetMosType
The schLakerSetMosType command specifies preferable NMOS/PMOS
symbols for certain MOS types. The available MOS symbols are shown in the
following figure.

K-2015.06
797

Options Commands
Figure 1
Default Mos and Special Mos
Syntax
schLakerSetMosType -type MosType
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-type MosType
Specify the preferable MOS symbol type.

Valid values: Mos3T, Mos4T, Std4T, Ind4T, Ind3T,
Dep3T, Asy3T, Sym3T, and Nv4T.
Examples
schLakerSetMosType -type Ind4T
Options Commands
This section describes the Tcl commands applied to the Options commands of
798
lakerCellTemplate
lakerChangeGrid
K-2015.06

Options Commands
lakerDispFinGrid
lakerDispGlobalFinGrid
lakerDispGrid
lakerDispHier
lakerDispMCellInfo
lakerDispRow
lakerDispTrack
lakerLayerTap
lakerSetColPat (for Layer Attribute Setup)
lakerSetColPat (for Layer Filter Setup)
lakerSetColPat (for Layer Session Setup)
lakerSetColPat (for Layer Attribute Editing)
lakerSetColPat (for Layer Category Editing)
lakerSnapFinGrid
lakerSnapRow
lakerSnapTrack
lakerCellTemplate
The lakerCellTemplate command specifies a set of constraints for
transistor placement and realization.
Syntax
lakerCellTemplate [-PlaceConstraint PlaceConstraint]
[-RowNum rowNum] [-RowPattern rowPattern] [-PAlignment
PAlignment] [-NAlignment NAlignment] [-PNSpacing
PNSpacing] [-PStripHeight PStripHeight] [-NStripHeight
NStripHeight] [-PPowerSpacing PPowerSpacing] [NGroundSpacing NGroundSpacing] [-PowerRailWidth
PowerRailWidth] [-PowerRailLayer 0|1] [-GroundRailWidth
GroundRailWidth] [-GroundRailLayer 0|1] [-WellLower
WellLower] [-WellUpper WellUpper] [-WellLayer 0|1] [ContactStyle ContStyle] [-PwrGndContactAlignment 0|1] [ContactRowNo ContRowNo] [-ContactColNo ContColNo] [ContactXSpacing ContXSpacing] [-ContactYSpacing

K-2015.06
799

Options Commands
ContYSpacing] [-PContactAlignment PContAlign] [NContactAlignment NContAlign] [-DefContSpacing 0|1] [PowGndSpacing PowGndSpacing] [-MergeParalle2Single 0|1]
[-PolyGateAlign 0|1] [-GateFolding 0|1] [-FoldingStyle
FoldingStyle] [-StraightMaxPStrip StrMaxPStrip] [StraightMaxNStrip StrMaxNStrip] [-ThresholdPStrip
ThresPStrip] [-ThresholdNStrip ThresNStrip] [-save
fileName] [-section sectionName] [-backwardStacking 0|1
-backwardStackingRange float] [-mergeDiffWidthTxOD 0|1]
[-useLocalPowerGround 0|1] [-localPower PowerNameList]
[-localGround GroundNameList] [-DefThinOdSpacing 0|1] [ThinOdXSpace spacing]
Returns
None
Arguments
800
Argument
Description
-backwardStacking 0|1

1 : Allow backward transistor placement though it
slightly violates the signal flow.
0 : Place the transistors by the signal flow.
-backwardStackingRange
float
Specify the placement range value.

(default=0.0).
-ContactColNo
ContColNo
Specify the number of columns for the contact array

to be created.
-ContactRowNo
ContRowNo
Specify the number of rows for the contact array to

be created.
-ContactStyle
ContStyle
Specify the contact style of transistors.

Valid values: Maximum, Single, User-Defined,
None, and Default (default=Maximum).
-ContactXSpacing
ContXSpacing
Specify the spacing between the horizontal contact

layers. The default value relies on the technology
file setting.

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-ContactYSpacing
ContYSpacing
Specify the spacing between the vertical contact

layers. The default value relies on the technology
file setting.
-DefContactSpacing 0|1

1 : Use the defined spacing between contact layers.
0 : Do not use the defined spacing between contact
layers.
-DefThinOdSpacing 0|1

1 : Enable the OD or Boundary Spacing option.
0 : Disable the OD or Boundary Spacing option.
-FoldingStyle
FoldingStyle
Specify the folding style.

Valid values: Uniform and Maximum
(default=Uniform).
-GateFolding 0|1

1 : Fold gates.
0 : Do not fold gates.
-GroundRailLayer 0|1

1 : Specify the layer for ground rails with
layer_num purpose_num (for example: GroundRailLayer 1 1 252).
0 : Do not specify any layers for ground rails.
-GroundRailWidth
GroundRailWidth
Specify the height for ground rails.

-localGround
GroundNameList
Specify the local ground nets. Multiple nets must be

-localPower
PowerNameList
Specify the local power nets. Multiple nets must be

-mergeDiffWidthTxOD
0|1

1 : Merge OD for different width transistors.
0 : Merge OD for the same width transistors.

K-2015.06
801

Options Commands
802
Argument
Description
-MergeParalle2Single
0|1

1 : Combine various parallel gates to form a single
gate.
0 : Do not combine various parallel gates.
-NAlignment
NAlignment
Specify the alignment mode while placing an NMOS

within the N strip.
Valid values: PMos, Center, and Ground
(default=PMos).
-NContactAlignment
NContAlign
Specify the alignment mode of NMOS contacts.

Valid values: PMos, Center, and Ground
(default=Center).
-NGroundSpacing
NGroundSpacing
Specify the spacing between N strips and ground

rails.
-NStripHeight
NStripHeight
Specify the height for N strips.

Valid value: a real number (default=3.5).
-PAlignment
PAlignment
Specify the alignment mode while placing a PMOS

within the P strip.
Valid values: Power, Center, and NMos
(default=NMos).
-PContactAlignment
PContAlign
Specify the alignment mode of PMOS contacts.

Valid values: Power, Center, and NMos
(default=Center).
-PlaceConstraint
PlaceConstraint
Specify the constraint to get an optimized transistor

placement.
Valid values: Default, MinRoutingTrack,
MaxGateAlignment, and MaxDiffSharing
(default=Default).
-PNSpacing
PNSpacing
Specify the spacing between P and N strips.


K-2015.06

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-PolyGateAlign 0|1

1 : Correct the relative position of the poly gates
between PMOS and NMOS vertically by following
the -PAlignment and
-NAlignment options.
0 : Do not correct the relative position of poly gates
between PMOS and NMOS vertically.
-PowerRailLayer
PowerRailLayer

1 : Specify the layer for power rails with layer_num
purpose_num, for example,
-PowerRailLayer 1 1 252.
0 : Do not specify any layers for power rails.
-PowerRailWidth
PowerRailWidth
Specify the height for power rails.

-PowGndSpacing
PowGndSpacing
Specify the spacing between contact layers. It is

used when
-ContactRowNo is greater than 1.
-PPowerSpacing
PPowerSpacing
Specify the spacing between P strips and power

rails.
-PStripHeight
PStripHeight
Specify the height for P strips.

Valid value: a real number (default=4.2).
-PwrGndContactAlignment Valid values: Boolean values, 0 and 1 (default=0).

0|1
1 : Align power and ground contacts. When it is
used, the power contact aligns with Vdd, and the
ground contact aligns with Vss.
0 : Do not align any power and ground contacts.
-RowNum rowNum
Specify the number of rows to be used.

Valid value: an integer (default=1). The -rowNum
should be greater than 1 if -RowPattern PNNP or
-RowPattern NPPN is specified.
-RowPattern rowPattern
Specify the row pattern.

Valid values: PN, NP, PNNP, and NPPN (default=PN).

K-2015.06
803

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-save fileName
Save the changes of the cell template to a file

(default=laker.rc).
-section sectionName
Specify the section to be loaded in the Cell Template

form.
-StraightMaxNStrip
StrMaxNStrip
Specify the N strip height to determine whether to

fold a straight gate in an NMOS. When a straight
gate exceeds the maximum value, it is folded.
-StraightMaxPStrip
StrMaxPStrip
Specify the P strip height to determine whether to

fold a straight gate in a PMOS. When a straight gate
exceeds the maximum value, it is folded.
804
-ThinOdXSpace spacing
Specify the horizontal OD spacing for MOS devices.

This argument only works with
-DefThinOdSpacing.
-ThresholdNStrip
ThresNStrip
Specify the minimum strip height of the folded gate

in an NMOS.
-ThresholdPStrip
ThresPStrip
Specify the minimum strip height of the folded gate

in a PMOS.
Valid value: a floating number (default=5.0)
-useLocalPowerGround
0|1

1 : Apply local power/ground nets.
0 : Do not apply local power/ground nets.
-WellLayer 0|1
Specify whether to add a new Well layer.

layer_num purpose_num may be specified when
the value is 1 (for example: -WellLayer 1 1
252).
-WellLower
WellLower
Specify the lower location of the Well layer.


K-2015.06

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-WellUpper
WellUpper
Specify the upper location of the Well layer.

Examples
lakerCellTemplate -useLocalPowerGround 1 \
-localPower {VDDA VDDB VDDC} -localGround {GNDA GNDB GNDC}
See Also
Layout Window: Options > Cell Template
lakerChangeGrid
The lakerChangeGrid commad sets up the grid attributes and the rules of
cursor snapping.
Syntax
lakerChangeGrid -resolution resolution
lakerChangeGrid -default
lakerChangeGrid [-dx horDist | -dy verDist | -ratio ratio |
-type gridType] [-CursorOnGrid CursorOnGrid] [coordinateOnGrid 0|1] [-mask maskRuleList] [maskCursorOnGrid 0|1] [-track trackRuleList]
[-trackCursorOnGrid 0|1] [-displayTrack 0|1] [-saveTF]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-coordinateOnGrid 0|1
Valid values: Boolean values, 0 and 1 (default=0). This

argument is valid only when -CursorOnGrid is
specified.
1 : Enable the Snap User Input Coordinate option.
0 : Disable the Snap User Input Coordinate option.
-CursorOnGrid
CursorOnGrid
If specified, enable the Snap Cursor to Minor Ratio

option and set the ratio.

K-2015.06
805

Options Commands
806
Argument
Description
-default
Reload the default grid settings from the technology

file.
-displayTrack 0|1

1 : Enable the Display Routing Track option.
0 : Disable the Display Routing Track option.
-dx horDist
Specify the horizontal distance of grids.

-dy verDist
Specify the vertical distance of grids.

-mask maskRuleList
Specify mask resolution rules, listed by the following

sequence: LayerName, PurposeName, X-spacing, Yspacing, and Available (Boolean values).
-maskCursorOnGrid 0|1

1 : Enable the Snap Cursor to Mask Resolution option.
0 : Disable the Snap Cursor to Mask Resolution
option.
-ratio ratio
Specify the value of (Major Grid)/(Minor

Grid).
-resolution resolution
Specify the digital resolution value.

-saveTF
Update and save the current system unit settings in

the Change Grid form to the technology file.
-track track RuleList
Specify routing track rules, listed by the following

sequence: LayerName, PurposeName, X-pitch, Ypitch, X-offset, Y-offset, Direction (V, H, or Orth),
Available (Boolean values), and Display (Boolean
values).
-trackCursorOnGrid 0|1

1 : Enable the Snap Cursor to Routing Track option.
0 : Disable the Snap Cursor to Routing Track option.

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-type gridType
Specify the grid type.

Valid values: none, line, and dot.
Examples
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
Example 1
Change the minimum resolution to 0.01
Change the minor X and Y spacing to 0.1
Change the major grid ratio to 5
Set the 'Snap Cursor to Min Ratio' to 2
Change the grid type to dot
Reload the default grid setting of the technology file
lakerChangeGrid -resoultion 0.01 -dx 0.1 -dy 0.1 -ratio 5 \

-type dot -CursorOnGrid 2
lakerChangeGrid -track { PO1 drawing 0.5 0.5 0.25 0.25 H 0 0 } \
{ ME1 drawing 0.5 0.5 0.25 0.25 V 0 0 } \
{ ME3 drawing 0.5 0.5 0.0 0.0 Orth 1 1 } \
{ ME4 drawing 0.5 0.5 0.2 0.2 Orth 1 1 } \
{ ME5 drawing 0.5 0.5 0.3 0.3 Orth 1 1 } \
lakerChangeGrid -mask { ME1 drawing 0.05 0.05 1 } \
-maskCursorOnGrid 1
lakerChangeGrid -default
# Example 2
lakerChangeGrid -dx 0.1 -dy 0.1 -ratio 5 -type dot \
-CursorOnGrid 2 -saveTF
lakerChangeGrid -dx 0.5 -dy 0.5 -saveTF
# Example 3
# Set the minimum resolution to 0.001
lakerChangeGrid -resolution 0.001
# Example 4
lakerChangeGrid -CursorOnGrid 1 -coordinateOnGrid 1
See Also
Layout Window: Options > Change Grid
lakerDispFinGrid
The lakerDispFinGrid command turns on/off the display of fin grids (or
tracks) within a local fin region on screen.

K-2015.06
807

Options Commands
Syntax
lakerDispFinGrid -mode 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode 0|1

1 : Enable the display of fin grids (or tracks) within a local fin
region on screen.
0 : Disable the display of fin grids (or tracks) within a local fin
region on screen.
Examples
# Display fin grids (or tracks) within a local fin region
lakerDispFinGrid -mode 1
See Also
Layout Window: Options > Display Fin-grid > Fin Region
lakerDispGlobalFinGrid
The lakerDispGlobalFinGrid command turns on/off the display of fin
grids (or tracks) within a global fin region on screen.
Syntax
lakerDispGlobalFinGrid -mode 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
808
Argument
Description
-mode 0|1

1 : Enable the display of fin grids (or tracks) within a global fin
region on screen.
0 : Disable the display of fin grids (or tracks) within a global fin
region on screen.

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Examples
# Display fin grids (or tracks) within a global fin region
lakerDispGlobalFinGrid -mode 1
See Also
Layout Window: Options > Display Fin-grid > Global Fin
lakerDispGrid
The lakerDispGrid command turns on/off the display of the background grid
on screen.
Syntax
lakerDispGrid [-mode 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode 0|1

1 : Enable the display of the background grid on screen.
0 : Disable the display of the background grid on screen.
Examples
# display the grid
lakerDispGrid -mode 1
See Also
Layout Window: Options > Display Grid
lakerDispHier
The lakerDispHier command fits the screen size to the selected cell of the
design hierarchy.
Syntax
lakerDispHier -point (x1,y1)(x2,y2)

K-2015.06
809

Options Commands
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
(x1,y1) specifies the lower left corner of the bounding

box while (x2,y2) specifies upper right corner.
Examples
# zoom in the view area to (100,100)(200,200)
lakerDispHier -point (100,100)(200,200)
See Also
Layout Window: Options > Design Hierarchy
lakerDispMCellInfo
The lakerDispMCellInfo command turns on/off the display of the MCell
information in the Layout window.
Syntax
lakerDispMCellInfo -mode 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode 0|1

1 : Enable the display of the MCell information.
0 : Disable the display of the MCell information.
Examples
# turn off the display of MCell information
lakerDispMCellInfo -mode 0
See Also
Layout Window: Options > Display MCell Information
810

K-2015.06

Options Commands
lakerDispRow
The lakerDispRow command turns on/off the drawing of the row and row
area on the screen.
Syntax
lakerDispRow -mode 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode 0|1

1 : Enable the drawing of the row site on screen.
0 : Disable the drawing of the row site on screen.
Examples
# display the row site
lakerDispRow -mode 1
See Also
Layout Window: Options > Display Row
lakerDispTrack
The lakerDispTrack command turns on/off the drawing of the routing track
on screen.
Syntax
lakerDispTrack [-mode 0|1]
Returns
None

K-2015.06
811

Options Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode 0|1

1 : Enable the drawing of the routing track on screen.
0 : Disable the drawing of the routing track on screen.
Examples
# display the routing track
lakerDispTrack -mode 1
See Also
Layout Window: Options > Display Routing Track
lakerLayerTap
The lakerLayerTap command taps the layer at the specified point into the
active layer.
Syntax
lakerLayerTap -point (x0,y0)
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-point (x0, y0)
(x0,y0) specifies the location of tap for the layer.
Examples
# Example 1
# Tap the layer at point (100,100) into active layer
lakerLayerTap -point (100,100)
See Also
Layout Window: Options > Layer Tap
812

K-2015.06

Options Commands
lakerSetColPat (for Layer Attribute Setup)

The lakerSetColPat command sets up the attributes of outline colors, fill
colors, stipple patterns, line styles, and line widths for the specified layer and
purpose.
Syntax
To set layer attributes in the layer table:
lakerSetColPat -selall 0|1 | -visall 0|1
To set the visibility or selectability of all valid layers in the layer table:
lakerSetColPat -selValid 0|1 | -visValid 0|1
To edit global settings in the layer table:
lakerSetColPat -default [category] | -LoadDispFile |
-SaveDispFile [-fileName fileName [-saveToRC 0|1]
To edit layer attributes in the layer table:
lakerSetColPat [-AddLayer|-DelLayer] -layerNo layerNum [purpose purposeName] | -layerName layerName [-purpose
purposeName] | -lp {layerName [purposeName]} ... [[outlineColor colorName -fillColor colorName -stipple
stippleName -style lineStyleName -width width -vis 0|1 sel 0|1 -use 0|1] [-streamNo streamNum -dataTypeNo
dataTypeNum -apply 0|1]]
To show/hide all layers in the layer table:
lakerSetColPat -useall 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-AddLayer
Add a layer.
-apply 0|1

1 : Specify the layer to be streamed in/out.
0 : Do not specify the layer to be streamed in/out.

K-2015.06
813

Options Commands
814
Argument
Description
-dataTypeNo
dataTypeNum
Specify the data type number.
-default [category]
Reload the default value of technology file.

-default: Reload tfLayoutLayerTable, and
tfStreamIoTable.
-default category: Reload
tfLayoutLayerCategory.
-DelLayer
Delete a layer.
-fileName fileName
Specify the display file for loading and saving.
-fillColor colorName
Specify the name of the fill color.
Specify the layer name of the shape.
Specify the layer name of the specified layer.
-layerNo layerNum
Specify the layer number of the shape.
-LoadDispFile
Load a display file to replace display definition.
-lp {layerName
[purposeName]}
Specify layer name and purpose name at the same time.

If the layer purpose is not specified, the default purpose,
drawing, is used.
-outlineColor colorName
Specify the name of the outline color.
Specify the purpose name of the shape

(default=drawing).
Specify the purpose name of the specified layer

(default=drawing).
-SaveDispFile
Save the display definition to a file.
-saveToRC 0|1

1 : Update UserDispFile attribute in the laker.rc file.
0 : Do not update UserDispFile attribute in the laker.rc
file.

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-sel 0|1

1 : Enable the selectability of a layer.
0 : Disable the selectability of a layer.
-selall 0|1

1 : Enable the selectability of all layers.
0 : Disable the selectability of all layers.
-selValid 0|1

1 : Enable the selectability of all valid layer purpose pairs
(LPPs).
0 : Disable the selectability of valid LPPs.
-stipple stippleName
Specify the name of the stipple.
-streamNo streamNum
Specify the stream number.
-style lineStyleName
Specify the name of the line style.
-use 0|1

1 : Specify the appearance of a layer.
0 : Do not specify the appearance of a layer.
-useall 0|1

1 : Show all layers.
0 : Hide all layers.
-vis 0|1

1 : Enable the visibility of layers.
0 : Disable the visibility of layers.
-visall 0|1

1 : Enable the visibility of all layers.
0 : Disable the visibility of all layers.
-visValid 0|1

1 : Enable the visibility of all valid LPPs.
0 : Disable the visibility of valid LPPs.
-width width
Specify the line width.
Examples
# Example 1

K-2015.06
815

Options Commands
# Set all layers to be selectable

lakerSetColPat -selall 1
# Example 2
# Load a display file, save it as another display file and
# update "UserDispFile" attribute in laker.rc.
lakerSetColPat -LoadDispFile /tmp/Laker/display.dsp \
lakerSetColPat -SaveDispFile /tmp/Laker/default.dsp -saveToRC 1
# Example 3
# Add/Delete/Modify a layer
lakerSetColPat -AddLayer -layerName NEWLL -layerNo 12 \
-purpose drawing -outlineColor red -fillColor red \
-stipple blank -style solid -width 2 -vis 1 -sel 1
lakerSetColPat -DelLayer -layerNo 12 -purpose drawing
lakerSetColPat -layerNo 12 -purpose drawing -outlineColor red \
-fillColor red -stipple blank -style solid -width 2 -vis 1 \
-sel 1 -streamNo 10 -dataTypeNo 10 -apply 1
# Example 4
# Deselect three layer purposes POLY drawing, POLY pin,
# and MET blockage with one of the following methods:
# method 1
lakerSetColPat -lp [list POLY {POLY pin} {MET1 blockage}] -sel 0
# method 2
lakerSetColPat -lp POLY {POLY pin} {MET1 blockage} -sel 0
# Example 5
# Allow the layer (11 drawing) to stream in/out with stream
# number (11) and data type number (0)
lakerSetColPat -layerNo 11 -purpose drawing -streamNo 11 \
-dataTypeNo 0 -apply 1
# Example 6
# Set all valid layers to be selectable
lakerSetColPat -selValid 1
See Also
Layout Window: Options > Layer Color/Pattern > Layer Setting
Layer Table Frame: Sel/Vis Control Panel
lakerSetColPat (for Layer Filter Setup)

The lakerSetColPat command sets up the layer filter.
816

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Syntax
To set or clear a layer filter in the layer table:
lakerSetColPat -clearFilter | -setFilter filterPattern
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-clearFilter
Clear the existing layer filter.
-setFilter filterPattern
Set the filter pattern for the layer filter.
Examples
# Example 1
# Clear the existing layer filter
lakerSetColPat -clearFilter
# Example 2
# Set filter pattern "od"
lakerSetColPat -setFilter od
# Example 3
# Set filter pattern "{m1:drawing via}"
lakerSetColPat -setFilter {m1:drawing via}
See Also
Layer Table Frame: Search Panel
lakerSetColPat (for Layer Session Setup)

The lakerSetColPat command sets up the layer session.
Syntax
To set a session in the layer table:
lakerSetColPat -saveSession index | -clearSession index | restoreSession index
Returns
None

K-2015.06
817

Options Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-clearSession index
Clear data in the indexed session.

Valid value: an integer, from 1 to 5.
-restoreSession index
Restore data from the indexed session.

-saveSession index
Save data to the indexed session.

Examples
# Example 1
# Save data to the indexed session 1
lakerSetColPat -saveSession 1
# Example 2
# Clear data in the indexed session 2
lakerSetColPat -clearSession 2
# Example 3
# Restore data from the indexed session 3
lakerSetColPat -restoreSession 3
See Also
Layer Table Frame: Session Panel
lakerSetColPat (for Layer Attribute Editing)

The lakerSetColPat command edits the fill colors, line styles, stipple
patterns, and display groups.
Syntax
To edit colors:
lakerSetColPat -AddColor | -DeleteColor | -ModifyColor colorName colorName [-r redKey -g greenKey -b blueKey blink 0|1]
818

K-2015.06

Options Commands
To edit line styles:

lakerSetColPat -AddLineStyle | -DeleteLineStyle |
-ModifyLineStyle -lineStyleName lineStyleName [-length
length -width width -pattern lineStyle]
To edit stipples:
lakerSetColPat -AddStipple | -DeleteStipple | -ModifyStipple
-stippleName stippleName [-width width -height height pattern stipplePatten]
To edit display groups:
lakerSetColPat -AddGroup | -DeleteGroup | -ModifyGroup
-groupName groupName [-outlineColor color -fillColor
color -stipple stipple -lineStyle lineStyle]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-AddColor
Add a color.
-AddGroup
Add a display group pattern.
-AddLineStyle
Add a line style.
-AddStipple
Add a stipple pattern.
-blink 0|1

1 : Specify the blink state of the color.
0 : Do not specify the blink state of the color.
-colorName
-DeleteColor
Delete a color.
-DeleteGroup
Delete a display group pattern.
-DeleteLineStyle
Delete a line style.
-DeleteStipple
Delete a stipple pattern.
-fillColor color
Specify the fill color name of the display group pattern.

K-2015.06
819

Options Commands
820
Argument
Description
-groupName
groupName
Specify the display group name.
-height height
Specify the height of stipple pattern.
-length length
Specify the length of the line style.
-lineStyle lineStyle
Specify the line style name of the display group pattern.
-lineStyle
lineStyleName
Specify the name of the line style.
-ModifyColor
Modify a color.
-ModifyGroup
Modify a display group pattern.
-ModifyLineStyle
Modify a line style.
-ModifyStipple
Modify a stipple pattern.
-outlineColor color
Specify the outline color name of the display group

pattern.
-pattern lineStyle
Specify the pattern of the line style starting from left to

right, each digit (1/0) represents the pattern (fill/blank) on
the mapping position.
-pattern stipplePatten
Specify the stipple pattern starting from left top to right

bottom. Each digit (1/0) represents the pattern (fill/blank)
on the mapping position.
-r redKey -g greenKey
-b blueKey
Specify the value of the RGB color.

Valid values: redKey, greenKey and blueKey.
-stipple stipple
Specify the stipple name of the display group pattern.
-stippleName
stippleName
Specify the name of the stipple pattern.
-width width
Specify the width (thickness) of the line style.
-width width
Specify the width of the stipple pattern.

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Examples
# Example 1
# Add a color, a line style, a stipple and a display group pattern
lakerSetColPat -AddGroup -groupName DGgreen -outlineColor green \
-fillColor green -stipple blank -lineStyle solid
# Example 2
# Delete a color, a line style, a stipple and a display group pattern
lakerSetColPat -DeleteGroup -groupName DGgreen
# Example 3
# Modify a color, a line style, a stipple and a display group pattern
lakerSetColPat -ModifyGroup -groupName DGgreen \
-outlineColor green -fillColor green -stipple blank \
-lineStyle solid
See Also
Layout Window: Options > Layer Color/Pattern > Layer Setting
lakerSetColPat (for Layer Category Editing)

The lakerSetColPat command adds, deletes, or modifies a layer category.
Syntax
To add a layer category set:
lakerSetColPat -addCategory Name -use 0|1 -layerInfo Layer1
[Layer2]...
To delete a layer category set:
lakerSetColPat -delCategory Name
To modify a layer category set:
lakerSetColPat -modCategory Name -newName newName -use 0|1
-layerInfo Layer1 [Layer2] ...
To enable all layer category sets:
lakerSetColPat -useAllCategory 0|1
To enable/disable the SysPin category set and the list of PinBorder related
layers:
lakerSetColPat -modCategory SysPinSet -use 0|1

K-2015.06
821

Options Commands
To enable/disable the visibility and selectability of each PinBorder related layer:

lakerSetColPat [-syspin layerName] [-vis 0|1] [-set 0|1]
To append layer category sets by the category file:
lakerSetColPat -LoadCatFile | -SaveCatFile -fileName
fileName [-saveToRC 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
822
Argument
Description
-addCategory Name
Add a user-defined layer category set. The default

category names (RoutingSet, DrawingSet, and
DesignSet) cannot be used in this argument.
-delCategory Name
Delete a user-defined layer category. The default

category names, RoutingSet, DrawingSet, and
DesignSet, cannot be used in this argument.
-fileName fileName
Specify the category file for loading and saving.
-layerInfo
Layer1 [Layer2]...
Specify the layer name and purpose name with

{LayerName PurposeName} | SystemLayerName
| LayerName. The default purpose name is drawing.
-layerInfo
Layer1 [Layer2]...
Specify the layer name and purpose name

(default=drawing) with {LayerName PurposeName}
| SystemLayerName | LayerName.
-LoadCatFile
Load a category file.
-modCategory Name
Modify a user-defined layer category set. The default

-modCategory
SysPinSet
Modify the SysPin category set.
-newName newName
Rename a user-defined layer category set. The default


K-2015.06

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-SaveCatFile
Save a category file.
-saveToRC 0|1

1 : Update the LayerCategory attributes in laker.rc.
0 : Do not update the LayerCategory attributes in
laker.rc.
-sel 0|1

1 : Enable the selectability of PinBorder related layers.
0 : Disable the selectability of PinBorder related layers.
-syspin layerName
Specify the PinBorder related layers, defined in the

tfLayoutConnection section of the technology file.
-use 0|1

1 : Enable the appearance of a layer category set.
0 : Disable the appearance of a layer category set.
-useAllCategory 0|1

1 : Enable all layer category sets.
0 : Disable all layer category sets.
-vis 0|1

1 : Enable the visibility of PinBorder related layers.
0 : Disable the visibility of PinBorder related layers.
Examples
# Example 1
# Add a layer category set
lakerSetColPat -addCategory drawingSet1 -use 1 \
-layerInfo {MET1 drawing} {MET2 drawing} {MET3 drawing}
# Example 2
# Delete a layer category set
lakerSetColPat -delCategory drawingSet2
# Example 3
# Modify a layer category set
lakerSetColPat -modCategory drawingSet1 -newName drawing1 \
-use 1 -layerInfo {MET1 drawing} {VIA1 drawing} \
{MET2 drawing}
# Example 4
# Disable the selectability of the PinBorder related layer, MET1

K-2015.06
823

Options Commands
lakerSeColPat -syspin MET1 -sel 0

# Example 5
# Disable the visibility of the PinBorder related layer, MET1
lakerSeColPat -syspin MET1 -vis 0
See Also
Layout Window: Options > Layer Color/Pattern > Category Setting
Layer Table Frame: Category List Panel
lakerSnapFinGrid
The lakerSnapFinGrid command turns on/off the cursor snap action to the
nearest fin grid (or track) within a fin region when creating or editing a fin region
or an OD shape.
Syntax
lakerSnapFinGrid -mode 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode 0|1

1 : Enable the snap action to the nearest fin grid or track.
0 : Disable the snap action to the nearest fin grid or track.
Examples
# Example 1
# Snap cursor to the nearest fin grid or track
lakerSnapFinGrid -mode 1
See Also
Layout Window: Options > Snap Fin-grid
lakerSnapRow
The lakerSnapRow command turns on/off the cursor snap action to the
nearest row site when creating or editing instances for cell placement.
824

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Syntax
lakerSnapRow -mode 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode 0|1

1 : Enable the snap action to the nearest row site.
0 : Disable the snap action to the nearest row site.
Examples
# Example 1
# Snap cursor to the nearest row site
lakerSnapRow -mode 1
See Also
Layout Window: Options > Snap Row
lakerSnapTrack
The lakerSnapTrack command turns on/off the cursor snap action to the
nearest routing track when moving or pointing to objects.
Syntax
lakerSnapTrack [-mode 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode 0|1

1 : Enable the cursor snap action to the nearest routing track.
0 : Disable the cursor snap action to the nearest routing track.
Examples
# Example 1
# Snap cursor to the nearest routing track

K-2015.06
825

Query Commands
lakerSnapTrack -mode 1
See Also
Layout Window: Options > Snap Routing Track
Query Commands
This section describes the Tcl commands applied to the Query commands of
826
lakerAdjacentNet
lakerArea
lakerAttribute
lakerClearHighLight
lakerClearConn
lakerClearDimensionMarks
lakerClearRuler
lakerClearRulerLabels
lakerClearTagRulers
lakerConfigFlightLine
lakerConnBrowser
lakerConnChecker
lakerDistance
lakerEstimateCellArea
lakerFindObj
lakerFindNetByArea
lakerFlightLine
lakerMeasureResistance
lakerP2PResistance
lakerPadWindow
lakerRefreshShortError

K-2015.06

Query Commands
lakerReplaceObj
lakerRuler
lakerShortClean
lakerShortLocator
lakerShowHPWireLength
lakerSpareCell
lakerUDP
lakerAdjacentNet
The lakerAdjacentNet command extracts adjacent objects in accordance
with user-specified spacing rule.
Syntax
lakerAdjacentNet -with applyWith -margin marginRatio [highlight 0|1] [-addSel 0|1] [-gdsOut fileName]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-with applyWith
Define the extraction input.

Valid values: highlight, netTracer, and select.
-margin marginRatio
Specify the margin ratio, it is multiplied by the spacing

value, defined in tfNetRouteRule.
-highlight 0|1

1 : Draw the output data with highlight color by sequence.
0 : Do not draw the output data with highlight color by
sequence.
-addSel 0|1

1 : Add the output data into the select set.
0 : Do not add the output data into the select set.
-gdsOut fileName
Save the output data to a GDSII file.

K-2015.06
827

Query Commands
Examples
# Extract the adjacent objects from the currently selected set.
# The space between selected object and adjacent object should be
# smaller than 0.63 (margin multiplied by spacing: 1.4*0.45=0.63 if
# the spacing rule is 0.45). If the checking object meets the rule,
# it adds into the select set.
lakerAdjacentNet -with select -addSel 1 -margin 1.4
See Also
Layout Window: Query > Adjacent Net
lakerArea
The lakerArea command estimates the area of pointed shapes.
Syntax
lakerArea [-layer {layerName purposeName} {...}] [-fromlevel
Level] [-tolevel Level] [-file fileName]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file fileName
Save the measurement result to a specified file (*.log).

The file path is printed in the message frame of the Home
page.
-fromlevel Level
Specify the start level (default=current start level).

-layer {{layerName
purposeName} {...}
Specify the layer of the displayed shapes (default=layer of

all displayed shapes).
-tolevel Level
Specify the view level (default=current view level).

Examples
None
See Also
Layout Window: Query > Measure > Area
828

K-2015.06

Query Commands
lakerAttribute
The lakerAttribute command modifies the attributes of selected objects or
devices.
The following table shows the six attributes of path elements for
-routeParam.
Argument
Description
beginStyle pathStyle
Choose one of the path styles, either Truncate, Extend,

or Variable.
color colorName
endStyle pathStyle
Choose one of the path styles, either Truncate, Extend,

or Variable.
layerName layer
Specify the layer name.
lock 0|1
Lock or unlock the color of the shape.
points (x0, y0) (x1, y1)
Specify two ends of the modified path segment.
purpose purpose
Specify the purpose name.
width width
Specify a float value as the width of the modified path

segment.
The following table shows the nine attributes of via elements.

Argument
Description
colSpace colSpace
Specify the interval between columns.
columns colsNo
Specify the number of columns for via arrays.
height height
Specify a float value as the height of vias.
orient orientation

and MYR90.
point (x, y)
Specify the via location.

K-2015.06
829

Query Commands
Argument
Description
rows rowsNo
Specify the number of rows for via arrays.
rowSpace rowSpace
Specify the interval between rows.
viaDef viaName
Specify the via name.
width width
Specify a float value as the width of vias.
Syntax
lakerAttribute [-index index] [-point point | [-lowerLeft
(x0,y0)] [-upperRight (x0,y0)]] [-offsetPoint (x0,y0)]
[-style pathStyle] [-layerName layerName [-purpose
purpose] ] [-width width] [-length length] [-orient
orientation] [-magni magnification] [-cell cellName] [inst instName] [-rows rowsNo] [-cols colsNo] [-rowSpace
rowSpace] [-colSpace colSpace] [-justify justification]
[-font textFont] [-height height] [-text textString] [inner r1] [-outer r2] [-changeToArray changeToArray] [device deviceName] [-xSpace xSpace] [-ySpace ySpace] [xLay1Enc xLay1Enc] [-yLay1Enc yLay1Enc] [-xLay2Enc
xLay2Enc] [-yLay2Enc yLay2Enc] [-xRepeat xRepeat] [yRepeat yRepeat] [-device viaStackName] [-contType
contType] [-contAlign contAlign] [[-contMode contMode]
[-topLayer layerName]] [-createContact 0|1] [createCornerContact 0|1] [-contAlignMode Center|Max] [contLen number] [-totalLength length] [-fit seg | [block]
fitValue] [-space deviceSpace] [-metWidth metWidth] [connectType connectType] [-interDist interContDistance]
[-value value] [-metEncCo metEncCo] [-unitDist unitDist]
[-pattern pattern] [-centerLine centerLine] [-param
parameters] [-netName netName] [-gateName gateName] [portName portName] [-pinName pinName] [-portType
portType] [-accDir accDir] [-status status] [disableImpNotch 0|1] [-resEncCo enclosure_value] [co2Gate number [$rule_name]] [-optLayerRepeatPattern
optLayerRepeatPattern] [-traitRepeatPattern Pattern] [trait Pattern] [-layerSetting {layerName purposeName
enable | disable rectangle | fillNotch | none | fillHole}
{value1 value2} + ] [-createDummyGate {numberSingle
numberMulti numberInner | {numberInner toleranceValue}}
[-dummyGateLengthType LengthType]] [-dummyCapValue
dummyCapValue] [-unitSpaceX unitSpaceX] [-unitSpaceY
830

K-2015.06

Query Commands
unitSpaceY] [-unitValue unitValue] [-unitWidth

unitWidth] [-dummyWidth value] [-dummyContact 0|1] [extSegLength 0|1] [-segNo value] [-bodyWidth floatValue]
[-pivot top|bottom|firstEnd|secondEnd] [useMaskResolution 0|1|AsIs] [-xConSpace xConSpace
[$rule_name]] [-yConSpace yConSpace [$rule_name]] [routeParam attributeList] [-pathOffset value] [globalRule $rule_name] [-topLayerName name1] [topPurpose name2] [-botLayerName name3] [-botPurpose
name4] [-bottomLayer bottomLayerName [bottomPurpose]] [topLayer topLayerName [topPurpose]] [-nonOverlapVia 0|1]
[-discreteGatePitch 0|1] [-contLay1Width layerWidth] [reEval 0|1] [-contLay1Height layerHeight] [createPolyCont 0|1] [-routeStatus routeStatus] [routeType routeType] [-polyContType contType]
[-polyConSymmetry 0|1] [-showExtensionLine 0|1] [xPolyCoEnc value] [-yPolyCoEnc value] [-xPolyCoConSpace
xConSpace [$rule_name]] [-yPolyCoConSpace yConSpace
[$rule_name]] [-dummyGatePolyCoSym mode] [-xCo2OdEnc
xValue -yCo2OdEnc yValue] [-plugInParam {{$paramName
$paramValue} [{$paramName $paramValue}...]}] [placementStatus status] [-rectContactStyle 0|1] [avgDCCurrent avgDCCurrent] [-avgACCurrent avgACCurrent]
[-peakACCurrent peakACCurrent] [-rmsACCurrent
rmsACCurrent] [-object objectName] [-beginStyle
beginStyle [-beginExt beginExt extendValue]] [-endStyle
endStyle [-endExt extendValue]] [-beginStrap 0|1] [endStrap 0|1] [-striped 0|1] [-stripeSegIndex index] [viaDef viaName] [-spacing spacing] [-number number] [color colorName] [-lock 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-accDir accDir

Valid values: the combination of {Top},
{Bottom}, {Left}, and {Right} (default=all
directions, that is,

K-2015.06
831

Query Commands
832
Argument
Description
-avgACCurrent
avgACCurrent
Specify the average AC current value.

-avgDCCurrent
avgDCCurrent
Specify the average DC current value.

-beginExt extendValue
Specify the extension value if the begin style is

Variable.
-beginStrap 0|1

1 : Indicate there is a strap at the begin terminal.
0 : Do not indicate any strap at the begin terminal.
-beginStyle beginStyle
Specify the begin style of striped wires.

Valid values: Truncate, Extend, and Variable.
-bodyWidth floatValue
Specify the body width of guard rings. The number

of contact rows is determined by the body width
and contact spacing.
-botLayerName name3
This argument is used for contact devices.

name3 is the bottommost layer name of stack vias.
-botPurpose name4

name4 is the bottommost layer purpose of stack
vias.
-bottomLayer
bottomLayerName
[bottomPurpose]

bottommost layer.
-cell cellName
-centerLine centerLine
(x0,y0)...(xn,yn)

array of the center line while y0...yn specify the
y coordinate. Objects can be aligned by XY
coordinates respectively:
(*, -12.3) : X is AsIs and Y aligns to -12.3
(12.3, *) : Y is AsIs and X aligns to 12.3

K-2015.06

Query Commands
Argument
Description
-changeToArray
changeToArray
Change the instance type to one-by-one array type.
-co2Gate
number [$rule_name]
Specify the spacing between contacts and gates.

number: The number is in user units, and it must
be greater than or equal to the
minCo2GateSpace value defined in the
technology file. The default is the
minCo2GateSpace value.
$rule_name: The rule to be used
(default=default, which indicates the default
rule).

-cols colsNo
Specify the number of columns.

-colSpace colSpace
Specify the number of instances for y coordinate

spacing.
-connectType
connectType
Specify the connected type for resistors.

Valid values: metal, res, and none
(default=res).
-contAlign contAlign
Specify the alignment of contacts.

Valid values: top, center, and bottom
(default=center).
If the value of -contAlign is none of the above
values, or it is not specified, the contact align status
for the selected transistor/activeLayer-region
remains unchanged.
-contAlignMode
Center|Max
Specify the contact pattern.

Valid values: Center, and Max (default=Center).
Center : Center-aligned contacts;
Max : Maximum contacts.
-contLay1Height
layerHeight
Specify the height for the bottom layer of contact

arrays.

K-2015.06
833

Query Commands
Argument
Description
-contLay1Width l
ayerWidth
Specify the width for the bottom layer of contact

arrays.
-contLen number
Specify the contact length. It accepts two kinds of

unit, that is, db unit and user-defined unit as
follows.
-contMode contMode
Specify the contact mode. The following valid

values vary depending on different MCell devices.
-contType contType (for

transistors)
Transistors: Normal, Esd, and StackVia

(default=Normal). Refer to
lakerCreateTransistor.
Guard rings: normal, and stackVia
(default=normal). Refer to
lakerCreateGuardRing.
Contacts: centerAlign, and maximum
(default=maximum). Refer to
lakerCreateContact.
Specify the contact type. The following valid values

vary depending on different MCell devices.
834
With a decimal point, the user- defined unit is

used.
Without a decimal point, the db unit is used.
Transistors: asIs, NoContact,

SingleContact, MaxContact, and
ContactArray (default=MaxContact).
asIs : Keep the existing condition without
modification.
NoContact: Remove contacts.
SingleContact : Change to a single contact
structure.
MaxContact : Change to a maximum contact
structure.
contactArray column row.

K-2015.06

Query Commands
Argument
Description
-contType contType (for resistors) Specify the contact type. The following valid values
-contType contType (for

capacitors)
Resistors: maxRow, single, maximum, and

contactArray (default=maxRow).
maxRow : Change to a contact structure with
maximum row, such as maxRow row.
single : Change to a single contact structure.
maximum : Change to a maximum contact
structure.
Specify the contact type. The following valid values

Capacitors: maximum, contactArray, and

AsIs (default=maximum).
maximum : Change to a maximum contact
structure.
AsIs : Keep the existing condition without
modification.
-createContact 0|1

1 : Create contact in stack paths.
0 : Do not create contact in stack paths.
-createCornerContact
0|1

0 : Do not create any corner contacts.

K-2015.06
835

Query Commands
836
Argument
Description
-createDummyGate
{ numberSingle
numberMulti
numberInner |
{ numberInner
toleranceValue } }
Create dummy gates for a transistor with these

conditions:
numberSingle: Number of dummy gates
(default=2) for a transistor with one normal gate.
numberMulti: Number of dummy gates
(default=1) for a transistor with multiple normal
gates.
numberInner: Number of dummy gates
(default=1) for a transistor with different gate width
(between two adjacent gates) exceeding the
toleranceValue. This toleranceValue must
be greater than or equal to 0.0.
numberSingle, numberMulti and
numberInner must be specified when this option
is used.
-createPolyCont 0|1

1 : Create poly contacts.
0 : Do not create any poly contacts.
-device deviceName
Specify the name of contacts, transistors, resistors,

capacitors or guard rings.
-device viaStackName
Specify the via stacking name (or contact device

name) for stack paths (default=StackVia). If it is
StackVia, the contact device sequence is
connected automatically.
-disableImpNotch 0|1

1 : Create a notch shape on IMP/L1/L2 layers.
0 : Do not create any notch shapes on IMP/L1/L2
layers.

-dummyCapValue
dummyCapValue
Specify the capacitance (in pF) of dummy

capacitors.

K-2015.06

Query Commands
Argument
Description
LengthType
Specify the length type for dummy gates. This

argument is valid only if -createDummyGate is
specified.
AdjacentWider and MinChannelLength
-dummyContact 0|1

1 : Add contacts and metal on dummy resistors.
0 : Do not add contacts and metal on dummy
resistors.
-dummyWidth value
Specify the dummy width for resistors. By default,

the value is equal to the -width option.
-dummyGatePolyCoSym
mode
Set the poly contact structure for dummy gates.

Valid values: none, polyOnly, and all
(default=none).
-endExt extendValue
Specify the extension value if the end style is

Variable.
-endStrap 0|1

1 : Indicate there is a strap at the end terminal.
0 : Do not indicate any strap at the end terminal.
-endStyle endStyle
Specify the end style of striped wires.

Valid values: Truncate, Extend, and Variable.
-extSegLength 0|1

1 : Extend each segment to make each segment
having the same length. This argument is used for
disconnected resistors only.
0 : Do not extend the segment length.
-fit seg|[block] fitValue
Specify the value of segment or blockLength.

K-2015.06
837

Query Commands
Argument
Description
-font textFont
Specify the font type of created text strings, ruler

labels, genText labels or dimension marks.
Valid values for created text strings: Modern,
Script, Roman, Simple, Merit, Contemplate
and Contemplate1 (default=Modern).
Valid values for ruler labels, genText labels and
dimension marks: Modern, Script, and Roman
(default=Modern).
838
-gateName gateName
Assign a gate name to the transistor gate.
Specify the global rule for transistors, contact

devices, guard rings (default=default, which
-height height
Specify the text height of created text strings, ruler

labels, genText labels or dimension marks.
(default=1.0).
-index index
Edit an index of the selected objects.

The starting index number is 1. If this is not set, all
selected objects can be edited.
-inner r1
Specify the inner radius of doughnuts.
-inst instName
-interDist
interContDistance
Specify each inter contact distance (default=empty

string).
-jointType jointType


K-2015.06

Query Commands
Argument
Description
-justify
justification
Specify the contact justification of paths, or the text

justification of created text strings, dimension mark
and genText labels.
Valid values for contacts in paths: UpperLeft,
CenterLeft, LowerLeft, UpperCenter,
CenterCenter, LowerCenter, UpperRight,
CenterRight, and LowerRight.
Valid values for created text strings: Original,
UpperLeft, CenterLeft, LowerLeft,
(default=LowerLeft). The Original value is
available only when -toPoly is turned on.
Valid values for genText labels: UpperLeft,
CenterLeft, LowerLeft, UpperCenter,
CenterCenter, LowerCenter, UpperRight,
CenterRight, and LowerRight
(default=CenterCenter).
Valid values for dimension mark labels: Auto,
UpperLeft, CenterLeft, LowerLeft,
UpperRight, CenterRight, and LowerRight.
-layerName
layerName

K-2015.06
839

Query Commands
Argument
Description
-layerSetting
{layerName
purposeName
enable|disable
{value1 value2}+
840

specified layer, and rectangle, fillNotch,
none, or fillHole sets the extend type of that
layer. fillHole is used for MCell guard rings
only.
The parameter set {layerName
is ignored if the specified layer is disabled
(setting generate off and control off in
the technology file).
file).
rectangle, fillNotch, none, or fillHole
is ignored if this layer is set to be disable.
and the OD layer for MCell transistors or the
body layer for MCell guard rings.
-length length
-lock 0|1

-lowerLeft (x0,y0)
x0 specifies the x coordinate for the lower left

corner of the rectangle while y0 specifies the y
coordinate. Objects can be aligned by XY
coordinates respectively:
Specify the view size is printed compared with a

real chip size.
(default=1.0).

K-2015.06

Query Commands
Argument
Description
-metEncCo metEncCo
Specify the enclosure distance between the metal

and contact layers (for Cross contact mode only).
-metWidth metWidth
Specify the width of Metal layer shapes that

connect cross type contacts (for Cross contact
mode only).
-netName netName
Assign a net name to the selected shape or MCell.
-nonOverlapVia 0|1

1 : Allow non-overlapping contacts/vias.
0 : Allow overlapping contacts/vias.
-number number
Specify the number of stripes for the striped

segment.
-object objectName
Specify the name of the striped wire.
x0 specifies an offset value from the x coordinate

point while y0 specifies the value from the y
coordinate point.
-optLayerRepeatPattern
optLayerRepeatPattern
Define the repeated sequence of option layers.
-orient orientation

-outer r2
Specify the outer radius of doughnuts.
-pathOffset value
Specify the path offset for user-defined justification.


K-2015.06
841

Query Commands
Argument
Description
-param parameters
Specify the parameter list for contacts. Each

parameter includes the device name, the number
of columns, the number of rows, the contact width,
the contact length, the align type (m for maximum
type), optional parameters for the width and height
of the bottom layer, the horizontal spacing between
contact layers, the vertical spacing between
contact layers, the horizontal enclosure distance
between the contact layer and the first connected
layer, the vertical enclosure distance between the
contact layer and the first connected layer, the
horizontal enclosure distance between the contact
layer and the second connected layer, the vertical
enclosure distance between the contact layer and
the second connected layer, align type (c for align
center, other for no align center), the horizontal
distance between the leftmost contacts center of
the current contact layer and the first contact layer,
the vertical distance between the leftmost contact's
center of the current contact layer and the first
contact layer.
Specify the parameter list for stack paths. Each
parameter includes the contact device name, the
contact width, the contact length, the horizontal/
vertical spacings between contact layers, the
horizontal/vertical enclosure distances between
contact layer and the first connected layer, the
horizontal/vertical enclosure distances between
Refer to the -param parameter description for more
details of the parameter list for transistors.
842
-pattern pattern
Specify the capacitor pattern.

Valid values: patternA, patternB, patternC,
and patternD (default=patternA).
-peakACCurrent
peakACCurrent
Specify the peak AC current value.

-pinName pinName
Assign a pin name to the selected shape.

K-2015.06

Query Commands
Argument
Description
-pivot top | bottom |

firstEnd | secondEnd
Specify the end point under consideration.

Valid values: top, bottom, firstEnd, and
secondEnd.
top and bottom are for metal/res-connected
resistor.
firstEnd and secondEnd are for disconnected
resistor and are ignored if -segNo is not specified.
-placementStatus status
Specify the pin placement status.

Valid values: Fixed, Cover, Placed, Unplaced,
and Null (default=Placed).
-plugInParam {{$paramName
$paramValue}[{$paramName
$paramValue}...]}
Define a list of parameters for MCell callbacks. This

applies to MCell transistors and guard rings.

section.
-point point
Specify the centerline of the striped segment.
-point point
(x0,y0)...(xn,yn)

array while y0...yn specify the y coordinate.
Objects can be aligned by XY coordinates
respectively, for example:
-polyContType
contType
Specify the contact type for poly contacts.

Valid values: NoContact, SingleContact,
MaxContact, and ContactArray
SingleContact : Insert a single contact.
MaxContact : Insert the maximum number of
contacts.
contactArray row column.

K-2015.06
843

Query Commands
844
Argument
Description
-polyConSymmetry 0|1

1 : Enable the Symmetry option for poly contacts.
0 : Disable the Symmetry for poly contacts.
-portName portName
Assign a port name to the selected shape.
-portType portType
Set the pin shape type.

Valid values: in, out, inout, jumper, and
device.
-purpose purpose
-rectContactStyle 0|1

1 : Enable the Rectangle Contact Style option.
0 : Disable the Rectangle Contact Style option.
-reEval 0|1

1 : Enable the Refresh Signature Number option.
0 : Disable the Refresh Signature Number option.
-resEncCo
enclosure_value

the resistor body layer and contact layer.
-rmsACCurrent
rmsACCurrent
Specify the root-mean-square (rms) AC current

value.
-routeParam
attributeList
Specify the list of attributes for the modified

element of route objects. The format is
{elementIndex {attrKey attrValue}
...}. Some attributes for path and via elements
are illustrated the Description section.
-routeStatus
routeStatus

(default=Fixed).

K-2015.06

Query Commands
Argument
Description
-routeType
routeType
-rows rowsNo

-rowSpace rowSpace
Specify the number of instances for the x

coordinate spacing.
-segNo value
Specify the segment index of a disconnected

resistor.
-showExtensionLine 0|1

1 : Enable the Show Extension Line option.
0 : Disable the Show Extension Line option.
-space deviceSpace
Specify the spacing between resistor shapes.
-spacing spacing
Specify the stripe spacing for this striped segment.
-status status
Set the pin shape status.

Valid values: fix and float.
-striped 0|1

1 : Specify the geometry as stripes.
0 : Specify the geometry as fat wires.
-stripeSegIndex index
Specify the index of the active striped segment.

-style pathStyle

Variable
(default=Truncate).
-text textString

K-2015.06

stripe, followPin, IOWire, coreWire,
blockWire, signalUser, pgStripe,
clockStripe, and miscFillTrack
(default=none).
845

Query Commands
846
Argument
Description
-topLayer layerName
Specify the top layer is selected from one of the

metal layers defined in the technology file.
This argument is valid only if -contMode
stackVia is specified.
-topLayerName name1

name1 is the topmost layer name of stack vias.
-topLayer
topLayerName
[topPurpose]

topmost layer.
-topPurpose name2

name2 is the topmost layer purpose of stack vias.
-totalLength length
Specify the total length between outmost contact

layers (default=100.0).
-trait Pattern
Define the trait repeat pattern for partially selected

transistors. The valid value can be any
combinations from the defined trait in technology
file.
-traitRepeatPattern
Pattern
Define the trait repeat pattern for fully selected

transistors. The valid value can be any
combinations from the defined trait in technology
file.
-unitDist unitDist
Specify the unit distance of cross contact array

structure (for Cross contact mode only).
-unitSpaceX
unitSpaceX
Specify the horizontal spacing between unit

capacitors.
-unitSpaceY
unitSpaceY
Specify the vertical spacing between unit

capacitors.
-unitValue unitValue
Specify the unit capacitance in pF.


K-2015.06

Query Commands
Argument
Description
-unitWidth unitWidth
Specify the width (in microns) of unit capacitors.

-upperRight (x0,y0)
x0 specifies the x coordinate for the top right

corner of the rectangle while y0 specifies the y
coordinate.
Objects can be aligned by XY coordinates
respectively:
-useMaskResolution
0|1|AsIs
Valid values: Boolean values, 0 and 1, and AsIs

(default=AsIs).
AsIs : The same value, inheriting from
lakerCreateCapacitor, lakerCreateResistor,
lakerCreateTransistor, lakerCreateGuardRing and
lakerCreateStackedPath.
-value value
For capacitor value, the equation is defined in the

technology file.
For resistance value, if -totalLength is
specified, this argument is ignored.
-viaDef viaName
Specify the used via of the striped wire.
-width width
Specify the width of paths, stack paths, capacitors,

resistor body layers, or the cutting width of
contacts.
Specify the stick width of polygonal labels in
Contemplate font type. The height must be
greater than 5 times of the specified stick width;
and the stick width must be the even multiple
resolutions.
Specify the stripe width for this striped segment.

K-2015.06
847

Query Commands
Argument
Description
-xCo2OdEnc
xValue

the contact layer and the adjacent edge of the Thinoxide layer.
-xConSpace
xConSpace
[$rule_name]
Specify the contact x-spacing

(default=minCoSpace in ruleDef). Valid value: a
floating number, greater than or equal to the
minCoSpace value.
-xLay1Enc xLay1Enc

-xLay2Enc xLay2Enc

-xPolyCoConSpace
xConSpace
[$rule_name]
Specify the contact x-spacing for poly contacts

(default=minCoSpace in polyContact). The
valid value and $rule_name settings are similar to
the -xConSpace argument.
-xPolyCoEnc value
Specify the minimum horizontal enclosure distance

-xRepeat xRepeat
Specify the number of capacitors in x-direction.

Number of columns for contact arrays.
848
-xSpace xSpace
Specify the horizontal spacing between contact

layers.
-yCo2OdEnc yValue
Specify the vertical enclosure distance between

the contact layer and the adjacent edge of the Thinoxide layer.

K-2015.06

Query Commands
Argument
Description
-yConSpace
yConSpace
[$rule_name]
Specify the contact y-spacing

(default=minCoSpace).
Valid value: a floating number, greater than or
equal to the minCoSpace value.
-yLay1Enc
yLay1Enc

-yLay2Enc
yLay2Enc

-yPolyCoConSpace
yConSpace
[$rule_name]
Specify the contact y-spacing for poly contacts

(default=minCoSpace in polyContact). The
valid value and $rule_name settings are similar to
the -yConSpace argument.
-yPolyCoEnc value
Specify the minimum vertical enclosure distance

-ySpace ySpace
Specify the vertical spacing between contact

layers.
-yRepeat yRepeat

The number of capacitors in y-direction.
Examples
# Example 1
# Change the layer name of all selected shapes to poly layer
# and change the bounding box to (0,0) (10,10)
lakerAttribute -layerName poly -point (0,0) (10,10)
# Example 2
# Change the layer name of the 2nd object among these
# selected objects to FRAM
lakerAttribute -index 2 -layerName FRAM

K-2015.06
849

Query Commands
# Example 3
# Change the layer name of the 5th object among these selected
# objects to FRAM and change the string content to demo string
lakerAttribute -index 5 -layerName MT1 -text demo string
# Example 4
lakerAttribute -index 1 -point (1.325,-3.43) -device pmos \
-glueNo 3 -contLen 850 -contType MaxContact -xEnc 0.150000 \
-yEnc 0.150000 -xConSpace 0.4 -yConSpace 0.4 -co2Gate 0.3
# Example 5
# Modify stack via
lakerAttribute -index 1 -point (1.57,2.905) -device StackVia \
-justify LowerLeft -param \
{M1_P1 1 2 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0 0.0 0.0 } \
{M1_M2 1 2 0.5 0.5 0.45 0.45 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.15 c 0.0 0.0 } \
# Example 6
lakerAttribute -index 1 -point (-1.175,2.055) -device pmos \
-gates 2 -type parallel -contLen 1.15 -contType MaxContact \
-xEnc 0.150000 -yEnc 0.150000 -xConSpace 0.4 -yConSpace 0.4 \
-param \
-layerSetting { PP drawing enable none } \
-createDummyGate {2 1 {1 0.2}}
# Example 7
# Modify selected capacitor to be 2x2 and dummy capacitors is 0.1pF
lakerAttribute -index 1 -point (22.325,62.495) -device PCAP \
-unitSpaceX 1.0 -unitSpaceY 1.0 -dummyCapValue 0.100000
# Example 8
lakerAttribute -index 1 -point (37.145,16.653) \
-useMaskResolution 0 -device pfet -gates 2 -type parallel \
-contLen asIs -contType MaxContact -xEnc 0.5 -yEnc 0.45 \
-xConSpace 1.0 -yConSpace 1.0 -param \
-layerSetting { PIMP drawing enable none } \
-createDummyGate {2 1 1} -dummyGateLengthType AdjacentWider
# Example 9
# change the contact type to contactArray with 2 columns and
# 3 rows. The contact spacing in X direction is 0.6, and the
# contact spacing in Y direction is 0.7.
lakerAttribute -index 1 -point (-67.625,8.17) \
-useMaskResolution 0 -device TRES -totalLength 100.0 \
-width 4.0 -space 2.3 -fit segment 5 -contType \
contactArray 2 3 -xConSpace 0.6 -yConSpace 0.7 -extSegLength 0
850

K-2015.06

Query Commands
# Example 10
# change the contact type to contactArray with 2 columns and
# 3 rows. The contact spacing in X direction is 1.0, and the
# contact spacing in Y direction is 1.5.
-useMaskResolution 0 -device PCAP -value 38.200001 \
-metEncCo 0.350000 -unitDist 2.000000 \
-metWidth 0.500000 -pattern patternA -contactType \
contactArray 2 3 -xConSpace 1.0 -yConSpace 1.5
# Example 11
lakerAttribute -index 1 -routeParam {11 {layerName METAL1} \
{points (-382.9,100.725) (-382.9,104.925)} {width 0.7} \
{beginStyle Truncate} {endStyle Truncate}}
# Example 12
lakerAttribute -index 1 -routeParam {0 {point (-654.5,-645.875)} \
{columns 16} {rows 18} {width 0.6} {height 0.6} {colSpace 0.5}}
# Example 13
lakerAttribute -point (1.36,3.64) -orient R0 -magni 1.000000 \
-cols 3 -xRepeat 3 -rows 4 -yRepeat 4 -colSpace 0.400000 \
-xSpace 0.400000 -rowSpace 0.400000 -ySpace 0.400000 \
-topLayerName MET2 -topPurpose drawing -botLayerName MET1 \
-botPurpose drawing -xLay1Enc 0.150000 -yLay1Enc 0.150000 \
-xLay2Enc 0.150000 -yLay2Enc 0.150000 -width 0.700000 \
-length 0.500000 -device M1_M2 -justify LowerLeft \
-netName remove -netName2 remove -gateName remove -portName \
remove -pinName remove -substrate remove -status float
# Example 14
# Change a stack path to be with viaStacking "viaStacking2"
# and use its two contact device "M1_P1" and "M1_M2", without
# creating corner contact and with contact pattern Max":
lakerAttribute -index 1 -point (-8.108,26.557) (-8.108,26.557)\
(25.334,26.557) (25.334,-6.33) -device viaStacking2 -param \
{M1_P1 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 } \
{M1_M2 0.5 0.5 0.45 0.45 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.15 } -topLayer MET2 \
-bottomLayer POLY -width 3.500000 -style Variable \
-beginExt 1.000000 -endExt 2.000000 -createCornerContact 0 \
-contAlignMode Max
# Example 15
# "Lower Left XY" (*, -12.3)
lakerAttribute -layerName POLY -purpose label \
-lowerLeft (*, -12.3) -netName remove -netName2 remove \
-gateName remove -portName remove \
-pinName remove -substrate remove -status float

K-2015.06
851

Query Commands
# Example 16
-useMaskResolution 0 -device PMOS_plugIn -gates 2 \
-type parallel -contLen asIs -contType MaxContact \
-xEnc 0.5 -yEnc 0.45 -xConSpace 1.0 -yConSpace 1.0 \
-param {patternA 4.0 2.0 asIs 0.0 } {patternA 4.0 0.8 bottom 0.0 } \
-layerSetting { PIMP drawing enable none } \
-plugInParam {{b1 25.0} {b2 15.0} }
# Example 17
lakerAttribute -routeType signalUser
lakerAttribute -avgDCCurrent 0.5 -peakACCurrent 1.3 \
-rmsACCurrent 0.9
See Also
lakerClearHighLight
The lakerClearHighLight command clears all highlights in the layout, and
also clears the highlighted drawings generated by lakerConnChecker,
lakerConnBrowser, and lakerAddHighLightObj.
Syntax
lakerClearHighLight
Returns
None
Examples
lakerClearHighLight
See Also
Layout Window: Query > Clear Highlight
lakerClearConn
The lakerClearConn command clears all highlighted drawings generated by
lakerConnChecker and lakerConnBrowser.
Syntax
lakerClearConn
852

K-2015.06

Query Commands
Returns
None
Examples
lakerClearConn
lakerClearDimensionMarks
The lakerClearDimensionMarks command clears all dimension marks in
the layout.
Syntax
lakerClearDimensionMarks -mode 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode 0|1

1 : Clear all dimension marks.
0 : Do not clear any dimension marks.
Examples
# Example 1
# Clear all dimension marks
lakerClearDimensionMarks -mode 1
See Also
Layout Window: Query > Clear Ruler > Clear Dimension Marks
lakerClearRuler
The lakerClearRuler command clears all rulers in the layout.
Syntax
lakerClearRuler
Returns
None

K-2015.06
853

Query Commands
Examples
# Example 1
# Clear all rulers
lakerClearRuler
See Also
Layout Window: Query > Clear Ruler > Clear Ruler
lakerClearRulerLabels
The lakerClearRulerLabels command clears all ruler labels in the layout.
Syntax
lakerClearRulerLabels -mode 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode 0|1

1 : Clear all ruler labels.
0 : Do not clear any ruler labels.
Examples
# Example 1
# Clear all ruler labels
lakerClearRulerLabels -mode 1
See Also
Layout Window: Query > Clear Ruler > Clear Ruler Labels
lakerClearTagRulers
The lakerClearTagRulers command clears all tag rulers in the layout.
Syntax
lakerClearTagRulers -mode 0|1
854

K-2015.06

Query Commands
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode 0|1

1 : Clear all tag rulers.
0 : Do not clear any ruler labels.
Examples
# Example 1
# Clear all tag rulers
lakerClearTagRulers -mode 1
See Also
Layout Window: Query > Clear Ruler > Clear Tag Rulers
lakerConfigFlightLine
The lakerConfigFlightLine command configures the display attributes of
flight line segments for individual nets.
Syntax
lakerConfigFlightLine [-addNet netName] [-removeNet
netName] [-zoomBBox (x,y1)(x2,y2)]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-addNet netName
Estimate flight lines by net name. Multiple nets are

-removeNet netName
Remove flight lines by net name. Multiple nets are

-zoomBBox
(x,y1)(x2,y2)
Zoom to selected flight lines in the layout and fit on

screen.

K-2015.06
855

Query Commands
Examples
# Example 1
lakerConfigFlightLine -addNet {n1}
# Example 2
lakerConfigFlightLine -zoomBBox (0.253,-0.374) (1.079,0.378)
See Also
Layout Window: Query > Configure Flight Line
lakerConnBrowser
The lakerConnBrowser command loads the net information extracted by the
net tracer or other vendors.
Syntax
lakerConnBrowser [ -net netName | -clear | -highlightAll ]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-clear
Clear the highlighted drawings generated by the

Highlight Net command only. To clear all highlighted
drawings in the layout, use lakerClearConn.
-highlightAll
Highlight all nets (listed in the net list) in the layout.
-net netName
Highlight or de-highlight a net by netName. Multiple

net names can be specified.
-show
When specified, show the Find Short form. This

argument works with -loadDRCShortResult.
Examples
# Example 1
# Highlight net VDD
lakerConnBrowser -net VDD
# Example 2
# Clear all highlighted drawings in the layout
lakerConnBrowser -highlightAll
856

K-2015.06

Query Commands
See Also
Layout Window: Query > Highlight Net
lakerConnChecker
The lakerConnChecker command extracts the connection relationship
according to the technology file section lakerLayoutConnection, and then
shows the relationship with highlights.
Syntax
lakerConnChecker [-toMaxLevel|-toViewLevel] -resultFile
fileName [-speedMode|-normalMode] [-mode mode|-area
(x0,y0) (x1,y1)] [-addNet] [-net NetName] [-startPoint
(x, y)] [-traceViaArray 0|1] [-highlightVisibleLayerOnly
0|1] [-disableConnStop | -disableConnAll | -enableConnAll
layoutConnection]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-addNet
Add a net to the trace list.
-area
(x0,y0) (x1,y1)
Set the trace mode as area with the given coordinates.

(x0,y0) specifies the first point of the bounding box
while (x1,y1) specifies the second point.
-disableConnAll
Disable the connection relationship.
-disableConnStop
Ignore the stop condition.
-enableConnAll
layoutConnection
Enable the connection relationship.
-highlightVisibleLayerOnly
0|1

1 : Enable the Highlight on Visible Layer Only option.
0 : Disable the Highlight on Visible Layer Only option.

K-2015.06
857

Query Commands
Argument
Description
-mode mode
Set the trace mode.

Valid values: full, screen, and area (default=full).
full: Trace the entire cell.
screen: Trace the screen viewing area.
area: Trace the user-specified area.
-net NetName
Specify a net name.
-normalMode
Get the traced results in normal mode. This argument is

specified by default.
-resultFile
fileName
Specify the file name to save the traced results.
-speedMode
When specified, get the traced results at a fast rate.

When not specified, get the traced results in normal
mode, with a regular sampling rate.
-startPoint (x, y)
Specify a start point for the selected net object. When

-startPoint is not specified, the center point of the
selected object is the start point by default.
-traceViaArray 0|1

1 : Enable the Trace All Vias in a Via Array option.
0 : Disable the Trace All Vias in a Via Array option.
-toMaxLevel
Set the traverse depth to extract connections. When this

argument is specified, the maximum level is extracted.
-toViewLevel
Set the traverse depth to extract connections. When this

argument is specified, only the current view level is
extracted. This argument is specified by default.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerConnChecker -toViewLevel -resultFile trace -normalMode
# Example 2
lakerConnChecker -toMaxLevel -net LakerNet_1 -speedMode
# Example 3
lakerConnChecker -addNet -net LakerNet_2 \
-startPoint (7.715,0.615)
858

K-2015.06

Query Commands
# Example 4
lakerConnChecker -disableConnStop METAL1 METAL2 VIA12 MMC
# Example 5
lakerConnChecker -disableConnAll METAL1 METAL2 VIA12 MMC
# Example 6
lakerConnChecker -enableConnAll METAL1 METAL2 VIA12 MMC
See Also
Layout Window: Query > Hierarchical Net Tracer
lakerDistance
The lakerDistance command creates a minimum distance ruler in the
Layout window pane.
Syntax
lakerDistance -point (x1,y1)(x2,y2)
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-point (x1, y1) (x2, y2)
(x1, y1) specifies the first point of the ruler while

(x2,y2) specifies the second point.
Examples
lakerDistance -point (100,100) (200,200)
See Also
Layout Window: Query > Measure > Distance
lakerEstimateCellArea
The lakerEstimateCellArea command estimates the cell area.
Syntax
lakerEstimateCellArea -lib libName -cell cellName [utilization floatNum] [-ratio floatNum]

K-2015.06
859

Query Commands
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell CellName
-lib LibName
-ratio floatNum
Specify the ratio of width/length (W/L).

Valid value: a positive floating number (default=1.0). It
forms a square area when the value is 1.0.
-utilization
floatNum
Create a row area by area utilization.

Examples
None
lakerFindObj
The lakerFindObj command searches for the specified objects according to
the search criteria.
Syntax
lakerFindObj -type searchType -searProp searchProp [-index
index] [-matchCase 0|1] [-regular 0|1] [-zoomTo 0|1] [level level] [-point (x1, y1)(x2, y2)(x3,y3)...] [isEnclose 0|1] [-highlight 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
860
Argument
Description
-highlight 0|1

1 : Highlight the found objects without selection.
0 : No highlight action.

K-2015.06

Query Commands
Argument
Description
-index index
Select an index of objects in the search group.

The starting index number is 1. If this is not set, all
searched objects are selected.
-isenclose 0|1

1 : The search target should be totally inside the specific
area.
0 : The search target can be totally or partially inside the
specific area.
-level level
Control the number of design hierarchy levels that are

searched.
-matchCase 0|1

1 : Specify the case sensitivity of comparing string(s).
0 : Do not specify the case sensitivity of comparing
string(s).
-point (x1, y1)

(x2, y2) (x3, y3)...
Points (x1, y1) (x2, y2) (x3, y3) specify the

point array of the selected polygon area.
-regular 0|1

1 : Specify all possible variants in a search and precisely
control the replacements.
0 : Do not specify all possible variants in a search.
-searProp
searchProp
Specify the search criteria list. The criteria include name,

operation, and value field. The name is for specific
attributes, instance, library, or properties for the object
type. The operation is for objects equal to (==) or not
equal to (!=) the criteria; and, the value field sets the
attribute value.
-type searchType
Set the type of object to be searched.

Valid values: Text, Rectangle, Polygon, Path,
Doughnut, Ellipse, AnyShape, Route, Instance,
Array, AnyInstance, Contact, Transistor,
Resistor, Capacitor, GuardRing, StackPath,
Device, Net and Pin.

K-2015.06
861

Query Commands
Argument
Description
-zoomTo 0|1

1 : Zoom the window view to the searched object.
0 : Do not zoom the window view to the searched object.
Examples
lakerFindObj -index 1 -zoomTo 0 -type Polygon \
-searProp {Layer != {mt1 drawing}}
See Also
lakerFindNetByArea
The lakerFindNetByArea command returns the net name of connected
objects in the Hierarchical Net Tracer Viewer, having the specified layers in
specified boundary.
Syntax
lakerFindNetByArea -area Rect -layer L1 -view viewName [condition condition] [-bLayer L2] [-tLayer L3] [-prefix
Name] [-gateLayer L4] [-mode w|a]
Returns
Name1 Name2 Name3 ... Namen if successful.
Arguments
862
Argument
Description
-area Rect
Specify the tracing area at the start.

Rect: [[x1 y1] [x2 y2]].
-bLayer L2
Specify the bottom layer for tracing (for example: L2). If

specified, trace from L2 to the topmost layer only.
-condition
condition
Specify the condition to trace the path.

Valid values: P and E (default=P).
P: P.Extract; tracing the path overlaps with area.
E: Extract; tracing the path which has an endpoint inside
area.

K-2015.06

Query Commands
Argument
Description
-gateLayer L4
If the gate layer L4 is specified, only finding the net which has
a shape on gate layer.
-layer L1
L1: [layer1 layer2 ...], specify the tracing layer at the

start.
-mode w|a
Specify the mode of the view saving scheme.

Valid values: w and a (default=w).
w: write ; a: append.
-prefix Name
Specify the prefix name. The returned net name can be

Name1, Name2, Name3, ..., Namen.
-tLayer L3
Specify the top layer for tracing (for example: L3). If specified,
trace from the bottom layer to L3 only.
-view viewName
Specify the view name (for example: v1) that used to save the
result.
Examples
# The following line returns => Net__1 Net__2
lakerFindNetByArea -area (-20.0,-30.0) (40.0,50.0) \
-layer {ME1 ME2 ME3} -view view1 -condition p -bLayer PO1 \
-TLayer ME3 -prefix Net_-gateLayer PO1 -mode w
See Also
Layout Window: Query > Hierarchical Net Tracer
lakerFlightLine
The lakerFlightLine command toggles on/off the display of flight lines in
the Layout window pane, without making selection on shapes.
Syntax
lakerFlightLine -showAll 0|1
Returns
None

K-2015.06
863

Query Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-showAll 0|1

1 : Show flight lines in the Layout window pane.
0 : Hide flight lines in the Layout window pane.
Examples
# Display Flight Lines in the layout
lakerFlightLine -showAll 1
# Hide Flight Lines in the layout
lakerFlightLine -showAll 0
See Also
Layout Window: Query > Show Flight Lines
The lakerMeasureResistance command gets the resistance measurement
results after creating MCell resistors with equal resistance.
Syntax
To measure the resistance at a faster speed:
lakerMeasureResistance -measure [[-sheetResist
sheetResistValue] [-cornerRatio cornerRatioValue] [extend extendValue] [-etchValue etchValue] [includeConnShape 0|1] [-shortestPathMeasurement 0|1]] [sort 0|1 [-horizontal 0|1] [-figs figIds]] [resistanceList resList]
To measure the resistance at a precision level:
lakerMeasureResistance -measure [[-sheetResist
sheetResistValue] [-factor factorValue] [-cornerRatio
cornerRatioValue] [-extend extendValue]] [-etchValue
etchValue] [-sort 0|1 [-horizontal 0|1] [-figs figIds]]
[-resistanceList resList] [-measEffort 0|1|2|3|4|5]
Other operations:
lakerMeasureResistance -query -condition conditionString
lakerMeasureResistance -save [-file filename]
lakerMeasureResistance -pointSel start|end
864

K-2015.06

Query Commands
sortType 0|1]
-delGrid -rowItem rowNum

-sortGrid [-colItem colNum ] [[-diagram 0|1]
[-returnValue 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-colItem colNum
Specify the column to be sorted. The following

numbers correspond to the associated columns:
0: The Index column (default).
1: The Resistance column.
2: The Dev. To Previous column.
3: The Dev. To Minimum column.
4: The Effective Length column.
5: The Length column.
6: The Width column.
7: The Spacing To Previous column.
8: The Jog Count column.
-condition
conditionString
Specify the query condition with the following format:

"Property1 [Operator1 Value1]
[Conjunction Property2 [Operator2
Value2]]", where:
The valid values of Property1 and Property2

are All, DevToPrevious, DevToMin,
EffectiveLength, Width and
SpacingToPrevious.
The valid values of Operator1 and Operator2
are >, >=, < and <=.
The valid value of Value1 and Value2 is a floating
number.
The valid values of Conjunction are And and Or.
-cornerRatio
cornerRatioValue
Specify the corner ratio of the sheet resistance.
-delGrid
Specify the action to delete items from the

measurement table.

K-2015.06
Valid value: a floating number, greater than 0.0.
865

Query Commands
866
Argument
Description
-diagram 0|1

1 : Display the Resistance Diagram form.
0 : Do not display the Resistance Diagram form.
-etchValue etchValue
Specify the etch value.

Valid value: a floating number, greater than or equal to
0.0.
-extend extendValue
Specify the extension length.

Valid value: a floating number, greater than or equal to
0.0.
-factor factorValue
Specify the process factor.

-figs figIds
Measure resistance by specified figIds, and report the

results by the input order of figIds.
-file fileName
Specify a file to save the measurement results.
-horizontal 0|1

1 : Sort shapes in horizontal direction.
0 : Sort shapes in vertical direction.
-includeConnShape
0|1

1 : Enable the Include Connected Shapes option.
0 : Disable the Include Connected Shapes option.
-measEffort 0|1|2|3|4|5
Specify a measurement effort.

Valid values: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5.
-measure
Measure the selected shapes.
-pointSel start|end
Set the start and end points.
-query
Filter the measurement results with the specified

condition string.

K-2015.06

Query Commands
Argument
Description
-returnValue 0|1

1 : Show the returned value with the following format:
{{Index Resistance DevToPrevious
DevToMin EffectiveLength Length Width
SpacingToPrevious JogCount} {.....} ...}
0 : Hide the returned value.
-rowItem rowNum
Specify the number of rows to be deleted.
-save
Save the filtered measurement results to a specified

file.
-sheetResist
sheetResistValue
Specify the sheet resistance.

-shortestPathMeasurement
0|1

1 : Enable the Shortest Path Measurement option.
0 : Disable the Shortest Path Measurement option.
-sort 0|1

1 : Enable the Sort Shapes in Direction option.
0 : Disable the Sort Shapes in Direction option.
-sortGrid
Specify the action to sort the information in the

measurement table.
-sortType 0|1

1 : Sort the data in descending order.
0 : Sort the data in ascending order.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerMeasureResistance -start
lakerMeasureResistance -sheetResist 1.000000 \
-figs [lakerGetSelSet] -measure
lakerMeasureResistance -save -file ./res.rpt
lakerMeasureResistance -end
# Example 2
# Measure selected shapes
lakerMeasureResistance -measure -sheetResist 0.1 \
-includeConnShape 1 -extend 10.0

K-2015.06
867

Query Commands
# Example 3
# Do not sort any shapes in direction
lakerMeasureResistance -measure
lakerMeasureResistance -measure -sort 0
# Example 4
# Sort shapes in vertical direction
lakerMeasureResistance -measure -sort 1 -horizontal 0
# Example 5
# Measure in shortest path style
lakerMeasureResistance -shortestPathMeasurement 1 \
-sheetResist 1.000000 -figs [lakerGetSelSet] -measure
# Example 6
# Measure at a faster speed
lakerMeasureResistance -sheetResist 1.0 -measEffort 0 -measure
# Example 7
# Measure at a precision level of 1, and the default
# Process Factor=1
lakerMeasureResistance -sheetResist 1.000000 -extend 1.0 \
-etchValue 1.0 -measEffort 1 -measure
# Example 8
# Measure at a precision level of 1, and the default
# Process Factor=1.5
lakerMeasureResistance -sheetResist 1.000000 -factor 1.5 \
-extend 1.0 -etchValue 1.0 -measEffort 1 -measure
# Example 9
# Query
lakerMeasureResistance -query
-condition "DeviationToPrevious > 1 And SpacingToPrevious > 40"
# Example 10
# Save to file
lakerMeasureResistance -save -file ./res.rpt
# Example 11
# Point selection
lakerMeasureResistance -pointSel start
lakerAreaSel -point (-0.063,0.218) (0.118,0.314)
# Example 12
# Remove a row from the measurement table
lakerMeasureResistance -delGrid -rowItem 1
868

K-2015.06

Query Commands
# Example 13
# Sort the Resistance column in ascending order
lakerMeasureResistance -sortGrid -colItem 1 -sortType 0
# Example 14
# Display the Resistance Diagram form
lakerMeasureResistance -diagram 1
# Example 15
lakerMeasureResistance -etchValue 1.000000 -sort 0 \
-measEffort 10 -measureResInPreselect 0 -measure -returnValue 0 \
-resistanceList {{POLY 1.000000} {MET1 0.5} { CONT 1.000000} \
{POLY2 1.000000} {MET2 1.000000} {VIA1 1.000000} \
{MET3 1.000000} {VIA2 1.000000} {MET4 1.000000} \
{VIA3 1.000000} }
See Also
Layout Window: Query > Measure > Resistance
Layout Window: Router > Equal Resistivity
lakerP2PResistance
The lakerP2PResistance command measures the resistance by specifying
measured points on the desired shapes or paths. It returns the resistance value
if the results can be measured successfully, otherwise returns -1.
Syntax
lakerP2PResistance -mode selectMode [-recPt] [-sheet
sheetResistance] -point (x1, y1) (x2, y2) ... (xn, yn)
[-layer (layer1, purpose1) (layer2, purpose2) ...
(layern, purposen)]
Returns
A resistance value if successful; otherwise, returns -1.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-layer (layer1, purpose1) Specify the layer and purpose for the selected point.
(layer2, purpose2)
This argument is only valid for multiple layers mode.
... (layern, purposen)

K-2015.06
869

Query Commands
Argument
Description
-mode selectMode
Specify the measurement mode.

Valid values: single and multiple
(default=single).
-point (x1, y1) (x2, y2)

... (xn, yn)
When -mode single is selected, two measured

points can be specified.
When -mode multiple is selected, at least two
measured points must be specified.
(x1,y1) specifies the first measured point while
(x2,y2) specifies the second measured point, and
(xn, yn) specifies the proceeding measured point.
-recPt
Record the measured points.
-sheet sheetResistance Specify the aspect ratio of sheet resistance.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerP2PResistance -recPt -point (0.195,0.145) (0.121,0.42)
# Example 2
lakerP2PResistance -mode single -sheet 0.100000 \
-point (282.0,1871.5) (14064.5,267.541)
# Example 3
lakerP2PResistance -mode multiple \
-point (282.0, 1871.5) (14064.5, 267.541) (2536.5, 24569.7) \
-layer (M1, drawing) (dg, drawing) (-M2, drawing)
See Also
Layout Window: Query > Measure > Point-to-Point Resistance
Layout Window: Router > Equal Resistivity
lakerPadWindow
The lakerPadWindow command crosses the design hierarchy to search for
the specific pad layer, and then exports the width, height, bounding box, center
point, and text label of a pad to a text file, or inserts text labels from a text file.
870

K-2015.06

Query Commands
Syntax
lakerPadWindow [-areaSize padAreaSize] -padLayerName
padLayerName [-padPurpose padPurpose] [-textLayerName
textLayerName] [-textPurpose textPurpose] [-height
height] [-offset offset] [-textListFile textListFile] [coordinateFile coordinateFile] [-startBox startBox]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-areaSize
padAreaSize
Specify the condition of the area size to search for the

pad layer (default=no condition).
-coordinateFile
coordinateFile
Specify the output file that contains the information of the

text label, width, height, bounding box and the center
point of each pad.
-height height
Specify the height of the inserted text.

Valid value: an integer or a floating number (default=10).
-offset offset
Specify the offset point of the inserted text.

-padLayerName
padLayerName
Specify the layer name of the pad layer.
-padPurpose
padPurpose
Specify the layer purpose of the pad layer

(default=drawing).
-startBox startBox
Specify the starting pad box.
-textLayerName
textLayerName
Specify the layer name of the text layer.
-textListFile
textListFile
Specify the input text file.
-textPurpose
textPurpose
Specify the layer purpose of the text layer

(default=drawing).

K-2015.06
871

Query Commands
Examples
# Example 1
lakerPadWindow -padLayerName POLY -textLayerName NWELL \
-height 10.0 -textListFile padtext3.txt \
-coordinateFile out3.txt
See Also
Layout Window: Query > Pad Window
The lakerRefreshShortError command removes unnecessary short
layers or creates necessary short layers after the EIP > Return To Top
command is executed.
Syntax
Returns
None
Examples
See Also
Layout Window: Query > Refresh Short Error
lakerReplaceObj
The lakerReplaceObj command modifies all objects found by the Replace
command.
Syntax
lakerReplaceObj -type searchType -searProp searchProp repProp replaceProp [-index index] [-matchCase 0|1] [regular 0|1] [-zoomTo 0|1] [-level level]
Returns
None
872

K-2015.06

Query Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-index index
Replace an index of objects in the search group.

The starting index number is 1. If the index number is not
defined, all searched objects are replaced.
-level level

searched.
-matchCase 0|1

0 : Do not specify the case sensitivity of comparing string(s).
-regular 0|1

1 : Specify all possible variants in a search and precisely
control the replacements.
0 : Do not specify any possible variants in a search
-repProp
replaceProp
The replacement properties include the name and value

fields. The name is for specific attributes, instances,
libraries, or properties for the object type; and the value field
sets the attribute value, for example: -repProp {String
{cc}}, where String is the name of the property and cc
is the value.
-searProp
searchProp
Specify the search criteria list. The criteria include the

name, operation and value fields. The name is for specific
attributes, instances, libraries, or properties for the object
type; the operation is for objects equal to (==) or not equal
to (!=) the criteria; and the value field sets the attribute
value, for example: -searProp {String == {dd}},
where String is the name of the property and dd is the
value.
-type searchType
Set the object type to be searched.

Valid values: Text, Rectangle, Polygon, Path,
Doughnut, Ellipse, AnyShape, Instance, Array,
AnyInstance, Contact, Transistor, Resistor,
Capacitor, GuardRing, StackPath, and Device.

K-2015.06
873

Query Commands
Argument
Description
-zoomTo 0|1

1 : Zoom in and fit a matched object in the window.
0 : Do not zoom in and fit a matched object in the window.
Examples
lakerReplaceObj -repProp {myprop {7}} -index 1 -matchCase 1 \
-type Text -searProp {myprop == {5}}
See Also
Layout Window: Query > Replace
lakerRuler
The lakerRuler command creates a ruler.
Syntax
lakerRuler -point (x1,y1)(x2,y2) [-startlen startvalue]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-point
(x1, y1) (x2, y2)
(x1,y1) specifies the first point of the ruler while

-startlen startvalue
Specify the start value of the ruler.

Examples
# create a ruler from (0,0) to (0,10) and its value from 10 to 20
lakerRuler -point (0, 0) (0,10) -startlen 10
See Also
Layout Window: Query > Tag Ruler
874

K-2015.06

Query Commands
lakerShortClean
The lakerShortClean command clears the blinking highlight result that is
generated by lakerShortLocator.
Syntax
lakerShortClean
Returns
None
Examples
lakerShortClean
See Also
Layout Window: Query > Highlight Net > Clear Short
lakerShortLocator
The lakerShortLocator command finds out the critical path that leads to
illegal connection. This function is valid based on the result of
lakerConnChecker, thus user should execute lakerConnChecker first and
the two assigned points must be overlapped with the connection highlight.
Syntax
lakerShortLocator -point (x1, y1)(x2, y2)
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-point (x1, y1) (x2, y2)
The two starting points for Short Locator to find the

critical path.
Examples
lakerShortLocator -point (-24.346,10.6) (4.139,-0.235)
See Also
Layout Window: Query > Highlight Net > Find Short

K-2015.06
875

Query Commands
lakerShowHPWireLength
The lakerShowHPWireLength command measures the half-perimeter wire
length (HPWL) of specified nets.
Syntax
lakerShowHPWireLength [-net netNames] [-ignoreSoftPin 0|1]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-ignoreSoftPin 0|1

1 : Ignore soft pins during measurement.
0 : Consider soft pins during measurement.
-net netNames
Specify the nets to be measured. Multiple net names

must be separated by spaces in format -net {net1
net2 ... netn}.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerShowHPWireLength -net {vdd vss} -ignoreSoftPin 0
# Example 2
lakerShowHPWireLength -net {vdd vss} -ignoreSoftPin 1
See Also
Layout Window: Query > Measure > Show HPWL
lakerSpareCell
The lakerSpareCell command manages the spare cell with the specific
prefix string.
Syntax
lakerSpareCell [-changemode viewMode | -loadfile filename |
-savefile filename | -delall 0|1 | -op [ clear | delete
| unselectall find [-matchcase 0|1 | -regular 0|1 | -zoom
0|1 | -searProp searchProp | -name spareName] | add [-
876

K-2015.06

Query Commands
matchcase 0|1 | -regular 0|1 | -name spareName | -group

groupName] | select -name spareName | dropadd -name
spareName]]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-changemode
viewMode
Change the display mode of spare cell management.
-delall 0|1

1 : Delete all view marks.
0 : Keep all view marks.
-loadfile filename
Load spare cell list from file.
-op add
[-matchcase 0|1 |
-regular 0|1 |
-name spareName |
-group groupName]
-op add performs add operation with the following

options:
-matchcase 0|1: The comparing strings are casesensitive when -matchcase is used. Valid values:
Boolean values, 0 and 1 (default=1).
-regular 0|1: Specify all possible variants in a search
and precisely control the replacements. Valid values:
-name spareName: Search value.
-group groupName: Group name for the added spare
cells.
-op clear
Clear special highlights.
-op delete
Delete selected items from the spare cell list.
-op dropadd
-name spareName
Specify the spare cell lists. They are added by the drag
and drop to the spare cell list.

K-2015.06
877

Query Commands
Argument
Description
-op find
[-matchcase 0|1 |
-regular 0|1 | -zoom
0|1 |
-searProp
searchProp |
-name spareName]
-op find performs search operation with the following

options:
-matchcase 0|1: The comparing strings are casesensitive when -matchcase 1 is set. Valid values:
-regular 0|1: Specify all possible variants in a
search and precisely control the replacements. Valid
values: Boolean values, 0 and 1 (default=1).
-zoom 0|1: Zoom to the matched spare cells if zoom 1 is set. Keep the zoom ratio if -zoom 0 is set.
-searProp searchProp: Search criteria list; the
criteria include name, operation and value field. The
name is for specific attributes, instance, library, or
properties for the object type; the operation is for
objects equal to (==) or not equal to (!=) the criteria;
and, the value field sets the attribute value.
-name spareName: Search value.
-op select
-name sparename
Select an item from the spare cell lists with the specified
spare cell name.
-op unselectall
Deselect all items in the spare cell lists.
-savefile filename
Save the spare cell list to a file.
Examples
# Example 1
# Find the spare cell with cell name that is not equal to
# "aaa", "bbb", with instance name starting with "I" and
# with abstract view
lakerSpareCell -op find -matchcase 0 -regular 1 -zoom 1 \
-searProp {Cell != {aaa bbb}} {Instance == {I*}} {View = {abs}}
See Also
lakerFindObj
Layout Window: Query > Spare Cell
lakerUDP
The lakerUDP command adds extra properties on any objects.
878

K-2015.06

Query Commands
Syntax
For specified data index:
lakerUDP -index index [-remove] -name Name -type Type -value
{Value}
For common property:
lakerUDP -common [-remove] -name Name -type Type -value
{Value}
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-common
Action to check the common property of the selected

objects.
-index index
Data index in the property.

Valid value: an integer, starting from 1.
-name Name
Data in the Name field.

Valid value: a text string.
-remove
Action to remove specified data.
-type Type
Data in the Type field.

Valid value: string, int, float, Boolean, and time.
-value {Value}
Data in the Value field.

Valid value: any input values, according to -type.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerUDP -index
lakerUDP -index
lakerUDP -index
lakerUDP -index
lakerUDP -index
lakerUDP -index
1
1
2
2
3
3
-name
-name
-name
-name
-name
-name
shape -type string -value {rectangle}

number -type int -value {1}
flag -type Boolean -value {1}
area -type float -value {2.5}
# Example 2
lakerUDP -common -name number -type int -value {532}
lakerUDP -common -name version -type string -value {3.2}

K-2015.06
879

EIP Commands
EIP Commands
This section describes the Tcl commands applied to the EIP commands of the
lakerDimNeighbor
lakerDispNeighbor
lakerEditInPlace
lakerEIPDisplayHier
lakerEIPDisplayNormal
lakerEIPDisplayTop
lakerFitEdit
lakerReturnLevel
lakerReturnOne
lakerReturnOneEdit
lakerReturnSubTop
lakerReturnTop
lakerDimNeighbor
The lakerDimNeighbor command dims (toggle operation) the color of
neighboring objects for EIP cell.
Syntax
lakerDimNeighbor -mode 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
880
Argument
Description
-mode 0|1

1 : Dim the color of neighboring objects.
0 : Show the neighboring objects with normal color.

K-2015.06

EIP Commands
Examples
# Dim the color of neighboring objects for EIP cell
lakerDimNeighbor -mode 1
See Also
Layout Window: EIP > Dim Neighbor
lakerDispNeighbor
The lakerDispNeighbor command enables or disables (toggle operation)
the display of neighboring objects for the cell being edited in place.
Syntax
lakerDispNeighbor -mode 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode 0|1

1 : Enable the display of neighboring objects.
0 : Disable the display of neighboring objects.
Examples
# enable the display of neighboring objects for EIP cell
lakerDispNeighbor -mode 1
See Also
Layout Window: EIP > Display Neighbor
lakerEditInPlace
The lakerEditInPlace command edits the specified cell at the current
layout window pane.
Syntax
lakerEditInPlace [-point (x0,y0)] [-zoomto 0|1] [-descend
0|1]

K-2015.06
881

EIP Commands
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-descend 0|1

1 : Enable the descend mode.
0 : Disable the descend mode.
-point (x0, y0)
(x0,y0) specifies the location of the EIP cell.
-zoomto 0|1

1 : Zoom to the edited cell or not in EIP mode.
0 : Do not zoom to the edited cell or not in EIP mode.
Examples
# edit the selected object (10,10) in EIP mode and
# zoom to the edited object
lakerEditInPlace -zoomto 1
# edit the object (10,10) in descend mode
lakerEditInPlace -point (10,10) -descend 1
See Also
Layout Window: EIP > Edit In Place
lakerEIPDisplayHier
The lakerEIPDisplayHier command shows the layout drawing of the
selected object or instance according to EIP hierarchy depth, but its neighbors
are displayed at the view level 0 of the top cell view.
Syntax
lakerEIPDisplayHier
Returns
None
Examples
lakerEIPDisplayHier
882

K-2015.06

EIP Commands
See Also
Layout Window: EIP > Display Level
The lakerEIPDisplayNormal command shows the layout drawing of the
selected object or instance and its neighbors according to EIP hierarchy depth.
Syntax
Returns
None
Examples
See Also
lakerEIPDisplayTop
The lakerEIPDisplayTop command always shows the layout drawing of the
selected object or instance with its neighbors at the view level 0 of the top cell
view.
Syntax
lakerEIPDisplayTop
Returns
None
Examples
lakerEIPDisplayTop
See Also

K-2015.06
883

EIP Commands
lakerFitEdit
The lakerFitEdit command fits the view area to the editing cell in EIP
mode.
Syntax
lakerFitEdit
Returns
None
Examples
# Fit the view area to the editing cell in EIP mode
lakerFitEdit
See Also
Layout Window: EIP > Fit To Edit
lakerReturnLevel
The lakerReturnLevel command returns to the specified level of the
current edited design hierarchy path.
Syntax
lakerReturnLevel -level level
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-level level
Specify the return level in the design hierarchy path.

Examples
# return to the level 2 of the current edited design hierarchy path
lakerReturnLevel -level 2
See Also
Layout Window: EIP > Return To Level
884

K-2015.06

EIP Commands
lakerReturnOne
The lakerReturnOne command reopens a cell view that is higher in the
design hierarchy.
Syntax
lakerReturnOne
Returns
None
Examples
# Reopen a cell view that is higher in the design hierarchy
lakerReturnOne
See Also
Layout Window: EIP > Up One Hierarchy Level
lakerReturnOneEdit
The lakerReturnOneEdit command reopens a cell view that is higher level
in the design hierarchy and is in the editing history.
Syntax
lakerReturnOneEdit
Returns
None
Examples
# Reopen a cell view that is higher in the design hierarchy
# and is in the editing history
lakerReturnOneEdit
See Also
Layout Window: EIP > Up One Edited Level
lakerReturnSubTop
The lakerReturnSubTop command returns to the current top cell.

K-2015.06
885

Syntax
lakerReturnSubTop
Returns
None
Examples
# Return to the current top cell
lakerReturnSubTop
See Also
Layout Window: EIP > Return To SubTop
lakerReturnTop
The lakerReturnTop command cancels the edit-in-place (EIP) function and
returns to the top cell.
Syntax
lakerReturnTop
Returns
None
Examples
# Cancel the edit-in-place function and return to the top cell
lakerReturnTop
See Also
Layout Window: EIP > Return To Top
This section describes the Tcl commands applied to the Verify commands of
886
lakerCalibreDFM
lakerCalibreDRC
lakerCalibreLVS

K-2015.06

lakerCalibreOption
lakerCalibrePERC
lakerCalibrePEX
lakerCalibreRVE
lakerClearRVEHighlight
lakerShowExportForm
lakerLDEAnalysis
lakerStartRVEServer
lakerSetRVEPort
lakerSetupParasitics
lakerViewError
lakerViewParasitics
xt::closeTextViewerTab
xt::createJob
xt::getJobs
xt::getManifestFeatureValue
xt::getOpenFile
xt::getTextViewerTabs
xt::openTextViewer
xt::openTextViewerTab
xt::readJob
xt::sendCommand
xt::showJobMonitor
xt::showLPESetup
xt::showLVSSetup
xt::showDRCSetup
xt::showPveOptions
xt::startPvDebugger
xt::signalJob

K-2015.06
887

xt::updateJob
xt::wait
xt::writeJob
lakerCalibreDFM
The lakerCalibreDRC command invokes a Calibre DFM (Design for
Manufacture) process.
Syntax
lakerCalibreDFM
Returns
None
Examples
lakerCalibreDFM
See Also
Layout Window: Verification > Calibre > Run DFM
lakerCalibreDRC
The lakerCalibreDRC command invokes a Calibre DRC (design rule
checking) process.
Syntax
lakerCalibreDRC
Returns
None
Examples
lakerCalibreDRC
See Also
Layout Window: Verification > Calibre > Run DRC
888

K-2015.06

lakerCalibreLVS
The lakerCalibreLVS command invokes a Calibre LVS (layout vs.
schematic) process for the editing cell.
Syntax
lakerCalibreLVS
Returns
None
Examples
lakerCalibreLVS
See Also
Layout Window: Verification > Calibre > Run LVS
lakerCalibreOption
The lakerCalibreOption command specifies settings for the integration
with Calibre processes.
Syntax
lakerCalibreOption -layerMapping layerMapping showExportForm 0|1 -run64BitCalibreRVE 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-layerMapping
layerMapping
Specify the mappings between RVEs Highlight

Layer Index and Laker layer, including layer name
and purpose name; the format is {Layer_Index
Layer_Name Purpose_Name}.
-run64BitCalibreRVE 0|1

1 : Invoke 64-bit Calibre RVE.
0 : Invoke 32-bit Calibre RVE.

K-2015.06
889

Argument
Description
-showExportForm 0|1

1 : Show form as exporting GDSII or OASIS for
Calibre DRC/LVS/PEX.
Examples
lakerCalibreOption -layerMapping \
{1 HLNet1 system} {3 POLY drawing} \
-showExportForm 1 -run64BitCalibreRVE 1
See Also
lakerCalibreRVE
Layout Window: Verification > Calibre > Options
lakerCalibrePERC
The lakerCalibrePERC command invokes a Calibre PERC (Programmable
Electrical Rule Checking) process.
Syntax
lakerCalibrePERC
Returns
None
Examples
lakerCalibrePERC
See Also
Layout Window: Verification > Calibre > Run PERC
lakerCalibrePEX
The lakerCalibrePEX command invokes a Calibre PEX process.
Syntax
lakerCalibrePEX
890

K-2015.06

Returns
None
Examples
lakerCalibrePEX
See Also
Layout Window: Verification > Calibre > Run PEX
lakerCalibreRVE
The lakerCalibreRVE command invokes a 64-bit Calibre RVE (results
viewing and debugging environment) process when the -bit64 argument is
specified. Otherwise, it invokes a 32-bit Calibre RVE process.
Syntax
lakerCalibreRVE [-bit64]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-bit64
Invoke 64-bit Calibre RVE.
Examples
# Example 1
# Invoke 32-bit Calibre RVE
lakerCalibreRVE
# Example 2
# Invoke 64-bit Calibre RVE
lakerCalibreRVE -bit64
See Also
lakerCalibreOption
Layout Window: Verification > Calibre > Start RVE

K-2015.06
891

The lakerClearRVEHighlight command clears all highlighted drawings
from the RVE error data.
Syntax
Returns
None
Examples
See Also
Layout Window: Verification > Calibre > Clear Highlights
lakerShowExportForm
The lakerShowExportForm command decides whether to show the
exporting form when user invokes the Calibre-DRC/LVS/PEX/RVE processes in
Laker and specifies the data source from Laker.
Syntax
lakerShowExportForm -mode 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode 0|1

1 : Show the exporting form.
0 : Hide the exporting form.
Examples
lakerShowExportForm -mode 1
See Also
Layout Window: Verification > Calibre > Options
892

K-2015.06

lakerLDEAnalysis
The lakerLDEAnalysis command invokes the LDE analysis processes and
specifies the data source.
Syntax
lakerLDEAnalysis -runDir . -layerMap fileName -runSet
fileName -oa|-gds -lib libraryName -cell cellName -view
viewName -cv|-select -extract ICV -global -vds vds -vgs
vgs -vbs vbs -runSim -dcSet {DCSetting} -update updateNetlist|-genPFile -outputFile fileName -refNetlist
netlistName -MosAnalstNum number -simInfo simInfo caseInsens 0|1 -save fileName -txt -csv
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-caseInsens 0|1
Specify the case sensitivity setting for the design.

Valid values: Boolean values, 0 and 1. The default=0 and only
enable for simInfo=hspiced.
-cell cellName
Specify the cell name of the top layout.
-csv
Save the file with the extension file name .csv.
-cv
Specify the cell view as the scope to extract the parameters.
-dcSet
DCSetting
Specify the DC settings for HSPICE.
-extract ICV
Extract parameters and run ICV.
-gds
Specify the layout format with GDSII format.
-genPFile
Enable the feature to generate the back annotation parameter

to a file.
-global
Enable vgs, vds, and vbs arguments for all instances.
-layerMap
fileName
Specify the layer mapping file for ICV settings.

K-2015.06
893

Argument
Description
-lib libraryName
Specify the library name for the input layout.
-MosAnalstNum
number
Specify the number of instances to show on the table in the

Mos Analysis tab.
-oa
Specify the layout format with OpenAccess format.
-outputFile
FileName
-refNetlist
netlistName
Specify the path of the referenced file name.
-rumSim
Specify the MOS analysis used model.
-runSet fileName Specify the run set file for ICV settings.
-save fileName
Specify a text file to save the data from DC analysis table.
-select
Specify the selected area as the scope to extract the

parameters.
-simInfo simInfo
Specify the referenced netlist type.

Valid Value: hspiced and spectre.
-txt
Save the file with the extension file name .txt.
-update
Enable the parameter back-annotation of LDE feature.
-updateNetlist
Enable the feature to extract the back annotation parameter to

the netlist.
-vds vds
Specify the vds value for all instances.
-vgs vgs
Specify the vgs value for all instances.
-view viewName Specify the view name of the layout.
Examples
lakerLDEAnalysis -runDir . -layerMap -runSet
-cell add4 -view layout -cv -extract ICV
894
-oa -lib testcase

K-2015.06

See Also
Layout Window: Verification > LDE Analysis
lakerStartRVEServer
The lakerStartRVEServer command fires up a socket server with specified
port number if necessary and registers callback to receive commands from
RVE process for the design window.
Syntax
lakerStartRVEServer [-port portNumber]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-port portNumber
Specify RVE server port number (default=the

environment variable MGC_CALIBRE_RVE_SERVER). If
this environment variable is not set, the default port
number is 9189. The server port could not be changed
after assignment.
Examples
lakerStartRVEServer -port 9189
See Also
Layout Window: Verification > Calibre > Integrate With RVE
lakerSetRVEPort
The lakerSetRVEPort command sets the RVE server port.
Syntax
lakerSetRVEPort -port portNumber
Returns
None

K-2015.06
895

Arguments
Argument
Description
-port portNumber
Specify RVE server port number (default=the environment

variable MGC_CALIBRE_RVE_SERVER). If this environment
variable is not set, the default port number is 9189. The
server port could not be changed after assignment.
Examples
lakerSetRVEPort -port 9189
See Also
Layout Window: Verification > Calibre > Integrate With RVE
lakerSetupParasitics
The lakerSetupParasitics command sets the parasitics.
Syntax
lakerSetupParasitics -lib libraryName -cell cellName -view
viewName -netList netName
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libraryName
-cell cellName
Specify the cell name that used to save the result.
-view viewName
Specify the view name that used to save the result.
-net netName
Specify the net names for the net list.
Examples
lakerSetupParasitic -lib testcase -cell add4 -view
See Also
Layout Window: Verification > Parasitics > Setup
896

K-2015.06

lakerViewError
The lakerViewError command loads the selected result file, view, or
viewing status to the error viewer.
Syntax
lakerViewError -start [0|1] | -end | [-loadOAMarkerResult view viewName] | [-loadCalibreResult resultFile
[ruleFile] [waiveFile]] | [-loadAssuraResult
[runSpecificFile] [ruleFile] [gdsFile]] | [loadHerculesResult -errTop blockName -resultFile
resultFile] | [-loadShortError [viewName]] | [loadOtherResult -gdsFile gdsFile] | [-loadDFMResult resultFile layout]
[-sortByType mode] | [-sortByResult mode]
| [-indexSet
num] (-markFix 0|1 | -markIgnore 0|1 | -highlight
currentError | nextError | preError | mainRegion |
(extraRegion -extraRegionIndex num) | extraRegions |
gotoAssociatedObject num) | [-highlight mode] | -typeSet
type | -display [-topCateName {*}] [-level1 {*}] [-level2
{*}] [-level3 {*}] [-level4 {*}] [-showFixed 0|1|2] [showIgnored 0|1|2] | -markFixByArea (x1,y1) (x2,y2) | markIgnoreByArea (x1,y1) (x2,y2)| -loadStatus viewName |
-saveStatus viewName | -changeCategory
[cateNo1][cateNo2][cateNo3] | [-setCategory typeNameSet]
-preference [-zoomRatio zoomRatio] [-highlightXSymbol 0|1]
[-highlightColorMode mode] [-showText mode [showTextFontSize num]] [-maxErrorNum num] [-showTip mode]
[-highlightMode mode] | [-selCatHighlight 0|1] | [autoClearHighlight 0|1] [-autoMoveErrorMarker 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-autoClearHighlight 0|1
This is specified with -preference.

1 : Automatically clear all highlights.
0 : Do not automatically clear all highlights.

K-2015.06
897

Argument
Description
-autoMoveErrorMarker
0|1

1 : Automatically select the next violation after marking a
violation.
0 : Do not automatically select the next violation after
marking a violation.
-changeCategory
Change the current category. The valid value of cateNo1,
[cateNo1][cateNo2][cateN cateNo2, and cateNo3 depends on the number of
o3]
original categories.
0: Change the original top level category (level 0).

1: The original level 1 category (level 1) if it has a level
1 category.
2: The original level 1 category (level 2) if it has a level
2 category.
-display
Specify the violations to be displayed in the error viewer.
-end
Exit the error viewer feature.
-highlight currentError |
nextError | preError
When specified with -indexSet, highlight violations in

the layout.
Valid values: currentError, nextError, and
preError.
-highlight mainRegion |
(extraRegion
-extraRegionIndex num) |
extraRegions |
gotoAssociatedObject
num
898
currentError: Highlight current violation.

nextError: Highlight next violation.
preError: Highlight previous violation.
When specified with -indexSet for oaMaker results,

highlight markers in the layout.
Valid values: mainRegion, extraRegion
-extraRegionIndex num, extraRegions, and
gotoAssociatedObject num.

K-2015.06

Argument
Description
-highlight mode
Specify the highlight mode for violations.

Valid values: clear, all, preCate, and nextCate.
-highlightColorMode
mode
clear: Clear all highlights.

all: Highlight all violations.
preCate: Highlight previous category.
nextCate: Highlight next category.
When specified with -preference, specify the color

mode when highlight violations.
Valid values: fix, cyclic, and indexMapping
(default=cyclic).
-highlightMode mode
When specified with -preference, specify the highlight

mode for objects.
Valid values: visible, invisible, and dim.
-highlightXSymbol 0|1
visible: All objects are visible, selectable and not

dimmed.
invisible: Shapes on non-related layers are
invisible and not selectable.
dim: Shapes on non-related layers are dimmed.

1 : Show an X symbol for highlighted objects.
0 : Do not show an X symbol for highlighted objects.
-indexSet num
Specify the index marker of violations to be selected.

-level1 {*}
When specified with -display, specify the violation

category at level 1. Wildcard character * is supported. The
default value is *.
-level2 {*}

default value is *.
-level3 {*}

default value is *.

K-2015.06
899

Argument
Description
-level4 {*}

default value is *.
-loadAssuraResult
Specify the run specific file, rule file or GDSII file of Assura
[runSpecificFile] [ruleFile] results.
[gdsFile]
-loadCalibreResult
resultFile [ruleFile]
[waiveFile]
Specify the Calibre result file to be loaded. The rule file

and waive file are optional.
-loadDFMResult
-resultFile layout
Specify the result file of DFM results.
-loadHerculesResult
-errTop blockName
-resultFile resultFile
Specify the output block and the result file of Hercules

results.
-loadOAMarkerResult
-view viewName
Specify the view name of the oaMarker results. The

default view name is layout.
-loadOtherResult
-gdsFile gdsFile
Specify the GDSII file of other results.
-loadShortError
[viewName]
Specify the view name of the short error results.
-loadStatus viewName
Specify the view name of the viewing status to be loaded.
-markFix 0|1
This is specified with -indexSet.
When specified with -setCategory, the category can be

specified, or the default category is used.

1 : Mark the selected violations as Fixed.
0 : Cancel marking the selected violations as Fixed.
-markFixByArea (x1,y1)
(x2,y2)
900
Mark the violations in (x1,y1) (x2,y2) bounding box as

Fixed.

K-2015.06

Argument
Description
-markIgnore 0|1
This is specified with -indexSet.

1 : Mark the selected violations as Ignored.
0 : Cancel marking the selected violations as Ignored.
-markIgnoreByArea
(x1,y1) (x2,y2)
Mark the violations in (x1,y1) (x2,y2) bounding box as

Ignored.
-maxErrorNum num
When specified with -preference, specify the

maximum number of violations to be displayed in the
Violations frame.
-preference
Set preference options.
-saveStatus viewName
Specify a view name for the viewing status to be saved.
-selCatHighlight 0|1

1 : Highlight category when selecting.
0 : Do not highlight category when selecting.
-setCategory
typeNameSet
Set the category by the sequence of type names defined

in typeNameSet, for example: ruleName/geometry.
-showFixed 0|1|2
This is specified with -display.

Valid values: 0, 1, and 2.
0: Show fixed and not fixed violations.
1: Show fixed violations.
2: Show not fixed violations.
-showIgnored 0|1|2
This is specified with -display.

Valid values: 0, 1, and 2.
0: Show ignored and not ignored violations.
1: Show ignored violations.
2: Show not ignored violations.

K-2015.06
901

Argument
Description
-showText mode
When specified with -preference, show text location.

Valid values: an integer from 0 to 9.
-showTextFontSize num
0: Do not show text location.

1: Show text at the upperleft corner of the bounding
box.
2: Show text at the center left point.
3: Show text at the lowerleft corner.
4: Show text at the upper center point.
5: Show text at the center point.
6: Show text at the lower center point.
7: Show text at the upperright corner.
8: Show text at the center right point.
9: Show text at the lowerright corner.
When specified with -showText, specify the font size.

-showTip mode
When specified with -preference, specify the mode to

show yellow tip windows.
Valid values: an integer from 0 to 4.
-sortByResult mode
0: Do not show any yellow tip windows.

1: Show tips with rule information only.
2: Show tips with violation value only.
3: Show tips with rule information and violation value.
4: Show tips without rule information and violation
value.
Sort violations by the number of violation results.

Valid values: ascending, and descending.
-sortByType mode
Sort violations by the rule category.

Valid values: unsort, ascending, and descending.
-start [0|1]
Start up the error viewer feature.

1 : Show the error viewer.
0 : Do not show the error viewer if no violations exist.
902

K-2015.06

Argument
Description
-topCateName {*}

category. Wildcard character * is supported. The default
value is *.
-typeSet type
Specify the violation type to be selected.
-zoomRatio zoomRatio
When specified with -preference, specify the zoom

ratio for highlight violations.
Valid values: a positive floating number (default=0.5).
0: Disable the zoom function.

1: Zoom All.
>1: Zoom In.
<1: Zoom Out.
Examples
# Example 1
# Start the error viewer
lakerViewError -start
# Example 2
# Load calibre results and set category as ruleName/geometry
lakerViewError -loadCalibreResult \
-resultFile /usr/work/FFT.results \
-setCategory ruleName geometry
# Example 3
# Change the category as ruleName
lakerViewError -changeCategory 0 2
# Change the category as ruleName/geometry
lakerViewError -changeCategory 0 1
# Example 4
# Select multiple violation types
lakerViewError -typeSet {G.4.M2i E-1} {G.4.M4i} {NT_N.S.1 P-12}
# Example 5
# Set zoomRatio as 0.7, enable highlightXSymbol, cycled color
# mode, enable show text and set justify as right bottom, set max
# error number to show error marker as 10000, show information tip.
lakerViewError -zoomRatio 0.7 -highlightXSymbol 1 \
-highlightColorMode 1 -showText 9 -maxErrorNum 10000 \
-showTip 1

K-2015.06
903

# Example 6
# Highlight all violations in current typeSet
lakerViewError -highlight currentError
# Example 7
# Highlight previous violation (current marker is 10)
lakerViewError -highlight preError -indexSet 10
# Example 8
# Highlight the last violation mark of the previous violation
# Type in Violation Tree
lakerViewError -highlight preError
# Example 9
# Mark violation index#5-10,#30 as fixed
lakerViewError -markFix 1 -indexSet 5-10 30
# Example 10
# Cancel marking all violations as ignored in current errorType
lakerViewError -markIgnore 0
# Example 11
# Mark all violations as fixed in
# bounding box(12.8465,-19.213) (84.69,29.177)
lakerViewError -markFixByArea (12.8465,-19.213) (84.69,29.177)
# Example 12
# Save viewing status to view abc
lakerViewError -saveStatus abc
# Example 13
# Exit the Error Viewer
lakerViewError -end
# Example 14
# Set preferences
lakerViewError -preference -zoomRatio 0.5 -highlightMode dim \
-selCatHighlight 0 -highlightXSymbol 1 \
-highlightColorMode cyclic -autoClearHighlight 1
-showTip 1 -showText 0 -showTextFontSize 14 \
-maxErrorNum 1000 -autoMoveErrorMarker 1
See Also
lakerCorrect
Layout Window: Verification > View Error
904

K-2015.06

lakerViewParasitics
The lakerViewParasitics command controls the parasitics viewing
scheme.
Syntax
lakerViewParasitics -start
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-start
Start up the viewer feature.
Examples
# Start up the viewer feature
lakerViewParasitics -start
See Also
Layout Window: Verification > View Parasitics
xt::closeTextViewerTab
Closes the named tab in a Text Viewer. Note that closing a tab changes the
indices for all later tabs.
Syntax
xt::closeTextViewerTab <tabname: string> -window <giWindow>
Arguments
<string>
The name of the tab to close.
-window giWindow
The Text Viewer window.

K-2015.06
905

xt::createJob
Starts a job. Launches the job as specified by -cmdLine on the given host of the
type batch, foreign or native. The xtJob is tracked by the Job Monitor. The caller
of this command must determine the invocation directory on the remote host.
The job name attribute of the xtJob will be generated by appending an
underscore followed by a number to the given job name prefix. For example, if
the prefix is "HSPICE", the job name will be "HSPICE_1", or "HSPICE_2" if
"HSPICE_1" is already in use.
Syntax
xt::createJob <name: string> -type <enum> [-aimType
<string>] -cmdLine <string> -runDesc <string> [-files
[<string>]] [-readOnlyFiles [<string>]] [-host <string>]
[-data <string>] [-readyProc [<attrObject>]] [-exitProc
<string>] [-queueEngine <string>]
Returns
Job object for communication and tracking. (xtJob)
Errors
This command will not raise any errors.
Arguments
name
Prefix for the name to display in the job monitor.
-type <string>
Job type: ({aim | batch | dp | interactive | native}).
aim
Interactive job type used for programs that integrate with the <Product
Name> platform using AimAppCom.
batch
Runs processing to completion without manual intervention. Batch jobs are
not terminated when the session exits. The <Product Name> platform will
continue to track batch jobs when it is restarted.
dp
Interactive job type used for programs that integrate with the <Product
Name> platform using Tcl/DP.
906

K-2015.06

interactive
Job type for programs that read and write messages from stdin and stdout.
Jobs of this type are terminated when the session exits.
-cmdLine <string>
Command used to launch the job, using Bourne shell syntax.
-runDesc <string>
Descriptive text to show in the Job Monitor.
-files {<string>}
List of pairs (display name, file name) to track. All files in this list will be
deleted before the child process is launched.
-readOnlyFiles {<string>}
List of read-only pairs to track, such as display name and file name. These
files will not be deleted before the child process is launched.
-host <string>
Host on which to run the job.
Default: Localhost.
-data <string>
Arbitrary string data associated with the job.
-readyProc <string>
Procedure to call once the job is initialized and ready for input. Interactive
jobs only. Takes a single argument of the xtJob object.
-exitProc <string>
Procedure to call once the job has exited. This procedure will be called
regardless of how the job shut down. Takes a single argument of the xtJob
object.
-queueEngine
Specifies which registered queue engine to use to launch the job. If
unspecified, it will default to the value of the xtJobQueueEngine preference.
Examples
set jobID [xt::createJob verilog2oa -type batch -cmdLine \
"verilog2oa -lib testLib -verilog test.v" -runDesc \
"Translate Verilog design into OA"]

K-2015.06
907

In this example, xt::createJob calls the verilog2oa utility for converting verilog
modules, which are described in the file test.v, into the OpenAccess database.
xt::getJobs
Returns the list of all jobs known to the job manager, subject to the optional
filter provided.
Syntax
xt::getJobs [<pattern: string>] [-filter <string>]
Returns
A collection of xtJobs matching the filter criteria. ({<xtJob>})
Arguments
<string>
Pattern to match the job name against. Empty pattern matches all jobs.
-filter <string>
Standard attribute filter.
Default: Matches all.
Examples
set jobs [db::getNext [xt::getJobs verilog2oa*]]
In this example, xt::getJobs finds jobs corresponding to verilog2oa* filter

requirements.
xt::getManifestFeatureValue
This command gets the manifest feature value.
Syntax
xt::getManifestFeatureValue <execName: string> -versionStr
<string> -featureName <string> [-searchPaths <string>]
Returns
<string>: Manifest file feature value.
908

K-2015.06

Arguments
execName
Executable name.
-versionStr
Version of executable.
-featureName
Name of feature whose value to return.
searchPaths
Extra paths to search for manifest files.
xt::getOpenFile
Opens a file selection dialog to select an existing file or directory.
Syntax
xt::getOpenFile [-multiple <bool> | -initialFile <string> |
-directory <bool>] [-title <string>] [-fileTypes
[<string>]] [-initialDir <string>] [-window <giWindow |
int>]
Returns
<none>
Arguments
-title
File selector dialog title.
-multiple
Allow multiple selection.
-fileTypes
File types filters. For example, { "Images (*.png *.jpg *.jpg)" "Text files (*.txt)"
"All files (*)" }
-initialDir
Initial directory.

K-2015.06
909

-initialFile
Initial file.
-directory
Toggle directory selection.
-window
Window Id.
xt::getTextViewerTabs
Returns a list of all tab names optionally filtered using the pattern.
Syntax
xt::getTextViewerTabs [<string>] -window <giWindow>
Returns
List of tab names matching the pattern. ([<string>])
Errors
An error occurs if the window argument is not a Text Viewer window.
Arguments
<string>
Pattern to match against. Empty pattern matches all tabs.
-window giWindow
xt::openTextViewer
Opens a text viewer displaying the given files in its own tab. The tab name is
created by taking the basename of the file displayed in the tab.
The -text argument allows the user to display a fixed text string in its own tab
named Text.
If a tab name is not unique, a colon and a numerical suffix are appended to
make the tab name unique.
910

K-2015.06

Syntax
xt::openTextViewer [-text <string>] [-files [<string>]]
Returns
The new Text Viewer window. (giWindow)
Arguments
-text <string>
String to view.
-files [<string>]
List of filenames to open.
xt::openTextViewerTab
Opens a file in a new tab in an existing Text Viewer window. The tab name will
be created by taking the basename of the file displayed in the tab.
The -text argument allows the user to display a fixed text string and the tab
name will be Text.
If a tab name is not unique, a colon and a numerical suffix are appended to
make the tab name unique.
Syntax
xt::openTextViewerTab [-text <string>] [-filePath <string>]
-window <giWindow>
Returns
The name of the new tab. (<string>)
Errors
An error occurs if the window argument is not a Text Viewer window.
Arguments
-text <string>
The string to display in the tab.
-filePath <string>
The filename to open.
-window giWindow
K-2015.06
911

xt::readJob
Returns the data written to stdout by the remote job, waiting a number of
seconds for data as specified by the time-out argument. If the time-out is not
specified, or is 0, then the readJob command does not wait.
Syntax
xt::readJob <job: xtJob> [-timeout <int>]
Returns
Data delivered by the interactive job. (<string>)
Errors
Any failure to connect to the job or read the data will generate a Tcl error.
Arguments
xtJob
The job to read data from.
-timeout <int>
Time, in seconds, to wait for data. Timeout of 0 will return immediately.
Default: 0.
xt::sendCommand
Sends a Tcl command to the specified job and waits a number of seconds as
specified by the timeout argument. If the timeout is not specified or is 0, then
the caller is not blocked.
Important: Calling sendCommand on a job that we are currently processing a
command from, or vice versa, will create deadlock and cause <Product Name>
to hang unless the underlying delivery mechanism will time out. It is very
important that the implementation include a timeout to prevent deadlock.
Syntax
xt::sendCommand <command: string> -job <xtJob> [-timeout
<int>]
Returns
Return value of the command which was sent to the interactive job. (<string>)
912

K-2015.06

Arguments
<string>
Command for the interactive job to execute.
-job xtJob
The job to execute the command.
-timeout <int>
Time, in seconds, to wait for a response (return value) to the command.
Timeout of 0 will return immediately.
Default: 0.
Errors
Timeout expires or message cannot be delivered.
Failure to send the command to the remote job will generate a Tcl error.
Failure to execute the remote command will generate a separate error.
Examples
set jobs [xt::getJobs vue*]
xt::sendCommand "vue_select {mainTab} 0" -job $job
In this example, xt::sendCommand sends an interactive command to Hercules

VUE.
xt::showJobMonitor
Opens Job Monitor and displays the jobs currently stored in the job manager.
Syntax
xt::showJobMonitor
Returns
The Job Monitor window. (giWindow)
Arguments
None.

K-2015.06
913

xt::showLPESetup
Shows the dialog box for setting up and running a layout parasitic extraction job
process. The options on the dialog are seeded using the current preference
values. The OK and Apply buttons save the preferences for the options in the
prefs.xml file in the run directory, and the xt::executePv command runs the
extraction job.
Syntax
xt::showLPESetup [-window <giWindow | int>] [-job <string |
xtPveJob>] [-tool <string | xtTool>]
Returns
Setup and Run dialog box (giDialog).
Errors
If there are un-set preferences for contents of the options dialog.
Arguments
-window
Design Editor window.
Default: -1.
-job
PVE job.
Default: lpe.
-tool
PVE tool.
Default: "".
xt::showLVSSetup
Shows the dialog box for setting up and a running a layout versus schematic
(LVS) comparison job process. It seeds the setup form with values that are
described in the Options for LVS run section. OK and Apply buttons will execute
the xt::executePv command, which saves the preferences for the run in the
prefs.xml file in the specified run directory if this preference is set.
914

K-2015.06

Syntax
xt::showLVSSetup [-window <giWindow | int>] [-job <string |
Returns
Setup and Run dialog box. (giDialog)
Errors
If the prefs.xml file contains invalid data.
Arguments
-window
Design Editor window.
Default: -1.
-job
PVE job.
Default: lpe.
-tool
PVE tool.
Default: "".
xt::showDRCSetup
Shows the DRC Setup and Run dialog box for running a DRC type job.
Syntax
xt::showDRCSetup [-window <giWindow | int>] [-job <string |
Returns
Setup and Run Dialog. (giDialog)
Errors
If the prefs.xml file contains invalid data.
Arguments
window
Design editor window.

K-2015.06
915

Default:1.
-job
Physical verification or parasitic extraction job.
Default: drc.
-tool
Physical verification or parasitic extraction tool.
Default: "".
xt::showPveOptions
Shows the physical verification options dialog for configuring general physical
verification process settings.
Syntax
xt::showPveOptions
Returns
<giDialog> Returns the PVE options dialog.
Arguments
None.
xt::startPvDebugger
Launches a physical verification tool's debugger using the xt::createJob
command. It will open the debugger of the specified PV tool (set in the
xt<runType><tool>Debug preference), or of the last executed tool.
Syntax
xt::startPvDebugger -job <string | xtJob | xtPveJob> -rundir
<string> [-tool <string | xtTool>] [-window <giWindow |
int>]
Returns
The running PV debugger job object. (xtJob)
916

K-2015.06

Arguments
-job xtJob
Previously completed physical verification job containing data for
debugging.
-tool <string>
The PV tool.
Default: "".
-runDir <string>
Output run directory of the design to debug. Either the rundir and runType
must be specified, or the job.
-window
Design editor window.
Default: -1.
Errors
If the design cannot be found.
If the tool was not run.
Examples
xt::startPvDebugger -runType drc -runDir and2.hercules.drc \
-tool Hercules
In this example, xt::startPvDebugger launches Hercules VUE.

xt::startPvDebugger -job [xt::getJobs hercules_drc_2]
In this example, xt::startPvDebugger launches VUE for a previously completed

physical verification job.
xt::signalJob
Suspends, resumes, or kills the remote job depending on the supplied
arguments. This is not the same as sending a UNIX signal to the process.
Syntax
xt::signalJob <job: xtJob | {<xtJob>}> -signal <enum>

K-2015.06
917

Arguments
{xtJob}
Collection of job objects to which to send signal.
-signal
Signal to send to the process: {kill | resume | suspend}.
Examples
xt::signalJob [xt::getJobs] -signal kill
In this example, xt::signalJob gets and kills all jobs. If any jobs were previously
killed, the system reports an error.
xt::updateJob
Allows a queue engine integrator to update an xtJob during the queue engine
statusProc callback. This command can only be called within the statusProc
callback for an xtQueueEngine. It will generate an error if it is called at any
other time.
Syntax
xt::updateJob <none: xtJob> -status <enum> -isQueued <bool>
[-host <string>] [-procId <int>] [-startTime <int>] [endTime <int>] [-exitStatus <int>]
Returns
<none>.
Arguments
<none>
Job to update.
-status
Updated status of the job: {FAILED | FINISHED | KILLED | RUNNING |
SUSPENDED | UNKNOWN}.
-isQueued
Indicates if the job is currently queued by the queuing software.
-host
Host where the job is running.
918

K-2015.06

-procId
Process ID (PID) of the job.
-startTime
Time that the job started, expressed as the number of seconds since the
epoch (see Tcl's "clock scan" command).
-endTime
The time that the job finished, expressed as the number of seconds since
the epoch (see Tcl's "clock scan" command).
-exitStatus
The exit code of the job.
xt::wait
This command waits for the job to finish.
Syntax
xt::wait <target: script | xtJob | {<xtJob>}>
Returns
<string>: Job status.
Arguments
target
The jobs to wait for, or script that creates jobs.
xt::writeJob
Writes data to stdin of the remote job, waiting a number of seconds for the write
process to complete, as specified by the timeout argument. If the timeout is not
specified, or is 0, then the writeJob command does not wait.
Syntax
xt::writeJob <job: xtJob> -data <string> [-timeout <int>]
Arguments
xtJob
The job to write data to.

K-2015.06
919

Placer Commands
-data <string>
Data to send to the interactive job.
-timeout <int>
Time, in seconds, to wait for the data to be sent. Timeout of 0 will return
immediately.
Default: 0.
Placer Commands
This section describes the Tcl commands applied to the Placer commands of
920
lakerAddDcap
lakerAddEndCap
lakerAddFiller
lakerAddTap
lakerAddToRPGroup
lakerAutoAssignment
lakerCellIndexPlacementScore
lakerCheckPlacement
lakerConfigureRowArea
lakerCreateRow
lakerCreateRPGroup
lakerDeleteRPGroup
lakerDelRow
lakerDumpPlacementTcl
lakerDumpPinAssTcl
lakerDumpPinConstraint
lakerLegalizeCellLoc
lakerOptimizePin

K-2015.06

Placer Commands
lakerPlaceInstance
lakerPlacementOption
lakerQueryCellBoundary
lakerQueryRegionDensity
lakerRemoveFiller
lakerResetRow
lakerRowPlaceAll
lakerRowPlaceCompact
lakerStretchRowArea
lakerAddDcap
The lakerAddDcap command inserts decoupling capacitors (dcap) cells in
the working cell or in a specified area of the working cell.
Syntax
lakerAddDcap -preEndCap {EndCapCell} -postEndCap
{PostEndCapCell} -wellTap {WellTapCell} -fillers
{FillerCellList} -wellTapSpacing {wellTapSpacing} minYGap {minimumYGap} -tileWidth {tileWidth} -tileHeight
{tileHeight}
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-fillers
{FillerCellList}
Specify filler cells by cell name. Multiple cells are

separated by spaces, for example: -fillers cellA
CellB. Cell names are case-sensitive. The wildcard
characters * and ? are supported.
-minYGap
{minimumYGap}
Specify the minimum spacing between rows.

-postEndCap
{PostEndCapCell}
Specify a post-end cap cell.

K-2015.06
921

Placer Commands
Argument
Description
-preEndCap
{EndCapCell}
Specify a pre-end cap cell.
-tileHeight
{tileHeight}
Specify the tile height.

-tileWidth
{tileWidth}
Specify the tile width.

-wellTap
{WellTapCell}
Specify a well tap cell.
-wellTapSpacing
{wellTapSpacing}
Specify the spacing between well tap cells.

Examples
# Example 1
lakerAddDcap -preEndcap LibA/PMOS4:layout -postEndcap -wellTap \
-fillers LibA/PMOS4:layout LibA/NMOS4:layout \
-wellTapSpacing 0.15 -minYGap 0.0 -tileWidth 67.0 -tileHeight 67.0
See Also
Layout Window: Placer > Add Dcap
lakerAddEndCap
The lakerAddEndCap command inserts pre end cap and post end cap cells.
Syntax
lakerAddEndCap -preLib preLibName -preCell preCellName preView preViewName -postLib postLibName -postCell
postCellName -postView postViewName -setAsFixed 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
922
Argument
Description
-postCell postCellName
Specify the name of the post end cap cell.

K-2015.06

Placer Commands
Argument
Description
-postLib postLibName
Specify the library of the post end cap cell.
-postView postViewName Specify the view name for the specified pre end cap
cell.
Valid values: layout and abstract.
-preCell preCellName
Specify the name of the pre end cap cell.
-preLib preLibName
Specify the library of the pre end cap cell.
-preView preViewName
Specify the view name for the specified pre end cap
cell.
Valid values: layout and abstract.
-setFixed 0|1

1 : Enable the Set as Fixed option.
0 : Disable the Set as Fixed option.
Examples
# Example 1
# Insert pre end cap and post end cap cells
lakerAddEndCap -preLib N28 -preCell PRE -preView layout \
-postLib N28 -postCell POST -postView layout -setAsFixed 1
See Also
Layout Window: Placer > Add End Cap
lakerAddFiller
The lakerAddFiller command inserts specified filler cells in the working
cell or in a specified area of the working cell.
Syntax
lakerAddFiller [-area (x1 y1)(x2 y2)] [-fillerCell
fillerList]
Returns
None

K-2015.06
923

Placer Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-area (x1 y1)(x2 y2)
Specify the area to insert filler cells.

(x1 y1) specifies the lower left point of the selected
area while (x2 y2) specifies the upper right point.
-fillerCell fillerList
Specify the filler cell by cell name. Multiple cells are

separated by spaces, for example: -fillerCell
cellA CellB. Cell names are case-sensitive. The
wildcard characters * and ? are supported.
Examples
# Example 1
# Insert filler cells FILLER1 FILLER2 in the specified area
lakerAddFiller -area (0 0)(500 500) -fillerCell FILLER1 FILLER2
See Also
Layout Window: Placer > Add Filler Cell
lakerAddTap
The lakerAddTap command inserts well tap cells.
Syntax
lakerAddTap -lib libName -cell cellName -view viewName endCap 0|1 [-wellTap style -gap value] -setFixed 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
924
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
-endCap 0|1

1 : Enable the End Cap option.
0 : Disable the End Cap option.
-gap value
Specify the spacing between well tap cells.

Valid value: a floating number, greater than 0.

K-2015.06

Placer Commands
Argument
Description
-lib libName
-setFixed 0|1

1 : Enable the Set as Fixed option.
0 : Disable the Set as Fixed option.
-view viewName
Specify the view name for the specified cell.

Valid values: layout, and abstract.
-wellTap style
Specify the placement style for well tap cells.

Valid values: alignment and stagger
(default=alignment).
Examples
# Example 1
# Insert well tap cells with Stagger style
lakerAddTap -lib testLib -cell testCell -endCap 0 \
-wellTap stagger -gap 30 -setFixed 1
See Also
Layout Window: Placer > Add Well Tap
lakerAddToRPGroup
The lakerAddToRPGroup command returns 1 if a leaf instance or a
hierarchical matrix relative placement (RP) group can be added into an RP
group.
Syntax
lakerAddToRPGroup -group groupName -column column -row row
[-leaf instName | -hierarchy groupName] [-orient
orientation]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-column column
Specify the column in the RP group matrix.


K-2015.06
925

Placer Commands
Argument
Description
-group groupName
Specify the RP group name.
-hierarchy groupName
Specify the hierarchical RP group name.
-leaf instName
Specify the leaf instance name.
-orient orientation
Specify the orientation of the leaf instance.

Valid values: R0, R90, R180, R270, MX, MXR90, MY, and
MYR90.
-row row
Specify the row in the RP group matrix.

Examples
# Example 1
# Add a leaf instance
lakerAddToRPGroup -group FFT -leaf I1 -column 0 -row 0
# Example 2
# Add a hierarchy group
lakerAddToRPGroup -group FFT -hierarchy GRP1 -column 0 -row 1
See Also
lakerCreateRPGroup
lakerDeleteRPGroup
lakerAutoAssignment
The lakerAutoAssignment command automatically assigns pins a single
block or multiple blocks in a row-based design.
Syntax
lakerAutoAssignment [-auto mode] [-autoGroupBus] [schematic] [-loadPinConstraint constFile] [dumpPinConstraint dumpFile]
Returns
None
926

K-2015.06

Placer Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-auto mode
If specified, the auto pin placement can be executed by

using one of the following options:
top : Place pins at the top level.
twoLevels: Place pins at two hierarchy levels.
-dumpPinConstraint
dumpFile
Specify the pin constraint file to be dumped.
-autoGroupBus
If specified, the bus pins are automatically grouped.
-loadPinConstraint
constFile
Specify the pin constraint file to be loaded.
-schematic
If specified, the pins are placed based on the location of

I/O ports in the schematic.
Examples
# Example 1
# Use the default mode (-auto twoLevels) when no mode is specified
lakerAutoAssignment
# Example 2
# Use Auto mode and dump the constraints
lakerAutoAssignment -auto top -dump dump.pin
# Example 3
# Use Constraint File mode and dump the constraints
lakerAutoAssignment -loadPinConstraint pin.const \
-dumpPinConstraint dump.pin
# Example 4
# Use Schematic mode
lakerAutoAssignment -schematic
See Also
Layout Window: Placer > Pin Placer > Auto Pin Assignment
The lakerCellIndexPlacementScore command gets the total score of a
legalized placement.

K-2015.06
927

Placer Commands
Syntax
Returns
None
Examples
See Also
Design Browser: Placement > Row Placement
Layout Window: Placer > Row Placer > Place All
lakerCheckPlacement
The lakerCheckPlacement command checks the row-based placement.
Syntax
lakerCheckPlacement [-overlap 0|1] [-siteName 0|1] [siteGrid 0|1] [-orient 0|1] [-hierarchical 0|1] [-filler1
0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
928
Argument
Description
-filler1 0|1

1 : Check space violations in the No Filler1 flow.
0 : Do not check space violations in the No Filler1 flow.
-hierarchical 0|1

1 : Check illegal hierarchical instances.
0 : Do not check illegal hierarchical instances.
-orient 0|1

1 : Check cells with invalid orientation.
0 : Do not check cells with invalid orientation.
-overlap 0|1

1 : Check overlapped shapes.
0 : Do not check overlapped shapes.

K-2015.06

Placer Commands
Argument
Description
-siteGrid 0|1

1 : Check off-row cells or cells with off-site grids.
0 : Do not check off-row cells or cells with off-site grids.
-siteName 0|1

1 : Check cells with inconsistent sites.
0 : Do not check cells with inconsistent sites.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerCheckPlacement -overlap 0 -siteName 1 -siteGrid 1 -orient 0 \
-hierarchical 0 -filler 0
# Example 2
lakerCheckPlacement -overlap 0 -siteName 0 -siteGrid 0 -orient 0 \
-hierarchial 0 -filler1 1
See Also
Layout Window: Placer > Check Placement
lakerConfigureRowArea
The lakerConfigureRowArea command configures the attributes of the
selected row area.
Syntax
Type 1 (for the row area that is created by the Row Area or Fixed Row
methods):
lakerConfigureRowArea -point point -traversedist
traverseDist [-site siteName | -height height -width
width] [-orient orient] [-flip 0|1] [-spacingType
spacingType] [-dir rowDirection] [-area rowArea] [-rows
rowNum | -rowSpace rowSpacing]
Type 2 (for the row area that is created by the Utilization method):
lakerConfigureRowArea -point point -traversedist
traverseDist [-site siteName | -height height -width
width] [-orient orient] [-flip 0|1] [-spacingType
spacingType] [-dir rowDirection] [-refPoint point] [-

K-2015.06
929

Placer Commands
utilization floatNum] [-rowSpace rowSpacing] [-ratio

floatNum | -boundaryWidth boundaryWidth | -boundaryHeight
boundaryHeight]
Returns
None
Arguments
930
Argument
Description
-area rowArea
Specify the row area.
-boundaryHeight
boundaryHeight
Specify the boundary width of the rectangular row area.

-boundaryWidth
boundaryWidth
Specify the boundary length of the rectangular row area.

-dir rowDirection
Specify the row direction.

Valid values: Horizontal and Vertical
(default=Horizontal).
-flip 0|1

1 : Flip over the orientation of row sites.
0 : Do not flip over the orientation of row sites.
-height height

-orient orient
Specify the site orientation.

Valid values for -dir Horizontal: R0, R180, MXR0,
and MYR0.
Valid values for -dir Vertical: R90, R270, MXR90,
and MYR90.
-point point
(x0,y0) specifies the location of the selected object.
-ratio floatNum
Specify the ratio of width/length (W/L).

forms a square area when the value is 1.0.
-refPoint point
Specify the lowerleft point of the row area.
-rows rowNum
Specify the number of rows to be created.


K-2015.06

Placer Commands
Argument
Description
-rowSpace
rowSpacing
Specify the row spacing.

-site siteName
-spacingType
spacingType
Specify the spacing type.

Valid values: Each, Pair, and Single.
Each: Separated row.
Pair: First row abutting the second row.
Single: Double back.
-traversedist
traverseDist
Specify the traversing distance of the selected row area.
-utilization
floatNum

-width width

Examples
# Example 1
lakerConfigureRowArea -rows 15 \
-point (-2010.53,-38.5) -traversedist 6.696
# Example 2
lakerConfigureRowArea -dir Vertical -orient R90 -flip 0 \
-rowSpace 2.0 -point (-1975.04,37.835) -traversedist 6.696
# Example 3
lakerConfigureRowArea -width 0.5 -height 1.0 \
-point (0,0) (12,0) (12,15) (0,15) -orient R0 -spacingType Single
See Also
Layout Window: Placer > Configure Row
lakerCreateRow
The lakerCreateRow command creates row in the current cell view for
proper cell placement.

K-2015.06
931

Placer Commands
Syntax
Method 1 (for the Row Area method in Placer > Create Row):
lakerCreateRow -point point (-rows rowNum | -rowSpace
rowSpacing) [-dir rowDirection] (-site siteName | -height
height [-width width]) -orient orient [-flip 0|1] spacingType spacingType
Method 2 (for the Fixed Row method in Placer > Create Row):
lakerCreateRow -point point -rowWidth rowWidth -rows rowNum
[-rowSpace rowSpacing] [-dir rowDirection] (-site
siteName | -height height -width width) -orient orient
[-flip 0|1] -spacingType spacingType
Method 3 (for the Utilization method in Placer > Create Row):
lakerCreateRow -point point -utilization floatNum [-mode
modeName] [-ratio floatNum | -boundaryWidth boundaryWidth
| -boundaryHeight boundaryHeight] [-rowSpace rowSpacing]
[-dir rowDirection] (-site siteName | -height height width width) -orient orient [-flip 0|1] -spacingType
spacingType
Returns
None
Arguments
932
Argument
Description
-boundaryHeight
boundaryHeight
Specify the boundary width of the rectangular row area.

This argument is only valid for Method 3.
-boundaryWidth
boundaryWidth
Specify the boundary length of the rectangular row area.

-dir rowDirection
Specify the row direction.

Valid values: Horizontal and Vertical
(default=Horizontal).
-flip 0|1

1 : Flip over the orientation of row sites.
0 : Do not flip over the orientation of row sites.

K-2015.06

Placer Commands
Argument
Description
-height height

-mode modeName
Specify the calculation mode for area utilization.

Valid values: full and select (default=full).
-orient orient
Specify the site orientation.

Valid values for -dir Horizontal: R0, R180, MXR0,
and MYR0.
Valid values for -dir Vertical: R90, R270, MXR90,
and MYR90.
-point point
Specify the boundary points of rowArea for Method 1.

Specify startPoint for Method 2 and Method 3.
-ratio floatNum
Specify the ratio of width/length.

forms a square area when the value is 1.0. This
argument is only valid for Method 3.
-rows rowNum
Specify the number of rows to be created.

-rowSpace
rowSpacing
Specify the spacing between rows.

-rowWidth
rowWidth
Specify the width of one row, and the width should be a

positive floating number. This argument is only valid for
Method 2.
-site siteName
-siteNum siteNum
Specify the number of sites to be created in a row.

-spacingType
spacingType
Specify the spacing type.

Valid values: Each, Pair, and Single.
Each: Separated row.
Pair: First row abutting the second row.
Single: Double back.

K-2015.06
933

Placer Commands
Argument
Description
-utilization
floatNum

-width width

Examples
# Example 1
lakerCreateRow -dir Horizontal -orient MXR0 -site core \
-flip 1 -rows 20 -point (0.0,0.0) (0.0, 500.0) \
(500.0,500.0) (500.0,0) -spacingType Pair
# Example 2
lakerCreateRow -dir Vertical -orient MXR90 -site core \
-flip 0 -rowSpace 5.0 -point (0.0,0.0) (0.0, 500.0) \
(500.0,500.0) (500.0,0) -spacingType Each
# Example 3
lakerCreateRow -dir Vertical -orient R90 -width 0.5 \
-height 1.0 -flip 0 -point (0.0,0.0) -rowWidth 6.4 \
-spacingType Single -rows 10 -rowSpace 2.0
See Also
Layout Window: Placer > Create Row
lakerCreateRPGroup
The lakerCreateRPGroup command returns 1 if a matrix relative placement
(RP) group can be created.
Syntax
lakerCreateRPGroup -group groupName -columns column -rows
row [-xOffset xOffset] [-yOffset yOffset] [-utilization
number]
Returns
934

K-2015.06

Placer Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-columns column
Specify the number of columns in the RP group.

-group groupName
-rows row
Specify the number of rows in the RP group.

-utilization number
Specify the utilization of the matrix relative placement.

This argument affects the column width for initial matrix
relative placement.
-xOffset xOffset
Specify the bottom-left x coordinate of the group.

-yOffset yOffset
Specify the bottom-left y coordinate of the group.

Examples
# Example 1
lakerCreateRPGroup -group FFT -rows 16 -columns 126 \
-xOffset 2 -yOffset 0
See Also
lakerAddToRPGroup
lakerDeleteRPGroup
lakerDeleteRPGroup
The lakerDeleteRPGroup command returns 1 if a relative placement (PR)
group can be deleted in a design.
Syntax
lakerDeleteRPGroup [-group groupName]
Returns

K-2015.06
935

Placer Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-group groupName

If it is not specified, all groups in the design are deleted.
Examples
# Example 1
# Delete group FFT in the design
lakerDeleteRPGroup -group FFT
# Example 2
# Delete all groups in the design
lakerDeleteRPGroup
See Also
lakerAddToRPGroup
lakerCreateRPGroup
lakerDelRow
The lakerDelRowArea command deletes selected row area in the working
cell view.
Syntax
lakerDelRowArea -point (x0,y0) [|(x0,y0) (x1,y1) (x2,y2)...
-traversedist traverseDist -close 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
936
Argument
Description
-close 0|1

1 : The point array of the selected area is close.
0 : The point array of the selected area is open.
-point (x0,y0) |
[(x0,y0) (x1,y1) (x2,y2)...]
(x0,y0) specifies the location of the selected

object.
Points (x0, y0) (x1, y1) (x2, y2) specify
the point array of the selected area.

K-2015.06

Placer Commands
Argument
Description
-traversedist
traverseDist
Specify the traversing distance of the selected row

area.
Examples
lakerDelRowArea -point (-1933.885,-6.92)
See Also
Layout Window: Placer > Delete Row
lakerDumpPlacementTcl
The lakerDumpPlacementTcl command dumps the placements in a tclbased format. This output file can be sourced later to restore the placement.
Syntax
lakerDumpPlacementTcl [-file fileName]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file fileName
Specify the output file name. The default is

lakerDumpPlacement.tcl.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerDumpPlacementTcl -file placement.tcl
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
The following lines are dumped to the placement.tcl file:

lakerHaltUndo -start
lakerPlaceInstance -inst {u93} -orient {MXR0} -magni {1.000} \
-xPos {96.1400} -yPos {8.7700} -placeStatus {placed} -draw {0}
lakerPlaceInstance -inst {u115} -orient {R180} -magni {1.000} \
-xPos {76.8200} -yPos {16.1500} -placeStatus {placed} -draw {0}
lakerHaltUndo -end
lakerRedraw

K-2015.06
937

Placer Commands
lakerDumpPinAssTcl
The lakerDumpPinAssTcl command dumps the pin placement in a Tclbased format to a specified file. This output file can be reused to restore the pin
assignments.
Syntax
lakerDumpPinAssTcl -file fileName [-topLevel]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file fileName
Specify a filename for the pin placement Tcls to be dumped.
-topLevel
If it is specified, the pins at the top level are dumped.

If it is not specified, the pins at two hierarchy levels are
dumped.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerDumpPinAssTcl -file pinA.tcl
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
Pins at two hierarchy levels have been dumped in

the pinA.tcl file:
lakerAssignPin -inst {Top} -port {CK} -pin {CK} -xPos {0.000} \
-yPos {-1.200} -width {2.000} -length {2.000} \
-layerName {SoftPin} -purpose {pin}
lakerAssignPin -inst {Top} -port {VDD} -pin {VDD} \
-xPos {59.020} -yPos {25.600} -width {3.000} \
-length {3.000} -layerName {SoftPin} -purpose {pin}
lakerAssignPin -inst {Top} -port {VSS} -pin {VSS} \
-xPos {34.320} -yPos {61.980} -width {3.000} -length {3.000} \
# Example 2
# Dump the pins at the top level only
lakerDumpPinAssTcl -file pinB.tcl -topLevel
See Also
Layout Window: Placer > Pin Placer > Dump Pin Placement Tcl
938

K-2015.06

Placer Commands
lakerDumpPinConstraint
The lakerDumpPinConstraint command generates an initial pin constraint
template for quick reference by dumping the pin constraints to a specified file.
Syntax
lakerDumpPinConstraint -file fileName [-topLevel] [initial]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file fileName
Specify the pin constraint file to be dumped.
-initial
If it is specified, only the initial constraints are dumped. In other

words, all pins are dumped as unconstrained and floating to
their nearest edge.
If it is not specified, the current pin assignment status is
dumped. This applies to both constrained and unconstrained
pins.
-topLevel
If it is specified, the pins at the top level are dumped.

If it is not specified, the pins at two hierarchy levels are
dumped.
Examples
lakerDumpPinConstraint -file pin.cons -initial
See Also
Layout Window: Placer > Pin Placer > Dump Constraint Template
lakerLegalizeCellLoc
The lakerLegalizeCellLoc command legalizes cell locations.

K-2015.06
939

Placer Commands
Syntax
lakerLegalizeCellLoc (-impactBoxExt ExtensionSize | impactBoxExt (X-ExtSize,Y-ExtSize) | -impactBox (x1,y1)
(x2,y2) ) [-keepSelObj 0|1] [-verticalCompact 0|1]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-impactBox
(x1,y1) (x2, y2)
Draw a rectangle to form the impact boundary by the

specified coordinates.
-impactBoxExt
(X-ExtSize, Y-ExtSize)
Form the impact boundary by enlarging the bounding

box of selected objects in the horizontal and vertical
directions, respectively.
-impactBoxExt
ExtensionSize
Form the impact boundary by enlarging the bounding

box of selected objects in all directions.
-keepSelObj 0|1

1 : Selected objects cannot be moved during
legalization.
0 : Unselected objects cannot be moved during
legalization.
-verticalCompact 0|1

1 : Enable the Perform Vertical Compaction option.
0 : Disable the Perform Vertical Compaction option.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerLegalizeCellLoc -impactBox \
(-299.16,-52.88) (135.995,158.4) -keepSelObj 0 \
-verticalCompact 0
See Also
Layout Window: Placer > Legalize Cell Location
940

K-2015.06

Placer Commands
lakerOptimizePin
The lakerOptimizePin command optimizes the pin placement.
Syntax
lakerOptimizePin -scope {top|cell|port} [-considerInternal]
[-keepPinOrder] -hPitch {PosInt} -vPitch {PosInt}
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-considerInternal
If specified, the wire length information is considered

during optimization.
-hPitch {PosInt}
Specify the horizontal pin pitch.

-keepPinOrder
If specified, the order of pins is kept on the same cell

boundary edge after optimization.
-scope {top|cell|port}
Specify a scope to optimize the pins.

Valid values: top, cell, and port (default=port).
top : Only pins at the top level can be moved.
cell : Only selected cells can be moved.
port : Only selected ports can be moved.
-vPitch {PosInt}
Specify the vertical pin pitch.

Examples
lakerOptimizePin -scope top -keepPinOrder -hPitch 1 -vPitch 1
See Also
Layout Window: Placer > Pin Placer > Dump Constraint Template
lakerPlaceInstance
The lakerPlaceInstance command returns 1 if the specified instance can
be placed in accordance with the specified attributes.

K-2015.06
941

Placer Commands
To restore a placement via a set of lakerPlaceInstance commands:
Ensure that the master cell of each instance is unchanged since the
lakerPlaceInstance command does not modify the master cell of an
instance.
This Tcl command is more suitable for cases without any instance/device
groups. The placement order of instances or devices in a group may
influence the final layout, therefore an incorrect placement order may lead
to an unexpected result.
Syntax
lakerPlaceInstance -inst instName [-orient orientation] [magni magnification] [-xPos xPosition] [-yPos yPosition]
[-placeStatus placementStatus] [-draw 0|1] [-showMsg 0|1]
Returns
Arguments
942
Argument
Description
-draw 0|1

1 : Redraw the layout window immediately.
0 : Do not redraw the layout window.
-inst instName
-magni manification
Specify the magnification of the instance.

-orient orientation
Specify the orientation of the instance.

MYR0, and MYR90.
-placeStatus
placementStatus
Specify the placement status of the instance.

Valid values: FIXED, COVER, PLACED, and UNPLACED.
-showMsg 0|1

1 : Show messages in the Home Page.
0 : Do not show messages in the Home Page.

K-2015.06

Placer Commands
Argument
Description
-xPos xPosition
Move the x coordinate of the reference point of the

instance to xPosition. The reference point of an
instance is at the lowerleft of the bounding box of the
instance.
-yPos yPosition
Move the y coordinate of the reference point of the

instance to yPosition.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerPlaceInstance -inst u1 -orient R180 -magni 1.0 -xPos 93.38 \
-yPos 8.77 -placeStatus PLACED
The lakerPlacementOption command returns 1 if the placement
constraints can be set. If the -constFile argument is not specified, all current
placement constraints are displayed.
Syntax
lakerPlacementOption [-constFile fileName] [-dumpTemplate
fileName]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-constFile fileName
Specify the placement constraint file.
-dumpTemplate fileName Dump the constraint template with the specified

filename.
Examples
# Example 1
# Set the placement constraint file
lakerPlacementOption -constFile design.const

K-2015.06
943

Placer Commands
# Example 2
# Show all current placement constraints
# Constraint file = design.const
# Example 3
lakerPlacementOption -dumpTemplate test.temp
# A template file 'test.temp' is generated,
# file contents can be:
# .BeginSection
# .EndSection
# .PrBoundaryLayerPurpose +Layer +Purpose
# .Spare +InstName
# .NoFiller1
# .CellIndexFilelibrary_cell_index_file
# .Hierarchy
See Also
Layout Window: Placer > Placement Constraint File
lakerQueryCellBoundary
The lakerQueryCellBoundary command gets the width/height of the
current cell.
Syntax
lakerQueryCellBoundary -instId {inst_address}
Returns
{dCellWidth, dCellHeight} if successful, where dCellWidth
corresponds to the cell width, and dCellHeight corresponds to the cell
height. The constraint file affects the results.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-instId {inst_address}
Set the memory address to an instance object.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerQueryCellBoundary -inst 123a5b7
# The value returned: 1.3 2.5
944

K-2015.06

Placer Commands
lakerQueryRegionDensity
The lakerQueryRegionDensity command is used to query the utilization of
the specified group region.
Syntax
lakerQueryRegionDensity -group groupName
Returns
A floating number (for example: 0.8 means that the utilization of the group
region is 80%) if successful; otherwise returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-group groupName
Examples
lakerQueryRegionDensity -group group1
lakerRemoveFiller
The lakerRemoveFiller command removes specified filler cells or cell
types in the working cell or in a specified area of the working cell.
Syntax
lakerRemoveFiller [-area (x1 y1)(x2 y2)] {-fillerCell
fillerList | -coreFiller 0|1 -padFiller 0|1 -endCap 0|1
-wellTap 0|1 }
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-area (x1 y1)(x2 y2)
Specify the area to remove filler cells or cell types.

(x1 y1) specifies the lower left point of the selected
area while (x2 y2) specifies the upper right point.

K-2015.06
945

Placer Commands
Argument
Description
-coreFiller 0|1

1 : Remove all cells in Core type.
0 : Do not remove the cells in Core type.
-endCap 0|1

1 : Remove all cells in End Cap type.
0 : Do not remove the cells in End Cap type.
-fillerCell fillerList
Specify the filler cell by cell name. Multiple cells are

separated by spaces, for example: -fillerCell
cellA CellB. Cell names are case-sensitive. The
wildcard character * is supported.
-padFiller 0|1

1 : Remove all cells in Pad type.
0 : Do not remove the cells in Pad type.
-wellTap 0|1

1 : Remove all cells in Well Tap type.
0 : Do not remove the cells in Well Tap type.
Examples
# Example 1
# Remove filler cells FILLER* MFILLER* in the specified area
lakerRemoveFiller -area (0 0)(500 500) \
-fillerCell FILLER* MFILLER*
# Example 2
# Remove all filler cells in Core, Pad, Well Tap and End Cap types
lakerRemoveFiller -coreFiller 1 -padFiller1 -wellTap 1 -endCap 1
See Also
Layout Window: Placer > Remove Filler Cell
lakerResetRow
The lakerResetRow command clears all created rows and row areas in the
working cell view.
Syntax
lakerResetRow
946

K-2015.06

Placer Commands
Returns
None
Examples
lakerResetRow
See Also
Layout Window: Placer > Delete All Rows
lakerRowPlaceAll
The lakerRowPlaceAll command analyzes and gives a legal location for all
instances within rows.
Syntax
lakerRowPlaceAll -ruleSet ruleName [-align alignment] [honorSoftPin 0|1] [-constFile fileName] [-area (left,
bottom)(right, top)] -site siteName
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-align alignment
Specify the alignment of the instance placement that

is related to the current row area. This argument is
valid only when the spacing value is 0.
Valid values: left, center, and right
(default=left).
-area (left, bottom)

(right, top)
Determine an incremental region for the placement by

forming a rectangular bounding box.
-constFile fileName
Specify the constraint file.
-honorSoftPin 0|1

1 : Consider soft pins during placement.
0 : Ignore soft pins during placement.
-ruleSet ruleName
Specify the rule set for routing congestion analysis.

K-2015.06
947

Placer Commands
Argument
Description
-site siteName
Specify an active site.

Valid values: default, core, and gacore.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerRowPlaceAll -ruleSet default -honorSoftPin 1
# Example 2
lakerRowPlaceAll -ruleSet default -area (0,0)(1000,1000)
# Example 3
lakerRowPlaceAll -ruleSet default -site core
See Also
lakerSchRowPlacer
lakerRowPlaceCompact
The lakerRowPlaceCompact command compacts the layout design more
efficiently after manual placement or new library cell mapping of a row-based
design.
Syntax
lakerRowPlaceCompact [-direction direction] [-mode mode][hierarchy]
Returns
None
Arguments
948
Argument
Description
Specify a compaction mode.

Valid values: left, center, and right (default=left).
-hierarchy
When -hierarchy is specified, the empty space in

hierarchical blocks is considered during compaction.
When -hierarchy is not specified, the empty space in
hierarchical blocks is ignored during compaction.

K-2015.06

Placer Commands
Argument
Description
-mode mode
Specify a compaction mode.

Valid values: sequential, abutting, global, and
hCompress (default=global).
Examples
# Example 1
lakerRowPlaceCompact -direction left -mode global
# Example 2
lakerRowPlaceCompact -direction right -mode hCompress -hierarchy
See Also
Layout Window: Placer > Compact on Row
lakerStretchRowArea
The lakerStretchRowArea command stretches the selected row area in the
working cell view.
Syntax
lakerStretchRowArea -refPoint (x0,y0) -offsetPopint (x0,y0)
-point (x0,y0) |[(x0,y0) (x1,y1) (x2,y2)...(xn,yn)] [traversedist traverseDist] [-close 0|1] [-keepRowSites
0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-close 0|1

1 : The point array of the selected area is close.
0 : The point array of the selected area is open.
-keepRowSites 0|1

1 : Enable the Keep Row Sites option.
0 : Disable the Keep Row Sites option.
Specify an offset direction to stretch.

K-2015.06
949

Router Commands
Argument
Description
-point (x0,y0) |
[(x0,y0) (x1,y1)
(x2,y2)... (xn,yn)]

point array of the selected area.
-refPoint (x0,y0)
Specify a reference coordinate to stretch.
-traversedist
traverseDist
Specify the traversing distance of the selected row

area.
Examples
lakerStretchRowArea -refPoint (-1905.74,-25.945) \
-offsetPoint (19.755,-2.01) -point (-1910.425,-24.44) \
-traversedist 1.674
See Also
Layout Window: Placer > Stretch Row
Router Commands
This section describes the Tcl commands applied to the Router commands of
950
lakerAssignBackbone
lakerAssignInstPortToNet
lakerAssignPin
lakerBusRouter
lakerCheckAdjacentLayerOverlap
lakerCommonDRC
lakerCongestionAnalysis
lakerCongestionMap
lakerCDRouter
lakerDangleRemove
lakerDeleteRoute

K-2015.06

Router Commands
lakerDeleteRouteAll
lakerDelShape
lakerDigitalRoute
lakerDoubleViaInsertion
lakerDumpRoutingConstraintTemplate
lakerEqualLRouter
lakerEqualLWire
lakerFindCustomViaForDFM
lakerLabelRouter
lakerLadderRoute
lakerLayerSetting
lakerMultiNetRouter
lakerPGRoute
lakerPtToPtRouter
lakerReplaceDFMVia
lakerRouteAll
lakerRouterInfoWnd
lakerRuleSetting
lakerSearchRepair
lakerAssignBackbone
The lakerAssignBackbone command assigns backbone properties to
selected pin shapes or instance pins.
Syntax
To invoke the Assign Backbone feature:
lakerAssignBackbone -start
To perform other actions:
lakerAssignBackbone -action actionMode [-net netName | -node
nodesList]

K-2015.06
951

Router Commands
To abort the Assign Backbone feature:

lakerAssignBackbone -end [-clear 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
952
Argument
Description
-action
actionMode
Valid values: add, remove, query, select, and confirm.

add : Add selected pin shapes or instance pins from the layout
window to the tree list window.
remove : Remove selected nodes in the tree list window.
query : Query all nodes, which belong to the specified net
name, in the tree list window. This action should be used with net.
select : Select nodes in tree list window. This action should be
used with -node.
confirm : Confirm to update the database in according to the
nodes in the tree list window.
-clear 0|1

1 : Clear all highlights in the layout window after aborting the
feature.
0 : Keep all highlights in the layout window after aborting the
feature.
-end
Abort this feature.
-net
netName
Specify a net name to which you want to query all nodes

belonging in tree list window. This argument is valid only if action query is specified.
-node
nodesList
Specify a list of nodes, which should be described in the format:

{netName [className [leafNodeNumber]]} where
netName : Net name of a net node. If only this name is specified,
all nodes belonging to the net node, including itself, are selected.
className : Class name of a class node. If only this name is
specified, all nodes belonging to the class node, including itself,
are selected.
leafNodeNumber : The sequence number of a leaf node in the
set of all leaf nodes belonging to a class node. The number
starts with 0.
This argument is valid only if -action select is specified.

K-2015.06

Router Commands
Argument
Description
-start
Start the feature.
Examples
# Start the Assign Backbone feature
lakerAssignBackbone -start
# Add selected pin shapes and instance pins into the
# tree list window
lakerAssignBackbone -action add
# Select some nodes in the tree list window
lakerAssignBackbone -action select -node \
{alpha} {beta Path} {gamma Rectangle 0}
# Remove selected nodes from the tree list window
lakerAssignBackbone -action remove
# Query all nodes belonging to a net in the tree list window
lakerAssignBackbone -action query -net gamma
# Confirm update the DB in according to all the nodes in the
# tree list window
lakerAssignBackbone -action confirm
# Abort the Assign Backbone feature and clear all highlights
# in the Layout window
lakerAssignBackbone -end -clear 1
See Also
Layout Window: Router > Assign Backbone
lakerAssignInstPortToNet
The lakerAssignInstPortToNet command assigns instance ports to the
specified net.
Syntax
lakerAssignInstPortToNet [-mode mode] [-netType netType]
[-net netName] [-portName portName] [-enableInstances
0|1] [-enableNames 0|1] [-file fileName] [-names
instCellNames] [-button button]

K-2015.06
953

Router Commands
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-button button
Specify the action of the Assign Inst Port to Net form.

Valid values: Apply, OK, and Cancel.
-enableInstances 0|1 Valid values: Boolean values, 0 and 1 (default=1).

1 : Enable the Instances option.
0 : Enable the Cell Types option.
954
-enableNames 0|1

1 : Enable the Names option.
0 : Enable the File option.
-file fileName
Specify the file that contains the instance names or cell

names.
-names
instCellNames
Specify the instance names or cell names that are used

together with the -portName option when assigning
instance ports to nets. The wildcard characters * and ?
are supported.
-mode mode
Specify the connection mode between the instance port

and the specified net.
Valid values: connect and disconnect
(default=connect).
-net netName
Specify the net name that the instance ports are assigned
to.
-netType netType
Specify the net type of the created net or disconnected

net.
Valid values: global, power, and ground
(default=global).
-portName
portName
Specify the port name of instances.

K-2015.06

Router Commands
Examples
# Example 1
lakerAssignInstPortToNet -net {VDD} -enableNames 1 \
-enableInstances 0 -names {*} -file {} -portName {VDD} \
-mode connect -netType power
lakerAssignInstPortToNet -button Apply
# Example 2
lakerAssignInstPortToNet -net {VSS} -enableNames 1 \
-enableInstances 0 -names {*} -file {} -portName {VSS} \
-mode connect -netType ground
lakerAssignInstPortToNet -button OK
See Also
Layout Window: Router > Digital Router > Assign Instance Port to Net
lakerAssignPin
The lakerAssignPin command assigns a specified pin to a specified
position, dimension, and layer.
Syntax
lakerAssignPin -inst instName -port portName -pin pinName
[-xPos xPosition] [-yPos yPosition] [-width width] [length length] [-layerName layerName -purpose purpose]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-inst instName
-layerName
layerName
Change the layer of the pin to another layer.
-length length
Set the length (y) of the pin. This argument is valid only if it
is a rectangular pin.
-pin pinName
-port portName

K-2015.06
955

Router Commands
Argument
Description
-purpose
purpose
Change the layer purpose of the pin to another purpose.
-width width
Set the width (x) of the pin. This argument is valid only if it is
a rectangular pin.
-xPos xPosition
Move the x coordinate of the pin reference point to

xPosition. The reference point of a pin is at the lowerleft
corner of the pin shape bounding box. For a rectangular pin
shape, the reference point is exactly at its lowerleft. For an
instance pin, the x and y positions of its reference point are
the coordinate with respect to the origin of the instance
master cell view, not the top cell view.
-yPos yPosition
Move the y coordinate of the pin reference point to

yPosition.
Examples
lakerAssignPin -inst {Top} -port {VSS} -pin {VSS} \
-xPos {34.320} -yPos {61.980} -width {2.300} -length {2.300} \
lakerBusRouter
The lakerBusRouter command automatically or interactively creates
connections for a set of paths (that is defined as bus).
Syntax
lakerBusRouter -action actionMode -point (x,y) [-autoUpdate
0|1] [[-fanOff 0|1] [-fitToPin 0|1]] [-allowPartialResult
0|1] [-compactBus 0|1] [-snapMode snapMode] [-toLayerName
layerName] [-busAlignStyle busAlignStyle] [-ruleSet
"ruleSetName"] [-rule routingRule] [-minContacts n] [viaPattern type]
Returns
None
956

K-2015.06

Router Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-action
actionMode
Valid values: start, end, and addPoint.

start : Start the Bus Route feature.
end : Abort the Bus Route feature.
addPoint : Specify an area.
-allowPartialResult 0|1

1 : Enable the Allow Partial Result option.
0 : Disable the Allow Partial Result option.
-autoUpdate 0|1

1 : Enable the Auto Update Width and Spacing option.
0 : Disable the Auto Update Width and Spacing option.
-busAlignStyle
busAlignStyle
Specify the bus alignment style.

Valid values: line, saw, inc, and dec (default=saw).
-compactBus 0|1

1 : Enable the Compact Bus option.
0 : Disable the Compact Bus option.
-fanOff 0|1

1 : Enable the Fan-off option.
0 : Disable the Fan-off option.
-fitToPin 0|1

1 : Enable the Fit Width to Edge Pin option.
0 : Disable the Fit Width to Edge Pin option.
-minContacts n

-point (x,y)
Specify a point.
-rule routingRule
Specify the rule setting on the form.
-ruleSet
"ruleSetName"
Specify the rule set to be used for routing.
-snapMode
snapMode
Specify a snap mode.

Valid values: orthogonal and anyangle

K-2015.06
957

Router Commands
Argument
Description
-toLayerName
layerName
Specify the layer for contact vias.
-viaPattern type
Specify the via enclosure pattern.

Valid values: Cross and nonCross (default=Cross).
Examples
lakerBusRouter -action addPoint -point (41.66,26.32) \
-autoUpdate 1 -fanOff 1 -fitToPin 0 -allowPartialResult 0 \
-compactBus 1 -snapMode orthogonal -toLayerName MET2 \
-busAlignStyle dec -ruleSet "default" \
-rule {POLY {Width 0.35} {Spacing 0.45} {Spacing1 0.45}} \
{MET1 {Width 0.5} {Spacing 0.45} {Spacing1 0.45}} \
{M1_P1 {L1Enc {0.15 0.15}} {L2Enc {0.3 0.1}}} \
{M1_M2 {L1Enc {0.3 0.1}} {L2Enc {0.3 0.1}}} \
{M2_M3 {L1Enc {0.3 0.1}} {L2Enc {0.3 0.1}}} \
{M3_M4 {L1Enc {0.3 0.1}} {L2Enc {0.3 0.1}}} \
-minContacts 2 -viaPattern nonCross
See Also
Layout Window: Router > Bus Route
lakerCheckAdjacentLayerOverlap
The lakerCheckAdjacentLayerOverlap command shows the coupling
overlap and area.
Syntax
lakerCheckAdjacentLayerOverlap [-net {NetName List1}] [ignoreNet {NetName List2}] [-status "RoutStatus"] [ruleSet "ruleSetName"]
Returns
None
958

K-2015.06

Router Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-ignoreNet
{NetName List2 }
Specify the nets to be ignored when showing coupling.

The wildcard characters * and ? are supported.
-net
{ NetName List1 }
Specify the net name for showing coupling.

-ruleSet
"ruleSetName"
Specify the rule set to be used for showing coupling.
-status
"RouteStatus"

Valid values: Cover, Fixed, Routed, Shield, and
NoShield.
If it is not specified, this command applies to all objects
created by the Router command.
Examples
# Example 1
# Show all nets with "Routed" status result coupling
lakerShowCoupling
# Example 2
# only show net name n* and "Routed" status result coupling
lakerShowCoupling -net {n*}
lakerCommonDRC
The lakerCommonDRC command checks whether there are any DRC
violations in the current Layout window, by referring to the design rules defined
in the technology file section tfNetRouteRule.
The lakerLoadCalibreDRCError command is automatically executed after
the lakerCommonDRC command is executed. If DRC violations do not exist in
the Layout window, a message is displayed in the message pane of the Home
page. If DRC violations exist, the violations are highlighted in the Layout
window, and the View Errors form, invoked by the Verify > View Error
command, is displayed.
Syntax
lakerCommonDRC

K-2015.06
959

Router Commands
Returns
None
Examples
lakerCommonDRC
lakerCongestionAnalysis
The lakerCongestionAnalysis command invokes the Global Router to
execute the congestion analysis and then view the congestion map with default
setting by lakerCongestionMap.
Syntax
lakerCongestionAnalysis -ruleSet "ruleSetName"
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-ruleSet "ruleSetName" Specify the rule set to be used for global

routing estimation.
Examples
lakerCongestionAnalysis -ruleSet default
lakerCongestionMap -display 1 -tip 0 -mode horizontal \
-map {CongestionMap0 1 50} {CongestionMap1 1 40} \
{CongestionMap2 1 30} {CongestionMap3 1 20} \
{CongestionMap5 1 10} {CongestionMap4 1 0}
See Also
Layout Window: Router > Congestion Map
lakerCongestionMap
The lakerCongestionMap command configures the display of congestion
map, from which you can easily decide the pin location and the shape of
macros.
960

K-2015.06

Router Commands
Syntax
lakerCongestionMap -display 0|1 -mode mode -tip 0|1 -map
{{layerName vial number}...}
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-display 0|1

1: Display the congestion map on the layout window.
0: Hide the congestion map.
-map {{layerName
vial number}...}
Specify the range to display the specified map.

layerName: Congestion layer name, the attribute of this
system layer can be changed from the layer table.
vial: A Boolean values (0|1) that decides whether to
display the specified map.
number: The number of remaining tracks, the positive
number represents remaining track whereas the negative
represents overflow.
-mode mode
Specify the display mode to display congestion map.

Valid values: horizontal, vertical, and least.
horizontal: Display the congestion map based on the
number of remaining tracks in x direction.
vertical: Display the congestion map based on the
number of remaining tracks in y direction.
least: Display the congestion map based on the least
number of remaining tracks between x and y directions.
-tip 0|1

1: Show the tip window.
0: Hide the tip window.
Examples
lakerCongestionMap -display 1 -tip 0 -mode horizontal -map \
{CongestionMap5 1 10} {CongestionMap4 1 0}
See Also
Layout Window: Router > Pin Assignment > Congestion Map

K-2015.06
961

Router Commands
lakerCDRouter
The lakerCDRouter command routes from the current density.
Syntax
lakerCDRouter -net {n1 n2 n3 ...} [-notCrossgate LayerName]
[-ruleSet "ruleSetName"] [-rule routingRule] [-save] [allowedWidth {value1 value2 ...} ] [-safetyFactor value]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-allowedWidth
{value1 value2 ...}
Specify the allowable wire width.

-net { n1 n2 n3 ... }
Specify the nets to be routed.
-notCrossgate
LayerName
Specify the layer, below which the router cannot

create paths across the gate area, overlapping of poly
and oxide layers.
-rule routingRule
-ruleSet "ruleSetName"
-safetyFactor value
Specify the safety ratio to tune the wire width.

-save
Save the current rule settings to a file.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerCDRouter -net {vout} -ruleSet "default" -rule \
{PO {Avail 1} {H 8} {V 4} {Width 0.06} {Spacing 0.12} \
{CurrDens 0.0}} \
{M1 {Avail 1} {H 1} {V 8} {Width 0.09} {Spacing 0.09} \
{CurrDens 1.12}} \
{CurrDens 1.14}} \
{M3 {Avail 1} {H 1} {V 8} {Width 0.1} {Spacing 0.1} {CurrDens 1.2}} \
962

K-2015.06

Router Commands

{PO_M1 {Avail 1} {H 6} {L1Enc {0.01 0.04}} {L2Enc {0.0 0.04}}} \
{M1_M2 {Avail 1} {H 5} {L1Enc {0.0 0.04}} {L2Enc {0.0 0.04}}} \
-safetyFactor 1.0
# Example 2
lakerCDRouter -save -ruleSet "default" -rule \
{PO {Avail 1} {H 8} {V 4} {Width 0.06} {Spacing 0.12} \
{CurrDens 0.0}} \
{CurrDens 1.12}} \
{CurrDens 1.14}} \
{PO_M1 {Avail 1} {H 6} {L1Enc {0.01 0.04}} {L2Enc {0.0 0.04}}} \
-allowedWidth { 0.2 0.5 0.7 1.1 1.2 1.3 2.0 2.5 3.0 } \
-safetyFactor 1.1
See Also
Layout Window: Router > Current Density Route

K-2015.06
963

Router Commands
lakerDangleRemove
The lakerDangleRemove command removes the dangle wire of specific
nets.
Syntax
lakerDangleRemove -net {NetNameList, ClassNameList} ignoreNet {NetNameList, ClassNameList} [-status
routeStatus]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-ignoreNet
{NetNameList,
ClassNameList}
Specify the net names or net class names to be ignored.

-net {NetNameList,
ClassNameList}
Specify the net name for the removal of dangle wires or

the net class name defined in the Constraint Manager
window.
If no nets are specified, this command applies to all nets.
-status routeStatus

NoShield.
If it is not specified, this command applies to all objects
created by the Router command.
Examples
# Example 1
# Dremoves all net dangle objects except those nets
# with name Vdd* or the nets in the CLS net class
lakerDangleRemove -ignoreNet { Vdd* CL2 }
# Example 2
# Only removes objects in the net (net1 and net2) or nets in the CL1
# net class (CL1 is defined in the Constraint Manager window)
lakerDangleRemove -net { net1 net2 CL1 }
See Also
lakerDeleteRouteAll
964

K-2015.06

Router Commands
lakerDeleteRoute
The lakerDeleteRoute command deletes routes by net/route types or net
names.
Syntax
lakerDeleteRoute [-filterByType 0|1] [-signal 0|1] [notchMetal 0|1] [-pg 0|1] [-ring 0|1] [-stripe 0|1] [followPin 0|1] [-ioWire 0|1] [-pinConn 0|1] [-blockWire
0|1] [-coreWire 0|1] [-filterByName 0|1] [-netName
{net_list}]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-blockWire 0|1

1 : Delete BlockWire type nets.
0 : Do not delete BlockWire type nets.
-coreWire 0|1

1 : Delete CoreWire type nets.
0 : Do not delete CoreWire type nets.
-filterByName 0|1

1 : Delete routes by net names.
0 : Delete routes by net types.
-filterByType 0|1

1 : Delete routes by net types.
0 : Delete routes by net names.
-followPin 0|1

1 : Delete FollowPin type nets.
0 : Do not delete FollowPin type nets.
-ioWire 0|1

1 : Delete IOWire type nets.
0 : Do not delete IOWire type nets.
-netName {net_list}
Specify the net names to be removed.

K-2015.06
965

Router Commands
Argument
Description
-notchMetal 0|1

1 : Delete notch metal shapes.
0 : Do not delete notch metal shapes.
-pg 0|1

1 : Delete power/ground (PG) nets.
0 : Do not delete power/ground (PG) nets.
-pinConn 0|1

1 : Delete PinConn type nets.
0 : Do not delete PinConn type nets.
-ring 0|1

1 : Delete Ring type nets.
0 : Do not delete Ring type nets.
-signal 0|1

1 : Delete signal nets.
0 : Do not delete signal nets.
-stripe 0|1

1 : Delete Stripe type nets.
0 : Do not delete Stripe type nets.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerDeleteRoute -filterByType 1 -signal 1 -pg 1
# Example 2
lakerDeleteRoute -filterByName 1 -netName {N1 N2}
See Also
Layout Window: Router > Digital Router > Delete Route
lakerDeleteRouteAll
The lakerDeleteRouteAll command removes objects with a Routed
property. These objects are created by the Route All command.
966

K-2015.06

Router Commands
Syntax
lakerDeleteRouteAll -net {NetNameList, ClassNameList} ignoreNet {NetNameList, ClassNameList} [-status
routeStatus]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-ignoreNet {NetNameList, Ignore net names or net class names. The wildcard
ClassNameList}
characters * and ? are supported.
-net {NetNameList,
ClassNameList}
Specify the net names or net class names to be

removed.
-status routeStatus

NoShield.
Examples
# Example 1
# Delete all net results except those nets with name Vdd* or
# the nets in the CLS net class.
lakerDeleteRouteAll -ignoreNet { Vdd* CL2 }
# Example 2
# Only delete the net (net1 and net2) or nets in the CL1 net class
# (CL1 is defined in the Constraint Manager window).
lakerDeleteRouteAll -net { net1 net2 CL1 }
lakerDelShape
The lakerDelShape command deletes shapes of the specified layer and
purpose.
Syntax
lakerDelShape -layerName layerName -purpose purpose
Returns

K-2015.06
967

Router Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-purpose purpose
Examples
lakerDelShape -layerName PinBlockage -purpose label
lakerDigitalRoute
The lakerDigitalRoute command creates custom digital routes and
generates the routing report.
Syntax
lakerDigitalRoute [-file fileName] [-tab tabName] [appliedNets {netList}] [-appliedFile fileName] [ignoredNets {netList}] [-ignoredFile fileName] [-area
0|1] [-routingAreaBox {x1 y1 x2 y2}] [-activeRuleSet
ruleName] [-varRule 0|1] [-varRules {variableRuleList}]
[-numOfRunThread threadsNum] [-routingTrack trackInfo]
[-useSpine 0|1] [-notUsePinAsFeedThrough 0|1] [enableFeedThroughLayer 0|1] [-feedThroughLayer
{layerList}] [-useViaEnclosedByPin 0|1] [enableViaEnclosedLayer 0|1] [-viaEnclosedLayer
{layerList}] [-useViaTouchPin 0|1] [-advanced 0|1] [enableViaTouchPinsLayer 0|1] [-viaTouchPinsLayer
{layerList}] [-viaStyle visStyle] [-doubleViaLayer
{layerList}] [-viaPattern type] [-dataPreparation
optionStr] [-preScript fileName] [-postScript fileName]
[-route 0|1] [-routeType routeType] [-showCongestion 0|1]
[-onTrack 0|1] [-initialRouteOptions optionStr] [detailRoute 0|1] [-noPushing 0|1] [-detailRouteIteration
iterationNum] [-detailRouteOptions optionStr] [postOptimize 0|1] [-alignViaEdge 0|1] [-postOptDetour
0|1] [-postOptDetourIteration iterationNum] [postOptimizeOptions optionStr] [-postOptPattern 0|1] [postOptPatternIteration iterationNum] [-doubleViaInsert
0|1] [-notchGapFill 0|1] [-notchGapFillOptions
optionStr] [-designInfo 0|1] [-ruleInfo 0|1] [-routeInfo
0|1] [-connectivity 0|1] [-detourRatio 0|1] [-ratio
968

K-2015.06

Router Commands
value] [-jogInfo 0|1] [-cornerInfo 0|1] [-checkExistedVio

0|1] [-violation 0|1] [-options optionStr] [-antenna 0|1]
[-subOptimal 0|1] [-showViolation 0|1] [suggestRoutePitch 0|1] [-skipPrimVio 0|1] [-output 0|1]
[-outputFile fileName]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-activeRuleSet
ruleName
Specify the global rule.
-advanced 0|1

1 : Enable the More button to show advanced
options.
0 : Disable the More button to hide advanced
options.
-alignViaEdge 0|1

1 : Disable the Align Via Edge option.
0 : Enable the Align Via Edge option.
This argument is valid only if -postOptimize 1 is
specified.
-antenna 0|1

1 : Enable the Antenna Rule option.
0 : Disable the Antenna Rule option.
This argument is valid only if -violation 1 is
specified.
-appliedFile fileName
Specify a file for applied nets.
-appliedNets {netList}
Specify net list for applied nets.
-area 0|1

1 : Enable the Routing Area option.
0 : Disable the Routing Area option.
-checkExistedVio 0|1

1 : Enable the Layout Data Validation option.
0 : Disable the Layout Data Validation option.

K-2015.06
969

Router Commands
Argument
Description
-connectivity 0|1

1 : Enable the Connectivity option.
0 : Disable the Connectivity option.
-cornerInfo 0|1

1 : Enable the Corner Information option.
0 : Disable the Corner Information option.
-dataPreparation
optionStr
Specify the options for data preparation.
-designInfo 0|1

1 : Enable the Design Information option.
0 : Disable the Design Information option.
-detailRoute 0|1

1 : Enable the Detail Route option.
0 : Disable the Detail Route option.
-detailRouteIteration
iterationNum
Specify the iteration to perform the detail route

action.
-detailRouteOptions
optionStr
Specify options for the detail route.
-detourRatio 0|1

1 : Enable the Nets with Detour Ratio option.
0 : Disable the Nets with Detour Ratio option.
-doubleViaInsert 0|1

1 : Enable the Double Via Insertion option.
0 : Disable the Double Via Insertion option.
-doubleViaLayer {layerList} Specify the layers to be used for double vias.

-enableFeedThroughLayer Valid values: Boolean values, 0 and 1 (default=0).
0|1
1 : Enable the Layers option of the Do Not Use Pin
as Feedthrough option.
0 : Disable the Layers option of the Do Not Use Pin
as Feedthrough option.
970

K-2015.06

Router Commands
Argument
Description
-enableViaEnclosedLayer
0|1

1 : Enable the Layers option of the Via Enclosed by
Pins option.
0 : Disable the Layers option of the Via Enclosed by
Pins option.
-enableViaTouchPinsLayer Valid values: Boolean values, 0 and 1 (default=0).

0|1
1 : Enable the Layers option of the Do Not Use Wire
Touch Pins option.
0 : Disable the Layers option of the Do Not Use Wire
Touch Pins option.
-feedThroughLayer
{layerList}
Specify the layers to be used for feedthrough.
-file fileName
Specify a file for restoring digital route settings.
-ignoredFile fileName
Specify a file for ignored nets.
-ignoredNets {netList}
Specify a net list for ignored nets.
-initialRouteOptions
optionStr
Specify options for the initial route.
-jogInfo 0|1

1 : Enable the Jog Information option.
0 : Disable the Jog Information option.
-noPushing 0|1

1 : Enable the No Pushing option.
0 : Disable the No Pushing option.
-notchGapFill 0|1

1 : Enable the Notch Gap Filling option.
0 : Disable the Notch Gap Filling option.
-notchGapFillOptions
optionStr
Specify options for notch gap filling.

K-2015.06
971

Router Commands
Argument
Description

notUsePinAsFeedThrough 1 : Enable the Do Not Use Pin as Feedthrough
0|1
option.
0 : Disable the Do Not Use Pin as Feedthrough
option.
972
-numOfRunThread
threadsNum
Specify the number of threads to be used.

-onTrack 0|1

1 : Enable the On Track option.
0 : Disable the On Track option.
-options optionStr
Specify options for reporting sub-optimal route

patterns.
-output 0|1

1 : Disable the Output File option.
0 : Enable the Output File option.
specified.
-outputFile fileName
Specify a specific file name for reporting.
-postOptDetour 0|1

1 : Enable the Detour option.
0 : Disable the Detour option.
specified.
-postOptDetourIteration
iterationNum
Specify the iteration to perform post optimization on

detoured routes.
-postOptimize 0|1

1 : Enable the Post Optimization option.
0 : Disable the Post Optimization option.
-postOptimizeOptions
optionStr
Specify the options for post optimization.

K-2015.06

Router Commands
Argument
Description
-postOptPattern 0|1

1 : Enable the Pattern option.
0 : Disable the Pattern option.
specified.
-postOptPatternIteration
iterationNum
Specify the iteration to perform post optimization on

routing patterns.
-postScript fileName
Specify a script to be executed after routing.
-preScript fileName
Specify a script to be executed before routing.
-ratio value
Specify a ratio number for filtering nets that have a

detour ratio smaller than the specified value.
-route 0|1

1 : Enable the Initial/ECO Route option.
0 : Disable the Initial/ECO Route option.
-routeInfo 0|1

1 : Enable the Route Information option.
0 : Disable the Route Information option.
-routeType routeType

Valid values: Initial Route and ECO Route.
-routingAreaBox
{x1 y1 x2 y2}
Specify the routing area by forming a bounding box

{x1 y1 x2 y2} where x1 and y1 represents the
bottom_left_x and bottom_left_y points, and
x2 and y2 represents the top_right_x and
top_right_y points.
-routingTrack trackInfo
Specify the routing track information.

Valid values: Auto and User.
-ruleInfo 0|1

1 : Enable the Rule Information option.
0 : Disable the Rule Information option.

K-2015.06
973

Router Commands
Argument
Description
-showCongestion 0|1

1 : Enable the Show Congestion Map option.
0 : Disable the Show Congestion Map option.
-showViolation 0|1

1 : Disable the Show Violations option.
0 : Enable the Show Violations option.
specified.
-skipPrimVio 0|1

1 : Disable the Skip Primitive Violations option.
0 : Enable the Skip Primitive Violations option.
specified.
-subOptimal 0|1

1 : Enable the Sub-optimal Patterns option.
0 : Disable the Sub-optimal Patterns option.
specified.
-suggestRoutePitch 0|1

1 : Disable the Suggested Routing Pitch option.
0 : Enable the Suggested Routing Pitch option.
-tab tabName
Specify the current tab name.
-useSpine 0|1

1 : Enable the Spine Routing Pattern option.
0 : Disable the Spine Routing Pattern option.
-useViaEnclosedByPin 0|1 Valid values: Boolean values, 0 and 1 (default=0).

1 : Enable the Via Enclosed by Pins option.
0 : Disable the Via Enclosed by Pins option.
-useViaTouchPin 0|1
974

1 : Enable the Do Not Use Wire Touch Pins option.
0 : Disable the Do Not Use Wire Touch Pins option.

K-2015.06

Router Commands
Argument
Description
-varRule 0|1

1 : Enable the Variable Rule option.
0 : Disable the Variable Rule option.
-varRules
{variableRuleList}
Specify a list of variable route rules.
-viaEnclosedLayer
{layerList}
Specify the layers to be used for pin shapes when

enclosing vias.
-viaPattern type

Valid values: Auto, Cross, and nonCross
(default=Auto).
-viaStyle viaStyle
Specify the via style.

Valid values: Single Via and Double Via 100%.
-viaTouchPinsLayer
{layerList}
Specify the layers to be used for pin shapes when

touching vias.
-violation 0|1

1 : Enable the Violations option.
0 : Disable the Violations option.
Examples
# Example 1
# Enable the via edge alignment action
lakerDigitalRoute -appliedNets {*} -ignoredNets {} -area 0 \
-routingAreaBox {} -activeRuleSet default -varRule 0 \
-numOfRunThread Auto -routingTrack Auto -routingArea {Auto} \
-useSpine 0 -notUsePinAsFeedThrough 0 -enableFeedThroughLayer 0 \
-feedThroughLayer {M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 AP} -useViaEnclosedByPin 0 \
-enableViaEnclosedLayer 0 -viaEnclosedLayer \
{M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7} -useViaTouchPin 0 \
-enableViaTouchPinsLayer 0 -viaTouchPinsLayer \
{M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7} -viaStyle {Single Via} \
-viaPattern {Auto} -advanced 0 -netPriority {} -tab {Run Step} \
-route 1 -routeType {Initial Route} -showCongestion 0 \
-detailRoute 1 -onTrack 0 -noPushing 0 -detailRouteIteration 5 \
-postOptimize 1 -postOptDetour 1 -postOptDetourIteration 3 \
-postOptPattern 1 -postOptPatternIteration 5 -alignViaEdge 1 \
-doubleViaInsert 0 -notchGapFill 0 -report 0

K-2015.06
975

Router Commands
# Example 2
# Report the suggested routing pitch of the current design
-useSpine 0 -notUsePinAsFeedThrough 0 -useViaEnclosedByPin 0 \
-useViaTouchPin 0 -viaStyle {Single Via} -advanced 0 \
-tab {Report} -designInfo 0 -ruleInfo 0 -routeInfo 0 \
-connectivity 0 -detourRatio 0 -ratio {2.000} -jogInfo 0 \
-cornerInfo 0 -checkExistedVio 0 -suggestRoutePitch 1 \
-violation 0 -antenna 0 -subOptimal 0 -skipPrimVio 0 \
-showViolation 0 -output 0 -outputFile {} -report 1
# Example 3
# Specify the double via layers
-useSpine 0 -notUsePinAsFeedThrough 0 -enableFeedThroughLayer 0 \
-feedThroughLayer {M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7} -useViaEnclosedByPin 0 \
-enableViaEnclosedLayer 0 -viaEnclosedLayer \
{M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7} -useViaTouchPin 0 \
-enableViaTouchPinsLayer 0 \
-viaTouchPinsLayer {M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7} -viaStyle {Single Via} \
-doubleViaLayer {VIA12 VIA23 VIA34 VIA45} -viaPattern {Auto} \
-advanced 0 -netPriority {} -tab {Run Step} -route 1 \
-routeType {Initial Route} -showCongestion 0 -detailRoute 1 \
-onTrack 0 -noPushing 0 -detailRouteIteration 5 -postOptimize 1 \
-postOptDetour 1 -postOptDetourIteration 3 -postOptPattern 1 \
-postOptPatternIteration 5 -alignViaEdge 1 -doubleViaInsert 0 \
-notchGapFill 0 -report 0
lakerDoubleViaInsertion
The lakerDoubleViaInsertion command inserts double vias for postlayout.
Syntax
lakerDoubleViaInsertion [-number number] [-ruleSet
ruleName] [-pathAlign mode]
Returns
None
976

K-2015.06

Router Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-number number
Specify the number of vias to be inserted for all single

vias.
Valid value: a possitive integer (default=2).
-pathAlign mode
Specify the alignment mode for routing paths.

Valid values: center, edge, and viaHole.
-ruleSet ruleName
Examples
lakerDoubleViaInsertion -number 4 -ruleSet myRull \
-pathAlign center
lakerDumpRoutingConstraintTemplate
The lakerDumpRoutingConstraintTemplate command dumps the
routing constraint template to a specified file.
The output file can be used to set the routing constraints in the Digital Route
form. If the file already exists, its contents are overwritten after invoking this
command.
Syntax
lakerDumpRoutingConstraintTemplate -file file_name [invokeEditor 0|1]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file fileName
Specify a filename for the routing constraints template to be

dumped to. The default is an empty string.
-invokeEditor 0|1

1 : Enable the Invoke Editor option.
0 : Disable the Invoke Editor option.

K-2015.06
977

Router Commands
Examples
# Example 1
lakerDumpRoutingConstraintTemplate \
-file {routeConstraintTemplate} -invokeEditor 0
See Also
Layout Window: Router > Digital Router > Dump Routing Constraint
Template
lakerEqualLRouter
The lakerEqualLRouter command routes multiple nets with the same
length.
Syntax
lakerEqualLRouter -net {n1 n2 n3 ...} [-maxAmp value] [minAmp value] [-ampSpacing value] [-notCrossgate
LayerName] [-style routerStyle] [-ruleSet ruleName] [save] [{Layer1 {Width W1} {Spacing S1}} {Layer2 {Width
W2} {Spacing S2}} ...]
Returns
None
Arguments
978
Argument
Description
-ampSpacing value
Specify the spacing for snake-style lengthening

scheme.
-maxAmp value
Specify the maximum amplitude for snake-like

lengthening scheme.
-minAmp value
Specify the minimum amplitude for snake-like

lengthening scheme.
-net { n1 n2 n3 ... }
Specify the nets to be routed in equal length.
-notCrossgate
LayerName
Specify the layer, below which the router cannot create

paths across the gate area, overlapping of poly and
oxide layers.
-rule

K-2015.06

Router Commands
Argument
Description
-ruleSet ruleName
-save
-style routerStyle
Specify the router path style.

Valid values: Truncate, and Extend.
Examples
lakerEqualLRouter -net { n1 n2 }
lakerEqualLRouter -net { n1 n2 } -maxAmp 2.0 -minAmp 1.0 \
-ampSpacing 1.0 -style Truncate -ruleSet "default" \
-rule {POLY {Width 0.35} {Spacing 0.45}} \
{MET1 {Width 0.5} {Spacing 0.45}} \
{M1_P1 {L1Enc {0.15 0.15}} {L2Enc {0.3 0.1}}} \
{M1_M2 {L1Enc {0.3 0.1}} {L2Enc {0.3 0.1}}} \
{M2_M3 {L1Enc {0.3 0.1}} {L2Enc {0.3 0.1}}}
See Also
Layout Window: Router > Equal Length Route
lakerEqualLWire
The lakerEqualLWire command routes specified area of nets with the same
length.
Syntax
lakerEqualLWire -net { n1 n2 n3 ...} [-maxAmp value] [-minAmp
value] [-ampSpacing value] -Area (x1, y1) (x2, y2) [-Dir
H|V|Auto]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-ampSpacing value
Specify the spacing for snake-style lengthening

scheme.

K-2015.06
979

Router Commands
Argument
Description
-Area (x1, y1) (x2, y2)
Specified area for lengthening.
-Dir H|V|Auto
Specify the lengthening direction.

Valid values: H, V, and Auto.
-maxAmp value
Specify the maximum amplitude for snake-like

lengthening scheme.
-minAmp value
Specify the minimum amplitude for snake-like

lengthening scheme.
-net { n1 n2 n3 ... }
Specify nets to be routed in equal length.
Examples
None
See Also
Layout Window: Router > Equal Length Wire
The lakerFindCustomViaForDFM command reports the number of valid
vias for replacement and checks the DFM via definition. This command is
executed before running lakerReplaceDFMVia.
Syntax
Returns
None
Examples
lakerLabelRouter
The lakerLabelRouter command connects more than two points by the
same text, labeled by users.
980

K-2015.06

Router Commands
Syntax
lakerLabelRouter -text {t1 t2 t3 ...} [-minContacts n] [notCrossgate LayerName] [-style routerStyle] [-save] [ruleSet "ruleSetName"] [-connectMode connectMode] [rowCol {row col}[-fixRowCol] [-rotate] [-pushContact] ]
[-rule routingRule] [-pinExtractionRule] [-routeStatus
routeStatus]
Returns
A list of figure identifiers if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-connectMode
connectMode
Specify the connection edge mode.

Valid values: Normal, and Pin (default=Normal).
-fixRowCol
When it is specified, use the user-defined number of

columns and rows for contacts, regardless of the contact
space within the overlapping area.
When it is not specified, the number of columns and rows
for contacts may vary according to the contact space
within the overlapping area.
-minContacts n

-notCrossgate
LayerName
Specify the layer (default=Met1), but not all metal layers,

below which the router cannot create paths across the
gate area. The gate area is the overlapping of poly and
oxide layers.
-pinExtractionRule
When it is specified, only shapes that overlap with the

label are taken as the same net. The pin extraction rule
is defined with mapText2Pin in the technology file
section tfAbstractCell.
When it is not specified, any shapes that overlap with the
label, regardless of its layer and/or purpose, are taken as
the same net.
-pushContact
Push the via to cover as many path regions as possible.

K-2015.06
981

Router Commands
Argument
Description
-rotate
Rotate the via according to the preferred H/V direction. If

the via is already in the preferred direction, it stays the
same regardless of the rotate option.
-routeStatus
routeStatus

(default=Fixed).
-rowCol {row col}
Specify the number of columns and rows of contacts for

via generation.
-rule routingRule
Specify the routing rule with the following format:

{LayerName1 {Avail value} {H value} {V
value} {Width value} {Spacing value}} \
value} {Width value} {Spacing value}} \
...
{ViaName1 {Avail value} {H value} {L1Enc
{value1 value2}} {L2Enc {value1 value2}}}
\
{value1 value2}} {L2Enc {value1 value2}}}
\
-ruleSet
"ruleSetName"
-save
-style routerStyle

Valid values: Truncate and Extend
(default=Truncate).
-text {t1 t2 t3 ...}
Specify the text label(s) to be routed.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerLabelRouter -text { a b }
982

K-2015.06

Router Commands
# Example 2
lakerLabelRouter -minContacts 1 -style Extend -connectMode Normal
-text { a b } -ruleSet "default"
-rule {POLY {Avail 1} {H 2} {V 2} {Width 0.35} {Spacing 0.45} \
{MET1 {Avail 1} {H 1} {V 1} {Width 0.5} {Spacing 0.45} \
{M1_P1 {Avail 1} {H 8} {L1Enc {1 5}} {L2Enc {1 5}}}
See Also
Layout Window: Router > Route By Label
lakerLadderRoute
The lakerLadderRoute command enables routing automation for a touch
panel layout.
Syntax
To invoke the Ladder Route feature:
lakerLadderRoute -start
To select teeth segments:
lakerLadderRoute -teeth teeth -select selMode -mode area point point1 point2
To perform ladder routing:
lakerLadderRoute -ruleSet ruleName -action action routePattern routePattern -startExtension insideVal
outsideVal -endExtension insideVal outsideVal -cutCorner
cutLength arcSide [-multipleLayers] [-maxResistance
resistanceValue] [-spacingRatio ratioValue] [-labelLayer
labelLayer [-labelPurpose labelPurpose]] [sameStartTeeth] [-sameEndTeeth] [-controlFile filePath]
To abort the Ladder Route feature:
lakerLadderRoute -end
Returns
None

K-2015.06
983

Router Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-action
action
Specify the action to be performed.

Valid values: preview, realize, and ignore.
-controlFile
filePath
Specify the control file with its full path.
-cutCorner
cutLength
arcSide
Specify the cutting length and arc sides for Cut Corner.
-end
Abort this feature.
-endExtension
insideVal
outsideVal
Specify the Inside and Outside values for End Extension.

Valid values: a positive floating number.
-labelLayer
labelLayer
Specify the text layer for the label matching teeth segments.
-labelPurpose
labelPurpose
984
-maxResistance
resistanceValue
Specify the maximum resistance.
-mode area
Select the teeth segments by area selection.
-multipleLayers
When specified, enable the Route with Multiple Layers option.
-point point1
point2
Indicate the coordinate point of the area formed by area

selection.
-repArea
When specified, show the Area column of the measurement

table in the Measure Resistance form. This argument is valid
only if -report 1 is specified.
-repDevToMin
When specified, show the Deviation to Minimum column of the

measurement table in the Measure Resistance form. This
argument is valid only if -report 1 is specified.

K-2015.06

Router Commands
Argument
Description
-repDevToPrev
When specified, show the Deviation to Previous column of the

-report 0|1
Valid values: boolean values, 0 and 1.

1 : Invoke the Measure Resistance form. One or more
arguments can be specified to show in the form: -repResist,
-repDevToPrev, -repDevToMin, -repSpaceToPrev, and
-repArea.
0 : Do not invoke the Measure Resistance form.
-repResist
When specified, show the Resistance column of the

-repSpaceToPrev When specified, show the Spacing to Previous column of the

-routePattern
routePattern
Specify the route pattern.
-ruleSet
ruleName
Specify the rule set.
-sameEndTeeth
When specified, enable the Same as End Teeth Width option.
Valid values: 45Degrees and 90Degrees.
-sameStartTeeth When specified, enable the Same as Start Teeth Width option.
-select selMode
Specify the method to select teeth segments.

Valid values: fresh, incr, and decr.
-spacingRatio
ratioValue
Specify the spacing ratio.
-start
Start the feature.
-startExtension
insideVal
outsideVal
Specify the Inside and Outside values for Start Extension.

K-2015.06
Valid values: a positive floating number.
985

Router Commands
Argument
Description
-teeth teeth
Specify the start/end teeth segments.

Valid values: start and end.
Examples
lakerLadderRoute -start
lakerPreSelMode -traversein 1 -fromtop 0 -TrHierFilter 0
lakerSelKind -selkind \
{Shape Device Mcell Route IsDevFlatten IsMCellFlatten
IsRouteFlatten}
lakerLadderRoute -teeth start -select fresh -mode area -point \
(406863.31,21360.03) (449055.56,119306.33)
lakerLadderRoute -teeth end -select fresh -mode area -point \
(297866.66,-8777.29) (408370.17,158484.85)
lakerLadderRoute -ruleSet default -routePattern 45Degrees \
-startExtension 0.0 0.0 -endExtension 0.0 0.0 \
-cutCorner 30.0 5 -sameStartTeeth -sameEndTeeth -report 1 \
-repResist -repDevToPrev -repDevToMin -action preview
lakerLadderRoute -action create -end
See Also
Layout Window: Router > Ladder Route
lakerLayerSetting
The lakerLayerSetting command consolidates layer properties for routing
layers.
Syntax
To invoke the Layer Rule Settings feature:
lakerLayerSetting -start action
To change or save a rule set:
lakerLayerSetting -switchRule name | -saveRule name
To add, delete, or rename a rule set:
lakerLayerSetting -addRule name | -deleteRule name | renameRule name -newName name
986

K-2015.06

Router Commands
To add, delete, or move a row in the Layer Properties table:

lakerLayerSetting -addRow row | -deleteRow row | -moveUpRow
row | -moveDownRow row
To edit the layer properties of a rule:
lakerLayerSetting -editRule -rowItem row -layer | -width |
-wireStep | -spacing | -notch | -resistance | -cornerRatio
| -etch | -etchLayer data
To load an existing layer property file or save the layer property to a file:
lakerLayerSetting -loadFile name | -saveFile name
To abort the Layer Rule Settings feature:
lakerLayerSetting -end
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-addRow row
Add a new row in the table.
-addRule name
Save the current data in table to a new rule set.
-deleteRow row
Delete the selected row in the table.
-deleteRule name
Delete the selected rule set.
-editRule
Edit the data in the Layer Properties table.
-rowItem row
-layer | -width |
-wireStep |
-spacing | -notch | resistance |
-cornerRatio |
-etch | -etchLayer
data
-end
Abort this feature.
-loadFile name
Load the layer properties file to the table.

K-2015.06
987

Router Commands
Argument
Description
-moveDownRow
row
Move down the selected row in the table.
-moveUpRow
row
Move up the selected row in the table.
-rename name
-newName name
Rename the selected rule set.
-saveFile name
Save the current data in table to a layer properties file.
-saveRule name
Save the current data in table to an existing rule set.
-start
Start the feature for Measure Resistance, Measure Point-toPoint Resistance, or Ladder Route features.
Valid values: -measRes, -p2pRes, and -ladderRoute.
-switchRule name
Switch to another rule in the rule set.
Examples
lakerLayerSetting
lakerLayerSetting
lakerLayerSetting
lakerLayerSetting
lakerLayerSetting
lakerLayerSetting
lakerLayerSetting
-start -ladderRoute
-editRule -rowItem 0
-saveRule default
-end
-layer L46:drawing
-width 23
-width 30
-spacing 30
See Also
Layout Window: Router > Layer Rule Settings
lakerMultiNetRouter
The lakerMultiNetRouter command routes nets by the order of the
specified net names.
Syntax
lakerMultiNetRouter -net {n1 n2 n3 ...} -netConst {n1 n2 n3
...} [-connPathCenter] [-viaPattern type] [usePrefWidth] [-maxVia num] [-notCrossgate LayerName] [style routerStyle] [-minContacts n] [-shield [shieldNet]
988

K-2015.06

Router Commands
[-shieldConnect] [-AbsShield [shieldSkipExistingObjects]] [-closedLoop] [shieldparallel [-shieldSpace space][shieldParallelWidth width]] [-shieldtop [-shieldTopWidth
width]] [-shieldbottom [-shieldBottomWidth width]] [autoDetect] [-reduceOverlap] [-enableSwapPort] [feedThrough] [-ruleSet ruleName] [-rule routingRule] [connectMode connectMode] [-cutGuardRing] [-useMinArea
0|1] [-save] [-routeStatus routeStatus] [-rowCol {row
col}[-fixRowCol] [-rotate] [-pushContact]] [[-bbRoute]
[-bbVia viaNum] [-bbMaxLength maxLen] [-bbViaOnPin] [bbOffShapeVia]] [-cutCorner [-cutCornerToPolygon] [cutCornerIMLength IMLen]]
Returns
A list of figure identifiers if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-AbsShield
Use the absolute shielding mode.
-autoDetect
Create a multi-segment routing result that fits the pin

width automatically.
-bbMaxLength
maxLen
Specify the maximum length of backbone routes.

-bbOffShapeVia
Allow off-shape vias, which are neither on the device

pin nor on the backbone, if vias can be used.
-bbRoute
Use the backbone style routing style.
-bbVia viaNum
Specify the maximum number of vias on the

backbone.
-bbViaOnPin
Allow dropping vias on the device pin.
-closedLoop
Form a closed loop for shield routing.
-connectMode
connectMode

Valid values: Normal, and Pin (default=Normal).

K-2015.06
989

Router Commands
990
Argument
Description
-connPathCenter
Allow connecting wires to the existing path centerline

or via center.
-cutCorner
Cut corners of the path.
-cutCornerToPolygon
Convert off-grid routes to polygons with on-grid

border points.
-cutCornerIMLength
IMLen
Specify the preferred innermost cut-length (in

microns).
-cutGuardRing
Allow cutting guard rings in the same design

hierarchy level for better routability.
-enableSwapPort
Enable swap ports.
-feedThrough
Enable the feedthrough insertion.
-fixRowCol
If it is specified, use the user-defined number of

columns and rows for contacts, regardless of the
contact space within the overlapping area.
If it is not specified, the number of columns and rows
for contacts may vary according to the contact space
within the overlapping area.
-maxVia num
Specify the maximum number of vias dropped on the

shapes.
-minContacts n

-net {n1 n2 n3 ...}
Specify the nets to be routed.
-netConst {n1 n2 n3 ...}
Specify the net constraints.
-notCrossgate
LayerName
Specify the layer (default=Met1), but not all metal

layers, below which the router cannot create paths
across the gate area. The gate area is the
overlapping of poly and oxide layers.

K-2015.06

Router Commands
Argument
Description
-pushContact
Push the via to cover as many path regions as

possible.
-reduceOverlap
Reduce adjacent layer overlaps to avoid parasitic

coupling.
-rotate
Rotate the via according to the preferred H/V

direction. If the via is already in the preferred
direction, it stays the same regardless of the rotate
option.
-routeStatus
routeStatus

(default=Fixed).
-rowCol {row col}
Specify the number of columns and rows for contacts

in via generation.
-rule routingRule
Specify the routing rule by using the following format:

value} {Width value} {PreferW value}
{Spacing value} {MAR value}} \
value} {Width value} {PreferW value}
{Spacing value} {MAR value}} \
...
{value1 value2}} {L2Enc {value1
value2}}} \
value2}}} \
-ruleSet ruleName
-save
-shield [shieldNet]
Produce a shielding net near the routed net.
-shieldbottom
Use the Down shielding type.

K-2015.06
991

Router Commands
Argument
Description
-shieldBottomWidth width Specify the minimum width of bottom shielding wires.

Valid value: an integer, greater than or equal to the
minimum width.
-shieldConnect
Connect the shielding net.
-shieldparallel
Use the Parallel shielding type.
-shieldParallelWidth width Specify the minimum width of parallel shielding wires.

minimum width.
Skip the existing objects (pins) and shield new route
shieldSkipExistingObjects objects only.
-shieldSpace space
Specify the minimum spacing between shielding

wires.
minimum spacing.
-shieldtop
Use the Top shielding type.
-shieldTopWidth width
Specify the minimum width of top shielding wires.

minimum width.
-style routerStyle

(default=Truncate).
-useMinArea 0|1

1 : Enable the Min Area Rule option.
0 : Disable the Min Area Rule option.
-usePrefWidth
Use the preferred wire width.
-viaPattern type

Valid values: Cross and nonCross (default=Cross).
Examples
# Example 1
# Define routing rules
# Relative settings in GUI:
992

K-2015.06

Router Commands
# Corresponding Tcl:
lakerMultiNetRouter -minContacts 1 -style Truncate \
-connectMode Normal -ruleSet "default" -rule \
{POLY {Avail 1} {H 2} {V 2} {Width 0.35}\
{PreferW 0.35}{Spacing 0.45}} \
{MET1 {Avail 1} {H 1} {V 1} {Width 0.5} \
{PreferW 0.5} {Spacing 0.45}} \
{M1_P1 {Avail 1} {H 8} {L1Enc {0.15 0.15}} {L2Enc {0.3 0.1}}} \
{M3_M4 {Avail 1} {H 8} {L1Enc {0.3 0.1}} {L2Enc {0.3 0.1}}}
# Example 2
# Use backbone style
lakerMultiNetRouter -net { n1 } -ruleSet "default" -rule \
{POLY {Avail 1} {H 20} {V 2} {Width 0.35} \
{PreferW 0.35}{Spacing 0.45}} \
{PreferW 0.5} {Spacing 0.45}}\
-style Truncate -rowCol {1 1} -bbRoute -bbVia 2 \
-bbMaxLength 100.0 -bbViaOnPin -bbOffShapeVia

K-2015.06
993

Router Commands
# Example 3
# cut corners
lakerMultiNetRouter -net { nr1 nr2 } -ruleSet "default" -rule \
{METAL1 {Avail 1} {H 1} {V 1} {Width 0.16} {PreferW 0.16} \
{Spacing 0.18}} {METAL2 {Avail 1} {H 1} {V 1} {Width 0.2} \
-cutCorner -cutCornerToPolygon -cutCornerIMLength 0.2 \
-style Truncate -minContacts 1
# Example 4
# auto detect edge and cut guard ring
lakerMultiNetRouter -ruleSet "default" -rule \
{M1 {Avail 1} {H 1} {V 8} {Width 0.12} \
{M2 {Avail 0} {H 8} {V 1} {Width 0.14} \
-autoDetect -cutGuardRing -style Truncate -minContacts 1
See Also
Layout Window: Router > Net Router
lakerPGRoute
The lakerPGRoute command creates power/ground (PG) wires.
Syntax
To set the General tab:
lakerPGRoute -options [-topViaLayer layerName] [bottomViaLayer layerName] [-searchRange range] [ignoreDRC 0|1] [-showViolation 0|1] [-activeRuleSet
ruleName]
To set the Core Ring tab:
lakerPGRoute -ring -net netNames -rowArea rowArea [-noCross
0|1] [-leftLayer layerName] [-rightLayer layerName] [topLayer layerName] [-bottomLayer layerName] [-leftWidth
width] [-rightWidth width] [-topWidth width] [bottomWidth width] [-leftSpacing spacing] [-rightSpacing
spacing] [-topSpacing spacing] [-bottomSpacing spacing]
[-leftCoreOffset offset] [-rightCoreOffset offset] [topCoreOffset offset] [-bottomCoreOffset offset] [skipLeftSide 0|1] [-skipRightSide 0|1] [-skipTopSide 0|1]
[-skipBottomSide 0|1] [-enableEntire 0|1]
994

K-2015.06

Router Commands
To set the Block Ring tab:

lakerPGRoute -macroRing -mode mode -net netNames [-noCross
0|1] [-extendCorner 0|1] [-topLeftExtension 0|1] [topRightExtension 0|1] [-bottomLeftExtension 0|1] [bottomRightExtension 0|1] [-leftTopExtension 0|1] [leftBottomExtension 0|1] [-rightTopExtension 0|1] [rightBottomExtension 0|1] [-skipLeftSide 0|1] [skipRightSide 0|1] [-skipTopSide 0|1] [-skipBottomSide
0|1] [-leftLayer layerName] [-rightLayer layerName] [topLayer layerName] [-bottomLayer layerName] [-leftWidth
width] [-rightWidth width] [-topWidth width] [bottomWidth width] [-leftSpacing spacing] [-rightSpacing
spacing] [-topSpacing spacing] [-bottomSpacing spacing]
[-leftCoreOffset offset] [-rightCoreOffset offset] [topCoreOffset offset] [-bottomCoreOffset offset] [enableEntire 0|1]
To set the Block Wire tab:
lakerPGRoute -blockWire -net net_names [-enableLayerJump
0|1] [-extensionViaNumber num] [-allowNonPreferredDir
0|1] [-enablePinLayer 0|1] [-pinLayer layerNames] [skipLeftSide 0|1] [-skipRightSide 0|1] [-skipTopSide 0|1]
[-skipBottomSide 0|1]
To set the Stripe tab:
lakerPGRoute -stripe -net netNames -rowArea rowArea [horLayer metalLayer] [-verLayer metalLayer] [-wireWidth
width -wireSpacing spacing] [-mode mode] [-start num] [end num] [-group num] [-step num] [-allowSwapNet 0|1] [allowShiftRange 0|1] [-shiftRangeGui range] [extendToBoundary 0|1]
To set the Follow Pin tab:
lakerPGRoute -followPin -net netNames -rowArea rowArea [enableLayerJump 0|1] [-extensionViaNumber num] [allowNonPreferredDir 0|1] [-extendToBoundary 0|1]
To close the PG Route form:
lakerPGRoute -close
To undo the last action within a specified row area (optional):
lakerPGRoute -undo [-rowArea rowArea]

K-2015.06
995

Router Commands
Returns
Arguments
996
Argument
Description
-activeRuleSet ruleName
Specify the global rule. The default ruleName is

default.
If this argument is not specified or the specified rule
set does not exist, the active rule set is not changed.
-allowNonPreferredDir 0|1

1 : Enable the Use Layers in Non-preferred Direction
option.
0 : Disable the Use Layers in Non-preferred
Direction option.
-allowShiftRange 0|1

1 : Enable the Shifting Range option.
0 : Disable the Shifting Range option.
-allowSwapNet 0|1

1 : Enable the Swap Net Order option.
0 : Disable the Swap Net Order option.
-blockWire
Set the options and fields in the Block Wire tab.
-bottomViaLayer
layerName
Specify the bottom metal layer to be reached by

stack vias.
-enableEntire 0|1

1 : Enable the Uniform Values option.
0 : Disable the Uniform Values option.
-enableLayerJump 0|1

1 : Enable the layer jump when the creation of block
wires or follow pins is unsuccessful.
0 : Disable the layer jump when the creation of block
wires or follow pins is unsuccessful.
-enablePinLayer 0|1

1 : Enable the Layers option.
0 : Disable the Layers option.

K-2015.06

Router Commands
Argument
Description
-end num
Specify a value for the end point of wire creation.

-extendCorner 0|1

1 : Enable the Extend Corner Wires option.
0 : Disable the Extend Corner Wires option.
-extendToBoundary 0|1

1 : Enable the Extend to Boundary option.
0 : Disable the Extend to Boundary option.
-extensionViaNumber
num
Specify the number of extension via arrays while

changing the metal layer.
-followPin
Set the options and fields in the Follow Pin tab.
-group num
Specify the number of stripe groups. Either -group

or -step must be specified.
-horLayer metalLayer
Specify the horizontal metal layers to create stripes.
-ignoreDRC 0|1

1 : Enable the Allow Violations option.
0 : Disable the Allow Violations option.
-leftCoreOffset offset
-rightCoreOffset offset
-topCoreOffset offset
-bottomCoreOffset offset
Specify the spacing between the core area and the

inner ring.
-leftLayer layerName
-rightLayer layerName
-topLayer layerName
-bottomLayer layerName
Specify the layer of the created ring wires on the four

sides. The default is the lowest metal layer.
-leftSpacing spacing
-rightSpacing spacing
-topSpacing spacing
-bottomSpacing spacing
Specify the edge-to-edge spacing between wires.

The default is the minimum spacing of the specified
layer.

K-2015.06
997

Router Commands
Argument
Description
-leftWidth width
-rightWidth width
-topWidth width
-bottomWidth width
Specify the wire width. The default is the minimum

width of the specified layer.
-macroRing
Set the options and fields in the Block Ring tab.
-mode mode
When -macroRing is specified, specify a mode to

create macro rings. Valid values: group and
individual (default=group).
When -stripe is specified, specify a mode to
interpret the Start and End values. Valid values:
absolute and offset (default=offset).
-net netNames
Specify the nets to create core rings, macro rings,

stripes, or follow pins. Multiple net names must be
separated by spaces, for example: -net {net1
net2 ... netn}.
For core rings, this argument specifies the net for
rings from inner to outer. The same net can be used
more than once to create multiple rings, for example:
-net {VDD VSS VDD VSS}.
998
-noCross 0|1

1 : Disable the Extend Inner Rings option.
0 : Enable the Extend Inner Rings option.
-options
Set the options and fields in the General tab.
-pinLayer layerNames
Specify the metal layers of macro pins.

This argument is valid only if -enablePinLayer 1
is specified.
-ring
Set the options and fields in the Core Ring tab.
-rowArea rowArea
Specify the row area to create P/G rings. The format

is x0 y0 x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 [x4 y4 ... xn
yn]. The row area should be rectilinear without
duplicated points.

K-2015.06

Router Commands
Argument
Description
-searchRange range
Specify how far the stripes or follow pins can search

when the connection is successful.
-shiftRangeGui range
Specify the range to shift the stripe wires.

This argument is valid only if -allowShiftRange
1 is specified.
-showViolation 0|1

1 : Disable the Show Violations option.
0 : Enable the Show Violations option.
This argument is valid only if -ignoreDRC 1 is
specified.
-skipBottomSide 0|1

1 : Disable the Bottom option.
0 : Enable the Bottom option.
-skipLeftSide 0|1

1 : Disable the Left option.
0 : Enable the Left option.
-skipRightSide 0|1

1 : Disable the Right option.
0 : Enable the Right option.
-skipTopSide 0|1

1 : Disable the Top option.
0 : Enable the Top option.
-start num
Specify a value for the start point of wire creation.

-step num
Specify the spacing between groups. Either -group

or -step must be specified.
-stripe
Set the options and fields in the Stripe tab.
-topViaLayer
layerName
Specify the top metal layer to be reached by stack

vias.

K-2015.06
999

Router Commands
Argument
Description
-undo
Undo the last action and keep the form open.
-verLayer metalLayer
Specify the vertical metal layers to create stripes.
-wireSpacing spacing
Specify the edge-to-edge spacing between stripe

wires.
-wireWidth width
Specify the width of stripe wires.

Examples
# Example 1
# Set the General options
lakerPGRoute -options -topViaLayer AP -bottomViaLayer M1 \
-ignoreDRC 1 -searchRange 0
# Example 2
# Create core rings
lakerPGRoute -ring -net {VDD VSS} -leftLayer M1 -rightLayer M1 \
-topLayer M1 -bottomLayer M1 -leftWidth 0.07 -rightWidth 0.07 \
-topWidth 0.07 -bottomWidth 0.07 -leftSpacing 0.07 \
-rightSpacing 0.07 -topSpacing 0.07 -bottomSpacing 0.07 \
-leftCoreOffset 0 -rightCoreOffset 0 -topCoreOffset 0 \
-bottomCoreOffset 0 -noCross 0 -skipLeftSide 0 \
-skipRightSide 0 -skipTopSide 0 -skipBottomSide 0 \
-enableEntire 0 -rowArea \
{3.0 38.3 21.7 38.3 21.7 20.7 42.2 20.7 42.2 3.0 3.0 3.0}
# Example 3
# Create stripes
lakerPGRoute -stripe -net {VDD VSS} -topViaLayer M10 \
-bottomViaLayer M1 -searchRange 0 -wireWidth 0.5 \
-wireSpacing 2.0 -horLayer M4 -rowArea \
{12.02 3.325 42.915 3.325 42.915 -31.62 12.02 -31.62} \
-mode offset -start 0 -end 0 -group 5 -step 6 -allowSwapNet 0 \
-allowShiftRange 1 -shiftRangeGui 0 -extendToBoundary 0
See Also
Layout Window: Router > Digital Router > PG Route
1000

K-2015.06

Router Commands
lakerPtToPtRouter
The lakerPtToPtRouter command connects two selected objects by the
available routing layers.
Syntax
lakerPtToPtRouter -point (x1,y1)(x2,y2) [-style
routerStyle] [-rule routingRule] [-figs figIds] [minContacts n] [-rowCol {row col}[-fixRowCol] [-rotate]
[-pushContact] ] [-connectMode connectMode] [notCrossgate LayerName] [-useMinArea 0|1] [reduceOverlap] [-routeStatus routeStatus]
lakerPtToPtRouter -point {(x1,y1) [LayerName]} {(x2,y2)
[LayerName]} [-style routerStyle] [-useMinArea 0|1] [rule routingRule] [-figs figIds] [-minContacts n] [rowCol {row col}[-fixRowCol] [-rotate] [-pushContact] ]
[-connectMode connectMode] [-notCrossgate LayerName] [reduceOverlap] [-routeStatus routeStatus]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-connectMode
connectMode

Valid values: Normal, Pin, and Edge
(default=Normal).
-figs figIds
Two figIds can be specified to route. If -point is

specified at the same time, -point has higher
priority and -figs is ignored.
-fixRowCol
When it is specified, use the user-defined number of

columns and rows for contacts, regardless of the
contact space within the overlapping area.
When it is not specified, the number of columns and
rows for contacts may vary according to the contact
space within the overlapping area.
-minContacts n


K-2015.06
1001

Router Commands
1002
Argument
Description
-notCrossgate
LayerName
Specify the layer (default=Met1), but not all metal

layers, below which the router cannot create paths
across the gate area. The gate area is the
overlapping of poly and oxide layers.
Specify two points to select the objects to be

connected.
-pushContact
Push the via to cover as many path regions as

possible.
-reduceOverlap
Reduce adjacent layer overlaps to avoid parasitic

coupling.
-rotate
Rotate the via according to the preferred H/V

direction. If the via is already in the preferred
direction, it stays the same regardless of the rotate
option.
-routeStatus
routeStatus

(default=Fixed).
-rowCol {row col}
Specify the number of columns and rows for contacts/

vias to be created.
-rule routingRule
Specify the routing rules with format:

value} {Width value} {Spacing value}
{MAR value}} \
{MAR value}} \
...
value2}}} \
value2}}} \

K-2015.06

Router Commands
Argument
Description
-style routerStyle
Specify the routing path style.

(default=Truncate).
-useMinArea 0|1

Examples
# Example 1
lakerPtToPtRouter -point (-11.576,4.691) (2.528,5.019)\
{POLY2 {Avail 1} {H 2} {V 2} {Width 0.8} {Spacing 0.8} \
{P1_P2 {Avail 1} {H 5} {L1Enc {0.4 0.4}} {L2Enc {0.4 0.4}}}
# Example 2
lakerPtToPtRouter -point {(2.400,0.500) POLY} \
{(8.000,8.000) MET1} \
{P1_P2 {Avail 1} {H 5} {L1Enc {0.4 0.4}} {L2Enc {0.4 0.4}}} \
-minContacts 2
# Example 3
set rect1Id [lakerCreateRect -layerName MET1 -point \
(37,-15) (54,0)]
set rect2Id [lakerCreateRect -layerName MET1 -point \
(98,-18) (118,-1)]
lakerPtToPtRouter \
{P1_P2 {Avail 1} {H 5} {L1Enc {0.4 0.4}} {L2Enc {0.4 0.4}}} \
-figs {$rect1Id $rect2Id}

K-2015.06
1003

Router Commands
# Example 4
lakerPtToPtRouter -cmd rules -rowCol {1 3} -style Truncate \
-connectMode Normal -ruleSet "default" \
{P1_P2 {Avail 1} {H 5} {L1Enc {0.4 0.4}} {L2Enc {0.4 0.4}}}
See Also
dbPtToPtRouter
Layout Window: Router > Point-To-Point Router
lakerReplaceDFMVia
The lakerReplaceDFMVia command replaces DFM vias by following the
technology file section dfmViaDef or the specified priority file.
Syntax
lakerReplaceDFMVia [-DFMFile fileName] [-net {n1 n2 ... nn}]
[-dumpFailPos] [-replaceInstVia]
Returns
None
Arguments
1004
Argument
Description
-DFMFile fileName
Specify the priority file that sets the priorities for DFM via
insertion. If this file is not specified, vias are replaced by
the order specified in the technology file.
-dumpFailPos
Report the position of failed vias to the log file only. By

default, the position of failed vias is not reported in the log
file.
-net {n1 n2 ... nn}
Specify the nets to be replaced. The wildcard characters

* and ? are supported.
-replaceInstVia
Change instances to custom vias.

K-2015.06

Router Commands
Examples
# Example 1
# Replace DFM vias by the priorities defined in the
# technology file section dfmViaDef
lakerReplaceDFMVia
# Example 2
# Replace DFM vias by the priorities set in the dfmvia file
# File example:
# DFM12_1 (DFM via name)
(High priority)
# DFM23_1
# DFM34_1
# DFM12_2
# DFM23_2
# DFM34_2
# DFM12_3
(Low priority)
lakerReplaceDFMVia -DFMFile dfmvia
lakerRouteAll
The lakerRouteAll command routes all unconnected nets automatically.
Syntax
lakerRouteAll -ripup -effort effort -mode mode [-viaGroup
mode] -allowViolation -postOptimize -connectToSoftPins selectedNets {netName_list, className_list} -ignoreNet
{netName_list, className_list} -backboneStyle longPathFirst -connect -save -ruleSet ruleName -rule
routingRule [-pathAlign mode] [-useMinArea 0|1] [reduceOverlap] [-enableSwapPort] [-useMultiVia] [useMinWS]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-allowViolation
When specified, route incomplete nets with violations.
-backboneStyle
When specified, change the routing style to backbone

style.
-connect
When specified, connect nets automatically.

K-2015.06
1005

Router Commands
Argument
Description
-connectToSoftPins
When specified, connect to soft pins.
-effort effort
Set up the repair effort.

Valid values: Small, Medium, and Large
(default=Medium).
-enableSwapPort
When specified, enable swap ports.
-ignoreNet
{netName_list,
className_list}
Specify the nets that are not routed as power/ground

nets.
Valid values: the net name list, and the class name list.
Net names must be separated by spaces. The
wildcard characters * and ? are supported, for
example: Vdd* *Vss B?. Class names can be used
to simplify the net name list.
1006
-longPathFirst
When specified, change the routing order to long path

first.
-mode mode
Specify the routing mode.

Valid values: Turbo and Normal.
-pathAlign mode
Specify the alignment mode for routing paths.

Valid values: center, edge, and viaHole.
-postOptimize
When specified, re-route each net.
-reduceOverlap
When specified, reduce the adjacent layer overlaps to

avoid parasitic coupling.
-ripup
When specified, repair incomplete nets.

K-2015.06

Router Commands
Argument
Description
-rule routingRule
Specify the routing rule with the following format:

{MAR value}} \
{MAR value}} \
...
value2}}} \
value2}}} \
-ruleSet ruleName
-save
Save the rule set specified by -ruleSet and -rule

to the laker.ro file.
-selectedNets
{netName_list,
className_list}
Route the specified nets or classes by the selector.

Valid values: net name list and class name list.
-useMinArea 0|1

-useMinWS
When specified, use the minimum width and spacing

values derived from the technology file or LEF file.
-useMultiVia
When specified, use multiple custom vias for routing.

K-2015.06
1007

Router Commands
Argument
Description
-viaGroup mode

device definition.
definition.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerRouteAll -mode Normal -backboneStyle -longPathFirst \
-connect -ruleSet "default" -rule \
{POLY {Avail 0} {H 10} {V 2} {Width 0.35} {Spacing 0.45}} \
{POLY2 {Avail 0} {H 2} {V 10} {Width 0.65} {Spacing 0.5}} \
{MET1 {Avail 1} {H 10} {V 1} {Width 0.5} {Spacing 0.45}} \
-minContacts 1 -pathAlign center -viaPattern Cross
# Example 2
lakerRouteAll -useMultiVia -ruleSet "default" -rule \
{MET1 {Avail 1} {H 1} {V 1} {Width 10.0} {Spacing 10.0} {MAR.
0.0}} \
0.0}} \
{4Cut {Avail 1} {H 10} {L1Enc {}} {L2Enc {}}} \
{2Cut {Avail 1} {H 10} {L1Enc {}} {L2Enc {}}} \
{6Cut {Avail 1} {H 10} {L1Enc {}} {L2Enc {}}} -reduceOverlap 1.0 \
-viaGroup RouteVia -minContacts 1 -pathAlign center \
-viaPattern Cross -useMinArea 1
# Example 3
lakerRouteAll -ripup -effort Small -useMinWS -mode Normal \
-connect -ruleSet "default" -rule \
0.0}} \
0.0}} \
1008

K-2015.06

Router Commands
{v1 {Avail 1} {H 10} {L1Enc {}} {L2Enc {}}} \

{V1 {Avail 1} {H 1} {L1Enc {6.0 6.0}} {L2Enc {6.0 6.0}}} \
-reduceOverlap 0.0 -viaGroup RouteVia -minContacts 1 \
-pathAlign center -viaPattern Cross -useMinArea 1
See Also
Layout Window: Router > Route All
lakerRouterInfoWnd
The lakerRouterInfoWnd command shows or hides the PG Route
Information form issued by the PG Route command or the Digital Route
Information form issued by the Digital Route command.
Syntax
lakerRouterInfoWnd -display 0|1
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-display 0|1

1 : Show the PG Route Information form issued by the PG
Route command or the Digital Route Information form issued
by the Digital Route command.
0 : Hide the PG Route Information form issued by the PG
Route command or the Digital Route Information form issued
by the Digital Route command.
Examples
# Example 1
# Show the information/message window
lakerRouterInfoWnd -display 1
See Also
Layout Window: Router > Digital Router > PG Route
Layout Window: Router > Digital Router > Digital Route

K-2015.06
1009

Router Commands
lakerRuleSetting
The lakerRuleSetting command sets routing and contact/via rules for the
digital router.
Syntax
lakerRuleSetting [-addRefRuleSet ruleName] [-newRuleSet
ruleName] [-addRuleApply 0|1] [-addRuleOk 0|1] [delRuleSet ruleName] [-deleteRuleApply 0|1] [deleteRuleOk 0|1] [-renameRefRuleSet ruleName] [renameRuleSet ruleName] [-renameRuleApply 0|1]
[-renameRuleOk 0|1] [-ruleSet ruleName] [-tab tabName]
[-viaGroup mode] [-specificSpacing 0|1] [-ruleChanged
list] [-save 0|1] [-routingTrack Auto|User]
Returns
None
Arguments
1010
Argument
Description
-addRefRuleSet
ruleName
Specify the reference rule set when adding a new rule

set.
-addRuleApply 0|1

1 : Record the Apply button action of the Add Rule Set
form.
0 : Do not record the Apply button action of the Add
Rule Set form.
-addRuleOk 0|1

1 : Record the OK button action of the Add Rule Set
form.
0 : Do not record the OK button action of the Add Rule
Set form.
-deleteRuleApply 0|1

1 : Record the Apply button action of the Delete Rule
Set form.
0 : Do not record the Apply button action of the Delete
Rule Set form.

K-2015.06

Router Commands
Argument
Description
-deleteRuleOk 0|1

1 : Record the OK button action of the Delete Rule Set
form.
0 : Do not record the OK button action of the Delete
Rule Set form.
-delRuleSet ruleName
Specify the rule set to be deleted.
-newRuleSet ruleName
Specify the rule set to be added.
-renameRefRuleSet
ruleName
Specify the reference rule set when renaming a rule

set.
-renameRuleApply 0|1

1 : Record the Apply button action of the Rename
Rule Set form.
0 : Do not record the Apply button action of the
Rename Rule Set form.
-renameRuleOk 0|1

1 : Record the OK button action of the Rename Rule
Set form.
0 : Do not record the OK button action of the Rename
Rule Set form.
-renameRuleSet
ruleName
Specify the rule set to be renamed.
-routingTrack Auto|User
Specify the mode to generate the pitch and offset of

tracks.
Valid values: Auto and User.
-ruleChanged list
Record the modified rule values.
-ruleSet ruleName
-save 0|1

1 : Save the modified rule settings.
0 : Do not save the modified rule settings.
-specificSpacing 0|1

1 : Display advanced spacing rules.
0 : Do not display any advanced spacing rules.

K-2015.06
1011

Router Commands
Argument
Description
-tab tabName
Specify the tab to be defined.

Valid values: Metal and Via.
-viaGroup mode
Specify the via group.

Examples
# Example 1
# Change to Metal tab
lakerRuleSetting -tab Metal
# Example 2
# Add a new rule set test
lakerRuleSetting -addRefRuleSet default -newRuleSet test \
-addRuleOk 1
Example 3
# Delete the test rule set
lakerRuleSetting -delRuleSet test -deleteRuleOk 1
# Example 4
# Rename the test rule set as test1
lakerRuleSetting -renameRefRuleSet test -renameRuleSet test1 \
-renameRuleOk 1
See Also
Layout Window: Router > Digital Router > Rule Setting
lakerSearchRepair
The lakerSearchRepair command repairs open nets by ripping up and rerouting the nets.
Syntax
lakerSearchRepair -effort effort [-useMinWS] -ignoreNet
{netName_list, className_list } -ruleSet ruleName
Returns
None
1012

K-2015.06

Window Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-effort effort
Set up the repair effort.

Valid values: Small, Medium, and Large
(default=Medium).
Small: Repair and re-route 3 times.
Medium: Repair and re-route 5 times.
Large: Repair and re-route 10 times.
-ignoreNet
{netName_list,
className_list}
Ignored net names or net class names, defined in the

Constraint Manager window. Net names must be
separated by spaces. The wildcard characters * and
? are supported (for example: Vdd* *Vss B?). Class
names can be used to simplify the net name list.
-ruleSet ruleName
-useMinWS
When specified, use the minimum width and spacing

values derived from the technology file or LEF file.
Examples
# Example 1
# Skip nets with name Vdd* or CL1 class and rip-up & re-route
# 5 times by following the default rule setting.
lakerSearchRepair -effort Medium -ignoreNet { Vdd* CL1 } \
-ruleSet default
# Example 2
lakerSearchRepair -effort Small -useMinWS -ruleSet "default"
See Also
Layout Window: Router > Search and Repair
Window Commands
This section describes the Tcl commands applied to the Window commands.
lakerKeepColor
lakerLayoutDsgBroswer

K-2015.06
1013

Window Commands
lakerLockColor
lakerRealizeColor
lakerRemoveColor
lakerSetCreateColor
lakerUnlockColor
lakerKeepColor
The lakerKeepColor command sets the color attributes for coloring results
by DRD checking.
Syntax
lakerKeepColor [-all]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-all
When specified, keep all color attributes.
Examples
lakerSingleSel
lakerKeepColor
See Also
Layout Window: Assistants > Color Assistant > Keep Color
Layout Window: Assistants > Color Assistant > Keep All Color
lakerLayoutDsgBroswer
The lakerLayoutDsgBrowser command shows or hides the Design
Browser pane in the layout.
Syntax
lakerLayoutDsgBrowser [-display 0|1]
1014

K-2015.06

Window Commands
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-display 0|1

1 : Show the Design Browser pane.
0 : Hide the Design Browser pane.
Examples
lakerLayoutDsgBrowser -display 1
See Also
Layout Window: Assistants > Layout Design Browser
lakerLockColor
The lakerLockColor command locks the color status of selected shapes.
When both -colorIndex and -color are specified, the -colorIndex
setting is adopted.
Syntax
lakerLockColor [-color color_name | -colorIndex color_index]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-color color_name
Specify the color by name.
-colorIndex color_index
Specify the color by color index.
Examples
lakerSingleSel
lakerLockColor
lakerLockColor -color ColorA
lakerLockColor -colorIndex 1

K-2015.06
1015

Window Commands
See Also
Layout Window: Assistants > Color Assistant > Lock Color
Layout Window: Assistants > Color Assistant > Lock All Color
Layout Window: Assistants > Color Assistant > Lock Color 1
Layout Window: Assistants > Color Assistant > Lock Color 2
lakerRealizeColor
The lakerRealizeColor command realizes the color attributes by color
design constraints.
Syntax
lakerRealizeColor
Returns
Arguments
None
Examples
lakerRealizeColor
See Also
Layout Window: Assistants > Color Assistant > Realize Color
lakerRemoveColor
The lakerRemoveColor command removes the color attributes of layout
shapes.
Syntax
lakerRemoveColor [-target all | keep | locked]
Returns
1016

K-2015.06

Window Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-target all | keep | locked
Specify the target to remove its color attributes.

Valid values: all, keep, and locked.
Examples
lakerRemoveColor -target all
See Also
Layout Window: Assistants > Color Assistant > Remove Color
Layout Window: Assistants > Color Assistant > Remove All Color
lakerSetCreateColor
The lakerSetCreateColor command sets the coloring behavior for creation
features from the toolbar entry. When both -colorIndex and -color are
specified, the -colorIndex setting is adopted.
Syntax
lakerSetCreateColor -color color_name | -colorIndex
color_index
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-color color_name
Specify the color by name.
-colorIndex color_index
Specify the color by color index.
Examples
lakerPreference -createColor 1 -createColorMode locked
lakerSetCreateColor -color colorB
See Also
lakerPreference
Layout Window: Assistants > Color Assistant > Creation Mode (None)

K-2015.06
1017

Schematic Commands
Layout Window: Assistants > Color Assistant > Creation Mode (Color 1)
Layout Window: Assistants > Color Assistant > Creation Mode (Color 2)
lakerUnlockColor
The lakerUnlockColor command unlocks the color status of selected
shapes.
Syntax
lakerUnlockColor
Returns
Arguments
None
Examples
lakerSingleSel
lakerUnlockColor
See Also
Layout Window: Assistants > Color Assistant > Unlock Color
Schematic Commands
This section describes the Tcl commands applied to the Schematic commands
of the Schematic and Layout windows. These commands include:
1018
adpDsgPrint
adpDsgPopViewUp
adpDsgPushViewIn
adpDsgSignalHier
lakerSyncSchematicScope

K-2015.06

Schematic Commands
adpDsgPrint
The adpDsgPrint command prints a part of schematic view (viewing area on
the Schematic window pane) or the entire schematic cell view.
Syntax
adpDsgPrint [-printerName printerName] [-orient
orientation] [-paperSize paperSize] [-copy printCopy] [color printColor] [-toFile printToFile] [-fileName
fileName] [-header paperHeader] [-footer paperFooter] [magni magnification] [-view viewName]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-color printColor
Set output format in color.
-copy printCopy
Specify the number of copies (default=1).
-fileName filename
-footer paperFooter
Print the footer string.
-header paperHeader
Print the header string.
-layerPattern 0|1

1 : Print layer patterns.
0 : Do not print layer patterns.
View size is printed compared with a real chip size

(default=0).
-orient orientation

-paperSize paperSize

Valid values: Letter, A4, A3, A2, A1, A0, B, C, D, E and
User-defined (default=A4).

K-2015.06
1019

Schematic Commands
Argument
Description
-printerName
printerName
-ruler 0|1
Print the ruler line.

-toFile printToFile
Set the output to file or printer.
-view viewName
Print the whole chip or screen area (default = whole

chip).
Examples
adpDsgPrint -printerName hp
See Also
lakerPrintDesign
Layout Window: Schematic > Print
adpDsgPopViewUp
The adpDsgPopViewUp command retraces the upper level of the design.
Syntax
adpDsgPopViewUp -topWnd window_ID [-net full_net_path] [port full_port_path]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-net full_net_path
Specify the net in full path.
-port full_port_path
Specify the port in full path.
-topWnd window_ID
Examples
adpDsgPopViewUp -topWnd _adp2 -net 4_bit_mux2.I0.A
1020

K-2015.06

Schematic Commands
See Also
Layout Window: Schematic > Pop View Up
adpDsgPushViewIn
The adpDsgPushViewIn command browses the schematic view for selected
blocks, if such schematic view exists.
Syntax
adpDsgPushViewIn -topWnd window_ID -inst full_instance_path
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-inst full_instance_path
Specify the instance in full path.
-topWnd window_ID
Examples
adpDsgPushViewIn -topWnd _laker2 -inst 4_bit_mux2.I4
See Also
Layout Window: Schematic > Push View In
adpDsgSignalHier
The adpDsgSignalHier command queries the net connection information.
Syntax
adpDsgSignalHier -topWnd winId [-netName netName] [-scope
scopeName] [-level level] [-zoomToHighlighSet 0|1] [color layerName] [-dump 0|1] [-file filename][-delete
netName]
Returns
None

K-2015.06
1021

Schematic Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-color layerName
Specify the layer to highlight the traced net.
-delete netName
Specify the input net name. -delete is used for

removing the highlight of the previous trace results.
-dump 0|1

1 : Save the settings and the traced results to a file.
0 : Do not save the settings and the traced results to
a file.
-file filename
Specify the ASCII file with its full path. This is only
used with the -dump argument.
-level level
Specify the tracing level.

Valid value: an integer (1 to 50).
-netName netName
Specify the input net name. -netName is used for

tracing a new net.
-scope scopeName
Specify the scope to be traced.
-topWnd winId
-zoomToHighlighSet 0|1

1 : Enable the Zoom to Traced Net option.
0 : Disable the Zoom to Traced Net option.
Examples
adpDsgSignalHier -topWnd _adp2 -netName N_1 -level 2 \
-zoomToHighlighSet 0 -color HighLightSignalLayer2 -dump TRUE \
-file /xmpg2/home/john_chen/work/Laker3.2v5/play/chenshou.log
See Also
Layout Window: Schematic > Signal Trace
The lakerSyncSchematicScope command synchronizes the view scope in
the Schematic window with the layout view and the Design Browser pane.
1022

K-2015.06

UDD Commands
Syntax
Returns
None
Examples
See Also
Schematic Window: Right-click command menu > Schematic > Sync Scope
UDD Commands
This section describes the Tcl commands applied to the UDD commands of the
lakerDefDevAlign
lakerDefDevBoolean
lakerDefDevConnect
lakerDefDevCopy
lakerDefDevCutCorner
lakerDefDevDist
lakerDefDevFill
lakerDefDevGenPin
lakerDefDevRemove
lakerDefDevReturnValue
lakerDevHistoryEditor
lakerDevHistoryViewer
lakerUDDAdjustParam
lakerUDDFindParam
lakerUDDReplaceParam
lakerUDDSortByClickName

K-2015.06
1023

UDD Commands
lakerDefDevAlign
The lakerDefDevAlign command specifies the distance rule between
edges on an object or on two different objects.
Syntax
lakerDefDevDist -procName procname -name rulename [-fromGUI
0|1] [-edit [-value value] [-avail 0|1] [-master master]
[-group 0|1] [-direction 1|2] [-actEdgeID actedge] [refEdgeID refedge] ] [-rename newname] [-del]
Returns
None
Arguments
1024
Argument
Description
-actEdgeID actedge
Define the active edge of the align constraint with

format: {[^]edgeIndex(objectIndex)}; where ^
represents that the active is on the non-orthogonal
corner; edgeIndex is the index of the polygon's
pointArray or the path centerline's pointArray; and
objectIndex is the shape index defined by the
system.
-avail 0|1

1 : The rule specified by -name is available.
0 : The rule is unavailable.
-direction 1|2
Specify the alignment direction.

1 : For horizontal edges.
2 : For vertical edges.
-group 0|1

1 : The rule is in group mode.
0 : The rule is in separate mode.
-master master
Specify the index to the master of the active edges.
-name rulename
Specify the name of the specified rule.
-procName procname
Specify the procedure name.

K-2015.06

UDD Commands
Argument
Description
-refEdgeID refedge
Specify the reference edge of the rule with format:

{I(1):I(2):...I(m)(k)}, where k specifies the
index to the reference edge of the Instance I(m). There
can be only one reference edge in a rule.
-value value
Specify the distance value.

Valid value: Either a real number, or an expression.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerDefDevAlign -procName Proc_1 -name a1 -edit \
-value {1.75} -avail 0 -master 0 -group 1 -direction 2 \
-actEdgeID {^9(3)} -refEdgeID {8(2)}
# Example 2
lakerDefDevAlign -procName Proc_1 -name al1 -del
lakerDefDevBoolean
The lakerDefDevBoolean command takes unary Boolean operation on a
set of objects, or take binary Boolean operation on two sets of objects.
Syntax
lakerDefDevBoolean -procName procname -name rulename [fromGUI 0|1] [-edit [-phyLayer 0|1] { {[-layerNo layerno]
[-layerPurpose layerpurpose]} | [-layerName layername] }
[-opType optype] [-value value] [-op1FigID fig1] [op2FigID fig2] ] [-rename newname]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-layerName
Specify a parameter with layer type.
-layerNo layerno
Specify a layer number.
-layerPurpose
layerpurpose
Specify a layer purpose.

K-2015.06
1025

UDD Commands
Argument
Description
-name rulename
Specify the specified rule name.
-op1FigID fig1
The indices to objects of the first set. The format is as

follows: {I1, I2, ... In} where Ii stands for the
i-th objects index.
-op2FigID fig2
The indices to objects of the second set. The format is

similar to
-op1FigID fig1. It is used when optype is AND, OR,
or NOT.
-opType optype
Specify a Boolean operation type.

Valid values: SIZE, AND, OR, NOT, GROW, SHRINK and
SIZE4DIR.
-phyLayer 0|1

1 : The target layer is specified in layers purpose and
number.
0 : The target layer is specified in a pre-defined
parameter.
-procName procname
-rename newname
Replace the rule name specified by -name.
-value value
The values corresponding to optype. If optype is

GROW, SHRINK, or SIZE4DIR, the value can be {[left l] [-bottom b] [-right r] [-top t]}.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerDefDevBoolean -procName Proc_3 -name s1 -edit \
-phyLayer 1 -layerNo 18 -layerPurpose 126 -opType SIZE \
-value {1} -op1FigID {2,7}
# Example 2
lakerDefDevBoolean -procName Proc_3 -name n1 -edit \
-phyLayer 1 -layerNo 18 -layerPurpose 126 -opType NOT \
-op1FigID {2,7} -op2FigID {9}
1026

K-2015.06

UDD Commands
lakerDefDevConnect
The lakerDefDevConnect command connects two routable shapes at level
0 and level 1.
Syntax
lakerDefDevConnect -procName procName -startObj objIdx targetObj objIdx [-condition condExpr]
lakerDefDevConnect -layers routingRule
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-condition condExpr
Valid values: 0 and 1 (default=1).

0 : No connection is built.
1 : A connection is created.
-layers routingRule
The routingRule is as follows:

routing layer (poly and metal layer) : {0 2 2 0.35 0.45} :
{available, H-cost, V-cost, minWidth,
minSpace}
contact layer : {1 8} : {available, cost}
The total number of layers and sequence are defined in
the technology file. They cannot be changed.
-procName procname
Specify the name of the procedure.
-startObj objIdx
Specify the start object.
-targetObj objIdx
Specify the target object with objIdx as follows:

n : index of the connect shape.
n#name : index of the instance#pin name.
The connected objects must be the routable shape
(metal and poly) at level 0 or routable pin shape at level
1.

K-2015.06
1027

UDD Commands
Examples
lakerDefDevConnect -procName Proc_1 -startObj 0 -targetObj 1
lakerDefDevConnect -procName Proc_2 -startObj 1 -targetObj 2#2
lakerDefDevConnect -layers {0 2 2 0.35 0.45} {0 1 1 0.5 0.45} \
{1 1 1 0.6 0.5} {1 1 1 0.6 0.5} {1 1 1 0.6 0.5} \
{1 8} {1 5} {1 5} {1 8}
See Also
Layout Window: PTS > Connect
lakerDefDevCopy
The lakerDefDevCopy command copies objects.
Syntax
lakerDefDevCopy -procName procname [-edit [-cols col] [-rows
row] [-colSpace colspace] [-rowSpace rowspace] [removeOriginalObj 0|1] -figID figid]
Returns
None
Arguments
1028
Argument
Description
-cols col
-colSpace colspace
Specify the offset in X direction.
-figID figid
Specify the indices to object to be copied with the

following format: {I1, I2, ... In}, where Ii
stands for the i-th objects index.
-procName procname
Specify the name of the procedure.
-removeOriginalObj 0|1

1 : Remove the original objects specified in -figID.
0 : Do not remove the original objects specified in
-figID.
-rows row
Specify the number of rows.
-rowSpace rowspace
Specify the offset in Y direction.

K-2015.06

UDD Commands
Examples
lakerDefDevCopy -procName Proc_2 -edit -cols {2} -rows {3} \
-colSpace {0.4} -rowSpace {0.5} -removeOriginalObj 0 -figID {9,7}
lakerDefDevCutCorner
The lakerDefDevCutCorner command cuts the corners of objects with
specified arc length and number of arc sides.
Syntax
lakerDefDevCutCorner -procName procname [-edit [cutangleLen length] [-cutangleSides sides] [-cornerID
corners] ]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cornerID corners
Specify the corners of objects. The format is as follows:

{I(1,1):I(1,2):...I(1,m_1)(k1), ...,
I(n,1):I(n,2):...I(n,m_n)(kn)}, which is
similar to lakerDefDevAlign -actEdgeID
actedge, except that ki is the index to the corner of
the object indexed by I(j, m_i).
-cutangleLen length
Specify the length of cut corner.
-cutangleSides sides
Specify the number of segments to be fit in each cut

corner.
-procName procname
Examples
lakerDefDevCutCorner -procName Proc_3 -edit -cutangleLen {0.2} \
-cutangleSides {1} -cornerID {7(0),7(1),7(2),7(3)}
lakerDefDevDist
The lakerDefDevDist command specifies the distance rule between edges
on an object or on two different objects.
K-2015.06
1029

UDD Commands
Syntax
lakerDefDevDist -procName procname -name rulename [-fromGUI
0|1] [-edit [-value value] [-avail 0|1] [-actEdgeID
actedge] [-refEdgeID refedge]] [-rename newname] [-del]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-actEdgeID actedge
Specify the active edge of the rule. The format is as

follows: {I(k)}, where I is the index to the object, and
k is the index to the edge of that object.
-avail 0|1

1 : The rule specified by -name is available.
0 : The rule is unavailable.
-del
Delete the rule specified by -name.
-name rulename
-procName procname
-refEdgeID refedge
Specify the reference edge of the rule. The format is

similar to -actEdgeID.
-rename newname
-value value
Specify the distance value.

Valid value: a real number, or an expression.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerDefDevDist -procName Proc_2 -name dist1 -edit \
-value {0.9250} -avail 0 -actEdgeID {7(1)} -refEdgeID {7(3)}
# Example 2
lakerDefDevDist -procName Proc_2 -name dist1 -rename dist2
lakerDefDevFill
The lakerDefDevFill command fills in some objects with other objects.
1030

K-2015.06

UDD Commands
Syntax
lakerDefDevFill -procName procname [-edit [-fillByCV 0|1]
[-method method] [-fillRegionID fillregion] [-fillFigID
fillfig] [-lib lib -cell cell -view view] [-rows row] [cols col] [-magni mag] [-rotate rotate] [-colSpace
colspace] [-rowSpace rowspace] [-lEncl lenc] [-rEncl
renc] [-tEncl tenc] [-bEncl benc] [-justify just] ]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-bEnc benc
Specify the bottom enclosure.
-cell cell
Specify the cell name of the filling object.
-cols col
-colSpace colspace
Specify the offset in X direction.
-fillByCV 0|1

1 : The source is from cell view specified by -lib,
-cell, and -view.
0 : The source is from the selected object.
-fillFigID fillfig
Specify the indices to object used to fill. The format is

similar to
-fillRegionID.
-fillRegionID fillregion
Specify the indices to objects to be filled. The format

is {I1, I2, ... In}, where Ii stands for the i-th
objects index.
-justify just
Specify the justification factor. This is a pre-defined

Justify type parameter.
-lEncl lenc
Specify the left enclosure.
-lib lib
Specify the library name of the filling object.
-magni mag
Specify the ratio of magnification.

K-2015.06
1031

UDD Commands
Argument
Description
-method method
Specify the fill method.

Valid values: contact, guardring, and
distributing.
-procName procname
-rEncl renc
Specify the right enclosure.
-rotate rotate
Specify the rotation factor. This is a pre-defined

Rotate type parameter.
-rows row
-rowSpace rowspace
Specify the offset in Y direction.
-tEncl tenc
Specify the top enclosure.
-view view
Specify the view name of the filling object.
Examples
lakerDefDevFill -procName Proc_3 -edit -fillByCV 0 \
-fillRegionID {1} -fillFigID {6} -magni {1.0} \
-colSpace {0.2} -rowSpace {0.3} -lEncl {0.0} \
-rEncl {0.0} -tEncl {0.0} -bEncl {0.0} -rows {1} \
-cols {2} -method contact
lakerDefDevGenPin
The lakerDefDevGenPin command floats pins of the hierarchical UDD
device from lower level to top level.
Syntax
lakerDefDevGenPin -procName procname -portName portname portId portid
Returns
None
1032

K-2015.06

UDD Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-portId portid
The portid is as follows:

{ I(1,1):I(1,2):...I(1,m_1)#name_1 ,...,
I(n,1):I(n,2):...I(n,m_n)#name_n }
The hierachical traversal paths and names for each
ports are also under consideration. For the k-th port,
name_k specifies its port name in instance
I(i,m_k), and I(i,j) specifies the Id of an instance
with respect to the cell view of instance I(i,j-1),
while I(i,1) with respect to the top cell view.
-portName portname
Specify the name of the port to be floated.
-procName procname
Examples
lakerDefDevGenPin -procName Proc_0 -portName pinx \
-portId {2#p1,4:1#p2}
See Also
Layout Window: UDD > GenPin
lakerDefDevRemove
The lakerDefDevRemove command removes the objects on the specified
condition.
Syntax
lakerDefDevRemove -procName procname [-edit -condition
condition -removeID removeid]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-condition condition
Specify the condition to remove an object.

Valid value: a Boolean values (0|1) or an expression.

K-2015.06
1033

UDD Commands
Argument
Description
-procName procname
-removeID removeid
Specify the objects to be removed. The format is

{I1,I2,...In}, where Ik is the index of an object.
Examples
lakerDefDevRemove -procName Proc_3 -edit -condition {1} \
-removeID {9,7,3}
lakerDefDevReturnValue
The lakerDefDevReturnValue command specifies the value of an
expression to be returned.
Syntax
lakerDefDevReturnValue -procName procname -name rulename {[edit [-value value]] | [-rename newname] | [-del]}
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-del
Delete the rule specified by -name.
-name rulename
-procName procname
Specify the procedure name. The name is always

Return Value and it cannot be changed.
-rename newname
-value value
Specify the value or expression to be evaluated and

returned.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerDefDevReturnValue -procName {Return Value} -name ret1 \
-edit -value {$asdf+1}
1034

K-2015.06

UDD Commands
# Example 2
lakerDefDevReturnValue -procName {Return Value} -name ret11 \
-rename ret12
# Example 3
lakerDefDevReturnValue -procName {Return Value} -name ret12 -del
lakerDevHistoryEditor
The lakerDevHistoryEditor command adds modification history to the
UDD design.
Syntax
lakerDevHistoryEditor [-author author] -content {text}
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-author author
Specify the author of the history recorder.
-content {text}
Specify the contents of the history.
Examples
lakerDevHistoryEditor -author integ -content {this is a test}
See Also
Layout Window: UDD > History Record Editor
lakerDevHistoryViewer
The lakerDevHistoryViewer command browsers modification history to
the UDD design.
Syntax
lakerDevHistoryViewer -logFile logFileName
Returns
None

K-2015.06
1035

UDD Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-logFile logFileName
Specify a file name to save the history record.
Examples
lakerDevHistoryViewer -logFile currentMirror.log
See Also
Layout Window: UDD > History Record Viewer
lakerUDDAdjustParam
The lakerUDDAdjustParam command adjusts the order of device
parameters when creating an UDD as a sub-master.
Syntax
lakerUDDAdjustParam -params parameters
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-params parameters
Specify the desired order of parameter names.

Format of the parameters can be {Name_1,
Name_2, ... Name_n}.
Examples
lakerUDDAdjustParam -params {pp1 ss1 rr1 bb1 ll1 jj1 jj2 pp2 ff1 }
See Also
Layout Window: UDD > Parameter > Adjust
lakerUDDFindParam
The lakerUDDFindParam command finds the parameter by defined name, or
by the defined expressions of the Parameter, Distance, Align procedures.
1036

K-2015.06

UDD Commands
Syntax
lakerUDDFindParam [-exactParam 0|1] [-searParam paramName]
[-listType Type]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-exactParam 0|1

1 : Search paramName in the parameter names only.
0 : Search paramName in the parameter names and
expressions.
-listType Type
Specify the filtering options of the search results.

Valid values: Parameter, Distance, Align, Copy, Fill,
Boolean, Attribute, CutCorner, Remove,
RepDistance, and ReturnValue.
When searching all parameter types, this argument can be
omitted.
-searParam
paramName
Specify the name to be searched.
Examples
lakerUDDFindParam -exactParam 1 -searParam ff1
See Also
Layout Window: UDD > Parameter > Find / Replace
lakerUDDReplaceParam
The lakerUDDReplaceParam command replaces the parameter by the
specified name.
Syntax
lakerUDDReplaceParam [-exactParam 0|1] [-searParam
paramName] [-index index] [-repParam replaceName]
Returns
None

K-2015.06
1037

UDD Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-exactParam 0|1

1 : Search paramName in the parameter names only.
0 : Search paramName in the parameter names and
expressions.
-index index
Specify the index to the specified row in the Result grid

window.
-repParam
replaceName
Specify the name to be substituted.
-searParam
paramName
Specify the name to be searched and replaced.
Examples
lakerUDDReplaceParam -exactParam 0 -searParam ff1 \
-index 0 -repParam ff1b
See Also
Layout Window: UDD > Parameter > Find / Replace
lakerUDDSortByClickName
The lakerUDDSortByClickName command enables or disables the autosorting scheme while you click on the name column in the UDD window.
Syntax
lakerUDDSortByClickName -mode 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
1038
Argument
Description
-mode 0|1

1 : Enable the auto-sorting scheme.
0 : Disable the auto-sorting scheme.

K-2015.06

DFM Commands
Examples
lakerUDDSortByClickName -mode 1
DFM Commands
This section describes the Tcl command applied to the DFM commands of the
Layout window. The command includes:
lakerUpdateMCell
lakerUpdateMCell
The lakerUpdateMCell command updates the transistor, according to the
selected edges, by given a figure Id and rule set.
Syntax
lakerUpdateMCell -figId figId -rule ruleSet -mode 0|1
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-figId figId
Specify the figure identifier of the device.
-mode 0|1

1 : Update the device value only if the rule value is greater than
the corresponding rule value in device.
0 : Do not update the device value; and allow PolyEndCap,
Gate2GateSpace, ODEncCont, and Gate2ContSpace to
shrink the value as long as the value is greater than or equal
to their minimum rule value.
-rule ruleSet
Specify the rule set with value.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerUpdateMCell -figId 0x11111 \
-rule "minPoly2GateExtension 0.5"

K-2015.06
1039

Selection Commands
# Example 2
# If minPoly2GateExtension=0.5 and polyEndCap=1.5
# polyEndCap will be 1.0, as follows
lakerUpdateMCell -figId $figList -mode 0 \
# polyEndCap remains unchanged because 0.3 <
minPoly2GateExtension(0.5)
# polyEndCap remains unchanged because -mode 1".
# Only the value is greater than current one is updated.
See Also
Selection Commands
This section describes the Tcl commands applied to the Edit > Select
commands and the selection schemes available in the Layout window pane.
1040
lakerAreaSel
lakerAreaSelect
lakerCycleSel
lakerDecreaseSel
lakerDeselectAll
lakerGetSelSet
lakerIncreaseSel
lakerPreSel
lakerPreSelMode
lakerSelectAll
lakerSelectRedo

K-2015.06

Selection Commands
lakerSelectUndo
lakerSelKind
lakerSelLayer
lakerSelNetObj
lakerSetSelSet
lakerSingleSel
lakerToObject
lakerAreaSel
The lakerAreaSel command selects the objects in a specified area.
Syntax
lakerAreaSel -point (x1,y1)(x2,y2)
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-point (x1, y1) (x2, y2)
(x1,y1) specifies the lower left point of the selected

area while (x2,y2) specifies the upper right point.
Examples
# Example 1
# Select objects in the specified area (100,100) (200,200)
lakerAreaSel -point (100,100) (200,200)
lakerAreaSelect
The lakerAreaSelect command selects the objects in an area with the Area
Select command.
Syntax
lakerAreaSelect -point (x1, y1) (x2, y2) (x3, y3)... (xn,
yn) -iscloseptarray 0|1 [-isenclose 0|1]

K-2015.06
1041

Selection Commands
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-iscloseptarray 0|1

1 : Specify the point array.
0 : Do not specify the point array.
-isenclose 0|1

1 : Specify the select mode.
0 : Do not specify the select mode.
-point (x1, y1)

(x2, y2) (x3, y3)
... (xn, yn)

point array of the selected area.
Examples
# Example 1
# All objects overlap with rectangle (0,0) (0,10) (10,10) (10,0)
# that will be selected
lakerAreaSelect -point (0,0) (0,10) (10,10) (10,0) \
-iscloseptarray 1 -isenclose 0
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Select > Area Select
lakerCycleSel
The lakerCycleSel command pre-selects an object in a cyclic manner at the
current location.
Syntax
lakerCycleSel [-attachPoint 0|1 [-subTop 0|1]]
Returns
None
1042

K-2015.06

Selection Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-attachPoint 0|1

1 : Return the selected point list.
0 : Do not return the selected point list.
-subTop 0|1

1 : The coordinate of the returned point list is based on
the sub-top cell view.
0 : The coordinate of the returned point list is not based
on the sub-top cell view.
Examples
# Example 1
# Pre-select an object in a cyclic manner at the current location
lakerCycleSel
lakerDecreaseSel
The lakerDecreaseSel command decreases objects from the selection list.
Syntax
lakerDecreaseSel [-point (x1,y1)(x2,y2) [-traversedist
distance] | -figs dbId]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-figs dbId
Specify the dbFigId/dbPortId/dbPinId/

dbInstPortId lists of the selected object.
-point (x1, y1) (x2, y2)
(x1,y1) specifies the location of the selected object,

or the lower left point of the speficied area while
(x2,y2) specifies the location of upper right point.
-traversedist distance
Specify the traverse distance of the selected object.

K-2015.06
1043

Selection Commands
Examples
# Example 1
# Decrease object on point (100,100) from selection list
lakerDecreaseSel -point (100,100)
# Example 2
# Decrease objects on area (100,100)(200,200) from selection list
lakerDecreaseSel -point (100,100) (200,200)
set portId [dbFindPort -cv $cvId -name port1]
lakerDecreaseSel -figs $portId
lakerDeselectAll
The lakerDeselectAll command deselects all selected objects in the
active cell view.
Syntax
lakerDeselectAll
Returns
None
Examples
# deselect all selected objects in the active cell view
lakerDeselectAll
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Select > Deselect All
lakerGetSelSet
The lakerGetSelSet command returns a list of object identifiers of the
selected objects in the current window.
Syntax
lakerGetSelSet [-instPort 0|1]
lakerGetSelSet [-attr Net|GlueNo]
lakerGetSelSet [-attachPoint 0|1 [-subTop 0|1]]
Returns
A list of object identifiers if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
1044

K-2015.06

Selection Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-attachPoint 0|1

-attr Net|GlueNo
Specify the attributes of the selected objects.

Valid values: Net and GlueNo.
Net: Get the net identifiers of the selected objects. The

return format is {figId {netIds}}.
GlueNo: Get the glue number of the selected transistors.
The return format is {figId {glueNumberList}}.
This attribute is only valid for transistors.
-instPort 0|1

1 : Return the selected dbInstPortId.
0 : Do not return the selected dbInstPortId.
-subTop 0|1

1 : The coordinate of the returned point list is based on the
sub-top cell view.
0 : The coordinate of the returned point list is not based on
Examples
# Example 1
# Get the current selected object Id list
# output SelSet=12312e12 12312e13
set SelSet [lakerGetSelSet]
# Example 2
# Get the selected dbInstPortId
set SelectSet [lakerGetSelSet -instPort 1]
#
#
#
#
#
Example 3
Select the whole transistor and execute
"lakerGetSelSet -attr Net" on the message frame
of the Home Page. The returned value is:
{735c123 {735c600 735c700 735c800 735c900 735c000}}
# If only glue block 2 and 3 of the transistor are selected,

# the resulting value will be {735c123 {735c700 735c800}}

K-2015.06
1045

Selection Commands
#
#
#
#
#
#
trx: 735c123
n1: 735c600
n2: 735c700
n3: 735c800
n4: 735c900
n5: 735c000
# "-attr GlueNo" has the same behavior as returning

# glue numbers like:
# {735c123 {1 2 3 4 5}}
# {735c123 {2 3}}
lakerIncreaseSel
The lakerIncreaseSel command increases objects into the selection list.
Syntax
lakerIncreaseSel [-point (x1,y1)(x2,y2) [-traversedist
distance] | -figs dbId]
Returns
None
Arguments
1046
Argument
Description
-figs dbId

-point (x1, y1) (x2, y2)
(x1,y1) specifies the location of the selected object,

or the lower left point of the specified area while
(x2,y2) specifies the location of upper right point.
Specify the traverse distance of the selected object.

K-2015.06

Selection Commands
Examples
# Example 1
# Add an object on point (100,100) to the selection list
lakerIncreaseSel -point (100,100)
# Example 2
# Add objects on area (100,100) (200,200) to the selection list
lakerIncreaseSel -point (100,100) (200,200)
set portId [dbFindPort -cv $cvId -name port1]
lakerIncreaseSel -figs $portId
lakerPreSel
The lakerPreSel command pre-selects an object when the mouse cursor is
placed onto an object at the specified point.
Syntax
lakerPreSel -point (x0,y0) [-traversedist distance] [attachPoint 0|1 [-subTop 0|1]]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-attachPoint 0|1

-point (x0, y0)
(x0,y0) specifies the location of the pre-selected

object.
-subTop 0|1

1 : The coordinate of the returned point list is based on
0 : The coordinate of the returned point list is not based
on the sub-top cell view.
-traversedist
distance
Specify the traverse distance of the pre-selected object.

K-2015.06
1047

Selection Commands
Examples
# Example 1
# Pre-select the object on point (100,100)
lakerPreSelMode
The lakerPreSelMode command sets the pre-select mode while traversing.
Syntax
lakerPreSelMode -traversein 0|1 -fromtop 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-fromtop 0|1

1 : The pre-select mode traverses from the working cell view
or the top cell view.
0 : The pre-select mode does not traverse from the working
cell view or the top cell view.
-traversein 0|1

1 : The pre-select mode only traverses all shapes and MCell
objects on the working cell view.
0 : The pre-select mode traverses all objects as you see.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerPreSelMode -traversein 1 -fromtop 0
lakerSelectAll
The lakerSelectAll command selects all objects in the active cell view.
Syntax
lakerSelectAll
Returns
None
1048

K-2015.06

Selection Commands
Examples
# select all objects in the active cell view
lakerSelectAll
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Select > Select All
lakerSelectRedo
The lakerSelectRedo command repeats the last action performed by
lakerSelectUndo.
Syntax
lakerSelectRedo
Returns
None
Examples
# Repeat the last action perform by lakerSelectUndo
lakerSelectRedo
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Select > Select Redo
lakerSelectUndo
The lakerSelectUndo command reverts to the last selected objects.
Syntax
lakerSelectUndo
Returns
None
Examples
# Revert to the last selected objects
lakerSelectUndo
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Select > Select Undo

K-2015.06
1049

Selection Commands
lakerSelKind
The lakerSelKind command sets the type of traversing object for selector.
Syntax
lakerSelKind -selkind objkind
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-selkind objkind
Specify the type of traversing object.
Examples
# Example 1
# The selector traverses the following objects
# (Shape, Label, Instance, Array, Device, MCell)
{Shape Label Instance Array Device MCell}
# Example 2
# The selector traverses the following objects (Shape, Label,
# Instance, Array, flattened device and flattened MCell)
{Shape Label Instance Array IsDevFlatten IsMCellFlatten}
lakerSelLayer
The lakerSelLayer command sets valid layers of the traversing object for
the selector. This command impacts on the behavior of the Point-to-Point
Router, cyclic selection, pre-select, and Layer Tap functions.
Syntax
lakerSelLayer -resetfilterlayer | -filterlayer routeLayer
Returns
None
1050

K-2015.06

Selection Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-resetfilterlayer
Clean the setting of filter layers.
-filterlayer
routeLayer
Specify the list of filter layers in (layerNo, purposeNo)

format with a list of integers. Laker filters the layers that are
not defined in the filter list, as given in the following
example:
set routeLayer 13 252
set routeLayer [list 13 252 9 252]
Examples
# Example 1
# Only traverse the layers
# (13,252)(16,252)(18,252)(28,252)(39,252) on the selector
set routeLayer 13 252 16 252 18 252 28 252 39 252
lakerSelLayer -filterlayer $routeLayer
lakerSelNetObj
The lakerSelNetObj command traces more than one net of the selected
objects by physical connections at the same time and adds traced nets to the
select set.
Syntax
lakerSelNetObj [-disableConnStop | -disableConnAll | enableConnAll layoutConnection] [-mode
normal|increase|decrease -byPassInst 0|1 -stopAtShort
0|1] [-mode end -name {netName ...} ...]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-byPassInst 0|1

1 : Bypass instances.
0 : Stop extracting when encountering instance pins.
-disableConnAll
layoutConnection
Disable the connection relationship.

K-2015.06
1051

Selection Commands
Argument
Description
-disableConnStop
layoutConnection
Ignore the stop condition.
-enableConnAll
layoutConnection
Enable the connection relationship.
-mode selMode
Valid values: normal, increase, decrease, and

end.
normal: Extract connection relationships of objects
from the currently selected object and clear the
previously extracted objects.
increase: Extract connection relationships of objects
from the currently selected object.
decrease: Take off extracted objects.
end: Add the whole extracted object to the select set.
The argument
-name should follow -mode end.
-name {netName ...} ...
Specify the net name of extracted objects.
-stopAtShort 0|1

1 : Stop extracting if a different logic net is found.
0 : Ignore the logic condition.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerSelNetObj -disableConnStop METAL1 METAL2 VIA12 MMC
# Example 2
lakerSelNetObj -disableConnAll METAL1 METAL2 VIA12 MMC
# Example 3
lakerSelNetObj -enableConnAll METAL1 METAL2 VIA12 MMC
# Example 4
lakerSelNetObj -mode increase -byPassInst 1 -stopAtShort 0
# Example 5
lakerSelNetObj -mode end -name {n1 n2}
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Select > Select Net Objects
1052

K-2015.06

Selection Commands
lakerSetSelSet
The lakerSetSelSet command returns a list of dbIds if the list can be added
to the select set.
Syntax
lakerSetSelSet -figs dbId [{transistorId glueBlockList}]
Returns
A list of dbIds (the selected dbIds) or a glueBlockList of the transistorId if
Arguments
Argument
Description
-figs dbId
[{transistorId glueBlockList}]

When transistorId glueBlockList is
specified, the glue blocks of the specified
transistor can be selected.
Examples
# Example 1
# add dbFigId (12312e12 12312e13) list to the select set
lakerSetSelSet -figs {12312e12 12312e13}
set port1 [dbFindPort -cv $cvId -name port1]
lakerSetSelSet -figs $port1 $port2
# Example 2
// Select an rectangle and two glue blocks of a transistor.
set rect [lakerCreateRect -layerName MET1 \
-point (-4.99,-1.73) (-2.1,0.16)]
set trx [lakerCreateTransistor -point (0.84,-1.13) \
-useMaskResolution 0 -device pmos \
-gates 2 -type serial -contType MaxContact -xEnc 0.15 -yEnc 0.15 \
-xConSpace 0.4 -yConSpace 0.4 -co2Gate 0.3 -contAlign center \
-xCo2OdEnc 0.15 -yCo2OdEnc 0.15 -param \
-optLayerRepeatPattern { } -traitRepeatPattern { } \
-layerSetting { PP drawing enable none }]
lakerSetSelSet -figs $rect "{$trx 2 4}"

K-2015.06
1053

Selection Commands
lakerSingleSel
The lakerSingleSel command returns a list of dbId if an object can be
selected. This command emulates the mouse action Click-left on the design
window.
Syntax
lakerSingleSel [-point (x0,y0) [-traversedist distance] | figs dbId]
Returns
A list of dbIds (the selected dbIds) if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-figs dbId

-point (x0, y0)
Specify the traverse distance of pre-selected object.
Examples
# Example 1
# Select the object on point (100,100)
set SelObj [lakerSingleSel -point (100,100)]
# output SelObj=12312e12
# put the pre-select object to selecting list
lakerSingleSel
# put the object (12312e12) to selecting list
lakerSingleSel -figs 12312e12
lakerSingleSel -figs $port1
lakerToObject
The lakerToObject command changes the selection of object vertex to the
whole object.
1054

K-2015.06

Highlight Schemes
Syntax
lakerToObject
Returns
None
Examples
# Change all partially selected objects to whole selected objects
lakerToObject
See Also
Layout Window: Edit > Select > To Object
Highlight Schemes
This section describes the Tcl commands applied to the highlight schemes
available in the Layout window pane. These commands include:
lakerAddHighLightId
lakerAddHighLightInst
lakerAddHighLightLine
lakerAddHighLightNet
lakerAddHighLightObj
lakerAddHighLightPair
lakerAddHighLightPath
lakerAddHighLightPoly
lakerAddHighLightRect
lakerFixHighLightColor
lakerRmHighLightObj
lakerAddHighLightId
The lakerAddHighLightId command adds highlighted drawings for
specified figure identifiers.

K-2015.06
1055

Highlight Schemes
Syntax
lakerAddHighLightId -id idList [-offset offset] [-orient
orientation] [-magni magnitude] [-color colorId] [-ratio
ratio] [-zoom 0|1] [-draw 0|1] [-NoLog] [-class classNum]
[-toolTip "message"]
Returns
An identifier for the highlighted object if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Refer to lakerAddHighLightObj.
Examples
# Example 1
# Add highlighted drawings for general objects by figure Id
lakerAddHighLightId -id 27fe844 -color 3 -ratio 4
# Example 2
# Add highlighted drawings for transistor objects
# (1st and 4th glues) by figure Id
lakerAddHighLightId -id {27fe844 1 4}
See Also
lakerAddHighLightInst
The lakerAddHighLightInst command adds highlighted drawings for
specified instance names.
Syntax
lakerAddHighLightInst -name nameList [-color colorId] [ratio ratio] [-zoom 0|1] [-draw 0|1] [-NoLog] [-class
classNum] [-toolTip "message"]
Returns
Examples
lakerAddHighLightInst -name and:I0 inv:I1 xor:I2
See Also
1056

K-2015.06

Highlight Schemes
lakerAddHighLightLine
The lakerAddHighLightLine command adds highlighted drawings for
specified line segments.
Syntax
lakerAddHighLightLine (-point pointSet | -pointList
pointSetList) [-color colorId] [-ratio ratio] [-zoom 0|1]
[-draw 0|1] [-NoLog] [-refTop level] [-toolTip "message"]
Returns
None
Examples
# Example 1
# Add highlight object by lines
# The result creates three line segments:
#
1. (0,0) > (1,1)
#
2. (1,1) > (0,1)
#
3. (0,1) > (1,0)
lakerAddHighLightLine -point (0,0) (1,1) (0,1) (1,0)
# Example 2
lakerAddHighLightLine -pointList \
{ {(0.0,5.0) (2.0,5.0) (2.0,7.0)} \
{(4.0,7.0) (6.0,7.0) (6.0,5.0)} }
See Also
lakerAddHighLightNet
The lakerAddHighLightNet command adds highlighted drawings for
specified net names.
Syntax
lakerAddHighLightNet -name nameList [-color colorId] [-ratio
ratio] [-zoom 0|1] [-draw 0|1] [-NoLog] [-class classNum]
[-toolTip "message"]
Returns

K-2015.06
1057

Highlight Schemes
Examples
lakerAddHighLightNet -name netA netB netC
See Also
The lakerAddHighLightObj command adds highlighted drawings for
various kinds of objects, including instances, lines, nets, paths, polygons, and
rectangles.
This is the kernel command for lakerAddHighLightId, lakerAddHighLightInst,
lakerAddHighLightLine, lakerAddHighLightPair, lakerAddHighLightPath,
lakerAddHighLightPoly, lakerAddHighLightRect, and lakerRmHighLightObj.
Syntax
To add highlighted drawings:
lakerAddHighLightObj -type objectType {-name nameList | -id
idList [-offset offset] [-orient orientation] [-magni
magnitude] | (-point pointSet | -pointList pointSetList)
[-width PathWidth | -style PathStyle] [-file fileName]}
[-color colorId] [-ratio ratio] [-zoom 0|1] [-draw 0|1]
[-NoLog] [-class classNum] [-refTop level] [-toolTip
"message"]
For other operations:
lakerAddHighLightObj {-remove removeGroup [-removeId idList
| -removeName nameList | -removeClass classNum] [-draw
0|1] | -colorCycle 0|1 | -getHighLightLayer mode} [-NoLog]
Returns
A color identifier is returned if -getHighLightLayer is specified.
The current color identifier is returned if -getHighLightLayer Index is
specified.
The current System Highlight Layer is returned if -getHighLightLayer Id
is specified.
1058

K-2015.06

Highlight Schemes
Arguments
Argument
Description
-class classNum
Specify a class number that indicates the highlighted group

for adding highlighted drawings. The class number can be
used to remove all highlighted drawings of a class.
Valid value: a positve integer (default=0). Any class
numbers must be positive. The default class is 0 if no class
number is specified. If the number is negative, the
command returns 0.
-color
colorId [integer]
Specify the color identifier. Highlighted drawings are added

with the specified color initially. The color identifier is
classified in two types:
0: Used for special highlighted drawings.
1~10: Used for general highlighted drawings.
To remove the highlighted drawings, use -remove.
-colorCycle 0|1

1 : Repeat the color in the same order when adding the
next highlighted drawing.
0 : Do not repeat the color in the same order.
-draw 0|1

1 : Draw newly added highlighted drawings immediately.
0 : Do not draw newly added highlighted drawings.
-file fileName
Specify an RVE result file. This argument is valid only if type File is specified.
-getHighLightLayer
mode
Specify the query color.

Valid values: Index and Id, where Index is used to query
the color identifier, and Id is used to query the system
highlight layer.
-id idList
Specify a list of instance Ids or net figure Ids for general

instances or nets. Alternatively, specify an instance figure
Id, followed by one or more glue numbers, for transistor
instances.
-magni magnitude
Specify the magnitude of highlighted drawings. This is only

used for adding highlighted drawings which are specified
by the figure Id.

K-2015.06
1059

Highlight Schemes
1060
Argument
Description
-name nameList
Specify a list of instances or nets.
-NoLog
When specified, the command for this operation is not

logged.
-offset offset
Specify the absolute location of instances where the

highlighted drawings reside.
-orient orientation
Specify the orientation of highlighted drawings.
-point pointSet
Specify a point set with format: (x0,y0)... (xn,yn).

This is only used for adding highlighted drawings to shapes
(specified by -type).
-pointList
pointSetList
Specify a list of point sets with format:

{{(x0,y0)... (xn,yn)} {(x0,y0)...
(xn,yn)}}.
This is only used for adding highlighted drawings to line
segments (specified by -type Line), line pairs (specified
by -type Pair), paths (specified by -type Path),
polygons (specified by -type Poly), and rectangles
(specified by -type Rect).
-ratio ratio [integer]
Specify the ratio of the object size and the bounding box. If
it is less than or equal to 0, no redraw occurs; otherwise,
zoom in with the specified ratio. This argument is valid only
if -zoom is specified.
-refTop level
Specify the design hierarchy level to be referenced.

-remove
removeGroup
Specify the group of highlighted drawings to be removed.

This can be specified without the -type argument.
Valid value: all, special, and general; where all
includes special and general highlighted drawings,
which are specified by -color.

K-2015.06

Highlight Schemes
Argument
Description
-removeClass
classNum
Specify a class number.

Valid value: a positive integer. The classNum can be null
(no assigned value). If the number is negative, the
command returns 0.
If the class number is specified for
lakerRmHighLightObj, the -type argument is
unnecessary. The lakerRmHighLightObj command
removes all the highlighted drawings that belong to the
assigned class.
If the class number is not specified (null) with other remove
arguments, the default class number is used for removal.
-removeId idList
Specify a list of figure Ids to remove their highlighted

drawings. This can be specified without the -type Id
argument.
-removeName
nameList
Specify a list of instances or nets. This argument is valid

only if -type Inst or -type Net is specified.
-style pathStyle

Valid values: Truncate, Extend, Round, and Variable
(default=Truncate).
-toolTip "message"
Specify the message to be displayed when the mouse

cursor is placed over the highlighted marker.
Multiple message lines can be specified by adding \n, for
example:
-toolTip "Hello\nThis is a test"
The maximum characters per line is specified by
lakerPreference -ToolTipMaxChars.

K-2015.06
1061

Highlight Schemes
Argument
Description
-type objectType
Specify the type of highlighted objects.

Valid values: Id, Inst, Line, Net, Pair, Path, Poly,
and Rect. These values represent:
File: A specified file.
Id: General objects.
Inst: Instances.
Line: Line segments.
Net: Net names.
Pair: Line pairs.
Path: Paths.
Poly: Polygons.
Rect: Rectangles.
-width pathWidth
[contWidth]
Specify the path width and cutting width of contacts.

-zoom 0|1

1 : Zoom to fit the highlighted objects. This argument must
be specified if -ratio is used.
0 : Do not zoom to fit the highlighted objects.
Examples
# Example 1
# Add highlighted drawings for general objects by figure Id
lakerAddHighLightObj -type Id -id 27fe844 -color 3 -ratio 4
# Example 2
# Add highlighted drawings for transistor objects
# (1st and 4th glues)
# by figure Id
lakerAddHighLightObj -type Id -id {27fe844 1 4}
# Example 3
# Add highlighted drawings by instance name
lakerAddHighLightObj -type Inst -name and:I0 inv:I1 xor:I2
# Example 4
# Add highlighted drawings by lines
# The result creates three line segments:
#
1. (0,0) > (1,1)
#
2. (1,1) > (0,1)
#
3. (0,1) > (1,0)
lakerAddHighLightObj -type Line -point (0,0) (1,1) (0,1) (1,0)
1062

K-2015.06

Highlight Schemes
# Example 5
# Add highlighted drawings by net name
lakerAddHighLightObj -type Net -name netA netB
# Example 6
# Add highlighted drawings by line pair
# The result creates two line segments:
#
1. (0,0) > (1,1)
#
2. (0,1) > (1,0)
lakerAddHighLightObj -type Pair -point (0,0) (1,1) (0,1) (1,0)
# Example 7
# Add highlighted drawings by polygon
lakerAddHighLightObj -type Poly -point (0,0) (1,0) (1,1) (0,1)
# Example 8
# Add highlighted drawings by rectangle
lakerAddHighLightObj -type Rect -point (0,0) (1,1)
# Example 9
# Remove special highlighted drawings
lakerAddHighLightObj -remove special
# Example 10
# Get current highlight color index
lakerAddHighLightObj -getHighLightLayer Index
# Example 11
lakerAddHighLightObj -type Path -point \
(-47.15,17.55) (-47.15,10.0) (-38.1,10.0) (-38.1,3.45) \
-width 1.000000
# Example 12
(-47.15,17.55) (-47.15,10.0) (-38.1,10.0) (-38.1,3.45) \
-width 1.000000 -style Extend
# Example 13
(-47.15,17.55) (-47.15,10.0) (-38.1,10.0) (-38.1,3.45) \
-width 1.000000 -style Variable -beginExt 1.5 -endExt 1.5
# Example 14
# Add the highlight of a general object with the figure Id 27fe844
# & class "1"
lakerAddHighLightObj -type Id -id 27fe844 -class 1
# Example 15
# Remove the highlight of a general object with
# the figure id 27fe844
lakerRmHighLightObj -removeId 27fe844

K-2015.06
1063

Highlight Schemes
# Example 16
# Remove the highlighted drawing of instances
lakerRmHighLightObj -type Inst -removeName and:I0 inv:I1 xor:I2
# Example 17
# Remove the highlighted drawings of class "1"
lakerRmHighLightObj -removeClass 1
# Example 18
# (default class number)
# Example 19
lakerAddHighLightObj -class 0 -type Rect \
-pointList { { (0.0,0.0) (1.0,1.0) } { (10.0,10.0) (11.0,11.0) } }
# Example 20
lakerAddHighLightObj -class 0 -type Poly -pointList \
{ { (1.0,2.0) (3.0,2.0) (3.0,4.0) (2.0,4.0) (2.0,3.0) (1.0,3.0) } \
{ (6.0,2.0) (8.0,2.0) (8.0,4.0) (7.0,4.0) (7.0,3.0) (6.0,3.0) } }
# Example 21
lakerAddHighLightObj -class 0 -type Line -pointList \
{ {(0.0,5.0) (2.0,5.0) (2.0,7.0)} {(4.0,7.0) (6.0,7.0) (6.0,5.0)}
}
# Example 22
lakerAddHighLightObj -class 0 -type Pair -pointList \
{ { (0.0,8.0) (1.0,9.0) (0.0,9.0) (1.0,8.0) } \
{ (2.0,8.0) (3.0,9.0) (2.0,9.0) (3.0,8.0) } }
# Example 23
lakerAddHighLightObj -class 0 -type Path -width 0.2 \
-style Truncate -pointList \
{ { (0.0,10.0) (5.0,10.0) } { (6.0,12.0) (8.0,12.0) } }
# Example 24
# Show messages in a yellow tip window
lakerAddHighLightLine -point (0,0) (1,1) (0,1) (1,0) -toolTip $msg
lakerPreference -ToolTipMaxChars 15
lakerAddHighLightObj -toolTip "Hello\nThis is a test"
# The following messages are shown in a yellow tip window
# when the mouse cursor is placed over the highlighted marker
# (line):
# Hello
# This is a test
1064

K-2015.06

Highlight Schemes
lakerAddHighLightPair
The lakerAddHighLightPair command adds highlighted drawings for
specified line pairs.
Syntax
lakerAddHighLightPair (-point pointSet | -pointList
Returns
None
Examples
# Example 1
# Add the highlighted drawings by line pair
# The result creates two line segments:
#
1. (0,0) > (1,1)
#
2. (0,1) > (1,0)
lakerAddHighLightPair -point (0,0) (1,1) (0,1) (1,0)
# Example 2
lakerAddHighLightPair -pointList \
{ { (0.0,8.0) (1.0,9.0) (0.0,9.0) (1.0,8.0) } \
{ (2.0,8.0) (3.0,9.0) (2.0,9.0) (3.0,8.0) } }
See Also
lakerAddHighLightPath
The lakerAddHighLightPath command adds highlighted drawings for
specified paths.
Syntax
lakerAddHighLightPath (-point pointSet | -pointList
pointSetList) -width PathWidth [-style PathStyle] [refTop level] [-toolTip "message"]
Returns
None
K-2015.06
1065

Highlight Schemes
Examples
# Example 1
lakerAddHighLightPath -point \
(-47.15,17.55) (-47.15,10.0) (-38.1,10.0) (-38.1,3.45) \
-width 1.000000
# Example 2
(-47.15,17.55) (-47.15,10.0) (-38.1,10.0) (-38.1,3.45) \
-width 1.000000 -style Extend
# Example 3
(-47.15,17.55) (-47.15,10.0) (-38.1,10.0) (-38.1,3.45) \
-width 1.000000 -style Variable -beginExt 1.5 -endExt 1.5
# Example 4
lakerAddHighLightPath -pointList \
{ { (0.0,10.0) (5.0,10.0) } { (6.0,12.0) (8.0,12.0) } }
See Also
lakerAddHighLightPoly
The lakerAddHighLightPoly command adds highlighted drawings for
specified polygons.
Syntax
lakerAddHighLightPoly (-point pointSet | -pointList
Returns
None
Examples
# Example 1
lakerAddHighLightPoly -point (0,0) (1,0) (1,1) (0,1)
# Example 2
lakerAddHighLightPoly -pointList \
{ { (1.0,2.0) (3.0,2.0) (3.0,4.0) (2.0,4.0) (2.0,3.0) (1.0,3.0) } \
{ (6.0,2.0) (8.0,2.0) (8.0,4.0) (7.0,4.0) (7.0,3.0) (6.0,3.0) } }
1066

K-2015.06

Highlight Schemes
See Also
lakerAddHighLightRect
The lakerAddHighLightRect command adds highlighted drawings for
specified rectangles.
Syntax
lakerAddHighLightRect (-point pointSet | -pointList
Returns
None
Examples
# Example 1
lakerAddHighLightRect -point (0,0) (1,1)
# Example 2
lakerAddHighLightRect -pointList {{(0 0) (2,3)} {(2,5) (7,8)}}
# Example 3
set PointList "{(0 0) (2,3)} {(2,5) (7,8)}"
lakerAddHighLightRect -pointList $PointList
# Example 4
set PointList {{(0 0) (2,3)} {(2,5) (7,8)}}
# Example 5
set Point1 "(0,0) (2,3)"
set Point2 "(2,5) (7,8)"
set PointList [list $Point1 $Point2]
See Also

K-2015.06
1067

Highlight Schemes
lakerFixHighLightColor
The lakerFixHighLightColor command specifies whether to change the
highlight color when adding a new highlighted drawing.
Syntax
lakerFixHighLightColor -colorCycle 0|1 [-NoLog]
Returns
None
Examples
# Example 1
# Fix highlight color
lakerFixHighLightColor -colorCycle 0
See Also
lakerRmHighLightObj
The lakerRmHighLightObj command removes highlighted drawings by
figure identifiers, names or class numbers, including instances, line segments,
nets, polygons, and rectangles.
Syntax
lakerRmHighLightObj [-remove removeGroup | -removeId idList
| -removeName nameList | -removeClass classNum] [-type
objectType] [-draw 0|1] [-NoLog]
Returns
Examples
# Example 1
# Remove the highlighted drawing of a general object with
# the figure id 27fe844
lakerRmHighLightObj -removeId 27fe844
1068

K-2015.06

# Example 2
# Remove the highlighted drawing of instances
lakerRmHighLightObj -type Inst -removeName and:I0 inv:I1 xor:I2
# Example 3
# Example 4
# (default class number)
lakerRmHighLightObj -removeClass
See Also

This section describes the other Tcl commands applied to the user entry
functions in the Layout window.
User entry functions collect data (such as points of shape, a string or a number)
that is provided by user. These functions are known as Entry Functions.
Entry functions are a special class of Tcl functions, exclusive to the Layout
window, for GUI. These functions are used to digitize shapes, when invoking an
entry function, the current Layout window is the only active window where the
data can be entered.
lakerEnterBox
lakerEnterLine
lakerEnterPath
lakerEnterPoint
lakerEnterPolygon
lakerEnterBox
The lakerEnterBox command returns {x1, y1}{x2, y2} if the
coordinates of the bounding box can be obtained.
K-2015.06
1069

Syntax
lakerEnterBox [-ref top] [-timeout time] | [-end]
Returns
{x1, y1} {x2, y2} if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
TIMEOUT if fail to get the coordinates of the bounding box with timeout option;
Arguments
Argument
Description
-end
Abort the command itself.
-ref top
The coordinates are referenced to the top cell view.
-timeout time
Specify the time period for enabling the lakerEnterBox

command. If time is expired, the command is aborted. The
time is in seconds (secs).
Examples
# Example 1
set BBOX [lakerEnterBox]
# Example 2
# wait for getting the coordinate of the bounding box with
# restricted time 60 secs
lakerEnterBox -timeout 60
lakerEnterLine
The lakerEnterLine command returns {x1, y1} ... {xn, yn} if the
coordinates of the line can be obtained.
Syntax
lakerEnterLine [-ref top] [-timeout time] | [-end]
Returns
{x1, y1} ... {xn, yn} if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
TIMEOUT if fail to get the coordinates of the line with the timeout option;
1070

K-2015.06

Arguments
Argument
Description
-end
-ref top
-timeout time
Specify the time period for enabling the lakerEnterLine

command. If the time is expired, the command is aborted. The
Examples
# Example 1
set LINE [lakerEnterLine]
# Example 2
# wait for getting the coordinates of the line
# with restricted time 60 secs
lakerEnterPolygon -timeout 60
lakerEnterPath
The lakerEnterPath command returns {x1, y1} ... {xn, yn} if the
center line coordinates of the path can be obtained.
Syntax
lakerEnterPath [-width width] [-ref top] [-timeout time] |
[-end]
Returns
{x1, y1} ... {xn, yn} if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
TIMEOUT if fail to get the center line coordinates of the path with the timeout
option; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-end
-ref top

K-2015.06
1071

Argument
Description
-timeout time
Specify the time period for enabling the lakerEnterPath

command. If the time is expired, the command is aborted.
The time is in seconds (secs).
-width width

Examples
# Example 1
set PATHLINE [lakerEnterPath -width 0.25]
# Example 2
# wait for getting the center line coordinates of the path
# with restricted time 60 secs
lakerEnterPoint
The lakerEnterPoint command returns {x1, y1} if the coordinates of the
clicked point can be obtained.
Syntax
lakerEnterPoint [-ref top] [-timeout time]
Returns
{x1, y1} if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
TIMEOUT if fail to get the coordinates of the clicked point with the timeout
Arguments
1072
Argument
Description
-ref top
-timeout time
Specify the time period to invoke the lakerEnterPoint

command. If the time is expired, the command is aborted. The

K-2015.06

Examples
# Example 1
# wait for getting the coordinates of clicked point
lakerEnterPoint
# Example 2
# wait for getting the coordinates of the clicked point with
# restricted time 60 secs
lakerEnterPoint -timeout 60
lakerEnterPolygon
The lakerEnterPolygon command returns {x1, y1}...{xn yn} if the
coordinates of the polygon can be obtained.
Syntax
lakerEnterPolygon [-ref top] [-timeout time] | [-end]
Returns
{x1, y1}...{xn yn} if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
TIMEOUT if fail to get the coordinates of the polygon with the timeout option;
Arguments
Argument
Description
-end
-ref top
-timeout time
Specify the time period for enabling the

lakerEnterPolygon command. If the time is expired, the
command is aborted. The time is in seconds (secs).
Examples
# Example 1
set POLYGON [lakerEnterPolygon]
# Example 2
# Wait for getting the coordinate of the polygon with a restricted
# time 60 secs

K-2015.06
1073

Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
This section describes the other Tcl commands applied to the Layout window.
1074
lakerAbortFeature
lakerCellViewBBox
lakerChangeSelMode
lakerChkActiveCmd
lakerDsgDrag
lakerDsgDrop
lakerDsgMessage
lakerDumpShapeTcl
lakerExposeWnd
lakerFinishDevPara
lakerGetAliveWnd
lakerGetActiveWnd
lakerGetClipboardCV
lakerGetColPat
lakerGetCurLayerId
lakerGetCurPos
lakerGetCurViewBBox
lakerGetCurViewLevel
lakerGetDspPat
lakerGetHierPath
lakerGetEIPHierarchy
lakerGetHighlightList
lakerGetOpenCount
lakerGetOpenNets
lakerGetPromptDefinition

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
lakerGetWndByCV
lakerGetWndCellViewId
lakerGetwtWndId
lakerHaltUndo
lakerHasWndAlive
lakerMessage
lakerMsgForm
lakerQuickAPA
lakerRmAbutInfo
lakerRmPromptDefinition
lakerSetActiveLayer
lakerSetActiveWnd
lakerSetBrowserWnd
lakerSetObjType
lakerSetPromptDefinition
lakerSetSchematicAWnd
lakerSetSchematicFWnd
lakerSetSchematicWnd
lakerShiftCursorDown
lakerShiftCursorLeft
lakerShiftCursorRight
lakerShiftCursorUp
lakerStartDevPara
lakerSocketClientSend
lakerTransSchLogicName
lakerUpdateDevPara
lakerUpdateSingleDevPara

K-2015.06
1075

Miscellaneous
lakerAbortFeature
The lakerAbortFeature command terminates the activate feature.
Syntax
lakerAbortFeature
Returns
None
Examples
# terminate the activated feature
lakerAbortFeature
lakerCellViewBBox
The lakerCellViewBBox command return a cell view bounding box if the
cell view bounding box of the current Layout window can be obtained.
Syntax
lakerCellViewBBox
Returns
A bounding box if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Examples
# Get the cell view bounding box of the current Layout window
set CVBox [lakerCellViewBBox]
# output CVBox= { {0,0} {100,100} }
lakerChangeSelMode
The lakerChangeSelMode command changes the selection mode.
Syntax
lakerChangeSelMode -mode selMode
Returns
None
1076

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode selMode
Specify the selection mode.

Valid values: Object , Vertex, and DevObj.
Examples
# change the selection mode to OBJ mode
lakerChangeSelMode -mode Object
lakerChkActiveCmd
The lakerChkActiveCmd command queries the active feature for crosswindow operation between the Design Browser and Layout window panes only.
Syntax
lakerChkActiveCmd -name user_command
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-name user_command
Specify the Tcl command.
Examples
# If the active feature is "lakerManualAssociate",
# the return value is 1.
set a [lakerChkActiveCmd -name lakerManualAssociate]
a=1
# if the active feature is "lakerCreateRect",
# the return value is 0.
set a [lakerChkActiveCmd -name lakerManualAssociate]
a=0

K-2015.06
1077

Miscellaneous
lakerDsgDrag
The lakerDsgDrag command drags the selected objects of the Layout
window pane.
Syntax
lakerDsgDrag
Returns
None
Examples
# drag the selected objects of layout window
lakerDsgDrag
lakerDsgDrop
The lakerDsgDrop drops the dragged data to the Layout window pane.
If the dragged data does not exist and the mode is specified as create, it is
created on the Layout window pane; otherwise, the dragged data is highlighted
on the Layout window pane.
If the dragged data is not found on the current view level, the instance that
includes this dragged data is highlighted.
Syntax
lakerDsgDrop [-mode drop_mode | -instname input_instances |
-netname input_nets | -fromSource 1|0]
Returns
None
Arguments
1078
Argument
Description
-fromSource 0|1

1: Transform the schematic information to the
hierarchical layout data when bringing in the netlist
source data to the Layout window pane.
0: Do not transform any schematic information to the
hierarchical layout data when bringing in the netlist
source data to the Layout window pane.

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Argument
Description
-instname
input_instances
Specify the input instance.
-mode drop_mode
Specify the control mode to the dropping action.

Valid values: highlight, create, and auto
(default=auto).
-netname input_nets
Specify the input net.
Examples
# Highlight the selected object of spare cells in the layout window
lakerSpareDrag
lakerDsgDrop
# Highlight a pmos with the hierarchy name: /aoi21/I1/P1
# in the Schematic window
lakerDsgDrop -mode highlight -delimiter "/" \
-instname /aoi21/I1/P1 -fromSource 1
See Also
lakerSchBroDrop
lakerDsgMessage
The lakerDsgMessage command displays the specified message or variable
in the Message Line Area of the status bar under the Design window.
Syntax
lakerDsgMessage (msgString | var) [-wnd wndId]
Returns
None

K-2015.06
1079

Miscellaneous
Arguments
Argument
Description
msgString | var
Specify the message or variable to be displayed in the

Message Line Area of the status bar under the Design
window.
Valid values: msgString and var.
-wnd wndId
msgString : Plain message strings.

var : Variables.
Specify the Design window identifier for the prompt

message. If this option is not specified, the message is
displayed in the active Design window.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerDsgMessage Show this message in the active design window
# Example 2
lakerDsgMessage This is a test message -wnd [lakerGetActiveWnd]
# Example 3
lakerDsgMessage -wnd [lakerGetActiveWnd] $showMsg
lakerDumpShapeTcl
The lakerDumpShapeTcl command dumps the rectangle and polygon
shapes of the specified layer and purpose to a Tcl-based creation format.
Sourcing the output file can create identical shapes in different layouts.
1080

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Syntax
lakerDumpShapeTcl -layerName layerName -purpose purpose
file fileName]
[-
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file fileName
Specify the name of the output file

(default=lakerDumpShape.tcl).
-purpose purpose
Examples
lakerDumpShapeTcl -layerName PlaceBlockage -purpose blockage \
-file test.tcl
# In the output file, test.tcl:
# Layer: PlaceBlockage 249, Purpose: blockage 241
lakerCreatePoly -layerName PlaceBlockage -purpose blockage \
-point \
(23 30) (39 30) (39 16) (60 16) (60 50) (34 50) (34 72) (23 72)
lakerCreateRect -layerName PlaceBlockage -purpose blockage \
-point (91 41) (91 94) (162 94) (162 41)
lakerExposeWnd
The lakerExposeWnd command sets the window to the active window and
exposes the window to the top.
Syntax
lakerExposeWnd [-cv cellviewId | -wnd wndId]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId

K-2015.06
1081

Miscellaneous
Argument
Description
-wnd wndId
Examples
# Example 1
# Set Wnd1 to active window and expose it to the top
lakerExposeWnd -wnd Wnd1
# Example 2
# Set la22810 cell view Id to active window and
# expose it to the top
lakerExposeWnd -cv la22810
See Also
lakerGetWndByCV
lakerGetwtWndId
lakerSetActiveWnd
lakerFinishDevPara
The lakerFinishDevPara command flushes the top cell information of
device paramters after modification, saves the related schematic cell views and
refreshes the tree structure. This command is used in combination with
lakerStartDevPara and lakerUpdateDevPara.
For a large amount of device data to be modified, use lakerStartDevPara,
lakerUpdateDevPara, and lakerFinishDevPara to modify the device
parameter(s) from specified top cell.
Syntax
lakerFinishDevPara
Returns
None
1082

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Examples
lakerStartDevPara -delim / -libName design -topCell top \
-view schematic
lakerUpdateDevPara -name U1 -cell IV -point {0 20} \
-parameter {W 0.000006}
lakerUpdateDevPara -name I0/U1 -cell IV -point {10 10} \
-parameter {W 0.000006} {L 0.000005}
lakerFinishDevPara
See Also
lakerStartDevPara
lakerUpdateDevPara
lakerGetAliveWnd
The lakerGetAliveWnd command returns a list of window identifiers of all
alive windows if the specified window type exists.
Syntax
lakerGetAliveWnd [-type type]
Returns
A list of window identifiers if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-type type
Specify the window type.

Valid values: master, layout, stick, and match
(default=all types).
Examples
# Example 1
# Get all alive windows
lakerGetAliveWnd

K-2015.06
1083

Miscellaneous
# Example 2
# Get the alive Layout window
lakerGetAliveWnd -type layout
# Example 3
# Return the alive Matching Device Creator window
set lstWndId [lakerGetAliveWnd -type match]
See Also
lakerHasWndAlive
lakerGetActiveWnd
The lakerGetActiveWnd command returns a window identifier if the active
window exists.
Syntax
lakerGetActiveWnd
Returns
Examples
lakerGetActiveWnd
See Also
lakerSetActiveWnd
lakerGetClipboardCV
The lakerGetClipboardCV command gets the clipboard cell view identifier.
Syntax
lakerGetClipboardCV [-purge 0|1]
Returns
Clipboard cell view identifier if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
1084

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Arguments
Argument
Description
-purge 0|1

1 : Purge clipboard contents.
0 : Do not purge clipboard contents.
Examples
lakerGetClipboardCV -purge 0
lakerGetColPat
The lakerGetColPat command returns the layer attribute
(LAYER_ATTRIBUTE) in a string with particular condition. This
LAYER_ATTRIBUTE includes layerName purposeName layerNo
fillColor fillStipple lineColor lineStyle lineWidth
visible(0|1) selectable(0|1) appearance(0|1)\n. The string is
ended by \n.
Syntax
lakerGetColPat [-all [-default 0|1]] [-layerName layerName]
[-layerNo layerNo] [-purpose purposeName] [-purposeNo
purposeNo] [-layerName layerName -purpose purposeName]
[-layerName layerName -purposeNo purposeNo] [-layerNo
layerNo -purpose purposeName] [-layerNo layerNo purposeNo purposeNo]
Returns
The specified layer attribute if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-all
Return LAYER_ATTRIBUTE of all user-defined layers

in the current layer table. The attributes of the system
layers are not returned.
-default 0|1

1 : Get the attributes of the default layers with layer
number 249, including {ShortErr drawing},
{SoftPin pin}, etc.
0 : Do not get the attributes of the default layers.

K-2015.06
1085

Miscellaneous
1086
Argument
Description
Return LAYER_ATTRIBUTE of all user-defined and

system layers whose layer name is equal to the
specified layerName.

system layers whose layer name and purpose name
are equal to layerName and purposeName,
respectively.
-purposeNo purposeNo

system layers whose layer name and purpose
number are equal to layerName and purposeNo,
respectively.
-layerNo layerNo

system layers whose layer number is equal to
layerNo.
-layerNo layerNo

system layers whose layer number and purpose
name are equal to layerNo and purposeName,
respectively.
-layerNo layerNo

system layers whose layer number and purpose
number are equal to layerNo and purposeNo,
respectively.

system layers whose purpose name is equal to
purposeName.
If the purposeName is system, the
LAYER_ATTRIBUTE of all system layers is returned.

system layers whose purpose number is equal to
purposeNo.
If the purposeNo is 0, the LAYER_ATTRIBUTE of all
system layers is returned.

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Examples
# Example 1
# get all attributes of user-defined layers but not the default ones
lakerGetColPat -all -default 0
# Example 2
lakerGetColPat -purposeNo 1
# Example 3
lakerGetColPat -layerName HLNet0
lakerGetCurLayerId
The lakerGetCurLayerId command returns the layer identifier of the
current Layout window if it can be obtained.
Syntax
lakerGetCurLayerId
Returns
The layer identifier if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Examples
lakerGetCurLayerId
lakerGetCurPos
The lakerGetCurPos command returns the cursor position of the current
Layout window.
Syntax
lakerGetCurPos
Returns
The cursor position if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Examples
# return the cursor position (10,10) of current design
set curPos [lakerGetCurPos]
# output curPos=10 10

K-2015.06
1087

Miscellaneous
lakerGetCurViewBBox
The lakerGetCurViewBBox command returns the viewing bounding box of
the current window.
Syntax
lakerGetCurViewBBox [-refToTop 0|1]
Returns
{(x1,y1) (x2,y2)} if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-refToTop 0|1

1 : Refer the viewing bounding box to top.
0 : Do not refer the viewing bounding to top.
Examples
set box [lakerGetCurViewBBox]
# output box = {(0,0) (100,100)}
The lakerGetCurViewLevel command returns the view level that is referred
to top of current window.
Syntax
Returns
An integer number if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Examples
set level [lakerGetCurViewLevel]
# output level = 3
lakerGetDspPat
The lakerGetDspPat command can query other display settings.
1088

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Syntax
lakerGetDspPat -type patternType [-name patternName]
Returns
The corresponding pattern (as follows) if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Argument
Description
Return values
color
none
A list of all defined color names.
color
color name
Pattern of the specified color name; and the

format is: Red_Value Green_Value
Blue_Value Blink(0/1)
stipple
none
A list of all defined stipple names.
stipple
stipple name
Pattern of the specified stipple name; and the

format is: Pattern
lineStyle
none
A list of all defined lineStyle names.
lineStyle
lineStyle name
Pattern of the specified lineStyle name; and the

format is: Line_Width {Pattern}
group
none
A list of all defined group names.
group
group name
Pattern of the specified group name; and the

format is: Fill_Color Line_Color
Fill_Stipple Line_Style
Arguments
Argument
Description
-name patternName Specify the pattern name defined in the specified pattern
type. If this argument is not specified, a list of all defined
pattern names of the specified pattern type is returned.

K-2015.06
1089

Miscellaneous
Argument
Description
-type patternType
Specify the pattern type.

Valid values: color, stipple, lineStyle and group;
where color query for tfDisplayColor section;
stipple query for tfDisplayStipple section;
lineStyle query for tfDisplayLineStyle section;
and group query for tfDisplayGroup section in display
settings.
Examples
# Query all defined color names
lakerGetDspPat -type color
# output : white yellow silver cream ...
# Query some color pattern by its name
lakerGetDspPat -type color -name white
# output : 255 255 255 0
# Query some stipple pattern by its name
lakerGetDspPat -type stipple -name blank
# output : {0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0} {0 0 ...}
# ...
# Query some lineStyle pattern by its name
lakerGetDspPat -type lineStyle -name solid
# output : 1 {1 1}
# Query some group pattern by its name
lakerGetDspPat -type group -name orange
# output : orange dots red solid
lakerGetHierPath
The lakerGetHierPath command returns a cell list of the design hierarchy
from the top cell to the current cell in the active design window.
Syntax
lakerGetHierPath -cell cellName [-wnd wndId]
Returns
Cell list if successful, otherwise returns an empty string.
1090

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
Specify the cell name (to specify the bottom of the design
hierarchy from the top cell).
-wnd wndId
Examples
# Example 1
# The return cell list is {AD4FUL ADFULAH DGATE TGATE CONT}
lakerGetHierPath -cell CONT
# Example 2
lakerGetHierPath -cell CONT -wnd $wndId
lakerGetEIPHierarchy
The lakerGetEIPHierarchy command returns a list of EIP instance
identifiers from the active design window.
Syntax
lakerGetEIPHierarchy [-origTop 0|1] [-showMode 0|1] [-wnd
wndId]
Returns
List of instance identifiers (instIds) and mode if successful; otherwise, returns
0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-origTop 0|1

1 : Return a list of the trace of EIP instIds from the original
top.
0 : Return a list of the trace of EIP instIds from the sub top.
-showMode 0|1

1 : Show the EIP/Descend mode.
0 : Hide the EIP/Descend mode.
-wnd wndId

K-2015.06
1091

Miscellaneous
Examples
# Example 1
lakerGetEIPHierarchy -origTop 1 -showMode 1
# Example 2
lakerGetEIPHierarchy -origTop 0 -wnd $WndId
lakerGetHighlightList
The lakerGetHighlightList command returns the net name, instance
name or both net/instance names of the highlighted objects in the current
window.
Syntax
lakerGetHighlightList -group groupName -type nameType
Returns
The net name, instance name or both net/instance names of the highlighted
objects in the current window if successful; otherwise, returns nothing. For
example:
when returning both the net/instance names, the return value may look like:
{net {{/x1/.../net1} {/x2/.../netx}}} {inst {{/x1/../I1}
{/x2/../I2}}}
when returning the net name only, the return value may look like:
{net {{/x1/.../net1} {/x2/.../netx}}} {inst {}}
when returning the instance name only, the return value may look like:
{net {}} {inst {{/x1/../I1} {/x2/../I2}}}
Arguments
1092
Argument
Description
-group groupName
Valid values: all, special, and general; where

all includes special and general highlighted
objects, which are specified by -color (default=all).
-type nameType
Valid values: all, net, and inst; where all includes

net and inst (default=all).

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Examples
# Example 1
lakerGetHighlightList -type all \
{net {{net2} {net1}}} {inst {{I5:1260} {A5:1176} {Inst_a} \
{array} {tx2_gate1} {tx_gate1} {tx_gate2}}}
# Example 2
lakerGetHighlightList -type net \
{net {{net2} {net1}}} {inst {}}
# Example 3
lakerGetHighlightList -type inst \
{net {}} {inst {{I5:1260} {A5:1176} {Inst_a} {array} \
{tx2_gate1} {tx_gate1} {tx_gate2}}}
lakerGetOpenCount
The lakerGetOpenCount command returns the number of the opened
libraries or cell views.
Syntax
lakerGetOpenCount -lib libName [-cell cellName -view
viewName]
Returns
Number of opening library or cell view (a positive number that is greater than or
equal to 0) if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
Specify the cell to be checked.
-lib libName
-view viewName
Specify the view name of the opened cell.

Valid values: layout and schematic.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerGetOpenCount -lib demoLib
# Example 2
lakerGetOpenCount -lib demoLib -cell demoCell -view layout

K-2015.06
1093

Miscellaneous
See Also
None
lakerGetOpenNets
The lakerGetOpenNets command returns the name of open nets if they can
be obtained successfully.
This Tcl command honors the Ignore Global Flight Lines and Ignore Net option
settings in the Connectivity tab of the Preferences form.
Syntax
lakerGetOpenNets -cv cellviewId
Returns
Name of open nets if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cv cellviewId
Examples
# Example 1
lakerGetOpenNets -cv [lakerGetWndCellViewId]
See Also
None
The lakerGetPromptDefinition command returns the contents of device
prompt definitions.
Syntax
lakerGetPromptDefinition -lib libName -cell cellName -view
ViewName
Returns
The contents of device prompt definitions if successful; otherwise, returns
nothing.
1094

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
Specify the cell to be retrieved.
-lib libName
-view viewName
Specify the view name of the cell.
Examples
lakerGetPromptDefinition -lib DevPrompt -cell Tr1 -view pcc
See Also
lakerGetWndByCV
The lakerGetWndByCV command returns a list of window identifiers if the
window identifiers can be obtained by cell view identifier with specified
arguments.
Syntax
lakerGetWndByCV -cv cellviewId [-work|-oritop] [-all]
Returns
List of window identifiers if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-all
Return all the window identifiers that match the cell view
identifier. If it is not specified, this command only returns the
existing first element window identifiers list.
-cv cellviewId
Cell view identifier that can be obtained by

lakerGetWndCellViewId, lakerGetWndCellViewId -oritop,
and lakerGetWndCellViewId -top.
The lakerGetWndCellViewId command returns the current
working cellviewId in the layout window when the
lakerGetWndByCV command only accepts the identifier of
top cell view. This is the default.

K-2015.06
1095

Miscellaneous
Argument
Description
-oritop
Get the identifier of original cell view that is opened in the

layout window.
-work
Get the identifier of working cell view that is opened in the

layout window.
Examples
# If there is a library named EX_ADDER_3 and
# its top cell view is AD4FUL.
# Supposed that we open three layout windows for the same top cell.
# Example 1
# get the current working cellviewId in any layout windows
# <return> : 69e540c
lakerGetWndByCV -cv 69e540c
# <return> : Wnd1
lakerGetWndByCV -cv 69e540c -work
# <return> : Wnd1
lakerGetWndByCV -cv 69e540c -work -all
# <return> : Wnd1 Wnd2 Wnd3
# Example 2
# use EIP mode for top ADFULAH cell in the Layout windows Wnd2
and Wnd3
# and let Wnd3 is the current Layout window
# <return> : 69e4c0c
lakerGetWndByCV -cv 69e4c0c
# <return> : nothing
lakerGetWndByCV -cv 69e4c0c -work
# <return> : Wnd2
lakerGetWndByCV -cv 69e4c0c -work -all
# <return> : Wnd2 Wnd3
# Example 3
# use EIP mode for DGATE cell in top ADFULAH cell within the Layout
# window Wnd2 and let Wnd2 is the current layout window
# <return> : nothing
# <return> : Wnd2
# <return> : Wnd2
1096

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
# Example 4
# Let Wnd2 is the current layout window
lakerGetWndCellViewId -oritop
# <return> : Wnd1
# <return> : Wnd1
# <return> : Wnd1
lakerGetWndByCV -cv 69e540c -oritop -all
# <return> : Wnd1 Wnd2 Wnd3
# Example 5
# Let Wnd2 is the current layout window
lakerGetWndCellViewId -top
# <return> : Wnd1
# <return> : Wnd1
# <return> : Wnd1
See Also
lakerGetwtWndId
The lakerGetWndCellViewId command returns a cell view identifier if the
cell view identifier of the current Layout window or the Layout window specified
with -wnd can be obtained.
Syntax
lakerGetWndCellViewId [-top] [-oritop] [-wnd wndId | -focus]
Returns
A cell view identifier if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-focus
Get the cell view identifier in the focused Layout window.

K-2015.06
1097

Miscellaneous
Argument
Description
-oritop
Get the identifier of the original cell view that is opened in the
current Layout window or the Layout window specified with wnd.
-top
Get the identifier of the sub-top cell view in the current Layout
window or the Layout window specified with -wnd. The subtop cell view is opened from the original cell view for Descend
Edit mode. When it is not under Descend Edit mode, -top
may act as -oritop.
-wnd wndId
Specify the window identifier of the desired Layout window.
Examples
# Example 1
# Get the original cellviewId in EIP mode
lakerGetWndCellViewId -oritop
# Example 2
# Get the sub-top cellviewId in Descend Edit mode
lakerGetWndCellViewId -top
# Example 3
# Get the current working cellviewId in the specified Layout window
lakerGetWndCellViewId -wnd Wnd6
# Example 4
# Get the top cellviewId in the focused Layout window
lakerGetWndCellViewId -top -focus
See Also
lakerGetwtWndId
lakerHasWndAlive
lakerGetwtWndId
The lakerGetwtWndId command returns a window identifier if the window
identifier of the current window or the window specified with -topWnd can be
obtained.
Syntax
lakerGetwtWndId [-type type | -focus] [-topWnd]
1098

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-focus
Get the window identifier in the focused window.
-topWnd
Get the top window identifier of the specified window.
-type type

(default=all types).
Examples
# Example 1
lakerGetwtWndId -focus
# Example 2
lakerGetwtWndId -topWnd
# Example 3
# Return the window Id of the current Layout window
set windowId [lakerGetwtWndId]
# output windowId=3200d48
# Example 4
# Return the Layout window only
set windowId [lakerGetwtWndId -type layout]
# Example 5
# Return the Matching Device Creator window only
set windowId [lakerGetwtWndId -type match]
See Also
lakerHasWndAlive
lakerHaltUndo
The lakerHaltUndo command suspends the Capture Undo action when start is specified, or continues the action when -end is specified.
Limitation:

K-2015.06
1099

Miscellaneous
The usage of lakerHaltUndo -start and lakerHaltUndo -end

should be paired.
Please run commands in one cell view between the pair of

lakerHaltUndo. DO NOT change cell views when lakerHaltUndo start is invoked. It may cause unexpected problems.
Syntax
To suspend the Capture Undo action,
To continue the Capture Undo action,
lakerHaltUndo -end
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-end
Abort this feature.
-start
Start the feature.
Examples
lakerCreateRect -point (0,0) (10,10) // here is stage 1
// suspend Capture Undo
...
db or laker commands
...
lakerHaltUndo -end
// resume and do Capture Undo
lakerUndo
// do this command to rollback to stage 1
lakerHasWndAlive
The lakerHasWndAlive command returns 1 if the specified window type
exists.
Syntax
lakerHasWndAlive [-type type]
Returns
1100

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Arguments
Argument
Description
-type type

(default=layout).
Examples
# Example 1
# All design windows are closed
set bHasLayoutWnd [lakerHasWndAlive]
# Output bHasLayoutWnd = 0
set bHasMainWnd [lakerHasWndAlive -type master]
# Output bHasMainWnd = 1
# Example 2
# Open any design windows
set bHasLayoutWnd [lakerHasWndAlive]
set bHasLayoutWnd [lakerHasWndAlive -type layout]
# Example 3
# Open the Matching Device Creator window
set bHasMatchWnd [lakerHasWndAlive -type match]
# Output bHasMatchWnd = 1
See Also
lakerGetwtWndId
lakerMessage
The lakerMessage command shows messages.
Syntax
lakerMessage (msgString|var)
Returns
None

K-2015.06
1101

Miscellaneous
Arguments
Argument
Description
msgString
Message strings.
var
Variables.
Examples
lakerMessage This is a test string
lakerMessage $msg
lakerMsgForm
The lakerMsgForm command creates and shows a message form with the
specified form name and message contents.
Syntax
lakerMsgForm -name formName -text msgText [-close 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-close 0|1

1 : Close the message form.
0 : Do not close the message form.
-name formName
Specify the name of the message form.
-text msgText
Specify the message contents that are appended into the

form. No space is allowed in the text.
Examples
lakerMsgForm -name ABC -text Message1
lakerMsgForm -name ABC -text Message2
lakerMsgForm -name ABC -close 1
1102

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
lakerQuickAPA
The lakerQuickAPA command only works for the instance which contains
soft pins. If the instance contains fixed pins, a message is displayed and the
command is aborted.
After the command is invoked, the soft pins in this instance are moved
according to their net connection. A minimum wire length is generated for the
net connection.
Syntax
lakerQuickAPA -instance instName
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-instance instName
Examples
# xgosc is the instance name (its master cell is inv0)
# After the Tcl is invoked, the soft pins in the xgosc are moved
# accordingly to minimize the wire length.
lakerQuickAPA -instance xgosc
lakerRmAbutInfo
The lakerRmAbutInfo command removes the information of the selected
device abutment.
Syntax
lakerRmAbutInfo
Returns
None
Examples
lakerRmAbutInfo

K-2015.06
1103

Miscellaneous
The lakerRmPromptDefinition command removes the definition of
prompts in a device.
Syntax
lakerRmPromptDefinition -lib libName -cell cellName -view
ViewName
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
-content PromptDefinition
Specify the definition of prompts.
-lib libName
-view viewName
Examples
lakerRmPromptDefinition -lib DevPrompt -cell Tr1 -view pcc
See Also
lakerSetActiveLayer
The lakerSetActiveLayer command sets the specified layer to the active
layer. This command is similar to the select layer action on the Layer Table.
Syntax
lakerSetActiveLayer -layerName layerName [-purpose purpose]
Returns
None
1104

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Arguments
Argument
Description
-purpose purpose
Examples
lakerSetActiveLayer -layerName poly -purpose drawing
lakerSetActiveWnd
The lakerSetActiveWnd command sets the specified window to the active
window.
Syntax
lakerSetActiveWnd [-wnd windowName | -window windowId | focus]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-focus
Specify the focused window.
-window windowId
-wnd windowName
Specify the window named assigned to the opened

window.
Examples
# Example 1
# Set the active window by window name
lakerSetActiveWnd -wnd Wnd1
# Example 2
# Set the focused window to the active window
lakerSetActiveWnd -focus
# Example 3
# Set the firstly-opened layout window to the active window
lakerSetActiveWnd -window [lakerGetwtWndId -type layout -topWnd]
K-2015.06
1105

Miscellaneous
lakerSetBrowserWnd
The lakerSetBrowserWnd command shows or hides the Design Browser
pane.
Syntax
lakerSetBrowserWnd -show 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-show 0|1

1 : Show the Design Browser pane.
0 : Hide the Design Browser pane.
Examples
# Show the Design Browser pane
lakerSetBrowserWnd -show 1
lakerSetObjType
The lakerSetObjType command setups the selectability, visibility, and offgrid checking of objects.
Syntax
lakerSetObjType -obj obj -sel 0|1 -vis 0|1 -grid 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
1106
Argument
Description
-grid 0|1

1 : Use off-grid checking. This is not valid for InstancePin,
Region, and MWRouteGuide.
0 : Do not use off-grid checking.

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Argument
Description
-obj obj
Specify the object type.

Valid values: All, Rectangle, Polygon, Path, Text,
Ellipse, Doughnut, Route, Instance, InstancePin,
Array, Device, Contact, Transistor, Resistor,
Capacitor, GuardRing, StackedPath, DimensionMark,
RulerLabel, Region, and MWRouteGuide.
-sel 0|1

1 : Enable the selectability of objects. This is not valid for
MWRouteGuide.
0 : Disable the selectability of objects.
-vis 0|1

1 : Enable the visibility of objects. This is not valid for
InstancePin.
0 : Disable the visibility of objects.
Examples
lakerSetObjType -obj All -sel 0 -vis 1 -grid 1
lakerSetObjType -obj All -sel 1
lakerSetObjType -obj InstancePin -sel 0
See Also
Home Page: Options > Preferences > Object tab
The lakerSetPromptDefinition command sets/replaces the definitions of
prompts for a device into the cell view.
Syntax
lakerSetPromptDefinition -lib libName -cell cellName -view
ViewName -content PromptDefinition
Returns

K-2015.06
1107

Miscellaneous
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
-content PromptDefinition
Specify the definition of prompts.
-lib libName
-view viewName
Examples
lakerSetPromptDefinition -lib DevPrompt -cell Tr1 \
-view pcc -content { ... }
See Also
lakerSetSchematicAWnd
The lakerSetSchematicAWnd command shows or hides the stand-alone
Schematic window.
Syntax
lakerSetSchematicAWnd -show 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-show 0|1

1 : Show the stand-alone Schematic window.
0 : Hide the stand-alone Schematic window.
Examples
# show the stand-alone Schematic window
lakerSetSchematicAWnd -show 1
1108

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
lakerSetSchematicFWnd
The lakerSetSchematicFWnd command shows or hides the schematic
floating window.
Syntax
lakerSetSchematicFWnd -show 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-show 0|1

1 : Showthe schematic floating window.
0 : Hide the schematic floating window.
Examples
# Example 1
# Show the schematic floating window
lakerSetSchematicFWnd -show 1
lakerSetSchematicWnd
The lakerSetSchematicWnd command shows or hides the Schematic
window.
Syntax
lakerSetSchematicWnd -show 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-show 0|1

1 : Show the Schematic window.
0 : Hide the Schematic window.

K-2015.06
1109

Miscellaneous
Examples
# Example 1
# Show the schematic window
lakerSetSchematicWnd -show 1
The lakerShiftCursorDown command shifts the cursor downwards one
unit. If the Snap Cursor to Minor Ratio option is turned on, the one unit
means Ratio*Minor_X_Spacing; otherwise, it is the Minimum Resolution.
Syntax
Returns
None
Examples
See Also
lakerShiftCursorUp
The lakerShiftCursorLeft command shifts the cursor leftwards one unit.
If the Snap Cursor to Minor Ratio option is turned on, the one unit means
Ratio*Minor_Y_Spacing; otherwise, it is the Minimum Resolution.
Syntax
Returns
None
Examples
See Also
1110

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
lakerShiftCursorUp
The lakerShiftCursorRight command shifts the cursor rightwards one
unit. If the Snap Cursor to Minor Ratio option is turned on, the one unit
means Ratio*Minor_Y_Spacing; otherwise, it is the Minimum Resolution.
Syntax
Returns
None
Examples
See Also
lakerShiftCursorUp
lakerShiftCursorUp
The lakerShiftCursorUp command shifts the cursor upwards one unit. If
the Snap Cursor to Minor Ratio option is turned on, the one unit means
Ratio*Minor_X_Spacing; otherwise, it is the Minimum Resolution.
Syntax
lakerShiftCursorUp
Returns
None
Examples
lakerShiftCursorUp
See Also

K-2015.06
1111

Miscellaneous
lakerStartDevPara
The lakerStartDevPara command sets the top cell information of device
paramters modification. This command is used in combination with the
lakerUpdateDevPara and lakerFinishDevPara commands.
For large amount of device data to be modified, use the lakerStartDevPara,
lakerUpdateDevPara, and lakerFinishDevPara commands to modify the device
parameter(s) from specified top cell. These commands can only be used for
inactive libraries, which do not have any opening cell views.
Syntax
lakerStartDevPara -libName libName -topCellName topCellName
-viewName viewName -delimiter delimiter
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-delimiter
delimiter
Specify the delimiter (default=HierarchyDelimiter in the

laker.rc file).
-libName
libName
-topCellName
topCellName
-viewName
viewName
Specify the view name (default=schematic).
Examples
lakerStartDevPara -delim / -libName design -topCell top \
-view schematic
1112

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous

-parameter {W 0.000006} {L 0.000005}
lakerFinishDevPara
See Also
lakerFinishDevPara
lakerUpdateDevPara
lakerSocketClientSend
The lakerSocketClientSend command sends data out by the specified
TCP/IP socket port; and then waits for response from the same socket port.
Syntax
lakerSocketClientSend -host hostName -port portNum -str
content
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-host hostName
Specify the host that TCP/IP socket port belongs. The

default value is localhost.
-port portNum
Specify the port number of TCP/IP socket port.
-str content
Specify the content to send out by the specified TCP/IP

socket port.

K-2015.06
1113

Miscellaneous
Examples
# Send a string out by a specified TCP/IP socket port
lakerSocketClientSend -port 9189 -str {Test TCP/IP socket.}
lakerTransSchLogicName
The lakerTransSchLogicName command translates instance/net names
between the schematic and logic. This command is used for Laker/Composer
Integration.
Syntax
lakerTransSchLogicName -type (instance | net) -logicName
logicNameList
lakerTransSchLogicName -type (instance | net) -schName
schNameList [-fullScope 0|1]
Returns
List of the translated results if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-fullScope 0|1

1 : Translated result name is in full scope.
0 : Translated result name is not in full scope.
-logicName
logicNameList
Specify the logic object name list that needs to be translated

into the schematic object name list.
-schName
schNameList
Specify the schematic object name list that needs to be

translated into logic object name list.
-type typeName
Specify the translated object type.

Valid values: instance, and net (default=instance).
Examples
lakerTransSchLogicName -schName {Adder/Sum Adder/SumX} \
-fullScope 0
1114

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
lakerUpdateDevPara
This lakerUpdateDevPara command updates the top cell information of
device paramter(s) modification. This command is used in combination with the
lakerStartDevPara and lakerFinishDevPara commands.
For large amount of device data to be modified, use the lakerStartDevPara,
lakerUpdateDevPara, and lakerFinishDevPara commands to modify the device
parameter(s) from specified top cell.
Syntax
lakerUpdateDevPara -name instName -cell cellName -point
point -parameter paraList
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
Specify the master cell name.
-name instName
Specify the instance name with its full path.
-parameter paraList
Declare a list of parameter pairs. A parameter pair

consists of a parameter name and a parameter value. For
example:
{W 0.000006} {L 0.000005}.
-point point
Declare the coordinate of the instance in the schematic

database. This is not kept in the Laker database at the
current stage.

K-2015.06
1115

Miscellaneous
Examples
lakerStartDevPara -delim / -libName design -topCell top -view
schematic
lakerUpdateDevPara -name U1 -cell IV -point {0 20} -parameter {W
0.000006}
lakerUpdateDevPara -name I0/U1 -cell IV -point {10 10} -parameter
{W 0.000006}
{W 0.000006}
{W 0.000006}
{W 0.000006}
-parameter {W 0.000006} {L 0.000005}
lakerFinishDevPara
See Also
lakerStartDevPara
lakerFinishDevPara
This lakerUpdateSingleDevPara command updates parameters of a
single device, saves related schematic cell views and refreshes the tree
structure. It is used to replace the lakerStartDevPara, lakerUpdateDevPara,
and lakerFinishDevPara commands.
If there is only a few devices to be modified, use this command for a single
device modification.
Syntax
lakerUpdateSingleDevPara -topCellId topCellID -name
instName -cell cellName -point point -parameter paraList
Returns
None
Arguments
1116
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
Specify the master cell name.
-name instName
Specify the instance name with its full path.

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Argument
Description
-parameter paraList
Declare a list of parameter pairs. A parameter pair

consists of a parameter name and a parameter value.
For example:
{W 0.000006} {L 0.000005}.
-point point
Declare the coordinate of the instance in the schematic

database. This is not kept in the Laker database at the
current stage.
-topCellId topCellID
Specify the top cell view identifier.
Examples
lakerCDLIn -file upPara.sp -lib upPara -forkChild 0 \
-ps 0 -case Preserve
lakerNewCell -lib upPara -cell VNot
set topId [dbOpenCV -lib upPara -cell Top -view schematic]
lakerUpdateSingleDevPara -topCellId $topId -name xI0/mn2 \
-cell n -parameter {W 0.000006}
lakerUpdateSingleDevPara -topCellId
-cell p -parameter {W 0.000012}
$topId -name xI0/mp1 \
dbCloseCV -cv $topId
See Also
lakerStartDevPara
lakerUpdateDevPara
lakerFinishDevPara

K-2015.06
1117

Miscellaneous
1118

K-2015.06
8
Custom Digital Router
This section describes the definable Tcl commands applied to the Custom
Digital Router commands of the Layout window. These commands and
To quickly query the syntax of a particular Tcl command, type -help or -h in

the message frame of the Home Page.
The Custom Digital Router Tcl commands are listed as follows. Tcl commands
and arguments are sorted alphabetically.
analyzeConnectivity
analyzeRoute
changeRouteTypeStatus
checkAntenna
checkConnectivity
checkExistingVio
checkSuboptimal
checkTieHiLo
checkViolation
createBone
createBoneConst
createChannel
createRouteRule
deleteRoute
deleteRouteRule

K-2015.06
1119
Chapter 8: Custom Digital Router
1120
deleteVioNet
dumpRoutingConstraintTemplate
fillNotchGap
fixAntenna
fixNetRatio
fixRoutePattern
fixViolation
insertDFMVia
insertDoubleVia
lakerCDRIn
lakerCDROut
removeDoubleVia
replaceStdVia
reportCorner
reportDesign
reportJog
reportRouteInfo
reportRouteRule
reportRule
reportSpine
routeBlockRing
routeBlockWire
routeNet
routeRail
routeRing
routeStripe
setIgnoredNetsInRouting
setOption
setRouteRule

K-2015.06

analyzeConnectivity
setRoutingConstraint
setRoutingLayer
reportSuggestedPitch
analyzeConnectivity
The analyzeConnectivity command analyzes the connectivity of one net
only and show the results in various colors on the GUI.
Syntax
analyzeConnectivity -net netName [-synopsys | -cadence |
-magma | -springSoft]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cadence
Set the connectivity model as Cadence mode.
-magma
Set the connectivity model as Magma mode.
-net netName
Check the connectivity of the specified net.
-springSoft
Set the connectivity model as SpringSoft mode. This is

the default model.
-synopsys
Set the connectivity model as Synopsys mode.
Examples
# Example 1
analyzeConnectivity -net myNet -springSoft
See Also
checkConnectivity

K-2015.06
1121

analyzeRoute
analyzeRoute
The analyzeRoute command analyzes the routing shapes of specified nets,
and reports the statistic information of specified nets.
Syntax
analyzeRoute [-net string] [-minRatio double] [-reportLimit
integer] [-netRatio] [-viaPinRatio] [-layer string] [useHPWL]
Returns
Arguments
1122
Argument
Description
-layer string
Sort the results by the wire length of the specified layer.

This argument cannot be specified with -netRatio
and -viaPinRatio.
-minRatio double
Report a net if the ratio is greater than the specified

value.
-net string
Specify the net name pattern.
-netRatio
Report a net if its total wire length to the Manhattan

distance is greater than the minimum ratio.
-reportLimit integer
Specify the maximum number of reported nets.

-useHPWL
Use a half perimeter of the net bounding box, instead of

the Manhattan distance for the calculation of
netRatio.
-viaPinRatio
Report a net if its total via count to the pin count is

greater than the minimum ratio.

K-2015.06

Examples
# Example 1
analyzeRoute
# Example 2
analyzeRoute -net { netToBeAnalyzed }
# Example 3
analyzeRoute -minRatio 4 -netRatio -reportLimit 50
See Also
checkConnectivity
routeNet
The changeRouteTypeStatus command changes the route status and route
type of physical shapes.
Syntax
changeRouteTypeStatus [-net string] [-allSignalNets] [allPGNets] [-default] [-free] [-fixed] [-stripe] [normal] [-dryRun] [-verbose] [-viaOnly] [-wireOnly] [spineOnly] [-wireGreaterThanMinWidth] [wireGreaterThanVarWidth] [-wireWithMinWidth] [viaWithMinimumCut integer] [-viaWithMasterName string]
[-onlyChangeNonPrewire]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-allPGNets
Apply changes to all power/ground (PG) nets.
-allSignalNets
Apply changes to all signal nets.

K-2015.06
1123

Argument
Description
-default
Perform all common route type changes, including:
Apply status change to all shapes of PG nets.

Mark all normal/special and free PG wires (nonmin-width wires) as fixed.
Mark all normal/special and free PG vias with more

than 2 cuts as fixed.
When -default is specified, any other conflict
arguments are ignored.
1124
-dryRun
Go through the nets, dry-run the changes without

changing anything for real.
-fixed
Change the route status as fixed.
-free
Change the route status as free.
-net string
Specify the net name (or name pattern) of routes to be

changed.
-normal
Change the route type as normal.
-onlyChangeNonPrewire
Only apply changes to non-prewire wires/vias.
-spineOnly
Only perform on spine wires.
-stripe
Change the route type as stripe.
-verbose
Only change the route type/status of spine wires (skip

vias/normal wires).
-viaOnly
Only change the route type/status on vias.
-viaWithMasterName string
Change all vias with the specified master name.
-viaWithMinimumCut
integer
Change the routes of the vias with the number of cuts

that is greater than or equal to the specified value.
-wireGreaterThanMinWidth
Change the routes of the wires with width greater than

the minimum width of the layer.
-wireGreaterThanVarWidth
Change the routes of the wires with width greater than

the var-width of the layer.

K-2015.06

checkAntenna
Argument
Description
-wireOnly
Only change the route type/status on wires.
-wireWithMinWidth
Change the routes of the wires with width equal to the

minimum width of the layer.
Examples
# Example 1
changeRouteTypeStatus -default
# Example 2
changeRouteTypeStatus -spineOnly -fixed
# Example 3
changeRouteTypeStatus -allPGNets -stripe
See Also
deleteRoute
checkAntenna
The checkAntenna command checks antenna violations.
Syntax
checkAntenna [-threads threadsNum ] [-net netName] [reportFile fileName [-showAll]]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-net netName
Only check antenna violations for the specified net. The

-reportFile fileName
Report the detailed information of antenna violations in

a specified file.
-showAll
Report all antenna information in the file (including

violations).

K-2015.06
1125

checkConnectivity
Argument
Description
-threads threadsNum
Specify the number of threads used for checking

antenna violations.
Examples
# Example 1
# Check antenna violations for all nets except Power/Ground
checkAntenna
# Example 2
# Only check antenna violations for net myNet1
checkAntenna -net myNet1
# Example 3
# Check antenna violations for the nets with prefix my
checkAntenna -net my*
See Also
fixAntenna
checkConnectivity
The checkConnectivity command checks the physical connectivity status
of a pin. It traverses from the driving pin (if it has port shapes).
Syntax
checkConnectivity [-synopsys | -cadence | -magma | springSoft] [-net netName] [-threads threadsNum] [skipNoRouteNets] [-skipPGNets] [-checkPGPins] [incremental] [-checkShapes]
Returns
Arguments
1126
Argument
Description
-cadence

K-2015.06

checkConnectivity
Argument
Description
-checkPGPins
When it is specified, PG pins connectivity in PG nets are

checked. When it is not specified, only tie-Hi/Lo pins are
be checked.
-checkShapes
Check open shapes as in analyzeConnectivity.
-incremental
Check connectivity incrementally based on the touched

connection of pins.
-magma
-net netName
Check the openness of one net only and generate a

detailed report for the specified net.
The -net and -threads arguments cannot be
specified simultaneously.
-skipNoRouteNets
Do not report open nets that have no routing (totally

unrouted nets).
The -net and -skipNoRouteNets arguments cannot
be specified simultaneously.
-skipPGNets
Do not report the checking of PG nets for connectivity.

The -net and -skipPGNets arguments cannot be
-springSoft

the default model.
-synopsys
-threads threadsNum
Specify the number of threads used for openness

checking. The default is the maximum avaliable CPU
threads.
Examples
# Example 1
checkConnectivity -springSoft -threads 4
# Example 2
checkConnectivity -magma -net myNet

K-2015.06
1127

checkExistingVio
See Also
analyzeRoute
checkExistingVio
The checkExistingVio command checks the existing DRC violations for
pins in the cell.
Syntax
checkExistingVio [-threads threadsNum] [-selectedTypeOnly]
[-signalOnly]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-selectedTypeOnly
Only report violations for the selected type.
-signalOnly
Skip checking PG instance pins. Only report a violation

if the port-rect belongs to a signal pin.
-threads threadsNum
Specify the number of threads used for violation

checking.
Examples
# Example 1
checkExistingVio -signalOnly
# Example 2
checkExistingVio -selectedTypeOnly
See Also
checkViolation
1128

K-2015.06

checkSuboptimal
checkSuboptimal
The checkSuboptimal command checks the sub-optimal routing shapes.
Syntax
checkSuboptimal [-threads threadsNum] [-signalOnly] [freeOnly]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-freeOnly
Only report a sub-optimal if it is related to a status-free

(not fixed) shape.
-signalOnly
Only report a sub-optimal route if it is related to a signal

or tie-hi/lo net shape.
-threads threadsNum
Specify the threads used for sub-optimal route checking.

Examples
# Example 1
checkSuboptimal
See Also
checkViolation
checkExistingVio
fixRoutePattern
fixNetRatio
checkTieHiLo
The checkTieHiLo command checks the physical connectivity status of a tiehi/lo pin. It traverses from a tie-hi/lo pin (the signal port that is connected to a
PG net) to PG pre-wires.

K-2015.06
1129

checkViolation
Syntax
checkTieHiLo [-threads threadsNum] [-net netName] [-synopsys
| -cadence | -magma | -springSoft]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cadence
-magma
-net netName
Check the tie-hi/lo openness of one net only and

generate a detailed report for the specified net.
The -net and -threads arguments cannot be
-springSoft

the default model.
-synopsys
-threads threadsNum
Specify the number of threads used for checking tie-hi/lo

openness. The default is the maximum avaliable CPU
threads.
Examples
# Example 1
checkTieHiLo -springSoft -threads 4
# Example 2
checkTieHiLo -cadence -net myNet
See Also
checkConnectivity
checkViolation
The checkViolation command checks existing DRC violations.
1130

K-2015.06

createBone
Syntax
checkViolation [-threads threadsNum] [-selectedTypeOnly] [signalOnly] [-freeOnly] [-net string]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-freeOnly
Only check violations related to the wires or vias that

have a ROUTED route status.
-net string
Only check violations related to the wires and vias of the

specified net.
-selectedTypeOnly
Only check violations for the specified violation type.
-signalOnly
Only check violations related to a signal wire/via or tiehi/lo net shapes. A signal wire and via are defined by the
wires and vias that have a NONE route type.
-threads threadsNum

checking.
Examples
# Example 1
checkViolation -signalOnly
# Example 2
checkViolation -selectedTypeOnly
See Also
checkExistingVio
checkSuboptimal
fixRoutePattern
insertDFMVia
createBone
The createBone command creates the positions of all bone shapes to the file.
K-2015.06
1131

createBoneConst
Syntax
createBone [-dumpFile fileName]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-dumpFile fileName
Specify the file name to dump the positions of all bone

shapes.
Examples
# Example 1
-createBone -dumpFile bone.txt
See Also
createBoneConst
createChannel
createBoneConst
The createBoneConst command creates the constraints of bone and
shielding.
Syntax
createBoneConst -net netName -width width -spacing spacing
-layer layer [-order order] [-compact] \
[-channel channel][-bindNet bindNet][-fullTrack]\
[-shieldingNet netName][-shieldingWidth width]\
[-shieldingSpacing spacing]
Returns
None
Arguments
1132
Argument
Description
-bindNet bindNet
Specify the binding nets that bones of all binding nets

should be created on the same track.

K-2015.06

createChannel
Argument
Description
-channel channel
Specify a channel that the bone can be placed.
-compact
All bones in the channel are compacted to the top.
-fullTrack
Specify the bone to be created from the left to the right.
-layer layer
Specify the left coordinate of the channel.
-net netName
-order order
Specify the compact order.
-shieldingNet netName Specify the name of the shielding net.

-shieldingSpacing
spacing
Specify the spacing of the shielding net.
-shieldingWidth width
Specify the width of the shielding net.
-spacing spacing
Specify the width of the spacing.
-width width
Specify the width of the bone.
Examples
# Example 1
-createBoneConst -net IN_TOPB -order 5 -compact -channel C1 \
-width 6 -spacing 6 -layer metal2 -fullTrack \
-shieldingNet gnd! -shieldingWidth 12
See Also
createBone
createChannel
createChannel
The createChannel command creates a channel that constrains bones to be
created in the channel area.

K-2015.06
1133

createRouteRule
Syntax
createChannel -name name -start start -end end [-left left]
[-right right] [-compactTop]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-compactTop
All bones in the channel are compacted to the top.
-end end
Specify the top coordinate of the channel.
-left left
Specify the left coordinate of the channel.
-name name
Specify the name of the channel.
-right right
Specify the right coordinate of the channel.
-start start
Specify the bottom coordinate of the channel.
Examples
# Example 1
-createChannel -name C3 -start 7557 -end 7961 -left 42600 \
-right 48600 -compactTop
See Also
createBone
createBoneConst
createRouteRule
The createRouteRule command creates non-default rules.
Syntax
createRouteRule [-rule string] [-refRule string] [-wireWidth
string] [-wireSpacing string] [-wireWidthMultiplier
string] [-wireSpacingMultiplier string] [-minLayer
string] [-maxLayer string]
1134

K-2015.06

createRouteRule
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-maxLayer string
Specify the name of maxLayer for routing.
-minLayer string
Specify the name of minLayer for routing.
-refRule string
Specify the name of the reference route rule.
-rule string
Specify the name of the route rule.
-wireSpacing string
Specify the desired wire spacing on the specified layer

with the following format: {layerName1
wireSpacing1 ... layerNameN wireSpacingN}.
-wireSpacingMultiplier
string
Specify the desired wire spacing multiplier on the

specified layer with the following format: {layerName1
wireSpacingMultiplier1 ... layerNameN
wireSpacingMultiplierN}.
-wireWidth string
Specify the desired wire width on the specified layer with

the following format: {layerName1 wireWidth1 ...
layerNameN wireWidthN}.
-wireWidthMultiplier
string
Specify the desired wire width multiplier on the specified

layer with the following format: {layerName1
wireWidthMultiplier1 ... layerNameN
wireWidthMultiplierN}.
Examples
# Example 1
createRouteRule -rule double_Width \
-wireWidth { metal1 0.23 metal2 0.28 metal3 0.56 metal4 0.88 }
# Example 2
createRouteRule -rule double_Spacing \
-wireSpacing { metal1 0.23 metal2 0.28 metal3 0.56 metal4 0.92 }
# Example 3
createRouteRule -rule myRule -wireWidth { M1 0.1}

K-2015.06
1135

deleteRoute
See Also
reportRouteRule
deleteRouteRule
deleteRoute
The deleteRoute command deletes the routes for specified nets.
Syntax
deleteRoute [-netNames {net1 net2 ... netn}] [-allNets]
[-types {types}] [-allSignals] [-subTypes {sub_types}]
Returns
1 if successful; otherwise, returns 0 (if a fatal error occurs).
Arguments
Argument
Description
-allNets
Delete routes for all nets.
-allSignals
Delete routes for signal-type nets (including tie-hi/lo nets).
-netNames
{net1 net2 ... netn}
Specify the net names of the routes to be deleted by the

wildcard character * or regular expressions. If more than
one expression is specified, separate the net names with
spaces and enclose the expressions with parentheses {}.
-subTypes
{sub_types}
Delete the shapes that match the subtypes of the specified

nets.
Valid values: RING, STRIPE, FOLLOWPIN, PINCONN,
IOWIRE, COREWIRE, and BLOCKWIRE.
-types {types}
Delete the routes that match the type of the specified nets.
Valid values: PG and SIGNAL.
Examples
# Example 1
# Delete routes of nets a and b
deleteRoute -netNames {a b}
1136

K-2015.06

deleteRouteRule
# Example 2
# Delete RING and STRIPE shapes of PG nets
deleteRoute -types PG -subtypes {RING STRIPE}
See Also
routeNet
deleteRouteRule
The deleteRouteRule command deletes non-default rules.
Syntax
deleteRouteRule [-all] [-rule string]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-all
Delete all route rules.
-rule string
Specify the name of the route rule to be deleted.
Examples
# Example 1
deleteRouteRule -all
# Example 2
deleteRouteRule -rule myRule
See Also
createRouteRule
reportRouteRule
deleteVioNet
The deleteVioNet command deletes the specified nets for all routing shapes
with violations.

K-2015.06
1137

Syntax
deleteVioNet [-nets string]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-nets string
Specify the names of nets to be deleted for all shapes with

violations. Multiple net names must be separated by
spaces, for example: -nets {net1 ... netN}. The
Examples
# Example 1
# Delete the specific violated nets
deleteVioNet -nets {vioNet1 vioNet2 vioNet3}
# Example 2
# Delete the specific violated nets by using the wildcard *
deleteVioNet -nets {vioNet*}
The dumpRoutingConstraintTemplate command dumps the routing
constraints to a specified file.
Syntax
dumpRoutingConstraintTemplate -file string
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file string
Specify the filename of the routing constraint template file.
Examples
# Example 1
dumpRoutingConstraintTemplate -file route1
1138

K-2015.06

fillNotchGap
fillNotchGap
The fillNotchGap command fills the notch/gap for DRC.
Syntax
fillNotchGap [-signalOnly] [-freeOnly] [-remove] [-threads
treadsNum]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-freeOnly
Only fill the notch/gap if it is related to a status-free (not

fixed) shape.
-remove
Remove all notch/gap fill shapes (NetRect) from the

design.
-signalOnly
Only fill the notch/gap if it is related to a signal or tie-hi/lo

net shape.
-threads threadsNum Specify the number of threads used for notch/gap filling.
Examples
# Example 1
fillNotchGap
# Example 2
fillNotchGap -remove
See Also
checkViolation
fixViolation
fixAntenna
The fixAntenna command is used to fix antenna violations.

K-2015.06
1139

fixAntenna
Syntax
fixAntenna [-net netName] [-useDiodeInsertion -power name
-ground name [-diodeCells name] [-diodePrefix name]]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-diodeCells name
Specify the name of cells to be used as diodes. The

default is all ANTENNACELL types. The wildcard character
* is supported.
-diodePrefix name
Specify the prefix string for diode instance names in the

following format: <unique_instancePrefix> <cell
name> + PLACED <location> <orientation>. The
default prefix is antennaDiode. For example:
antennaDiode86 ANTENNA + PLACED ( 2807660
11612000 ) N
-ground name
Specify the ground net name to assign to the ground pin

of the cell.
-net netName
Only fix antenna violations for the specified nets. The

default is all nets. The wildcard character * is supported.
-power name
Specify the power net name to assign to the power pin of

the cell.
-useDiodeInsertion
Include the diode insertion in the fixing algorithm.
Examples
# Example 1
# Fix antenna violations
fixAntenna
# Example 2
# Fix antenna violations of nets with prefix op
fixAntenna -net {op*}
# Example 3
# Fix antenna violations and use the diode insertion
fixAntenna -useDiodeInsertion -power VDD -ground VSS
1140

K-2015.06

fixNetRatio
See Also
checkAntenna
fixNetRatio
The fixNetRatio command is used to fix high net ratios.
Syntax
fixNetRatio [-threads threadsNum] [-iteration integer]
[-area string] [-ratioLimit double]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-area string
Only fix the net ratio on the area formed by {x1 y1 x2

y2}.
-iteration integer
Specify the number of iterations.

-ratioLimit double
Only fix nets with ratio greater than or equal to the

specified value.
-threads threadsNum
Specify the number of threads used for net ratio fixing.

Examples
# Example 1
fixNetRatio
# Example 2
fixNetRatio -iteration 10
# Example 3
fixNetRatio -ratioLimit 3.0
See Also
checkViolation

K-2015.06
1141

fixRoutePattern
checkSuboptimal
fixRoutePattern
analyzeRoute
fixRoutePattern
The fixRoutePattern command fixes sub-optimal route patterns by
eliminating unnecessary U, Z, and W shapes at the post-routing stage. No
violation is created after pattern fixing if the input design is DRC clean.
Syntax
fixRoutePattern [-threads threadsNum] [-iteration integer]
[-area string] [-wrongWayLimit length | -wrongWayLength
length]
Returns
Arguments
1142
Argument
Description
-area string
Only fix the route pattern on the area formed by {x1 y1

x2 y2}. When it is not specified, fix the route pattern for
the whole design.
-iteration integer

-threads threadsNum
Specify the number of threads used for route pattern

fixing.
-wrongWayLength
length
Set the limit on the length (represented in microns) of

wrong way wires generated to replace vias. When it is not
specified or a negative number is assigned, the wrong
way wire can be used unlimitedly.
Valid value: a floating number (default=unlimited).
-wrongWayLimit
length
Set the limit on the length (represented in the multiple of

the wire width) of wrong way wires generated to replace
vias.

K-2015.06

fixViolation
Examples
# Example 1
fixRoutePattern
# Example 2
# Fix the routing pattern for the whole design with 10 iterations
and
# 1 thread. While generating a wrong way wire to replace a via, use
# the wire segment with length less than or equal to 5*wireWidth
fixRoutePattern -iteration 10 -thread 1 -wrongWayLimit 5
# Example 3
# Fix the routing pattern for the whole design with 5 iterations and
# 4 threads. While generating a wrong way wire to replace a via, use
# the wire segment with length less than or equal to 10 microns.
fixRoutePattern -wrongWayLength 10
See Also
checkViolation
checkSuboptimal
fixViolation
fixViolation
The fixViolation command fixes all design violations including simple
shorts, spacing, and nano-meter rules, for example: fat spacing or minimum
edge. It also connects tie-hi/lo nets and fixes sub-optimal route patterns.
Syntax
fixViolation [-threads threadsNum] [-skipVioChecking]
[-incremental] [-iteration integer] [-area string] [onGrid] [-noPushing] [-checkTopPinMA] [-useDoubleVia] [avoidM1WireTouchPin] [-verbose]
Returns
The violation fixing progressive messages if successful; otherwise, returns
nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-area string
Only fix violations on the area formed by {x1 y1 x2

y2}.

K-2015.06
1143

fixViolation
Argument
Description
-avoidM1WireTouchPin
Only use vias to touch M1 pins.
-checkTopPinMA
Check and fix the minimum area violation on the toplevel pins.
-incremental
Only check nets (with drcDirty bit marked) to save

time.
-iteration integer

-noPushing
Do not use pushing to resolve violations.
-onGrid
Try routing on major grids (tracks).
-skipVioChecking
Use existing violation set, skip re-checking to save

time.
-threads threadsNum
Specify the number of threads used for violation fixing.

-useDoubleVia
Use double vias in routing.
-verbose
Generate more messages about the progress of

violation fixing.
Examples
# Example 1
fixViolation
# Example 2
fixViolation -onGrid -thread 4
# Example 3
fixViolation -iteration 50 -thread 4
See Also
checkViolation
checkSuboptimal
fixRoutePattern
setRoutingLayer
1144

K-2015.06

insertDFMVia
insertDFMVia
The insertDFMVia command replaces single cut vias in the design based on
the system-defined DFM priority. It does not touch single cut vias if the
replacement introduces violations. If the DFM priority for vias is not defined in
the technology, no replacements occur.
Syntax
insertDFMVia [-threads threadsNum] [-withPushing] [-report
[-showLayerBreakdown] [-skipPGMCVia]]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-report
Skip the replacement and only show different priorities

of DFM vias in the final report.
-showLayerBreakdown
When it is specified, the final report shows different

priorities of DFM vias for each layer.
When it is not specified, the final report only shows
different priorities of DFM vias for the entire design.
-skipPGMCVia
Skip counting the multiple cut vias of PG nets in the

report to match the report percentages of GDS flow.
-threads threadsNum
Override the global thread count with a specified

number.
-withPushing
Use pushing to make a space for larger vias. This

usually results in a higher insertion rate.
Examples
# Example 1
# replace single cut vias with DFM priority via
insertDFMVia
# Example 2
# only report without replacement
insertDFMVia -report

K-2015.06
1145

insertDoubleVia
See Also
checkViolation
insertDoubleVia
The insertDoubleVia command replaces single cut vias in the design with
double cut vias. It does not touch single cut vias if the replacement introduces
violations.
Syntax
insertDoubleVia [-threads threadsNum] [-withPushing]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-threads threadsNum
Override the global thread count with a specified

number.
-withPushing
Use pushing to make a space for larger vias. This

usually results in a higher insertion rate.
Examples
# Example 1
# Replace single cut vias with double cut vias
insertDoubleVia
# Example 2
# Increase the success rate by using pushing
insertDoubleVia -withPushing
See Also
checkViolation
reportRouteInfo
1146

K-2015.06

lakerCDRIn
lakerCDRIn
The lakerCDRIn command prepares the data for the Custom Digital Router.
Syntax
lakerCDRIn [-verbose number] [-defNDR] [-ruleSet ruleName]
[-autoDesignPitch] [-autoDesignTrack]
[-autoIdentifyAntCell] [-antCell {cellList}] [keepRouteStatus] [-topLevelMacroPin] [-propAllPortRect]
[-showRuleSet] [-poly2OutsideRect] [-skipConvertRoute]
[-notGenerateViaMaster] [-keepDEFTrackInfo] [notGenerateBoundaryBlk] [-extraCell] [-skipViaConvert
{cellName1 cellName2}] [-weakToMustjoin 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-antCell {cellList}
Treat the cells specified in the cell list as antenna

diode cells.
-autoDesignPitch
Automatically adjust the pitch and tracks.
-autoDesignTrack
Automatically adjust the offset of tracks by referring

half (1/2) of the vertical pitch, and 0 of the horizontal
pitch.
-autoIdentifyAntCell
Automatically extract cells with the ANTENNACELL

property. These cells are generally defined in the LEF
design.
-defNDR
Dump the NonDefaultRule definition in the DEF

file.
-extraCell
Specify the list of extra cell names and covert them.
-keepDEFTrackInfo
Convert the track information defined in the DEF file to

the track information in the Laker database.
-keepRouteStatus
Keep the route status by ignoring the checking of the

RouteAll property.

K-2015.06
1147

lakerCDRIn
Argument
Description
-notGenerateBoundaryBlk
Do not create the boundary blockage.
-notGenerateViaMaster
Do not generate a new via master rotated from the

original via master.
-poly2OutsideRect
Split polygon shapes into rectangles by using the

exterior-cut in instances.
-propAllPortRect
Propagate port shapes from the port shape at the top

level.
-ruleSet ruleName
Specify the ruleSet to be used for routing.
-showRuleSet
Show the rule setting.
-skipConvertRoute
Do not execute ConvertRoute.
-skipViaConvert
{cellName1 cellName2}
Do not convert specified cells as vias. Wildcard

characters are not supported.
-topLevelMacroPin
Only convert top level macro pins.
-verbose number
Show messages by the specified level.

0 : Do not dump any messages.
1 : Dump simple messages.
2 : Dump detailed messages.
-weakToMustjoin 0|1
Examples
# Example 1
# Automatically adjust design tracks
lakerCDRIn -autoDesignTrack
# Example 2
# Display all supported arguments of lakerCDRIn
lakerCDRIn -help
1148

K-2015.06

lakerCDROut
lakerCDROut
The lakerCDROut command outputs the data for the Custom Digital Router.
Syntax
lakerCDROut
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
# Example 1
# Output data
lakerCDROut
removeDoubleVia
The removeDoubleVia command replaces double cut vias in the design with
single cut vias.
Syntax
removeDoubleVia [-net netName] [-checkConn] [-skipClock]
[-includeMultiCut]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-checkConn
Check the connectivity.
-includeMultiCut
Replace the via master (including the multi-cut via).
-net netName
Specify the net name of the via to be replaced.
-skipClock
Skip the clock net.

K-2015.06
1149

replaceStdVia
Examples
# Example 1
removeDoubleVia
# Example 2
removeDoubleVia -net myNet
See Also
insertDoubleVia
replaceStdVia
The replaceStdVia command replaces vias with a cut count less than or
equal to (<=) 2. If a via already has more than 2 cuts, the via is not replaced.
Syntax
replaceStdVia [-net netName] [-widthGE widthLBound]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-net netName
When specified, the replacement is only applied on nets

with names matching the pattern (specified by
netName).
When not specified, the replacement is applied on all
nets.
-widthGE widthLBound When specified, the replacement is only applied on vias

with the routing width of both the lower and upper metal
layers greater than or equal to widthLBound.
Examples
# Example 1
# For each via in a net with name matching N*, if the routing
# width of both the lower layer and upper layer is >= 4.0um,
# replace the via with a standard via
replaceStdVia -net N* -widthGE 4.0
# Example 2
replaceStdVia -widthGE 3.5
1150

K-2015.06

reportCorner
reportCorner
The reportCorner command reports the corner information of shapes on
specified layers. The corner information can be saved, and then used in the
comparison with the other corner information.
Syntax
reportCorner [-box {x1 y1 x2 y2}] [-save] [-compare]
[-directory dirPath] [-includeOutOfBoundary] [reportLimit limitNum] [-fromLayer layerName] [-toLayer
layerName] [-layer layerName] [-metalOnly] [-cutOnly] [threads threadsNum]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-box {x1 y1 x2 y2}
Compute corners within the area formed by {x1 y1

x2 y2}. The default is the design boundary box
(BBox).
The -box and -includeOutOfBoundary
arguments cannot be specified simultaneously.
-compare
Compare the current corner information against the

previously saved corner information under the
directory specified by the -directory argument. The
default directory is the current working directory.
This argument must be specified when the
-reportLimit argument is specified.
When this argument is not specified, only report the
layer-based statistics with checksum.
-cutOnly
Only check corners on cut layers (Via12 and above).

The -metalOnly and -cutOnly arguments cannot
be specified simultaneously. When the -metalOnly
and -cutOnly arguments are both not specified,
corners on metal and cut layers are checked.
-directory dirPath
Specify the directory to save the compressed corner

information (in gzip format). The default is the current
working directory.

K-2015.06
1151

reportCorner
1152
Argument
Description
-fromLayer layerName
Perform the operation, starting from this metal/cut

layer (specified by name).
When the -fromLayer or -toLayer argument is
specified, the -layer argument cannot be specified.
-includeOutOfBoundary
Include the out-of-boundary shapes in the checking

process.
The -box and -includeOutOfBoundary
arguments cannot be specified simultaneously.
-layer layerName
Only check corners on this metal layer (specified by

name).
When this argument is specified, the -fromLayer and
-toLayer arguments cannot be specified.
-metalOnly
Only check corners on metal layers (M1 and above).

The -metalOnly and -cutOnly arguments cannot
be specified simultaneously. When the -metalOnly
and -cutOnly arguments are both not specified,
corners on metal and cut layers are checked.
-reportLimit limitNum
Specify the maximum number of corners to be

reported in a comparison.
When this argument is specified, the -compare
argument must be specified.
-save
Save the corner information under the directory

specified by the
-directory argument. The default directory is the
current working directory.
When this argument is not specified, only report the
layer-based statistics with checksum.
-threads threadsNum
Specify the number of threads used for the checking of

corner information. The default is the maximum
avaliable CPU threads.

K-2015.06

reportDesign
Argument
Description
-toLayer layerName
Perform the operation, ending at this metal/cut layer

(specified by name).
When the -fromLayer or -toLayer argument is
specified, the
-layer argument cannot be specified.
Examples
readLef my.lef
readDef -springSoft my.def
...
reportCorner -fromLayer M1 -toLayer M5 -save
...
reportCorner -fromLayer M1 -toLayer M5 -compare
reportDesign
The reportDesign command reports the design, netlist, floorplan, and
routing statistics and information.
Syntax
reportDesign
Returns
Arguments
None
Examples
readLef my.lef
readDef my.def -springSoft
...
reportDesign
reportJog
The reportJog command analyzes and reports the wire jogging.

K-2015.06
1153

reportRouteInfo
Syntax
reportJog [-threads threadsNum] [-nets string] [-threshold
double] [-verbose]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-nets string
Specify the names or patterns of nets to report jogs.

Multiple net names or patterns must be separated by
spaces, for example: -nets {net1 ... netN}.
-threads threadsNum
Specify the number of threads used for analyzing wire

jogging.
-threshold double
Specify a threshold value. A jog is defined as an jogedge with length less than the minimum width of the
layer.
-verbose
Report the jog coordinate when a jog is found.
Examples
# Example 1
reportJog
# Example 2
reportJog -nets {net1 net2 net3}
See Also
analyzeRoute
reportRouteInfo
reportRouteInfo
The reportRouteInfo command reports the information (including wires
and vias) of routing shapes.
1154

K-2015.06

reportRouteRule
Syntax
reportRouteInfo [-area string] [-totalOnly]
[-excludeDummyNet]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-area string
Report the route information on the area formed by {x1

y1 x2 y2}.
-excludeDummyNet
Ignore wire or vias on dummy nets when counting the

wire length.
-totalOnly
Only report the total statistics.
Examples
# Example 1
reportRouteInfo
# Example 2
reportRouteInfo -area { 0 0 10 10 }
See Also
reportJog
routeNet
reportCorner
reportRouteRule
The reportRouteRule command reports the existing non-default rules.
Syntax
reportRouteRule [-all] [-rule string]
Returns

K-2015.06
1155

reportRule
Arguments
Argument
Description
-all
Report all route rules.
-rule string
Report the specified route rule.
Examples
# Example 1
reportRouteRule
# Example 2
reportRouteRule -rule myRule
See Also
createRouteRule
deleteRouteRule
setRouteRule
reportRule
The reportRule command reports the information of physical design rules.
Syntax
reportRule
Returns
Arguments
None
Examples
# Example 1
reportRule
See Also
checkViolation
fixViolation
1156

K-2015.06

reportSpine
reportSpine
The reportSpine command reports the spine coordinate.
Syntax
reportSpine [-threads threadsNum] [-nets string] [-verbose]
[-file string]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file string
Report the spine coordinate to a file when -threads 1

is specified.
-nets string
Specify the names or patterns of nets to report the

spine coordinate. Multiple net names or patterns must
be separated by spaces, for example: -nets {net1
... netN}.
-threads threadsNum
Specify the number of threads used for analyzing spine

routing.
-verbose
Report the spine coordinate when a spine coordinate is

found and -threads 1 is specified.
Examples
# Example 1
reportSpine
# Example 2
reportSpine -verbose
See Also
reportRouteInfo

K-2015.06
1157

routeBlockRing
routeBlockRing
The routeBlockRing command creates block rings according to the
specified Macro cells.
The corner definition for -highTopExtension, -highBottomExtension,
-highLeftExtension,
-highRightExtension, -lowTopExtension, -lowBottomExtension,
-lowLeftExtension,
-lowRightExtension arguments is illustrated in the following figures:
Figure 1
Corner Definition
Syntax
routeBlockRing -net netNames -inst instNames -topLayer
layerName -bottomLayer layerName -leftLayer layerName rightLayer layerName [-topWidth width] [-bottomWidth
width] [-leftWidth width] [-rightWidth width] [topSpacing spacing] [-bottomSpacing spacing]
[-leftSpacing spacing] [-rightSpacing spacing] [topCoreOffset offset] [-bottomCoreOffset offset] [leftCoreOffset offset] [-rightCoreOffset offset]
[-skipTopSide] [-skipBottomSide] [-skipLeftSide] [skipRightSide] [-highTopExtension range] [highBottomExtension range] [-highLeftExtension range] [highRightExtension range] [-lowTopExtension range] [lowBottomExtension range] [-lowLeftExtension range] [lowRightExtension range] [-topViaLayer layerName] [bottomViaLayer layerName] [-ignoreDRC] [-noCross]
Returns
1158

K-2015.06

routeBlockRing
Arguments
Argument
Description
-bottomCoreOffset
offset
Specify the offset between the block rings and macro

contour on the bottom side.
-bottomLayer
layerName
Specify the metal layer of block rings on the bottom

side.
-bottomSpacing
spacing
Specify the wire spacing between block rings on the

bottom side. The default is the minimum spacing of the
specified layer.
-bottomViaLayer
layerName
Specify the lowest metal layer that stack vias can reach.
The default is the lowest metal layer.
-bottomWidth
width
Specify the wire width of block rings on the bottom side.

The default is the minimum width of the specified layer.
-highBottomExtension
range
Specify the extended search range on the high bottom

corner.
-highLeftExtension
range
Specify the extended search range on the high left

corner.
-highRightExtension
range
Specify the extended search range on the high right

corner.
-highTopExtension
range
Specify the extended search range on the high top

corner.
-ignoreDRC
Skip the violation checker while creating block rings.

This argument is not specified by default.

K-2015.06
1159

routeBlockRing
1160
Argument
Description
-inst instNames
Specify the name of the instances for creating block

rings. A wildcard expression can be used when
specifying instance names. Multiple instance names
must be separated by spaces, for example: -inst
{inst1 inst2 ... instN}.
-leftCoreOffset
offset

contour on the left side.
-leftLayer
layerName
Specify the metal layer of block rings on the left side.
-leftSpacing
spacing
Specify the wire spacing between block rings on the left

side. The default is the minimum spacing of the
specified layer.
-leftWidth
width
Specify the wire width of block rings on the left side. The
default is the minimum width of the specified layer.
-lowBottomExtension
range
Specify the extended search range on the low bottom

corner.
-lowLeftExtension
range
Specify the extended search range on the low left

corner.
-lowRightExtension
range
Specify the extended search range on the low right

corner.
-lowTopExtension
range
Specify the extended search range on the low top

corner.
-net netNames
Specify the name of the nets for creating block rings.

Multiple net names must be separated by spaces, for
example: -net {net1 net2 ... netN}.

K-2015.06

routeBlockRing
Argument
Description
-noCross
Indicate the non-extended style for each block ring. This

argument is not specified by default.
-rightCoreOffset
offset

contour on the right side.
-rightLayer
layerName
Specify the metal layer of block rings on the right side.
-rightSpacing
spacing
Specify the wire spacing between block rings on the

right side. The default is the minimum spacing of the
specified layer.
-rightWidth
width
Specify the wire width of block rings on the right side.

The default is the minimum width of the specified layer.
-skipBottomSide
Skip the creation of block rings on the bottom side. This

-skipLeftSide
Skip the creation of block rings on the left side. This

-skipRightSide
Skip the creation of block rings on the right side. This

-skipTopSide
Skip the creation of block rings on the top side. This

-topCoreOffset
offset

contour on the top side.
-topLayer
layerName
Specify the metal layer of block rings on the top side.
-topSpacing
spacing
Specify the wire spacing between block rings on the top

side. The default is the minimum spacing of the
specified layer.

K-2015.06
1161

routeBlockWire
Argument
Description
-topViaLayer
layerName
Specify the highest metal layer that stack vias can

reach.
The default is the highest metal layer.
-topWidth width
Specify the wire width of block rings on the top side. The
default is the minimum width of the specified layer.
Examples
# Example 1
routeBlockRing -net {VDD VSS} -inst {i_ALUB i_CCU } -leftLayer
metal4 \
-rightLayer metal2 -topLayer metal3 -bottomLayer metal3
-leftWidth 1 \
-rightWidth 1 -topWidth 1 -bottomWidth 1 -leftSpacing 0.21 \
-rightSpacing 0.21 -topSpacing 0.21 -bottomSpacing 0.21 \
-leftCoreOffset 1 -rightCoreOffset 1 -topCoreOffset 1
-bottomCoreOffset 1
# Example 2
routeBlockRing -net {VDD VSS} -inst {i_ALUB i_CCU } -leftLayer
metal4 \
-rightLayer metal2 -topLayer metal3 -bottomLayer metal3
-leftWidth 1 \
-rightWidth 1 -topWidth 1 -bottomWidth 1 -skipTopSide
-skipLeftSide \
-highRightExtension 1 -lowBottomExtension 1
routeBlockWire
The routeBlockWire command creates block wires according to the
specified Macro cells.
Syntax
routeBlockWire -net netNames -inst instNames [-pinLayer
layerName] [-searchRange range] [-ignoreDRC] [skipTopSide] [-skipBottomSide] [-skipLeftSide] [skipRightSide] [-topViaLayer layerName] [enableLayerJump [-extensionViaArraysNumber num]
[-allowNonPreferredDir]] [-bottomViaLayer layerName]
1162

K-2015.06

routeBlockWire
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-allowNonPreferredDir
Allow the use of a non-preferred routing direction

when changing a layer. This argument is not
-bottomViaLayer
layerName
Specify the lowest metal layer that stack vias can

reach. The default is the lowest metal layer.
-enableLayerJump
Enable the jump layer function when the

connection of block wires fails. This argument is not
-extensionViaArraysNumber Specify the number of extension via arrays for stack

num
vias when changing a layer.
-ignoreDRC
Skip the violation checker while creating block

wires. This argument is not specified by default.
-inst instNames
Specify the name of the instances for creating block

wires. A wildcard expression can be used when
specifying instance names. Multiple instance
names must be separated by spaces, for example:
-inst {inst1 inst2 ... instN}.
-net netNames
Specify the name of the nets for creating block

wires. Multiple net names must be separated by
spaces, for example: -net {net1 net2 ...
netN}.
-pinLayer layerName
Specify the metal layer of the macro pin to create

block wires. The default is all metal layers.
-searchRange range
Specify how far the pre-wires can search when the

connection is successful.
-skipBottomSide
Skip the creation of block wires on the bottom side.


K-2015.06
1163

routeNet
Argument
Description
-skipLeftSide
Skip the creation of block wires on the left side. This

-skipRightSide
Skip the creation of block wires on the right side.

-skipTopSide
Skip the creation of block wires on the top side.

-topViaLayer
layerName
Specify the highest metal layer that stack vias can

reach. The default is the highest metal layer.
Examples
# Example 1
routeBlockWire -net {VDD VSS} -inst {i_ALUB i_CCU }
# Example 2
routeBlockWire -net {VDD VSS} -inst {i_*}
# Example 3
# Create the block wire with the capacity for layer changing
routeBlockWire -net {VDD VSS} -inst {i_ALUB i_CCU} \
-enableLayerJump
routeNet
The routeNet command connects all nets in the design, except Power/
Ground (PG) nets.
Syntax
routeNet [-estimateCongestionOnly | -timingDriven] [-effort
{mode}] [-net {net1 net2 ... netn}]
Returns
1164

K-2015.06

routeNet
Arguments
Argument
Description
-effort {mode}
Specify the routing effort.

Valid values: prototype, low, medium, and high
(default=medium).
-estimateCongestionOnly Only estimate the congestion, and generate the

congestion report.
-net {net1 net2 ... netn}
Specify the nets to be routed by the wildcard character

* or regular expressions. If more than one expression
is specified, separate the net names with spaces and
enclose the expressions with parentheses {}.
-timingDriven
Perform timing-driven routing.

K-2015.06
1165

routeRail
Examples
# Example 1
# Quickly check the congestion information, and route every net
with
# the shortest distance
routeNet -estimateCongestionOnly -effort prototype
# Example 2
# Check the congestion information
routeNet -estimateCongestionOnly
# Example 3
# Check the congestion information and get the accurate results
# for the congestion
routeNet -estimateCongestionOnly -effort high
# Example 4
# Check the congestion information for specified nets
routeNet -estimateCongestionOnly -net { clk* }
# Example 5
# Quickly route the design and get a rough result
routeNet -effort prototype
# Example 6
# Route the design and get a result with less violation
routeNet -effort medium
# Example 7
# Route the design and fix violations
routeNet -effort high
# Example 8
# Route specified nets
routeNet -net { blk_n* }
# Example 9
# Perform timing-driven routing
routeNet -timingDriven
See Also
checkViolation
fixViolation
routeRail
The routeRail command creates PG rails in a specified row area.
1166

K-2015.06

routeRail
Syntax
routeRail [-ignoreDRC] [-enableLayerJump] [-searchRange
number] [-extensionViaNumber] [-extendToBoundary]
[-generatePinOnBoundary] [-rowArea string] [-direction
string] [-undo] [-net string] [-maxLayer string] [minLayer string] [-allowNonPreferredDir]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
Allow to use layers in a non-preferred direction

when changing the layer.
-direction string
Specify the direction of the rail to connect.
-enableLayerJump
Enable the layer jump function when a PG

connection failed.
-extendToBoundary
Extend the follow pin or stripe to the boundary.
-extensionViaNumber
Specify the number of vias when changing the layer.
-generatePinOnBoundary
Generate PG pins on the boundary.
-ignoreDRC
Ignore violations when creating PG wires.
-maxLayer string
Specify the highest Metal layer vias can be created.
-minLayer string
Specify the lowest Metal layer vias can be created.
-net string
Specify the net name to be connected.
-rowArea string
Specify the row area by a sequence of points (x y).
-searchRange number
Specify the search range when a PG route connects

to other pre-wires.
-undo
Undo the last action.

K-2015.06
1167

routeRing
Examples
# Example 1
routeRail
# Example 2
routeRail -net { VDD VSS }
# Example 3
routeRail -minLater M1 -maxLayer M4
See Also
routeStripe
routeRing
routeRing
The routeRing command creates PG rings in a specified row area.
Syntax
routeRing [-net string] [-topLayer string] [-bottomLayer
string] [-leftLayer string] [-rightLayer string] [topWidth width] [-bottomWidth width] [-leftWidth width]
[-rightWidth width] [-topSpacing spacing] [bottomSpacing spacing] [-leftSpacing spacing]
[-rightSpacing spacing] [-topCoreOffset offset] [bottomCoreOffset offset] [-leftCoreOffset offset] [rightCoreOffset offset] [-skipTopSide] [-skipBottomSide]
[-skipLeftSide] [-skipRightSide] [-maxLayer string] [minLayer string] [-undo] [-rowArea string] [-ignoreDRC]
[-Cross]
Returns
Arguments
1168
Argument
Description
-bottomCoreOffset offset
Specify the offset between core rings and contour on

the bottom side.

K-2015.06

routeRing
Argument
Description
-bottomLayer string
Specify the Metal layer of core rings on the bottom

side.
-bottomSpacing spacing
Specify the wire spacing between core rings on the

bottom side.
-bottomWidth width
Specify the wire width of core rings on the bottom

side.
-Cross
Indicate the extended style for each core ring.
-ignoreDRC
-leftCoreOffset offset

the left side.
-leftLayer string
Specify the Metal layer of core rings on the left side.
-leftSpacing spacing

left side.
-leftWidth width
Specify the wire width of core rings on the left side.

-maxLayer string
-minLayer string
-net string
Specify the name of nets for creating core rings.
-rightCoreOffset offset

the right side.
-rightLayer string
Specify the Metal layer of core rings on the right side.
-rightSpacing spacing

right side.

K-2015.06
1169

routeRing
Argument
Description
-rightWidth width
Specify the wire width of core rings on the right side.

-rowArea string
-skipBottomSide
Skip the creation of core rings on the bottom side.
-skipLeftSide
Skip the creation of core rings on the left side.
-skipRightSide
Skip the creation of core rings on the right side.
-skipTopSide
Skip the creation of core rings on the top side.
-topCoreOffset offset
Specify the offset between the core rings and contour

on the top side.
-topLayer string
Specify the Metal layer of core rings on the top side.
-topSpacing spacing

top side.
-topWidth width
Specify the wire width of core rings on the top side.

-undo
Examples
# Example 1
routeRing -leftLayer M1 -rightLayer M1 -topLayer M1 -bottomLayer
M1 \
-leftWidth 1 -rightWidth 1 -topWidth 1 -bottomWidth 1 \
-leftSpacing 0.15 -rightSpacing 0.15 -topSpacing 0.15 \
-bottomSpacing 0.15 -net {VDD VSS} -maxLayer M2 -minLayer M1
See Also
routeStripe
routeRail
1170

K-2015.06

routeStripe
routeStripe
The routeStripe command creates PG stripes in a specified row area.
Syntax
routeStripe [-direction string] [-metalLayer string] [-start
start] [-mode string] [-width double] [-spacingInGroup
double] [-end end] [-step step] [-numberOfGroup number]
[-shiftRange number] [-undo] [-allowSwapNet] [-lowEnd
string] [-highEnd string] [-ignoreDRC] [-searchRange
number] [-extendToBoundary] [-generatePinOnBoundary] [net string] [-rowArea string] [-maxLayer string]
[-minLayer string]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-allowSwapNet
Allow to swap the order of specified nets.
-direction string
Specify the direction to create stripes.
-end end
Specify the end coordinate.

-extendToBoundary
-generatePinOnBoundary Generate PG pins on the boundary.

-highEnd string
Specify the high end point.

Valid values: coordinate, boundary,
firstTarget, and lastTarget.
-ignoreDRC
-lowEnd string
Specify the low end point.

-maxLayer string

K-2015.06
1171

routeStripe
Argument
Description
-metalLayer string
Specify the Metal layer by name.
-minLayer string
-mode string
Specify the mode of offset.

Valid values: absolute and relative.
-net string
Specify the name of nets for creating stripes.
-numberOfGroup number Specify the group of the stripes.

-rowArea string
-searchRange number

to other pre-wires.
-shiftRange number
Specify the range to shift the group of stripes.

-spacingInGroup spacing
Specify the wire spacing between stripes.

-start start
Specify the start coordinate.

-step step
Specify the step coordinate.

-undo
-width width
Specify the width of stripes.

Examples
# Example 1
routeStripe -net {VDD VSS} -dir horizontal -metalLayer M3 \
-width 0.3 -spacingInGroup 0.15 -mode relative -start 0.2 \
-end 0.2 -numberOfGroup 4
1172

K-2015.06

See Also
routeRing
routeRail
The setIgnoredNetsInRouting command sets the net which is not routed
by the router.
Syntax
setIgnoredNetsInRouting [netNamesOrPatterns] [-clear]
[-set]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-clear
Reset or clear the nets from being ignored in routing.
-set
Set the nets to be ignored in routing.
netNamesOrPatterns
Specify one or a list of nets. Multiple net names or

patterns must be separated by spaces, for example:
{net1 ... netN}.
Examples
# Example 1
setIgnoredNetsInRouting {net1 net2 net3} -set
# Example 2
setIgnoredNetsInRouting -clear
See Also
routeNet

K-2015.06
1173

setOption
setOption
Various control options exist to control and customize the behavior of the tool.
This setOption command helps set the desired options.
When this command is specified without argument, all possible group

names are listed.
When this command is specified with a group name, all possible options
inside this group are listed.
When this command is specified with a group name and an option name, a
short description about the option and how it should be set is listed.
Syntax
setOption [group_name] [variable_name]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
group_name
Specify the option group name.
variable_name
Specify the variable name.
Examples
# Example 1
# set a Boolean option to true
setOption timer idealClock true
# Example 2
# Assuming that 400 is the metal antenna ratio limit
checkAntenna
# Ratio exceeds 400 is a violation
setOption antenna metalMargin 20
checkAntenna
fixAntenna
# Ratio exceeds 420 are fixed
checkAntenna
setOption antenna metalMargin -20
checkAntenna
setOption antenna metalMargin 0
checkAntenna
1174

K-2015.06

setRouteRule
setRouteRule
The setRouteRule command sets a non-default rule to the specified nets.
Syntax
setRouteRule [-rule string] [-default] [-nets string]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-default
Set the default rule for the specified nets.
-nets string
Specify the names or patterns of nets to set the route

rule. Multiple net names or patterns must be separated
by spaces. For example: -nets {net1 ... netN}.
-rule string
Examples
# Example 1
setRouteRule -rule myRule -nets myNet
# Example 2
setRouteRule -default -nets myNet
See Also
createRouteRule
reportRouteRule
deleteRouteRule
The setRoutingConstraint command is used to:
Set routing constraints
Reset routing constraints

K-2015.06
1175

View current routing constraint settings
Dump routing constraints
Syntax
Synxtax 1:
setRoutingConstraint -h [category]
Syntax 2 (General constraint settings):
setRoutingConstraint [-reset] [-info] [-maxWrongWayLength
<double> | -maxWrongWayLengthByPitch <int>] [setIgnoreInCellViolation | -resetIgnoreInCellViolation]
[-memTopRoute | -resetMemTopRoute] [-dynamicTrack | resetDynamicTrack]
Syntax 3 (Metal layer related constraint settings):
setRoutingConstraint [-setEscape | -resetEscape] [maxEscapeLength <double> | -maxEscapeLengthByPitch
<int>] [-useViaOnly | -resetUseViaOnly] [disallowWireTouchPin | -resetDisallowWireTouchPin] [allowBridge | -disallowBridge] [-useViaEnclosedByPin | resetUseViaEnclosedByPin] [-noPinFeedThrough | resetNoPinFeedThrough] [-maxLayer <string> [-minLayer
<string> | -allLayers | -layers <string>]]
Syntax 4 (Via control constraint settings):
setRoutingConstraint [-doubleVia | -resetDoubleVia] [noBiasedVia | -resetNoBiasedVia] [[-HHViaOnly] | [VVViaOnly] | [-preferHHVia] | [-preferVVVia] | [resetUseViaDir]] [-crossViaOnly | -nonCrossViaOnly] [resetViaPattern]
Syntax 5 (User grid related constraint settings):
setRoutingConstraint [-userGrid <string>] [placeViaOnUserGrid | -resetPlaceViaOnUserGrid]
Syntax 6 (Route net group related constraint settings):
setRoutingConstraint [[-addToRouteNetGroup] | [removeFromRouteNetGroup] | [-resetRouteNetGroup]] [-nets
<string>]
Syntax 7 (Global route related constraint settings):
setRoutingConstraint [-setLongPathRoutingFirst | resetLongPathRoutingFirst]
1176

K-2015.06

Syntax 8 (Net based constraint settings):

setRoutingConstraint [-maxSegmentLength <double>] [dumpNetConstraint <string>] [-nets <string>] [-maxLayer
<string> [-minLayer <string> | -allLayers | -layers
<string>]]
Syntax 9 (Row bone route constraint settings):
setRoutingConstraint [-extendPinToBone | resetExtendPinToBone] [-maxEscapeLengthForPinConnect
<double>] [-maxEscapeWidthForPinConnect <double>] [resetAllowBridgeForPin] [-shieldWire | -resetShieldWire]
[-loopWire | -resetLoopWire] [-setViaMasterForLoopWire
<string>] [-setViaTopEncWidthForLoopWire <double>] [setViaTopEncHeightForLoopWire <double>] [setViaBotEncWidthForLoopWire <double>] [setViaBotEncHeightForLoopWire <double>] [extendRowBoneSearchRangeByPitch <int>] [extendRowBoneSearchRange <double>] [setRowBoneGroupDistByPitch <int>] [extendVertBoneSearchRange <double>] [extendVertBoneSearchRangeByPitch <int>] [-rowHeight
<double>] [-rowlessBoneAssignment | resetRowlessBoneAssignment] [-rowBoneTopology <string>]
[-preferVertBone <string> | -resetPreferVertBone] [setLayerConnectM1Pin | -resetLayerConnectM1Pin]
Syntax 10 (Spine related constraint settings):
setRoutingConstraint [-useSpine | -resetUseSpine] [spinePattern <string> | -resetSpinePattern]
Syntax 11 (Compactness constraint settings):
setRoutingConstraint [-compactRowBone <string>] [compactRowBoneArea <string>] [-compactRowBoneRange
<string>] [-compactRowBoneM2Range <string>] [compactRowBoneToPoint <point> | resetCompactRowBoneToPoint] [-compactRowBoneTrackNum
<int>]
Syntax 12 (Route area constraint settings):
setRoutingConstraint [-routeArea <string> | resetRouteArea] [-addInverseRoutingDirBox <string> | resetInverseRoutingDirBox] [-inverseRoutingLayerDir | resetInverseRoutingLayerDir]

K-2015.06
1177

Syntax 13 (Track related constraint settings):

setRoutingConstraint [-setVariousTrack <string> | resetVariousTrack] [-setTrackPriority | resetTrackPriority] [-trackPrioritySeq <string>]
Syntax 14 (Memory cell generator constraint settings):
setRoutingConstraint [-setMemCellPinLayer | resetMemCellPin]
Syntax 15 (Unclassified constraint settings):
setRoutingConstraint [-connectToUpperLayer | resetConnectToUpperLayer] [-preferConnectToUpperLayer |
-resetPreferConnectToUpperLayer]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-addInverseRoutingDirBox <string>
[Route area constraint settings]

Add a box in which the preferred direction
is inversed. The box is specified by format
{x1 y1 x2 y2}.
-addToRouteNetGroup
[Route net group related constraint

settings]
Add the specified nets to the group of nets.
When this constraint is specified without
-nets, all nets are added.
-allLayers
[Metal layer related and net based

constraint settings]
Apply constraints to all layers.
-allowBridge
[Metal layer related constraint settings]

Allow bridge patterns in specified layers.
1178

K-2015.06

Argument
Description
-compactRowBone <string>
[Compactness constraint settings]

Compact row bone wires to a specified part
of the design.
Valid values: CENTER, GROUND, POWER,
PG, and AUTO.
-compactRowBoneArea <string>

Compact row bone wires to a specified
area of the design.
Valid values: ONPIN, OFFPIN,
ONPINONLY, OFFPINONLY, and AUTO.
-compactRowBoneM2Range <string>

Compact M2 row bone wires with the
specified range.
Valid values: CENTER, MANYPIN, and
AUTO.
-compactRowBoneRange <string>

Compact row bone wires with the specified
range.
Valid values: TWOROWONEBONE and
ONEROWONEBONE.
-compactRowBoneToPoint <point>

Compact row bone wires to the specified
point.
-compactRowBoneTrackNum <int>

Compact the track number of row bone
wires.
-connectToUpperLayer
[Unclassified constraint settings]

Connect to the upper layer of pins.

K-2015.06
1179

Argument
Description
-crossViaOnly
[Via control constraint settings]

Use cross vias for the specified cut layers
only.
-disallowBridge

Disallow bridge patterns in specified
layers.
-disallowWireTouchPin

Do not use wires to touch pins on the
specified layers.
-doubleVia

Use double vias for the specified cut layers.
-dumpNetConstraint <string>
[Net based constraint settings]

Dump all net constraints to the specified
file.
-dynamicTrack
[General constraint settings]

Use the dynamic generated track.
-extendPinToBone
[Row bone route constraint settings]

Extend pins to bone wires on the specified
layer.
-extendRowBoneSearchRange
<double>

Extend the search range for row bone
wires.
-extendRowBoneSearchRangeByPitch
<int>

Extend the search range for row bone
wires by the number of pitches.
1180

K-2015.06

Argument
Description
-extendVertBoneSearchRange <double> [Row bone route constraint settings]

Extend the search range for vertical bone
wires.
-extendVertBoneSearchRangeByPitch
<int>

Extend the search range for vertical bone
wires by the number of pitches.

K-2015.06
1181

Argument
Description
-h [category]
Print the help messages.

When no category group is specified, print
all routing constraints by all category
groups.
When any of the following category groups
is specified, print the specified routing
constraint settings by category group:
-HHViaOnly
general: Shows general constraint

settings.
metal: Shows metal layer related
constraint settings.
via: Shows via control constraint
settings.
userGrid: Shows user grid related
routeNetGroup: Shows route net
group related constraint settings.
globalRoute: Shows global route
related constraint settings.
net: Shows net based constraint
settings.
rowBone: Shows row bone route
spine: Shows spine related constraint
settings.
compactness: Shows compact wire
routeArea: Shows route area
track: Shows track related constraint
settings.
memory: Shows memory cell generator
constraint setting.
misc: Shows unclassified constraint
settings.

Use vias with horizontal (H) enclosure for
the specified layers.
1182

K-2015.06

Argument
Description
-info

Show the current constraint settings.
-inverseRoutingLayerDir

Inverse the direction of the routing layer
from H to V or V to H.
-layers <string>

Apply constraints to the specified layers.
-loopWire

Loop wires for specified nets. When this
constraint is specified without -nets, it is
treated as a general constraint.
-maxEscapeLength <double>

Set the maximum wire length allowed in an
escape layer.
Valid value: a floating number. The default
is 10xPitch(um).
-maxEscapeLengthByPitch <int>

Set the maximum wire length allowed in an
escape layer by the number of pitch.
Valid value: an integer. The default is 10.
-maxEscapeLengthForPinConnect
<double>

Set the maximum escape wire length for
pin connection.
-maxEscapeWidthForPinConnect
<double>

Set the maximum escape wire width for pin
connection.

K-2015.06
1183

Argument
Description
-maxLayer <string>

Apply constraints to this layer.
-maxSegmentLength <double>
[Net based constraint settings]

Use the maximum segment length (MSL)
of connected wires for the specified layer.
-nets, it is treated as a general constraint.
-maxWrongWayLength <double>

Set the maximum wrong way wire length
(unit: um).
Valid value: a floating number. 0 means
reset.
-maxWrongWayLengthByPitch <int>

Set the maximum wrong way wire length
with the number of pitches for the specified
layers.
Valid value: an integer. 0 means reset.
-memTopRoute

Indicate that this is a top level design of a
memory chip.
-minLayer <string>

Apply constraints from this layer.
-nets <string>
[Route net group related and net based

Specify the nets to be used in the
constraint.
-noBiasedVia

Do not use biased vias.
1184

K-2015.06

Argument
Description
-nonCrossViaOnly

Use non-cross vias for the specified cut
layers only.
-noPinFeedThrough

Do not use pins as feed-through on the
specified layers.
-placeViaOnUserGrid
[User grid related constraint settings]

Place the via position on the user grid.
-preferConnectToUpperLayer

Prefer to connect to the upper layer of pins.
-preferHHVia

Use vias with preferred horizontal
enclosure for the specified layers.
-preferVertBone <string>

Prefer vertical bone routing.
-preferVVVia

Use vias with preferred vertical enclosure
for the specified layers.
-removeFromRouteNetGroup

settings]
Remove the specified nets from the group
of nets. When this constraint is specified
without -nets, all nets are removed.
-reset

Reset all constraints. This argument is
previously known as -resetToDefault.
-resetAllowBridgeForPin

Disallow bridge patterns for pins.

K-2015.06
1185

Argument
Description
-resetCompactRowBoneToPoint

Do not compact row bone wires to the
specified point.
-resetConnectToUpperLayer

Do not connect to the upper layer of pins.
-resetDisallowWireTouchPin

Use wires to touch pins on specified layers.
-resetDoubleVia

Do not use double vias for the specified cut
layers.
-resetDynamicTrack

Do not use the dynamic generated track.
-resetEscape

Disallow using an escape layer.
-resetExtendPinToBone

Do not extend pins to bone wires on the
specified layer.
-resetIgnoreInCellViolation

Treat spacing errors between port rects
and inst-rect as real violations.
-resetInverseRoutingDirBox

Reset all inverse routing direction boxes.
-resetInverseRoutingLayerDir

Reset the direction of the routing layer
according to the layer definition in the
library.
-resetLayerConnectM1Pin

Set the routing layer not to connect to m1
pins.
1186

K-2015.06

Argument
Description
-resetLongPathRoutingFirst
[Global route related constraint settings]

Do not route nets with a long distance
between pins first.
-resetLoopWire

Do not loop wires for specified nets. When
this constraint is specified without -nets,
it is treated as a general constraint.
-resetMemCellPin
[Memory cell generator constraint settings]

Reset all settings for memory cell pins.
-resetMemTopRoute

Indicate that this is not a top level design of
a memory chip.
-resetNoBiasedVia

Use biased vias.
-resetNoPinFeedThrough

Use pins as feed-through on the specified
layers.
-resetPlaceViaOnUserGrid

Do not place the via position on the user
grid, but still place on the manufacturing
grid.
-resetPreferConnectToUpperLayer

Do not prefer to connect to the upper layer
of pins.
-resetPreferVertBone

Do not prefer vertical bone routing.
-resetRouteArea

Reset the routing area.

K-2015.06
1187

Argument
Description
-resetRouteNetGroup

settings]
Do not apply any route net group
constraints.
-resetRowlessBoneAssignment

Do not use row bone assignment without
row information.
-resetShieldWire

Do not shield wires for specified nets.
-nets, it is treated as a general constraint.
-resetSpinePattern
[Spine constraint settings]

Reset the spine pattern.
-resetTrackPriority
[Track related constraint settings]

Reset the priority of tracks for a layer.
-resetUseSpine <string>

Do not use spine pattern routing.
-resetUseViaDir

Do not use H/V vias for the specifie layers.
-resetUseViaEnclosedByPin

Do not enclose vias on pins of specified
layers by shape.
-resetUseViaOnly

Allow wiring on specified layers.
-resetVariousTrack

Reset coordinates of tracks.
-resetViaPattern

Do not use cross/non-cross vias for the
specified cut layers.
1188

K-2015.06

Argument
Description
-routeArea <string>

Set the routing area by format {x1 y1 x2
y2}.
-rowBoneTopology <string>

Set the row bone topology.
Valid values: I, H, and BOTH.
-rowHeight <double>

Specify the row height (unit: um) to
determine the distance to share one row
bone.
-rowlessBoneAssignment

Use row bone assignment without row
information.
-setEscape

Allow using an escape layer.
-setIgnoreInCellViolation

Ignore spacing errors between port rects
and inst-rect.
-setLayerConnectM1Pin

Set the routing layer to connect to m1 pins.
-setLongPathRoutingFirst
[Global route related constraint settings]

Route nets with a long distance between
pins first.
-setMemCellPinLayer
[Memory cell generator constraint settings]

Set the layer for memory cell pins (finger
pins).

K-2015.06
1189

Argument
Description
-setRowBoneGroupDistByPitch <int>

Set the row bone grouping distance by the
number of pitches.
-setTrackPriority

Set the priority of tracks for a layer.
-setVariousTrack <string>

Set coordinates of tracks by a specified file.
-setViaBotEncHeightForLoopWire
<double>
-setViaBotEncWidthForLoopWire
<double>
-setViaMasterForLoopWire <string>
Set search condition by the length (unit:

um) of the bottom enclosure of vias for loop
wires.
Set search condition by the width (unit: um)

of the bottom enclosure of vias for loop
wires.
Specify a via master for creating loop

wires.
-setViaTopEncHeightForLoopWire
<double>

Set search condition by the length (unit:
um) of the top enclosure of vias for loop
wires.
-setViaTopEncWidthForLoopWire
<double>
-shieldWire
Set search condition by the width (unit: um)

of the top enclosure of vias for loop wires.
Shield wires for specified nets. When this

constraint is specified without -nets, it is
treated as a general constraint.
1190

K-2015.06

Argument
Description
-spinePattern

Specify the spine pattern.
Valid values: H, V, and AUTO.
-trackPrioritySeq <string>

Set the track priority sequence by a
specified file.
-userGrid <string>

Set minimum user grid for all routing layers.
Valid value: a string in format {x y}, where
{x y} indicates different minimum grid
values in X and Y directions. 0 means
reset.
When specified, the router may try to align
as many wires or vias as possible to the
specified minimum grid.
-useSpine

Use spine pattern routing.
-useViaEnclosedByPin

Enclose vias on pins of specified layers by
pin shape.
-useViaOnly

Disallow wiring on specified layers.
-VVViaOnly

Use vias with vertical (V) enclosure for the
specified layers.

K-2015.06
1191

setRoutingLayer
Examples
# Example 1
# Show all current settings
setRoutingConstraint -info
# Example 2
# Set the Max Segment Length Constraint for global routes
setRoutingConstraint -maxSegmentLength 1.0 -layers { M1 }
# Example 3
# Set the Max Wire Length Constraint for global routes
setRoutingConstraint -maxWireLength 1.0 -layers { M2 }
See Also
routeNet
fixViolation
setRoutingLayer
The setRoutingLayer command sets the available routing layers.
Syntax
setRoutingLayer [-fromLayer string] [-toLayer string]
[-clear] [-info]
Returns
Arguments
1192
Argument
Description
-clear
Remove the metal ECO constraints.
-fromLayer string
Allow layout changes beginning from this layer (specified

by name).
-info
List the current metal ECO constraints.
-toLayer string
Allow layout changes up to this layer (specified by name).

K-2015.06

Examples
# Example 1
setRoutingLayer -fromLayer metal1 -toLayer metal4
# Example 2
setRoutingLayer -clear
# Example 3
setRoutingLayer -info
See Also
routeNet
fixViolation
The reportSuggestedPitch command reports the pitch suggested by the
router.
Syntax
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
# Example 1
# Calculate the best pitch and report the suggested pitch
setOption router autoAdjustPitch true

K-2015.06
1193

#
#
#
#
#
#
Current Related Routing Constraints:

doubleVia: ON
userGrid : OFF
---------------------------------------------------------Suggested Pitch for Route Rule default
----------------------------------------------------------
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
Metal Layer: Suggested Value

(Original)
M1
:
0.59
(0.98)
M2
:
0.775
(0.9)
M3
:
0.99
(0.98)
M4
:
1.12
(0.98)
---------------------------------------------------------Suggested Pitch for Route Rule myrule1
---------------------------------------------------------Metal Layer: Suggested Value
(Original)
M1
:
0.66
(0.98)
M2
:
0.9
(0.9)
M3
:
0.99
(0.98)
M4
:
1.12
(0.98)
----------------------------------------------------------
See Also
routeNet
reportRule
1194

K-2015.06
9
9
Automatic Place and Route (APR)
This chapter describes the definable Tcl commands applied to the Laker APR
commands of the Layout window. These commands and arguments are sorted
alphabetically.
The Automatic Place and Route (APR) Tcl commands are listed as follows. Tcl
commands and arguments are sorted alphabetically.
addEndCap
addFiller
addIOPadFiller
addView
addWellTap
analyzeConnectivity
analyzeRoute
aprExit
checkConnectivity
checkExistingVio
checkPlacement
checkRCTable
checkSuboptimal
checkTieHiLo
checkViolation
clearCTSException

K-2015.06
1195
Chapter 9: Automatic Place and Route (APR)
1196
closeDesign
compareRc
compileDef
compileHdl
compileLef
convertRouteConnectionModel
createLibGroup
createPlaceBlkUnderMetal
createRouteRule
deleteFiller
deleteRoute
deleteRouteRule
deleteSdc
deleteView
detachScanChain
dumpInstPlacementTcl
dumpPinConstraintTemplate
dumpPinPlacementTcl
ecoRoute
extractRc
extractScanChain
fillNotchGap
fixNetRatio
fixRoutePattern
fixViolation
genRCTable
guiSetLayerColor
guiShow
help

K-2015.06
ignoreNetInRouting
insertDFMVia
insertDoubleVia
legalizeInst
listViews
man
memUsage
optAddBuffer
optAddInvPair
optDeleteBuffer
optDeleteInvPair
optSizeCell
optimizeNetFanout
optimizeNetLength
optimizePin
optimizePostCTSDesign
optimizePostRouteDesign
optimizePreCTSDesign
placeIOPad
placeInst
placeInstECO
placePin
readDef
readDesign
readEcoDesign
readLef
readRCTable
readSdc
readSpareCellFile

K-2015.06
1197
1198
readSpef
readVerilog
redirectOutput
removeBufInvs
removeDoubleVia
removePlacement
reportBufInvs
reportCTSException
reportCTSOption
reportCaseAnalysis
reportClock
reportClockTree
reportConstraint
reportCorner
reportDelayCalculation
reportDesign
reportJog
reportNet
reportOptOption
reportPlaceOption
reportRouteInfo
reportRouteRule
reportRule
reportSiteUtilization
reportSlackHistogram
reportSpine
reportTieHiLo
reportTiming

K-2015.06
resetCTSOption
resetSdc
resumeOutput
routeNet
routeRail
routeRing
routeStripe
setActiveView
setCTSException
setCTSOption
setDontUseCell
setIdealClock
setOptOption
setOption
setPlaceOption
setPropagatedClock
setRouteRule
setRoutingLayer
setRoutingTrack
setViolationType
showHPWL
synthesizeClockTree
unsetDontUseCell
updateTiming
writeDef
writeDesign
writeEcoReport

K-2015.06
1199

addEndCap
writeSdf
writeSpareCellFile
writeSpef
writeVerilog
addEndCap
The addEndCap command inserts cap cells in the end of rows. All row
intervals should be enclosed by cap cells.
Similar to the addWellTap command, this command is used to avoid DRC
violations.
Syntax
addEndCap [-ground name] -postCap name [-power name] -preCap
name [-prefix name] [-setAsFixed]
Returns
A progress message is returned.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-ground name
-postCap name
Specify the name of the cell in the technology library to use

to cap the end of each site row.
-power name
-preCap name
Specify the name of the cell in the technology library to use

to cap the beginning of each site row.
-prefix name
Specify the prefix name.
-setAsFixed
Set the placement status of inserted cap instances to

FIXED.
Examples
# Example 1
addEndCap -preCap PRECAP -postCap POSTCAP -power VDD -ground VSS
1200

K-2015.06

addFiller
See Also
addFiller
addWellTap
deleteFiller
addFiller
The addFiller command fills unused sites with the specified filler cells.
Syntax
addFiller [-box {area}] [-ground name] [-power name] [-prefix
name] [-prefixMetalFillers name] [-selectedFillerCells
name] [-selectedMetalFillerCells name]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-box {area}
Add filler cells within the area formed by {x1 y1 x2

y2}.
-ground name
-power name
-prefix name
Specify the prefix for inserted filler instances.
-prefixMetalFillers
name
Specify the prefix for inserted metal filler instances.
-selectedFillerCells
name
Specify the cell name of filler cells.
-selectedMetalFillerCells Specify the cell name of metal filler cells.

name

K-2015.06
1201

addIOPadFiller
Examples
# Example 1
addFiller
# Example 2
addFiller -selectedFillerCells FILL* -power VDD -ground GND
# Example 3
addFiller -selectedMetalFillerCells MFILL* -prefixMetalFillers
mfiller
See Also
deleteFiller
addWellTap
addEndCap
addIOPadFiller
The addIOPadFiller command inserts the filler cells between IO pads. The
space between IO pads is filled by IO fillers. For some conditions, the IO filler
can overlap with each other.
Syntax
addIOPadFiller [-selectedFillerCells] [overlapFillerCells] [-prefix] [-box {area}] [skipLeftSide] [-skipTopSide] [-skipRightSide] [skipBottomSide]
Returns
Arguments
1202
Argument
Description
-box {area}
Add filler cells within the area formed by {x1 y1 x2

y2}.
-overlapFillerCells
Specify the pad filler cells that overlap is allowed.
-prefix
Specify the prefix for inserted filler instances.
Specify the pad filler cells.

K-2015.06

addView
Argument
Description
-skipBottomSide
Skip the action at bottom side.
-skipLeftSide
Skip the action at left side.
-skipRightSide
Skip the action at right side.
-skipTopSide
Skip the action at top side.
Examples
# Example 1
addIOPadFiller -sel GRIO025_FILLER* -overlap GRIO025_FILLER* \
-prefix IOFILL
See Also
placeIOPad
addView
The addView command creates an analysis view for timing analysis. It defines
the operating conditions (or environmental characteristics) for the current
design.
The library with maximum and minimum conditions must be specified for delay
analysis. The maxLibraryGroup is used for maximum delay analysis and the
minLibraryGroup is used for minimum delay analysis.
Syntax
addView [-analysisType single | bcwc | ocv ] [-crpr] [cScalarHold value] [-cScalarSetup value] -libGroup
libGroupName -maxLibGroup libGroupName [-maxOp
operating_condition] -minLibGroup libGroupName [-minOp
operating_condition] [-op operating_condition] -rcMode
MIN | NOM | MAX -sdc sdcName viewName
Returns

K-2015.06
1203

addView
Arguments
Argument
Description
-analysisType
single | bcwc | ocv
Specify the operating condition analysis type. The

available types are:
1204
single: Single timing library

bcwc: Dual timing library for best/worse corner
ocv: On-chip-variation on top of bcwc or timingderate.
-crpr
Enable clock re-convergence pessimism removal

analysis.
-cScalarHold value
Specify the multiplier for the capacitance value in hold

analysis.
-cScalarSetup value
Specify the multiplier for the capacitance value in setup

analysis.
-libGroup
libGroupName
Specify the library containing definitions of the

environmental characteristics to be used. This is either
a library name or a collection object.
-maxLibGroup
libGroupName
Specify the library that contains the max_condition.

This is either a library name or a collection object. If this
option is specified, the -maxOp option must also be
specified.
-maxOp
operating_condition
Specify the maximum operating condition used for

checking maximum delays and setup violations (see
the reportTiming command with the -delay min
option). If this option is specified, the -minOp option
must also be specified.
-minLibGroup
libGroupName
Specify the library that contains the min_condition.

This is either a library name or a collection object. If this
option is specified, the -minOp option must also be
specified.
-minOp
operating_condition
Specify the minimum operating condition used for

checking minimum delays and hold violations (see the
reportTiming command with the -delay min
option). If this option is specified, the -maxOp option
must also be specified.

K-2015.06

addWellTap
Argument
Description
-op operating_condition Specify the name of a single operating condition.

-rcMode
MIN | NOM | MAX
Specify the RC extraction mode. The modes are

minimum (MIN), nominal (NOM), and maximum (MAX).
Only one may be specified at a time.
-sdc sdcName
Specify the design/timing constraint (SDC) file name.
viewName

Examples
# Example 1
createLibGroup -libGroup typicalGroup data/typical.lib
readSdc -sdcGroup sdcGrp test.sdc
addAnalysisView corner1 -rcMode NOM -libGroup typicalGroup \
-sdc sdcGrp
# Example 2
# For max/min library analysis
addAnalysisView corner1 -rcMode NOM -maxLibGroup maxGroup \
-minLibGroup minGroup -sdc sdcGrp
See Also
reportTiming
createLibGroup
readSdc
addWellTap
The addWellTap command inserts well-tap cells to avoid DRC violations.
To minimize cell size in advanced processes, well-taps are removed from the
standard cell and well-tap cell insertion is performed to avoid latch up DRC
violations.
Well-taps are physical-only filler cells that are required by some technology
libraries to limit resistance between power or ground connections to the
substrate well.
For back-to-back row types, the stagger technology is used to reduce the area
impact.
K-2015.06
1205

addWellTap
Syntax
addWellTap -cell name [-ground name] [-prefix name] [-power
name] -maxGap distance [-setAsFixed] [-stagger]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell name
Specify the cell name in the technology library to use as a

well-tap.
-ground name
-prefix name
Specify the prefix name.
-power name
-maxGap distance
Specify the distance (in microns) from the left edge of one
well-tap to the right edge of the following well-tap in the
same row.
-setAsFixed
Set the placement status of inserted tap instances to

FIXED.
-stagger
Insert the well-tap using stagger style.
Examples
# Example 1
addWellTap -cell WELLTAP -maxGap 10.0 -setAsFixed
# Example 2
addWellTap -cell WELLTAP -maxGap 10.0 -stagger -power VDD \
-ground VSS -prefix _WellTap
See Also
addFiller
deleteFiller
addEndCap
1206

K-2015.06

analyzeConnectivity
analyzeConnectivity
The analyzeConnectivity command analyzes the connectivity of one net
only and highlights the results in various colors on the GUI.
Syntax
analyzeConnectivity [-cadence | -synopsys | -magma | springSoft] -net net_name
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cadence | -synopsys |
-magma | -springSoft
Specify the connectivity model as one of the following

modes: Cadence, Synopsys, Magma, or
SpringSoft. Only one mode may be specified. The
default mode is SpringSoft.
-net net_name
Check the connectivity of the specified net.
Examples
analyzeConnectivity -net myNet -springSoft
See Also
checkConnectivity
analyzeRoute
The analyzeRoute command analyzes the routing shapes of specified nets
and reports the statistical information of specified nets.
Syntax
analyzeRoute [-layer string] [-net {string}] [-netRatio] [minRatio value] [-reportLimit integer] [-useHPWL] [viaPinRatio]
Returns

K-2015.06
1207

analyzeRoute
Arguments
Argument
Description
-layer string
Sort the results by the wire length of the specified layer.

This argument cannot be specified with the netRatio and -viaPinRatio arguments.
-net {string}
Specify the net name pattern.
-netRatio
Set to report a net if its total wire length to the

Manhattan distance is greater than the minimum ratio.
-minRatio value
Report a net if the ratio is greater than the specified

value.
-reportLimit integer
Specify the maximum number of reported nets.

-useHPWL
Set to use the half perimeter of the net bounding box

instead of the Manhattan distance for net ratio
calculation. If this option is used, -netRatio must also
be specified.
-viaPinRatio
Set to report a net if its total via count to the pin count is
greater than the minimum ratio.
Examples
# Example 1
analyzeRoute
# Example 2
analyzeRoute -net { netToBeAnalyzed }
# Example 3
analyzeRoute -minRatio 4 -netRatio -reportLimit 50
See Also
checkConnectivity
routeNet
1208

K-2015.06

aprExit
aprExit
The aprExit command exits the window.
Syntax
aprExit
Returns
Examples
# Example 1
readDesign my_design -topCell CPU
...
closeDesign
aprExit
See Also
exit quit
According to the filtered criteria, the changeRouteTypeStatus command
changes the route status and route type of physical shapes.
Syntax
changeRouteTypeStatus [-allPGNets] [-allSignalNets] [default] [-dryRun] [-free] [-fixed] [-net string] [normal] [-onlyChangeNonPrewire] [-spineOnly] [-stripe]
[-verbose] [-viaOnly] [-viaWithMasterName string] [viaWithMinimumCut integer] [-wireGreaterThanMinWidth] [wireGreaterThanVarWidth] [-wireOnly] [wireWithMinWidth]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-allPGNets
Apply changes to all power and ground (PG) nets.

K-2015.06
1209

Argument
Description
-allSignalNets
Apply changes to all signal nets.
-default
Perform all default common route type changes,

including:
Apply status change to all shapes of PG nets.

Mark all normal/special and free PG nonminimum-width wires as fixed.
Mark all normal/special and free PG vias with

more than 2 cuts as fixed.
The -default argument overrules any other
conflicting parameters.
-dryRun
Go through the nets and test the changes without

changing anything for real.
-free
Change the route status as free.
-fixed
Change the route status as fixed.
-net string
Specify the name of the net (or name pattern) of

routes to be changed.
-normal
Change the route type as normal.
-onlyChangeNonPrewire
Only apply changes to non-prewire wires/vias.
-spineOnly
Only change the route type/status on spine wires.
-stripe
Change the route type as stripe.
-verbose
Only change the route type/status of spine wires

(skip vias/normal wires).
-viaOnly
Only change the route type/status on vias.
-viaWithMasterName string
Change all vias matching the specified master

name.
-viaWithMinimumCut integer Change the routes of vias with the number of cuts
greater than or equal to the specified value.
-wireGreaterThanMinWidth
1210
Change the routes of wires with a width greater

than the minimum width of the layer.

K-2015.06

checkConnectivity
Argument
Description
-wireGreaterThanVarWidth
Change the routes of wires with a width greater

than the variable width of the layer.
-wireOnly
Only change the route type/status on wires.
-wireWithMinWidth
Change the routes of wires with a width equal to

the mininum width of the layer.
Examples
# Example 1
changeRouteTypeStatus -default
# Example 2
changeRouteTypeStatus -spineOnly -fixed
# Example 3
changeRouteTypeStatus -allPGNets -stripe
See Also
deleteRoute
checkConnectivity
The checkConnectivity command checks the physical connectivity status
of a pin and traverses from the driving pin (if it has port shapes). For detailed
analysis with graphical display, use the analyzeConnectivity command.
Use the -net argument to see a detailed report of each net.
Power/Ground (PG) nets are always checked. With -checkPGPins, all pins of
a PG net are checked, without -checkPGPins, only tied-high/low pins of a PG
net are checked.
Syntax
checkConnectivity [-cadence | -synopsys | -magma | springSoft] [-checkPGPins] [-checkShapes] [-incremental]
[-net net_name] [-skipNoRouteNets] [-skipPGNets] [threads threads_number]
Returns
K-2015.06
1211

checkConnectivity
Arguments
Argument
Description
Specify the connectivity model as one of the following

modes: Cadence, Synopsys, Magma, or
-checkPGPins
Check PG pins connectivity in PG nets. When not

specified, only tied-high/low pins are checked.
-checkShapes
Check open shapes as in analyzeConnectivity.
-incremental
Check connectivity incrementally based on the touched

connection of pins.
-net net_name
Check the openness of the specified net and then

generate a detailed report. This argument cannot be
specified with the -threads, -skipNoRouteNets, or
-skipPGNets arguments.
-skipNoRouteNets
Do not report open nets that have NO routing (totally

unrouted nets). This argument cannot be specified with
the -net argument.
-skipPGNets
Do not check and report PG nets for connectivity. This

argument cannot be specified with the -net argument.
-threads
threads_number
Specify the number of threads used for openness

checking. The default is the maximum available CPU
threads.
This argument cannot be specified with the -net
argument.
Examples
# Example 1
checkConnectivity -springSoft -threads 4
# Example 2
checkConnectivity -magma -net myNet
See Also
analyzeConnectivity
1212

K-2015.06

checkExistingVio
checkExistingVio
According to the design rule, the checkExistingVio command checks the
existing DRC violations for pins in the cell.
Syntax
checkExistingVio [-selectedTypeOnly] [-signalOnly]
[-threads integer]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-selectedTypeOnly
Only report violations for the types specified in the

violationTypeSet command.
-signalOnly
Skip checking PG instance pins. Only report a violation

if the port-rectangle belongs to a signal pin.
-threads integer

checking.
Examples
# Example 1
checkExistingVio
# Example 2
checkExistingVio -selectedTypeOnly
See Also
checkViolation
checkPlacement
The checkPlacement command checks the placement legality. It is a checker
used to detect errors related to the current message.

K-2015.06
1213

checkRCTable
Syntax
checkPlacement [-blockageAware] [-detail] [overlapIgnoreCheckList string] [-short]
Returns
A summary message is returned.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-blockageAware
Detect whether cells overlap with placement blockage.
-detail
Perform detailed checking.
-overlapIgnoreCheckList Specify the list to ignore when checking overlap.

string
Valid values: string list.
-short
Detect whether the cells are placed under safe route.
Examples
# Example 1
checkPlacement
# Example 2
checkPlacement -detail
See Also
placeInst
legalizeInst
addFiller
deleteFiller
checkRCTable
The checkRCTable command checks the completeness of the resistance and
capacitance (RC) lookup table loaded with the readRCTable command. All
routing layer combinations should have associated model and tables. If there
are missing RC models (specifying the up/current/down layers and associated
models for different corners) or RC lookup table, the extractRC command
fails.
1214

K-2015.06

checkSuboptimal
Syntax
checkRCTable
Returns
Examples
checkRCTable
See Also
readRCTable
checkSuboptimal
The checkSuboptimal command checks the sub-optimal routing shapes.
Syntax
checkSuboptimal [-freeOnly] [-signalOnly] [-threads
integer]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-freeOnly
Only report a sub-optimal route if it is related to a

status-free (not fixed) shape.
-signalOnly
Only report a sub-optimal route if it is related to a

signal or tied-high/low net shape.
-threads integer
Specify the threads used for sub-optimal route

checking.
Examples
checkSuboptimal
See Also
checkViolation

K-2015.06
1215

checkTieHiLo
checkExistingVio
fixRoutePattern
fixNetRatio
checkTieHiLo
The checkTieHiLo command checks the physical connectivity status of a
tied-high/low pin. This command traverses from the tied-high/low pin (the signal
port that is connected to a power/ground (PG) net) to PG pre-wires.
Syntax
checkTieHiLo [ -cadence | -synopsys | -magma | -springSoft ]
[-net net_name] [-threads threads_number]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
Specify the connectivity model as one of the

following modes: Cadence, Synopsys, Magma, or
SpringSoft. Only one mode may be specified.
The default mode is SpringSoft. The springSoft argument is also known as nanovata.
-net net_name
Check the tied-high/low openness of the specified

net and generate a detailed report. This argument
cannot be used with the -threads argument.
-threads threads_number
Specify the number of threads used for checking

tied-high/low openness. The default is the maximum
available CPU threads. Valid value: an integer. This
argument cannot be used with the
-net argument.
Examples
checkTieHiLo -springSoft -threads 4
checkTieHiLo -cadence -net myNet
1216

K-2015.06

checkViolation
See Also
analyzeConnectivity
checkConnectivity
checkViolation
According to the design rule, the checkViolation command checks existing
design rule violations.
Syntax
checkViolation [-freeOnly] [-selectedTypeOnly] [signalOnly] [-threads integer]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-freeOnly
Only check and report violations related to a status-free

(not fixed) shape.
-selectedTypeOnly
Only check and report violations for types specified in the

violationTypeSet command.
-signalOnly
Only check and report violations related to a signal or

tied-high/low net shape.
-threads integer

checking.
Examples
# Example 1
checkViolation
# Example 2
checkViolation -signalOnly -freeOnly
# Example 3
checkViolation -selectedTypeOnly

K-2015.06
1217

clearCTSException
See Also
fixViolation
fixRoutePattern
insertDFMVia
setViolationType
clearCTSException
The clearCTSException command clears CTS pin exceptions.
Syntax
clearCTSException [ -all ] [ -excludePin pinNames ] [ leafPin pinNames ] [ -stopPin pinNames ] [ -throughPin
pinNames ]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-all
Clear all pin exceptions.
-excludePin pinNames
Specify the list of user-defined pin names to exclude for

CTS.
-leafPin pinNames
Specify the list of user-defined leaf pins for CTS.
-stopPin pinNames
Specify the list of user-defined stop pins for CTS.
-throughPin pinNames
Specify the list of user-defined through pins for CTS.
Examples
# Example 1
clearCTSException -excludePin u1/CK -stopPin u2/CK
# Example 2
clearCTSException -all
See Also
setCTSException
1218

K-2015.06

closeDesign
closeDesign
The closeDesign command closes the current design and releases the
design data from memory.
Syntax
closeDesign
Returns
Examples
# Example 1
readLib -logical logical_lib -physical physical_lib
readDesign my_design -topCell CPU
...
closeDesign
See Also
readDesign
compareRc
The compareRc command compares two SPEF files to calculate the worst
relative difference, the worst absolute difference, the expected value error, and
the standard deviation error.
The first file specified should contain the golden data.
Syntax
compareRc spef_file_name1 spef_file_name2 [-max maxVal] [min minVal]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
spef_file_name1
Specify the first SPEF file to compare.

K-2015.06
1219

compileDef
Argument
Description
spef_file_name2
Specify the second SPEF file to compare.
-max maxVal
Skip the capacitance with value greater than the

specified maximum value (in pF).
-min minVal
Skip the capacitance with value less than the specified

minimum value (in pF).
Examples
# Example 1
compareRc golden.spef data.spef
See Also
writeSpef
readSpef
compileDef
The compileDef command compiles the specified DEF file(s) and saves the
design data into the specified database.
Syntax
compileDef defFilesList -output db_name [-refLib
reference_lef_lib(s)]
Returns
Arguments
1220
Argument
Description
defFilesList
Specify one or more DEF files.
-output db_name
Specify the database name to be created.
-refLib reference_lef_lib(s)
Specify the LEF cell library database.

K-2015.06

compileHdl
Examples
# Example 1
compileLef -output lef13 head.lef macro.lef
compileDef -refLib lef13 -output my_design cpu_routed.def
See Also
readDesign
compileLef
compileHdl
The compileHdl command compiles the specified HDL source files into a
database.
For CPF support, the -cpf argument is required to specify the CPF file to map
1b1 and 1b0 in different power domains correctly. The specified CPF file
binds to this design on disk. This CPF file does not need to be specified again
later.
The CPF file can also contain liberty and SDC information.
Syntax
compileHdl -cpf cpf_file -output db_name -refLib
external_reference_lib(s) [-top_cell top_cell_name] [verilog verilog_file]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cpf cpf_file
Specify the common power format (CPF) file.
-output db_name
Specify the database name to be created.
-refLib
external_reference_lib(s)
Specify the external reference library.
-top_cell top_cell_name
Specify the top module name. If this option is not

specified, the first non-instantiated module is
assigned as the top module.

K-2015.06
1221

compileLef
Argument
Description
-verilog verilog_file
Specify the Verilog file to compile into the database.
Examples
# Example 1
# Compile c.v by reference to lef with cpf file myCPF.cpf
compileHdl -verilog c.v -refLib lef -topCell system -cpf myCPF.cpf
See Also
compileDef
compileLef
readDesign
compileLef
The compileLef command compiles physical (.lef) library files into the
specified database. The logical name of database is the same as the base
name of the physical database.
lib.defs is updated after this command.
For multiple LEF library support, the LEF library containing the technology
information must be compiled with -tfLib. Other LEF libraries must reference
this technology library specified with the -tfRef argument.
Syntax
compileLef filesList [-layerMap layerMapFile] -output dbName
[-tfLib] [-tfRef refTechLib]
Returns
Arguments
1222
Argument
Description
filesList
Specify one or more external files.
-layerMap layerMapFile

K-2015.06

Argument
Description
-output dbName
Specifies the database name to be created. This

argument must be specified. All LEF files are
compiled into the specified database (db_name).
-tfLib
Specify the technology library.
-tfRef refTechLib
Specify the reference LEF library for this LEF library.
Examples
# Example 1
# The files_list can be a Tcl list format
compileLef -output lef13 {head.lef macro.lef}
# Example 2
# Compile LEF library
compileLef -output lef13 head.lef macro.lef
compileDef -tech_lib lef13 -output my_design cpu_routed.def
# Example 3
# Compile multiple
compileLef -output
compileLef -output
compileLef -output
LEF libraries
lef_tech tech.lef -tfLib
lef_std std.lef -tfRef lef_tech
lef_mem mem.lef -tfRef lef_tech
See Also
compileDef
readDesign
The convertRouteConnectionModel command converts the net specified
with the -net argument.
By default, box overlaps are considered as connected.
-cadence/-synopsys modes are both center-line modes. However,
-cadence mode is stricter than -synopsys mode. For example, in -cadence
mode:
Center-line crossing is not considered as connected.
Origin of via must sit on center line of wires.

K-2015.06
1223

createLibGroup
Syntax
convertRouteConnectionModel [-net string] [-verbose]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-net string
Convert the connectivity of the specified net only and

generate a detailed report.
-verbose
Print the detailed information into the log file.
Examples
# Example 1
# Example 2
convertRouteConnectionModel -verbose
See Also
checkConnectivity
createLibGroup
The createLibGroup command creates a library group with the specified
name. This group can be input by readLib for addAnalysisView to use
later.
Syntax
createLibGroup libFileNames [-libGroup group_name]
Returns
Arguments
1224
Argument
Description
libFileNames
Specify one or more library file (.lib) names. If multiple

names are specified, surround the list with {}.

K-2015.06

Argument
Description
-libGroup group_name
Specify the name for the library group.
Examples
# Example 1
readLib data/typical.lib
createLibGroup -libGroup typicalGroup data/typical.lib
addAnalysisView corner1 -rcMode NOM -libGroup typicalGroup
See Also
addAnalysisView
The createPlaceBlkUnderMetal command creates placement blockages
under pre-routed shapes.
During the design flow, users may not expect to place instances under prerouted shapes. This command provides a strategy for creating placement
blockages under routed shapes.
Syntax
createPlaceBlkUnderMetal -layer layerNames [-pgOnly]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-layer layerNames
Specify one or more metal layers. If multiple layers are

specified, separate by spaces and surround the list with
{}.
-pgOnly
Only create a blockage under power/ground (PG)

shapes.
Examples
# Example 1
createPlaceBlkUnderMetal -layer {ME1 ME2}

K-2015.06
1225

createRouteRule
# Example 2
createPlaceBlkUnderMetal -layer {ME1 ME2} -pgOnly
See Also
placement
createRouteRule
The createRouteRule command defines the wiring width, spacing and
available routing layer with non-default rules.
Syntax
createRouteRule [-maxLayer string] [-minLayer string] [refRule string] [-rule string] [-wireSpacing string] [wireSpacingMultiplier string] [-wireWidth string] [wireWidthMultiplier string]
Returns
Arguments
1226
Argument
Description
-maxLayer string
Specify the name of the maximum layer for routing

(also known as -maxLayerName).
-minLayer string
Specify the name of the minimum layer for routing (also

known as -minLayerName).
-refRule string
Specify the name of the reference route rule.
-rule string
-wireSpacing string
Specify the desired wire spacing on the specified layer

with the following format: {layerName1
wireSpacing1 ... layerNameN
wireSpacingN}.
-wireSpacingMultiplier
string
Specify the desired wire spacing multiplier on the

specified layer with the following format:
{layerName1 wireSpacingMultiplier1 ...
layerNameN wireSpacingMultiplierN}.

K-2015.06

deleteFiller
Argument
Description
-wireWidth string
Specify the desired wire width on the specified layer

with the following format: {layerName1 wireWidth1
... layerNameN wireWidthN}.
-wireWidthMultiplier
string
Specify the desired wire width multiplier on the

specified layer with the following format:
{layerName1 wireWidthMultiplier1 ...
layerNameN wireWidthMultiplierN}.
Examples
# Example 1
createRouteRule -rule double_Width \
-wireWidth { metal1 0.23 metal2 0.28 metal3 0.56 metal4 0.88 }
# Example 2
createRouteRule -rule double_Spacing \
-wireSpacing { metal1 0.23 metal2 0.28 metal3 0.56 metal4 0.92 }
# Example 3
createRouteRule -rule myRule -wireWidth { M1 0.1}
See Also
setRouteRule
reportRouteRule
deleteRouteRule
deleteFiller
The deleteFiller command removes filler cells from the current design.
Filler cells with COVER status are not removed.
Syntax
deleteFiller [-box {area}] [-selectedFillerCells string]
Returns

K-2015.06
1227

deleteRoute
Arguments
Argument
Description
-box {area}
Delete filler cells from the area formed by {x1 y1 x2

y2}.
string
Specify the string pattern for the filler cell names.
Examples
# Example 1
deleteFiller
# Example 2
deleteFiller -selectedFillerCells FILL* -box {0 0 400 400}
See Also
addFiller
addEndCap
addWellTap
deleteRoute
The deleteRoute command deletes the routes for specified nets using the
given options.
Syntax
deleteRoute [-allNets] [-allSignals] [-netNames string] [subTypes string] [-types string]
Returns
Arguments
1228
Argument
Description
-allNets
Delete routes for all nets.
-allSignals
Delete routes for signal-type nets (including tied-high/

low nets).

K-2015.06

deleteRouteRule
Argument
Description
-netNames string
Specify the net names of the routes to be deleted. The

wildcard character * or regular expressions are
supported. If multiple net names are specified,
surround the list with {}.
-subTypes string
Delete the routes that match the sub-types of the

specified nets. If multiple sub-types are specified,
Valid values: RING, STRIPE, FOLLOWPIN, PINCONN,
IOWIRE, COREWIRE, and BLOCKWIRE.
-types string
Delete the routes that match the type of the specified

nets. If multiple types are specified, surround the list
with {}. Valid values: PG and SIGNAL.
Examples
# Example 1
deleteRoute -allSignals
# Example 2
deleteRoute -types {PG} -subTypes {FOLLOWPIN}
# Example 3
deleteRoute -net {netToBeDeleted}
See Also
routeNet
deleteRouteRule
The deleteRouteRule command deletes the defined non-default rules.
Syntax
deleteRouteRule [-all] [-rule string]
Returns

K-2015.06
1229

deleteSdc
Arguments
Argument
Description
-all
Delete all route rules.
-rule string
Specify the name of the route rule to be deleted.
Examples
# Example 1
deleteRouteRule -all
# Example 2
deleteRouteRule -rule myRule
See Also
createRouteRule
setRouteRule
reportRouteRule
deleteSdc
The deleteSdc command deletes a defined SDC group. All timing views that
reference the deleted SDC group are also deleted.
Syntax
deleteSdc groupName
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
groupName
Specify a previously defined group name.
Examples
# Example 1
readSdc -sdcGroup testMode {constraint.sdc test.sdc}
readSdc -sdcGroup normalMode {constraint.sdc normal.sdc}
1230

K-2015.06

deleteView
addView corner1 -sdc testMode ...

addView corner3 -sdc normalMode ...
# If deleteSdc testMode is executed, the SDC group testMode
# is deleted. Views corner1 and corner2 are also deleted.
See Also
readSdc
resetSdc
deleteView
deleteView
The deleteView command deletes a previously defined timing view.
Syntax
deleteView viewName
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
viewName
Specify the timing view name.
Examples
# Example 1
readSdc -sdcGroup testMode {contraint.sdc test.sdc}
# If deleteView corner1 is executed, corner1 is deleted.
# Only corner2 references SDC group testMode.
See Also
addView
readSdc

K-2015.06
1231

detachScanChain
detachScanChain
The detachScanChain command detaches the connection for the specified
scan chain name.
Syntax
detachScanChain
-name string
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-name string
Specify the scan chain name.
Examples
# Example 1
detachScanChain -name chain1
The dumpInstPlacementTcl command dumps the current placement (for
example: instance position, orientation, and status) in Tcl format. The
placement can be recalled by sourcing the Tcl script.
Syntax
dumpInstPlacementTcl -file name
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file name
Examples
# Example 1
dumpInstPlacementTcl -file place.tcl
1232

K-2015.06

See Also
dumpPinPlacementTcl
The dumpPinConstraintTemplate command dumps a template file for pin
constraints. A template file is a better starting point.
Syntax
dumpPinConstraintTemplate -file name
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file name
Examples
# Example 1
dumpPinConstraintTemplate -file pin.const
See Also
placePin
dumpPinPlacementTcl
The dumpPinPlacementTcl command dumps the current pin position and
size in Tcl format. The placement can be recalled by sourcing the Tcl script.
Syntax
dumpPinPlacementTcl -file name
Returns

K-2015.06
1233

ecoRoute
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file name
Examples
# Example 1
dumpPinPlacementTcl -file pin.tcl
See Also
ecoRoute
The ecoRoute command connects open nets and fixes existing rule violations.
All violations are fixed by R&R and pusher.
Syntax
ecoRoute [-autoReduceMask] [-checkTopPinMA] [cutOffVioSoftness softness] [-fixSuboptimal] [incremental] [-maxLayer maxLayer] [-minLayer minLayer]
[-onGrid] [-skipTieHiLo] [-skipVioFixing] [-threads
thread_num] [-suboptimalMaxIteration sub_opt_iter_num]
[-trimTieHiLo] [-useDoubleVia] [-vioFixIteration
iter_num]
Returns
Progressive messages for each violation if successful; otherwise, returns
nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-autoReduceMask
Perform auto mask reduction routing iterations.
-checkTopPinMA
Check the minimum area violation on top-level pins

and fix violations.
-cutOffVioSoftness softness Ignore DRC violation types if the softness is

greater than the specified value.
1234

K-2015.06

ecoRoute
Argument
Description
-fixSuboptimal
Treat suboptimal routes as violations and fix them.
-incremental
Perform checkConnectivity and fixViolation

incrementally to reduce routing time.
-maxLayer maxLayer
Specify the preferred maximum routing layer by

name.
-minLayer minLayer
Specify the preferred minimum routing layer by

name.
-onGrid
Route on major grids (tracks) when possible.
-skipTieHiLo
Skip fixing tied-high/low opens.
-skipVioFixing
Skip fixing DRC violations. Only fix opens.
-suboptimalMaxIteration
sub_opt_iter_num
Specify the number of iterations to perform for

cleaning up passive suboptimal routes.
-threads thread_num

fixing. Valid value: an integer, from 0 to 8. Default
is 1.
-trimTieHiLo
Set to perform wire trimming on dangling tied-high/

low wires and vias during violation fixing.
-useDoubleVia
Set to use double via during routing. A single via is

considered a violation.
-vioFixIteration iter_num
Specify the number of iterations for violation fixing.

Examples
# Example 1
ecoRoute
# Example 2
ecoRoute -onGrid -thread 4
See Also
fixViolation

K-2015.06
1235

extractRc
checkViolation
checkConnectivity
extractRc
The extractRc command extracts the RC value of all nets after reading the
RC table.
Syntax
extractRc [-ignoredNets names] [-incremental] [-nets names]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-ignoredNets names
Specify the nets whose shapes should be ignored as

coupling parties during RC extraction. If multiple names
are specified, surround the list with {}.
-incremental
Only update the RC value for those nets that are dirty.
When in doubt, do not use this option.
-nets names
Specify the names or patterns of nets to extract the RC

value for. If multiple names are specified, surround the
list with {}.
Examples
# Example 1
extractRc
# Example 2
extractRc -net {n1 n2 n3}
# Example 3
extractRc -incremental
See Also
readRCTable
1236

K-2015.06

extractScanChain
extractScanChain
The extractScanChain command extracts the scan chains for the
scanMode assigned in the CPF file or from the addView command. The
desired stil file and scan chains (from scan_in/scan_out) can also be specified.
Syntax
extractScanChain [-chain string]
string]
-scanMode string
[-stil
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-chain string
Specify the scan chains scan_in and scan_out names,

for example: SI1 SO1 SI2 SO2 ... SIn SOn.
-scanMode string
Specify the scan mode name from the CPF file or from
addView -sdc {scanMode}.
-stil string
Specify the stil file name.
Examples
# Example 1
addView ScanFastView -libGroup fastLibSet -sdc ScanMode \
-analysisType single -rcGroup testRc
extractScanChain -stil scan.stil -scanMode {ScanMode}
See Also
addView
fillNotchGap
The fillNotchGap command is used in the post-process stage to fill the
notch/gap for DRC.

K-2015.06
1237

fixNetRatio
Syntax
fillNotchGap [-freeOnly] [-remove] [-signalOnly] [-threads
integer]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-freeOnly
Only fill the notch/gap if it is related to a status-free (not

fixed) shape.
-remove
Remove all notch/gap fill shapes (NetRect) from the

design.
-signalOnly
Only fill the notch/gap if it is related to a signal or tiedhigh/low net shape.
-threads integer
Specify the number of threads used for notch/gap

filling.
Examples
# Example 1
fillNotchGap
# Example 2
fillNotchGap -remove
See Also
checkViolation
fixViolation
fixNetRatio
The fixNetRatio command is used in the post-process stage to fix high net
ratios.
Syntax
fixNetRatio [-area string] [-iteration integer] [-ratioLimit
value] [-threads integer]
1238

K-2015.06

fixRoutePattern
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-area string
Only fix the net ratio on the area formed by {x1 y1 x2

y2}.
-iteration integer

-ratioLimit value
Only nets with ratio greater than or equal to the specify

value.
-threads integer
Specify the number of threads used for net ratio fixing.

Examples
# Example 1
fixNetRatio
# Example 2
fixNetRatio -iteration 10
# Example 3
fixNetRatio -ratioLimit 3.0
See Also
fixRoutePattern
analyzeRoute
checkSuboptimal
fixRoutePattern
The fixRoutePattern command fixes sub-optimal route patterns by
eliminating unnecessary U, Z, and W shapes at the post-routing stage. No
violation is created after pattern fixing if the input design was DRC clean.

K-2015.06
1239

fixRoutePattern
Syntax
fixRoutePattern [-area string] [-iteration integer] [threads integer] [-wrongWayLimit length | -wrongWayLength
length]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-area string
When specified, only fix the route pattern on the area

formed by {x1 y1 x2 y2}. When not specified, fix
the route pattern for the whole design.
-iteration integer

-threads integer
Specify the number of threads used for route pattern

fixing.
-wrongWayLength length Set the limit on the length (represented in microns) of

wrong way wires generated to replace vias.
-wrongWayLimit length
Set the limit on the length (represented in the multiple

of the wire width) of wrong way wires generated to
replace vias.
Examples
# Example 1
fixRoutePattern
# Example 2
fixRoutePattern -iteration 10
# Example 3
fixRoutePattern -wrongWayLength 0.5
See Also
fixViolation
checkViolation
checkSuboptimal
1240

K-2015.06

fixViolation
fixViolation
The fixViolation command fixes all design violations including simple
shorts, spacing, and nano-meter rules (for example: fat spacing and minimum
edge). It also connects tied-hi/lo nets and fixes sub-optimal route patterns.
This command cannot be used to connect nets except for tied-high/low nets.
Syntax
fixViolation [-area string] [-avoidM1WireTouchPin] [checkTopPinMA] [-incremental] [-iteration integer] [onGrid] [-noPushing] [-skipVioChecking] [-threads
thread_num] [-useDoubleVia] [-verbose]
Returns
Progressive violation fixing messages if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-area string
Only fix violations on the area formed by {x1 y1 x2 y2}.
-avoidM1WireTouchPin
Only use vias to touch M1 pin.
-checkTopPinMA
Check and fix the minimum area violation on the toplevel pins.
-incremental
Only check nets (with drcDirty bit marked) to save

time.
-iteration integer
Specify the number iterations.

-onGrid
Route on major grids (tracks) when possible.
-noPushing
Do not use pushing to resolve violations.
-skipVioChecking
Use existing violation set, skip re-checking to save

time.
-threads thread_num

fixing.

K-2015.06
1241

genRCTable
Argument
Description
-useDoubleVia
Use double vias in routing.
-verbose
Generate more messages about the progress of

violation fixing.
Examples
# Example 1
fixViolation
# Example 2
fixViolation -onGrid -thread 4
# Example 3
fixViolation -iteration 50 -thread 4
See Also
ecoRoute
checkViolation
fixRoutePattern
genRCTable
The genRCTable command uses the field solver to generate resistance and
capacitance (RC) patterns based on the ITF or PF information.
Syntax
genRCTable -itf | -pf fileName [-polyLayerName polyName]
-rcTbl fileName
Returns
Arguments
1242
Argument
Description
-itf | -pf fileName
Specify the Synopsys interconnect technology file

name (-itf) or the SpringSoft process file name (pf).

K-2015.06

guiSetLayerColor
Argument
Description
-polyLayerName
polyName
Specify the name of the poly layer (for example: POLY)

if not defined in the technology file.
-rcTbl fileName
Specify the output RC table name.
Examples
# Example 1
genRCTable -itf test.itf -rcTbl out.tlu -polyLayerName POLY
See Also
readRCTable
guiSetLayerColor
The guiSetLayerColor command changes the default color setting for the
specified layer.
The layer name must match the layer name defined in the technology
database. The color name must match the color name in the loaded display file.
Syntax
guiSetLayerColor -color colorName -layer layerName
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-color colorName
-layer layerName
Specify the name of the layer for which to change the

color.
Examples
# Example 1
# Change the METAL2 layer color to green
guiSetLayerColor -layer METAL2 -color green

K-2015.06
1243

guiShow
See Also
guiShow
guiShow
The guiShow command displays the GUI window on demand.
After switching to GUI mode, it is not possible to switch back to the console
prompt.
Syntax
guiShow
Returns
Examples
guiShow
See Also
gui show
help
The help command displays all usable commands in table format if a specific
command name is not provided. If a command name is specified, a brief
description for the command is displayed.
Syntax
help [commandName]
Returns
Arguments
1244
Argument
Description
commandName
Specify the command name for which to print the help

message.

K-2015.06

ignoreNetInRouting
Examples
# Example 1
# List all possible commands
help
# Example 2
# List the usage of readDesign
help readDesign
See Also
man
ignoreNetInRouting
The ignoreNetInRouting command filters nets that do not need to be
routed.
The fixViolation command may be used to change the routing shapes of
ignored nets.
Syntax
ignoreNetInRouting [netNamesOrPatterns] [-clear] [-set]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
netNamesOrPatterns
Specify one or more net names/patterns to be ignored

during routing.
-clear
Set to route the specified nets. If no nets are specified,

all nets are routed.
-set
Set to ignore the specified nets during routing.
Examples
# Example 1
ignoreNetInRouting -set {VDD VSS}
# Example 2
ignoreNetInRouting -clear

K-2015.06
1245

insertDFMVia
See Also
routeNet
fixViolation
insertDFMVia
The insertDFMVia command replaces the existing vias in the design with
DFM vias.
Syntax
insertDFMVia [-report] [-showLayerBreakdown] [-skipPGMCVia]
[-threads integer] [-withPushing]
Returns
Arguments
1246
Argument
Description
-report
Skip the replacement and only show different priorities

of DFM vias in the final report.
-showLayerBreakdown
Show different priorities of DFM vias for each layer in

the final report. When not specified, the final report
shows different priorities of DFM vias for the entire
design.
-skipPGMCVia
Do not process (and report in totals) multiple cut PG

vias.
-threads integer
Specify the number of threads to run DFM via insertion

on.
-withPushing
Use pushing to make space for larger vias. This usually

results in a higher insertion rate.

K-2015.06

insertDoubleVia
Examples
# Example 1
insertDFMVia
# Example 2
insertDFMVia -threads 4
# Example 3
insertDFMVia -withPushing
See Also
checkViolation
insertDFMVia
insertDoubleVia
The insertDoubleVia command replaces single cut vias in the design with
double cut vias including rectangle cuts.
Syntax
insertDoubleVia [-threads integer] [-withPushing]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-threads integer
Override the global thread count with the specified

number.
-withPushing
Use pushing to make a space for larger vias. This usually

results in a higher insertion rate.

K-2015.06
1247

legalizeInst
Examples
# Example 1
insertDoubleVia
# Example 2
insertDoubleVia -threads 4
# Example 3
insertDoubleVia -withPushing
See Also
checkViolation
reportRouteInfo
legalizeInst
The legalizeInst command moves standard cells to the legal position. It
finds the legal position of standard cells first, and then do the following actions:
snap to site grid
honor the orientation rule of the cell/row
match the site definition in the cell/row
keep the cell displacement to a minimum
Syntax
legalizeInst [-box {area}] [-fixClockInst] [-plotMove]
Returns
A legalization progress message is returned.
Arguments
1248
Argument
Description
-box {area}
Specify the legalized area formed by {x1 y1 x2 y2}.
-fixClockInst
Fix clock instances during legalization.
-plotMove
Plot instance movements.

K-2015.06

listViews
Examples
# Example 1
legalizeInst
# Example 2
legalizeInst -box {0 0 400 400}
# Example 3
legalizeInst -fixClockInst
See Also
placement legalize legalization
listViews
The listViews command lists the settings for timing views. If -activeOnly
is specified, only activated views are listed.
Syntax
listViews [-activeOnly]
Returns
The timing view setting if successful.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-activeOnly
Only list activated timing views.
Examples
# Example 1
listViews
# Example 2
listViews -activeOnly
See Also
setActiveView

K-2015.06
1249

man
man
The man command displays the usage information for the specified command.
Syntax
man [commandName]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
commandName
Specify the command name for which to display the

manual page.
Examples
# Example 1
# Give man page of readDesign
man readDesign
See Also
help
memUsage
The memUsage command dumps the current memory usage of the process.
Both the total memory in use and the peak memory used are dumped.
Syntax
memUsage
Returns
Examples
memUsage
See Also
dump memory usage
1250

K-2015.06

optAddBuffer
optAddBuffer
The optAddBuffer command adds a buffer to a net.
Syntax
optAddBuffer [-all] [-cell cellName] [-fanout {pinNames}]
[-net netName] [-x position] [-y position]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-all
Set to buffer all fan-outs.
-cell cellName
Specify the cell name to be used.
-fanout {pinNames}
Specify the pins to be connected to the added instance.
-net netName
Specify the net name to be modified.
-x position
Specify the X-coordinate of the added instance.
-y position
Specify the Y-coordinate of the added instance.
Examples
# Example 1
optAddBuffer -net n1 -cell BUFX1 -fanout {u1/A u2/A} -x 10 -y 5
See Also
optSizeCell
optAddInvPair
optDeleteBuffer
optDeleteInvPair
optAddInvPair
The optAddInvPair command adds an inverter pair to a specified net.

K-2015.06
1251

optAddInvPair
Syntax
optAddInvPair [-all] [-fanout {pinNames}] [firstCellcellName ] [-firstX position] [-firstY position]
[-net netName] [-secondCell cellName] [-secondXposition]
[-secondY position]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-all
Set to buffer all fan-outs.
-fanout {pinNames}
Specify the pins to be connected with the added

instance.
-firstCell cellName
Specify the name of the first inverter to be used.
-firstX position
Specify the X-coordinate of the first inverter.
-firstY position
Specify the Y-coordinate of the first inverter.
-net netName
Specify the net name to be modified.
-secondCell cellName
Specify the name of the second inverter to be used.
-secondX position
Specify the X-coordinate of the second inverter.
-secondY position
Specify the Y-coordinate of the second inverter.
Examples
# Example 1
optAddInvPair -net n1 -firstCell INVX1 -secondCell INVX2 -firstX
10 \
-firstY 15 -secondX 20 -secondY 15 -fanout {u1/A u2/A}
See Also
optSizeCell
optAddBuffer
optDeleteBuffer
optDeleteInvPair
1252

K-2015.06

optDeleteBuffer
optDeleteBuffer
The optDeleteBuffer command deletes a buffer.
Syntax
optDeleteBuffer [-lInst instName]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lInst instName
Specify the instance name to be deleted.
Examples
# Example 1
optDeleteBuffer -lInst u1
See Also
optSizeCell
optAddBuffer
optAddInvPair
optDeleteInvPair
optDeleteInvPair
The optDeleteInvPair command deletes an inverter pair.
Syntax
optDeleteInvPair [-firstLInst instName] [-secondLInst
instName]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-firstLInst instName
Specify the name of the first instance to be deleted.

K-2015.06
1253

optSizeCell
Argument
Description
-secondLInst instName
Specify the name of the second instance to be deleted.
Examples
# Example 1
optDeleteInvPair -firstLInst u1 -secondLInst u2
See Also
optSizeCell
optAddBuffer
optAddInvPair
optDeleteBuffer
optSizeCell
The optSizeCell command changes the master of an instance.
Syntax
optSizeCell [ -inst instName ] [ -newCell cellName ]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-inst instName
Specify the instance name to be changed.
-newCell cellName
Specify the cell type to be used.
Examples
# Example 1
optSizeCell -inst u1 -newCell AND2X2
See Also
optAddBuffer
optAddInvPair
optDeleteBuffer
optDeleteInvPair
1254

K-2015.06

optimizeNetFanout
optimizeNetFanout
The optimizeNetFanout command fixes high fan-out nets without
considering timing information.
Syntax
optimizeNetFanout [-bufType bufname] [-file filename] [maxFanout number] [-maxUtilization number] [-netList
netnames] [-postRoute] [-reportNetsAboveMaxFanout] [verbose]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-bufType bufname
Specify the buffer type to be added.
-file filename
Specify the output file name when used with the reportNetsAboveMaxFanout argument.
Otherwise, specify an input file containing a list of
nets.
-maxFanout number
Specify the number for the maximum fan-out.
-maxUtilization number
Specify the number for the maximum utilization

rate.
-netList netnames
Specify the list of net names for which to fix the

fan-out.
-postRoute
Insert buffers only at a legal position.
-reportNetsAboveMaxFanout After the maximum fan-out is reached, report the

remaining nets.
-verbose

K-2015.06
Show detailed messages.
1255

optimizeNetLength
Examples
# Example 1
optimizeNetFanout -maxFanout 32 -reportNetsAboveMaxFanout \
-file output.log
# Example 2
optimizeNetFanout -maxFanout 32 -bufType BUFX2
See Also
optimizeNetLength
optimizeNetLength
The optimizeNetLength command fixes nets above the specified length
without considering the timing information.
Syntax
optimizeNetLength [-bufType {bufname}] [-file filename] [guiShow] [-interval number] [-maxUtilization value] [netList netnames] [-postRoute] [reportNetsAboveThreshold]
Returns
Arguments
1256
Argument
Description
-bufType {bufname}
Specify the buffer types to be added.
-file filename
Specify the input file name containing the list of net

names.
-guiShow
Show the added buffers in the GUI.
-interval number
Specify the length threshold in microns (um).
-maxUtilization value
Specify the maximum utilization rate.
-netList netnames
Specify a list of net names. If multiple names are

specified, surround the list with {}.

K-2015.06

optimizePin
Argument
Description
-postRoute
Insert buffers only at a legal position.
-reportNetsAboveThreshold Report nets above the length threshold.
Examples
# Example 1
# Query nets above length
optimizeNetLength -interval 160 -reportNetsAboveThreshold >
target.log
# Example 2
# Fix nets listed in file
optimizeNetLength -bufType {BUFX2} -interval 100 -file target.log
# Example 3
# Fix nets specified in -netList
optimizeNetLength -netList {net1 net2} -bufType {BUFX2} -interval
100
See Also
optimizeNetFanout
optimizePin
Sometimes pins introduce longer wire length because of the constraint file
setting. The optimizePin command incrementally places the pins to
minimize the wire length.
Syntax
optimizePin [-keepPinOrder]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-keepPinOrder
Keep the pin order during optimization.

K-2015.06
1257

Examples
# Example 1
optimizePin
# Example 2
optimizePin -keepPinOrder
See Also
placePin
The optimizePostCTSDesign command optimizes timing during the postCTS stage. The goal is to meet the setup/hold time constraints without any
violations.
Syntax
optimizePostCTSDesign [ -buffering true|false ] [ -fixDrv
true|false ] [ -hold true|false ] [ -holdBufType
{cellnames} ] [ -setup true|false ] [ -setupBufType
cellnames ] [ -sizing true|false ]
Returns
Arguments
1258
Argument
Description
-buffering true|false
When true, enable buffering to optimize the design.

The default is true.
-fixDrv true|false
When true, enable DRV fixing before optimizing the

design. The default is true.
-hold true|false
When true, enable hold time optimization. The

default is true.
-holdBufType {cellnames}
Specify the allowed buffer types when fixing the

hold time. If not specified, the default is all buffer
types.

K-2015.06

Argument
Description
-setup true|false
When true, enable setup time optimization. The

default is true.
-setupBufType cellnames
Specify the allowed buffer types when fixing setup

time. If not specified, the default is all buffer types.
-sizing true|false
When true, enable sizing to optimize the design.

Examples
# Example 1
# Example 2
optimizePostCTSDesign -buffering false
# Example 3
optimizePostCTSDesign -hold -holdBufType {BUFX1 BUFXL}
See Also
setOptOption
The optimizePostRouteDesign command optimizes timing at the postroute stage. The goal is to meet the setup/hold time constraints without any
violations.
Syntax
optimizePostRouteDesign [ -buffering true|false ] [ -fixDrv
true|false ] [ -hold true|false ] [ -holdBufType
{cellnames} ] [ -setup true|false ] [ -setupBufType
{cellnames} ] [ -sizing true|false ]
Returns

K-2015.06
1259

Arguments
Argument
Description

-fixDrv true|false

-hold true|false
When true, enable hold time optimization. The

default is true.
-holdBufType {cellnames}
Specify the allowed buffer types when fixing hold

-setup true|false
When true, enable setup time optimization. The

default is true.
-setupBufType {cellnames} Specify the allowed buffer types when fixing setup
-sizing true|false
When true, enable sizing to optimize the design. The

default is true.
Examples
# Example 1
# Example 2
optimizePostRouteDesign -buffering false
# Example 3
optimizePostRouteDesign -hold -holdBufType {BUFX1 BUFXL}
See Also
setOptOption
1260

K-2015.06

The optimizePreCTSDesign command optimizes timing at the pre-CTS
stage. The goal is to meet the setup time constraints without any violations.
Syntax
optimizePreCTSDesign [ -buffering true|false ] [ -fixDrv
true|false ] [ -setupBufType {cellnames} ] [ -sizing
true|false ]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description

-fixDrv true|false

-setupBufType {cellnames}
Specify the allowed buffer types when fixing setup

-sizing true|false
When true, enable sizing to optimize the design.

Examples
# Example 1
# Example 2
optimizePreCTSDesign -buffering false
# Example 3
optimizePreCTSDesign -setupBufType {BUFX1 BUFXL}
See Also
setOptOption

K-2015.06
1261

placeIOPad
placeIOPad
The placeIOPad command places IO pads by constraint.
Syntax
placeIOPad
Returns
Return the progress message.
Examples
# Example 1
placeIOPad
See Also
setIOPadConstraints
addIOPadFiller
placeInst
The placeInst command decides the position of UNPLACED/PLACED cells.
The objectives are:
Ease routing.
Meet the timing constraint.
Shorten the routing wire length.
Syntax
placeInst [-cellAnalysisPadding] [-congestionEffort low |
medium | high] [-ignoreScan] [-incremental] [timingDriven] [-timingEffort low | medium | high]
Returns
A placement progress message is returned.
Arguments
1262
Argument
Description
-cellAnalysisPadding
Enable cell analysis padding.

K-2015.06

placeInstECO
Argument
Description
-congestionEffort
low | medium | high
Define the congestion driven effort as low, medium, or

high.
-ignoreScan
Ignore the scan chain during placement.
-incremental
Place cells incrementally.
-timingDriven
Enable timing driven placement.
-timingEffort
low | medium | high
Define the timing driven effort as low, medium, or high.
Examples
# Example 1
placeInst
# Example 2
placeInst -timingDriven
# Example 3
placeInst -timingDriven -ignoreScan
# Example 4
placeInst -incremental
See Also
placement
placeInst
placeInstECO
The placeInstECO command places pre and post silicon ECO cells. The
ECO cells must be UNPLACED before executing this command.
For pre-silicon mode, the ECO cells are assigned a location into whitespace.
Sometimes other cells are moved as well.
For post-silicon mode, the ECO cells try to replace the position of spare cells.

K-2015.06
1263

placePin
Syntax
placeInstECO [-congestionDriven] [-congestionEffort low |
medium | high] [-fseco] [-plotMove] [-timingDriven] [timingEffort low | medium | high]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-congestionDriven
Enable congestion driven optimization.
-congestionEffort
low | medium | high
Specify the congestion driven effort as low, medium, or

high.
-fseco
Enable post-silicon mode.
-plotMove
Plot instance movements.
-timingDriven
Enable timing driven optimization.
-timingEffort
low | medium | high
Specify the timing driven effort as low, medium, or high.
Examples
# Example 1
placeECO
# Example 2
placeECO -timingDriven -congestionDriven
# Example 3
placeECO -fseco
See Also
placeInst
placePin
The placePin command places the pins on the tracks using the description in
the constraint file.
1264

K-2015.06

readDef
Syntax
placePin [-constFile name] [-dumpFile name]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-constFile name
Specify the input pin constraint file.
-dumpFile name
Dump the pin constraints to the specified file after pin

placement.
Examples
# Example 1
placePin
# Example 2
placePin -constFile pin.const
See Also
readDef
The readDef command reads the DEF file into ICS and does the proper
adjustment using the specified target vendor.
The DEF file must be consistent with Verilog in netlist if Verilog has been
imported.
If the target vendor is not on the list or is unknown, use the -springSoft
argument.
Use the readLef command to read the LEF file first.
Syntax
readDef [-cadence | -synopsys | -magma | -springSoft]
fileName [-noMinGridSnap] [-noRoutes] [-noSignalRoutes]
[-notTouchCoverWire] [-rectDrcFill] [-shapeOnly] [skipConvert] [-skipFillers filler_name_list] [splitContinuousPath] [-varRuleFile rule_file_name]

K-2015.06
1265

readDef
Returns
Arguments
1266
Argument
Description
Specify the target vendor for place and route as:

Cadence, Synopsys, Magma, or SpringSoft.
fileName
Specify one DEF file name to be parsed in. Post-fix .gz

is allowed and handled properly.
-noMinGridSnap
Distance values are not snapped to minimum

manufacturing grid (warning remains).
-noRoutes
Skip all routes in the DEF file. This argument cannot be

specified with the -noSignalRoutes argument.
-noSignalRoutes
Skip signal routes in the DEF file. This argument cannot

be specified with the -noRoutes argument.
-notTouchCoverWire
Wires with cover types are not touched.
-rectDrcFill
Parse all rectangles in the SPECIALNET section as

notch gap fillers.
-shapeOnly
Only parse the DEF file for shapes.
-skipConvert
Skip route conversion if the input routing is in

compliance (saves runtime).
-skipFillers
filler_name_list
Specify the filler instance names or patterns to skip. If

multiple names are specified, surround the list with {}.
-splitContinuousPath
Extend the half width for the connected points of

continuous paths in the SPECIALNETS section.
-varRuleFile
rule_file_name
Specify the variable rule file name if not defined in the

DEF file.

K-2015.06

readDesign
Examples
# Example 1
# Example 2
readDef my.def -synopsys -skipFillers {XOFILLER_* IOFILLER_*} noRoutes
See Also
writeDef
readLef
readDesign
The readDesign command reads the design from a database. The design
database can be created by compileHdl, compileDef or both.
To save the updated in-memory design data to a database, use the
writeDesign command. The writeDesign command can also be used to
export the design to external design files.
To release the design data from memory, specify the closeDesign command.
Syntax
readDesign logicalLibName -topCell topCellName
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
logicalLibName
Specify the logical library name.
Specify the top cell (design) name.
Examples
# Example 1
readDesign -topCell CPU my_design
See Also
compileHdl
compileDef
K-2015.06
1267

readEcoDesign
writeDesign
closeDesign
designStatistics
readEcoDesign
The readEcoDesign command reads the specified ECO design. It can be
compared with the current design.
Syntax
readEcoDesign db_name [-topCell name]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
db_name
Specify the database name.
-topCell name
Specify the top cell name of the ECO design.
Examples
# Example 1
readEcoDesign ECO_design -topCell ecoTop
readLef
The readLef command reads the specified LEF file into ICS.
Use readLef on each LEF file individually. They may share the same libName.
Syntax
readLef fileName [-libName lib_name]
Returns
1268

K-2015.06

readRCTable
Arguments
Argument
Description
fileName
Specify the name of one LEF file with or without the

path.
-libName lib_name
Specify the library name to parse this LEF file into.
Examples
# Example 1
readLef my.lef
# Example 2
readLef -libName techLib my.lef
readRCTable
The readRCTable command reads the resistance and capacitance (RC) table
from SpringSoft or a third-party tool. The RC extractor reads pre-calculated RC
information to model RC patterns.
Use the genRCTable command to generate the SpringSoft RC table.
The RC Table from Synopsys is normally a .tf file or .tlu file.
The RC Table from Cadence is normally a .tlu file.
Syntax
readRCTable -synopsys | -cadence | -springSoft filename
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-synopsys | -cadence |
-springSoft
Specify the vendor name for the RC table from one of

the following options: Cadence, Synopsys, or
SpringSoft. Only one mode may be specified.
filename
Specify the RC table file name that contains RC

information.

K-2015.06
1269

readSdc
Examples
# Example 1
readRCTable -springSoft rc.tlu
See Also
extractRc
genRCTable
readSdc
The readSdc command reads the .sdc file with the specified name for the
group. The loaded file is used in addAnalysisView.
Syntax
readSdc -sdcGroup name
sdcFile
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-sdcGroup name
Specify the name for the SDC group.
sdcFile
Specify the SDC file name.
Examples
# Example 1
readSdc -sdcGroup sdcGrp test.sdc
See Also
addView
readSpareCellFile
The readSpareCellFile command reads the list of spare instances from a
file.
1270

K-2015.06

readSpef
Syntax
readSpareCellFile -name fileName
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-name fileName
Specify the file name to be read.
Examples
# Example 1
readSpareCellFile -name spare.list
See Also
writeSpareCellFile
writeEcoReport
readSpef
The readSpef command reads a SPEF file to annotate parasitics for RC
correlation.
Syntax
readSpef spef_file_name
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
spef_file_name
Specify the SPEF file name to be read.
Examples
readSpef test.spef
See Also
writeSpef

K-2015.06
1271

readVerilog
readVerilog
The readVerilog command reads a Verilog file into ICS.
The ordering of Verilog files is not relevant. A mixing of ASCII and gzipped files
is supported. Gzipped files are also allowed in the include statement in Verilog.
Use the readLEF command to read the LEF file first.
Syntax
readVerilog fileNames [-eco] [-tieHigh net_name] [-tieLow
net_name] [-topCell top_cell_name]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
fileNames
Specify one or more Verilog file names. If multiple

names are specified, surround the list with {}. Post-fix
.gz is allowed and handled properly.
-eco
Incrementally update for pre-silicon ECO flow.
-tieHigh net_name
By default tie1 is mapped to a global power net. This

argument specifies the global power net name. If the
-tieHigh argument is specified, the -tieLow
argument must also be specified.
-tieLow net_name
By default tie0 is mapped to a global ground net. This

argument specifies the global ground net name. If the
-tieLow argument is specified, the -tieHigh
-topCell top_cell_name
Specify the top module name.
Examples
# Example 1
readVerilog my.v -tieHigh VDD -tieLow VSS -topCell myTop
# Example 2
readVerilog {my1.v my2.v my3.v ...} -tieHigh VDD -tieLow VSS
1272

K-2015.06

redirectOutput
See Also
writeVerilog
readLef
redirectOutput
By default, messages are printed on the main window and console. The
redirectOutput command redirects the messages to a separate log file.
Syntax
redirectOutput log_file_name
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
log_file_name
Specify the log file name to save the messages to.
Examples
# Example 1
redirectOutput my_test.log
# Example 1
resumeOutput
See Also
resumeOutput
removeBufInvs
The removeBufInvs command removes the buffer and inverter cells in the
design.
Syntax
removeBufInvs [ -bufOnly ] [ -critical ] [ -dontTouchInsts
instances] [ -fastMode ] [ -invOnly ] [ -net netname ] [
-outOnly ] [ -path data|clock|all ] [ -polarity ]

K-2015.06
1273

removeDoubleVia
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-bufOnly
Only remove buffer cells.
-critical
Only remove cells on the critical path.
-dontTouchInsts instances
Specify one or more instances to not touch.
-fastMode
Execute in fast mode (this may create more ports).
-invOnly
Only remove inverter cells.
-net netname
Remove through the specified net.
-outOnly
Only remove through nets with output direction.
-path data|clock|all
Specify the path type from which to remove buffers.

Valid values are: data, clock, and all. The
default is data.
-polarity
Remove inverter cells and re-group by polarity.
Examples
# Example 1
removeBufInvs -path all
# Example 2
removeBufInvs -bufOnly -net net1
removeDoubleVia
The removeDoubleVia command replaces double cut vias in the design with
single cut vias.
Syntax
removeDoubleVia [-checkConn] [-includeMultiCut] [-net
net_name] [-skipClock]
1274

K-2015.06

removePlacement
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-checkConn
Check the connectivity.
-includeMultiCut
Replace the via master (including multiple cut via).
-net net_name
Specify the net name of the via to be replaced.
-skipClock
Skip the clock net.
Examples
# Example 1
removeDoubleVia
# Example 2
removeDoubleVia -net myNet
See Also
insertDoubleVia
removePlacement
The removePlacement command removes all cells from the core region and
places them regularly.
Syntax
removePlacement [-keepSpacing] [-unplacedInstOnly] [includeIOPad]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-includeIOPad
Remove IO pad placement.

K-2015.06
1275

reportBufInvs
Argument
Description
-keepSpacing
Keep spacing between cells.
-unplacedInstOnly
Only affects unplaced cells.
Examples
# Example 1
removePlacement
# Example 2
removePlacement -unplacedInstOnly
See Also
placement
reportBufInvs
The reportBufInvs command reports all usable buffer, inverter, and delay
cells.
Syntax
reportBufInvs
Returns
Examples
# Example 1
reportBufInvs
reportCTSException
The reportCTSException command reports current CTS exceptions.
Syntax
reportCTSException [ -file fileName ]
Returns
1276

K-2015.06

reportCTSOption
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file fileName
Specify the output file name for the CTS exceptions.
Examples
# Example 1
reportCTSException
# Example 2
reportCTSException -file output.log
See Also
setCTSException
reportCTSOption
The reportCTSOption command reports current CTS options such as the
maximum level, the maximum latency, and the clock buffer type.
Syntax
reportCTSOption [ -file filename ]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file fileName
Specify the output file name for the CTS options.
Examples
# Example 1
reportCTSOption
# Example 2
reportCTSOption -file output.log
See Also
setCTSOption

K-2015.06
1277

reportCaseAnalysis
reportCaseAnalysis
The reportCaseAnalysis command reports constant information as
defined in the SDC and design (.v) files.
The SDC or design files must be loaded first.
Syntax
reportCaseAnalysis [-designOnly] [-sdcOnly]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-designOnly
Only list constants defined in the design (.v) files.
-sdcOnly
Only list constants defined in the SDC file.
Examples
# Example 1
reportCaseAnalysis -sdcOnly
reportClock
The reportClock command reports the clock-related information.
Syntax
reportClock
Returns
Examples
# Example 1
reportClock
See Also
readSdc
1278

K-2015.06

reportClockTree
reportClockTree
The reportClockTree command reports the status of the clock trees.
Syntax
reportClockTree [ -detail ] [ -preRoute ] [ -postRoute ]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-detail
Report the detailed structure of the clock trees.
-preRoute
Report the clock tree timing analysis results that are

based on a trial route of the clock tree. This is the
default.
-postRoute
Set this argument if the design is completely routed.
Examples
# Example 1
reportClockTree -postRoute
# Example 2
reportClockTree -postRoute -detail
See Also
synthesizeClockTree
reportConstraint
The reportConstraint command reports information for pins that violate
the design constraints, including the maximum capacitance constraint and the
maximum transition constraint. Use the -verbose or -detail arguments to
see more detailed information.

K-2015.06
1279

reportConstraint
Syntax
reportConstraint [ -allViolators ] [ -detail ] [ maxCapacitance ] [ -maxTransition ] [ -sig integer ] [ threshold value ] [ -view value ]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-allViolators
Report all violated pins.
-detail
Report the detailed constraint information.
-maxCapacitance
Report the maximum capacitance constraint

information.
-maxTransition
Report the maximum transition constraint information.
-sig integer
Specify the precision for the digits. The default is 4.
-threshold value
Only report slack that is less than the specified

threshold value. This argument is only valid if the allViolators argument is specified.
-view value
Specify the view to be observed. The default is all

views.
Examples
# Example 1
reportConstraint
# Example 2
reportConstraint -maxCapacitance
# Example 3
reportConstraint -maxTransition
# Example 4
reportConstraint -view 0
See Also
reportTiming
1280

K-2015.06

reportCorner
reportCorner
The reportCorner command reports corner statistics of shapes on the
specified layers. The corner statistic can be saved, and then used in
comparison with other corner information.
If either of the -save or -compare arguments are missing, this command only
reports layer-based statistics with checksum.
The -directory argument is optional when either of the -save or -compare
arguments are specified.
If neither of the -metalOnly and -cutOnly arguments are specified, both
types of layers are worked on.
Syntax
reportCorner [-box {area}] [-compare] [-cutOnly] [-directory
dirPath] [-fromLayer layer_name] [-includeOutOfBoundary]
[-layer layer_name] [-metalOnly] [-reportLimit
limit_number] [-save] [-threads threads_number] [toLayer layer_name]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-box {area}
Compute corners within the area formed by {x1 y1 x2

y2}. The default is the design boundary box (BBox).
This argument cannot be specified with the
-includeOutofBoundary argument.
-compare
Compare current corner information against the

previously saved corner information under the directory
specified by the -directory argument. The default is
the current working directory.
-cutOnly
Only check corners on cut layers (Via12 and above)

only. This argument cannot be specified with the metalOnly argument.

K-2015.06
1281

reportCorner
Argument
Description
-directory dirPath
Specify the directory to save the compressed corner

information (in gzip format). The default is the current
working directory.
-fromLayer layer_name
Perform the operation starting from the specified metal/

cut layer name. The default is the last layer. This
argument cannot be specified with the -layer
argument.
-includeOutOfBoundary Include the out of boundary shapes in the checking

process. This argument cannot be specified with the box argument.
1282
-layer layer_name
Only check corners on the specified metal layer name.

This argument cannot be specified with the fromLayer or -toLayer arguments.
-metalOnly
Only check corners on metal layers (M1 and above).

This argument cannot be specified with the -cutOnly
argument.
-reportLimit
limit_number
Specify the maximum number of corners to be reported

in a comparison.
Value value: an integer (default=100).
When this argument is specified, the -compare
-save
Save the corner information under the directory

specified by the -directory argument. The default is
the current working directory.
-threads
threads_number
Specify the number of threads used for checking corner

information. The default is the maximum available CPU
threads.
-toLayer layer_name
Perform the operation ending at the specified metal/cut

layer name. The default is the top layer. This argument
cannot be specified with the -layer argument.

K-2015.06

Examples
# Example 1
readLef my.lef
readDef -springSoft my.def
...
reportCorner -fromLayer M1 -toLayer M5 -save
...
reportCorner -fromLayer M1 -toLayer M5 -compare
The reportDelayCalculation command reports the actual calculation of
the timing arc delay value for a cell or a net. This information is useful for
debugging or verifying timing data in a technology library.
Syntax
reportDelayCalculation -from fromPin -to toPin [ -max | min ]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-from fromPin
-to toPin
Specify the start and end points of a timing arc within a

design. For a cell timing arc, the pins must represent
the input and output pins of a common leaf cell, which
have a timing arc specified between them in the library.
-max | -min
Specify whether to display the minimum or maximum

delay calculation. The design itself must be in either
min/max mode.
Examples
# Example 1
reportDelayCalculation -from U3/CK -to U3/Q
See Also
reportTiming

K-2015.06
1283

reportDesign
reportDesign
The reportDesign command reports the design, netlist, floorplan, routing
statistics, and information in ICS.
Syntax
reportDesign
Returns
Examples
# Example 1
readLef my.lef
...
reportDesign
reportJog
The reportJog command analyzes and reports the wire jogging information.
Syntax
reportJog [-nets strings] [-threads integer] [-threshold
double] [-verbose]
Returns
Arguments
1284
Argument
Description
-nets strings
Specify the names or patterns of nets to report jogs. If

multiple names are specified, separate by spaces and
-threads integer
Specify the number of threads used for analyzing wire

jogging.

K-2015.06

reportNet
Argument
Description
-threshold double
Specify a threshold value. A jog is defined as a jogedge with length less than minimum width of the layer.
-verbose
Report the jog coordinate when a jog is found.
Examples
# Example 1
reportJog
# Example 2
reportJog -nets net_name
See Also
analyzeRoute
reportRouteInfo
reportNet
The reportNet command displays the information about the nets in the
current instance of the design or in the current design.
Syntax
reportNet
Returns
Examples
# Example 1
reportNet
See Also
reportTiming

K-2015.06
1285

reportOptOption
reportOptOption
The reportOptOption command reports current optimization options such
as the target slack, the maximum density, and the effort.
Syntax
reportOptOption [ -file filename ]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file filename
Specify the output file name for the optimization

options.
Examples
# Example 1
reportOptOption
# Example 2
reportOptOption -file output.log
See Also
setOptOption
reportPlaceOption
The reportPlaceOption command reports current placer options. If the file argument is not specified, the current option status is printed in the
screen. Otherwise, the options are dumped in Tcl format and the file can be
directly sourced or applied to the command setPlaceOption -file xxx.
Syntax
reportPlaceOption [-file filename ]
Returns
1286

K-2015.06

reportRouteInfo
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file filename
Specify the output file name for the placement options.

The contents are in Tcl format.
Examples
# Example 1
reportPlaceOption
# Example 2
reportPlaceOption -file option.tcl
See Also
setPlaceOption
reportRouteInfo
The reportRouteInfo command reports the statistical information (including
wires and vias) of routing shapes.
Syntax
reportRouteInfo [-area string] [-excludeDummyNet] [totalOnly]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-area string
Report the route information on the area formed by {x1

y1 x2 y2}.
-excludeDummyNet
Ignore wires or vias on dummy nets when counting the

wire length.
-totalOnly
Only report the total statistics.

K-2015.06
1287

reportRouteRule
Examples
# Example 1
reportRouteInfo
# Example 2
reportRouteInfo -area { 0 0 10 10 }
See Also
routeNet
reportCorner
reportRouteRule
The reportRouteRule command reports the existing non-default rules.
Syntax
reportRouteRule [-all] [-rule string]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-all
Report all route rules.
-rule string
Report the specified route rule.
Examples
# Example 1
reportRouteRule
# Example 2
reportRouteRule -rule myRule
See Also
createRouteRule
setRouteRule
deleteRouteRule
1288

K-2015.06

reportRule
reportRule
The reportRule command reports information about the physical design
rules.
Syntax
reportRule
Returns
Examples
# Example 1
reportRule
See Also
checkViolation
fixViolation
The reportSiteUtilization command reports the usable site information
in the current design.
The objects sites are occupied by cells, macro blocks, and the placement
blockage.
Syntax
reportSiteUtilization [-box {area}]
Returns
The current site utilization is returned.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-box {area}
Report the utilization within the area formed by {x1 y1 x2

y2}.

K-2015.06
1289

Examples
# Example 1
# Example 2
reportSiteUtilization -box {0 0 400 400}
See Also
placement
The reportSlackHistogram command reports the slack distribution.
Syntax
reportSlackHistogram [-bin value ] [-from value ] [-gap
value] [-min value] [-to value]
Returns
The slack distribution is returned.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-bin value
Specify the number of bins. The default is 8.
-from value
Specify the lower bound slack.
-gap value
Specify the slack gap between bins.
-min value
Specify the minimum/hold timing.
-to value
Specify the upper bound slack.
Examples
# Example 1
# Print the slack distribution within 10 bins
reportSlackHistogram -bin 10
# Example 2
# Print the slack distribution where the slack is between
# -5.0ns to 5.0ns
reportSlackHistogram -from -5.0 -to 5.0 -gap 1.0
1290

K-2015.06

reportSpine
See Also
reportTiming
reportSpine
The reportSpine command reports the spine coordinate.
Syntax
reportSpine [-file string] [-nets string] [-threads integer]
[-verbose]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file string
Report the spine coordinate to the specified file when threads 1 is specified.
-nets string
Specify the names or patterns of nets to report the spine

coordinate. If multiple names are specified, separate the
names with a space and surround the list with {}.
-threads integer
Specify the number of threads used for analyzing spine

routing.
-verbose
Report the spine coordinate when a spine coordinate is

found and
-threads 1 is specified.
Examples
# Example 1
reportSpine
# Example 2
reportSpine -verbose
See Also
reportRouteInfo

K-2015.06
1291

The reportSuggestedPitch command reports the routing pitch suggested
by the router.
Syntax
Returns
Examples
# Example 1
See Also
routeNet
reportRule
reportTieHiLo
The reportTieHiLo command reports the logical connection status of tiedhigh, tied-low, and PG pins. When -verbose is specified, tied-high, tied-low,
and PG pins with incorrect connections are dumped.
Syntax
reportTieHiLo [-verbose]
Returns
Arguments
1292
Argument
Description
-verbose
Dump the tied-high, tied-low, and power/ground (PG) pins

with incorrect connections.

K-2015.06

reportTiming
Examples
# Example 1
readLef my.lef
readVerilog my.v -tieHigh VDD -tieLow VSS
...
reportTieHiLo
reportTiming
The reportTiming command reports timing paths.
Syntax
reportTiming [-delay_type max | min | minmax] [-force] [from objectNames] [-max_paths value] [-sig ] [-through
object_names] [-to object_names] [-view viewName]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-delay_type
max | min | minmax
Specify the delay type as maximum, minimum or both

(minmax).
-force
Force the timer recalculate.
-from objectNames
Specify the list of objects to start from. If multiple

objects are specified, separate by spaces and
-max_paths value
Specify the maximum number of paths per path group

to output.
-sig
Specify the precision for digits.
-through object_names
Specify the list of objects to report through.
-to object_names
Specify the list of objects to end at.
-view viewName
Only report the path in the specified view name.

K-2015.06
1293

resetCTSOption
Examples
# Example 1
reportTiming
# Example 2
reportTiming -from {A/CK} -to {B/D}
# Example 3
reportTiming -delay_type min -from {A/CK} -to {B/D}
# Example 4
reportTiming -from {A1/CK A2/CK A3/CK} -to {B/D}
See Also
addView
reportNet
resetCTSOption
The resetCTSOption command resets the CTS options.
Syntax
resetCTSOption
Returns
Examples
resetCTSOption
See Also
setCTSOption
resetSdc
The resetSdc command resets previously defined SDC settings of an SDC
group.
1294

K-2015.06

resumeOutput
Syntax
resetSdc {sdcFiles} -sdcGroup name
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
{sdcFiles}
Specify one or more SDC file names (with .sdc extension).

If multiple names are specified, separate by spaces and
-sdcGroup name
Specify the SDC group name.
Examples
# Example 1
# Reset the SDC settings of sdcGroup testMode from
# {normal.sdc constraint.sdc test.sdc} to {constraint.sdc
test.sdc}
readSdc -sdcGroup testMode {normal.sdc constraint.sdc test.sdc}
resetSdc -sdcGroup testMode {constraint.sdc test.sdc}
See Also
readSdc
resumeOutput
After using redirectOutput, all messages are redirected to a separate log
file. The resumeOutput command prints the messages back to the console
and main window again.
Syntax
resumeOutput
Returns
Examples
#Example 1
redirectOutput my_test.log
resumeOutput

K-2015.06
1295

routeNet
See Also
redirectOutput
routeNet
The routeNet command connects all open signal nets in the design and fixes
coarse design rules. The tied-high or tied-low nets are not connected.
Syntax
routeNet [-effort string] [-estimateCongestionOnly] [-net
string] [-timingDriven]
Returns
Arguments
1296
Argument
Description
-effort string
Specify the routing effort.

Valid values: prototype, low, medium, and high.
The default is medium.
-estimateCongestionOnly
Only estimate the congestion and generate the

congestion report.
-net string
Specify the net names or patterns to be routed. If

multiple nets are specified, separate by spaces and
-timingDriven
Perform timing-driven routing.

K-2015.06

routeNet
Examples
# Example 1
# Check the congestion information for the design quickly,
# and route every net the shortest distance
routeNet -estimateCongestionOnly -effort prototype
# Example 2
# Check the congestion information for the design
routeNet -estimateCongestionOnly
# Example 3
# Check the congestion information for the design with
# accurate congestion information
routeNet -estimateCongestionOnly -effort high
# Example 4
# Check the congestion information for the design for some
specified nets
routeNet -estimateCongestionOnly -net { clk* }
# Example 5
# Quickly route the design and get a rough result
routeNet -effort prototype
# Example 6
# Route the design and do congestion distribution
routeNet
# Example 7
# Route the design and get a result with less violation
routeNet -effort medium
# Example 8
# Route the design and fix violations
routeNet -effort high
# Example 9
# Route specified nets
routeNet -net { blk_n* }
# Example 10
# Perform timing-driven routing
routeNet -timingDriven
See Also
checkViolation
fixViolation

K-2015.06
1297

routeRail
routeRail
According to rows of the floorplan, the routeRail command creates the PG
wires marked as FOLLOWPIN defined in the Def file, and also extends the
FOLLOWPIN wires to connect PG pre-wires.
Syntax
routeRail [-allowNonPreferredDir] [-direction string] [enableLayerJump] [-extendToBoundary] [extensionViaNumber] [-generatePinOnBoundary] [ignoreDRC] [-maxLayer string] [-minLayer string] [-net
string] [-rowArea string] [-searchRange number] [-undo]
Returns
Arguments
1298
Argument
Description
Use layers in a non-preferred direction when

changing the layer.
-direction string
Specify the direction of the rail to connect.
-enableLayerJump
Enable the layer jump function when a PG

connection fails.
-extendToBoundary
-extensionViaNumber
Specify the number of vias when changing the layer.

Also known as -extensionViaArraysNumber.
-ignoreDRC
Ignore violations when creating P/G wires. Also

known as -noVC.
-maxLayer string
Specify the string for the highest metal layer vias that
can be created. Also known as -topViaLayer.
-minLayer string
Specify the string for the lowest metal layer vias that
can be created. Also known as -bottomViaLayer.

K-2015.06

routeRing
Argument
Description
-net string
Specify the net name to be connected.
-rowArea string
-searchRange number

to other pre-wires.
-undo
Examples
# Example 1
routeRail
# Example 2
routeRail -net { VDD VSS }
# Example 3
routeRail -minLayer M1 -maxLayer M4
See Also
routeStripe
routeRing
routeRing
The routeRing command creates PG rings in a specified row area.
Syntax
routeRing [-bottomCoreOffset value] [-bottomLayer string]
[-bottomSpacing value] [-bottomWidth value] [-Cross] [ignoreDRC] [-leftCoreOffset value] [-leftLayer string]
[-leftSpacing value] [-leftWidth value] [-maxLayer
string] [-minLayer string] [-net string] [rightCoreOffset value] [-rightLayer string] [rightSpacing value] [-rightWidth value] [-rowArea string]
[-skipBottomSide] [-skipLeftSide] [-skipRightSide] [skipTopSide] [-topCoreOffset value] [-topLayer string]
[-topSpacing value] [-topWidth double] [-undo]
Returns
K-2015.06
1299

routeRing
Arguments
1300
Argument
Description
-bottomCoreOffset value
Specify the offset between the core rings and

contour on the bottom side.
-bottomLayer string
Specify the metal layer of core rings on the bottom

side.
-bottomSpacing value

bottom side.
-bottomWidth value
Specify the wire width of core rings on the bottom

side.
-Cross
Indicate the extended style for each core ring.
-ignoreDRC
Ignore violations when creating PG wires. Also

known as -noVC.
-leftCoreOffset value

contour on the left side.
-leftLayer string
Specify the metal layer of core rings on the left side.
-leftSpacing value

left side.
-leftWidth value
Specify the wire width of core rings on the left side.
-maxLayer string
Specify the string for the highest metal layer vias that
can be created. Also known as -topViaLayer.
-minLayer string
can be created. Also known as -bottomViaLayer.
-net string
Specify the net names for creating core rings.
-rightCoreOffset value

contour on the right side.
-rightLayer string
Specify the metal layer of core rings on the right side.
-rightSpacing value

right side.

K-2015.06

routeRing
Argument
Description
-rightWidth value
Specify the wire width of core rings on the right side.
-rowArea string
-skipBottomSide
Skip the creation of core rings on the bottom side.
-skipLeftSide
Skip the creation of core rings on the left side.
-skipRightSide
Skip the creation of core rings on the right side.
-skipTopSide
Skip the creation of core rings on the top side.
-topCoreOffset value

contour on the top side.
-topLayer string
Specify the metal layer of core rings on the top side.
-topSpacing value

top side.
-topWidth double
Specify the wire width of core rings on the top side.
-undo
Examples
# Example 1
routeRing \
-leftLayer M1 -rightLayer M1 -topLayer M1 -bottomLayer M1 \
-leftWidth 1 -rightWidth 1 -topWidth 1 -bottomWidth 1 \
-leftSpacing 0.15 -rightSpacing 0.15 -topSpacing 0.15 \
-bottomSpacing 0.15 -net {VDD VSS} -maxLayer M2 -minLayer M1
See Also
routeStripe
routeRail

K-2015.06
1301

routeStripe
routeStripe
According to the given parameters, the routeStripe command creates the
PG wires marked as STRIPE as defined in the Def file, and also connects other
pre-wires.
Syntax
routeStripe [-allowSwapNet] [-direction string] [-end value]
[-extendToBoundary] [-generatePinOnBoundary] [-highEnd
string] [-ignoreDRC] [-lowEnd string] [-maxLayer string]
[-metalLayer string] [-minLayer string] [-mode string]
[-net string] [-numberOfGroup integer] [-rowArea string]
[-searchRange value] [-shiftRange value] [spacingInGroup value] [-start value] [-step value] [undo] [-width value]
Returns
Arguments
1302
Argument
Description
-allowSwapNet
Swap the order of specified nets.
-direction string
Specify the direction to create stripes. Also known

as -dir.
-end value
Specify the end coordinate.
-extendToBoundary
-highEnd string
Specify the high end point.

-ignoreDRC
Ignore violations when creating PG wires. Also

known as -noVC.
-lowEnd string
Specify the low end point.


K-2015.06

routeStripe
Argument
Description
-maxLayer string
Specify the string for the highest metal layer vias

that can be created. Also known as topViaLayer.
-metalLayer string
Specify the metal layer by name.
-minLayer string
can be created. Also known as bottomViaLayer.
-mode string
Specify the mode of offset.

Valid values: absolute and relative.
-net string
Specify the net names for creating stripes.
-numberOfGroup integer
Specify the group of stripes. Also known as group.
-rowArea string
-searchRange value

to other pre-wires.
-shiftRange value
Specify the range to shift the group of stripes.
-spacingInGroup value
Specify the wire spacing between stripes. Also

known as
-spacing.
-start value
Specify the start coordinate.
-step value
Specify the step coordinate.
-undo
-width value
Specify the width of stripes.
Examples
# Example 1
routeStripe -net {VDD VSS} -dir horizontal -metalLayer M3 \
-width 0.3 -spacingInGroup 0.15 -mode relative -start 0.2 \
-end 0.2 -numberOfGroup 4

K-2015.06
1303

setActiveView
See Also
routeRing
routeRail
setActiveView
The setActiveView command sets the active/inactive analysis view for CTS,
optimization, and other engines.
If both -all and -view are specified, all views are used.
If neither -setup or -hold are specified, both types (setup and hold) are
analyzed.
Syntax
setActiveView [-all] [-disable] [-enable] [-hold] [-setup]
-view viewName
Returns
The active/inactive analysis view for CTS, optimization, and other engines is
returned.
Arguments
1304
Argument
Description
-all
Enable all views.
-disable
Set inactive analysis for specified views.
-enable
Set active analysis for specified views.
-hold
Perform hold/minimum time analysis only.
-setup
Perform setup/maximum time analysis only.
-view viewName

K-2015.06

setCTSException
Examples
# Example 1
# Active all timing views
setActiveView -all -disable
# Example 2
# Inactive all setup/max analysis for all views
setActiveView -all -disable -setup
# Example 3
# Active hold timing analysis for view normalFast
setActiveView -view normalFast -enable -hold
# Example 4
# Inactive hold timing analysis for view normalSlow
setActiveView -view normalSlow -disable -hold
See Also
listViews
setCTSException
The setCTSException command sets the exception pins for CTS.
Syntax
setCTSException [ -excludePin pinNames ] [ -file fileName ]
[ -leafPin pinNames ] [ -stopPin pinNames ] [ -throughPin
pinNames ]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-excludePin pinNames
Specify the pin names of user-defined excluded pins

for CTS.
-file fileName
Specify the file name containing the CTS exceptions.
-leafPin pinNames
Specify the pin names of user-defined leaf pins for

CTS.

K-2015.06
1305

setCTSOption
Argument
Description
-stopPin pinNames
Specify the pin names of user-defined stop pins for

CTS.
-throughPin pinNames
Specify the pin names of user-defined through pins

for CTS.
Examples
# Example 1
setCTSException -excludePin u1/CK -leafPin u2/CK
See Also
synthesizeClockTree
setCTSOption
The setCTSOption command sets options for CTS such as the maximum
level, the maximum latency, and the clock buffer type.
Syntax
setCTSOption [clock_source] [-clockBuf cellnames] [-file
filename] [-lowerLevelDefaultRule number] [maxCapacitance number] [ -maxFanout number ] [-maxLatency
number] [-maxLevel number] [-maxTransitionOnBuf number]
[-maxTransitionOnSink number] [-minLatency number] [moveGate true|false] [-routeRule string] [-sizeGate
true|false] [-sourceBuffer string] [-targetSkew number]
Returns
Arguments
1306
Argument
Description
clock_source
Specify the list of target clock sources. The target

clock source or the file containing CTS options must
be specified.

K-2015.06

setCTSOption
Argument
Description
-clockBuf cellnames
Specify the buffer and inverter cells that can be used.

If multiple names are specified, surround the list with
{}.
-file filename
Specify the CTS option file. Must specify the target

clock source or the file of CTS option.
-lowerLevelDefaultRule
number
Specify the number of levels from sinks that take the

default routing rules.
-maxCapacitance number Specify the maximum capacitance for a buffer.

-maxFanout number
Specify the maximum fanout count for a buffer. The

default is 60.
-maxLatency number
Specify the maximum latency for a clock tree. The

default is clock period.
-maxLevel number
Specify the maximum level for the clock tree. The

default is 20.
-maxTransitionOnBuf
number
Specify the maximum transition for a buffer. The unit

is ns.
-maxTransitionOnSink
number
Specify the maximum transition for a sink. The unit is

ns.
-minLatency number
Specify the minimum latency for a clock tree. The

default is 0.
-moveGate true|false
When set to true, allow the gate to be moved.
-routeRule string
Specify the name of the routing rule.
-sizeGate true|false
When set to true, allow the gate to be sized.
-sourceBuffer string
Specify the name of the buffer placed near the port

of a clock.
-targetSkew number
Specify the target skew for a clock tree. The default

is 0.3ns.

K-2015.06
1307

setDontUseCell
Examples
# Example 1
setCTSOption -clockBuf {CLKBUFX1 CLKBUFX2 CLKBUFX4 CLKBUFX12} \
-maxLevel 8 -maxTransitionOnBuf 0.45 -maxTransitionOnSink 0.45 \
-maxLatency 2.0
See Also
synthesizeClockTree
reportCTSOption
setDontUseCell
The setDontUseCell command specifies dont use cells during
optimization.
During optimization stage, the optimization engine may be told not to use some
cells like low power cells or big delay cells which helps the optimization engine
get better timing, area, or run time.
Syntax
setDontUseCell cellNames
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
cellNames
Specify the cell type names.
Examples
# Example 1
setDontUseCell *XL
# Example 2
setDontUseCell DEL*
See Also
unsetDontUseCell
1308

K-2015.06

setIdealClock
setIdealClock
The setIdealClock command turns the ideal clock propagation on or off.
Syntax
setIdealClock on | off
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
on | off
Set ideal clock propagation on or off.
Examples
# Example 1
setIdealClock on
See Also
setPropagatedClock
The setIgnoredNetsInRouting command sets the nets for the router to
ignore.
Syntax
setIgnoredNetsInRouting [-clear] [-set]
[netNamesOrPatterns]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-clear
Reset or clear the nets from being ignored during

routing.

K-2015.06
1309

setOptOption
Argument
Description
-set
To set the nets to be ignored during routing.
netNamesOrPatterns
Specify one or more nets to set to be ignored during

routing. If multiple names are specified, separate by
spaces and surround the list with {}.
Examples
# Example 1
setIgnoredNetsInRouting {netToBeIgnored} -set
# Example 2
setIgnoredNetsInRouting -clear
See Also
routeNet
setOptOption
The setOptOption command sets the optimization options for setup target
slack, hold target slack, total negative slack optimization, area recovery, and
density constraint.
Syntax
setOptOption [-areaRecovery true|false] [-effort
high|medium|low ] [-file filename] [-holdTargetSlack
value] [-maxDensity value] [-setupTargetSlack value] [tnsOptimize true|false]
Returns
Arguments
1310
Argument
Description
-areaRecovery true|false
Enable/disable area recovery. The default is false.
-effort high|medium|low
Specify the effort level. Valid values: low, medium, or

high. The default is medium.

K-2015.06

setOption
Argument
Description
-file filename
Specify the file name containing the optimization

options.
-holdTargetSlack value
Specify the worst hold target slack (ns) to be

achieved. The default is 0.0.
-maxDensity value
Specify the maximum utilization rate for the design

during timing optimization. The default is 0.95.
-setupTargetSlack value
Specify the worst setup target slack (ns) to be

achieved. The default is 0.0.
-tnsOptimize true|false
Enable/disable total negative slack optimization. The

default is false.
Examples
# Example 1
setOptOption -setupTargetSlack 0.1 -holdTargetSlack 0.1 \
-areaRecovery true -effort medium -maxDensity 0.96
See Also
reportOptOption
setOption
Various control options exist to control and customize the behavior of the tool.
The setOption command helps set the desired options.
When this command is specified without argument, all possible group names
are listed.
When this command is specified with a group name, all possible options inside
this group are listed.
When this command is specified with a group name and an option name, a
short description about the option and how it should be set is listed.

K-2015.06
1311

setPlaceOption
Syntax
setOption [group_name] [variable_name]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
group_name
Specify the option group name.
variable_name
Specify the variable name.
Examples
# Example 1
# Set a Boolean option to true
setOption timer idealClock true
See Also
listVar
setPlaceOption
The setPlaceOption command sets options to control the placer engine.
Syntax
setPlaceOption [-file name ] [-threadNum integer] [-useGR ]
Returns
Arguments
1312
Argument
Description
-file name
Specify the placement option Tcl file name.
-threadNum integer
Specify the thread number in the placement engine.
-useGR
Set to use the global router during placement.

K-2015.06

setPropagatedClock
Examples
# Example 1
setPlaceOption -useGR -threadNum 2
# Example 2
setPlaceOption -file place_option.tcl
See Also
reportPlaceOption
setPropagatedClock
The setPropagatedClock command turns the propagated delay for all
clocks on or off.
Syntax
setPropagatedClock on | off
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
on | off
Set propagated delay for all clocks on or off.
Examples
# Example 1
setPropagatedClock on
See Also
setIdealClock
setRouteRule
The setRouteRule command sets a non-default rule to the specified nets.
Syntax
setRouteRule [-default] [-nets string] [-rule string]

K-2015.06
1313

Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-default
Set the default rule for the specified nets.
-nets string
Specify names or patterns of nets to set the route rule. If

multiple names are specified, separate by spaces and
-rule string
Examples
# Example 1
setRouteRule -rule myRule -nets myNet
# Example 2
setRouteRule -default -nets myNet
See Also
createRouteRule
reportRouteRule
deleteRouteRule
The setRoutingConstraint command sets the wire or via constraints for
routing.
The -reset argument cannot be specified simultaneously with another routing
constraint.
The set and reset options for the same constraint cannot be specified
simultaneously.
Syntax
setRoutingConstraint [-addInverseRoutingDirBox string] [allLayers] [-crossViaOnly] [-disallowWireTouchPin] [doubleVia] [-dumpNetConstraint string] [excludeNetsForPinFT string] [-fromLayer] [-HHViaOnly] [-
1314

K-2015.06

info] [-inverseRoutingLayerDir] [-layers string] [maxEscapeLength double] [-maxEscapeLengthByPitch

integer] [-maxLayer string] [-maxSegmentLength value] [minLayer string] [-nets string] [-nonCrossViaOnly] [maxWireLength value] [-maxWrongWayLength double] [maxWrongWayLengthByPitch integer] [-reset] [noPinFeedThrough] [-numOfRunThread integer] [preferHHVia] [-preferVVVia] [resetDisallowWireTouchPin] [-resetDoubleVia] [resetEscape] [-resetExcludeNetsForPinFT] [resetIgnoreInCellViolation] [resetInverseRoutingDirBox] [resetInverseRoutingLayerDir] [-resetNoPinFeedThrough]
[-resetRouteArea] [-resetSpinePattern] [resetUseSpineOnChannel] [-resetUseViaEnclosedByPin] [resetUseViaDir] [-resetUseViaOnly] [-resetViaPattern] [routeArea string] [-setEscape] [setIgnoreInCellViolation] [-spinePattern string] [toLayer] [-userGrid double] [-useSpineOnChannel] [useViaEnclosedByPin] [-useViaOnly] [-VVViaOnly] [disllowBridge | -allowBridge] [maxWrongWayLengthForPinConnect lengthValue] [maxWrongWayWidthForPinConnect widthValue] [parallelRoute]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-addInverseRoutingDirBox string
Add a box in which the preferred direction is

inversed.
-allLayers
Apply constraints to all layers. This

argument cannot be specified with the minLayer, -maxLayer, and -layers
arguments.
-allowBridge
Allow bridge patterns on specified layers.

K-2015.06
1315

1316
Argument
Description
-crossViaOnly
Use cross vias in routing for specified cut

layers. This argument cannot be specified
with the
-nonCrossViaOnly argument.
-disallowBridge
Disallow bridge patterns on specified layers.
-disallowWireTouchPin
Do not allow wires to touch pins on specified

layers.
-doubleVia
Use double vias in routing for specified cut

layers.
-dumpNetConstraint string
Dump all net constraints to the specified file.
-excludeNetsForPinFT string
Use exclude nets for pins used as

feedthrough.
-fromLayer
See -minLayer for details.
-HHViaOnly
Use vias with horizontal enclosure for the

specified layers. This argument cannot be
specified with the
-VVViaOnly, -preferHHVia, and preferVVVia arguments.
-info
Show current settings.
-inverseRoutingLayerDir
Inverse the direction of the routing layers

(H>V, V>H).
-layers string

-minLayer, -maxLayer, and allLayers arguments. If -layers is not
specified, apply constraints to all layers.
-maxEscapeLength double
Specify the maximum wire length allowed in

the escape layer. The default is 10xPitch.
-maxEscapeLengthByPitch argument.

K-2015.06

Argument
Description
-maxEscapeLengthByPitch integer
Specify the maximum wire length allowed in

the escape layer by number of pitches. The
default is 10. This argument cannot be
specified with the
-maxEscapeLength argument.
-maxLayer string
Apply constraints to the specified layer. This

argument must be specified with the minLayer option but it cannot be specified
with the -layers and -allLayers
arguments.
-maxSegmentLength value
Specify the maximum wire length of

connected wire segments for the specified
layers. A value of 0 indicates reset. If
specified without -nets, this is treated as a
global constraint.
-maxWireLength value
Specify the maximum wire length for the

specified layers. A value of 0 indicates reset.
If specified without -nets, this is treated as
a global constraint.
-maxWrongWayLength double
Specify the maximum length for wrong way

wires. The unit is represented in microns
(um). A value of 0 indicates reset.
-maxWrongWayLengthByPitch integer Specify the maximum length for wrong way

wires in the specified layers by number of
pitches. A value of 0 indicates reset.
-maxWrongWayLengthForPinConnect Connect pins with distance less than the
lengthValue
specified length using the wrong way layer.
-maxWrongWayWidthForPinConnect
widthValue
Use the width of wrong way wires to connect

pins.
-minLayer string
Apply constraints from the specified layer.

This argument must be specified with the maxLayer argument but it cannot be
specified with the -layers and allLayers arguments.

K-2015.06
1317

1318
Argument
Description
-nets string
Specify the nets to be constrained. This

argument is active only when maxWireLength and/or
-maxVCFromSrcToSink are specified.
-nonCrossViaOnly
Use non-cross vias for the specified cut

layers. This argument cannot be specified
with the -CrossViaOnly argument.
-noPinFeedThrough
Do not use pins as feedthrough on specified

layers.
-numOfRunThread integer
Set the number of run threads for the routing

engine.
-parallelRoute
Create parallel wires.
-preferHHVia
Use vias with horizontal enclosure for the

specified with the
-HHViaOnly, -VVViaOnly, and preferVVVia arguments.
-preferVVVia
Use vias with vertical enclosure for the

specified with the -HHViaOnly, VVViaOnly, and -preferHHVia
arguments.
-reset
Reset all constraints.
-resetDisallowWireTouchPin
Allow wires to touch pins on specified layers.
-resetDoubleVia
Reset the double vias that have been

applied in routing.
-resetEscape
Reset the escape layer.
-resetExcludeNetsForPinFT
Do not use excluded nets for pins used as

feedthrough.

K-2015.06

Argument
Description
-resetIgnoreInCellViolation
Treat spacing errors between port

rectangles and instance rectangles as real
violations.
-resetInverseRoutingDirBox
Reset all inverse preferred direction boxes.
-resetInverseRoutingLayerDir
Reset the direction of routing layers

according to the layer definition in the library.
-resetNoPinFeedThrough
Use pins as feedthrough on the specified

layers.
-resetRouteArea
Reset the routing area box for the routing

engine.
-resetSpinePattern
Do not use the spine pattern in routing.
-resetUseSpineOnChannel
Do not use the spine pattern on channels.
-resetUseViaEnclosedByPin
Do not enclose vias on pins of the specified

layers by pin shapes.
-resetUseViaDir
Do not use H/V vias for specified layers.
-resetUseViaOnly
Use wires on specified layers.
-resetViaPattern
Do not use cross/non-cross vias for the

specified cut layers.
-routeArea string
Specify the routing box for the routing engine

with the following format: {x0 y0 x1 y1}.
-setEscape
Set the escape layer.
-setIgnoreInCellViolation
Ignore spacing errors between port

rectangles and instance rectangles.
-spinePattern string
Specify the spine pattern to use in routing.
-toLayer
See -maxLayer for details.

K-2015.06
1319

Argument
Description
-userGrid double
Specify the minimum grid for all routing

layers. A value of 0 indicates reset. The
router attempts to align as many wires/vias
to the specified minimum grid as possible.
-useSpineOnChannel
Use the spine pattern on channels.
-useViaEnclosedByPin
Enclose vias on pins of the specified layers

by pin shapes.
-useViaOnly
Do not use wires on specified layers.
-VVViaOnly
Apply vias with vertical enclosure for

specified with the
-HHViaOnly, -preferHHVia, and preferVVVia arguments.
Examples
# Example 1
# Use double vias in routing and show the setting
setRoutingConstraint -doubleVia -info
# Example 2
# Use vias to touch pins on layer M1 and use spine pattern
setRoutingConstraint -disallowWireTouchPin -layers M1
setRoutingConstraint -spinePattern AUTO -allLayers
# Example 3
# Set escape layers from M1 to M2; do not allow bridge violations
setRoutingConstraint -setEscape -minLayer M1 -maxLayer M2
# Example 4
# Set the escape layer as M1 and allow possible bridge violations
setRoutingConstraint -setEscape -allowBridge -layer M1
# Example 5
# Layer metal1 is a high resistance layer, thus no bridge
# is allowed on metal1
# Reserve the routing resource of metal2 for top level routing
setRoutingConstraint -disallowBridge -layer metal1
setRoutingConstraint -setEscape -layer metal2
1320

K-2015.06

setRoutingLayer
# Example 6
# Set a parallel route constraint
setRoutingConstraint -layers BP \
-maxWrongWayLengthForPinConnect 3.0
-maxWrongWayWidthForPinConnect 0.3 -parallelRoute
See Also
routeNet
fixViolation
setRoutingLayer
The setRoutingLayer command sets the available routing layers for router.
Syntax
setRoutingLayer [-clear] [-fromLayer string] [-info] [toLayer string]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-clear
Remove the metal ECO constraints.
-fromLayer string
Allow layout changes beginning from the specified layer

name.
-info
List current metal ECO constraints.
-toLayer string
Allow layout changes up to the specified layer name.
Examples
# Example 1
setRoutingLayer -fromLayer metal1 -toLayer metal4
# Example 2
setRoutingLayer -clear
# Example 3
setRoutingLayer -info

K-2015.06
1321

setRoutingTrack
See Also
routeNet
fixViolation
setRoutingTrack
The setRoutingTrack command sets the routing track pre-process.
Syntax
setRoutingTrack [-dir H | V] [-info] [-layers string] [pitch value] [-start value]
[-clear] [-autoAdjust] [-curRouterTrack]
Returns
Arguments
1322
Argument
Description
-autoAdjust
Automatically adjust the routing track offset.
-clear
Clear all track information in the database.
-curRouterTrack
When worked with -info, report the current track

information used by the router.
-dir H | V
Specify the direction for the specified layers as horizontal

(H) or vertical (V).
-info
Show all track information in ICSDB.
-layers string
-pitch value
Specify the pitch between tracks.

-start value
Specify the start point of the track.

K-2015.06

setViolationType
Examples
# Example 1
setRoutingTrack -start
M5 M9 }
0.35 -pitch 0.67 -dir H -layers { M1 M3
# Example 2
setRoutingTrack -start -0.73 -pitch -1.54 -dir V -layers { M1 M3
M5 M9 }
# Example 3
setRoutingTrack -start -3.22 -pitch 1.58 -dir H -layers { M2 M4
M6 M8 }
# Example 4
setRoutingTrack -start
M6 M8 }
5.66 -pitch -1.54 -dir V -layers { M2 M4
See Also
reportDesign
setViolationType
The setViolationType command sets the violation types to be checked.
Syntax
setViolationType [-adjacentCut] [-all] [-cutSpacing] [doubleViaInSignalNet] [-enclosureEdge] [-endOfLine] [fatSpacing] [-gap] [-minArea] [-minCut] [-minEdges] [minEnclosedArea] [-minGrid] [-minSpacing] [-minWidth] [notch] [-notUsePinAsFeedThrough] [-outOfBoundary] [reverse] [-short] [-viaStacking] [standardCellPinAccess] [-varLayer] [-varSpacing] [varVia] [-varWidth]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-adjacentCut
Check adjacent cut spacing violations and browse

them.

K-2015.06
1323

setViolationType
Argument
Description
-all
Turn on all violation types in the drawing but do not

begin checking.
-cutSpacing
Check cut-to-cut spacing violations and browse

them.
-doubleViaInSignalNet
Check all vias are double vias in all signal nets.

setRoutingConstraint -doubleVia must be
set first.
-enclosureEdge
Check foundry 45nm rule VIAx.EN.3.1.
-endOfLine
Check end of line spacing.
-fatSpacing
Check fat metal spacing violations and browse

them.
-gap
Check gaps.
-minArea
Check minimum area violations and browse them.
-minCut
Check minimum cut violations and browse them.
-minEdges
Check minimum consecutive step edges (small

edges).
-minEnclosedArea
Check minimum enclosed area violations and

browse them.
-minGrid
Check any shapes that are not on minimum grid and

browse them.
-minSpacing
Check minimum spacing violations and browse

them.
-minWidth
Check minimum width violations and browse them.
-notch
Check notches.
Do not use pins as feedthrough.

notUsePinAsFeedThrough setRoutingConstraint
-noPinFeedThrough must be set first.
1324

K-2015.06

showHPWL
Argument
Description
-outOfBoundary
Check out of design boundary violations and browse

them.
-reverse
Reverse the selection condition of all types.
-short
Check shorts and browse short violations.
-standardCellPinAccess
Check the legal pin access for foundry 45/40

qualification suite.
-varLayer
Check the variable layer routing rules.
-varSpacing
Check the variable spacing routing rule.
-varVia
Check the variable via routing rule.
-varWidth
Check the variable width routing rule.
-viaStacking
Check via stacking violations and browse them.
Examples
# Example 1
setViolationType -all
# Example 2
setViolationType -short -endOfLine
# Example 3
setViolationType -reverse
See Also
checkViolation
checkExistingVio
showHPWL
The showHPWL command gets the Half-Perimeter Wire Length (HPWL) value
of the current design.
Syntax
showHPWL [-ignoreFanoutLargerThan value]
K-2015.06
1325

synthesizeClockTree
Returns
The HPWL information is returned.
Arguments
Argument
Description
Specify the value for the maximum fan-out.

ignoreFanoutLargerThan
value
Examples
# Example 1
showHPWL
# Example 2
showHPWL -ignoreFanoutLargerThan 1024
See Also
placement
synthesizeClockTree
The synthesizeClockTree command synthesizes the clock tree. The goal
is to minimize the skew and latency of the clock tree.
Syntax
synthesizeClockTree [ -target clock_source ]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-target clock_source
Specify the target clock source.
Examples
# Example 1
synthesizeClockTree
1326

K-2015.06

unsetDontUseCell
See Also
setCTSOption
unsetDontUseCell
The unsetDontUseCell command unsets the dont use cells that were
specified by the setDontUseCell command during optimization.
Syntax
unsetDontUseCell cellNames
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
cellNames
Specify the cell type name list.
Examples
# Example 1
unsetDontUseCell *XL
# Example 2
unsetDontUseCell DEL*
See Also
setDontUseCell
updateTiming
The updateTiming command updates the timing settings, for example: SDC
and view settings.
Syntax
updateTiming
Returns

K-2015.06
1327

writeDef
Examples
# Example 1
updateTiming
See Also
setActiveView
listViews
resetSdc
writeDef
The writeDef command writes the DEF file from ICS.
The target vendor is the same as the setting in the readDef command if it is
not set here. However, it may be set to override just for writeDef.
Use -stripBackSlash ONCE to strip one backslash per cluster of
backslashes. This mode is usually used with merging DEF files into a single
DEF output.
Use -stripBackSlash ALL to strip all backslashes related to /. There are
always backslashes in front of buses if not at the end.
Syntax
writeDef fileName [-cadence | -synopsys | -magma | springSoft] [-autoVarRule] [-designName design_name] [ver 5.5 | 5.6 | 5.7] [-distUnit 100 | 200 | 1000 | 2000
| 10000 | 20000] [-keepMetalFill] [-noRoutes] [rectDrcfill] [-skip1PinNets] [-skipUnplacedInsts] [stripBackSlash ONCE | ALL | once | all]
Returns
Arguments
1328
Argument
Description
fileName
Specify the name of the file to dump the DEF into.

Postfix .gz is allowed and handled properly.
-autoVarRule
Select the variable route rule automatically.

K-2015.06

writeDef
Argument
Description
Dump the DEF file in a format suitable for importing

into one of the following P&R tools: Cadence,
Synopsys, Magma, or SpringSoft. Only one mode
may be specified. The default mode is SpringSoft.
-designName
design_name
Specify the design name to use in the output DEF

file.
-distUnit 100 | 200 | 1000 |

2000 | 10000 | 20000
Specify the distance unit to convert to in the output

DEF file.
-keepMetalFill
Include the dummy metal fill in the DEF file.
-noRoutes
Do not dump routing into the DEF file.
-rectDrcfill
Write metal fillers as rectangle in the SPECIALNET

section.
-skip1PinNets
Do not report nets with 1 single pin (unconnected

pin).
-skipUnplacedInsts
Do not dump instances that are not placed.
-stripBackSlash
ONCE | ALL | once | all
Specify how to handle backslashes: strip out once

per cluster or strip out all of them (except for a bus
in the middle of names).
-ver 5.5 | 5.6 | 5.7
Specify the DEF version to write. Versions 5.5 to 5.7

are supported. The default is 5.6.
Examples
# Example 1
writeDef my.def
# Example 2
writeDef my.def -magma -ver 5.7
See Also
readDef

K-2015.06
1329

writeDesign
writeDesign
The writeDesign command writes the current design to disk in either DB,
DEF, or HDL format. The current design is the last design that was opened by
the readDesign, readVerilog, or readDef commands.
If the current design was not read by the readDesign command, specify the
-refLib and -designLib arguments to write out the technology library and
design library. If the current design is read by the readDesign command, the
output database is put under the working library.
When writing the DEF format, shapes of dummy nets are exported to the FILLS
section.
Syntax
writeDesign [-designLib designLibName] [-dumpMetalFill]
[-format (db | verilog | def)] [-gzip] [keepDanglingNet] -output newCell_or_fileName [-refLib
refLibName] [-sects {via | component | pin | special_net
| net | scan_chain | all}] [-techVia] [-tieHigh
tieHighNet] [-tieLow tieLowNet]
Returns
Arguments
1330
Argument
Description
-designLib
designLibName
If the current design is not read by the readDesign

command, specify the target design library to write to.
-dumpMetalFill
Dump the metal fill section of the DEF file.
-format
(db | verilog | def)
Specify the output format.

Valid values: db, verilog, and def (default=db).
-gzip
Compress the DEF file into gzip format.
-keepDanglingNet
Keep dangling nets in the output design.
-output
newCell_or_fileName
If -format db is specified, specify the new cell name

for this argument. Otherwise, specify the output file
name. If this argument is omitted, the current cell
name is the default output name.

K-2015.06

writeDesign
Argument
Description
-refLib refLibName
Write the database with the specified reference

library.
-sects {via | component |

pin | special_net |net |
scan_chain | all}
Specify the sections to be written.
-techVia
Write the vias defined in the LEF file to the output DEF
file.
-tieHigh tieHighNet
Specify the name for tied-high nets. This argument is

valid if -format verilog is specified. The tied-high
net is converted into 1b1 in the HDL file.
-tieLow tieLowNet
Specify the name for tied-low nets. This argument is

valid if -format verilog is specified. The tied-low
net is converted into 1b0 in the HDL file.
Examples
# Example 1
# Save current design as cpu_v2 cell
writeDesign -output cpu_v2
# Example 2
# Export current design into cpu.def file in DEF format
writeDesign -format def -output cpu.def
# Example 3
# Export current design into cpu.v file in Verilog format
writeDesign -format verilog -output cpu.v
# Example 4
# Export def file with metal fill shapes and vias defined in lef
writeDesign -format def -output cpu.def -dumpMetalFill -techVia
# Example 5
# Export def for scan chain section only
writeDesign -format def -output scan.def -sects scan_chain
# Example 6
# Not read design flow
readLef tech.lef
readVerilog netlist.v -cpf myCPF.cpf
readDef -springSoft physical.def
writeDesign -format db -output my_design -refLib my_lef_lib \
-designLib design_lib

K-2015.06
1331

writeEcoReport
See Also
readDesign
readLef
readVerilog
readDef
writeEcoReport
The writeEcoReport command reports the current spare cells into a file.
Syntax
writeEcoReport -name filename
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-name filename
Specify the output file name to be created.
Examples
# Example 1
writeEcoReport -name spare.report
See Also
readSpareCellFile
writeSpareCellFile
writeSdf
The writeSdf command saves a standard delay format (SDF) file.
Syntax
writeSdf [-inputPortNets] [-outputPortNets] [-sdf3] [-sig
precision] [-view viewName]
1332

K-2015.06

writeSpareCellFile
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-inputPortNets
Include input ports.
-outputPortNets
Include output ports.
-sdf3
Use SDF verion 3.0 instead of version 2.1.
-sig precision
Specify precision for digits. The default is 3.
-view viewName
Specify the view to be written. If not specified, the first

view is written.
Examples
# Example 1
writeSdf -view ac1 -sig 4 -inputPortNets -outputPorts \
-sdf3 design.sdf.gz
writeSpareCellFile
The writeSpareCellFile command writes the current spare instances into
a file.
Syntax
writeSpareCellFile -name filename
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-name filename
Specify the output file name to be created.
Examples
# Example 1
writeSpareCellFile -name new_spare.list

K-2015.06
1333

writeSpef
See Also
readSpareCellFile
writeEcoReport
writeSpef
The writeSpef command writes the RC network data to the specified file for
min, typ, or max application points in the specified format.
Syntax
writeSpef file(s) [-ap single_analysis_point] [-format
spef|dspf|rspf|sbpf] [-max max_analysis_point] [-min
min_analysis_point] [-noNameMap] [-typ
typ_analysis_point]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
file(s)
-ap single_analysis_point
Specify a single analysis point.
-format
spef | dspf | rspf | sbpf
Specify the output format.

Valid values: spef, dspf, rspf, and sbpf
(default=spef).
-max max_analysis_point
Specify the maximum analysis point.
-min min_analysis_point
Specify the minimum analysis point.
-noNameMap
Do not save the name map table.
-typ typ_analysis_point
Specify the typical analysis point.
Examples
# Example 1
writeSpef
1334

K-2015.06

writeVerilog
See Also
RCX
writeVerilog
The writeVerilog command saves the Verilog file from ICS.
The target vendor is the same as the setting in the readDef command if it is
not set here. However, it may be set to override just for writeVerilog.
Syntax
writeVerilog fileName [-cadence | -synopsys | -magma | springSoft] [-incPGPorts] [-incPhysicalOnly] [newTopModule top_module_name] [-skipFillerByCell
cell_master_name] [-skipFillerByInst inst_name] [skipPad] [-skipSpare] [-skipTieOff]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
fileName
Specify the name of the file to dump the hierarchical

Verilog into. Postfix .gz allowed and handled properly.
Dump a Verilog file suitable for importing into one of the

following P&R tools: Cadence, Synopsys, Magma, or
-incPGPorts
Include power/ground ports of the top module.
-incPhysicalOnly
Include physical-only instances.
-newTopModule
top_module_name
Specify the name to output as the Verilog top module

name.
-skipFillerByCell
cell_master_name
Skip filler instances by the specified master names or

patterns. If multiple names are specified, surround the
list with {}.

K-2015.06
1335

writeVerilog
Argument
Description
-skipFillerByInst
inst_name
Skip filler instances by the specified instance names or

patterns. If multiple names are specified, surround the
list with {}.
-skipPad
Skip pad cells.
-skipSpare
Skip spare cells.
-skipTieOff
Skip tied-high/low cells.
Examples
# Example 1
writeVerilog myOut.v
# Example 2
writeVerilog myOut.v -cadence -skipFillerByCell FILL4 \
-newTopModule myTop
See Also
readVerilog
readDef
1336

K-2015.06
10
Design Browser
10
User Interface (GUI) which applied within the Design Browser pane.
lakerAssociate
lakerDelLayoutNet
lakerFixDiscrepancy
lakerFixLayDisc
lakerGetBroSelSet
lakerManualAssociate
lakerProbeShape
lakerSchAreaPlacer
lakerSchRecoverHier
lakerSchAreaEstimate
lakerSchBroDrag
lakerSchBroDrop
lakerSchBroDump
lakerSchChgGridMode
lakerSchChgInstanceMap
lakerSchChgRefMap
lakerSchCloneMaster
lakerSchCollapseAllItem

K-2015.06
1337
Chapter 10: Design Browser

lakerAssociate
lakerSchCompare
lakerSchCreate
lakerSchDeSelectGrid
lakerSchECORowPlacer
lakerSchExpandAllItem
lakerSchExpandMFactor
lakerSchFind
lakerSchFlattenAll
lakerSchFlattenLvl
lakerSchFlattenOne
lakerSchGroup
lakerSchHLObject
lakerSchLayInstMap
lakerSchMakeNode
lakerSchRecoverMFactor
lakerSchRowPlacer
lakerSchSelectGridItem
lakerSchSelectTreeNode
lakerSchSetActiveTree
lakerSchSummary
lakerSchTopology
lakerSchUngroup
lakerAssociate
The lakerAssociate command automatically links the schematic
information to the layout cell view based on the schematic netlist.
1338

K-2015.06

lakerDelLayoutNet
Syntax
lakerAssociate [-overwriteInst 0|1 | -overwriteNet 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-overwriteInst 0|1

1 : Replace the instance name of the layout cell view, which
may be a system-assigned name or a user-assigned
name, with the instance name found in the relative
schematic netlist.
0 : The system-assigned name is replaced but the userassigned name remains unchanged.
-overwriteNet 0|1

1 : Replace the net name of the layout cell view, which may
be a system-assigned name or a user-assigned name, with
the net name found in the relative schematic netlist.
0 : The system-assigned name is replaced but the userassigned name remains unchanged.
Examples
# Associate the layout cell view with schematic netlist,
# and replace the instance name of the layout cell view but keep
# the user-assigned net name
lakerAssociate -overwriteInst 1 -overwriteNet 0
See Also
Design Browser: Associate
lakerDelLayoutNet
The lakerDelLayoutNet command deletes an extra layout net with the
condition that the net name must not be on the corresponding schematic cell
view.
Syntax
lakerDelLayoutNet -net net_name_list

K-2015.06
1339

lakerFixDiscrepancy
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-net net_name_list
Specify the list of net names to be deleted.
Examples
lakerDelLayoutNet -net net1 VDD1
See Also
Design Browser: Delete Layout Net
lakerFixDiscrepancy
The lakerFixDiscrepancy command fixes the discrepancies between the
schematic and layout.
Syntax
lakerFixDiscrepancy [-extendGate extendGateMode]
[-fixValueMode 0|1] -honorMOSMfactor 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
1340
Argument
Description
-extendGate
extendGateMode
Set the extend or shrink direction of the bent gate

width when fixing discrepancies.
Valid values: top, bottom, both, and auto
(default=auto).top: Extend/shrink the bent gate
from the top.bottom: Extend/shrink the bent gate
from the bottom.both: Extend/shrink the bent gate
from both the top and bottom.auto: Extend the bent
gate from the top, middle, and bottom, and follow the
proportion of 2:1:2.

K-2015.06

lakerFixLayDisc
Argument
Description
-fixValueMode 0|1

1: Use the Ratio mode to dispatch the incorrect width.
0: Use the Average mode to dispatch the incorrect
width.

1: Enable the Honor M-factor option.
0: Disable the Honor M-factor option.
Examples
# Example 1
# Fix the discrepancies by extending the bent gate from the top
lakerFixDiscrepancy -extendGate top
lakerFixLayDisc -honorMOSMfactor 0 -fixValueMode 1
See Also
Design Browser: Fix Discrepancy
lakerFixLayDisc
lakerFixLayDisc
The lakerFixLayDisc command fixes the width of the selected MCell
transistors in the Layout window pane.
Syntax
lakerFixLayDisc [-extendGate extendGateMode] [-fixvaluemode
0|1] [-honorMOSMfactor 0|1]
Returns
None

K-2015.06
1341

lakerGetBroSelSet
Arguments
Argument
Description
-extendGate
extendGateMode
Set the extend or shrink direction of the bent gate

width when fixing discrepancies.
Valid values: top, bottom, both, and auto
(default=auto).top: Extend/shrink the bent gate
from the top.bottom: Extend/shrink the bent gate
from the bottom.both: Extend/shrink the bent gate
from both the top and bottom.auto: Extend the bent
gate from the top, middle, and bottom and follow the
proportion of 2:1:2.
-fixValueMode 0|1

1: Use the Ratio mode to dispatch the incorrect width.
0: Use the Average mode to dispatch the incorrect
width.

1: Enable the Honor M-factor option.
0: Disable the Honor M-factor option.
Examples
# Example 1
# Fix the discrepancies of the selected objects
lakerFixLayDisc
# Example 2
# Fix the discrepancies by extending the bent gate from the top
lakerFixDiscrepancy -extendGate top
lakerFixLayDisc -honorMOSMfactor 0 -fixValueMode 1
See Also
Design Browser: Fix Discrepancy
lakerFixDiscrepancy
lakerGetBroSelSet
The lakerGetBroSelSet command gets the select sets from the Design
Browser pane.
1342

K-2015.06

Syntax
lakerGetBroSelSet [-type type]
Returns
The identifier (ID) of the selected instances is returned if the Design Browser
pane is in Instance mode.
The identifier (ID) of the selected nets is returned if the Design Browser pane is
in Netlist mode.
0 is returned if nothing is selected, or the wrong data type is selected.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-type type
Specify the data type.

Valid values: logic, layout, and all (default=all).
logic : Get the logic data only.
layout : Get the extra layout data only.
all : Get both the logic and extra layout data.
Examples
lakerGetBroSelSet -type logic
Based on the selected items in the Design Browser pane, the
lakerManualAssociate command assigns the schematic information to
pre-selected objects in the Layout window pane.
Syntax
lakerManualAssociate [-gui 0|1 [-callback Tcl_callback]]
Returns
None

K-2015.06
1343

lakerProbeShape
Arguments
Argument
Description
-callback
Tcl_callback
Specify the Tcl callback command to be executed. After the

command is finished, this callback function is executed: proc
callback {par1} where the valid parameter is either 0 or
1.
0 : Do not update the data.
1 : Update the data.
-gui 0|1

1 : Jump to the Layout window pane to select the associated
layout.
0 : Do not jump to the Layout window pane.
Examples
See Also
Design Browser: Manual Associate
lakerProbeShape
The lakerProbeShape command suspends Laker to wait for further layout
probing action. After the layout data is probed, it returns the specified
information of the probed layout data. If there is no specified information, it
keeps suspending Laker to wait for further layout probing action.
Syntax
lakerProbeShape [-mode probe_mode | -relatedSchematic 0|1]
Returns
A string containing cell name (the first token), instance or net names of the
probed layout data (the remaining tokens) if successful; otherwise, returns
nothing.
1344

K-2015.06

lakerSchAreaPlacer
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode probe_mode
Specify the information you wish to get.

Valid values: instance, net and all (default=all).
instance: Get instance names of the probed layout
data.
net: Get net names of the probed layout data and their
connected nets.
all: Get the information of instances and nets at the
same time.
-relatedSchematic 0|1

1: Do not relate the original schematic information.
0: Relate the original schematic information.
Examples
# Get instance names of probed layout data
# return value: CellName inst1 inst2
lakerProbeShape -mode instance
# Get net names of probed layout data
# return value: CellName Net1 Net2
lakerProbeShape -mode net
# Get instance and net names of probed layout data
# return value:
# CellName { Instance {inst1 inst2}} { Net {net1 net2 net3}}
lakerProbeShape -mode all
See Also
lakerSchLayInstMap
lakerSchAreaPlacer
The lakerSchAreaPlacer command performs the area placement.
Syntax
lakerSchAreaPlacer [-topology 0|1] [-boundary options]
[-area priority] [-wireLen priority] [-ratio priority ratioValue floatNum] [-power locality]

K-2015.06
1345

lakerSchAreaPlacer
Returns
None
Arguments
1346
Argument
Description
-area priority
Specify the priority for Area.

Valid values: high, medium, and low (default=high).
-boundary
options
Specify the placement constraint with the cell boundary.
-power
locality
Specify the relative locality of power and ground nets at the

contrast locality.
Valid values: top, bottom, left, right (default=top).
top: Power nets are at the top locality and ground nets are at
the bottom.
bottom: Power nets are at the bottom locality and ground
nets are at the top.
left: Power nets are at left locality and ground nets are at the
right.
right: Power nets at the right locality and ground nets are at
the left.
-ratio priority
Specify the priority for Aspect Ratio.

Only valid with -ratioValue.
-ratioValue
floatNum
Specify the ratio of width/length for the placement area. This

argument is only valid with -ratio.
-topology 0|1

1: Use the topology-driven concept for area placement.
0: Use the general placement constraints.
-wireLen
priority
Specify the priority for Wire Length.

Valid values: inside, width, and length

(default=inside).

K-2015.06

lakerSchRecoverHier
Examples
# Example 1
lakerSchAreaPlacer -area high -ratio high -ratioValue 1.0 -power
left
# Example 2
lakerSchAreaPlacer -boundary inside -power top
See Also
Design Browser: Placement: Area Placement
lakerSchRecoverHier
The lakerSchRecoverHier command rebuilds the original hierarchy by
recovering the hierarchy relationship of instances in the logic cell view.
Syntax
lakerSchRecoverHier
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
# Select several instances (inst1 inst2) and
# try to recover each instances to previous hierarchy depth
lakerSchSelectGridItem -item inst1 inst2
lakerSchRecoverHier
See Also
Design Browser: Recover
The lakerSchAreaEstimate command re-estimates the layout cell
boundary for specific cell views by the actual amount of instances, instance
types, instance and model mappings, and halo settings.

K-2015.06
1347

Syntax
lakerSchAreaEstimate (-halo haloVal | [-mos mosHaloVal] [res resHaloVal] [-cap capHaloVal] [-BJT BJTHaloVal] [inductor inductorHaloVal] [-diode diodeHaloVal] [-inst
instHaloVal]) -file filePathName -multiplier floatNum (ratio floatNum | -width floatNum | -length floatNum)
Returns
None
Arguments
1348
Argument
Description
-BJT
BJTHaloVal
Specify the halo value for BJT (um).

Valid value: a positive floating number (default=0).
-cap
capHaloVal
Specify the halo value for capacitor (um).

-diode
diodeHaloVal
Specify the halo value for diode (um).

-file
filePathName
Specify the file that lists the halo value for specific instance
by instance name. The file has higher priority than the
specified halo value (uniform or by type).
-halo
haloVal
Specify the uniform halo value (um).

-inductor
inductorHaloVal
Specify the halo value for inductor (um).

-inst
instHaloVal
Specify the halo value for instance (um).

-length
floatNum
Specify the rectangle length (um).

-mos
mosHaloVal
Specify the halo value for Mos (um).

-multiplier
floatNum
Specify the layout area multiplier.


K-2015.06

lakerSchBroDrag
Argument
Description
-ratio
floatNum
Specify the ratio width/length.

It forms a square area when the value is 1.0.
-res
resHaloVal
Specify the halo value for resistor (um).

-width
floatNum
Specify the rectangle width (um).

Examples
lakerSchAreaEstimate -multiplier 1.2 -ratio 1.6 -mos 0.25 \
-res 0.5 -diode 0.8 -inst 0.2
See Also
Design Browser: Re-estimate Area
lakerSchBroDrag
The lakerSchBroDrag command drags selected objects from the Design
Browser pane.
Syntax
lakerSchBroDrag
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
# Drag the selected objects from the Design Browser pane
lakerSchBroDrag
See Also
Design Browser: Drag

K-2015.06
1349

lakerSchBroDrop
lakerSchBroDrop
The lakerSchBroDrop command drops the dragged data to the Design
Browser pane. The dragged data is highlighted on the Design Browser pane.
Syntax
lakerSchBroDrop [-instname input_instances | -netname
input_nets | -fromSource 1|0]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-fromSource 0|1

1: Transform the schematic information to hierarchical
layout data while bringing in the netlist source data to the
Layout window pane.
0: Do not transform the schematic information to
hierarchical layout data while bringing in the netlist source
data to the Layout window pane.
-instname
input_instances
Specify the input instance.
-netname
input_nets
Specify the input net.
Examples
# Drop the dragged data to the Design Browser pane
lakerDsgDrag
lakerSchBroDrop
See Also
Design Browser: Drop
lakerDsgDrop
lakerSchLayInstMap
1350

K-2015.06

lakerSchBroDump
lakerSchBroDump
The lakerSchBroDump command dumps the showing information in the
current Design Browser pane. If the -file option is not specified, the
information is saved to the lakerBrowser.log file under the log directory.
Syntax
lakerSchBroDump [[-mode {mode}] | [-file fileName]]
Returns
The instance name only if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
The return data depends on the settings of the Design Browser pane:
Showing mode (Instance/Net): If it is under Instance mode, the dump
information contains data in Instance mode only, and vice versa.
Showing extra layout (All/Naming): If showing extra layouts by All, the dump
information contains extra layouts by All only, and vice versa.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file fileName
Save the dumping informaiton to a specified file.
-mode {mode}
Specify the showing information to be dumped. The

-file option is inactive when you specified the -mode
option.
Valid values: all, schematic,
realized_schematic, nonRealized_schematic,
and extra_layout.
Examples
# Save the information from the Design Browser pane to
# demo.map in the log directory
lakerSchBroDump -file demo.dmp
See Also
lakerSchLayInstMap

K-2015.06
1351

lakerSchChgGridMode
lakerSchChgGridMode
The lakerSchChgGridMode command changes the showing mode of the
Syntax
lakerSchChgGridMode -mode ShowType
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode ShowType
Specify the display mode.

Valid values: inst and net (default=inst).
Examples
# change to show net information in the Design Browser pane
lakerSchChgGridMode -mode net
See Also
Design Browser: Show Inst/Net List
lakerSchChgInstanceMap
The lakerSchChgInstanceMap command changes the instance mapping
information.
Syntax
lakerSchChgInstanceMap -item mappingList [-showOnly]
lakerSchChgInstanceMap -showOnly
Returns
None
1352

K-2015.06

lakerSchChgRefMap
Arguments
Argument
Description
-item
mappingList
Specify the instance mapping list with the following

format:
{InstanceName RefLibrary RefCell RefView
{ParameterMap} {ConnectionMap} {HierMap}
{HierNetMap}}
Refer to the definition of the MODEL_MAP section in the
model map file for more details on the formats of
ParameterMap, ConnectionMap, HierMap, and
HierNetMap.
-showOnly
Display the Change Instance Map form with settings.
Examples
# Example 1
# a. Change the instance mapping information of instance (x1) to
#
cell view (Adder, abstract) in library (LayoutLib)
#
and map the port as (A>OP1, B>OP2, C>OP3, SumOut>Sum)
# b. Change the instance mapping information of instance (x2) to
#
cell view (Inv, layout) in library (LayoutLib)
#
and map the port as (A>In, An>Out)
lakerSchChgInstanceMap -item \
{x1 LayoutLib Adder abstract {A:OP1 B:OP2 C:OP3 SumOut:Sum}} \
{x2 LayoutLib Inv layout {A:In An:Out} }
See Also
Design Browser: Change Instance Map
lakerSchChgRefMap
The lakerSchChgRefMap command changes the cell mapping information.
Syntax
lakerSchChgRefMap -item mappingList ( [-file saveFile] |
[-showOnly] )
lakerSchChgRefMap -file saveFile
lakerSchChgRefMap -showOnly
Returns
None
K-2015.06
1353

lakerSchChgRefMap
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file saveFile
Dump the model map file with the current cell mappings to
a file.
-item
mappingLst
Specify the cell mapping list with the following format:

{ModelType ModelName RefLibrary
RefCellView {Condition} {ParameterMap}
{ConnectionMap} {IgnoreSchPort}
{IgnoreLayoutPort} {HierMap} {HierNetMap}}
ConnectionMap, HierMap, and HierNetMap.
-showOnly
Display the Change Map form with settings.
Examples
# Example 1
# a. Change the mapping of model type (x) and model name (inv) to
#
cell view (devCell, layout) in library (refLib)
#
and map the port as (PortA>in, PortB>out)
# b. Change the mapping of model type(m) and model name(p) to
#
MCell(pmos) in the current library
lakerSchChgRefMap -item \
{x inv refLib {devCell layout} {} {} {PortA:in PortB:out} } \
{m p . pmos}
# Example 2
# a. Change the mapping of model type (x) to the cell with the same
#
cell name in library (LayoutLib)
# b. Change the mapping of model type (M) and model name (nfet) with
# condition w<0.5 to cell view (nch, layout) in library (Layout65)
#
and map the parameter as (wtot> w, fingers=0)
# c. Change the mapping of model type (M) and model name (nfet) to
#
cell view (nch, layout) in library(Layout65)
#
and map the parameter as (wtot>w, fingers>NF)
# d. Change the mapping of model type (M) and model name (pfet) with
#
condition w<0.5 to cell view (pmos, udd) in library(LayoutLib)
#
and map the parameter as (TotalW> w*1e6, Len>l*1e6,
#
Fingers>nf) and port as (D>Drain, G>Gate, S>Source,
#
B>Bulk)
# e. Change the mapping of model type (M) and model name (pfet) to
#
MCell(PMOS) in the current library
lakerSchChgRefMap -item {X * LayoutLib *} \
1354

K-2015.06

lakerSchCloneMaster
{M nfet Layout65 {nch layout} {w<0.5} {{wtot w} {fingers {}

0}} } \
{M nfet Layout65 {nch layout} {} {{wtot w} {fingers NF}} } \
{M pfet LayoutLib {pmos udd} {w<0.5} \
{{TotalW w 1e6} {Len l 1e6} {Finger nf}} \
{D:Drain G:Gate S:Source B:Bulk} } \
{M pfet . PMOS }
# Example 3
# Dump the current mapping information to the file (test.map)
lakerSchChgRefMap -file test.map
See Also
Design Browser: Change Map
lakerSchCloneMaster
The lakerSchCloneMaster command copies the master cell of the specified
instance to another.
Syntax
lakerSchCloneMaster -cellname cellName -inst instName
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cellname cellName
Specify the new cell name.
-inst instName
Specify the action instance.
Examples
# change the master cell of instance (xinvB) to cell (NewINV)
lakerSchCloneMaster -cellname NewINV -inst xinVB
See Also
Design Browser: Clone Master
Layout Window: SDL > Clone Master

K-2015.06
1355

The lakerSchCollapseAllItem command condenses the content of the
Design Browser pane, showing only the top level of the Design Browser pane.
Syntax
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
# showing only the top level of the Design Browser pane
See Also
Design Browser: Collapse All
lakerSchCompare
The lakerSchCompare command makes a discrepancy report for the
differences between the schematic netlist and layout cell view.
Syntax
lakerSchCompare [-cmpHierarchy 0|1 | -dumpMapInfo 0|1 |
-groupsDis 0|1 | -groupInst 0|1 | -file filename] [-inst
cmp_instance_name_list]
Returns
Discrepancy result if -inst is specified, otherwise returns nothing.
1356

K-2015.06

lakerSchCompare
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cmpHierarchy 0|1

1 : Report the discrepancy for the current design
hierarchy.
0 : Do not report the discrepancy for the current design
hierarchy.
-dumpMapInfo 0|1

1 : Copy the cell mapping and instance mapping
information to the discrepancy report.
0 : Do not copy the cell mapping and instance
mapping information to the discrepancy report.
-file filename
Specify the file to save the discrepancy results.
-groupDis 0|1

1 : Dump the discrepancy information and group the
result by mismatched type.
0 : Do not dump the discrepancy information and
group the result by mismatched type.
-groupInst 0|1

1 : Dump the discrepancy information and group the
results by instance name.
0 : Do not group the results by instance name.
-inst
Return the discrepancy results with the following

format:
cmp_instance_name_list { {cmp_result1 cmp_information1}
{cmp_result2 cmp_information2} ....}
where cmp_result could be:
0 : No compare result
1 : No layout instance
2 : Connection mismatch
4 : Master mismatch
6 : Connection and master mismatch
8 : Value mismatch
Examples
# Save the discrepancy result to the file (diff.rpt)
lakerSchCompare -file diff.rpt

K-2015.06
1357

lakerSchCreate
See Also
Design Browser: Discrepancy
lakerSchCreate
The lakerSchCreate command creates all selected objects in the Design
Browser onto the Layout window pane.
Syntax
lakerSchCreate
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
# create all objects in the Design Browser pane
# onto the Layout window pane
lakerSchSelectGridItem -all
lakerSchCreate
See Also
Design Browser: Create
The lakerSchDeSelectGrid command deselects all objects in the Design
Browser pane.
Syntax
Returns
None
Arguments
None
1358

K-2015.06

Examples
# deselect all objects in the Design Browser pane
The lakerSchECORowPlacer command assigns the position of ECO cells
incrementally.
Syntax
lakerSchECORowPlacer -mode mode [-constFile fileName]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-constFile fileName
-mode mode
Specify the ECO mode.

Valid values: pre, and post (default=pre).
Examples
# Example 1
# Perform pre-silicon placement
lakerSchECORowPlacer -mode pre
# Example 2
# Perform post-silicon placement
lakerSchECORowPlacer -mode post -constFile spare.const
See Also
Design Browser: Placement > ECO Row Placement
The lakerSchExpandAllItem command expands the content of the Design
Browser pane, showing the entire design hierarchy.

K-2015.06
1359

Syntax
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
# Show the entire design hierarchy within the Design Browser
# pane
See Also
Design Browser: Expand All
The lakerSchExpandMFactor command expands the M-factor parameter of
the selected instance. If -autoGroup is set, the expanded instances are
grouped automatically by honoring the user-defined sequential number.
Syntax
lakerSchExpandMFactor -item instanceList -autoGroup 0|1 [seqNum SequentialNumberList]
Returns
None
Arguments
1360
Argument
Description
-autoGroup 0|1
Valid values: Boolean values, 0, and 1.

1 : Enable the Auto Group Expanded Instance
option.
0 : Disable the Auto Group Expanded Instance
option.
-item instanceList
Specify the instances to be expanded, for example:

-item M1 M2.

K-2015.06

lakerSchFind
Argument
Description
-seqNum
SequentialNumberList
Specify the number of each expanded group one by

one.
Examples
# Example 1
lakerSchExpandMFactor -item X1 -autoGroup 1
# Example 2
lakerSchExpandMFactor -item X2 -autoGroup 1 -seqNum {2 3}
# Example 3
lakerSchExpandMFacotr -item X3 -autoGroup 0
See Also
Design Browser: Expand M-Factor
lakerSchFind
The lakerSchFind command pre-selects or selects objects found by the
Find command on the Design Browser pane.
Syntax
lakerSchFind [-findStr input_text | -selItem SelectIt]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-findStr input_text
Specify the search criteria.

If the input value contains wildcard characters, the
matched items are selected.
If the input value does not contain any wildcard
characters, Laker finds the similar item. If the item is
similar to the input, it is set as the pre-select item. If the
item fits the input, it is selected.
-selItem SelectIt
Force the Pre-Select item to be the selected item.

K-2015.06
1361

lakerSchFlattenAll
Examples
# Deselect all objects and clear the pre-selected item
lakerSchFind
# Finding the first matched "mp1" item
lakerSchFind -findStr {mp1}
# Select the pre-selected item
lakerSchFind -findStr {mp1} -selItem 1
# Select the items that match the "mp*"
lakerSchFind -findStr {mp*}
See Also
Design Browser: Find
lakerSchFlattenAll
The lakerSchFlattenAll command flattens all levels for the specified
instances.
Syntax
lakerSchFlattenAll -scope scopeName -insts instList
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-insts instList
-scope scopeName
Specify the active scope.
Examples
# flatten one level for xAnd1, xAnd2 instances
lakerSchFlattenAll -scope gor -insts xAnd1 xAnd2
See Also
dbSchFlatten
lakerSmashObj
Design Browser: Flatten
1362

K-2015.06

lakerSchFlattenLvl
lakerSchFlattenLvl
The lakerSchFlattenLvl command flattens the specified instances to a
specified level.
Syntax
lakerSchFlattenLvl -scope scopeName -insts instList -level
level
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-level level
Specify the flatten level.

-insts instList
-scope scopeName
Examples
# Flatten xAnd1, xAnd2 to level 2
lakerSchFlattenLvl -scope gor -insts xAnd1 xAnd2 -level 2
See Also
dbSchFlatten
lakerSmashObj
lakerSchFlattenOne
The lakerSchFlattenOne command flattens one level for the specified
instances.
Syntax
lakerSchFlattenOne -scope scopeName -insts instList

K-2015.06
1363

lakerSchGroup
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-insts instList
-scope scopeName
Examples
# Flatten one level for xAnd1, xAnd2 instances
lakerSchFlattenOne -scope gor -insts xAnd1 xAnd2
See Also
dbSchFlatten
lakerSmashObj
lakerSchGroup
The lakerSchGroup command creates a user-defined group with selected
instances or creates a stacking MOS group with selected stacking MOS
devices. The group name can be specified by the user or generated by the
system automatically.
Syntax
lakerSchGroup -item instList [-name groupName] -type
groupType
Returns
None
Arguments
1364
Argument
Description
-item instList

separated by spaces, for example: -item M1 M2.
-name groupName
Specify the group name. If it is not specified, the system

generates the group name automatically.

K-2015.06

lakerSchHLObject
Argument
Description
-type groupType

Valid values: user and stacking (default=user).
Examples
# Example 1
lakerSchGroup -item M1 M2 -name G1 -type user
# Example 2
lakerSchGroup -item M1 M2 M3 -name StackMOS_1 -type stacking
See Also
Design Browser: Group
lakerSchHLObject
The lakerSchHLObject command highlights all selected objects in the
Design Browser pane to the Layout window pane.
Syntax
lakerSchHLObject
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
# highlight all objects in the Design Browser pane to
# the Layout window pane
lakerSchHLObject
See Also
Design Browser: Highlight

K-2015.06
1365

lakerSchLayInstMap
lakerSchLayInstMap
The lakerSchLayInstMap command translates hierarchical logical instance
names to physical names and vice versa.
Syntax
lakerSchLayInstMap -libId dbLibId [-mode inst_Net] -name
instance_Scope -fromSource 0|1
Returns
Translate instance name if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-libId dbLibId
The working library.
-mode inst_Net
Specify the translate mode, whether to translate the

instance type or net.
Valid value: instance, and net (default=instance).
-name instance_Scopt
Specify the full scope name of translated instances.
-fromSource 0|1
Valid values: Boolean values, 0, and 1.

1 : Translate the source schematic instance names to
the target layout.
0 : Translate the target layout instance names to the
source schematic.
Examples
# Get the library Id for current cell view
set libId [dbGet -obj [leoGetWndCellViewId] -attr Lib]
# Assume the schematic hierarchy path is assigned to
# variable: instName
set instName {aoi21/I2[2]/N0}
set lName [lakerSchLayInstMap -libId $libId \
-mode instance -name $instName \
-fromSource 1] ; # Get the layout hierarchical path
#
# Return value: aoi21/xLK1/I2[2]/N0
1366

K-2015.06

lakerSchMakeNode
# Assume the layout hierarchy path is assigned to

# variable: instName
set instName {aoi21/xLK1/I2[1]/N0}
set sName [lakerSchLayInstMap -libId $libId \
-mode instance -name $instName \
-fromSource 0] ; # Get the schematic hierarchical path
#
# Return value: aoi21/I2[1]/N0
See Also
lakerSchBroDump
lakerSchBroDrop
lakerProbeShape
lakerSchMakeNode
The lakerSchMakeNode command groups the specified instances to a
schematic hierarchy hard block, and performs the instance mapping.
Syntax
lakerSchMakeNode -cellname cellName [-instname instName] insts instList [-replace 0|1] [-mapLib mappingLib mapCell mappingCell -mapView mappingView [-parameterMap
parameterMapping] [-portMap mappingPort] [-hierInstMap
hierInstMap [-hierNetMap hierNetMap]]]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cellname
cellName
Specify the new cell name for the hard block.
-hierInstMap
hierInstMap
Specify the hierarchical instance mapping.
-hierNetMap
hierNetMap
Specify the hierarchical net mapping.

K-2015.06
1367

lakerSchMakeNode
Argument
Description
-instname
instName
Specify the new instance name.
-insts
instList
Specify the instances to be grouped.
-mapCell
mappingCell
Specify the layout mapping cell.
-mapLib
mappingLib
Specify the layout mapping library (default=current library).
-mapView
mappingView
Specify the layout mapping view.
-parameterMap
parameterMap
Specify the parameter mapping list.

ParameterMap
-portMap
mappingPort
Specify the layout mapping port with the following format:

{ port1:Mapped_port1 ...}
-replace 0|1

1 : Enable the Replace Figures option.
0 : Disable the Replace Figures option.
Examples
# Example 1
# Make the mn11, mn12, mn13 instances to a new hard block NewCell
lakerSchMakeNode -cellname NewCell -instname xNew \
-insts mn11 mn12 mn13
See Also
dbSchMakeNode
lakerMakeCell
Design Browser: Make Node
1368

K-2015.06

The lakerSchPatternReuse command defines the logic information on a
layout instance when it is reused from a cell that makes from other layout
objects with the same layout topology.
Syntax
To invoke the Pattern Reuse feature:
lakerSchPatternReuse -start
To search candidates and dump the matched results:
lakerSchPatternReuse -mode mode -selObj 0|1 [-autoMapInfo
fileName]
To select the pattern cell view:
lakerSchPatternReuse -patternLib patternLibName patternCell patternCellName -patternView patternViewName
To select the layout mapping cell view:
lakerSchPatternReuse -mapLib mapLibName -mapCell
mapCellName -mapView mapViewName
To create and associate the logic/layout data:
lakerSchPatternReuse -realizeToLayout 0|1 [-arrayMode 0|1 cols columnNum -rows rowNum -typeIn 0|1 -colSpace colSpace
-rowSpace rowSpace -rearrangeMaster 0|1] -mapInfo
mapInfoList [-point pointList -orient orientationList instPrefix instNamePrefix -cellPrefix cellNamePrefix] [dumpTip fileName]
To abort the Pattern Reuse feature:
lakerSchPatternReuse -end
Returns
None

K-2015.06
1369

Arguments
1370
Argument
Description
-arrayMode 0|1

-autoMapInfo
fileName
Specify the output file to save the candidate data.
-cellPrefix
cellNamePrefix
Specify the cell name prefix for new nodes.
-colDoubleBack 0|1

-cols colsNum

-colSpace
colSpace

-dumpTip
fileName
Specify the file to save the dumped tips. The default file
name is MismatchTip.log.
-end
Abort this feature.
-flipCol 0|1

-flipRow 0|1

-instPrefix
instNamePrefix
Specify the instance name prefix for new nodes.

K-2015.06

Argument
Description
-mapCell
mapCellName
Specify the cell name of the mapped layout.
-mapInfo
mapInfoList
Specify the format of mapping information as follows:

{ {cellName [instName]}
where:
cellName is the pattern cell name, instName is the
pattern instance name, userDefInstName is the
specified instance, userDefNetName is the specified net,
mapInstName is the instance to be reused, and
mapNetName is the net to be reused.
-mapLib
mapLibName
Specify the library name of the mapped layout.
-mapView
mapViewName
Specify the view name of the mapped layout.
-mode mode

when searching candidates.
topology : No net connection but the topology
relationship is considered when searching candidates.
-orient
orientationList
Specify the orientation list with the following format: { R0

R0 R90 R180 ... }
-patternCell
patternCellName
Specify the cell name of the pattern cell.
-patternLib
patternLibName
Specify the library name of the pattern cell.
-patternView
patternViewName
Specify the view name of the pattern cell.

K-2015.06
1371

Argument
Description
-point pointList
Specify a point list of coordinates to paste the mapping

object. For example, you need to fill in three coordinates in
the pointList when there are three mapping objects. Only
one point value is needed if -arrayMode is specified. The
coordinate is reset to (0,0) when the point value is not
specified.
-realizeToLayout 1

1 : Realize the selected candidates to the layout.
0 : Do not realize the selected candidates to the layout.
-rearrangeMaster
0|1

-rowDoubleBack 0|1 Valid values: Boolean values, 0 and 1 (default=0).

1372
-rows rowsNum

-rowSpace
rowSpace

spacing.
-selObj 0|1

0 : Disable the Selected Objects option
-start
Start this feature.
-typeIn 0|1

1 : Specify the x, y spacing between objects if copying
them with array mode.
0 : Do not specify the x, y spacing between objects if

K-2015.06

Examples
lakerSchPatternReuse -start
lakerSchPatternReuse -mode topology -selObj 1 -autoMapInfo
topology.out
lakerSchPatternReuse -realizeToLayout 1 -arrayMode 1 -cols 1 -rows
1 \
-typeIn 1 -colSpace 3.1 -rowSpace 13.954 -DoubleBackForRows 1 \
-DoubleBackForColumns 0 -FlipAllRows 0 -FlipAllColumns 0 \
-rearrangeMaster 0 -mapInfo { { { {NewInstName} {NewCellName} } \
{ {M28} {M27} {M26} {M25} {M35} } } } -point (-2.892,28.9) \
-orient { R0 } -instPrefix xLK -cellPrefix PatternCell_LK
lakerSchPatternReuse -realizeToLayout 1 -arrayMode 0 -mapInfo \
{ { { {xPT0} {NewCell0} } { {I127} {I131} {I130} {I129} } } \
{ { {xPT1} {NewCell1} } { {I128} {I132} {I133} {I134} } } \
{ { {} {} } { {I135} {I141} {I140} {I139} } } { { {} {} } \
{{I136} {I142} {I143} {I144} } } { { {} {} } { {I137} {I147} \
{I146} {I145} } } { { {} {} } { {I138} {I148} {I149} {I150} } } } \
-point (62.254,26.792) (71.529,61.014) (52.499,34.788) \
(77.126,52.379) (73.608,10.001) (42.264,7.922) \
-orient { R0 R90 R180 R270 R0 R90 } -instPrefix xLK \
-cellPrefix PatternCell_LK
lakerSchPatternReuse -end
See Also
lakerPatternReuse
Design Browser: Pattern Reuse
Layout Window: SDL > Pattern Reuse
The lakerSchRecoverMFactor command reverts the expanded instances
back to the original instances.
Syntax
lakerSchRecoverMFactor [-item instanceList]
Returns
None

K-2015.06
1373

lakerSchRowPlacer
Arguments
Argument
Description
-item instanceList
Specify the instances to be recovered, for example: -item

M1::0 M2::3.
When not specified, the selected instances from the Design
Browser pane is recovered.
Examples
# Expand M-Factor of X1( m=4) as X1::0, X1::1, X1::2, X1::3
# Try to recover expanded instances X1::0, X1::1, X1::2,
# X1::3 to X1.
# Example 1
lakserSchSelectGridItem -item X1::0
# Example 2
lakerSchRecoverMFactor -item X1::0
See Also
Design Browser: Recover M-Factor
lakerSchRowPlacer
The lakerSchRowPlacer command analyzes and gives a legal location for
each selected cell within user-defined rows.
Syntax
lakerSchRowPlacer -ruleSet ruleName -point (x0,y0) [traversedist dist] [-align alignment] [-honorSoftPin 0|1]
[-constFile fileName]
Returns
None
1374

K-2015.06

Arguments
Argument
Description
-align alignment
Specify the alignment of the instance placement that is

related to the current row area. This argument is valid
only if the spacing value is 0.
Valid values: left, center, and right (default=left).
-constFile fileName
-honorSoftPin 0|1

1 : Consider soft pins during placement.
0 : Ignore soft pins during placement.
-point (x0,y0)
Specify the location of the row area for placement.

while y0 specifies the one for the y coordinate point.
-ruleSet ruleName
Specify the rule set for routing congestion analysis.
-traversedist dist
Specify the traversing distance.

Examples
# Example 1
lakerSchRowPlacer -ruleSet default -point (148.2,12.99)
# Example 2
lakerSchRowPlacer -ruleSet default -point (151.105,-4.305) \
-traversedist 7.349
See Also
The lakerSchSelectGridItem command selects the specified objects in
Syntax
lakerSchSelectGridItem [-all | -item itemList]

K-2015.06
1375

Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-all
Select all objects in the Design Browser pane.
-item itemList
Specify the name list to select.
Examples
# select all objects in the Design Browser pane
# select objects (mp1,mp2) in the Design Browser pane
lakerSchSelectGridItem -item mp1 mp2
See Also
Design Hierarchy Browser: Select All
The lakerSchSelectTreeNode command changes the scope of the source
tree in the Design Browser pane.
Syntax
lakerSchSelectTreeNode -scope scopeName
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-scope scopeName
Specify the scope to be changed in the Design Browser

pane.
Examples
# change the scope of the source tree to CPU.x_iALU
lakerSchSelectTreeNode -scope CPU.x_iALU
1376

K-2015.06

The lakerSchSetActiveTree command changes the active tree in the
Syntax
lakerSchSetActiveTree -wnd activeWnd
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-wnd activeWnd
Change the active window.

Valid values: source and object.
Examples
# change the active tree to source
lakerSchSetActiveTree -wnd source
lakerSchSummary
The lakerSchSummary command shows the summary of the current cell
view, or summarizes all master cell view of the selected instances and makes a
total summary of them.
Syntax
lakerSchSummary [-mode mode] [-file file]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file file
Specify a file name to save the log information of the summary

contents. By default, this information is saved to the
lakerSchSummary.log file under the lakerLog directory.

K-2015.06
1377

lakerSchTopology
Argument
Description
-mode mode
Specify the display mode of the summary.

Valid values: cell and select (default=cell).
cell: Show the current cell view information in the summary.
select: Show the information of all master cell views of the
selected instances in the summary.
Examples
# save the current cell view information to
# file (lakerSchSum3.log) in current working directory
lakerSchSummary -mode cell -file lakerSchSum3.log
See Also
Design Browser: Summary
lakerSchTopology
The lakerSchTopology command creates objects with their topology
information, with which you can easily recognize the corresponding logic
instances.
If -xSpacing and -ySpacing are not specified, the topology creation is
executed with the Auto mode.
Syntax
lakerSchTopology [-xSpacing nXSpace -ySpacing nYSpace]
Returns
None
Arguments
1378
Argument
Description
-xSpacing nXSpace
Specify the spacing between two instances in the

X-axis direction.
-ySpacing nYSpace
Specify the spacing between two instances in the

Y-axis direction.

K-2015.06

lakerSchUngroup
Examples
# Example 1
lakerSchSelectGridItem -item xinvA xinvC xsc xinvB/mnm xinvB/mpm
lakerSchBroDrag
lakerSchTopology
# Example 2
lakerSchTopology -xSpacing 1.2 -ySpacing 0.45
See Also
Design Browser: Placement > Topology Creation
lakerSchUngroup
The lakerSchUngroup command cancels the grouping information of the
specified instances.
Syntax
lakerSchUngroup -item itemList
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-item itemList
Specify the name list to cancel the grouping information.
Examples
# cancel the mn11, mn12 group information
lakerSchUngroup -item mn11 mn12
See Also
Design Browser: Ungroup

K-2015.06
1379

lakerSchUngroup
1380

K-2015.06
11
11
User Interface (GUI) which applied within the Matching Device Creator window
(invoked by the Matching Creator command in the Design Browser pane).
lakerCreateMatch
lakerMchAdd
lakerMchAddDummy
lakerMchAddPattern
lakerMchAddPeriDummy
lakerMchAdjustTrack
lakerMchAlignRowTop
lakerMchAlignRowCenter
lakerMchAlignRowBottom
lakerMchAreaZoom
lakerMchAttribute
lakerMchChainSerialRes
lakerMchChangeOrient
lakerMchCheck
lakerMchClear
lakerMchClearRuler
lakerMchCompactSpace

K-2015.06
1381
Chapter 11: Matching Device Creator
1382
lakerMchDelete
lakerMchDeletePattern
lakerMchDeSelDevice
lakerMchDeSelect
lakerMchDistance
lakerMchDrag
lakerMchDrop
lakerMchExportPattern
lakerMchFillBlack
lakerMchFillDiagonal
lakerMchFlip
lakerMchImportPattern
lakerMchInsAColGrid
lakerMchInsAGrid
lakerMchLastView
lakerMchMaxViewLevel
lakerMchMerge
lakerMchMinViewLevel
lakerMchMode
lakerMchMoveWire
lakerMchNormal
lakerMchOptimizeOD
lakerMchPanDown
lakerMchPanLeft
lakerMchPanRight
lakerMchPanUp
lakerMchPreference
lakerMchPreview
lakerMchQuickInsert

K-2015.06
lakerMchRealize
lakerMchRechainConnection
lakerMchRedo
lakerMchRedraw
lakerMchRenamePattern
lakerMchRefUnit
lakerMchRepeatNum
lakerMchRepeatPat
lakerMchRoute
lakerMchSelDevice
lakerMchSelect
lakerMchSelectAll
lakerMchSelEmpty
lakerMchSelPattern
lakerMchSetDefaultRouteRule
lakerMchSetRemNum
lakerMchSetTopology
lakerMchSetUnitNum
lakerMchShareOD
lakerMchSize
lakerMchSpace
lakerMchSplit
lakerMchSwapSD
lakerMchUndo
lakerMchUnsetFingerGroup
lakerMchViewLevelDec
lakerMchViewLevelInc
lakerMchXMirror
lakerMchYMirror

K-2015.06
1383

lakerCreateMatch
lakerMchZoomAll
lakerMchZoomIn
lakerMchZoomOut
lakerQueryMatch
lakerSchMatch
mchGet
lakerCreateMatch
The lakerCreateMatch command makes the arrangement of symmetrical
patterns for analog circuits and creates the associated layout in the Layout
window pane without invoking the Matching Device Creator window.
This command can also be used to preview the layout before realization, realize
the device placement to the layout, and close the standalone preview window.
Syntax
Syntax 1:
lakerCreateMatch -getSelected logic [-repeatRow rowNum] [repeatCol colNum] [-xSpacing xSpacing] [-ySpacing
ySpacing | {ySpacing1 ySpacing2 ... ySpacingn}] [loadConstraint 0|1] [-unsetFingerGroupOption 0|1] [enableAbutDevice 0|1] [-abutSameDevice 0|1] [abutDiffDevice 0|1] [-abutDiffWidth 0|1] [-patternName
patternName] [-quickFormat quickFormat] [quickFormatOptOD 0|1] [-setSwappedPort none|all|{pos
{{nRow1 nCol1} {nRow2 nCol2} ... {nRown nColn}} | {list
gridList}}] | [-xBoundaryInfo {layer purpose}] | [yBoundaryInfo {layer purpose}] [-repeatPatRow rowNum] [repeatPatCol colNum] [-repeatPatSeq Z0|Z1] [-abut
all|{pos {{nRow1 nCol1} {nRow2 nCol2} ... {nRown nColn}}
| {list abutList}}] [-unabut all|{pos {{nRow1 nCol1}
{nRow2 nCol2} ... {nRown nColn}} | {list unabutList}}]
[-createPeriDummy 0|1 -periDummyOption [{mode
ring|side}] [{ring nRing}] [{left nLeft}] [{right
nRight}] [{top nTop}] [{bottom nBottom}] [{odSharing
0|1}] [{length max|min}] [{width max|min}] [{nf
one|adj|OdIsland}]] [-enableSpacingProc 0|1] [spacingProcName newSpacingProcName] [-enablePostProc
1384

K-2015.06

lakerCreateMatch
0|1] [-postProcName newPostProcName] [-param {{param1

value1} {param2 value2} ... {paramn valuen}}] [enableTransitionRule 0|1]
Syntax 2:
lakerCreateMatch -preview |-close | -realize
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-abut all | {pos {{nRow1

nCol1} {nRow2 nCol2}
{nRown nColn}}} |
{list abutList}
Specify the target devices to be abutted. Valid values:
all: Try to abut all devices.

{pos {nRow1 nCol1}{nRow2 nCol2}
{nRown nColn}}: Abut the device at {nRow1
nCol1} and {nRow1 nCol1+1}, {nRow2
nCol2} and {nRow2 nCol2+1}.
{list abutList}: Specify the expected abut
status by order from left to right, and then from top
to bottom with series 0 and 1. For example, {{1 0
1}{1 0 1}}.
-abutDiffDevice 0|1

1 : Allow abutment for different devices when
-enableAbutDevice 1 is set.
0 : Disallow abutment for different devices when
-abutDiffWidth 0|1

1 : Allow abutment for devices with a different width
when -enableAbutDevice 1 is set.
0 : Disallow abutment for devices with a different width
when -enableAbutDevice 1 is set.
-abutSameDevice 0|1

1 : Allow abutment for the same device when
0 : Disallow abutment for the same device when
-close
Close the standalone Matching Device Creator

window.

K-2015.06
1385

lakerCreateMatch
Argument
Description
-createPeriDummy 0|1

1 : Add peripheral dummy devices.
0 : Do not add peripheral dummy devices.
-enableAbutDevice 0|1

1 : Allow device abutment.
0 : Disallow device abutment.
-enablePostProc 0|1

1 : Enable the post processing procedure.
0 : Apply the settings in the SDL Preferences form.
-enableSpacingProc 0|1

1 : Enable the spacing procedure for reference.
0 : Apply the settings in the SDL Preferences form.
-enableTransitionRule 0|1

1 : Enable the transition rule for MOS devices only.
0 : Apply the transition rule for all devices.
-getSelected logic
Based on the selected set of the Design Browser

pane.
-loadConstraint 0|1
Only work for -getSelected logic.

1 : Load constraints.
0 : Do not load constraints.
-param {{param1
value1}{param2 value2}...}
Specify the parameter name and value for all devices

to be assigned and callback triggered after created.
-patternName
patternName
Specify the placement with a matching pattern.
-periDummyOption [{mode
Specify the options for adding peripheral dummy
ring|side}] [{ring nRing}] [{left devices.
nLeft}] [{right nRight}] [{top
nTop}] [{bottom nBottom}]
[{odSharing 0|1}] [{length
max|min}] [{width max|min}]
[{nf one|adj|odIsland}]]
1386

K-2015.06

lakerCreateMatch
Argument
Description
-postProcName
newPostProcName
Specify the name of the post processing procedure.

When not specified, apply the settings in the SDL
Preferences form.
-preview
Shows a standalone Matching Device Creator window

with the preview mode.
-quickFormat quickFormat
Specify the placement with a quick format string.
-quickFormatOptOD 0|1
This argument works when the placement is specified

with -quickFormat.
1 : Apply OD sharing.
0 : Do not apply OD sharing.
-realize
Invoke the Paste feature to copy and paste the layout

from the standalone Matching Device Creator window
to the Layout window pane.
-repeatCol colNum
Specify the number of columns to be repeated.

-repeatPatCol colNum
Specify the number of columns to be repeated for the

selected pattern.
-repeatPatRow rowNum
Specify the number of rows to be repeated for the

selected pattern.
-repeatPatSeq Z0|Z1
Specify the placement sequence to repeat the pattern.

Valid values: Z0 and Z1 (default=Z0).
-repeatRow rowNum

K-2015.06
Z0 : Repeat the matching pattern from left to right,

and then from top to bottom.
Z1 : Repeat the matching pattern from top to
bottom, and then from left to right.
Specify the number of rows to be repeated.

1387

lakerCreateMatch
Argument
Description
-setSwappedPort none |
all | {pos {{nRow1 nCol1}
{nRow2 nCol2} {nRown
nColn}} | {list gridList}
Specify the target devices to be port-swapped. Valid

values:
none: Ports of all devices are not swappable.

all: Ports of all devices are swappable.
{nRown nColn}}: Swap ports for the device at
{nRow1 nCol1} and {nRow1 nCol1+1},
{nRow2 nCol2} and {nRow2 nCol2+1}.
{list gridList}: Specify the expected portswapped status by order from left to right, and then
from top to bottom with series 0 and 1. For example,
{{0 1 0}{0 1 0}} becomes {{S-D, D-S, SD}{S-D, D-S, S-D}}.
-spacingProcName
newSpacingProcName
Specify the name of the spacing procedure. When not

specified, apply the settings in the SDL Preferences
form.
-unabut all | {pos {{nRow1

nCol1} {nRow2 nCol2}
{nRown nColn}}} |
{list abutList}
Specify the target devices to be unabutted. Valid

values:
all: Try to unabut all devices.

{nRown nColn}}: Unabut the device at {nRow1
nCol1} and {nRow1 nCol1+1}, {nRow2
nCol2} and {nRow2 nCol2+1}.
{list abutList}: Specify the expected unabut
status by order from left to right, and then from top
to bottom with series 0 and 1. For example, {{0 1
0}{0 1 0}}.
-unsetFingerGroupOption 0|1 Valid values: Boolean values, 0 and 1.

1 : Override the Unset Finger Group option setting in
the SDL Preferences form.
0 : Apply the Unset Finger Group option setting in the
SDL Preferences form.
1388

K-2015.06

lakerCreateMatch
Argument
Description
-xBoundaryInfo {layer
purpose}
Specify the user-defined boundary layer/purpose and

spacing in X-axis.
When specified, the Matching Device Creator uses
this referenced layer/purpose to do placement instead
of using the Boundary_Info settings defined in the
model map file sections [DEVICE_MOS] or
[DEVICE_RES].
This arguments is only valid for device MOS or device
resistors.
-xSpacing xSpacing
Specify the horizontal spacing between boundary

layers.
-yBoundaryInfo {layer
purpose}
Specify the user-defined boundary layer/purpose and

spacing in Y-axis.
When specified, for FinFET design, the Matching
Device Creator uses this referenced layer/purpose to
do placement instead of using the boundary settings in
the technology file section tfWideAlignment.
For non-FinFET design, the Matching Device Creator
uses this referenced layer/purpose to do placement
instead of using the Boundary_Info settings defined
in the model map file sections [DEVICE_MOS] or
[DEVICE_RES].
This arguments is only valid for device MOS or device
resistors.
-ySpacing ySpacing |
{ySpacing1 ySpacing2 ...
ySpacingn}

K-2015.06
Specify the vertical spacing between boundary layers.

1389

lakerMchAdd
Examples
# Example 1
# See Figure 1 for reference
lakerCreareMatch -getSelected logic -xSpacing 2.2 \
-ySpacing 1.8 -createGuardRing 0 -loadConstraint 0 \
-unsetFingerGroupOption 1 -enableAbutDevice 0 \
-quickFormat AB_Ad -quickFormatOptOD 1 -unabut all \
-createPeriDummy 1 -periDummyOption \
{{mode ring} {ring 1} {odSharing 0}} \
-enableSpacingProc 1 -spacingProcNamne SpacingProc1 \
-enablePostProc 1 -postProcName PostProc1 \
-param {{DummyPoly 2}{extLayerNum 1}} -enableTransitionRule 0
# Example 2
lakerCreateMatch -preview
lakerCreateMatch -close
lakerCreateMatch -realize
See Also
Figure 1
Figure for Example 1
lakerMchAdd
The lakerMchAdd command adds pattern from the Device List to the
matching window pane.
Syntax
lakerMchAdd [-inst instName1 -pos (x1,y1) (x2,y2)]
Returns
None
1390

K-2015.06

lakerMchAddDummy
Arguments
Argument
Description
-inst instName1
Specify the selected pattern.
-pos (x1,y1) (x2,y2)
Specify the position of the pattern.
Examples
lakerMchAdd
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Add
lakerMchAddDummy
The lakerMchAddDummy command adds dummy MOS devices, dummy
resistors, or dummy capacitors.
Syntax
lakerMchAddDummy [-odSharing 0|1] [-length type] [-width
type]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-length type
Specify the gate length type for dummy MOS devices.

Valid values: adjMax, adjMin, min, and {userDef
LengthValue}. The default is adjMax.
When {userDef LengthValue} is used, the
LengthValue must be a floating number, greater than or
equal to the min value.
-odSharing 0|1

K-2015.06

1 : Share the OD with adjacent MOS devices when
adding a dummy MOS device.
0 : Do not share the OD with adjacent MOS devices when
1391

lakerMchAddPattern
Argument
Description
-width type
Specify the gate width type for dummy MOS devices.

Valid values: adjMax, adjMin, min, and {userDef
WidthValue}. The default is adjMax. When {userDef
WidthValue} is used, the WidthValue must be a
floating number, greater than or equal to the min value.
Examples
# Example 1
# Add dummy MOS devices with adjMax length and adjMin width,
# and share OD with adjacent MOS devices
lakerMchAddDummy -odSharing 1 -length adjMax -width adjMin
# Example 2
# Add dummy MOS devices with user-defined length 1.2
# and user-defined width 0.6,
# and do not share OD with adjacent MOS devices
lakerMchAddDummy -odSharing 0 -length {userDef 1.2} \
-width {userDef 0.6}
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Add Dummy
lakerMchAddPattern
The lakerMchAddPattern command adds a user-defined pattern to the
pattern list.
Syntax
lakerMchAddPattern [-name patternName]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-name patternName
If specified, the user-defined pattern is saved with userspecified name.

If not specified, the pattern is saved with a systemgenerated name.
1392

K-2015.06

Examples
# Add a new pattern, test
lakerMchAddPattern -name test
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Pattern > Add
The lakerMchAddPeriDummy command creates peripheral dummy devices.
Syntax
lakerMchAddPeriDummy [[-ring num] | [-left num -right num top num -bottom num]] [-ODSharing 0|1] [-length type] [width type] [-nf one|adj]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-left num -right num

-top num -bottom num
Specify the size of dummy devices by giving the -left

and -right values for the number of columns, and the
-top and -bottom values for the number of rows.
-length type
Specify the gate length type.

Valid values: adjMax and adjMin (default=adjMax).
-nf one|adj
Specify the number of fingers.

Valid values: one and adj (default=one).
-ODSharing 0|1

1 : Share the OD with adjacent MOS devices.
0 : Do not share the OD with adjacent MOS devices.
-ring num
Specify the number of rings.

-width type
Specify the gate width type for dummy devices.

Valid values: adjMax and adjMin (default=adjMax).

K-2015.06
1393

lakerMchAdjustTrack
Examples
# Example 1
# Add one dummy ring around the selected bbox;
# share the OD area for dummy without referencing any target
lakerMchAddPeriDummy -ring 1 -ODSharing 1 -length adjMax \
-width adjMax
# Example 2
# Add one dummy ring around the selected bbox; share the OD
# area for dummy without a referenced target; the finger
# number of peripheral dummy is 1
lakerMchAddPeriDummy -ring 1 -ODSharing 1 -length adjMax \
-width adjMax -nf one
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Add Peripheral Dummy
lakerMchAdjustTrack
The lakerMchAdjustTrack command adjust tracks of the selected channel
in the matching window pane.
Syntax
lakerMchAdjustTrack [-strip StripNum] [-pin PinNum] [trackregion TrackRegionNum]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-pin PinNum
Specify the pin number.
-strip StripNum
Specify the number of strips.
-trackregion TrackRegionNum
Specify the track region number.
Examples
lakerMchAdjustTrack -strip 1 -pin 2 -trackregion 7
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Router
1394

K-2015.06

lakerMchAlignRowTop
lakerMchAlignRowTop
The lakerMchAlignRowTop command places all MOS devices, Tcl PCells,
or PyCells in the selected row/column to align the top of the row or the left of
the column.
Syntax
lakerMchAlignRowTop
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
# Example 1
# Change the row alignment to top for row 1
lakerMchSelect -pos (1,0)
lakerMchAlignRowTop
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Align Row > Top, Align Column > Left
The lakerMchAlignRowCenter command places all MOS devices, Tcl
PCells, or PyCells in the selected row/column to align the center of the row/
column.
Syntax
Returns
None
Arguments
None

K-2015.06
1395

Examples
# Example 1
# Change the row alignment to center for row 1
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Align Row > Center, Align Column > Center
The lakerMchAlignRowBottom command places all MOS devices, Tcl
PCells, or PyCells in the selected row/column to align the bottom of the row or
the right of the column.
Syntax
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
# Example 1
# Change the row alignment to bottom for row 1
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Align Row > Bottom, Align Column > Right
lakerMchAreaZoom
The lakerMchAreaZoom command allows you to quickly view at a desired
area in the matching window pane by dragging the right mouse button over that
area.
1396

K-2015.06

lakerMchAttribute
Syntax
lakerMchAreaZoom -point (x1,y1) (x2,y2)
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
(x1,y1) specifies the lower left point of zoomIn area

Examples
lakerMchAreaZoom -point (10,10) (40,40)
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Mouse Operations
lakerMchAttribute
The lakerMchAttribute command allows you to query or modify the
attribute of the selected wire.
Syntax
lakerMchAttribute [-crossSDViaOn crossSDViaOnType]
[-B2G {B2G spacing value string}]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-B2G
{B2G spacing value string}
Specify the distance between horizontal

backbone wires and gates (OD).
Valid value: a constant or an expression.
If -B2G AUTO is specified, a system-assigned
value is used.

K-2015.06
1397

Argument
Description
-crossSDViaOn
crossSDViaOnType
Specify the cross type of S/D vias.

Valid values: channel and pin
(default=channel).
Examples
lakerMchAttribute -crossSDViaOn pin
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Router > Attribute
The lakerMchChainSerialRes command places serial resistors in a certain
sequence and makes the resistor chain has the minimum routing resource.
Syntax
lakerMchChainSerialRes -pattern placePattern
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-pattern placePattern
Specify the placement pattern for chain serial resistors.

Valid values: S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, S8, Z1, Z2, Z3,
Z4, Z5, Z6, Z7, and Z8 (default=S1).
Examples
lakerMchChainSerialRes -pattern S1
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Chain Serial Resistor
1398

K-2015.06

The lakerMchChangeOrient command changes the placement orientation
of transistors or instances.
Syntax
lakerMchChangeOrient -orient orient
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-orient orient
Specify the placement orientation of transistors and/or

instances.
Valid values: vertical and horizontal
(default=vertical).
Examples
lakerMchChangeOrient -orient vertical
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Cell > Change Placement Orientation
lakerMchCheck
The lakerMchCheck command checks the matching rules for the pattern
arrangment before realization.
Syntax
lakerMchCheck
Returns
None
Arguments
None

K-2015.06
1399

lakerMchClear
Examples
lakerMchCheck
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Cell > Check
lakerMchClear
The lakerMchClear command clears up the pattern arrangment in the
Syntax
lakerMchClear
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
lakerMchClear
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Delete All
lakerMchClearRuler
The lakerMchClearRuler command clears all rulers in the preview window
pane.
Syntax
lakerMchClearRuler
Returns
None
Arguments
None
1400

K-2015.06

Examples
# Example 1
# Clear all rulers
lakerMchClearRuler
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Query > Clear Ruler
The lakerMchCompactSpace command enables or disables the space
compaction.
Syntax
lakerMchCompactSpace -mode 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode 0|1

1 : Enable the space compaction after device realization.
0 : Disable the space compaction.
Examples
# Compact the matching layout
lakerMchCompactSpace -mode 1
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Cell > Compact Space
lakerMchDelete
The lakerMchDelete command deletes one or more than one pattern type
from the matching window pane.

K-2015.06
1401

Syntax
lakerMchDelete [-pos (x1,y1) (x2,y2) (x3,y3)]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-pos (x1,y1) (x2,y2) (x3,y3)
Examples
lakerMchDelete -pos (0,0) (0,1) (1,1)
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Delete
The lakerMchDeletePattern command removes a user-defined pattern
from the pattern list.
Syntax
lakerMchDeletePattern [-name patternName]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-name patternName
If specified, the user-defined pattern is deleted.

Reserved patterns are not deleted.
If not specified, no pattern is deleted.
Examples
# Example 1
# Delete the pattern named test
lakerMchDeletePattern -name test
1402

K-2015.06

lakerMchDeSelDevice
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Pattern > Delete
lakerMchDeSelDevice
The lakerMchDeSelDevice command deselects the Device List on the left.
Syntax
lakerMchDeSelDevice
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
lakerMchDeSelDevice
lakerMchDeSelect
The lakerMchDeSelect command deselects the content of the matching
window pane on the right.
Syntax
lakerMchDeSelect
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
lakerMchDeSelect

K-2015.06
1403

lakerMchDistance
lakerMchDistance
The lakerMchDistance command creates a minimum distance ruler in the
preview window pane.
Syntax
lakerMchDistance -point (x1,y1)(x2,y2)
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-point (x1, y1) (x2, y2)

Examples
lakerMchDistance -point (100, 100) (200,200)
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Query > Distance
lakerMchDrag
The lakerMchDrag command emulates the action of a click and hold on the
middle mouse button when using a two-button mouse.
Syntax
lakerMchDrag
Returns
None
Arguments
None
1404

K-2015.06

lakerMchDrop
Examples
# Example 1
# Select the objects and drag
lakerMchSelect -pos (0,0) (1,0)
lakerMchDrag
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Drag
lakerMchDrop
The lakerMchDrop command emulates the action of a click and hold on the
middle mouse button when using a two-button mouse.
The dragged objects are moved by the click-left operation. The dragged objects
are copied if the Shift-click-left operation is used.
Syntax
lakerMchDrop -RowOffset RowOffset -ColOffset ColOffset [copy 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-ColOffset ColOffset
Specify the offset (for columns) between the new

position and the original position.
-copy 0|1

1 : Copy the dragged objects.
0 : Move the dragged objects only.
-RowOffset RowOffset
Specify the offset (for rows) between the new position

and the original position.

K-2015.06
1405

Examples
# Example 1
# Move the dragged objects
lakerMchDrag
lakerMchDrop -RowOffset 1 -ColOffset 2
# Example 2
# Copy the dragged objects
lakerMchDrag
lakerMchDrop -RowOffset 1 -ColOffset 2 -copy 1
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Drop
The lakerMchExportPattern command exports all matching patterns in
the pattern list to a matching pattern file (*.match).
Syntax
lakerMchExportPattern -file matchFile [-setUserMatchFile]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file matchFile
Specify the filename of the output file.
-setUserMatchFile
Set the output file to setUserMatchFile in the

laker.rc resource file.
Examples
lakerMchExportPattern -file myPatternFile -setUserMatchFile
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Pattern > Export
1406

K-2015.06

lakerMchFillBlack
lakerMchFillBlack
The lakerMchFillBlack command replaces existing patterns in a selected
area with raster scan order by filling the patterns with one of the following
options: Fill Chessboard with Black First or Fill Chessboard with White
First.
Syntax
lakerMchFillBlack -blackStart 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-blackStart 0|1

1 : Fill chessboard with black first.
0 : Fill chessboard with white first.
Examples
lakerMchFillBlack
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Fill Chessboard
The lakerMchFillDiagonal command replaces existing patterns in a
selected area by filling the patterns from top left to bottom right or from bottom
left to top right.
Syntax
lakerMchFillDiagonal -topDown 0|1
Returns
None

K-2015.06
1407

lakerMchFlip
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topDown 0|1

1 : Fill diagonal from top left to bottom right.
0 : Fill diagonal from bottom left to top right.
Examples
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Fill Diagonal
lakerMchFlip
The lakerMchFlip command turns selected patterns in the same row (if
there are vertically placed) into a different position.
Syntax
lakerMchFlip
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
lakerMchSelect -pos (0,1) (0,2) (0,3)
lakerMchFlip
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Flip
lakerMchImportPattern
The lakerMchImportPattern command imports all matching patterns to
the pattern list from a matching pattern file (*.match).
1408

K-2015.06

lakerMchInsAColGrid
Syntax
lakerMchImportPattern -file matchFile [-setUserMatchFile]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file matchFile
Specify the filename of input file.
-setUserMatchFile
Set the input file to setUserMatchFile in the laker.rc

resource file.
Examples
lakerMchImportPattern -file myPatternFile -setUserMatchFile
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Pattern > Import
lakerMchInsAColGrid
The lakerMchInsAColGrid command inserts a new column of grid boxes.
Syntax
lakerMchInsAColGrid
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
lakerMchInsAColGrid
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Insert

K-2015.06
1409

lakerMchInsAGrid
lakerMchInsAGrid
The lakerMchInsAGrid command inserts a grid box.
Syntax
lakerMchInsAGrid
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
lakerMchInsAGrid
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Insert
lakerMchLastView
The lakerMchLastView command shows the previous view that displayed in
the matching window pane (normal view) or the preview window pane (preview
mode).
Syntax
lakerMchLastView
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
lakerMchLastView
See Also
Matching Device Creator: View > Last View
1410

K-2015.06

The lakerMchMaxViewLevel command sets the view level to maximum (49)
to view all levels of the hierarchial design in the preview window pane.
Syntax
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
See Also
Matching Device Creator: View > Max View Level
lakerMchMerge
The lakerMchMerge command merges OD by the select set. The OD within
the select set is merged as possible. This command does not apply on the OD
in a finger group.
Syntax
lakerMchMerge
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
lakerMchMerge
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Merge
K-2015.06
1411

The lakerMchMinViewLevel command sets the view level to the minimum
(0) to view the top level of the hierarchial design in the preview window pane.
Syntax
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
# set the view level to 0
See Also
Matching Device Creator: View > Min View Level
lakerMchMode
The lakerMchMode command enables the Remainder mode or the Topology
mode.
Syntax
lakerMchMode -mode mode
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode mode
Specify the matching mode.

Valid values: remainder and topology.
1412
remainder : Enable the Remaidner mode.

topology : Enable the Topology mode.

K-2015.06

lakerMchMoveWire
Examples
# Enable remainder mode
lakerMchMode -mode remainder
lakerMchMoveWire
The lakerMchMoveWire command moves wires to another channel in the
Syntax
lakerMchMoveWire [-strip StripNum] [-pin PinNum] [-channel
ChannelNum]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-channel ChannelNum
Specify the channel number.
-pin PinNum
Specify the pin number.
-strip StripNum
Specify the number of strips.
Examples
lakerMchMoveWire -strip 1 -pin 2 -channel 1
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Router
lakerMchNormal
The lakerMchNormal command switches to the symbol view mode, showing
the content of the matching window pane.
Syntax
lakerMchNormal

K-2015.06
1413

lakerMchOptimizeOD
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
lakerMchNormal
See Also
Matching Device Creator: View > Normal
lakerMchOptimizeOD
The lakerMchOptimizeOD command optimizes OD sharing by mirroring or
merging placed transistors that are selected in grids.
Syntax
lakerMchOptimizeOD
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
lakerMchOptimizeOD
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Optimize OD Sharing
lakerMchPanDown
The lakerMchPanDown command pans down of the current view area by the
specified ratio.
Syntax
lakerMchPanDown -ratio pan_ratio
1414

K-2015.06

lakerMchPanLeft
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-ratio pan_ratio
Specify the ratio value.

Examples
lakerMchPanDown
See Also
lakerMchPanLeft
The lakerMchPanLeft command pans to the left of the current view area by
the specified ratio.
Syntax
lakerMchPanLeft -ratio pan_ratio
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-ratio pan_ratio

Examples
lakerMchPanLeft
See Also

K-2015.06
1415

lakerMchPanRight
lakerMchPanRight
The lakerMchPanRight command pans to the left of the current view area by
the specified ratio.
Syntax
lakerMchPanRight -ratio pan_ratio
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-ratio pan_ratio

Examples
lakerMchPanRight
See Also
lakerMchPanUp
The lakerMchPanUp command pans up of the current view area by the
specified ratio.
Syntax
lakerMchPanUp -ratio pan_ratio
Returns
None
Arguments
1416
Argument
Description
-ratio pan_ratio


K-2015.06

lakerMchPreference
Examples
lakerMchPanUp
See Also
lakerMchPreference
The lakerMchPreference command sets up user preferences for the
creation of dummy MOS devices, dummy resistors, or dummy capacitors.
Syntax
lakerMchPreference [-dummyNMOSGateNet 0|1] [dummyPMOSGateNet 0|1] [-dummyNMOSSDNet 0|1] [dummyNMOSSDNetName netname] [-dummyPMOSSDNet 0|1] [dummyPMOSSDNetName netname] [-autoTxDummy 0|1] [dummyTxSingleGateNum [natural int]] [dummyTxMultipleGateNum [natural int]] [-odSharing 0|1]
[-dummyTxGateLength LengthType] [-dummyTxGateWidth
WidthType] [-shortAllResDummy 0|1] [-dummyResNetName
netname] [-autoResDummy 0|1] [-dummyResSegNum [natural
int]] [-ResContType ResContType] [-enableDummyResWidth
0|1] [-dummyResWidth [float]] [-shortAllCapDummy 0|1] [dummyCapNetName netname] [-autoCapDummy 0|1] [createDummyCapByValue 0|1] [-dummyCapValue [float]] [dummyCapWidth [float]] [-horOrientMode 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-autoCapDummy 0|1

1 : Automatically add dummy capacitors when
initializing the matching process.
0 : Do not add dummy capacitors automatically.

K-2015.06
1417

lakerMchPreference
1418
Argument
Description
-autoResDummy 0|1

1 : Automatically add dummy resistors when
0 : Do not add dummy resistors automatically.
-autoTxDummy 0|1

1 : Automatically add dummy MOS devices when
0 : Do not add dummy MOS devices automatically.
-createDummyCapByValue
0|1

1 : Create dummy capacitors by capacitance
value.
0 : Create dummy capacitors by width.
-dummyCapNetName
netname
Assign a single net name for all dummy capacitors.
-dummyCapValue [float]
Specify the capacitance value for dummy

capacitors.
-dummyCapWidth [float]
Specify the width for dummy capacitors.


1 : Enable the Gate Net Name for Dummy NMOS
option.
option.
-dummyNMOSSDNet 0|1

option.
option.
-dummyNMOSSDNetName
netname

dummy NMOS devices.

K-2015.06

lakerMchPreference
Argument
Description

1 : Enable the Gate Net Name for Dummy Gate
Net Name for Dummy NMOS option.
option.
-dummyPMOSSDNet 0|1

option.
option.
-dummyPMOSSDNetName
netname

dummy NMOS devices.
-dummyResNetName
netname
Assign a single net name for all dummy resistors.
-dummyResSegNum
[natural int]
Specify the number of dummy resistors to be

assigned beside the resistor segment.
-dummyResWidth [float]
Specify the width for dummy resistors.

-dummyTxGateLength
LengthType
Specify the gate length type for dummy MOS

devices.
Valid values: adjMax, adjMin, min, and
{userDef LengthValue}. The default is
adjMax. When {userDef LengthValue} is
used, the LengthValue must be a floating
number, greater than or equal to the min value.
-dummyTxGateWidth
WidthType
Specify the gate width type for dummy MOS

devices.
Valid values: adjMax, adjMin, min, and
{userDef WidthValue}. The default is
adjMax. When {userDef WidthValue} is
used, the WidthValue must be a floating number,
greater than or equal to the min value.
-dummyTxMultipleGateNum Specify the number of dummy MOS devices to be

[natural int]
assigned beside multi-gate MOS devices.

K-2015.06
1419

lakerMchPreference
Argument
Description
-dummyTxSingleGateNum
[natural int]
Specify the number of dummy MOS devices to be

assigned beside single-gate MOS devices.
-enableDummyResWidth 0|1 Valid values: Boolean values, 0 and 1.

1 : Create dummy resistors by the user-defined
width.
0 : Create dummy resistors by the minimum width.
-horOrientMode 0|1

1 : Change the placement orientation of MOS
devices and/or instances in a horizontal direction.
0 : Keep the placement orientation of MOS
devices and/or instances in a vertical direction.
-odSharing 0|1

1 : Share the OD with adjacent MOS devices when
0 : Do not share the OD with adjacent MOS
devices when adding a dummy MOS device.
-ResContType ResContType Specify the contact type of dummy resistors.

Valid values: MaxRow, Single, Max, and
{UserDefined
-ResContCol ResContCol -ResContRow
ResContRow}. The default is MaxRow.
-shortAllCapDummy 0|1

1 : Assign a single net name for all dummy
capacitors.
0 : No net name for dummy capacitors.
-shortAllResDummy 0|1

1 : Assign a single net name for all dummy
resistors.
0 : No net name for dummy resistors.
Examples
# Example 1
# Set the preferences for dummy MOS devices with adjMax
# length and adjMin width
lakerMchPreference -dummyTxGateLength adjMax \
-dummyTxGateWidth adjMin
1420

K-2015.06

lakerMchPreview
# Example 2
# Set the preferences for dummy MOS devices with a
# user-defined length of 1.2 and a user-defined width of 0.6
lakerMchPreference -dummyTxGateLength {userDef 1.2} \
-dummyTxGateWidth {userDef 0.6}
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Options > Preferences
lakerMchPreview
The lakerMchPreview command switches to the preview mode, showing the
content of the preview window pane.
Syntax
lakerMchPreview
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
lakerMchPreview
See Also
Matching Device Creator: View > Preview
lakerMchQuickInsert
The lakerMchQuickInsert command inserts a desired pattern in the
pattern list and the grid table in the matching window pane in a quick and
efficient manner.
Syntax
lakerMchQuickInsert -pattern {pattern} [-fixed 0|1] [-select
0|1] [-optimizeOD 0|1]

K-2015.06
1421

lakerMchRealize
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-fixed 0|1

1: Enable the Fixed Columns option.
0: Disable the Fixed Columns option.
-optimizeOD 0|1

1: Enable the Optimize MOS OD Sharing option.
0: Disable the Optimize MOS OD Sharing option.
-pattern {pattern}
Specify the input pattern enclosed by brackets ({}). For

example: { ABBA }.
-select 0|1

1: Enable the Selected Grid Boxes option.
0: Disable the Selected Grid Boxes option.
Examples
# Place devices to the entire grid table in the matching
# window pane based on pattern *{A-C} with fixed column size
lakerMchQuickInsert -pattern { *{A-C} } -fixedCol 1 -select 0
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Pattern > Quick Insert
lakerMchRealize
The lakerMchRealize command realizes the device arrangement from the
matching window pane to the Layout window pane.
Syntax
lakerMchRealize
Returns
None
Arguments
None
1422

K-2015.06

Examples
lakerMchRealize
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Cell > Realize
The lakerMchRechainConnection command re-assigns the internal nets
of the selected resistor with a specified pattern.
Syntax
lakerMchRechainConnection -pattern chainPattern [-netName
startNetName] [-netLocation startNetLocation] [shortestRows 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-netLocation
startNetLocation
Specify the starting net location. This argument is valid

only for row-based patterns (S1, S2, S3, S4, Z1, Z2, Z3,
and Z4).
Valid values: top and bottom.
-netName
startNetName
Specify the starting net.

Valid value: the top/bottom net name of the selected
resistor.
-pattern
chainPattern
Specify the pattern to re-chain the resistor segment.

Valid values: S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, S8, Z1, Z2, Z3,
Z4, Z5, Z6, Z7, and Z8.
-shortestRows 0|1

1: Connect rows with the shortest path.
0: Do not connect rows with the shortest path.

K-2015.06
1423

lakerMchRedo
Examples
# Example 1
# Re-chain the resistor with pattern S1, the starting
# net name is n1, the starting net location is on top of the grid,
# and do not connect rows with the shortest path.
lakerMchRechainConnection -pattern S1 -netName n1 \
-netLocation top -shortestRows 0
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Re-chain Connection
lakerMchRedo
The lakerMchRedo command repeats the last action, if possible.
Syntax
lakerMchRedo
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
lakerMchRedo
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Redo
lakerMchRedraw
The lakerMchRedraw command updates the content of the matching window
pane.
Syntax
lakerMchRedraw
Returns
None
1424

K-2015.06

Arguments
None
Examples
lakerMchRedraw
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Redraw
The lakerMchRenamePattern command renames a user-defined pattern in
the pattern list.
Syntax
lakerMchRenamePattern -name oriName -rename newName
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-name oriName
Sepcify the original name of user-defined pattern.
-rename newName
Specify a new name for the pattern.
Examples
lakerMchRenamePattern -name test -rename testA
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Pattern > Rename
lakerMchRefUnit
The lakerMchRefUnit command sets up the reference unit for resistors and
capacitors.

K-2015.06
1425

lakerMchRefUnit
Syntax
lakerMchRefUnit -value value -width width -length length mode refUnitMode
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-length length
Specify the device length.
-mode
refUnitMode
Specify the Reference Unit Setting mode for resistors and

capacitors.
Valid values: valueWidth, valueLength,
widthLength, squareValue, squareWidth,
segWidth, and segLength (default=widthLength).
valueWidth : Value/Width for R (Topology) or C (Topology/
Remainder).
valueLength : Value/Length for R (Topology) or C
(Topology/Remainder).
widthLength : Width/Length for R (Topology) or C
(Topology/Remainder).
squareValue : Square by Value for C (Topology/
Remainder).
squareWidth : Square by Width for C (Topology/
Remainder).
segWidth : Width for R (Segment).
segLength : Length for R (Segment).
-value value
Specify the device value.
-width width
Specify the device width.
Examples
lakerMchRefUnit -value 100 -width 10 -length 5 -mode valueWidth
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Reference Unit Setting
1426

K-2015.06

lakerMchRepeatNum
lakerMchRepeatNum
The lakerMchRepeatNum command assigns the number of rows/columns to
be repeated.
Syntax
lakerMchRepeatNum -row row -col col
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-col col

-row row

Examples
lakerMchRepeatNum -row 2 -col 2
lakerMchRepeatPat
The lakerMchRepeatPat command expands repeated matching patterns for
MOS devices, MCell resistors, MCell capacitors, and instances.
Syntax
lakerMchRepeatPat [-row row] [-col col] [-seq seqString]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-col col


K-2015.06
1427

lakerMchRoute
Argument
Description
-row row

-seq seqString
Specify the placement sequence.

Valid values: Z0 and Z1 (default=Z0).
Z0 : Repeat matching patterns from left to right first, and then
from top to bottom.Z1 : Repeat matching patterns from top to
bottom first, and then from left to right.
Examples
lakerMchRepeatPat -row 2 -col 2 -seq Z1
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Repeat Pattern
lakerMchRoute
The lakerMchRoute command invokes the Matching Device Router in the
Syntax
lakerMchRoute
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
lakerMchRoute
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Router > Matching Device Router
1428

K-2015.06

lakerMchSelDevice
lakerMchSelDevice
The lakerMchSelDevice command selects the Device List on the left.
Syntax
lakerMchSelDevice -inst instName1
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-inst instName1
Specify the device to be selected.
Examples
lakerMchSelDevice
lakerMchSelect
The lakerMchSelect command selects the content of the matching window
pane.
Syntax
lakerMchSelect -set {ChanNum1 StripNum1 PinNum1} {ChanNum2
StripNum2 PinNum2}
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-set {ChanNum1 StripNum1

PinNum1}
{ChanNum2 StripNum2 PinNum2}
Select set, including the number of

channels, the number of strips and the
number of pins.
Valid value: positive integer.

K-2015.06
1429

lakerMchSelectAll
Examples
# Example 1
# Segment: 1
lakerMchSelect -set {2 1 0}
# Example 2
# Net: (6, 2, 4)
lakerMchSelect -set {2 0 0} {2 1 4} {0 0 0}
lakerMchSelectAll
The lakerMchSelectAll command selects all grid boxes in the matching
window pane.
Syntax
lakerMchSelectAll
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
lakerMchRoute
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Select All
lakerMchSelEmpty
The lakerMchSelEmpty command selects empty grid boxes only.
Syntax
lakerMchSelEmpty
Returns
None
1430

K-2015.06

lakerMchSelPattern
Arguments
None
Examples
lakerMchSelEmpty
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Select Empty Grid Boxes
lakerMchSelPattern
The lakerMchSelPattern command chooses a pattern from the default
pattern list, optimized by Laker.
Syntax
lakerMchSelPattern [-param paramList]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-param paramList
Specify the parameter list.
Examples
lakerMchSelPattern -param {0 {0 my}}
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Pattern > Select
The lakerMchSetDefaultRouteRule command define routing sets for the
Matching Device Router.

K-2015.06
1431

Syntax
To use the default routing set if a user-defined set is not found or specified:
lakerMchSetDefaultRouteRule -set default -load [-useMBB 0|1]
[-useCross 0|1]
To load an existing routing set, which belongs to the current library:
lakerMchSetDefaultRouteRule -set [set_name] -load [-useMBB
0|1] [-useCross 0|1]
To add a new routing set by specifying routing set values and a set name:
lakerMchSetDefaultRouteRule -setting_type1 [value] setting_type2 [value] .... -set [set_name] -save [-useMBB
0|1] [-useCross 0|1]
To pass routing set values without specifying a set name (these values are
used temporarily until Laker is closed without saving):
lakerMchSetDefaultRouteRule -setting_type1 [value] setting_type2 [value] .... [-useMBB 0|1] [-useCross 0|1]
To use net-based rules:
lakerMchSetDefaultRouteRule -netrule {$net1name {$const1
$value} {$const2 $value} ... } {$net2name {$const1 $value}
{$const2 $value} ...}
To ignore nets with single connection:
lakerMchSetDefaultRouteRule -ignoreSingleConnNet 0|1
To specify the alignment of over-transistor wires:
lakerMchSetDefaultRouteRule -overTxAliType $value
To specify the preferred direction for layers:
lakerMchSetDefaultRouteRule -layerrule {$layer1 $value} ...
{$layerN $value}
To specify the S/D Via cross pattern:
lakerMchSetDefaultRouteRule -crossSDViaOn Pin|Channel
To create cross pattern paths as on-grid polygons:
lakerMchSetDefaultRouteRule -crossConvertToPolygon 0|1
1432

K-2015.06

To specify the Backbone to Gate Spacing setting:

lakerMchSetDefaultRouteRule -crossUseB2GSpacing 0|1 crossB2GSpacing {B2G spacing value string}
To specify the Vertical Feedthrough setting:
lakerMchSetDefaultRouteRule -VFeedthrough 0|1
To specify the Extend Wire to Backbone Edge setting:
lakerMchSetDefaultRouteRule -extendWire 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-crossB2GSpacing
{B2G spacing value string}
Specify the distance between horizontal

backbone wires and gates (OD).
Valid value: a constant or an expression.
If the value is zero or not specified (empty), the
value is a system-assigned value.
-crossConvertToPolygon 0|1

(default=0).
1: Convert cross pattern paths as on-grid
polygons.
0: No conversion, creating cross pattern paths
only.
-crossSDViaOn Pin|Channel
Specify the S/D Via cross pattern.

Valid values: Pin and Channel
(default=Channel).
-crossUseB2GSpacing 0|1

(default=0).
1: Enable the Backbone to Gate Spacing
setting.
0: Disable the Backbone to Gate Spacing
setting.

K-2015.06
1433

Argument
Description
-extendWire 0|1

(default=0).
1: Enable the Extend Wire to Backbone Edge
setting.
0: Disable the Extend Wire to Backbone
Edge setting.
1434
-ignoreSingleConnNet 0|1

(default=0).
1: Ignore nets with single connection.
0: Include nets with single connection.
-layerrule {$layer1 $value} ...

{$layerN $value}
Preferred direction of routing layer.

Valid values: Orth, Hori, and Vert.
Orth: Specify the preferred layer direction to
orthogonal.
Hori: Specify the preferred layer direction to
horizontal.
Vert: Specify the preferred layer direction to
vertical.
The format of metal layer name $layer is
{$layer_name $purpose_name}. If the
purpose name is drawing, the
$purpose_name and the brackets can be
omitted.
-load
Load the default or the existing routing set.

This argument is only valid with -set.

K-2015.06

Argument
Description
-netrule {$net1name
{$const1 $value}
{$const2 $value} ... }
{$net2name {$const1 $value}
{$const2 $value} ...}
The rules can be:
-overTxAliType $value
route decides whether to route a net (1) or

not (0). Default=1.
hbbLayer specifies the metal layer of

horizontal backbone of a particular net.
Default=None (auto).
bbWidth specifies the wire width of H/V

backbone of a particular net. Default=0
(auto).
brLayer specifies the metal layer of vertical

backbone and branch wire of a particular
net. Default=None (auto).
brWidth specifies the wire width of branch

wire of a particular net. Default=0 (auto).
Specify the metal layer in format:
{$layer_name $purpose_name}
If the purpose name is drawing or the layer
name is None (auto), the $purpose_name and
the brackets can be omitted.
Alignment type for over-transistor wirings.
Valid values: t, c, b, and s (default=c).
t aligns over transistor wirings to top side of

corresponding strip.
c aligns over-transistor wirings to the center
of corresponding strip.
b aligns over-transistor wirings to bottom
side of corresponding strip such as current
result.
s spreads over-transistor wirings to
corresponding strip.
-save
Save the current routing set to the laker.ro file.

This argument is only valid with -set.
-set [default | set_name]
Determine the routing set to be used.

default: Use default routing set if userdefined set is not found or specified.
set_name: Use user-defined routing set.
set_name can be any text string.

K-2015.06
1435

Argument
Description
-setting_type1 [value]
Specify the routing set value.
-setting_type2 [value]
Specify the routing set value.
-useCross 0|1

(default=1).
1: Enable the Cross Pattern setting.
0: Disable the Cross Pattern setting.
-useMBB 0|1

(default=1).
1: Enable the Matched Backbone Pattern
setting (Junction Matched Backbone).
0: Disable the Matched Backbone Pattern
setting.
-VFeedthrough 0|1

(default=0).
1: Enable the Vertical Feedthrough setting.
0: Disable the Vertical Feedthrough setting.
Examples
# Example 1
# Allow Matched Backbone patterns (Junction Matched Backbone)
lakerMchSetDefaultRouteRule -useMBB 1
# Example 2
# Allow Cross patterns
lakerMchSetDefaultRouteRule -useCross 1
# Example 3
# Route net IN using MET1 horizontal backbone, backbone
# wire width is 0.28um, MET2 vertical backbone and branch wire
# and branch wire width is 0.28um
lakerMchSetDefaultRouteRule -netrule \
{IN {route 1} {hbbLayer MET1} {bbWidth 0.28} \
{brLayer MET2} {brWidth 0.28}}
# or write the command as follows:
{IN {route 1} {hbbLayer {MET1 drawing}} {bbWidth 0.28} \
{brLayer {MET2 drawing}} {brWidth 0.28}}
1436

K-2015.06

lakerMchSetRemNum
# Example 4
# Route net OUT using optimum horizontal backbone,
# backbone wire width is 0.28um
{OUT {route 1} {hbbLayer None} {bbWidth 0.28}}
# Example 5
# Route net IN using MET1 horizontal backbone with label purpose,
# backbone wire width is 0.28um
{IN {route 1} {hbbLayer {MET1 label}} {bbWidth 0.28}}
# Example 6
# Align all strip over-transistor wirings to center:
lakerMchSetDefaultRouteRule -overMosRouting 1 -overTxAliType c
# Example 7
# Align all strip over-transistor wirings to spread:
lakerMchSetDefaultRouteRule -overMosRouting 1 -overTxAliType s
# Example 8
# Align all strip over-transistor wirings to Top>Bottom repeated:
lakerMchSetDefaultRouteRule -overMosRouting 1 -overTxAliType tb
# Example 9
# Align all strip over-transistor wirings to
# Top>Center>Bottom repeated:
lakerMchSetDefaultRouteRule -overMosRouting 1 -overTxAliType tcb
# Example 10
# Set MET1 preferred direction to orthogonal:
lakerMchSetDefaultRouteRule -layerrule {MET1 Orth}
# the above line can also be written in another way:
lakerMchSetDefaultRouteRule -layerrule {{MET1 drawing} Orth}
# Example 11
# Set MET1 preferred direction to horizontal:
lakerMchSetDefaultRouteRule -layerrule {MET1 Hori}
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Router > Router Settings
lakerMchSetRemNum
The lakerMchSetRemNum command specifies the number of capacitor
remainders.

K-2015.06
1437

lakerMchSetTopology
Syntax
lakerMchSetRemNum -num remNo
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-num remNo
Specify the number of remainders.

Examples
lakerMchSetRemNum -num 2
lakerMchSetTopology
The lakerMchSetTopology command specifies the topology status of the
selected device.
Syntax
lakerMchSetTopology -status status
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-status status
Specify the topology status.
Examples
lakerMchSetTopology -status 2P1S
lakerMchSetUnitNum
The lakerMchSetUnitNum command specifies the number of capacitor
units.
1438

K-2015.06

lakerMchShareOD
Syntax
lakerMchSetUnitNum -num unitNo
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-num unitNo
Specify the number of units.

Examples
lakerMchSetUnitNum -num 2
lakerMchShareOD
The lakerMchShareOD command enables or disables OD sharing for
transistors.
Syntax
lakerMchShareOD 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
0|1

1 : Enable the OD sharing of transistors.
0 : Disable the OD sharing of transistors.
Examples
lakerMchShareOD 1
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Cell > Share OD

K-2015.06
1439

lakerMchSize
lakerMchSize
The lakerMchSize command defines the pattern structure.
Syntax
lakerMchSize -row row -col col
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-col col

-row row

Examples
lakerMchSize -row 1 -col 2
lakerMchSpace
The lakerMchSpace command defines the X-Spacing and Y-Spacing values.
Syntax
lakerMchSpace -XSpace XSpace -YSpace YSpace
Returns
None
Arguments
1440
Argument
Description
-XSpace XSpace
Specify the vertical spacing.

-YSpace YSpace
Specify the horizontal spacing.


K-2015.06

lakerMchSplit
Examples
lakerMchSpace -XSpace 1.0 -YSpace 1.0
lakerMchSplit
The lakerMchSplit command splits OD by the select set. The OD within the
select set is split. This command does not apply on the OD in a finger group.
Syntax
lakerMchSplit
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
lakerMchSplit
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Split
lakerMchSwapSD
The lakerMchSwapSD command swaps the source/drain of the selected MOS
device, Tcl PCell, or PyCell. This command is only available for MOS devices,
Tcl PCells, or PyCells.
Syntax
lakerMchSwapSD
Returns
None
Arguments
None

K-2015.06
1441

lakerMchUndo
Examples
lakerMchSelect -pos (1.0)
lakerMchSwapSD
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Swap SD
lakerMchUndo
The lakerMchUndo command reverses the last action.
Syntax
lakerMchUndo
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
lakerMchUndo
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Undo
The lakerMchUnsetFingerGroup command unsets finger groups by the
select set. If the select set is not a finger group, no action is taken. This is
enabled only when the selected devices list has a finger-factor.
Syntax
Returns
None
1442

K-2015.06

Arguments
None
Examples
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Unset Finger Group
The lakerMchViewLevelDec command decreases the view level of the
preview window pane by one.
Syntax
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
# Decrease on current view level
See Also
Matching Device Creator: View > View Level-1
The lakerMchViewLevelInc command increases the view level of the
preview window pane by one.
Syntax

K-2015.06
1443

lakerMchXMirror
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
# Example 1
# Increase on current view level
See Also
Matching Device Creator: View > View Level+1
lakerMchXMirror
The lakerMchXMirror command makes a vertical mirrored reflection of the
selected pattern. This command is only available for instances, MCell
resistors, and MCell capacitors.
Syntax
lakerMchXMirror -pos (x1,y1) (x2,y2)
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-pos (x1,y1) (x2,y2)
Examples
# Example 1
lakerMchXMirror -pos (0,0) (1,2)
# Results:
# A A A
=> {A my} A A
# A A A
A A {A my}
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Mirror X
1444

K-2015.06

lakerMchYMirror
lakerMchYMirror
The lakerMchYMirror command makes a horizontal mirrored reflection of
the selected pattern. This command is only available for instances.
Syntax
lakerMchYMirror -pos (x1,y1) (x2,y2)
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-pos (x1,y1) (x2,y2)
Examples
# Example 1
lakerMchYMirror -pos (0,0) (0,2)
# Results:
# A A A => {A my} A {A my}
See Also
Matching Device Creator: Edit > Mirror Y
lakerMchZoomAll
The lakerMchZoomAll command fits all items into the matching window
pane (normal view) or the preview window pane (preview mode) to check the
edited results in an overall view.
Syntax
lakerMchZoomAll
Returns
None
Arguments
None

K-2015.06
1445

lakerMchZoomIn
Examples
lakerMchZoomAll
See Also
Matching Device Creator: View > Zoom All
lakerMchZoomIn
The lakerMchZoomIn command magnifies the content of the matching
window pane (normal view) or the preview window pane (preview mode).
Syntax
lakerMchZoomIn
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
lakerMchZoomIn
See Also
Matching Device Creator: View > Zoom In
lakerMchZoomOut
The lakerMchZoomOut command manipulates the content of the matching
window pane (normal view) or the preview window pane (preview mode) at a
reduced size.
Syntax
lakerMchZoomOut
Returns
None
1446

K-2015.06

lakerQueryMatch
Arguments
None
Examples
lakerMchZoomOut
See Also
Matching Device Creator: View > Zoom Out
lakerQueryMatch
The lakerQueryMatch command queries selected logic devices and their
related information.
Syntax
Syntax 1:
lakerQueryMatch -getSelected logic
Syntax 2:
lakerQueryMatch -device deviceName -param paramName
Syntax 3:
lakerQueryMatch -device deviceName -connection portName
Syntax 4:
lakerQueryMatch -device deviceName -attr attrName
Syntax 5:
lakerQueryMatch -device deviceName -constParam paramName
Syntax 6:
lakerQueryMatch -constraint constName -attr attrName
Syntax 7:
lakerQueryMatch -patternName patternName
Returns
Syntax 1 returns the device name list if successful.

K-2015.06
1447

lakerQueryMatch
Syntax 2 returns the parameter value of the specified device if successful;

otherwise, returns an empty string.
Syntax 3 returns the net name of the specified device if successful; otherwise,
returns an empty string.
Syntax 4 returns the attributes of the specified device if successful.
Syntax 5 returns the following information if successful; otherwise returns an
empty string or 0:
1448
When -constParam objList is specified, returns all instance names in

the same matching group. For example, M1 or {M1 M2}.
When -constParam inputMethod is specified, returns a string as

patternName or quickFormat.
When -constParam patternName is specified, returns a string. For

example: AB.
When -constParam quickFormat is specified, returns a string. For

example: AB_BA.
When -constParam isOptimizeODSharing is specified, returns 1 if

successful; otherwise returns 0.
When -constParam isSetBdrySpacing is specified, returns 1 if

When -constParam xSpacing is specified, returns a floating number.
When -constParam ySpacing is specified, returns a floating number.
When -constParam isSetRepeatedNum is specified, returns 1 if

When -constParam repeatedRowNum is specified, returns an integer.
When -constParam repeatedColNum is specified, returns an integer.
When -constParam isSetGenGuardRing is specified, returns 1 if

When -constParam isUseDefGuardRingNum is specified, returns 1 if

When -constParam guardRingNum is specified, returns an integer.
When -constParam isSetPeripheralDummy is specified, returns 1 if


K-2015.06

lakerQueryMatch
When -constParam peripheralDummy is specified, returns a string as

ringNum or sides.
When -constParam peripheralDummyRingNum is specified, returns

an integer.
When -constParam peripheralDummyLeft is specified, returns an

integer.
When -constParam peripheralDummyRight is specified, returns an

integer.
When -constParam peripheralDummyTop is specified, returns an

integer.
When -constParam peripheralDummyBottom is specified, returns an

integer.
When -constParam peripheralDummyODSharing is specified, returns

1 if successful; otherwise returns 0.
When -constParam peripheralDummyGateLength is specified,

returns a string as adjMin or adjMax.
When -constParam peripheralDummyGateWidth is specified, returns

a string as adjMin or adjMax.
Syntax 6 returns the following information if successful; otherwise returns an

empty string or 0:
When -attr objList is specified, returns all instance names in the same
matching group. For example, M1 or {M1 M2}.
When -attr inputMethod is specified, returns a string as

patternName or quickFormat.
When -attr patternName is specified, returns a string. For example: AB.
When -attr quickFormat is specified, returns a string. For example:

AB_BA.
When -attr isOptimizeODSharing is specified, returns 1 if successful;

otherwise returns 0.
When -attr isSetBdrySpacing is specified, returns 1 if successful;

When -attr xSpacing is specified, returns a floating number.
When -attr ySpacing is specified, returns a floating number.

K-2015.06
1449

lakerQueryMatch
When -attr isSetRepeatedNum is specified, returns 1 if successful;

When -attr repeatedRowNum is specified, returns an integer.
When -attr repeatedColNum is specified, returns an integer.
When -attr isSetGenGuardRing is specified, returns 1 if successful;

When -attr isUseDefGuardRingNum is specified, returns 1 if

When -attr guardRingNum is specified, returns an integer.
When -attr isSetPeripheralDummy is specified, returns 1 if

When -attr peripheralDummy is specified, returns a string as

ringNum or sides.
When -attr peripheralDummyRingNum is specified, returns an integer.
When -attr peripheralDummyLeft is specified, returns an integer.
When -attr peripheralDummyRight is specified, returns an integer.
When -attr peripheralDummyTop is specified, returns an integer.
When -attr peripheralDummyBottom is specified, returns an integer.
When -attr peripheralDummyODSharing is specified, returns 1 if

When -attr peripheralDummyGateLength is specified, returns a

string as adjMin or adjMax.
When -attr peripheralDummyGateWidth is specified, returns a string

as adjMin or adjMax.
Syntax 7 returns1if successful; otherwise, returns 0.

Arguments
Argument
Description
-attr attrName
Specify the attribute name for Syntax 4.

Valid values: matchingConstraint and isFinFET.
When -attr matchingConstraint is specified,
returns the constraint name; otherwise, returns an
empty string.
1450

K-2015.06

lakerQueryMatch
Argument
Description
-attr attrName
Specify the attribute name to be queried by the

specified constraint. This is used for Syntax 6.
Valid values: objList, inputMethod,
patternName, quickFormat,
isOptimizeODSharing, isSetBdrySpacing,
xSpacing, ySpacing, isSetRepeatedNum,
repeatedRowNum, repeatedColNum,
isSetGenGuardRing, isUseDefGuardRingNum,
guardRingNum, isSetPeripheralDummy,
peripheralDummyMode,
peripheralDummyRingNum,
peripheralDummyLeft,
peripheralDummyRight, peripheralDummyTop,
peripheralDummyBottom,
peripheralDummyODSharing,
peripheralDummyGateLength, and
peripheralDummyGateWidth.
-connection portName
Specify the port name of a net.

Valid values: D, G, S, B, PLUS, MINUS, and SUB.
D, G, S, and B are port names for MOS devices.
PLUS, MINUS, and SUB are port names for resistors.
-constParam paramName
Specify the parameter name for which to query the

constraint value.
Valid values: objList, inputMethod,
patternName, quickFormat,
isOptimizeODSharing, isSetBdrySpacing,
xSpacing, ySpacing, isSetRepeatedNum,
repeatedRowNum, repeatedColNum,
isSetGenGuardRing, isUseDefGuardRingNum,
guardRingNum, isSetPeripheralDummy,
peripheralDummyMode,
peripheralDummyRingNum,
peripheralDummyLeft,
peripheralDummyRight, peripheralDummyTop,
peripheralDummyBottom,
peripheralDummyODSharing,
peripheralDummyGateLength, and
peripheralDummyGateWidth.

K-2015.06
1451

lakerQueryMatch
Argument
Description
-device deviceName
Specify the logic name of the specified device.
-getSelected logic
Based on the selected set of the Design Browser

pane.
-param paramName

Valid values: mapLib, mapCell, mapView, R, W, L,
NF, NFIN, NS, and M.
mapLib, mapCell, and mapView are common
parameters.
L, W, NF, NFIN, NS, and M are parameters for MOS
devices.
R, L, W, NS, and M are parameters for resistors.
-pattern patternName
1452
Specify the pattern name.

K-2015.06

lakerQueryMatch
Examples
# Example 1
# Refer to Figure 2 for the selected device in Design Browser
lakerQueryMatch -getSelected logic
# Return {m1 m2}
# Example 2
# Return 5.0
lakerQueryMatch -device m1 -param W
# Example 3
# Return GND
lakerQueryMatch -device m1 -connection B
# Example 4
# Return D_MH1
lakerQueryMatch -device m1 -attr matchingConstraint
# Return FALSE
lakerQueryMatch -device m1 -attr isFinFET
# Example 5
# Return {m1 m2}
lakerQueryMatch -device m1 -constParam objList
# Example 6
# Return {m1 m2}
lakerQueryMatch -constraint D_MH1 -constParam objList
# Example 7
# Return 1
lakerQueryMatch -patternName AB
See Also
Figure 2
Selected Device in the Design Browser pane

K-2015.06
1453

lakerSchMatch
lakerSchMatch
The lakerSchMatch command makes the arrangement of symmetrical
patterns for analog circuits, according to the selected transistors and instances
in the Design Browser pane.
This command is supported for transistors and instances only due to backward
compatibility issues. Starting from Laker 3.1v3, this command invokes the
Matching Device Creator window only and it is logged without any arguments.
Refer to the Matching Device Creator description in Laker Command
Reference Manual for more details of matching patterns.
Syntax
lakerSchMatch -XSpace xSpace -YSpace ySpace -repeatRow
repeatRow -repeatCol repeatCol -param matchPattern [ODSharing 0|1] [-inst instName1]
Returns
None
Arguments
1454
Argument
Description
-inst instName1
Realize transistors or instances directly.
-ODSharing 0|1

1 : Allow OD sharing at realization if possible.
0 : Do not allow OD sharing even though it is possible.
-param matchPattern
Specify a matching pattern (for example: ABBA is {0 1

1 0}) with user-defined orientation, mirror x or mirror
y values for each element.
Valid values: mx, my, and mxy.
-repeatCol repeatCol

-repeatRow repeatRow

-XSpace xSpace
Specify the horizontal spacing between thin oxide

layers.

K-2015.06

mchGet
Argument
Description
-YSpace ySpace
Specify the vertical spacing between thin oxide layers.

Examples
# Example 1
lakerSchMatch -XSpace 1.0 -YSpace 2.0 -repeatRow 1 -repeatCol 1 \
-param {0 {0 my} 0 {0 my}}
# Example 2
-param {0 {1 my} 0 {0 my} 1 {0 my} } {{1 mx} {0 mxy} {1 mx} \
{1 mxy} {0 mx} {1 mxy} } {0 {1 my} 0 {0 my} 1 {0 my} }
# Example 3
-param {0 {1 my} 1 {0 my}} {{1 mx} {0 mxy} {0 mx} {1 mxy}}
See Also
lakerMatch
Layout Window: SDL > Match
mchGet
The mchGet command queries placement configurations and parameters of
the created layout for the post processing procedure.
Syntax
Syntax 1:
mchGet -cvId cellviewId -size row|col
Syntax 2:
mchGet -cvId cellviewId -attr id [[-pos {{nRow1 nCol1} ...
{nRown nColn}}] | [-type type]]
Syntax 3:
mchGet -obj instId -attr attribute

K-2015.06
1455

mchGet
Syntax 4:
mchGet -obj instId -attr logic|layout -param paramName
Syntax 5:
mchGet -obj instId -attr logic|layout -connection portName
Syntax 6:
mchGet -obj instId -attr logic|layout -name
Syntax 7:
mchGet -obj instId -param pos|col|row
Returns
Syntax 1 returns the final row/column size if successful.
Syntax 2 returns the instance Id and instance Id list if successful.
Syntax 3 returns 1 if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Syntax 4 returns the parameter value if successful.
Syntax 5 returns the net name if successful.
Syntax 6 returns the logic or layout instance name if successful.
Syntax 7 returns the layout position from the given layout instance if successful.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-attr attribute
Specify the target attribute for Syntax 3.

Valid values: isPeriDummy, isDummy, and
isDevice.
-attr id [[-pos {{nRow1 nCol1} Specify to get the instance Id or instance Id list in the
... {nRown nColn}}] |
returned value by position or type for Syntax 2.
[-type type]]
When -pos is specified, get the target by position with
the given columns and rows {{nRow1 nCol1} ...
{nRown nColn}}.
When -type is specified, get the target by type.
Valid values: periDummy, dummy, and device.
-attr logic|layout
Specify the source of target attributes for Syntax 3, 4,

5, and 6.
Valid values: logic and layout.
1456

K-2015.06

mchGet
Argument
Description
-connection portName
Specify the port name of a net.

The port name for MOS devices can be D, G, S, or B.
The port name for resistors can be PLUS, MINUS, or
SUB.
-cvId cellviewId
Specify the current working cell view Id.
-name
-obj instId
Specify the target layout instance.
-param paramName

When -attr logic is specified, the parameter for
MOS devices can be L, W, NF, NFIN, or M; and the
parameter for resistors can be R, W, L, NS, or M.
When -attr layout is specified, the parameter for
MOS devices can be L, W, NF, or NFIN; and the
parameter for resistors can be R, W, L, or NS.
-param pos|col|row
Specify the layout position in the temporary cell view,

from left to right, bottom to top.
When -param pos is specified, get the number of
columns and rows in the temporary cell view. For
example: {x y}, where x represents the column and
y represents the row.
When -param col is specified, get the number of
columns in the temporary cell view.
When -param row is specified, get the number of
rows in the temporary cell view.
-size row|col

K-2015.06
Specify the target, whether it is a row or column.

Valid values: row and col.
1457

mchGet
Examples
# Example 1
mchGet -cvId 69F040c -size row
# Return 4
# Example 2
mchGet -cvId 69F040c -attr id
# Return all inst id {69e540c 69e542c 69e544c}
mchGet -cvId 69F040c -attr id -pos {{0 0} {0 1} {0 2} {1000 1000}}
# Return inst id {69e540c 69e540c 69e542c {}}
# The {0 0} and {0 1} are the same inst id (its NF=2)
mchGet -cvId 69F040c -attr id -type dummy
# Return inst id {69e542c 69e544c} from left to right and
# then top to bottom
mchGet -cvId 69F040c -attr id -type device
# Return inst id 69e540c
mchGet -cvId 69F040c -attr id -type periDummy
# Return {} here. (There is not any peripheral dummy.)
# Refer to Figure 3 for reference
# Example 3
mchGet -obj 69e540c
# Return 0
mchGet -obj 69e540c
# Return 1
# Example 4
mchGet -obj 69e540c
# Return 3.0
mchGet -obj 69e540c
# Return 1.5
# Example 5
mchGet -obj 69e540c
# Return N_3
mchGet -obj 69e540c
# Return N_1
# Example 6
mchGet -obj 69e540c
# Return m1::0
mchGet -obj 69e540c
# Return m1
# Example 7
mchGet -obj
# Return {1
mchGet -obj
# Return 1
mchGet -obj
# Return 2
1458
-attr isDummy
-attr isDevice
-attr logic -param W

-attr layout -param W
-attr layout -connection S

-attr logic -connection S
-attr logic -name

-attr logic -name
69e540c
2}
69e540c
-param pos
69e540c
-param row
-param col

K-2015.06

mchGet
See Also
Figure 3
Figure for Example 2

K-2015.06
1459

mchGet
1460

K-2015.06
12
12
Stick Diagram Compiler
User Interface (GUI) which applied within the Stick Diagram Compiler window
(invoked by the Create command in the Design Browser pane or by the SDL >
To Stick Diagram command in the Layout window).
lakerSkAddDummy
lakerSkAlign
lakerSkAreaZoom
lakerSkAutoDummy
lakerSkAutoOptimizeOD
lakerSkClearRuler
lakerSkClose
lakerSkDelete
lakerSkDeleteDummy
lakerSkDeselectAll
lakerSkDisorderAll
lakerSkDistance
lakerSkDrag
lakerSkDrop
lakerSkFold
lakerSkFuse

K-2015.06
1461
Chapter 12: Stick Diagram Compiler

lakerSkAddDummy
lakerSkLastView
lakerSkMergeGate
lakerSkMove
lakerSkNormal
lakerSkOptimizeOD
lakerSkPanDown
lakerSkPanLeft
lakerSkPanRight
lakerSkPanUp
lakerSkPreview
lakerSkPreference
lakerSkRealize
lakerSkRechain
lakerSkRedo
lakerSkRedraw
lakerSkSelRealize
lakerSkSplit
lakerSkSwap
lakerSkUnalignGate
lakerSkUndo
lakerSkUnsetFingerGroup
lakerSkZoomAll
lakerSkZoomIn
lakerSkZoomOut
lakerSkAddDummy
The lakerSkAddDummy command inserts dummy gates on the selected OD
area.
1462

K-2015.06

lakerSkAddDummy
Syntax
Real size mode:
lakerSkAddDummy -odSharing 0|1 -lengthType lengthType
-widthType widthType
Symbol mode:
lakerSkAddDummy -obj modelName packIdx -glue glueNumber
-odSharing 0|1 -lengthType lengthType -widthType
widthType
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-glue glueNumber
Specify the glue number of the gate to be added.

-lengthType lengthType
Specify the length type for dummy gates.

AdjacentWider, MinChannelLength, and
{UserDefined lengthValue}, where
{UserDefined lengthValue} specifies the
user-defined length value, and it must be a floating
number, greater than 0. The default is initiated from
the MOS tab in the Preferences form of the Home
Page.
-obj modelName packIdx
Specify the master name of transistor packs and a

pack number:
-odSharing 0|1

K-2015.06
modelName: Specify the master name of PMOS

or NMOS.
packIdx: Specify the pack number with an
integer, greater than or equal to 0.

1 : Enable the OD Sharing option.
0 : Disable the OD Sharing option.
1463

lakerSkAlign
Argument
Description
Specify the width type for dummy gates.

AdjacentWider, MinChannelWidth, and
{UserDefined widthValue}, where
{UserDefined widthValue} specifies the userdefined width value, and it must be a floating
number, greater than 0. The default is
AdjacentWider.
Examples
# Example 1
# Real size mode
lakerSkAddDummy -odSharing 1 -lengthType AdjacentWider \
-widthType MinChannelWidth
# Example 2
# Symbol mode
lakerSkAddDummy -obj NMOS_3.3V 0 -glue 3 -odSharing 0 \
-lengthType {UserDefined 0.5} -widthType {UserDefined 1.2}
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: Edit > Add Dummy
lakerSkAlign
The lakerSkAlign command aligns each specified gate to a reference gate
and builds the alignment relationship between the specified gate and reference
gate.
Syntax
lakerSkAlign [-mode mode]
Returns
None
1464

K-2015.06

lakerSkAreaZoom
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode mode
Specify the select mode for the alignment.

Valid values: init, start, end, and select.
init : Specify the mode for initializing the Align feature.

start : Specify the mode for selecting the aligned gate.
end : Specify the mode for selecting the referenced
gate.
select : Specify the mode for selecting transistors to
move with the aligned gate.
Examples
#
#
#
#
Align gate in (0.331, 21.005) to gate in (10.010,11.006).

During this alignment, Laker also moves transistors in
(15.001,21.956) and keeps the relative distance with aligned
transistors
lakerSkAlign -init
lakerSkChgSelObj -reset -selType GateObject
lakerSkPreSel -point (0.331, 21.005) -traversedist 0.396
lakerSkAlign
-mode start
lakerSkChgSelObj -reset -selType PackObject
lakerSkPreSel -point (15.001,21.956) -traversedist 0.396
lakerSkIncSel
lakerSkAlign -mode select
lakerSkChgSelObj -reset -selType GateObject
lakerSkAlign -mode end
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: Edit > Align Gates
lakerSkAreaZoom
The lakerSkAreaZoom command zooms in the viewable area by the
specified region.

K-2015.06
1465

lakerSkAutoDummy
Syntax
lakerSkAreaZoom -point (x1,y1) (x2,y2)
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
(x1,y1) specifies the lower left point of zoomIn area

Examples
lakerSkAreaZoom -point (100,100) (200,200)
lakerSkAutoDummy
The lakerSkAutoDummy command adds dummy gates on the selected pack.
Syntax
Real size mode:
lakerSkAutoDummy -odSharing 0|1 -lengthType lengthType
-widthType widthType -gateNumbers numberSingle
numberMulti numberInner -innerTolerance toleranceValue
Symbol mode:
lakerSkAutoDummy -obj modelName packIdx -odSharing shareOD
-lengthType lengthType -widthType widthType -gateNumbers
numberSingle numberMulti numberInner -innerTolerance
toleranceValue
Returns
None
1466

K-2015.06

lakerSkAutoDummy
Arguments
Argument
Description
-gateNumbers
Specify the number of dummy gates with the
numberSingle numberMulti following values:
numberInner
numberSingle: Used for transistors with one

normal gate.
numberMulti: Used for transistors with multiple

normal gates.
numberInner: Used for transistors where the

difference in gate width (between two adjacent
logic gates) exceeds the tolerance value.
The default is initiated from the MOS tab in the
Preferences form of the Home Page.
-innerTolerance
toleranceValue
Specify a threshold value (in microns) for dummy

gates. When the width difference of two adjacent
logic gates exceeds the tolerance value, dummy
gates are added between the two adjacent gates.
to 0.0. The default is initiated from the MOS tab in
the Preferences form of the Home Page.
-lengthType lengthType
Specify the length type for dummy gates.

AdjacentWider, MinChannelLength, and
{UserDefined lengthValue}, where
{UserDefined lengthValue} specifies the
user-defined length value, and it must be a floating
number, greater than 0. The default is initiated from
the MOS tab in the Preferences form of the Home
Page.
-obj modelName packIdx
Specify the master name of transistor packs and a

pack number:

K-2015.06
modelName: Specify the master name of PMOS

or NMOS.
1467

Argument
Description
-odSharing 0|1

1 : Enable the OD Sharing option.
0 : Disable the OD Sharing option.
Specify the width type for dummy gates.

AdjacentWider, MinChannelWidth, and
{UserDefined widthValue}, where
{UserDefined widthValue} specifies the userdefined width value, and it must be a floating
number, greater than 0. The default is
AdjacentWider.
Examples
# Example 1
# Real size mode
lakerSkAutoDummy -odSharing 1 -lengthType {UserDefined 1.0} \
-widthType AdjacentNarrower -gateNumbers 1 2 1 \
-innerTolerance 0.0
# Example 2
# Symbol mode
lakerSkAutoDummy -obj pmos 0 -odSharing 0 \
-lengthType AdjacentWider -widthType MinChannelWidth \
-gateNumbers 2 1 0 -innerTolerance 0.5
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: Edit > Auto Dummy
The lakerSkAutoOptimizeOD command enables or disables the Auto
Optimize OD command.
Syntax
lakerSkAutoOptimizeOD -mode 0|1
Returns
None
1468

K-2015.06

lakerSkClearRuler
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode 0|1

1 : Enable the Auto Optimize OD command.
0 : Disable the Auto Optimize OD command.
Examples
# Example 1
# Optimize OD automatically when the alignment relationship
# of selected transistors is removed
lakerSkAutoOptimizeOD -mode 1
# Example 2
# Do not optimize OD automatically when the alignment relationship
# of selected transistors is removed
lakerSkAutoOptimizeOD -mode 0
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: Options > Auto Optimize OD
lakerSkClearRuler
The lakerSkClearRuler command clears all rulers in the preview window
pane.
Syntax
lakerSkClearRuler
Returns
None
Examples
# clear all rulers
lakerSkClearRuler
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: Query > Clear Ruler

K-2015.06
1469

lakerSkClose
lakerSkClose
The lakerSkClose command closes the active Stick Diagram Compiler
window.
Syntax
lakerSkClose
Returns
None
Examples
lakerSkClose
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: Cell > Close
lakerSkDelete
The lakerSkDelete command deletes a pack.
Syntax
Real size mode:
lakerSkDelete
Symbol mode:
lakerSkDelete -obj modelName packIdx [-glue glueNumber]
Returns
None
Arguments
1470
Argument
Description
-glue glueNumber
Specify the glue number of the gate to be deleted. If

not specified, the whole pack is deleted.

K-2015.06

lakerSkDeleteDummy
Argument
Description
-obj modelName packIdx Specify the master name of transistor packs and a
pack number:
modelName: Specify the master name of PMOS or

NMOS.
Examples
# Example 1
# Delete a pack in Real size mode
lakerSkDelete
# Example 2
# Delete a pack in Symbol mode
lakerSkDelete -obj NMOS_3.3V 0 -glue 2
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: Edit > Delete
lakerSkDeleteDummy
The lakerSkDeleteDummy command deletes a selected dummy gate or all
dummy gates in the selected transistor packs.
Syntax
Real size mode:
lakerSkDeleteDummy
Symbol mode:
lakerSkDeleteDummy -obj modelName packIdx [-glue glueNumber]
Returns
None

K-2015.06
1471

lakerSkDeselectAll
Arguments
Argument
Description
-glue glueNumber
Specify the glue number of the gate to be deleted. If

not specified, the whole pack is deleted.
-obj modelName packIdx Specify the master name of transistor packs and a
pack number:
modelName: Specify the master name of PMOS or

NMOS.
Examples
# Example 1
# Delete dummy gates in Real size mode
lakerSkDeleteDummy
# Example 2
# Delete dummy gates in Symbol mode
lakerSkDeleteDummy -obj NMOS_3.3V 0 -glue 2
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: Edit > Delete Dummy
lakerSkDeselectAll
The lakerSkDeselectAll command deselects all selected objects.
Syntax
lakerSkDeselectAll
Returns
None
Examples
lakerSkDeselectAll
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: Edit > Deselect All
1472

K-2015.06

lakerSkDisorderAll
lakerSkDisorderAll
The lakerSkDisorderAll command unalign all aligned transistors.
Syntax
lakerSkDisorderAll
Returns
None
Examples
lakerSkDisorderAll
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: Edit > Unalign All Gates
lakerSkDistance
The lakerSkDistance command creates a minimum distance ruler in the
preview window pane.
Syntax
lakerSkDistance -point (x1,y1)(x2,y2) [-file filename]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file filename
Dump the created ruler tag information to a file with the

following format: (xS1, yS1) (xE1,yE1) (xS2,
yS2) (xE2,yE2) ... (xSn, ySn) (xEn,yEn),
where (xS1, yS1) (xE1,yE1) corresponds to two
points of the tag ruler.
The tag ruler data is sorted by the X coordinate of the
head point first then the Y coordinate.
If it is a vertical tag ruler, the head point is the higher
point. If it is an horizontal tag ruler, the head point is the
left point.

K-2015.06
1473

lakerSkDrag
Argument
Description
-point (x1, y1) (x2, y2)

Examples
lakerSkDistance -point (100, 100) (200,200)
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: Query > Distance
lakerSkDrag
The lakerSkDrag command drags the selected objects from the Stick
Diagram Compiler window to the Layout window pane.
Syntax
lakerSkDrag
Returns
None
Examples
# Select object in the stick diagram compiler, then drag it to
the layout window
lakerSkDrag
# Set active window to the layout window pane
lakerDsgDrop
lakerSkDrop
The lakerSkDrop command drops the dragged data from the Design
Browser pane to the Stick Diagram Compiler window.
Syntax
lakerSkDrop
1474

K-2015.06

lakerSkFold
Returns
None
Examples
# Select an object in the Design Browser pane,
# then drag it to the Layout window pane, the Stick Diagram
# Compiler window appears automatically
lakerSchBroDrag
lakerSkDrop
lakerSkFold
The lakerSkFold command multiplies a transistor into a number of
transistors.
Syntax
lakerSkFold -obj typeName packNo -glueNo glueNo [-foldNo
foldNo | -maxWidth maxWidth | -maxFin maxFin]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-foldNo foldNo
Specify the number of the folding counters.
-glueNo glueNo
Specify a glue number.
-maxFin maxFin
Specify the maximum number of fins for FinFET MOS

devices.
-maxWidth maxWidth
Specify the maximum width for non-FinFET MOS

devices.
-obj typeName packNo
Specify a transistor type name and a pack number.
Examples
# Fold the 1st transistor of the 3rd pack into two transistors
lakerSkFold -obj pmos 3 -glueNo 1 -foldNo 2
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: Edit > Fold
K-2015.06
1475

lakerSkFuse
lakerSkFuse
The lakerSkFuse command joins two transistor packs together.
Syntax
lakerSkFuse -mode mode -point selectObjPos -traversedist
traverseDist
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode mode
start : the mode for selecting first object.

end : the mode for selecting second object.
-point selectObjPos
Specify the position of the merged outer glue block.
-traversedist traverseDist
Specify the traverse distance for the selector.
Examples
# join the glue block in position (6.809,29.414) and (7.067,29.414)
# together to become one pack. Traverse Distance is 0.299.
lakerSkFuse -mode start -point (6.809,29.414) -traversedist 0.299
lakerSkFuse -mode end -point (7.067,29.414) -traversedist 0.299
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: Edit > Merge
lakerSkLastView
The lakerSkLastView command switches the current display to the last
view.
Syntax
lakerSkLastView
1476

K-2015.06

lakerSkMergeGate
Returns
None
Examples
lakerSkLastView
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: View > Last View
lakerSkMergeGate
The lakerSkMergeGate command merges the selected gate into the target
merged gate in the same transistor.
Syntax
lakerSkMergeGate -obj mos_type index -glueNo num1 num2
-optimize 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-glueNo num1 num2
Select gate num1 to merge with gate num2, delete gate

num2.
-obj mos_type index
Select the MOS pack index in selected strip pmos or

nmos.
-optimize 0|1

K-2015.06
mos_type: The transistor type can be pmos or

nmos.
index: an integer, starting from 0.

1 : Optimize the source/drain after merging gates, even
if the order of some gates have to be changed.
0 : Optimize the source/drain only if the transistor, which
contains only one gate and no gate order change,
needs to be reversed.
1477

lakerSkMove
Examples
lakerSkMergeGate -obj pmos 0 -glueNo 2 4 -optimize 1
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: Edit > Merge Gates
lakerSkMove
The lakerSkMove command moves a transistor pack towards another.
Syntax
lakerSkMove -obj typeName fromPakcNo toPackNo [-glueNo
glueNo]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-obj typeName
fromPakcNo toPackNo
Specify a transistor type name, a pack number of the

pack to be moved, and a pack number of another
pack (destination).
-glueNo glueNo
Specify a glue number of the transistor to insert the

moved pack.
Examples
# Example 1
# Move the 1st pack of pmos after the 4th pack
lakerSkMove -obj pmos 1 4
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: Edit > Move
lakerSkNormal
The lakerSkNormal command changes the display content of the Stick
Diagram Compiler window to the normal mode.
1478

K-2015.06

lakerSkOptimizeOD
Syntax
lakerSkNormal
Returns
None
Examples
lakerSkNormal
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: View > Normal
lakerSkOptimizeOD
The lakerSkOptimizeOD command optimizes a single OD region or all OD
regions of the selected transistors.
Syntax
lakerSkOptimizeOD
Returns
None
Examples
# Example 1
# Select a transistor pack before invoking the command
lakerSkChgSelObj -reset -selType ActiveObject
lakerSkSingleSel
lakerSkOptimizeOD
# Example 2
# Select a transistor pack after invoking the command
lakerSkChgSelObj -reset -selType PackObject
lakerSkAreaSel -point (-16.768,10.345) (2.92,16.933)
lakerSkOptimizeOD
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: Edit > Optimize OD

K-2015.06
1479

lakerSkPanDown
lakerSkPanDown
The lakerSkPanDown command pans 1/2 down of the current view area to
the current window.
Syntax
lakerSkPanDown
Returns
None
Examples
lakerSkPanDown
lakerSkPanLeft
The lakerSkPanLeft command pans 1/2 left of the current view area to the
current window.
Syntax
lakerSkPanLeft
Returns
None
Examples
lakerSkPanLeft
lakerSkPanRight
The lakerSkPanRight command pans 1/2 right of the current view area to
the current window.
Syntax
lakerSkPanRight
Returns
None
1480

K-2015.06

lakerSkPanUp
Examples
lakerSkPanRight
lakerSkPanUp
The lakerSkPanUp command pans 1/2 up of the current view area to the
current window.
Syntax
lakerSkPanUp
Returns
None
Examples
lakerSkPanUp
lakerSkPreview
The lakerSkPreview command changes the display content of the Stick
Diagram Compiler window to preview the data physically.
Syntax
lakerSkPreview
Returns
None
Examples
lakerSkPreview
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: View > Preview

K-2015.06
1481

lakerSkPreference
lakerSkPreference
The lakerSkPreference command sets up user preferences for the Stick
Diagram Compiler window.
Syntax
lakerSkPreference [-gateLabel mode] [-autoBreakFinger 0|1]
[-autoGroupLayout 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-autoBreakFinger 0|1

1 : Enable the Unset Finger Groups when Editing
command.
0 : Disable the Unset Finger Groups when Editing
command.
-autoGroupLayout 0|1

1 : Enable the Create Group when Realizing
Instances option.
0 : Disable the Create Group when Realizing
Instances option.
-gateLabel mode
Specify a display mode for gate labels.

Valid values: gate, net, and all (default=all).
Examples
# Example 1
lakerSkPreference -gateLabel net
# Example 2
lakerSkPreference -autoBreakFinger 1
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: Options > Preferences
1482

K-2015.06

lakerSkRealize
lakerSkRealize
The lakerSkRealize command realizes a well-arranged logical transistors
(from the Stick Diagram Compiler window) to a physical magic cell (in the
Layout window pane).
Syntax
lakerSkRealize
Returns
None
Examples
# realize the stick diagram data to MCell
# set the active window to the layout window
lakerSchBroDrag
lakerDsgDrop
# set the active window to the stick diagram compiler window
# realize the stick diagram data to MCell and put it
# into the layout window
lakerSkRealize
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: Cell > Realize
lakerSkRechain
The lakerSkRechain command re-chains all transistors in the Stick Diagram
Compiler window, and returns to the optimal chaining status.
Syntax
lakerSkRechain
Returns
None
Examples
lakerSkRechain

K-2015.06
1483

lakerSkRedo
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: Edit > Re-chain
lakerSkRedo
The lakerSkRedo command repeats the last action performed in the Stick
Syntax
lakerSkRedo
Returns
None
Examples
lakerSkRedo
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: Edit > Redo
lakerSkRedraw
The lakerSkRedraw command redrawd the content in the Stick Diagram
Compiler window.
Syntax
lakerSkRedraw
Returns
None
Examples
lakerSkRedraw
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: View > Redraw
1484

K-2015.06

lakerSkSelRealize
lakerSkSelRealize
The lakerSkSelRealize command realizes a selected logical transistors
(from the Stick Diagram Compiler window) to a physical magic cell (in the
Layout window pane).
Syntax
lakerSkSelRealize
Returns
None
Examples
# Realize the selected stick diagram data to MCell
# Set the active window to the layout window
lakerSchBroDrag
lakerDsgDrop
# Set the active window to the stick diagram compiler window
# Realize the selected stick diagram data to MCell and put it
# into the layout window
lakerSkSelRealize
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: Cell > Realize Selected
lakerSkSplit
The lakerSkSplit command divides a pack object into two separate parts.
Syntax
lakerSkSplit -obj typeName packNo -glueNo glueNo1 [glueNo2]
Returns
None

K-2015.06
1485

lakerSkSwap
Arguments
Argument
Description
-glueNo glueNo1 [glueNo2]
Specify one or two glue numbers.
Specify a transistor type name and a pack

number.
Examples
# Divide the 1st pack into two packs from the 5th glue number
lakerSkSplit -obj pmos 1 -glueNo 5
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: Edit > Split
lakerSkSwap
The lakerSkSwap command swaps two nodes or gate groups in the same
pack.
Syntax
lakerSkSwap -obj typeName packNo -glueNo glueNo1 glueNo2 [swapGateNo fromGlueNo toGlueNo]
Returns
None
Arguments
1486
Argument
Description
-glueNo glueNo1 glueNo2
Specify two glue numbers for node swapping.
Specify a transistor type name and a pack number.
-swapGateNo
fromGlueNo toGlueNo
Specify two glue numbers for gate swapping.

K-2015.06

lakerSkUnalignGate
Examples
# Example 1
# Swap two transistor source and drain 1st and 3rd of
# the 1st pack of the pmos type
lakerSkSwap -obj pmos 1 -glueNo 1 3
# Example 2
# Swap two groups of transistor gate, the first gate group is
# 2nd of the 1st pack of the pmos type. the other gate group is
# from 3rd to 5rd of the 1st pack of the pmos type
lakerSkSwap -obj pmos 1 -glueNo 2 2 -swapGateNo 3 5
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: Edit > Swap
lakerSkUnalignGate
The lakerSkUnalignGate command breaks the alignment relationship of
selected transistor gates.
Syntax
lakerSkUnalignGate
Returns
None
Examples
# Unalign gate in (0.854, 11.515) with traverse distance 0.17
lakerSkPreSel -point (0.854, 11.515) -traversedist 0.17
lakerSkSingleSel
lakerSkUnalignGate
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: Edit > Unalign Gates
lakerSkUndo
The lakerSkUndo command reverses the last action performed in the Stick

K-2015.06
1487

Syntax
lakerSkUndo
Returns
None
Examples
lakerSkUndo
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: Edit > Undo
The lakerSkUnsetFingerGroup command unsets finger groups by the
select set. If the select set is not a finger group, no action is taken. This is
enabled only when the selected devices list has a finger-factor.
Syntax
lakerSkUnsetFingerGroup -obj master_name index
num]
[-glueNo
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-glueNo num
Select the finger group which contains the gate

number. If not specified, all finger groups on the
pack are removed.
-obj master_name index
Select the MOS pack index in the selected strip.
1488
master_name : Model name for MCells and

the full master name (lib_cell_view) for device
MOS.
index : Specify an integer, starting from 0.

K-2015.06

lakerSkZoomAll
Examples
# Example 1
lakerSkUnsetFingerGroup -obj pmos 0
# Example 2
lakerSkUnsetFingerGroup -obj nmos 1 -glueNo 2
# Example 3
lakerSkUnsetFingerGroup -obj libn65_nch_layout 0 -glueNo 10
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: Edit > Unset Finger Group
lakerSkZoomAll
The lakerSkZoomAll command fits the current data in the viewable area of
the Stick Diagram Compiler.
Syntax
lakerSkZoomAll
Returns
None
Examples
lakerSkZoomAll
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: View > Zoom All
lakerSkZoomIn
The lakerSkZoomIn command zooms in the viewable area by half of the
Stick Diagram Compiler.
Syntax
lakerSkZoomIn
Returns
None
K-2015.06
1489

lakerSkZoomOut
Examples
lakerSkZoomIn
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: View > Zoom In
lakerSkZoomOut
The lakerSkZoomOut command zooms out the viewable area by half of the
Stick Diagram Compiler.
Syntax
lakerSkZoomOut
Returns
None
Examples
lakerSkZoomOut
See Also
Stick Diagram Compiler: View > Zoom Out
1490

K-2015.06
13
13
Schematic Editor
User Interface (GUI) which applied within Schematic Editor window.
Cell Commands
View Commands
Create Commands
Edit Commands
Options Commands
Query Commands
Check Commands
Tools Commands
Miscellaneous
Cell Commands
Schematic Editor window. These commands include:
adpChangeMode
adpDiscardEdit
adpDsgCapture
adpDsgCheckSaveCmd

K-2015.06
1491
Chapter 13: Schematic Editor

Cell Commands
adpDsgCloseWnd
adpDsgLoadSession
adpDsgPrint
adpDsgSave
adpDsgSaveAs
adpDsgSaveSession
adpDsgSummary
adpLibMgrExportEDIF
adpLibMgrExportVeri
adpLibMgrOpenDesign
adpSynchronize
adpChangeMode
The adpChangeMode command changes the editing mode of the active cell
view.
Syntax
adpChangeMode -topWnd winId [-save 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-save 0|1

1 : Save the active cell view.
0 : Do not save the active cell view.
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpChangeMode -topWnd _adp2
1492

K-2015.06

Cell Commands
See Also
Cell > Change to Read Only/Edit Mode
adpDiscardEdit
The adpDiscardEdit command discards the editing actions performed and
reverts to the last saved version of the data.
Syntax
adpDiscardEdit -topWnd winId
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Examples
# Example 1
# Discard the modified design and restore to the original design
adpDiscardEdit -topWnd _adp2
See Also
Cell > Discard Edit
adpDsgCapture
The adpDsgCapture command captures the image of the Schematic Editor
window.
Syntax
adpDsgCapture -footer footercomment -file filename -Inverse
adpDsgCapture -printer printerName -type printType -copy
copyNumber -orient orientation -paper paperSize [fitpage]
Returns
None

K-2015.06
1493

Cell Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-copy copyNumber
Specify the number of copies.
-file filename
Save the captured image to a file.
-fitpage
Fit printout to a specified paper size.
-footer footercomment
Specify the footer comments.
-Inverse
Inverse the image color.
-orient orientation

Valid values: Landscape and Portrait.
-paper paperSize

Valid values: Letter, A4, A3, A2, A1, A0, B, C, D, and E.
-printer printerName
-type printType
Specify the postscript print type.

Valid values: Level1, and Level2.
Examples
# Example 1
# Specify the filename (test.png) and footer (Sheet1)
# and specify to inverse the image color
adpDsgCapture -footer Sheet1 -file test.png -Inverse
# Example 2
adpDsgCapture -printer Jupiter -type Level2 -copy 1 \
-orient Landscape -paper D -fitpage
See Also
Cell > Capture
adpDsgCheckSaveCmd
The adpDsgCheckSaveCmd command returns 1 if the Check and Save
function is executed. This command combines the functions of ERC checking
and saving.
1494

K-2015.06

Cell Commands
Syntax
adpDsgCheckSaveCmd -topWnd winId
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpDsgCheckSaveCmd -topWnd _adp2
See Also
Cell > Check and Save
adpDsgCloseWnd
The adpDsgCloseWnd command returns 1 if the Schematic Editor window is
closed.
Syntax
adpDsgCloseWnd -topWnd winId [-dmCVCkout 0|1] [-dmCVCkin
0|1] [-dmCVCkcancel 0|1]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-dmCVCkcancel 0|1

1 : Cancel the check out of cell view files, that are
checked out automatically. The default value depends on
the setting in the laker.rc file.
0 : Do not cancel the check out of cell view files.

K-2015.06
1495

Cell Commands
Argument
Description
-dmCVCkin 0|1

1 : Check in cell view files, that are checked out
automatically. The default value depends on the setting in
the laker.rc file.
-dmCVCkout 0|1

1 : Check out cell view files. The default value depends
on the setting in the laker.rc file.
-topWnd winId
Examples
# Example 1
adpDsgCloseWnd -topWnd _adp1
# Example 2
# Close an opened design and check in the checkout automatically
adpDsgCloseWnd -topWnd _adp2 -dmCVCkout 0 -dmCVCkin 1
# Example 3
# Close an opened design and cancel checkout automatically
adpDsgCloseWnd -topWnd _adp3 -dmCVCkout 0 -dmCVCkcancel 1
See Also
Cell > Close
adpDsgLoadSession
The adpDsgLoadSession command loads an existing design data to the
current schematic window. This command returns 1 if a session file has been
loaded.
Syntax
adpDsgLoadSession sessionFile
Returns
1496

K-2015.06

Cell Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
sessionFile
Specify the session file to be loaded.
Examples
adpDsgLoadSession test.ses
See Also
Cell > Load Session
adpDsgPrint
The adpDsgPrint command prints a part of schematic view or the entire
schematic view.
Syntax
adpDsgPrint -topWnd winId [-paper paperSize] [-color] [header Header] [-footer Footer] [-file fileName] [-type
fileType] [-printer printerName] [-orient orientation]
[-printRegion printRegion] [-pageNum] [-printLevel
printLevel [-dir outputDir]] [-addSerial | -addSerial
level]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-addSerial
Add an extra serial number to the output file (for example:

serialNum_cellname.ps) for each cell in the design scope.
-addSerial level
Add an extra scope level number to the output file (for

example: levelNum_cellname.ps) for the cells at the same
design scope level.
-color
If it is specified, print in colors.

If it is not specified, print in black and white.
-dir outputDir
Specify the user-defined file location for the output file.

K-2015.06
1497

Cell Commands
Argument
Description
-file fileName
Specify the output file. Valid file extensions: *.ps and *.pdf.
-footer Footer
Specify the footer strings.
-header Header
Specify the header strings.
-orient orientation

-pageNum
If it is specified, print the page number.

If it is not specified, do not print the page number.
-paper paperSize

Valid values: Letter, A4, A3, A2, A1, A0, B, C, D, E and
User-defined (default=A4).
-printer
printerName
Specify the printer name for the To Printer option.
-printLevel
printLevel
Specify the hierarchy level of the print scope.

Valid values: all and currentView.
-printRegion
printRegion
Specify the print view region.

Valid values: fullCell and screen.
-topWnd winId
-type fileType
Specify the file type.

Valid values: PS1, PS2, GL2 and PDF.
Examples
# Example 1
adpDsgPrint -topWnd _adp2 -paper A4 -color -header "" \
-footer "" -file "test.pdf" -type PDF -printRegion fullCell \
-printLevel all -pageNum
# Example 2
adpDsgPrint -topWnd _adp2 -paper A4 -color -header "" \
-footer "" -type PS2 -printer "dd" -printRegion fullCell \
-printLevel all -pageNum
1498

K-2015.06

Cell Commands
# Example 3
adpDsgPrint -topWnd _adp2 -orient portrait -paper A4 \
-color -header "" -footer "" -type PDF -printRegion fullCell \
-printLevel all -dir /laker/home/user_A/adp/print -pageNum
See Also
Cell > Print
adpDsgSave
The adpDsgSave command saves the activated design to the database.
Syntax
adpDsgSave -topWnd winId [-autoSave]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-autoSave
When specified, the design is automatically saved.
-topWnd winId
Examples
# Save the activated design to database
adpDsgSave
# Save the design automatically
adpDsgSave -autoSave
See Also
Cell > Save
adpDsgSaveAs
The adpDsgSaveAs command saves the activated design to another cell.
Syntax
adpDsgSaveAs -cell cellName [-lib libName] [-view viewName]

K-2015.06
1499

Cell Commands
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
-lib libName
Specify the library (default=the current library).
-view viewName

Valid values: schematic, symbol, and any user-defined view
Examples
# Example 1
# Save the activated design to another cell (demo) in
# the library (demo)
adpDsgSaveAs -lib demo -cell demo
See Also
Cell > Save As
adpDsgSaveSession
The adpDsgSaveSession command saves the current design into a session
file. This command returns 1 if a session file has been saved.
Syntax
adpDsgSaveSession sessionFile
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
sessionFile
Specify the session file to be saved.
Examples
adpDsgSaveSession test.ses
1500

K-2015.06

Cell Commands
See Also
Cell > Save Session
adpDsgSummary
The adpDsgSummary command displays the summary of the design.
Syntax
adpDsgSummary -topWnd winId [-file filename] [-scope scope
[-value value]]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-file filename
Specify the summary file in ASCII format

(default=adpSummary.log).
-scope scope
Specify the scope to get the summary.

Valid values: {From Current}, {From Top}, and {Whole
Design}.
-topWnd winId
-value value
Specify the cross hierarchy level.

Examples
# Example 1
# Dump the design information from Current to level 2,
# and save the summary to the default file (adpSummary.log)
adpDsgSummary -topWnd _adp2 -scope {From Current} -value 2
# Example 2
# Dump the design information from Current to level 2,
# and save the summary to a specified file (dumpSummary.log)
adpDsgSummary -topWnd _adp2 -file dumpSummary.log \
-scope {From Current} -value 2
# Example 3
# Dump the design information for the whole design,
# and save the summary to the default file (adpSummary.log)
adpDsgSummary -topWnd _adp2 -scope {Whole Design}

K-2015.06
1501

Cell Commands
See Also
Cell > Summary
adpLibMgrExportEDIF
The adpLibMgrExportEDIF command is applied to File> Export EDIF
command in the Home Page.
Refer to File Commands > adpLibMgrExportEDIF in the Home Page chapter
for details.
See Also
Cell > Export EDIF
The adpLibMgrExportSpice command is applied to File> Export Spice
Refer to File Commands > adpLibMgrExportSpice in the Home Page chapter
for details.
See Also
Cell > Export Spice
adpLibMgrExportVeri
The adpLibMgrExportVeri command is applied to File> Export Verilog
Refer to File Commands > adpLibMgrExportVeri in the Home Page chapter for
details.
See Also
Cell > Export Verilog
1502

K-2015.06

Cell Commands
adpLibMgrOpenDesign
The adpLibMgrOpenDesign command is applied to both File> Open and
Cell> New commands in the Home Page.
Refer to File Commands > adpLibMgrOpenDesign in the Home Page chapter
for details.
See Also
Cell > Open
adpSynchronize
The adpSynchronize command synchronizes and updates the cell view
content in several processes if any of the cell views opened in several
processes is modified.
Syntax
adpSynchronize -topWnd winId
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Examples
# Reload data from database
adpSynchronize -topWnd _adp2
See Also
Cell > Synchronize

K-2015.06
1503

View Commands
View Commands
Schematic Editor window. These commands includes:
adpDsgLastView
adpDsgPanDown
adpDsgPanLeft
adpDsgPanRight
adpDsgPanUp
adpDsgPopViewUp
adpDsgPushSymbolIn
adpDsgPushViewIn
adpDsgRedraw
adpDsgZoomAll
adpDsgZoomFit
adpDsgZoomFitSelSet
adpDsgZoomIn
adpDsgZoomOut
adpDsgLastView
The adpDsgLastView command changes the current view area to the last
view area.
Syntax
adpDsgLastView
Returns
None
Arguments
None
1504

K-2015.06

View Commands
Examples
# switch to the last view area
adpDsgLastView
See Also
View > Last View
adpDsgPanDown
By following the specified ratio, the adpDsgPanDown command pans the
current view area downward the current window or view box boundary.
Syntax
adpDsgPanDown [-ratio ratio]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-ratio ratio

n: 1/n of view box for each scrolled size.
Examples
# Example 1
# pan 1/4 down of current view area to the current window
adpDsgPanDown -ratio 4
# Example 2
# pan to the bottom of view box boundary
adpDsgPanDown -ratio 0
See Also
View > Pan > Pan Down
adpDsgPanLeft
By following the specified ratio, the adpDsgPanLeft command pans the
current view area to the left of the current window or view box boundary.

K-2015.06
1505

View Commands
Syntax
adpDsgPanLeft [-ratio ratio]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-ratio ratio

Examples
# Example 1
# pan 1/4 left of current view area to the current window
adpDsgPanLeft -ratio 4
# Example 2
# pan to the left of view box boundary
adpDsgPanLeft -ratio 0
See Also
View > Pan > Pan Left
adpDsgPanRight
By following the specified ratio, the adpDsgPanRight command pans the
current view area to the right of the current window or view box boundary.
Syntax
adpDsgPanRight [-ratio ratio]
Returns
None
Arguments
1506
Argument
Description
-ratio ratio


K-2015.06

View Commands
Examples
# Example 1
# pan 1/4 right of current view area to the current window
adpDsgPanRight -ratio 4
# Example 2
# pan to the right of view box boundary
adpDsgPanRight -ratio 0
See Also
View > Pan > Pan Right
adpDsgPanUp
By following the specified ratio, the adpDsgPanUp command pans the current
view area upward the current window or view box boundary.
Syntax
adpDsgPanUp [-ratio ratio]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-ratio ratio

0: Scroll to the top of the view box boundary.
Examples
# Example 1
# pan 1/4 up of current view area to the current window
adpDsgPanUp -ratio 4
# Example 2
# pan to the top of view box boundary
adpDsgPanUp -ratio 0
See Also
View > Pan > Pan Up

K-2015.06
1507

View Commands
adpDsgPopViewUp
The adpDsgPopViewUp command retraces the upper level of the design.
Syntax
adpDsgPopViewUp -topWnd winId [-net full_net_path] [-port
full_port_path]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-net full_net_path
Specify the net in full path.
-port full_port_path
Specify the port in full path.
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpDsgPopViewUp -topWnd _adp2 -net 4_bit_mux2.I0.A
See Also
View > Pop View Up
adpDsgPushSymbolIn
The adpDsgPushSymbolIn command browses the symbol view for some
selected blocks, if such symbol view exists.
Syntax
adpDsgPushSymbolIn -topWnd winId -scope scopeName -port
portName
Returns
None
Arguments
1508
Argument
Description
-port portName

K-2015.06

View Commands
Argument
Description
-scope scopeName
Specify the scope name.
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpDsgPushSymbolIn -topWnd _adp2 -scope BIT4_SW_CP_CELL \
-port BIT4_SW_CP_CELL.DN
See Also
View > Push Symbol In
adpDsgPushViewIn
The adpDsgPushViewIn command browses the schematic view for some
selected blocks, if such schematic view exists.
Syntax
adpDsgPushViewIn -topWnd winId -inst full_instance_path
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-inst full_instance_path
Specify the instance in full path.
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpDsgPushViewIn -topWnd _adp2 -inst 4_bit_mux2.I4
See Also
View > Push View In
adpDsgRedraw
The adpDsgRedraw command redraws the current view area.

K-2015.06
1509

View Commands
Syntax
adpDsgRedraw
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
# redraw the current view area
adpDsgRedraw
See Also
View > Redraw
adpDsgZoomAll
The adpDsgZoomAll command fits the current design in the Schematic
Editor window.
Syntax
adpDsgZoomAll
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
# fit the current design in the Schematic Editor window
adpDsgZoomAll
See Also
View > Zoom All
adpDsgZoomFit
The adpDsgZoomFit command fits the current design (minus border) in the
Schematic Editor window.
1510

K-2015.06

View Commands
Syntax
adpDsgZoomFit -topWnd winId
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpDsgZoomFit -topWnd _adp3
See Also
View> Zoom Fit Design
adpDsgZoomFitSelSet
The adpZoomDsgZoomFitSelSet command fits the selected object(s) to the
Syntax
adpDsgZoomFitSelSet
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
adpDsgZoomFitSelSet
See Also
View > Fit Select Set
adpDsgZoomIn
The adpDsgZoomIn command zooms in the view area by 1/2 of the active

K-2015.06
1511

View Commands
Syntax
adpDsgZoomIn
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
# zoom in the view area by 1/2 of the active
# Schematic Editor window
adpDsgZoomIn
See Also
View >Zoom In
adpDsgZoomOut
The adpDsgZoomOut command zooms out the view area by 1/2 of the active
Syntax
adpDsgZoomOut
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
# zoom out the view area by 1/2 of the active
# Schematic Editor window
adpDsgZoomOut
See Also
View > Zoom Out
1512

K-2015.06

Create Commands
Create Commands
the Schematic Editor window. These commands include:
adpCreateSymbolOption
adpDsgAddNetExpr
adpDsgAssignInstName
adpDsgAutoCreateWire
adpDsgAutoWireLabel
adpDsgCreateArcCom
adpDsgCreateCircleCom
adpDsgCreateEllipseCom
adpDsgCreateInst
adpDsgCreateLineCom
adpDsgCreateMultiSheet
adpDsgCreatePolyCom
adpDsgCreatePort
adpDsgCreateRectCom
adpDsgCreateSymbol
adpDsgCreateTextCom
adpDsgCreateTable
adpDsgCreateWireName
adpDsgPlaceWideWire
adpDsgPlaceWire
adpDsgSetGenSymbol
The adpCreateSymbolOption command logs the option information of
generated symbols.

K-2015.06
1513

Create Commands
Syntax
adpCreateSymbolOption [-pinDistance pinDistance] [pinLength pinLength] [-height height] [-width width] [origin origin] [-dotSize dotSize] [-fontStyle fontStyle]
[-fontheight fontheight][-createcdsTerm 0|1] [createcdsParam 0|1]
adpCreateSymbolOption -side side [-justify justification]
[-rotate rotate] [-offset offset]
Returns
None
Arguments
1514
Argument
Description
-createcdsParam
Valid Values: 0 and 1 (default=0).1: Create the labels

with cdsParams.0: Create the labels without
cdsParams.
-createcdsTerm
Valid values: 0 and 1 (default=0).1 : Create labels with

cdsTerms.0 : Create labels without cdsTerms.
-dotSize dotSize
Specify the dot size for a pin.

-fontheight
fontHeight
Specify the text height for created pin labels.

-fontStyle
fontStyle

Valid values: TTARomanFont, TTAGothFont, and
TTASlabFont (default=TTAGothFont).
-height height
Specify the pin height (the unit is grid resolution).

-justify
justification

-offset offset
Specify the offset between pin labels.


K-2015.06

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-origin origin
Specify the origin for a pin.

Valid values: UpperLeft, CenterLeft, and
LowerLeft (default=UpperLeft).
-pinDistance
pinDistance
Specify the pin distance (the unit is grid resolution).

-pinLength
pinLength
Specify the pin length (the unit is grid resolution).

-rotate rotate
Specify the orientation of pin labels at a specified angle.

Valid values: R0, R90, R180, and R270.
-side side
Specify the input ports for left/right/top/bottom pins.

Valid values: Left, Right, Top, and Bottom.
-width width
Specify the pin width (the unit is grid resolution).

Examples
# Example 1
adpCreateSymbolOption -pinDistance 2 -pinLength 1 -height 0 \
-width 0 -origin UpperLeft -dotSize 8 -fontStyle TTAGothFont \
-fontHeight 10
# Example 2
adpCreateSymbolOption -side Left -justify CenterLeft \
-rotate 0 -offset 2
# Example 3
adpCreateSymbolOption -side Right -justify CenterRight \
-rotate 0 -offset 2
# Example 4
adpCreateSymbolOption -side Top -justify CenterRight \
-rotate 90 -offset 2
# Example 5
adpCreateSymbolOption -side Bottom -justify CenterLeft \
-rotate 90 -offset 2
See Also
Create > Generate Symbol
adpDsgSetGenSymbol

K-2015.06
1515

Create Commands
adpDsgAddNetExpr
The adpDsgAddNetExpr command adds a net expression in the schematic
design.
Syntax
adpDsgAddNetExpr -topWnd wndId -prop propName -netName
netName -point (x0,y0) -justify justification -orient
orientation -fontStyle fontStyle -fontheight fontHeight
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-fontheight fontHeight
-fontStyle fontStyle
Specify the font style.

Specify the justification for the input text string.

LowerRight (default=LowerLeft).
-netName netName
-orient orientation

Valid values: R0, R90, R180, and R270 (default=R0).
-point (x0,y0)

-prop propName
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpDsgAddNetExpr -topWnd _adp2 -prop n2vdd -netName qq! \
-point (0.375,0.5625) -justify LowerLeft -orient R0 \
-fontStyle TTAGothFont -fontheight 0.0625
1516

K-2015.06

Create Commands
See Also
Create > Net Expression
adpDsgAssignInstName
The adpDsgAssignInstName command creates instance names.
Syntax
adpDsgAssignInstName -topWnd winId -expand 0|1 [excludeBracket 0|1] -instName instName -point (x0,y0)
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-excludeBracket 0|1

1 : Display instance names without brackets.
0 : Display instance names with brackets.
-expand 0|1

1 : Display the array expansion.
0 : Do not display the array expansion.
-instName instName
-point (x0,y0)

-topWnd winId
Examples
adpDsgAssignInstName -topWnd _adp2 -expand true -instName A1
-point (478,1229) -excludeBracket true
See Also
Create > Assign Instance Name

K-2015.06
1517

Create Commands
adpDsgAutoCreateWire
The adpDsgAutoCreateWire command creates wire segments for floating
instance ports in the whole design or selected instances.
Syntax
adpDsgAutoCreateWire -topWnd winId [-whole | -select] [sysNetName | -pinName | -userDefined [-pattern
patternName]] [-addTerminal] -wireLength Num [-inst
instNameArray]
Returns
None
Arguments
1518
Argument
Description
-addTerminal
If specified, add the NoConnection symbol at the tail

of each new wire.
-inst instNameArray
Specify the array name of all instances if -select is

specified. The format of instNameArray is:
{instName1 instName2 instName3 instName4
...}
-pattern patternName
Specify the user-defined content.
-pinName
Assign a net name for the created wire. The net name
is the same as the associated pin.
-select
If specified, wire segments are created automatically for

all selected instances that have one or more floating
instance ports.
-sysNetName
Assign a system-reserved net name for the created

wire.
-topWnd winId
-userDefined
Assign a user-defined net name for the created wire.
-whole
If specified, wire segments are created automatically for

all instances that have one or more floating instance
ports in the current scope.

K-2015.06

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-wireLength Num
Specify the new wire length.

Valid value: an integer. The minimum is 1, and the
default is 20.
Examples
adpDsgAutoCreateWire -topWnd _adp3 -whole -sysNetName \
-wireLength 20
See Also
Create > Auto Create Wire
adpDsgAutoWireLabel
The adpDsgAutoWireLabel command assigns wire names and
automatically creates net labels for user-defined wire segments in the
schematic.
Syntax
adpDsgAutoWireLabel -topWnd winId -all -fontheight
fontheight -fontStyle fontStyle [-filter string]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-all
If it is specified, net labels are created for all wire segments.

If it is not specified, net labels are created for user-defined nets
only.
-filter string
Specify a net label filter to exclude the net name with the
specified prefix. The default prefix is N_.
-fontheight
fontHeight
Specify the text height for created net labels.

-fontStyle
fontStyle
Specify the font type for the input text string.


K-2015.06
1519

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Examples
# Example 1
adpDsgAutoWireLabel -topWnd _adp2 -userDefinedNet \
-fontheight 10 -fontStyle TTARomanFont
# Example 2
adpDsgAutoWireLabel -topWnd _adp3 -all -fontheight 10 \
-fontStyle TTARomanFont
See Also
Create > Auto Net Label
adpDsgCreateArcCom
The adpDsgCreateArcCom command returns a dbFigId if the specified arc
can be created.
Syntax
adpDsgCreateArcCom -topWnd winId -point (x0,y0) (x1,y1)
(x2,y2) [-layer LayerName]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-layer LayerName
-point (x0,y0)
(x1,y1) (x2,y2)
x0, x1, and x2 specify the left value, the right value,
and the center value for the x coordinate points
respectively while y0, Y1 and Y2 specify the values for
the y coordinate point.
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpDsgCreateArcCom -topWnd _adp2 -point \
(-390,210) (-200,120) (-260,240)
1520

K-2015.06

Create Commands
See Also
Create > Note > Arc
adpDsgCreateCircleCom
The adpDsgCreateCircleCom command returns a dbFigId if the specified
circle shape can be created.
Syntax
adpDsgCreateCircleCom -topWnd winId -point (x0,y0) -value
value [-layer LayerName]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-layer LayerName
-point (x0,y0)

-topWnd winId
-value value
Examples
adpDsgCreateCircleCom -topWnd _adp2 -point (600,-120) -value 42
See Also
Create > Note > Circle
adpDsgCreateEllipseCom
The adpDsgCreateEllipseCom command returns a dbFigId if the specified
Syntax
adpDsgCreateEllipseCom -topWnd winId -bbox (x0,y0)(x1,y1)
[-layer LayerName]

K-2015.06
1521

Create Commands
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-bbox (x0,y0) (x1,y1)

-layer LayerName
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpDsgCreateEllipseCom -topWnd _adp2 -bbox (730,400) (1000,530)
See Also
Create > Note > Ellipse
adpDsgCreateInst
The adpDsgCreateInst command returns a dbFigId if the specified instance
or array cell can be created.
Syntax
adpDsgCreateInst -topWnd winId [-lib libName] -cell cellName
[-inst instName] -point (x0,y0) (x1,y1) (x2,y2)... [-rows
rowsNo] [-columns columnsNo]
Returns
Arguments
1522
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
Specify the instance cell.
-columns columnsNo

-inst instName
Specify the instance name (default=system assigned).

K-2015.06

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-lib libName
-point (x0,y0)
(x1,y1) (x2,y2)...
(x0,y0) specifies the starting point of the instance

while (x1,y1) specifies the second point, (x2,y2)
specifies the second point, and so on.
-rows rowsNo

-topWnd winId
Examples
adpDsgCreateInst -topWnd _adp2 -lib local -cell cap \
-instName test -point (40,810) (520,520) (40,810) \
-rows 2 -columns 3
See Also
Create > Instance
adpDsgCreateLineCom
The adpDsgCreateLineCom command returns a dbFigId if the specified line
can be created.
Syntax
adpDsgCreateLineCom -topWnd winId -point (x0,y0)(x1,y1)...
[-layer LayerName]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-layer LayerName
-point (x0,y0) (x1,y1)...
(x0,y0) specifies the starting point of the line while

(x1,y1) specifies the second point, and so on.
-topWnd winId

K-2015.06
1523

Create Commands
Examples
adpDsgCreateLineCom -topWnd _adp2 -point \
(810,320) (930,320) (930,240) (1010,240) (1010,150)
See Also
Create > Note > Line
adpDsgCreateMultiSheet
The adpDsgCreateMultiSheet command creates multiple sheets in the
schematic design.
Syntax
adpDsgCreateMultiSheet -topWnd winId [-num sheetNum -lib
libName -cell cellName]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
Specify the cell name for border symbols.
-lib libName
Specify the library name for border symbols.
-num sheetNum
Specify the sheet number.

Valid value: a positive integer, greater than or equal to
1 (default=1).
-topWnd winId
Examples
# Example 1
# Create multiple sheets when borders exist
adpDsgCreateMultiSheet -topWnd _adp2
# Example 2
# Create multiple sheets when no border exists
adpDsgCreateMultiSheet -topWnd _adp2 -num 1 -lib borderADP \
-cell A_border
See Also
Create > Multiple Sheets
1524

K-2015.06

Create Commands
adpDsgCreatePolyCom
The adpDsgCreatePolyCom command returns a dbFigId if the specified
polygon can be created.
Syntax
adpDsgCreatePolyCom -topWnd winId -point (x0,y0)(x1,y1)...
[-layer LayerName]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-layer LayerName
-point (x0,y0) (x1,y1)...
(x0,y0) specifies the starting point of the polygon

while (x1,y1) specifies the second point, etc.
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpDsgCreatePolyCom -topWnd _adp2 -point \
(0,660) (0,620) (20,620) (20,640) (40,640) (40,660)
See Also
Create > Note > Polygon
adpDsgCreatePort
The adpDsgCreatePort command returns a dbFigId if the specified port can
be created.
Syntax
adpDsgCreatePort -topWnd winId -cell ipin|opin|iopin portName portName -point (x0,y0)
Returns

K-2015.06
1525

Create Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell ipin|opin|iopin
Specify the direction of the port.
-point (x0,y0)

-portName portName
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpDsgCreatePort -topWnd _adp2 -cell ipin -portName test -point
(20,740)
See Also
Create > Port
adpDsgCreateRectCom
The adpDsgCreateRectCom command returns a dbFigId if the specified
rectangle shape can be created.
Syntax
adpDsgCreateRectCom -topWnd winId -bbox (x0,y0)(x1,y1) [layer LayerName]
Returns
Arguments
1526
Argument
Description
-bbox (x0,y0) (x1,y1)
(x0,y0) specifies the lower left corner of the rectangle

-layer LayerName
-topWnd winId

K-2015.06

Create Commands
Examples
adpDsgCreateRectCom -topWnd _adp2 -bbox (-80,610) (-40,660)
See Also
Create > Note > Rectangle
adpDsgCreateSymbol
The adpDsgCreateSymbol command returns 1 if a symbol for the current
schematic has been created.
Syntax
adpDsgCreateSymbol -topWnd winId -append [-createcdsTerm
0|1] [-createcdsParam 0|1]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-createcdsParam 0|1
Valid Values: 0 and 1 (default=0).1:Create the labels

with cdsParams.0: Create the labels without
cdsParams.
-createcdsTerm 0|1
Valid Values: 0 and 1 (default=0).1:Create the labels

with cdsTerms.0: Create the labels without cdsTerms.
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpDsgCreateSymbol -topWnd _adp2
See Also
adpDsgCreateTextCom
The adpDsgCreateTextCom command returns a dbFigId if the specified text
label can be created.

K-2015.06
1527

Create Commands
Syntax
adpDsgCreateTextCom -topWnd winId -text {text} -point
(x0,y0) -fontheight fontHeight -fontStyle fontStyle justify justification -orient orientation [-layer
LayerName] [-color color] [-style style] [-file fileName]
Returns
Arguments
1528
Argument
Description
-color color
Specify the color of the selected object with the color

selection list.
-file fileName
Import the specified text file. The file extension is txt.
-fontheight
fontHeight
-fontStyle
fontStyle


-layer LayerName
-orient orientation

-point (x0,y0)

-style style
Specify the style of the selected object with the style

selection list.
-text {text}
Specify the text strings.
-topWnd winId

K-2015.06

Create Commands
Examples
adpDsgCreateTextCom -topWnd _adp2 -text {test} -point (450,540)
-fontheight 10 -fontStyle TTARomanFont -justify CenterCenter orient R0
See Also
Create > Note > Text
adpDsgCreateTable
The adpDsgCreateTable command creates a table to add the logical
comments or truth table.
Syntax
adpDsgCreateTable -topWnd winId -table tableName -namePos
namePosition -title title -titlePos titlePosition -row
numRows -column numColumns [-autoAdjust 0|1] -width width
-height height [-rotate 0|1] -fontHeight fontHeight fontStyle fontStyle [[-cellData cellData] -point (x0,y0)]
|[-file fileName]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-autoAdjust 0|1
Valid values: 0 and 1 (default=0).1 : Auto adjust the

width of the columns and the height of the rows.0 : Do
not auto adjust the width of the columns and the height
of the rows.
-cellData cellData
Specify the text string in the table.

Valid value: {cellData00 cellData01}
{cellData10 cellData11} (the list sequence is
from the first column in the first row to the last column
in the last row).
-file fileName

K-2015.06
Import the specified table settings file. The file

extension is cvs.
1529

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-column numColumns

-fontHeight fontHeight

Valid value: a positive integer, 1-100000
(default=10).

-height height
Specify the row height.

(default=14).
-namePos namePosition Specify the position of the name label.

Valid values: None, topLeft, topCenter,
topRight,
bottomLeft, bottomCenter, and bottomRight
(default= topLeft).
-point (x0,y0)

-rotate 0|1
Valid values: 0and 1 (default=0).1 : Rotate the first

row to vertical direction.0 : Do not rotate the first row to
vertical direction.
-row numRows

-table tableName
Specify the name of the table.
-title title
Specify the title of the table.
-titlePos titlePosition
Specify the position of the title label.

Valid values: None, topLeft, topCenter,
topRight,
bottomLeft, bottomCenter, and bottomRight
(default= topRight).
1530

K-2015.06

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
-width width
Specify the column width.

(default=20).
Examples
adpDsgCreateTable -topWnd _adp2 -table region -namePos topLeft \
-title options -titlePos topRight -row 2 -column 2 -width 20 \
-height 14 -fontHeight 10 -fontStyle TTARomanFont \
-cellData {{} {a}} {{b} {0}}
See Also
Create > Table
adpDsgCreateWireName
The adpDsgCreateWireName command returns a dbFigId if the specified
wire name can be created.
Syntax
adpDsgCreateWireName -topWnd winId -placeObj placeObj expand 0|1 -netName netName [-refpoint (x0,y0)] -point
(x0,y0) [-label [-fontheight fontHeight] [-fontStyle
fontStyle] [-justify justification] [-orient
orientation] ]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-expand 0|1

1 : Display bus expansion.
0 : Do not display bus expansion.
-fontheight
fontHeight
Specify the text height for created net labels.

K-2015.06
1531

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-fontStyle
fontStyle

-netName
netName
-placeObj
placeObj
Specify the wire type.

Valid values: single, multiple, and bundle.
-justify
justification

-orient
orientation

MYR90, and auto.
-point (x0,y0)

-refpoint (x0,y0)
Specify the reference point for multiple wire type.x0

specifies a position value for the x coordinate point while y0
-topWnd winId
Examples
# Example 1
adpDsgCreateWireName -topWnd _adp2 -placeObj single -expand 0 \
-netName test -point (-1989,460) -label -fontheight 10 \
-fontStyle TTARomanFont -justify LowerLeft -orient auto
# Example 2
adpDsgCreateWireName -topWnd _adp2 -placeObj multiple -expand 0 \
-netName test -refpoint (-2020,460) -point (-2020,440) -label \
-fontheight 10 -fontStyle TTARomanFont -justify LowerLeft \
-orient auto
See Also
Create > Net Label
1532

K-2015.06

Create Commands
adpDsgPlaceWideWire
The adpDsgPlaceWideWire command returns a dbFigId if the wide wire can
be created.
Syntax
adpDsgPlaceWideWire -topWnd winId -point (x0,y0) (x1,y1)
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
(x0,y0) specifies the starting point of the wide wire

while (x1,y1) specifies the end point of the wide wire.
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpDsgPlaceWideWire -topWnd _adp2 -point (110,740) (110,750)
See Also
Create > Wide Wire
adpDsgPlaceWire
The adpDsgPlaceWire command returns a dbFigId if the wire can be
created.
Syntax
adpDsgPlaceWire -topWnd winId -point (x0,y0) (x1,y1) lineWidth wvalue
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lineWidth wvalue
Specify the width of the wire.

K-2015.06
1533

Create Commands
Argument
Description
(x0,y0) specifies the starting point of the wire while

(x1,y1) specifies the end point of the wire.
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpDsgPlaceWire -topWnd _adp2 -point (180,460) (180,450) \
-lineWidth 4
See Also
Create > Wire
adpDsgSetGenSymbol
The adpDsgSetGenSymbol command logs the pin information and creates
the symbol.
Syntax
adpDsgSetGenSymbol -side side [-order order] -pinName
pinName [-direction direction] [-style style] -topWnd
winId
adpDsgSetGenSymbol -topWnd winId -create
Returns
None
Arguments
1534
Argument
Description
-create
If specified, the symbol view is created.
Specify the pin direction by side.

Valid values: Input, Output, and InOut
(default=Input).
-order order
Specify the pin order by side.

Valid value: a positive integer, the minimum is 1.
-pinName pinName
Specify the pin name by side.

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
Argument
Description
-side side
Specify the input ports for left/right/top/bottom pins.

Valid values: Left, Right, Top, and Bottom.
-style style
Specify the pin style by side.

Valid values: Square, ActHi, ActHi2, and
commActLo (default=ActHi).
-topWnd winId
Examples
# Example 1
adpDsgSetGenSymbol -side Left -order 1 -pinName in1 \
-direction Input -style Square -topWnd _adp2
# Example 2
adpDsgSetGenSymbol -side Right -order 1 -pinName out1 \
-direction Output -style Square -topWnd _adp2
# Example 3
adpDsgSetGenSymbol -topWnd _adp2 -create
See Also
Edit Commands
adpDsgCopy
adpDsgDelete
adpDsgDeselectAll
adpDsgEditAvaiProp
adpDsgMirrorX
adpDsgMirrorY
adpDsgMove

K-2015.06
1535

Edit Commands
adpDsgPaste
adpDsgRedo
adpDsgRotateLeft
adpDsgRotateRight
adpDsgSelectAll
adpDsgStretch
adpDsgStretch2
adpDsgSwitchPage
adpDsgUndo
adpDsgYank
adpDsgCopy
The adpDsgCopy command copies the selected object from a point to a
reference point.
Syntax
adpDsgCopy -topWnd winId -point (x0,y0) -refPoint (x1,y1)
[-orient orientation] [-RenameNetLabel] [-rows rowsNo]
[-columns columnsNo]
Returns
None
Arguments
1536
Argument
Description
-columns columnsNo
Specify the number of objects to be copied in columns.

-orient orientation
Specify the orientation of objects.

-point (x0,y0)
Specify a starting point to copy. x0 specifies a reference

position value for the x coordinate point while y0

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
Argument
Description
-refPoint (x1,y1)
Specify the destination for the copied object. x1

specifies a reference position value for the x coordinate
point.
-RenameNetLabel
When specified, enable the Rename Net Label

option.
-rows rowsNo
Specify the number of objects to be copied in rows.

-topWnd winId
Examples
# Example 1
# Copy an array of selected objects
adpDsgCopy -topWnd _adp2 -point (70,-20) (-50,-20) (-100,10) \
-refpoint (30,190) -orient R0 -rows 2 -columns 3
# Example 2
# Copy selected objects and rename net labels
adpDsgCopy -topWnd _adp2 -point (10,230) -refpoint (10,260) \
-orient R0 -RenameNetLabel
See Also
Edit > Copy
adpDsgDelete
The adpDsgDelete command deletes the selected object(s).
Syntax
adpDsgDelete
Returns
None
Examples
adpDsgDelete
See Also
Edit > Delete

K-2015.06
1537

Edit Commands
adpDsgDeselectAll
The adpDsgDeselectAll command deselects all selected objects in the
active cell view.
Syntax
adpDsgDeselectAll
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
adpDsgDeselectAll
See Also
Edit > Deselect All
adpDsgEditAvaiProp
The adpDsgEditAvaiProp command edits available properties in the
schematic design.
Syntax
adpDsgEditAvaiProp -topWnd wndId -inst instanceName actionType actionType -prvalue prvalue
Returns
None
Arguments
1538
Argument
Description
-actionType actionType
Specify the actions to edit the available properties.

Valid values: overrideNet and chgConnParam.
-inst instanceName

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
Argument
Description
-prvalue prvalue
Specify the property name values.

Valid values: propName overrideNetName and
propName connectionName.
-topWnd winId
Examples
# Example 1
adpDsgEditAvaiProp -topWnd _adp2 -inst I5 \
-actionType overrideNet -prvalue {n3gnd 3.3v!}
# Example 2
adpDsgEditAvaiProp -topWnd _adp2 -inst I5 \
-actionType chgConnParam -prvalue {n3gnd 2nvdd vdd!}
See Also
Edit > Net Expression > Available Properties
adpDsgMirrorX
The adpDsgMirrorX command mirrors the selected objects along the x axis.
Syntax
adpDsgMirrorX
Returns
None
Examples
# Example 1
adpDsgMirrorX
See Also
Edit > Mirror X
adpDsgMirrorY
The adpDsgMirrorY command mirrors the selected objects along the y axis.

K-2015.06
1539

Edit Commands
Syntax
adpDsgMirrorY
Returns
None
Examples
# Example 1
adpDsgMirrorY
See Also
Edit > Mirror Y
adpDsgMove
The adpDsgMove command moves the selected object from one point to
another.
Syntax
adpDsgMove -topWnd winId -point (x0,y0) -refPoint (x1,y1) orient orientation
Returns
None
Arguments
1540
Argument
Description
-orient orientation

-point (x0,y0)
Specify a starting point to move. x0 specifies a

-refPoint (x1,y1)
Specify the destination for the moved object. x1

point.
-topWnd winId

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
Examples
adpDsgMove -topWnd _adp2 -point (560,620) -refpoint (530,690) \
-orient R0
See Also
Edit > Move
adpDsgPaste
The adpDsgPaste command pastes the yanked object from clipboard to the
current cell view.
Syntax
adpDsgPaste -topWnd _adp2 -point (x0,y0) [-orient
orientation] [-RenameNetLabel] [-justify justification]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
Specify the justification for the pasting reference point.

-orient orientation

-point (x0,y0)
Specify a starting point to paste. x0 specifies a position

value for the x coordinate point while y0 specifies the
value for the y coordinate point.
-RenameNetLabel
When specified, enable the Rename Net Label

option.
-topWnd winId

K-2015.06
1541

Edit Commands
Examples
# Example 1
adpDsgPaste -topWnd _adp2 -point (32,16) -orient MX \
-justify CenterLeft
See Also
Edit > Paste
adpDsgRedo
The adpDsgRedo command repeats the last action performed.
Syntax
adpDsgRedo
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
# Example 1
# Redo the last editing command
adpDsgRedo
See Also
Edit > Redo
adpDsgRotateLeft
The adpDsgRotateLeft command rotates the selected objects at 90
degrees counterclockwise.
Syntax
adpDsgRotateLeft -topWnd winId -point (x0,y0)
Returns
None
1542

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-point (x0,y0)

-topWnd winId
Examples
adpDsgRotateLeft -topWnd _adp2 -point (490,670)
See Also
Edit > Rotate 90
adpDsgRotateRight
The adpDsgRotateRight command turns the selected objects at 90 degrees
clockwise.
Syntax
adpDsgRotateRight -topWnd winId -point (x0,y0)
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-point (x0,y0)

-topWnd winId
Examples
adpDsgRotateRight -topWnd _adp2 -point (490,670)
See Also
Edit > Rotate 270

K-2015.06
1543

Edit Commands
adpDsgSelectAll
The adpDsgSelectAll command selects all objects in the active cell view.
Syntax
adpDsgSelectAll
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
adpDsgSelectAll
See Also
Edit > Select All
adpDsgStretch
The adpDsgStretch command stretches one or more selected objects from a
point to another point. This command returns 1 if the stretch command is
executed.
Syntax
adpDsgStretch -topWnd winId -point (x0,y0) -refpoint (x1,y1)
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-point (x0, y0)
Specify the start point for stretching.
-refpoint (x1, y1)
Specify the end point for stretching.
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpDsgStretch -topWnd _adp2 -point (250, 170) -refpoint (180, 140)
1544

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
See Also
Edit > Stretch
adpDsgStretch2
The adpDsgStretch2 command stretches selected instances, ports and
wires from a point to another point.
Syntax
adpDsgStretch2 -topWnd windId -point (x0,y0) -refpoint
(x1,y1) [-orient orientation] [-routeMode routeMode] [extendWire] [-extendInst] [-extendPort] [-lock]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-extendInst
If it is specified, the anchor points are extended when

stretching instances.
-extendPort

stretching IO pads.
-extendWire

stretching wires.
-lock
If it is specified, the angle of the selected object, vertex

or edge are locked when stretching.
If it is not specified, the angle of the selected object,
vertex or edge are not locked.
-orient orientation

Valid values: R0, R90, R180, R270, MRX0, MRX90, MRY0,
and MRY90.
-point (x0, y0)
-refpoint (x1, y1)

K-2015.06
1545

Edit Commands
Argument
Description
-routeMode
routeMode
Specify the route mode.

Valid values: full, easy, direct, and flight
(default=full).
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpDsgStretch2 -topWnd _adp3 -point (100, 200) -refpoint (200,
300)\
-routeMode full -orient R0 -extendInst -lock
See Also
Edit > Stretch
adpDsgSwitchPage
The adpDsgSwitchPage command returns 1 if a sheet schematic has been
switched.
Syntax
adpDsgSwitchPage -topWnd winId -pageName pageName -scope
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-pageName pageName
Specify the name of the sheet schematic to be

switched.
-scope
Specify the scope.
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpDsgSwitchPage -topWnd _adp2 -pageName a2 -scope
See Also
Edit > Sheet
1546

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
adpDsgUndo
The adpDsgUndo command reverses the last action performed.
Syntax
adpDsgUndo
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
# Example 1
# Undo the last editing command
adpDsgUndo
See Also
Edit > Undo
adpDsgYank
The adpDsgYank command yanks the selected object(s) to a yank buffer for
further paste command.
Syntax
adpDsgYank -topWnd winId [-point (x1,y1) ... (xn,yn)] [RenameNetLabel]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-point (x1,y1)
... (xn,yn)
Specify the coordinate points for the yank area. If only

two points are specified, (x1,y1) specifies the lower left
corner of the bounding box while (x2,y2) specifies the
upper right corner. If this argument is not specified, the
selected objects are copied to the yank buffer.
-RenameNetLabel
When specified, enable the Rename Net Label option.

K-2015.06
1547

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Examples
# Example 1
adpDsgYank -topWnd _adp2
See Also
Edit > Yank
Options Commands
adpDsgChangeGrid
adpDsgEditLayerTbl
adpDsgChangeGrid
The adpDsgChangeGrid commad sets up the grid attributes and the rules of
cursor snapping.
If the -gridResolution, -major, -snapGridresolution, or -type
arguments are not specified with Tcl, the existing settings for these arguments
stay as is.
Syntax
adpDsgChangeGrid -topWnd windId [-type type] [gridResolution value] [-major value] [snapGridResolution snapGridResolution]
Returns
None
1548

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-gridResolution value
Specify the grid resolution.

Valid value: integer, 0.00625-1.
-major value
Specify the interval to show major grid dots or lines in

pixels.
Valid value: integer, 2-100.
-snapGridResolution
snapGridResolution
Specify the cursor step distance.

Valid values: primary, half, or integer 1-100.
-topWnd winId
-type type
Specify the grid type.

Valid values: 0 (None), 1 (Dot), and 2 (Line).
Examples
# Example 1
adpDsgChangeGrid -topWnd _adp2 -major 5 \
-snapGridResolution primary -type 1
See Also
Options > Change Grid
adpDsgEditLayerTbl
The adpDsgEditLayerTbl command returns 1 if a layer has been edited.
Syntax
adpDsgEditLayerTbl -topWnd winId -name attrName -color
colorType -stipple stippleType -lineStyle lineStyle
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-color colorType

K-2015.06
1549

Query Commands
Argument
Description
-lineStyle lineStyle
Specify line the style.
-name attrName
-stipple stippleType
Specify the stipple type.
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpDsgEditLayerTbl -topWnd _adp2 -name adpPWRBusNetColor \
-color ID_Red4 -stipple GDC_UNDEFINED_STIPPLE \
-lineStyle line_solid
See Also
Options > Layer Table Editor
Query Commands
adpDsgEditProperty
adpDsgQueryFind
adpDsgQueryProp
adpDsgQueryReplace
adpDsgSignalHier
adpPickParameter
adpDsgEditProperty
The adpDsgEditProperty command displays the property information on
This command also renames instances, net labels, ports, and net expressions.
1550

K-2015.06

Query Commands
Syntax
adpDsgEditProperty -topWnd winId -label
{netLabelName|annotationText} [-add] [-del] [-common] [inst instName|-net netName|-port portName] [-width
lineWidth] [-point (x0,y0)] [-oldname oldname -newname
newname] [-cell cellName -lib libName] [-prname
promptName] [-updateCB procname] [-net net -netName
netName][-direction direction]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-netName netName
Specify the default global net name.
-add
Add the property into the property list.
-cell cellName
Specify the cell name. This is used to replace the

symbol of a port. The old symbol is kept if the
specified cell does not exist or the specified cell is not
a port.
-common
Show common attributes of selected objects.
-del
Delete the property from the property list.
Specify the port direction.

Valid values: Input, Output, and InOut.
-inst instName
-label {netLabelName|
annotationText}
Specify the text string of the new net or annotation

text.
Valid value: any text string.
-lib libName
-net net
Specify the selected net.
-net netName
Specify the net label.
-newname newname
Specify the new name for the selected instance, net

label, or port.

K-2015.06
1551

Query Commands
1552
Argument
Description
-oldname oldname
Specify the existing name of the selected instance,

net label, or port.
-point (x0,y0)

-port portName
-prname promptName
Specify the prompt name.
-topWnd winId
-updateCB procname
Update the callback function.

If procname is null, all procedures are called.
If procname is not null, only the specified procedure
is called.
-width lineWidth
Specify the line width.


K-2015.06

Query Commands
Examples
# Example 1
adpDsgEditProperty -topWnd adp2 -inst MMP2 -add \
-prname new_0 -point (185,440)
# Example 2
# Modify the instance name
adpDsgEditProperty -topWnd _adp2 -inst MMP2 -oldname MMP2 \
-newname MMMP3 -point (185,440)
# Example 3
# Query the wire name
adpDsgEditProperty -topWnd _adp2 -net abbc -oldname abbc \
-newname abdbc -point (85,180)
# Example 4
# Modify the port name
adpDsgEditProperty -topWnd _adp2 -port port1 -oldname port1 \
-newname port11 -point (82,200)
# Example 5
# Query a net label to change the label name
adpDsgEditProperty -topWnd _adp3 -index 1 -label A<0:3> \
-point (250,825) -fontheight 10 -justify LowerCenter \
-fontStyle TTAGothFont -orient R90 -layer adpNetNameColor
# Example 6
adpDsgEditProperty -topWnd _adp2 -port A -oldname A \
-newname A -cell inv -lib digitalADP -point (320,60)
# Example 7
adpDsgEditProperty -topWnd _adp3 -common -net n_1 \
-width 1 -point (185,440)
# Example 8
adpDsgEditProperty -topWnd _adp2 -net bbb! -prop aaaa \
-netName bbb! -point (0.25,1.625)
See Also
Query > Attribute
adpDsgQueryFind
The adpDsgQueryFind command searches the specified object(s) according
to the search criteria.

K-2015.06
1553

Query Commands
Syntax
adpDsgQueryFind -topWnd winId -type searchType -searProp
searchProp [-case 0|1] [-zoomToSelectSet 0|1] -scope
scopeLevel [-value value] [-regular 0|1] [-noGUI]
Returns
None
Arguments
1554
Argument
Description
-case 0|1

string(s).
-noGUI
If it is specified, the Find form is closed after the Find

operation.
-regular 0|1

1 : Use Regular Expression mode.
0 : Use Easy Expression mode.
-scope scopeLevel
Specify the search scope.

Valid values: All, and Current.
-searProp searchProp
Specify the search criteria list. The criteria include

name, operation and value field, where the name is
used for specific attributes, instance, library, or
properties for the object type; the operation is for
objects equal to (==) or not equal to (!=) the criteria;
and the value field sets the attribute value.
-topWnd winId
-type searchType
Set the object type to be searched.

Valid values: Instance, Net, Port, PseudoRC, and
UndefinedInstance.
-value value
Control the number of design hierarchy levels that are

searched.
Valid value: integer (default=0).

K-2015.06

Query Commands
Argument
Description

0 : Do not zoom the window view to the searched
object.
Examples
adpDsgQueryFind -topWnd _adp2 -type Instance \
-searProp { Instance == X1 } -case false -regular 1 \
-zoomToSelectSet true -scope All -value 2
See Also
Query > Find
adpDsgQueryProp
The adpDsgQueryProp command edits cell view properties in the schematic.
Syntax
adpDsgQueryProp -topWnd winId -lib libName -cell cellName
[-add | -delete] -prname propName -propAttr {{name} {type}
{value}} -value {{propName} {typeName} {valueName}}
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-add
Add a property to the cell view.
-cell cellName
-delete
Delete a property from the cell view.
-lib libName
-prname propName
Specify the property name to be modified.

K-2015.06
1555

Query Commands
Argument
Description
-propAttr
{{name} {type} {value}}
Specify the property attributes to be modified.

{name} specifies the property name, {type}
specifies the property type, and {value} specifies
the property value.
-topWnd winId
-value {{propName}
{typeName} {valueName}}
Specify a new value for the corresponding property

attributes. {propName} specifies a new property
name, {typeName} specifies a new property type,
and {valueName} specifies a new property value.
Examples
# Example 1
adpDsgQueryProp -topWnd _adp2 -lib test -cell nmos \
-prname instNamePrefix -propAttr {{nam} {type} {value}} \
-value {{namePrefix} {string} {N}}
# Example 2
adpDsgQueryProp -topWnd _adp2 -lib test -cell nmos -delete \
-prname instNamePrefix
# Example 3
adpDsgQueryProp -topWnd _adp2 -lib test -cell nmos -add \
-prname new_0 -propAttr {{nam} {type} {value}} \
-value {{ new_0} {string} { }}
See Also
Query > Cell View Property
adpDsgQueryReplace
The adpDsgQueryReplace command modifies all objects found by the
Replace command.
Syntax
adpDsgQueryReplace -topWnd winId -type searchType [-regular
0|1] -searProp searchProp [-case 0|1] [-zoomToSelectSet
0|1] -row rowNumber -scope scopeLevel [-value value] inst instName -replace replaceString [-noGUI]
1556

K-2015.06

Query Commands
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-case 0|1

string(s).
-inst instName
Specify the instance.
-noGUI
If it is specified, the Replace form is closed after the

Replace operation.
-repProp replaceProp
Replacement properties include name and value field.

The name is for specific attributes, instance, library, or
properties for the object type; and the value field sets the
attribute value.
-row rowNumber
Specify the row number.
-regular 0|1

1 : Use Regular Expression mode.
0 : Use Easy Expression mode.
-scope scopeLevel
Specify the search scope.

Valid values: All, and Current.
Specify the search criteria list. The criteria include name,

operation and value field. The name is for specific
attributes, instance, library, or properties for the object
type; the operation is for objects equal to (==) or not
equal to (!=) the criteria; and, the value field sets the
attribute value.
-topWnd winId
-type searchType
Specify the object type to be searched.

Valid values: Instance, Net, Port, PseudoRC, and
UndefinedInstance.

K-2015.06
1557

Query Commands
Argument
Description
-value value

searched.
Valid value: integer (default=0).

Examples
adpDsgQueryReplace -topWnd _adp2 -type Instance -regular 1 \
-searProp { Instance == vcc1 } -case 0 -zoomToSelectSet 1 \
-scope All -row 0 -repProp { Library local inv_sim } { None } \
-inst { vcc1 inv_sim} -replace demoReplaceString
See Also
Query > Replace
adpDsgSignalHier
The adpDsgSignalHier command queries the net connection information.
Syntax
adpDsgSignalHier -topWnd winId [-netName netName | -delete
inputNetName] [-level level] [-zoomToHighLighSet 0|1] [color layerName] [-dump 0|1 [-file filename]]
Returns
None
Arguments
1558
Argument
Description
-color layerName
Specify the layer to highlight the traced net.
-dump 0|1

1 : Save the settings and the traced results to a file.
0 : Do not save the settings and the traced results to a
file.
-delete inputNetName
Specify the input net name. -delete is used for

removing the highlights of previously traced results.

K-2015.06

Query Commands
Argument
Description
-file filename
Specify the ASCII file with its full path. This is only used
with the -dump argument.
-level level
Specify the tracing level.

Valid value: integer (1 to 50).
-netName netName
Specify the input net name. -netName is used for

tracing a new net.
-topWnd winId
-zoomToHighLighSet 0|1

1 : Enable the Zoom to Traced Net option.
0 : Disable the Zoom to Traced Net option.
Examples
# Example 1
# Trace net B<1> at all levels
adpDsgSignalHier -topWnd adp2 -netName B<1> \
-zoomToHighLighSet 0 -color HighLightSignalLayer1
# Example 2
# Trace net A at level 1
adpDsgSignalHier -topWnd _adp3 -netName N_1 -level 1 \
-zoomToHighlighSet 0 -color
# Example 3
# Trace net first and then specify a level to filter the results
adpDsgSignalHier -topWnd _adp3 -netName N_1 \
-zoomToHighlighSet 0 -color
adpDsgSignalHier -topWnd _adp3 -level 1
# Example 4
# Save the settings and the traced results to an ASCII file
adpDsgSignalHier -topWnd _adp2 -dump 1 \
-file /home/user/work/NetTrace/Scan/bb
See Also
Query > Net Tracer

K-2015.06
1559

Check Commands
adpPickParameter
The adpPickParameter command the parameters of selected devices in the
schematic.
Syntax
adpPickParameter
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
adpDsgSel -point (3.2375,6.2125) \
-aperture (3.23125,6.20625)(3.24375,6.21875)
adpDsgSel -bbox (2.96875,3.375)(5.9375,6.025)
adpDsgDrag
adpPickParameter
See Also
Query > Pick Parameter
Check Commands
This section describes the Tcl commands applied to the Check commands of
1560
adpCreateERCRule
adpCreateERCViolation
adpDsgCheckCurrentCell
adpDsgCheckTop
adpDsgMarkerBrowser
adpDsgDelAllMarker
adpDsgSetupRule
adpDsgCheckOffGridObj

K-2015.06

Check Commands
adpCreateERCRule
The adpCreateERCRule command creates a new rule check into the ERC
system.
Syntax
adpCreateERCRule -ruleName ruleName -proc procName -shortMsg
shortMsg [-category category] [-ruleSetting ruleSetting]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-category category
Specify the name of the category for the rule check.
-proc procName
-ruleName ruleName
Specify the option name for the rule check.
-ruleSetting ruleSetting
Specify the settings of the rule check with the

following format:
{[{Enable = TRUE|FALSE}][{SeverityType
= Message|Error|Warning}][{StopExport
= TRUE|FALSE}]}
-shortMsg shortMsg
Specify the short description for the rule check.
Examples
# Example 1
adpCreateERCRule -ruleName Port Name With A\
-proc checkRule_portNameWithA -shortMsg Port Name With A\
-category User -ruleSetting{{Enable TRUE}{SeverityType Warning}
{StopExport FALSE}}
See Also
Check > Setup ERC Rules

K-2015.06
1561

Check Commands
adpCreateERCViolation
The adpCreateERCViolation command creates a violation object in the
system to record the information of the violations. The program creates
markers according to the violation objects.
Syntax
adpCreateERCViolation -design oaDesign -message message\
[-polygon points] [-objects oaBlockObject]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-design oaDesign
Specify the design (oaDesign) to which the violation

belongs.
-message message
-objects oaBlockObject
Collection of oaBlockObjects which are associated

with this violation.
-polygon points
Specify the Tcl list of points describing the polygon

shape for the violation region/marker.
Examples
# Example 1
adpCreateERCViolation -design oa:0xae0f79a\
-message The port A has A in its name\
-objects{oa:0xae0f11e oa:0xae0f12e oa:0xae0f13e}\
-polygon {{0.9875 4.94375}{1.25 4.94375} {1.25 5.05625}\
{0.9875 5.05625}}
See Also
adpDsgCheckCurrentCell
The adpDsgCheckCurrentCell command checks the current cell by the
ERC rules.
1562

K-2015.06

Check Commands
Syntax
adpDsgCheckCurrentCell [-dump fileName]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-dump fileName
Specify a file to save the ERC result. The default is

CheckError.dump.
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpDsgCheckCurrentCell -dump
See Also
Check > Current Cell
adpDsgCheckTop
The adpDsgCheckTop command checks the whole design by the ERC rules.
Syntax
adpDsgCheckTop [-dump fileName]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-dump fileName
Specify a file to save the ERC result. The default is

CheckError.dump.
Examples
adpDsgCheckTop -dump
See Also
Check > Current Cell

K-2015.06
1563

Check Commands
adpDsgMarkerBrowser
The adpDsgMarkerBrowser command specifies the ERC rules to search the
error markers in the design.
Syntax
adpDsgMarkerBrowser [-scope scopeView]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-scope scopeView
Specify the level to search the errors by the ERC

rules.
Valid values: currentCellView,
hierFromTopCellView, and
hierFromCurrentCellView.
Examples
# Example 1
adpDsgMarkerBrowser -scope currentView
See Also
Check > Marker Browser
adpDsgDelAllMarker
The adpDsgDelAllMarker command deletes the error markers in the
design have been searched.
Syntax
adpDsgDelAllMarker [-scope scopeView] [-severity setting]
Returns
None
1564

K-2015.06

Check Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-scope scopeView
Specify the level to delete the markers.

Valie values: currentView, hierFromTop, and
hierFromCurrentView (default= currentView).
-severity setting
Specify the deleted markers with the following

settings: all, annotation, info,
acknowledgedWarning, warning,
signedOffError, error,
signedOffCriticalError, criticalError, or
fatalErr (default= all).
Examples
# Example 1
adpDsgDelAllMarker -severity [all] -scope hierFromTop
# Example 2
adpDsgDelAllMarker -severity [warning error] -scope currentView
See Also
Check > Delete All Markers
adpDsgSetupRule
The adpDsgCheckRule command specifies the ERC rules for listing the
warning/error report on the General, Connectivity, Namespace, Physical,
Compatibility, and Design Integrity rules. This command returns 1 if the ERC
for the selected cell has been checked.
Syntax
adpDsgSetupRule [-chkOnly 0|1] [-chkforce 0|1] [ [-all 0|1]
| [-chkInPin | setting] [-chkOutPin | setting] [-chkBiPin
| setting] [-chkIOPort | setting] [-chkNet | setting] \
[-chkShort | setting] [-chkShortNets | setting] \
[-chkNetLabelConflict | setting] [-chkPowGndShortIO |
setting] [-chkConnectionSizeMismatch | setting] \
[-chkWire | setting] [-chkOverInst | setting] \
[-chkImplictRepeatNets | setting] [-chkUndefinedSymbol
| setting] [-chkDupName | setting] [-chkDupCellName |
setting] [-chkIncomPortPad | setting] [-chkMulPin |

K-2015.06
1565

Check Commands
setting] [-chkPowGndShort | setting] [-chkInConSymbol |

setting] [-chkTopWithoutSymbol | setting]][-ruleSetting
RuleSetting]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-all 0|1

1 : Specify checking rules for all checking options.
0 : Do not specify checking rules for all checking
options.
-chkBiPin | setting
Specify the checking rule for floating bidirectional

pins with the following setting:
[Enable 0|1] [-severityType Type]
[-stopExport 0|1]
-chkConnectionSizeMismatch |
setting
Specify the checking rule for mismatched

connection bit size with the following setting:
[-stopExport 0|1]
1566
Enable 0|1: The default is 1. Refer to Enable

for details.
-severityType Type: The default is error.
Refer to -severityType for details.
-stopExport 0|1: The default is 0. Refer to
-stopExport for details.

for details.

K-2015.06

Check Commands
Argument
Description
-chkDupCellName | setting
Specify the checking rule for the duplicated cell

names with the following setting:
[-stopExport 0|1]
-chkDupName | setting

for details.
-severityType Type: The default is
warning. Refer to -severityType for details.
Specify the checking rule for signal names that are

different only in capital/lower cases with the
following setting:
[-stopExport 0|1]

for details.
-chkforce 0|1

1 : Check the design after running the Check
command.
0 : Do not check the design after running the Check
command.
-chkImplcitRepeatNets | setting
Specify the checking rule for system

repeated nets with the following
setting:
[-stopExport 0|1]

K-2015.06

for details.
1567

Check Commands
Argument
Description
-chkInconPortPad | setting
Specify the checking rule for whether a port has

multiple pads and whether the port direction is
different for any of the port pads with the following
setting:
[-stopExport 0|1]
-chkInconSymbol | setting
Specify the checking rule for whether any port name

in the schematic matches the pin name in the
symbol with the following setting:
[-stopExport 0|1]
-chkInPin | setting

for details.
Specify the checking rule for floating input pins with

the following setting:
[-stopExport 0|1]
1568

for details.

for details.

K-2015.06

Check Commands
Argument
Description
-chkIOPort | setting
Specify the checking rule for floating I/O ports with

the following setting:
[-stopExport 0|1]
-chkMulPin | setting
Specify the checking rule for schematic ports that

have the same port name with the following setting:
[-stopExport 0|1]
-chkNet | setting

for details.
Specify the checking rule for floating nets with the

following setting:
[-stopExport 0|1]

K-2015.06

for details.

for details.
1569

Check Commands
Argument
Description
-chkNetLabelConflict | setting
Specify the checking rule for whether a wire has

different labels with the following setting:
[-stopExport 0|1]
-chkOnly 0|1

1 : Check the design without creating the markers.
0 : Do not check the design without creating the
markers.
-chkOutPin | setting
Specify the checking rule for floating output pins

with the following setting:
[-stopExport 0|1]
-chkOverInst | setting

for details.
Specify the checking rule for overlapping instances

[-stopExport 0|1]
1570

for details.

for details.

K-2015.06

Check Commands
Argument
Description
-chkPowGndShort | setting
Specify the checking rule for Power/Ground pins/

nets that connect to other power/Ground pins/nets
[-stopExport 0|1]
-chkPowGndShortIO | setting
Specify the checking rule for Power/Ground pins/

nets that connect to schematic ports with the
following setting:
[-stopExport 0|1]
-chkShort | setting

for details.
Specify the checking rule for shorted output pins

[-stopExport 0|1]

K-2015.06

for details.

for details.
1571

Check Commands
Argument
Description
-chkShortNets | setting
Specify the checking rule for shorted nets with the

following setting:
[-stopExport 0|1]

for details.
-chkTopWithoutSymbol | setting Specify the checking rule for non-existent symbol

views in the top cell with the following setting:
[-stopExport 0|1]
-chkUndefinedSymbol | setting
Specify the checking rule for undefined symbols

[-stopExport 0|1]
1572

for details.

for details.

K-2015.06

Check Commands
Argument
Description
-chkWire Setting
Specify the checking rule for unconnected wires

[-stopExport 0|1]
-ruleSetting RuleSetting

for details.
Specify the user defined rule settings with the

following format:
{{{ruleName1}{Enable TRUE|FALSE}
{SeverityType Message|Error|Warning}
{StopExport TRUE|FALSE}}
{{ruleName2}{Enable TRUE|FALSE}
{SeverityType Message|Error|Warning}
{StopExport TRUE|FALSE}} }
-severityType Type
Specify the type of the severity.

Valid values: message, warning, and error.
-stopExport 0|1

1 : Do not export errors when exporting the design
or creating the netlist.
0 : Export errors when exporting the design or
creating the netlist.
Enable 0|1

1 : Enable the option to check errors.
0 : Disable the option for error checking.
Examples
# Example 1
adpDsgCheckRule chkInPin {{Enable 1} \
{-severityType warning} {-stopExport 0}} -chkNet {{Enable 1}}
# Example 2
adpDsgCheckRule chkOnly 1
# Example 3
adpDsgCheckRule -all 0
K-2015.06
1573

Tools Commands
See Also
adpDsgCheckOffGridObj
The adpDsgCheckOffGridObj command shows the information of the offgrid objects in the Schematic Editor window.
Syntax
adpDsgCheckOffGridObj -topWnd winId -mode Cell|Select
-instPin|-wire|-netLabel
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-instPin|-wire|-netLabel
Specify the displayed information tab (default =

-instPin).
-mode Cell|Select
Specify the area to search for off-grid objects.

Valid values: Cell and Select (default = Cell).
-topWnd winId
Examples
# Example 1
adpDsgCheckOffGridObj -topWnd _adp9 -mode Cell -wire
See Also
Check > Off-grid Objects
Tools Commands
This section describes the Tcl commands applied to the Tools commands of
1574
adpCrossProbe
adpDsgAllDCVal

K-2015.06

Tools Commands
adpDsgLoadSimFile
adpDsgParasiticNet
adpDsgShowAnnCmd
adpDsgShowDCOPValue
adpDsgShowDCRegion
adpDsgShowDCVoltValue
adpDsgToolAna
simOpenWnd
adpCrossProbe
The adpCrossProbe command enables or disables the cross probing mode
to the LakerWave window. This command returns 1 if the cross probing mode
is set to the LakerWave window.
Syntax
adpCrossProbe -topWnd winId -mode 0|1
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode 0|1

1 : Turn on the cross probing mode.
0 : Turn off the cross probing mode.
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpCrossProbe -topWnd _adp2 -mode 1
See Also
Tools > Cross Probing

K-2015.06
1575

Tools Commands
adpDsgAllDCVal
The adpDsgAllDCVal command returns 1 if the Show OP Values form has
been invoked.
Syntax
adpDsgAllDCVal -topWnd winId
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpDsgAllDCVal -topWnd _adp2
See Also
Tools > Show OP Values
adpDsgLoadSimFile
The adpDsgLoadSimFile command returns 1 if the simulation file has been
loaded.
Syntax
adpDsgLoadSimFile -topWnd winId -file simulationFile -active
0|1 [-load 0|1] [-sim simType] [-netlist netlist] [-alter
alterName] [-data dataName] [-time time]
Returns
Arguments
1576
Argument
Description
-active 0|1

1 : Perform back-annotation for the selected file.
0 : Do not perform back-annotation for the selected file.

K-2015.06

Tools Commands
Argument
Description
-alter alterName
Specify the alter statement to be back-annotated.

Valid values: the first alter name (if the alter name is
defined) or DEFAULT, Alter_1, Alter_2, ...,
Alter_n (if the alter name is not defined).
-data dataName
Specify the data statement to be back-annotated.

Valid values: The defined data name (if the data name is
defined) or Index_0, Index_1, Index_2, ...,
Index_n (if the data name is not defined).
-file simulationFile
Specify the simulation file to be loaded.
-load 0|1

1 : Load the simulation file.
0 : Change the simulation file.
-netlist netlist
Specify the netlist file type.

Valid values: Hspice, CDL, SmartSpice, Eldo, and
Spectre (default=Spectre).
-sim simType
Specify the simulator type.

Valid values: Hspice, SmartSpice, Eldo, and
Spectre (default=Spectre).
-time time
Specify the simulation time to be back-annotated.

Valid values: The defined simulation time, starting from
0 or larger than 0, for example: 5n, 6n, 7n, ...
-topWnd winId
Examples
# Example 1
adpDsgLoadSimFile -topWnd _adp2 \
-file /laker/simulation/opamp_t.lis -sim Hspice
# Example 2
adpDsgLoadSimFile -topWnd _adp2 -active 1 -load 0 -file 0.dp0 \
-netlist Hspice -alter 1 -data Index_1 -time 5n
See Also
Tools > Annotate OP

K-2015.06
1577

Tools Commands
adpDsgParasiticNet
The adpDsgParasiticNet command supports RC back-annotation to the
schematic. This command returns 1 if the specified file has been dumped.
Syntax
adpDsgParasiticNet -topWnd winId [-dumpFile dumpFileName]
[-mode mode] [-reducedRC] [-foldNotation value]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-dumpFile
dumpFileName
Specify the file to be dumped.
-foldNotation value
Specify the folding notation.

Valid values: __, @, a space or any characters (default=@).
If it is not specified, use the default folding notation @ or
the last saved folding notation.
1578
-mode mode
Specify the display mode.

Valid values: all, R, and C.
-reducedRC
If it is specified, the reduced RC information is shown in

the schematic.
-topWnd winId

K-2015.06

Tools Commands
Examples
# Example 1
adpDsgParasiticNet -topWnd _adp3 -dumpFile R.txt
# Example 2
adpDsgParasiticNet -topWnd _adp3 -mode all
# Example 3
# Show reduced RC, and use the default folding notation @
adpDsgParasiticNet -topWnd _adp3 -reducedRC
# Example 4
# Set the folding notation value as NULL
adpDsgParasiticNet -topWnd _adp3 -reducedRC -foldNotation
# Example 5
# Set the folding notation value as .
adpDsgParasiticNet -topWnd _adp3 -reducedRC -foldNotation .
See Also
Tools > Parasitic
adpDsgShowAnnCmd
The adpDsgShowAnnCmd command logs the information of the Display Data
section of the Annotate OP form.
Syntax
adpDsgShowAnnCmd -topWnd winId [-dc 0|1] [-dcvolt 0|1]
[-dcapa 0|1] [-dcregion 0|1] [-dccut 0|1] [-dccuteq 0|1]
[-dccuteqtxt {text}] [-dclinear 0|1] [-dclineareq 0|1]
[-dclineareqtxt {text}] [-dcsaturi 0|1] [-dcsaturieq 0|1]
[-dcsaturieqtxt {text}] [-dcsubth 0|1] [-dcsubtheq 0|1]
[-dcsubtheqtxt {text}] [-dcbreak 0|1] [-dcbreakeq 0|1]
[-dcbreakeqtxt {text}] [-dcuser 0|1] [-dcusereq 0|1] [dcusereqtxt {text}] [-dcbjtoff 0|1] [-dcbjtoffeq 0|1] [dcbjtoffeqtxt {text}] [-dcbjtsat 0|1] [-dcbjtsateq 0|1]
[-dcbjtsateqtxt {text}] [-dcbjton 0|1] [-dcbjtoneq 0|1]
[-dcbjtoneqtxt {text}] [-dcbjtrev 0|1] [-dcbjtreveq 0|1]
[-dcbjtreveqtxt {text}] [-dcbjtbreak 0|1] [-dcbjtbreakeq
0|1] [-dcbjtbreakeqtxt {text}] [-dcbjtuser 0|1] [dcbjtusereq 0|1] [-dcbjtusereqtxt {text}]
Returns
None

K-2015.06
1579

Tools Commands
Arguments
1580
Argument
Description
-dc 0|1

1 : Enable the OP Values option.
0 : Disable the OP Values option.
-dcapa 0|1

1 : Enable the Node Capacitance option.
0 : Disable the Node Capacitance option.
-dcbjtbreak 0|1

1 : Show the Breakdown region for BJT devices.
0 : Do not show the Breakdown region.
-dcbjtbreakeq 0|1

1 : Set an equation for the Breakdown region for BJT
devices.
0 : Do not set an equation for the Breakdown region.
-dcbjtbreakeqtxt {text}
Equation text string for the Breakdown region for BJT

devices.
-dcbjtoff 0|1

1 : Show the Off region for BJT devices.
0 : Do not show the Off region.
-dcbjtoffeq 0|1

1 : Set an equation for the Off region for BJT devices.
0 : Do not set an equation for the Off region.
-dcbjtoffeqtxt {text}
Equation text string for the Off region for BJT devices.
-dcbjton 0|1

1 : Show the On region for BJT devices.
0 : Do not show the On region.
-dcbjtoneq 0|1

1 : Set an equation for the On region for BJT devices.
0 : Do not set an equation for the On region.

K-2015.06

Tools Commands
Argument
Description
-dcbjtoneqtxt {text}
Equation text string for the On region for BJT devices.

-dcbjtrev 0|1

1 : Show the rev region for BJT devices.
0 : Do not show the rev region.
-dcbjtreveq 0|1

1 : Set an equation for the rev region for BJT devices.
0 : Do not set an equation for the rev region.
-dcbjtreveqtxt {text}
Equation text string for the rev region for BJT devices.
-dcbjtsat 0|1

1 : Show the Saturation region for BJT devices.
0 : Do not show the Saturation region.
-dcbjtsateq 0|1

1 : Set an equation for the Saturation region for BJT
devices.
0 : Do not set an equation for the Saturation region.
-dcbjtsateqtxt {text}
Equation text string for the Saturation region for BJT

devices.
-dcbjtuser 0|1

1 : Show the User-Defined region for BJT devices.
0 : Do not show the User-Defined region.
-dcbjtusereq 0|1

1 : Set an equation for the User-Defined region for BJT
devices.
0 : Do not set an equation for the User-Defined region.
-dcbjtusereqtxt {text}
Equation text string for the User-Defined region for

BJT devices.
-dcbreak 0|1

1 : Show the Breakdown region for MOS devices.
0 : Do not show the Breakdown region.

K-2015.06
1581

Tools Commands
1582
Argument
Description
-dcbreakeq 0|1

1 : Set an equation for the Breakdown region for MOS
devices.
0 : Do not set an equation for the Breakdown region.
-dcbreakeqtxt {text}
Equation text string for the Breakdown region for MOS

devices.
-dccut 0|1

1 : Show the Cutoff region for MOS devices.
0 : Do not show the Cutoff region.
-dccuteq 0|1

1 : Set an equation for the Cutoff region for MOS
devices.
0 : Do not set an equation for the Cutoff region.
-dccuteqtxt {text}
Equation text string for the Cutoff region for MOS

devices.
-dclinear 0|1

1 : Show the Linear region for MOS devices.
0 : Do not show the Linear region.
-dclineareq 0|1

1 : Set an equation for the Linear region for MOS
devices.
0 : Do not set an equation for the Linear region.
-dclineareqtxt {text}
Equation text string for the Linear region for MOS

devices.
-dcregion 0|1

1 : Enable the Working Region option.
0 : Disable the Working Region option.
-dcsaturi 0|1

1 : Show the Saturation region for MOS devices.
0 : Do not show the Saturation region.

K-2015.06

Tools Commands
Argument
Description
-dcsaturieq 0|1

1 : Set an equation for the Saturation region for MOS
devices.
0 : Do not set an equation for the Saturation region.
-dcsaturieqtxt {text}
Equation text string for the Saturation region for MOS

devices.
-dcsubth 0|1

1 : Show the Subthreshold region for MOS devices.
0 : Do not show the Subthreshold region.
-dcsubtheq 0|1

1 : Set an equation for the Subthreshold region for
MOS devices.
0 : Do not set an equation for the Subthreshold
region.
-dcsubtheqtxt {text}
Equation text string for the Subthreshold region for

MOS devices.
-dcuser 0|1

1 : Show the User-Defined region for MOS devices.
0 : Do not show the User-Defined region.
-dcusereq 0|1

1 : Set an equation for the User-Defined region for
MOS devices.
0 : Do not set an equation for the User-Defined region.
-dcusereqtxt {text}
Specify the equation text string for the User-Defined

region for MOS devices.
-dcvolt 0|1

1 : Enable the Node Voltage option.
0 : Disable the Node Voltage option.
-topWnd winId

K-2015.06
1583

Tools Commands
Examples
# Example 1
adpDsgShowAnnCmd -dcsubth 1 -dcsubtheq 0 -dcsubtheqtxt \
-dcbreak 1 -dcbreakeq 0 -dcbreakeqtxt -dcuser 1 -dcusereq 1 \
-dcusereqtxt {$id>0} -dcbjtoff 1 -dcbjtoffeq 0 \
-dcbjtoffeqtxt -dcbjtsat 1 -dcbjtsateq 0 -dcbjtsateqtxt \
-dcbjton 1 -dcbjtoneq 0 -dcbjtoneqtxt -dcbjtrev 1 -dcbjtreveq 0 \
-dcbjtreveqtxt -dcbjtbreak 1 -dcbjtbreakeq 0 -dcbjtbreakeqtxt \
-dcbjtuser 1 -dcbjtusereq 0 -dcbjtusereqtxt
See Also
Tools > Annotate OP
adpDsgShowDCOPValue
The adpDsgShowDCOPValue command returns 1 if the operation value of DC
can be back-annotated to the schematic.
Syntax
adpDsgShowDCOPValue -topWnd winId -display 0|1
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-display 0|1

1 : Show the operation value of DC.
0 : Hide the operation value of DC.
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpDsgShowDCOPValue -topWnd _adp2 -display 1
See Also
Tools > Annotate OP
1584

K-2015.06

Tools Commands
adpDsgShowDCRegion
The adpDsgShowDCRegion command returns 1 if the device working region
of DC has been annotated.
Syntax
adpDsgShowDCRegion -topWnd winId -display 0|1
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-display 0|1

1 : Show the DC region.
0 : Do not show the DC region.
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpDsgShowDCRegion -topWnd _adp2 -display 1
See Also
Tools > Annotate OP
adpDsgShowDCVoltValue
The adpDsgShowDCVoltValue command returns 1 if the node voltage of DC
can be back-annotated to the schematic.
Syntax
adpDsgShowDCVoltValue -topWnd winId -display 0|1
Returns

K-2015.06
1585

Tools Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-display 0|1

1 : Show the node voltage of DC.
0 : Do not show the node voltage of DC.
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpDsgShowDCVoltValue -topWnd _adp2 -display 1
See Also
Tools > Annotate OP
adpDsgToolAna
The adpDsgToolAna command returns 1 if a LakerWave window has been
opened.
Syntax
adpDsgToolAna -topWnd winId
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpDsgToolAna -topWnd _adp2
See Also
Tools > Waveform Analyzer
1586

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
simOpenWnd
The SimOpenWnd command returns 1 if a Simulation Console window is
opened.
Syntax
simOpenWnd
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
simOpenWnd
See Also
Tools > Simulation
Miscellaneous
This section describes the Tcl commands applied to the other commands in the
adpDsgChgSelMode
adpDsgEnterBox
adpDsgEnterLine
adpDsgEnterPoint
adpDsgEnterPolygon
adpDsgGetSelect
adpDsgGetTreeInst
adpDsgSetSelect
adpDumpCV
adpGetCurrentHierName
adpGetSelectHierName

K-2015.06
1587

Miscellaneous
adpGetTextEditor
adpGetwtWndId
adpMergeMultiPage
adpDsgChgSelMode
The adpDsgChgSelMode command changes the selection mode in the
Syntax
adpDsgChgSelMode -topWnd winId -mode selMode
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode selMode

Valid values: Object , Vertex and Edge.
-topWnd winId
Examples
# Example 1
# Change select mode to [V/E] mode in the Schematic Editor window
# _adp3
adpDsgChgSelMode -topWnd _adp3 -mode Vertex
# Example 2
# Change select mode to [OBJ] mode in the Schematic Editor window
# _adp3
adpDsgChgSelMode -topWnd _adp3 -mode Object
adpDsgEnterBox
The adpDsgEnterBox command returns {x1, y1} {x2, y2} if the coordinates of
the bounding box can be obtained.
Syntax
adpDsgEnterBox -topWnd winId [-timeout time]
1588

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Returns
{x1, y1} {x2, y2} if successful; otherwise, returns TIMEOUT if -timeout
is specified; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-timeout time
Specify the time period for enabling adpDsgEnterBox. If

the time is expired, the Tcl is aborted. The time is in seconds
(secs).
-topWnd winId
Examples
# Example 1
adpDsgEnterBox -topWnd _adp2
# the return values can be {100, 200} {134,296}
# Example 2
adpDsgEnterBox -topWnd _adp3 -timeout 30
# the return values can be TIMEOUT
adpDsgEnterLine
The adpDsgEnterLine command returns a list of points if the coordinates of
the line can be obtained.
Syntax
adpDsgEnterLine -topWnd winId
Returns
A list of points if successful; otherwise, returns 0.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Examples
# Example 1
adpDsgEnterLine -topWnd _adp2
# the return values can be {100, 200} {100, 300} {200, 300}...

K-2015.06
1589

Miscellaneous
adpDsgEnterPoint
The adpDsgEnterPoint command returns returns {x1, y1} if the
coordinates of the clicked point can be obtained.
Syntax
adpDsgEnterPoint -topWnd winId [-timeout time]
Returns
One points coordinates {x1,y1} if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
TIMEOUT if fail to get the coordinate of the clicked point with the timeout
Arguments
Argument
Description
-timeout
Specify the time period to invoke the adpDsgEnterPoint

command. If the time is expired, the command is aborted.
The time is in seconds (secs).
-topWnd winId
Examples
# Example 1
# the return value can be {100, 200}
adpDsgEnterPoint -topWnd _adp2
# Example 2
# the return value can be TIMEOUT
adpDsgEnterPoint -topWnd _adp3 -timeout 30
adpDsgEnterPolygon
The adpDsgEnterPolygon command returns {x1, y1} ... {xn, yn} if the
coordinates of the polygon can be obtained.
Syntax
adpDsgEnterPolygon -topWnd winId [-timeout time]
Returns
{x1, y1} ... {xn, yn} if successful; otherwise, returns TIMEOUT if timeout is specified; otherwise, returns nothing.
1590

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Arguments
Argument
Description
-timeout time
Specify the time period for enabling

adpDsgEnterPolygon. If the time is expired, the Tcl is
aborted. The time is in seconds (secs).
-topWnd winId
Examples
# Example 1
adpDsgEnterPolygon -topWnd _adp2
# the return values can be {100, 200} {134,296} {176,253}
# Example 2
adpDsgEnterPolygon -topWnd _adp3 -timeout 20
# the return values can be TIMEOUT
adpDsgGetSelect
The adpDsgGetSelect command returns the select set identifier in the
Syntax
adpDsgGetSelect -topWnd winId [-logic]
Returns
Get the select set identifier if successful; otherwise, returns nothing.
Arguments
Argument
Description
-logic
Get logical shapes or objects.
-topWnd winId
Examples
# Example 1
# get physical shapes/objects
adpDsgGetSelect -topWnd winId
# Example 2
# get logical shapes/objects
adpDsgGetSelect -topWnd winId -logic

K-2015.06
1591

Miscellaneous
adpDsgGetTreeInst
The adpDsgGetTreeInst command returns 1 if the current node in the
design hierarchy browser pane can be obtained.
Syntax
adpDsgGetTreeInst -topWnd winId
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpDsgGetTreeInst -topWnd _adp2
adpDsgSetSelect
The adpDsgSetSelect command returns 1 if the select set identifier is set.
Syntax
adpDsgSetSelect -topWnd winId -seltab obj1 obj2 ... objn
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-seltab obj1 obj2 ... objn
Set the select set identifier (Id).
-topWnd winId
Examples
adpDsgSetSelect -topWnd _adp2 -seltab 30f1f28
1592

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
adpDumpCV
The adpDumpCV command dumps the information of notes.
Syntax
adpDumpCV -lib LibName -cell CellName -view viewName -shape
-label [-layer LayerName] [-sheet sheetNum]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell CellName
Specify the cell containing the information of notes.
-label
Dump the information of text labels.
-layer LayerName
-lib libName
-shape
Dump the information of shapes.
-sheet sheetNum
Specify the sheet number of multi-sheet cell views.

Valid value: a positive integer, greater than or equal to
1.
-view viewName
Specify the view to be configured.
Examples
# Example 1
adpDumpCV -lib libA -cell test -shape -label -layer Comments
# Example 2
# If it is a multi-sheet cell view, only objects in Sheet1 are
# dumped; if it is not a multi-sheet cell view, the whole cell view
# is dumped.
adpDumpCV -lib libA -cell testB -view schematic -sheet 1
adpGetCurrentHierName
The adpGetCurrentHierName command displays the full path name of the
current cell.
K-2015.06
1593

Miscellaneous
When -netlist or -obj is specified for hierarchical instances, if the Name

Prefix text field in the Netlist tab of the Parameter Dialog form contains
characters "" (for example: "x"), the prefix string is returned as x. If the Name
Prefix text field is empty, an x is added to the prefix string for all netlist types
except Spectre. If the Name Prefix text field is empty, an x is not automatically
added to the prefix string for the Spectre netlist.
Syntax
adpGetCurrentHierName -topWnd winId [-netlist netType] [obj objectId] [-trimtop 0|1] [-delimiter delimiter] [dump fileName] [-top 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
1594
Argument
Description
-delimiter delimiter
Assign the hierarchical delimiter for objects. If the

parameter is not set, the default delimiter is used.
-dump fileName
Specify the file name to dump the results. The default file
name is adpGetCurrentHierName.log.
-netlist netType
Dump the prefix string of the full path name of instances

by specifying the net type.
Valid values: hspice, cdl, eldo, smartspice, and
verilog.
-top 0|1

1 : Show the top level port name.
0 : Do not show the top level port name.
-obj objectId
Dump the prefix string of the full path name of objects

(instances, nets, or ports) by specifying the object
identifier (instanceId, netId, or portId).
-topWnd winId
-trimtop 0|1

1 : Remove the top scope. For example, if the original
value contains top.xi1.a, the returned value is
xi1.a.
0 : Return the original value.

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Examples
# Example 1
# Show the full path name (SplitP.X1.X1) of the current cell.
adpGetCurrentHierName -topWnd _adp2
# Example 2
# Show the full path name (SplitP.X1.X1) of the current cell
# and dump the results to a.out
adpGetCurrentHierName -topWnd _adp2 -dump a.out
# Example 3
# Show the full path name (SplitP/X1/X1) of the
# current cell with delimiter "/".
adpGetCurrentHierName -topWnd _adp2 -delimiter /
Figure 1
Examples 1-3
# Example 4
# Dump the prefix string of the full path name (inv.XX1.XX2)
# of instances by specifying the net type
adpGetCurrentHierName -topWnd _adp2 -netlist Hspice
# Example 5
# Dump the prefix string of the full path name of objects
# (inv.X1.X2.Mn, if the object type is an instance)
# by specifying the object identifier
adpGetCurrentHierName -topWnd _adp2 -obj 0x21563480
# Example 6
# (inv.XX1.XX2.MMn, if the object type is an instance)
adpGetCurrentHierName -topWnd _adp2 -netlist hspice \
-obj 0x21563480

K-2015.06
1595

Miscellaneous
# Example 7
# (inv.X1.X2.A, if the object type is a net or port)
adpGetCurrentHierName -topWnd _adp2 -obj 0x21563480
adpGetSelectHierName
The adpGetSelectHierName command displays the full path name of the
selected objects.
Syntax
adpGetSelectHierName -topWnd winId [-delimiter delimiter]
[-inst] [-port] [-net] [-netlist netType] [-dump
fileName]
Returns
None
Arguments
1596
Argument
Description
-delimiter delimiter
Assign the delimiter of the hierarchy name of the objects.

If the parameter is not set, the default delimiter is used.
-dump fileName
Specify the file name to dump the results.
-inst
Show the full path name of the selected instance only.
-net
Show the full path name of the selected net only.
-netlist netType
Add the prefix string of the full path name of instances by

specifying the net type.
Valid values: hspice, cdl, eldo, smartspice, and
verilog.
-port
Show the full path name of the selected port only.
-topWnd winId

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Examples
# Example 1
# Show the full path name of all of the selected objects.
adpGetSelectHierName -topWnd _adp2
# Example 2
# Show the full path name of the selected instance
# and net objects.
adpGetSelectHierName -topWnd _adp2 -inst -net
# Example 3
# Show the full path name with the prefix of hspice
# of the selected instance and dump the results to a.out
adpGetSelectHierName -topWnd _adp2 -inst -netlist hspice
-dump a.out
# Example 4
# Show the full path name of all of the selected objects with
# the delimiter "."
adpGetSelectHierName -topWnd _adp2
adpGetTextEditor
The adpGetTextEditor command displays the value of the text editor.
Syntax
adpGetTextEditor -dump fileName
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-dump fileName
Specify the file name to dump the results.
Examples
# Example 1
# Show the value of the text editor.
adpGetTextEditor
# Example 2
# Show the value of the text editor and dump the results to a.out.
adpGetTextEditor -dump a.out

K-2015.06
1597

Miscellaneous
adpGetwtWndId
The adpGetwtWndId command returns a window identifier if the window
identifier of the current Schematic Editor or Symbol Editor window can be
obtained.
Syntax
adpGetwtWndId
Returns
Arguments
None
Examples
# Example 1
# Get the window Id of the current window
adpGetwtWndId
adpMergeMultiPage
The adpMergeMultiPage command merges the cell view(s) with multiple
pages into one schematic.
-lib libName [-cell cellName] specify the library and cells to be
merged.
If the specified cellview contains multiple pages, it is merged. The cell view
to be merged should be closed, otherwise the merge operation is failed.
If only the library is specified (the cell name is not specified), all cells in the
library are scanned, and if any cell views contain multiple pages, they are
merged.
If there are conflicting names, the instances are renamed in

pageName_instName format, and the net and port names remain
unchanged.
[-fixSize] [-borderWidth width] [-borderHeight height]

specify the border size of each page.
1598

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
If -fixSize is not specified, the origin size of each page is used.
If -fixSize is specified, each page is applied with a fixed border. The

border width is specified by -borderWidth, and the border height is
specified by -borderHeight. The default border width is the maximum
page width in the current cell. The default border height is the maximum
page height in the current cell. The border is illustrated in dashed lines.
The page name is printed at the upperleft corner of the border.
[-placeX value] [-offset offset] specify the alignment of all pages.
-placeX specifies the number of pages to be placed in a row. The default

is 5.
-offset specifies the interval (left, right, top and down) of each page. The
default is 100. The offset value is a reference value and may be not the real
value, because it can be adjusted to meet the not overlap and on-grid
conditions.
All pages can be sorted, from left to right and top to down, by page name.
Syntax
adpMergeMultiPage -lib libName [-cell cellName] [-fixSize]
[-borderWidth width] [-borderHeight height] [-placeX
value] [-offset offset]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-borderHeight height
Specify the border height for the fixed border.

-borderWidth width
Specify the border width for the fixed border.

-cell cellName
-fixSize
Specify a fixed size value for each page.

-lib libName

K-2015.06
1599

Miscellaneous
Argument
Description
-offset offset
Specify an offset value for each page.

-placeX value
Specify the number of pages to be placed in a row.

Examples
# Example 1
adpMergeMultiPage -lib libA -cell cellA -fixSize \
-borderWidth 200 -borderHeight 300 -placeX 3 -offset 20
# the output is illustrated in the following figure:
# Example 2
adpMergeMultiPage -lib libA -cell cellB -placeX 3 -offset 20 \
# the output is illustrated in the following figure:
1600

K-2015.06
14
14
Symbol Editor
User Interface (GUI) which applied within the Symbol Editor window.
Cell Commands
View Commands
Create Commands
Edit Commands
Query Commands
Options Commands
Miscellaneous
Cell Commands
Symbol Editor window. These commands include:
adpLibMgrOpenDesign
symChangeMode
symDiscardEdit
symDsgCheckSave
symDsgCloseWnd

K-2015.06
1601
Chapter 14: Symbol Editor

Cell Commands
symDsgSave
symDsgSaveAs
adpLibMgrOpenDesign
The adpLibMgrOpenDesign command is applied to both the File > Open
and Cell > New commands in the Home Page. Refer to File Commands >
adpLibMgrOpenDesign in the Home Page chapter for details.
symChangeMode
The symChangeMode command changes the editing mode of the active cell
view.
Syntax
symChangeMode -topWnd winId [-save 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-save 0|1

1 : Save the active cell view.
0 : Do not save the active cell view.
-topWnd winId
Examples
symChangeMode -topWnd _adp2
See Also
Cell > Change to Read Only/Edit Mode
symDiscardEdit
The symDiscardEdit command discards the editing actions performed and
reverts to the last saved version of the data.
1602

K-2015.06

Cell Commands
Syntax
symDiscardEdit -topWnd winId
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Examples
# discard the modified design and restore to the original design
symDiscardEdit -topWnd _adp2
See Also
Cell > Discard Edit
symDsgCheckSave
The symDsgCheckSave command returns 1 if the Check and Save function is
executed. This command combines the functions of pin checking and saving.
Syntax
symDsgCheckSave -topWnd winId
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Examples
symDsgCheckSave -topWnd _adp2
See Also
Cell > Check and Save

K-2015.06
1603

Cell Commands
symDsgCloseWnd
The symDsgCloseWnd command returns 1 if the Symbol Editor window is
closed.
Syntax
symDsgCloseWnd -topWnd winId
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Examples
symDsgCloseWnd -topWnd _adp3
See Also
Cell > Close
symDsgSave
The symDsgSave command saves the activated design to the database.
Syntax
symDsgSave -topWnd winId
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Examples
# save the activated design to database
symDsgSave -topWnd _adp3
1604

K-2015.06

View Commands
See Also
Cell > Save
symDsgSaveAs
The symDsgSaveAs command saves the activated design to another cell.
Syntax
symDsgSaveAs -topWnd winId -cell cellName [-view viewName]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
-topWnd winId
-view viewName

Valid values: schematic, symbol, and any user-defined
Examples
# Example 1
# Save the activated design to another cell (demo)
symDsgSaveAs -topWnd _adp3 -cell demo
See Also
Cell > Save As
View Commands
symDsgPanDown
symDsgPanLeft
symDsgPanRight

K-2015.06
1605

View Commands
symDsgPanUp
symDsgRedraw
symDsgZoomFit
symDsgZoomIn
symDsgZoomOut
symDsgPanDown
The symDsgPanDown command pans the current view area downward the
current window or view box boundary.
Syntax
symDsgPanDown -topWnd winId
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Examples
symDsgPanDown -topWnd _adp3
See Also
View > Pan > Pan Down
symDsgPanLeft
The symDsgPanLeft command pans the current view area to the left of the
Syntax
symDsgPanLeft -topWnd winId
Returns
None
1606

K-2015.06

View Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Examples
symDsgPanLeft -topWnd _adp3
See Also
View > Pan > Pan Left
symDsgPanRight
The symDsgPanRight command pans the current view area to the right of the
Syntax
symDsgPanRight -topWnd winId
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Examples
symDsgPanRight -topWnd _adp3
See Also
View > Pan > Pan Right
symDsgPanUp
The specified ratio, the symDsgPanUp command pans the current view area
upward the current window or view box boundary.
Syntax
symDsgPanUp -topWnd winId

K-2015.06
1607

View Commands
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Examples
symDsgPanUp -topWnd _adp3
See Also
View > Pan > Pan Up
symDsgRedraw
The symDsgRedraw command redraws the current view area.
Syntax
symDsgRedraw -topWnd winId
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Examples
# redraw the current view area
symDsgRedraw -topWnd _adp3
See Also
View > Redraw
symDsgZoomFit
The symDsgZoomFit command fits the current design in the Symbol Editor
window.
1608

K-2015.06

View Commands
Syntax
symDsgZoomFit -topWnd winId
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Examples
# fit the current design in the Symbol Editor window
symDsgZoomFit -topWnd _adp3
See Also
View > Zoom All
symDsgZoomIn
The symDsgZoomIn command zooms in the view area by 1/2 of the Symbol
Editor window.
Syntax
symDsgZoomIn -topWnd winId
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Examples
# zoom in the view area by 1/2 of the Symbol Editor window
symDsgZoomIn -topWnd _adp3
See Also
View > Zoom In

K-2015.06
1609

Create Commands
symDsgZoomOut
The symDsgZoomOut command zooms out the view area by 1/2 of the Symbol
Editor window.
Syntax
symDsgZoomOut -topWnd winId
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Examples
# zoom out the view area by 1/2 of the Symbol Editor window
symDsgZoomOut -topWnd _adp3
See Also
View > Zoom Out
Create Commands
the Symbol Editor window. These commands include:
1610
symDsgAddNetExpr
symDsgCreateArc
symDsgCreateBoundaryBox
symDsgCreateBubble
symDsgCreateCircle
symDsgCreateEllipse
symDsgCreateFillCircle
symDsgCreateFillPolygon
symDsgCreateFillRect

K-2015.06

Create Commands
symDsgCreateLine
symDsgCreatePin
symDsgCreatePolygon
symDsgCreateRect
symDsgCreateLabel
symDsgAddNetExpr
The symDsgAddNetExpr command specifies the net expression.
Syntax
symDsgAddNetExpr -topWnd wndId -prop propName -netName
netName -point (x0,y0) -justify justification -orient
orientation -fontStyle fontStyle -fontheight fontHeight
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description


LowerRight (default=LowerLeft).
-netName netName
-orient orientation

-point (x0,y0)


K-2015.06
1611

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-prop propName
-topWnd winId
Examples
symDsgAddNetExpr -topWnd _adp3 -prop n2vdd -netName qq! \
-point (0.0,0.125) -justify LowerLeft -orient R0 \
-fontStyle TTAGothFont -fontheight 0.0625
See Also
Create > Net Expression
symDsgCreateArc
The symDsgCreateArc command returns a dbFigId if the specified arc is
created.
Syntax
symDsgCreateArc -topWnd winId -point (x0,y0) (x1,y1) (x2,y2)
-layer layer
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-layer layer
Specify the layer for the symbol body.
-point
(x0,y0) (x1,y1) (x2,y2)
x0, x1 and x2 specify the left value, the right value,

and the center value for the x coordinate points
respectively while y0, Y1 and Y2 specify the values for
the y coordinate points.
-topWnd winId
Examples
symDsgCreateArc -topWnd__adp2 \
-point (-390,210) (-200,120) (-260,240)
1612

K-2015.06

Create Commands
See Also
Create > Arc
symDsgCreateBoundaryBox
The symDsgCreateBoundaryBox command returns a dbFigId if the specified
boundary box is created.
Syntax
symDsgCreateBoundaryBox -topWnd winId [-bbox (x0,y0) (x1,y1)
| -autoCreateBoundary]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-autoCreateBoundary
When specified, a boundary box is created

automatically.
-bbox (x0,y0) (x1,y1)
(x0,y0) specifies the lower left corner of the boundary

box while (x1,y1) specifies the upper right corner.
-topWnd winId
Examples
# Example 1
# create a boundary box manually in the symbol editor window
symDsgCreateBoundaryBox -topWnd _adp2 -bbox (-10,40) (0,40)
# Example 2
# create a boundary box automatically in the symbol editor window
symDsgCreateBoundaryBox -topWnd _adp2 -autoCreateBoundary
See Also
Create > Boundary Box
symDsgCreateBubble
The symDsgCreateBubble command returns a dbFigId if the specified
bubble shape can be created.
K-2015.06
1613

Create Commands
Syntax
symDsgCreateBubble -topWnd winId -point (x0,y0) [-mini 0|1]
-layer layer [-orient orientation]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-layer layer
specify the layer for the symbol body.
-mini 0|1

1 : Create mini bubble shapes.
0 : Create big bubble shapes.
-orient orientation

-point (x0,y0)

-topWnd winId
Examples
symDsgCreateBubble -topWnd _adp4 -point (-20,0) -orient R0 \
-layer adpBodyColor -mini 1
See Also
Create > Bubble
symDsgCreateCircle
The symDsgCreateCircle command returns a dbFigId if the specified circle
Syntax
symDsgCreateCircle -topWnd winId -point (x0,y0) -value value
-layer layer
Returns
1614

K-2015.06

Create Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-layer layer
-point (x0,y0)

-topWnd winId
-value value
specify the radius of the circle.
Examples
symDsgCreateCircle -topWnd _adp2 -point (600,-120) -value 42
See Also
Create > Circle
symDsgCreateEllipse
The symDsgCreateEllipse command returns a dbFigId if the specified
Syntax
symDsgCreateEllipse -topWnd winId -bbox (x0,y0)(x1,y1) layer layer
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-bbox (x0,y0) (x1,y1)

-layer layer
-topWnd winId
Examples
symDsgCreateEllipse -topWnd _adp2 -bbox (730,400) (1000,530)

K-2015.06
1615

Create Commands
See Also
Create > Ellipse
symDsgCreateFillCircle
The symDsgCreateFillCircle command returns a dbFigId if the specified
filled-circle shape can be created.
Syntax
symDsgCreateFillCircle -topWnd winId -point (x0,y0) -value
value -layer layer
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-layer layer
Specify the layer for the symbol filled body.
-point (x0,y0)

-topWnd winId
-value value
Examples
symDsgCreateFillCircle -topWnd _adp2 -point (600,-120) -value 42 \
-layer adpPadBodyColor
See Also
Create > Filled Circle
symDsgCreateFillPolygon
The symDsgCreateFillPolygon command returns a dbFigId if the specified
filled-polygon can be created.
1616

K-2015.06

Create Commands
Syntax
symDsgCreateFillPolygon -topWnd winId -point
(x0,y0)(x1,y1)... -layer layer
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-layer layer
Specify the layer for the symbol filled body.
-point (x0,y0) (x1,y1)...
(x0,y0) specifies the starting point of the filledpolygon while (x1,y1) specifies the second point,
etc.
-topWnd winId
Examples
symDsgCreateFillPolygon -topWnd _adp2 -point \
(0,660) (0,620) (20,620) (20,640) (40,640) (40,660) \
See Also
Create > Filled Polygon
symDsgCreateFillRect
The symDsgCreateFillRect command returns a dbFigId if the specified
filled-rectangle shape can be created.
Syntax
symDsgCreateFillRect -topWnd winId -bbox (x0,y0)(x1,y1) layer layer
Returns

K-2015.06
1617

Create Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-bbox (x0,y0) (x1,y1)
(x0,y0) specifies the lower left corner of the filledrectangle while (x1,y1) specifies the upper right
corner.
-layer layer
Specify the layer for symbol filled body.
-topWnd winId
Examples
symDsgCreateFillRect -topWnd _adp2 -bbox (-80,610) (-40,660) \
See Also
Create > Filled Rectangle
symDsgCreateLine
The symDsgCreateLine command returns a dbFigId if the specified line can
be created.
Syntax
symDsgCreateLine -topWnd winId -point (x0,y0)(x1,y1)... layer layer
Returns
Arguments
1618
Argument
Description
-layer layer
-point (x0,y0) (x1,y1)...
(x0,y0) specifies the starting point of the line while

(x1,y1) specifies the second point, etc.
-topWnd winId

K-2015.06

Create Commands
Examples
symDsgCreateLine -topWnd _adp2 -point \
(810,320) (930,320) (930,240) (1010,240) (1010,150) \
-layer adpBodyColor
See Also
Create > Line
symDsgCreatePin
The symDsgCreatePin command returns a dbFigId if the specified pin can be
created.
Syntax
symDsgCreatePin -topWnd winId -point (x0,y0) -pinName
pinName [-expand 0|1] [-placeObj type] -pinNameAlign mode
-pinType pinType -dir pinDir -orient orientation fontStyle fontStyle [-setGlobal setGlobal -globalType
type]
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-dir pinDir

Valid values: input, output, and inout.
-expand 0|1

1 : Display bus expansion.
0 : Do not display bus expansion.

-globalType type
Specify the global type.

Valid values: Global, Power, and Ground
(default=Global).

K-2015.06
1619

Create Commands
Argument
Description
-orient orientation

-pinName pinName
-pinNameAlign mode
Specify the label location.

Valid values: Left, and Right.
-pinType pinType
Specify the pin type.

Valid values: Square, ActHi, and commActLo.
-placeObj type
Specify the wire type.

Valid values: single, and multiple.
-point (x0,y0)

-setGlobal setGlobal
Specify the pin type to global type.
-topWnd winId
Examples
symDsgCreatePin -topWnd _adp2 -point (10,10) \
-pinName TEST_PIN -pinNameAlign left -pinType Square \
-dir input -orient R0 -fontStyle TTAGothFont
See Also
Create > Pin
symDsgCreatePolygon
The symDsgCreatePolygon command returns a dbFigId if the specified
polygon can be created.
Syntax
symDsgCreatePolygon -topWnd winId -point (x0,y0)(x1,y1)...
-layer layer
Returns
1620

K-2015.06

Create Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-layer layer
-point (x0,y0) (x1,y1)...
(x0,y0) specifies the starting point of the polygon

while (x1,y1) specifies the second point, etc.
-topWnd winId
Examples
symDsgCreatePolygon -topWnd _adp2 -point \
(0,660) (0,620) (20,620) (20,640) (40,640) (40,660) \
-layer adpBodyColor
See Also
Create > Polygon
symDsgCreateRect
The symDsgCreateRect command returns a dbFigId if the specified
rectangle shape can be created.
Syntax
symDsgCreateRect -topWnd winId -bbox (x0,y0)(x1,y1) -layer
layer
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-bbox (x0,y0) (x1,y1)
(x0,y0) specifies the lower left corner of the rectangle

-layer layer
-topWnd winId
Examples
symDsgCreateRect -topWnd _adp2 -bbox (-80,610) (-40,660) \
-layer adpBodyColor
K-2015.06
1621

Create Commands
See Also
Create > Rectangle
symDsgCreateLabel
The symDsgCreateLabel command returns a dbFigId if the specified text
label can be created.
Syntax
symDsgCreateLabel -topWnd winId -point (x0,y0) -label
{string} -fontheight fontHeight -fontStyle fontStyle justify justification -orient orientation -layer layer
Returns
Arguments
1622
Argument
Description
Specify the font type for the input text string.


-label {string}

Valid values: cdsName(), cdsParam(1),
cdsTerm("D"), [@instanceName], [@libName],
[@cellName], [@PartName], and [@userParam].
-layer layer
Specify the layer for the text label.
-orient orientation


K-2015.06

Edit Commands
Argument
Description
-point (x0,y0)

-topWnd winId
Examples
# Example 1
symDsgCreateLabel -topWnd _adp2 -point (450,540) \
-label {[@instanceName]} -fontheight 0.65 \
-fontStyle TTAGothFont -justify LowerLeft -orient R0
# Example 2
symDsgCreateLabel -topWnd _adp2 -point (450,540) \
-label {cdsName()} -fontheight 0.65 -fontStyle TTAGothFont \
-justify LowerLeft -orient R0
See Also
Create > Label
Edit Commands
symDsgCopy
symDsgDelete
symDsgDeselectAll
symDsgEditOrigin
symDsgPaste
symDsgMirrorX
symDsgMirrorY
symDsgMove
symDsgRedo
symDsgRotateLeft
symDsgRotateRight

K-2015.06
1623

Edit Commands
symDsgSelectAll
symDsgStretch
symDsgUndo
symDsgYank
symDsgCopy
The symDsgCopy command copies the selected object from a point to a
reference point.
Syntax
symDsgCopy -topWnd winId -point (x0,y0) -refPoint (x1,y1)
[-rows rowsNo] [-columns columnsNo]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-columns columnsNo
Specify the number of objects to be copied in columns.

-point (x0,y0)
Specify a starting point to copy. x0 specifies a reference

-refPoint (x1,y1)
Specify the destination for the copied object. x1

point.
-rows rowsNo
Specify the number of objects to be copied in rows.

-topWnd winId
Examples
# Example 1
symDsgCopy -topWnd _adp2 -point (560,440) \
-refpoint (250,510) -rows 2 -columns 3
1624

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
See Also
Edit > Copy
symDsgDelete
The symDsgDelete command deletes the selected object(s).
Syntax
symDsgDelete -topWnd winId
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Examples
symDsgDelete -topWnd _adp2
See Also
Edit > Delete
symDsgDeselectAll
The symDsgDeselectAll command deselects all selected objects in the
active cell view.
Syntax
symDsgDeselectAll -topWnd winId
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId

K-2015.06
1625

Edit Commands
Examples
symDsgDeselectAll -topWnd _adp2
See Also
Edit > Deselect All
symDsgEditOrigin
The symDsgEditOrigin command returns a dbFigId if the original point of
the active cell view to a new origin has been changed.
Syntax
symDsgEditOrigin -topWnd winId -point (x0,y0)
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-point (x0,y0)

-topWnd winId
Examples
symDsgEditOrigin -topWnd _adp2 -point (600,-120)
See Also
Edit > Origin
symDsgPaste
The symDsgPaste command pastes the yanked object from clipboard to the
current cell view.
Syntax
symDsgPaste -topWnd _adp2 -point (x0,y0) [-orient
orientation] [-justify justification] [-keepName]
1626

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
Specify the justification of the pasting reference point.

-keepName
If it is specified, keep all pin names after pasting. If it is

not specified, do not keep the pin name.
-orient orientation

-point (x0,y0)
Specify a starting point to paste. x0 specifies a position

value for the x coordinate point while y0 specifies the
value for the y coordinate point.
-topWnd winId
Specify the window identifier of the Symbol Editor

window.
Examples
symDsgPaste -topWnd _adp2 -point (32,16) -orient MX \
-justify CenterLeft
See Also
Edit > Paste
symDsgMirrorX
The symDsgMirrorX command mirrors the selected objects along the x axis.
Syntax
symDsgMirrorX -topWnd winId -point (x0,y0)
Returns
None

K-2015.06
1627

Edit Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-point (x0,y0)

-topWnd winId
Examples
symDsgMirrorX -topWnd _adp2 -point (600,-120)
See Also
Edit > Mirror X
symDsgMirrorY
The symDsgMirrorY command mirrors the selected objects along the y axis.
Syntax
symDsgMirrorY -topWnd winId -point (x0,y0)
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-point (x0,y0)

-topWnd winId
Examples
symDsgMirrorY -topWnd _adp2 -point (40,0)
See Also
Edit > Mirror Y
1628

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
symDsgMove
The symDsgMove command moves the selected object from one point to
another.
Syntax
symDsgMove -topWnd winId -point (x0,y0) -refPoint (x1,y1)
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-point (x0,y0)
Specify a starting point to move. x0 specifies a reference

-refPoint (x1,y1)
Specify the destination for the moved object. x1 specifies

a reference position value for the x coordinate point while
-topWnd winId
Examples
symDsgMove -topWnd _adp2 -point (560,620) -refpoint (530,690)
See Also
Edit > Move
symDsgRedo
The symDsgRedo command repeats the last action performed.
Syntax
symDsgRedo -topWnd winId
Returns
None

K-2015.06
1629

Edit Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Examples
# Example 1
# Redo the last editing command
symDsgRedo -topWnd _adp2
See Also
Edit > Redo
symDsgRotateLeft
The symDsgRotateLeft command rotates the selected objects at 90
degrees counterclockwise.
Syntax
symDsgRotateLeft -topWnd winId -point (x0,y0)
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-point (x0,y0)

-topWnd winId
Examples
symDsgRotateLeft -topWnd _adp2 -point (490,670)
See Also
Edit > Rotate 90
1630

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
symDsgRotateRight
The symDsgRotateRight command turns the selected objects at 90 degrees
clockwise.
Syntax
symDsgRotateRight -topWnd winId -point (x0,y0)
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-point (x0,y0)

-topWnd winId
Examples
symDsgRotateRight -topWnd _adp2 -point (490,670)
See Also
Edit > Rotate 270
symDsgSelectAll
The symDsgSelectAll command selects all objects in the active cell view.
Syntax
symDsgSelectAll -topWnd winId
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId

K-2015.06
1631

Edit Commands
Examples
symDsgSelectAll -topWnd _adp2
See Also
Edit > Select All
symDsgStretch
The symDsgStretch command returns 1 if the stretch command is executed.
Syntax
symDsgStretch -topWnd winId -point (x,y) -refpoint (x,y) lock 0|1
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lock 0|1

1 : Enable the Lock Angle option.
0 : Disable the Lock Angle option.
-point (x, y)
-refpoint (x, y)
-topWnd winId
Examples
symDsgStretch -topWnd _adp2 -point (250, 170) \
-refpoint (180, 140) -lock 1
See Also
Edit > Stretch
symDsgUndo
The symDsgUndo command reverses the last action performed.
1632

K-2015.06

Edit Commands
Syntax
symDsgUndo -topWnd winId
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Examples
# Example 1
# Undo the last editing command
symDsgUndo -topWnd _adp2
See Also
Edit > Undo
symDsgYank
The symDsgYank command yanks the selected object(s) to a yank buffer for
further paste command.
Syntax
symDsgYank -topWnd winId [-point (x1,y1) ... (xn,yn)]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-point
(x1,y1) ... (xn,yn)
Specify the coordinate points for yank area. If you specify

two points only, (x1,y1) specifies the lower left corner
of the bounding box while (x2,y2) specifies the upper
right corner. If this argument is not specified, the selected
objects are copied to the yank buffer.
-topWnd winId
Specify the window ID of the Symbol Editor window.

K-2015.06
1633

Query Commands
Examples
symDsgYank -topWnd _adp2
See Also
Edit > Yank
Query Commands
adpLibCellParam
symCheckPinOrder
symDsgQueryFind
symDsgQueryProp
symDsgClearHighlight
symDsgTermOrder
symDsgCheckOffGridObj
adpLibCellParam
The adpLibCellParam command is applied to the Library > Parameter
command in the Home Page. Refer to Library Commands > adpLibCellParam
in the Home Page chapter for details.
See Also
Query > Parameter
symCheckPinOrder
The symCheckPinOrder command checks the unmatched pins and
unmatched pin order for the selected cell. The information of unmatched pins
between the symbol and schematic views is checked.
1634

K-2015.06

Query Commands
Syntax
symCheckPinOrder -topWnd winId [-dump]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-dump
Dump the Check Pin results to a file. The default file name
is CheckPin.dump. The unmatched pins and unmatched
pin order are listed in the dump file.
-topWnd winId
Examples
# Example 1
# Dump the unmatched pins, unmatched pin order and
# term order to a file
symCheckPinOrder -topWnd _adp2 -dump
See Also
Query > Check Pin
The symDsgQueryAttribute command returns 1 if the attributes of the
selected object are modified.
Syntax
symDsgQueryAttribute -topWnd winId -label {string} -dir
portType -portDir portDir -pinName pinName -point (x0,y0)
-index index -prop propName -netName netName
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-dir portType
Specify the port type.

Valid values: Input, Output, and Inout.

K-2015.06
1635

Query Commands
Argument
Description
-index index
Specify the index.
-label {string}

Valid values: @instanceName, @libName, @cellName,
@PortName, @Param(1), @SimAnn(1) and any text
string.
-netName netName
-pinName pinName
-point (x0,y0)
x0 specifies the value for the x coordinate point while y0

-portDir portDir
Specify the pin access direction.

Valid values: top, bottom, left, right, and AsIs.
-prop propName
-topWnd winId
Examples
# Example 1
symDsgQueryAttribute -topWnd _adp3 -dir Input -portDir left \
-pinName in -point (30,0)
# Example 2
# Query a label to change the label name
symDsgQueryAttribute -topWnd _adp2 -label abcd
# Example 3
symDsgQueryAttribute -topWnd _adp3 -index 1 -prop ccc \
-netName bbb!
See Also
Query > Attribute
symDsgQueryFind
The symDsgQueryFind command searches the specified object(s) according
to the search criteria.
1636

K-2015.06

Query Commands
Syntax
symDsgQueryFind -topWnd winId -type searchType -searProp
searchProp -case 0|1 -zoomToSelectSet 0|1
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-case 0|1

string(s).
Search criteria list; the criteria include name, operation

and value field. The name is for specific attributes,
instance, library, or properties for the object type; the
operation is for objects equal to (==) or not equal to (!=)
the criteria; and, the value field sets the attribute value.
-topWnd winId
-type searchType
Set the type of objects to be searched.

Valid values: Instance, Net, and Port.

Examples
symDsgQueryFind -topWnd _adp2 -type pin -searProp { Pin == a* } \
-case 0 -zoomToSelectSet 1
See Also
Query > Find
symDsgQueryProp
The symDsgQueryProp command edits cell view properties in the symbol.

K-2015.06
1637

Query Commands
Syntax
symDsgQueryProp -topWnd winId -lib libName -cell cellName
[-add|-delete] -prname propName -propAttr {{name} {type}
{value}} -value {{propName} {typeName} {valueName}}
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-add
Add a property to the cell view.
-cell cellName
-delete
Delete a property from the cell view.
-lib libName
-prname propName
Specify the property name to be modified.
-propAttr {{name}
{type} {value}}
Specify the property attributes to be modified.

{name} specifies the property name, {type}
specifies the property type, and {value}
specifies the property value.
-topWnd winId
-value {{propName}
{typeName} {valueName}}
Specify a new value for the corresponding

property attributes. {propName} specifies a new
property name, {typeName} specifies a new
property type, and {valueName} specifies a new
property value.
Examples
# Example 1
symDsgQueryProp -topWnd _adp2 -lib test -cell nmos \
-prname instNamePrefix -propAttr {{nam} {type} {value}} \
-value {{namePrefix} {string} {N}}
# Example 2
symDsgQueryProp -topWnd _adp2 -lib test -cell nmos -delete \
-prname instNamePrefix
1638

K-2015.06

Query Commands
# Example 3
symDsgQueryProp -topWnd _adp2 -lib test -cell nmos -add \
-prname new_0 -propAttr {{nam} {type} {value}} \
-value {{ new_0} {string} { }}
See Also
Query > Cell View Property
symDsgClearHighlight
The symDsgClearHighlight command clears all highlighted drawings in the
Symbol Editor window.
Syntax
symDsgClearHighlight -topWnd winId
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Examples
symDsgClearHighlight -topWnd _adp4
See Also
Query > Clear Highlight
symDsgTermOrder
The symDsgTermOrder command checks the unmatched pins and
unmatched pin order for the selected cell. The unmatched pin order between
the symbol view and the pin order settings are updated.
Syntax
symDsgTermOrder -topWnd winId [-nlsimtype netlistType] [nltermorder netlistTermOrder] [-dump]
Returns
None
K-2015.06
1639

Query Commands
Arguments
Argument
Description
-dump
Dump the Update Pin Order results to a file. The default file
name is PinOrder.dump. The netlist types, new and old
values of the pin order settings are listed in the dump file.
-nlsimtype
netlistType
Specify the netlist type to be selected to update the pin

order.
-nltermorder
netlistTermOrder
Specify the new pin order list.
-topWnd winId
Examples
# Example 1
symDsgTermOrder -topWnd _adp2 \
-nlsimtype Hspice CDL Eldo SmartSpice
-nltermorder {A Y port_0 port_1} {A Y
{A Y port_0 port_1} {A Y
{A Y port_0 port_1} {A Y
Spectre Verilog \
port_0 port_1} \
port_0 port_1} \
port_0 port_1} -dump
See Also
Query > Check Pin
symDsgCheckOffGridObj
The symDsgTermOrder command shows the information of the off-grid
objects in the Symbol Editor window.
Syntax
symDsgCheckOffGridObj -topWnd winId -mode Cell|Select -pin
Returns
None
Arguments
1640
Argument
Description
-pin
Specify the displayed information tab.

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Argument
Description
-mode Cell|Select
Specify the area to search for off-grid objects.

Valid values: Cell and Select (default = Cell).
-topWnd winId
Examples
# Example 1
symDsgCheckOffGridObj -topWnd _adp6 -mode Cell -pin
See Also
Query > Off-grid Objects
Options Commands
symDsgChangeGrid
symDsgEditLayerTbl
symDsgPreference
symDsgChangeGrid
The symDsgChangeGrid commad sets up the grid attributes and the rules of
cursor snapping.
Syntax
symDsgChangeGrid -topWnd windId [-type type] [gridResolution value] [-major value] [snapGridResolution snapGridResolution]
Returns
None
Arguments
Refer to the adpDsgChangeGrid description in the Schematic Editor chapter for
details.

K-2015.06
1641

Options Commands
Examples
# Example 1
symDsgChangeGrid -topWnd _adp3 -snapGridResolution half -type 1
See Also
Options > Change Grid
symDsgEditLayerTbl
The symDsgEditLayerTbl command returns 1 if a layer has been edited.
Syntax
symDsgEditLayerTbl -topWnd winId -name attrName -color
colorType -stipple stippleType -lineStyle lineStyle
Returns
Arguments
Refer the adpDsgEditLayerTbl description in the Schematic Editor chapter for
details.
Examples
symDsgEditLayerTbl -topWnd _adp2 -name adpPWRBusNetColor \
-color ID_Red4 -stipple GDC_UNDEFINED_STIPPLE \
-lineStyle line_solid
See Also
Options > Layer Table Editor
symDsgPreference
The symDsgPreference command defines the display of extra information on
the Symbol Editor window.
Syntax
symDsgPreference -topWnd winId [-autoPopup 0|1] [-autoUpdate
0|1] [-snapCreate mode] [-snapEdit mode] [caseSensInNetName case] [-directManipulation 0|1] [viewsToCheck {viewlist}]
1642

K-2015.06

Options Commands
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-autoPopup 0|1

1 : Open the Options form.
0 : Hide the Options form.
-autoUpdate 0|1

1 : Update the pin order settings for macro symbols
automatically.
0 : Do not update the pin order settings for macro
symbols automatically.
-caseSensInNetName case
Case sensitivity in pin names.

(default=Preserve).
-directManipulation 0|1

1 : Enable the Direct Manipulation option.
0 : Disable the Direct Manipulation option.
-snapCreate mode
Specify the snap mode for creation.

Valid values: orthogonal, anyAngle,
diagonal, xFirst, and yFirst
-snapEdit mode
Specify the snap mode for editing.

Valie values: orthogonal, anyAngle,
diagonal, horizontal, and vertical
-topWnd winId
-viewsToCheck {viewlist}
Specify a list of views for cross-view pin checking of

symbol editor.

K-2015.06
1643

Miscellaneous
Examples
# Example 1
symDsgPreference -topWnd _adp2 -autoPopup 1 -autoUpdate 1
# Example 2
symDsgPreference -topWnd _adp2 -snapCreate orthogonal
# Example 3
symDsgPreference -topWnd _adp2 -snapEdit anyAngle
# Example 4
symDsgPreference -topWnd _adp2 -caseSensInNetName Upper
# Example 5
symDsgPreference -topWnd _adp2 -viewsToCheck \
{symbol schematic opt_sym opt_sch}
See Also
Options > Preference
Miscellaneous
This section describes the Tcl command applied to the other commands of the
adpFixSymPin
adpGetwtWndId
symDsgChgSelMode
symDsgGetSelect
adpFixSymPin
The adpFixSymPin command returns 1 if the existed designs meet the logical
binding for pins.
Syntax
adpFixSymPin -lib libName
Returns
1644

K-2015.06

Miscellaneous
Arguments
Argument
Description
-lib libName
Examples
adpFixSymPin -lib aa
adpGetwtWndId
The adpGetwtWndId command is applied to the Schematic Editor and
Symbol Editor windows. Refer to Others > adpGetwtWndId in the Schematic
Editor chapter for details.
symDsgChgSelMode
The symDsgChgSelMode command changes the selection mode in the
Syntax
symDsgChgSelMode -topWnd winId -mode selMode
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-mode selMode

Valid values: Object, Vertex, and Edge.
-topWnd winId

K-2015.06
1645

Miscellaneous
Examples
# Example 1
# Change select mode to [V/E] mode in the Symbol Editor
# window _adp3 sym
DsgChgSelMode -topWnd _adp3 -mode Vertex
# Example 2
# Change select mode to [OBJ] mode in the Symbol Editor
# window _adp3
symDsgChgSelMode -topWnd _adp3 -mode Object
symDsgGetSelect
The symDsgGetSelect command returns 1 if all objects are selected in the
Syntax
symDsgGetSelect -topWnd winId
Returns
Arguments
Argument
Description
-topWnd winId
Examples
symDsgGetSelect -topWnd _adp3
1646

K-2015.06
15
15
Hierarchy Editor
User Interface (GUI) which applied within the Hierarchy Editor window.
hedDsgCloseWnd
hedDsgDiscardEdit
hedDsgOpenTopCell
hedDsgRedo
hedDsgSave
hedDsgSaveAs
hedDsgSetCellBind
hedDsgSetInstBind
hedDsgSetGlobalBind
hedDsgSetTopCell
hedDsgUndo
hedDsgUpdate
hedDsgCloseWnd
The hedDsgCloseWnd command closes the Hierarchy Editor window.
Syntax
hedDsgCloseWnd
K-2015.06
1647
Chapter 15: Hierarchy Editor

hedDsgDiscardEdit
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
# Example 1
hedDsgCloseWnd
See Also
Cell > Close
hedDsgDiscardEdit
The hedDsgDiscardEdit command discards the editing actions performed
and reverts to the last saved version of the configuration.
Syntax
hedDsgDiscardEdit
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
# Example 1
hedDsgDiscardEdit
See Also
Cell > Discard Edit
hedDsgOpenTopCell
The hedDsgOpenTopCell command opens the top cell of the configuration in
1648

K-2015.06

hedDsgRedo
Syntax
hedDsgOpenTopCell
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
# Example 1
hedDsgOpenTopCell
hedDsgRedo
The hedDsgRedo command repeats the last action performed.
Syntax
hedDsgRedo
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
# Example 1
hedDsgRedo
See Also
Edit > Redo
hedDsgSave
The hedDsgSave command saves the activated configuration to the database.
Syntax
hedDsgSave

K-2015.06
1649

hedDsgSaveAs
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
# Example 1
hedDsgSave
See Also
Cell > Save
hedDsgSaveAs
The hedDsgSaveAs command saves the config view of the opened cell to
another cell.
Syntax
hedDsgSaveAs -lib libName -cell cellName
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
Specify the cell name of the target cell.
-lib libName
Specify the library name of the target library.
Examples
# Example 1
hedDsgSaveAs -lib test -cell top
See Also
Cell > Save As
1650

K-2015.06

hedDsgSetCellBind
hedDsgSetCellBind
The hedDsgSetCellBind command sets the cell bindings.
Syntax
hedDsgSetCellBind -lib libName -cell cellName [-viewToUse
viewName] [-viewList {viewList}] [-stop 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
-lib libName
-stop 0|1

1 : Add a stop point.
0 : Remove a stop point.
Specify an inherited view list at the cell level with the

following format: {view1 view2 ... viewn}. For
example: {schematic symbol}.
Valid values: schematic, symbol, simulation,
config, veriloga, verilog, spice, and any
user-defined view name.
-viewToUse viewName
Specify the view to be used.

Examples
# Example 1
# Bind to symbol for cell "digitalADP, inv"
hedDsgSetCellBind -lib digitalADP -cell inv -viewToUse symbol
# Example 2
# Add a stop point for cell "digitalADP, inv"
hedDsgSetCellBind -lib digitalADP -cell inv -stop 1

K-2015.06
1651

hedDsgSetInstBind
hedDsgSetInstBind
The hedDsgSetInstBind command sets the instance bindings.
Syntax
hedDsgSetInstBind -lib libName -cell cellName -view viewName
-inst instName [-viewToUse viewName] [-viewList
{viewList}] [-stop 0|1]
Returns
None
Arguments
1652
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
Specify the parent cell of the instance.
-inst instName
-lib libName
Specify the parent library of the instance.
-stop 0|1

1 : Add a stop point.
0 : Remove a stop point.
-view viewName
Specify the parent view of the instance.


-viewToUse viewName
Specify the view to be used.


K-2015.06

hedDsgSetGlobalBind
Examples
# Example 1
# Bind to symbol for instance "test, top, schematic, X1"
hedDsgSetInstBind -lib test -cell top -view schematic \
-inst X1 -viewToUse symbol
# Example 2
# Add stop point for instance "test, top, schematic, X1"
hedDsgSetInstBind -lib test -cell top -view schematic \
-inst X1 -stop 1
hedDsgSetGlobalBind
The hedDsgSetGlobalBind command sets the global bindings.
Syntax
hedDsgSetGlobalBind [-viewList {viewList}] [-stopList
{stopList}]
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-stopList {stopList}
Specify a stop list at the global level with the following

format: {view1 view2 ... viewn}. For example:
{schematic symbol}.


K-2015.06
1653

hedDsgSetTopCell
Examples
# Example 1
# Set the view list of global binding as "schematic symbol"
hedDsgSetGlobalBind -viewList { schematic symbol }
# Example 2
# Set the stop list of global binding as "symbol"
hedDsgSetGlobalBind -stopList symbol
hedDsgSetTopCell
The hedDsgSetTopCell command sets the top cell for configuration.
Syntax
hedDsgSetTopCell -lib libName -cell cellName -view viewName
Returns
None
Arguments
Argument
Description
-cell cellName
-lib libName
-view viewName

Valid values: schematic, symbol, and any userdefined view name.
Examples
# Example 1
hedDsgSetTopCell -lib test -cell top -view schematic
hedDsgUndo
The hedDsgUndo command reverses the last action performed.
Syntax
hedDsgUndo
1654

K-2015.06

hedDsgUpdate
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
# Example 1
hedDsgUndo
See Also
Edit > Undo
hedDsgUpdate
The hedDsgUpdate command updates the configuration settings.
Syntax
hedDsgUpdate
Returns
None
Arguments
None
Examples
# Example 1
hedDsgUpdate
See Also
Edit > Update

K-2015.06
1655

hedDsgUpdate
1656

K-2015.06
A
A
Symbol Callback Procedures
This chapter describes the symbol callback procedures.
Overview
The Laker3 system supports a callback scheme to change the values of
parameters. A Tcl callback procedure can be attached to the parameter of the
symbol through the Callback section of the Parameter Dialog form, invoked by
the Library > Parameter command in the Home page. The tool will call this
procedure when a parameter value of the symbol is changed.
Attaching Tcl Procedures to Symbol

There is only one Tcl file can be attached in one cell. So, if different procedures
exist for different parameters, these Tcl procedures need to be placed in one
file.
The detailed steps are as follows:
Attaching Tcl File to Symbol
Attaching Tcl Procedure to Symbols Parameter
Attaching Tcl File to Symbol

You can attach a Tcl file to the symbol as follows:
1. Select Library > Parameter to invoke the Parameter Dialog form.
2. Select the library and cell on the left side of the form.

K-2015.06
1657
Appendix A: Symbol Callback Procedures

Attaching Tcl Procedures to Symbol
3. Browse the Tcl script file.

4. Click the Replace button.
5. Click the Apply button.
Figure 1
Attaching Tcl File
Attaching Tcl Procedure to Symbols Parameter

You can attach a Tcl procedure to the symbols parameter as follows:
1. Select Library > Parameter to invoke the Parameter Dialog form.
2. Select the library and cell on the left side of the form.
3. Select the parameter.
4. Specify the procedure name.
5. Click the Apply button.
1658

K-2015.06

Callback Working Scheme
Figure 2
Attaching Tcl Procedure
Callback Working Scheme

After the Tcl procedure is attached to the parameter, this procedure will be
executed when the parameter value is modified. The callback procedure will be
executed only when the parameter value is changed in the following two forms:
1. The Create Instance form, invoked by Create > Instance.
2. The Parameter tab of the Attribute form, invoked by Query > Attribute.
Callback Procedure Examples

Callback procedures are defined by the paramGetAttr and paramSetAttr
Tcl commands. Refer to the paramGetAttr and paramSetAttr descriptions
for more details on the related Tcl commands of symbol callback procedures.

K-2015.06
1659

Callback Procedure Examples
The following paragraphs give two examples of symbol callback procedures.
When there is a value change in the parameter area or peri, the callback
procedure will automatically update the value of parameter c. For example:
proc calCPoly {} {
set a [paramGetAttr -name area -attr value]
set p [paramGetAttr -name peri -attr value]
puts "$a $p"
set cpoly [expr $a*1.87 + $p*0.15]
puts $cpoly
paramSetAttr -name c -attr value -value $cpoly
}
When there is a value change in the parameter c, the callback procedure will
automatically update the value of parameters w and l. For example:
proc calCAreaPeri {} {
set c [paramGetAttr -name c -attr value -eval]
puts $c
set aa [expr $c*0.2]
paramSetAttr -name w -attr value -value $aa
paramSetAttr -name l -attr value -value $aa
}
1660

K-2015.06
Index
A
addEndCap 1200
addFiller 1201
addIOPadFiller 1202
addView 1203
addWellTap 1205
adpAddHighLightInst 541
adpAddHighLightNet 542
adpAddPortPad 543
adpAutoCheck 543
adpChangeMode 1492
adpChgBusChar 545
adpCreateSymbolOption 1513
adpCrossProbe 1575
adpDelGNet 546
adpDelRNet 546
adpDiscardDesign 547
adpDiscardEdit 1493
adpDsgAddNetExpr 1516
adpDsgAllDCVal 1576
adpDsgAssignInstName 1517
adpDsgAutoCreateWire 1518
adpDsgAutoWireLabel 1519
adpDsgCapture 1493
adpDsgChangeGrid 1548
adpDsgCheckCurrentCell 1562
adpDsgCheckSaveCmd 1494
adpDsgCheckTop 1563
adpDsgChgSelMode 1588
adpDsgCloseWnd 1495
adpDsgCopy 1536
adpDsgCreateArcCom 1520
adpDsgCreateCircleCom 1521
adpDsgCreateEllipseCom 1521
adpDsgCreateInst 1522
adpDsgCreateLineCom 1523
adpDsgCreateMultiSheet 1524
adpDsgCreatePolyCom 1525
adpDsgCreatePort 1525
adpDsgCreateRectCom 1526
adpDsgCreateSymbol 1527
adpDsgCreateTable 1529
adpDsgCreateTextCom 1527
adpDsgCreateWireName 1531
adpDsgDelete 1537
adpDsgDeselectAll 1538
adpDsgEditAvaiProp 1538
adpDsgEditLayerTbl 1549
adpDsgEditProperty 1550
adpDsgEnterBox 1588
adpDsgEnterLine 1589
adpDsgEnterPoint 1590
adpDsgEnterPolygon 1590
adpDsgGetSelect 1591
adpDsgGetTreeInst 1592
adpDsgLastView 1504
adpDsgLoadSession 1496
adpDsgLoadSimFile 1576
adpDsgMirrorX 1539
adpDsgMirrorY 1539
adpDsgMove 1540
adpDsgPanDown 1505
adpDsgPanLeft 1505
adpDsgPanRight 1506
adpDsgPanUp 1507
adpDsgParasiticNet 1578
adpDsgPaste 1541
adpDsgPlaceWideWire 1533
adpDsgPlaceWire 1533
adpDsgPopViewUp 1020, 1508
adpDsgPref 485
adpDsgPrint 1019, 1497
adpDsgPushSymbolIn 1508
adpDsgPushViewIn 1021, 1509
adpDsgQueryFind 1553
adpDsgQueryProp 1555
adpDsgQueryReplace 1556
adpDsgRedo 1542
1661
Index
B
adpDsgRedraw 1509
adpDsgRotateLeft 1542
adpDsgRotateRight 1543
adpDsgSave 1499
adpDsgSaveAs 1499
adpDsgSaveSchCV 548
adpDsgSaveSession 1500
adpDsgSelectAll 1544
adpDsgSetGenSymbol 1534
adpDsgSetSelect 1592
adpDsgShowAnnCmd 1579
adpDsgShowDCOPValue 1584
adpDsgShowDCRegion 1585
adpDsgShowDCVoltValue 1585
adpDsgSignalHier 1021, 1558
adpDsgStretch 1544
adpDsgStretch2 1545
adpDsgSummary 1501
adpDsgSwitchPage 1546
adpDsgToolAna 1586
adpDsgUndo 1547
adpDsgYank 1547
adpDsgZoomAll 1510
adpDsgZoomFit 1510
adpDsgZoomFitSelSet 1511
adpDsgZoomIn 1511
adpDsgZoomOut 1512
adpDumpCV 1593
adpDumpDsgTree 484
adpFixBundleNet 549
adpFixNetFig 549
adpFixPinDot 550
adpFixSymPin 1644
adpGetActiveWnd 550
adpGetCurrentHierName 1593
adpGetNetListType 551
adpGetSelectHierName 1596
adpGetTextEditor 551, 1597
adpGetWindowVar 552
adpGetWndByCV 552
adpGetWndCellViewId 553
adpGetwtWndId 1598, 1645
adpLakerWavePreference 482
adpLibCellParam 1634
adpLibMgrExportEDIF 1502
1662
adpLibMgrExportSpice 374, 1502

adpLibMgrExportVeri 378, 1502
adpLibMgrImportTextView 380
adpLibMgrImportVerilog 380
adpLibMgrOpenDesign 380, 1503, 1602
adpMergeMultiPage 1598
adpNetlistMapping 436
adpOpenWaveAna 383
adpPickParameter 1560
adpRegWndCB 553
adpRmHighLight 555
adpRmParam 555
adpSetInstParamCB 556
adpSetLibGrid 556
adpSetObjType 557
adpSimConPreference 500
adpSynchronize 1503
adpTriggerPropertyCB 558
analyzeConnectivity 1121, 1207
analyzeRoute 1122, 1207
aprExit 1209
arrays 6, 7, 35
atof 40
atoi 41
B
Basic Flow Control 4
beautyFileName 41
bounding box 35, 36, 37
C
caar 42
cadr 43
car 42
cdar 43
cddr 44
cdr 44
cdrN 46
changeRouteTypeStatus 1123, 1209
charToInt 46
checkAntenna 1125
checkConnectivity 1126, 1211
checkExistingVio 1128, 1213
checkPlacement 1213
Index
D
checkRCTable 1214
checkSuboptimal 1129, 1215
checkTieHiLo 1129, 1216
checkViolation 1130, 1217
clearCTSException 1218
closeDesign 1219
closeTextViewerTab
xt:: 905
commands
xt::closeTextViewerTab 905
xt::createJob 906
xt::getJobs 908
xt::getOpenFile 909
xt::getTextViewerTabs 910
xt::openTextViewer 910
xt::openTextViewerTab 911
xt::readJob 912
xt::sendCommand 912
xt::showDRCSetup 915
xt::showJobMonitor 913
xt::showLPESetup 914
xt::showLVSSetup 914
xt::showPveOptions 916
xt::signalJob 917
xt::startPvDebugger 916
xt::updateJob 918
xt::writeJob 919
comment 47
compareRc 1219
compileDef 1220
compileHdl 1221
compileLef 1222
concatInstallDir 47
cons 48
convertRouteConnectionModel 1223
createBone 1131
createBoneConst 1132
createChannel 1133
createJob
xt:: 906
createLibGroup 1224
createPlaceBlkUnderMetal 1225
createRouteRule 1134, 1226
currentTime 48
cwxyzr 45
cxyzr 45
D
Data Types 36
dbAddChildToParent 289
dbAddObjectToGroup 261
dbArcToLine 215
dbArea 289
dbBreakTraverse 226
dbCellFind 281
dbCellPro 254
dbChangeCVMode 164
dbCheckBBox 165
dbCheckCV 166
dbCheckRecursion 166
dbCloseCV 167
dbCloseLib 148
dbColorBackAnno 290
dbColorPropagation 291
dbConcatTransform 227
dbCopyCV 168
dbCopyFig 227
dbCopyParam 282
dbCopyProp 256
dbCorrectPolygon 228
dbCreateArc 198
dbCreateArray 220
dbCreateBusNet 267
dbCreateDot 200
dbCreateDoughnut 199
dbCreateEllipse 201
dbCreateFinRegion 201
dbCreateGroup 261
dbCreateInst 221
dbCreateInstPin 268
dbCreateInstPort 269
dbCreateLabel 202
dbCreateLib 148
dbCreateLine 204
dbCreateNet 269
dbCreateParam 282
dbCreateParameterizedInst 190
dbCreatePath 205
dbCreatePathRouter 206
dbCreatePin 271
dbCreatePolygon 207
1663
Index
D
dbCreatePort 272
dbCreateProp 256
dbCreateRect 208
dbCreateRoute 212
dbCreateSingleNet 273
dbCreateTextToPoly 209
dbCVExist 169
dbDefineParameterizedCell 185
dbDelCV 170
dbDelete 292
dbDeleteAllNet 274
dbDeleteGroupByName 262
dbDeleteObjectFromGroup 263
dbDeleteParamByName 284
dbDeletePropByName 258
dbDeviceSetParameter 274
dbDoughnutToPolygon 215
dbDumpTCL 171
dbEllipseToPolygon 216
dbFindCV 172
dbFindGroup 263
dbFindNet 275
dbFindOrphanCell 149
dbFindParam 284
dbFindPort 276
dbFindProp 258
dbGenPin 277, 279
dbGet 293
dbGetAllCellRefNumber 151
dbGetAllCells 172
dbGetAllLibs 152
dbGetAllMCellDeviceNames 349
dbGetAllMCellRuleValues 350
dbGetAllViews 174
dbGetCbInstId 174
dbGetChild 315
dbGetCVFullPath 175
dbGetDummyMOS 175
dbGetInstByLogicName 176
dbGetInstParam 196
dbGetInstSwitchMaster 177
dbGetLastModifyTime 316
dbGetLayerIdByLayerPurposeName 153
dbGetLayerIdByLayerPurposeNum 153
dbGetLayerIdsByLib 154
1664
dbGetLayerNameByLayerId 154
dbGetLayerNumByLayerId 155
dbGetLDMFile 156
dbGetLibIdByLibName 157
dbGetLibNameByLibId 156
dbGetLibPath 157
dbGetMasterLibName 158
dbGetOpenCV 178
dbGetOpenCVNum 178
dbGetOpenLib 160
dbGetParent 318
dbGetPcellDefValue 197
dbGetPurposeNameByLayerId 159
dbGetPurposeNumByLayerId 160
dbGetShapeDimension 318
dbGetTechParam 158
dbGetTrueOverlaps 230
dbIsDbObj 321
dbIsSameMaster 224
dbIterateDB 319
dbIterateLib 321
dbLayerGen 232
dbLibExist 160
dbLineToPath 217
dbLoadCellCDF 286
dbLoadLibCDF 286
dbMakeBusNet 279
dbMakeSingleNet 280
dbMoveMember 264
dbOpenCV 179
dbOpenHier 180
dbOpenLib 161
dbOpenRecoveryCV 181
dbParameterizedCell 186
dbPathSideToPolygonSide 218
dbPathToPolygon 217
dbPolygonToTrap 219
dbPtToPtRouter 211
dbPurgeCV 182
dbRegisterCVPurge 182
dbRepairCellViewRouteObj 235
dbSaveAllLib 162
dbSaveCellCDF 287
dbSaveCV 183
dbSaveLib 161
Index
E
dbSaveLibCDF 287
dbSchCloneMaster 343
dbSchExpandMFactor 344
dbSchFlatten 345
dbSchGroup 345
dbSchInstanceMap 346
dbSchMakeNode 347
dbSchUngroup 348
dbSelObjsByType 322
dbSeparateRouteObj 236
dbSet 324
dbSetInstHeaderMasterName 224
dbSetPCellParam 195
dbShiftOrigin 237
dbSizing 238
dbSmashInst 240
dbSnapToGrid 241
dbSuperMasterId 186
dbSuperMasterLibId 186
dbTransformBBox 241
dbTransformPoint 242
dbTraverse 243
dbUDDBool 334
dbUDDCopy 336
dbUDDDelete 337
dbUDDFill 337
dbUDDGetParameter 340
dbUDDSetParameter 341
dbUnregisterCVPurge 184
decr 49
deleteFiller 1227
deleteRoute 1136, 1228
deleteRouteRule 1137, 1229
deleteSdc 1230
deleteView 1231
deleteVioNet 1137
detachScanChain 1232
dumpInstPlacementTcl 1232
dumpPinConstraintTemplate 1233
dumpPinPlacementTcl 1233
dumpRoutingConstraintTemplate 1138
E
echo 49
ecoRoute 1234
elemN 50
encrypt 50
Entry Functions 1069
extractRc 1236
extractScanChain 1237
F
fillNotchGap 1139, 1237
firstIdxStr 51
fixAntenna 1139
fixNetRatio 1141, 1238
fixRoutePattern 1142, 1239
fixViolation 1143, 1241
G
genRCTable 1242
getBBoxBottom 249
getBBoxCenter 250
getBBoxLeft 250
getBBoxLeftBottom 251
getBBoxRight 251
getBBoxRightTop 252
getBBoxTop 252
getenv 51
getInstallDir 52
getJobs
xt:: 908
getOpenFile
xt:: 909
getTextViewerTabs
xt:: 910
gtAddFields 127
gtAppendBannerMenu 77
gtCancelNumberKeyPad 128
gtCreateAppForm 94
gtCreateBooleanButton 95
gtCreateButton 96
gtCreateButtonBoxField 97
gtCreateCyclicField 98
gtCreateFileOpenField 100
gtCreateFloatField 101
gtCreateForm 102
gtCreateIntField 103
1665
Index
H
gtCreateLabel 104
gtCreateListBoxField 105
gtCreateListField 107
gtCreateMenu 79
gtCreateMenuItem 80
gtCreatePointField 108
gtCreatePointListField 109
gtCreatePulldownMenu 81
gtCreateRadioField 111
gtCreateSeparatorField 112
gtCreateSliderMenuItem 81
gtCreateStringField 112
gtCreateToggleField 114
gtDeleteField 129
gtDeleteFields 128
gtDeleteForm 115
gtDestroyAllObjs 130
gtDisableField 116
gtDisplay 116
gtDisplayAppDBox 87
gtEnableField 117
gtFormApply 118
gtFormCancel 118
gtFormDone 119
gtGet 130
gtGetBBox 131
gtGetOrigin 132
gtHideBannerMenu 83
gtIsGTObj 132
gtMaxWnd 133
gtMoveIntoScreen 134
gtProcessDragData 123
gtProcessDragType 124
gtProcessDropData 125
gtProcessDropType 125
gtSet 134
gtSetBBox 135
gtSetBindKey 136
gtSetOrigin 138
gtSetWndBgColor 139
gtShowBannerMenu 84
guiSetLayerColor 1243
guiShow 1244
1666
H
hedDsgCloseWnd 1647
hedDsgDiscardEdit 1648
hedDsgOpenTopCell 1648
hedDsgRedo 1649
hedDsgSave 1649
hedDsgSaveAs 1650
hedDsgSetCellBind 1651
hedDsgSetGlobalBind 1653
hedDsgSetInstBind 1652
hedDsgSetTopCell 1654
hedDsgUndo 1654
hedDsgUpdate 1655
help 1244
I
ignoreNetInRouting 1245
incr 52
insertDFMVia 1145, 1246
insertDoubleVia 1146, 1247
intToChar 53
isEmptyList 53
isEqual 54
isEven 54
isFileEncrypted 55
isFloat 55
isInteger 56
isNegative 56
isNEqual 57
isNumber 57
isOdd 58
isOne 58
isPositive 59
isSymbolicLink 59
isZero 60
L
lakerAbortFeature 1076
lakerAbstractCell 437
lakerAddDcap 921
lakerAddDummyGate 749
lakerAddEndCap 922
lakerAddFiller 923
lakerAddHighLightId 1055
Index
L
lakerAddHighLightInst 1056
lakerAddHighLightLine 1057
lakerAddHighLightNet 1057
lakerAddHighLightObj 1058
lakerAddHighLightPair 1065
lakerAddHighLightPath 1065
lakerAddHighLightPoly 1066
lakerAddHighLightRect 1067
lakerAddICCLib 439
lakerAddTap 924
lakerAddToRPGroup 925
lakerAdjacentNet 827
lakerAlignObj 685
lakerAnnotatePin 687
lakerArea 828
lakerAreaSel 1041
lakerAreaSelect 1041
lakerAssignBackbone 951
lakerAssignInstPortToNet 953
lakerAssignPin 955
lakerAssociate 1338
lakerAssocNet 592
lakerAttachObj 687
lakerAttribute 829
lakerAutoAssignment 926
lakerAutoChopGR 750
lakerAutoFix 688
lakerBackwardView 608
lakerBoolean 689
lakerBusRouter 956
lakerCalibreDFM 888
lakerCalibreDRC 888
lakerCalibreLVS 889
lakerCalibreOption 889
lakerCalibrePERC 890
lakerCalibrePEX 890
lakerCalibreRVE 891
lakerCapture 594
lakerCapturePNG 595
lakerCDLIn 384
lakerCDLOut 388
lakerCDRIn 1147
lakerCDROut 1149
lakerCDRouter 962
lakerCellIndexPlacementScore 927
lakerCellPro 595
lakerCellTemplate 799
lakerCellViewBBox 1076
lakerChangeGrid 805
lakerChangeLicense 503
lakerChangeRefLib 440
lakerChangeSelMode 1076
lakerChangeStack 751
lakerCheckAdjacentLayerOverlap 958
lakerCheckPlacement 928
lakerCheckReference 597
lakerCheckSchTimeStamp 389
lakerCheckUnsavedDesign 390
lakerChgmodeDesign 597
lakerChgVia 691
lakerChkActiveCmd 1077
lakerChmod 391
lakerChopContact 752
lakerChopGuardRing 754
lakerChopObj 692
lakerClearConn 852
lakerClearDimensionMarks 853
lakerClearHighLight 852
lakerClearRuler 853
lakerClearRulerLabels 854
lakerClearRVEHighlight 892
lakerClearTagRuler 854
lakerCloneMaster 693
lakerCloseDesign 598
lakerCommonDRC 959
lakerConfigFlightLine 855
lakerConfigureRowArea 929
lakerCongestionAnalysis 960
lakerCongestionMap 960
lakerConnBrowser 856
lakerConnChecker 857
lakerContinueBus 694
lakerConvertToPoly 694
lakerCopyAssoc 731
lakerCopyCell 470
lakerCopyLib 441
lakerCopyObj 695
lakerCopyToClipboard 697
lakerCorrectOffGridObj 697
lakerCreateBus 629
1667
Index
L
lakerCreateCapacitor 630
lakerCreateCircle 634
lakerCreateContact 635
lakerCreateDoughnut 641
lakerCreateEllipse 642
lakerCreateFinRegion 643
lakerCreateGuardRing 644
lakerCreateInstance 648
lakerCreateMatch 1384
lakerCreateMetalSlot 650
lakerCreatePath 653
lakerCreatePickedDevice 657
lakerCreatePin 658
lakerCreatePoly 660
lakerCreateRect 661
lakerCreateResistor 662
lakerCreateRow 931
lakerCreateRPGroup 934
lakerCreateSite 479
lakerCreateStackedPath 665
lakerCreateText 668
lakerCreateTransistor 671
lakerCrSoftPin 734
lakerCutCorner 698
lakerCutFinBdry 699
lakerCutPolyShape 700
lakerCycleSel 1042
lakerDangleRemove 964
lakerDecreaseSel 1043
lakerDefDevAlign 1024
lakerDefDevBoolean 1025
lakerDefDevConnect 1027
lakerDefDevCopy 1028
lakerDefDevCutCorner 1029
lakerDefDevDist 1029
lakerDefDevFill 1030
lakerDefDevGenPin 1032
lakerDefDevRemove 1033
lakerDefDevReturnValue 1034
lakerDefGlobalNet 443
lakerDelAllAreaDsp 608
lakerDelAreaDsp 609
lakerDelCategory 466
lakerDelCell 473
lakerDeleteDummyGate 755
1668
lakerDeleteObj 700
lakerDeleteRoute 965
lakerDeleteRouteAll 966
lakerDeleteRPGroup 935
lakerDeleteSite 480
lakerDelLayoutNet 1339
lakerDelLib 442
lakerDelPin 735
lakerDelRowArea 936
lakerDelShape 967
lakerDelSoftPin 735
lakerDeselectAll 1044
lakerDevHistoryEditor 1035
lakerDevHistoryViewer 1035
lakerDigitalRoute 968
lakerDimensionMark 679
lakerDimNeighbor 880
lakerDiscardDesign 598
lakerDiscrepancyHier 444
lakerDispFinGrid 807
lakerDispGlobalFinGrid 808
lakerDispGrid 809
lakerDispHier 809
lakerDispMCellInfo 810
lakerDispNeighbor 881
lakerDispRow 811
lakerDispTrack 811
lakerDistance 859
lakerDivideObj 755
lakerDoubleViaInsertion 976
lakerDsgDrag 1078
lakerDsgDrop 1078
lakerDsgMessage 1079
lakerDtbAlign 701
lakerDumpModelMap 445
lakerDumpPinAssTcl 938
lakerDumpPinConstraint 939
lakerDumpPlacementTcl 937
lakerDumpRoutingConstraintTemplate 977
lakerDumpShapeTcl 1080
lakerEcho 559
lakerEDIFIn 393
lakerEditInPlace 881
lakerEIPDisplayHier 882
lakerEIPDisplayNormal 883
Index
L
lakerEIPDisplayTop 883
lakerEncryptLib 446
lakerEnterBox 1069
lakerEnterLine 1070
lakerEnterPath 1071
lakerEnterPoint 1072
lakerEnterPolygon 1073
lakerEqualLRouter 978
lakerEqualLWire 979
lakerEstimateCellArea 859
lakerExit 396
lakerExpandSchParameter 397
lakerExportConstraint 401
lakerExportDEF 402
lakerExportLEF 403
lakerExportOASIS 404
lakerExportSIF 559
lakerExportStream 408
lakerExportUDDGC 474
lakerExposeWnd 1081
lakerExtractECOCommand 561
lakerExtractSwapPort 562
lakerFillContact 756
lakerFillGuardRing 757
lakerFindCustomViaForDFM 980
lakerFindNetByArea 862
lakerFindObj 860
lakerFinishDevPara 1082
lakerFitEdit 884
lakerFitSelObj 609
lakerFixDiscrepancy 1340
lakerFixHighLightColor 1068
lakerFixLayDisc 1341
lakerFlightLine 863
lakerFold 757
lakerForwardView 610
lakerFuseObj 758
lakerGenPin 735
lakerGenText 680
lakerGetActiveWnd 1084
lakerGetAliveWnd 1083
lakerGetBroSelSet 1342
lakerGetClipboardCV 1084
lakerGetColPat 1085
lakerGetCurLayerId 1087
lakerGetCurPos 1087
lakerGetCurViewBBox 1088
lakerGetCurViewLevel 1088
lakerGetDesign 563
lakerGetDspPat 1088
lakerGetEIPHierarchy 1091
lakerGetHierPath 1090
lakerGetHighlightList 1092
lakerGetLibCell 560
lakerGetLicenseName 503
lakerGetOpenCount 1093
lakerGetOpenNets 1094
lakerGetPromptDefinition 1094
lakerGetSelSet 1044
lakerGetWndByCV 1095
lakerGetWndCellViewId 1097
lakerGetwtWndId 1098
lakerGroupObj 702
lakerHaltUndo 1099
lakerHasWndAlive 1100
lakerHybridAlign 702
lakerImportConstraint 415
lakerImportDEF 416
lakerImportLEF 417
lakerImportOASIS 418
lakerImportSIF 565
lakerImportStream 422
lakerImportTLUPlus 429
lakerImportUDDGC 475
lakerImportVerilog 430
lakerIncreaseSel 1046
lakerInsert 759
lakerIpcHdl 566
lakerIPMerge 598
lakerKeepColor 1014
lakerLabelRouter 980
lakerLadderRoute 983
lakerLastView 610
lakerLayerGen 704
lakerLayerSetting 986
lakerLayerTap 812
lakerLayoutDsgBrowser 1014
lakerLegalizeCellLoc 939
lakerLibCellDumpParam 447
lakerLibCellParam 447
1669
Index
L
lakerLinkMCell 760
lakerLME 583
lakerLMEBack2Top 584
lakerLMEClose 585
lakerLMEOpen 586
lakerLMESave 586
lakerLMESaveAs 587
lakerLoadDesign 598, 600
lakerLoadNanoScopeFile 568
lakerLockColor 1015
lakerMakeCell 705
lakerManualAssociate 1343
lakerMapPath 588
lakerMatch 738
lakerMaxViewLevel 611
lakerMCellTechPorting 450
lakerMchAdd 1390
lakerMchAddDummy 1391
lakerMchAddPattern 1392
lakerMchAddPeriDummy 1393
lakerMchAdjustTrack 1394
lakerMchAlignRowBottom 1396
lakerMchAlignRowCenter 1395
lakerMchAlignRowTop 1395
lakerMchAreaZoom 1396
lakerMchAttribute 1397
lakerMchChainSerialRes 1398
lakerMchChangeOrient 1399
lakerMchCheck 1399
lakerMchClear 1400
lakerMchClearRuler 1400
lakerMchCompactSpace 1401
lakerMchDelete 1401
lakerMchDeletePattern 1402
lakerMchDeSelDevice 1403
lakerMchDeSelect 1403
lakerMchDistance 1404
lakerMchDrag 1404
lakerMchDrop 1405
lakerMchExportPattern 1406
lakerMchFillBlack 1407
lakerMchFillDiagonal 1407
lakerMchFlip 1408
lakerMchImportPattern 1408
lakerMchInsAColGrid 1409
1670
lakerMchInsAGrid 1410
lakerMchLastView 1410
lakerMchMaxViewLevel 1411
lakerMchMerge 1411
lakerMchMinViewLevel 1412
lakerMchMode 1412
lakerMchMoveWire 1413
lakerMchNormal 1413
lakerMchOptimizeOD 1414
lakerMchPanDown 1414
lakerMchPanLeft 1415
lakerMchPanRight 1416
lakerMchPanUp 1416
lakerMchPreference 1417
lakerMchPreview 1421
lakerMchQuickInsert 1421
lakerMchRealize 1422
lakerMchRechainConnection 1423
lakerMchRedo 1424
lakerMchRedraw 1424
lakerMchRefUnit 1425
lakerMchRenamePattern 1425
lakerMchRepeatNum 1427
lakerMchRepeatPat 1427
lakerMchSelDevice 1429
lakerMchSelect 1429
lakerMchSelEmpty 1430
lakerMchSelPattern 1431
lakerMchSetDefaultRouteRule 1431
lakerMchSetRemNum 1437
lakerMchSetTopology 1438
lakerMchSetUnitNum 1438
lakerMchShareOD 1439
lakerMchSize 1440
lakerMchSpace 1440
lakerMchSplit 1441
lakerMchSwapSD 1441
lakerMchUndo 1442
lakerMchUnsetFingerGroup 1442
lakerMchViewLevelDec 1443
lakerMchViewLevelInc 1443
lakerMchXMirror 1444
lakerMchYMirror 1445
lakerMchZoomAll 1445
lakerMchZoomIn 1446
Index
L
lakerMchZoomOut 1446
lakerMeasureResistance 864
lakerMergeGate 760
lakerMergeObj 706
lakerMessage 1101
lakerMinViewLevel 611
lakerMirrorX 707
lakerMirrorY 708
lakerModifyCategory 467
lakerModifySite 481
lakerMoveContact 761
lakerMoveGate 762
lakerMoveObj 708
lakerMsgForm 1102
lakerMultiNetRouter 988
lakerNewCategory 468
lakerNewCell 476
lakerNewLib 451
lakerOpenDesign 432, 601
lakerOptimize 762
lakerOptimizePin 941
lakerP2PResistance 869
lakerPadWindow 870
lakerPanDown 612
lakerPanLeft 612
lakerPanRight 613
lakerPanUp 614
lakerPanXY 614
lakerPasteObj 710
lakerPasteWithLogic 739
lakerPatternReuse 742
lakerPGRoute 994
lakerPlaceInstance 941
lakerPlacementOption 943
lakerPreference 505
lakerPreSel 1047
lakerPreSelMode 1048
lakerPrintDesign 601
lakerProbeShape 1344
lakerPropagateNet 711
lakerPtToPtRouter 1001
lakerPurgeBackup 452
lakerQueryCellBoundary 944
lakerQueryMatch 1447
lakerQueryRegionDensity 945
lakerQuickAPA 1103
lakerRealizeColor 1016
lakerReassignNet 712
lakerRedo 712
lakerRedraw 617
lakerRefLib 453
lakerRefreshLockedLayerFile 517
lakerRefreshMCell 454
lakerRefreshShortError 872
lakerRefreshUDD 455
lakerReGuardRing 763
lakerRegWndCB 569
lakerRemoveFiller 945
lakerRenCategory 469
lakerRenCell 477
lakerRenLib 455
lakerRepeatObj 713
lakerReplaceDFMVia 1004
lakerReplaceObj 872
lakerRepModelMap 456
lakerResetRow 946
lakerReshapeObj 713
lakerReturnLevel 884
lakerReturnOne 885
lakerReturnOneEdit 885
lakerReturnSubTop 885
lakerReturnTop 886
lakerReuseCell 478
lakerRmAbutInfo 1103
lakerRmHighLightObj 1068
lakerRmOverlapGRCont 763
lakerRmPromptDefinition 1104
lakerRotate 714
lakerRotate90 715
lakerRouteAll 1005
lakerRouterInfoWnd 1009
lakerRowPlaceAll 947
lakerRowPlaceCompact 948
lakerRuler 874
lakerRulerLabel 683
lakerRuleSetting 1010
lakerSaveAsDesign 604
lakerSaveDesign 603
lakerSchAreaEstimate 1347
lakerSchAreaPlacer 1345
1671
Index
L
lakerSchBroDrag 1349
lakerSchBroDrop 1350
lakerSchBroDump 1351
lakerSchBroPreference 518
lakerSchChgGridMode 1352
lakerSchChgInstanceMap 1352
lakerSchChgRefMap 1353
lakerSchCloneMaster 1355
lakerSchCollapseAllItem 1356
lakerSchCompare 1356
lakerSchCreate 1358
lakerSchDeSelectGrid 1358
lakerSchECORowPlacer 1359
lakerSchExpandAllItem 1359
lakerSchExpandMFactor 1360
lakerSchFind 1361
lakerSchFlattenAll 1362
lakerSchFlattenLvl 1363
lakerSchFlattenOne 1363
lakerSchGroup 1364
lakerSchHLObject 1365
lakerSchLayInstMap 1366
lakerSchMakeNode 1367
lakerSchMatch 1454
lakerSchPatternReuse 1369
lakerSchRecoverHier 1347
lakerSchRecoverMFactor 1373
lakerSchRowPlacer 1374
lakerSchSelectGridItem 1375
lakerSchSelectTreeNode 1376
lakerSchSetActiveTree 1377
lakerSchSummary 1377
lakerSchTopology 1378
lakerSchUngroup 1379
lakerSearchRepair 1012
lakerSelectAll 1048
lakerSelectRedo 1049
lakerSelectUndo 1049
lakerSelGroupByName 715
lakerSelKind 1050
lakerSelLayer 1050
lakerSelNetObj 1051
lakerSession 434
lakerSetAbsMode 617
lakerSetActiveLayer 1104
1672
lakerSetActiveWnd 1105
lakerSetAreaDsp 617
lakerSetBothViewMode 618
lakerSetBrowserWnd 1106
lakerSetColPat 813, 816, 817, 818, 821
lakerSetCreateColor 1017
lakerSetDeviceObjMode 577
lakerSetLayoutMode 619
lakerSetObjType 1106
lakerSetPromptDefinition 1107
lakerSetRVEPort 895, 896
lakerSetSchematicAWnd 1108
lakerSetSchematicFWnd 1109
lakerSetSchematicWnd 1109
lakerSetSelSet 1053
lakerSetUserStrokeFile 530
lakerShiftCursorDown 1110
lakerShiftCursorLeft 1110
lakerShiftCursorRight 1111
lakerShiftCursorUp 1111
lakerShiftOrigin 716
lakerShortClean 875
lakerShortLocator 875
lakerShowExportForm 892, 893
lakerShowHPWireLength 876
lakerSingleSel 1054
lakerSkAddDummy 1462
lakerSkAlign 1464
lakerSkAreaZoom 1465
lakerSkAutoDummy 1466
lakerSkAutoOptimizeOD 1468
lakerSkClearRuler 1469
lakerSkClose 1470
lakerSkDelete 1470
lakerSkDeleteDummy 1471
lakerSkDeselectAll 1472
lakerSkDisorderAll 1473
lakerSkDistance 1473
lakerSkDrag 1474
lakerSkDrop 1474
lakerSkFold 1475
lakerSkFuse 1476
lakerSkLastView 1476
lakerSkMergeGate 1477
lakerSkMove 1478
Index
L
lakerSkNormal 1478
lakerSkOptimizeOD 1479
lakerSkPanDown 1480
lakerSkPanLeft 1480
lakerSkPanRight 1480
lakerSkPanUp 1481
lakerSkPreference 1482
lakerSkPreview 1481
lakerSkRealize 1483
lakerSkRechain 1483
lakerSkRedo 1484
lakerSkRedraw 1484
lakerSkSelRealize 1485
lakerSkSplit 1485
lakerSkSwap 1486
lakerSkUnalignGate 1487
lakerSkUndo 1487
lakerSkUnsetFingerGroup 1488
lakerSkZoomAll 1489
lakerSkZoomIn 1489
lakerSkZoomOut 1490
lakerSlitSlot 716
lakerSmashObj 718
lakerSnapFinGrid 824
lakerSnapRow 824
lakerSnapTrack 825
lakerSocketClientSend 1113
lakerSpareCell 876
lakerSplitArray 719
lakerSplitNet 720
lakerSplitObj 721
lakerStartDevPara 1112
lakerStartRVEServer 895
lakerStretchCapacit 765
lakerStretchContact 765
lakerStretchGate 766
lakerStretchObj 722
lakerStretchResist 767
lakerStretchRowArea 949
lakerStripeWire 724
lakerSubduce 767
lakerSummaryDesign 605
lakerSwapGate 768
lakerSwapInstPort 725
lakerSwapPort 457
lakerSynchronize 606
lakerSyncSchematicScope 1022
lakerTechDump 459
lakerTechReplace 461
lakerTechSave 462
lakerText2Prop 463
lakerToObject 1054
lakerToStickDiagram 747
lakerTransSchLogicName 1114
lakerTrimWire 725
lakerTunnelObj 726
lakerUDDAdjustParam 1036
lakerUDDFindParam 1036
lakerUDDReplaceParam 1037
lakerUDDSortByClickName 1038
lakerUDP 878
lakerUndo 728
lakerUngroupObj 729
lakerUnlinkMCell 769
lakerUnlockColor 1018
lakerUpdateCellProp 465
lakerUpdateDevPara 1115
lakerUpdateMCell 1039
lakerUpdateSingleDevPara 1116
lakerVersion 578
lakerViewError 897, 905
lakerViewInsAbs 619
lakerViewInsLayout 620
lakerViewInsNormal 620
lakerViewLevel 621
lakerViewLevelDec 621
lakerViewLevelInc 622
lakerViewMark 622
lakerViewPinLabelNet 624
lakerViewPinLabelOff 624
lakerViewPinLabelPort 625
lakerViewTopSysPin 625
lakerYankObj 729
lakerYankWithLogic 747
lakerZoomAll 626
lakerZoomIn 626
lakerZoomInByArea 627
lakerZoomOut 628
lastElem 60
lastIdxStr 61
1673
Index
M
legalizeInst 1248
listViews 1249
M
man 1250
max 61
mcGet 769
mchGet 1455
mcSet 792
member 62
memUsage 1250
min 62
mod 63
N
nlEval 532
nlGetAttr 536
nlPuts 538
O
openTextViewer
xt:: 910
openTextViewerTab
xt:: 911
optAddBuffer 1251
optAddInvPair 1251
optDeleteBuffer 1253
optDeleteInvPair 1253
optimizeNetFanout 1255
optimizeNetLength 1256
optimizePin 1257
optimizePostCTSDesign 1258
optimizePostRouteDesign 1259
optimizePreCTSDesign 1261
optSizeCell 1254
P
paramGetAttr 530
paramSetAttr 531
pdecr 63
pincr 64
placeInst 1262
placeInstECO 1263
1674
placeIOPad 1262
placePin 1264
point 36
point list 37
putenv 64
R
random 65
readDef 1265
readDesign 1267
readEcoDesign 1268
readJob
xt:: 912
readLef 1268
readRCTable 1269
readSdc 1270
readSpareCellFile 1270
readSpef 1271
readVerilog 1272
redirectOutput 1273
removeBufInvs 1273
removeDoubleVia 1149, 1274
removePlacement 1275
replaceStdVia 1150
reportBufInvs 1276
reportCaseAnalysis 1278
reportClock 1278
reportClockTree 1279
reportConstraint 1279
reportCorner 1151, 1281
reportCTSException 1276
reportCTSOption 1277
reportDelayCalculation 1283
reportDesign 1153, 1284
reportJog 1153, 1284
reportNet 1285
reportOptOption 1286
reportPlaceOption 1286
reportRouteInfo 1154, 1287
reportRouteRule 1155, 1288
reportRule 1156, 1289
reportSiteUtilization 1289
reportSlackHistogram 1290
reportSpine 1157, 1291
Index
S
reportSuggestedPitch 1193, 1292

reportTieHiLo 1292
reportTiming 1293
resetCTSOption 1294
resetSdc 1294
resumeOutput 1295
reverseList 66
Route 1428
routeBlockRing 1158
routeBlockWire 1162
routeNet 1164, 1296
routeRail 1166, 1298
routeRing 1168, 1299
routeStripe 1171, 1302
S
schLakerSetMosType 797
sendCommand
xt:: 912
setActiveView 1304
setCTSException 1305
setCTSOption 1306
setDontUseCell 1308
setIdealClock 1309
setIgnoredNetsInRouting 1173, 1309
setOption 1174, 1311
setOptOption 1310
setPlaceOption 1312
setPropagatedClock 1313
setRouteRule 1175, 1313
setRoutingConstraint 1175, 1314
setRoutingLayer 1192, 1321
setRoutingTrack 1322
setViolationType 1323
Shortcut 36
showDRCSetup
xt:: 915
showHPWL 1325
showJobMonitor
xt:: 913
showLPESetup
xt:: 914
showLVSSetup
xt:: 914
showPveOptions
xt:: 916
signalJob
xt:: 917
simOpenWnd 1587
source_enc 66
srandom 67
startPvDebugger
xt:: 916
stop 67
strcat 68
stringLess 68
strncat 69
strncmp 69
subStr 70
symChangeMode 1602
symCheckPinOrder 1634
symDiscardEdit 1602
symDsgAddNetExpr 1611
symDsgChangeGrid 1641
symDsgCheckSave 1603
symDsgChgSelMode 1645
symDsgClearHighlight 1639
symDsgCloseWnd 1604
symDsgCopy 1624
symDsgCreateArc 1612
symDsgCreateBoundaryBox 1613
symDsgCreateBubble 1613
symDsgCreateCircle 1614
symDsgCreateEllipse 1615
symDsgCreateFillCircle 1616
symDsgCreateFillPolygon 1616
symDsgCreateFillRect 1617
symDsgCreateLabel 1622
symDsgCreateLine 1618
symDsgCreatePin 1619
symDsgCreatePolygon 1620
symDsgCreateRect 1621
symDsgDelete 1625
symDsgDeselectAll 1625
symDsgEditLayerTbl 1642
symDsgEditOrigin 1626
symDsgGetSelect 1646
symDsgMirrorX 1627
symDsgMirrorY 1628
symDsgMove 1629
symDsgPanDown 1606
1675
Index
T
symDsgPanLeft 1606
symDsgPanRight 1607
symDsgPanUp 1607
symDsgPaste 1626
symDsgPreference 1642
symDsgQueryAttribute 1635
symDsgQueryFind 1636
symDsgQueryProp 1637
symDsgRedo 1629
symDsgRedraw 1608
symDsgRotateLeft 1630
symDsgRotateRight 1631
symDsgSave 1604
symDsgSaveAs 1605
symDsgSelectAll 1631
symDsgStretch 1632
symDsgTermOrder 1639
symDsgUndo 1632
symDsgYank 1633
symDsgZoomFit 1608
symDsgZoomIn 1609
symDsgZoomOut 1610
synthesizeClockTree 1326
sysGetRcValue 579
sysSetRcValue 579
T
Tcl procedure 2, 4
tfGet 351
timeCmp 70
timeStrToTime 71
timeToTimeStr 71
tmpFileName 72
tmpName 72
Tool Command Language 1
U
unsetDontUseCell 1327
updateJob
xt:: 918
updateTiming 1327
User-definable Commands 38
1676
V
Variable Substitution 3
W
writeDef 1328
writeDesign 1330
writeEcoReport 1332
writeJob
xt:: 919
writeSdf 1332
writeSpareCellFile 1333
writeSpef 1334
writeVerilog 1335
wtShowLicStatus 581
X
xt namespace
closeTextViewerTab 905
createJob 906
getJobs 908
getOpenFile 909
getTextViewerTabs 910
openTextViewer 910
openTextViewerTab 911
readJob 912
sendCommand 912
showDRCSetup 915
showJobMonitor 913
showLPESetup 914
showLVSSetup 914
showPveOptions 916
signalJob 917
startPvDebugger 916
updateJob 918
writeJob 919
xt::closeTextViewerTab 905
xt::createJob 906
xt::getJobs 908
xt::getOpenFile 909
xt::getTextViewerTabs 910
xt::openTextViewer 910
xt::openTextViewerTab 911
xt::readJob 912
xt::sendCommand 912
xt::showDRCSetup 915
Index
X
xt::showJobMonitor 913
xt::showLPESetup 914
xt::showLVSSetup 914
xt::showPveOptions 916
xt::signalJob 917
xt::startPvDebugger 916
xt::updateJob 918
xt::writeJob 919
1677
Index
X
1678

TCL

Cargado por

Información del documento

Título original

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

TCL

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Laker Tcl Reference Manual

Version K-2015.06, June 2015

Copyright and Proprietary Information Notice

Destination Control Statement

Laker Tcl Reference Manual

Getting Started with Tcl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Running Tcl Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tcl Commands and Command Substitution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tcl Variables and Variable Substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Basic Flow Control (if, while, for, foreach) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Data Structures: Lists and Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Built-in Commands and Math Functions in Tcl. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Loading a Tcl Script File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Laker and Tcl/Tk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Socket Command Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Application Programming Interface (API) References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General Tcl Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

New Data Types and Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Basic User-definable Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Form and Field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pre-processing Tcl Callback Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Object Access Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cell View Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instances and Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General Object Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parameterized Test Structure Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Schematic Object Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Symbol Callback Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Netlist Procedure Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Library Mapping Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

User Entry Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Custom Digital Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic Place and Route (APR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10. Design Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11. Matching Device Creator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12. Stick Diagram Compiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13. Schematic Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14. Symbol Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15. Hierarchy Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Symbol Callback Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Attaching Tcl Procedures to Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Attaching Tcl File to Symbol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Attaching Tcl Procedure to Symbols Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Callback Working Scheme. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Callback Procedure Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About This Manual

Release Notes, available on SolvNet (see Accessing SolvNet on page xi)

Documentation on the Web, which provides PDF documents and is

Indicates command syntax.

Laker Tcl Reference Manual

Indicates a user-defined value, such as object_name.

Within an example, indicates information of special

include_enclosing = true | false

Within syntax and examples, indicates user inputtext

Denotes optional parameters, such as:

Indicates that parameters can be repeated as many times as

Indicates a choice among alternatives, such as

Indicates a continuation of a command line.

Indicates levels of directory structure.

Edit > Copy

Indicates a path to a menu command, such as opening the

Indicates a keyboard combination, such as holding down the

Laker Tcl Reference Manual